Amm Pa-46-500tp

AIRPLANE MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARD 1 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.
PART NUMBER 767-005 April 15, 2007

1A1
Published by
Technical Publications
© Piper Aircraft, Inc.

2926 Piper Drive
Vero Beach, Florida 32960
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
Manufacturers Association
1A2
PA-46-500TP, MALIBU MERIDIAN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AEROFICHE REVISION STATUS
Revisions to this Maintenance Manual 767-005 issued July 01, 2000 are as follows:
Revision Publication Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
* COMPLETE REVISION OF MAINTENANCE MANUAL 767-005

Revisions appear in all nine Aerofiche Cards. Accordingly, discard your
entire existing aerofiche card set and replace it with this set dated
04/15/07.
Consult the Customer Service Information Aerofiche (P/N 1753-755) for current revision dates for this
manual.
1A3 AEROFICHE EFFECTIVITY PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 AEROFICHE EFFECTIVITY 1A4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE
Intro-List of 1 Apr 15/07

Effective Pages 2 Apr 15/07
Intro-Table of Contents 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
Introduction 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
1A5 INTRO - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INTRO - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1A6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT SECTION PAGE GRID NO.
INTRODUCTION
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness 1 1A9
General 1 1A9
Effectivity 2 1A10
Serial Number Explanation 2 1A10
Assignment of Subject Material 2 1A10
Pagination 2 1A10
Aerofiche Effectivity 3 1A11
Identifying Revised Material 3 1A11
Indexing 3 1A11
List of Effective Pages 3 1A11
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes 3 1A11
Accident/Incident Reporting 3 1A11
Supplementary Publications 4 1A12
PIPER Publications 4 1A12
Vendor Publications 4 1A12
Chapter/Section Index Guide 11 1A19
INDEX
Index 1 1B1
1A7 INTRO - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INTRO - CONTENTS 1A8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
1. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

WARNING: INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS (ICA) FOR ALL NON-PIPER
APPROVED STC INSTALLATIONS ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS MANUAL. WHEN A
NON-PIPER APPROVED STC INSTALLATION IS INCORPORATED ON THE AIRPLANE,
THOSE PORTIONS OF THE AIRPLANE AFFECTED BY THE INSTALLATION MUST BE
INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ICA PUBLISHED BY THE OWNER OF THE
STC. SINCE NON-PIPER APPROVED STC INSTALLATIONS MAY CHANGE SYSTEMS
INTERFACE, OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENT LOADS OR
STRESSES ON ADJACENT STRUCTURES, THE PIPER PROVIDED ICA MAY NOT BE
VALID FOR AIRPLANES SO MODIFIED.
The PIPER PA-46-500TP Malibu Meridian Maintenance Manual constitutes the Instructions for
Continued Airworthiness as required by Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR) Part 23, Appendix G.
Chapter 4 contains the Airworthiness Limitations section (4-00-00) and the Inspection Program is in
Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
This publication is prepared in accordance with the General Aviation Manufacturers Association (GAMA)
Specification No. 2, with respect to the arrangement and content of the System/Chapters within the
designated Chapter/Section-numbering system.
WARNING: USE ONLY GENUINE PIPER AIRCRAFT PARTS OR PIPER AIRCRAFT APPROVED
PARTS OBTAINED FROM PIPER APPROVED SOURCES, IN CONNECTION WITH THE
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OF PIPER AIRPLANES.
Genuine PIPER parts are produced and inspected under rigorous procedures to insure airworthiness
and suitability for use in PIPER airplane applications. Parts purchased from sources other than PIPER,
even though identical in appearance, may not have had the required tests and inspections performed,
may be different in fabrication techniques and materials, and may be dangerous when installed in an
airplane.
Additionally, reworked or salvaged parts or those parts obtained from non-PIPER approved sources,
may have service histories which are unknown or cannot be authenticated, may have been subjected to
unacceptable stresses or temperatures or may have other hidden damage not discernible through
routine visual or nondestructive testing. This may render the part, component or structural assembly,
even though originally manufactured by PIPER, unsuitable and unsafe for airplane use.
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. expressly disclaims any responsibility for malfunctions, failures, damage or
injury caused by use of non-PIPER approved parts.
NOTE: PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. expressly reserves the right to supersede, cancel and/or declare
obsolete any part, part numbers, kits or publication that may be referenced in this manual
without prior notice.
Any question concerning the care of your airplane, be sure to include the airplane serial number in any
correspondence.
1A9 INTRODUCTION PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
This maintenance manual is effective for PA-46-500TP Malibu Meridian airplane serial numbers
4697001 and up. This encompasses the following model years:
NOTE: The following information is provided as a general reference only.
Model Year Serial Numbers Model Year Serial Numbers
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up
4. Serial Number Explanation

Example: 46 97 001
TYPE CERTIFICATE DESIGNATION SEQUENCE NUMBER

MODEL CODE
97 = PA-46-500TP MALIBU MERIDIAN
5. Assignment of Subject Material

This publication is divided into industry standard, three element, numeric subject groupings as follows:
A. System/Chapter - The various groups are broken down into major systems such as Environmental
Systems, Electrical Power, Landing Gear, etc. They are assigned a number, which becomes the first
element of the standardized numbering system. Thus, the element “28” of the number 28-40-01
refers to the chapter “Fuel”. Everything concerning the fuel system will be covered in this chapter.
B. Sub-System/Section - The major systems/chapters of an airplane are broken down into
subsystems. These sub-systems are identified by the second element of the standard numbering
system. The element “40” of the number 28-40-01 concerns itself with the indicating section of the
fuel system.
C. Unit/Subject - The individual units within a sub-system/section may be identified by the third
element of the standard numbering system. The element “01” of the number 28-40-01 is a subject
designator. This element is assigned at the option of the manufacturer and is normally zeroed out by
PIPER.
Refer to paragraph 14, Chapter/Section Index Guide, for a complete breakdown and list. The material is
arranged in ascending numerical sequence.
6. Pagination
The Chapter - Section (i.e. - 28-40-00) numbering system (explained above) forms the primary page
numbering system for this manual. Within each Section, pages are numbered consecutively beginning
with Page 1 (i.e. - 28-40-00, Page 1). Additionally, the aerofiche grid numbering system (explained
below) is also used to indicate location within the manual.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INTRODUCTION 1A10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Aerofiche Effectivity
A. The General Aviation Manufacturers Association (GAMA) have developed specifications for
microfiche reproduction of aircraft publications. The information compiled in this Aerofiche
Maintenance Manual will be kept current by revisions distributed periodically. These revisions will
supersede all previous revisions and will be complete Aerofiche card replacements and shall
supersede Aerofiche cards of the same number in the set. The “Aerofiche Effectivity” page at the
front of this manual lists the current revision for each card in this set.
B. Conversion of Aerofiche alpha/numeric grid code numbers:
First number is the Aerofiche card number.
Letter is the horizontal row reference per card
Second number is the vertical column reference per card.
Example: 2J16 = Aerofiche card number two, row J, column 16.
C. To aid in locating information, the following is provided at the beginning of each aerofiche card:
(1) A complete Introduction containing the Chapter/Section Index Guide for all fiche in this set.
(2) A complete subject Index for all fiche in this set.
8. Identifying Revised Material
A revision to a page is defined as any change to the printed matter that existed previously.
Revisions, additions and deletions are identified by a vertical line (i. e. - change bar) along the left-
hand margin of the page opposite only that portion of the printed matter that was changed.
A change bar in the left-hand margin opposite the footer (i.e. - chapter/section/subject, page
number and date), indicates that the text was unchanged but the material was relocated to a
different page.
Example.
NOTE: Change bars are not used in the title pages, list of effective pages, or index.
9. Indexing
An alphabetically arranged subject Index follows this introduction to assist the user in locating desired
information. In addition, each System/Chapter begins with an individual Table of Contents.
10. List of Effective Pages
Each System/Chapter has a List of Effective Pages preceding the Table of Contents to identify the
effective revision date for each page in that chapter.
11. Warnings, Cautions and Notes
These adjuncts to the text are used to highlight or emphasize important points when necessary.
WARNINGS call attention to use of materials, processes, methods, procedures or limits which must be
followed precisely to avoid injury or death to persons. CAUTIONS call attention to methods and
procedures which must be followed to avoid damage to equipment. NOTES call attention to methods
which make the job easier. Warnings and Cautions shall be located directly above and Notes directly
beneath the text and be in line with the paragraphs to which they apply.
12. Accident/Incident Reporting
To improve our Service and Reliability system and aid in Piper’s compliance with FAR 21.3, knowledge
of all incidents and/or accidents must be reported to Piper immediately. To expedite and assist in
reporting all incidents and accidents, Piper Form 420-01 has been created. See Service Letter 1041 for
latest revision. This procedure is to be used by all Dealers, Service Centers and Repair Facilities.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13. Supplementary Publications

The following publications/sources provide servicing, overhaul and parts information for the
PA-46-500TP airplane and its various components. Use them to supplement this manual.
A. Piper Publications:
(1) Parts Catalog - P/N 767-004
(2) Progressive Inspection Manual (100 hour) - P/N 767-009
B. Vendor Publications:
WARNING: FAILURE TO CONSULT APPLICABLE VENDOR PUBLICATION(S), WHEN
SERVICING OR INSPECTING VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PIPER
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY.
(1) AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR:
Vendor: Sanden International (USA), Inc. PH: - (972) 442-8400
601 South Sanden Blvd. FAX: - (972) 442-8700
Wylie, Texas 75098
http://www.sanden.com/
(2) AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATORS AND BLOWERS:
Vendor: Enviro Systems, Inc. PH: - (405) 382-0731
P.O. Box 1404
Seminole, Oklahoma 74868
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Vendor: Electro Systems, Inc. PH: - (888) 461-6077
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Fort Deposit, Alabama 36032
http://www.kellyaerospace.com/index.htm/
(4) ALTERNATOR CONTROL UNIT:
Vendor: Lamar
(See Generator Control Unit)
(5) AUTOPILOT:
Vendor: S-TEC Corporation PH: - (940) 325-9406
One S-TEC Way
Mineral Wells, Texas 76067-9236
http://www.s-tec.com
Instructions for
Continued Airworthiness: S-TEC System 550 Flight Director/Autopilot with Trim,
Yaw Damper and Altitude Selector Alerter - Part No. 81532P
Instructions for
Continued Airworthiness: Meggitt Avionics / S-TEC MAGIC 1500 Flight Director/Autopilot
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Vendor: Concorde Battery Corp. PH: - (626) 813-1234
2009 San Bernardino Road
West Covina, CA 91790
http://www.concordebattery.com
Maintenance Manual
Supplement: Manual M1 - Supplement for Concorde Valve Regulated
Lead-Acid Main Battery
(b) STANDBY ATTITUDE INDICATOR EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY:
Vendor: BFGoodrich Avionics Systems, Inc. PH: - (616) 949-6600
5353 52nd Street, SE
P.O. Box 873
Grand Rapids, MI 49588-0873
http://www.bfgavionics.com/
Service Letter: SL-120A, or latest revision,
PS-834 Battery Charging and Capacity Testing.
(7) BRAKES AND WHEELS:
Vendor: Parker Hannifin Corp PH: - (800) 272-5464
Aircraft Wheel and Brake Division
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
http://www.parker.com/cleveland/Universe/book.pdf
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
Vendor: BFGoodrich Aerospace PH: - (330) 374-3040
De-Icing and Specialty Systems FAX: - (330) 374-2290
1555 Corporate Woods Parkway
Uniontown, Ohio 44685-8799
http://www.bfg-ips.com/
(9) ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM (EFIS):
Vendor: Meggitt Avionics, Inc. PH: - (603) 669-0940
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
Manchester, NH 03103-7406
http://www.meggittavi.com/
or Avidyne Corporation PH - (800) 284-3963
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773
http://www.avidyne.com/index.htm
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (Avidyne):
Primary Flight Display
and Magnetometer/OAT: Document No. AVPFD-174
Multifunction Display: Document No. AVMFD-167

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER:

Vendor: Artex Airccraft Supplies PH: - (800) 547-8901
14405 Keil Road NE
Aurora, Oregon 97002
http://www.artex.net/
(11) ENGINE:
Vendor: Pratt & Whitney Canada, Inc. PH: US/CAN - (800) 268-8000
1000 Maire-Victorian Blvd. INTL - (450) 647-8000
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
http://www.pwc.ca/www/en_pwc/index2.asp
Maintenance Manual: Pratt & Whitney Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine
- Maintenance Manual (PT6A-38/-40-/41/-42/-42A)
P/N 3021442
(12) ENGINE FIRE WARNING SYSTEM:
Vendor: Meggitt
(See Electronic Flight Instrument System)
(13) ENGINE INSTRUMENT DISPLAY SYSTEM (EIDS):
Vendor: Meggitt
(14) ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS):
Vendor: Enviro Systems, Inc.
(See Air Conditioning Evaporators and Blowers)
(15) FIRE EXTINGUISHER (PORTABLE):
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
San Francisco, California 94123-2911
http://www.h3r.com/index.htm
(16) FORCE APPLICATOR KIT:
Vendor: Safe Flight Instrument Corp. PH: - (914) 946-9500
20 New King Street
White Plains, New York 10602
(17) FUEL BOOST PUMP:
Vendor: Parker Hannifin Corp. PH: - (800) 382-8422
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
(18) FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY:
Vendor: Pall Aeropower Corp. PH: - (800) 933-3111
5775 Rio Vista Drive
Clearwater, Florida 33760-3114
http://www.pall.com
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(19) GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT:

Vendor: Lamar Technologies Corp. PH: - (360) 651-6666
14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
Marysville, WA 98271
http://www.lamartech.com/
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
Vendor: Electro-Mech Inc.
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
(21) GEAR LOCKING ACTUATORS, NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATOR, HYDRAULIC PUMP,
AND ALL HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS:
Vendor: Frisby Aerospace PH: - (336) 766-9036
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
http://frisbyaerospace.com/
(22) HI-LOK FASTENERS AND TOOLS:
Vendor: Hi-Shear Corporation PH: - (213) 326-8110
2600 Skypark Drive
Torrance, California 90509
(23) LIGHTS - NAVIGATION, STROBE, AND STANDBY/MAP LIGHTS:
Vendor: Whelen Engineering Co. Inc. PH: - (860) 526-9504
Route 145, Winthrop Rd. FAX - (860) 526-2009
Chester, Connecticut 06412
http://www.whelen.com/
(24) NAVIGATION, COMMUNICATIONS, AND GPS (NAV/COM/GPS):
Vendor: Gamin International PH: - (913) 397-8200
1200 East 151ST Street
Olathe, KS 66062
http://www.Gamin.com
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
Vendor: Scott Aviation PH - (716) 683-5100
2225 Erie Street
Lancaster, New York 14086
http://www.scottaviation.com/
Maintenance Manual: Operating and Maintenance Instructions,
EROS, Quick Donning Mask-Regulator MC-10-[ ]-[ ] Series,
P/N 4NUT0045A
(26) PRESSURIZATION SAFETY AND OUTFLOW VALVE, CONTROLLER VALVE:
Vendor: AlliedSignal Aerospace PH - (310) 323-9500
Aerospace Equipment Systems FAX: - (310) 512-2221
2525 W. 190th Street
Torrance, CA 90504
http://www.alliedsignalaerospace.com/aerospace/

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Vendor: Hartzell Propeller Inc. PH - (937) 778-4379
One Propeller Place FAX - (937) 778-4321
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
http://www.hartzellprop.com/index2.htm
Overhaul Instructions: Manual No. 143
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
and Overhaul Instructions: Manual No. 133
Propeller Owner’s
Manual and Logbook: Manual No. 149
(28) PROPELLER GOVERNOR AND PROPELLER OVERSPEED GOVERNOR (I.E. - HTG):
Vendor: Woodward Governor Company PH - (815) 624-4400
Aircraft Engine Systems
Attn: Supervisor, Product Support
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Rockton, Illinois 61072-0405
http://www.woodward.com/AES/
Overhaul Instructions: Manual No. 61-20-15 (60045)
(29) WEATHER RADAR, RDR - 2000:
Vendor: Honeywell
One Technology Center
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
http://www.bendixking.com
Maintenance Manual: Bendix/King ART 2000
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
with Instructions for Bendix/King KMD 850 MFD
Continued Airworthiness P/N 006-20000-0000
(30) RADIO COOLING BLOWER:
Vendor: Troll Avionics, Inc. PH - (805) 641-2028
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
(31) STARTER/GENERATOR:
Vendor: Aircraft Parts Corp. PH - (631) 758-3861
100 Corporate Drive
Holtsville, NY 11742
http://www.apcmfg.com
(32) VACUUM REGULATOR:
Vendor: Parker Hannifin Corp.
(See Fuel Boost Pump)
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14. Chapter/Section Index Guide
NOTE: The following GAMA Specification No. 2 standard chapters are not included in this Maintenance
Manual: 36, 38, 49, 53, 54, 60, 73, 78, 80, 81, 83, and 95. These chapters are omitted because
the subject system is either: not installed in these airplanes; adequately covered in vendor or
other manuals; or, for ease of use, has been combined with another chapter.
CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.
4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 1C1
00 Airworthiness Limitations
5 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS 1C9
00 General
10 Time Limits
20 Scheduled Maintenance Checks
30 Special Inspections
50 Unscheduled Maintenance Checks
6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 1F15
00 General
7 LIFTING AND SHORING 1G9
10 Jacking
8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 1G17
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
9 TOWING AND TAXIING 1H5
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 PARKING AND MOORING 1H17
10 Parking
20 Mooring
11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 1I5
20 Exterior Placards and Markings

30 Interior Placards and Markings
12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing
20 Scheduled Servicing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
20 STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME 2C1
00 General
21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 2D1
00 General
20 Distribution
30 Pressurization Control
40 Heating
50 Cooling
60 Temperature Control
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
23 COMMUNICATIONS 2I1
00 General
50 Audio Integrating
60 Static Discharging
24 ELECTRICAL POWER 2IJ1
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
50 Electrical Load Distribution
25 EQUIPMENT/FURNISHINGS 3C1
10 Flight Compartment
20 Passenger Compartment
50 Cargo Compartments
60 Emergency
26 FIRE PROTECTION 3D1
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 3D15
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
29 HYDRAULIC POWER 3J7
00 General
10 Main
30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 4C1
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
40 Windows and Windshields
60 Propellers
31 INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEMS 4E9
50 Central Warning Systems
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
10 Main Gear and Doors
20 Nose Gear and Doors
30 Extension and Retraction
40 Wheels and Brakes
50 Steering
60 Position and Warning
33 LIGHTS 4I21
30 Cargo and Service Compartments
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
10 Flight Environment Data
20 Attitude & Direction
40 Independent Position Determining
50 Dependent Position Determining
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)
39 ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC PANELS 6D19
10 Instrument and Control Panels

20 Electrical & Electronic Equipment Racks
51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
10 Investigation, Cleanup, and Aerodynamic Smoothness
70 Repairs
80 Electrical Bonding
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
10 Horizontal Stabilizer
20 Elevator
30 Vertical Stabilizer
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
10 Propeller Assembly
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
70 STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE 7D1
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives
73 ENGINE AND FUEL CONTROL
(See Pratt & Whitney Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1
10 Electrical Power Supply

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
76 ENGINE CONTROLS 7H3
00 General
10 Power Control
77 ENGINE INDICATING 7I3
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
40 Integrated Engine Instrument Systems
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
91 CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS 8C1
10 Charts
21 thru 31 Electrical Schematics
91 (CONT.) CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS (CONT.) 9C1
32 & UP Electrical Schematics
APPENDIXES
APPENDIX 1 GROUND TEST PROCEDURE 5K1
- Meggit MAGIC ADAHRS and Pitot-Static System
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A Air Distribution System: 2D12 Avionics

Bleed Air Check Valves: 2D14 Removal / Installation
Absolute Pressure Regulator: Blowers Face-Mounted: 6E1
2E1 Avionics Cooling: 2D14 Rack-Mounted: 6E1
Access and Inspection Provisions: Cabin Recirculation: 2D11 Avionics Cooling: 2D15
1G4 Ground Ventilation: 2D11 Avionics Master Switch: 2I7
Accessory Drive Installation: Airspeed Indicator, Standby:
7F20 5C17 B
ADF-650D: 4J12 Troubleshooting: 5C17 Baggage Net: 3C19
Lighting Set-up: 4J12 Airworthiness Battery-See Electrical
Aerofiche Grid Code: 1A11 Compliance Record Form: Brakes
Aft-Facing Passenger Seat(s): 1E15 Bleeding Procedure: 4H21
3C15 Directives (AD’s): 1C15 Parking Brake Valve: 4H24
Aileron: 6K21 Limitations: 1C7 Servicing: 1K20
Balancing: 6K22 Altimeter, Standby: 5C15 System: 1K20
Control System: 3E12 Troubleshooting: 5C15 Draining: 1K20
Aileron - Rudder Anchor Bolt, Removal and Filling (Fluid Reservoir):
Interconnect: 3E15 Installation: 4H18 1K20
Control Cables: 3E12 Annunciator: 4E15 System Installation: 4H22
Control Column: 3E7 Antenna Installations: 5E13 System Leak Check: 4H23
Control Wheel: 3E7 Attach Fittings Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly:
Rigging and Adjustment: Corrosion Control 4H20
3E14 Horizontal Stabilizer: 6H17 Wheel Brake Assembly: 4H16
Troubleshooting: 3E7 Vertical Fin: 6I3 Buttock Lines: 1G3
Tab: 3E15 Wing: 6K17
Air Conditioning System: 2E22 Attitude Indicator, Standby: 5C19 C
Charging Hookup: 2F10 Emergency Power Supply:
Compressor: 2F20 Cabin
5C19 Heat and Fresh Air System:
Adjustment: 2F22 Troubleshooting: 5C19
Fabricated Dipstick: 2G2 2E11
Autopilot: 2G21 Mass Flow Control Valve:
Installation: 2F22 Flap Compensator: 2H17
Mounting Angle / Oil Level: 2E13
Flight Adjustments: 2H4 Temperature Control Valve:
2G3 Ground Checks: 2G21
Positioning Sanden 2G11
Installation: 2G24 Options-See Passenger
Compressor Internal Pitch Servo: 2H12
Parts: 2G2 Compartment
Pressure Transducer: 2H7 Pressure Control System:
Evacuation Hookup: 2F18 Roll Servo: 2H5
Expansion Valve: 2G5 2D20
Servo Clutch Torque Pressure Controller-See
Kent Moore J23500 Charging Adjustment: 2H16
Stand: 2F7 Pressurization
Trim Monitor: 2H4 Pressurization: 2D19
Leak Test Hookup: 2F18 Trim Servo: 2H8
Manifold Set Operation: 2F16 Absolute Pressure Regulator:
Yaw Amplifier: 2H14 2E1
Robinair 34700 Charging Yaw Servo: 2H10
Stand: 2F6 Components: 2E1
Autopilot/Flight Director Control System: 2D20
Robinair 34700 Charging Installation: 2G24
Station Hose Hookup: Controller: 2E3
Avidyne Electronic Flight Rigging: 2E5
2F13 Instrument System (EFIS)
Service Valves: 2E23 Safety and Outflow Valves:
Component Locator: 5D11 2D24
Servicing: 2E23 Description: 5D10
Temperature vs. Pressure: System Test: 2E7
Maintenance: 5D10 Troubleshooting: 2D21
2E24
Test Gauge and Manifold Set:
2F15
Troubleshooting: 2E18
1B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cable Tension vs. Ambient D Electrical

Temperature: 3D22 Alternator: 2K3
Calibration Decals-See also Placards Installation and Adjustment:
Engine Torque Indication Meyercord Decals 2K5
Avidyne EFIS: 7I18 Installation: 1J12 Alternator Control Unit (ACU):
Meggitt EFIS: 7I13 Removal: 1J12 2K8
Cargo: 3C19 Digital Voice Recorder: 1H23 Avionics Bus: 2J16
Chapter/Section Index Guide: Dimensions: 1F21 Batteries: 1L2
1A19 Door Standby Attitude Indicator:
Circuit Breaker Panels: 6E2, 6E6 Cabin: 6G17 5C19
Clamping Rudder Pedals in Cable Assembly: 6G18 Battery: 2K11
Neutral Position: 4G10 Latching Mechanism: 6G18 Capacity Test: 2K14
Cleaning Seal: 6G22 Bonding
Aircraft Finish: 1K7 Support: 6G17 Inspections
Carpets: 1K11 Warning System: 6H3 100 Hour: 6G7
Deice Boots: 1K10 Emergency Exit: 6H1 On Condition: 6G7
Engine/Compressor: 1K7 Seal: 6H1 Resistance Index: 6G8
Exterior: 1K8 Lubrication Chart: 1L7 Straps: 2I17
Interior: 1K10 Downspring Remove/Install Tool: Circuit Breaker Panels: 6E2,
Landing Gear: 1K10 4H3 6E6
Relief Tube System: 1K11 E Distribution: 2J18
Windows: 1K9 Electronic Control Module
Windshield: 1K9 ECTM: 7J10 Identification: 6E8
Clock: 1H23 EDU: 7J1 External Power: 2K17
COM/NAV/GPS: 2I7, 5E11 Calibration: 3I19 Generator Control Unit (GCU):
Communications tranceivers: Calibration Page: 7I15, 7J7 2J24
2I7 Data Page: 7J6 Tests: 2J24
Conical Seals: 2C14 DAU - Fuel Quantity Processor Troubleshooting: 2K1
Control Cable Inspection: 3D24 (FQP) Data Page: 7I14, Main Bus: 2J16
Control Column Installation: 3E10 7J8 Master Electrical Panel: 6E13
Control Wheel Installation: 3E8 Exceedance Data Page: 7J3 Relay Installation: 6E14
Conversion Tables Fuel Flow Display: 3I9 Schematics
Drill Sizes: 8D16 Fuel Quantity Display: 3I9 ADF
Fuel Weight: 3I15 Fuel Quantity Processor: 3I17 Dual (KR-87): 9H9
Corrosion OAT Display: 3I9 Single: 9H10
Conditions Affecting: 6F11 Oil Pressure Display: 3I9 Air Conditioning and Vent
Forms of: 6F11 Primary Display: 7I13, 7J3 Blowers: 8E20
Inspections: 6F12 Reversionary Display: 7J4 Airspeed Warning: 9E22
Attach Fittings Secondary Display: 3I9, 7J4 Alert Horn - Vmo: 9F19
Horizontal Stabilizer: 6H17 Test Mode: 7J4 Alternator System and
Vertical Fin: 6I3 Vacuum Pressure Display: 3I9 Control: 8H2
Wing: 6K17 Effectivity: 1A10 Altimeter, Standby: 9E24
Elevator Trim Rod: 3F13, EFIS Annunciator: 9G9
6H24 Avidyne Entegra Annunciator Dimming: 8J13
Prone Areas: 6F14 DAU Fuel Calibration Page: Annunciator Panel: 8K21
Removal and Control: 6F13 3I23 Attitude Indicator, Standby:
Types of Metal Corrosion: 6F12 Engine Display: 3I11 9F4
Covers: 1I1 Engine Setup Page: 3I22 Audio: 8G9
Cowling-See Engine - Cowling Autopilot
Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
S-TEC MAGIC 1500: 8F13
S-TEC System 550: 8F2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 1B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Electrical (cont.) Entertainment Console: KRA 10A Radar Altimeter:

Schematics (cont.) 8H18 9G1
Avidyne EFIS Fire Detection System: 8H22 Landing Gear Position
DC 50 Antenna Coupler: Flap Indicator: 8I18 Indicators: 9C10
9G1 Flaps: 8I14 Landing Gear Warning:
Dual PFD: 9F22 Flight Hour Meter: 8K18 9C12
MFD: 9F24 Fuel Filter: 8J2 Landing Lights: 9E16
PFD #1 : 9F20 Fuel Pressure: 8I22 Lift Detector Heat: 8K6
PFD #2: 9F21 Fuel Pumps: 8I22 Lights: 9D2
Avionics Cooling: 8E4 Fuel Quantity Avionics: 9D16, 9D20
Avionics Lighting: 9D16 Left: 8J6 Cabin: 9E2
Blower, Vent Right: 8J8 Cabin Side Panel: 9E4
Cabin Recirculation: 8E20 Fuel Return Valve: 8J13 Circuit Breaker Panel: 9D4
Ground: 8E2 Fuel Temp. Indicator: 8J10 Courtesy: 9E2
Cabin Lights: 9E2 Sensor - Right: 8J11 Ice: 9E14
Cabin Pressurization: 8E12 Generator System and Instrument Panel Posts:
Cabin Pressurization Dump: Control: 8H4 9D8
8E16 GI-106: 9G22 Instrument Panel Switches:
Cabin Side Panel Lights: GMA-340: 9F22, 9G20, 9H6, 9D12
9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
Chip Detector: 9I16 GMA-340 LCD Panel: 9D20
Circuit Breaker Panel Audio/Mkr/Intercom: Map: 9D2
Lighting: 9D4 8G9 Navigation: 9E8
Clock: 8H16 GNS 430: 9G20 Oxygen Cabinet: 9D12
Collins DME: 9H7 Dual (#1 and #2): 9H6, Position: 9E8
COM/NAV #2: 9G16 9H8 Recognition: 9E16
Console, Entertainment: GNS-530 #1: 9G12 Strobe: 9E8
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
Cooling, Avionics: 8E4 GPS# 2: 9G16 Taxi: 9E16
Data Acquisition Unit (DAU): Ground Clearance: 8G6 Wing Inspection: 9E14
8J7, 8J9, 9J1 GTX 327: 9G24 Map Lights: 9D2
Deice GTX 330: 9H2 Marker Beacon: 8G9
Propeller: 8K12 Dual: 9H4 Meggitt EFIS: 9F8
Surface: 8J24 Heated Windshield: 8K10 ADAHRS: 9F12
Wing: 8J24 Hour Meter: 8K18 DAU: 9F13
Digital Voice Recorder Clock: Hydraulic Pump: 8J18 PFD 1 / ND 1 / ND 2:
8H16 Ice Light: 9E14 9F10
Display, Engine Data: 9J7 Ignition: 9I18 PFD 2: 9F14
Door Ajar Warning: 9I6 IHAS: 9G8 Meters: 8G22
Electric Flaps: 8I14 IND-450: 9H7 Monitoring, Engine Data: 9J1
Electroluminescent Panel IND-650A: 9H10 NAV/COM #2: 9G16
Lighting: 9D4 Instrument Panel Navigation Lights: 9E8
ELT Power: 8H17 Post Lights: 9D8 Oil Pressure Switch: 8K18
Emergency Pressurization Switch Lights: 9D12 Overhead Switch Panel: 9I9,
Valve: 8E10, 8E12 Intercom: 8G9 9I15, 9I19
Engine: 9J1 J Block Diagrams: 8H9 Overspeed Horn: 9E22
Chip Detector: 9I16 KA-44B Antenna: 9H9 Oxygen Generator System:
Data Acquisition: 9J1 KDI 572: 9H6 9I2
Data Display: 9J7 KI-227-00 Indicator: 9H9 Panel (Post) Lights: 9D8
Data Monitoring: 9J1 KMH 820: 9F24, 9G8 Panel LCD Lighting: 9D20
Ignition: 9I18 KN-63 DME: 9H6 Panel Switch Lights: 9D12
PY Line Heaters: 9I18 KR-87 ADF: 9H9 Pitot Heat: 8K4
1B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Electrical (cont.) Switches: 6E2 ELT: 3C21

Schematics (cont.) Overhead Switch Panel: 6E2 Artex 110: 3C22
Position Lights: 9E8 Push ON - Push OFF: 6E4 Testing: 3C23
Power Distribution: 8G18 Rocker-type: 6E4 Wiring Schematic: 3C22
Pressurization: 8E10, 8E12, Symbols: 8D18 Emergency Locator Transmitter-
8E16 System See ELT
Propeller: 9I8 Functional Test: 2J16 Empennage Installation: 6H14
Deice: 8K12 Load Distribution: 2K20 Engine
Feather: 9I10 Overview: 2J7 Accessory Drive: 7F19
Heat: 8K12 Troubleshooting: 2J10 Cleaning: 1K7
Overspeed Governor: 9I14 Terminal Junction Module Control
Reverse Lockout: 9I8 Identification: 6E8 Adjustments: 7H14
Radar, Weather: 9G4 Tie Bus Panel Connections: Condition Lever Cable: 7H22
RCR-650D ADF: 9H10 6E11 Description: 7H9
Recorder, Digital Voice: Volt/Ammeter: 2K19 Engine Controls Installation:
8H16 Voltage: 2J17 7H16
Relay, Computer Fail Logic: Adjustment: 2J17 Engine Performance Check:
8I9 Regulation and Control: 7H11
Rudder Meter: 8G22 2J17 Manual Override Lever
Rudder Trim: 8I2 Wire Coding: 8D17 Cable: 7H23
Stall Detection and Warning: Electronic Attitude Director Power Lever Cable: 7H15
8I8 Indicator (EADI): 5C21 Cowling: 7E5
Standby Altimeter: 9E24 Basic Functional Test: 5C21 Description and Operation:
Standby Attitude Indicator: Troubleshooting: 5C24 7D15
9F4 Electronic Control Module Drains: 7F3
Stormscope: 9G7 Identification: 6E8 Dry Motoring Run-See POH,
Strobe Lights: 9E8 Electronic Flight Instrument Para 4.15
Summing Amp: 8G14, 9G1 System-See Electronic Flight Dual Drive: 7F19
Surface Deice: 8J24 Instrument System ECTM: 7J10
Switch Lights, Panel: 9D12 Electronic Horizontal Situation Engine Installation: 7D20
Tail Light: 9E12 Indicator (EHSI): 5D3 Fire Seals: 7E19
Taxi/Recognition Lights: Basic Functional Test: 5D3 Fire/Overheat Detection: 3D7
9E16 Color Coding: 5D7 Computer: 3D10
TCR-451: 9H7 Default Settings: 5D7 Foreign Object or Debris (FOD)
Transponder: 9G24 Troubleshooting: 5D4 Ingestion: 1F6
Dual GTX 330: 9H4 Elevator Fuel Manifold/Fuel Nozzle
GTX 327: 9G24 Balancing: 6H21 Assembly Bolts: 3D10
GTX 330: 9H2 Control System: 3F5 Ground Test: 7E1
Vacuum System: 9I4 Rigging: 3F10 Lubrication: 1K24
Vent Blower Torque Tube Bearing Chart: 1L13
Cabin Recirculation: 8E20 Changes: 3F6 Chip Detectors: 1L1
Ground: 8E2 Trim Controls: 3F10 Draining and Flushing Oil
Volt/Amp Meters: 8G22 Actuator Assembly: 3F14 Sump: 1K24
Weather Radar: 9G4 Rigging: 3F13 Filling Oil Sump: 1K24
Windshield, Heated: 8K10 Troubleshooting: 3F5 Oil Changes: 1K24
Wing Deice: 8J24 Elevator and Elevator Trim Oil Filter: 1K24
Wing Inspection (Ice) Light: Installation: 3F9 Maintenance Manual: 7D8,
9E14 Torque Tube Bearing Changes: 7D15
XM Satellite Receiver: 9G1 3F6 Oil Chip Detectors: 1L1
Servicing: 1L1 Trim Tab: 6H24 Oil Cooler Installation: 7J19
Starter Generator: 2J19 Push Rods Attach Brackets: Oil Pressure Transducer
Static Wicks: 2I17 6H24 Installation: 7J21
Rods Corrosion Control:
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 1B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine (cont.) Fuel G

Oil Temperature Probe Additives: 1K14
Installation: 7J21 Biocide: 1K15 Garmin GMA-340 Audio Panel
Overspeed: 1F6 Handling Practices: 1K14 Adjustment: 2I11
Overtemp: 1F6 Removing Biological Functional Test: 2I10
Overtorque: 1F6 Contamination: 1K19 Removal and Installation: 2I9
Performance Check: 7H11 Fuel Control Unit Adjustments: GMA-340 Audio Panel: 2I9
Safety Precautions: 7E1 7H13 GNS-430/-530: 4J10
Serial number plate: 1F21 Fuel System Lighting Set-up: 4J10
Sudden Stoppage: 1F6 Distribution: 3H15 Ground Clearance Switch: 2I7
Tachometer Generators: 7I22 3/8 Inch Suction Line: 3H23 Ground Protection Equipment:
Torque Limits: 7D23 Boost Pumps: 3H18 1I2
Troubleshooting: 7D17 Engine Driven Pump (EDP): GTX-327/-330
Wet Motoring Run: 7D24 3I1 Lighting Set-up: 4J11
Engine Condition Trend Monitoring Float Valve: 3H17 H
(ECTM)-See ECTM Header Tanks: 3H15
Engine Display Unit-See EDU Draining HI-LOK Fasteners Installation:
Engine Fire Detection System: Fuel System: 1K17 6K7
3D7 Moisture: 1K17 Horizontal Stabilizer: 6H17
Environmental System Drains: 1K16 Attach Fittings Corrosion
Description: 2D9 Filling: 1K15 Control: 6H17
Distribution: 2D11 Filter: 1K16, 3H24 Hydraulic System
Assembly: 3H24 Bleeding: 3J21
F Servicing: 1K18 Description: 3J13
Fatigue Life: 1C7 Fuel Quantity Probes: 3I12 Fluid Diagram: 3J17
Fiberglass Repairs-See Repairs - Fuel Return System Installation: 3J18
Fiberglass Functional Test: 3I5 Leading Particulars: 3J14
Fire Extinguisher: 3D13 Operational Logic: 3I3 Lines: 3J22
Flap Compensator: 2H16 Functional Test: 3G22 Pump: 3J19, 3J20
Flaps: 6K24 Indicating Servicing: 3K1
Bellcrank Distortion Inspection: Fuel Probe Testing: 3J21
3G10 Fuel Quantity: 3I9 Servicing: 1K23
Control System: 3F23 Calibration: 3I14, 3I21 Testing: 3K1
Adjustment: 3G10 Display: 3I9, 3I11 Troubleshooting: 3J13
Motor-Actuator: 3F24, 3G8 Full Range Check: 3I20, Hydraulic Topping Governor-See
Rigging: 3G9 3J1 Overspeed Governor
Temperature: 3J3
Troubleshooting: 3F23
Leak Evaluation: 3H7
I
Drive System: 3F24
Flared Tube Assemblies: 2C6 Leakage Inspection: 3H9 Ice Protection: 4C7
Flight Controls Manual Fuel Shut-off Valve: Ignition System
Aileron-See Aileron 3H23 Checking: 7G9
Description and Operation: Operational Logic: 3H3 Description and Operation:
3D21 Quick Drain Valves: 3H23 7G7
Elevator-See Elevator Removing Biological Igniter Plugs: 7G13
Flaps-See Flaps Contamination: 1K19 Cleaning and Inspection:
Lubrication Chart: 1L10 Tanks: 3H5 7G13
Rudder-See Rudder Trim Fittings: 3H20 Erosion Limits: 7G14
Standard Practices and Troubleshooting: 3G20 Ignitinon Exciter: 7G10
Procedures: 3D21 Weight Conversion: 3I15 Ignition Cables: 7G15
Flight Deck View: 6E3 Fuselage Stations: 1F24 Inspection: 7G17
1B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Inspection Parking Brake Valve: 4H24 Unscheduled

Definitions: 1C19 Propeller: 7C13 Engine: 1F6
Forms: 1E3 Propeller Blades: 7C13 Overspeed: 1F6
Event Inspection Work Sheet: Propeller Heaters: 4E4 Overtemp: 1F6
1D13 Static Wick 100 Hour: 2I17 Overtorque: 1F6
Scheduled Maintenance Tailcone 100 Hour: 6H13 Sudden Stoppage: 1F6
Checks: 1E3 V-Band Coupling 100 Hour: Flaps Extended Above
Special Inspections Work 2E9 Maximum Flap
Sheet: 1E19 Vertical Fin Extension Speed: 1F9
Fuel System Leakage: 3H9 Attach Fitting Corrosion Flood Damage, Immersion in
Generator Brush Control: 6I3 Water: 1F9
Operating Environment: 1F1 Wheel Brake Assembly: Hard Landing: 1F7
Per Calendar Year: 1E22 4H19 Lightning Strike: 1F5
Per Engine Cycle: 1E19 Windows and Windshields: Overweight Landing: 1F7
Per Flight Hour: 1E19 6I18 Severe Turbulence: 1F7
Procedures Wing Attach Fittings Instruments
Cable Fittings: 3E3 Corrosion Control: 6K17 Removal / Installation
Chip Detector: 1L1 Progressive: 1C22 Face-Mounted: 6E1
Control Cables: 3D24 Requirements: 1C21 Rack-Mounted: 6E1
Drain Hose Routing 100 Annual/100 Hour Inspection: Introduction: 1A7
Hour: 7E23 1C21
Elevator Trim Tab Overlimits Inspections: 1C21 J
Corrosion Control: 6H24 Progressive Procedure: Jacking: 1G15
Engine Mount 1C21
100 Hour Special: 7E9 Away From Home Station L
Corrosion after Immersion: Requirements: 1C23 Landing
7E15 Equipment Change & Hard: 1F7
Firewall Overhaul Record Overweight: 1F7
100 Hour: 7E20 Form: 1E17 Landing Gear
1000 Hour Special: 7E22 Event #2: 1D13 Description and Operation: 4F9
Flap Bellcrank Distortion: Event Inspection Record Extension and Retraction:
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
Fuel Filter: 1K18 FAA AD Compliance Emergency Gear Release
Fuel Purge System: 7F8 Record Form: 1E15 Valve: 4H9
Horizontal Stabilizer Overview: 1C22 Sequence Valve: 4H7
Attach Fittings Corrosion Program Responsibility: System Functional Test:
Control: 6H17 1C24 4G22
Igniter Plugs: 7G13 Progressive Inspection Main
Ignition Cables: 7G17 Cycle Record Form: Actuator
Main Gear Assembly: 4F16 1E9 Assembly: 4H5
Main Gear Oleo: 4F14 Revisions: 1C24 Adjustment: 4F17
Main Wheel Assembly: 4H16 Service Publication Alignment: 4F19
Nose Gear Assembly: 4G9 Compliance Record Assembly: 4F14
Nose Gear Door Assembly: Form: 1E13 Door Assembly: 4F22
4G14 Special Inspections: 1E19 Installation: 4F15
Nose Gear Oleo: 4G5 Unscheduled Inspections: Lubrication Chart: 1L8
Nose Wheel Assembly: 4H14 1F5 Oleo Strut Assembly: 4F12
Oxygen System Specific Operation: 1F1 Toe-in / Toe-out Correction:
100 Hour: 6C19 Starter Generator: 2J21 4F18
300 Hour: 6C10 Tolerances: 4F20
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 1B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Landing Gear (cont.) Dimming Rheostats: 4J8 Main Gear-See Landing Gear -
Nose Electroluminescent: 4J9 Main
Actuator Eyeball Spotlights: 4J13 Main Wheel-See Wheels - Main
Assembly: 4H3 Instrument Panel Post Lights: Maintenance Checks
Installation: 4H2 4J7 Scheduled: 1C19
Adjustment: 4G9 Overhead Switch Panel: 4J9 Forms: 1E3
Alignment: 4G9 Oxygen Cylinder Cabinet: Special Inspections: 1E19
Assembly: 4G6 4J9 Unscheduled: 1F5
Door Actuator Assembly: Post-Installation Set-up: Manufacturers Aircraft Association
4H6 4J10 (MAA) plate: 1I11
Door Assembly: 4G14 ADF-650D: 4J12 Markings-See Placards
Down Spring Tool: 4G6 GNS-430: 4J10 Mass Flow Control Valve: 2E13
Installation: 4G7 GNS-530: 4J10 Master Electrical Panel: 6E13
Lubrication Chart: 1L9 GTX-327: 4J11 Meggitt Avionics/S-TEC MAGIC
Oleo Strut Assembly: 4G3 GTX-330: 4J11 1500: 2G21
Tolerances: 4G12 Reading: 4J13 Meggitt MAGIC
Troubleshooting: 4G1 Rocker Switch: 4J9 Electronic Flight Instrument
Oleo Struts Side Light Strips: 4J13 System (EFIS): 5C7
Filling: 1K21 Standby-Map Light: 4J8 Air Data & Attitude Heading
Inflating: 1K22 Locating Information: 1A11 Reference System:
Position and Warning Locking Airplane: 1H23 5D10
Gear Up / Power Reduced: Lubrication Ground Test Proceedure:
4I16 Airframe: 1L5 5D10
Main Application: 1L5 Functional Schematic: 5C23
Down Limit Switch: 4I12 Grease: 1L5 Navigation Display (ND):
Up Limit Switch: 4I12 Oil: 1L5 5D3
Nose Charts: 1L6 Color Coding: 5D7
Down Limit Switch: 4I12 Control System: 1L10 Default Settings: 5D7
Up Limit Switch: 4I12 Doors: 1L7 Troubleshooting: 5D4
Squat Switches: 4I14 Hydraulic System: 1L8 Primary Flight Display (PFD):
Adjustment: 4I14, 4I15 Landing Gear, Main: 1L8 5C21
Tires: 1K22 Landing Gear, Nose: 1L9 Troubleshooting: 5C24
Leveling: 1H1 Power Plant: 1L13 Engine Instrument Display
Life Limited Parts: 1C7 Propeller: 1L13 System (EIDS): 7J1
Lift Computer Pin Outs: 3F19 Seats: 1L7 Colors: 7J9
Lift Transducer Test Specifications: Engine: 1K24 Data Acquisition Unit (DAU):
3F20 Gaskets: 8D8 7J1
Lifting: 1G15-See also 57-40-00 Seals: 8D8 Switches: 7I15
Lightning Strike: 1F5 Special Instructions: 1L6 Description: 7J1
Lights Threads: 8D8 Engine Display Unit (EDU):
Courtesy: 1H23 3I9, 7J1
Exterior: 4J15 M Calibration Page: 7I15
Ice: 4J19 Magnetic Heading Systems: Data Page: 7J6
Landing: 4J19 5D18 DAU-FQP DATA Page:
Position: 4J16 Avidyne EFIS: 5D23 7I14, 7J8
Strobe: 4J15 Magnetometers: 5D23 Exceedance Data Page:
Taxi / Pulse (Recognition): Magnetic Compass: 5E2 7J3, 7J5
4J18 Meggitt EFIS: 5D18 Primary Display: 7I13, 7J3
Wing Inspection: 4J19 Flux Detectors: 5D18 Reversionary Display: 7J4
Interior: 4J7 Magnetic Heading Secondary Display: 7J4
Annunciator Panel: 4J8 Compensation / Test Mode: 7J4
Courtesy: 4J13 Calibration: 5D20
Dimmer Control Modules:
4J7
1B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Meggitt MAGIC (cont.) Piper Overspeed Governor: 7C19

Engine InstrumentDisplay Parts: 1A9 Operational Check: 7C19
(cont.) Publications: 1A12 Propeller Assembly: 7C10
Engine Torque Indication Service Bulletins: 1C15 Servicing: 1L2
Calibration: 7I13 Service Letters: 1C15 Spinner: 7C9
Flags: 7J9 Service Spares Letters: 1C15 Torquing Propeller Mounting
Modes of Operation: 7J3 Subscription Service: 1C15 Bolts: 7C11
Test Mode Terminal software: Pitch Servo: 2H12 Propeller Heat Installation: 4D14
7J10 Pitot and Static System Publications
Troubleshooting: 7J2 Description and Operation: 5C9 Piper: 1A12
Metal / Wire Stitching Repair: 6G4 Pitot Head: 5C13 Parts Catalog: 1A12
Model Test: 5C9 Progressive Inspection
Code: 1A10 Troubleshooting: 5C10 Manual: 1A12
Year: 1A10 Pitot Deice: 4D5 Vendor: 1A12
Mooring: 1I1 Placards Pulley Wear Patterns: 3E2
Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
Nose Gear-See Landing Gear - Instrument Panel: 1J5 Radar, Color Weather: 5E7
Nose Overhead Switch Panel: 1J4 Relay Installation: 6E14
Nose Wheel-See Wheels - Nose Pneumatic Deice System Repairs
Adjustments and Test: 4D3 Fiberglass: 6F17
O Troubleshooting: 4C9 Metal/Wire Stitching: 6G4
Oil Cooler-See Engine - Oil Power Lever Cable Adjustment: Thermoplastic: 6F19
Cooler 7H19 List of Materials: 6G2
Outflow Valve: 2D24 Power Plant-See Engine Restraint System
Outside Air Temperature (OAT): Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk Inertial Reel Adjustment: 3C10
5C17 Installation: 6G3 Shoulder Harness/Lap Belt:
Overspeed Governor: 7C19 Pressure Transducer: 2H7 3C10
Operational Check: 7C19 Pressurization Control-See Cabin Revisions: 1A3
Oxygen Propeller Identifying Revised Material:
Fixed Cylinder System: 6C7 Blade Inspection and Repair: 1A11
300 Hour Inspection: 6C10 7C13 Rod End Installation: 3D23
Component Limits: 6C11 Blade Track: 7C12 Roll Servo: 2H5
Installation: 6C8 Cleaning, Inspection, and Capstan Wrapping: 2H6
Leak Tests: 6C16 Repair: 7C13 Rudder
Safety Precautions: 6C7 Description: 7C7 Balancing: 6I5
Servicing: 6C13 Governor: 7C15 Control System: 3E19
Troubleshooting: 6C10 Rigging and Adjustment: Controls: 3E20, 3E21
Fixed Generator System: 6C19 7C17 Rigging: 3E23
Installation: 6C20 Heat: 4D9 Rudder Pedal Assembly:
Passenger: 6C19 Boots: 4D20 3E20
Pilot: 6C7 Brush Block Assemblies: Trim Controls: 3F2
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
P Functional Check: 4E3 Troubleshooting: 3E19
Harness Installation: 4E2 Trim Tab: 6I8
Page Numbering: 1A10 Inspections: 4E4
Parking: 1H23 Rudder Pedals at Neutral Position:
Installation: 4D14 4G10
Parking Brake Valve Assembly: Slip Ring Assembly: 4D19
4I1 Troubleshooting: 4D10
Passenger Compartment Hydraulic Topping Governor-
Options See Overspeed Governor
Cabinets: 3C14 Lubrication Chart: 1L13
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 1B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S T Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly:

4H20
Safety Valve: 2D24 Taxiing: 1H15 Toe-in / Toe-out Correction Chart:
Seat Belts-See Restraint System Terminal Junction Module 4F18
Seats Identification: 6E8 Tools
Lumbar Support: 3C9 Testing Control Surfaces Balancing:
Bladder Installation: 3C11 ADAHRS Ground Test 6H23
Passenger: 3C13 Procedure: 5D10 Flight Controls Rigging: 3E4
Pilot/Copilot: 3C7 ADAHARS Test Cable: 5E5 Landing Gear Installation /
Sequence Valve: 4H7 Alternator Control Unit: 2K8 Rigging: 4F10
Serial Number: 1I11 Battery Capacity: 2K14 Tire Balancer: 1L15
Explanation: 1A10 Electrical System Function: Torque
Service Points: 1K13 2J16 Requirements
Servo Clutch Torques, Autopilot: ELT: 3C23 Aluminum Tubing: 2F4
2H15 Engine Ground Test: 7E1 Flare Connections: 2F4
Shoring: 1G15 Fuel Return System Functional Flare Fittings: PB 8D4
Skin Material Specifications: 6F7 Test: 3I5 O-Ring Connections: 2F4
Specifications Fuel System Functional Test: Servo Clutches: 2H15
Fuel Boost Pump: 3H19, 3I4 3G22 Wrenches: PB 2C6
Service Test Generator Control Unit: 2J24 Towing: 1H13
Alternator: 2K3 GMA-340 Audio Panel Transponder: 5E14
Starter Generator: 2J20 Functional Test: 2I10 Trim Monitor: 2H4
Skin Materials: 6F7 Heated Windshield: 4D7 Trim Servo: 2H8
Squat Switches: 4I14 Hydraulic Pump: 3J21 Troubleshooting
Stall Warning System: 3F15 Thermal Relief Valve: 3J21 Aileron Control System: 3E9
Flight Test Procedure: 3F16 Hydraulic System: 3K1 Air Conditioning: 2E18
Functional Test: 3F16 Landing Gear Retraction Airspeed Tubes and Standby
Troubleshooting: 3F15 System Functional Test: Indicator: 5C17
Standard Practices 4G22 Alternator: 2J12
Airframe Lift Computer (LC): 3F19 Altimeter, Standby: 5C15
Flared Tube Assemblies: Lift Transducer (LT): 3F20 Battery System: 2K12
2C6 Mass Flow Control System: EADI: 5C24
Torque Wrenches: 2C6 2E14 EFIS-Avidyne: 5D10
Engine: 7D5 Navigation Display (ND): 5D3 EHSI: 5D4
Additional Information: 7D8 Overspeed Governor: 7C19 EIDS (i.e. - EDU / DAU): 7J2
Basic Procedures: 7D7 Oxygen Cylinder System Leak Electrical System: 2J10
Station Reference Lines: 1F24 Tests: 6C16 Elevator Control System: 3F5
S-TEC System 550: 2G24 Pitot/Static System: 5C9 Engine: 7D17
Steering: 4I7 Pneumatic Deice System: 4D3 Flap Control System: 3F23
Arm: 4I6 Pressurization System: 2E7 Fuel System: 3G20
Bellcrank: 4I5 Primary Flight Display (PFD): Generator Control Unit: 2K1
Bungee Assembly: 4I6 5C21 Hydraulic System: 3J13
Pushrod: 4I5 Propeller Heater: 4E3 Ignition System: 7G9
Pushrod Bellows: 4I6 Stall Warning System: 3F16 Landing Gear Extension and
Structural Inspection and Temperature Control System: Retraction: 4G19
Replacement: 1C7 2G11 Magnetic Compass: 5E3
Surface Thermoplastic Repairs-See Main Landing Gear: 4F11
Finish Care: 1K7 Repairs - Thermoplastic Navigation Display (ND): 5D4
Switches Thread Lubricants: 8D8 Nose Landing Gear: 4G1
Overhead Switch Panel: 6E2 Three View: 1F21 Oxygen Cylinder System: 6C10
Push ON - Push OFF: 6E4 Tie Bus Panel Connections: 6E11 Pitot and Static Systems: 5C10
Rocker-type: 6E4 Time Limits & Maintenance
Checks: 1C13
1B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Troubleshooting (cont.) Windshield Heat

Pneumatic Deice System: 4C9 Testing: 4D7
Pressurization System: 2D21 Troubleshooting: 4D7
Primary Flight Display (PFD): Wing
5C24 Attach Fittings Corrosion
Propeller Heat: 4D10 Control: 6K17
Rudder Control System: 3E19 Inboard Wing: 6K8
Starter Generator Installation: 6K10
Vacuum System: 6D12 Installation: 6K1
Windshield Heat: 4D7 Outboard Wing: 6K1
Turbulence: 1F7 Installation: 6K3
Turn Coordinator: 5E4 Wing Stations: 1G2
Turning Radius: 1H11 Y
Type Certificate: 1A10 Yaw Amplifier: 2H14
Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Troubleshooting: 6D12
Vendor
Publications: 1A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
Attach Fitting Corrosion Control:
6I3
Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator:
6E2
Vortex Generators: 6H19, 6L1
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheel Brake Assembly: 4H17
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Assembly Repairs: 4H16
Windows and Windshields
Definitions: 6I17
Inspection and Repair: 6I18
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Pilot’s / Copilot’s: 6J10
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 INDEX 1B10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 1B12 THRU 1B24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
4
AIRWORTHINESS
LIMITATIONS
1C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER CHAPTER
4-List of 1 Apr 15/07

4-Table of Contents 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
4-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
1C3 4 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 4 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1C4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 4 - AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 4-00-00 1 1C7
1C5 4 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 4 - CONTENTS 1C6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
NOTE: The Airworthiness Limitations section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required
under §§ 43.16 and 91.403 of the Federal Aviation Regulations unless an alternative program
has been FAA approved.
1. The following limitations, related to fatigue life of the airplane and its components, have been established
for the PA-46-500TP:
A. Refer to Chart 1 for Structural Inspection and Replacement.
B. The safe life limit of propeller blades is unlimited.
C. See latest revision of Pratt & Whitney Canada Service Bulletin No. 3002 for PT6A-42A Rotor
Components Service Life Limits.
2. Refer to 5-20-00 for Piper’s recommended Progressive Inspection Program.
3. Life Limited Parts Marking and Disposition
14 CFR Part 43.10, Disposition of Life-Limited Aircraft Parts requires that proper procedures are
followed when removing life limited parts with time and/or cycles remaining on them as well as the
disposition of life limited parts with no time and/or cycles left. Life limited parts defined by Type
Certificate are listed in paragraph 1, above. Other parts which are replaced or rebuilt at specified
intervals are listed in Chapter 5.
A. Parts that are removed prior to accumulating their life limit, are to be marked with indelible ink or
marker with the part number, serial number and accumulated life status as defined in 14 CFR Part
43.10 in a manner that does not affect part structural integrity, i.e. - no surface deformation such as
vibration/etching allowed.
B. Parts that have accumulated the life limit shall be disposed of in accordance with the applicable
FARs. Piper recommends life limited parts with no time and/or cycles remaining be completely
destroyed.
CHART 1
STRUCTURAL INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT (PIR-TCDS A25SO, Rev. 15.)
SERIAL NUMBER COMPONENT LIFE INSPECTIONS

EFFECTIVITY (Flight Hours) (Flight Hours)
4697001 thru 4697156 Fuselage Assembly - P/N 89600-004 10,145 N/A
(i.e. - Pressurized Structure)
Wing Assembly - P/N 89640-004/-007 13,349 N/A
(i.e. - Wing & Associated Structure)
4697001 thru 4697156 Fuselage Assembly - P/N 89600-004 10,145 N/A
with Kit No. 767-360 (i.e. - Pressurized Structure)
installed
Wing Assembly - P/N 89640-007 10,255 N/A
4697157 and up Fuselage Assembly - P/N 89600-004 10,145 N/A
(i.e. - Pressurized Structure)
Wing Assembly - P/N 89640-007 10,255 N/A

1C7 4-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 4-00-00 1C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
5
TIME LIMITS /
MAINTENANCE
CHECKS
1C9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER CHAPTER
5-List of 1 Apr 15/07 5-20-00 (cont.)

Effective Pages 2 Apr 15/07 31 Apr 15/07
32 Apr 15/07
5-Table of Contents 1 Apr 15/07 33 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 34 Apr 15/07
35 Apr 15/07
5-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 36 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 37 Apr 15/07
38 Apr 15/07
5-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 39 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 40 Apr 15/07
41 Apr 15/07
5-20-00 1 Apr 15/07 42 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 43 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 44 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 45 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 46 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 47 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 48 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 5-30-00 1 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07 5-50-00 1 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
26 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
27 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
28 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
29 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
30 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5 - TIME LIMITS AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 5-00-00 1 1C15
TIME LIMITS 5-10-00 1 1C17
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 5-20-00 1 1C19

Description 1 1C19
Definitions 1 1C19
Inspection Requirements 3 1C21
Progressive Inspection Program 3 1C21
Overlimits Inspections 3 1C21
Annual / 100 Hour Inspection 3 1C21
Progressive Inspection Procedure 4 1C22
Overview 4 1C22
Scheduled Maintenance (5-20-00) 4 1C22
Special Inspections (5-30-00) 5 1C23
Unscheduled Maintenance (5-50-00) 5 1C23
Away From Home Station Requirements 5 1C23
Program Responsibility 6 1C24
Revisions 6 1C24
Event Inspection Work Sheet - Event #1 7 1D1
Left Wing, Detailed 7 1D1
Right Wing, Routine 8 1D2
Fuselage and Empennage, Detailed 8 1D2
Cabin and Cockpit, Detailed 10 1D4
Propeller, Detailed 12 1D6
Engine, Detailed 12 1D6
Landing Gear, Routine 14 1D8
Unscheduled Maintenance Checks, As Required 14 1D8
Special Inspections, As Required 14 1D8
Operational Inspection 14 1D8
General 15 1D9
Return to Service Certification 17 1D11
Discrepancy Worksheet 18 1D12
Event Inspection Work Sheet - Event #2 19 1D13
Right Wing, Detailed 19 1D13
Left Wing, Routine 20 1D14
Fuselage and Empennage, Routine 20 1D14
Cabin and Cockpit, Routine 21 1D15
Propeller, Detailed 21 1D15
Engine, Detailed 22 1D16
Landing Gear, Detailed 24 1D18
Unscheduled Maintenance Checks, As Required 25 1D19
Special Inspections, As Required 25 1D19
Operational Inspection 25 1D19
General 26 1D20

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 5 - TIME LIMITS AND MAINTENANCE CHECKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS (continued)

Event Inspection Work Sheet - Event #2 (continued)
Return to Service Certification 27 1D21
Discrepancy Worksheet 28 1D22
Notes 29 1D23
Sample Forms 33 1E3
Program Responsibility 33 1E3
Record of Revisions 35 1E5
Event Inspection Record 37 1E7
Progressive Inspection Cycle Record 39 1E9
Discrepancy Record 41 1E11
Service Publication Compliance Record 43 1E13
Federal Aviation Airworthiness Directives (AD) Compliance Record 45 1E15
Equipment Change and Overhaul Record 47 1E17
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 5-30-00 1 1E19

Per Engine Cycle 1 1E19
Per Flight Hour 1 1E19
Per Calendar Year 4 1E22
Per Specific Operation / Operating Environment 6 1E24
High Dust or Industrial Pollution 6 1E24
High Salt or High Humidity 7 1F1
Extreme Cold 7 1F1
Soft or Unusual Terrain 8 1F2
Airplane Inactive More than Seven (7) Days 9 1F3
UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 5-50-00 1 1F5

Lightning Strike 1 1F5
Engine Overspeed, Overtemp, Overtorque, or Sudden Stoppage 2 1F6
Engine FOD Ingestion - Hard Material 2 1F6
Engine FOD Ingestion - Soft Material / Bird Strikes 3 1F7
Severe Turbulence, Hard or Overweight Landing 3 1F7
Flaps Extended Above Maximum Flap Extension Speed (VFE) 5 1F9
Flood Damage, Immersion in Water 5 1F9
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. (Piper) takes a continuing interest in having the owner get the most efficient use
from his airplane, and keeping the airplane in the best mechanical condition. To that end, Piper publishes
a recurring maintenance schedule which is supplemented with Service Bulletins, Service Letters and
Service Spares Letters as required.
A. The recurring maintenance schedule for the PA-46-500TP Malibu Meridian takes the form of a
Progressive Inspection Program, which is provided in 5-20-00.
B. Piper Service Bulletins are of special importance and Piper considers compliance mandatory.
These are sent to the latest U.S. registered owners and Piper Service Centers.
C. Service Letters deal with product improvements and service hints pertaining to the aircraft. They are
sent to Piper Service Centers and sometimes directly to owners, so they can properly service the
aircraft and keep it up to date with the latest changes. Owners should give careful attention to the
service letter information.
D. Service Spares Letters, which are sent only to Piper Service Centers, offer improved parts, kits and
optional equipment which were not available originally and which may be of interest to the owner.
NOTE: Piper mails Service Bulletins, Service Letters, and P.O.H. Revisions to the registered
owner’s name and address as shown on the Aircraft Registration Certificate. If the aircraft
is based and/or operated at a different location (or locations) and/or by a person (or
persons) other than those recorded on the aircraft registration, then the registered owner(s)
is responsible for forwarding these Bulletins and Letters to the operating location(s) or
person(s).
Changes in aircraft registration may take a substantial amount of time to be recorded by
the Federal Aviation Administration and received by Piper to change the mailing address.
Owners and operators should make arrangements to keep abreast of service releases
during this interim period through their Piper Service Center.
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) publishes Airworthiness Directives (AD’s) that apply to
specific aircraft. They are mandatory changes and are to be complied within a time limit set by the FAA.
When an AD is issued, it is sent to the latest registered owner of the affected aircraft and also to
subscribers of the service. The owner is solely responsible for being aware of and complying with
airworthiness directives.
NOTE: A searchable database of AD’s is available on the FAA website. See the “Airworthiness
DIrectives” link at “www1.faa.gov”. Additionally, Avantext offers a free email notification service
for new AD’s as well as the last six weeks worth of AD’s at “www.avantext.com”.
An owner should periodically check with a Piper Service Center to find out the latest information to keep
his aircraft up to date.
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. has a subscription service for the Service Bulletins, Service Letters, and
Service Spares Letters. This service is offered to interested persons such as owners, pilots, and
mechanics at a nominal fee and may be obtained through Piper Service Centers. Owners residing
outside of the United States are urged to subscribe to this service since Piper cannot otherwise obtain
the addresses of foreign owners. Maintenance Manuals and Illustrated Parts Catalogs are also available
through Piper Service Centers and Distributors world wide.
1C15 5-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 5-00-00 1C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIME LIMITS
1. Refer to 4-00-00 for the FAA-approved airworthiness limitations section. It sets forth each mandatory
replacement time, structural inspection interval, and related structural inspection procedure required for
type certification.
2. Refer to 5-20-00 for Piper’s recommended Progressive Inspection Program. It includes the frequency
and extent of the inspections required for the continued airworthiness of the airplane.
3. Inspections required by Engine Cycle, Flight Hour, or Calendar Year are included as part of the
Progressive Inspection Event cycles, if due, and are listed individually in 5-30-00.
1C17 5-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 5-10-00 1C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
1. Description
WARNING: FAILURE TO CONSULT APPLICABLE VENDOR PUBLICATION(S), WHEN SERVICING
OR INSPECTING VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN PIPER AIRCRAFT, MAY
RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY
PUBLICATIONS.)
The recurring maintenance schedule for the PA-46-500TP Malibu Meridian is provided as a Progressive
Inspection Program. The inspection program contained herein (i.e. - paragraph 4) is also available in a
separate manual form from your Piper Distributor as P/N 767-009 (Progressive 100 Hour Inspection)
(see Note, paragraph 3).
Piper Progressive Inspection Programs comply with the F.A.A. Federal Aviation Regulations Parts 43, 91
and 135. The owner/operator is primarily responsible for maintaining the airplane in an airworthy
condition, including compliance with all applicable Airworthiness Directives and conformity with the
requirements in FAR 91.409, 91.411 and 91.413.
The first overhaul or replacement of components should be performed at the given periods. The
condition of various components can then be used as criteria for determining subsequent periods
applicable to the individual airplane, depending on usage, providing the owner/operator has an
established Part 91 Progressive Inspection Program (see 91.409(d)) or Part 135 Approved Aircraft
Inspection Program (see 135.419).
The time periods given for inspections of various components are based on average usage and
environmental conditions.
NOTE: The listed inspection, overhaul and replacement schedules do not guarantee that a particular
item or component will reach the listed time without malfunction. Unique operating conditions
encountered by individual airplanes cannot be controlled by the manufacturer.
2. Definitions:
A. Inspections - Must be performed only by Certified Mechanics who are qualified on this aircraft,
using acceptable methods, techniques and practices to determine physical condition and detect defects.
(1) Routine Inspection - Consists of a visual examination or check of the aircraft and its
components and systems without disassembly.
(2) Detailed Inspection - Consists of a thorough examination of the appliances, the aircraft and the
components and systems with such disassembly as is necessary to determine condition.
(3) Special Inspection - Involves those components, systems or structure which by their
application or intended use require an inspection peculiar to, more extensive in scope or at a
time period other than that which is normally accomplished during the event inspection.
B. Checks - Can be performed by pilots and/or mechanics who are qualified on this aircraft and
consists of examinations in the form of comparisons with stated standards for the purpose of
verifying condition, accuracy and tolerances.
C. Approved Inspection - Means a continuing airworthiness inspection of an airplane and its various
component and systems at scheduled interval in accordance with procedures approved by the FAA
under FAR Part 91.409(d) or Part 135.419.
1C19 5-20-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Tests - Operation of aircraft components, appliances or systems to evaluate functional performance.

(1) Operational Test - A task to determine that an item, is fulfilling its intended purpose.The task
does not require quantitative tolerances. This is a fault finding task.
(2) Functional Test - A quantitative check to determine, if one or more functions of an item
performs within specified limits. This test may require the use of supplemental bench test
equipment.
(3) In addition, each of the above tests must be performed by an FAA Certified Repair Station with
appropriate ratings or by a Certified Mechanic who is qualified on this aircraft. The recording of
the above function must be made in the permanent aircraft records by the authorized individual
performing the test.
E. Bench Test - Means removal of component from the aircraft to inspect for cleanliness, impending
failure, need for lubrication, repair or replacement of parts and calibration to at least the
manufacturers specifications using the manufacturers recommended test equipment or standards
or the equivalent.
Each bench test will be performed by a Piper Service Center, FAA Certified Repair Station with
appropriate rating or by a certified mechanic. This test will be performed at the scheduled interval
regardless of any bench test performed on a particular component while being repaired/overhauled
before scheduled interval bench test. After the component is installed into the aircraft, an
operational test of the component and its related system should be performed to ensure proper
function. Serviceable parts that were issued to the component will be filed in the aircraft permanent
records. The person performing the test must make appropriate entries in the aircraft’s permanent
maintenance record.
F. Maintenance - The word maintenance as defined by FAR Part 1, means “inspection, overhaul,
repair, preservation and the replacement of parts, but excludes preventive maintenance.”
G. On Condition Maintenance - A primary maintenance process having repetitive inspections or tests
to determine the condition of units, systems, or portions of structure with regard to continued
serviceability (corrective action is taken when required by item condition.)
H. Time - as used in this manual.
(1) Time-in-service for aircraft components, unless otherwise specified, is a cumulative total of
flight hours or calendar time calculated from the time a new or overhauled component was first
installed in any aircraft, and including:
(a) the aircraft time that elapses from the initial installation to the first removal, if any; and,
(b) the aircraft time that elapses from each subsequent installation to each subsequent
removal, if any; or,
(c) the calendar time elapsed since the installation.
NOTE: Dates stamped on individual components at the time of manufacture are typically
applied to determine shelf life - i.e. the maximum time allowed from manufacture/
assembly/cure until actually installed in an aircraft and are not relevant.
Do not, however; ignore markings applied to life-limited parts when removed with time
and/or cycles remaining on them.
(2) Aircraft time, flight hours, or aircraft hours are the “Hobbs Time” shown on, or calculated from,
the installed “Hour Meter.”
(3) A complete “engine cycle” is defined as engine start, idle, takeoff, flight, landing, idle, and
shutdown. Many aircraft operations involve partial engine cycles (i.e. - idle, takeoff, flight,
landing, idle) that, with the application of an appropriate formula (see P&WC Service Bulletin
No. 3002), are also factored into the calculation of service life limits.
NOTE: The owner/operator is responsible for recording and calculating life limiting cycles.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Inspection Requirements
A. Progressive Inspection Program
The Piper Progressive Inspection Program complies with the F.A.A. Federal Aviation Regulations
(FAR) Parts 43, 91 and 135 for progressive inspections. The owner/operator is primarily responsible
for maintaining the airplane in an airworthy condition, including compliance with all applicable
Airworthiness Directives and conformity with the requirements in FAR 91.409, 91.411 and 91.413.
The complete cycle inspection consists of two (2) 100 hour events, which provides for a complete
aircraft inspection in 200 aircraft flying hours. The complete inspection, Events (1) and (2), must be
completed within twelve (12) calendar months. Inspections must be accomplished by persons
authorized by the FAA.
The Progressive Inspection Program is designed to permit best utilization of the aircraft through the
use of a planned inspection schedule. This schedule is contained herein (i.e. - paragraph 4) and is
also available in a separate manual form from your Piper Distributor as P/N 767-009. Refer to the
Piper Customer Service Information Aerofiche (P/N 1753-755) revision checklist for latest issue.
NOTE: The PA-46-500TP Malibu Meridian 100 Hour Progressive Inspection Manual (P/N 767-009)
referenced above is not a stand-alone document. The Progressive Inspection Manual
constitutes a snapshot of the Airworthiness Limitations and Inspection sections of the
Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) and is current only at the time of printing.
Use it as follows:
(1) Owners/operators desiring to establish a Part 91 Progressive Inspection Program
(PIP) (see 91.409(d)) or a Part 135 Approved Aircraft Inspection Program (AAIP) (see
135.419) should use the Progressive Inspection Manual as a template for submission
to the appropriate FAA office.
(2) Service centers conducting Event Cycle inspections under a FAA-approved PIP or
AAIP can use the Progressive Inspection Manual as a working check-off list/form,
provided they verify its currency against the FAA-approved PIP or AAIP.
(3) Service centers conducting Part 91 Annual / 100 Hour Inspections (see paragraph C,
below) can use the Progressive Inspection Manual as a working check-off list/form,
provided they verify its currency against an up-to-date copy of the ICA (i.e. - the
PA-46-500TP Maintenance Manual, Chapters 4 and 5).
B. Overlimits Inspections
If the airplane has been operated so that any of its components have exceeded their maximum
operational limits, special inspections may be required by Piper and/or the component
manufacturer. See 5-50-00 and applicable vendor publications.
C. Annual / 100 Hour Inspection
Owners/operators may maintain the airplane solely under FAR 91.409 (a) and (b) inspection
requirements. The inspection checklist for such an annual/100 hour inspection consists of both
Events (1) and (2) from the 100 hour Progressive Inspection Program described above. Inspections
must be accomplished by persons authorized by the FAA.
1C21 5-20-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Progressive Inspection Procedure

The progressive inspection program cycle consists of two (2) 100 Hour Events, which provides for a
complete aircraft inspection in 200 aircraft flying hours. The complete inspection cycle, Events (1) and
(2), must be completed within twelve (12) calendar months.
Each Event Inspection consists of a predetermined number of location inspections, both routine and
detailed, as indicated below. The Event Inspections are conducted each 100 hours and must be done in
sequence. Each Event Inspection will be conducted using an Event Inspection Work Sheet and, when
completed, recorded in the Event Inspection Record.
Late compliance with the Event Inspection Interval of 100 hours may be extended by not more than ten
(10) flying hours (10% of Event Inspection Interval). The excess time, however, must be deducted from
the next 100 flying hours.
Early compliance can be accomplished at the owner/operator’s discretion for convenience of scheduling.
However, where early compliance is accomplished, the 100 flying hour interval for the next event
inspection will be maintained.
The Event Inspections are arranged so that the 200 flying hour cycle results in a complete inspection.
When both Events are complete and recorded, an entry is made in the Progressive Inspection Cycle
Record and Sign-off Sheet which is the running log or current status of the aircraft’s inspections.
A. Overview
(1) Scheduled Maintenance (5-20-00)
(a) Two (2) Event Inspections at 100 Hour Intervals. Work sheets are provided as follows:
1 Event #1 (100, 300, 500, 700, and 900 flight hours, etc.)
a Left Wing, Detailed
b Right Wing, Routine
c Fuselage and Empennage, Detailed
d Cabin, Detailed
e Propeller, Detailed
f Engine, Detailed
g Landing Gear, Routine
h Unscheduled, Special, Operational, and General Inspections
i Return to Service Certification
j Discrepancy Worksheet
2 Event #2 (200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 flight hours, etc.)
a Right Wing, Detailed
b Left Wing, Routine
c Fuselage and Empennage, Routine
d Cabin, Routine
e Propeller, Detailed
f Engine, Detailed
g Landing Gear, Detailed
h Unscheduled, Special, Operational, and General Inspections
i Return to Service Certification
j Discrepancy Worksheet
3 Notes
(b) Completed Aircraft Inspection Cycle (i.e. - as part of the second Event Inspection).
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Sample Forms

1 Program Responsibility - is a permanent record identifying the person responsible for
scheduling the inspections under this program.
2 Record of Revisions - is a permanent record documenting any revisions to this
inspection program. Note that any such revisions must be submitted to and approved
by the FAA District Office before enactment.
3 The Event Inspection Record - is a permanent record of 100 Hour Event Inspection
completion.
4 The Progressive Inspection Cycle Record - is a permanent record of Progressive
Inspection 200 Hour Cycle completion.
5 The Discrepancy Record is a log of conditions for corrective action at the next routine
or event inspection as determined by the maintenance personnel. FAA Airworthiness
Directives and/or manufacturer’s service publications, not requiring immediate action
may be entered on the (DR) providing complying with the A.D. or service publication
at the next routine or event will be within the time allowance permitted. Certain FAA
or manufacturer’s mandatory inspections may have to be accomplished before
further flight, in which case, their compliance should be recorded on the appropriate
record.
6 Service Publication Compliance Record - is a permanent record used to document
compliance with all applicable aircraft and component manufacturer’s service
publications.
7 The Federal Aviation Airworthiness Directives (AD) Compliance Record - is a
permanent record used to document compliance with all applicable AD Notes.
8 The Equipment Change and Overhaul Record - is a permanent record used to
document equipment changes, allowing precise control of equipment inspection,
overhaul, or replacement intervals. Use of the ECR allows review of the ‘’Out of
Sequence’’ equipment and permits a projection of equipment “due” times in relation
to the aircraft Hobbs times.
(2) Special Inspections (5-30-00)
NOTE: Includes inspections which occur outside the 100 hour event cycle.
(a) Per Engine Cycle
(b) Per Flight Hour
(c) Per Calendar Year
(d) Per Special Operation / Operating Environment
(3) Unscheduled Maintenance (5-50-00)
B. Away From Home Station Requirements.
If the airplane is to be away from the home location at the time an inspection is due, the pilot-in
command of the flight will take with him all sign off sheets which will be required for the inspection,
and a copy of this manual. The inspection will be conducted or supervised by one of the following:
(1) An appropriately certified repair station.
(2) An appropriately rated certified mechanic, qualified on this type aircraft.
The results of the inspection will be noted on the proper sign off sheets which are then brought
back to the home base. The pilot will be responsible for all inspection forms and work sheet entries
with mechanics and/or inspector’s signature and identification.
1C23 5-20-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Discrepancies affecting the airworthiness of the airplane, when the airplane is away from the local
station, will be corrected by either 1 or 2, above. The pilot will be responsible for all work sheet
entries with mechanics and/or inspector’s signature and identification.
The pilot-in-command should also ascertain that the appropriate logbook entries have been made
in the aircraft and engine logbooks.
C. Program Responsibility
The person responsible for scheduling the inspections required under this program must enter his
or her name in a copy of the Program Responsibility form included later in this section and forward
the original copy of the form to their local FAA-FSDO office. A duplicate copy should be maintained
in this manual.
Any change in personnel responsible for scheduling the inspection program requires another copy
of the Program Responsibility form to be filled out and the original copy sent to the local FAA-FSDO
office, while a duplicate copy is attached behind the previous Program Responsibility form. The
previous form should be retained and the word "CHANGED" should be written across the obsolete
information.
D. Revisions
Revisions to this Inspection Program are the direct responsibility of the manufacturer. However,
owners/operators with an F.A.A.-approved Part 91 Progressive Inspection Program or a Part 135
Approved Aircraft Inspection Program may not enact any such revisions until approval is obtained
from the responsible F.A.A. District Office. A permanent record of revisions and F.A.A. approvals will
be maintained by the owner/operator on the form provided for this purpose later in this section.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRPLANE REGISTRATION ENGINE PROPELLER

SERIAL NUMBER NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
EVENT INSPECTION WORK SHEET

EVENT #1 (SHEET 1 OF 12)
PUBLICATIONS.)
NOTE: Review Notes 1, 2, 3, and 4, before beginning this event.
LEFT WING, DETAILED (See Chapter 57.)
1. Remove inspection covers and panels
2. Check surfaces, skins, and tips for damage and loose or missing fasteners. (See Notes 35 and 51.)
3. Inspect forward and aft wing spar to fuselage attach fittings for corrosion and condition.
4. Check security of ailerons, hinges, and attachments.
5. Inspect ailerons for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion,
and excessive paint build up); structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging or
structural imbalance; hinge damage, excessive wear, freedom of movement and proper lubrication;
and attachment points for missing or worn hardware.
6. Inspect aileron control cables, terminals, turnbuckles, fittings, guides, pulleys, and bellcranks for
safety, condition, and operation. (See Note 58.)
7. Inspect flaps for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion, and
excessive paint build up); structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging or structural
imbalance; hinge damage, excessive wear, freedom of movement and proper lubrication; and
attachment points for missing or worn hardware. (See Note 15.)
NOTE: If flap extension at speeds exceeding VFE is suspected, see 5-50-00 - Flaps Extended
Above Maximum Flap Extension Speed (VFE).
8. Inspect the flap actuation system rod end bearings for binding or seizing of the ball bearings. Pay
particular attention to the rod end bearings attached to the inboard bellcrank assembly located in
each main gear well.
9. Inspect condition of bolts used with flap rollers and aileron hinges. (Replace as required.)
10. Inspect flap tracks for security of attachment, damage, condition, and corrosion.
11. Check condition of exterior bearings.
12. Inspect static discharge wicks for security of attachment and condition. (Replace as required.)
WARNING: A TOTAL OF MORE THAN FIVE (5) VORTEX GENERATORS MISSING FROM THE
WHOLE AIRPLANE RENDERS THE AIRPLANE UNAIRWORTHY.
13. Inspect condition and security of vortex generators, if installed.
WARNING: PHYSICAL MANIPULATION OF LIFT TRANSDUCER ON PA-46 SERIES AIRPLANES
MAY RESULT IN ERRONEOUS STALL WARNINGS NECESSITATING CALIBRATION
OF SYSTEM. REFER TO CHAPTER 27.
14. Inspect lift transducer for security of attachment, spring centering of switch blade, and corrosion.
Check heat element for operation.
15. Inspect wing inspection light for broken lens, security, wiring, and attachment.
16. Lubricate per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.
17. Check condition of hydraulic, fuel, and pneumatic hoses and lines.
1D1 5-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EVENT #1 (Sheet 2 of 12)
LEFT WING, DETAILED (continued)

18. Check condition and security of wiring and connectors. (See Note 47.)
19. Check fuel tanks and lines for leaks. (See Notes 21, 22, and 39.)
NOTE: Any fuel leaks within the wing will show at the lower wing root fairing, between wing and
fuselage.
20. Drain wing fuel sumps. Inspect fuel for contaminants, flush tank as required.
21. Check fuel tank sealing material.
22. Check fuel tank fillers marked “Jet Fuel Only.”
23. Check fuel filler cap, O-ring, and receptacle for condition.
24. Check fuel tank vent for obstructions.
25. Inspect condition of pneumatic deicer. Inspect fill and edge sealant on stall strips installed on boots.
Reseal, refill, feather as required with AC665B-1/2 (P/N 279-065).
26. Inspect wing tip navigation and strobe lights for broken lenses, security, wiring, and attachment.
27. Reinstall inspection covers and panels.
RIGHT WING, ROUTINE (See Chapter 57.)
2. Check surfaces, skins, and tips for damage and loose or missing fasteners. (See Note 51.)
3. Check fuel tanks and lines for leaks. (See Note 39.)
fuselage.
4. Fuel tank fillers marked “Jet Fuel Only.”
.9. Inspect standby attitude indicator emergency power supply (in radar pod aft compartment) for
condition and security.
FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE, DETAILED (See Chapters 51 & 55.)
1. Remove inspection covers and panels.
2. Check that all fuselage and empennage drain holes are clear and open. (See Note 31.)
3. Inspect structure for cracks, dents, security of attachments, cleanliness, and loose or pulled
fasteners. (See Note 55.)
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT IS PROHIBITED WITH DISCOLORATION, CRACKS, OR
CRAZING IN WINDSHIELD OR WINDOWS.
4. Inspect windshield and windows for nicks, scratches, cracks, crazing, and discoloration.
(See 56-00-00.)
5. Inspect condition of skins, bulkheads, frames, and stringers for cracks, dents, bending, buckling,
sealed areas, and loose or pulled fasteners. (See Note 49.)
6. Inspect avionics components and wiring for condition, security, and operation.
7. Inspect control cable boots for condition and security.
8. Check fuel sump drains for water and proper operation. (See Note 10.)
9. Drain pitot/static lines. (Refer to 34-00-00.)
10. Inspect antennas/coaxial cables for condition and security.
11. Inspect dorsal fin for condition and security.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE, DETAILED (continued)

12. Inspect vertical fin for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion,
13. Check vertical fin attach points and wiring.
14. Check forward vertical fin attach fittings for corrosion and damage.
15. Inspect rudder for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion,
16. Check rudder hinges and attachments for damage and operation.
17. Check rudder hinge bolts for excessive wear.
18. Check rudder trim mechanism installation.
19. Inspect condition of deice system.
20. Inspect horizontal stabilizer for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents,
corrosion, and excessive paint build up); structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging
or structural imbalance; hinge damage, excessive wear, freedom of movement and proper
lubrication; and attachment points for missing or worn hardware.
21. Check horizontal stabilizer attachments.
22. Check forward and aft horizontal stabilizer attach fittings for corrosion and damage.
23. Inspect elevator for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion,
24. Check elevator hinge bolts, trim tab hinges, and attachments for damage and operation.
25. Check elevator and trim tab hinge bolts and bearings for excessive wear.
26. Check elevator trim tab push rods for corrosion, condition, and security.
27. Check elevator trim mechanism installation.
29. Inspect batteries and battery compartment for corrosion, etching, condition, and security. (Flush
compartment as required. Refer to 12-10-00.)
30. Inspect external power supply receptacle, battery relay, fuses, and vent blower assembly for
cleanliness, corrosion, condition, and security. (See Note 43.)
31. Inspect fuel filter and element. Replace filter element as required or each 600 hours. (See Fuel
Filter Servicing, 12-10-00.) (See Note 57.)
32. Check or replace vacuum regulator filter.
33. Inspect deice system pneumatic valves and lines for condition and security. (See Note 41.)
34. Check baggage area upholstery and carpet for condition.
35. Inspect ELT battery for condition/date per FAR 91.207.
36. Inspect ELT installation and antenna for condition and security. Replace antenna if bent or
damaged.
37. Inspect all fluid lines for leakage, condition, and security.
38. Inspect all other hoses and lines for leakage, condition, and security.
1D3 5-20-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE, DETAILED (continued)

39. Check autopilot servos and controls, bridle cables, terminals, turnbuckles, fittings, guides, and
pulleys for safeties, condition and wear, proper installation and function. Check bridle cable tension.
(See S-TEC Instructions for Continued Airworthiness - P/N 81532P and 22-10-00, Figure 2; and
Note 58.)
40. Check aileron, rudder, elevator, and trim cables, terminals, turnbuckles, fittings, guides, bonding
straps, and pulleys for safeties, condition and wear, and operation. Check cable tension. (See
Chapter 27 and Notes 18 and 58.)
41. Check all electronic installations for security and operation. (See Note 66.)
42. Inspect all control cables, air ducts, electrical leads, harnesses, and attaching parts for security,
routing, chafing, deterioration, wear and correct installation.(Perform 100 Hour Inspection,
51-80-00.)
43. Inspect heater ducting for obstruction, condition, and security.
44. Check air conditioning evaporators and clean fins.
45. Inspect electric windshield for correct fit, distortion, condition, cracking, delamination, security, and
proper operation. Check windshield heat. (See Heated Windshield Testing, 30-40-00.)
CAUTION: THE FLUX DETECTORS ARE SECURED TO THE MOUNTING BRACKET WITH
BRASS SCREWS. ENSURE ONLY BRASS SCREWS ARE USED WHEN
REINSTALLING.
46. Inspect flux detectors. (See Note 46.)
47. Check outflow and safety valves for cleanliness, looseness, and condition.
NOTE: Outflow and safety valves may require cleaning prior to 100 hour intervals, if heavy
smoking or dusty conditions exist.
NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used when reinstalling vertical fin dorsal fairing over flux
detector.
CABIN AND COCKPIT, DETAILED (See Chapters 25, 33, and 52.)
1. Inspect cabin entrance door and emergency exit door seals.
2. Inspect cabin door and emergency exit for proper rigging, and check retainer pins and striker plates
for bending, cracks, proper engagement, pulled or sheared fasteners and bending for the frame
web. (See Note 19.)
3. Perform functional check of emergency exit. Verify that no exceptional effort is required to remove
Emergency Exit Door. Remove and reinstall Emergency Exit Door.
CAUTION: WITH CREW SEATS OCCUPIED AND AT THE LOWEST VERTICAL POSITION,
CHECK SEATS FOR PROPER ENGAGEMENT OF PINS TO SEAT TRACK.
4. Inspect crew seats for proper vertical and horizontal operation. (See Note 8.)
5. Inspect all seats and upholstery for damage, and seat belts/shoulder harnesses, brackets, and bolts
for damage, security, and operation. (See Restraint System, Inspection, 25-10-00.)
NOTE: Seats and carpet must be removed for access to inspection covers on cabin floor.
7. Inspect electric trim operation and indicators for full travel, binding, damage, and correct control
deflection. (See Note 9.)
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CABIN AND COCKPIT, DETAILED (continued)

8. Check rudder pedals and toe brakes for travel, binding, security, and leaks. (See Note 13.)
9. Inspect parking brake for condition, security, operation, and leaks.
10. Inspect control wheels, column, and switches for damage, operation, and full travel. (See Note 63.)
11. Inspect push pull tubes, torque tubes, levers, pillow blocks, bellcranks, and connections for
condition and security.
12. Check operation of strobe, landing, taxi, navigation, cabin, instrument, and EL panel lights.
(See Notes 9 and 27.)
13. Inspect static system, altimeter and transponder for installation/certification per latest revision of
AC43.13-1 and tested/inspected per FAR’s 91.411 and 91.413, respectively.
14. Inspect and test ELT per FAR 91.207. (See Testing ELT, 25-60-00.)
15. Inspect condition of instruments, lines, hoses, and attachments.
16. Check pneumatic and electric gyro instruments, overhaul or replace as required.
17. Inspect pitot/static and alternate static lines, hoses for condition and security.
18. Check operation of cabin heat and defrost controls.
19. Inspect all knobs, switches, and levers for security of attachment and condition. (See Notes 11, 29,
40, and 67.)
20. Check condition of environmental system ducts.
WARNING: BE SURE SKIN AND CLOTHING ARE FREE OF GREASE, OIL, OR OTHER
PETROLEUM PRODUCTS BEFORE CHECKING OR PERFORMING
MAINTENANCE ON ANY COMPONENT OF THE OXYGEN SYSTEM.
21. Check oxygen masks and connectors for condition and security.
22. Inspect fixed oxygen generators per Fixed Oxygen Generator System, Inspection, 35-20-00.
23. Check landing gear emergency release (freefall) valve and lines for leaks, security, and condition.
(See Note 60.)
24. Check fluid in hydraulic pump reservoir. Fill as required.
25. Inspect hydraulic power pack for condition, leaks and security.
26. Inspect all fluid lines for leakage, condition, and security.
27. Inspect electrical panel components and circuit breakers for condition and security of installation.
(See Notes 16, 20, 33, and 61.)
28. Inspect forward side of outflow and safety valves for condition and security. Remove and clean per
21-30-00.
NOTE: Outflow and safety valves may require cleaning prior to 100 hour intervals, if heavy smoke
or dust conditions exist.
29. Inspect filters on controller and safety valve for contamination. Clean or replace as required.
(Refer to 21-30-00.)
30. Inspect aft face of forward pressure bulkhead (F.S. 100.00) and forward face of aft pressure
bulkhead (F.S. 273.746) for bulging, cracks, dents, loose, or missing fasteners, condition and
security of components.
31. In S/N’s 4697174 & up, inspect fuel return system per Fuel Return System, Functional Test, 28-20-00.
32. If installed, inspect portable fire extinguisher minimum weight as specified on nameplate.
33. Inspect avionics components and wiring for condition, security, and operation. (See Notes 48 & 62.)
34. Inspect control cable boots for condition and security.
36. Reinstall inspection covers, panels, and seats. Check operation and security of seats and seat stops.
1D5 5-20-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROPELLER, DETAILED (See Chapter 61.)

1.
Remove spinner. Inspect spinner and spinner bulkhead for cracks, corrosion and damage.
2.
Inspect blades for nicks, cracks, erosion and evidence of strikes.
3.
Check for grease and oil leaks.
4.
Inspect propeller mounting bolts for condition and proper safetywire. Check torque if safetywire is
broken.
PROPELLER, DETAILED (continued)
5. Inspect hub parts for cracks, corrosion, wear, and security. Check carefully around grease fittings for
cracks.
6. Rotate blades and inspect for tightness in hub pilot tube.
7. Inspect beta feedback ring for runout (0.010 inch max.) and no metal to metal contact with reverse
lever and carbon block holder.
8. Inspect carbon block for wear limit (see 61-10-00, Figure 4) and freedom of movement.
9. Inspect low pitch stop rods, return springs and beta feedback ring for damage, corrosion and
freedom of movement.
10. Inspect condition of propeller deicer slip ring and brush block or modular brush assembly. Replace
as required.
11. Inspect propeller deice boots for security of attachment and condition.(See Note 54.)
12. Inspect propeller deice wiring and junction blocks for security, cracks, chafing and damage.
13. Check condition and operation of propeller deice system. (See Propeller Heater Inspections, 100
Hour, 30-60-00.)
14. Lubricate propeller per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.
15. Install spinner.
ENGINE, DETAILED (See Chapter 71.)
CAUTION: REFER TO PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442 AS
REQUIRED FOR DETAILED PROCEDURES. SEE NOTE 5.
1. Review exceedances. Using appropriate vendor publications, determine and accomplish corrective
action, as required.
NOTE: In addition, print (or copy) the list of exceedances and attach it to the inspection form. For
each listed exceedance, make a notation on the inspection form detailing the diagnosis,
publications consulted, and corrective action required. Make a separate logbook entry for
each corrective action accomplished in response to an exceedance.
2. Remove engine cowling. (See 71-10-00.)
3. Clean and inspect cowling and covers for cracks, distortion and loose or missing fasteners. (See
Notes 26 and 50.)
4. Inspect oil temperature sender unit for leaks and security.
5. Inspect oil lines and fittings for leaks, security, chafing, dents, cracks and routing.
6. Clean oil cooler and inspect for condition and attachment.
7. Remove and inspect oil filter for damage and contamination. Clean or replace as required.
CAUTION: OBTAIN ALL ENGINE CLEANING PROCEDURES AND CLEANING PRECAUTIONS
FROM THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THE PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA
MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442.
8. Clean exterior of engine.
9. Inspect condition of igniter plugs. (Refer to Chapter 74.)
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ENGINE, DETAILED (continued)

10. Inspect ignition harness and insulators for high tension leakage, continuity, damage and
attachment.
11. Inspect electrical connections on ignition exciter for safety and security.
12. Remove air inlet screen; inspect first stage compressor blades for ingestion damage and corrosion.
Inspect screen for damage and cleanliness. Install screen.
CAUTION: DO NOT CLEAN ENGINE FUEL PUMP OUTLET FILTER. FILTER ELEMENT IS
DISPOSABLE AND SHOULD BE REPLACED IF NO LONGER SERVICEABLE. SEE
73-10-02, PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442.
13. Inspect engine fuel pump outlet filter for foreign material or distortion.
14. Inspect gas generator case fuel drain valves for security and leaks. (Check after engine run.)
15. Inspect, and then clean, magnetic chip detectors. Jump pins “A & B” for operational check of annunciator.
16. Inspect condition of inlet air ducts.
CAUTION: WHEN ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING, ANY ATTEMPT TO MOVE POWER LEVER INTO
REVERSE POSITION, WITHOUT DISCONNECTING PROPELLER PUSH-PULL
WIRE ROPE CLEVIS FROM PROPELLER CONTROL CAM, WILL RESULT IN
BENDING OR KINKING OF WIRE ROPE.
17. Inspect power lever, condition control, propeller governor and propeller reversing linkage for
condition, travel and operation. (See Note 53.)
18. Inspect gas generator case for cracks, distortion and evidence of overheating.
19. Inspect exhaust stacks for cracks, distortion and security.
20. Inspect propeller governor and overspeed governor (i.e. - HTG) for leaks and security.
21. Inspect propeller shaft seal for oil leaks.
22. Inspect all flexible lines (fuel, hydraulic, pneumatic and oil) for leaks, abrasions, cuts and secure
connections. Replace upon condition or per Special Inspection.
23. Inspect fuel manifold adapter and nozzle assemblies as required by Pratt & Whitney Canada
Maintenance Manual P/N 3021442.
24. Inspect fuel control unit, oil-to-fuel heater, fuel pumps, flow divider and purge valve, fuel manifold, fuel
flow transmitter and fuel pressure transmitter for leaks, security and condition. Check wiring for security
and condition. (See Notes 12, 28, 30, and 37.)
25. Inspect engine fireseals for cracks, damage and security.
26. Inspect firewall per 100 Hour inspection, 71-30-00.
27. Inspect firewall seals for condition.
28. Inspect oil breather tube for obstruction and security.
29. Inspect oil filler cap seal for damage and condition.
30. Check oil level and condition and operation of oil filler cap lock.
31. Inspect oil pressure transmitter for security and leaks. Check wires for connection and damage.
32. Inspect torque transmitter for leaks and security. Check wiring for damage and security. Check
condition of shock mounts.
33. Inspect autoignition switch, feather switch and manifold for security and condition. Check wiring for
damage and secure connection. (See Note 42.)
34. Inspect P3 air filter for contamination. Clean or replace as required.
35. Inspect fire warning sensors and wiring for security and condition.
36. Inspect compressor wash ring for damage and security.
37. Inspect engine mounts for cracks, damage and loose mounting bolts. Retorque engine mount bolts.
(See Note 59.)
38. Inspect rubber Lord mounts for deterioration and condition. (Replace as required.)
1D7 5-20-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


39. Inspect front and rear tachometer generators for security and wiring.
40. Inspect starter generator quick attachment device (QAD) ring and mount pad for security, cracks
and damage.
41. Inspect starter generator for condition and security.
42. Inspect condition of starter-generator cables. Inspect ground connection for corrosion and security.
43. Inspect condition of starter-generator cooling air ducts.
44. Inspect air conditioning compressor drive belt for tension, condition, and security. (See Adjustment
of Drive Belt Tension, 21-50-00.)
45. Inspect generator control unit (GCU) for security, damage and wiring integrity.
46. Inspect bleed air lines, flexible lines and couplings for security, damage and leakage.
(See V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection, 21-30-00.)
47. Check bleed air shutoff valve and flow control valve for security, damage, leakage and correct
operation. Check wiring for attachment and damage. (See Notes 17 and 25.)
48. Inspect bleed air heat exchanger and precooler for cleanness and blockage. Check inlets and
outlets for blockage, security and leakage of duct couplings.
49. Inspect and check all engine wiring and ITT harness and connectors for security and condition.
(See Note 38.)
50. Lubricate power plant. (See Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00, and P&WC Maintenance Manual P/N 3021442.)
51. Install engine cowling. (See 71-10-00.)
LANDING GEAR, ROUTINE (See Chapter 32.)
1. Inspect nose gear wheel bolts for proper torque. (Refer to 32-40-00.)
2. Inspect tires for cuts, uneven or excessive wear, and slippage.
3. Balance wheel and tire assembly.
4. Check tires for proper pressure. (Refer to 12-10-00.)
5. Check brake reservoir for proper fluid level, leaks, condition, and security.
UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS, AS REQUIRED
See 5-50-00.
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, AS REQUIRED
See 5-30-00.
OPERATIONAL INSPECTION
ENGINE OFF
1. Check reverse gate lockout.
2. Check ELT. (See 25-60-00, ELT Testing.)
3. Check electronic equipment operation.
4. Check operation of flight controls.
5. Check operation of flaps.
6. Check and self-test Meggitt Engine Instrument System.
7. Check bus isolation diodes (i.e. - CR331L, CR331R, and CR331M) per 24-30-00, Electrical System
Functional Test.
8. Set clock.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OPERATIONAL INSPECTION (continued)

ENGINE RUNNING
9. Check fuel pumps.
10. Check fuel quantity and flow gauges.
11. Check fuel shutoff.
12. Check oil pressure and temperature.
13. Check output on generator and alternator.
NOTE: Generator should be set at 28.4 ± .2 VDC and the alternator should be set at 27.0 ± .2
VDC. See Voltage Regulation and Control, 24-30-00.
14. Check parking brake and toe brakes.
15. Check vacuum gauge and vacuum ejector.
16. Check gyros for noise and roughness.
17. Check cabin heat and defroster operation.
18. Check avionics cooling blower operation.
19. Check power lever operation.
20. Check hydraulic topping governor (HTG). (See 61-20-00, Overspeed Governor - Operational Check.)
21. Check engine idle.
22. Check air conditioning compressor clutch operation.
23. Check emergency pressurization solenoid valve operation. I.E. - cycle ECS switch to “EMER” and
then to “NORM” or “OFF”. Verify you hear the emergency pressurization solenoid valve open and
close.
24. Check cabin pressure controller operation.
(See Cabin Pressure Controller - Operational Inspection, 21-30-00.)
25. Check propeller smoothness.
GENERAL
1. Aircraft conforms to FAA Specifications. (See Notes 45 and 65.)
2. All Airworthiness Directives and Service Bulletins, Letters, and Instructions complied with and
appropriate compliance records completed. (See Notes 23, 68, 69, 70, and 71.)
3. Current FAA Pilot’s Operating Handbook is in the aircraft.
4. Appropriate entries made in the Aircraft and Engine Log books.
5. Registration Certificate is in the aircraft and properly displayed.
6. Radio Station FCC License is in the aircraft and properly displayed.
7. Aircraft Equipment List, Weight and Balance and FAA Form 337 (if applicable) are in the aircraft and
in proper order.
8. Operational inspection and run-up completed.
9. Aircraft cleaned and lubricated after wash (as required).
10. Event Inspection Record completed.
11. Discrepancy Record completed.
12. Equipment Change and Overhaul Record completed.
1D9 5-20-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


INSPECTION COMPLETED
I certify that this aircraft has been inspected in accordance

with PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. 100 Hour Progressive Inspection
Event No. 1, and is approved for return to service. Pertinent
details of this inspection are on file at this facility under:
Repair Order No.
Total Time: Date:
Signed: Repair Station No.:
1D11 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Event #1 Inspection Discrepancy Report
Aircraft Time: Engine Time:
Date: Work Order No.:
Item No. Discrepancy Corrective Action Mechanic Signature
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL



PUBLICATIONS.)
NOTE: Review Notes 1, 2, 3, and 4, before beginning this event.
RIGHT WING, DETAILED (See Chapter 57.)
2. Check surfaces, skins, and tips for damage and loose or missing fasteners. (See Notes 7 and 35.)
3. Inspect forward and aft wing spar to fuselage attach fittings for corrosion and condition.
4. Check security of ailerons, hinges, and attachments.
5. Inspect ailerons for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion,
6. Inspect aileron control cables, terminals, turnbuckles, fittings, guides, pulleys, and bellcranks for
safety, condition, and operation. (See Note 58.)
7. Inspect flaps for surface damage or irregularities (i.e. - skin cracks, distortion, dents, corrosion, and
excessive paint build up); structural defects (i.e. - loose or missing rivets); misrigging or structural
imbalance; hinge damage, excessive wear, freedom of movement and proper lubrication; and
attachment points for missing or worn hardware. (See Note 15.)
NOTE: If flap extension at speeds exceeding VFE is suspected, see 5-50-00 - Flaps Extended
Above Maximum Flap Extension Speed (VFE).
8.Inspect the flap actuation system rod end bearings for binding or seizing of the ball bearings. Pay
particular attention to the rod end bearings attached to the inboard bellcrank assembly located in
each main gear well.
9. Inspect condition of bolts used with flap rollers and aileron hinges. (Replace as required.)
10. Inspect flap tracks for security of attachment, damage, condition, and corrosion.
11. Check condition of exterior bearings.
12. Inspect static discharge wicks for security of attachment and condition. (Replace as required.)
15. Check condition of hydraulic, fuel, and pneumatic hoses and lines.
16. Check condition and security of wiring and connectors. (See Note 47.)
17. Check fuel tanks and lines for leaks. (See Note 21.)
fuselage.
18. Drain wing fuel sumps. Inspect fuel for contaminants, flush tank as required.
19. Check fuel tank sealing material.
1D13 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RIGHT WING, DETAILED (continued)

23. Check radome for erosion, cracks, or delamination.
24. Inspect standby attitude indicator emergency power supply (in radar pod aft compartment) for
condition and security. Remove and capacity test emergency power supply unit per 34-20-00.
25. Inspect condition of pneumatic deicer. Inspect fill and edge sealant on stall strips installed on boots.
Reseal, refill, feather as required with AC665B-1/2 (P/N 279-065).
LEFT WING, ROUTINE (See Chapter 57.)
2. Check surfaces, skins, and tips for damage and loose or missing fasteners.
3. Check fuel tanks and lines for leaks.
fuselage.
FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE, ROUTINE (see Chapters 51 and 55.)
2. Inspect structure for cracks, dents, security of attachments, cleanliness, and loose or pulled
fasteners. (See Note 55.)
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT IS PROHIBITED WITH DISCOLORATION, CRACKS, OR
CRAZING IN THE WINDSHIELD OR WINDOWS.
3. Inspect windshield and windows for nicks, scratches, cracks, crazing, and discoloration.
(See 56-00-00.)
4. Check fuel sump drains for water and proper operation.
5. Inspect fuel filter and element. Replace filter element as required or each 600 hours. (See Fuel
Filter Servicing, 12-10-00.) (See Note 57.)
6. Inspect batteries and battery compartment for corrosion, etching, condition, and security. (Flush
compartment as required. See 12-10-00.)
.7 Visually inspect shield and shield terminations of each electrical harness for integrity, condition, and
security. (See 100 hour inspection 51-80.00.)
8. Inspect external power supply receptacle, battery relay, fuses, and vent blower assembly for
cleanliness, corrosion, condition, and security.
9. Check outflow and safety valves for cleanliness, looseness, and condition.
NOTE: Outflow and safety valves may require cleaning prior to 100 hour intervals, if heavy
smoking or dusty conditions exist.
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CABIN AND COCKPIT, ROUTINE (See Chapters 25 & 33.)

CAUTION: WITH CREW SEATS OCCUPIED AND AT THE LOWEST VERTICAL POSITION,
CHECK SEATS FOR PROPER ENGAGEMENT OF PINS TO SEAT TRACK.
1. Inspect crew seats for proper vertical and horizontal operation.
2. Inspect all seats, upholstery for damage, and seat belts/shoulder harnesses, brackets, and bolts for
damage, security, and operation. (See Restraint System, Inspection, 25-10-00.)
3. Check oxygen masks and connectors for condition and security.
4. Inspect fixed oxygen generators per Fixed Oxygen Generator System, Inspection, 35-20-00.
5. Check fluid level in hydraulic reservoir. Fill as required.
6. Inspect forward side of outflow and safety valves for condition and security. Remove and clean per
21-30-00.
NOTE: Outflow and safety valves may require cleaning prior to 100 hour intervals, if heavy smoke
or dust conditions exist.
7. Inspect filters on controller and safety valve for contamination. Clean or replace as required.
(Refer to 21-30-00.)
8. Check operation of strobe, landing, taxi, navigation, cabin, instrument, and EL panel lights.
PROPELLER, DETAILED (See Chapter 61.)
1. Remove spinner. Inspect spinner and spinner bulkhead for cracks, corrosion and damage.
2. Inspect blades for nicks, cracks, erosion and evidence of strikes.
3. Check for grease and oil leaks.
4. Inspect propeller mounting bolts for condition and proper safetywire. Check torque if safetywire is
broken.
5. Inspect hub parts for cracks, corrosion, wear, and security. Check carefully around grease fittings for
cracks.
6. Rotate blades and inspect for tightness in hub pilot tube.
7. Inspect beta feedback ring for runout (0.010 inch max.) and no metal to metal contact with reverse
lever and carbon block holder.
8. Inspect carbon block for wear limit (see 61-10-00, Figure 4) and freedom of movement.
9. Inspect low pitch stop rods, return springs and beta feedback ring for damage, corrosion and
freedom of movement.
10. Inspect condition of propeller deicer slip ring and brush block or modular brush assembly. Replace
as required.
11. Inspect propeller deice boots for security of attachment and condition. ( See Note 54.)
12. Inspect propeller deice wiring and junction blocks for security, cracks, chafing and damage.
13. Check condition and operation of propeller deice system. (See Propeller Heater Inspections, 100
Hour, 30-60-00.)
14. Lubricate propeller per Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00.
15. Install spinner.
1D15 5-20-00 PAGE 21

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ENGINE, DETAILED (See Chapter 71.)

CAUTION: REFER TO PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442 AS
REQUIRED FOR DETAILED PROCEDURES. SEE NOTE 5.
1. Review exceedances. Using appropriate vendor publications, determine and accomplish corrective
action, as required.
NOTE: In addition, print (or copy) the list of exceedances and attach it to the inspection form. For
each listed exceedance, make a notation on the inspection form detailing the diagnosis,
publications consulted, and corrective action required. Make a separate logbook entry for
each corrective action accomplished in response to an exceedance.
2. Remove engine cowling. (See 71-10-00.)
3. Clean and inspect cowling and covers for cracks, distortion and loose or missing fasteners.
4. Inspect oil temperature sender unit for leaks and security.
5. Inspect oil lines and fittings for leaks, security, chafing, dents, cracks and routing.
6. Clean oil cooler and inspect for condition and attachment.
7. Remove and inspect oil filter for damage and contamination. Clean or replace as required.
CAUTION: OBTAIN ALL ENGINE CLEANING PROCEDURES AND CLEANING PRECAUTIONS
FROM THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THE PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA
MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442.
8. Clean exterior of engine.
9. Inspect condition of igniter plugs. (Refer to Chapter 74.)
10. Inspect ignition harness and insulators for high tension leakage, continuity, damage and
attachment.
11. Inspect electrical connections on ignition exciter for safety and security.
12. Remove air inlet screen; inspect first stage compressor blades for ingestion damage and corrosion.
Inspect screen for damage and cleanliness. Install screen.
CAUTION: DO NOT CLEAN ENGINE FUEL PUMP OUTLET FILTER. FILTER ELEMENT IS
DISPOSABLE AND SHOULD BE REPLACED IF NO LONGER SERVICEABLE. SEE
73-10-02, PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442.
13. Inspect engine fuel pump outlet filter for foreign material or distortion.
14. Inspect gas generator case fuel drain valves for security and leaks. (Check after engine run.)
15. Inspect, and then clean, magnetic chip detectors and jump pins “A & B” for operational check of
annunciator.
16. Inspect condition of inlet air ducts.
CAUTION: WHEN ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING, ANY ATTEMPT TO MOVE POWER LEVER INTO
REVERSE POSITION, WITHOUT DISCONNECTING PROPELLER PUSH-PULL
WIRE ROPE CLEVIS FROM PROPELLER CONTROL CAM, WILL RESULT IN
BENDING OR KINKING OF WIRE ROPE.
17. Inspect power lever, condition control, propeller governor and propeller reversing linkage for
condition, travel and operation. (See Note 53.)
18. Inspect gas generator case for cracks, distortion and evidence of overheating.
19. Inspect exhaust stacks for cracks, distortion and security.
20. Inspect propeller governor and overspeed governor (i.e. - HTG) for leaks and security.
21. Inspect propeller shaft seal for oil leaks.
22. Inspect all flexible lines (fuel, hydraulic, pneumatic and oil) for leaks, abrasions, cuts and secure
connections. Replace upon condition or per Special Inspection.
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


23. Inspect fuel manifold adapter and nozzle assemblies as required by Pratt & Whitney Canada
Maintenance Manual P/N 3021442.
24. Inspect fuel control unit, oil-to-fuel heater, fuel pumps, flow divider and purge valve, fuel manifold, fuel
flow transmitter and fuel pressure transmitter for leaks, security and condition. Check wiring for security
and condition.
25. Inspect engine fireseals for cracks, damage and security.
26. Inspect firewall per 100 Hour inspection, 71-30-00.
27. Inspect firewall seals for condition.
28. Inspect oil breather tube for obstruction and security.
29. Inspect oil filler cap seal for damage and condition.
30. Check oil level and condition and operation of oil filler cap lock.
31. Inspect oil pressure transmitter for security and leaks. Check wires for connection and damage.
32. Inspect torque transmitter for leaks and security. Check wiring for damage and security. Check
condition of shock mounts.
33. Inspect autoignition switch, feather switch and manifold for security and condition. Check wiring for
damage and secure connection.
34. Inspect P3 air filter for contamination. Clean or replace as required.
35. Inspect fire warning sensors and wiring for security and condition.
36. Inspect compressor wash ring for damage and security.
37. Inspect engine mounts for cracks, damage and loose mounting bolts. Retorque engine mount bolts.
(See Note 59.)
38. Inspect rubber Lord mounts for deterioration and condition. (Replace as required.)
39. Inspect front and rear tachometer generators for security and wiring.
40. Inspect starter generator quick attachment device (QAD) ring and mount pad for security, cracks
and damage.
41. Inspect condition of starter-generator cables. Inspect ground connection for corrosion and security.
42. Inspect condition of starter-generator cooling air ducts.
43. Inspect air conditioning compressor drive belt for tension, condition, and security. (See Adjustment
of Drive Belt Tension, 21-50-00.)
44. Inspect generator control unit (GCU) for security, damage and wiring integrity.
45. Inspect bleed air lines, flexible lines and couplings for security, damage and leakage.
(See V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection, 21-30-00.)
46. Check bleed air shutoff valve and flow control valve for security, damage, leakage and correct
operation. Check wiring for attachment and damage.
47. Inspect bleed air heat exchanger and precooler for cleanness and blockage. Check inlets and
outlets for blockage, security and leakage of duct couplings.
48. Inspect and check all engine wiring and ITT harness and connectors for security and condition.
49. Lubricate power plant. (See Lubrication Chart, 12-20-00, and P&WC Maintenance Manual P/N 3021442.)
50. Install engine cowling. (See 71-10-00.)
1D17 5-20-00 PAGE 23

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LANDING GEAR, DETAILED (See Chapter 32.)

CAUTION: ENSURE THAT JACK DOES NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH RADAR POD ON
RIGHT WING.
NOTE: Check for proper strut extension prior to jacking airplane. (Refer to 12-10-00.)
1. Place airplane on jacks. Jack airplane. (Refer to 7-10-00.)
3. Check oleo struts for proper extension and evidence of fluid leakage. See Landing Gear, 12-10-00.
4. Inspect nose gear steering control and travel. (See Note 6.)
5. Inspect nose gear installation for condition and security. (See Notes 14, 32, 34, and 44.)
6. Inspect nose gear trunnion for cracks and condition.
7. Inspect nose wheel steering cam and rotator for cracks.
8. Check nose and main gear squat switches for security and adjustment. (See Notes 24 and 36.)
9. Inspect tires for cuts, uneven or excessive wear, and slippage.
10. Remove wheels and clean, check and repack bearings.
11. Inspect nose gear wheel bolts for proper torque. (Refer to 32-40-00.)
12. Inspect wheels for cracks, corrosion, and broken bolts.
13. Inspect brake disc/linings for wear, condition, and security.
14. Check tires for proper pressure. (Refer to 12-10-00.)
15. Balance wheel and tire assembly.
16. Check brake hydraulic lines for leakage.
17. Check brake reservoir for proper fluid level, leaks, condition, and security.
18. Inspect gear fork for damage.
19. Inspect struts for fluid/pressure leaks and scoring.
20. Check torque links, bolts, and bushings. (Rebush as required.) (See Note 52.)
21. Check gear struts, trunnion pins and attachments for condition and security.
22. Inspect bolt, bushings, trunnion pins, and attachments for condition and security. (Rebush as
required.)
23. Check retraction actuators and attachments for condition and security.
24. Check condition and security of flexible hydraulic lines to actuator. Replace as required.
25. Inspect main and nose gear doors, and rod assemblies for corrosion, security, and freedom of
movement. (See Note 64.)
26. Check locking actuator for operation and adjustment.
27. Inspect nose gear door actuator for operation and adjustment.
28. Check warning horn and lights for operation.
30. Inspect hydraulic lines, electrical leads, and attaching parts for condition and security (i.e. - routing,
chafing, damage, wear, etc.).
31. Check actuating cylinders for leakage and security.
32. Perform gear retraction and extension operation check. (See Functional Test, 32-30-00.)
33. Place weight of aircraft on landing gear. (DO NOT REMOVE JACKS.)
34. Check anti-retraction system on gear lever for proper operation.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE JACKS WITHOUT FIRST VERIFYING THAT LANDING GEAR IS
DOWN AND LOCKED AND ANTI-RETRACTION SYSTEM HAS BEEN CHECKED.
36. Ensure all gears are down and locked, then remove jacks.
37. Check wheel alignment.
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS, AS REQUIRED

See 5-50-00.
SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, AS REQUIRED
See 5-30-00.
OPERATIONAL INSPECTION
ENGINE OFF
1. Check reverse gate lockout.
2. Check ELT. (See 25-60-00, ELT Testing.)
3. Check electronic equipment operation.
4. Check operation of flight controls.
5. Check operation of flaps.
6. Check and self-test Meggitt Engine Instrument System.
7. Check bus isolation diodes (i.e. - CR331L, CR331R, and CR331M) per 24-30-00, Electrical System
Functional Test.
8. Set clock.
ENGINE RUNNING
9. Check fuel pumps.
10. Check fuel quantity and flow gauges.
11. Check fuel shutoff.
12. Check oil pressure and temperature.
13. Check output on generator and alternator.
NOTE: Generator should be set at 28.4 ± .2 VDC and the alternator should be set at 27.0 ± .2
VDC. See Voltage Regulation and Control, 24-30-00.
14. Check parking brake and toe brakes.
15. Check vacuum gauge and vacuum ejector.
16. Check gyros for noise and roughness.
17. Check cabin heat and defroster operation.
18. Check avionics cooling blower operation.
19. Check power lever operation.
20. Check hydraulic topping governor (HTG). (See 61-20-00, Overspeed Governor - Operational Check.)
21. Check engine idle.
22. Check air conditioning compressor clutch operation.
23. Check emergency pressurization solenoid valve operation. I.E. - cycle ECS switch to “EMER” and
then to “NORM” or “OFF”. Verify you hear the emergency pressurization solenoid valve open and
close.
24. Check cabin pressure controller operation.
(See Cabin Pressure Controller - Operational Inspection, 21-30-00.)
25. Check propeller smoothness.
1D19 5-20-00 PAGE 25

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

GENERAL
1. Aircraft conforms to FAA Specifications.
2. All Airworthiness Directives and Service Bulletins, Letters, and Instructions complied with and
appropriate compliance records completed.
4. Appropriate entries made in the Aircraft and Engine Log books.
5. Registration Certificate is in the aircraft and properly displayed.
7. Aircraft Equipment List, Weight and Balance and FAA Form 337 (if applicable) are in the aircraft and
in proper order.
8. Operational inspection and run-up completed.
9. Aircraft cleaned and lubricated after wash (as required).
10. Event Inspection Record completed.
11. Discrepancy Record completed.
12. Equipment Change and Overhaul Record completed.
THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


INSPECTION COMPLETED
I certify that this aircraft has been inspected in accordance

with PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. 100 Hour Progressive Inspection
Event No. 2, and is approved for return to service. Pertinent
details of this inspection are on file at this facility under:
Repair Order No.
Total Time: Date:
Signed: Repair Station No.:
1D21 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 27
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Event #2 Inspection Discrepancy Report
Aircraft Time: Engine Time:
Date: Work Order No.:
Item No. Discrepancy Corrective Action Mechanic Signature
PAGE 28
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES
1. Refer to Piper's Customer Service Information Aerofiche P/N 1753-755 for latest revision dates to Piper
Inspection Manuals and this maintenance manual. References to Chapter or Section are to the
appropriate Chapter or Section in this manual.
2. Inspections or operations are to be performed as indicated in each 100 hour inspection event.
Inspections or operations (i.e. - component overhauls/replacements, etc.) required outside the 100 hour
cycle are listed as special inspections in section 5-30-00. Inspections must be accomplished by persons
authorized by the FAA.
A. The routine inspection accomplishes preventive maintenance, lubrication and servicing as well as
inspecting critical components.
B. The detailed inspection is a complete inspection of the indicated inspection group.
NOTE: A log book entry should be made upon completion of any inspections.
3. Piper Service Bulletins are of special importance and Piper considers compliance mandatory. In all
cases, see Service Bulletin/Service Letter Index P/N 762-332 or Service Bulletin/Service Letter
Aerofiche Set P/N 1762-331 to verify latest revision.
4. Piper Service Letters are product improvements and service hints pertaining to servicing the airplane
and should be given careful attention.
5. Inspections given for the power plant are based on the engine manufacturer’s maintenance manual
( P&W Canada P/N 3021442 ) for this airplane. Any changes issued to the engine manufacturer’s
maintenance manual shall supersede or supplement the inspections outlined in this report.
6. In S/N’s 4697003 thru 4697035, and 4697037 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No.
1052.
7. In S/N’s 4697003 thru 4697039 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1053.
1054.
1056.
1058.
14. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697046, 4697048 thru 4697050, and 4697054, 4697058, 4697062 and 4697064
only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1061.
1D23 5-20-00 PAGE 29

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES (cont.)
15. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697020, 4697023 thru 4697025, 4697027 thru 4697037, 4697040 thru 4697052,
and 4697054, 4697055, 4697058 and 4697059 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No.
1062.
20. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697075 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1067A.
1070.
28. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697075 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1077 and Pratt &
Whitney Canada Service Bulletin 3387R1.
30. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697097 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1080 and Lear
Romec Service Bulletin RG34720-73-002.
33. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697069, 4697073, 4697075, and 4697077 only, verify compliance with Piper
Service Bulletin No. 1086.
1087A.
38. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697123 and 4697125 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No.
1093.
39. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, and 4697116 & 4697118 only, verify compliance with Piper Service
Bulletin No. 1094.
40. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 only, verify compliance with Piper
41. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697106 (less 4697003, 4697006, 4697007, 4697011, 4697022, 4697060,
4697076, 4697088, 4697092, and 4697098) only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1098.
42. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116 thru 4697119, and 4697125 only, verify compliance with Piper
PAGE 30
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES (cont.)
43. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116 thru 4697123, and 4697125 only, verify compliance with Piper
49. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697127 and 4697134 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No.
1121.
50. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697128 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Letter No. 1051.
51. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697141 and 4697143 thru 4697145 only, verify compliance with Piper Service
Letter No. 1057.
52. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697135 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Letter No. 1062.
53. Ensure fuel control unit (FCU) end of power lever linkage (i.e. - FCU control rod and FCU arm) has full
range of travel and is not restricted by incorrect routing of the mass flow controller/accessory cooling air
inlet drain hose. If drain hose contacts FCU arm or FCU control rod, reroute the drain hose per
instructions in 71-60-00.
54. At propeller overhaul or anytime a propeller deice boot is removed, verify compliance with Piper Service
Letter No. 1086.
55. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697170 only, for those airplanes which have not installed Piper Kit No. 767-356,
conduct 100 Hour Tailcone Inspection, 55-00-00.
56. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697164 only, verify installation of Piper Kit No. 767-377 per Piper Service Bulletin
No. 1150.
57. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697173 only, at fuel filter replacement, verify compliance with Pall Aeropower
Corporation Service Bulletin No. ADB474-72-01 per Piper Service Letter No. 1082.
58. Examine cables for broken strands by wiping them with a cloth for their entire length. Visually inspect the
cable thoroughly for damage not detected by the cloth. Replace any damaged or frayed cables.
A. See Control Cable Inspection, 27-00-00, or the latest edition of FAA AC 43.13-1.
B. At fifteen (15) years time-in-service, begin Cable Fittings 100 Hour Special Inspection (27-00-00).
59. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697240 and 4697242 thru 46972244 only with the 12460-002- engine mount,
installed conduct 100 Hour Engine Mount Special Inspection, 71-20-00 per Piper Service Bulletin
No.1154A.
60. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697158 only, verify installation of Piper Kit No. 767-364 per Piper Service Bulletin
No. 1126A.
61. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697140 and 4697142 thru 4697153 only, verify compliance with Piper Service
Bulletin No. 1132. See also AD 04-03-32.
62. In S/N 4697146 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1135. In S/N’s 4697001 thru
4697089; 4697091 thru 4697141; and 4697145; if a GMA-340 “Mod 4” unit has been installed, the
airplane is not equipped with stereo headsets, and Piper Service Bulletin No. 1135 has not been
complied with; complete the re-wire procedure under GMA340 Mod 4 Installation in 23-50-00.
63. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697174 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1139A.
1E1 5-20-00 PAGE 31

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES (cont.)
65. In S/N’s 4697179 thru 4697183 only, verify compliance with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1151E.
66. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697169 only, if the stall warning computer has been replaced in the field, verify
compliance with Piper Service Letter No. 1076.
67. In S/N’s 4697144 and 4697149 thru 4697162; and any PA-46-500TP with a field retrofit S-TEC Magic
1500 Autopilot installed, verify installation of Piper Kit No. 767-376 per Piper Service Letter No. 1077.
68. In S/N’s 4697216 and up verify compliance with AVIDYNE Service Alert No. SA 05-001 Per Piper Vender
Service Publication No. 172.
69. In S/N’s 4697001 and up, verify compliance with S-TEC Service Bulletin No. SB 06-001 Per Piper Vender
Service Publication No. 175.
70. In S/N’s 4697216 thru 4697237 only verify compliance with Piper Special Advisory No. 46-15.
71. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697260 only verify compliance with CLEVELAND Service Bulletin No. 7083 per
Piper Service Bulletin No. 1177.
72. In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4696248 and 4697252, for airplanes which have replaced the Thermistor Detector
between June 13, 2005 and April 12, 2006; verify compliance with Meggitt Safety Systems Service
Bulletin No. 26-36 per Piper Vendor Service Publication No. 176.
PAGE 32
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROGRAM RESPONSIBILITY
The person responsible for scheduling the inspections required under this program must enter his or her
name below and forward the original copy of this form to their local FAA-FSDO office. A duplicate copy should
be maintained in this manual.
Name:
Address:
City: State: Zip:
Telephone Number:
Any change in personnel responsible for scheduling the inspection program, will be added with the
appropriate information on a separate sheet of paper and the original copy sent to the local FAA-FSDO office,
while a duplicate copy is attached behind this page. The previous information sheet will be left in the booklet
and the word "CHANGED" will be written across the deleted information.
1E3 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 33
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 34
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REVISIONS
Revisions to this Inspection Program are the direct responsibility of the manufacturer. However,
owners/operators with an F.A.A.-approved Part 91 Progressive Inspection Program or a Part 135 Approved
Aircraft Inspection Program may not enact any such revisions until approval is obtained from the responsible
F.A.A. District Office. A permanent record of revisions and F.A.A. approvals will be maintained by the
owner/operator.
RECORD OF REVISIONS
REV. NO. FAA APPROVAL DATE PAGE NO. INSERTED BY/DATE
1E5 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 35
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 36
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EVENT INSPECTION RECORD
1. Proper inspection procedures are the responsibility of the individuals performing the inspection and must
be made in accordance with all applicable current Federal Aviation Regulations and Piper Maintenance
Manuals and Publications.
2. Work order column is applicable only to FAA approved repair stations.
3. Always check for and use only current information.
4. The signatures below signify that this aircraft has been thoroughly inspected and found airworthy in
accordance with applicable and current FAR’s, Piper Maintenance Manual and Service Publications
(including Service Bulletins and Mandatory Service Letters). Further, the signatures verify that all
appropriate entries have been made in Aircraft and Engine Logbooks and Progressive Inspection
Program Records (i.e. - Event Inspection Record, Progressive Inspection Cycle Record, Discrepancy
Record, Service Publication Compliance Record, FAA AD Compliance Record, and Equipment Change
and Overhaul Record).
EVENT No. A/C HOURS DATE W.O. No. SIGNATURE - CERTIFICATE No.
1 100 HR
2 200 HR
1 300 HR
2 400 HR
1 500 HR
2 600 HR
1 700 HR
2 800 HR
1 900 HR
2 1000 HR
1 1100 HR
2 1200 HR
1 1300 HR
2 1400 HR
1 1500 HR
2 1600 HR
1 1700 HR
2 1800 HR
1 1900 HR
2 2000 HR
1E7 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 37
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 38
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROGRESSIVE INSPECTION CYCLE RECORD

2. Aircraft and Engine Logbooks are in the aircraft and appropriate entries made in these logbooks.
3. Registration certificate is in the aircraft and properly displayed.
4. Airworthiness certificate in aircraft and properly displayed.
6. Aircraft Equipment List, Weight and Balance and FAA Form 337 (if applicable) are in the aircraft and in
proper order.
7. All Service Bulletins and mandatory Service Letters have been complied with.
8. Applicable FAA Airworthiness Directives are complied with.
9. Piper Progressive Inspection Records in order and properly signed off.
10. Outstanding conditions have been corrected as listed on condition record.
CYCLE No. DATE A/C HOURS REMARKS SIGNATURE - CERTIFICATE No.
1E9 5-20-00 Apr

PAGE 39
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 40
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E10
1E11

DISCREPANCY RECORD
DISCREPANCY A/C SIGNATURE DATE CORRECTIVE ACTION W.O.# SIGNATURE AND DATE
HOURS CERTIFICATE NO.

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5-20-00 Apr
PAGE 41
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 42
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E12
1E13

SERVICE PUBLICATION SERIAL NUMBER NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
COMPLIANCE RECORD
MANUFACTURER PUBLICATION NUMBER COMPLIANCE A/C W.O.# SIGNATURE AND CERTIFICATE NO.
DATE HOURS

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5-20-00 Apr
PAGE 43
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 44
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E14
1E15

FAA AIRWORTHINESS
DIRECTIVE (AD)
COMPLIANCE RECORD
ONE TIME RECURRING
AD AD A/C METHOD OF DATE / TIME W.O.# SIGNATURE AND CERTIFICATE NO.

NUMBER DATE HOURS COMPLIANCE NEXT DUE

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5-20-00 Apr
PAGE 45
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 46
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E16
1E17

EQUIPMENT CHANGE
AND OVERHAUL
RECORD
DATE A/C REMOVED PART NO. SERIAL INSTALLED PART NO. SERIAL SIGNATURE AND CERTIFICATE NO.
HOURS NUMBER NUMBER

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5-20-00 Apr
PAGE 47
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 48
Apr 15/07 5-20-00 1E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS WORK SHEET
(Sheet 1 of 9)

PUBLICATIONS.)
The following inspections are required in addition to those listed in the Progressive Inspection Program (i.e. -
5-20-00). These inspections are required at intervals of:
A. Engine Cycles;
B. Flight hours outside the Progressive Inspection 100 Hour Events;
C. Calendar Year; or
D. the specific operation being conducted or the environment being operated in.
Unless otherwise indicated, these inspections are to be repeated at each occurrence of the specified interval.
Note that the items listed herein are guidelines based on past operating experience. Each operator should
closely monitor his own unique operating conditions/environment and react accordingly to keep his aircraft
airworthy.
1. Per Engine Cycle

See latest revision of Pratt & Whitney Canada Service Bulletin No. 3002 for PT6A-42A Rotor
Components Service Life Limits.
NOTE: A complete engine cycle is defined as engine start, idle, takeoff, flight, landing, idle, and
shutdown. Many aircraft operations involve partial engine cycles (i.e. - idle, takeoff, flight,
landing, idle) that, with the application of an appropriate formula (see P&WC Service Bulletin,
above), are also factored into the calculation of service life limits.
The owner/operator is responsible for recording and calculating life limiting cycles.
2. Per Flight Hour
Each 50 Hours
Conduct Propeller Heater Inspection, 50 Hour, per 30-60-00.
For airplanes with pilot’s side cockpit windows which have accumulated 350 hours time-in-service,
perform the 50 Hour Pilot’s Side Cockpit Window Inspection, under Pilot’s/Copilot’s Window in 56-10-00.
1E19 5-30-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 2 of 9)
Each 200 Hours

Inspect fuel manifold adapter and nozzle assemblies per Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual
P/N 3021442.
NOTE: For airplanes using the fuel nozzle “in-situ” cleaning program per Pratt & Whitney Canada
Maintenance Manual P/N 3021442, 71-00-00 - Cleaning, inspection may be deferred to each
400 hours.
NOTE: For airplanes NOT using the fuel nozzle “in-situ” cleaning program, inspection interval may be
extended to each 400 hours based on inspection results.
NOTE: Whenever the fuel nozzles are removed, visually inspect the hot section with a borescope.
For batteries which have been in service for 600 hours or 12 months, whichever comes first, perform a
capacity check (see 24-30-00, Capacity Test) each 200 hours or 90 days, whichever comes first.
Each 300 Hours
Inspect fixed oxygen cylinder system per 300 Hour Inspection, 35-10-00.
Remove, clean, and inspect starter generator per Starter Generator Cleaning and Inspection, 24-30-00.
inspect brushes.
Each 400 Hours
In S/N’s 4697174 and up, each 400 hours or two (2) years, whichever comes first, perform Fuel Purge
System, Inspection and Cleaning, 71-70-00.
Lubricate propeller each 400 hours or 12 months, whichever comes first. See latest revision of Hartzell
Manual 202.
NOTE: If annual operation is significantly less than 400 hours, reduce lubrication interval to six months.
Inspect fuel manifold adapter and nozzle assemblies per Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual
P/N 3021442. (For airplanes using the fuel nozzle “in-situ” cleaning program per Pratt & Whitney Canada
Maintenance Manual P/N 3021442, 71-00-00 - Cleaning.)
NOTE: Inspection interval may be extended to each 600 hours based on inspection results.
NOTE: Whenever the fuel nozzles are removed, visually inspect the hot section with a borescope.
Each 500 Hours
Inspect and clean engine oil scavenge screen in reduction gear box.
Each two (2) years or 500 hours, whichever occurs first, check that fuel strainers (five in each wing tank)
are secure and unobstructed. Strainers may be inspected by removing the forward and aft access
covers, fifth in from the wing tip. Additionally, check fuel probes and associated electrical connectors for
cleanliness, condition, and security.
Each 500 hours, in S/N’s 4697157 & up, and other Meridian aircraft with Kit No. 767-360 installed,
inspect main landing gear actuator upper attach bolt per the 500 Hour Main Landing Gear Actuator
Upper Attach Bolt Special Inspection, 32-10-00.
Inspect cabin pressurization system operation. (See 21-00-00, Pressurization System Test.)
In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 with Piper Kit No. 766-697 installed
and in S/N’s 4697115, 4697117, 4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 & up, while in flight, check
operation of landing gear warning oil pressure switch (i.e. - with landing gear up, reduce power smoothly
gear warning horn should sound at 300 ft-lbs ± 30). (PIR-FTP2001-25,Rev. F. & 1-FTP2001-25-1, Rev. A)
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 5-30-00 1E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 3 of 9)
Each 600 Hours

Replace engine fuel pump outlet filter each 600 hours, or as required, and whenever fuel contamination
is suspected.
Replace fuel system fuel filter element as required or each 600 hours whichever comes first.
Check engine fuel pump inlet screen for foreign matter or distortion. Clean and reinstall or replace.
For new batteries only, perform a capacity check (see 24-30-00, Capacity Test) after the first 600 hours
or one (1) year, whichever comes first.
Each 1000 Hours
Replace engine compartment flexible hoses (fuel, oil, etc.) as required; but not to exceed 1,000 hours or
eight (8) years time-in-service; or engine overhaul; whichever comes first.
Overhaul or replace starter generator.
Remove heat blankets and inspect firewalls per Firewalls 1,000 Hour Special Inspection, 71-30-00.
Overhaul or replace tachometer generators.
Replace or overhaul compressor P3 air filter.
Replace engine main oil filter element.
Each 1500 Hours
Replace flexible bleed air lines (high temp) each 1500 hours time-in-service or every seven (7) years,
whichever occurs first.
Each 1800 Hours
Inspect hot section per Pratt & Whitney Maintenance Manual or, alternatively; the Hot Section Inspection
(HSI) may be based on engine trend monitoring in accordance with Pratt & Whitney Canada Engine
Condition Trend Monitoring Analytical Guide (EAG) Manual P/N 3043607, latest revision. If trend
monitoring is introduced part way through engine life, a compressor wash and HSI must be
accomplished to establish performance base line. Refer to latest revision of Pratt & Whitney Canada.
After each Hot Section Inspection (HSI), conduct Torque Limiter Check, 76-10-00.
Replace batteries each 1800 hours or three (3) years, whichever comes first.
Each 2000 Hours
Overhaul or replace alternator.
Each 2000 hours or seven (7) years, whichever occurs first, remove interior cabinets, panels, and
headliner and conduct detailed inspection of aircraft structure (skin, bulkheads, stringers, etc.) for
condition and security. Inspection of structure concealed by headliner may be accomplished by alternate
means (i.e. - through the use of a borescope) without removing the headliner, providing access is
obtained to all concealed areas and borescope provides sufficient detail to adequately accomplish the
inspection.
1E21 5-30-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 4 of 9)
Each 3000 Hours

Each 3000 hours or six (6) years, whichever occurs first, replace FCU drive shaft bearing and inspect
FCU drive body.
Overhaul or replace hydraulic power pack.
Each 3500 Hours
Overhaul or replace fuel filter assembly.
Each 3600 Hours
Overhaul engine. Refer to latest revision of Pratt & Whitney Canada Service Bulletin No. 3003.
Inspect compressor turbine blades and disk assembly at engine overhaul.
Each 4000 Hours
Each 4000 hours or six (6) years, whichever occurs first, overhaul propeller. Refer to latest revision of
Hartzell Service Bulletin No. 61. (See Note 54.)
Each 4500 Hours
Overhaul or replace propeller governor.
Each 6500 Hours
Overhaul or replace overspeed governor (i.e. - HTG).
Each 7500 Hours
Replace engine mount bolts located at the firewall (F.S. 95.00).
3. Per Calendar Year

Each Thirty (30) Days
Check standby attitude indicator emergency power supply (in radar pod aft compartment) for condition
and security. Self-test unit using integral test switch - see 34-20-00. Hand-tighten electrical connector.
Inspect batteries and battery compartment for corrosion, etching, condition, and security. Flush
compartment as required. Refer to 12-10-00.
If installed, check portable fire extinguisher condition and charge. Verify nozzle is unobstructed and
safety seal is intact. Determine charge by "hefting" extinguisher.
Each Ninety (90) Days
For batteries which have been in service for 600 hours or 12 months, whichever comes first, perform a
capacity check (see 24-30-00, Capacity Test) each 200 hours or 90 days, whichever comes first.
Check fluid in hydraulic pump reservoir. Fill as required.
Check brake reservoir for proper fluid level, leaks, condition, and security.
Each Six (6) Months
Manual 202.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 5-30-00 1E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 5 of 9)
Each Year
For new batteries only, perform a capacity check (see 24-30-00, Capacity Test) after the first 600 hours
or one (1) year, whichever comes first.
Test pilot’s oxygen mask per Servicing - Mask - Complete System Test, 35-10-00.
Inspect cabin pressurization system operation. (See 21-00-00, Pressurization System Test.)
Manual 202.
Each Two (2) Years
In S/N’s 4697174 and up, each 400 hours or two (2) years, whichever comes first, perform Fuel Purge
System, Inspection and Cleaning, 71-70-00.
Each two (2) years or 500 hours, whichever occurs first, check that fuel strainers (five in each wing tank)
are secure and unobstructed. Strainers may be inspected by removing the forward and aft access
covers, fifth in from the wing tip. Additionally, check fuel probes and associated electrical connectors for
cleanliness, condition, and security.
Test and inspect the static pressure system and altimeters. Ensure compliance with the requirements of
FAR 43, Appendix E. (See FAR 91.411.) (For Meggitt equipped Airplanes see Appendix 1)
Test and inspect the transponder. Ensure compliance with the requirements of FAR 43, Appendix F.
(See FAR 91.413.)
For airplanes equipped with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS: swing the magnetic compass and
recalibrate the magnetometer(s) every two (2) years. See Magnetometer(s), 34-20-00.
Each Three (3) Years
Replace batteries each 1800 hours or three (3) years, whichever comes first.
Each Five (5) Years
WARNING: DO NOT USE GREASE OR ANY TYPE OF GREASE FITTING ON ANY OXYGEN
SYSTEM. WHEN WORKING WITH AN OXYGEN SYSTEM MAKE SURE HANDS,
CLOTHING, TOOLS, AND IMMEDIATE AREA ARE FREE OF GREASE.
Remove and hydrostatically test oxygen cylinder every five (5) years. (I.E. - standard weight cylinders -
ICC or DOT 3AA1800.) Overhaul the regulator and replace the fill valve.
Inspect the Attach Fittings and Push Rods listed below. Repair or replace as required and, when
finished, reapply Dinitrol AV8 Corrosion Inhibiting Compound (P/N 89500-800).
Fwd and aft wing spar to fuselage attach fittings. (See Attach Fittings Corrosion Control, 57-40-00.)
Fwd vertical fin attach fittings. (See Attach Fittings Corrosion Control, 55-30-00.)
Elevator trim tab push rods. (See Elevator Trim Tab Push Rod Corrosion Control, 55-20-00.)
Fwd and aft horizontal stabilizer attach fittings. (See Attach Fittings Corrosion Control, 55-10-00.)
Each Six (6) Years
Each six (6) years or 3000 hours, whichever occurs first, replace FCU drive shaft bearing and inspect
FCU drive body.
Each six (6) years or 4000 hours, whichever occurs first, overhaul propeller. Refer to latest revision of
Hartzell Service Bulletin No. 61. (See Note 54.)
Overhaul pilot’s oxygen mask.
1E23 5-30-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 6 of 9)
Each Seven (7) Years

Each 2000 hours or seven (7) years, whichever occurs first, remove interior cabinets, panels, and
headliner and conduct detailed inspection of aircraft structure (skin, bulkheads, stringers, etc.) for
condition and security. Inspection of structure concealed by headliner may be accomplished by alternate
means (i.e. - through the use of a borescope) without removing the headliner, providing access is
obtained to all concealed areas and borescope provides sufficient detail to adequately accomplish the
inspection.
Replace flexible bleed air lines (high temp) each 1500 hours time-in-service or every seven (7) years,
whichever occurs first.
Each Eight (8) Years
Replace engine compartment flexible hoses (fuel, oil, etc.) as required, but not to exceed 1,000 hours or
eight (8) years time-in-service; or engine overhaul; whichever comes first.
Each Ten (10) Years
Each ten (10) years time-in-service, test fuselage and wing fluid hoses to system pressure. Visually
inspect for leaks. Hoses that pass inspection may remain in service, but must be rechecked each five (5)
years additional time-in-service. No fluid hose may exceed twenty (20) years total time-in-service.
For airplanes equipped with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS: replace the CMOS battery in the
multifunction display (MFD) as required, but at least each 10 years. See Multifunction Display (MFD), 34-
20-00.
Each Twelve (12) Years
Replace fixed oxygen generators at twelve (12) years from the date of manufacture as indicated on the
unit dataplate.
Each Twenty (20) Years
No fluid hose may exceed twenty (20) years total time-in-service.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 5-30-00 1E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 7 of 9)
4. Per Specific Operation / Operating Environment

A. Operation in High Dust or Industrial Pollution Environment
CAUTION: DISCONNECT LINES FROM PITOT/STATIC SYSTEM BEFORE CONDUCTING THIS
INSPECTION.
Item Inspection Inspection Interval
P3 Air Filter. Remove, inspect and clean. 100 Hours.
Replace as required.
Air Intake Screens. Clean and inspect for damage. 100 Hours.
Engine Oil Filter. Clean and inspect condition. 100 Hours.
Engine Oil. Drain and replace. 200 Hours.
Compressor. Inspect and complete performance Weekly or more often
recovery wash. (See Pratt & Whitney as required.
Canada Maintenance Manual
No. 3021442, 71-00-00, page 701.)
Propeller. Refer to latest Hartzell Service Letter. 1,500 Hours or
Three (3) years.
Cowling. Snug fit of fireseals. 100 Hours.
Cabin Environmental and Inspect and replace if necessary. 100 Hours.
Instrument Air Filters.
Pitot/Static system. Check for obstruction. Reverse 100 Hours or
flow to lines. as required.
Landing Gear Actuators Clean. Before each flight.
and Oleos.
Inspect. 100 Hours.
Landing Gear Wheel Clean, inspect and repack. 50 Hours.
Bearings.
Windows. Inspect for cracks, erosion, crazing, Daily.
visibility, and cleanliness.
Structure drain holes. Clean with pipe cleaner. Before each flight.
1F1 5-30-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 8 of 9)
B. Operation in High Salt or High Humidity Environment

Fuselage, Empennage Remove floor panels and exterior 200 Hours.
and Wings. access plates; inspect for corrosion.
Landing Gear. Inspect for corrosion and lubrication; 200 Hours.
switches and wiring for condition.
Engines. Perform desalinization and wash. Daily or as required.
Instruments and Wiring. Inspect for proper seal of cases and 100 Hours.
corrosion.
Interior. Inspect upholstery, seat belts, seats and 100 Hours.
rugs for corrosion and integrity.
NOTE: Do not use metallic tie downs (i.e. - chains, cables, etc.) in high salt or high humidity
environments.
C. Operation in Extreme Cold

Hydraulic, Pneumatic Check all fittings and attachments for First 100 Hour, then
and Environmental. security and leaks. as required.
D. Operation from Soft or Unusual Terrain

Landing Gear. Inspect for cracks, attachment, 100 Hours.
damage, cleanliness and lubrication.
Wheels. Inspect for cracks, damage, chipped 100 Hours.
rims; bearings for damage, corrosion
and lubrication.
Tires. Inspect for cuts, wear, inflation and Daily.
deterioration.
Wheel Wells. Inspect for foreign material, damage 100 Hours.
and corrosion.
Brakes. Inspect for damage, foreign material, Daily.
cracks and overheating.
Flaps, Lower Fuselage Inspect for damage, cracks and 100 Hours.
and Wing. corrosion.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 5-30-00 1F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 9 of 9)
E. Airplane Inactive More than Seven (7) Days

Engine. See Pratt & Whitney Canada As required.
Maintenance Manual No. 3021442,
72-00-00, Engine, Turboprop - Servicing,
paragraph 6 - Preservation and
Depreservation.
1F3 5-30-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 5-30-00 1F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECK WORK SHEET
(Sheet 1 of 8)

PUBLICATIONS.)
CAUTION: UPON OCCURANCE OF ANY UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE EVENT, REVIEW OF
PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA, MAINTENANCE MANUAL NO. 3021442, 72-00-00,
ENGINE, TURBOPROP - INSPECTION, PARAGRAPH 11, IS RECOMMENDED BEFORE
FURTHER FLIGHT.
The following inspections are required in response to specific anomalies encountered during aircraft
operation. Note that the items listed herein are guidelines based on past operating experience. Each operator
should closely monitor his own unique operating conditions/environment and react accordingly to keep his
aircraft airworthy.
1. Lightning Strike
Propeller Overhaul or replace. Additionally, for Each occurrence,
and Prop. Governor. prop. only, see latest Hartzell Svc. Ltr. before further flight.
Engine. See Pratt & Whitney Canada Each occurrence,
Maintenance Manual No. 3021442, before further flight.
72-00-00, Engine, Turboprop - Inspection,
paragraph 11.
Electrical and Avionics Inspect and check harness, connections, Each occurrence,
Systems. and equipment for high voltage damage, before further flight.
burns and insulation degradation.
Replace or overhaul as required.
Consult with appropriate avionics
vendor(s) for inspections and operational
checks. Bench check alternator, generator,
and voltage regulators. (See 24-30-00.)
All exterior surfaces, skins, Inspect for burns, evidence of arcing, Each occurrence,
and structure. and damage on surfaces and bearings. before further flight.
Check for correct material properties in
the area of the strike path. Degauss
engine mount. Replace or repair
affected areas/parts.
System Components. Inspect instrumentation, hydraulic, Each occurrence,
vacuum, pitot/static, and fuel systems, before further flight.
for damage and correct operation.
1F5 5-50-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 2 of 8)
1. Lightning Strike (cont.)

Static Wicks. Replace. Each occurrence,
before further flight.
Bearings. Inspect all control surface hinges and Each occurrence,
bearings, and landing gear and wheel before further flight.
bearings for pitting and damage.
2. Engine Overspeed, Overtemp, Overtorque, or Sudden Stoppage
paragraph 11.
Propeller. Propeller overspeed of more than 10%. Each occurrence,
Refer to latest Hartzell Service Letter. before further flight.
Overhaul or replace.
Propeller Governor. Overhaul or replace. Each sudden stoppage,
Engine Mount and Inspect for distortion and Each occurrence,
Attachments. damage. Replace or repair, before further flight.
as required.
3. Engine Foreign Object or Debris (FOD) Ingestion - Hard Material

First-stage compressor blades. Check for damage. Each occurrence,
See Pratt & Whitney Canada before further flight.
72-30-05.
Engine. Conduct engine ground power check. Each occurrence,
See Pratt & Whitney Canada before further flight.
71-00-00.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 5-50-00 1F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 3 of 8)
4. Engine Foreign Object or Debris (FOD) Ingestion - Soft Material / Bird Strikes
Engine. A hot section inspection is Each occurrence,
recommended. as soon as possible.
See Pratt & Whitney Canada
72-00-00.
First-stage compressor Check for damage, bird remains, Each occurrence,
airfoils. or other soft foreign material. before further flight.
72-30-05.
Engine. Conduct engine performance Each occurrence,
recovery wash and engine ground before further flight.
power check. See Pratt & Whitney
Canada Maintenance Manual
No. 3021442, 71-00-00.
5. Severe Turbulence, Hard or Overweight Landing

CAUTION: MINOR OR APPARENTLY SUPERFICIAL DAMAGE MAY INDICATE A MORE SEVERE
CONDITION SOMEWHERE ELSE IN THE STRUCTURE.
A. Place aircraft in a normal level attitude.
B. Make a preliminary inspection of checking alignment and out-of-track condition of engine, wings,
tail, landing gear and doors.
C. Follow Piper and Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual procedures. If there are any
questions regarding repairs or procedures, contact your Piper Distributor’s Service Advisor (DSA).
D. Inspect the following items closely to determine the extent of damage:
Landing Gear Struts Cracks, signs of overstress Each occurrence,
and Actuators deformation, loose or damaged before further flight.
(Not required for trunnion mounts. Axles for cracks,
severe turbulence.) bending or flat spots. Damaged oleos
and seals, hydraulic leaks and landing
gear alignment.
Perform 500 HR Main Gear Actuator Each occurrence,
Upper Attach Bolt Special Inspection, before further flight.
32-10-00.
Wheels, Tires, Brakes. Cracks, chips, loose or cracked Each occurrence,
(Not required for mounting bolts, alignment of slippage before further flight.
severe turbulence.) marks, sidewall distress, hydraulic or
air leaks. Inspect the wheels (dye
penetrant method) and wheel bolts
(magnetic particle method).
1F7 5-50-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 4 of 8)
5. Severe Turbulence, Hard or Overweight Landing (continued)

Wheel Wells and Landing Buckling, cracks, overstress, wing skin Each occurrence,
Gear attach points. buckling, actuator and side brace before further flight.
(Not required for damage and condition. Magnaflux
severe turbulence.) landing, gear attachment and drag
link bolts.
Wings. Wing attach bolts for slippage, damage Each occurrence,
and overstress. Upper and lower wing before further flight.
skins for wrinkles, cracks, popped or
loose rivets.
Remove access plates and inspect for
internal damage to ribs, stringers and
sparwebs; and fuel tanks for damage,
attachment, and leaks.
Engine. Engine mounts for distortion and Each occurrence,
damage to elastomeric parts. before further flight.
Propeller for evidence of ground strike
(i.e. - hard or overweight landing).
paragraph 11.
Fuselage. Loose or missing rivets, door alignment, Each occurrence,
windows and attachments for overstress, before further flight.
cracks or damage. Wing carry through
member for overstress damage.
Stringers, bulkheads, keel beams for
buckling, cracks, or damage. Forward
and aft pressure bulkheads for buckling,
cracks and damage. Avionics,
instruments and accessories installation
for security and operation.
Perform ground pressurization check.

(See 21-30-00 - Pressurization System
Test.)
Empennage. Skins for buckling wrinkles, loose or Each occurrence,
missing rivets. Elevator, rudder, vertical before further flight.
fins and horizontal stabilizer for security
of attachment and overstress of bolts.
Ribs, stringers for buckling, cracks
and damage.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 5-50-00 1F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 5 of 8)
6. Flaps Extended Above Maximum Flap Extension Speed (VFE)

Flap bellcranks. Inspect for distortion. Replace as Each occurrence,
required. (See Flap Bellcrank Distortion before further flight.
Inspection, 27-50-00.)
Flaps. Inspect for damage to the skin and Each occurrence,
attach points. Replace as required. before further flight.
7. Flood Damage, Immersion in Water

A. These guidelines are general in nature and should be applied or varied to fit the individual aircraft
according to water level, length of time of exposure and other variables. Only those areas that might
not be obvious to the mechanic are addressed.
CAUTION: MAKE ALL REPAIRS AND/OR ADJUSTMENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
APPROPRIATE PIPER MAINTENANCE MANUAL, THE COMPONENT
MANUFACTURER'S MAINTENANCE MANUAL, AND FAR PART 43. PAY
PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO SILT, CORROSION AND CONTAMINANTS.
B. Follow Piper and Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual procedures. If there are any
questions regarding repairs or procedures, contact your Piper Distributor’s Service Advisor (DSA).
C. Determine the water level on the aircraft. Determine which operating and/or electrical components
have been exposed to the water.
D. If the following items were immersed, inspect them closely to determine the extent of damage:
Airframe Clean silt and contaminants from airframe. If immersed, each event,
Tubular Structures Check for internal corrosion. If immersed, each event,
(i.e. - Engine Mounts, etc.) Clean and represerve as required. before further flight.
(See 71-20-00 - Engine Mount Corrosion
Inspection, Immersion in Water.)
Wings Inspect to ensure that contaminants If immersed, each event,
are cleaned from fuel cell areas. before further flight.
Landing Gear and associated Check all limit switches, replace If immersed, each event,
Bearings, Locks, Torque Links, non-sealed type. Jack airplane and before further flight.
Shimmy Dampeners, etc. cycle landing gear to ensure
proper operation.
Control Surfaces Remove surface, clean and check If immersed, each event,
all bearings - relube or replace before further flight.
as necessary.
Rebalance before installation.
Flight Control System Clean and inspect all cables, pulleys, If immersed, each event,
and bearings for evidence of corrosion. before further flight.
Replace corroded cables.
Re-preserve galvanized cable
with MIL- C-11796 Class 2 (hot).
1F9 5-50-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 6 of 8)
7. Flood Damage, Immersion in Water (continued)

Trim Control System Clean and inspect all trim system If immersed, each event,
cables, pulleys, drums, bearings, before further flight.
jack screws, etc. Do not apply
preservation to trim cables.
Actuating Cables Inspect "push-pull" actuating cables If immersed, each event,
for powerplant, heating and before further flight.
ventilating system, fuel system, etc.
for proper operation.
Engine Remove and ship to an approved If immersed, each event,
overhaul facility for “Light Overhaul before further flight.
- Immersion in Water.”
Engine Accessories Inspect. Aircraft systems that supply If immersed, each event,
either fuel or oil to the engine must be before further flight.
thoroughly cleaned, including oil cooler,
lines,valves, etc. to prevent
contamination of the engine after
reinstallation.
Propellers Inspect and repair as necessary If immersed, each event,
in an authorized propeller shop. before further flight.
Hydraulic System Replace hydraulic powerpak. If immersed, each event,
Electrical Systems Replace all circuit breakers and If immersed, each event,
switches (except sealed landing gear before further flight.
limit switches).
Replace all solenoids, relays and
master contactors.
Replace battery.
Disassemble all connectors; clean
and inspect for corrosion. Replace all
corroded or pitted connectors. Inspect
for wire corrosion at connector.
Check all harness assemblies for
entrapped contaminants. Clean and
check for short circuits.
Remove electric motors and electric
pumps.
Remove all potted solid state electrical
equipment such as flap time delay relays,
alternator inop. switches, windshield heat
timers, low fuel warning switches, etc.
Clean, dry and bench check per
appropriate maintenance manual.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 5-50-00 1F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 7 of 8)

Electrical Systems (continued) Replace de-icer timers. Clean and check
prop de-icer brush holders.
Clean and check voltage regulators.
Replace as necessary
Clean and check aIl strobe light power
supplies. Refer to appropriate
maintenance manual.
Replace all fuel senders, trim tab sender
pots, flap position senders, etc.
Clean, inspect and check heated
pitot systems.
Autopilot System Bench check in accordance with If immersed, each event,
appropriate maintenance manual. before further flight.
Pay particular attention to clutch settings.
Vacuum and Pitot-Static Replace gyros. If immersed, each event,
Systems before further flight.
Replace filters.
Clean and inspect all lines, and pitot

and static vents.
Clean and check all regulating valves.
Remove and inspect engine driven and

auxiliary vacuum pumps.
Induction and Bleed Air Clean and inspect for silt and If immersed, each event,
Systems corrosion. Check all ducts and gaskets. before further flight.
Replace as necessary.
Clean and inspect all heat shrouds
and ducting.
Fuel Systems Remove access panels and clean fuel If immersed, each event,
tank (wet wing) and clean all associated before further flight.
lines and pumps and header tanks.
Clean and inspect all fuel tank vents,
cap vents and vent lines.
Instruments Clean and inspect instruments. Bench If immersed, each event,
check per appropriate maintenance before further flight.
manual.
1F11 5-50-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(Sheet 8 of 8)

Heating and Ventilating Replace blower. If immersed, each event,
Systems before further flight.
Clean and inspect all ducting and valves.
Inspect and check system control cables.

Replace corroded or binding cables.
Clean and inspect air conditioning

evaporator, condenser, and compressor.
Pressurization Systems Remove and replace all system controls If immersed, each event,
and valves. before further flight.
Oxygen Systems Disconnect all lines from source and If immersed, each event,
outlets; clean all fittings and lines before further flight.
per MIL-I-5585A.
Remove and clean regulator valve per

appropriate Scott publication.
Replace pressure gauge.
Replace oxygen generator units.

Avionics Systems Replace avionics. If immersed, each event,
Clean and inspect antennas
and connectors.
Insulation and Upholstery Remove all wet insulation and upholstery. If immersed, each event,
Thoroughly clean and dry (or replace) before further flight.
to ensure corrosion is not promoted in
adjacent structures.
8. Starter-Generator Replacement
paragraph 11.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 5-50-00 1F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1F13 5-50-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 5-50-00 1F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
6
DIMENSIONS AND
AREAS
1F15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
6-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
1F17 6 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 6 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 6 - DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 6-00-00 1 1F21

Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions 2 1F22
Station References 4 1F24
Access and Inspection Provisions 8 1G4
1F19 6 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 6 - CONTENTS 1F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The principal airplane dimensions are shown in Figure 1. The leading particulars and additional dimensions
are listed in Chart 1. The airplane serial number is located on the Manufacturers Aircraft Association (MAA)
dataplate, which is located below the tailcone at approximately F.S. 311.50. The engine serial number plate is
located on the left to the rear at approximately F.S. 74.00 and is accessed through the left gull-wing engine
access door.
104321
17 ft
(5.18 m)
11.17 ft 7.43 ft
(3.4 m) (2.26 m)
Wing Area (sq ft) 183

Minimum Turning Radius (ft) 35.4
(pivot point to wing tip)
43 ft
(13.11 m)
4.42 ft
(1.35 m)
4.58 ft
(1.39 m)
4.5˚ Dihedral
6.17 ft
(1.88 m)
12.33 ft
(3.76 m)
29.6 ft
(9.02 m)
11.3 ft
(3.44 m)
5.25 ft
(1.6 m)
2.25 ft (0.68 m)
8.04 ft
(2.45 m)
Three View (PA-46-500TP)

Figure 1
1F21 6-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Leading Particulars and Principal Dimensions
CHART 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS
MODEL PA-46-500TP
ENGINE
Manufacturer Pratt & Whitney Canada

Model PT6A-42A
FAA Type Certificate E4EA

Type Free Turbine, Reverse Flow, 2 Shaft
Compressor Stages and Type 3 Axial Stages, 1 Centrifugal Stage
Turbine Stages and Type 1 Stage Compressor, 2 Stage Power
Combustion Chamber Type Annular
Flat Rated Horsepower (Airframe Limit) 500 (Takeoff)
400 (Maximum Continuous)
Rated RPM 2,000
Oil
Specification Refer to 12-10-00 and latest
revision of Pratt & Whitney
Canada Service Bulletin No.
3001.
Tank Capacity 2.3 US Gal.
Usable Quantity 1.5 US Gal.
Fuel Specification Jet A, Jet A-1 (as specified in

Pratt & Whitney Canada Service
Bulletin No. 3044, latest revision.
Starter Generator (24 volt)

AFI (200 amp) 200SGL145Q-1
Alternator, Standby - Belt Driven (24 volt)

Electrosystems (130 amp) ES4019-1
Generator Control Unit

Lamar Inc. GC-22
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 6-00-00 1F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS
MODEL PA-46-500TP
PROPELLER
Manufacturer Hartzell
Type Hydraulically operated,
constant speed, full feathering,
reversible
WARNING: GROUND IDLE ENGINE SPEED MUST BE AT OR ABOVE 1200 RPM.
Hub HC-E4N-3Q
Blade E8501B-3.5
Diameter (Inches)
Maximum 82.5
Minimum 81.5
Blade Angle
Reverse -10° ± 0.5°
Low Pitch (High RPM) 19° ± 0.1°
Feather 84.5° ± 0.5°
Propeller Governor Woodward 8210-007E
Overspeed Governor Woodward 210638
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank Capacity (Gal.) 86.5 per wing
Total Fuel Onboard (Gal.) 173
Total Usable Fuel (Gal.) 170
Fuel - Minimum Grade Jet A, Jet A-1 (as specified in
Pratt & Whitney Canada Service
Bulletin No. 3044, latest revision.)
LANDING GEAR
Type Retractable - Hydraulic
Shock Strut Design Combination Air and Oil
Turning Radius 35.4 ft
Nose Gear Travel 30° Left and Right
Wheel, Nose Cleveland 40-77G
Wheel, Main Cleveland 40-142
Brakes Cleveland 30-127D
Tire, Main 6.00 x 6, 8 ply rating
Tire, Nose 5.00 x 5, 8 ply rating *
Tire Pressures Main - 55 psi
Nose - 70 psi *
* - S/N’s 4697126 & up and 4697001 thru 4697125 with Kit No. 767-336 or 767-338 installed.
1F23 6-00-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Station References
To locate various airplane components that require maintenance and servicing, a method using fuselage
station, wing station, buttock line and waterline designations is frequently used in this manual. Fuselage
stations (F.S.), wing station (W.S.), buttock lines (B.L.), and waterlines (W. L.) are measured by inches in
the vertical or horizontal direction from a given reference line. These points indicate station locations of
airplane structural members.
A
FS FS FS
158.30 171.40 189.60
FS
178.90
FS FS FS FS
53.75 66.375 150.58 164.75
FS FS FS FS FS
95.00 108.00 124.125 139.80 178.60
FS FS FS FS FS FS FS
79.00 100.00 117.00 132.00 146.47 171.43 186.25
FWD PRESSURE BULKHEAD

INSTRUMENT PANEL EMERGENCY
EXIT
*
FIREWALL
NOSE GEAR MAIN

DOOR
* RIGHT SIDE SPAR
MAIN FLOOR
BATTERY
ACCESS
* MAIN FLOOR
(WL 50.00)
(WL 50.00)
MAIN FLOOR
(WL 50.00) C
Fuselage Stations
Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 6-00-00 1F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
FS FS FS FS
189.60 214.90 226.25 302.793
FS
346.96
FS
326.005
FS
311.382
FS
FS 292.00
282.00
FS
FS 273.746
257.70 FS
FS 286.725
241.50 FS
FS FS
207.00 218.62 FS 265.80
249.60
FS FS
198.25 233.87
B
AFT PRESSURE BULKHEAD
*
GENCY
XIT
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT FLOOR
C MAIN FLOOR
(WL 50.00)
Fuselage Stations
1G1 6-00-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 6
6-00-00
WS WS
WS WS WS WS 240.00
WS 182.00 209.00
107.50 134.00 156.00
82.50

WS WS WS
61.80 93.00 116.00 FUEL FILLER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WS

51.542
WS
Wing Stations
40.00
Figure 3
WS
29.00
PITOT TUBE OAT SENSOR (RIGHT SIDE ONLY)
RADAR POD (RIGHT SIDE ONLY)
LIFT DETECTOR
JACK POINT
1G2
CENTER WING SECTION OUTBOARD WING SECTION

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BL BL BL
0.0 44.00 102.00
BL BL
94.02 101.16
BL
29.00
WL
WL 153.70
148.26
WL
147.23
WL
115.44
WL
WL 88.56
66.00
WL
46.00
Buttock Lines and Waterlines

Figure 4
1G3 6-00-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Access and Inspection Provisions (See Figure 5)

Components to be serviced or inspected through each opening are identified in the legend. All access
plates and panels are secured by metal fasteners or screws.
NOTE: Review Chart 3, 91-10-00, for sealant requirements, before removing any access plates or
panels.
Gain access to floor panel attachment screws by removing seats and carpeting.
NUMERICAL INDEX (BY ACCESS PANEL)
1. A/C Condenser and Fan 14. Master Electrical Panel 25. Relays:
Elevator Trim Jackscrew - Starter Control - K1 - Annunciator Test
Elevator Sector & Up Stop - Generator Control Unit - K2 - Day / Night
Rudder Sector & Stops - Battery Bus - K3 - Annunciator Inop.
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) - Fuses - K4 - Stall Fail
Elevator Cable Turnbuckles - Contactors - K9 - Squat Switch No. 2
Pitch Servo (Battery, Starter, Aux Power)
26. Trim Monitor
Yaw Servo P3 Air Filter
Relays:
Yaw Amplifier Fuel Pump / Filter
- K6 - Ground Clearance
Fuel Control Unit
2. Main Landing Gear Actuator - K7 - Squat Switch No. 1
Oil-to-Fuel Heater
Flap Bellcranks - K8 - Emergency /
Oil Filter
Up Limit Switch Ground Clearance
Squat Switch (Left side only) 15. Engine & Propeller
27. Flap Drive Micro-switches
Prop Deicer Brush Block
3. O. A. T. Sensor
Prop Governor 28. Flap Drive Pushrod
(S/N’s 4697003 thru 4697039
Tach Governor
shown with 29. Trim Servo
Torque Limiter
Kit No. 766-688 installed.) R. Vent Blower
16. Dual Drive
4. Pitot Tube 30. Oil Dipstick
Alternator
5. Fuel Tank (Wet Wing) A/C Compressor 31. Rear Closeout Panel
(Probes Accessed via Fwd Plates) Brake Reservoir - Hydraulic Pump/Reservoir
Vacuum Regulator - Aft Avionics Shelf
6. Strobe Power Supply Chip Detector - Autopilot Pressure Transducer
7. Fuel Vent 17. ELT Antenna - Safety & Outflow Valves
(Cabin Pressurization)
8. Deice Valves & Pressure Switches 18. Rudder Trim Tab Actuator - Lift Computer
9. Fuel Boost Pump(s) (Both Sides) (Right side only)
32. Ignition Relay
Check Valve(s) (Both Sides) 19. Elevator Trim Tab Adjustment E.L. Panels Inverter Assy.
10. Wing Attach Fittings K-300 Annunciator Day/Night
20. Battery
Relay
11. Fuel Intake Float Valve(s) 21. Engine Air Inlets
Fuel Float Switch(es) 33. Flap Drive Motor-Actuator
Oil Cooler
12. Fuel Filter Oil Cooler Air Inlet 34. Roll Servo
Fuel System Drain Cap Chip Detector
35. A/C Receiver/Dehydrator
13. Nose Landing Gear Actuator 22. Misc. Storage Compartment A/C Service Valves
Steering Bellcrank Trim Servo
23. External Power Receptacle
Steering Bungee L. Vent Blower
24. Trim Relay
Effectivity Access and Inspection Provisions

4697001 & up Figure 5 (Sheet 1 of 4)
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 6-00-00 1G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: UNLABELED ACCESS PLATES / PANELS 1

PROVIDE GENERAL ACCESS TO
CONTROL CABLES AND FUEL AND
PNEUMATIC LINES.
SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 2, FOR

ANTENNA LOCATIONS.
5 4 2 2 4 5
10
6 7 5 11 9 5 7 3, 6
8
12 13
18
14 15 16 17
19
20 21 12 22 23
14 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31
16 32 33 34 35
Access and Inspection Provisions Effectivity

Figure 5 (Sheet 2 of 4) 4697001 & up
1G5 6-00-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (BY COMPONENT)
A/C Compressor: 16 K3 Relay - Annunciator Inop.: 21

A/C Condenser and Fan: 1 K4 Relay - Stall Fail: 21
A/C Receiver/Dehydrator: 35 K6 Relay - Ground Clearance: 26
A/C Service Valves: 35 K7 Relay - Squat Switch No. 1: 26
Aft Avionics Shelf: 31 K8 Relay - Emergency / Ground Clearance: 26
Alternator: 16 K9 Relay - Squat Switch No. 2: 21
Annunciator Day/Night Relay: 32 K300 Relay - Annunciator Day/Night Relay: 32
Annunciator Inop. Relay - K3: 21 L. Vent Blower: 35
Annunciator Test Relay - K1: 25 Lift Computer: 31
Autopilot Pressure Transducer: 31 Main Landing Gear Actuator: 2
Aux Power Contactor: 14 Master Electrical Panel: 14
Battery Bus: 14 Misc. Storage Compartment: 22
Battery Contactor: 14 Nose Landing Gear Actuator: 13
Battery: 20 O. A. T. Sensor: 3
Brake Reservoir: 16 (S/N’s 4697003 thru 4697039 shown with
Check Valve(s) (Both Sides): 9 Kit No. 766-688 installed.)
Chip Detector: 16 Oil Cooler Air Inlet: 21
Chip Detector: 21 Oil Cooler: 21
Contactors: 14 Oil Dipstick: 30
Day / Night Relay - K2: 21 Oil Filter: 14
Deice Valves & Pressure Switches: 8 Oil-to-Fuel Heater: 14
Dual Drive: 16 P3 Air Filter: 14
E.L. Panels Inverter Assy.: 32 Pitch Servo: 1
Elevator Cable Turnbuckles: 1 Pitot Tube: 4
Elevator Sector & Up Stop: 1 Prop Deicer Brush Block: 15
Elevator Trim Jackscrew: 1 Prop Governor: 15
Elevator Trim Tab Adjustment: 19 Propeller: 15
ELT Antenna: 17 R. Vent Blower: 29
Emergency / Ground Clearance Relay - K8: 26 Rear Closeout Panel: 31
Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT): 1 Roll Servo: 34
Engine Air Inlets: 21 Rudder Sector & Stops: 1
Engine: 15 Rudder Trim Tab Actuator (Right side only): 18
External Power Receptacle: 23 Safety & Outflow Valves (Cabin Pressurization): 31
Flap Bellcranks: 2 Squat Switch (Left side only): 2
Flap Drive Micro-switches: 27 Squat Switch No. 1 Relay - K7: 26
Flap Drive Motor-Actuator: 33 Squat Switch No. 2 Relay - K9: 21
Flap Drive Pushrod: 28 Stall Fail Relay - K4: 21
Fuel Boost Pump(s) (Both Sides): 9 Starter Contactor: 14
Fuel Control Unit: 14 Starter Control: 14
Fuel Filter: 12 Steering Bellcrank: 13
Fuel Float Switch(es): 11 Steering Bungee: 13
Fuel Intake Float Valve(s): 11 Strobe Power Supply: 6
Fuel Probes (Access via Fwd Plates): 5 Tach Governor: 15
Fuel Pump / Filter: 14 Torque Limiter: 15
Fuel System Drain Cap: 12 Trim Monitor: 26
Fuel Tank (Wet Wing): 5 Trim Relay: 24
Fuel Vent: 7 Trim Servo: 29
Fuses: 14 Trim Servo: 35
Generator Control Unit: 14 Up Limit Switch: 2
Ground Clearance Relay - K6: 26 Vacuum Regulator: 16
Hydraulic Pump/Reservoir: 31 Wing Attach Fittings: 10
Ignition Relay: 32 Yaw Amplifier: 1
K1 Relay - Annunciator Test: 25 Yaw Servo: 1
K2 Relay - Day / Night: 21
Effectivity Access and Inspection Provisions

PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 6-00-00 1G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: UNLABELED ACCESS PLATES / PANELS 1

PROVIDE GENERAL ACCESS TO
CONTROL CABLES AND FUEL AND
PNEUMATIC LINES.
SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 2, FOR

ANTENNA LOCATIONS.
5 4 2 2 4 5
10
6 7 5 11 9 5 7 3, 6
8
12 13
18
14 15 16 17
19
20 21 12 22 23
14 24 25 26 27 28 29
30 31
16 32 33 34 35
Access and Inspection Provisions Effectivity

Figure 5 (Sheet 4 of 4) 4697001 & up
1G7 6-00-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 6-00-00 1G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
7
LIFTING AND
SHORING
1G9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
7-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
1G11 7 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 7 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 7 - LIFTING AND SHORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JACKING 7-10-00 1 1G15

General 1 1G15
Jacking 1 1G15
1G13 7 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 7 - CONTENTS 1G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JACKING
1. General
Jacking the airplane is necessary to service the landing gear and other operations. The jacking operation
can be performed by using tripod jacks; in other situations (emergency, post-accident lifting), slings or
airbags should be used.
If wing or fuselage shoring is required, make sure the support is contoured to conform with the surface it
is supporting.
2. Jacking
CAUTION: DISABLE LIFT DETECTOR, WINDSHIELD HEAT, AND PITOT HEAT PRIOR TO JACKING
AIRCRAFT.
A. Align jacks under wing with respective pads on the wing main spar.
CAUTION: ENSURE JACK DOES NOT COME IN CONTACT WITH RADAR POD ON RIGHT WING.
B. Attach tail stand with approximately 400 pounds ballast to the tail skid.
CAUTION: ENOUGH SUPPORT BALLAST MUST BE ADDED TO THE TAILSTAND TO
PREVENT THE AIRPLANE FROM TIPPING FORWARD ON ITS NOSE SECTION.
MAKE SURE TO ACCOUNT FOR SOMEONE IN THE FUSELAGE IF APPLICABLE.
C. Carefully raise jacks until all three wheels are clear of surface.
ADD SUFFICIENT WEIGHT

TO TAILSTAND TO ENSURE
AIRCRAFT DOES NOT
SIT ON NOSE.
Jacking Arrangement
Figure 1
1G15 7-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 7-10-00 1G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
8
LEVELING AND
WEIGHING
1G17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
8-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
8-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 8 - LEVELING AND WEIGHING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WEIGHING 8-10-00 1 1G23
LEVELING 8-20-00 1 1H1
1G21 8 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WEIGHING
The airplane may be weighed by the following procedure:

A. Position a scale and a ramp in front of each of the three wheels.
B. Secure the scales from rolling forward, tow the airplane up onto the scales and block the wheels.
C. Remove the ramp so as not to interfere with the scales.
D. If the airplane is to be weighed for weight and balance computations, level the airplane per
instructions given in the paragraph titled Leveling.
E. Fill engine with oil to full capacity.
F. Place pilot and copilot seats in fifth notch aft of forward position. Put flaps in the fully retracted
position and all control surfaces in the neutral position. Tow bar should be in the proper location and
all entrance and baggage doors should be closed.
G. Weigh the airplane inside a closed building to prevent errors in scale readings due to wind.
H. With the airplane level and brakes released, record the weight shown on each scale. Deduct the
tare weight, if any, from each reading.
Weighing
Figure 1
1G23 8-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 8-10-00 1G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEVELING
The airplane can be leveled both longitudinally and laterally: while on jacks, during the weighing
procedure while the wheels are on scales, or while the wheels are on the ground. To level the airplane for
purposes of weighing or rigging, the following procedures may be used:
NOTE: Always level the airplane laterally first, then level the airplane longitudinally.
A. To laterally level the airplane, place a level across the forward edge of the rear baggage
compartment. If the airplane is resting on its gear, raise or lower one wing tip by deflating the main
gear tire on the high side of the airplane until the bubble of the level is centered. If the airplane is on
jacks, adjust either wing jack until the bubble of the level is centered.
B. To longitudinally level the airplane, place a level against the centerline of the bottom fuselage skin,
behind the forward pressure bulkhead and adjust the jacks until the level is centered. Should the
airplane be either on scales or on the floor, first insert a 3.4 inch spacer on each of the main gear
struts and a 3.0 inch spacer on the nose gear strut. Level airplane by deflating (or inflating, as
required) the nose wheel tire to center the bubble in the level.
FS 100.0
LEVEL POINT
(CENTERLINE OF BOTTOM FUSELAGE SKIN,
AFT OF FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD -- FS 100.0)
Leveling Longitudinally
Figure 1
1H1 8-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Leveling Laterally
Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 8-20-00 1H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1H3 8-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 8-20-00 1H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
9
TOWING AND TAXIING
1H5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
9-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
9-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
9-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
1H7 9 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 9 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 9 - TOWING AND TAXIING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 9-00-00 1 1H11
TOWING 9-10-00 1 1H13
TAXIING 9-20-00 1 1H15
1H9 9 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 9 - CONTENTS 1H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Before towing or taxiing airplane, ground personnel must be informed by a qualified pilot or other
personnel about tow turning limits of nose gear, engine starting and shutdown procedures, and any
other system functions required to properly and safely move the airplane.
RADIUSES: 1. Inner Main Gear 7 ft., 8 in.

2. Nose Gear 16 ft., 1 in.
3. Outer Main Gear 20 ft., 1 in.
4. Outer Wing Tip 35 ft., 5 in.
PIVOT
POINT
2
30˚
3
27 ' 6 "
27 ' 10 "
49 ' 4 "
70 ' 10 "
Turning Radius and Limits

Figure 1
1H11 9-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 9-00-00 1H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TOWING
CAUTION: WHEN TOWING WITH POWER EQUIPMENT, DO NOT TURN THE NOSE GEAR IN
EITHER DIRECTION BEYOND ITS STEERING RADIUS LIMITS AS THIS WILL RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO THE NOSE GEAR AND STEERING MECHANISM.
No tow/steering bar is provided. If moving the airplane by hand or with power equipment using towing
lines (see below), a qualified person should ride in the pilot’s seat to steer with the nose wheel and to
maintain control by use of the brakes.
The airplane may be moved and steered by power equipment, if the power equipment’s tow bar stem will
fit in the hollow of the nose wheel axle at its right side and, if sufficient care is taken to ensure the nose
gear steering assembly is not damaged or strained.
In the event towing lines are necessary, lines (rope) should be attached to both main gear struts as high
up on the tubes as possible. Lines should be long enough to clear the nose and/or tail by not less than
15 feet, and a qualified person should ride in the pilot’s seat to maintain control by use of the brakes.
1H13 9-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 9-10-00 1H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAXIING
Before attempting to taxi the airplane, ground personnel should be checked out by a qualified pilot or
other responsible person. Engine starting and shut-down procedures should be covered as well. When it
is ascertained that the propeller back blast and taxi areas are clear, apply power to start the taxi roll and
perform the following checks:
CAUTION: MINIMIZE GROUND OPERATION IN BETA AND/OR REVERSE THRUST POWER MODE
TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE WING PNEUMATIC DE-ICERS AND FUSELAGE FROM
EXHAUST HEAT.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE AT HIGH RPM WHEN RUNNING UP OR TAXIING
OVER GROUND CONTAINING LOOSE STONES, GRAVEL OR ANY LOOSE MATERIAL
THAT MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE PROPELLER BLADES.
CAUTION: OBSERVE WING CLEARANCES WHEN TAXIING NEAR BUILDINGS OR OTHER
STATIONARY OBJECTS. IF POSSIBLE, STATION A GUIDE OUTSIDE THE AIRPLANE TO
OBSERVE.
CAUTION: WHEN TAXIING ON UNEVEN GROUND, AVOID HOLES AND RUTS.
A. When first starting, taxi a few feet and apply brakes to determine their effectiveness.
B. While taxiing, make slight turns to ascertain the effectiveness of steering.
1H15 9-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 9-20-00 1H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
10
PARKING AND
MOORING
1H17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
10-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
10-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10 - PARKING AND MOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARKING 10-10-00 1 1H23

Locking Airplane 1 1H23
MOORING 10-20-00 1 1I1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARKING
1. Parking
When parking the airplane, ensure it is sufficiently protected against adverse weather conditions and
presents no danger to other aircraft. When parking the airplane for any length of time or overnight, it
must be moored as described in 10-20-00.
NOTE: Care should be taken when setting brakes that are overheated, or when setting brakes during
cold weather when moisture can freeze the brakes.
NOTE: The courtesy lights and the Flightcom DVR300i digital voice recorder clock are connected to the
battery at all times, regardless of the master switch position. Accordingly, when parking the
airplane ensure that:
- the digital voice recorder clock is switched OFF before exiting the airplane, and
- that the courtesy lights extinguish when the cabin door is shut.
2. Locking Airplane
The cabin door is provided with a key lock on the outside.
1H23 10-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 10-10-00 1H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOORING
CAUTION: WHEN MOORING, USE SQUARE OR BOWLINE KNOTS. DO NOT USE SLIP KNOTS.
The airplane is moored to ensure its security and protection under various weather conditions. To moor
the airplane, use the following procedures:
A. Head airplane into wind, if possible.
B. Block wheels.
C. Lock aileron and elevator controls with front seat belts.
CAUTION: WHEN MOORING THE AIRPLANE WITH NATURAL FIBER ROPE, LEAVE
SUFFICIENT SLACK TO AVOID DAMAGE TO AIRPLANE.
CAUTION: DO NOT MOOR THE AIRPLANE WITH JUST THE WING TIE-DOWN RINGS. USE
ALL THREE TIE-DOWN RINGS AT ALL TIMES.
D. Secure wing tie-down ropes to retractable tie-down rings (located on underside of wings, just
outboard of the main gear) and to the tail tie-down ring at approximately 45 degrees.
NOTE: Additional preparations for high winds include adding tie-down ropes from the landing gear
forks, and securing the rudder.
E. Install ground protection equipment (covers) in the engine inlets and exhaust, generator cooling
inlet, and over the pitot tubes and propeller tips. Secure the propeller to prevent windmilling and to
provide maximum clearance for towing equipment. (See Figure 1.)
1I1 10-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RE
M
OV
E
B
EFOR
E
FL
IG
HT
REMOV E
METAL CLIP
ATTACHES
DIRECTLY TO
EXHAUST STACK
REMOVE B E F
OPTIONAL
OV
E BEFO
ORE FLI
R
E
FL
IG
GH
HT
T
104319 G
104631 NEW
Effectivity Ground Protection Equipment

4697001 & up Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 10-20-00 1I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1I3 10-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 10-20-00 1I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
11
PLACARDS
AND MARKINGS
1I5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
11-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
11-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
1I7 11 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 11 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-20-00 1 1I11
INTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-30-00 1 1I19
1I9 11 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 11 - CONTENTS 1I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
The airplane nameplate placard (Manufacturers Aircraft Association (MAA) plate) is located below the
tailcone at approximately F.S. 311.50. The placard identifies the airplane by its model number and serial
number. Should a question arise concerning the care of the airplane, it is important to include the
airplane serial number in any correspondence to PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.
NOTE: Any time an airplane is repainted or touched up, inspect all placards to ensure that they are not
covered with paint, are legible, and securely attached.
2 2
4, 5, & 6 - BOTH SIDES
3 4 5
Placards and Markings - Exterior

1I11 11-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9
8
10
12
11 13
NOTE: 14 & 15 ON BOTH MAIN GEAR.
14
15
16 (FRONT), 17 (REAR)

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 11-20-00 1I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NO
Fwd
(Ref) STEP
1
JET-A-FUEL
2 ANTI-ICE ADDITIVE REQUIRED. SEE PILOT’S
OPERATING HANDBOOK FOR OTHER APPROVED
FUELS, QUANTITY AND TYPE OF ADDITIVE.
Aft
(Ref)
Fuel Filler - Not to Scale

(Ref)
DURING FUELING AND DEFUELING OPERATIONS,

ATTACH GROUNDING CABLE TO GROUND ATTACH
PIN LOCATED ON MAIN STRUT.

1I13 11-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPEN
STATIC VENTS
KEEP CLEAN
(Ref) 4
6
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 11-20-00 1I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL POWER STATIC VENTS STATIC VENTS

28 VOLTS D.C. KEEP CLEAN KEEP CLEAN
TURN MASTER SWITCH
AND ALL EQUIP. OFF Aft
BEFORE INSERTING (Ref)
OR REMOVING PLUG.
(Ref) (Ref)
7
8
TC PC TC Piper PC
MANUFACTURED BY
THE NEW PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.
PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
MODEL MODEL
SERIAL NO. SERIAL NO.
PLATE NO.
PLATE NO.
PIPER PART NO. 100697-3 PIPER PART NO. 100697-004
S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697282 S/N’s 4697283 and up
9
DRAIN
Aft
(Ref)
10
1I15 11-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FILTER FUEL SUMP

DRAIN -- PUSH DRAIN
Inboard
(Ref) (Ref)
(Ref)
11
FUEL SUMP EPA DRAIN

DRAIN PUSH
GROUND ATTACH POINT
14
(Ref) (Ref)
Inboard Inboard
(Ref) (Ref)
12 13
STRUT AND TIRE

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
PLACE AIRPLANE ON JACKS AND EXTEND STRUT COMPLETELY.

RELEASE AIR AND REMOVE AIR VALVE. SLOWLY COMPRESS
THE STRUT. SLOWLY FILL COMPRESSED STRUT WITH
MIL-H-5606 HYDRAULIC FLUID THROUGH THE FILLER
OPENING UNTIL IT REACHES THE TOP OF THE FILLER PLUG
HOLE. MANUALLY COMPRESS AND EXTEND STRUT SEVERAL
TIMES TO REMOVE TRAPPED AIR. ADD FLUID EACH TIME IF
REQUIRED. REPLACE VALVE AND, WITH MAIN GEAR STILL CLEAR
OF GROUND, INFLATE STRUT TO 250 PSI AIR PRESSURE.
INFLATE MAIN TIRE TO 55 PSI AIR PRESSURE. REMOVE JACKS
FROM AIRPLANE (NORMAL MAIN GEAR STRUT EXTENSION IS
3.14 INCHES (7.98 CM) WITH AIRCRAFT ON A LEVEL SURFACE
AND AT EMPTY WEIGHT.)
15

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 11-20-00 1I16
1I17
installed.
STRUT AND TIRE
SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
PLACE AIRPLANE ON JACKS AND EXTEND STRUT COMPLETELY.

RELEASE AIR AND REMOVE AIR VALVE. SLOWLY COMPRESS
THE STRUT. SLOWLY FILL COMPRESSED STRUT WITH
MIL-H-5606 HYDRAULIC FLUID THROUGH THE FILLER
OPENING UNTIL IT REACHES THE TOP OF THE FILLER PLUG
17
16
HOLE. MANUALLY COMPRESS AND EXTEND STRUT SEVERAL

TIMES TO REMOVE TRAPPED AIR. ADD FLUID EACH TIME IF
LIMIT
TURN
REQUIRED. REPLACE VALVE AND, WITH NOSE GEAR STILL CLEAR

OF GROUND, INFLATE STRUT TO A PRESSURE OF 160 PSI.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INFLATE NOSE GEAR TIRE TO 70 PSI AIR PRESSURE. REMOVE

JACKS FROM AIRPLANE (NORMAL STRUT EXTENSION IS
2.70 INCHES (6.86 CM) WITH AIRCRAFT ON A LEVEL SURFACE

AND AT EMPTY WEIGHT WITH FULL FUEL AND OIL.)
11-20-00 AprPAGE 7
15/07
NOTE: Shown for S/N’s 4696126 & up; and, 4697001 thru 4697125 with Kit No. 767-336 or 767-338
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 11-20-00 1I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
104321 NEW
104350 AD
SEE FIGURE 2 1, 2
3
12a
12a 5
6 7
Placards and Markings - Interior

1I19 11-30-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13
14 16
15
13 15
11
LIGHT
LIGHT
PHONE
PHONE
MIC
EMERGENCY OXYGEN
MIC
IN DRAWER UNDER SEAT
PULL MASK OUT OF DRAWER FULLY
AT FULL EXTENSION GIVE CORD A TUG
EMERGENCY OXYGEN MAXIMUM DURATION---15 MINS
NO SMOKING WHILE IN USE
(AISLE ACCESS)
MAXIMUM DURATION---15 MINS
SEE POH 100700-062
NO SMOKING
OX Y G E N O N LY 100700-052
EMERGENCY
N O S T O WA G E
OXYGEN
PILOT OXYGEN LIGHT
OFF ON 100700-053 SWITCH
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
100700-054 IN DRAWER
12
25
8
LOOKING RIGHT
24
18 10 16
15
19
23 17
20
21
COURTESY
22
LIGHT
READING LIGHT
LIGHT
PHONE PHONE
THIS AIRCRAFT MUST BE OPERATED AS A NORMAL
CATEGORY AIRPLANE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
OPERATING LIMITATIONS STATED IN THE FORM OF
NO SMOKING
MIC MIC
THIS AIRCRAFT MUST BE OPERATED AS A NORMAL

CATEGORY AIRPLANE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
OPERATING LIMITATIONS STATED IN THE FORM OF
PLACARDS, MARKINGS AND MANUALS. NO ACROBATIC
MANEUVERS (INCLUDING SPINS) APPROVED. THIS
AIRCRAFT APPROVED FOR V.F.R., I.F.R., DAY
AND NIGHT ICING FLIGHT WHEN EQUIPPED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL.
WARNING
TURN OFF STROBE LIGHTS WHEN IN CLOSE
PROXIMITY TO GROUND OR DURING FLIGHT
THROUGH CLOUD, FOG OR HAZE.
PRESSURIZED LANDING NOT APPROVED.

PULL LATCH 100700-061
OPEN-
ROTATE HANDLE UP
ROTATE HANDLE DOWN
CLOSE- INSURE PIN WINDOWS GREEN
LOOKING LEFT

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTENTION MAX WEIGHT 5 LBS (2.2 KG)

THIS AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM SERVICED
WITH HFC-134a 4
REFRIGERANT.
COMPRESSOR SERVICED
WITH POLYALKLENE MAXIMUM WEIGHT THIS
GLYCOL (PAG)
LUBRICANT COMPARTMENT 4 LBS (1.8 KG)
1 5
INSURE PIN
BRAKE FLUID OPEN CLOSE
WINDOWS GREEN
RESERVOIR
SERVICE USING
MIL-H-5606
6
2
STARTING PROCEDURE
FOR EXTERNAL POWER
ENGINE OIL
SPECIFICATION MASTER SWITCH AND
RADIOS MUST BE OFF
DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT
BRANDS OF OIL.
SEE AIRPLANE FLIGHT
MANUAL FOR
OIL TANK CAPACITY
DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS
9.2 QTS
DO NOT OVERFILL
7
FILL WITH APPROVED
OIL TO MAXIMUM MARK
ON DIP STICK.
SEE LATEST REVISION

OF PRATT & WHITNEY
104349-20 G
100700-066 AF
100700-065 AF
CANADA ENGINE SERVICE

BULLETIN SB 3001 FOR PITOT S TAT I C S TAT I C PITOT S TAT I C PITOT
DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN
LIST OF APPROVED
LUBRICATING OILS.
WITH MEGGITT EFIS IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 & UP,
WITH AVIDYNE EFIS.
3
8

1I21 11-30-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
364 363 362 361 360 359 358 357

COMM NAV/GPS AUDIO XPNDR DME ADF EGPWS FLT
1 1 MKR 1 INFO
372 371 370 369 368 367 366 365

EADI 1 EHSI 1 AVIONICS AHRS 1 LTNG CLOCK
BUS TIE PROT
388 387 386 385 384 383 382 381

CABIN AIR CONDITIONINGVENT INVERTER CABIN AVIONICS CO-PILOT
FANS CONTROL POWER FAN TEMP DIMMING AIRSPEED
WARN
9 (Typical)
THE MARKINGS AND PLACARDS INSTALLED IN THIS AIRPLANE CONTAIN OPERATING

LIMITATIONS WHICH MUST BE COMPLIED WITH WHEN OPERATING THIS AIRPLANE
IN THE NORMAL CATEGORY. OTHER OPERATING LIMITATIONS WHICH MUST BE
COMPLIED WITH WHEN OPERATING THIS AIRPLANE IN THIS CATEGORY ARE CONTAINED
IN THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL. NO AEROBATIC MANEUVERS, INCLUDING SPINS,
APPROVED.
THIS AIRCRAFT APPROVED FOR V.F.R., I.F.R., DAY AND NIGHT ICING FLIGHT
WHEN EQUIPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL.
WARNING
TURN OFF STROBE LIGHTS WHEN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO GROUND OR DURING FLIGHT
THROUGH CLOUD, FOG OR HAZE.
PRESSURIZED LANDING NOT APPROVED.
10 (Typical)

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
396 395 394 393 392 391 390 389

COMM NAV/GPS XPNDR STORM RADAR RMI HAZ RADAR
2 2 2 SCOPE MFD AVOID ALTIMETER
404 403 402 401 400 399 398 397

CO-PILOT CO-PILOT EHSI 1 FUEL TEMP ENTERTAINMENT AHRS 2 EHSI 2 EADI 2
ATTITUDE DIR BUS 2
GYRO GYRO
11 (Typical)
BATTERY CHARGE
CONNECTOR
INTERCOM USE ONLY PIPER
APPROVED BATTERY
CHARGER 601-913
PHONE MIC DISCONNECT CHARGER

BEFORE ENGINE START
12 REINSTALL PROTECTIVE
COVER AFTER CHARGING
(IN S/N’S 4697256 & UP,

OR WITH PIPER KIT NO. 767-516 INSTALLED.)
EMERGENCY OXYGEN 12a


MAXIMUM DURATION — 15 MINS
SEE POH
13
1I23 11-30-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY EXIT
REMOVE GLASS
PULL DOOR IN -- LIFT UP
14
LIGHT COURTESY
LIGHT
READING
PHONE
NO SMOKING
LIGHT
MIC
PHONE
16
MIC
15
17

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100700-19
PULL LATCH
OPEN- ROTATE HANDLE UP
ROTATE HANDLE DOWN

CLOSE- INSURE PIN WINDOWS GREEN
18
INTERCOM
MIC PHONE
19
380 379 378 377 376 375 374 373

OVERSPEED L PITOT R PITOT PROP STALL SURFACE WINDSHIELD HEAT
TEST HEAT HEAT HEAT HEAT DE-ICE CONTROL POWER
ICE PROTECTION
348 347 346 345 344 343 342 341

FLAP HOUR LTNG OIL PRESS BLEED VACUUM CABIN EMERGENCY
INDICATOR METER PROT AIR PRESS PRESSURE
CONTROLLER DUMP
356 355 354 353 352 351 350 349

PITCH AUTOPILOT PROP TORQUE REVERSE DATA DATA AVIONICS
TRIM FEATHER LOCKOUT ACQUISITION ACQUISITION COOLING
20 (Typical)

1J1 11-30-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
316 315 314 313 312 311 310 309
IGNITION ENGINE START LANDING POSITION STROBE TAXI ICE

START CONTROL
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
324 323 322 321 320 319 318 317

ENGINE ENGINE STBY PILOT ANNUN MAP CABIN INSTR
DISPLAY DISPLAY ATTITUDE AIRSPEED PANEL
1 2 INDICATOR WARNING INTERIOR LIGHTS
332 331 330 329 328 327 326 325
LANDING GEAR HYDRALIC PUMP STALL RUDDER ALTERNATOR FIRE

INDICATION WARNING CONTROL POWER WARN TRIM FIELD DETECT
FLIGHT SYSTEM
340 339 338 337 336 335 334 333

PY HTR LEFT RIGHT FUEL QTY FLAP FLAP PILOT CO-PILOT
FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP MOTOR WARN TURN TURN
COORD COORD
21 (Typical)
100700-066 AF
100700-065 AF
100700-065 AF
PITOT S TAT I C S TAT I C PITOT S TAT I C

DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN DRAIN
IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 & UP, WITH MEGGITT

WITH AVIDYNE EFIS. EFIS
22

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDARD CARGO NET INSTALLED

MAX BAGGAGE THIS COMPARTMENT
100 LBS ( 45.3 KG)
GOLF CARGO NET INSTALLED
FWD
ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE

(LOCATED PILOTS SIDE BELOW PANEL)
100700-64 AE
100700-038 Y/AE
UP- ALTERNATE
NO BAGGAGE PERMISSIBLE DOWN- PRIMARY
IN THESE AREAS WHEN THE (SEE POH SECTION 5 FOR ALTERNATE
GOLF NET IS IN USE
MAX GOLF CLUB LOAD
STATIC SYSTEM CORRECTION)
105 LBS ( 47.6 KG )
IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 & UP,
MAX ADDITIONAL BAGGAGE WITH AVIDYNE EFIS.
BEHIND LEFT SEAT
50 LBS ( 22.6 KG )
23 24
25

1J3 11-30-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOME LIGHT
DIMMING
INC INC INC INC
PUSH FUEL PUMPS WINDSHLD HT PITOT PROP SURF
BATTERY AVIONICS GEN START MAN AUTO DEFOG ANTI ICE HEAT HEAT STALL HEAT DE-ICE
DEC DEC DEC DEC

SWITCH PANEL AVIONICS PANEL
OVERSPEED REVERSE FIRE EMER / IGNITION LCD’S TAXI / REC LT LANDING NAV STROBE ICE ENT
GOV TEST LOCK OUT DET TEST GND CLR ALT START MODE MAN AUTO PULSE TAXI LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT CONTROL
DAY
NIGHT
MAN / STOP DAY / NIGHT
A B C
PUSH FUEL PUMPS

BATTERY AVIONICS GEN START MAN AUTO
A OVERSPEED REVERSE
GOV TEST LOCK OUT
FIRE
DET TEST
EMER /
GND CLR ALT START MODE
IGNITION
MAN AUTO
MAN / STOP
DOME LIGHT
DIMMING
INC INC INC INC
B
DEC DEC DEC DEC
SWITCH PANEL AVIONICS PANEL
LCD’S
DAY
NIGHT
DAY / NIGHT
WINDSHLD HT PITOT PROP SURF

DEFOG ANTI ICE HEAT HEAT STALL HEAT DE-ICE
TAXI / REC LT LANDING NAV ICE ENT

C PULSE TAXI LIGHT LIGHT
STROBE
LIGHT LIGHT CONTROL
Placards and Markings - Overhead Switch Panel

Figure 2
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1J4
1J5
N P10
P6 P7 P8 P9 P11 P12
P5
P3 P4
P27
TOTAL USABLE FUEL CAPACITY
1140 LBS (517.1 KG)
VO 127 KIAS VLO 168 KIAS DN
SEE AFM VLO 129 KIAS UP
VLE 168 KIAS MAX
P13
P2
*P1
Placards and Markings - Instrument Panel

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FUEL TEMPERATURE LIMIT

JET A -34 C TO 50 C
P13
JET A-1 -41 C TO 50 C
055
P26 P25 P21 P19 P16 P15 P14

P23
P28*** P22
P24 P18 P1**
11-30-00 Apr
P20
* S/N'S 4697001 THRU 4697173 ONLY.
** S/N'S 4697174 & UP
*** S/N'S 4697159 & UP; AND,
4697001 THRU 4697158
WITH KIT NO. 767-380 INSTALLED.
P17
PAGE 11
104350 Z
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P37
P14
CAUTION
TOTAL HOURS
4
104350 AD
ELT
Hobbs
0
0
0
0
P15
P12
P1
SEE SHEET 1
P34
P31
P17
P29
P18
P32
P36
P20
P21
P33
P11
P30
P4
P3
P35
P27
P28
Effectivity
4697198; 4697216 and up Placards and Markings - Instrument Panel
with Avidyne Entegra Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 7)
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P8
104349-21/22 J
ELEV. TRIM
DAMPER
TRIM
YAW
P9
P5
P6
P7
THUNDERSTORM AREA PENETRATION
STORMSCOPE NOT TO BE USED FOR
NXXXXX
PUSH ON / OFF
STALL
TEST
P1
P4
P2
P3
1J7 11-30-00 Apr
PAGE 13
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 14
STANDBY COMPASS
GENERATOR
CONTROL
FOR CORRECT READING CHECK:
WINDSHIELD HT SWITCH OFF
11-30-00
PROP DE-ICE SWITCH OFF

COOLING SYSTEM OFF
COCKPIT AND CABIN HEATING OFF
TIE BUS
#1 AVIONICS #2 AVIONICS NON ESS. MAIN MAIN

P10 BUS BUS BUS BUS BUS ALTERNATOR BATTERY
Piper 102364 F

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P14
P11
DEFROST FLAPS
TOTAL USEABLE FUEL CAPACITY PULL / ON
1140 LBS. (517.1 KG)
P16
(USE 104349-05/06 IN P15
S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 & UP,
WITH AVIDYNE EFIS.
P12
FUEL SHUTOFF EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION

PULL TO RELEASE. SEE A.F.M.
EADI DISPLAY LIFT COVER - PULL OFF
BEFORE RE-ENGAGEMENT.
DOWN
1J8
P13 P17 P18

1J9
LANDING
AV MIC
84
9 67 GEAR PARK SELECT
BRAKE
UP PULL
MASK BOOM
P21
DOWN
P25
P19 XPNDR 2

SELECT ALTERNATE STATIC SOURCE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(LOCATED BELOW PANEL)

UP - ALTERNATE
DOWN - PRIMARY
P22
84967-22 B
102364 F
P26
CABIN
PRESS DUMP
RADAR
ECS CABIN COMFORT ALT
HIGH
NORM EMER
ON
11-30-00 Apr
P23
OFF
S G
Piper T Y
OFF OFF
B R
P20 AHRS 2
SELECT Y O
TEST
PAGE 15
84967-267 DN
15/07
P24 P27
Apr 15/07
PAGE 16
FUEL TEMPERATURE LIMIT

84967-315 EK
TAS
JET A -34°C TO 50°C F 0 ON
11-30-00
JET A-1 -41°C TO 50°C L

84967-292 ED A KIAS STBY
P
168 10
S
TEST
P28 135 20
84967-313 EK
118 36
P34
HOLD

P31
NAV 1 NAV 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

84967-314 EK
LANDING
GEAR YAW
DME TRIM
SELECT UP DAMPER
84967-319 EK
129 KIAS
84967-317 EK
168 KIAS
P29 DN
P35
84967-312 EK
COUPLED P32
P ELEV. TRIM
F
D PUSH ON/OFF
84967-316 EK
84967-318 EL
UNCOUPLED V0 127 KIAS
SEE AFM VLE 168 KIAS MAX
P30 P33 P36

1J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Absence of light during first
3 seconds of test indicates
possible G-switch failure
CAUTION
P37
Placards and Markings - Instrument Pane
1J11 11-30-00 Apr
PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Meyercord Decals (PIR-PPS-65104, Rev G.)
Decals installed on the instrument panel are Meyercord type manufactured by Mark-it Company, 291
Oswalt Avenue, Batavia, IL 60510, PH: (630) 879-7590. The following procedures should be followed in
the event one or more of these decals must be replaced.
A. Removal
CAUTION: DO NOT USE LACQUER THINNER ON ANY PANEL THAT HAS BEEN PAINTED
WITH ENAMEL OR LACQUER. INSTRUMENT PANELS ARE PAINTED AT THE
FACTORY WITH POLYURETHANE PAINTS.
Remove placard to be replaced with a clean cloth dampened with lacquer thinner.
CAUTION: MARK-IT J-70 SOLVENT WILL REMOVE ENAMEL, LACQUER, AND
POLYUTHERANE BASED PAINT PRODUCTS IF LIQUID IS DROPPED ONTO
PAINTED SURFACE AND NOT REMOVED IMMEDIATELY.
If panel is painted with enamel or lacquer use a clean cloth dampened with Mark-It J-70 solvent to
remove placard to be replaced.
B. Installation
(1) If required, clean surface to receive decal using alcohol. Newly painted surfaces need no
preparation.
(2) Mix a solution consisting of six (6) parts water and one (1) part J-70 solvent (P/N 179-497).
(3) Submerge decal in the mixed J-70 solution for approximately 3 to 5 seconds.
(4) Remove decal from mixed solution and lay in position.
(5) Using a plastic squeegee, squeegee out from center to edges to remove excess solution.
(6) Wait approximately 30 to 60 seconds, then slide the backing paper off and wipe up the excess
solution with a damp cloth.
(7) Wait at least 30 minutes at room temperature before wiping the face of the decal with a damp
cloth to remove excess solvent residue.
(8) Allow the decal to dry thoroughly, (tack free in 2 hours at room temp) before handling.
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1J13 11-30-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 1J14 THRU 1J24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 11-30-00 1J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
12
SERVICING
1K1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
12-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
12-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
12-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
1K3 12 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 12 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 1K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12 - SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 12-00-00 1 1K7

Engine/Compressor Cleaning 1 1K7
Aircraft Finish Care 1 1K7
Dupont Imron 6000 Paint System 1 1K7
Cleaning Exterior Surfaces 2 1K8
Cleaning Windshield and Windows (Except Pilot's) 3 1K9
Cleaning Pilot's Windshield 3 1K9
Cleaning Surface Deicing Equipment 4 1K10
Cleaning Landing Gear 4 1K10
Cleaning Interior 4 1K10
Cleaning Carpets 5 1K11
Cleaning and Maintenance of Relief Tube System 5 1K11
REPLENISHING 12-10-00 1 1K13

Service Points 1 1K13
Fuel System 2 1K14
Fuel Handling Practices 2 1K14
Jet Fuel Additives 2 1K14
Filling Fuel Cells 3 1K15
Draining Moisture From Fuel System 5 1K17
Draining Fuel System 5 1K17
Fuel Filter Servicing 6 1K18
Removing Biological Fuel Contamination 7 1K19
Brake System 8 1K20
Filling Brake System Reservoir 8 1K20
Draining Brake System 8 1K20
Landing Gear Oleo Struts 9 1K21
Filling Oleo Struts 9 1K21
Inflating Oleo Struts 10 1K22
Tires 10 1K22
Hydraulic System 11 1K23
Engine Lubrication 12 1K24
Draining and Flushing Oil Sump 12 1K24
Filling Oil Sump 12 1K24
Engine Oil Filter 12 1K24
Engine Oil Chip Detectors 13 1L1
Electrical System 13 1L1
Batteries 14 1L2
Power Plant 14 1L2
Propeller 14 1L2
Air Conditioning System Service Valves 14 1L2
Pilot’s Fixed Oxygen Cylinder 14 1L2
1K5 12 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12 - SERVICING
SCHEDULED SERVICING 12-20-00 1 1L5

Airframe Lubrication 1 1L5
Application of Grease 1 1L5
Application of Oil 1 1L5
Lubrication Charts 2 1L6
Chart 1 Special Instructions 2 1L6
Chart 2 Doors and Seats 3 1L7
Chart 3 Main Landing Gear and Hydraulic System 4 1L8
Chart 4 Nose Gear 5 1L9
Chart 5 Control System 6 1L10
Chart 6 Propeller and Power Plant 9 1L13
Tire Balance 10 1L14
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 12 - CONTENTS 1K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
This chapter covers all routine servicing of airplane, scheduled and non-scheduled, including
replenishment of fuel, oil, hydraulic fluid, oxygen, tire pressure, lubrication requirements, servicing of
oleo struts with air and oil, etc. Pay special attention to all WARNINGS or CAUTIONS.
1. Engine / Compressor Cleaning

Pratt & Whitney Canada recommends a compressor wash be carried out weekly for airplanes operating
in air which is occasionally salt-laden, and more often if significant salt or atmospheric pollution is
suspected.
Full, detailed instructions for the washing of the engine and compressor are provided in Pratt & Whitney
Canada Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Maintenance Manual (P/N 3021442), 71-00-00, Cleaning.
In addition, the following instructions should be followed:
CAUTION: BEFORE ANY TYPE OF CLEANING MAKE SURE THE CABLES ARE PROPERLY
SEALED TO PREVENT WATER FROM ENTERING THE CABLE HOUSINGS. TRY NOT TO
DIRECT ANY WATER PRESSURE AT THESE SEALS. WATER COULD FREEZE AND
BIND CABLES UNDER CERTAIN CONDITIONS.
CAUTION: ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COOL FOR AT LEAST 40 MINUTES BEFORE PERFORMING A
COMPRESSOR WASH.
CAUTION: BEFORE CONDUCTING A COMPRESSOR WASH, SELECT “BLEED AIR OFF.”
CAUTION: OBSERVE STARTER OPERATING LIMITS OF 30 SECONDS ON 60 SECONDS OFF, 30
SECONDS ON 60 SECONDS OFF, 30 SECONDS ON AND THEN 30 MINUTES OFF.
INSURE THAT P3 HEATER (FUEL CONTROL HEAT) CIRCUIT BREAKER IS PULLED.
NOTE: Motor engine with starter only. Make sure ignition is off and fuel “firewall shut-off valve” is closed.
NOTE: Due to chemicals in tap water which may cause deposits on compressor blades, tap water
should not be used.
2. Aircraft Finish Care
WARNING: DO NOT USE GASOLINE, KEROSENE, ALCOHOL, BENZENE, CARBON
TETRACHLORIDE, THINNER, ACETONE OR WINDOW CLEANING SPRAYS TO CLEAN
AIRPLANE.
The entire airplane is carefully finished inside and out to assure maximum service life. The external
surfaces are coated with durable polyurethane finish.
A. Dupont Imron 6000 Paint System
CAUTION: FAILURE TO OBSERVE THE PROPER "FINISH CARE" GUIDELINES MAY RESULT
IN DAMAGE OR LOSS OF SHINE OF THE AIRCRAFT PAINT. IMPROPER CARE
MAY ALSO VOID THE WARRANTY REGARDING THE AIRCRAFT FINISH.
Piper aircraft delivered in 1999 and later use the new Dupont Imron 6000 paint system. The
guidelines outlined below must be followed to prevent damage to the finish and ensure long paint
life.
(1) For the first 30 days after painting:
(a) Hand wash the aircraft often. Use fresh water only.
(b) Avoid parking under trees or places where birds roost. If sap, bird droppings, or insect
remains are discovered, rinse them off immediately. (Sap, bird droppings, or insect
remains will damage the paint during this period.)
1K7 12-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) For the first 120 days after painting:

(a) To remove heavy soil, use mild liquid soap. Never use detergent.
(b) DO NOT WAX THE AIRCRAFT WITHIN 120 DAYS OF PAINTING!
(3) For long term paint finish protection:
(a) Park in a sheltered area whenever possible.
(b) Never use a scraper to remove ice or snow from painted surfaces.
(c) Never let avgas, oil, or hydraulic fluid stand on painted surfaces. (This will permanently
damage the finish.)
(d) Never wash the aircraft in the hot sun.
(e) Never wipe the finish with a dry cloth, always use fresh water.
(f) Avoid abrasive cleaners, chemicals, abrasive wax, or brushes.
(g) Have paint nicks or scratches touched up as soon as possible to maintain the aircraft's
corrosion protection.
To summarize, New Piper aircraft using the new Dupont paint system need special attention in the
early days of ownership.
B. Cleaning Exterior Surfaces
CAUTION: IF PAINT IS LESS THAN SIX MONTHS OLD, SEE “DUPONT IMRON 6000 PAINT
SYSTEM,” ABOVE.
CAUTION: DO NOT DIRECT ANY STREAM OF WATER OR CLEANING SOLUTIONS AT THE
OPENINGS IN THE PITOT HEAD, STATIC PORTS, ALTERNATE STATIC PORTS OR
FUSELAGE BELLY DRAINS.
CAUTION: AFTER WASHING AIRPLANE EXTERIOR, OPEN COWLING GULL-WING DOORS
AND INSPECT ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE AREA (ESPECIALLY WHERE THE
STARTER-GENERATOR ATTACHES) FOR WATER ACCUMULATION. IF WATER
FOUND, BLOW DRY WITH SHOP AIR.
The airplane should be washed with a mild soap and water solution. Harsh abrasives or alkaline
soaps or detergents could scratch painted or plastic surfaces or corrode metal. Cover areas where
a cleaning solution could cause damage. To wash the airplane use the following procedure:
(1) Flush away loose dirt with water.
(2) Apply cleaning solution with a soft cloth, a sponge or a soft brush.
(3) To remove exhaust stains, allow the solution to remain on the surface longer.
(4) To remove stubborn oil and grease stains, use a soft cloth dampened with naphtha - sparingly.
Flush immediately with a mild soap and water solution.
(5) Rinse all surfaces thoroughly.
(6) Any good automotive wax may be used to protect and preserve painted surfaces. Soft cleaning
cloths or a chamois should be used to prevent scratches when cleaning or polishing. A heavier
coat of wax on leading surfaces will reduce the abrasion problems in these areas. Refer to
surface de-ice cleaning procedures.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 12-00-00 1K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cleaning Windshield and Windows (Except Pilot's Windshield)

CAUTION: USE ONLY WATER AND MILD SOAP WHEN CLEANING THE HEATED
WINDSHIELD. USE OF ANY OTHER CLEANING AGENT OR MATERIAL MAY
CAUSE DISTORTION OR DAMAGE TO WINDSHIELD COATINGS.
(1) Remove dirt, mud and other loose particles from exterior surfaces with clean water.
(2) Wash interior and exterior window surfaces with mild soap and warm water. Use a soft cloth or
sponge in a straight back and forth motion. Do not rub harshly.
WARNING: DO NOT USE GASOLINE, ALCOHOL, BENZENE, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
THINNER, ACETONE, STRONG SOLVENTS OR WINDOW CLEANING
SPRAYS. DO NOT USE PLASTIC CLEANER ON HEATED GLASS
WINDSHIELDS.
(3) Remove oil and grease with a cloth dampened with Plexiglas Polish and Cleaner, P/N 403D or
similar substance conforming to Federal Specification (P-P-560) or kerosene.
(4) Rinse windows thoroughly and dry with soft lint-free cloth.
(5) A superficial scratch or mar in plastic can be removed by polishing out the scratch with
jeweler's rouge.
(6) When windows are clean, apply a thin coat of polishing wax. Rub lightly with a soft cloth. Do
not apply wax to heated windshields with electrical heating elements.
(7) Apply REPCON repellent or equivalent to windows and windshield to improve visibility during
flights through rain. Apply only according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Refer to 91-00-00,
Consumable Materials.)
D. Cleaning Pilot's Windshield
The surface of the pilot's windshield should be cleaned in a manner that will protect the special
water repellent coating.
(1) Flush with clean water to remove excessive amounts of dirt and other substances. Adhered
particles should be dislodged using fingers or fingernails.
(2) Use only clean materials such as a soft cloth or clean sponge or soft paper towel (such as
Kaydry® Wipers). Wash with a 50/50 solution of isopropanol and water. Alternative cleaning
solutions that can be used if isopropanol is not available include:
(a) 50/50 solution of rubbing alcohol and water.
(b) Mild liquid detergents (such as Ivory Dishwashing Liquid or Joy® Dishwashing Liquid
mixed 1/4 oz. per gallon of water).
(c) Windex® Glass Cleaner
NOTE: Do not use any abrasive materials (such as pumice or any strong acids or bases as
these materials may damage the coating.
(3) Flush thoroughly with clean water and dry. Wipe dry with strokes in one direction using only
clean materials such as a damp soft cloth, damp sponge, or soft paper towel (such as Kaydry®
Wipers).
NOTE: Do not apply any polish or wax to the glass surface.
1K9 12-00-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Cleaning Surface Deicing Equipment

The deice boots should be cleaned when the aircraft is washed using a mild soap and water
solution.
In cold weather, wash the boots with the airplane inside a warm hangar if possible. If the cleaning is
to be done outdoors, heat the soap and water solution before taking it out to the airplane. If difficulty
is encountered with the water freezing on boots, direct a flow of warm air along the region being
cleaned, using a portable type ground heater.
As an alternate cleaning solvent, use benzol or non-leaded gasoline. Moisten the cleaning cloth in
the solvent, scrub lightly and then with a clean dry cloth, wipe dry so that the cleaner does not have
time to soak into the rubber.
CAUTION: PETROLEUM PRODUCTS SUCH AS THESE ARE INJURIOUS TO RUBBER AND
THEREFORE SHOULD BE USED SPARINGLY IF AT ALL.
When deice boots are clean, a coating of B.F. Goodrich Icex should be applied. Icex is compounded
to lower the strength of adhesion between ice and rubber surface of the deice boots.
F. Cleaning Landing Gear
CAUTION: DO NOT USE HIGH PRESSURE SPRAY WASH EQUIPMENT. ITS USE CAN INJECT
SOAP SOLUTION AND WATER INTO THE WHEEL BEARINGS AND OTHER
INTERNAL CAVITIES RESULTING IN CORROSION AND REDUCED SERVICE LIFE.
Before cleaning landing gear, place plastic cover or similar material over wheel and brake assembly.
(1) Place pan under gear to catch waste.
(2) Spray (low pressure only) or brush gear area, as required, with solvent or mixture of solvent
and degreaser.
(3) Allow solvent to remain on gear for 5 to 10 minutes. Rinse gear with additional solvent and
allow to dry.
(4) Remove cover from wheel and brake assembly.
(5) Hand wash wheels and brakes with a mild soap and water solution, rinse, and remove catch
pan.
(6) Lubricate gear per Lubrication Chart,12-20-00.
G. Cleaning Interior
(1) Vinyl interior surfaces may be cleaned with a damp cloth and mild soap and water solution.
(2) Leather may be cleaned with a mild hand soap and water solution or with a saddle soap.
Follow the precautions which apply to the cleaning of any fine leather product. Avoid saturation
and never use detergents or harsh cleaning solutions on leather.
CAUTION: USE OF COMMON HOUSEHOLD CLEANERS AND POLISHES ON WOOD
LAMINATED SURFACES COULD BE VERY HARMFUL.
(3) Wood laminated surfaces should be maintained using only a high grade furniture wax.
(4) All upholstery fabrics are Scotchgard treated and may be cleaned as follows:
Spilled oily and watery liquids will generally bead up on the fabric and can be blotted away
leaving little or no stain. Blot spills up as quickly as possible with an absorbent cloth, tissue or
sponge. If the material is a solid or semi-solid, such as butter, remove the excess by gently
scraping with a table knife. Often, blotting will remove all traces of stain but if the staining agent
is not completely removed by blotting, the following techniques are suggested:
(a) Water-based stains such s ketchup, milk, ice cream, coffee: wipe the stain with a cloth
wet with water containing a detergent or ammonia (4 fluid ounces of ammonia to one
gallon of water). Repeat if necessary.
(b) Oil based stains such as salad dressing, butter or mayonnaise may be removed by either
of the following procedures:
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 12-00-00 1K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Apply “Texize K-2R Spot Remover” by spraying or rubbing into the fabric and let dry.
Vacuum off the residual powder. Repeat if necessary; or,
(2) Wet a cloth with a solvent type spot cleaner such as “Energine” or “Renuzit” and wipe
or gently rub the stained area. Turn cloth and rewet with solvent often. Repeat until
stain disappears.
NOTE: Test the cleaner on an inconspicuous portion of the fabric to test for discoloration.
Also avoid soaking or harsh rubbing.
(c) To remove residual detergent left on the fabric, wipe the entire fabric surface with a cloth
dampened with water. The cloth should be rinsed in clean water several times. This
procedure will ensure that the treatment will continue to function.
H. Cleaning Carpets
WARNING: SOLVENT CLEANERS REQUIRE ADEQUATE VENTILATION.
Use a small whisk broom or vacuum cleaner to remove dirt. For soiled spots, use a nonflammable
dry cleaning fluid. Floor carpets may be removed and cleaned like any household carpet.
I. Cleaning and Maintenance of Relief Tube System
For airplanes equipped with a relief tube system, the corrosive effects of urine or other liquids
poured through the system are extreme and heightened attention to the cleanliness of this system
is indicated, both inside and outside the aircraft. In the interior, the funnel tube assembly, rubber
hose and surrounding sheet metal must be cleaned at the termination of each flight, if the system
has been used. Likewise, attention to the exterior of the aircraft is equally important and exterior
surfaces must be cleaned as described below.
CAUTION: THE CORROSIVE AFFECTS OF URINE ON PAINTED AND UNPAINTED SURFACES
CANNOT BE UNDERSTATED. CORROSION MAY APPEAR IN SURROUNDING
AREAS IF CLEANING IS DEFERRED FOR EVEN ONE DAY!
(1) Interior
(a) After each use of the relief tube, the area surrounding the relief tube should be examined
for spillage and cleaned according to the procedures in paragraphs (4) and (5), above.
Clean the area inside the box and access door, funnel, and tube using mild soap and
water. After cleaning, flush with clean water to ensure that no soapy residue remains. Dry
system thoroughly.
CAUTION: SHOULD SPILLAGE EXTENDING INTO THE FUSELAGE BE EVIDENT,
PROMPT MAINTENANCE ACTION IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE URINE
SPILLAGE IN THE FUSELAGE STRUCTURE IS NEUTRALIZED. REMOVE
PANELS TO ACCESS THE FLOOR STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED.
(b) Prepare to flush the relief tube assembly by placing a catch can underneath the relief tube
outlet. Flush tube by pouring a solution of baking soda (10%) and water through the tube,
flushing out the entire system. Flush again with at least 1/2 gallon of clean water. Low
pressure (LP) shop air may be blown through the relief tube system to dry it.
(2) Exterior
Exterior bottom painted surfaces of the airplane must be cleaned from the firewall to the tip of
the tail, including the bottom of the tail surfaces, at termination of each flight during which the
relief tube system was used. Cleaning should occur per paragraph B, above, with the exception
that after completion of washing, a solution of baking soda (10%) and water should be applied
to the entire area and allowed to remain for a few minutes. The area must then be thoroughly
rinsed with clean water. Dry the area thoroughly and inspect for paint chipping and/or
corrosion. Touch up paint as necessary.
1K11 12-00-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 12-00-00 1K12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPLENISHING
1. Service Points
1. FUEL TANK FILLERS

2. MLG FILLER VALVE
3. HYDRAULIC PUMP/RESERVOIR
4. EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE
5. ENGINE OIL FILLER
6. BATTERIES
7. FUEL SUMP DRAINS
8. EPA DRAIN
9. CHIP DETECTORS
10. PROPELLER HUB
11. NLG FILLER VALVE
12a. FUEL FILTER
12b. FUEL FILTER DRAIN
13. BRAKE RESERVOIR
14. A/C SERVICE VALVES
Service Points
Figure 1
1K13 12-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Fuel System
At intervals of 100 hours or 90 days, whichever comes first, clean the fuel filter bowl and element. The
fuel filter is located on the lower left side of the engine compartment and accessed through a plate in the
lower left forward fuselage (see 6-00-00, Figure 5). See also Chapter 28 and 5-20-00.
A. Fuel Handling Practices
The handling of turbine fuel as used in this airplane requires some special attention and safety
precautions which cannot be overstated. There are several problems which are not normally
associated with aviation gasoline. One is water or microscopic particles of free water suspended in
the fuel, another is microbiological contaminants or micro-organisms which live and multiply in the
water interfaces with turbine fuel. Due to these problems, turbine fuel requires good fuel handling
practices to assure that the airplane is serviced with clean fuel. The following steps should be used
to minimize the possible introduction of contaminants into the fuel system and maintain a clean
condition within the fuel cells:
(1) Know the source (supplier) of the fuel to be used, ascertain that it is properly stored and
filtered as it is passed from the storage area to the airplane.
(2) Perform regular fuel filter inspections to determine if any sludge is present. (Microbiological
contamination is visible as a slime or sludge which may vary in color, i.e. red, brown, gray or
black.) Micro-organisms have a tendency to mat and cause interference with fuel flow.
Reference to FAA Manual A.C. 65-9, Chapter 4 gives complete explanation on fuels and
related problems.
(3) Maintain a clean fuel system by periodically flushing the fuel cells to remove any contaminants
within.
B. Jet Fuel Additives
CAUTION: USE ONLY THOSE FUELS AND ADDITIVES SPECIFIED IN THE LATEST REVISION
OF PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 3044.
CAUTION: FOLLOW MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS WHEN USING THESE PRODUCTS.
Condensation of water in the fuel tanks increases the possibility of microbiological growth and
contamination of the fuel. This contamination can damage skins, coatings and sealants in the tanks.
Fuel additives conforming to MIL-I-27686 and/or biocidal agents, such as Biobor JF, are compounds
which contain anti-fungicidal agents. Use of either of these additives in the fuel tanks will reduce the
possibility of contamination of fuel and fuel filters/lines.
(1) MIL-I-27686D and MIL-I-27686E Fuel Anti-icing Inhibitors
WARNING: THESE ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES CONTAINS ETHYLENE GLYCOL
MONOETHYL ETHER WHICH IS HIGHLY TOXIC. AVOID ALL DIRECT
CONTACT WITH SKIN AND CLOTHING. ANY CLOTHING ACCIDENTALLY
CONTAMINATED SHOULD BE PROMPTLY REMOVED AND THE SKIN
WASHED WITH SOAP AND WATER. PREVENT CONTACT WITH EYES AND
AVOID INHALATION OF VAPORS. IF CONTACT IS MADE WITH EYES, FLUSH
WITH WATER FOR 15 MINUTES. CONSULT A PHYSICIAN AS RAPIDLY AS
POSSIBLE AFTER ALL CONTACT CASES.
CAUTION: ASSURE THAT THE ADDITIVE IS DIRECTED INTO THE FLOWING FUEL
STREAM. THE ADDITIVE FLOW SHOULD START AFTER AND STOP BEFORE
THE FUEL FLOW. DO NOT PERMIT THE CONCENTRATED ADDITIVE TO
COME IN CONTACT WITH THE AIRCRAFT PAINTED SURFACES OR THE
INTERIOR SURFACES OF THE FUEL TANKS.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: SOME FUELS HAVE ANTI-ICING ADDITIVES PREBLENDED IN THE FUEL AT

THE REFINERY, SO NO FURTHER BLENDING SHOULD BE PERFORMED.
CAUTION: THESE ADDITIVES ARE NOT REPLACEMENTS FOR PREFLIGHT DRAINING

OF THE FUEL SYSTEM DRAINS.
The MIL-I-27686 D & E Fuel Anti-Icing Inhibitors, primarily are anti-icing agents, however they
also have excellent microbiological sludge deterrent characteristics. They are very soluble in
water, and only slightly soluble in fuel, which mandates that the blending with fuel be
accomplished in a precise manner. Use of a metering device when blending the additive is
recommended. Such a device permits injection of the agent into a flowing stream of fuel to
ensure even disbursement. When blending the additive, the concentration should not be less
than 0.10 percent or more than 0.15 percent by volume. Except for the information contained
herein and in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook, the manufacturer’s mixing or blending
instructions should be carefully followed.
(2) Biofor JF (Biocide)
(a) Biobor JF is not an anti-icing agent and is intended to be used specifically as a fuel
biocide. The compound is an extremely efficient biocidal agent and is soluble in the fuel as
well as water. Biobor JF disperses throughout the entire fuel system to even the most
remote areas soon after introduction into the fuel system. This compound is used as a
periodic treatment in concentrations of 135 ppm when the airplane has been operated in
an environment conductive to contamination or when evidence of such contamination is
found. Biobor JF may also be used in maximum concentrations of 270 ppm as a single
dose shock treatment to clean out and sterilize a very contaminated system. Biobor JF is
not volatile and may remain in the tank until the fuel is used.
(b) The preferred method of introducing Biobor JF into the fuel is by injection through a
metering device. If no metering device is available, blending may be accomplished by
batch blending or by over-the-wing blending while filling the tanks. When one half the
required quantity of fuel has been added, gradually introduce the compound directly into
the stream of fuel while the remaining one half of fuel is added. Complete mixing is
necessary depending on the severity of the contamination. It must be used at a high
enough concentration to kill, not control the infestation. When used only periodically, it
must be used often enough to contact the entire surface of the fuel tank interiors and
remain in contact up to 72 hours to effect the kill. An airplane which has been treated and
flown, should be re-treated at consecutive fills so that a 72 hour contact time is
accomplished.
C. Filling Fuel Cells
WARNING: DURING FUEL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, A GROUND WIRE
ATTACHED FROM EACH MAIN GEAR GROUNDING PIN TO SEPARATE APPROVED
GROUNDING STAKES SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT UNGROUNDING OF THE
AIRCRAFT DUE TO ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION OF ONE GROUND WIRE.
CAUTION: USE ONLY THOSE FUELS AND ADDITIVES SPECIFIED IN THE LATEST REVISION
OF PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 3044.
Observe all required precautions for handling Jet Fuel. Fill the fuel tanks with the fuel as specified
on the placard adjacent to the filler neck. Each wing tank has a capacity of 86.5 U.S. gallons, for a
total capacity of 173 U.S. gallons. Three U.S. gallons are considered unusable fuel.
1K15 12-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102430 6 AN
TO ENGINE
FUEL FILTER
FUEL
FILTER
DRAIN
FUEL SYSTEM DRAIN CAP
LOOKING AFT
MANUAL SHUT-OFF VALVE
TANK
ER
D
HEA
IG HT
MR
FRO
FROM LEFT
ER
TAN
K
FROM LEFT
HEADER TANK
SUMP
FUEL FILTER DRAIN LEFT SUMP DRAIN
FUEL FILTER ACCESS PANEL (REMOVED)

(SEE 6-00-00, FIGURE 5)
LOOKING INBOARD FROM LEFT
Fuel Filter and System Drains

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Draining Moisture From Fuel System (See Figure 2)

CAUTION: WHEN DRAINING ANY AMOUNT OF FUEL, CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO
ENSURE THAT NO FIRE HAZARD EXISTS BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE.
The fuel tank sumps and fuel filter should be drained daily prior to first flight and after refueling to
avoid the accumulation of water or sediment. Each fuel header tank is equipped with an individual
quick drain fed from the sump at the lower inboard rear corner of the tank. These sump drains are
located, one on each side, on the bottom of the lower forward fuselage at the leading edge of the
wing to fuselage joint. The fuel filter quick drain is located adjacent to the left side sump drain. Drain
fuel tank sumps and filter as follows:
(1) Using a drain cup with pin, drain each header tank sump through its individual quick drain.
Examine the contents of the drain cup for water and sediment. Repeat until all water and
sediment is removed.
NOTE: If the fuel system has been completely drained, the sump drains will need to be
reprimed before a fuel sample can be taken. With at least 10 gallons of fuel in each
wing, hold open both left and right sump drains until fuel starts to flow - this may take
10 to 15 seconds. The drains are now primed and a fuel sample may be taken.
(2) Using a drain cup with pin, drain the fuel filter through its individual quick drain. Examine the
contents of the drain cup for water and sediment. Repeat until all water and sediment is
removed.
(3) After refueling, delay sump sampling for several hours. This will permit water and contaminants
to flow to the sump drains for detection.
E. Draining Fuel System (See Figure 2)
A fuel system drain is provided adjacent to the fuel filter. The fuel system may be drained as follows:
(1) Completely
NOTE: Whenever the fuel system is drained completely, consider completing a “Full Range
Check” (see 28-40-00) when refueling the aircraft.
To drain both left and right wings:
(a) Level airplane. (See 8-20-00.)
(b) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(c) Remove the fuel filter access plate. (See 6-00-00, Figure 5.)
(d) Place a suitable container beneath the fuel system drain.
(e) Remove the fuel system drain cap and attach a suitable hose to direct the fuel flow into
the container.
(f) Push in manual fuel shut-off.
NOTE: Defueling can be expedited by running the fuel boost pumps. When defueling both
wings, select “Fuel Pumps - Manual” on the overhead switch panel. The float switch in
each header tank should shutdown its respective boost pump with approximately 2.5
gallons remaining, but the prudent operator will monitor the process to manually
shutdown either fuel pump if a tank runs dry. The individual pump may be shutdown by
pulling its circuit breaker.
(g) When fuel stops flowing from the fuel system drain, the remaining fuel in the system may
be drained through the fuel filter and sump quick drains.
1K17 12-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Only one wing

To drain only one wing:
(a) Level airplane. (See 8-20-00.)
(b) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(c) Remove the fuel filter access plate. (See 6-00-00, Figure 5.)
(d) Place a suitable container beneath the fuel system drain.
(e) Remove the fuel system drain cap and attach a suitable hose to direct the fuel flow into
the container.
NOTE: Defueling only one wing requires the use of the fuel boost pump in the wing being
defueled.
(f) When defueling only one wing, pull the circuit breaker of the unwanted pump.
(g) Push in manual fuel shut-off.
(h) Set the Fuel Pumps switch to “Manual”. The float switch in the header tank should
shutdown the boost pump with approximately 2.5 gallons remaining, but the prudent
operator will monitor the process to manually shutdown the fuel pump if the tank runs dry.
The operating pump may be shutdown by pulling its circuit breaker.
(i) When the pump shuts down, pull the manual fuel shut-off.
(j) The remaining fuel in the wing being drained may be drained through that side’s fuel
sump quick drain.
F. Fuel Filter Servicing
The fuel filter is located on the lower left side of the engine compartment and accessed through a
plate in the lower left forward fuselage (See Figure 2 and 6-00-00, Figure 5).
(1) Removal
(a) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(b) Remove fuel filter access plate.
(c) Drain residual fuel in filter and lines through the fuel filter quick drain.
(d) Disconnect the fuel filter quick drain line from the bottom of the filter bowl.
(e) Unscrew the fuel filter bowl and remove the bowl and filter element.
(2) Cleaning and Inspection
(a) Flush fuel bowl with solvent AM3-3160 (i.e. - Varsol.) Clean deposits, if any, with a
medium stiff brush and solvent.
(b) Blow dry with shop air.
(c) Inspect filter element for distortion and debris, replace as required. DO NOT clean the filter
element.
(3) Installation
(a) Place filter element and bowl in position and screw in filter bowl.
(b) Connect the fuel filter quick drain line to the bottom of the filter bowl.
(c) Push in manual fuel shut-off.
(d) Clear air by draining the fuel filter quick drain until fuel flows continuously.
(e) Check for leaks.
(f) Replace fuel filter access plate.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1K18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Removing Biological Fuel Contamination

Fuel system contamination presents a bigger potential problem in turbine fuel systems than in fuel
systems using aviation gasoline because of turbine fuels greater affinity for water. Micro-organisms
thrive when water droplets and fuel are mixed. By-products created by this form of contamination
attack fuel cell sealants and metal components; fuel system must be kept clean and periodically
inspected to ensure it is free of water and other foreign matter. If biological contamination exists,
evidenced by presence of red, brown, gray, or black slime in fuel tanks, lines, pumps and filters,
thoroughly clean all system components with lowest octane aviation gasoline available.
Proceed as follows:
WARNING: DURING FUEL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PRACTICES, A GROUND WIRE
ATTACHED FROM EACH MAIN GEAR GROUNDING PIN TO SEPARATE APPROVED
GROUNDING STAKES SHOULD BE USED TO PREVENT UNGROUNDING OF THE
AIRCRAFT DUE TO ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION OF ONE GROUND WIRE.
(1) Level aircraft.
(2) Defuel airplane completely per paragraph E, above.
NOTE: Only use container(s) designed for use with contaminated fuel.
(3) Remove both sump drains and the fuel filter quick drain and ensure all fuel is removed.
(4) Remove wing root glove access plates and panels.
(5) Remove fuel cell access covers.
(6) Remove boost pumps.
(7) Remove engine cowling and fuel filter access plate.
(8) Remove fuel filter. Clean or replace as required.
(9) Remove engine-driven high-pressure fuel pump’s inlet and outlet filters. Clean or replace as
required.
(10) Remove and clean all finger screens, probes, and check valves.
(11) Clean fuel filter bowl, element, and housing with aviation gasoline and inspect components for
etching. If etching exists, replace affected component.
CAUTION: BRUSH MUST HAVE LANYARD ATTACHED TO PREVENT BRUSH FROM
FALLING WITHIN CELL.
(12) Use Stoddard solvent and soft bristle brush to scrub affected cells. Remove any particles of
contamination in fuel cells with tack rag. When fuel cell cleaning is completed, ensure no
equipment is left in fuel cells and reinstall all access covers.
(13) Use lowest octane aviation gasoline available. Thoroughly flush all fuel cells, tanks, connecting
fuel lines, and boost pumps.
(14) Inspect all fuel cells, tanks, pumps, and lines for deterioration. The micro-organism by-products
attack fuel sealants and coatings, and etch underlying metals.
(15) Reinstall all finger screens, probes, and check valves.
(16) Reinstall boost pumps and safety.
(17) Reinstall both sump drains and the fuel filter quick drain.
(18) Reinstall fuel filter without filter element.
(19) Reinstall engine-driven high-pressure fuel pump’s inlet and outlet filters.
1K19 12-10-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(20) Flush system as follows:

(a) Remove fuel system drain cap and place a contaminated fuel container beneath the fuel
system drain.
(b) Pull all circuit breakers except those controlling fuel boost pumps.
(c) Add eight gallons of aviation gasoline in each wing.
(d) Place master switch in ON position and actuate boost pumps.
(e) After pumping two gallons of aviation gasoline using pumps, observe fuel coming from
fuel drain.
(21) Check all lines and fittings for leaks.
(22) Continue to pump aviation gasoline through system until clean fuel flows into contaminated
container. Then shut-off pumps.
(23) Reinstall filter element in fuel filter and safety.
(24) Reinstall fuel system drain cap.
(25) Check system for leaks.
(26) Reinstall wing root glove, fuel cell, and tank access covers, plates and panels.
(27) Reinstall engine cowlings.
(28) Fill each wing with 30 gallons of lowest octane aviation gasoline available. (Add one quart of
120 aviation grade mineral oil to every 100 gallons of fuel.) Run engine. Observe all cautions
when operating engine.
NOTE: Make logbook entry each time engine is run on aviation gasoline. Refer to latest
revision of Pratt & Whitney Service Bulletin No. 3044.
(29) Inspect fuel filter after operating engine. Look for evidence of microbiological contamination. If
contamination remains, repeat cleaning procedure.
(30) Clean fuel filter; reinstall and safety.
3. Brake System
The brake system contains a hydraulic fluid reservoir through which the brake system is periodically
serviced. Fluid is drawn from the reservoir by the brake master cylinders to maintain the volume of fluid
required for maximum braking efficiency. Spongy brake pedal actions is often an indication that the brake
fluid reservoir is running low on fluid or air. When repairs to brake system components or bleeding the
system are required, refer to instructions in 32-40-00.
A. Filling Brake System Reservoir
The brake system reservoir must be filled with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) to the level marked on
the reservoir. The reservoir, located on the upper left side of the firewall in the engine compartment,
must be checked at every 100 hour inspection or every 90 days, whichever comes first, and
replenished as necessary. Access to the reservoir is through the left gull-wing door on the rear
upper cowling. If fluid level is low, it must be filled with filtered hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606). No
adjustment to the brakes is necessary, but they must be checked periodically per instructions given
in 32-40-00.
B. Draining Brake System
To drain the brake system, disconnect the supply hose from the fitting on the bottom of the cylinder
and open the bleeder valve at the top of the cylinder. This will empty the piston chamber. Pump the
desired brake pedal to clear the line of fluid. To clean system, flush with denatured alcohol.
NOTE: If brake system is drained, parts replaced, or line connections broken, pressure fill and
bleed system per procedure in 32-40-00. Procedure assures air is not trapped in system.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Landing Gear Oleo Struts

Air-oil type oleo struts should be maintained at proper strut tube exposure for best oleo action. Nose
gear strut piston tube exposure is 2.7 ± .25 inches. Main gear strut piston tube exposure is 3.14 ± .25
inches. Measure with the airplane sitting on a level surface under normal static load. (Empty weight of
airplane plus full fuel and oil). If the strut has less tube exposure than prescribed, determine whether it
needs air or oil by rocking the airplane. If the oleo strut oscillates with short strokes (approximately one
inch) and the airplane settles to its normal position within one or two cycles after the rocking force is
removed, the oleo strut requires inflating. Check the valve core and filler plug for air leaks, correct if
required, and add air or nitrogen as described in Inflating Oleo Struts. If the oleo strut oscillates with long
strokes (approximately three inches) and the airplane continues to oscillate after the rocking force is
removed, the oleo struts require fluid. Check the oleo for indications of oil leaks, correct if required and
add fluid as described in Filling Oleo Struts. For landing gear and/or oleo strut repair procedures, refer to
32-10-00 and 32-20-00.
WARNING: DO NOT RELEASE AIR BY REMOVING THE STRUT VALVE CORE OR FILLER PLUG.
DEPRESS THE VALVE CORE PIN UNTIL STRUT CHAMBER PRESSURE HAS
DIMINISHED.
CAUTION: DIRT AND FOREIGN PARTICLES FORM AROUND THE FILLER PLUGS OF THE
LANDING GEAR STRUTS, THEREFORE, BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THESE
PLUGS, THE TOPS OF THE STRUTS SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH COMPRESSED AIR
AND/OR WITH A QUICK DRYING SOLVENT.
A. Filling Oleo Struts
To fill the nose or main gear oleo strut with fluid (MIL-H-5606), whether it be the addition of a small
or large amount, proceed as follows:
(1) Raise the airplane on jacks.
(2) Place a pan under the gear to catch spillage.
(3) At the filler plug, relieve air pressure from the strut housing chamber by removing the cap from
the air valve and depressing the valve core.
(4) There are two methods by which the strut chamber may be filled. They are as follows:
(a) METHOD I
1 Remove the valve core from the filler plug at the top of the gear strut housing. Allow
the filler plug to remain installed.
2 Attach one end of a clean plastic hose to the valve stem of the filler plug and
submerge the other end in a container of hydraulic fluid.
NOTE: An air-tight connection is necessary between the plastic tube and the valve
stem. Without such a connection, a small amount of air will be sucked into
the oleo strut during each sequence, resulting in an inordinate amount of air
bubbles and a prolonged filling operation.
3 Fully compress and extend the strut thus drawing fluid from the fluid container and
expelling air from the strut chamber. By watching the fluid pass through the plastic
hose, it can be determined when the strut is full and no air is present in the chamber.
4 When air bubbles cease to flow through the hose, compress the strut fully and
remove the hose from the valve stem.
5 With the strut compressed, remove the filler plug to determine that the fluid level is
visible up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
6 Reinstall the core in the filler plug and apply thread lubricant (Parker No. 6PB) to the
threads of the filler plug and install the plug in the top of the strut housing. Torque the
plug from 350 to 400 inch pounds.
1K21 12-10-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) METHOD II
1 Remove the filler plug from the top of the gear strut housing.
2 Raise the strut piston tube until it is fully compressed.
3 Pour fluid from a clean container through the filler opening until it reaches the bottom
of the filler plug hole. (Use of an air pressure type oil container may be helpful.)
4 Install the filler plug finger tight and extend and compress the strut two or three times
to remove air from the housing.
5 Remove the filler plug, raise the strut to full compression and fill with fluid if needed.
6 Apply thread lubricant (Parker No. 6PB) to the threads of the filler plug. Reinstall the
filler plug and torque from 350 to 400 inch pounds.
7 With the airplane raised, compress and extend the gear strut several times to
ascertain that the strut actuates freely. The weight of the gear fork and wheel should
extend the strut.
8 Clean off overflow of fluid and inflate the strut as described in Inflating Oleo Struts.
9 Check that fluid is not leaking around the strut piston at the bottom of the housing.
B. Inflating Oleo Struts
After making certain that an oleo strut has sufficient fluid, attach a strut pump to the air valve and
inflate the oleo strut. The strut should be inflated until the correct inches of piston is exposed with
normal static load (empty weight of the airplane plus full fuel and oil) on the gears. Rock the
airplane several times to ascertain that the gear settles back to the correct strut position. If a strut
pump is not available, the airplane may be raised and line pressure from a high pressure air system
used.
NOTE: Moisture free compressed air may be used in lieu of nitrogen gas on a temporary basis;
however, the strut should be deflated and serviced with nitrogen as soon as possible.
Lower the airplane and, while rocking it, let air from the valve to bring the strut down to the
proper extension. (Before capping the valve, check for valve core leakage)
If the airplane is on jacks, ensure that the struts are fully extended. Inflate the nose gear strut to 160
+ 16 psi and the main gear struts to 250 + 25 psi. This is the preferred method.
5. Tires
Tubeless tires are designed to permit any air or nitrogen that is trapped in the cords or that diffuses
through the liner to escape through special sidewall vents. This venting prevents pressure build-up within
the cord body which might cause tread, sidewall or ply separation. Discounting tire growth after initial
inflation, once the tire has been inflated, the maximum permissible pressure drop due to diffusion is 5%
in any 24 hour period.
Vent holes penetrate the sidewall rubber to, or into, the cord body and may vary in size, depth and angle.
Therefore, the amount of diffusion through these holes will vary.
When water or a soap solution is brushed over the outside of an inflated tubeless tire, bubbles form.
Some vents may emit a continuous stream of bubbles. Others may produce intermittent bubbles. And
some may not bubble at all. This variety is normal and does not mean that there is anything wrong with
the tire. In fact, as long as a tubeless tire is inflated, there will be some diffusion from the vents. When
the loss rate exceeds 5% in 24 hours, recheck for possible injuries. Vents should remain open, so check
periodically to make sure they have not been covered over or closed by tire paint or spilled solvent. And
since vents may be covered during retreading, check for evidence that your retreads have been
revented.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1K22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Several basic characteristics of tubeless aircraft tires may be mistaken for problems:
(1) Tire growth in the first 12 to 24 hours after inflation will result in a seemingly severe pressure
drop. Simply inflate, wait for another 24 hours, then check pressure. It will probably be within
specs.
(2) Make sure that initial inflation is to recommended operating pressure to ensure full tire growth.
(3) It is normal for tubeless tires to show a small amount of pressure leakage throughout the life of
the tires.
B. Maintain tires at pressure specified in 6-00-00, Chart 1. When checking tire pressure, examine tires
for wear, cuts, bruises, and slippage. Apply Age-Master #1 to tires to protect against ozone attack
and weathering as follows:
(1) Clean oil and grease from all tire surfaces.
(2) Apply single heavy coat using brush at 0.4 - 0.5 fluid ounces per square foot. Cover surface
completely and evenly; allow to dry for 5 - 10 minutes.
(3) Apply second coat per step B; allow to dry for 20 - 30 minutes before handling.
(4) Remove agent on wheel assembly with cleaning solvent.
(5) Apply as conditions dictate.
6. Hydraulic System
The general condition of the hydraulic pump and landing gear actuating cylinders should be checked.
Ensure that there are no leaks and that the line fittings are tight. The cylinder rods are to be free of all
dirt and grit. To clean the rods use a rag soaked in hydraulic fluid and carefully wipe them. All the
hydraulic lines should also be checked for leaks, kinks, and corrosion. Check the tightness of the
attachment fittings.
A. Repair and inspection procedures for the hydraulic pump, cylinders and various components may
be found in 29-10-00 of this manual.
B. Servicing Hydraulic Pump/Reservoir
The fluid level of the reservoir of the combination pump and reservoir should be checked every 100
hours or each 90 days, whichever comes first, by viewing the fluid level directly through the
transparent reservoir on the hydraulic pump. Access to the pump is through the closeout panel at
the rear of the baggage compartment behind the rear seat.
If fluid is below the fill-line (i.e. - the “L” mark), remove fill plug and fill vent screw and add MIL-H-
5606 hydraulic fluid. Ensure that the landing gear is down when filling the reservoir. Re-install fill
plug and fill vent screw and tighten.
NOTE: Do Not Overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling, allow fluid
level to stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling will result in excess
fluid being expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
1K23 12-10-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Engine Lubrication
CAUTION: USE ONLY THOSE LUBRICANTS AND ADDITIVES SPECIFIED IN THE LATEST
REVISION OF PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA SERVICE BULLETIN NO. 3001.
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX OIL BRANDS OR VISCOSITIES. IF INTERMIXING OCCURS
INADVERTENTLY, OR IF SWITCHING BRANDS OR VISCOSITIES, THE ENGINE OIL
SYSTEM SHOULD BE DRAINED, FLUSHED, AND REPLENISHED.
NOTE: Regularly scheduled oil changes are no longer recommended by the engine manufacturer;
however, the owner/operator must be especially alert to the dangers of oil contamination by
hydraulic fluid, sand, etc. If any such contamination is suspected, the engine oil system should
be immediately drained, flushed, and replenished.
A. Draining and Flushing Oil Sump
Full, detailed instructions for servicing the engine lubrication system are provided in Pratt & Whitney
Canada Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Maintenance Manual (P/N 3021442), 72-00-00, Engine,
Turboprop - Servicing.
B. Filling Oil Sump
This engine is equipped with an oil level sightglass which is visible by opening the left gull-wing
engine access door. A dipstick is also provided as part of the oil filler cap, which is accessed via the
oil access door in the upper engine cowling.
Engine operation is permitted with the oil at any level within the green zone of the sightglass. The oil
level dipstick must be checked when the oil level is in the red zone or not visible in the sightglass.
Normal oil level is one US quart below maximum level marked on dipstick. Engine oil capacity is 2.3
US gallons.
Do Not Overfill. Check oil level within 30 minutes after engine shutdown; ideally with 15-20 minutes.
If more than 30 minutes has passed and dipstick indicates that oil is needed, start engine and run
at ground idle for five minutes, and recheck oil level.
To add oil, open the oil access door and remove the oil filler cap/dipstick. Add oil through the filler to
the normal level. Install filler cap/dipstick and lock. Run engine at ground idle for five minutes and
recheck oil level.
C. Engine Oil Filter
Remove and clean the engine oil filter each 100 hours and whenever the engine oil “Chip Detector”
annunciator is illuminated.
See Pratt & Whitney Canada Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Maintenance Manual (P/N 3021442),
72-20-02, Oil Filter Housing - Maintenance Practices for removal, cleaning, and installation
instructions.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1K24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Engine Oil Chip Detectors

Two magnetic chip detectors, one at 6 o’clock on the reduction gearbox and one at 6 o’clock on the
accessory gearbox, are connected electrically to the annunciator panel lights. Illumination of the “Chip
Detector” light on annunciator indicates ferrous metal contamination in oil system. If “Chip Detector” light
illuminates, remove both chip detectors and inspect magnetic pole pieces for contaminant.
Additionally, each 100 hours, inspect and clean both chip detectors.
NOTE: Whenever the chip detectors are removed for inspection, also inspect oil filter.
A. Removal
(1) Remove wiring from chip detector.
(2) Remove chip detector from gearbox and discard preformed packing.
B. Inspection
Refer to Pratt & Whitney Canada Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Maintenance Manual, P/N
3021442, 72-20-02, Inspection/Check.
C. Cleaning
(1) Seal electrical receptacle.
(2) Clean with solvent (AMS 3160 - Varsol) and a medium stiff bristle brush or spray.
(3) Ensure magnets are free of metal particles.
D. Installation
(1) Install chip detector with new preformed packing in boss on appropriate gearbox.
(2) Tighten and torque the detector to 45 - 55 inch-pounds.
(3) Connect plug and safety.
9. Electrical System
Servicing the electrical system is limited to checking cable connections and general condition of the
batteries and battery compartment. The security of all electrical connections should be checked, as well
as the operation of all lights, and general condition of the alternator and starter. All electrical wires
should be inspected for chafing and bare wires. For detailed information on this system, refer to Chapter
24 of this manual.
1L1 12-10-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10. Batteries
Access to the two 24-volt batteries is gained by removing the access panel on the right side of the
forward fuselage and sliding out the battery tray. The batteries are maintenance-free, sealed, lead-acid
type. If overheated, they can vent electrolyte which could lead to corrosion.
Inspect each battery for general condition and charge.
If either battery has overheated and vented, it must be replaced and the remaining battery, battery
tray and compartment must be cleaned as described in 24-30-00, Cleaning Batteries.
If the battery is not up to charge, recharge starting at a 4-amp rate and finishing with a 2-amp rate.
Quick charges are not recommended.
11. Power Plant
Regularly check the engine compartment for oil and fuel leaks, chafing of lines, loose wires and
tightness of all parts. General maintenance information for the power plant may be found in Chapter 71
of this manual and detailed instructions are provided in Pratt & Whitney Canada Turboprop Gas Turbine
Engine Maintenance Manual (P/N 3021442).
12. Propeller
The spinner, back plate and propeller surfaces should be cleaned and inspected frequently for nicks,
scratches, corrosion and cracks. Minor nicks and scratches may be removed per instructions in
61-10-00 or the appropriate Hartzell Blade Manual. The face of each blade should be painted when
necessary with a flat paint to retard glare. To prevent corrosion, wipe surfaces with a light oil or wax.
In addition, propellers should be inspected for grease or oil leakage and freedom of rotation on the hub
pilot tube. To check freedom of rotation, rock the blade back and forth through the slight freedom allowed
by the pitch change mechanism. Lubricate the propeller at the intervals shown in the Lubrication Chart,
12-20-00, and in 5-30-00. See also, the latest revision of Hartzell’s Standard Practices Manual No. 202.
Additional service information for the propeller may be found in 61-10-00.
13. Air Conditioning System Service Valves
See 21-50-00 for A/C service instructions.
14. Pilot’s Fixed Oxygen Cylinder
See Servicing, 35-10-00.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1L2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1L3 12-10-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 12-10-00 1L4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCHEDULED SERVICING
1. Airframe Lubrication
Proper lubrication procedures are valuable for prolonging the service life of the airplane and as a means
of reducing the frequency of extensive and expensive repairs. The periodic application of recommended
lubricants to relevant bearing surfaces combined with cleanliness, as detailed in the following
paragraphs, ensures maximum efficiency and utmost service of all moving parts. Lubrication instruction
regarding locations, time intervals, and type of lubricants used are found in proper lubrication charts. To
ensure the best possible results from lubricant application, observe the following precautions:
NOTE: If the airplane is inactive for long periods of time, it should be lubricated in accordance with the
Lubrication Chart every 90 days.
A. Use only recommended lubricants. Where general purpose lubricating oil is specified, but
unavailable, clean reciprocating engine oil is a satisfactory substitute.
B. Check components for evidence of excessive wear and replace as necessary.
C. Removal all excess lubricants from components to prevent collecting dirt and sand in quantities
capable of causing excessive wear or damage to bearing surfaces.
2. Application of Grease
When lubricating bearings and bearing surfaces with a grease gun, ensure gun is filled with new, clean
grease specified for the particular application before applying lubricant to grease fittings.
A. If a reservoir is not provided around a bearing, apply lubricant sparingly and wipe off excess.
B. Remove wheel bearings from wheel hub and clean thoroughly with suitable solvent. When
repacking with grease, ensure lubricant enters space between rollers in retainer ring. Do not pack
grease into wheel hub.
C. Use extra care when greasing Hartzell propeller hub to avoid blowing clamp gaskets. Remove one
grease fitting while applying grease to other fitting. Uneven greasing effects propeller balance.
3. Application of Oil
If specific lubrication instructions for certain components are not available, observe the following
precautions:
CAUTION: AFTER THOROUGHLY WASHING AIRPLANE, ENSURE LANDING GEAR, FLIGHT
SURFACE WINGS, FLAP TRACKS, ELEVATOR TRIM SCREW, AND ENGINE
COMPARTMENT ARE STILL PROPERLY LUBRICATED.
A. Apply oil sparingly. Never apply more than enough to coat bearing surfaces.
B. Do not oil control cables.
1L5 12-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Lubrication Charts (Ref. Piper Dwg 102003 Rev A.)

The lubrication charts consist of individual illustrations for the various aircraft systems. Each component
to be lubricated is indicated by a number, the type of lubricant and the frequency of application. Special
instructions are listed at the beginning of the lubrication charts and with the applicable component
illustration.
CAUTION: MIL-G-23827 AND MIL-G-81322, CONTAIN CHEMICALS WHICH MAY BE HARMFUL TO
PAINTED SURFACES.
DRY LUBRICANT (I.E. - PTFE BASED MS-122DF) WILL ATTACK ANY ACRYLIC BASED
PLASTIC (LUCITE), POLYCARBONATES (LEXAN), POLYSTYRENE AND ITS
COPOLYMERS (ABS), AND CELLULOSE ACETATE.
CHART 1
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. LUBRICATION POINTS - WIPE CLEAN OR GREASE, OIL, DIRT, ETC., BEFORE LUBRICATING.
2. BEARING AND BUSHINGS - CLEAN EXTERIOR WITH A DRYING TYPE SOLVENT PRIOR TO LUBRICATING.
3. WHEEL BEARINGS - CLEAN OLD GREASE FROM WHEEL HOUSING, OUTER RACE AND BEARING ASSEMBLY
USING DRYING TYPE SOLVENT. PACK GREASE BETWEEN ROLLERS AND CONE. GREASE OUTER ROLLER
PERIMETER. DO NOT PACK GREASE IN WHEEL HOUSING.
4. OLEO STRUTS, HYDRAULIC PUMP RESERVOIR, AND BRAKE SYSTEM RESERVOIR - FILL PER INSTRUCTIONS
ON UNIT OR IN MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
5. PROPELLER - REMOVE ONE OF THE TWO GREASE FITTINGS FOR EACH BLADE. APPLY GREASE THRU
FITTING UNTIL FRESH GREASE APPEARS AT HOLE OF REMOVED FITTING. SEE LATEST REVISION OF
HARTZELL MANUAL 202.
6. BUNGEE - LUBRICATE SPRINGS IF BUNGEE IS DISASSEMBLED.
7. HYDRAULIC PUMP RESERVOIR AND BRAKE SYSTEM RESERVOIR - CHECK AT LEAST EVERY 90 DAYS.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 12-20-00 1L6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
LUBRICATION CHART (Doors and Seats)
COMPONENT LUBRICANT FREQUENCY

1. ENGINE COWLING GULL-WING ACCESS DOORS - HOLD OPEN
(Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. ACCESS DOOR - HINGE (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. ACCESS DOOR - LATCH (Special. Instruction #1) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
4. PILOT AND COPILOT SEAT ADJUSTMENTS MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. CABIN DOOR HINGES (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
6. CABIN DOOR LATCH MECHANISM (Special Instruction #1) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
1L7 12-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
LUBRICATION CHART (Main Landing Gear and Hydraulic System)

1. BRAKE RESERVOIR (Special Instructions #4 and #7) MIL-H-5606 100 HRS
2. HYDRAULIC PUMP/RESERVOIR (Special Instructions #4 and #7) MIL-H-5606 100 HRS
3. RETRACTION CYLINDER ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. MAIN GEAR TORQUE LINKS (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. MAIN GEAR WHEEL BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
* MAIN GEAR DOOR HINGE AND DOOR ROD END BEARINGS MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
(Special Instruction #1 & 2) ( * Not Shown )
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 12-20-00 1L8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
LUBRICATION CHART (Nose Gear)

1. STEERING BELLCRANK PIVOT POINTS AND ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. RETRACTION CYLINDER AND ASSIST SPRING ROD END BEARINGS
(Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. NOSE GEAR PIVOT POINT (Special Instruction #1) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
4. TORQUE LINK ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. NOSE WHEEL BEARINGS (Special Instruction #3) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
6. STEERING BELLCRANK AND ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
7. NOSE GEAR DOOR HINGES (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
8. NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATOR (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
9. NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATOR TORQUE TUBE (Special Instruction #1) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
1L9 12-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5
LUBRICATION CHART (Control System - Sheet 1 of 3)

* FLAP TRACKS AND ROLLERS (Special Instruction #1) ( * Not Shown) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
1. FLAP CONTROL ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. RUDDER CONTROL SECTOR (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. ELEVATOR TRIM ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. ELEVATOR SECTOR AND CONTROL ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. ELEVATOR TRIM SCREW (Special Instruction #1) MIL-G-81322 100 HRS
6. RUDDER TRIM ROD END BEARINGS (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 12-20-00 1L10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5

1. AILERON TORQUE ROLLER ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. CONTROL COLUMN ATTACHMENT ARM (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. ELEVATOR TORQUE TUBE ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
4. RUDDER TORQUE TUBE ASSEMBLY (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
5. BRAKE ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
6. BUSHING, RUDDER PEDAL MOUNT (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
* AILERON, ELEVATOR, RUDDER AND TRIM CABLES (Special Instruction #1) MIL-L-23827 100 HRS
(Grease cables where they pass over a pulley or through a fairlead.) ( * Not Shown )
1L11 12-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5

1. PULLEYS AND TRIM WHEEL (Special Instruction #1) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
2. AILERON HINGES (Special Instruction #2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
3. AILERON SECTOR (Special Instruction #1) DRY LUBRICANT 100 HRS
4. POWER QUADRANT LEVER SEAL EDGES (Special Instruction #1) PARKER O-RING SUPER LUBE 100 HRS
* RUDDER AND TAB HINGES (Special Instructions #1 and 2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
* ELEVATOR AND TAB HINGES (Special Instructions #1 and 2) MIL-PRF-7870C 100 HRS
( * Not Shown )
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 12-20-00 1L12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 6
LUBRICATION CHART (Propeller and Power Plant)

1. PROPELLER BLADE HUB (Special Instructions #1 and #5) AeroShell 6 Grease 400 HRS
2. FUEL CONTROL UNIT INTERCONNECT ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #1) MIL-G-23827 100 HRS
3. CONTROL CAM AND PINS (Special Instruction #1) LUBRIPLATE 130A 100 HRS
4. PROPELLER CONTROL ROD ENDS (Special Instruction #1) MIL-G-23827 100 HRS
5. PUSH-PULL CONTROL (WIRE ROPE) (Special Instruction #1) MIL-G-21164 100 HRS
1L13 12-20-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Tire Balance
Proper balancing is critical for the life of aircraft tires. If a new tire is balanced upon installation it will
usually remain balanced for the life of the tire without having any shimmy or flat spots. An inexpensive
balancer can be made that will balance almost any tire for light aircraft (see Figure 1). Balance the tire as
follows:
A Mount the tire and tube (if one is used) on the wheels, but do not install the securing bolts. Install
the wheel bearings in the wheels; then, using the -7 bushings, -6 spacers, and -5 nuts, install the
wheel/tire assembly on the -8 pipe. Secure the -5 nuts finger tight so that the wheel halves touch
each other.. Be sure the bolt holes are aligned. Insert the -4 axle through the -8 pipe and place the
wheel in the center of the balancer. Make sure the axle is only on the chamfered edges of the
balancer and that it is at 90° to the sides of the balancer.
B Release the tire. If it is out of balance it will rotate, coming to rest with the heaviest point on the
bottom. Tape a ounce patch across the top center of the tire. Rotate the tire 45° and release it
again. If the tire returns to the same position, add a 1 ounce patch and again rotate the tire and
release it. Continue this procedure until the tire is balanced.
C When balance is attained, put a chalk mark on the sidewall directly below the patch. Use one mark
for each half ounce of weight needed. Mark the valve stem location on the tire and the opposite
wheel half to assure reassembly in the same position. Remove the wheel from the balance stand,
break it down and clean the inside of the tire with toluol. Apply a coat of patch cement to both the
patch and the inside center of the tire in line with the chalk marks. When the cement has dried,
install the patches making certain they are on the centerline of the tire and aligned with the chalk
marks on the sidewall. Burnish the patches to remove trapped air, etc.
D When reassembling the wheel, powder the inside of the tire. Mount the tire on the valve side of the
wheel in the same position it was in when it was balanced. Install the other wheel half, aligning the
chalk marks. Install the bolts and tighten to required torque, then inflate the tire to the pressure
specified in 6-00-00, Chart 1, and recheck the balance. The wheel should not be more than one
ounce out of balance.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 12-20-00 1L14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A useful tire balancing fixture can be built as follows:
A. Chamfer top edges of -3 sides, leaving 1/16 inch flat on top of the inboard edge. Rivet -2 tee’s to -3
sides using AN 470-AD5 rivets, with 2 inch spacing, and using AN 426-AD5 rivets ( 2 inch center to
center ) to secure -2 tee’s to -1 base. If tee extrusion is unavailable, heavy angle extrusion could be
used. -3 sides must be vertical.
B. The -4 axle must slide through the -8 pipe, the -5 nuts are made by reaming the existing threads in
the AN 365-624 nuts with an R drill, then tapping them with a 1/8-27 pipe tap.
C. The -6 spacers were made from 1/2 inch aluminum tubing, the two lengths of spacers are suitable
for balancing most any aircraft wheel.
D. The -7 bushings may be made from one inch phenolic or aluminum using a 1-1/2 inch hole saw to
cut out the smaller bushing and a 1-3/4 hole saw to cut out the larger. By inserting a 1/4 inch long
threaded bolt through the pilot hole and securing with a washer and nut, a drill press and file may
be used to make the off-set on the bushing. The turned-down part should just slide inside the
bearing race and then ream the pilot hole to slide over the -8 pipe threads.
E. The -8 pipe was made from a piece of 1/8 inch black pipe and threaded with a 1/8-27 pipe die, this
will be thread 3 inches in from each end of the pipe.
Tire Balancer
Figure 1
1L15 12-20-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 1L16 THRU 1L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 12-20-00 1L16
CARD 2 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

2A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
2A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 2A9
Effectivity 2 2A10
Pagination 2 2A10
Indexing 3 2A11
INDEX
Index 1 2B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
Aerofiche Grid Code: A11 Compliance Record Form: Brakes
2E24
2F15
2B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A19 Door Standby Attitude Indicator:
Wing: 6K17 Effectivity: A10 Altimeter, Standby: 9E24
Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 2B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
2B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 2B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
2B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Drain Hose Routing 100 Annual/100 Hour Inspection: Introduction: A7
Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 2B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Inflating: 1K22 Locating Information: A11 Reference System:
4J7
2B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Engine InstrumentDisplay Parts: A9 Operational Check: 7C19
(cont.) Publications: A12 Propeller Assembly: 7C10
Troubleshooting: 7J2 Description and Operation: 5C9 Piper: A12
Metal / Wire Stitching Repair: 6G4 Pitot Head: 5C13 Parts Catalog: A12
Code: A10 Troubleshooting: 5C10 Manual: A12
Year: A10 Pitot Deice: 4D5 Vendor: A12
Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
Operational Check: 7C19 Pressurization Control-See Cabin Revisions: A3
Fixed Cylinder System: 6C7 Blade Inspection and Repair: A11
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Page Numbering: A10 Inspections: 4E4
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 2B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Explanation: A10 Electrical System Function: Torque
Checks: 1C13
2B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Type Certificate: A10 Yaw Amplifier: 2H14
Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
20
STANDARD
PRACTICES -
AIRFRAME
2C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
20-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
20-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20 - STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 20-00-00 1 2C7

Description 1 2C7
Torque Wrenches 1 2C7
Installing Rod End Bearings 1 2C7
Removing Cherrylock Rivet 3 2C9
Identification of Fluid Lines 4 2C10
Inspection of Flexible Hoses 4 2C10
Flareless Tube Assemblies 7 2C13
Flared Tube Assemblies 7 2C13
Support Clamps 7 2C14
Dye Penetrant Inspection 8 2C15
Threaded Fastener Installation 9 2C15
PAINTING 20-20-00 1 2C17

Painting Safety 1 2C17
Polyurethane Paint Safety 1 2C17
Paint Application 2 2C18
Painting Sequence 2 2C18
Color Matching 2 2C18
Trim and Registration Numbers 2 2C18
Paint System Compatibility 3 2C19
Common Paint Troubles 3 2C19
Storage 4 2C20
Painting Facility 4 2C20
Aircraft Finish Care 4 2C20

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Description
This chapter contains general information pertaining to standard aircraft hardware installation and
removal practices, as well as general information on corrosion control and painting issues.
For standard repair practices of a minor nature, see 51-70-00 and AC 43.13-1 (latest revision).
If non-destructive testing is needed after repair of 4130 steel, use a magnetic particle inspection method
such as Magnaflux.
Testing and inspecting of aluminum castings and machined aluminum parts may be done by the dye
penetrant method.
Usually, a good visual inspection with a 10X magnifying glass will show any damage or defect in a repair
that is of a significant nature.
2. Torque Wrenches
Torque wrenches should be checked daily and calibrated by means of weights and a measured lever
arm to ensure that inaccuracies are not present. Checking one torque wrench against another is not
sufficient and is not recommended. Some wrenches are quite sensitive to the way they are supported
during a tightening operation. Any instructions furnished by the manufacturer must be followed explicitly.
When it is necessary to use a special extension or adapter wrench together with a torque wrench, a
simple mathematical equation must be worked out to arrive at the correct torque reading. Following is
the formula to be used: (Refer to Figure 1.)
T = Torque desired at the part.
A = Basic lever length from center of wrench shank to center of handle or stamped on wrench or
listed for that model wrench.
B = Length of adapter extension, center of bolt to center of shank.
C = Scale reading needed to obtain desired torque (T).
The formula: C=AxT
A+B
EXAMPLE: A bolt requires 30 foot pounds and a 3 inch adapter (one-quarter of a foot or
0.25’) is needed to get at it. You want to know what scale reading it will take on
a one-foot lever arm wrench to obtain the 30 foot pounds at the bolt.
C = 1 x 30 or C= 30
1 + 0.25 1.25
Remember, the 3 inch adapter must be projecting 3 inches straight along the wrench axis. In
general, avoid all complex assemblages or adapters and extensions of flex joints.
3. Installing Rod End Bearings
Install rod end bearings as shown in Figure 2.
2C7 20-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Torque Wrench Formula

Figure 1
Installing Rod End Bearings

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 20-00-00 2C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Removing Cherrylock Rivets

Use following procedure to remove cherrylock rivets:
A. To remove from thick material, use a tapered steel drift
pin to drive out rivet stem. (See Figure 3, View 1.)
CAUTION: DRIVING OUT THE LOCKED STEM OF
RIVETS INSTALLED IN THIN MATERIAL
MAY DAMAGE THE MATERIAL.
NOTE: Drilling completely through the rivet sleeve,
when removing rivets, tends to enlarge hole.
B. To remove from thin material, drill away tapered portion
of stem to destroy the lock. Use a small center drill bit on
top of the rivet stem to provide a guide for a larger bit.
(See Figure 3, Views 2 and 3.)
C. Pry remainder of locking collar out of rivet head with a
drift pin. (See Figure 3, View 3.)
D. Drill almost, but not completely, through head of rivet.
Use a drill bit the same size as the rivet shank.
(See Figure 3, View 4.)
E. Use a drift pin as a lever to break off rivet head.
(See Figure 3, View 5.)
F. Drive out remaining rivet shank with a pin having same
diameter as rivet shank. (See Figure 3, View 6.)
Removing Cherrylock Rivets

Figure 3
2C9 20-00-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Identification of Fluid Lines (Refer to Figure 4.)

Aircraft fluid lines are identified by color code markers, words and geometric symbols. The markers
identify each line`s function, content, primary hazard, and the direction of fluid flow.
Most fluid lines are marked with 1 inch tape or decals. Paint is used on lines in the engine induction
system.
Certain lines may also be identified as to the specific function within a system. For example: DRAIN,
VENT, PRESSURE or RETURN.
Lines conveying fuel may be marked FLAM. Lines containing toxic materials are marked TOXIC. Line
containing physically dangerous materials, such as oxygen, nitrogen, or freon, are marked PHDAN.
The aircraft and engine manufacturer is responsible for the original installation of identification markers,
Aircraft maintenance personnel are responsible for their replacement when it becomes necessary.
Tapes, paint, tags and decals are placed on both ends of a line and at least once in each compartment
through which the line runs. Identification markers are also placed immediately adjacent to each valve,
regulator, filter or other accessory within a line.
6. Inspection of Flexible Hoses
NOTE: During the manufacturing process, a condition known as “rubber strike-through” occasionally
occurs. This condition is such that rubber material protrudes through the wire braid cover. This
condition has no effect on hose quality.
It is recommended that flexible hoses be inspected every 100 hours, especially those in the engine
compartments. When inspecting hoses, look for the following conditions:
A. Check each installation to be sure the hose is not kinked, twisted, or distorted. Check for evidence
of abrasion, cuts, and broken wires. Random broken wires are acceptable since wire breaks
sometimes occur during manufacture. Discard hose if two or more broken wires are found per plait
(braid) or more than six broken wires per lineal foot. Broken wires in an area where kinking is
evident is also a cause for rejection.
CAUTION: PUNCTURING THE OUTER COVER OF THE HOSE MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
HOSE.
B. Check each assembly for deterioration, ply separation of cover or braid, cracks, weather checking,
lack of flexibility, blisters or bulging, collapse, or sharp bending. Blisters on the outer synthetic cover
do not necessarily indicate a faulty hose.
C. Remove hose from assembly if hose shows any visible wear. Inspect hose interior and check for
signs of deterioration, tube collapse, cut rubber, wire braid puncture, or restriction. To inspect hoses
with elbow fittings, use flexible inspection light and viewer, or inspection ball as described in Chart 1
Replace hose if any deterioration exists.
CHART 1
BALL DIAMETERS FOR TESTING HOSE RESTRICTIONS
Hose Size Ball Size
-4 ................................................. 5/64
-5 ................................................. 9/65
-6 ................................................ 13/64
-8 ................................................. 9/32
- 10 ................................................. 3/8
- 12 ................................................. 1/2
- 16 ............................................... 47/64
- 20 ............................................... 61/64
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 20-00-00 2C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hose, Tube, and Line Markings

Figure 4
2C11 20-00-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flareless Tube Fittings

Figure 5
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 20-00-00 2C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Flareless Tube Assemblies

The use of flareless tube fittings eliminates all tube flaring. An operation, referred to as presetting, is
necessary prior to installing a new flareless tube assembly. Presetting is performed as follows:
A. Cut tube to correct length. Ensure ends are perfectly square. Deburr inside and outside of tube. Slip
nut, then sleeve, over the tube. (Refer to Figure 5, Step 1.)
B. Lubricate fitting and nut threads as specified in table contained in Figure 5.
C. Place fitting in a vise (refer to Figure 5, Step 2). Hold tubing firmly and squarely on seat in fitting.
(Tube must bottom firmly in the fitting.) Tighten nut until cutting edge of sleeve grips tube. This point
is determined by slowly turning tube back and forth while tightening nut. When tube no longer turns,
nut is ready for final tightening.
D. Final tightening depends upon type and size of tubing. On aluminum alloy tubing up to and including
half inch outside diameter, tighten nut from 1 to 1-1/6 turns. On aluminum alloy tubing over half inch
outside diameter, or steel tubing, tighten nut from 1-1/6 to 1-1/2 turns.
E. After presetting the sleeve, disconnect tubing from fitting and check the following points (refer to
Figure 5, Step 3):
(1) Tube extends 3/32 to 1/8 inch beyond sleeve pilot to prevent blow off.
(2) Sleeve pilot contacts tube. A maximum clearance of 0.005 inch for aluminum alloy tubing, or
0.015 inch for steel tubing, is acceptable.
(3) A slight collapse of tube at sleeve cut is permissible. No movement of sleeve pilot, except
rotation, is permissible.
8. Flared Tube Assemblies (Refer to Figure 6)
When any fitting containing conical seals is disconnected the following steps must be performed when
connecting the fitting.
A. Lubricate threads of nut with a substance compatible with the fluid that is to be contained in the line
B. Install new conical seals
NOTE: Conical seals are never to be reused. If a connection is broken the seals must be replaced.
CAUTION: ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT BETWEEN TUBE AND FITTING WILL OVER-STRAIN
SLEEVE AND NUT DURING TORQUE-UP. APPLY TORQUE ONLY AFTER TUBE
CENTER LINE IS SQUARELY MATED TO THE FITTING CENTER LINE.
C. Tighten fitting one (1) to one and one half (1 1/2) hex flats from position of sharp torque rise (finger
tight).
NOTE: Apply torque on back portion of nut next to shoulder to minimize distortion of thread.
2C13 20-00-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Conical Seal 37 Flared Fitting

Tube
Sleeve
Nut
Conical Seals
Figure 6
9. Lubrication of Threads
Lubricate all fittings on external lines, including attachment points at engine and other components, with
proper lubricant (specified in Chart 2).
When applying thread lubricants, proceed as follows:
A. Thoroughly clean threads before applying lubricant.
B. Use thread lubricant sparingly.
C. Apply thread lubricant to male threads only.
D. Lubricate first three threads only on straight fittings.
E. Do not lubricate first two threads on tapered fittings; apply lubricant to next three threads only.
F. Ensure lubricant does not enter fittings or flared areas.
G. Lubricate any fittings going to engine with same fluid going through lines.
CHART 2
THREAD LUBRICANTS
TYPE OF LINE TYPE OF LUBRICANT
Brake MIL-H-5606, Tite Seal 3-Y3
Deicer (Air) TT-A-580 (JAN-A-669), Anti-Seize Compound (White Lead Base)
Air Conditioning TT-A-580 or MIL-T-5544, Anti-Seize Compound
Fuel MIL-T-5544, Anti-Seize, Graphite Petrolatum
Oil MIL-G-6032, Lubricating Grease (Gasoline and Oil Resistant)
Oxygen MIL-T-27730, Thread Compound, Anti-Seize and Sealing.
Pitot and Static TT-A-580 (JAN-A-669), Anti-Seize Compound (White Lead Base)
Engine - Bleed Air C5-A High Temperature Anti-Seize Compound
NOTE: Lubricate engine fittings only with fluid contained in particular lines.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 20-00-00 2C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10. Lubrication of Gaskets and Seals

Lubricate gaskets and O-ring seals with same fluid they are sealing.
11. Support Clamps
CAUTION: MAKE CERTAIN THAT CLAMPS ARE OF THE CORRECT SIZE. CLAMPS OR
SUPPORTING CLIPS SMALLER THAN THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE HOSE MAY
RESTRICT THE FLOW OF FLUID THROUGH THE HOSE.
Support clamps are used to secure the various lines to the airframe or power plant assemblies. Several
type of support clamps are used for this purpose. The rubber cushioned and plain are the most
commonly used clamps. The rubber cushioned clamp is used to secure lines subject to vibration; the
cushioning prevents chafing of the tubing. The plain clamp is used to secure lines in areas not subject to
vibration.
A teflon cushioned clamp is used in areas where the deteriorating effects of Skydrol 500,hydraulic fluid
(MIL-H-5606),or fuel is expected, however, because it is less resilient, it does not provide as good a
vibration damping effect as other cushion materials.
Use bonded clamps to secure metal hydraulic, fuel and oil lines in place. Unbonded clamps should be
used only for securing wiring. Remove any paint or anodizing from the portion of the tube at the bonding
clap location.
All plumbing lines must be secured at specified intervals. The maximum distance between supports for
rigid fluid tubing is shown in Chart 3.
CHART 3
MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS FOR FLUID TUBING
Distance Between Supports (IN.)

Tube O.D. (IN.) Aluminum Alloy Steel
1/8 9-1/2 11-1/2
3/16 12 14
1/4 13-1/2 16
5/16 15 18
3/8 16-1/2 20
1/2 19 23
5/8 22 25-1/2
3/4 24 27-1/2
1 26-1/2 30
2C15 20-00-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12. Dye Penetrant Inspections

NOTE: The following procedure is general in nature. See manufacturer's instructions, included with dye
penetrant kit, for specifics.
A. Using a volatile cleaner, thoroughly remove dirt, loose scale, oil and grease from surface to be
inspected.
B. Heat surface to at least 70°F (21°C), but not exceeding 130°F (54°C).
C. Apply penetrant by brushing, spraying, or dipping. Let stand 2 to 15 minutes, depending on
temperature.
D. Remove surplus penetrant by applying special cleaner recommended by penetrant manufacturer, or
by rinsing with water. Allow housing to dry.
E. Apply a light, even coat of developer by spraying, brushing, or dipping. Cracks or other opening in
surface being inspected will appear as bright red. An indication of size of the defect may be
obtained by watching the size and rate of growth of red indication.
13. Threaded Fastener Installation (PIR-PPS20015-1, Rev. S.)
A. Fastener Lengths
Fastener lengths must be long enough to prevent bearing loads on threads. The complete chamfer
or end radius of the fastener or screw must extend through the nut.
The specified fastener grip length can be varied by one size (longer or shorter) to meet
requirements stated above. Where needed, use a maximum of two standard filler washers (spacers)
under the nut to adjust for fastener length or alignment of cotter key hole. Where nutplates are used,
adjust for protruding head fastener length by using up to a maximum of two standard filler washers
under the fastener head.
B. Washer Usage
Add a maximum of two NAS1149 washers (of the correct diameter, material and finish that matches
the fastener being installed) under fastener heads or nuts to correct for variations in material
thickness within the tolerances permitted.
C. Self-locking Fasteners
The use of self-locking nuts, fasteners and screws, including fasteners with non-metallic inserts is
subject to the following limitations:
(1) Fasteners incorporating self-locking devices must not be re-used if they can be run up using
less than the required minimum torque values specified or as shown in Chart 2, 91-10-00.
They may be reused, if hand tools are required to run them up, providing there is no obvious
damage to the self-locking device prior to installation.
(2) Fasteners 5/16 inch diameter and over with cotter pin holes may be used with self-locking nuts.
Nuts with non-metallic locking devices may be used in this application only if the fasteners are
free from burrs around the cotter pin holes.
(3) Self-locking nuts must not be used at joints which subject either the nut or the fastener to
rotation.
(4) Self-locking fasteners shall never be tapped or rethreaded. Nuts, fasteners and screws with
damaged threads or rough ends shall not be used, or rethreaded.
D. Torque
See Torque Requirements, 91-10-00.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 20-00-00 2C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAINTING
1. Painting Safety
WARNING: OVERSPRAY FROM CERTAIN ENAMELS, IF PUT IN WATER, IS FLAMMABLE. STORE
ALL OVERSPRAY IN COVERED CONTAINERS AWAY FROM BUILDINGS WHERE
SPRAYING OPERATIONS ARE CONDUCTED.
WARNING: WASH ALL RAGS AND SPONGES USED TO APPLY ANY PHOSPHORIC ACID
CONVERSION COATINGS (ALODINE) BEFORE DISPOSAL. IF MATERIAL DRIES ON
RAG, THERE IS DANGER OF SPONTANEOUS COMBUSTION.
WARNING: MIX DOPES AND LACQUERS WITH AIR DRILL. DO NOT USE ELECTRIC DRILL.
ARCING ELECTRIC DRILL MOTOR WILL IGNITE FUMES.
WARNING: VERIFY SPRAY ROOM IS WELL VENTILATED. A CONCENTRATION OF FUMES WILL
CAUSE A DANGEROUS FIRE HAZARD OR INSUFFICIENT OXYGEN FOR THE
OPERATOR.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW PAINT STRIPPER TO CONTACT FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PARTS
SUCH AS RADOMES, RADIO ANTENNAS, WING PARTS, OR WING TIPS. FIBERGLASS
STRUCTURES MAY BE FINISHED WITH ACRYLIC LACQUER OR POLYURETHANE
ENAMEL AND ARE DAMAGED BY THE STRIPPER.
2. Polyurethane Paint Safety
WARNING: POLYURETHANE PAINT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO YOUR HEALTH. SERIOUS INJURY
WILL RESULT IF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
WARNING: DURING TRANSIT AND STORAGE CHECK FOR SIGNS OF A BULGING CAN, OTHER
THAN NORMAL ODOR, OR A CHANGE IN RESIN FROM A CLEAR TO A CLOUDY
STATE. A SLOW CARBON DIOXIDE BUILDUP WILL CAUSE CAN TO BURST. REMOVE
AND PROPERLY DISPOSE ANY DEFECTIVE CANS.
WARNING: ENSURE ADEQUATE VENTILATION AND WEAR APPROPRIATE BREATHING
PROTECTION FACE MASK WHEN PAINTING.
WARNING: POLYURETHANE PAINTS CAN PRODUCE IRRITATION OF THE SKIN, EYES, AND
RESPIRATORY TRACT DURING MIXING AND APPLICATION. EXPOSURE TO SPRAY
VAPORS AND MISTS DURING SPRAY APPLICATION MAY CAUSE BREATHING
DIFFICULTY, SHORTNESS OF BREATH, AND DRY COUGH. INDIVIDUAL
SUSCEPTIBILITY IS A CONTROLLING FACTOR. ONCE SENSITIZED, MANY PEOPLE
CANNOT TOLERATE ANY EXPOSURE AND MUST THEREAFTER AVOID EXPOSED
WORK AREAS.
WARNING: PRODUCTION TYPE MIXING AND SPRAY PAINTING OPERATIONS MUST BE IN
SPECIALLY DESIGNED, EXHAUST-VENTILATED AREAS.
WARNING: PAINTERS MUST BE FULLY CLOTHED WITH COLLARS BUTTONED AND SLEEVES
TAPED AT THE WRIST. PAINTERS MUST WEAR FITTED, DOUBLE CARTRIDGE
ORGANIC VAPOR RESPIRATOR WITH FRESH CARTRIDGE INSERTED DAILY,
SOLVENT-RESISTANT GAUNTLET STYLE GLOVES, AND SAFETY GOGGLES.
2C17 20-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Paint Application
WARNING: GROUND AIRCRAFT BEFORE PAINTING SO NO STATIC ELECTRICITY CHARGES
BUILD UP AND DISCHARGE.
CAUTION: PROTECT WINDSHIELD WHEN MASKING AIRCRAFT. PAINT STRIPPERS, METAL
BRIGHTENERS, AND SOLVENTS WILL DAMAGE WINDSHIELD.
CAUTION: BALANCE MOVABLE CONTROL SURFACES AFTER PAINTING. REFER TO
APPROPRIATE MAINTENANCE MANUAL SECTIONS.
CAUTION: BEFORE FORCE DRYING AT ELEVATED TEMPERATURES, VERIFY THAT ALL FUEL
TANK VENTS ARE UNOBSTRUCTED AND WILL NOT RESULT IN EXPANDED FUEL
SPILLING ON NEWLY PAINTED SURFACES OR PAINT BOOTH FLOOR.
CAUTION: DO NOT PAINT PITOT TUBES, GAS CAPS, OR ANTENNA COVERS THAT WERE NOT
FACTORY PAINTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE METALLIC PAINTS ON RADAR CONES OR ANTENNA COVERS.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW SILICONE LUBRICANTS TO CONTACT ANY SURFACES TO BE
PAINTED. SILICONE LUBRICANT IS VERY DIFFICULT TO REMOVE COMPLETELY.
4. Painting Sequence
For primer, tack, finish coats, and lacquer application:
A. Position airplane so airflow is from tail toward nose and overspray ahead of you.
B. To minimize overspray problems, have two painters work simultaneously on opposite sides of
airplane.
C. Paint difficult areas such as landing gear, and wheel wells before flat surfaces. Paint the ends and
leading edges of ailerons and flaps. Paint flap and aileron wells, wing tips, and leading and trailing
edges.
D. Paint the bottom of the airplane first including bottom of horizontal tail surfaces. Starting at the root
and working outward, spray chordwise. Work up fuselage and allow spray to cover sides. Work up to
engine. Spray wing bottom. Start each painter at the root and work toward tip, spraying chordwise.
E. Lower airplane tail enough to reach fin top. When spraying fuselage top, tilt spray gun so overspray
is ahead of area being painted and new paint will wipe out overspray. Spray primer across fuselage,
vertical and horizontal tail surfaces, and wing.
5. Color Matching
See aircraft logbooks for color codes.
6. Trim and Registration Numbers
Apply predominant color first over entire surface. Apply trim colors over base color after it dries. When
top of fuselage is to be painted white with a dark color adjoining it, apply light color and feather into area
to be painted with dark color. When light color dries, place masking tape and paper along separation line,
and apply dark color.
Allow paint to dry several hours before removing masking tape. Remove tape by pulling slowly parallel to
surface. This will reduce the possibility of peeling off finish with tape.
Apply registration numbers by painting or affixing self-adhering plastic figures. They must be solid color
lines contrasting with background. Location and size of identification numbers vary, per aircraft size.
Location and size is found in Federal Aviation Regulations.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 20-20-00 2C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Paint System Compatibility

Before applying new paint, find what type finish was used previously. Refer to the Piper parts catalog for
correct paint number and color.
Identify paint finishes by applying engine oil to a small surface area. Old nitrocellulose finishes will soften
in a few minutes. Acrylics, urethanes, and epoxy finishes show no effects.
If not identified, wipe down a small area with rag wet with methyl ethyl ketone. MEK picks up pigments
from acrylic finishes, but not from epoxy or cured urethane coatings. Wipe surface, do not rub. Heavy
rubbing picks up epoxy and urethane pigments from coatings not fully cured.
The use of different types of paint, with several coatings, make repair of damaged and deteriorated
areas difficult. Paint finishes are not always compatible. The following are general rules for compatibility
and are not necessarily listed in order of importance.
A. Old type zinc chromate primer may be used directly for touchup of bare metal surfaces and on
interior finishes. It may be overcoated with wash primers if in good condition. Acrylic lacquer finishes
will not adhere to this material.
B. Modified zinc chromate primer will not adhere to bare metal. Never use it over a dried film of acrylic
nitrocellulose lacquer.
C. Nitrocellulose coatings will adhere to acrylic finishes, but reverse is not true. Do not use acrylic
nitrocellulose lacquers over old nitrocellulose finishes.
D. Acrylic nitrocellulose lacquers will not adhere to nitrocellulose and epoxy finishes and to bare metal.
For best results, apply lacquers over fresh, successive coatings of wash primer and modified zinc
chromate. They also adhere to freshly applied epoxy coatings (dried less than 6 hours).
E. Epoxy topcoats adhere to all paint systems in good condition. Use epoxy for general touch touchup,
including touchup of defects in baked enamel coatings.
F. Old wash primer coats may be overcoated directly with epoxy finishes. Apply a new second coat of
wash primer if an acrylic finish is to be applied.
G. Old acrylic finishes may be refinished with new acrylic provided old coating is thoroughly softened
using acrylic nitrocellulose thinner before paint touchup.
H. Repair damage to epoxy finishes by using more epoxy. Neither lacquer finish will stick to epoxy
surfaces. In some instances, air drying enamels may be used for touchup of epoxy coatings if edges
of damaged areas are roughened with abrasive paper.
8. Common Paint Troubles
A. Poor Adhesion - Paint properly applied to correctly pretreated surfaces will adhere satisfactorily.
When thoroughly dry, paint must not be easily removed. Poor adhesion can result from:
(1) Inadequate cleaning and pretreatment.
(2) Inadequate stirring of paint or primer.
(3) Coating at incorrect time intervals.
(4) Application under adverse conditions.
(5) Bad application.
B. Spray Dust - Spray dust caused by atomized particles drying before reaching surface being painted
fail to flow as a continuous film. Usual causes are incorrect air pressure or distance gun is held from
work.
2C19 20-20-00 Apr

PAGE 3
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Sags and Runs - Excess paint causes wet paint film to move by gravity and presents a sagging
appearance. Incorrect viscosity, air pressure, and gun handling, or inadequate surface preparation
are frequent causes.
D. Spray Mottle - Sometimes known as orange peel or pebble, is caused by incorrect paint viscosity,
air pressure, spray gun setting, or the distance the gun is held from work.
E. Blushing is one of the most common troubles. It appears as clouding or blooming of paint film. It is
more common with cellulose than synthetic materials. It may be caused by moisture in air supply
line, adverse humidity, drafts, or sudden temperature changes.
9. Storage
A. Store paint, enamel, and other finishing material in dry storage away from direct sunlight and heat.
Mark each container with a code for identification.
B. Storage facilities must comply to Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requirements
regarding air circulation, lighting, and fire protection. Lock storage facilities to prevent children and
unauthorized personnel entry.
C. Invert pigmented materials every inventory so pigments will not pack to can bottom. Properly
dispose of empty containers.
D. Use older materials first. Useful life of some finishes is limited.
E. Storage area temperatures must be approximately 50-90°F. If finishes are stored in temperature
extremes, allow them to return to room temperature before using.
10. Painting Facility
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE PAINT FUMES. FUMES DEPLETE THE OXYGEN SUPPLY
REQUIRED BY THE BODY.
A. Painting facilities must conform to local, state, and OSHA standards with respect to air circulation,
exhaust emissions, lighting, and fire protection.
B. Provide sufficient air movement in painting area so there is only a slight finishing material odor.
Exhaust fans must be belt-driven and located near floor level. Locate fan’s motor away from fumes.
C. All spraying area personnel must wear approved respiration safety equipment.
11. Aircraft Finish Care
See 12-00-00.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 20-20-00 2C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2C21 20-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 2C22 THRU 2C24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 20-20-00 2C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
21
ENVIRONMENTAL
SYSTEMS
2D1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21
CHAPTER CHAPTER
21-List of 1 Apr 15/07 21-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
21-50-00 1 Apr 15/07
21-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
21-20-00 1 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
21-30-00 1 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 16 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 17 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 18 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 19 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 20 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 21 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 22 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 23 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 24 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 25 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 26 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 27 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07 28 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07 29 Apr 15/07
2D3 21 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
SECTION PAGE DATE
21-50-00 (Cont.) 30 Apr 15/07

31 Apr 15/07
32 Apr 15/07
33 Apr 15/07
34 Apr 15/07
35 Apr 15/07
36 Apr 15/07
37 Apr 15/07
38 Apr 15/07
39 Apr 15/07
40 Apr 15/07
41 Apr 15/07
42 Apr 15/07
21-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 2D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21 - ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 21-00-00 1 2D9
DISTRIBUTION 21-20-00 1 2D11

Ground Blower 1 2D11
Removal 1 2D11
Installation 1 2D11
Cabin Recirculation Blowers 1 2D11
Removal 1 2D11
Installation 4 2D14
Bleed Air Check Valves 4 2D14
Removal 4 2D14
Installation 4 2D14
Avionics Cooling Blower 4 2D14
Removal 4 2D14
Installation 4 2D14
Muffin Fan 4 2D14
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL 21-30-00 1 2D19

General 1 2D19
Troubleshooting Pressurization System 3 2D21
Component Detailed Description 7 2E1
Cabin Outflow Valve 7 2E1
Absolute Pressure Regulator 7 2E1
Cabin Safety Valve 7 2E1
Cabin Pressure Controller 9 2E3
Description 9 2E3
Operational Check 9 2E3
Auxiliary Volume (Surge) Tank 9 2E3
Vacuum Relief (Cabin Dump) Solenoid Valve 11 2E5
Vacuum Regulator 11 2E5
Bleed Air Shut-off Valve 11 2E5
Removal 11 2E5
Installation 11 2E5
Rigging of Bleed Air and Bleed Air Condition System 11 2E5
Outflow and/or Safety Valve 12 2E6
Removal 12 2E6
Installation 12 2E6
Servicing 12 2E6
Solenoid Valve (Cabin Dump) 12 2E6
Removal 12 2E6
Installation 12 2E6
Pressurization System Test 13 2E7
V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection 15 2E9
2D5 21 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING 21-40-00 1 2E11

Muffler 2 2E12
Removal 2 2E12
Installation 2 2E12
Heat Exchanger/Plenum Assembly 2 2E12
Removal 2 2E12
Installation 2 2E12
Mass Flow Control Valve 2 2E12
Removal 3 2E13
Installation 3 2E13
Testing 4 2E14
Heat Exchanger (Precooler) 4 2E14
Removal 4 2E14
Installation 4 2E14
Defroster 4 2E14
Removal 4 2E14
Installation 5 2E15
Rigging 5 2E15
COOLING 21-50-00 1 2E17

General 1 2E17
Troubleshooting 1 2E17
Servicing Cooling System 7 2E23
Definitions 7 2E23
Service Valves 7 2E23
Description 7 2E23
Replacement 7 2E23
Malfunction Detection 9 2F1
Special Servicing Procedures 10 2F2
Refrigerant Safety Precautions 10 2F2
System Servicing Precautions 11 2F3
Servicing the System (with a Charging Stand) 13 2F5
Discharging the System 13 2F5
Evacuating the System 14 2F6
Leak Detection 17 2F9
Charging the System 19 2F11
Post Charging Operational Check 22 2F14
Servicing the System (with a Manifold Set) 25 2F17
Test Gauge and Manifold Set 25 2F17
Evacuating the System 25 2F17
Leak Detection 25 2F17
Charging the System 27 2F19
Post Charging Operational Check 28 2F20
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21 - CONTENTS 2D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COOLING (continued) 21-50-00

Compressor 28 2F20
Compressor Service 28 2F20
Removal 29 2F21
Installation 29 2F21
Checking Compressor Oil Level 29 2F21
Adjustment of Drive Belt Tension 33 2G1
Refrigerant Lines and Routing 33 2G1
Evaporator/Blower Assembly 36 2G4
Removal 36 2G4
Installation 36 2G4
Expansion Valve 36 2G4
Removal 36 2G4
Installation 36 2G4
Condenser 36 2G4
Removal 36 2G4
Installation 37 2G5
Condenser Blower Motor Assembly 38 2G6
Removal 38 2G6
Installation 38 2G6
Receiver - Dehydrator 38 2G6
Removal 38 2G6
Installation 38 2G6
Manifold Assembly 39 2G7
Removal 39 2G7
Installation 39 2G7
Pressure Switches 39 2G7
Removal 39 2G7
Installation 39 2G7
TEMPERATURE CONTROL 21-60-00 1 2G11

Cabin Air Temperature Control Valve 1 2G11
Removal 1 2G11
Installation 1 2G11
Testing 1 2G11

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The environmental system consists of an engine bleed air and conditioning system, cabin air distribution
system, pressurization and control system, ventilating air system and air conditioning system.
Compressor bleed air from the P3 engine port supplies air for heating the cabin during flight and ground
operations and for pressurization. The bleed air is first routed through a mass flow controller that mixes
ambient and bleed air, then the air flow is split between a heat exchanger and muffler. The amount of air
flowing through each component is dependent on the cabin air temperature setting, but will always be
warmer than cabin air. The air then flows into the cabin through the lower left and right cabin side panel
ducts, in addition to the windshield defroster when selected by pulling the knob below the right control
column.
The cabin pressurization and control system consist of an outflow valve (isobaric), safety valve, cabin
altitude and rate selector, electrically operated vacuum solenoid valve, surge tank and associated inter-
connecting plumbing and wiring. Cabin altitude, differential pressure, and rate of change are displayed
on a single 3-inch diameter indicator. Pilot warning (displayed on the annunciator panel and aurally) is
provided to indicate a cabin altitude above 10,000 feet.
Cabin ventilating air during ground or unpressurized low altitude flight operation is provided by a blower
through the lower left and right cabin side panel ducts. The blower is activated by the VENT switch.
Cabin air conditioning is provided by a vapor cycle system. The A/C compressor is belt driven by the
engine dual drive.
The condenser and its cooling air fan are located in the tailcone immediately aft of the rear pressure
bulkhead. Cooling air from outside the tailcone is drawn into the cooling air duct through a flush opening
in the skin, routed across the condenser coil, and discharged overboard through the tailcone exit
opening.
Two recirculation blowers and evaporator assemblies are located aft of each rear seat below the rear
baggage compartment floor. The recirculation blowers draw air into each evaporator coil through grills in
the floor structure behind the rear seats and discharges it into the upper left and right cabin side panel
ducts. Adjustable eyeball outlets are located at each seat in the airplane.
The AIR COND and BLOWER LO & HI switches, located as part of the environmental switch panel in
the center of the instrument panel, are used to control the air conditioning system.
When the AIR COND switch is selected ON, the compressor belt drive is electrically clutched, the
condenser blower motor relay is closed, and both recirculation blowers are activated. The recirculation
blowers can be operated independently of the air conditioner by selecting the BLOWER HI or LO on. In
either situation, the BLOWER switches are used only to select a HI or LO recirculation blower motor
speed. When selecting between BLOWER HI and BLOWER LO the switch currently "on" should be
deselected to "off" before selecting the other "on". Overcurrent protection is provided by the 15 amp
CABIN BLOWERS, 5 amp AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL, and 25 amp AIR CONDITIONER POWER
circuit breakers in the nonessential bus section of the pilot's forward circuit breaker panel.
The refrigeration system incorporates a receiver dryer, a sight gauge, suction and discharge service
valves, and 265 psi high pressure and 40 psi low pressure switches. Should the compressor discharge
pressure increase above 265 psi, or decrease below 40 psi, the applicable pressure switch will open,
disengaging the A/C compressor clutch.
2D9 21-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21-00-00 2D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
The cabin air distribution system consists of left and right side panel ducting, windshield defrost, foot
warmer (if installed) and left and right recirculation blowers. The side panel ducts provide for overall air
distribution throughout the length of the cabin as well as individual controllable air outlets at each seat
(eyeball outlets). The defrost control will allow part of the bleed air to be diverted to the windshield
defrost outlet. Separate and individual controls for the two foot warmer outlets (if installed) are also
provided. The outlets are located between the rudder pedals on each side of the cockpit. The
recirculation blowers supply airflow to the portion of the sidewall ducts containing the individual seat
outlets (eyeballs).
1. Ground Ventilation Blower (See 21-40-00, Figure 1.)
A vane-axial blower is installed in the duct at the left rear of the engine compartment. This blower
supplements ventilation air flow during ground operation and is unheated.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the electrical leads from the blower.
(2) At the forward end of the blower, loosen the clamp that secures the flexible inlet duct to the
blower.
(3) At the aft end of the blower, unbolt and remove the six (6) bolts that hold the check valve to the
blower and the outlet duct.
(4) Unscrew and remove the screws (2) holding the mounting clamps (2) and blower to the
mounting bracket.
(5) Slide the blower aft and up to remove it.
B. Installation
(1) Position the blower in place, ensuring that the airflow arrow is pointing aft.
(2) Slide the mounting clamps (2) into position and screw them to the mounting bracket sufficiently
tight to hold the blower, but loose enough to allow fore and aft movement.
(3) Install the check valve per paragraph 3, below, and secure the aft end of the blower to the
check valve and outlet duct with the six (6) check valve bolts.
(4) Secure the forward flexible inlet duct to the blower with the clamp.
(5) Tighten mounting clamps.
(6) Connect electrical leads to the blower.
2. Cabin Recirculation Blowers
The left and right cabin recirculation blowers can be removed and installed as follows:
A. Removal
(1) To remove either blower assembly, gain access to it beneath the floor between F.S. 233.87 and
F.S. 241.50.
(2) Disconnect the duct from the outboard side of the blower.
(3) Disconnect the electrical lead going to the blower motor.
(4) Remove the bolts, nuts and washers that attach the blower to the evaporator shell.
(5) Remove the blower from its cavity.
2D11 21-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Defrost DEFROST
FWD Control PULL ON
Aft
Pressure
Bulkhead
Flow Restrictor
Eyeballs (6)
A
Safety
Valve
Defroster
Recirculation Blower
And Evaporators
Outflow
Valve
Conditioned Air
Mass Flow Control (4 Positions)

- OFF
- NORM (Ground with WOW) Mass
Arms Emergency Flow
- HIGH Controller
Arms Emergency
- EMERGENCY
Commands Emergency Valve Open
B
ECS ON / OFF
Auto / Manual
Switch Temp
Controller
Manual
Control Cabin Temp Control
INCR / DECR
Cabin Temp Sensor
Cabin Altitude Switch
Air Distribution System

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21-20-00 2D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
* S/N'S 4697174 & UP
Pressure
Regulator
To Vacuum System Overboard
Dump
To De-Ice System
Forward
Pressure Precooler
Air-to-Air
Bulkhead
Heat
Emergency Exchanger
Pressure
Solenoid
Valve Ground
Blower
Ram Air
A Ram Air
Temp
Sensor
Check
Ram Air TO *
FUEL PURGE
Valve SYSTEM
Temp Mass
Acoustic Muffler (SEE 71-70-00,
Mass Control Flow P3 FIGURE 3.)
Flow Valve Control Port
Sensor Valve
Overboard
Dump
Engine
Bleed Air
Shutoff
Air-to-Air Valve
Heat
Exchanger
Firewall
Ram Air
FWD BLEED AIR

PULL OFF
Note: See also 21-40-00, Figure 1.
Air Distribution System

2D13 21-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Position the blower in place on the evaporator shell and secure it with the bolts, nuts and
washers.
(2) Connect the electrical leads going to the blower motor. (Refer to Chapter 91 of this manual for
schematic information.)
(3) Connect the duct to the outboard side of the blower.
(4) Reinstall any access panels previously removed.
3. Bleed Air Check Valves (See Figure 1.)
Flapper-type check valves are located at the forward pressure bulkhead, the aft end of the vane-axial
blower, and between the temperature and mass flow sensors. While individual assemblies vary, they can
all be removed and installed as follows:
A. Removal
(1) Remove six (6) bolts joining components on either side of the check valve. It may also be
necessary to loosen or remove clamps retaining one or both components to allow sufficient
clearance to access check valve.
(2) Remove check valve.
B. Installation
(1) Position valve and gaskets, taking care to ensure flapper side is towards the cabin side of the
flow.
(2) Position components on either side of check valve, as necessary, and secure components and
check valve with six (6) bolts.
4. Avionics Cooling Blower (See Figure 2.)
The avionics cooling blower is installed on the right side of the fuselage, behind the instrument panel, at
FS 108.00. The cooling air is directed through ducts to installed avionics equipment.
NOTE: Actual equipment served will vary depending on optional equipment installed.
A. Removal
(1) Remove ducts from top of blower. (Ducts are held in place by Ty-Raps.)
(2) Disconnect blower motor wires at connector.
(3) Remove screws, washers and nuts that attach the blower assembly to its mounting bracket.
B. Installation
(1) Attach the blower assembly to the mounting bracket with the screws, washers and nuts.
(2) Reconnect the blower motor wires.
(3) Attach the ducts to the tops of the blower assembly. Ensure that the duct ends overlap the
ports on top of the blower one-half inch minimum. Secure with Ty-Raps.
5. Muffin Fan
In addition to the avionics cooling blower described above, a muffin fan is installed in the control pedestal
as shown in Figure 2, Sheet 2.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 21-20-00 2D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
BLOWER
DUCT
TUBING
J308
P308
Avionics Cooling
2D15 21-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO XPNDR #1 TO TOP OF AUDIO PANEL

(S/N'S 4697001 THRU 4697037)
OR
TO XPNDR #2 TO FLIGHT MAX DISPLAY
(S/N'S 4697038 & UP)
TO AUTOPILOT COMPUTER
TO GNS-530 NO. 2
TO GNS-530 NO. 1
DUCT TUBING
BLOWER
ACFT SKIN
SCREW (2)
WASHER (2) FWD
+
-
AV5
F.S.
MUFFIN FAN 108.00
VIEW A-A
ROTATED 180˚
D
FW
104468 D
UP
Avionics Cooling
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 21-20-00 2D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2D17 21-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 21-20-00 2D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL
1. General
The cabin pressurization control system consists of an isobaric outflow valve, a safety outflow valve,
absolute pressure regulator, cabin altitude and rate selector, electrically operated vacuum solenoid valve,
surge tank and associated inter-connecting plumbing and wiring.
Cabin altitude, differential pressure, and rate of change are displayed on a single 3-inch diameter
indicator. Pilot warning (displayed on the annunciator panel and aurally) is provided to indicate a cabin
altitude above 10,000 feet.
Air for cabin pressure is obtained from the P3 engine bleed port. Bleed air is routed through the mass
flow and temperature controllers. The mass flow controller meters the amount of mass flow to the cabin
through an actuator controlled, ambient and bleed air, mixing ejector. The amount of mass flow is
controlled by a four position switch located below and to the right of the left control column. The available
settings are off, normal, high, and emergency.
Cabin pressure is automatically regulated to a maximum of 5.5 psi pressure differential. Should the cabin
outflow valve malfunction, the cabin safety valve will maintain a maximum of 5.6 cabin differential
pressure. The landing gear squat switch (which actuates the cabin dump solenoid valve) and vacuum
pressure prevents the cabin from being pressurized while the airplane is on the ground.
Should cabin pressure altitude exceed 10,000 feet, an amber CABIN ALT 10K annunciator combined
with audible alarm will warn the pilot. If the cabin altitude exceeds 12,000 feet, the emergency pressure
solenoid valve (see 37-10-00, Figure 1, Sheet 2) is opened and a red CABIN ALTITUDE annunciator
combined with audible alarm will warn the pilot. If the cabin altitude exceeds 13,500 feet, the absolute
pressure regulator will close the isobaric outflow valve. The cabin pressurization system isobaric outflow
valve provides the means by which smoke and impurities are vented from the cabin.
In pressurized flight, set the cabin pressure controller at 500 feet above the airport pressure altitude, the
CABIN PRESS control set to normal and the DUMP/NORM switch to NORM. The rate of cabin ascent
and descent change is controlled with the rate knob (left lower corner of the cabin pressure controller),
and may be adjusted between approximately 200 and 2000 feet per minute, as desired. Setting the rate
knob arrow to the 9 o'clock position provides a cabin rate of change of approximately 500 feet per
minute, a comfortable rate for normal operations.
The CABIN PRESS DUMP/NORM switch, when set to DUMP, electrically opens a solenoid valve
allowing vacuum suction pressure to open the safety valve and rapidly dump cabin pressure to ambient
pressure.
In unpressurized flight the CABIN PRESS is set to OFF and the pressurization bleed air shut off valve
pulled closed. Setting the CABIN PRESS/DUMP/NORM switch to DUMP will provide maximum airflow
through the cabin.
Refer to Chapter 91 of this manual for electrical schematics of the pressurization system.
2D19 21-30-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin Pressure Control System

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Troubleshooting Pressurization System

TROUBLESHOOTING (PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM)
Trouble Cause Remedy

Cabin will not pressurize. Blocked safety valve cabin Replace filter and check
air filter or orifice. orifice.
Blocked controller cabin air Clean filter and check
filter with orifice. orifice on controller.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace
isobaric valve and defective isobaric valve and absolute
absolute pressure regulator. pressure regulator.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace safety
safety valve. valve.
controller. controller.
Defective landing gear Remove and replace
safety switch. switch.
Dump switch incorrectly Replace switch.
positioned or defective.
No pressure to door seal. Check and repair door
seal or door seal valve.
Excessive leakage in Locate leak and tighten
pressurization ducts. connections.
Excessive cabin leakage. Locate and repair leak.
Solenoid valve malfunctions Replace valve.
in the open position.
Cabin pressurizes to full Vacuum tube not connected Connect vacuum tube.
positive differential to controller.
pressure after takeoff.
Malfunction in aircraft Check aircraft vacuum
vacuum supply. supply.
Rupture in volume tank. Replace tank.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace valve.
outflow isobaric valve.
Cabin altitude decreases Low aircraft vacuum supply. Check aircraft vacuum
below selected altitude. supply.
Minor leak in tube between Remove and replace tube
controller and volume tank or volume tank.
or in volume tank.
2D21 21-30-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin altitude decreases Minor leak in tube between Remove and replace tube
below selected altitude. controller and isobaric valve or isobaric valve.
(cont.) or in isobaric valve.
Minor leak in the controller. Remove and replace
controller.
Minimum rates unbalanced. Minor leak in tube between Remove or replace tube
Down rate faster than up controller and volume tank or volume tank.
rate. or in volume tank.
Minor leak in the controller. Remove and replace
controller.
Pressurized operation Solenoid valve malfunction Replace valve.
before takeoff and in the closed position.
after landing.
Landing gear safety switch/ Remove and replace
dump switch malfunction in the switch.
open position.
Broken wiring to the Repair wiring.
solenoid valve.
Loose or damaged pneumatic Check tube connections or
tube between solenoid valve replace damaged tube.
and safety valve.
Internal malfunction in the Remove and replace valve.
safety valve.
Cabin exceeds full positive True static atmosphere tube Securely connect or
differential calibrated blocked or not connected on remove blockage from
setting. isobaric valve and safety the true static atmosphere
valve. tube on isobaric valve and
safety valve.
Loose or damaged pneumatic Repair or replace tubing.
tubing from port “1” of
safety and isobaric valve to
atmosphere.
Cabin climbs and descends Internal malfunction in Remove and replace
at a fixed rate regardless controller. controller.
of rate selection.
Cabin rate exceeds selected Malfunction in controller. Remove and replace
rate valve during aircraft controller.
climb to cruise altitude.
Defective cabin rate of Remove and replace
climb indicator. indicator.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin pressure rapidly Malfunction in controller. Remove and replace

increases or decreases controller.
with reselection of cabin
altitude.
Cabin altitude exceeds Loss of airflow into cabin. Repair bleed air supply.
selected value.
Internal malfunction in Remove and replace valve.
isobaric valve and, if
cabin altitude exceeds
13,500, defective absolute Replace absolute pressure
pressure regulator. regulator.
Internal malfunction in Remove and replace valve.
safety valve.
Internal malfunction in Remove and replace
Excessive cabin leak rate. Seal leaks.
Cabin pressure will not Defective outflow valve. Remove and replace valve.
maintain control setting.
Defective safety valve. Remove and replace valve.
Defective cabin altitude Remove and replace cabin
controller. altitude controller.
Pressurization duct leakage. Locate leak and tighten
connection.
Cabin leakage Locate and repair leak.
Defective cabin altitude Remove and replace
pressure gauge. gauge.
Foreign matter on isobaric Clean valve seats.
outflow control valve or
safety valve seats.
Leak in outflow isobaric Locate leak and tighten
valve control line. connection.
Cabin pressure excessively Isobaric outflow valve static Clean static line.
high. line clogged.
Defective cabin over pressure Remove and replace
switch. switch.
Safety valve static vent Clean vent line.
clogged.
Defective safety valve. Remove and replace valve.
2D23 21-30-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Safety and Outflow Valves

Figure 2
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Component Detailed Description

A. Cabin Outflow Valve. (Refer to Figure 2)
The outflow valve consists of two sections, a head section and a base section. The head section
contains port "2" (controller connection) and a plugged cabin air port. Mounted on the head is the
differential control, which contains port "1" (true static atmosphere connection with orifice). The
base assembly encloses a poppet outflow valve which seats on a surface of the base assembly
when in the closed position.
B. Absolute Pressure Regulator (See Figures 1 and 3)
The absolute pressure regulator contains a spring-loaded, closed ball metering valve and an
aneroid bellows. The bellows senses cabin pressure and overrides the spring closing force when
cabin pressure reduces to 13,500 ± 1,000 ft. When the valve opens, cabin pressure enters the
outflow valve head with sufficient pressure to:
(1) fully close the outflow valve; and,
(2) shut off the pneumatic control pressure from the controller.
C. Cabin Safety Valve. (Refer to Figure 2)
The safety valve consists of two sections, a head section and a base section. The head section
contains port "2" depressurization connection and a cabin air filter with orifice. Mounted on the head
is a differential control which contains port "1" (true static atmosphere connection with orifice). The
base assembly encloses a poppet outflow valve which seats on a surface of the base assembly
when in the closed position.
Absolute Pressure Regulator

Figure 3
2E1 21-30-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Cabin Pressure Controller. (See Figure 4.)

(1) Description
The body of the controller is composed of three elements. The lower element forms a chamber
which is open to cabin pressure and houses the absolute bellows. It also is the face of the
controller, and has the cabin altitude selector knob and the cabin rate control knob. The middle
element, when assembled to the lower element, completes the cabin pressure chamber and
seals the cabin pressure chamber from the rest of the controller with a sealing diaphragm. The
opposite side of the middle element forms a rate pressure chamber which houses the rate
spring. The upper element, when assembled to the rate diaphragm and other two elements,
forms a reference pressure chamber which houses the reference pressure metering valve and
metering valve follower spring. This element also contains the various air connections for
installation of the controller into the cabin pressure control system.
(2) Operational Check (PIR-Garrett Report No. 4-360.)
This check verifies minimum P operation, cabin altitude control, and cabin pressure rate-of-
change control are operational.
(a) Close and secure cabin door.
(b) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob to the 9 o’clock position.
(c) Rotate cabin altitude selector knob until CABIN ALT indicates approximately 500 feet
above field altitude.
(d) Set brakes, start engine, and establish a steady cabin air inflow.
(e) Pull landing gear warning circuit breaker and note that safety valve closes and outflow
valve remains open.
(f) Rotate cabin altitude selector knob counterclockwise until CABIN ALT indicates
approximately 1500 feet below field altitude or unitl it reaches its stop. Cabin pressure will
increase on rate-of-change operation.
(g) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob counterclockwise and note a reduction in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change.
(h) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob clockwise and note an increase in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change. Return selector knob to the 9 o’clock position.
(i) Allow cabin pressure to stabilize at the selected value.
(j) Rotate cabin altitude selector knob until CABIN ALT indicates approximately 500 feet
above field altitude.
(k) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob counterclockwise and note a reduction in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change.
(l) Rotate cabin rate control selector knob clockwise and note an increase in cabin
pressurization rate-of-change; then, allow cabin pressure to return to field altitude and
outflow valve to move to the full-open position.
(m) Push-in landing gear warning circuit breaker and note that safety valve also fully opens.
(n) Shutdown engine.
E. Auxiliary Volume (Surge) Tank.
This is a small sealed chamber located close to the controller; and when connected to the
controller, it provides additional volume to the rate pressure chamber in the controller, thus
providing greater accuracy of the cabin rate-of-control.
2E3 21-30-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cabin Pressure Controller

Figure 4
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Vacuum Relief (Cabin Dump) Solenoid Valve.

This valve is normally closed. It is located in the control line between the cabin pressure controller
vacuum port and the safety valve. When energized, vacuum is applied to the diaphragm of the
safety valve, holding it open. The vacuum relief solenoid valve is open under either of the following
conditions:
(1) On the ground with the landing gear squat switch energized.
(2) In flight whenever the cabin dump switch is in the DUMP position.
G. Vacuum Regulator.
Vacuum to operate the safety valve and controller is obtained from the vacuum system which
utilizes its own regulator. The regulator, set to provide a nominal suction of 5.0 inches of mercury
(relative to cabin pressure), is incorporated in the system between the cabin and the ejector.
4. Bleed Air Shut-off Valve (See 21-40-00, Figure 1.)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect control cable rod end from bottom of bleed air shut-off valve.
(2) Remove V-band couplers that secure the bleed air shut-off valve assembly to the bleed air line.
(3) Remove bleed air shut-off valve.
B. Installation
(1) Position bleed air shut-off valve assembly in place.
(2) Install V-band couplers, one on each end of the shut-off valve assembly and safety with
lockwire.
(3) Attach control cable rod end to shut-off valve arm.
5. Rigging of Bleed Air and Bleed Air Condition System
Rig cabin pressure system as follows:
A. Push bleed air shut-off knob into the pedestal.
B. Verify that bleed air shut-off valve is in open position.
C. Pull bleed air shut-off knob out from the pedestal.
D. Verify that bleed air shut-off valve is in closed position.
2E5 21-30-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Outflow and/or Safety Valve

A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the two lines from the valve being removed.
(2) Remove the three nuts which secure the valve to the aft pressure bulkhead.
(3) Remove the valve from the pressure bulkhead.
B. Installation
(1) When reinstalling outflow and/or safety valve, the gasket dimension shown in Detail A of Figure
2 must be met to ensure proper sealing. To provide proper clearance between nuts and gasket
face, adjust for clearance as follows:
(a) Remove nuts using a deep socket and remove enough shims to meet dimensional
requirements. A minimum of one shim is required each place for installation of nut.
(b) Install nuts and tighten.
(c) Apply a drop of locking compound, MIL-S-22473-EV, to the top of nuts between nuts and
studs.
(2) Position the valve on the rear pressure bulkhead.
(3) Install the three nuts which hold the valve to the aft pressure bulkhead. Torque nuts to 20 in.
lbs.
(4) Reconnect the two lines to the valve.
C. Servicing
Routine maintenance of the valves is limited to the replacement of the filter in the safety valve and
cleaning of the seats in both valves.
Using Joy detergent or isopropyl alcohol, clean the seats of either valve thoroughly.
7. Solenoid Valve (Cabin Dump)
The solenoid valve is mounted on the left-hand side of the F.S. 108.00 bulkhead at W.L. 57.00.
A. Removal
(1) Gain access to the solenoid valve.
(2) Disconnect the lines from the valve.
(3) Remove the screws and washers that attach the valve to the bulkhead. Remove the valve.
B. Installation
(1) Secure the valve to the bulkhead with the screws and washers.
(2) Reconnect the lines to the valve.
(3) Tighten the nuts finger tight plus one and one-half turns.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Pressurization System Test (PIR-PPS60144-3, Rev. C.)
WARNING: DO NOT APPLY ELECTRICAL POWER ON BUS UNLESS AIRCRAFT IS ON JACKS AND
STRUTS ARE FULLY EXTENDED.
A. Equipment Required.
Pressurization Test Stand
B. Procedure.
NOTE: Open engine access gull wing doors and remove upper forward cowling before beginning.
(1) Plug cabin altimeter indicator (3-in-1 indicator) sensing port (marked “C.P.”).
(2) Disconnect vacuum line at the tee on the rear of cabin pressurization controller. Cap tee and
plug vacuum line.
CAUTION: IMPROPER SETTING WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO CABIN PRESSURIZATION
CONTROLLER.
(3) Turn rate selector on cabin pressurization controller full clockwise. Turn cabin altitude selector
full counter-clockwise.
(4) Ensure that pilot’s storm window, emergency exit, and cabin door are properly installed and
secured closed. Strap cabin door.
NOTE: Perform the following steps outside aircraft by monitoring test stand operation and
inspecting gauge through cockpit window.
(5) Connect instrument line connector port on test stand to 1/4 inch bulkhead fitting on firewall
(WL 66.25, LBL 16.75).
(6) At the right side of the engine, disconnect the mass flow control valve outlet hose from the
temperature control valve inlet (see Figure 1, 21-40-00). Connect pressurization test stand air
outlet port to temperature control valve inlet.
(7) At the left engine access gull wing door, disconnect the emergency pressure valve (see 37-10-00,
Figure 1) from the flexible hose coupling between the valve and its outlet tube assy (i.e. - P/N
102682-002). Plug the flexible hose coupling.
WARNING: DO NOT OCCUPY CABIN DURING TESTS.
(8) Start airflow into fuselage slowly and at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute rate of
change.
CAUTION: TEST STAND OPERATOR MUST CONTINUALLY MONITOR STAND
OPERATION DURING ALL TIMES THAT CABIN IS PRESSURIZED. DURING
INITIAL PRESSURIZATION, ENSURE BY INSPECTION THROUGH COCKPIT
WINDOW THAT AIRCRAFT AND CABIN ALTITUDE, AIRSPEED, AND RATE OF
CLIMB INDICATORS ARE UNAFFECTED BY CABIN PRESSURE. ANY OF THE
ABOVE INSTRUMENTS BEING AFFECTED INDICATES A LEAK IN THE STATIC
SYSTEM. CORRECT BEFORE PROCEEDING.
(9) When cabin differential gauge indicates 1 pound per square inch differential (psid), maintain
only sufficient airflow to hold 1 psid. Inspect cabin structure, bleed air system, outflow, and
safety valves. Identify major leaks for corrective sealing.
2E7 21-30-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Continue to pressurize the cabin at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute until a maximum
cabin differential of 5.25 psid occurs. Determine airflow required to maintain 5.25 psid and
record. If airflow exceeds 40 SCFM*, or a major leak is occurring in one or more places, or if
excessive noise is found, identify for corrective sealing.
* SCFM = CFM obs

[( P obs + 29.92
29.92 )( 520 ˚F
T obs + 460 ˚R )]
Where: P obs = PSID observed x 2.036
T obs = Temperature (˚F) observed
CFM obs = Cubic Feet per Minute observed
SCFM = Standard Cubic Feet per Minute (flow)
NOTE: If cabin will not pressurize above 1 psid due to excessive leakage:
(a) Disconnect cabin controller line at outflow valve.
(b) Pressurize to not more than 5.25 psid to identify all leaks.
(c) Repair leaks.
(d) When an acceptable leak rate is achieved, depressurize cabin.
(e) Reconnect cabin controller line to outflow valve.
WARNING: DO NOT EXCEED 5.60 MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE IN NEXT STEP.
EXCESSIVE PRESSURE CAN CAUSE STRUCTURAL DAMAGE OR
PERSONAL INJURY.
(11) Continue to pressurize the cabin at a rate not to exceed 1,500 feet per minute until either the
outflow or safety valve starts to relieve. Note differential pressure and which valve operated.
Correct operating range is 5.50 + 0.1, - 0.15 psid.
(12) Lower cabin pressure to 4.0 ± 0.2 psid.
(13) Plug the ambient sensing port of the valve which operated above.
PERSONAL INJURY.
(14) Slowly increase cabin pressure and observe the differential pressure at which the remaining
valve starts to relieve. Record. Correct operating range is 5.50 + 0.1, - 0.15 psid.
(15) Lower cabin pressure to 4.0 ± 0.2 psid.
(16) Unplug the ambient sensing port of the valve which operated first and was subsequently
plugged.
PERSONAL INJURY..
(17) Repeat step 11. Verify that the same valve operates first and that it operates within the correct
pressure range (i.e. - 5.50 + 0.1, - 0.15 psid).
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(18) Depressurize cabin at a rate not exceeding 1,500 fpm.

(19) Remove instrument line connector and pressurization outlet connections installed in steps (5)
and (6). Cap 1/4 inch fitting in firewall. Reconnect mass flow control valve outlet hose to the
temperature control valve inlet.
(20) Remove the plug installed in step (7) and reconnect the flexible hose coupling to the outlet side
of the emergency pressure valve.
(21) Unstrap cabin door.
(22) Inside cabin, remove plug installed in cabin altitude indicator sensing port. Reconnect vacuum
line and tee at controller.
(23) Turn rate and cabin altitude selectors on cabin controller full counterclockwise.
(24) Install cowling.
9. V-Band Coupling 100 Hour Inspection (See Figure 5.)
Each 100 hours, inspect lockwiring on V-band couplings for condition and security. If lockwiring is found
broken, inspect T-bolt for stretching, cracking, or any other damage. Replace coupling as required.
Lockwiring V-Band Couplings

Figure 5
2E9 21-30-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 21-30-00 2E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HEATING
The temperature controller sets what percentage of bleed air will flow through the cooling heat
exchanger and what percentage will flow through the acoustic muffler. The amount of air through each
device determines the mixed cabin supply air temperature. The temperature controls are located in the
middle of the instrument panel and have two modes of operation, automatic and manual. Cabin
temperature is controlled by a relative temperature knob when in automatic mode and an
increase/decrease rocker switch when in manual mode. The automatic temperature mode relies on the
cabin temperature sensor, located behind the pilot in a side close out panel, for temperature regulation.
The manual temperature mode directly controls the amount of air flowing through the cooling heat
exchanger and acoustic muffler. In either mode, the cabin supply air temperature will always be higher
than cabin air.
Cabin Heat and Fresh Air System

Figure 1
2E11 21-40-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Muffler
A. Removal
(1) Loosen band clamps (two each end) and remove flexible hoses from forward and aft ends of
muffler.
(2) Unscrew and remove mounting bracket retaining screws (2).
(3) Remove muffler.
B. Installation
(1) Position muffler in mounting bracket.
(2) Secure with screws (2).
(3) Attach flexible hoses to forward and aft ends of muffler and secure with band clamps (two each
end).
2. Heat Exchanger/Plenum Assembly
A. Removal
(1) Remove muffler as described above.
(2) Loosen band clamp and remove flexible hose from bottom of fiberglass intake plenum.
(3) Loosen band clamps and remove flexible hoses from forward and aft ends of heat exchanger.
(4) Loosen and remove the two mounting bracket bolts on each end of the heat exchanger and
remove the heat exchanger/plenum assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Position heat exchanger/plenum assembly in mounting bracket.
(2) Secure with two bolts on each end.
(3) Slide flexible hoses in to place on each end of the heat exchanger. Secure with band clamps.
(4) Slide flexible hose in to place at the bottom of the fiberglass intake plenum. Secure with a band
clamp.
(5) Install muffler as described above.
3. Mass Flow Control Valve (See Figure 2.)
The electronic mass inflow system consists of: Mass Flow Control Valve (1 ea.), Mass Flow Sensor
Assembly (1 ea.) (which includes the probe in the ECS duct and the sensor in the cabin), and Mass Flow
Controller (1 ea.).
NOTE: The mass flow sensor assembly components (i.e. - the ECS duct probe and the cabin sensor)
are matched sets. If either component fails, both must be replaced.
The primary function of the mass inflow control system is to provide a sufficient amount of bleed air to
the aircraft cabin for pressurization.
The mass flow control valve is controlled by a linear actuator, which receives programmed 28 VDC
pulses from the electronic mass flow controller. The electronic (digital) mass flow controller receives input
signals from the electronic mass flow sensor assembly, compares the data with the pre-selected flow
value and makes adjustments as required. The mass flow controller is programmed to provide a
controlled response to the flow sensor input signal to eliminate cabin pressure bumps.
The bleed air mass inflow system automatically maintains the selected inflow rate and is programmed for
3 different flow settings. The pilot may manually select high or normal flow. In the normal mode, the
system provides 1.25 ppm of bleed air on the ground to provide fresh air for the occupants and heating
on moderate days, and 5 ppm in flight to meet cabin pressurization requirements. In the high mode the
system provides 8 ppm to meet high altitude and cold day heating requirements.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21-40-00 2E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Mass Flow Control Valve

Figure 2
The mass flow control valve also includes an air-to-air ejector. The ejector creates low internal static
pressure that enables low pressure ambient air to be drawn into the venturi where it is mixed with the hot
expanded bleed air. By doing so, the inflow system is able to reduce the amount of bleed air extracted
from the engine (and related power losses) as well as reducing the temperature of the air being supplied
to the temperature control system. The valve includes an ambient valve to close off the ambient source
at temperatures below 32 degrees F. Testing has shown that utilizing the air-to-air ejector should reduce
bleed air consumption by approximately 50% at sea level. The effect is reduced at higher altitudes where
the pressure of the ambient air is lower and at approximately 20,000 feet no ambient air will be drawn
into the valve.
A. Removal
(1) Remove muffler as described above.
(2) Remove muffler mounting bracket.
(3) Disconnect electrical leads.
(4) Loosen band clamps at each end of valve assembly and remove flexible hoses.
(5) Unscrew high pressure bleed air fitting on top of valve assembly.
(6) Unscrew and remove mounting clamp screws at each end of valve assembly. Remove valve
assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Place mounting clamps (2) on valve assembly with forward clamp up and aft clamp down.
(2) Position valve assembly and secure mounting clamps to brackets with screws (2).
(3) Screw high pressure bleed air fitting to top of valve assembly and tighten.
(4) Slide flexible hoses in to place on each end of valve assembly and secure with band clamps.
(5) Connect electrical leads.
(6) Reinstall muffler mounting bracket.
(7) Reinstall muffler as described above.
2E13 21-40-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Testing
The mass inflow control system can be tested as follows. Use of an Enviro Systems breakout box
(Enviro Systems P/N 1300000) is helpful, but not required.
(1) Ground testing without the breakout box:
(a) With the aircraft electrical power turned on, place the ECS switch in the off position. The
flow control valve should move to the full closed position and remain there.
(b) Place the ECS switch in the normal position. The flow control valve should move to the full
open position and remain there.
(2) Ground testing with the breakout box:
The breakout box allows measurements of voltages for each of the input and output lines on
the flow controller and allows the technician to see the actual open and close signals being
sent to the flow control valve.
(a) Connect the breakout box by installing it between the flow controller and the aircraft wiring
harness.
(b) Conduct the test sequence described in “Ground testing without the breakout box,” above.
4. Heat Exchanger (Precooler)
A. Removal
(1) Loosen band clamps and remove flexible hoses from forward and aft ends of precooler
plenum.
(2) Unscrew high pressure bleed air fittings at heat exchanger intake and exhaust.
(3) Remove screws (2) holding heat exchanger to precooler mounting bracket and remove heat
exchanger and plenum.
B. Installation
(1) Align heat exchanger/plenum assembly into proper position.
(2) Attach heat exchanger/plenum assembly to precooler mounting bracket with screws (2).
(3) Attach high pressure bleed air fittings at heat exchanger intake and exhaust and tighten.
(4) Slide flexible hoses over forward and aft ends of precooler plenum and secure with band
clamps.
5. Defroster
A. Removal
(1) Remove closeout panel covering magnetic (float) compass and windshield defroster by
removing compass deviation and removing screw securing deviation card holder and close out
panel.
(2) Remove the four screws and nylon spacers securing defroster to windshield post.
(3) Loosen clamps securing defrost hoses to defroster. Remove hoses.
(4) Remove defroster.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 21-40-00 2E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Connect defrost hoses to appropriate fittings on defroster. Tighten clamps screws.
(2) Position defroster at windshield post. Secure with four nylon spacers and screws.
(3) Position closeout panel in appropriate position over defroster and magnetic compass.
NOTE: Only brass screw may be used to secure compass card holder and close out panel to
windshield post.
(4) Position compass deviation card holder in proper location. Be sure screw hole in deviation card
holder aligns with screw hole in closeout panel. Secure both in position with brass screw
previously removed.
C. Rigging
(1) Push defroster control knob in.
(2) Ensure that the defroster restrictor valve is fully open.
2E15 21-40-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 21-40-00 2E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COOLING
1. General
PUBLICATIONS.)
WARNING: REFRIGERANT HFC-134A IS USED IN THIS AIRPLANE. ANYONE SERVICING THE AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM MUST BE FAMILIAR WITH THE REFRIGERANT, LUBRICANT,
AND COMPONENTS USED IN THAT PARTICULAR SYSTEM.
This installation consists of a compressor with its special brackets, two evaporator modules and blowers,
a condenser, a receiver dehydrator, a manifold assembly which incorporates dual pressure switches,
high and low service ports, and related plumbing.
The evaporators filter, dehumidify and cool the air. The evaporator modules are mounted underneath the
floor between the ribs at F.S. 233.87 and F.S. 241.50 along with the blowers, expansion valves, ducting,
service ports, and related tubing.
The compressor is a five cylinder, rotary, piston type which is supported by special brackets at the left
rear of the engine on the accessory gearbox. A V-belt connected to the dual drive unit pulley, drives the
compressor through a magnetic clutch.
The condenser is located in the aft fuselage. Air is drawn through the condenser and vented overboard
by means of a blower and duct.
The manifold assembly incorporates high and low service ports, a high pressure switch, and a low
pressure switch that control the condenser head pressure by engaging or disengaging the compressor
via a magnetic clutch.
The air conditioning system uses refrigerant HFC-134a. The refrigerant enters the compressor as a
vapor. The compressor pressurizes the heat-laden vapor until its pressure and heat reach a point much
hotter than the outside air. The compressor then pumps the vapor to the condenser where it cools and
changes to a liquid. The liquid then passes to the receiver-dehydrator. The receiver-dehydrator’s function
is to filter, remove any moisture and ensure a steady flow of liquid refrigerant into the evaporators
through the expansion valves. The expansion valves are temperature controlled metering valves which
regulate the flow of liquid refrigerant to the evaporators. Inside each evaporator the liquid refrigerant
changes state to a gas and, in doing so, absorbs heat. The evaporators then absorb the heat from the air
passing over the coils. From the evaporators, the refrigerant vapor returns to the compressor where the
cycle is repeated.
NOTE: The air conditioning system should be operated at least once a month to prevent sticking valves
and to keep the system lubricated.
2. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2E17 21-50-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM)

High discharge pressure. Overcharge of refrigerant. Purge excess refrigerant.
Air in system. Check for leaks. Bleed
charge from system.
Evacuate and recharge
system.
Overheated condenser due to Clean bugs and dirt from
blocking air passage. condenser fins. Straighten
fins if bent.
Flooded evaporator indicated Replace expansion valve.
by heavy frosting on suction
line and compressor suction
service valve.
Restriction in liquid line Check for kinked hoses and
from condenser. stopped up filter.
Low discharge pressure. Undercharge of refrigerant. Add refrigerant until
Sight glass shows bubbles bubbles disappear. Check
or foam. system for leaks.
Damaged compressor valves Replace compressor.
or dirt under valves.
Damaged compressor. Worn Replace compressor.
or broken piston or piston rings.
Low suction pressure Low air supply through Repair blower or blower
(Accompanied by icing evaporator. motor. Clean stoppage in
evaporator.) air ducts.
Very dirty evaporator fins Clean and flush with water.
and coils.
Low suction pressure. Undercharge of refrigerant. Add refrigerant. Install new
(Evaporator not cold enough.) Moisture freezing in expansion dryer. Evacuate and
Suction gauge may read a valve. Valve will show frost. recharge. Remove screen.
vacuum indicating Expansion valve inlet screen Clean with solvent and
evaporator lacks refrigerant. clogged. Inoperative replace. If suction pressure
expansion valve. Valve stuck does not change,
closed. replace expansion valve.
Restriction anywhere in Locate restriction and
liquid line. Restriction will repair.
show frost.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

High suction pressure. Expansion valve not closing. Replace expansion valve.
Evaporator flooded. Suction
line frosted to compressor.
Compressor drive belt Adjust belt tension.
slipping.
Magnetic clutch slipping. Check electrical circuit for
correct voltage to clutch
coil. Clean clutch surfaces
of oil.
Leaking or broken Replace compressor.
compressor valves.
System produces no
cooling. Electrical
Blown fuse in control head. Replace fuse.
Open circuit breaker. Reset circuit breaker.
Broken or disconnected Check all terminals for
electrical wire. loose connections; check
wiring for hidden breaks.
Broken or disconnected Check ground wire to see if
ground wire. loose, broken, or
disconnected.
Clutch coil burned out or Check current flow to
disconnected. clutch, replace if
inoperative.
Thermostat sensing element Check thermostat and
defective. cabin comfort control
panel.
Blower motor disconnected Check current flow to
or burned out. blower motor. Repair or
replace if inoperative.
Mechanical
Loose or broken drive belt. Replace drive belts and/or
tighten to specifications.
Compressor partially or Remove compressor for
completely frozen. service or replacement.
Expansion valve stuck in Replace expansion valve.
open position.
2E19 21-50-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

System produces no
cooling. (continued) Refrigeration
Broken refrigerant line. Examine all lines for
evidence of breakage by
external stress or rubbing
wear.
Leak in system. Evacuate system, apply
static charge, leak test
system, and repair leak as
necessary.
Compressor shaft seal Replace compressor.
leaking.
Clogged screen or screens in Repair as necessary.
receiver dehydrator or expansion
valve; plugged hose or coil.
System will not produce
sufficient cooling. Electrical
Blower motor sluggish in Remove blower motor for
operation. service or replacement.
Mechanical
Compressor clutch slipping. Remove clutch assembly
for service or replacement.
Obstructed blower passage. Examine entire passage for
obstruction. Correct as
necessary.
Insufficient air circulation Clean condenser coils.
over condenser coils; fins
clogged with dirt or bugs.
Evaporator filter clogged. Clean with cleaning solvent
to remove cigarette tars.
Refrigeration
Insufficient refrigerant in Recharge system until
system. bubbles disappear in
receiver dehydrator and
gauge readings stabilize to
specifications.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

System produces no
cooling. (continued) Refrigeration (continued)
Clogged screen in Purge system and replace
expansion valve. expansion valve.
Clogged screen in receiver Purge system; replace
dehydrator. receiver dehydrator.
Excessive moisture in Purge system; replace
system. receiver dehydrator.
Air in system. Purge, evacuate and
charge system. (Replace
receiver dehydrator)
Excessively noisy system. Mechanical
Loose or excessively worn Tighten or replace as
drive belt. required.
Noisy clutch. Remove clutch for service
or replacement
as necessary.
Compressor noisy. Check mountings and
repair; remove compressor
for service or replacement.
Compressor oil level low. Fill with correct amount of
specified oil.
Electrical
Defective winding or Replace or repair as
improper connection in necessary.
compressor clutch coil.
Refrigeration
Excessive charge in system. Discharge excess
refrigerant until high
pressure gauge drops
within specifications.
Low charge in system. Check system for leaks;
charge system.
Excessive moisture in Replace dehydrator; purge,
system. evacuate, and charge
system.
2E21 21-50-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Air Conditioning System

Figure 1
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Servicing Cooling System (PIR-PPS50003-4, Rev. C.)
NOTE: The maximum refrigerant capacity is 2.75 pounds. The total refrigerant capacity required is
determined separately for each system and is the amount that will result in bubble-free
operation at the sight gauge, as specified in the post charging operational check.
A. Definitions
(1) High Side. The “high side” consists of all lines and components between the compressor outlet
and the expansion valves. It includes the condenser and receiverdryer sight gage.
(2) Low Side. The “low side” consists of all lines and components between the expansion valves
and the compressor inlet. It includes the evaporators.
B. Service Valves (i.e. - ports) (See Figures 1 and 2.)
(1) Description
The service valves are installed to Test, Bleed (Discharge), Evacuate and Charge the air
conditioning system. These service ports are located on the top of the manifold assy. The
forward port is the high side service port. The aft port, located inboard, is the low side service
port. All normal air conditioning service is performed at the manifold assembly mounted valves.
The service valves are quick-disconnect type Schrader valves.
NOTE: If a Schrader service valve is not serviceable, the core assembly must be replaced.
(2) Replacement
CAUTION: WHENEVER THE AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT LINES OR SYSTEM
ARE OPENED FOR ANY REASON, THE LINES AND FITTINGS SHOULD BE
CAPPED AND SEALED IMMEDIATELY TO PREVENT DIRT AND OTHER
CONTAMINANTS FROM ENTERING THE SYSTEM. (DO NOT PUT A PLUG
INTO THE HOSES OR FITTINGS.)
When installing the valves on the manifold assembly, lubricate the threads with Tite Seal 3. (Do
not apply to the first two threads).
Service Valves
Figure 2
2E23 21-50-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TEMPERATURE VS. PRESSURE
Refrigerant HFC134a Refrigerant HFC134a

Evaporator Pressure Evaporator Temperature
Gauge Reading psi °F
-5 -27
0 -15
2 -9
4 -4
6 0
8 4
10 7
12 11
14 14
16 17
18 20
20 22
22 25
24 28
26 30
28 33
30 35
32 37
34 39
36 41
38 43
40 45
42 47
44 49
46 51
48 53
50 54
55 58
60 62
65 66
70 69
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Malfunction Detection
NOTE: If the cooling system has leaked refrigerant or is discharged, the compressor oil level must
be checked.
The detection of system malfunction largely depends on the mechanic’s ability to interpret the
gauge pressure readings into system problems. A system operating normally will have a low side
gauge pressure reading that will correspond with the temperature of the refrigerant evaporating in
the evaporator, allowing for a few degrees temperature rise due to loss in the tube walls and fins.
The high side will have a gauge pressure that will correspond with the temperature of the refrigerant
condensing in the condenser, allowing for a few degrees temperature drop due to loss in the tube
walls and fins.
Any deviation from that which is normal indicates a malfunction within the system due to a faulty
control device, obstruction, defective part, or improper installation.
Detection of system malfunction is made easier with knowledge of the relationship between
temperature and pressure of the refrigerant (HFC-134a). They are in close proximity between the
pressures of twenty and eighty pounds per square inch (psi). A glance at the temperature-pressure
chart (i.e. - Chart 2) will show that there is only a slight variation between the temperature and
pressure of the refrigerant in the lower range.
It is correct to assume that for every pound of pressure added to the low side, a temperature
increase of about one degree Fahrenheit takes place. For instance, a pressure of 23.8 on the chart
indicates a temperature of 24°F. A change of pressure of almost one pound to 24.6 psi gives us a
temperature increase to 25°F.
NOTE: For each 1,000 feet of elevation above sea level, the gauge readings will be about one inch
of mercury or 1/2 psi higher than the chart indicates.
It must be pointed out that the actual temperature of the air passing over the coils of the evaporator
will be several degrees warmer than the fins, allowing for a temperature rise caused by the loss in
the fins and tubing of the evaporator.
The importance of a seasonal check up of the air conditioning system should be brought to the
attention of the customer whenever possible. A thorough check of the system performed in a
methodical manner will reveal trouble the customer is often not aware of. Locating and repairing the
trouble early will usually result in savings to the customer both in time and additional troubles that
too often result from neglect.
A performance test of the system is the only positive way in which the complete system can be
checked for efficient operation. The air conditioning system should be given this test before work is
begun on the system whenever possible. However, if the system is completely inoperative, repairs
must be performed before the system can be properly tested. The test can uncover further work that
must be performed before the system is brought to its full operating efficiency. The performance test
should always be performed after repair work has been done and before the airplane is released to
the customer. The serviceman performing this test carefully will ensure that the repairs have been
properly performed and that the system will operate satisfactorily.
The performance test, when properly performed includes a thorough examination of the outside of
the system as well as the inside. Many related parts are overlooked because it is felt they are of no
bearing on the operating efficiency of the unit. For this reason, a thorough visual inspection of the
complete system should be performed, followed by an operating inspection of the system.
2F1 21-50-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Special Servicing Procedures

The air conditioning system should be serviced by a qualified shop with trained personnel. The
following procedures and precautions should be observed.
CAUTION: UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS REQUIRE THAT AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM REPAIRS BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A QUALIFIED SHOP
WITH APPROPRIATELY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
The efficiency of this system depends upon the pressure-temperature relationship of pure
refrigerant. As long as the system contains only pure refrigerant plus a specified amount of
compressor oil (which is mixed with the refrigerant), it is considered to be chemically stable. Foreign
materials within the system will affect the chemical stability, contaminate the system, and decrease
its efficiency.
(1) Refrigerant Safety Precautions.
WARNING: REFRIGERANT HFC-134A IS ODORLESS AND COLORLESS IN EITHER THE
LIQUID OR GASEOUS STATE. REFRIGERANT FOR CHARGING
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS IS SUPPLIED IN PRESSURIZED CONTAINERS
(APPROX. 70 PSI AT 70°F) IN LIQUID FORM. SINCE THIS MATERIAL IS
ESSENTIALLY INERT AT ROOM TEMPERATURES THE DANGERS ARE
PRIMARILY ASSOCIATED WITH THE PRESSURE AND THE REFRIGERATION
EFFECTS OF THE RELEASE AND SUBSEQUENT EVAPORATION OF THIS
PRESSURIZED LIQUID.
WARNING: WEAR SUITABLE EYE PROTECTION WHEN HANDLING REFRIGERANT DUE
TO THE POSSIBILITY OF FREEZING OF THE EYE IF CONTACTED BY
ESCAPING LIQUID REFRIGERANT. IF LIQUID REFRIGERANT DOES STRIKE
THE EYE, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN:
(1) DO NOT RUB THE EYE.
(2) Splash large quantities of cool water into the eye to raise the temperature.
(3) Tape on an eye patch to avoid the possibility of dirt entering the eye.
(4) Rush to a physician or hospital for immediate professional aid.
(5) DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TREAT IT YOURSELF.
WARNING: IF LIQUID REFRIGERANT STRIKES THE SKIN, FROSTBITE CAN OCCUR.

TREAT WITH COOL WATER AND PROTECT WITH PETROLEUM JELLY.
WARNING: DO NOT DISCHARGE LARGE QUANTITIES OF REFRIGERANT INTO CLOSED
ROOMS. IT MAY DISPLACE MOST OF THE AIR IN THE ROOM AND THIS
COULD CAUSE OXYGEN STARVATION. GASEOUS REFRIGERANT IS
HEAVIER THAN AIR AND FLOWS TO THE BOTTOM OF A CONTAINER.
WARNING: DO NOT APPLY DIRECT FLAME OR OTHER HIGH HEAT SOURCE TO A
REFRIGERANT CONTAINER DUE TO THE HIGH PRESSURES WHICH WILL
RESULT. IF ANY HEATING IS DONE TO REFRIGERANT CONTAINERS THE
CONTAINER PRESSURE SHOULD BE MONITORED AND KEPT BELOW 150
PSI.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) System Servicing Precautions.

WARNING: DISCHARGE SYSTEMS SLOWLY TO PREVENT THE ESCAPE OF LIQUID
REFRIGERANT AND THE LOSS OF THE LUBRICATING OIL.
NOTE: The term “Discharge,” as used throughout this section, in no sense implies or
suggests discharging refrigerant to atmosphere. In all cases when discharging, an
environmentally approved refrigerant recovery station is to be used.
WARNING: DO NOT LEAVE SYSTEMS OPEN TO THE ATMOSPHERE WHEN
DISCHARGED. MOISTURE AND OTHER CONTAMINATION MAY ENTER AND
DAMAGE OPEN SYSTEMS.
NOTE: When HFC-134a comes in contact with moisture it absorbs it into the
system, which will lead to system failure.
WARNING: USE ONLY APPROVED REFRIGERATION OIL IN THE COMPRESSOR:
-- POLYALKYLENE GLYCOL (PAG) FOR HFC-134A SYSTEMS
IF ANY DOUBT EXISTS ABOUT THE CLEANLINESS OF THE COMPRESSOR
OIL, REPLACE IT WITH NEW OIL.
WARNING: NEVER INTRODUCE ANYTHING BUT PURE REFRIGERANT AND THE
APPROPRIATE REFRIGERANT OIL INTO A SYSTEM.
WARNING: KEEP REFRIGERANT OIL CONTAINERS TIGHTLY SEALED AND CLEAN TO
PREVENT ABSORPTION OF MOISTURE OR OTHER CONTAMINATION.
WARNING: NEVER REUSE OIL REMOVED FROM THE SYSTEM -- DISCARD IT.
CAUTION: WHEN LOCTITE REFRIGERANT SEALANT HAS BEEN USED ON A JOINT IT
MUST BE HEATED TO 400°F PRIOR TO DISASSEMBLY. LOCTITE MUST BE
USED TO SEAL ANY PIPE THREADS IN THE SYSTEM LINES.
CAUTION: REPLACE THE RECEIVER-DEHYDRATOR ASSEMBLY ON ANY SYSTEM
WHICH HAS BEEN OPERATING WITH A LEAK ALLOWING AIR TO ENTER
THE SYSTEM. IF A RECEIVER-DEHYDRATOR IS LEFT OPEN TO THE
ATMOSPHERE IT SHOULD BE REPLACED DUE TO THE LOSS OF
EFFECTIVENESS OF THE DRYING COMPOUND IT CONTAINS.
CAUTION: A NEW RECEIVER-DEHYDRATOR SHOULD BE OPENED AND CONNECTED
TO THE SYSTEM ONLY WHEN READY TO CHARGE THE SYSTEM WITH
REFRIGERANT.
CAUTION: RECOMMENDED TORQUE VALUES MUST BE USED ON ALL FLARE FITTING
AND O-RING JOINTS. SEE CHART 3.
CAUTION: IF AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT LINES OR SYSTEM IS OPENED,
LINES AND FITTINGS MUST BE CAPPED AND SEALED IMMEDIATELY TO
PREVENT DIRT AND OTHER CONTAMINANTS FROM ENTERING THE
SYSTEM. (DO NOT PUT A PLUG INTO THE HOSES OR FITTINGS.)
CAUTION: UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS PROHIBIT THE RELEASE
OF REFRIGERANT INTO THE ATMOSPHERE. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT IS
REQUIRED WHEN TESTING, DISCHARGING, OR CHARGING THE SYSTEM.
CAUTION: UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS REQUIRE THAT AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM REPAIRS BE ACCOMPLISHED BY A QUALIFIED
SHOP WITH APPROPRIATELY TRAINED PERSONNEL.
2F3 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
RECOMMENDED TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
ALUMINUM TUBING
Metal Tube O.D. Thread and Fitting Size Ft./Lb.
1/4 7/16 5-7

3/8 5/8 11-13
1/2 3/4 15-20
5/8 7/8 21-27
3/4 1-1/16 28-33
FLARE CONNECTIONS O-RING CONNECTIONS

Tube OD Thread size Ft./Lb. Tube OD Thread size Ft./Lb.
3/8 5/8 18-20 3/8 5/8 11-13

1/2 3/4 36-39 1/2 3/4 15-20
5/8 7/8 52-57 5/8 7/8 21-27
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Servicing the System (with a Charging Stand)

CAUTION: MINERAL OIL AND PAG ARE NOT COMPATIBLE. USE A SEPARATE MANIFOLD
TEST SET AND / OR TEST/CHARGING STAND AND RECOVERY SYSTEM FOR
EACH REFRIGERANT TYPE.
CAUTION: USE RECOVERY UNIT SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE TYPE OF
REFRIGERANT USED IN THE AIRCRAFT SYSTEM. UNINTENDED AFFECTS MAY
OCCUR IF REFRIGERANTS ARE COMBINED.
(1) Discharging (Bleeding/Purging) the System
CAUTION: APPLIES TO ROBINAIR 34700 OR SIMILAR CHARGING/RECOVERY

STATION. SEE OPERATOR'S MANUAL OF STATION BEING USED FOR
DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS FOR DISCHARGING SYSTEM.
This procedure is for a Robinair 34700 or similar charging stand/recovery station, see Figure 3.
Required only if the system contains refrigerant.
NOTE: The term “Discharge,” as used throughout this section, in no sense implies or
suggests discharging refrigerant to atmosphere. In all cases when discharging, an
environmentally approved refrigerant recovery station is to be used.
(a) Gain access to service valves by removing rear access panel in cabin floor.
(b) Remove protective caps from access valves.
(c) Connect high side (red) hose to air conditioner high side service valve. On systems
equipped with quick disconnect connections, open coupler valve.
(d) Connect low side (blue) hose to air conditioner low side service valve. On systems
equipped with quick disconnect connections, open coupler valve.
(e) Check the low side gauge (GAUGE 1) and high side gauge (GAUGE 2) to determine that
there is pressure in the system. If there is no pressure, there is no refrigerant in the
system to recover.
(f) Check that the oil drain valve is closed.
(g) Open both the low side and high side valves on control panel.
(h) Open the red GAS (vapor) valve and the blue LIQUID valve on the charging station's
refrigerant tank.
(i) Slowly open the oil drain valve to see if system oil separator contains oil. If it does, let oil
drain into the oil drain bottle (located at the bottom of the rear side of the charging station)
until separator is empty.
(j) Close the oil drain valve. Dispose of collected oil in an environmentally accepted manner.
Return collection bottle to its place on the charging stand.
(k) Plug unit into a proper voltage outlet. Turn MAIN POWER switch ON.
(l) Press the RECOVER key on charging station keypad.
(m) To assure complete recovery of refrigerant:
(a) Wait 5 minutes. Observe pressure gauges for a rise above zero.
(b) If a rise occurs, press the HOLD/CONT key.
(c) Repeat as necessary until system maintains pressure for two minutes.
(n) Slowly open oil drain valve. Drain oil into the oil catch bottle. When all recovered oil has
been completely drained, close oil drain valve.
NOTE: Drain oil separator after each job. Display will indicate OIL (OUNCES) or OIL
(GRAMS) as a reminder.
2F5 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(o) Measure the amount of oil in the catch bottle. The same amount of new oil must be added
to the system before charging the system.
(p) To enter diagnostic mode, simultaneously press the SHIFT/RESET and ENTER keys. To
display amount of refrigerant recovered by the unit, press the 3 key. The panel display will
read the amount of recovered refrigerant in pounds or kilograms.
(q) Simultaneously press the SHIFT/RESET and ENTER keys to clear internal counter. Press
SHIFT/RESET to return to the main menu.
(2) Evacuating the System
If the system has been operated in a discharged condition or anytime the system has been
open to atmospheric pressure, the receiver-dehydrator must be replaced and the system
evacuated to remove any trapped air and moisture which has entered it. A vacuum pump
capable of pulling 29 inches of mercury or better should be used. As the pressure in the air
conditioning system is lowered, the boiling point of the water (moisture) that may be present is
also lowered. This then forces any moisture, in the form of water vapor, out of the system.
Chart 4 demonstrates the effectiveness of moisture removal under a given vacuum.
(a) Using a Kent Moore J23500 or similar charging stand (See Figure 4.)
Turn aircraft power OFF before beginning.
1 Remove the access panel at the rear of the cabin floor to gain access to the service
valves on the manifold assembly.
2 Remove the protective caps from the high and low side service ports on the manifold
assembly.
3 Close all valves on the charging stand.
4 Remove the protective cap from the vacuum pump outlet.
Robinair 34700 Charging Stand

Figure 3
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
USING VACUUM TO EVACUATE MOISTURE
System Vacuum Boiling Point of Water (°F)

27.95 101
COMPOUND GAUGE 28.74 84
READING IN INCHES 29.53 52
OF MERCURY VACUUM 29.76 29
29.84 15
29.88 1
NOTE: Compound gauge reading will be approximately one inch lower, numerically, for
each 1000 feet elevation above sea level.
Kent Moore J23500 Charging Stand

Figure 4
2F7 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 Connect the blue and red hoses to the service ports.

6 Start the vacuum pump.
7 Open the valve on the vacuum pump. Open the low pressure control valve and the
vacuum control valve on the charging stand.
8 After five minutes of pump operation, the high pressure gauge should indicate
slightly below zero.
a If it doesn’t, stop the pump and eliminate the blockage in the system replacing
the faulty component, then repeat steps (1)-(8).
b If it does, open the high pressure control valve on the charging stand and
continue to evacuate the system.
9 Operate the vacuum pump for fifteen minutes, or until the compound gauge indicates
24 to 26 in. Hg. whichever occurs first.
10 Close the low pressure control valve and the high pressure control valve on the
charging stand. Stop the vacuum pump and observe the compound gauge. If the
gauge rises at a rate faster than 1 in. Hg. in 5 minutes, there is a leak in the system.
Locate and fix the leak. Repeat the evacuation steps above.
11 Open the low pressure control valve and the high pressure control valve on the
charging stand. Continue pumping and hold the system pressure below 26 in. Hg. for
a minimum of 30 minutes. All the pumping time specified above may be included in
the 30 minutes provided that no leaks or blockages are noted, and provided that the
system is not opened by removal or disconnection of components.
12 Close the low pressure control valve, the high pressure control valve and the vacuum
control valve. Stop the vacuum pump and perform the charging procedure
immediately.
(b) Using a Robinair 34700 or similar charging/recovery stand: (See Figures 3 and 6.)
Turn aircraft power OFF before beginning.
1 Remove access panel at rear of cabin floor to gain access to service valves.
2 Remove protective caps from the high and low side service ports on the evaporator
unit.
3 Close both the low side and high side valves on charging unit.
4 Connect the blue and red hoses to the service ports (Figures 1 and 2), on systems
equipped with quick disconnect connections, open coupler valves
5 Open blue (low side) valve (1) on unit’s control panel
6 Open both the red GAS (vapor) valve and the blue LIQUID valve on the tank.
7 Program the length of evacuation time.
a Press the VACUUM key on control panel key pad.
b Display will show unit is in VACUUM mode.
c Refer to operator’s manual for further detail.
8 Enter the required time in minutes and seconds (30:00 minutes minimum) by
pressing appropriate keys and then ENTER on keypad. The display will show
selected time in minutes and seconds. Example: one hour and fifteen minutes (1:15)
would be entered as 7500. The display will show 75:00. Thirty minutes is entered as
3000. the display will show 30:00.
9 To start the vacuum pump press the VACUUM key on keypad again.
10 Vacuum sequence will continue for the programmed time. Digital display will then
show CPL, indicating that the evacuation is completed.
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 If, after 5 minutes of pump operation, the RED gauge does not indicate a little below
zero:
a Stop the pump by pressing the 1 key or the SHIFT/RESET key.
b Eliminate blockage in the system by replacing faulty parts.
c Repeat steps (1) through (8) above.
12 After 5 minutes of pump operation, when RED gauge indicates a little below zero,
open red (high side) valve (2), and continue evacuation.
a System vacuum should attain 24 to 26 inches of mercury (in. Hg.) in 10 to 15
minutes.
b Allow pump to hold system vacuum at or below 26 in. Hg. for a minimum of 15
minutes.
c Failure to achieve or hold a vacuum at or below 26 in. Hg. indicates a leak in the
system. Perform Leak Detection, below, to locate and repair all leaks.
13 When evacuation sequence has continued for the programmed length of time and
the panel display reads CPL (complete), close both the low side valve (1) and the
high side (2) valves.
14 Perform charging procedure immediately. (See Charging the System, below.)
(3) Leak Detection (See Figures 3 and 4.)
(a) Using Nitrogen
1 Prepare aircraft so as to provide access to all air conditioning components and fitting
connections being leak checked.
2 Ensure that aircraft and ground power are OFF or disconnected.
3 Close all valves on the charging station.
4 Remove the protective caps from the high and low side service ports on the
evaporator unit.
5 Connect the blue and red hoses to the service ports as shown in Figure 5.
6 Slowly pressurize the system to 200 psig max. with nitrogen and turn off the nitrogen
source. Ensure gages used have a 0-400 psig range.
7 Monitor pressure on the charging station gauge for 20 minutes. A leak free system
will maintain the 200 psig pressure for 20 minutes.
8 If there is no pressure drop for 20 minutes, slowly release nitrogen pressure and
disconnect the nitrogen source from the evaporator assembly. Re-install the pressure
switch per drawing requirements. The leak check procedure is completed.
9 If there is a pressure drop, find leak(s) by applying a soap solution to all connections.
10 Rework system as required to stop leaks and repeat Leak Check Procedure.
(b) Using HFC-134a (PIR-PPS50003-4, Rev. A.)
A leak may be located while a charging stand is hooked up to the system as follows:
1 Ensure that there is at least one pound of refrigerant in the charging cylinder.
2 Open the high pressure control valve and the refrigerant control valve on the
charging stand. Allow one pound of refrigerant to enter the system.
3 Close the high pressure control valve and the refrigerant control valve.
2F9 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HP LP
REFRIGERANT
CONTAINER OF
WARM WATER (125˚ F)
SCALE
OPTIONAL METHOD
This end of the hose
EVAPORATORS must have a device to
depress the Schrader
Valve.
EXPANSION
VALVES
L
H
RECIVER - MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY

DEHYDRATOR
CONDENSER
COMPRESSOR SUCTION LINE

DISCHARGE LINE
CHARGING
STAND
PREFERRED METHOD
Charging Hookup
Figure 5
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: USE A THICK SOLUTION OF SOAP AND WATER TO CHECK FOR

LEAKS INSTEAD OF THE PROPANE LEAK DETECTOR THAT IS
PROVIDED WITH SOME BRANDS OF CHARGING STANDS.
4 Locate leak(s) using an electronic leak detector designed to detect HFC134a
refrigerant. Or, use soap and water in a thick solution.
5 Tighten/re-tighten fittings as necessary to stop leak(s). If leaks are due to damaged
or worn components, proceed with refrigerant recovery/system discharge, perform
repairs or component replacement and repeat leak detection procedure.
6 Discharge the system.
NOTE: The term “Discharge,” as used throughout this section, in no sense implies
or suggests discharging refrigerant to atmosphere. In all cases when
discharging, an environmentally approved refrigerant recovery station is to
be used.
7 Evacuate the system.
8 Immediately recharge the system as described in Charging the System, below.
(4) Charging the System
NOTE: The following assumes the charging stand is already connected to the airplane as
described in Evacuating the System, above.
NOTE: A Post Charging Operational Check is required immediately upon completion of

charging. Accordingly, choose a location where engine run-up is allowed and set up
the airplane and the charging stand with the airplane headed into the wind.
(a) Using a Kent Moore J23500 or similar charging stand (See Figures 4 and 5.)
Ensure aircraft power is OFF before beginning.
1 Open the valve at the base of the charging cylinder and fill the charging cylinder with
sufficient refrigerant to charge the system. If refrigerant stops filling the cylinder, open
the bleed valve at the top of the charging cylinder to relieve head pressure and allow
refrigerant to continue filling the charging cylinder.
2 Close the bleed valve and the valve at the base of the charging cylinder.
3 Turn the charging cylinder sight glass to match the pressure reading on the charging
cylinder pressure gauge. Keep the sight glass in this position during the remainder of
the charging operation.
4 Connect the heating element plug to a 110 volt power outlet.
5 With the low pressure control valve (3) closed, open the refrigerant control valve (11)
and the high pressure control valve (10).
6 Allow the correct amount of refrigerant to enter the high side of the system.
7 Close the high pressure control valve (10) and the refrigerant control valve (11).
8 Perform Post Charging Operational Check, below.
2F11 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Using a Robinair 34700 charging station or equivalent (See Figures 3 and 6.)
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE APPLIES TO ROBINAIR 34700 OR
SIMILAR CHARGING STATION. SEE OPERATOR'S MANUAL OF
CHARGING STATION BEING USED, FOR DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CHARGING SYSTEM.
1 Check that aircraft main power switch is OFF.
CAUTION: DO NOT PLACE ANY WEIGHT, INCLUDING HANDS AND/OR FEET,
ON REFRIGERANT TANK OR SCALE DURING CHARGING
PROCESS. ANY WEIGHT DISTURBANCE WILL CAUSE AN
INDIRECT TRANSFER OF REFRIGERANT.
2 Check that the LBS/KG selector switch on back of unit is in desired measurement
mode. Turn charging station power OFF before switching units of measure mode.
NOTE: You may enter the amount of refrigerant to be charged when the unit is
turned ON. The unit will store the amount in memory until it is turned off.
3 Open the low side (blue) valve on the unit's control panel.
4 If the messages PROGRAM and CHARGE do not display, press the CHG key to
enter the PROGRAM mode.
CAUTION: ADD REFRIGERANT THROUGH THE LOW PRESSURE SIDE ONLY.
NOTE: The amount of refrigerant required must be determined for each airplane. It
is the amount that will result in bubble-free operation at the system sight
gauge. 1.5 lbs. is the nominal amount of refrigerant for the PA-46-500TP.
5 Enter amount of refrigerant required to charge the system by pressing the
appropriate number keys and ENTER on keypad.
6 To begin charging process, press CHG key on keypad.
a The digital display will read AUTOMATIC and show the amount of refrigerant
programmed for the charge.
b As the solenoid opens, it will make an audible sound.
c The display will count down to zero, and display message CPL, when charging
is complete.
7 Close low side (blue) valve. Check that the high (red) valve is also closed. Also close
coupler valves.
8 Perform Post Charging Operational Check, below.
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOW SIDE SERVICE PORT

EVAPORATOR COILS
HIGH SIDE SERVICE PORT
INLET
MANIFOLD COMPRESSOR
SYSTEM LOW SIDE

SYSTEM HIGH SIDE
OUTLET
EXPANSION VALVES
RECEIVER - DRYER
AND SIGHT GLASS CONDENSER
GAUGE 2
LOW PRESSURE HIGH PRESSURE CHARGING LINE (RED )
CHARGING LINE (BLUE )
LOW HIGH
SIDE SIDE
MICROPROCESSOR
CONTROLLED
LOW SIDE HIGH SIDE

CHARGING
VALVE VALVE
GAUGE 1 (1) (2)
VALVE
VACUUM RECOVERY PRESSURE

PUMP AUTOMATIC
SWITCH
PROTECTION EXPANSION VALVE
SWITCH
RECOVERY RECYCLING
VACUUM VALVE VALVE
SOLENOID MOISTURE
INDICATOR
AIR PURGE
VACUUM
PUMP ROBINAIR
OIL SEPARATOR MODEL
HEAT EXCHANGER
34700
SERVICE PORT STATION
OIL
DRAIN HIGH
FILTER - DRIER VALVE PRESSURE GAS LIQUID
OIL SWITCH (VAPOR)
DRAIN
BOTTLE
50 LB. (23 KG)
RECOVERY REFILLABLE
FAN REFRIGERANT
COMPRESSOR
TANK
COMPRESSOR
OIL SEPARATOR
PRESSURE EQUALIZING &

OIL RETURN VALVE
SCALE ASSEMBLY
Robinair 34700 Charging Station Hose Hookup

Figure 6
2F13 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 21
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Post Charging Operational Check

NOTE: The following assumes the charging stand is already connected to the airplane as
described in Evacuating the System, above.
This procedure can also be used to top off a partially charged system with refrigerant.
(a) Using a Kent Moore J23500 or similar charging stand (See Figures 4 and 5 - numbers in
parentheses refer to Figure 4.)
1 Ensure that the low pressure control valve (3) and the high pressure control valve
(10) are closed.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR
AND THAT A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE
AIRPLANE. ENSURE AIRPLANE IS HEADED INTO WIND.
3 Activate the system and operate the engine at IDLE RPM for 2 minutes. Then
operate the engine at 450 LBS.-FT. TORQUE for 2 minutes.
4 Check the sight gauge on the receiver-dehydrator during the engine operation at
IDLE RPM and 450 LBS.-FT. TORQUE. Any indication of bubbles passing the sight
gauge indicates that additional refrigerant is required.
5 If additional refrigerant is required, add it slowly through the refrigerant control valve
(11) and the low pressure control valve (3) until the sight glass remains free of
bubbles. Regulate the flow of refrigerant with the low pressure control valve. Do not
allow the compound gauge (2) to exceed a reading of 40 psi.
6 With the engine operating IDLE RPM to 400 LBS.-FT. TORQUE, the low and high
side gauges should indicate as shown in Chart 5.
7 With the charge properly established, stop the engine.
8 Close the low pressure control valve (3) and the refrigerant control valve (11).
9 Remove the charging stand. Replace all protective caps, covers, and access panels.
(b) Using a Robinair 34700 charging station or equivalent (See Figures 3 and 6 - numbers in
parentheses refer to Figure 6.)
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE APPLIES TO ROBINAIR 34700 OR
SIMILAR CHARGING STATION. SEE OPERATOR'S MANUAL OF
CHARGING STATION BEING USED, FOR DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CHARGING SYSTEM.
1 Ensure that the low pressure control valve (1) and the high pressure control valve (2)
are closed.
2 Ensure coupler valves are open.
CHART 5
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INDICATION
AMBIENT
GAUGE TEMPERATURE INDICATION
Low Pressure All 10 to 35 psig

High Pressure Up thru 75°F 125 psig min to 175 psig max
High Pressure Over 75°F 150 psig min to 300 psig max
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR

AND THAT A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE
AIRPLANE. ENSURE AIRPLANE IS HEADED INTO WIND.
3 Activate the system and operate the engine at IDLE RPM for 2 minutes. Then
operate the engine at 450 LBS.-FT. TORQUE for 2 minutes.
4 Check the sight gauge on the receiver-dehydrator during the engine operation at
IDLE RPM and 450 LBS.-FT. TORQUE. Any indication of bubbles passing the sight
gauge indicates that additional refrigerant is required.
5 If additional refrigerant is required, add it slowly through the low pressure control
valve (1) until the sight glass remains free of bubbles. Regulate the flow of refrigerant
with the low pressure control valve. Do not allow the gauge (1) to exceed a reading of
40 psi.
6 With the engine operating IDLE RPM to 400 LBS.-FT. TORQUE, the low (1) and high
(2) side gauges should indicate as shown in Chart 5.
7 With the charge properly established, stop the engine and close the coupler valves.
8 Close the low pressure control valve (1).
9 Remove the charging stand. Replace all protective caps, covers, and access panels.
Test Gauge and Manifold Set

Figure 7
2F15 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 23
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Manifold Set Operation

Figure 8
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Servicing the System (with a Manifold Set)

(1) Test Gauge and Manifold Set
The proper testing and diagnosis of the air conditioning system require that a manifold gauge
set (or a charging stand) be attached to the system. This set consists of two gauges mounted
to a manifold. One gauge is a high pressure gauge used in the discharge side of the system.
The other is a low pressure gauge used in the suction side of the system. The manifold is a
device having fittings for both gauges and connection hoses with provisions for controlling the
flow of refrigerant through the manifold. (See Figures 7 and 8.)
The center port of the manifold set is used for charging or evacuation procedures, or any other
service that may be necessary.
Both the high or low side of the manifold have hand shut-off valves. When the hand valve is
turned all the way in, in a clockwise direction, the manifold is closed. The pressures on that
side of the system will, however, be recorded on the gauge above the hose.
Cracking the hand valve, in the counterclockwise direction, opens the systems to the middle
service port of the manifold set. This is desirable only when it is necessary to let refrigerant out
of or into the system. (See Figures 7 and 8.)
(2) Evacuating the System (See Figure 9.)
(a) Ascertain that all system pressure is released.
(b) Connect the manifold set hoses to the service ports and vacuum pump as shown in
Figure 9.
(c) Close the high side (pressure) and low side (suction) hand valves on the manifold set.
(d) Start the vacuum pump.
(e) Open the low side manifold set hand valve. The low side gauge should show a vacuum.
(f) After five minutes of pump operation the high side gauge should indicate slightly below
zero. If it does not, stop the pump and eliminate the blockage in the system by replacing
the faulty component, then repeat the previous evacuation steps.
(g) Operate the vacuum pump for fifteen minutes or until the low side gauge indicates 24 to
26 in. Hg. whichever occurs first.
(h) Close the low side hand valve, stop the vacuum pump and observe the low side gauge. If
the gauge rises at a rate faster than 1 in. Hg. in 5 minutes, there is a leak in the system.
Locate and repair the leak (per the following instructions), then repeat the previous
evacuation steps.
(i) With both the low and high side valves open, continue the pumping and hold the system
below 26 in. Hg. for a minimum of 30 minutes. All the previous pumping time may be
included in the 30 minutes provided that no leaks or blockages are noted, and provided
that the system is not opened by removal or disconnection of components.
(j) Close the low and high side hand valves, stop the vacuum pump and perform the
charging procedure immediately.
(3) Leak Detection (See Figure 10.)
(a) Close both the low side and high side valves on manifold hand set.
(b) Disconnect manifold hand set middle port (yellow) hose from low side port on charging
stand and connect it to a container of HFC134a refrigerant.
(c) Open refrigerant container service valve.
(d) Open the manifold hand set high side valve until a pressure of 50 psig is reached on low
side gauge. Close high side valve.
(e) Locate leak(s) using an electronic leak detector designed to detect HFC134a refrigerant.
Or, use soap and water in a thick solution.
2F17 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 25
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Evacuation Hookup
Figure 9
Leak Test Hookup

Figure 10
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Tighten/re-tighten fittings as necessary to stop leak(s). If leaks are due to damaged or
worn components, proceed with refrigerant recovery/system discharge, perform repairs or
component replacement and repeat leak detection procedure.
(g) Check that the both high side and low side valves on the manifold hand set are closed.
(h) Close service valve on refrigerant container. Disconnect yellow manifold hand set center
hose from refrigerant container.
(i) On systems equipped with quick disconnect connections, close coupler valves.
Disconnect manifold hand set red and blue hoses from airplane service ports. Remove
manifold hand set.
(j) Recover remaining refrigerant from system using the Robinair 34700 (or other approved)
charging station ( see Discharging the System, above ). Any quantity of oil recovered from
aircraft must be measured and an equal amount of new oil (P. A. G. with HFC134a) must
be added to system before recharging.
(k) On systems equipped with quick disconnect connections, close coupler valves.
Disconnect charging/test station from service ports.
(l) Perform evacuation procedure per Evacuating the System, above.
(m) Immediately charge system per Charging the System, above or below.
(4) Charging the System
This method is the least desirable due to the requirement of operating the airplane’s engine to
run the compressor.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR AND THAT
A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE AIRPLANE. ENSURE
AIRPLANE IS HEADED INTO WIND.
(a) Keep the system under the vacuum established during the evacuating procedure with
both hand valves in the closed position. Disconnect evacuation set-up, if not already
disconnected.
(b) Attach a container of the appropriate refrigerant to the manifold set and open the
container service valve.
(c) Loosen the center hose at the manifold set until a hiss can be heard. Allow the gas to
escape for 2 to 3 seconds, then tighten the connection.
(d) Open the high side manifold set hand valve, observe the low side gauge, then close the
high side hand valve. The low side gauge should immediately change from an indication
of a vacuum to an indication of pressure. If it does not, the system is blocked, and the
blockage must be corrected before proceeding.
(e) Start the engine and operate it at IDLE RPM.
(f) Adjust the airplane air conditioning controls for maximum cooling, high blower speed.
(g) Keep the refrigerant cylinder in an upright position. A slug of liquid refrigerant entering the
system would damage the compressor.
(h) Open the low side manifold set hand valve and allow 1.5 pounds of refrigerant in the gas
state to enter the system.
(i) Close the low side manifold set hand valve.
(j) Proceed with the Post Charging Operation Check, below.
2F19 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 27
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Post Charging Operational Check

This procedure can also be used to top off the system with refrigerant.
NOTE: Head the airplane into the wind during these checks.
(a) With the manifold set installed, and both hand valves closed, actuate the system and
operate the engine at IDLE RPM for two minutes, then operate the system at 450 LBS.-
FT. TORQUE for 2 minutes.
CAUTION: ASCERTAIN THAT THE AREA AROUND THE AIRPLANE IS CLEAR AND
THAT A QUALIFIED PERSON IS AT THE CONTROLS OF THE AIRPLANE.
(b) Check the system sight gauge (on the receiver-dehydrator) during operation at IDLE RPM
and 450 LBS.-FT. TORQUE. Any indication of bubbles passing the sight gauge indicates
that additional refrigerant is required.
(c) Add additional refrigerant slowly through the low side manifold set hand valve until the
sight glass remains free of bubbles.
(d) Close the low side hand valve and refrigerant container valve.
(e) With the engine operating from IDLE RPM to 400 LBS.-FT. TORQUE, the gauges should
indicate as shown in Chart 5.
(f) Once the charge is properly established, stop the engine, close the refrigerant container
service valve. Remove the manifold set and replace all protective caps, covers, and
access panels.
CHART 5
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INDICATION
AMBIENT
GAUGE TEMPERATURE INDICATION
Low Pressure All 10 to 35 psig

High Pressure Up thru 75°F 125 psig min to 175 psig max
High Pressure Over 75°F 150 psig min to 300 psig max
G. Compressor (See Figure 11.)

The engine driven compressor is mounted on the aft left section of the engine. A V-belt connected
to the accessory drive pulley drives the compressor through a magnetic clutch.
(1) Compressor Service
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE
INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
It is not advisable to service the compressor in the field. It should be done by a qualified shop
which has the special equipment and trained personnel required to properly service the unit.
Maintenance to the Sanden compressor is limited to Removal and Installation of Compressor,
checking the compressor oil level and replacement of worn drive belt.
PAGE 28
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: AN IMPORTANT FACTOR IN AIR CONDITIONING SERVICING IS

CLEANLINESS. TAKE CARE TO PREVENT DIRT OR FOREIGN MATERIAL
FROM ENTERING THE SYSTEM. ALL HOSE AND TUBING ENDS SHOULD BE
CAPPED IMMEDIATELY. ANY LUBRICATION REQUIRED IN THE ASSEMBLY
OF THE COMPONENTS SHOULD BE REFRIGERANT OIL OF THE TYPE
USED IN THE COMPRESSOR.
(2) Removal
Remove the compressor as follows:
(a) Be sure the air conditioning circuit protector is in the off position.
(b) Open left engine access gull-wing door.
(c) Disconnect the electrical leads to the magnetic clutch on the compressor.
(d) Discharge the air conditioning system to an appropriate environmentally approved
refrigerant recovery station. See Servicing the System, Discharging, above.
(e) Remove the suction and discharge lines from the connections on the compressor.
NOTE: All open lines should be capped immediately to prevent dirt and moisture from
entering the system.
(f) Loosen compressor belt tension turnbuckle locknut and relieve belt tension.
(g) Remove belt.
(h) Unbolt turnbuckle from compressor mounting lug.
(i) Support compressor, loosen and remove the mounting bolt, nut, and washers.
(j) Remove compressor.
(3) Installation
Install the compressor as follows:
(a) Align compressor mounting lugs with bolt hole in accessory drive assembly and loosely fit
mounting bolt.
(b) Attach compressor belt tension turnbuckle to compressor mounting lug.
(c) Install compressor drive belt. Rotate compressor drive belt. Check belt alignment. As
shown in Figure 11, Sheets 2 and 3, add or remove washers as required to obtain correct
belt alignment.
(d) Tighten compressor mounting bolt and turnbuckle mounting bolt.
(e) Adjust belt tension per Adjustment of Drive Belt Tension, below.
(f) Check oil level in compressor. (See Checking Compressor Oil Level, below.)
(g) Connect the discharge and suction lines to their respective fittings.
(h Evacuate and charge the system per instructions given above.
(4) Checking Compressor Oil Level
Whenever a system component has been replaced or there is an obvious leak, use the
following procedure to check the compressor oil level (after making necessary repairs):
(a) Run compressor for 10 minutes at engine idle rpm.
(b) Recover all refrigerant from the system. See Servicing the System, Discharging, above.
Be careful not to lose oil.
(c) Determine the compressor mounting angle by positioning an angle gauge (Sanden P/N
32448 or a propeller protractor) across the flat surfaces of the two front mounting ears.
(d) Center the bubble and read the mounting angle to the closest degree.
(e) Remove the oil filler plug.
2F21 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 29
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A/C Compressor Installation and Adjustment

PAGE 30
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE 1: AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN ALTERNATOR BELT ALIGNMENT,

USE WASHERS (NAS1149C0663R (UP TO 2) OR NAS1149C0632R (UP TO 4))
IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN INSERTS AND
ALTERNATOR MOUNTING LUG.
AS REQUIRED, USE WASHERS INSERT (NOTE 1)

(NAS1149C0663R (UP TO 2)
OR NAS1149C0632R (UP TO 4))
IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN INSERT (NOTE 1)
SUPPORT AND ACCESSORY DRIVE
MOUNTING LUGS. Alternator
MS21042-6 NUT NAS6606-69 BOLT

NAS1149C0663R WASHER NAS1149C0663R WASHER
ACCESSORY DRIVE
ASSEMBLY
SUPPORT
NAS43HT4-20 SPACER
(INSIDE COMPRESSOR
MOUNTING LUG)
MS21043-4 NUT
NAS1149C0463R WASHER
BUSHING
NAS6604-69 BOLT
- ADDITIONAL NAS1149C0463R
(UP TO 2) CAN BE USED IF BOLT
GRIP EXTENDS THROUGH
AS REQUIRED
BRACKET.
TO MAINTAIN COMPRESSOR BELT ALIGNMENT,
USE WASHERS (NAS1149C0463R (UP TO 3)
IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN
SPACER AND COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUGS. COMPRESSOR
AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COMPRESSOR BELT ALIGNMENT,

IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN ACCESSORY DRIVE
AND COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUGS.
VIEW A-A

2F23 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 31
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AN3C4A BOLT
MS35333-39 WASHER
(2 PLACES)
(MAX TORQUE 15 IN. LBS. - OILED)
ACCESSORY DRIVE
ASSEMBLY
BRACKET
MS20392-2C11 PIN TURNBUCKLE LOCKNUT

MS24665-132 COTTER PIN
AS REQUIRED TO FILL BOLT GRIP LENGTH,
IN ANY COMBINATION.
COMPRESSOR BELT TENSION
ADJUSTMENT TURNBUCKLE
(THREAD BOTH SIDES EQUALLY) MS21043-4 NUT
AN4-16A BOLT NAS43HT4-20 SPACER

AN960C416 WASHER (INSIDE COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUG)
NAS43HT4-20 SPACER COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUG
AS REQUIRED
SPACER AND COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUG.
VIEW B-B

PAGE 32
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) While looking through the oil filler plug hole and observing the internal parts (see Figure
12), rotate the counterweight. Stop the counterweight in the position shown in Figure 14
as the internal parts are moving to the rear of the compressor (discharge stroke).
NOTE: This step clears the internal parts to allow the dipstick to be inserted to full depth.
(g) Insert the dipstick (Figure 13) to its stop position. The stop is the angle near the top of the
dipstick.
1 The point of the angle must be to the right since the mounting angle is to the left.
2 The bottom surface of the angle must be flush with the surface of the oil filler hole.
(h) Remove the dipstick and count the increments of oil.
(i) Use Chart 6 to determine the correct oil level for the mounting angle of the compressor.
(j) If the increments read on the dipstick do not match the table, add or subtract oil to obtain
the mid-range value.
(k) Install the oil filler plug, first checking that the sealing O-ring is not twisted. Ensure that the
seat and O-ring are clean.
(l) Torque the plug from 6 to 9 foot-pounds (0.8 to 1.2 kg-m). Do not over tighten the plug to
stop a leak, If plug leaks, remove it, and install a new O-ring.
(m) Recharge the system per Servicing the System, Charging, above.
(5) Adjustment of Drive Belt Tension
To adjust compressor belt tension, simply loosen the turnbuckle locknut and torque or loosen
the turnbuckle until desired tension is reached. Then tighten locknut.
Using a Gates Rubber Co. #150 Belt Tensiometer, adjust the A/C compressor belt tension as
follows:
(a) 100 ± 5 lbs. on initial installation of a new belt. After compressor operation of no more
than one hour, recheck belt tension and, if required, readjust to service specifications,
below.
(b) Service adjustment of a used belt is as follows:
1 If checked HOT (i.e. - immediately after engine shutdown), and belt tension is below
50 lbs., adjust to 50 lbs.
2 If checked COLD, and belt tension is below 90 lbs., adjust to 90 ± 5 lbs.
H. Refrigerant Lines and Routing
NOTE: Hoses in HFC-134a installations are nylon-lined.
The refrigerant lines in this airplane are flexible high pressure hoses and should be handled
accordingly. The hoses in the power plant area are routed so as to provide maximum protection
from heat and abrasion.
From the firewall, the hoses are routed through the forward pressure bulkhead, underneath the left
cabin floor back to the manifold assembly, receiver-dehydrator and evaporators. From these
components, the lines continue back to the condenser.
NOTE: Before any of the hose couplings are uncoupled, the system must be completely
discharged.
2G1 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 33
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Positioning Sanden Compressor Internal Parts

Figure 12
0.118 " (3mm) INCREMENTS
TYPICAL FOR
20 NOTCHES
30˚
4.115 "
Fabricated Dipstick for Sanden Compressor Oil Check

Figure 13
PAGE 34
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIPSTICK
STOP
L
OIL LLE
RA
FILLER HOLE PA
60 O
CLUTCH
FRONT PLATE
POSITION OF
COUNTER WEIGHT
COUNTERWEIGHT
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
Sanden Compressor Mounting Angle

Figure 14
CHART 6
SANDEN SD 505 COMPRESSOR MOUNTING ANGLE / OIL LEVEL
Mounting Angle Degree Acceptable Oil Level

In Increments
0 4-6
10 6-8
20 8-10
30 10-11
40 11-12
50 12-13
60 12-13
90 15-16
2G3 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 35
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Evaporator/Blower Assembly
The two evaporators are located beneath the floor aft of the rib at F.S. 233.87.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved, refrigerant recovery
station.
(b) Remove the refrigerant lines from the inboard side of the evaporator.
(c) Disconnect the duct from the lower outboard side of the blower.
(d) Remove the nuts and washers that secure the evaporator/blower assembly to the F.S.
233.87 rib.
(e) Disconnect the electrical leads from the motor.
(f) Remove the evaporator/blower assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the evaporator/blower assembly on the rib at F.S. 233.87 and secure it there with
the nuts and washers.
(b) Connect the electrical leads to the motor.
(c) Connect the duct to the lower outboard side of the blower.
(d) Connect the refrigerant lines to the inboard side of the evaporator.
(e) Charge the system.
J. Expansion Valve
NOTE: If this part is not serviceable, it must be replaced with a new part.
(1) Removal
The expansion valves are located on the upper inboard corners of the evaporator assemblies
between the receiver-dehydrator and the evaporator inlet.
(a) Remove the necessary access panels and discharge system into an appropriate,
environmentally-approved, refrigerant recovery station.
(b) Uncouple all related tube fittings. (refer to Special Servicing Procedures.)
(2) Installation
(a) Install the expansion valve in the inlet line of the evaporator core by coupling the related
fittings. Torque fittings per Chart 3.
(b) Evacuate and charge the system. (refer to Evacuating the System and Charging the
System.) Check for leaks. (refer to Leak Detection.)
(c) Reinstall any access panels that were previously removed.
K. Condenser
The condenser, blower motor and exhaust duct assemblies are located in the aft fuselage between
F.S. 282.00 and F.S. 292.00 (forward of the aft fuselage access panel).
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(b) Discharge the air conditioning system.
(c) Disconnect and cap the lines going to the condenser. Cap inlet and outlet ports on the
condenser.
(d) Remove the screws which secure the lower end of the duct to the fuselage skin forward of
the aft fuselage access panel.
PAGE 36
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Expansion Valve
Figure 15
(e) Remove the bolts, washers, screws and nuts that secure the upper end of the duct to the
supports and to the condenser assembly.
NOTE: With the bolts and screws removed from the duct assembly, there is no support
for the condenser and it is free to fall.
(f) Carefully position the duct out of the way and remove the condenser.
(2) Installation
(a) Remove caps from lines and ports on condenser.
(b) Position condenser between brackets and align the bolt holes in the supports, condenser
and upper end of the duct. Install the bolts, washers, screws and nuts.
(c) Secure the lower end of the duct to the fuselage skin with the screws.
(d) Reconnect the lines to the condenser.
NOTE: Whenever the air conditioning system has been open to the atmosphere, it is
recommended that the receiver-dehydrator be replaced.
(e) Evacuate and recharge the system per instructions in this section.
(f) When the system is completely charged, check it for any leaks.
(g) Reinstall the aft fuselage access panel.
2G5 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 37
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L. Condenser Blower Motor Assembly

The condenser blower motor assembly is located in the condenser exhaust duct. Access to the
motor is through the rear fuselage access panel and the removable access panel on the aft side of
the duct assembly.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(b) Remove the bolts, washers and nuts that secure the duct access panel to the duct,
condenser and condenser support. Remove the duct access panel.
(c) Disconnect the electrical leads from the blower motor.
(d) Lift the blower motor and bracket from the duct.
(2) Installation
(a) Position the blower motor and bracket assembly in the duct.
(b) Connect the electrical leads to the blower motor.
(c) Secure the duct access panel to the duct, condenser and condenser supports with the
bolts, washers, screws and nuts.
(d) Reinstall the aft fuselage access panel.
M. Receiver - Dehydrator
The receiver-dehydrator is located beneath the floor on the left hand side. It is aft of the left
evaporator module. The receiver-dehydrator is mounted to the aft side of the frame at F.S. 241.50
The receiver-dehydrator should be replaced if the air conditioning system has been operating with a
leak that would have allowed air to enter the system if the receiver-dehydrator is left open to the
atmosphere, it should be replaced due to the loss of effectiveness of the drying compound it
contains.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved, refrigerant recovery
station.
(b) Remove the two refrigerant lines that connect to the top of the receiver-dehydrator. Cap
the lines.
(c) Disconnect wiring to receiver-dehydrator mounted pressure switches.
(d) Loosen the two clamps that secure the receiver-dehydrator and lift the receiver-dehydrator
from its mount.
(2) Installation
(a) Place the receiver-dehydrator in its mount.
(b) Connect the two refrigerant lines to the top of the receiver-dehydrator.
(c) Secure the receiver-dehydrator to its mount by tightening the two clamps around the
receiver-hydrator body.
(d) Connect wiring to receiver-dehydrator mounted pressure switches.
(e) Service the air conditioning system.
PAGE 38
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
N. Manifold Assembly
The manifold assembly is located behind the receiver-dehydrator and is mounted to the forward
face of the frame at F.S. 249.60.
The manifold assembly has the high pressure switch screwed into the high pressure port that goes
through the manifold body and the low pressure switch screwed into the low pressure port that
passes through the manifold body.
Two service valves are located on the top side of the manifold body. These service valves should be
used for any hook ups when servicing the system. See Service Valves, above.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the air conditioning system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved,
refrigerant recovery station.
(b) Disconnect the four refrigerant lines that go to the manifold assembly.
(c) Remove the two screws that secure the manifold to its mounting bracket and remove the
manifold assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Secure the manifold assembly to its mounting bracket with the two screws. The “H” for
stamping should be forward.
(b) Connect the four refrigerant lines to the manifold assembly.
(c) Service the air conditioning system.
O. Pressure Switches
The high and low pressure switches have been incorporated into a single housing and are located
on the receiver-dehydrator. They control the system pressure by energizing or de-energizing the
compressor clutch.
(1) Removal
(a) Discharge the air conditioning system into an appropriate, environmentally-approved,
refrigerant recovery station.
(b) Gain access to the receiver-dehydrator.
(c) Remove the electrical connections from the switch.
(d) Turn the switch out of the receiver-dehydrator body.
(e) Plug the switch hole in the receiver-dehydrator body.
(2) Installation
(a) Remove the plug from the switch hole in the receiver-dehydrator body.
(b) Lubricate the switch threads and packing with refrigerant oil and install the switch in the
receiver-dehydrator body.
(c) Service the air conditioning system.
(d) Check operation of the switches.
2G7 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 39
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 40
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2G9 21-50-00 Apr

PAGE 41
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 42
Apr 15/07 21-50-00 2G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Cabin Air Temperature Control Valve (See 21-40-00, Figure 1.)

The cabin temperature control system consists of: an Electronic (Digital) Temperature Controller (1 ea.),
a Temperature Modulating Valve Assembly (1 ea.), a Cabin Temperature Sensor (1 ea.), and a Duct
Temperature Sensor (1 ea.).
The temperature controller receives inputs from the duct temperature sensor and the cabin temperature
sensor and then operates the temperature modulating valve as required. This maintains the pre-selected
cabin temperature by modulating the cabin inflow directly into the cabin via the acoustic muffler (when
higher cabin temperatures are selected) or through an air-to-air heat exchanger and then into the cabin
(when lower cabin temperatures are selected). In either case, the air entering the cabin will always be
warmer than cabin air.
The pilot selects the desired cabin or cockpit temperature via the temperature control rheostat. Set
temperature range is 55 °F (extreme counterclockwise) to 85 °F (extreme clockwise). The 12 o'clock
position is approximately 70 °F. The air temperature is sensed using a solid state temperature sensor
that supplies data to the temperature controller. The temperature controller compares this data with the
pilot selected zone temperature and modulates the temperature modulating valve to maintain the
selected zone temperature. The duct sensor located in the hot air supply ducting works as a system
anticipator. It also allows the system to prevent maximum duct temperatures from being exceeded during
all modes of operation and allow the temperature controller to provide an indication of a duct
temperature that has exceeded its maximum in the event of a component failure within the system.
A. Removal
(2) Loosen band clamps on the inlet and both outlet tubes and remove flexible hoses.
(3) Remove screws (3) holding valve assembly to mounting bracket and remove valve assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Position the cabin temperature control valve in place on its mounting bracket, inlet tube
forward.
(2) Secure with screws (3).
(3) Slide flexible hoses over the inlet and both outlet tubes and secure with band clamps.
C. Testing
The temperature control system can be tested as follows. Use of an Enviro Systems breakout box
(Enviro Systems P/N 1300000) is helpful, but not required.
(1) Ground testing without the breakout box:
(a) With the aircraft power turned ON, place the ECS switch in the OFF position. The
temperature control valve should move to the full cold position (i.e. - all flow directed
through the heat exchanger) and remain there.
(b) Place the ECS switch in the normal position and the temperature control system in the
manual position. Manual increase will move the temperature control valve to the bypass
(hot) direction (i.e. - more flow directly into the cabin via the acoustic muffler). Manual
decrease will move the temperature control valve to the cold position.
2G11 21-60-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) If the cabin air temperature is less than 85 °F, placing the system in auto mode and
rotating the temperature select rheostat to the full clockwise position should cause the
temperature modulating valve to slowly move to the bypass (hot) position. If the ambient
air temperature is more than 55 °F, placing the system in auto mode and rotating the
temperature select rheostat to the full counterclockwise position should cause the
temperature modulating valve to slowly move to the cold position. Depending on actual air
temperatures at the sensors, in either of these tests the valve may initially move counter
to the test direction but should begin to move in the correct direction within 2-3 minutes.
(d) If all of these tests are successfully completed it is unlikely that there is any problem with
the temperature control system. The tests check the cabin temperature sensor, the duct
temperature sensor, the computer and the temperature modulating valve. If the system
fails any of these tests there could be a valve failure, a wiring problem, or a problem with
the temperature controller. Further testing will require a breakout box.
(2) Ground testing with the breakout box:
(a) The breakout box allows measurements of voltages for each of the input and output lines
on the temperature controller and allows the technician to see the actual hot and cold
signals being sent to the temperature modulating valve. Connect the breakout box by
installing it between the temperature controller and the aircraft wiring harness.
(b) With the aircraft power turned ON, place the ECS switch in the normal position and the
temperature control system in the manual position. Manual increase will move the
temperature control valve to the bypass (hot) direction and will illuminate the red "hot"
light on the breakout box. Manual decrease will move the temperature control valve to the
cold position and will illuminate the green "cold" light on the breakout box. If one light
works and not the other, it is likely that there is a problem with the temperature controller
and that it will need to be replaced. If neither test works you should insure that the wiring
is correct for the temperature controller.
(c) If the manual mode test works, the next step is to test the cabin and duct sensors. These
can be tested with a voltmeter and the breakout box. Measure and record the voltages for
each sensor. The cabin sensor should be measured from pin 14 to pin 34 and the duct
sensor from pin 10 to pin 32. Each sensor produces a voltage that can be converted to a
temperature with the following formula:
Temperature in Fahrenheit = Sensor Voltage * 180 - 460
(d) If either sensor does not provide an accurate reading it should be confirmed that it is
wired properly and replaced, as required.
(e) In addition to these tests the breakout box may be useful in testing the wiring to various
switches and components in the system.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 21-60-00 2G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2G13 21-60-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 21-60-00 2G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
22
AUTOFLIGHT
2G15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 22
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
22-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 22 - AUTOFLIGHT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AUTOPILOT 22-10-00 1 2G21

Description 1 2G21
Ground Checks and Flight Adjustments 1 2G21
Face-mounted Instruments 8 2H4
Trim Monitor 8 2H4
Removal 8 2H4
Installation 8 2H4
Roll Servo 9 2H5
Removal 9 2H5
Installation 10 2H6
Pressure Transducer 11 2H7
Removal 11 2H7
Installation 11 2H7
Trim Servo 12 2H8
Removal 12 2H8
Installation 12 2H8
Yaw Servo 14 2H10
Removal 14 2H10
Installation 14 2H10
Pitch Servo 16 2H12
Removal 16 2H12
Yaw Amplifier 18 2H14
Removal 18 2H14
Post-Installation Ground Checks 18 2H14
Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment 20 2H16
Flap Compensator 20 2H16

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUTOPILOT
1. Description (See Figures 1, 2, and 3.)

RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (FOR S-TEC/MEGGITT AUTOPILOT
INSTALLATIONS, SEE THE S-TEC/MEGGITT DRAWING PACKAGES DELIVERED WITH
EACH AIRCRAFT.)
CAUTION: THIS SECTION PROVIDES INFORMATION SUFFICIENT ONLY TO CONDUCT BASIC
SYSTEM CHECKS (S-TEC SYSTEM 550 ONLY) AS WELL AS LOCATING, REMOVING,
AND INSTALLING COMPONENTS. IF MORE DETAILED TROUBLESHOOTING OR
REPAIR IS REQUIRED, IT SHOULD BE PERFORMED BY A QUALIFIED AVIONICS
REPAIR SHOP USING THE APPROPRIATE S-TEC MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
A. S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697143 and 4697145 thru 4697148.
The S-TEC System 550 Autopilot / Flight Director (AP/FD) is installed as standard equipment. It is a
conventional three-axis autopilot with altitude pre-select and trim monitor. It consists of a
programmer/computer, altitude selector/alerter, annunciator, turn coordinator, trim monitor, pressure
transducer, yaw, pitch, roll, and trim servos, and a yaw amplifier.
B. S/N’s 4697144, and 4697149 & up.
The Meggitt Avionics/S-TEC MAGIC 1500 Autopilot / Digital Flight Control System (AP/DFCS) is
installed as standard equipment. It is a three-axis attitude based Digital Flight Control System
(DFCS) for aircraft equipped with an Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS). It consists of a
programmer/computer, trim monitor, pressure transducer, yaw, pitch, roll, and trim servos, and a
yaw amplifier.
2. Ground Checks and Flight Adjustments (System 550 only)
A. Ground Checks
(1) Turn aircraft master and radio master ON as required, to provide system voltage to the
autopilot circuit breaker.
(2) Check autopilot circuit breaker ENGAGED. Place autopilot master switch in the ON position. All
segments of the programmer/computer display should illuminate including: HDG, RDY, NAV,
CWS, APR, FAIL, REV, TRIM, ALT, GS, VS, + 18. After five (5) seconds only the RDY
annunciation will remain illuminated indicating the system is ready to engage.
(3) Depress and release control wheel steering switch (when installed). CWS and VS modes will
annunciate and RDY will extinguish. Move aircraft controls to determine that roll and pitch
servos are engaged.
(4) Depress and release the control wheel disconnect switch. RDY will flash and then annunciate
steady. An audible tone will indicate autopilot disconnect. Check to see that roll and pitch servo
solenoids are disconnected.
(5) Select heading mode on programmer/ computer. HDG will annunciate and RDY will extinguish.
Rotate heading bug on directional gyro to right and then to left of the center indice and note
that control wheel movement follows direction of commanded input. Center heading bug on indice.
(6) Tune the NAV receiver to the local OMNI Station or simulated signal and center the needle on
the OBS/CDI instrument. Select NAV mode on the programmer and rotate the OMNI bearing
selector right and then left. Control wheel should move right with right needle deflection and
left with left needle deflection.
NOTE: When NAV or REV mode is selected and no valid NAV information is present, the
FAIL annunciator should illuminate and the respective mode light will flash.
2G21 22-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Center the HDG bug on D.G. or CRS Arrow on HSI, then center the NAV needle and note that
NAV and CAP annunciations are illuminated (steady). If the above conditions are maintained
for approximately 15 seconds the SOFT annunciator light will illuminate along with NAV and
CAP, indicating a dynamic gain change. After approximately 60 seconds the CAP annunciation
will be extinguished indicating the second gain change.
(8) Check that CDI needle is centered, and adjust the roll centering (3 turn pot accessible through
the face plate between the REV and ALT mode select switches). Adjust for zero roll servo
activity with centered CDI needle. (Refer to note in Flight Adjustments, below.)
(9) Select REV mode on the programmer and conduct the same tests as indicated in (Step 6) for
NAV mode. Note that REV annunciator is illuminated and that control wheel action is opposite
direction of needle movement.
NOTE: The APR annunciator should illuminate anytime a NAV or REV mode is selected on
the programmer, while the NAV receiver is channeled to a localizer frequency.
(10) Move elevator control to neutral and select VS mode to engage pitch. Turn VS knob clockwise
to select a positive vertical speed and observe control wheel moves slowly OUT (up). Select a
negative vertical speed (VS knob counterclockwise) and observe control wheel moves slowly
IN (Down).
NOTE: In some airplanes, operator assistance may be required in order for autopilot to move
the elevator on ground check.
NOTE: Flashing VS annunciator during this test may or may not occur. Flashing VS indicates
the system is unable to resolve a vertical speed error, a condition that may occur
during ground test.
(11) Channel an ILS radio frequency. Select ALT and NAV modes. Select NAV mode a second time
- the ALT annunciation should remain illurninated with flashing GS. Select NAV once again to
return to Nav (normal). Select ALT mode. Select ALT mode a second time to arm/engage GS
(ALT extinguishes).
NOTE: If the GS flag is in view, the fail annunciator will illuminate with the GS annunciator
flashing.
(12) Overpower - Grasp control wheel and overpower autopilot in both roll and pitch. Be alert that
no excessive play exists in the control system and/or between the control system and the roll
and pitch servos.
(13) Momentarily depress control wheel disconnect switch - move control wheel in roll and pitch
and assure that the roll and pitch servo have disconnected and that the controls are free. The
RDY light should illuminate flashing for 5 seconds and then be steady, along with an audible
tone, indicating autopilot disconnect.
(14) Trim Test - Move elevator control to neutral position and re-engage HDG and VS modes. Apply
forward pressure (nose DN) to elevator control and hold for three (3) seconds (minimum). TRIM
will annunciate steady for four (4) seconds. After four (4) seconds the TRIM annunciation will
begin flashing. Apply aft pressure on the control wheel (nose UP) and hold for 3 seconds
(minimum) - observe same annunciation with the TRIM annunciator. Hold control wheel and
disengage autopilot.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 2 1 5 20 14 15a 17
6
7
8
19
9
10
11
3 13 15b 16 18
7-8 9 15a
10
11
12
4 5 13 14 15b 16 17 18
1. CB371 CIRCUIT BREAKER (5 AMP) (REF) 11. TURN COORDINATOR (NOT IN MAGIC 1500)
2. CB372 CIRCUIT BREAKER (2 AMP) (REF) 12. HORN
3. CB334 CIRCUIT BREAKER (3 AMP) (REF) 13. ROLL SERVO
4. TRIM RELAY 14. TRIM SERVO
5. TRIM MONITOR 15a. TRANSDUCER (NOT IN MAGIC 1500)
6. PROGRAMMER / COMPUTER 15b. 429 CONVERTER (NOT IN SYSTEM 550)
7. ALTITUDE SELECTOR (NOT IN MAGIC 1500) 16. YAW SERVO
8. AUTOPILOT ANNUNCIATOR (NOT IN MAGIC 1500) 17. PITCH SERVO
9. TRIM MASTER / ANNUNCIATOR SWITCH 18. YAW AMPLIFIER
10. EFIS DISPLAYs (I.E. - PFD, ND, MFD) (REF) 19. CONTROL WHEEL SWITCH INSTALL (BOTH SIDES)
20. FLAP COMPENSATOR POTENTIOMETER
Autopilot Component Locator
Figure 1
2G23 22-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102310 F/J
TRIM
2 AMP C/B
TRIM T2 (BLK)
MASTER (3 PIN MOLEX) TO A/C GND
SWITCH
TRIM MONITOR (RED) A/C BUSS
TO DIMMER LIGHT RHEOSTAT (WHT)

T1
TRIM MASTER SW
A/C GND A
(RED) TRIM CB
(3 PIN MOLEX) CONTROL WHEEL
TRIM
MONITOR TRIM MONITOR PROG/COMP
MOLEX (4 PIN)
(BLK)
FLAP POT FLAP POT COMP
TO A/C GND
(WHT) (WHT)
P1-36 MOLEX PILOT'S CONTROL WHEEL
HORN T3
TO A/C GND P1-37 (6 PIN)
(BLK)
A/P A+ (RED)
TO A/C GND
(WHT)
P1-32
P1-33
P2 (REF.)
OPTION-F/D A/S
(6 PIN MOLEX)
PROGRAMMER/
COMPUTER P1 (REF.)
A/S 1
B
(BLK)
TO A/C GND
(WHT) TO RADIO TRANSDUCER
YAW YAW LIGHT RHEOSTAT
MASTER (WHT)
POTENTIOMETER TO A/P DISC (PIN 11 EFIS - AP PRESSURE
SWITCH CONTROL WHEEL CONN) TRANSDUCER
Y1
Y1
YAW MASTER
YAW MASTER
OPTIONAL (WHT) TO PIN 6

ALTITUDE SELECTOR/ OF A/S 1
ALERTER ALT. SEL.
(ENC. ALT.)
TO
CODE LINES
(BLK) AP C/B (5 AMP)
A/C GND F/D A/P
(WHT)
TO A/P DISC MASTER SW
(RED)
TO 28 VDC
(WHT)
P1-34
P1-35 A/C BUSS (WHT)
(RED) (RED) A/P C/B FD/AP SW
TO T&B C/B (5 AMP MAX.)
TURN COORDINATOR (BLK) (RED) A/P A+
TO AIRFRAME GND
TURN COORDINATOR
(RED) A/P A+
ANNUNCIATOR
ANNUNCIATOR
(BLK)
TO A/C GND
Effectivity
4697001 thru 4697143 and S-TEC System 550 Autopilot/Flight Director Installation
4697145 thru 4697148 Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO CO-PILOT CONTROL WHEEL

STALL WARN
AV2
CO-PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL 30D05
DIODE
TRIM RELAY
PITCH SERVO
A (BLK)
(WHT)
(BLK) T4
(WHT) (BLK)
(WHT)
PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL
PITCH SERVO
PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
B PB1
PB1 YAW SERVO
YAW SERVO
0121 YAW AMP

UP
ROLL SERVO
ROLL
YAW AMP
SERVO
TRIM SERVO
TRIM
SERVO
Effectivity
S-TEC System 550 Autopilot/Flight Director Installation 4697001 thru 4697143
Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 2) and 4697145 thru 4697148
2H1 22-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105127 8.0 NEW/A
TRIM
2 AMP C/B
TRIM
MASTER T2 (3 PIN MOLEX) TO A/C GND
SWITCH CABLE ASSEMBLY
TRIM MONITOR
TRIM MASTER SW AVIONICS
(RED) TRIM CB
T1 (3 PIN MOLEX) BUSS
TO DAY/NIGHT
} RELAY (P317) A/C GND
TRIM TRIM MONITOR PROG/COMP
MONITOR
(BLK) (WHT) MOLEX (4 PIN)

TO A/C GND P1-36
(WHT) P1-37 FLAP POT FLAP POT COMP
HORN
TO A/C GND CABLE ASSEMBLY
NOT USED MOLEX

T3
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA (6 PIN) TO A/C GND
A
NOT USED
(WHT)
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA
P1-32 Y2
P1-33
(1 PIN MOLEX)
P2
RAD/ALT
(9 PIN CPC)
PROGRAMMER/ NOT USED WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA

COMPUTER TO STALL WARNING
TO A/C GND T5
P1
YAW TO RADIO
POTENTIOMETER LIGHT RHEOSTAT EFIS - AP
NOT USED WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA

CABLE ASSEMBLY
Y1
Y1
YAW POT
B
AP C/B (5 AMP)
A/P MASTER SW
AVIONICS BUSS
YD A+
(RED) A/P C/B
(RED) A/P A+ TO EFIS EADI
DOWN SWITCH
NOT USED
MEGGITT INSTALLATION SHOWN,

AVIDYNE ENTEGRA (IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 & UP) AS NOTED.
Effectivity S-TEC Magic 1500 Autopilot/Flight Director Installation

4697144 and 4697149 & up Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 2)
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RELAY (REF)
CO-PILOT CONTROL WHEEL

CO-PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL
30D05
TRIM RELAY DIODE
T4
NOT USED
PILOT
CONTROL WHEEL
GO-AROUND
SWITCH REF
A PILOT CONTROL WHEEL
PITCH SERVO
POWER LEVER
GRIP
GA1
MOLEX (2 PIN)
TO A/C GND PITCH SERVO
GA1
CABLE ASSEMBLY
429
CONVERTER
YAW SERVO
NOT USED WITH AFT BULKHEAD
AVIDYNE ENTEGRA Y3 CONNECTOR
PB1* PB1** YAW SERVO
TAIL SECTION
* P359
** J359
B
TRIM SERVO
ROLL SERVO
UP
YAW AMP
YAW AMP
SERVO
SERVO
ROLL
TRIM
S-TEC Magic 1500 Autopilot/Flight Director Installation Effectivity

Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 2) 4697144 and 4697149 & up
2H3 22-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Flight Adjustments
The in-flight adjustments for this system consist of one (3 turn) adjustable pot (roll centering)
located behind the face plate of the programmer/ computer and accessible with a small slot
screwdriver, through the hole in the face plate between the “REV’ and “ALT’ mode switches.
(1) Fly the aircraft to smooth air, and trim for level flight.
(2) Check autopilot circuit breaker “IN” and toggle A/P master to “ON’ position.
(3) Center heading bug on directional gyro or heading system indicator and engage HDG mode
on the programmer.
(4) Select desired radial on OBS and set heading bug on D.G. to same heading. Engage NAV
mode on programmer and allow aircraft time to establish on course.
(5) Check roll center adjustments in NAV mode after system has timed out to NAVSOFT and fine
adjust (if necessary) to fly a centered needle. Select HDG mode and check heading bug
centered ± 3°.
NOTE: Roll centering pot is a 3 turn pot and should be adjusted in very small increments.
Allow sufficient time between adjustments for system to stabilize. Clockwise rotation of
pot produces right turn and counterclockwise rotation produces left turn.
(6) The pitch section does not require flight adjustments. Operate the pitch section in accordance
with the instructions provided in the pitch section of the POH Supplement information provided
in this installation kit.
(7) Conduct a functional (operational) test of the system. Refer to the POH Supplement and/or the
Autopilot Operator’s Manual for operational information.
NOTE: If rudder is incorrectly trimmed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to fly with a wing
low in an effort to maintain the selected heading.
3. Face-Mounted Instruments
The programmer/computer, altitude selector/alerter, annunciator, and turn coordinator are either face-
mounted or rack-mounted in the instrument panel. See 39-10-00 for removal and installation instructions.
4. Trim Monitor (See Figure 1.)
The trim monitor is mounted on the underside of the aft-most access panel in the cockpit floor at the co-
pilot’s feet.
A. Removal
(1) Remove carpet to expose access panel.
(2) Remove screws holding access panel to floor and open access panel to expose trim monitor
and autopilot harness.
(3) Disconnect autopilot harness.
(4) Remove screws (4) holding trim monitor to access panel and remove trim monitor.
B. Installation
(1) Place trim monitor in position on underside of access panel and and secure with screws (4).
(2) Connect autopilot harness.
(3) Place access panel in position and secure with screws.
(4) Replace carpet over access panel.
(5) Check system operation - perform Trim Test under Ground Checks, paragraph 2, above.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
*FOR WEAR LIMITS, SEE

S-TEC INSTRUCTIONS FOR
102310 F/J ROLL SERVO
105127 A CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS,
PER INTRODUCTION, SUPPLEMENTARY BULKHEAD F.S. 171.40
PUBLICATIONS.
AILERON CABLE
CL OF A/C
CHAFE BLOCK *
CABLE CLAMP
AILERON
ADJUST BALANCE CABLE
BRIDLE CABLE PULLEY
TENSION
TO
15 ± 2 LBS.
CHAFE BLOCK
(NOT IN MAGIC 1500)
AILERON
BOLT, AN3-4A BALANCE
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P CABLE
NUT, MS20365-1032A BULKHEAD F.S. 178.60
FWD
(4 EACH REQ'D)
CABLE CLAMP LEFT

.005 MIN GAP BETWEEN CLAMP
HALVES AFTER TORQUING
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT INSTALLATION)
AILERON BALANCE CABLE TORQUE CLAMP BOLTS

(BRIDLE CABLE BEHIND) TO 55 ± 5 IN. LBS
CABLE CLAMP DETAIL
Effectivity
Roll Servo Installation System 550 shown,
Figure 4 MAGIC 1500 similar
5. Roll Servo (See Figures 1, 4, and 5.)

The roll servo is mounted underneath the left aft facing passenger seat or the entertainment cabinet,
whichever is installed.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft facing passenger seat or entertainment cabinet, whichever is installed.
(2) Remove adjacent carpet.
(3) Remove screws securing centerline floor access panel and remove access panel.
(5) Remove nuts and bolts (2 ea.) securing each cable clamp (2) and remove cable clamps from
aileron balance and autopilot bridle cables.
(6) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.) securing roll servo to mounting brackets and remove
roll servo with attached bridle cable.
2H5 22-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCATION OF CENTER-BALL WITH AILERONS

IN NEUTRAL POSITION. DEPRESS CENTER-BALL
TO BOTTOM OF HOLE AND TIGHTEN SETSCREW.
ROLL SERVO
AUTOPILOT
BRIDLE
CABLE
AFT
10˚
(VIEW LOOKING UP, CAPSTAN COVER

WRAP 440
AND OUTBOARD
˚ AND CABLE GUARDS REMOVED FOR WRAP 280 ˚
AND INBOARD
CLARITY.)
Roll Servo Capstan Wrapping

Figure 5
B. Installation
(1) Rig ailerons per Aileron Control Rigging and Adjustment, 27-10-00.
(2) Lock the control wheels together in the aileron neutral position using a suitable tool.
(3) Lock the ailerons in neutral position using a suitable contour fixture at the inboard ends of the
ailerons. Neutral position is defined by wing loft contour at this location.
(4) Remove screws (4) and remove capstan cover and cable guards from servo.
(5) Adjust roll servo clutch torque per paragraph 11, Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
(6) Wrap autopilot bridle cable, align capstan, and and tighten center-ball setscrew as shown in
Figure 5.
(7) Replace cable guards and capstan cover, secure with screws (4).
(8) Position servo as shown in Figure 2 and install and secure nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.)
holding servo to mounting brackets.
(9) Position cable clamps (2) as shown in Figure 4 and tighten nuts and bolts (2 ea.). Adjust cable
clamps in or out along the aileron balance cable to obtain the bridle cable tension specified in
Figure 4. Torque cable clamp bolts as specified in Figure 4.
(10) Remove the locking fixtures. Aileron neutral position should be maintained at 0 ± 1 degree with
the control wheels in neutral.
(11) Use the pilot’s control wheel to move the ailerons and verify aileron travel at the primary stops
(at the aileron drive sectors on the wing spars) remains 18 ± 1 degree up and down.
(12) Use the pilot’s control wheel to hold the ailerons firmly against the primary stops. Verify the
secondary aileron stops (on the forward pressure bulkhead) retain a cushion (gap) of
0.09 ± 0.03 inch in each direction.
(13) If either step (9) or (10) reveal the aileron controls out of rig, repeat steps (1) thru (10), above.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(15) Check autopilot system for binding and proper operation, see paragraph 2, Ground Checks
and Flight Adjustments, above.
(16) Check aileron controls for free and correct movement.
(17) Replace centerline floor access panel and secure with screws.
(18) Replace carpeting.
(19) Replace the aft facing passenger seat or entertainment cabinet, whichever is installed.
6. Pressure Transducer (See Figure 1.)
The pressure transducer is located on the right side of the aft avionics shelf, behind the rear closeout
panel aft of the baggage compartment.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the transducer from the static-system by unscrewing the JACO union fitting nut.
(2) Disconnect the autopilot harness.
(3) Remove screws and washers (2 ea.) and remove transducer and phenolic spacer block.
B. Installation
(1) Place transducer in position with phenolic spacer block underneath. Secure both to shelf with
screws and washers (2 ea.)
(2) Connect the transducer to the static system. First, screw the JACO union fitting nut handtight,
and then tighten the nut two turns.
(3) Connect the autopilot harness.
2H7 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Trim Servo (See Figures 1 and 6.)

The trim servo is located on the centerline underneath the baggage compartment floor.
A. Removal
(1) Remove rear seats. Remove carpet and access panels from baggage compartment floor.
(2) Remove the centerline access panels in the cabin floor to expose the plastic tube that protects
the trim cables.
(3) Remove the pins from both ends of the plastic tube.
(4) Slide the tube forward.
(5) Rotate the elevator trim control wheel until the right trim cable turnbuckle clears the aft end of
the tube.
(6) Tie a pull rope to the right trim cable forward of the exposed turnbuckle.
(7) Tie a pull rope to the right trim cable aft of the idler pulley.
(8) Tie-off both pull ropes to maintain tension on the left trim cable and the extreme forward and
aft segments of the right trim cable (i.e. - forward of the turnbuckle and aft of the idler pulley).
NOTE: Tension must be applied to the trim cables to prevent the cables from unwrapping
from the trim wheel drum or the trim actuator, and to prevent the cables from fouling at
any of the pulleys.
(9) Slack off the exposed turnbuckle to relieve tension on the right trim cable segment between the
turnbuckle and idler pulley.
(10) Disconnect the autopilot harness.
(11) Remove the capstan cover and cable guards (4) by removing the retaining screws (4).
(12) Remove the bolt, nut, and washer securing the idler pulley to the trim servo baseplate and
mounting bracket and remove the idler pulley components.
NOTE: The idler pulley breaks down into the following components upon removal of the bolt,
above: mounting plate/cable guard assembly, idler pulley, and two washers.
(13) Remove the remaining bolts, nuts, and washers (3 ea.) securing the trim servo to its mounting
bracket and remove the trim servo.
B. Installation
(1) Adjust trim servo clutch torque per paragraph 11, Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
(2) With the capstan cover and cable guards removed, position the trim servo as shown in
Figure 6. Secure with bolts, nuts, and washers (3 ea. - i.e. - top two and bottom forward).
(3) Assemble the idler pulley cable guards (3) to the mounting plate with screws (1 ea.) and star
washers (2 ea.). Place the center bolt through the mounting plate/cable guard assembly and
slide a washer over the threaded end and up against the mounting plate. Set the mounting
plate/cable guard/bolt assembly aside.
(4) Drape the slack left trim cable over the servo capstan.
(5) Place thumb and forefinger on top of the capstan over the trim cable in its groove. Pressing the
trim cable into its groove, slide thumb and forefinger down around opposite sides of the servo
capstan and pull the trim cable slack to the lower rear quadrant.
(6) Holding the trim cable in that position, install the capstan cover and cable guards as shown in
Figure 6.
(7) Hold the idler pulley on the forward side of the trim servo and align it with the left trim cable.
Move the idler pulley down to the left trim cable forward of the trim servo and capture the trim
cable in the left cable groove on the bottom of the idler pulley.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102310 G/J
105127 NEW TRIM SERVO
CABLE GUARDS BULKHEAD F.S. 249.60

(4 REQ'D)
C
L OF A/C
BULKHEAD F.S. 241.50
VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT TRIM SERVO INSTALLATION
BOLT, AN3-5A (3 REQ'D)

BULKHEAD F.S. 241.50 WASHER, NAS1149F0363P (6 REQ'D)
NUT, MS21042-3 (3 REQ'D)
CAPSTAN COVER
FOR BUILD-UP SEE DETAIL
RIGHT ELEVATOR TRIM CABLE

(LEFT NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
VIEW LOOKING RIGHT
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P
IDLER PULLEY
CENTER SPACER
NUT, MS20365-1032A
CABLE GUARDS (3 REQ'D)
WASHER, NAS1149C0632R WASHER, NAS1149F0363P
MOUNTING PLATE TRIM SERVO BASEPLATE

STAR WASHER, BRACKET
MS35333-36 (6 REQ'D)
BOLT WASHER, NAS1149C0632R

SCREW (3 REQ'D)
IDLER PULLEY DETAIL
Effectivity
Trim Servo Installation System 550 shown,
2H9 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Slide the idler pulley along the trim cable, underneath the servo capstan, and bring it
approximately to its installed position (See Figure 6). At this point, the forward portion of the
trim cable should be routed under, around the rear, and over the top of the idler pulley and
under, around the front, and over the top of the capstan.
(9) Holding the idler pulley in this position, reach to the rear and pull the aft portion of the trim
cable under the idler pulley and seat it in the right cable groove on the idler pulley. The left trim
cable should now be routed as shown in Figure 6.
(10) Place the spacer inside the idler pulley.
(11) Position the mounting plate/cable guard/bolt assembly as shown in Figure 6 and slide the bolt
through the spacer inside the idler pulley.
(12) Place a washer over the bolt end and put the bolt through the trim servo mounting bracket and
baseplate. Secure with a nut and washer, taking care to ensure that the cable guards are
positioned, and the left trim cable is routed, as shown in Figure 6.
(13) Rig elevator trim per Elevator Trim Controls Rigging, 27-30-00.
(14) Connect the autopilot harness.
(15) Check autopilot system for proper operation.
(16) Check elevator trim controls for free and correct movement.
(17) Replace access panels and carpet in cabin and baggage compartment floors.
(18) Replace rear seats.
8. Yaw Servo (See Figures 1 and 7.)
The yaw servo is located in the unpressurized aft fuselage.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel (see #1, Figure 5, 6-00-00).
(3) Remove nuts and bolts (2 ea.) securing each cable clamp (2) and remove cable clamps from
rudder cables and autopilot bridle cables.
(4) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.) securing yaw servo to mounting brackets and remove
yaw servo with attached bridle cable.
B. Installation
(1) Rig rudder controls per Rudder Control Rigging, 27-20-00.
(2) Lock rudder in its neutral (streamlined) position.
(4) Adjust yaw servo clutch torque per paragraph 11, Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
Figure 7.
(7) Position yaw servo as shown in Figure 7 and secure with bolts, nuts, and washers (4 ea.)
(8) Remove tape or clip holding bridle cable on capstan and attach left and right autopilot bridle
cables to the left and right rudder cables with cable clamps (2).
(9) Evenly adjust the cable clamps up the rudder cables until the tension on both left and right
autopilot bridle cables is as specified in Figure 7. Torque cable clamp bolts as specified in
Figure 7.
(11) Remove rudder lock.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EA
CL OF AIRCRAFT
CABLE CLAMP
(2 REQ"D)
RIGHT
RUDDER CABLE
SEE DETAIL (BELOW)

BOLT, AN3-5A FOR BRIDLE CABLE
UP WASHER, NAS1149F0363P WRAP INFORMATION
NUT, MS21042-3
(4 EACH REQ'D)
FWD
ADJUST
BRIDLE CABLE
TENSION
TO
CABLE 30 ± 2 LBS.
GUARDS
CAPSTAN
COVER LEFT
RUDDER CABLE
RIGHT
YAW SERVO RUDDER CABLE
(LEFT OMITTED
FOR CLARITY)

EA VIEW DOWN AND AFT
VIEW EA-EA
(LOOKING LEFT) (RUDDER PULLEYS OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
WRAP 450˚ AND UP WRAP 450˚ AND UP
BRIDLE CABLE
YAW SERVO
102310 G/J LOCATION OF CENTERBALL WITH RUDDER

105127 NEW IN NEUTRAL. DEPRESS CENTERBALL TO
BOTTOM OF HOLE & TIGHTEN SET SCREW.
BRIDLE CABLE WRAPPING DETAIL

(CAPSTAN COVER AND CABLE GUARDS OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
Effectivity
Yaw Servo Installation System 550 shown,
2H11 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Check autopilot system for binding and correct operation.

(13) Check rudder controls for free and correct movement.
(14) Replace and secure the aft fuselage access panel.
9. Pitch Servo (See Figures 1 and 8.)
The pitch servo is located in the unpressurized aft fuselage.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel (see #1, Figure 5, 6-00-00).
(3) Remove locking clips (2) from turnbuckle in autopilot bridle cable. Let the upper segment of the
autopilot bridle cable remain on top of the autopilot sector assembly.
(4) Remove cotter pins (cable guards) (2) holding the lower segment of the autopilot bridle cable
on idler pulley and remove the bridle cable from the idler pulley.
(5) Remove cotter pin (cable guard) holding the autopilot bridle cable to the bottom of the autopilot
sector assembly.
(6) Remove cotter pin, clevis pin, washers (2), and autopilot bridle cable fork end from autopilot
sector assembly.
(7) Remove nuts, washers, and bolts (4 ea.) securing pitch servo to mounting brackets and
remove pitch servo with attached bridle cable.
B. Installation
(1) Rig elevator controls per Elevator Controls Rigging, 27-30-00.
(3) Adjust pitch servo clutch torque per paragraph 11, Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment, below.
Figure 8.
(6) Position pitch servo as shown in Figure 8 and secure with bolts, nuts, and washers (4 ea.).
(7) Position autopilot bridle cable fork end on autopilot sector assembly and secure with clevis pin,
washers (2), and cotter pin.
(8) Ensuring bridle cable is in bottom groove of sector assembly, insert and secure cotter pin
(cable guard).
(9) Loop bridle cable over idler pulley and install cotter pins (cable guards) (2).
(10) Connect bridle cable turnbuckle and adjust cable tension as specified in Figure 8.
(11) Install bridle cable turnbuckle locking clips (2).
(13) Check autopilot system for binding and correct operation.
(14) Check elevator controls for free and correct movement.
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102310 H/J
CLEVIS PIN, (2 REQ'D) 105127 NEW
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P (4 REQ'D)
COTTER PIN, MS24665-134 (2 REQ'D)
(CUT TO LENGTH)
EXISTING ELEVATOR CABLE
ADJUST
BRIDLE CABLE
TENSION
TO
30 ± 2 LBS.
W.L.
77.25 TURNBUCKLE
LOCKING CLIP,
MS21256-1 (2 REQ'D)
BOLT, AN3-4A
WASHER, NAS1149F0363P
NUT, MS21042-3
(4 EACH REQ'D)
COTTER PINS,
MS24665-134, PITCH SERVO
INSTALLED AS (SEE DETAIL, BELOW,
CABLE GUARDS FOR BRIDLE CABLE
(2 PLCS) WRAP INFORMATION)
COTTER PINS
F.S. INSTALLED AS
311.00 CABLE GUARDS
(2 PLCS)
AUTOPILOT SECTOR ASSEMBLY
EXISTING PITCH CABLE
EXISTING ELEVATOR TRIM CABLE
UP
FWD
VIEW LOOKING LEFT FROM CENTERLINE OF AIRCRAFT

(ELEVATOR SECTOR OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
BRIDLE CABLE
PITCH SERVO
WRAP TERMINAL END 315˚ AND UP
WRAP FORK END 495˚ AND AFT
45˚
UP
AFT POSITION OF BRIDLE CABLE CENTER BALL

WITH ELEVATOR CONTROL IN FULL DOWN
POSITION. DEPRESS CENTER BALL TO
BOTTOM OF HOLE AND TIGHTEN SETSCREW.
BRIDLE CABLE WRAPPING DETAIL

(CAPSTAN COVER AND CABLE GUARDS OMITTED FOR CLARITY)
Effectivity
Pitch Servo Installation System 550 shown,
2H13 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F.S. 311.40 102310 G/J

C
L OF A/C 105127 NEW
.125 MIN
AUTOPILOT SECTOR
ELEVATOR SECTOR
UP
YAW AMPLIFIER
SCREW, MS27039-0807
WASHER, NAS1149FN832P
(4 EACH REQ'D)
VIEW LOOKING AFT

Effectivity
System 550 shown, Yaw Amplifier Installation
MAGIC 1500 similar Figure 9
10. Yaw Amplifier (See Figures 1 and 9.)

The yaw amplifier is located in the unpressurized aft fuselage.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel (See #1, Figure 5, 6-00-00).
(3) Remove screws and washers (4 ea.) and remove the yaw amplifier.
B. Installation
(1) Position yaw amplifier and secure with screws and washers (4 ea.)
(3) Check autopilot system for correct operation.
C. Post-Installation Ground Checks
(1) Level aircraft laterally per 8-20-00.
(2) Center trim pot on instrument panel.
(3) Adjust the pot in the yaw amplifier (located under plug in top of amplifier) to provide a null
(i.e. - no servo action) at the yaw servo.
(4) Align the cap on the yaw trim pot knob (on instrument panel) so that the white line is centered vertically.
(5) Check operation of yaw trim pot by turning trim pot both left and right and verify rudder pedal
movement in the same direction (i.e. - turning trim pot left causes left rudder pedal depression, etc.)
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCREW (4 REQ'D.)
WASHER (4 REQ'D.)
AN936-A4
CAPSTAN COVER
TORQUE WRENCH
S-TEC TOOL
(SEE PARTS CATALOG)
CASTLE NUT COTTER PIN

AN320-5 MS24665-134
SHIM WASHER (MIN. 1 REQ'D.)
CAN BE USED IN ANY COMBINATION TO
ALIGN COTTER PIN WITH SHAFT HOLE
TENSION WASHERS
(SEE CHART 1)
CABLE GUARD (4 REQ'D.)
SERVO
Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment

Figure 10
CHART 1
AUTOPILOT SERVO CLUTCH TORQUE
TORQUE (In. Lbs.) WASHERS

SERVO System 550 MAGIC 1500 System 550 MAGIC 1500
(Standard) (Standard)
Roll 36 ± 2 36 ± 3 Three .040 Three .032
Pitch 36 ± 2 36 ± 3 Three .040 Three .032
Trim 18 ± 2 18 ± 3 One .032 and Two .040 Two .040
Yaw 43 ± 2 43 ± 3 Three .040 One .032 and Two .040
NOTE: When the Avidyne Entegra is installed with the MAGIC 1500 Autopilot in
S/N’s 4697198, 4697216 and up: use the torque and washer stackup values listed under
System 550, above.
2H15 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11. Servo Clutch Torque Adjustment (See Figure 10.)

A. Remove servo per instructions under specific servo, above.
B. Place servo in a holding fixture (i.e. - vice) with capstan up.
C. Remove capstan cover, cable guards, and cable.
D. Check capstan torque by attaching the capstan adjusting tool (special tool - see parts catalog) to
the capstan and using a currently calibrated torque wrench as shown in Figure 10.
(1) Acceptable torque is specified in Chart 1.
(2) If adjustment is required, proceed as follows.
E. Remove cotter pin from end of servo shaft and remove castle nut, shim washers, and tension
washers.
F. Replace tension washers as required (see Chart 1).
G. Replace shim washers and castle nut.
H. Tension castle nut so that capstan torque is as specified in Chart 1.
12. Flap Compensator (See Figures 1 and 11.)
A flap compensator potentiometer is just aft of F.S. 158.3. The pot is mounted on a bracket attached to
the aft side of the bulkhead just left of aircraft centerline and beneath the floor. The arm of the pot is
linked to the flap microswitch drive tube by a cable assembly.
Adjustment
(1) With flaps in the full up position and set screw loose, turn A/P master switch ON.
(2) Connect a digital voltmeter (3 1/2 digit) between airframe ground and center terminal (wiper) of
potentiometer (pot).
(3) Turn pot shaft clockwise to stop. Voltmeter should read 5.00 vdc.
(4) Turn pot shaft slowly counter-clockwise until voltage just starts to decrease from 5.00 volts to
4.70 volts.
(5) Tighten set screw and recheck voltage for 4.70 volts.
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102310 F/J CL OF AIRCRAFT

105127 NEW
FWD
LEFT
SEE F.S. 158.3

DETAIL A
SEE DETAIL B
3.00
CABLE CUSHION
ASSEMBLY CLAMP
EXISTING
BELLCRANK
C C
LOOKING DOWN ON INSTALLATION

(SHOWN W/FLAPS IN FULL UP POSITION)
CUSHION CLAMP
FLAP MICROSWITCH DRIVE TUBE (REF)
F.S. 158.3
ARM SPRING SETSCREW
FLAP
GROUND
COMPENSATOR
LEAD CONTROL CABLES (REF)
CABLE ASSEMBLY
SCREW (AN525-832R7) FLAP
WASHER (AN960-8) COMPENSATOR
NUT (AN365-832) BRACKET
(2 PLACES)
VIEW C-C
LOOKING FORWARD SHOWN W/FLAPS IN FULL UP POSITION
Effectivity
Flap Compensator Installation System 550 shown,
Figure 11 (Sheet 1 of 2) MAGIC 1500 similar
2H17 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 21
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102310 F/J
105127 NEW
AN3-4A BOLT
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(DRIVE TUBE END)
SPACER
CUSHION CLAMP
NAS1149F0332P WASHER
(2 REQ'D)
MS21042-3 NUT
DETAIL A
MS35206-232 SCREW
CABLE ASSEMBLY
(FLAP COMPENSATOR ARM END)
ARM
SPACER
NAS1149FN632P WASHER
(4 REQ'D)
NOT
MS21042-06 NUT IN
MAGIC 1500
INSTALLATIONS
DETAIL B
Effectivity
System 550 shown, Flap Compensator Installation
MAGIC 1500 similar Figure 11 (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2H19 22-10-00 Apr

PAGE 23
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 2H20 THRU 2H24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 22-10-00 2H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
23
COMMUNICATIONS
2I1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 23
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
23-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
23-50-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
23-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 23 - COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 23-00-00 1 2I7

Avionics Master Switch 1 2I7
Ground Clearance Switch 1 2I7
AUDIO INTEGRATING 23-50-00 1 2I9

Removal and Installation 1 2I9
System Functional Test 2 2I10
Adjustments 3 2I11
GMA340 MOD 4 Installation 5 2I13
M1091 Summing Amplifier 6 2I14
STATIC DISCHARGING 23-60-00 1 2I17

Static Wicks 1 2I17
Bonding Straps 1 2I17
2I5 23 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Avionics Master Switch

Avionics Bus #1 and #2 are fed direct from the tie bus via the avionics master solenoids which in turn are
energized by the avionics master switch. Refer to Chapter 24 and to schematics in 91-24-30.
2. Ground Clearance Switch
The ground clearance switch furnishes power to the Comm 1 and speaker panel direct from the battery
bus through the ground clearance relay. Refer to 91-23-00 for schematic interface and troubleshooting.
NOTE: Communications transceivers are installed in these aircraft as part of the Garmin GNS-530
COM/NAV/GPS multi-function units. See 34-50-00 and 91-34-50 for details of these
installations.
2I7 23-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 23-00-00 2I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUDIO INTEGRATING

PUBLICATIONS.)
The Garmin GMA-340 Audio Panel integrates the audio switching, amplifier, and intercom system with a
marker beacon receiver. Maintenance of the GMA-340 is “on condition” only and, with the exception of
swapping complete units, should be performed only by a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the
GMA-340 Audio Panel Maintenance Manual (Garmin P/N 190-00149-02).
Information provided in this manual is intended to aid the removal and installation of the GMA-340 unit
and its associated wiring and to permit basic system functional test and adjustment. In addition, a
detailed electrical schematic is provided in 91-23-50.
1. Removal and Installation (See Figure 1.)
See 39-10-00 - Avionics, Removal and Installation.
102312 F WIRE RP2A22 & RP2B22 TO AUDIO AMP CKT BKR (REF)
(SEE DETAIL BELOW AND 91-23-00, FIGURE 1)
WIRES CW15J & CW16J

TO CO-PILOT CONT. WHEEL
CONN. PINS 10 & 12
AUDIO PANEL
TO MKR/BCN ANTENNA (SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 2)

GROUND BLOCK
PASSENGER AUDIO
EFIS AUDIO J17
WIRES CW15 & CW16 OXYGEN MASK

TO PILOT CONT. WHEEL MIC JACK (REF)
CONN. PINS 10 & 12
J-1
P-1 BLUE WIRE TO

AVIONICS LIGHT
DIMMING BUS
J13
TO TO STEREO CABINET
SEE DETAIL INTERCOM BEHIND PILOT'S SEAT
JACKS
P387
J387
TO SUMMING AMP
MIC SELECT SWITCH
CLOCK HARNESS J16

SPEAKER CONN
RELAY
PANEL (REF)
P387 J387
RED WIRES LABELED "RP7"
FROM AUDIO HARN. 17 17
RP2A22 (REF) 15 15
TO AUDIO AMP CKT. BKR.
RP2B22 (REF)
DETAIL
(SEE ALSO 91-23-00, FIGURE 1)
GMA-340 Audio Panel Installation Effectivity

Figure 1 4697001 & up
2I9 23-50-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. System Functional Test (See Figure 2.)

A. On Ground
The following known good equipment is required prior to performing this test: microphone, headset,
speaker and avionics receivers.
(1) Lamp Test
(a) Apply power to the unit by rotating the pilot intercom knob clockwise.
(b) The test button checks the internal LED annunciator and marker beacon lamps. Press
TEST to confirm operation of the LED’s. Cover the photocell with a finger and observe
that the LED annunciators dim automatically. Check the front panel back-lighting and
dimming function. Each annunciator contains a lamp for illumination.
(2) Fail-safe Operation Check
(a) Turn the unit off by rotating the pilot intercom knob counterclockwise.
(b) Check fail-safe operation by exercising the COM 1 microphone, microphone key and
audio over the headphones.
(c) Turn the unit back on to continue testing.
(3) Transceiver Operational Check
(a) Perform a ramp test radio check by exercising the installed transceivers, microphone,
microphone key and audio over the headphones and speaker.
(b) Verify that communications are loud and clear and push-to-talk (PTT) operation is correct.
(4) Intercom System (ICS) Check
(a) Set the intercom to the ALL mode (Crew and Pilot LED’s off).
(b) Plug in headsets at each ICS position.
(c) Adjust squelch and volume for each position and verify that the ICS is working properly.
(d) Check Pilot and Copilot ICS positions for isolation and proper operation of volume and
squelch controls.
(e) Press the PA button. Verify that microphone audio is heard over the speaker.
(5) Aircraft Receivers Check
(a) Select the audio source corresponding to each installed avionics unit and check for audio
over the headsets.
(b) Check for Pilot/Copilot audio isolation when pressing the COM 1/2 button.
(c) Press the SPKR button and verify that any selected audio is heard over the speaker.
(6) Music System Check
Connect a stereo music source to MUSIC 2. Press the CREW button to set the ICS to the crew
mode. Verify that stereo audio is heard in the passenger headsets only.
B. In Flight
Verify proper operation of the marker lamps and marker audio, including the marker audio mute
function. Check proper operation of the marker sensitivity selection (using the SENS button) by
flying towards the outer marker position initially using HI sensitivity. When the OM audio is just
barely audible in the headset, switching to LO sensitivity should reduce or eliminate the audio.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 23-50-00 2I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GARMIN GMA 340
A OM MKR
MUTE
COM1 COM2 COM3 NAV1 NAV2 DME ADF TEST
SQ HI SPKR PILOT SQ
LO COM1 COM2 COM3 COM

OFF/ CABIN AUDIO ICS ISOLATION VOL
VOL MIC MIC MIC 1/2 PULL
SENS PA CREW PASS
PILOT VOL CO-PILOT
GMA-340 Audio Panel Effectivity

Figure 2 4697001 & up
3. Adjustment (See Figure 3.)

CAUTION: USE ONLY A 2 MM (MAX BLADE WIDTH) FLAT-BLADE NONCONDUCTIVE SCREW
DRIVER AS AN ADJUSTMENT TOOL. BE CAREFUL WHEN INSERTING ADJUSTMENT
TOOL THROUGH THE TOP COVER. THE UNIT MAY BE DAMAGED IF AN ADJUSTMENT
TOOL IS ACCIDENTALLY FORCED AGAINST UNINTENDED COMPONENTS OR
CIRCUIT BOARD PATHS.
The following adjustments can be made through access holes in the top cover of the GMA 340:
A. Marker beacon audio level.
Counter-clockwise adjustment increases the marker audio level.
B. Marker beacon sensitivity.
Clockwise (CW) adjustment increases the sensitivity. LOW sensitivity can be adjusted without
affecting HIGH sensitivity setting. Adjusting HIGH sensitivity will, however, affect the LOW
sensitivity. If the HIGH sensitivity setting is adjusted, then the LOW sensitivity setting should be
checked and adjusted afterwards, as needed. If your GMA-340 top cover does not have the marker
beacon sensitivity adjustment access holes as indicated in Figure 3, and you need to adjust the
sensitivity, contact Garmin for instructions.
C. Aircraft radio speaker output level.
D. Pilot PA microphone speaker output level.
E. Copilot PA microphone speaker output level.
2I11 23-50-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MARKER BEACON HIGH SENSITIVITY
MARKER BEACON LOW SENSITIVITY
PILOT PA MIC SPKR LEVEL AIRCRAFT RADIO SPKR LEVEL
CO-PILOT PA MIC SPKR LEVEL
MARKER BEACON AUDIO LEVEL
MUSIC 1 MUTE TRIP LEVEL

(NOT USED IN THIS INSTALLATION)
FRONT
(VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
Effectivity GMA-340 Audio Panel Adjustments

4697001 & up Figure 3
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 23-50-00 2I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. GMA340 MOD 4 Installation

NOTE: The following does not apply if Piper Service Bulletin No. 1135 has been previously complied
with or if the airplane has been retrofitted with stereo headsets.
In S/N’s 4697001 through 4697089, 4697091 through 4697141, and 4697145; the "failsafe" feature of
the GMA340 installations have been wired to the pilot headset RIGHT audio channel which will not allow
audio transmissions to the pilot's headset during emergency audio operations (loss of power to or failure
of the GMA340 MOD 4 units). The following procedure relocates one wire within the harness connector
to the correct pin (RIGHT channel to LEFT channel).
Upon installation of the GMA340 MOD 4 unit complete these steps.
A. Gain access to the "P2" connector on the back of the GMA 340 audio panel . The "P2" connector
attaches to the "J2" receptacle located on the back of the GMA 340 (See Figure 4).
B. De-pin the wire going to Pin 31 of the "P2" connector and relocate this wire to Pin 16.
C. Reconnect the connector to the back of the GMA 340 audio panel, if removed.
D. Verify correct operation by switching the battery and avionics master switches ON. Pull the
Audio/Mkr circuit breaker located on RH forward panel, row 1, breaker 3. Verify radio transmission
and reception on COM 1 is still possible. Reset the circuit beakers and turn OFF the avionics and
battery master switches.
15 1 15 1
30 16 30 16
44 31 44 31
J2/P2 J1/P1
(View looking from back of rack)
GNMA340 Rear Receptacles

Figure 4
2I13 23-50-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. M1091 Summing Amplifier (PIR-PPS-60205, NEW)

PUBLICATIONS.)
The Baker Electronics M1091 Summing Amplifier is designed to the convert the warning tones from up
to 6 audio channels into one audio output. The Summing Amp. is connected to the GMA-340 Audio
Panel the audio switching, amplifier, and intercom system. Maintenance of the M1091 is “on condition”
only and, with the exception of swapping complete units, should be performed only by a qualified
avionics shop.
Information provided in this manual is intended to aid the removal and installation of the M1091
Summing Amp. and its associated wiring and to permit basic system functional test and adjustment. In
addition, a detailed electrical schematic is provided in 91-23-50.
When replacing the Summing Amplifier Assy the only set up adjustment that needs to be made, is to
insure that the unused channel is turned off. The case must first be removed.(refer to the Baker
Electronics M1091 Summing Amplifier Installation Manual P/N I23-50-13).
A. Input channels not used on the M1091 will be turned OFF by adjusting the corresponding channel
potentiometer fully counter clockwise. (See Chart 1 and Figure 5)
B. Input channels that are used on the M1091 will be turned on by adjusting the corresponding
channel potentiometer fully clockwise. (See Chart 1 and Figure 5)
Chart 1
M1091 Summing Amplifier CONFIG Page
MODEL AUDIO SOURCE

PA46-500TP
CHANNEL 1 #1 MODE S TRANSPONDER
CHANNEL 2 #2 MODE S TRANSPONDER
CHANNEL 3 RADAR ALTIMETER
CHANNEL 4 IHAS
CHANNEL 5 TAWS
CHANNEL 6 UNUSED
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 23-50-00 2I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
R5 R12
D2 D1
+ C3 R13
R36
R8 R33
Q2
R27
R11 C18
Q1 VR1 R35
R34
U1 + + 1 2 3
+ C19
C12
R32
C6
C7
R22
R7 C5 R25 R24 CHANNEL
C13
C17
3 1 R26 1 3
R2 #5
C4
CHANNEL R8 R10 C14 R23
#2 R18 C11 R16 R15 CHANNEL
C6
R17
3 1
1 3
R20 #3
C10
CHANNEL R19 R21 C9 R14

#4 R1 C2 R29 CHANNEL
C15
1 R30
#6
3
R3 R31 1 3
C1
CHANNEL R2 R4
T1 C16 R28
#1
1 13
14 J1 25
105360 B
AUD1 SUMMING AMP. CONN.
BL 0.00
FS 100.00
(SEE FIGURE 1)
VIEW LOOKING DOWN

LEFT SIDE
SUMMING AMP ASSY
M1091 Summing Amplifier Effectivity

Figure 5 4697174 & up
2I15 23-50-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 23-50-00 2I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC DISCHARGING
1. Static Wicks
A. Description
This airplane is equipped with 16 static wicks: three on the outboard end of each aileron, three on
the outboard half of each side of the elevator; two on the right-hand side of the rudder and one on
the left-hand side of the rudder and one in the center of the elevator trim tab.
B. Inspection
Static discharging wicks must be inspected each 100 hours as follows:
(1) General appearance and physical condition.
(2) Security of attachment to airframe.
(3) Discharge points visible.
(4) Resistance (1.0 to 100 megohms, 500 to 1,000 volt megohmmeter).
(5) Base resistance to airframe (one (1) ohm maximum).
2. Bonding Straps (See also 51-80-00.)
To aid in dissipating static electricity buildup, the ailerons, elevator and rudder are bonded to either the
control’s hinge or spar.
When replacing the jumper assemblies (bonding straps), secure the end of the jumper that mounts to
the control’s hinge or spar as follows:
A. Clean an area of 1 1/2 times the diameter of the jumper’s washer down to bare metal.
B. Attach the jumper and washer to the control’s hinge or spar.
C. Seal the cleaned area with zinc chromate primer and acrylic lacquer.
2I17 23-60-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 2I18 THRU 2I24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 23-60-00 2I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
24
ELECTRICAL POWER
2J1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24
CHAPTER CHAPTER
24-List of 1 Apr 15/07 24-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

24-Table of Contents 1 Apr 15/07 24-50-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
24-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
24-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07
26 Apr 15/07
27 Apr 15/07
28 Apr 15/07
29 Apr 15/07
30 Apr 15/07
31 Apr 15/07
32 Apr 15/07
2J3 24 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 24 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 2J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRICAL POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 24-00-00 1 2J7
DC GENERATION 24-30-00 1 2J9

Description 1 2J9
Troubleshooting 1 2J9
Electrical System Functional Test 8 2J16
Main Electrical Bus 8 2J16
Avionics Bus 8 2J16
Voltage Regulation and Control 9 2J17
Voltage Adjustment 9 2J17
Distribution 10 2J18
Starter Generator 11 2J19
Adjusting Starter Generator 12 2J20
Precautions 12 2J20
Removal 13 2J21
Installation 13 2J21
Cleaning and Inspection 13 2J21
Generator Control Unit (GCU) 16 2J24
Static Tests 16 2J24
Operational Tests 18 2K2
Alternator 19 2K3
Removal 20 2K4
Installation 20 2K4
Alternator Drive Belt Tension 20 2K4
Alternator Control Unit 24 2K8
Bench Test of Alternator Control Unit (Lamar B-00382-1) 24 2K8
Batteries 27 2K11
Definitions 27 2K11
Precautions 27 2K11
Removal 28 2K12
Cleaning Battery 29 2K13
Installation 29 2K13
Battery Charging 29 2K13
Capacity Test 30 2K14
Storage Limitations 31 2K15
Disposal 31 2K15
EXTERNAL POWER 24-40-00 1 2K17

Emergency Starting through External Power Receptacle 1 2K17
ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION 24-50-00 1 2K19

Electrical Load 1 2K19
Volt / Ammeter 1 2K19
2J5 24 - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 24 - CONTENTS 2J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
This section contains information to assist in servicing the electrical power distribution systems and
components. This chapter does not include autopilot or avionics service information. Refer to Chapter 91
for electrical systems schematics.
PUBLICATIONS.)
The electrical system is 28 Vdc, negative ground, consisting of:
A. One 200 amp APC Starter/Generator standard
B. One 130 amp Electrosystems Alternator standard
C. One Lamar Generator Control Unit standard
D. One Lamar Alternator Control Unit standard
E. One digital Voltmeter. standard
F. Dual digital Ammeters standard
G. Tri-fed main power distribution bus/tie bus standard
H. One (or two) Concorde valve-regulated lead acid battery(s)
with a 38 (or combined 29) amp hour capacity standard
I. External power provisions standard
J. Visual annunciation with alternator and generator “INOP’’ sensors standard
Power for the 28 Vdc negative ground tri-fed split bus electrical system is supplied by a direct driven 200
ampere generator and a belt driven 130 ampere alternator. The generator and the alternator are located
on the aft end of the engine. Both units run at the same time. The generator is the primary current source
and the alternator is the back-up. The units that control the generator and the alternator are adjusted
such that the generator furnishes all of the load and the alternator is in active standby mode. In the event
that the generator should fail or be turned off for any reason, the alternator picks up the entire load. The
24 Vdc lead acid battery(s), with a 38 (or combined 29) ampere hour capacity, are located in the battery
compartment in the right hand side of the nose of the aircraft just forward of the wing leading edge. The
batteries provide power for engine starting and also act as an emergency source of electrical power in
the event the generator and the alternator should both fail.
Electrical switches are located as follows:
An overhead switch panel located above the windshield (See 11-30-00, Figure 2).
Avionics and systems switches located on the instrument panel.
Environmental control panel installed in the instrument panel.
A battery bus, located in the engine compartment, provides a continuous source of power for the
courtesy lights, digital clock and memory function of the entertainment console. Because the battery bus
is connected directly to the battery, power is available for these functions even when the Battery Master
switch is OFF. The battery bus contains fuses to protect these circuits.
The EMERGENCY/GROUND CLEARANCE BUS is activated by depressing the EMER/GND CLEAR
switch on the overhead switch panel. The bus is tied directly to the battery via a relay and may be
activated even if the battery master switch is turned off. The EMER/GND CLEARANCE bus provides
power to #1 Comm, #1 Nav/GPS, Audio/Marker panel, gear warning lights and instrument panel lights. It
is used for such things as filing flight plans prior to turning the battery master switch ON or providing
emergency power to systems required to land the aircraft in the event of a total electrical failure.
2J7 24-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
When the Battery Master switch, located on the overhead switch panel, is turned ON, the battery
contactor closes, enabling current to flow from the battery to both the start contactor and the tie bus
located on the lower right section of the Co-Pilots instrument panel. Should the airplane's batteries be
depleted, a receptacle (located behind a small access door on the left side of the aft fuselage) permits
using an external 28 Vdc power source for engine start. With the Battery Master switch OFF, connecting
an appropriate external source completes a circuit that closes the external power contactor, permitting
current to flow to the starter/generator and the tie bus. Whether using the airplane’s batteries, or external
power, tie bus overcurrent protection is provided by the 150 ampere Battery circuit breaker.
A Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim Position indicator is located in the center of the lower portion of the instrument
panel. The digital voltmeter incorporated therein is connected to the tie bus to indicate system voltage on
the bus. The dual ammeters provide separate readouts to indicate Generator and Alternator load current.
A low voltage monitor in the indicator will illuminate a "LOW BUS VOLTS" light on the annunciator panel,
which is located at the top center of the instrument panel, when the voltage on the tie bus is 25 Vdc or
less.
NOTE: When using only the airplane's batteries or a 24 volt external power source, the "LOW BUS
VOLTS" annunciator may be illuminated. Check the voltmeter for actual voltage.
The generator and the alternator each have their own independent ON-OFF switch located on the
overhead switch panel. Each system also has it's own solid state voltage regulator which regulates field
voltage to its respective device. When selected ON, the output of the generator and the alternator is fed
through individual shunts to the tie bus. The shunts provide a signal to the Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim Position
indicator to indicate the amount of current each device is providing. The alternator is tied to the bus by a
150 ampere circuit breaker. The generator is tied to the bus by a line contactor which is controlled by the
generator control unit (GCU). Should an overvoltage or field ground fault condition occur in the alternator
system, it's alternator control unit (ACU) will turn off the output to the alternator field. Once the fault has
been cleared the alternator system may be turned back on by turning the alternator switch on the
overhead switch panel OFF and then back ON. Should an overvoltage or ground fault condition occur in
the generator system the GCU will open the line contactor and place itself in the tripped mode. Once the
fault has been cleared the generator can be put back on line by resetting the Generator control circuit
breaker (on the lower right hand instrument panel) and turning the generator switch on the overhead
switch panel OFF and then back ON. Any time the alternator or the generator is turned OFF an "ALT
INOP" or "GEN INOP" light will be illuminated on the annunciator panel.
The engine start system has an Auto and a Manual mode. Auto mode is considered the normal mode.
When in Auto you momentarily depress the PUSH START switch, this will engage the starter and the
starter will run until 56% Ng at which time the starter disengages. Pressing the PUSH START switch (in
AUTO) at higher than 56% Ng will not re-engage the starter. Should it be necessary to abort a start in
AUTO mode, the pilot just has to place the AUTO/MANUAL switch in the manual position. When in
MANUAL mode the starter will run only while the PUSH START switch is depressed.
The main electrical bus with associated circuit breakers is located on the pilots forward and aft side
panels. The non-essential bus and the AVIONICS NO.1 and AVIONICS NO.2 busses are located on the
co-pilot's side panel. The two avionics busses are interconnected via a 25 ampere bus tie circuit breaker.
Current is fed to the main bus by three conductors. Three in-line diodes provide isolation in the event of a
ground fault in one of the feeder lines. The three feeders are protected by two 80 amp and one 100 amp
circuit breakers. The non-essential bus is also fed by the 100 amp circuit breaker.
The two avionics busses are fed through independent contactors. The feeders to the contactors are
protected by 35 ampere circuit breakers. When the AVIONICS switch on the overhead switch panel is
depressed, both avionics contactors close allowing current to flow to both avionics busses. Should the
need arise, either avionics bus can be isolated by pulling the avionics bus BUS TIE circuit breaker and
the appropriate avionics circuit breaker.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 24-00-00 2J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC GENERATION
1. Description
Power for the 28 Vdc negative ground tri-fed split bus electrical system is supplied by a direct driven 200
ampere generator and a belt driven 130 ampere alternator. The generator and the alternator are located
on the aft end of the engine. Both units run at the same time. The generator is the primary current source
and the alternator is the back-up. The units that control the generator and the alternator are adjusted
such that the generator furnishes all of the load and the alternator is in active standby mode. In the event
that the generator should fail or be turned off for any reason, the alternator picks up the entire load. Two
24 Vdc lead acid batteries, with a combined 29 ampere hour capacity, are located in the battery
compartment in the right hand side of the nose of the aircraft just forward of the wing leading edge. The
batteries provide power for engine starting and also act as an emergency source of electrical power in
the event the generator and the alternator should both fail.
The generator and the alternator each have their own independent ON-OFF switch located on the
overhead switch panel. Each system also has it's own solid state voltage regulator which regulates field
voltage to its respective device. When selected ON, the output of the generator and the alternator is fed
through individual shunts to the tie bus. The shunts provide a signal to the Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim Position
indicator to indicate the amount of current each device is providing. The alternator is tied to the bus by a
150 ampere circuit breaker. The generator is tied to the bus by a line contactor which is controlled by the
generator control unit (GCU). Should an overvoltage or field ground fault condition occur in the alternator
system, it's alternator control unit (ACU) will turn off the output to the alternator field. Once the fault has
been cleared the alternator system may be turned back on by turning the alternator switch on the
overhead switch panel OFF and then back ON. Should an overvoltage or ground fault condition occur in
the generator system the GCU will open the line contactor and place itself in the tripped mode. Once the
The Piper Model 46-500TP Battery Charger is a fully automatic 8 Amp battery charger capable of
operating on any worldwide input from 100 to 240 VAC.
2. Troubleshooting
See Charts 1 and 3.
2J9 24-30-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

STARTER GENERATOR
Unit fails to operate or does Low voltage power source. Check the power source to
not attain normal speed. make certain that full
voltage is being applied to
starter terminals.
Defective switch in power Replace switch.
supply line.
Defective starter contactor. Replace contactor.
Damaged armature. Replace the armature
assembly.
Short circuited or open Replace the stator and
stator windings. housing assembly.
Improperly seated Check brush seating and
brushes. increase brush run-in
time.
Eccentric commutator. Refinish commutator.
Excessive sparking Short circuited or grounded Replace stator and housing
at brushes. field windings. assembly.
Excessive clearance in Replace bearings.
bearings or rough
bearing races.
Eccentric commutator. Refinish commutator.
Short circuit in armature Replace armature
windings. assembly.
Brushes incorrectly installed Reverse and reseat
with top bevel reversed.
Armature out of balance. Balance or replace
armature.
Insufficient brush run-in; Run in brushes until
improper seating. seated.
Severe overload or short Locate and correct fault.
circuit in aircraft electrical
system.
Brushes sticking in holders. Free-up brushes.
Weak brush springs. Replace brush holders.
Brushes loose in holder. Replace brushes. If still
loose, replace brush holder
assemblies.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Noisy operation. Rough bearings. Replace bearings.

Scored or worn drive splines. Replace drive shaft.
Armature rubbing in stator. Repair or replace defective
parts.
Fan blades bent and Straighten or replace
rubbing. fan.
Unit vibrates. Unbalanced armature Balance or replace
assembly. armature assembly.
Excessive run-out of Replace armature
armature bearings. bearings.
Fan damaged or out Rebalance or replace fan.
of balance.
Generator overheats. Continuous overload or Check aircraft electrical
restricted air inlet. system for grounds, etc.
Make correction as
necessary.
Starter-generator fails Short circuited or open Replace stator and housing
starting test. stator winding. assembly.
Open circuit in armature. Replace armature.
2J11 24-30-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALTERNATOR
Zero output indicated on Open field circuit With the battery switch
ammeter regardless of rpm. turned on, check for battery
(refer to alternator system voltage from the airplane’s
test procedure) main bus through the entire
field circuit to the alternator
field terminal. Measure the
voltage from the ground (-)
to the following points (+) in
sequence: bus bar, field
circuit breaker (5A), field
terminals of master switch
alternator control unit and
alternator field terminal.
Interruption of voltage
through any of these points
isolates the faulty
component or wire which
must be replaced. (See
wiring schematic,
Chapter 91.)
Open output circuit. With the battery switch
turned on, check for battery
voltage from the airplane’s
main bus through the entire
output circuit to the
alternator battery post.
Measure voltage from
ground (-) to the following
points (+) in sequence: bus
bar, output current limiter,
ammeter, and the post on
the alternator marked “BAT”.
Interruption of voltage
through any of these points
isolates the faulty
component or wire
which must be replaced.
(See wiring schematic,
Chapter 91.)
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Zero output indicated on Open field winding Disconnect field terminal of

ammeter regardless of rpm in alternator. alternator from field wiring
(continued) and check for continuity
from field terminal to
ground with ohmmeter
(20-100 ohms) depending
on brush contact
resistance.
(Slowly turn alternator
rotor through 360 of travel.)
If resistance is high, check
brushes for spring tension
and excessive wear and
replace if necessary. If
brushes are okay and field
reads open, replace
alternator.
Shunt resistor 1 amp Replace fuse(s).
fuse(s) open.
Output indicated on Faulty or mis-adjusted Start engine, turn on load
ammeter does not meet ACU. (ref. ACU test procedure),
minimum values specified set power lever
in alternator control unit at 2000 RPM. Check voltage
(ACU) test procedure. at buss bar. Voltage should
be 28 volts minimum. If
voltage is below this value,
adjust voltage per
24-30-00, Voltage
Adjustment. If adjustment
cannot correct the
condition, replace ACU.
2J13 24-30-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALTERNATOR (cont.)
Output indicated on High resistance connections Check visually for loose
ammeter does not meet in field or output circuit. binding posts at the various
minimum values specified junction points in system,
in alternator control unit alternator post marked
test procedure. (cont.) “BAT”, lugs on ammeter,
connections at alternator
control unit, circuit
breaker, etc. (See wiring
schematic, Chapter 91.)
Examine crimped terminal
ends for signs of
deterioration at crimp or
strands of broken wire at
crimp. Tighten any loose
binding posts or replace
bad wire terminals.
Open rectifier. If any of the rectifiers of the
alternator open up
internally, it will result in a
definite limitation on the
current that can be drawn
from the alternator. After
having checked the
previous causes of low
output it can be assumed
that a faulty rectifier exists.
Field circuit breaker Short circuit in alternator Test ACU per 24-30-00,
trips. control unit (ACU) or harness. Bench Test of Alternator
Control Unit.
- If ACU fails test, replace
ACU.
- If ACU passes test,
check harness for short.
(See wiring schematic,
Chapter 91.)
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Excessive ammeter Excessive resistance Check all connections and

fluctuation. in field circuit. wire terminals in field circuit
for deterioration such as
loose binding posts, broken
wire strands at terminals,
etc. Tighten all connections
and replace faulty
terminals.
High field circuit If problem persists, jump
resistance. across the terminals of the
following components one
at a time until the faulty unit
is isolated.
a. Field 5-amp (CB).
b. Alternator switch.
Defective alternator. Replace alternator control
control unit. unit.
Faulty grounds. Completely clean all
corrosion from grounding
points.
2J15 24-30-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Electrical System Functional Test (PIR-PPS60094-2.)
Whenever electrical system work involving the major system busses is completed, verify correct
connections as follows:
A. Prior to application of external or battery power pull the following circuit breakers:
(1) 150 Amp ALTERNATOR FEED (CB302)
(2) 80 Amp MAIN BUS FEED (2) (CB306, CB307)
(3) 40 Amp AVIONICS FEED (2) (CB304, CB305)
(4) 100 Amp NON-ESSENTIAL FEED (CB308)
(5) 150 Amp BATT/EXT PWR FEED (CB301)
B. With a Multimeter set to the diode check scale, read between the load side of CB306, CB307 and
CB308 to verify that bus isolation diodes CR331L, CR331R and CR331M, located on the pilot’s side
below the aft circuit breaker panel, are not shorted. (Check both polarities.)
C. Turn on battery master switch. Engage CB301 (BATT/EXT PWR) breaker. Verify Battery voltage on
Multimeter. Turn off battery master switch and observe no voltage on Multimeter.
D. Apply external power (28 vdc). Verify voltage.
E. Engage CB306 (LH Main Bus Feed). Verify items on the main bus are operable. Disengage CB306
and engage CB307 (RH Main Bus Feed). Verify items on the main bus are operable.
F. Turn on avionics master switch and engage CB304 (LH Avionics Feed). Verify items on the #1 & #2
avionics bus are operable. Open CB368 (Avionics BUS Tie) and observe items on the #2 avionics
bus are inoperative. Engage CB305 (RH Avionics Feed). Observe items on the #2 avionics bus are
once again operable. Re-engage CB368.
G. Engage CB308 (Non-Essential Bus Feed). Observe items on the non-essential bus are operable.
H. Engage CB302 (Alternator Output). With a Multimeter verify 28VDC on the + output terminal of the
alternator.
I. Re-engage all open circuit breakers, turn off avionics master switch and disconnect external power.
4. Main Electrical Bus
The main electrical bus with associated circuit breakers is located on the pilots forward and aft side
panels.
Current is fed to the main bus by three conductors. Three in-line diodes provide isolation in the event of a
ground fault in one of the feeder lines. The three feeders are protected by two 80 amp and one 100 amp
circuit breakers. The non-essential bus is also fed by the 100 amp circuit breaker.
5. Avionics Bus
The AVIONICS NO.1 and AVIONICS NO.2 busses are located on the co-pilot's side panel. The two
avionics busses are interconnected via a 25 ampere bus tie circuit breaker.
The two avionics busses are fed through independent contactors. The feeders to the contactors are
protected by 35 ampere circuit breakers. When the AVIONICS switch on the overhead switch panel is
depressed, both avionics contactors close allowing current to flow to both avionics busses. Should the
need arise, either avionics bus can be isolated by pulling the avionics bus BUS TIE circuit breaker and
the appropriate avionics circuit breaker.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Voltage Regulation and Control

Voltage regulation and control is provided for the starter generator by a Lamar Generator Control Unit
(GCU) and for the alternator by a Lamar Alternator Control Unit (ACU). Both units regulate voltage
through control of field voltage and automatic overvoltage protection. The only adjustment on each is the
voltage adjust potentiometer.
GCU voltage should be set at 28.4 ± .2 Vdc and ACU voltage should be set at 27.0 ± .2 Vdc per the
voltage adjustment procedure below.
The starter generator and the alternator each have their own independent ON-OFF switch located on the
overhead switch panel. Should an overvoltage or field ground fault condition occur in the alternator
system, it's alternator control unit will turn off the output to the alternator field. Once the fault has been
cleared the alternator system may be turned back on by turning the alternator switch on the overhead
switch panel OFF and then back ON. Should an overvoltage or ground fault condition occur in the
generator system the GCU will open the line contactor and place itself in the tripped mode. Once the
7. Voltage Adjustment (PIR-PPS60184-1, Rev. A.)
NOTE: The following is effective for S/N’s 4697124 and 4697126 & up; and, also for S/N’s 4697001 thru
4697123 and 4697125 with Kit No. 767-307 installed.
The generator control unit (GCU) and the alternator control unit (ACU) work independently of each other.
In order to be able to run the alternator and generator at the same time it is necessary to adjust their
outputs to have the generator putting out 28.4 ± .2 VDC and the alternator putting out 27.0 ± .2 VDC.
The generator and alternator do not share the load at any time.
NOTE: The alternator is normally in an active standby mode. Under normal conditions the
generator carries the full load. If the generator fails, the alternator immediately picks up the
load.
A. Pre-adjust the GCU with a bench test fixture as follows: (PIR-PPS60184, Appendix A.)
(1) Remove the GCU from the airplane and connect it to a bench test fixture as shown in Figure 1.
(2) Voltage Adjustment
Turn on power supply and increase voltage output slowly while observing the "Field" light. The
Field light will get brighter with increasing voltage until it reaches the regulator set point at
which time the Field light goes out. Adjust the GCU and repeat procedure until the Field light
goes out at 28.4 VDC.
(3) Line Contactor Check
Observe that the "LC” light stays off until the voltage at pin B equals or exceeds pin A.
(4) Over Voltage Check.
As the power supply voltage is increased above the regulation set point (Field light goes out)
the LC light will stay on until the overvoltage point is reached (32 --> 33 VDC). At this point the
LC light will abruptly go out and the bench power supply will current limit. Shut down the bench
supply and lower its output voltage to approximately 28 VDC to reset the overvoltage condition.
2J17 24-30-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
+ J
BATT. 18-24V **
- - + A
IN4004
(OR EQUIV.) FIELD
VARIABLE POWER
SUPPLY
(CURRENT LIMITED TO M
LESS THAN 1-2 AMPS. ) 28V GCU
BULBS LC
G
L
D
** USE SMALL BATTERIES, SUCH AS TWO 9V IN SERIES.
GCU Bench Test Set-up

Figure 1
B. With the GCU pre-adjusted and installed in the airplane, start the engine and proceed as follows:
(1) With the engine running turn on the generator only and establish a 50 amp ± 3 load. Verify or
adjust the generator output at 28.4 ± .2 VDC.
(2) Turn off the generator and Turn on the alternator. Adjust the ACU to give an alternator output of
27.0 ± .2 VDC.
(3) Turn the generator back on and observe the following:
(a) "ALT INOP" light extinguished.
(b) "GEN INOP" light extinguished.
(c) Generator is carrying the full load.
(d) Turn off the generator and verify that the alternator assumes the full load.
8. Distribution
See 24-50-00, Chart 1, and 91-24-30, Figure 1.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Starter Generator
PUBLICATIONS.)
NOTE: Review Pratt & Whitney Canada, Maintenance Manual No. 3021442, 72-00-00, Engine,
Turboprop - Inspection, paragraph 11, whenever the starter-generator is replaced.
The instructions contained in this manual provide a guide for line maintenance, inspection, and brush
replacement only.
CAUTION: DO NOT HOLD THE PUSH START SWITCH IN ANY LONGER THAN THE TIME
REQUIRED FOR A NORMAL ENGINE START. OTHERWISE, THE UNIT CAN BE
DAMAGED BY EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURES CAUSED BY LARGE STARTING
CURRENTS IF A NORMAL START IS NOT EFFECTED.
The starter generator is located on the upper part of the engine accessory section. The purpose of the
unit is to provide torque for engine starting and to generate dc electrical power. When this unit is being
used as a starter, it may be energized by aircraft batteries or through the use of an external power
source.
When the unit is being utilized as a generator, it will provide rated dc output when operated at rated
speeds. This generated electrical power is then used as the primary power source to operate the aircraft
electrical systems.
The starter generator incorporates its own cooling system which consists of an air inlet duct, exhaust
duct, and an integral four-bladed fan. Cooling is obtained by routing the outside ram air through the air
inlet duct which is then driven through the unit by the four-bladed fan and vented into the engine
compartment.
The engine start system has an Auto and a Manual mode controlled by switches on the overhead switch
panel. Auto mode is considered the normal mode. With the battery master switch on, and in Auto mode,
momentarily depressing the PUSH START switch will engage the starter and the starter will run until
56% Ng at which time the starter disengages. Pressing the PUSH START switch (in AUTO) at higher
than 56% Ng will not re-engage the starter. Should it be necessary to abort a start in AUTO mode, place
the AUTO/MANUAL switch in the manual position. When in MANUAL mode the starter will run only while
the PUSH START switch is depressed.
In detail, depressing the PUSH START switch with the battery master switch on, in either mode, closes
the starter contactor. Power is then supplied through the master contactor to the field windings and the
armature windings of the starter unit creating a strong magnetic field. This magnetic field in the armature
combines with that existing in the field windings of the starter unit to drive the armature as required to
start the engine.
When operating as a generator after engine start, the generator has its own independent ON-OFF
switch located on the overhead switch panel and its own solid state voltage regulator (i.e. - GCU). When
selected ON, the output of the generator is fed through a shunt to the tie bus. The shunt provides a
signal to the Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim Position indicator (on the instrument panel) to indicate the amount of
current the generator is providing. The generator is tied to the bus by a line contactor which is controlled
by the generator control unit (GCU). Should an overvoltage or ground fault condition occur in the
generator system the GCU will open the line contactor and place itself in the tripped mode. Once the
switch panel OFF and then back ON. Any time the generator is turned OFF the "GEN INOP" light will be
illuminated on the annunciator panel.
2J19 24-30-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
STARTER GENERATOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS
DC Starter-Generator Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200SGL145Q

Rating (kw). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Current @ max. RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 amps
Voltage (gen. output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.5 Vdc (nominal)
Speed range (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,050-12,000
Rated Continuous Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,000 RPM
Direction of rotation when viewing shaft end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCW
Voltage (starter, max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Generator output terminal designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B+
Negative terminal designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-
Positive field-terminal designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A+
Equalizer terminal designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
Starting terminal designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C+
Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8 lbs. (w/QAD)
Brush life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 hours min.
A. Adjusting Starter Generator

There are no adjustments to the starter generator The only adjustment necessary to maintain
proper generator output is located on the generator control unit. See Voltage Adjustment, above.
B. Precautions
Since the starter generator and generator control unit are designed for use on a single polarity type
electrical system, the following precautions must be observed when servicing the charging circuits.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
DAMAGE TO THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
(1) When installing a battery, ensure that the ground polarity of the battery and the ground polarity
of the starter generator is the same.
(2) When connecting a booster battery, make certain to connect the negative battery terminals
together and the positive battery terminals together.
(3) When connecting a charger to a battery, connect the charger positive lead to the battery
positive terminal and the charger negative lead to the battery negative terminal.
(4) Never operate the starter generator on an open circuit. Make absolutely certain all connections
in the circuit are secure.
(5) Do not short across or ground any of the terminals on the starter generator or generator
control unit.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Removal (PIR-PPS60229, Rev. New)
NOTE: Two mechanics are required to remove or install the Starter-Generator

(1) Open left gull-wing engine access door. (See 71-10-00.)
(2) Disconnect and mark electrical wiring at terminal block.
(3) Disconnect cooling air inlet hose.
(4) Disconnect the alternator cooling air inlet hose at the hatchback cowling air inlet and fold it
back out of the way.
CAUTION: THE STARTER GENERATOR MUST BE SUPPORTED BEFORE LOOSENING
THE HOLDING CLAMP AS DAMAGE TO THE SPLINE MAY OCCUR.
(5) One mechanic is to maintain the alignment of the Starter-Generator by holding the Starter-
Generator in position by keeping the mounting surfaces flush with the Quick Attach/Detach
adapter (QAD pad), while the other mechanic loosens and removes the “V”-band clamp.
(6) Remove starter generator by sliding aft, to the left and lifting out of engine compartment.
D. Installation (PIR-PPS60229, Rev. New)
(1) Lubricate shaft assembly with a thin, even, coat of turbine oil.
(2) One mechanic is to gently align the Starter-Generator to the QAD pad, being careful not to put
the Starter-Generator drive spline in a bind.
(3) After the Starter-Generator has been properly aligned, one mechanic should hold the Starter-
Generator in position by keeping the mounting surfaces flush with QAD pad while the other
mechanic installs and secures the “V”-band clamp. Torque the nut on the clamp to 50 inch
pounds.
(4) Connect cooling air inlet hose.
(5) Connect electrical wiring at terminal block.
(6) Connect alternator cooling air inlet hose to the hatchback cowling air inlet.
(7) Close left engine access gull-wing door. (See 71-10-00.)
E. Cleaning and Inspection
(1) Remove generator from aircraft. (See Removal, above.)
(2) Remove end bell brush inspection cover. Do not remove brushes during internal cleaning and
resistance check procedures.
(3) Internal:
WARNING: WHILE USING COMPRESSED AIR, WEAR GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELD TO
PROTECT EYES. DO NOT AIM AIR JET AT EXPOSED SKIN. USE A DUST
FILTER RESPIRATOR.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO BEARING SEALS AND TO AVOID FORCING

CONTAMINANTS INTO BEARINGS, DO NOT AIM AIR JET AT BEARINGS
(a) Remove carbon and copper dust from armature and stator windings using a low pressure
(40 psi) air supply and nozzle. Start at the drive end of unit and work toward the brushes
and commutator area.
WARNING: STODDARD SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE. DO NOT BREATHE
VAPORS. USE IN WELL VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM SPARKS,
FLAME, AND HOT SURFACES. WEAR SPLASH GOGGLES, SOLVENT
RESISTANT GLOVES, AND OTHER PROTECTIVE GEAR. IN CASE OF
SKIN CONTACT, WASH WITH SOAP AND WATER; IN CASE OF EYE
CONTACT, FLUSH EYES WITH WATER AND SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION.
2J21 24-30-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE LUBRICANTS OR UNAUTHORIZED SOLVENTS, WHICH

CAN REDUCE BRUSH LIFE.
(b) Inspect interior of unit for oil and other contaminants. Wipe contaminants with clean cloth
moistened with Stoddard solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680, Type 1).
(c) Perform an insulation check using a volt-ohmmeter or equivalent (50-volt maximum)
source tester. The dc resistance between generator output terminal B and the machine
frame must measure at least 10,000 ohms. If resistance again measures less than 10,000
ohms, return unit to an authorized overhaul center for repair.
(d) Inspect air intake and exhaust screens for foreign material. Carefully remove foreign
material and check for possible internal damage to unit.
(4) External:
(a) Ensure that end bell brush inspection cover is installed to unit.
WARNING: STODDARD SOLVENT IS TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE. DO NOT BREATHE
VAPORS. USE IN WELL VENTILATED AREA FREE FROM SPARKS,
FLAME, AND HOT SURFACES. WEAR SPLASH GOGGLES, SOLVENT
RESISTANT GLOVES, AND OTHER PROTECTIVE GEAR. IN CASE OF
SKIN CONTACT, WASH WITH SOAP AND WATER; IN CASE OF EYE
CONTACT, FLUSH EYES WITH WATER AND SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION.
(b) Thoroughly clean exterior of unit with soft, clean cloth moistened with Stoddard solvent
(Federal Specification P-D-680, Type 1). Wipe dry with a clean, lint-free cloth.
(5) Generator Brush Inspection
At 300 hours, remove the generator for brush inspection. Remove the shortest brush only to
measure the remaining brush life. Do not remove more than one brush, as brush seating will
be affected. Your brush inspection time will be obtained by measuring using the shortest brush
length, as the basis for determining brush life.
(a) Remove end bell brush cover from unit.
NOTE: Remove the shortest brush only. Do not remove more than one brush as brush
seating will be affected.
(b) Remove screws securing brush lead to brush holder. With a stiff wire hook, lift spring from
brush and remove brush.
(c) Determine remaining life of brushes (refer to Figure 2). Filling in the attached form, will
show you how to determine remaining brush life. Using this procedure will aid you in
determining your Mean Time Between Overhauls (MTBO). to determine continued
airwor thiness: See latest revisions of Aircraft Par ts Corp. service bulletins 19-
SB150SG105, 19-SB150SG124 and service letter SL132.
Starter Generator Brush Wear Indicators

Figure 2
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERATOR SERIES 200SGL SAMPLE GALCULATION PROCEDURE

BRUSH P/N 200SG1009
At 300 hours, remove the generator for brush inspection. Remove the shortest brush only. Do not
remove more than one brush as brush seating will be affected.
Date:
Generator P/N: Serial No.:
Calculate brush life left as per example below:
Maximum wear length of a new 150SG1009-5 Brush (1) .625
Brush wear left (as measured from shortest brush) (2)
TOTAL BRUSH WEAR (3)
Hours brush has operated: (4)
(3) ÷ (4) = (5) Rate of brush wear per hour

Total Brush Hours Brush
Wear (from #3 Operated (from
above) #4 above)
Hours of brush left before brushes
(2) ÷ (5) = (6) must be replaced
Brush Wear Rate of Brush
Left (from Item Wear per Hour
#2 above) (from Item #5
above)
Generator Operating Hours: + =

Hours Left Total Hours on Total Hours
(from Item #6) Generator Thus Generator Can
Far (from Item #4) Operate Before Brush
Change
If 150 hours or more of brush life is left, reinstall the brush and operate the generator for the
remaining hours of brush wear left, as calculated above or for a maximum of 1,000 hours. At that
time, return the unit to an Authorized APC Repair Station for overhaul.
New Brush Shortest Brush from Generator
.625 Brush Length (1) Brush Wear Left (2)
Remove the generator the second time after the additional operating hours established by your
calculations have been reached. Inspect the brushes. If all are below the maximum brush wear mark,
the generator MBTO has been established.
Brush Wear Calculation

Figure 3
2J23 24-30-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: If brushes are worn below the wear life indicators replace using the latest
available revisions of Aircraft Parts Corp. service publications.
NOTE: If new brushes (including instant-filming (IF) types) have been installed, seating /
run-in is required by the starter-generator manufacturer.
(d) After inspection, replace end bell brush cover. Ensure that cover is seated in housing
recess and that exhaust air holes are located adjacent to terminal block. Then reinstall the
generator.
10. Generator Control Unit (GCU)
The system uses one Lamar GC-22 generator control unit (voltage regulator). It only has one adjustment
the voltage control. See Voltage Adjustment, above.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 3.
B. Static Tests
The following static tests are “quick and easy” and enable localizing some problems without starting
the engine. A Lamar “TE02-1 Breakout Box” test set and an ohmmeter are required.
(1) Disconnect the aircraft harness from the GCU.
(2) Connect the aircraft harness to the breakout harness, but do not connect the breakout harness
to the GCU.
(3) Short the ohmmeter probes together and record the reading. Subtract this value from all point
to point readings, below.
(4) Turn master switch OFF, turn Generator switch ON.
(5) With the ohmmeter, measure the following point to point:
From To Nominal Notes

Term Term Value (Ohms)
TE02-1 J S/G B 0 If high. Check Start switch, Generator switch,
10 Amp C/B, and all associated wire and
connections.
TE02-1 L S/G E 0 If high, check wire and connections from L to
ground.
TE02-1 G S/G E 0 If high, check wire and connections.
TE02-1 M S/G A 0 If high, check wire and connections.
S/G A S/G E 2 If high, suspect S/G field is open.
If low, suspect that S/G field is shorted or
GCU M to S/G A wire is shorted to ground.
TE02-1 D S/G D 0 If high, check wire and connections.
TE02-1 H K405 X2 0 If high, check wire and connections.
K405 X2 S/G E 50 If high, suspect K405 coil is open.
If low, suspect K405 coil is shorted or GCU H
to K405 X2 wire is shorted to ground.
TE02-1 A K405 A2 0 If high, check wire and connections.
TE02-1 B K405 A1 0 If high, check wire and connections.
GCU = Generator Control Unit, S/G = Starter Generator, K405 = Line Contactor Relay
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT (GCU)

After engine start, GEN will not Field Flash function of Repair or replace GCU.
come on line unless the Start GCU inoperative.
Switch is engaged momentarily
after the Generator Switch is
turned on.
NOTE: The system can be operated as described without creating further detrimental effects until a
convenient time to have the GCU replaced or repaired.
During engine shutdown the Reverse current protection Repair or replace GCU.
starter "motors on” if the function of GCU is defective.
Generator Switch is left on.
NOTE: Turning the Generator switch off prior to engine shutdown will correct this condition as a
stopgap measure but the operator should be aware that if this precaution is overlooked damage
to the starter generator could result.
After an engine start the Indicates that the Generator has
Generator won't come on line built up and is being regulated
(low voltmeter reading and/or but the K405 relay is not
LOW VOLTAGE light "ON") but connecting the Generator to
normal generator output voltage the Bus. This can be caused by:
exists (nominally 28.4 Vdc) at A1
on the K405 relay. a) No output (nominally 28.4 Vdc) Repair or replace GCU.
on pin H of the GCU
(i.e. - defective GCU).
b) Output on pin H but no Repair wiring.
voltage on X2 of K405 relay
(i.e. - defective wiring).
c) Normal voltage (nominally Replace relay.
28.4 Vdc) from X2 to X1
on K405 relay
(i.e. - defective relay).
d) Normal voltage (nominally Repair wire.
28.4 Vdc) from both X2 and
X1 on K405 relay
(i.e. - open ground wire).
After engine start, the Generator Discontinuity in the circuit feeding Verify the 10 Amp C/B is
will not come on line. Voltage at power to the GCU. The circuit not tripped. Set Generator
A1 on the K405 relay is only includes the wiring, the 10 Amp switch ON and proceed to
about 1 volt and there is no C/B, the Generator switch, and isolate the discontinuity
voltage on pin J of the GCU. the Start switch. from A1 on the K405 relay
to pin J on the GCU.
The Generator will not come The voltage regulator section Repair or replace GCU.
on line and the voltage on A1 of the GCU is defective.
on the K405 relay is low (9-16V).
2K1 24-30-00 PAGE 17

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT (GCU)

The voltmeter indicates rapidly Indicative of an overvoltage trip If resetting the C/B or
increasing bus voltage and then and may be accompanied by the cycling the Generator
at about 32V suddenly drops to 10 Amp C/B tripping. In those switch restores the system
about 24V and then slowly cases where the C/B does not and the Generator stays
decreases as the batteries trip, the system can be restored on line, the GCU is
discharge. to normal operation by may have an intermittent
momentarily turning the condition. If the symptoms
Generator switch OFF and then repeat, the GCU is faulty
back ON. and should be repaired or
replaced.
C. Operational Tests
The Lamar “TE02-1 Breakout Box” test set can also be used to test GCU performance with the
engine running.
(1) Disconnect the aircraft harness from the GCU.
(2) Connect the aircraft harness to the breakout harness, and connect the breakout harness to the
GCU.
(3) Uncoil the breakout harness to its full length and take a position well away from the propeller,
propeller blast and engine exhaust.
(4) Start engine and conduct tests.
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11. Alternator (See Figure 3.)

PUBLICATIONS.)
The alternator installed in the PA-46-500TP functions as a secondary power supply, acting as an on-line
standby in case the generator fails or is switched OFF.
The alternator ON-OFF switch is located on the overhead switch panel. Voltage regulation is provided by
a solid state alternator control unit (i.e. - ), which automatically monitors and controls alternator output by
controlling the alternator field winding current. When selected ON, the output of the alternator is fed
through a shunt to the tie bus. The shunt provides a signal to the Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim Position indicator
to indicate the amount of current the alternator is providing. The alternator is tied to the bus by a 150
ampere circuit breaker. Should an overvoltage or field ground fault condition occur in the alternator
system, it's alternator control unit will turn off the output to the alternator field. Once the fault has been
cleared the alternator system may be turned back on by turning the alternator switch on the overhead
switch panel OFF and then back ON. Whenever the alternator is turned OFF the "ALT INOP" light will be
illuminated on the annunciator panel.
CHART 4
ALTERNATOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS
Model ES-4019-1
Rated Voltage 28 Volt
Rated Current 130 Amps
Overload Rating 145 Amps
Rated Speed Range 5,400 - 10,000 RPM
Continuous Operating Speed 10,000 RPM
Drive Type Belt
Minimum Speed for Regulation 5,400 RPM
Maximum Speed for Regulation 12,000 RPM
Minimum External Field Resistance 2.0 Ohms
Maximum External Field Resistance 3.0 Ohms
Maximum Operating Altitude 35,000 Feet
Weight 17 lbs.
Rotation Bi-directional
Maximum Operating Temperatures Stator 360° F
Heat Sink 300° F
Bearing 250° F
2K3 24-30-00 PAGE 19

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Removal
(1) Turn battery master switch OFF.
(2) Open left engine access gull-wing door.
(3) Disconnect the electrical leads to the alternator.
(4) Remove safetywire and loosen alternator belt tension turnbuckle locknut and relieve belt
tension.
(5) Remove belt.
(6) Remove safetywire and unbolt turnbuckle from alternator mounting lug.
(7) Support alternator, loosen and remove the bolt, nut, inserts, and washers securing the
alternator to the accessory drive assembly.
(8) Remove alternator.
B. Installation
(1) Align alternator mounting lug between accessory drive assembly mounting lugs and loosely fit
bolt and inserts.
(2) Attach alternator belt tension turnbuckle to alternator mounting lug.
(3) Install alternator drive belt. Rotate alternator drive belt. Check belt alignment. As shown in
Figure 3, Sheets 2 and 3, add or remove washers as required to obtain correct belt alignment.
(4) Tighten alternator mounting bolt. Tighten and safety turnbuckle mounting bolt.
(5) Adjust belt tension per Alternator Drive Belt Tension, above.
(6) Connect electrical leads to the alternator.
(7) Close and secure left engine access gull-wing door.
C. Alternator Drive Belt Tension
(1) To adjust alternator drive belt tension:
(a) Remove lockwire on tension turnbuckle nut.
(b) Slightly loosen bolt that attaches tension turnbuckle assembly to accessory drive
mounting lug.
(c) Tighten or loosen the turnbuckle until desired tension is reached.
(d) Then tighten turnbuckle locknut, safetywire it, and retorque and safety mounting lug bolt.
(2) Using a Gates Rubber Co. #150 Belt Tensiometer, check the alternator belt tension as follows:
(a) 100 ± 5 lbs. on initial installation of a new belt. After alternator operation of no more than
one hour, recheck belt tension and, if required, readjust to service specifications, below.
(b) Service adjustment of a used belt is as follows:
1 If checked HOT (i.e. - immediately after engine shutdown), and belt tension is below
50 lbs., adjust to 50 lbs.
2 If checked COLD, and belt tension is below 90 lbs., adjust to 90 ± 5 lbs.
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Alternator Installation and Adjustment

2K5 24-30-00 PAGE 21

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE 1: AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN ALTERNATOR BELT ALIGNMENT,

USE WASHERS (NAS1149C0663R (UP TO 2) OR NAS1149C0632R (UP TO 4))
IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN INSERTS AND
ALTERNATOR MOUNTING LUG.
AS REQUIRED, USE WASHERS INSERT (NOTE 1)

(NAS1149C0663R (UP TO 2)
IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN INSERT (NOTE 1)
SUPPORT AND ACCESSORY DRIVE
MOUNTING LUGS. ALTERNATOR
MS21042-6 NUT NAS6606-69 BOLT

NAS1149C0663R WASHER NAS1149C0663R WASHER
ACCESSORY DRIVE
ASSEMBLY
SUPPORT
NAS43HT4-20 SPACER
(INSIDE COMPRESSOR
MOUNTING LUG)
MS21043-4 NUT
BUSHING
NAS6604-69 BOLT
- ADDITIONAL NAS1149C0463R
(UP TO 2) CAN BE USED IF BOLT
GRIP EXTENDS THROUGH
AS REQUIRED
BRACKET.
SPACER AND COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUGS. Compressor
AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN COMPRESSOR BELT ALIGNMENT,

IN ANY COMBINATION TO FILL GAP BETWEEN ACCESSORY DRIVE
AND COMPRESSOR MOUNTING LUGS.
VIEW A-A

PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALTERNATOR BELT
TENSION ADJUSTMENT TURNBUCKLE ASSY.

ALTERNATOR IN ANY COMBINATION.
MS20074-06-07 BOLT
MS20995-C32 SAFETYWIRE
AFTER ADJUSTING ALTERNATOR LOCATION
(SEE VIEW A-A), IF REQUIRED TO FILL GAP
BETWEEN ALTERNATOR MOUNTING LUG
AND TENSION ARM, USE WASHERS
(NAS1149C0463R (UP TO 2)
IN ANY COMBINATION.

USE WASHERS (NAS1149C0463R (UP TO 3) ALTERNATOR BELT
OR NAS1149C0432R (UP TO 6)) TENSION ADJUSTMENT TURNBUCKLE ASSY.
IN ANY COMBINATION.
MS21043-4 NUT
AN4H11A BOLT
MS20995-C32 SAFETYWIRE
NAS1149C0463R
AFTER ADJUSTING ALTERNATOR LOCATION
(SEE VIEW A-A), IF REQUIRED TO FILL GAP
BETWEEN ACCESSORY DRIVE MOUNTING LUG
AND TENSION ARM, USE WASHERS
(NAS1149C0463R (UP TO 2)
ACCESSORY DRIVE ASSY. OR NAS1149C0432R (UP TO 4))
IN ANY COMBINATION.
VIEW B-B

2K7 24-30-00 PAGE 23

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12. Alternator Control Unit (ACU)

The system uses one Lamar B-00382-1 alternator control unit (voltage regulator). It only has one
adjustment -- the voltage control. See Voltage Adjustment, above.
13. Bench Test of Alternator Control Unit (Lamar B-00382-1)
CAUTION: IN-AIRCRAFT TESTING WITH ALTERNATOR RUNNING IS NOT RECOMMENDED. DO
NOT BYPASS REGULATOR BUS TO FIELD AS A MEANS OF CHECKING ALTERNATOR
OR OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION WITH ALTERNATOR RUNNING.
A. Setting Up Test Equipment
(1) Remove unit from aircraft.
(2) Set up the following equipment as shown in Figure 4:
Power: Pure dc regulated power supply (A) 28.8V 5A
Adjustable 6-12V power supply (B) 0.05A
Resistors: R1 1 ohm
R2 650 ohms fine adjustment
R3 7.2 ohms dummy load 4A
Ammeter: 0-5A dc
Voltmeters: Precision meter between pins 1 and 8;

between pin 3 and power (B) ground;
50 MV precision meter between shunts at pins 6 and 7.
Switch: Between R1 and R2

Indicator: 28V light
(3) Set up load resistance as follows:

(a) Jumper pins 1 and 2.
(b) Set dummy load resistance for 4A 28.8V (approximately 7.2 ohms).
(c) Remove jumper.
B. Voltage Regulator Test
(1) Turn power off.
(2) Mate unit with test connector.
(3) Open switch #1.
(4) Apply regulated power supply (A). Hold constant @ 28.3 V ± 0.025 V.
NOTE: Power supply should be adequate for load. If fluctuation occurs, assist with 28 V
battery to stabilize current.
(5) Allow unit a 2 minute warm up.
(6) Reset adjustment on alternator control unit for 1.0 A field current.
(7) Decrease power supply (A) to approximately 28.1 V until ammeter shows 3 A field current.
(8) Check alternator inoperative indicator by varying power supply (B) to 10.25 ± 0.75 V.
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
+ (A)
Red
Lavender 1 28.8 VDC
Regulated
-
Orange 7 R1 Switch 1
R2
V
Yellow 6 V Precision Volt
Meter
Grey 4
Dummy Load
Blue 2 A
R3
+
Brown 3 (B)
6-12 VDC
V V Variable
Green -
5
Black 8
Case
Test
Connection 9
Bench Test of Alternator Control Unit - Lamar #B-00382-1

Figure 5
+
1
PTT (A)
7 R1 Switch 1
R2
6
V
Blue 2
K1
+
3
Switch 2 (B)
R3
5
Black 8 Case
9
Overvoltage Test of ACU
Figure 6
2K9 24-30-00 PAGE 25

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Field Short Test (Refer to Figure 4.)

NOTE: Repeatedly performing this test to prove effective shorted load protection is not
recommended.
(1) Set the field current to any desired value by adjusting the power supply.
(2) Apply a solid short circuit from field terminal to ground. The unit should shutdown the same as
if an overvoltage had occurred.
(3) Restore operation for additional testing by momentarily removing bus voltage.
NOTE: The shorted load circuits do not protect against overload other than a zero resistance short
circuit.
D. Overvoltage Protection Test (Refer to Figure 5.)
(1) Revise connections as follows:
(a) Disconnect dummy load.
(b) Add 28 V relay (K1). No other connections should be on pin #2.
(c) Add a press-to-test (PTT) switch between power supply (A) and pin #1.
(d) Add resistor R3 and switch #2.
(2) Open switches #1 and #2. Set power supply (B) at 11 V.
(3) Set power supply (A) at 31.8 V. Depress PTT and hold for 5 seconds. No activation should
occur.
(4) Increase power (A) to 32.2 V. Depress PTT. Relay should activate almost instantly.
(5) Close switch #2. Increase power to 33.8 V. Depress PTT for 5 seconds. No activation should
occur.
(6) Increase power to 34.5 V. Depress PTT. Relay should activate almost instantly.
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14. Batteries
One (or two) 28 Vdc valve-regulated lead acid battery(s) (located in the battery compartment in the right
side fuselage just forward of the wing leading edge) provide(s) power for engine starting and also acts as
an emergency source of electrical power in the event both the generator and the alternator fail.
The battery(s) is (are) rated at 38 (or 12 and 17) amp hour capacity(s). In the dual installation, the two
batteries are paralleled for a combined capacity of 29 amp hours.
A battery bus, located in the engine compartment, provides a continuous source of power for the
courtesy lights, digital clock and memory function of the entertainment console. Because the battery bus
is connected directly to the battery, power is available for these functions even when the Battery Master
switch is OFF. The battery bus contains fuses to protect these circuits.
When the Battery Master switch, located on the overhead switch panel, is turned ON, the battery
contactor closes, enabling current to flow from the battery(s) to both the start contactor and the tie bus
located on the lower right section of the Co-Pilots instrument panel. Should the airplane's batteries be
depleted, a receptacle (located behind a small access door on the left side of the aft fuselage) permits
using an external 28 Vdc power source for engine start. With the Battery Master switch OFF, connecting
an appropriate external source completes a circuit that closes the external power contactor, permitting
current to flow to the starter generator and the tie bus. Whether using the airplane’s battery(s), or
external power, tie bus overcurrent protection is provided by the 150 ampere Battery circuit breaker.
A. Definitions
(1) Valve Regulated battery - A lead-acid battery in which there is no free electrolyte. This battery
requires no maintenance of the liquid level and recombines the gases formed on charge within
the battery to reform water. The battery may be used in any attitude without danger of leakage
or spilling of electrolyte.
(2) Rated Capacity (C1) - Quantity of electricity in Ampere-hours (Ah) which the cell or battery is
capable of delivering in 1 hour, throughout its normal service life, after full charge, under
conditions defined with regard to temperature and end discharge voltage.
(3) End Point Voltage (EPV) - Unless otherwise stated, during discharge the battery voltage
corresponding to a mean voltage per cell of 1.67 Volts for lead-acid batteries (20 EPV for 24
volt batteries).
B. Precautions:
WARNING: BATTERIES ON CHARGE OR DISCHARGE PRODUCE HYDROGEN GAS, WHICH
CAN EXPLODE IF IGNITED. DO NOT SMOKE, USE AN OPEN FLAME, OR CAUSE
SPARKING NEAR A BATTERY. CHARGE, SERVICE OR TEST THE BATTERY ONLY
IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA. THE USE OF EXHAUST FANS MAY REDUCE THE
RISK OF EXPLOSION.
WARNING: BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID WHICH WILL CAUSE BURNS. DO NOT
TOUCH EYES AFTER TOUCHING BATTERY. DO NOT GET ACID IN YOUR EYES,
ON YOUR SKIN, OR IN YOUR CLOTHING. IN THE EVENT OF ACID IN THE EYES,
FLUSH THOROUGHLY WITH CLEAN COOL WATER FOR SEVERAL MINUTES. GET
PROFESSIONAL MEDICAL ATTENTION. REFER TO BATTERY MATERIAL SAFETY
DATA SHEET (MSDS) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
WARNING: WEAR PROPER EYE, FACE, AND HAND PROTECTION AT ALL TIMES WHEN
WORKING WITH BATTERIES. KNOW THE LOCATION AND USE OF EMERGENCY
EYEWASH AND SHOWER NEAREST THE BATTERY CHARGING AREA.
WARNING: ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. DO NOT TOUCH UNINSULATED PORTION OF THE
CONNECTOR OR THE BATTERY TERMINALS. A POSSIBILITY OF SERIOUS
ELECTRICAL SHOCK EXISTS
2K11 24-30-00 PAGE 27

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5
TROUBLESHOOTING (BATTERY SYSTEM)

Low Voltage or No Voltage. Battery Partially or Charge battery.
Fully Discharged.
Battery does not hold charge. Battery beyond serviceable life. Replace Battery.
Battery gets hot while recharging. Battery beyond serviceable life. Replace Battery.
NOTE: Batteries operated in parallel should be replaced together.
WARNING: ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. DO NOT LAY TOOLS OR OTHER METAL OBJECTS
ON THE BATTERY AS ARCING OR EXPLOSION COULD OCCUR. REMOVE
CONDUCTIVE JEWELRY BEFORE WORKING AROUND BATTERY, CHARGER, OR
TEST EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: AIRCRAFT BATTERIES ARE CERTIFIED TO HAVE CERTAIN MINIMUM CAPACITY
FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS IN THE EVENT OF A ELECTRICAL GENERATOR
SYSTEM FAILURE. NEVER "JUMP START" AN AIRCRAFT THAT HAS A
DISCHARGED OR 'DEAD' BATTERY.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CONNECTOR , ARC BURNS ON THE HANDS, OR
EXPLOSION, BATTERIES SHOULD NEVER BE CONNECTED OR DISCONNECTED
WITH CHARGER OR ANALYZER OPERATING. BATTERIES MUST BE CONNECTED
OR DISCONNECTED ONLY WHEN THE AMMETER READS ZERO. PUSH THE
"OFF" SWITCH TO SHUT DOWN THE CHARGER OF ANALYZER.
CAUTION: BATTERIES CONTAIN HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. KNOW THE LOCATION AND
PROPER USE OF EMERGENCY RESPONSE MATERIALS. REFER TO BATTERY
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
C. Removal
(1) Set master switch to the OFF position.
(2) Disconnect any external power supply.
(3) Open battery compartment access panel and slide out battery tray.
CAUTION: REMOVE NEGATIVE (GROUND) CABLE FIRST, BEFORE EXPOSING AND
LOOSENING POSITIVE TERMINAL WING NUT, TO AVOID SHORT CIRCUITS
AND ELECTRICAL BURNS.
(4) Pull back rubber battery terminal boots, loosen nuts and disconnect battery cables.
(5) Remove battery(s):
WARNING: BATTERIES ARE HEAVY. USE APPROPRIATE LIFTING DEVICES OR
EQUIPMENT. USE BATTERY HANDLES WHERE PROVIDED.
(a) One at a time:
1 Remove battery hold down bolts.
2 Lift batteries off of tray, one at a time.
(b) Release tray slider catches and slide the entire tray with batteries out of the aircraft.
PAGE 28
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Cleaning Battery
(1) Remove all accumulated contamination from the battery exterior with a stiff bristle brush. (Do
not use a metal brush or abrasive materials.) Wipe exterior of battery with a cloth saturated
with a solution of bicarbonate of soda mixed - one part soda to twenty parts of water. (Do not
allow soda solution to enter any cells.)
(2) Wash entire battery with clear water and dry thoroughly.
(3) Wash down the battery support and floor area, hold down supports, connectors and cable
ends with a soda solution followed by clear water. Dry entire area and component parts
thoroughly. Apply fresh acid resistant paint if required.
E. Installation
(1) Set master switch to the OFF position.
(2) Disconnect any external power supply.
(3) Ensure the battery tray is clean and dry.
WARNING: BATTERIES ARE HEAVY. USE APPROPRIATE LIFTING DEVICES OR
EQUIPMENT. USE BATTERY HANDLES WHERE PROVIDED.
(4) Install battery(s):
(a) One at a time:
1 Place batteries on tray, one at a time.
2 Install and secure battery hold down bolts.
(b) Holding tray slider catches open, slide the entire tray with batteries into the aircraft.
CAUTION: USE ONLY THE HARDWARE PROVIDED WITH THE BATTERY. DO NOT PLACE
ANY STAINLESS STEEL OR STEEL WASHERS BETWEEN THE RING
TERMINAL AND THE BATTERY TERMINAL.
CAUTION: USE AN OPEN END WRENCH ON THE FLATS OF THE BATTERY TERMINAL
WHILE TORQUING THE TERMINAL BOLTS. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT
IN THE RUPTURE OF THE BATTERY SEAL AT THE TERMINAL AND
PREMATURE FAILURE OF THE BATTERY.
(5) Connect battery cables. Torque terminal nuts to 40 in-lbs. Always install the ground (negative)
cable last.
(6) Annotate log book with battery serial number and date of installation.
(7) Replace battery compartment access panel.
(8) Perform an operational test.
F. Battery Charging
NOTE: If a battery gets very hot (external case temperature greater than 55° C (130° F) during
charging it should be replaced.
NOTE: Batteries operated in parallel should be replaced together.
(1) Recharging on the aircraft:
(a) Special Tools:
Advanced Power Products Activator 282 Battery Charger, P/N 4105, or constant potential
charger.
(b) The Activator 282 is fully automatic, connect to battery and initiate charging. If using a
constant potential charger, follow instructions below.
(c) Set the charger for 2.35 volts per cell (28.2 for 24 volt batteries).
2K13 24-30-00 PAGE 29

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Set the current limit to the C1 rate.

NOTE: If current on external power unit is not adjustable, do not charge battery in aircraft.
(e) Initiate charging and continue to charge until the charge current stabilizes for 1 hour.
(2) New Piper model 46-500TP battery charger (4697256 and up).
CAUTION: USE ONLY PIPER BATTERY CHARGER CODE NUMBER 601-913, ADAPTER
CABLE CODE NUMBER 651-568 (CHARGER TO AIRCRAFT), AND AC INPUT
LINE CORD 153-166 (CHARGER TO AC POWER SOURCE). USE OF NON
PIPER APPROVED CHARGER CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO AIRCRAFT AND
RELATED EQUIPMENT AND MAY VOID WARRANTY.
The battery charger monitors charge progression; charging will cease if an internal battery
problem occurs. When the battery charging is complete, the charger begins an automatic
topping cycle as the battery requires. Thus, the charger may be left on indefinitely when the
aircraft engine is not in use, without any danger of overcharging or damaging the battery.
To install this option on 4697001 thru 4697255 order kit 767-516. This kit includes a charger as
well as the parts and instructions to install a charging interface on the airplane. After
installation make a logbook entry indicating compliance with kit 767-516.
(3) Recharging off the aircraft:
(a) Remove the battery from the aircraft.
(b) Special Tools:
- Advanced Power Products Alpha C-20 Battery Charger, P/N 4136, or equivalent
- Advanced Power Products CA15-50 Charger/analyzer, P/N 4159, or equivalent.
(c) Depending on the charger available, charge the battery Constant Potential (CP). Charge
at 28.2 volts for 24 volt batteries until the charge current stabilizes for one hour.
G. Capacity Test
(1) Special Tools:
- Advanced Power Products Beta D-50 Aircraft Battery Analyzer, P/N 4120, 4126, or
equivalent
- Advanced Power Products Alpha C-20 Battery Charger, P/N 4136, 4142, or equivalent
- Advanced Power Products CA15-50 Charger/analyzer, P/N 4159 or equivalent.
(2) Depending on the type of charger available, CHART 6
charge the battery Constant Potential (CP). TEST RATES
Charge at 28.2 volts for 24 volt batteries until
the charge rate stabilizes for one hour. Battery Rating Discharge Rate (AH)
(3) Test Procedure: RG-41 38 AH 30.4
(a) Stabilize the battery at 15° C (59° F) or RG-47 17 AH 13.6
higher. The batter y must be at the RG-45 12 AH 9.6
temperature for at least 24 hours.
(b) Discharge the battery at the test rate
specified in Char t 6 to an end point
CHART 7
voltage of 20 volts for 24 volt batteries.
MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE CAPACITY
(c) Record the time to EPV.
(4) The battery is acceptable for continued use if Battery Rating Minimum Capacity
the ampere hour capacity (actual hours of
RG-41 38 AH 32.3 AH
discharge x ampere rate of discharge) is
RG-47 17 AH 14.45 AH
greater than minimum AH capacity shown in
RG-45 12 AH 10.2 AH
Chart 7.
PAGE 30
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Storage Limitations
(1) If it becomes necessary to store the batteries for any length of time, they must be:
(a) boost charged every 90 days while in storage, and
(b) boost charged when open circuit voltage is below 25.0 volts for 24 volt batteries.
(2) Batteries that have not been recharged every 90 days when stored are to be conditioned
before being placed in service.
(3) Boost charging:
(a) Special tools:
- Advanced Power Products Alpha C-20 Battery Charger, P/N 4136, or equivalent
- Advanced Power Products Activator 282 Battery Charger, P/N 4105, or equivalent
- Advanced Power Products CA15-50 Charger/Analyzer, P/N 4159, or equivalent.
(b) Depending on the type of charger available, charge the battery Constant Potential (CP).
Charge at 28.2 volts for 24 volt batteries until the charge current stabilizes for one hour.
(4) Conditioning:
(a) Special Tools:
- Advanced Power Products Alpha C-20 Battery Charger, P/N 4136 or equivalent
- Advanced Power Products Beta D-50 Analyzer, P/N 4120 or equivalent.
(b) Procedure:
CAUTION: THIS PROCEDURE MAY DAMAGE BATTERY IF PERFORMED
REPEATEDLY.
1 Discharge the battery at the test rate specified in Chart 6 to an end point voltage of
20 volts for 24 volt batteries.
2 Constant current charge at:
- 3.8 AH rate for the 38 AH battery, or
- 1.7 AH rate for the 17 AH battery, and
- 1.2 AH rate for the 12 AH battery;
for 16 hours or until the battery voltage reaches 2.5 volts per cell (i.e. - 30 volts for 24
volt batteries).
3 Allow the battery to cool down for 8 hours.
4 Retest the battery per Capacity Test, above.
I. Disposal
(1) Batteries contain lead, sulfuric acid, and other hazardous materials.
(2) Lead acid batteries are recyclable.
(3) Dispose of all spent batteries in accordance with local laws and regulations. In the United
States, see battery Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for additional information.
2K15 24-30-00 PAGE 31

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 32
Apr 15/07 24-30-00 2K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL POWER
Emergency Starting through External Power Receptacle

Should the airplane's batteries be depleted, a receptacle (located behind a small access door on the left
side of the aft fuselage) permits using an external 28 Vdc power source for engine start. With the Battery
Master switch OFF, connecting an appropriate external source completes a circuit that closes the
external power contactor, permitting current to flow to the starter generator and the tie bus. Whether
using the airplane’s batteries, or external power, tie bus overcurrent protection is provided by the 150
ampere Battery circuit breaker.
CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT EXTERNAL POWER PLUG TO AIRCRAFT’S EXTERNAL POWER
RECEPTACLE WITH A DISCHARGED OR “RUN-DOWN” AIRCRAFT BATTERY, UNLESS
THE AIRCRAFT’S BATTERY MASTER SWITCH IS TURNED “OFF” AND LEFT “OFF”.
A. Place ground power unit on the pilot’s side of the nose in full view of pilot’s window. Upon
connecting ground power to the aircraft, the External Power Contactor will energize immediately,
supplying electrical power to all aircraft electrical buses.
B. With Battery Master Switch left in the “OFF” position, turn “OFF” all unnecessary electrical loads as
in a normal start.
C. Start engine.
CAUTION: EXERCISE GREAT CARE DISCONNECTING GROUND POWER PLUG.
DISCONNECT THE PLUG ONLY FROM THE PILOT’S SIDE OF THE AIRPLANE.
D. Disconnect and move ground power unit well away from aircraft.
E. Turn “ON” Battery Master Switch.
F. Observe ammeters indicate Generator / Alternator electrical power is available.
G. Do not take-off immediately. Allow sufficient time for batteries to recharge.
2K17 24-40-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 24-40-00 2K18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD DISTRIBUTION
1. Electrical Load
See Chart 1.
2. Volt / Ammeter
The Volt / Amp meter installation consists of two digital ammeters and one digital voltmeter collocated in
a Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim Position indicator in the center of the lower portion of the instrument panel. The
digital voltmeter is connected to the tie bus to indicate system voltage on the bus. The dual ammeters
provide separate readouts to indicate Generator and Alternator load current. A low voltage monitor in
the indicator will illuminate a "LOW BUS VOLTS" light on the annunciator panel, which is located at the
top center of the instrument panel, when the voltage on the tie bus is 25 Vdc or less.
NOTE: When using only the airplane's batteries or a 28 volt external power source, the "LOW BUS
VOLTS" annunciator may be illuminated. Check the voltmeter for actual voltage.
The best troubleshooting approach with these instruments, is to compare the readings with a known
good meter. Placing a good voltmeter in parallel with the indicator is the best practice.
2K19 24-50-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOAD DISTRIBUTION
# AMPS/ DUTY # AMPS/ DUTY

BUS COMPONENT / SYSTEM UNITS UNIT CYCLE BUS COMPONENT / SYSTEM UNITS UNIT CYCLE
STARTER 500.00 INT NE EMER. PRESSURE VALVE 0.29 INT

M WINDSHIELD HEAT RELAYS 1.40 INT
TIE BATTERY CONTACTOR 0.40 CONT M WINDSHIELD HEAT (HIGH) 20.74 INT
TIE GENERATOR FIELD 3.00 CONT M WINDSHIELD HEAT (L0) 13.59 INT
TIE VOLT/AMP/RUD-INDICATOR 0.18 CONT NE INVERTER 5.00 CONT
NE CABIN TEMP. 2.00 CONT
AVI AVIONICS #1 CONTACTOR 0.70 CONT NE C/P AIRSPD. WARNING 0.25 CONT
AVI AVIONICS #2 CONTACTOR 0.70 CONT M PROP HEAT (4 BLADE) 25.00 CONT
M STARTER CONTACTOR 0.40 INT M SURFACE DEICE 1.85 INT
M ELECTRIC FLAPS 6.00 INT
M HYDRAULIC PUMP 26.00 INT NE AVIONICS LIGHTING 1.00 CONT
M HYDRAULIC PUMP RELAY 0.35 INT AVI CLOCK DVR 3001-XT 0.10 CONT
M HOURMETER 0.05 CONT M ENTERTAINMENT CONSOLE 3.00 INT
M FUEL QUANTITY (L&R) 0.25 CONT M AVIONICS COOLING 0.50 CONT
M FUEL PUMP 2 2.50 INT M TURN COORDINATORS 0.30 CONT
M DATA ACQ./ENG. MON. 0.70 CONT M STALL HORN 0.25 INT
M ENGINE DISPLAY 1/2 2.40 CONT M IGNITION 3.50 INT
M ENV. & BLEED AIR CONT. 3.25 CONT M E. L. PANELS 0.50 CONT
M PROP 0’SPD GOV./R EV LOCK 1.50 INT M FIRE DETECTION 0.07 CONT
M FLAP INDICATOR 0.50 INT M PROP. FEATHER 2.50 INT
M LNDG. GEAR POS. IND. 0.24 INT M RUDDER TRIM 2.00 INT
M ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL 0.46 INT M AIRSPEED WARNING 0.25 INT
M LNDG. GEAR WARNING 0.25 INT M ““PY”” HEATER” 2.00 CONT
M STROBE LIGHTS 3 4.00 INT M STANDBY ATTITUDE GYRO 1.70 INT
M POSITION LIGHTS 2 2.50 CONT M STEC AUTOPILOT 0.90 INT
M LANDING LIGHTS 8.90 INT
M TAXI LIGHTS 3.50 INT AVI GMA-340 AUDIO PANEL 0.50 CONT
M ALTERNATOR FIELD 1.50 CONT AVI GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS 1 1.50 CONT
M INSTRUMENT LIGHTS 0.96 CONT AVI GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS 2 1.50 CONT
M CABIN/COURTESY LIGHTS 4 3.00 CONT AVI GTX-320 TRANSPONDER 0.50 CONT
M CABIN SIDE PNL. LIGHTING 2.00 INT
M MAP LIGHTS 1.50 INT
M ICE LIGHT 1.55 INT AVI RDR-2000 RADAR 2.00 CONT
M VENT DEFOG BLOWER 7.00 INT AVI RCR-650A ADF 1.00 CONT
M STALL HEAT 9.60 INT AVI DME-450 DME 1.20 CONT
NE PITOT HEAT 2 6.40 CONT AVI WX-1000 STORMSCOPE 1.00 CONT
NE CABIN BLOWERS 2 12.00 CONT AVI KRA-10A RADAR ALTIMETER 0.20 CONT
NE A/C EVAP. BLOWER 16.50 INT
NE A/C CLUTCH 2.00 INT AVI EFIS 2 1.80 CONT
NE CABIN DUMP SOLENOID 0.29 INT AVI ADAHRS 2 0.60 CONT
Notes: “Bus” Abbreviations: AVI = Avionics, M = Main, NE = Non-Essential, TIE = Tie

“# Units” default value is one.
“Duty Cycle” = Intermittent or Continuous.
Annunciator Control bulbs (.04 EA.) are normally OFF.
Windshield Heat Relays and High and Lo are each 50% duty cycle.
Prop Feather engages at engine shutdown.
Rudder Trim is 20% duty cycle.
S-TEC Autopilot draws 0.68 for 50% and 0.90 for 50% when in cruise; and 0.68 during takeoff and landing.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 24-50-00 2K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2K21 24-50-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 2K22 THRU 2L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 24-50-00 2K22
CARD 3 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

3A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
3A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 3A9
Effectivity 2 3A10
Pagination 2 3A10
Indexing 3 3A11
INDEX
Index 1 3B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
3B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 3B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
3B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 3B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
3B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 3B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
3B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 3B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
3B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
25
EQUIPMENT /
FURNISHINGS
3C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
25-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
25-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
25-50-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
25-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 25-10-00 1 3C7

Pilot’s / Copilot’s Vertically Adjustable Seat
Removal 1 3C7
Installation 1 3C7
Disassembly 1 2J7
Assembly 1 3C7
Rigging 3 3C9
Lumbar Support 3 3C9
Carpets 4 3C10
Restraint System 4 3C10
Inertial Reel Adjustment 4 3C10
Inspection 4 3C10
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 25-20-00 1 3C13

Aft-Facing Passenger Seats 1 3C13
Removal 1 3C13
Installation 1 3C13
Gas Spring Support 1 3C13
Removal 1 3C13
Installation 1 3C13
Forward-Facing Passenger Bench Seat 1 3C13
Removal 1 3C13
Installation 2 3C14
Pyramid Cabinets 2 3C14
Entertainment Cabinet 2 3C14
Conference Table 4 3C16
CARGO COMPARTMENTS 25-50-00 1 3C19

Aft Baggage Net 1 3C19
EMERGENCY 25-60-00 1 3C21

Artex 110 Emergency Locator Transmitter 1 3C21
General Description 1 3C21
Battery Removal and Installation 1 3C21
Emergency Locator Transmitter Testing 3 3C23
3C5 25 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
1. Pilot's / Copilot's Vertically Adjustable Seat

A. Removal
(1) Remove front stops from seat tracks.
(2) Lift lever underneath front lip of seat.
(3) Slide seat off of tracks.
B. Installation
CAUTION: WITH SEAT OCCUPIED AND AT LOWEST VERTICAL POSITION, CHECK SEAT
FOR PROPER ENGAGEMENT OF PINS TO SEAT TRACK.
(1) Lift lever under front lip of seat and slide seat onto tracks.
(2) Install front stops on seat tracks.
C. Disassembly
(1) To remove the armrest from the seat back:
(a) Remove seat back.
(b) Remove stop screw and spring retaining screw.
(c) Slide armrest assembly and pivot bar from seat back.
(2) To remove the seat back assembly from the seat assembly:
(a) Remove nuts, bolts and washers from upper part of seat back support.
(b) Remove seat back.
(3) To remove seat track plunger cable:
(a) Remove cotter pin, washer and pin that secures cable yoke to track plunger actuating
lever.
(b) Remove the clamps which secure the upper portion of the cable sheath to the bottom of
the seat frame.
(c) Remove the cotter pin, washer and pin that secure the remaining end of the cable to the
plunger actuating arm.
(d) Remove the two clamps which secure the cable sheath end to the mount on the lower
seat frame cross member.
(4) To remove the gas spring cylinder from the seat:
(a) Remove the two bolts and washers that secure the upper end of the gas spring cylinder to
the adapter on the seat frame.
(b) Remove the nut, bolt and washer that secures the lower end of the gas spring cylinder to
the rear seat tube assembly.
D. Assembly
(1) To install the gas spring cylinder in the seat:
(a) Attach the lower end of the gas spring cylinder to the rear seat tube assembly with nut,
bolt and washer.
(b) Attach the upper end of the gas spring cylinder to the adapter on the seat frame with two
bolts and washers.
3C7 25-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89976 AD
Bend end of
spring as shown.
Put free end inside
coils of spring.
VIEW A
Track Plunger
Actuating Lever
Cotter Pin, .50± .00

.05
Washer and
Pin Yoke Cable Yoke
Plunger
Actuating
Arm
Pilot’s / Copilot’s Vertically Adjustable Seats

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 25-10-00 3C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) To install the seat track plunger cable:

(a) Attach the cable sheath end to the mount on the lower seat frame cross member with the
two clamps. Ensure that the cable end protrudes .03 (+.00/-.05) inch from the end of the
forward clamp. (See View B of Figure 1.)
(b) Attach the lower end of the cable to the plunger actuating arm with the pin, washer and
cotter pin.
(c) Attach the upper end of the cable sheath to the bottom of the seat frame with the clamp.
Ensure that the cable end protrudes .50 (+.00/-.05) inch from the clamp. (See View A of
Figure 1.)
(d) Attach the cable yoke to the track plunger actuating lever with the pin, washer and cotter
pin.
(3) To install the seat back assembly:
(a) Position seat back in place.
(b) Secure seat back with bolts, nuts and washers inserted in upper part of hinge.
(4) To attach the armrest to the seat back:
(a) Slide armrest and pivot bar assembly into seat back.
(b) Place bushing into pivot bar.
(c) Attach spring to armrest pivot bar.
E. Rigging
After installation of the seat track plunger cable verify that when the handle assembly is in the
normal (Hands off) position the seat plunger should be full down and locked into the seat track.
2. Lumbar Support (Refer to Figure 2.)
A. Description
The pilot and co-pilot seats incorporate a Lumbar support feature. The installation consists of an
inflatable bladder attached to the seat back filler and a inflation bulb located under and on the
inboard side of each pilot and co-pilot seat.
B. To remove the Lumbar bladder for repair or replacement:
(1) Remove seat from airplane.
(2) Loosen velcro securing seat back filler cover.
(3) Remove only enough of seat back filer cover to expose lumbar bladder.
NOTE: Inflation tube may be removed before or after bladder is removed from seat back filler.
Tube is not glued to nipple attachment; it can be removed by carefully pulling on tube.
(4) Remove inflation tube from bladder.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A CHEMICAL SOLVENT TO REMOVE BLADDER. SOLVENT MAY
DAMAGE SEAT BACK FILLER
CAUTION: TO AVOID OR MINIMIZE DAMAGE TO SEAT BACK FILLER DURING
REMOVAL, USE ONE HAND TO RETAIN SEAT BACK FILLER IN PLACE,
WHILE GENTLY REMOVING BLADDER WITH OTHER HAND.
(5) Starting at either right or left edge of bladder, carefully and slowly pull bladder and pad
assembly from seat back filler.
3C9 25-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. To assemble pad and bladder:

(1) Apply a layer of 3M Scotch Grip 10 (2210) or Delta Labotoratories Contact Adhesive B-10161
cement to smooth side of bladder pad.
cement to back side of bladder (side away from inflation tube nipple).
(3) Attach bladder pad to bladder.
NOTE: While cement does not set immediately, there is no need to wait before attaching
bladder and pad to seat back filler.
D. To install Lumbar bladder

cement to rough side of bladder pad.
cement to seat back filler where bladder is to be located.
(3) Attach bladder and pad assembly to seat back filler. Depending on temperature and humidity,
allow 0:30 minutes to 1:00 hour for cement to set.
(4) Install seat back filler cover and secure velcro fastenings.
(5) Install seat in airplane.
3. Carpets
The carpets are individually fastened to the floor with Velcro fasteners and adhesive (Hysol EA9309 NA).
4. Restraint System
An integrated shoulder harness / lap belt restraint system is installed.
A. Inertial Reel Adjustment
(1) Allow harness to wind up on reel as much as possible.
(2) On end of reel, pry off plastic cover over spring. Make sure spring does not come out of plastic
cover. Set aside plastic cover.
(3) Unwind the harness completely. Measure and mark the harness 24 inches from the reel center.
(4) Wind harness onto reel until the 24 inch mark is reached. Hold reel and place cap with spring
over reel shaft end.
(5) Align slot in shaft with spring tang. Wind spring 6 1/2 turns and snap plastic cover into holes in
reel end shaft.
(6) Release harness and allow harness to wind up. Extend harness several times to check reel for
smooth operation.
(7) Hold inertia reel with reel completely wound and inertia mechanism end up. Pry off plastic
cover over mechanism and set reel aside.
(8) Install nut in plastic cover so that stud in cover is flush with nut surface. Position cover over reel
and snap cover into place. Extend harness several times to ensure reel operates smoothly.
B. Inspection
(1) Inspect ends and attachment points for condition and security.
(2) Inspect harness web material for condition and wear over its entire length. Particularly look for
wear and fraying where harness web passes in and out of inertial reel and in and out of the
adjusting buckle. If excessively worn, replace.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 25-10-00 3C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLADDER
PAD
BLADDER
INFLATION AIR
INLET AND VENT
BLADDER
BLADDER
AND PAD
AIR
TUBE
SEAT BACK
FILLER
BLADDER
INFLATION &
DEFLATION
CONTROLS
Lumbar Seat Bladder Installation

Figure 2
3C11 25-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 25-10-00 3C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Aft-Facing Passenger Seats (See figure 1)

A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the upper end of the gas spring support from the bracket on the outboard side of
the seat back.
(2) Remove the bolts and washers that secure the seat pedestal to the floor.
(3) Remove the seat.
B. Installation
(1) Position seat on floor.
(2) Secure seat pedestal to floor with bolts and washers.
(3) Connect the upper end of the gas spring support to the bracket on the outboard side of the
seat back.
C. Gas Spring Support
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISASSEMBLE THE GAS SPRING.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the upper end of the gas spring support from the bracket on the outboard side
of the seat back.
(b) Disconnect the lower end of the gas spring support from its lower bracket by removing the
cotter pins, washers (if any) and pins from the gas spring support’s attach stop.
(c) Remove the gas spring support.
(2) Installation
(a) Place the gas spring support in position.
(b) Connect the lower end of the gas spring to its lower bracket with the washers (if any), pins
and cotter pins.
(c) Connect the upper end of the gas spring to its upper support (on the outboard side of the
seat back) with the bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin.
2. Forward-Facing Passenger Bench Seat
A. Removal
(1) Remove the seat bottom filler assembly from the seat bottom pan assembly to gain access into
the interior of the pan.
(2) Disconnect the cable from the forward end of the seat back actuator and remove the seat back
actuator from the channel as follows:
(a) Remove the forward bolt from the channel and remove the seat back release cover from
the channel.
(b) Remove the two cotter pins from the retaining pins in the stop assembly and remove the
retaining pins from the stop assembly.
(c) Remove the nut, bolt and washers from the aft end of the seat back actuator. Lift the
actuator from the channel.
(3) Remove the bolts that hold the channel, seat back supports and armrest supports to the
bottom of the seat pan. Lift the seat back with its supports from the seat assembly.
3C13 25-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) The armrest may be removed from the side of the pan assembly by removing the nuts, bolts
and washers that attach the armrest to the armrest support/side of the pan assembly.
(5) Remove the pan assembly from the floor.
B. Installation
(1) Position the pan assembly on the floor.
(2) Attach the armrest (if previously removed) to the side of the pan with the nuts, bolts and
washers.
(3) Secure the channel to the outboard side of the pan bottom/floor with the aft three bolts and
washers.
(4) Secure the armrest support and the seat back assembly support to the inboard side of the pan
bottom with the bolts and washers. Install the forward inboard bolt.
(5) Install the seat back actuator into the channel as follows:
(a) Position the seat back actuator into the channel.
(b) Slide the bolt into the aft holes in the channel, placing on the bolt (in order): washer (if
required), bushing, aft fitting of seat back actuator, roller, washer (if required) and nut.
(c) Insert a pin in each side of the stop assembly and secure them with cotter pins.
(d) Secure the seat back release cover to the forward portion of the channel with the nut and
bolt.
(e) Attach the cable assembly to the forward end of the seat back actuator.
(6) Attach the seat back/seat back support to the bottom of the pan assembly and aft portion of
channel.
(7) Reinstall the seat bottom filler assembly on the seat bottom pan assembly.
3. Pyramid Cabinets
In the six seat installation, two pyramid-shaped cabinets are located between the crew seats and the aft-
facing passenger seats. In the five seat installation, the left pyramid cabinet is replaced by the
entertainment cabinet.
In all cases, the pyramid cabinets are secured to the floor by four screws and washers.
4. Entertainment Cabinet
In the five seat installation, an entertainment cabinet takes the place of the left aft-facing seat and the left
pyramid cabinet. The entertainment cabinet removable base is secured to the aircraft floor with screws
(13) and the entertainment cabinet is then secured to its base with screws.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 25-20-00 3C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F.S.
152.00
REF
FWD
GAS SPRING
SUPPORT
SEAT PEDESTAL
Aft-Facing Passenger Seat(s)

Figure 1
3C15 25-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Conference Table
A. Description
The conference table is located between the center and aft passenger seats on the right side panel
just below window level opposite the cabin door. The table assembly is secured by 3 screws and
washers.
B. Spring Adjustment
This adjustment is to assure that the proper amount of tension is on the counter balance torsion
spring. Using a suitable force gauge, measure the lift force required to raise the table from its 2 inch
open position. the force should be 10 pounds ± 1 pound. If it is more than 11 pounds or less than 9
pounds Adjust the torsion spring to get the desired tension. Use a 7/64 tee handle allen wrench to
make adjustments.
CAUTION: IF THE PROCEDURE IS REPEATED TOO MANY TIMES, THE TORSION SPRING
WILL FAIL TO COUNTER-BALANCE THE TABLE. IF THE TABLE IS ALLOWED TO
SELF-STOW FROM ITS “EXTENDED” POSITION, THIS CAN LEAD TO DAMAGE TO
THE HANDLE, BECAUSE THE HANDLE WILL HIT THE STOP PINS HEAVILY AS
THE TABLE FREE-FALLS.
(1) Increase tension
(a) Raise the table (located on the right side of the aircraft cabin between the passenger
seats) until the torsion spring on the table slide is visible near the top of the interior panel.
(b) Locate the spring retaining collar at the aft end of the torsion spring. See Figure 2.
(c) Move the table up or down just sufficiently to expose the set screw on the collar.
(d) Hold the table in position and use the allen wrench to loosen the set screw on the collar
while maintaining enough pressure on the wrench to prevent the collar from rotating.
(e) While maintaining pressure on the set screw, lower the table to the point where the allen
wrench can still be rotated to tighten the set screw (about 4 inches).
(f) Tighten the set screw, withdraw the allen wrench and raise the table until the torsion
spring is again visible.
(g) Repeat Steps (d) through (f) again (one time).
(h) Ensure that the set screw is tightened properly. Check the lift force of the table. The
required lift force from the 2 inch open position is 10 pounds ± 1 pound. When the proper
lift force is obtained.
(2) Decrease tension.
(a) Locate set screw and collar (see Figure 2). Lower table approximately 2 inches and
loosen the set screw on the collar while maintaining enough pressure on the wrench to
prevent the collar from rotating.
(b) Raise the table until the torsion spring is visible, then tighten the set screw.
(c) Repeat Step (a) and (b) as necessary to achieve required lift force of 10 pounds ± 1
pound.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 25-20-00 3C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORSION SPRING
SPRING RETAINING
COLLAR
Conference Table Torsion Spring

Figure 2
3C17 25-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 25-20-00 3C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CARGO COMPARTMENTS
Aft Baggage Net

The lower edge of the aft baggage net is secured to the F.S. 233.87 frame by four screws. The upper
edge of the baggage net is secured to two stud assemblies (one on either side of the interior). The studs
are located slightly aft of the shoulder harness inertia reel for the aft seat.
In the stowed position, the net may be rolled and left on the baggage floor at the base of the aft seat
backs.
A golf bag net is optional. The bench seat back(s) can be folded down and the golf bag(s) stowed on the
seat back(s), secured by the net.
3C19 25-50-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 25-50-00 3C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY
Artex 110 Emergency Locator Transmitter

A. General Description
The Artex ELT-110 transmits on 121.5 mHz and 243.0 mHz, and is designed to meet or exceed the
requirements of TSO C91a and FAR Part 91. Electrical power for the ELT transmissions is totally
supplied by its own self-contained battery. The battery must be replaced if the transmitter has been
used in an emergency situation or if accumulated test time exceeds one hour, or no later than the
replacement date marked on the transmitter label, whichever comes first.
The Artex 110 cannot be accidentally activated by dropping the unit, handling it roughly, or during
shipping. However, when properly mounted, and locked into its mounting tray, the ELT will activate
in a crash, regardless of the cockpit remote switch and ELT switch position. The normal position of
the ELT switch is in the down or OFF position. The normal position of the remote cockpit switch is in
down or ARM position
Whenever the ELT is activated, a red light located just above the remote cockpit switch will blink to
alert the pilot or maintenance personnel. Should the ELT be activated accidentally, it must be reset.
To reset:
(1) Position the remote cockpit switch to ON, then immediately reposition it to ARM, or;
(2) Position the switch on the ELT to ON, then immediately reposition it to OFF.
B. Battery Removal and Installation (Refer to Figure 1)
(1) Disconnect and remove positive cable from battery.
(2) Remove ELT from the airplane by:
(a) Loosening the two screws on the front of the mounting tray and pull mounting tray cap off.
(b) Disconnecting coax (antenna) cable.
(c) Disconnecting the Molex cable from the ELT unit.
(d) Remove unit from airplane.
(3) Remove the four screws on the bottom of the ELT securing the battery pack.
(4) Disconnect battery pack connector from main unit.
(5) Remove battery pack from unit.
(6) Securely plug in new battery pack connector to main unit.
(7) Immediately reset unit by positioning unit switch to ON, then to OFF.
(8) Fit new battery pack into place. Ensure all gaskets are properly aligned.
(9) Replace the four screws. Dress wires away from standoffs to avoid pinching wires between
standoffs and the battery pack.
(10) Install unit into mounting tray:
(a) Connect molex and coax cables to ELT unit.
(b) Install mounting tray cap and secure to front of mounting tray with the two screws.
(11) Install positive cable to battery.
(12) Test transmitter.
3C21 25-60-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOLEX
CONNECTOR
3 6 9 12
2 5 8 11
S IDE VIEW 1 4 7 10
ON
MOUNTING BATTERY
OFF
HOLE S COVER
S CREW S
FRONT
VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW END

CAP
Artex 110 ELT.

Figure 1
AFT
PRESSURE COCKPIT
BULKHEAD PANEL
ARTEX
ELT 110-4 SWITCH
P203 P401 P301 J501
WH WH
LIGHT 1 1 1 8
WH/BLU WH/BLU
RESET 1 3 3 3 5
WH/ORG WH/ORG
RESET 2 6 6 6 2
WH/GRN WH/GRN
EXTERNAL ON 7 7 7 7
WH/RED WH/RED
20B GROUND 11 2 2 6
G-SWITCH LOOP 5 22
G-SWITCH LOOP 8
1A TO ELT
+28 VDC 3 20R SW
PWR
GROUND 9 20B
Artex ELT 110 Wiring Schematic

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 25-60-00 3C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Emergency Locator Transmitter Testing

The transmitter operates on the emergency frequencies of 121.5 and 243.0 MHz; both of these
frequencies are monitored by the various FAA installations. Before performing any operational test
of the ELT, the following precautions should be observed:
CAUTION: TESTING OF AN ELT SHOULD BE CONDUCTED IN A SCREEN ROOM OR METAL
ENCLOSURE TO ENSURE THAT ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY IS NOT
RADIATED DURING TESTING. IF A SHIELDED ENCLOSURE IS NOT AVAILABLE,
TESTING MAY BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURES:
(1) Test should be no longer than three audio sweeps.
(2) Test should be conducted only within the time period made up of the first five minutes after any
hour.
(3) If the operational tests must be made at a time not included within the first five minutes after
the hour, the test should be coordinated with the closest FAA Tower or Flight Service Station.
CAUTION: CONSULT FAA ADVISORY CIRCULAR AC 20-81 FOR DETAILED
INFORMATION CONCERNING UNSHIELDED TESTING.
(4) Turn the airplane master switch ON.
(5) Tune airplane communications receiver to 121.5 mHz. Check that aircraft battery and radio
master switches are ON.
(6) Position ELT cockpit switch to ON. The ELT should immediately begin signaling and the panel
light should immediately come ON. Although the light may illuminate after a few seconds,
failure of the light to immediately come ON indicates trouble with the G-Switch circuit, pins 5
and 8 on tray connector, and that the unit is not working properly. Repairs should be done only
by a licensed aviation radio repair shop.
3C23 25-60-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 25-60-00 3C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
26
FIRE PROTECTION
3D1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 26
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
26-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
26-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 26 - FIRE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DETECTING 26-10-00 1 3D7

Description and Operation 1 3D7
Troubleshooting 3 3D9
Engine Fire Cables 3 3D9
Removal 3 3D9
Installation 4 3D10
Fuel Manifold/Fuel Nozzle Assembly Bolts 4 3D10
Fire Detection Computer 4 3D10
Removal 4 3D10
Installation 4 3D10
EXTINGUISHING 26-20-00 1 3D13

Incendex Portable Fire Extinguisher 1 3D13

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DETECTION
An engine fire/overheat detection system is provided. In the event of an engine compartment

fire/overheat situation, a heat-sensitive engine fire cable (Figure 1) will begin to pass an electrical
current. This current prompts the fire detection computer to activate the ENGINE FIRE warning light on
the annunciator. The exact temperature at which an electrical current is passed through the cable and
the warning light is activated varies based on the length of cable exposed to the heat source.
1. Description and Operation
The engine fire/overheat detection system consists of two engine fire cable assemblies (Left and Right)
running through the engine compartment, softwire cables to connect the engine fire cables to the aircraft
harness, a fire detection computer mounted in the right side fuselage wall between FS 139.80 and FS
146.47, a switch in the overhead switch panel, and a 3 amp circuit breaker in the pilot’s circuit breaker
panel.
The engine fire cable is heat sensitive. At normal operating temperatures it exhibits high electrical
resistance. If an engine fire/overheat event occurs, the electrical resistance of the engine fire cable drops
as the temperature rises and an electrical current is passed which causes the fire detection computer to
activate the ENGINE FIRE warning light in the annunciator panel. The system automatically resets itself
when the fire/overheat condition is removed.
To test the system, press the FIRE DET TEST switch in the overhead switch panel until the ENGINE
FIRE warning light illuminates in the annunciator panel. Release test switch to reset system.
LEFT
FWD
102615 E
ENGINE FIRE CABLE
SOFTWIRE
SOFTWIRE
DISCONNECTS
LEFT & RIGHT

ENGINE FIRE CABLES
CONNECTOR
RIGHT LEFT
ENGINE FIRE CABLES
Engine Fire Detection System

3D7 26-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEFT
ENGINE FIRE CABLE
FWD
ENGINE FIRE CABLE

DISCONNECTS
RIGHT
ENGINE FIRE CABLE
SOFTWIRE
RIGHT FIRE
ENGINE FIRE CABLE DETECTION
COMPUTER
(IN CABIN)
LEFT & RIGHT
ENGINE FIRE CABLES
CONNECTOR
LEFT WIRING
ENGINE HARNESS
FIRE CABLE
D
FW
102615 D
LEFT
ENGINE FIRE CABLE

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 26-10-00 3D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Troubleshooting
Pending.
3. Engine Fire Cable(s) (See Figure 1)
A. Removal
(1) Open both gull-wing access doors and remove the forward upper engine cowling
(See 71-10-00, Engine Cowling - Removal).
(2) Disconnect the engine fire cable connector(s) to the softwire at the left rear of the intake
plenum and disconnect the left and right engine fire cables from each other at the connector at
the right front of the intake plenum.
(3) Remove the retaining screw and release the engine fire cable(s) from each retaining clip/clamp
(See Views A and B).
(4) Remove the engine fire cable(s).
MOUNTING SCREW / BOLT MS21919WH4 "P" - CLAMP
GROMMET
RETAINING SCREW
VIEW A VIEW B
ENGINE FIRE CABLE RETAINING CLIPS

3D9 26-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Thread the engine fire cable(s) around the engine along the path(s) defined by the retaining
clips/clamps and as shown in Figure 1.
NOTE: Engine fire cable minimum bend radius is 1.00 inch. Also, do not bend cable assembly
within one inch of a connector.
NOTE: Ensure that engine fire cable is routed to clear moving parts by a minimum of 1.00
inch and static parts by a minimum of 0.25 inch.
(2) At each retaining clip/clamp, capture the engine fire cable and grommet in the clip/clamp and
reinstall and tighten the retaining screw (See Views A and B).
NOTE: When successive clip/clamp attachment points are located with one on the engine
and one on the structure, ensure sufficient slack (i.e. - approx four inches) is left
between the two points to allow for vibration.
(3) Connect the engine fire cable connector(s) to the softwire at the left rear of the intake plenum
and connect the left and right engine fire cables to each other with the connector at the right
front of the intake plenum.
NOTE: Use spiral sleeving as required to protect the softwire assemblies.
(4) Install the forward upper engine cowling and close both gull-wing access doors (See 71-10-00,
Engine Cowling - Installation).
4. Fuel Manifold/Fuel Nozzle Assembly Bolts
CAUTION: ENSURE FUEL MANIFOLD/FUEL NOZZLE BOLTS ARE SAFETY WIRED.
Where the engine fire cable passes around the combustion chamber, the retaining clips are mounted to
the forward fuel manifold/fuel nozzle assembly bolt (see C, Figure 1). If these bolts are removed to
remove the retaining clip, ensure that the bolt is safety wired when the retaining clip is reinstalled.
5. Fire Detection Computer
The fire detection computer is mounted in the right side fuselage wall between FS 139.80 and FS 146.47
(i.e. - just aft of the co-pilot’s circuit breaker panel).
A. Removal
(1) Gain access to the fire detection computer by removing the interior panel.
(2) Disconnect the computer from the wiring harness at the pin connector.
(3) Remove four (4) screws and washers and remove computer.
B. Installation
(1) Place computer in position between FS 139.80 and FS 146.47. Reinstall four (4) screws and
washers. Tighten screws.
(2) Connect the computer to the wiring harness at the pin connector.
(3) Reinstall and secure the interior panel.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 26-10-00 3D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3D11 26-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 26-10-00 3D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTINGUISHING
WARNING: AFTER DISCHARGE OF EXTINGUISHER AVOID EXPOSURE TO SMOKE, VAPORS AND

OTHER BY-PRODUCTS OF FIRE. DO NOT INCINERATE EXTINGUISHER.
CAUTION: EXTINGUISHER IS A PRESSURE VESSEL. PROTECT FROM CORROSIVE
CONDITIONS. IF THERE IS ANY CORROSION OR DAMAGE, EXTINGUISHER SHOULD
BE CAREFULLY EMPTIED AND DISCARDED. USE ONLY AS DIRECTED.
Incendex Portable Fire Extinguisher
The Incendex Class 2B:C fire extinguisher unit (Model No. A600), contains 20 ounces of Halon
1211/1301. The extinguisher is located in the bottom drawer of the right side pyramid cabinet. It is
secured by a quick release bracket.
To operate the extinguisher, remove it from the quick - release bracket, hold it upright in either hand by
the handgrip, with the spray nozzle pointing forward. Remove the safety pin, direct the nozzle towards
the base of the fire source, squeeze the lever with the palm of the hand. Maximum extinguishing effect is
obtained if the fire fighter uses side to side motion and keeps moving in towards the base of the fire
source as it is extinguished. Releasing the lever closes a secondary seal inside the operating head. This
interrupts the flow of extinguishant, thus retaining part of the charge, for dealing with a flash back or re-
ignition should they occur, without waste or leakage. Ejection of the indicator disc provides a visual
indication of partial or total discharge. A partly or totally discharged extinguisher assembly should be
replaced immediately after use.
The extinguisher shall be inspected monthly unless otherwise specified. The nozzle shall be examined to
ascertain that it is unobstructed. The tamper tag or tamper indicator shall be intact. Verify that there is no
obvious physical damage or condition to prevent operation. The extinguisher shall be pressurized as
indicated and the weight shall be within the tolerance on the label. Return to manufacturer if gross weight
is below the minimum stated on the extinguisher nameplate.
3D13 26-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 26-20-00 3D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
27
FLIGHT CONTROLS
3D15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27
CHAPTER CHAPTER
27-List of 1 Apr 15/07 27-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
27-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
27-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 18 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 27-50-00 1 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
27-20-00 1 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27 - FLIGHT CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 27-00-00 1 3D21

Standard Practices and Procedures 1 3D21
Control Cable Inspection 4 3D24
Special Tools 8 3E4
Fin Type Control Cable Air Seals 8 3E4
Drawing Cables Through 8 3E4
Removal 8 3E4
Installation 8 3E4
AILERON AND TAB 27-10-00 1 3E7

Control Wheel 1 3E7
Removal 1 3E7
Installation 1 3E7
Control Column 1 3E7
Removal 1 3E7
Installation 5 3E11
Aileron Control Cables 6 3E12
Removal 6 3E12
Installation 7 3E13
Aileron Control Rigging and Adjustment 8 3E14
Aileron Tab 9 3E15
Aileron - Rudder Interconnect 9 3E15
RUDDER AND TAB 27-20-00 1 3E19

Troubleshooting Rudder Control System 1 3E19
Rudder Pedal Assembly 2 3E20
Rudder Controls 2 3E20
Removal 2 3E20
Installation 2 3E20
Rigging 5 3E23
Rudder Trim Controls 8 3F2
Removal 8 3F2
Actuator Assembly 9 3F3
Installation 9 3F3
Rigging 9 3F3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27 - FLIGHT CONTROLS
ELEVATOR AND TAB 27-30-00 1 3F5

Troubleshooting Elevator Control System 1 3F5
Elevator Torque Tube Bearing Changes 2 3F6
Elevator Controls 2 3F6
Removal 2 3F6
Installation 3 3F7
Rigging 6 3F10
Elevator Trim Controls 6 3F10
Removal 6 3F10
Installation 7 3F11
Elevator Trim Actuator 8 3F12
Removal 8 3F12
Installation 8 3F12
Disassembly 8 3F12
Assembly 8 3F12
Elevator Trim Rod Corrosion Control 9 3F13
Elevator Trim Controls Rigging 9 3F13
Stall Warning System 11 3F15
Description and Operation 11 3F15
Lift Detector Assembly 11 3F15
Removal 11 3F15
Dual Warning Unit (Horn) 11 3F15
Removal 11 3F15
Stall Warning Functional Test 12 3F16
Stall Warning Flight Test Procedure 12 3F16
Force Applicator Kit Test 13 3F17
Lift Computer Test 15 3F19
Lift Transducer Test 16 3F20
FLAPS 27-50-00 1 3F23

Flap Drive System 1 3F23
Troubleshooting Flap Control System 1 3F23
Flap Controls 3 3G1
Removal 3 3G1
Installation 7 3G5
Flap Actuator-Motor 10 3G8
Removal 10 3G8
Installation 10 3G8
Flap System Rigging 11 3G9
Flap System Adjustment 12 3G10
Flap Bellcrank Distortion Inspection 12 3G10
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL

The airplane is controlled in flight by the use of three primary control surfaces, consisting of ailerons,
elevator and rudder. Operation of these controls is through movement of the dual control wheels and
rudder pedals. On the forward end of each control wheel is a quadrant assembly to which the aileron
control cables are fastened. Also connected to the control wheel push-pull tubes are interconnect arms
to the elevator torque tube located behind the instrument panel. Mounted on this torque tube are sectors
to which the elevator control cables are fastened; thus the forward and aft movement of the control
wheels in turn moves the torque tube and sectors thus transmitting movement thru the control cables to
the elevator.
The rudder controls are driven from dual rudder pedals through torque tubes which have dual sectors
connected and control cables from these sectors to the rudder sector located in the aircraft tail section.
Provisions for elevator and rudder trim are provided by adjustable trim mechanisms. The trim controls
and are in the pedestal located below the instrument panel. The elevator trim indicator is next to the trim
wheel, while the rudder trim indicator is part of the digital Volt/Amp/Rudder Trim indicator in the lower
center of the instrument panel. Elevator trim is through cables routed to the elevator trim screw located in
the tail cone which drives dual actuators to the trim tab. Rudder trim is electrically operated through the
use of a linear actuator mounted in the vertical fin driving push rods to the trim tab.
The ailerons and rudder are interconnected through a spring system which is activated only when
controls are out of harmony. In normal coordinated flight it is inactive.
2. Standard Practices and Procedures
Tips for the removal, installation and rigging of the various assemblies:
A. It is recommended, though not always necessary, to level and place the airplane on jacks during
rigging and adjustment.
B. Remove turnbuckle barrels from cable ends before withdrawing the cables through the structures.
C. Tie a cord to the cable end before withdrawing the cable through the structures to facilitate
installation of cable.
D. When referring to marking cable end, etc., before disconnecting, use a felt tip marking pen.
E. Assemble and adjust the turnbuckles so that each terminal is screwed an approximately equal
distance into the barrel. Do not turn the terminals in such a manner that will put a permanent “twist”
into the cables.
F. Cable tensions should be taken with the appropriate control surface in its neutral position.
G. Check all cable ball ends for proper seating in retainers after setting cable tension.
H. After completion of each adjustment, check the turnbuckles to be sure not more than three terminal
threads are visible outside the barrel. Install the locking clips, and check for proper installation by
trying to remove the clips using fingers only. Both locking clips may be installed in opposite holes.
Locking clips which have been installed and removed must be scrapped and not reused.
Turnbuckles may be safetied in accordance with Advisory Circular 43.13-1A Chapter 4, Section 2.
I. When pushrods or rod ends are provided with an inspection hole, the screw must be screwed in far
enough to pass the inspection hole. This can be determined visually or by feel, inserting a piece of
wire into the inspection hole. If no hole is provided, there must be a minimum of .375 (3/8) of an
inch thread engagement.
J. When installing rod end jamnuts, refer to Figure 3 for proper installation method.
3D21 27-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J. After completion of adjustments, each jam nut must be tightened securely.
NOTE: Cable rigging tensions specified must be corrected to ambient temperature in the area
where the tension is being checked, using Chart 1. On new airplanes, it is suggested
that cables initially be tensioned 20 to 30 % over nominal tension, then loosened to
the “High Side” of the tolerance. This will aid in maintaining specified tension after
flight testing.
K. Torque all nuts in the flight control system (including nose wheel steering), refer to
Recommended Nut Torques Chart in Chapter 91.
L. Check all cable ball ends for proper seating in retainers after setting cable tension.
CHART 1
CABLE TENSION VS. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
120
110
100
90
Temperature, Degrees Fahrenheit (˚F)
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
-10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10
Subtract Add
Rigging Load Correction, Pounds
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 27-00-00 3D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Method of Blocking Trim Cables

Figure 1
Rod End Installation Method

Figure 2
3D23 27-00-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Control Cable Inspection

Aircraft control cable systems are subject to a variety of environmental conditions and forms of
deterioration that, with time, may be easy to recognize as wire/strand breakage or the not-so-readily
visible types of wear, corrosion, and/or distortion. The following data may help in detecting the presence
of these conditions:
A. Cable Damage
Critical areas for wire breakage are sections of the cable which pass through fairleads and around
pulleys. To inspect each section which passes over a pulley or through a fairlead, remove cable from
aircraft to the extent necessary to expose that particular section. Examine cables for broken wires
by passing a cloth along length of cable. This will clean the cable for a visual inspection, and detect
broken wires, if the cloth snags on cable. When snags are found, closely examine cable to
determine full extent of damage.
The absence of snags is not positive evidence that broken wires do not exist. Figure 3A shows a
cable with broken wires that were not detected by wiping, but were found during a visual inspection.
The damage became readily apparent (Figure 3B) when the cable was removed and bent using the
techniques depicted in Figure 3C.
B. External Wear Patterns
Wear will normally extend along cable equal to the distance cable moves at that location. Wear may
occur on one side of the cable only or on its entire circumference. Replace flexible and non-flexible
cables when individual wires in each strand appear to blend together (outer wires worn 40-50
percent) as depicted in Figure 4.
Control Cable Inspection

Figure 3
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 27-00-00 3D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
External Cable Patterns

Figure 4
C. Internal Cable Wear

As wear is taking place on the exterior surface of a cable, the same condition is taking place
internally, particularly in the sections of the cable which pass over pulleys and quadrants. This
condition, shown in Figure 5, is not easily detected unless the strands of the cable are separated.
Wear of this type is a result of the relative motion between inner wire surfaces. Under certain
conditions the rate of this type wear can be greater than that occurring on the surface.
D. Corrosion
Carefully examine any cable for corrosion that has a broken wire in a section not in contact with
wear producing airframe components such as pulleys, fairleads, etc. It may be necessary to remove
and bend the cable to properly inspect it for internal strand corrosion as this condition is usually not
evident on the outer surface of the cable. Replace cable segments if internal strand rust or
corrosion is found.
Areas especially conducive to cable corrosion are battery compartments, lavatories, wheel wells,
etc., where concentrations of corrosive fumes, vapors, and liquids can accumulate.
NOTE: Check all exposed sections of cable for corrosion after a cleaning and/or metal-brightening
operation has been accomplished in that area.
3E1 27-00-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Internal Cable Patterns

Figure 5
Pulley Wear Patterns

Figure 6
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 27-00-00 3E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Cable Maintenance
CAUTION: TO AVOID REMOVAL OF CORROSION-PREVENTATIVE COMPOUNDS AND
CABLE INTERNAL LUBRICANT, DO NOT USE VAPOR DEGREASING, STEAM
CLEANING, METHYLETHYLKETONE (MEK) OR OTHER SOLVENTS.
CAUTION: DO NOT OIL CONTROL CABLES.
Frequent inspections and preservation measures such as rust prevention treatments for bare cable
areas will help to extend cable service life. Where cables pass through fairleads, pressure seals, or
over pulleys, remove accumulated heavy coatings of corrosion prevention compound. Provide
corrosion protection for these cable sections by lubricating as specified in the Lubrication Chart,
12-20-00.
F. Cable Fittings
(1) 100 Hour Standard Inspection
Check swaged terminal reference marks for any indication of cable slippage within fitting.
Inspect fitting assembly for distortion and/or broken strands at the terminal. Check that all
bearings and swivel fittings (bolted or pinned) pivot freely to prevent binding and subsequent
failure. Check turnbuckles for proper thread exposure and broken or missing safety wires/clips.
Pay particular attention to corrosion and “pitting” on cable terminals, turnbuckles and cable
fittings. Any corrosion or pitting found requires replacement of the corroded fitting and/or cable.
(2) 100 Hour Special Inspection
For airplanes 15 years old or older, using a 10X magnifier, visually inspect the entire surface of
each cable terminal, turnbuckle, or other cable fitting for corrosion or cracking. Inspect under
safety wire or clips wrapped around the cable or fitting. Any evidence of corrosion or cracking,
however minute, is cause for replacement. A logbook entry documenting the replacement of a
cable terminal, turnbuckle, or other cable fitting relieves the inspection requirement for that
fitting only, until such time as that fitting has been in service for 15 years.
G. Pulleys
Inspect pulleys for roughness, sharp edges, and presence of foreign material embedded in the
grooves. Examine pulley bearings to assure proper lubrication, smooth rotation, freedom from flat
spots, dirt, and paint spray. Periodically rotate pulleys, which turn through a small arc, to provide a
new bearing surface for the cable. Maintain pulley alignment to prevent the cable from riding on
flanges and chafing against guards, covers, or adjacent structure. Check all pulley brackets and
guards for damage, alignment, and security.
H. Pulley Wear Patterns:
Various cable system malfunctions may be detected by analyzing pulley conditions. These include
such discrepancies as too much tension, misalignment, pulley bearing problems, and size
mismatches between cables and pulleys. Examples of these conditions are shown in Figure 6.
3E3 27-00-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Special Tools
These tools are used at the factory and are recommended where rigging, alignment, or installation
procedures specify “use a suitable tool.” They can be ordered through any Piper dealer.
Tool (Piper Tool Number) Piper P/N
Rudder Pedal Neutral Alignment Tool (TL 623161) 762-152
Elevator / Elevator Trim Travel Tool (HF 622548) 762-154
Nose Wheel Centering (i.e. - Neutral) Tool (HF 622722) 762-147
Aileron and Flap Travel Tool - Left Wing (CKJ 622719) 762-149
Aileron and Flap Travel Tool - Right Wing (CKJ 622720) 762-150
Rudder Travel Tool (TL 622721) 762-153
Control Wheel Neutral Tool (HF 622725) N/A
5. Fin-Type Control Cable Air Seals (See Figure 7.)
This airplane is equipped with ten fin type control
cable air seals. Six seals (one for each control
cable going to the empennage) are located on the CABLE
aft pressure bulkhead. Two seals are located in SEAL
RETAINING
each wing root for the aileron cables. GROOVE
A. Drawing Cables Through

It is not necessary to completely remove the
seal from the bulkhead in order to draw a
cable turnbuckle through the seal.
To draw a cable turnbuckle through the seal. RESTRAINING
RINGS
(1) Remove the three seal clips (per seal).
PRESSURIZED
(2) Grease the cable and turnbuckle with SIDE
MIL-G-21164 grease.
(3) Slowly pull the cable through the seal.
B. Removal
LOOKING DOWN
(1) Remove the three seal clips (per seal).
(2) Compress the seal and pull it from the Fin-Type Control Cable Air Seal
hole in the bulkhead. Figure 7
(3) Remove the seal from the cable.
C. Installation
(1) Fill the cable air seal with MIL-G-21164 grease.
(2) Apply MIL-G-21164 grease to the full travel of the cable section that passes through the seal
when the control is actuated.
(3) Apply a light coat of MIL-G-21164 on the external small end and tapered section of the seal for
ease of insertion.
(4) Place the seal on the cable, on the non-pressurized side of the bulkhead with the small end of
the seal pointing towards the bulkhead.
(5) Insert the seal in the bulkhead hole so that the bulkhead sheet is entirely within the seal
retaining groove.
(6) Install the proper retaining rings on the seal, two on the small end and one on the large end.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 27-00-00 3E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3E5 27-00-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 27-00-00 3E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON AND TAB
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
2. Control Wheel
The retainer clip (P/N 104687-002) and MS24693-S40 screws (2 ea.) are factory installed in
S/N’s 4697175 and up. S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697174 must individually procure and retrofit the retainer
clip and screws.
A. Removal
(1) Remove two (2) screws and retainer clip.
(2) Remove control wheel attachment screw and spacer.
(3) Slide control wheel off of tube.
(4) Disconnect control wheel switches wiring harness.
B. Installation
(1) Degrease aft end of tube and inside of control wheel using acetone or naptha. Allow to dry.
(2) Degrease control wheel attachment screw, the spacer, and the nutplate (inside the tube) using
acetone or naptha. Allow to dry.
(3) Prime inside of control wheel with Loctite 7649 (Piper P/N 279-073). Allow to dry.
(4) Connect control wheel switches wiring harness.
(5) Install control wheel onto tube using Loctite 271 (Piper P/N 279-128). Take care to ensure
screw hole in control wheel aligns with screw hole in tube.
NOTE: This step must be accomplished promptly due to short cure time.
(6) Prime threads of control wheel attachment screw with Loctite 7649 (Piper P/N 279-073). Allow
to dry.
(7) Install control wheel attachment screw (with spacer) into nutplate using Loctite 271 (Piper P/N
279-128).
NOTE: This step must be accomplished promptly due to short cure time.
(8) Position retainer clip to capture spacer and control wheel attachment screw. Secure with
screws (2), being careful not to over tighten the screws and damage the logo medallion.
3. Control Column (See Figure 2.)
A. Removal
(1) Control wheel:
Remove control wheel as described under Control Wheel, above.
(2) Control column assembly:
CAUTION: LOOSEN BALANCE CABLES BEFORE REMOVING CONTROL COLUMN, TO
PREVENT STRUCTURAL DAMAGE.
(a) Block the aileron primary cables at the pulleys mounted on the pressure bulkhead station
100.00 prior to loosening the balance cable between the control wheels.
(b) Loosen the clamps securing the protective tube over the control wheel balance cable
turnbuckle. Slide the tube to one side and loosen the turnbuckle to relieve tension on the
cables.
3E7 27-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Wheel Installation

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 27-10-00 3E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING - AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM

Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension.
control wheel and aileron.
Torque rollers loose or worn. Check torque rollers and
tighten or replace.
Broken pulley. Replace pulley.
Cables not in place on Install cables correctly.
pulleys. Check cable guards.
Resistance to control System not lubricated Lubricate system.
wheel rotation. properly.
Cable tension too high. Adjust cable tension.
Control column horizontal Adjust cable tension.
cable improperly adjusted.
Pulleys binding or rubbing. Replace binding pulleys
and/or provide clearance
between pulleys and
brackets.
Bent aileron and/or hinge. Repair or replace aileron
and/or hinge.
Cables crossed or routed Check routing of control
incorrectly. cables.
Control wheels not Incorrect control column Re-rig control column.
synchronized. rigging.
Control wheels not Incorrect rigging of Re-rig aileron system.
horizontal when ailerons aileron system.
are neutral.
Incorrect aileron travel. Aileron stops not adjusted Adjust stops.
properly.
Correct aileron travel Incorrect rigging of Re-rig controls.
cannot be obtained by aileron cables, and/or
adjusting stops. control wheel.
Control wheel stops Incorrect rigging between Re-rig controls.
before control surfaces control wheel and control
reach full travel. cables.
3E9 27-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Column Installation

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 27-10-00 3E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Remove the screws securing the cable retainers, both primary and balance, to the aileron
quadrant at the forward end of the control columns.
(d) Remove the nut and bolt securing the arms to the elevator torque tube behind the
instrument panel.
(e) Disconnect the control wheel switches electrical harness (if installed).
(f) Remove the bolt, washers, and nut securing the control column tube to the quadrant shaft
and separate the tube from the shaft. Make a note of washer buildup for reinstallation.
NOTE: The control column stop assy is fitted over the tube, secured by the same bolt,
and will be removed with the tube.
(g) The control column can now be removed by lifting the forward end and sliding the
assembly forward until the tube clears the instrument panel.
B. Installation (Refer to Figure 2.)
(1) Control column assembly:
NOTE: Check bearing on instrument panel for security. If found loose, use LOC-498-50 or
LOC-495-50 Super Bond adhesive to bond bearing to instrument panel.
(a) Place the control column assembly under and behind the instrument panel, keeping the
forward end raised until the aft end of the tube can be inserted into the bearing in the
instrument panel. Slide the assembly aft and lower the forward end to its installed
position.
(b) Ensuring the control column stop assembly is in place over the forward end of the control
column tube, slide the tube over the quadrant shaft. Secure the control column tube and
control column stop assembly to the quadrant shaft with bolt, washers, and nut.
(c) Attach the arms on the control column to the arm on the elevator torque tube. (The bolt
beads should point outboard.)
(d) Reconnect the control wheel switches electrical harness (if installed.)
(e) Attach the primary and control wheel balance cables to the aileron quadrant at the
forward end of the control column assembly. Safety the cable retainer screws with
MS20995-C32 safety wire.
NOTE: As of early 2006, the original MS35265-42 fillister head screw has been replaced
by a higher strength MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036) socket head screw. In earlier
airplanes, anytime the cable end retainer screws are removed, if the original
fillister head screws are still installed, they must be replaced with the socket head
screws upon reassembly. Additionally, when using the MS24674-8 (P/N 520-036)
socket head screws, torque to 12 to 15 in.-lbs.
(f) Remove the aileron primary cable blocks from the pulleys at F.S. 100.00.
(2) Control wheel:
Install control wheel as described under Control Wheel, above.
(3) Rig the aileron control system in accordance with instructions given in this chapter. Ensure that
turnbuckles are safetied with locking clips and that protective tube is installed over turnbuckle
on the control wheel balance cable.
(4) Check the system for proper operation and freedom from binding.
3E11 27-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Aileron Controls
Figure 3
4. Aileron Control Cables

A. Removal (Refer to Figure 3.)
(1) For removal of any control cables in the fuselage or wings, first determine which cables are to
be removed and then proceed with the appropriate set of instructions which follow.
(2) To remove either right or left primary control cables that are located in the fuselage, the
following procedures may be used.
(a) Remove access panels from the cabin floor at fuselage station 171.43. This will allow you
access to either turnbuckle.
(b) Separate the primary control cable at the turnbuckles.
(c) Remove the access panels from the cockpit floor and then remove pulley cable guards
from pulleys located in front of the pressure bulkhead.
(d) Disconnect the primary cables from the control column sectors.
(e) Draw the cables back through the floor.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 27-10-00 3E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) To remove the primary control cable in either wing, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the access panel from the cabin floor at fuselage station 171.43.
(b) Separate the primary cable at the turnbuckle within the fuselage and disconnect the
opposite end at the sector out in the wing located aft of the rear spar at wing station
175.498.
(c) Remove the cable guards at the pulleys located along the aft side of the wing rear spar.
(d) Remove the control cable from the fuselage by removing the retaining rings on the fin
type air seal and pulling the cable from the fuselage.
(4) Either balance cable may be removed by the following procedure:
(a) Remove the access panels from the cabin floor.
(b) Separate the balance cables at the turnbuckle located below the right side of the cabin
floor at station 171.43.
(c) Disconnect the balance cable from the sector in the wing located at wing station 175.498
along the aft side of the rear spar.
(d) Remove the cable guards at the pulleys along the wing rear spar.
(e) Remove the control cable from the fuselage by removing the retaining rings on the fin
type air seal and pulling the cable from the fuselage.
(1) The installation of either the right or left primary control cable, located in the fuselage may be
accomplished as follows:
(a) Draw the cable through the floor, and around the pulleys at the forward pressure
bulkhead.
(b) Connect the cable end to the quadrant assembly at the forward end of the control column
and secure the cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety
the cable end retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
(c) Ensure that the cable is properly placed around the pulley and install cable guards.
(d) Route cable around the pulley at fuselage station 171.43 and install cable guard.
(e) Connect cable turnbuckle to primary cable end from wing, and ensure proper rigging of
system.
(f) Install all access panels removed.
3E13 27-10-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) The primary control cable in either wing may be installed by the following procedure:
(a) Draw the central cable along the wing rear spar, ensuring proper routing around the
pulleys.
(b) Connect the end of the primary cable to the aileron sector at wing station 175.498 and
secure the cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the
cable end retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
(c) Install the fin type cable air seal on the cable and install the seal in the bulkhead.
(d) Route the cable through the fuselage.
(e) Connect the turnbuckle to the primary cable within the fuselage, and ensure proper
rigging of system.
(f) Install all access panels removed.
(3) Either balance cable may be installed by the following procedure:
(a) Connect the cable end to the sector in the wing at wing station 175.498.
(b) Route the cable along the rear spar ensuring its proper routing through the pulleys.
(c) Route the cable through the fuselage and then place the retainer rings on the seal. (Refer
to Figure 7, 27-00-00.)
(d) Connect the balance cable turnbuckle ends together and rig the ailerons as required.
Check complete system for operation, see Caution under Rigging and Adjustment.
(e) Install all access panels removed.
C. Aileron Controls Rigging and Adjustment
(1) Lock the control wheels together in the aileron neutral position using a suitable tool.
(2) Lock the ailerons in neutral position using a suitable contour fixture at the inboard ends of the
ailerons. Neutral position is defined by wing loft contour at this location.
(3) Adjust the aileron control cables to a tension of 30 + 5 pounds.
NOTE: Prior to adjusting aileron control cable tension, loosen the roll servo autopilot bridle
cable clamps to allow the clamps to slide freely on the aileron cable. After aileron
control cable tension is set, adjust roll servo autopilot bridle cable tension per Roll
Servo Installation, 22-10-00.
(4) Remove the locking fixtures. Aileron neutral position should be maintained at zero (0) +1,-0
degree with the control wheels in neutral.
(5) Use the pilot’s control wheel to move the ailerons and adjust the aileron travels at the primary
stops (at the aileron drive sectors on the wing spars) to give the ailerons their 18 ± 1 degree up
and down movement. Total freeplay measured at the aileron inboard trailing edge is not to
exceed .120 inch.
(6) Use the pilot’s control wheel to hold the ailerons firmly against the primary stops. Adjust the
secondary aileron stops (on the forward pressure bulkhead) to maintain a cushion (gap) of
0.09 ± 0.03 inch in each direction.
(7) Check system for proper operation.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 27-10-00 3E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
38 o
22 o
TRIM TAB
Aileron trim tab Adjustment Limits.

Figure 4
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF AILERONS. WHILE IT WOULD

SEEM SELF-EVIDENT, FIELD EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT THIS CHECK
IS FREQUENTLY MISINTERPRETED OR NOT PERFORMED AT ALL.
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF AILERON RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE RIGHT AILERON MOVES UP AND THE
LEFT AILERON MOVES DOWN WHEN THE CONTROL WHEEL IS TURNED
RIGHT; AND THAT THE LEFT AILERON MOVES UP AND THE RIGHT AILERON
MOVES DOWN WHEN THE CONTROL WHEEL IS TURNED LEFT.
5. Aileron Tab (PIR-PPS50056-4, Rev. M.)
A fixed trim tab is located on the trailing edge of the right aileron. The tab is ground adjustable only.
Adjust tab as needed within limits shown in figure 4.
6. Aileron - Rudder Interconnect
The aileron - rudder interconnect installation is located underneath the floor between the frames at
F.S. 131.84 and F.S. 139.80. The aileron - rudder interconnect is bolted to the left aileron cable. The
aileron - rudder interconnect guide is bolted to the left rudder cable.(See figure 5)
The aileron-rudder interconnect is rigged and adjusted as follows:
NOTE: All aileron and rudder rigging must be completed prior to rigging the aileron - rudder
interconnect.
A. Gain access to the aileron - rudder interconnect.
B. Lock the aileron and rudder systems in neutral. With the control wheels and rudder pedals neutral,
the rudder is 0° (i.e. - streamlined).
C. Ensure that the aft cable clamp on the left rudder cable is positioned 3.3 to 3.6 inches from the aft
face of the F.S. 139.80 fuselage frame.
D. Ensure that the aft cable clamp on the left aileron cable is positioned 2.00 inches from the aft face
of the F.S. 139.80 fuselage frame.
E. Ensure that the forward side of the forward arm of the aileron - rudder interconnect is positioned
1.60 inches (See Note, below) from the aft face of the F.S. 131.84 fuselage frame.
3E15 27-10-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Ensure that the forward side of the guide (on the left rudder cable) is positioned 3.40 inches (See
Note, below) from the aft side of the F.S. 131.84 fuselage frame.
NOTE: Some early production airplanes were factory reworked to be rigged at 1.67 and 3.47
inches, respectively.
* Inrequired
any event, these dimensions are starting points. Rig the interconnect fore or aft as
to ensure that no component interferes with either the frame at F.S. 131.84 or the
frame at F.S. 139.80. Slight contact between the interconnect and the forward phenolic
cable guide is permissible, if it does not cause the F.S. 131.84 frame to deflect. If the F.S.
131.84 frame deflects, re-rig the interconnect aft to eliminate interference.
Fore and aft adjustments of the two interconnect components must be made in the same
direction and distance for each component. For example, if one component is adjusted aft
by .10 inch, then the other component must be adjusted aft by .10 inch.
Metal-to-metal contact between any interconnect component and either frame is not
permissible. Additionally, there must be measurable clearance between the interconnect
and the F.S. 139.80 frame.
CAUTION: AFTER RIGGING THE INTERCONNECT, DEMONSTRATE THAT BOTH THE
AILERONS AND THE RUDDER CAN OBTAIN FULL TRAVEL AND BE DEFLECTED
TO THEIR RESPECTIVE STOPS WITHOUT INTERFERING WITH EITHER FRAME
F.S. 131.84 OR FRAME F.S. 139.80. WHEN DEMONSTRATING THIS, MOVE BOTH
THE AILERON AND RUDDER IN THE SAME DIRECTION TO THEIR RESPECTIVE
STOPS AND THEN HOLD FIRMLY IN POSITION WHILE THE FRAMES ARE
INSPECTED FOR INTERFERENCE WITH THE INTERCONNECT.
G. After adjustment, verify smooth free operation by watching the aileron - rudder interconnect while
an assistant cycles the yoke and pedals through full control movement.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 27-10-00 3E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
83305 H
* See Note in Text
STA STA
131.84 139.80
See Note Below.
*
3.4
LEFT RUDDER
CABLE
Arm 3.3 - 3.6
LBL
1.602
CABLE GUIDE
2.0
1.60 * GUIDE
LBL
4.732
CONTROL CABLE AFT FACE OF FUSELAGE

SLEEVE CLAMPS LEFT AILERON CABLE LOWER FRAME
(4 REQUIRED)
NOTE; In early production airplanes, these pins may interfere with the F.S. 139.80 frame.
If so, reverse the pins and add two (2) NAS 1149FN416P washers between the
cotter pin and the plate.
Aileron - Rudder Interconnect Installation

Figure 5
3E17 27-10-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 27-10-00 3E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER AND TAB
1. Troubleshooting Rudder Control System

CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM

rudder pedals and rudder.
Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and tighten
or replace.
Bolts attaching forward or Tighten sector bolts.
aft sectors are loose.
Excessive resistance to System not lubricated Lubricate system.
rudder pedal movement. properly.
Rudder pedal torque tube Lubricate torque tube
bearing in need of lubrication. bearings.
between pulleys and
brackets.
Incorrect rudder travel. Rudder sector stop Re-rig sector stops.
incorrectly adjusted.
Nose wheel contacts stops Re-rig nose wheel stops.
before rudder.
3E19 27-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Rudder Pedal Assembly

To change bearings on rudder bar assembly, follow these steps:
A. Remove nut and washers from end of rudder bar assembly.
B. Remove nuts, bolts and washers that secure the bearing block to the tube support bracket.
C. Remove bearing.
D. Replace bearing using the shrink fit process. Bond the bearing with Loctite 290.
E. Securing bearing block to tube support bracket with nuts, bolts and washers.
F. Place two washers over the threaded end of the rudder bar and secure with the nut.
3. Rudder Controls
A. Removal
(1) To remove the rudder torque tube sectors:
(a) Loosen cables.
(b) Remove the screw which retains the rudder cable lockplate to the sector.
(c) Remove the nuts, bolts and washers that attach the sector to the rudder torque tube.
(d) Remove the sector.
(2) To remove the forward rudder control cables.
(a) Remove the screw which retains the rudder cable lockplate to the rudder bar sector.
Remove the cable from the sector.
(b) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(c) Disconnect the rudder turnbuckles by the rudder tube sector in the aft section of the
fuselage.
(d) At the aft pressure bulkhead, pull the control cable through the fin type air seal. (Refer to
27-00-00, Figure 7)
(e) Pull the cable aft and remove it from the airplane.
(3) To remove the aft rudder cable.
(a) Remove the screws and washers that secure the two cable guard plates at both sides of
the sector. Remove the safety plates.
(b) Disconnect the turnbuckles if not previously accomplished.
(c) Remove the cotter pins from the rear of the sector and remove the aft cable from the
sector.
(4) To remove the rudder torque tube sector:
(a) Remove the aft rudder cable if not previously accomplished.
(b) Remove the nuts, bolts and washers that attach the rudder sector to the rudder torque
tube.
(c) Remove the rudder sector.
B. Installation
(1) To install the rudder torque tube sector:
(a) Position the sector on the torque tube.
(b) Attach the sector to the torque tube with nuts, bolts and washers.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 27-20-00 3E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rudder Controls
Figure 1
3E21 27-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) To install the rudder bar sector:

(a) Position the sector on the rudder bar assembly.
(b) Secure the sector to the rudder bar assembly with nuts, bolts and washers.
(3) To install the aft rudder cable:
(a) Position the cable on the sector.
(b) Install the two guard plates with screws and washers. Replace the cotter pins in the rear
of the sector.
(c) Attach the aft cable to the forward cables at the turnbuckles. Safety the turnbuckles with
locking clips.
(4) To install the forward rudder cable:
(a) Push the cable through the fin type air seal (refer to 27-00-00, Figure 7). Thread the cable
forward through the airplane.
(b) Connect the forward and aft rudder cables at the turnbuckles in the aft end of the airplane.
(c) Attach the forward ends of the forward cables to the rudder bar sector and secure the
cable end retainer (i.e. - lockplate) with a screw (see note below). Safety the cable end
retainer screw with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
Cable Guard Installation (Typical)

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 27-20-00 3E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Ensure that all pulley cable guards have been properly installed (i.e. - with the cables routed
inside/under the cable guards - see Figure 2).
(6) Set the rudder cable tension and check the rigging per instruction in this chapter.
(7) After setting the cable tension, check all cable ball ends for proper seating in the retainers.
(8) Check the system for proper operation. See the Caution under Rigging.
(9) Rig the rudder control system.
C. Rudder Controls Rigging (PIR-PPS50056-4, Rev. M)
(1) Use a suitable tool to check the rudder travel for its proper travel (perpendicular to the hinge
line) left and right from the zero degree position (streamlined with the vertical stabilizer). The
left travel should be 26 + 1, -0 degrees and the right travel should be 30 + 1, -0 degrees. Adjust
the stops on the rudder sector as required.
(2) Move the rudder to the zero (0) degrees (streamlined) position. Lock the rudder in this position.
(3) Lock rudder pedals together, in alignment with each other, at F.S. 105.700 (refer to Figure 3).
(4) Disconnect bungee from forward steering arm.
(5) Install a suitable tool which will lock the nose wheel in alignment with the longitudinal axis of
the aircraft.
Locking Rudder Pedals in Neutral

Figure 3
3E23 27-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Adjust clearance between rollers on the nose gear and forward steering arm from 0.010 to
0.030 inch by loosening the steering arm mounting nut and using the adjuster underneath the
steering arm mount plate.
NOTE: This clearance is measured with nose wheel aligned per paragraph (5), above, and
steering bar parallel to steering horn pads. While measuring this clearance, the gear
should be down and locked and the airplane’s weight should be on the gear.
(7) Torque the steering arm mounting nut and the adjuster jam nuts.
(8) Ensure that the two steering pushrods are holding the steering bellcrank perpendicular to
B.L. 0.00 at F.S. 93.00. Ensure jam nuts are tight and bellows are clamped on rods immediately
behind jam nuts. (refer to 32-50-00, Steering Pushrod - Installation, if adjustment is
necessary).
(9) Adjust the steering bungee to fit between the steering arm and the steering bellcrank with nose
wheel aligned straight ahead. There should be no load on the bungee springs while the nose
wheel is aligned with the longitudinal axis of the airplane. Tighten jam nuts.
(10) Adjust the rudder cable turnbuckles to obtain 40 ± 5 pounds of tension with the rudder set at
zero (0) degrees (i.e. - neutral). Adjust the cables evenly to avoid uneven strain on airplane
components.
NOTE: Prior to adjusting rudder control cable tension, loosen the pitch servo autopilot bridle
cable clamps to allow the clamps to slide freely on the rudder cable. After rudder
control cable tension is set, adjust roll servo autopilot bridle cable tension per Pitch
Servo Installation, 22-10-00.
(11) Remove any centering tools that had been previously installed.
(12) Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00)
(13) Depress each of the pilot’s rudder pedals until the rudder sector firmly contacts its stops.
Adjust the forward stops (on the bellcrank in the nose gear tunnel) to provide 0.06 to 0.09 inch
clearance in each direction.
(14) Operate the rudder through its full travel range with the tab set at both full left and full right
positions. Operation shall be smooth and free. With tab neutral and rudder held securely
against each stop, determine free play of tab. Total free play, measured at tab trailing edge,
shall not exceed 0.06 inches.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF RUDDER. WHILE IT WOULD

ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF RUDDER RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE RUDDER MOVES RIGHT WHEN THE
RIGHT PEDAL IS DEPRESSED; AND, THAT THE RUDDER MOVES LEFT
WHEN THE LEFT PEDAL IS DEPRESSED.
(15) Remove the airplane from jacks.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 27-20-00 3E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89920 AW
R.H.
.43 (REF)
.43 (REF)
30˚ +1, -0 (REF)
13˚ ± 1
13.5˚ ± 1
26˚ +1, -0 (REF)
RUDDER TRIM RIGGING
L.H.
RUDDER TRIM ACCESS

SYSTEM COVER
(REF) (REF)
ACTUATOR
RODS
PUSH ROD LOCK NUTS
ACTUATOR
ROD ENDS PUSH RODS
TAB
B.L. 0.00
ACTUATOR RUDDER
ASSEMBLY
VIEW A-A
NAS6203-7 BOLT NAS6603-9D BOLT

AN960-10L WASHER MS17825-3 NUT
MS21059L3 NUTPLATE (REF) AN960-10 (2 EA.) WASHER
(4 PLACES) MS24665-132 COTTER PIN
1.50 (REF)
A 90˚
A
(REF)
PUSH RODS
B
VIEW FROM LEFT

(ROTATED 31.9˚ CCW)
Rudder Trim Installation and Rigging

3F1 27-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
.99 EXTENDED
(TRIM TAB FULL RIGHT)
AN4-22 BOLT
.56 AN310-4 NUT
(TRIM TAB NEUTRAL) AN960-416 (2 EA.) WASHER
ACTUATOR MS24665-132 COTTER PIN
ROD
.13 RETRACTED
(TRIM TAB FULL LEFT)
ACTUATOR BUSHING
ASSEMBLY
SLEEVE
2.31
(REF)
HINGE LINE
ACTUATOR ROD ENDS
RUDDER
Rudder Trim Installation and Rigging

4. Rudder Trim Controls (See Figure 4.)

The rudder trim system consists of a linear actuator in the tail connected to the trim tab via push rods.
The actuator is controlled by a momentary rocker switch mounted in the pedestal and trim tab position is
displayed to the pilot on the Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator (located in the center lower instrument
panel) (or on the MFD Engine Page when equipped with the optional Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS)
as a digital readout of degrees of deflection.
A. Removal
(1) Turn master switch OFF.
(2) The rudder trim switch is a rocker-type momentary switch and the Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim
Indicator is face mounted. Removal instructions for both are in 39-10-00.
(3) Gain access to the actuator rod ends / push rods connections by securing the rudder at full left
or full right deflection.
(4) Remove cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt holding each push rod to each actuator rod end.
(5) Remove cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt holding each push rod to the trim tab and remove
push rods.
(6) Remove screws and remove actuator assembly access plate on right side of vertical fin.
(7) Disconnect actuator harness.
(8) Remove bolts and washers (4 ea.) holding actuator to vertical fin and remove actuator
assembly.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 27-20-00 3F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Actuator Assembly
NOTE: In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697155, when replacing the original factory installed rudder trim
actuator assembly (P/N 102345-004) you must also replace the original factory installed
Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator (P/N 602-264). Order Kit No. 767-342.
When replacing actuator or actuator rod ends, install actuator rod ends at 2.31 inch from center of
rod end to face of actuator rod. (See Figure 4, Sheet 2.)
NOTE: Take care not to torque the actuator rods when removing or installing the actuator rod ends.
C. Installation
(2) The rudder trim switch is a rocker-type momentary switch and the Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim
Indicator is face mounted . Installation instructions for both types are in 39-10-00.
(3) Place actuator assembly into position through access in right side of vertical fin. Secure with
bolts and washers (4 ea.).
(4) Connect actuator harness.
(5) Replace actuator assembly access plate on right side of vertical fin and secure with screws.
(6) Slide push rods into position in rudder and secure each rod end with lock nut to the trim tab
with bolt, washers, nut, and cotter pin.
(7) Gain access to the actuator rods / push rods connections by securing the rudder at full left or
full right deflection.
CAUTION: DO NOT TORQUE ACTUATOR RODS WHEN INSTALLING PUSH RODS.
(8) Secure each push rod to each actuator rod with bolt, washers, nut, and cotter pin.
(9) Rig rudder trim system.
NOTE: When installing a new unit:
(1) rig the trim controls per paragraph D, below; then,
(2) see 39-10-00, Volt-Amp/Rudder Indicator, for set-up instructions.
D. Rudder Trim Control Rigging (PIR-PPS50056-4, Rev. M)
(1) Ensure rudder rigging is correct per Rigging of Rudder Controls.

(2) Lock rudder pedals in neutral position. (refer to Figure 1, Rudder Controls.)
(3) Using a suitable tool, set rudder at zero (0) degrees (i.e. - streamlined).
(4) Using the rudder trim switch and Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator (or MFD Engine Page when
equipped with the optional Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS) in the cockpit:
(a) set the rudder trim to zero (0). Trim tab should be streamlined.
(b) set rudder trim to full left deflection. Tab deflection should be 13.5° ± 1.
(c) set rudder trim to full right deflection. Tab deflection should be 13.0° ± 1.
In all cases, any corrections are to be made by push rod adjustment. When tab is adjusted
correctly, check readings on the position indicator. Indicator should read 0° when tab is
streamlined and may vary ± 2° at tab extreme deflections.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF RUDDER. WHILE IT WOULD SEEM
SELF-EVIDENT, FIELD EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT THIS CHECK IS
FREQUENTLY MISINTERPRETED OR NOT PERFORMED AT ALL. ACCORDINGLY,
UPON COMPLETION OF RUDDER TRIM RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT
THE RUDDER TRIM TAB MOVES LEFT WHEN THE RUDDER TRIM SWITCH IS
PRESSED LEFT; AND, THAT THE RUDDER TRIM TAB MOVES RIGHT WHEN THE
RUDDER TRIM SWITCH IS PRESSED RIGHT.
3F3 27-20-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 27-20-00 3F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR AND TAB
1. Troubleshooting Elevator Control System

TROUBLESHOOTING ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM

control wheel and elevator.
Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and tighten
or replace.
pulleys.
Resistance to elevator System not lubricated Lubricate system.
control movement. properly.
Binding control column. Adjust and lubricate.
between pulleys and
brackets.
pulleys.
Incorrect elevator travel. Elevator stops Adjust stop screws.
Correct elevator travel Elevator cables incorrectly Re-rig elevator cables.
cannot be obtained by rigged.
adjusting stops.
Lost motion between trim Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension.
control wheel and trim tab.
Cables not in place on Install cables properly.
pulleys.
Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and
tighten or replace.
3F5 27-30-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING ELEVATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Trim control wheel moves System not lubricated Lubricate system.
with excessive resistance. properly.
Pulleys binding or rubbing. Replace binding pulleys.
Provide clearance between
pulleys and brackets.
Cables not in place on Install cables properly.
pulleys.
Trim tab hinge binding. Lubricate hinge.
If necessary, replace.
incorrectly. cable.
Trim tab fails to System incorrectly rigged. Check and/or adjust
reach full travel. rigging.
Trim indicator fails to Trim indicator unit not Adjust trim indicator.
indicate correct trim adjusted properly.
position.
2. Elevator Torque Tube Bearing Changes

A. Remove nut and washers from end of elevator torque tube assembly.
B. Remove nuts, bolts and washers that secure the bearing block to the tube support bracket.
C. Remove bearing.
D. Replace bearing using the shrink fit process. Bond the bearing with Loctite 290.
E. Secure bearing block to tube support bracket with nuts, bolts and washers.
F. Place two washers over the threaded end of the elevator torque tube and secure with nut.
3. Elevator Controls
A. Removal
(1) To remove elevator torque tube quadrant:
(a) Remove elevator downspring.
(b) Remove the two quadrant cable guards.
(c) Loosen cables.
(d) Remove the screw which retains the elevator cable lockplates.
(e) Remove the cables and lockplates.
(f) Remove the bolts, nuts and washers that secure the quadrant to the elevator torque tube.
(g) Remove the quadrant.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) To remove the elevator forward cable assemblies:

(a) Disconnect the elevator cable turnbuckles (located forward of the aft elevator quadrant).
(b) Remove the screw that retains the elevator cable lockplates to the forward quadrants (on
the elevator torque tube).
(c) Pull the cables aft through the fuselage after removing the cable guards at the elevator
pulleys and the fin type control cable air seal clips.
(3) To remove the aft elevator cable assemblies:
(a) Disconnect the cable turnbuckles (located forward of the aft elevator quadrant).
(b) Cut safety wire on cable lockplate screw. Remove screw.
(c) Remove cable guards and remove cable.
(4) To remove the elevator aft quadrant:
(a) Remove the elevator aft cable assemblies from the quadrant. (Refer to step 3.)
(b) Remove the bolt, nut, washers and bushings which secure the quadrant assembly to the
bulkhead (Note position of bushings as removed).
(c) Remove the quadrant assembly.
B. Installation
(1) To install the elevator aft quadrant:
(a) Position the elevator quadrant in place.
(b) Attach cables to quadrant assembly and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate)
with screws (See Note Below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32
safety wire. Ensure the safety wire is installed so that the wire is inside and clear of the
elevator pushrod fork through the full travel of the quadrant.
(c) Adjust cable guards to be 0.03 to 0.06 inch from the edge of the quadrant.
(d) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(2) To install the elevator torque tube quadrant:
(a) Position the quadrant assembly on the torque tube.
(b) Secure quadrant with bolt, nut and washer (two places).
(c) Attach cables to quadrant assembly and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate)
with screws (See Note Below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32
safety wire.
3F7 27-30-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Adjust cable guard to provide 0.08 ± 0.01 inch of clearance from the edge of the
quadrant.
(e) Attach the elevator downspring.
(f) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(3) To install the elevator forward cable assemblies:
(a) Insert the cables through the fin-type air seals on the aft pressure bulkhead and draw
them forward through the fuselage, positioning them on the proper pulleys.
(b) Attach cables to forward quadrant and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate) with
screws (see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32 safety
wire.
(c) Adjust cable guards so that there is 0.08 ± 0.01 inch of clearance from edge of the
quadrant.
(d) Attach forward cable assemblies to aft cable assemblies at the turnbuckles located just
forward of the aft quadrant.
(e) Ensure that all cable guards are in place.
(f) Attach the elevator downspring.
(g) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(4) To install the elevator aft cable assemblies:
(a) Attach cables to quadrant and secure the cable end retainers (i.e. - lockplate) with screws
(see note below). Safety the cable end retainer screws with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
(b) Attach the rear cables to the forward cables at the turnbuckles.
(c) Reinstall cable guards and adjust them to provide 0.03 to 0.06 inch of clearance from the
edge of the quadrant.
(d) Attach the elevator downspring (Refer to Figure 1).
(e) Refer to steps (5) and (6).
(5) Set cable tension.
(6) Check control system for proper rigging and operation.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Elevator Sector
Assembly
ELEVATOR CONTROL INSTALLATION
Turnbuckle
Cable Guard Bushing Elevator Control
Rod Assembly
Sector
Seal
g Assembly
nsprin
Dow
ator
Elev
Pulley
Cable Guard
Cotter Pin
Actuator Assembly
Elevator Trim Control Wheel
Aft Rod
Assembly
Forward Rod
Cable Protection Tube Assembly
l As sy
Pedesta Turnbuckle
A ssy
ble
Ca
im
or Tr Seal Assembly
vat
Ele
PuIIey
ELEVATOR TRIM INSTALLATION
Elevator and Elevator Trim Installation

Figure 1
3F9 27-30-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Elevator Controls Rigging (PIR PPS-50056-4 Rev. M))
NOTE: The neutral position of the elevator is when the leading edges of the aerodynamic balances
are lined up with the leading edges of the horizontal stabilizer.
(1) Adjust the elevator stops to obtain the travel specified in Chart 2.
CHART 2
ELEVATOR RIGGING POSITIONS
Elevator Trailing Elevator Trailing Elevator Tab Elevator Tab

Edge Up Edge Down Elevator Neutral Elevator Neutral
Trailing Edge Up Trailing Edge Down
23.5° ± .5° 14.5° ± .5° 19° + 0°, - 1° 24.5° + 0°, - 1°
(2) Lock the elevator in its neutral position.

(3) Position the pilot’s control wheel with the forward face of the wheel mounting boss 5.30 inches
aft of the instrument panel aft face and secure. (Refer to Figure 1, 27-10-00.)
(4) Adjust the cables evenly to obtain 30 ± 5 Ibs. cable tension.
(5) Remove the locking device from the control wheel.
(6) With the elevator held against the trailing edge down primary (aft) stop, push the pilot’s wheel
full forward. The control wheel travel between the primary (aft) and secondary (forward) stops
should be 0.30 ± 0.10 inch. There is no adjustment on the secondary stop.
(7) If necessary, use the cable rigging turnbuckles to bring the control wheels into their neutral
position. If control wheel position adjusted, recheck/rerig elevator trim tab.
(8) With the elevator physically held against the trailing edge up primary (aft) stop, adjust the
secondary stop on the channel ahead of the instrument panel to provide a cushion (gap) of
0.06 - 0.09 inch. Lock the jamnut.
(9) Check system for binding and proper operation.
4. Elevator Trim Controls
A. Removal
To remove elevator trim controls in the console:
(1) Remove access panel on left side of console.
(2) Disconnect elevator trim cables by:
(a) Remove the center access panels on the floor to gain access to the plastic tube that
protects the elevator trim cables.
(b) Remove the pins from both ends of the plastic tube.
(c) Slide the tube forward.
(d) Rotate the elevator trim control wheel until one of the trim cable turnbuckles clears the aft
end of the tube.
(e) Tie a pull rope forward of the exposed turnbuckle on the forward cable.
NOTE: Tension must be applied to the ends of the trim cables as soon as the
turnbuckles are disconnected to prevent the cables from unwrapping from the
trim wheel drum or the trim actuator, and to prevent the cables from fouling at any
of the pulleys.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Disconnect the cables, keeping tension on both ends of cable.

(g) Have an assistant in the cockpit rotate the elevator trim control wheel until the opposite
elevator trim turnbuckle clears the aft end of the plastic tube. Keep tension on both ends
of the disconnected cable while the assistant is rotating the trim wheel.
(h) Have the assistant tie another pull rope forward of the turnbuckle on the remaining cable.
(i) Have the assistant disconnect his cables, keeping tension on both ends of the cable.
(j) Transfer the cable ends to one man. Have him keep tension on all four cable ends.
(k) Have the remaining man slide the plastic tube aft until the cables are exposed aft of the
F.S. 124.125 frame.
(3) Remove the nut and washer from trim wheel pivot bolt.
(4) Push the trim wheel pivot bolt out the right hand side of the quadrant.
(5) Remove the trim wheel from the console, pulling the control cable along with it.
(6) To disassemble the elevator trim wheel:
(a) Remove the three screws which attach the cable drum to the wheel.
(b) Remove the cable from the drum.
B. Installation
(1) To assemble the elevator trim wheel:
(a) Place the cable ends in the drum.
(b) Secure the cable drum to the wheel with the three screws.
(c) Wrap the cable ends around the drum 3 1/4 turns in opposite directions.
(2) Position the trim wheel/cable in place in the console.
(3) Slide the trim wheel pivot bolt through the pivot holes in the trim wheel and the console.
(4) Secure the pivot bolt with the nut and washer.
(5) Connect the elevator trim cables by:
(a) Have the assistant keep tension on the trim cables while the cable blocks at F.S. 207.00
and F.S. 124.125 are removed.
(b) Slide the plastic tube forward.
(c) Connect one set of cables at the turnbuckles and remove the pull rope. Keep tension on
the remaining cables.
(d) Have the assistant rotate the elevator trim control wheel until the remaining (unconnected)
turnbuckle clears the aft end of the tube.
(e) Connect the remaining cables and remove the pull rope. Set cable tension to 12 ± 2
pounds.
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST THE TWO AFT CURVED RODS WHICH ATTACH TO THE
TAB. THESE RODS MUST RETAIN THEIR ORIGINAL DRAWING
DIMENSION TO MAINTAIN THE PROPER TAB OPERATING GEOMETRY.
NOTE: Both the up and down cable turnbuckle assemblies should be within 0.10 of an
inch of the same length upon completion of adjustment.
(f) Slide the tube in place and insert the pins in both ends of the tube.
(g) Check to ensure that the cables have not loosened on the trim drum or actuator. Check
that they have not fouled on any of the pulleys.
(h) Check the system for restrictions or binding.
(i) Reinstall the floor access panels that were previously removed.
3F11 27-30-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Ensure that the pulley cable guards are installed at all elevator trim cable pulleys.
(7) Replace the access panel on the console.
(8) Check operation of elevator trim controls. See Caution under Rigging.
C. Elevator Trim Actuator
(1) Removal
(a) Block the cables at the actuator drum.
(b) Disconnect the trim cable turnbuckles (inside the plastic tube under the floor). (Refer to
paragraph 4.A.(2) ).
(c) Cut safety wire and remove bolts that attach actuator to elevator trim forward rod
assembly.
(d) Remove four bolts and washers that secure the actuator to its supporting bracket.
(e) Remove actuator and trim cable from aircraft.
(2) Installation
(a) Position actuator/trim cable assembly on actuator bracket. Fasten in place with bolts and
washer.
(b) Attach elevator trim forward rod assembly to actuator with bolts and washers. Safety bolts.
(c) Connect the trim cables (Refer to step (5) in paragraph 4B, above).
(d) Ensure that cables are in pulleys and that pulley cable guards are installed.
(e) Attach three cable clips (per seal) to the fin type control cable air seals in the aft pressure
bulkhead.
(f) Set cable tension.
(g) Check system for smooth and proper operation.
(3) Disassembly
(a) Remove nut and washer from the end of the actuator screw.
(b) Remove the bolt, nut and washer that secures the actuator screw to the actuator frame.
(c) Turn the screw out of the housing assembly and then out of the frame.
(d) Remove the drum from the housing assembly by removing the bolts which secure the aft
retainer to the housing.
(e) Unwrap cable from drum (if desired).
(4) Assembly
(a) Place trim cable in slot in trim drum. Cable end Y should be 17.5 inches longer than cable
end X.
(b) Wrap each end of the cable nine and one-quarter turns toward the center of the drum.
One series of wraps should be clockwise and the other series should be
counterclockwise. Hold the cable in place.
(c) Insert the drum into the housing assembly.
(d) Secure the aft retainer and guide to the aft side of the housing with the screws, nuts and
washers.
NOTE: Refer to Figure 2 for information on setting trim drum end play.
(e) Place the housing/drum assembly into the actuator frame.
(f) Insert the actuator screw through the frame and then into the housing/drum assembly.
(g) Rotate the screw until the housing/drum assembly is positioned as shown in Figure 2.
Cable end “Y” should be 17.5 inches longer than cable end “X” after installation and
wrapping on the drum before fastening the screw in position.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Attach the aft end of the actuator screw to the actuator frame by installing the bolt, nut
and washer. The bolt shank should point in the same direction as the cable ends.
(i) Attach the forward end of the actuator screw to the frame with the nut and washer.
(j) Check for free, smooth full range travel.
D. Elevator Trim Rod Corrosion Control
Inspect elevator trim rods and reapply Dinatrol AV 8 each five years. See 55-20-00, Elevator Trim
Tab Rods Corrosion Control.
E. Elevator Trim Controls Rigging
NOTE: The neutral position of the elevator tab is with the tab trailing edge lined up with the
elevator trailing edge.
(1) Check the tension of the elevator trim tab cables. Adjust the tension to 12 ± 2 pounds. The up
and down cable turnbuckle assemblies should be within 0.10 inch of the same length upon
completion of adjustment.
NOTE: Access the turnbuckles by rolling trim wheel to the full nose up position and sliding the
tube that surrounds the cables fore or aft, as required.
(2) Place the elevator tab in the neutral position and set the tab indicator at the neutral position
using a suitable locating fixture.
(3) Move the elevator trim wheel aft (nose up) until the positive stop (spacer) on the actuator frame
engages the trim drum housing. Check to ensure that the tab indicator guide pin has not
bottomed out in its slot in the trim wheel.
(4) Set tab to the Elevator Tab (Elevator Neutral) Trailing Edge Down angle specified in Chart 2, by
adjusting the two straight rods which penetrate the aft fuselage bulkhead. The rods must be
within 0.010 inch of the same length upon completion of adjustment. Lock the jam nuts on the
rods.
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST THE TWO AFT CURVED RODS WHICH ATTACH TO THE
TAB. THESE RODS MUST NOT BE CHANGED FROM THEIR ORIGINAL
LENGTH OF 10.16 INCHES BETWEEN THE CENTERS OF THE ROD END
HOLE AND THE MOUNTING BUSHING HOLE. A CHANGE IN THEIR LENGTH
WOULD ALTER THE PROPER TAB OPERATING GEOMETRY.
(5) Move the elevator trim wheel forward (nose down) until the elevator tab is at the Elevator Tab
(Elevator Neutral) Trailing Edge Up angle specified in Chart 2. Check to ensure that the tab
indicator guide pin has not bottomed out in its slot in the trim wheel. Set the adjustable stop
mounted on the stabilizer spar to maintain the specified tab angle. Lock the jam nut.
(6) Operate the elevator through its full travel range with the tab set at both full nose up and full
nose down positions. Operation should be smooth and free.
(7) With the tab neutral and the elevator held securely against each stop, determine the free play
of the tab. Total free play measured at the tab trailing edge should not exceed 0.06 inch.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF ELEVATOR TAB. WHILE IT
WOULD SEEM SELF-EVIDENT, FIELD EXPERIENCE HAS SHOWN THAT THIS
CHECK IS FREQUENTLY MISINTERPRETED OR NOT PERFORMED AT ALL.
ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF ELEVATOR TRIM RIGGING AND
ADJUSTMENT, VERIFY THAT THE ELEVATOR TAB MOVES UP WHEN THE
TRIM WHEEL IS TRIMMED DOWN; AND, THAT THE ELEVATOR TAB MOVES
DOWN WHEN THE TRIM WHEEL IS TRIMMED UP.
3F13 27-30-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Elevator Trim Actuator Assembly

Figure 2
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Stall Warning System

A. Description and Operation
WARNING: PHYSICAL MANIPULATION OF LIFT TRANSDUCER ON PA-46-500TP AIRPLANES
MAY RESULT IN ERRONEOUS STALL WARNINGS NECESSITATING CALIBRATION
OF SYSTEM.
The stall warning system’s major components consist of a lift transducer located in the leading edge
of the left wing and a lift computer located on the left side under the aft electronic shelf. The sensing
source of the transducer protrudes into the air stream and during flight is positioned by local airflow
velocity and direction. By correlating lift with airflow characteristics at the stagnation point on the
wing, the lift transducer measures changes in angle-of-attack, or airspeed deviations from an
airspeed represented by a reference angle-of-attack.
The output signal, combining angle-of-attack and local dynamic pressure, enters the lift computer
which contains power regulators, signal processor and control circuitry. Provisions are included for
monitoring the entire stall warning system.
B. Troubleshooting - See Chart 3.
CHART 3
TROUBLESHOOTING STALL WARNING SYSTEM
AC voltage between PINS N/A Replace Lift Computer.
24 & 25 is not within 0.5V
of 10.0 V.
Lift Transducer calibration N/A Replace Lift Transducer.
exceeds tolerances specified
in Table 1.
Lift Transducer fails Stall N/A Replace Lift Transducer.
Warning Heat test.
Lift Computer “Tip Grams” N/A Readjust “Tip Grams”
out of adjustment. per Figure 3.
C. Lift Detector Assembly

(1) Removal
(a) Remove the four screws which hold lift detector to leading edge of wing.
(b) Pull lift detector partially out of opening in wing and disconnect wires at connector.
(c) Remove lift detector.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect wires from detector to harness.
(b) Position lift detector in the opening in the wing and secure with the four screws.
(c) Check lift detector for operation per Stall Warning Functional Test.
D. Dual Warning Unit (Horn)
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect wires coming from warning unit.
(b) Remove the four screws and washers that secure the unit to the bulkhead.
3F15 27-30-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Position dual warning unit on the bulkhead and secure with screws/washers.
(b) Connect electrical leads to unit (refer to electrical schematic in 91-27-30).
E. Stall Warning Functional Test
(1) Locate the stall warning test switch on the pilot’s instrument panel and the lift transducer which
is located in the inboard left wing leading edge.
(a) Activate the test switch;
(b) Verify that the transducer vane moves forward (up); the stall warning activates.
(2) Locate the stall warn heat switch on the overhead switch panel.
CAUTION: DO NOT ACTIVATE STALL WARN HEAT SWITCH FOR MORE THAN FIVE (5)
SECONDS.
(a) Activate the stall warn heat switch;
(b) Check that the lift transducer vane and mounting plate become warm.
F. Stall Warning Flight Test Procedure (PIR-FTP2001-25, Rev. F./ FTP2001-25-1,B.)
NOTE: Required whenever a “replacement” wing is installed.

(1) Ensure aircraft CG is 140.0 ± 1" and aircraft weight is between 4750 - 5000 LBS.
(2) Fly airplane and at a rate of 1 KT/SEC maximum record the following warning and stall speeds:
Warning Min.
Gear Flaps Power Trimspeed Limits Warning / Stall Delta
UP 0° 150 ft/lbs 100 87 - 90 ________/________ 8 kts
DOWN 20° 150 ft/lbs 90 83 -85 ________/________ 10 kts
DOWN 36° 150 ft/lbs 90 70 - 75 ________/________ 5 kts
UP 0° 650 ft/lbs 100 87 - 90 ________/________ N/A
DOWN 20° 650 ft/lbs 90 83 - 85 ________/________ N/A
DOWN 36° 650 ft/lbs 90 74 - 77 ________/________ N/A
(3) If the stall warning system fails to perform within the limits above, adjust the system and refly
the test.
(4) If not able to adjust the stall warning system sufficient to achieve the limits above, recheck the
“replacement” wing installation to ensure it is installed and rigged correctly.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Force Applicator Kit Test

The lift computer is factory set by Safe Flight Instrument Corp. to produce the required outputs to
activate the stall horn. Final adjustments are then made to each installation by Piper during flight
test. At the completion of individual system adjustment by Piper the actual tip gram value will be
recorded in the aircraft logbook. The logbook entry is as follows:
In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697100, 4697102, and 4697104 thru 4697108, after Flight Into Known
Icing (FIKI) retrofit (specifically, after installation of Piper Kit No. 767-323), and
in S/N’s 4697101, 4697103, and 4697109 & up:
“The stall system computer is adjusted at the factory. Component changes require that the
computer settings be checked and adjusted per Chapter 27 of the Piper Maintenance Manual.
The settings for this aircraft are:”
STALL WARNING
TIP GRAMS
FLAPS ACTUAL
SETTINGS EXAMPLE
Full Up 0° x.x (+3.0)
10°-20° x.x (+4.0)
Full Down 36° x.x (+1.5)
Should it become necessary to check the values shown in the airplane log book, use Safe Flight
Instrument Corp's. Force Applicator Kit, P/N 1952-1, to measure the “tip-grams” of force settings
required at the lift transducer vane to energize the signal.
Force Applicator
Figure 3
3F17 27-30-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Attach the force applicator to the lift transducer cavity as shown in Figure 3 (See also Safe
Flight's Force Applicator Kit operation manual.) The squat switch shall be in the in-flight
condition.
In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 as delivered from the
factory:
(a) Position the cockpit pedestal power lever to the idle position and flaps to the full up
position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip grams recorded in the airplane log book.
(b) Place the cockpit pedestal power lever in the idle position and flaps to the 10°-20°
position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip grams recorded in the airplane log book.
(c) Place the cockpit pedestal power lever in the idle position and the flaps at the full (36°)
down position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip grams recorded in the airplane log
book.
or
In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 with Piper Kit No. 766-697
installed and in S/N’s 4697115, 4697117, 4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 & up:
(a) Position the flaps in the full up position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip grams
recorded in the airplane log book.
(b) Place the flaps to the 10°-20° position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip grams
recorded in the airplane log book.
(c) Place the the flaps at the full (36°) down position. The pre-stall horn shall activate at tip
grams recorded in the airplane log book.
(2) To make necessary adjustments, remove the access plate from the lift computer. Locate the
adjustment screws (refer to Figure 4). Increase negative tip grams to decrease activation
speed. Increase positive tip grams to increase activation speed.
Vane Tip-Grams
36˚ Flaps
Bias
2 5
Vane Tip-Grams
10˚ - 20˚ Flaps 1 4
Bias
0 3
Access Cover
Vane Tip-Grams
0˚ Flaps
LIFT COMPUTER
Bias
S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697100, 4697102, and 4697104 thru 4697108,
after Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) retrofit
(specifically, after installation of Piper Kit No. 767-323),
and in S/N’s 4697101, 4697103, and 4697109 & up
Lift Computer “Tip Grams” Adjustment

Figure 4
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Lift Computer (LC) Test

(1) If available, connect the Breakout Box (Safe Flight P/N SK100360) between the lift computer
and the aircraft wiring. Locate the breakout box so that the test jacks (which connect to the like
numbered pin) are accessible. If no breakout box is available, the pins may be accessed directly.
See Table 1.
(2) Attach the Force Applicator to the lift transducer as shown in Figure 3 so as to apply forces to
the vane as specified in the following test sections. Use the gauge with the lowest range
adequate for the readings. Forward forces on the vane are designated as minus (-): aft forces
are designated as positive (+).
(3) Set the aircraft flaps to the UP position for 0° readings, MID position for 10° and 20° readings
and DOWN for 36° readings.
(4) Bypass the OLEO (i.e. - squat) switch function to the IN AIR condition. A jumper between PINS
2 (GND) and 7 (OLEO) will accomplish this.
(5) Apply 28V DC ± 20% DC power to the system by actuating the proper circuit breakers. Do not
apply power to the lift transducer heaters while making these tests.
TABLE 1
LIFT COMPUTER PIN OUTS
Pin Function Voltage Reading

1 +28 VDC Power Source Constant
2 DC Power Ground
3
4 Flaps Excitation 28V Constant
5 10 and 20 Flaps 28V only at these settings
6 36 Flaps 28V only at this setting
7 OLEO - Connected to ground when IN AIR
8 SELF TEST - Momentary ground for test
9 VALID FLAG +28 VDC if system is valid
10 ESSENTIAL BUS +28 VDC Constant (3 Amp Breaker)
11
12 Stall Warning Voltage +28 VDC to warning device
13 - 15
16 Lift Transducer (LT) Self Test +15 VDC for ON GND Self Test to LT
17 Fail Warning +28 VDC if system is not valid
18 - 21
22 TEST DATA Varying voltage controlled by lift transducer
23 SIGNAL GROUND
24 LIFT TRANSDUCER EXCITATION 10V RMS 700 Hz power to LT
25 LIFT TRANSDUCER EXCITATION } Pin 25 is high
26 FAST
27
28
COMMON
SLOW
} Lift Transducer Signals to Computer
3F19 27-30-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Lift Transducer (LT) Test

(1) Check that the AC voltage measured between PIN-24 and PIN-25 (PIN-25 is High) is
10.0 ± 0.5 V.
(2) Check the lift transducer and the lift computer phase detector by comparing the voltages of
Table 1 below, PIN-22 and PIN-23 (PIN-23 = Low). The voltage across pins PIN-26 and PIN-28
(PIN-26 = Low) is an AC voltage varying in polarity and magnitude with the LT tip gram force.
TABLE 2
LIFT TRANSDUCER TEST SPECIFICATIONS
PIN - 26 (LOW)
Tip Grams PIN - 28 (HI) PIN - 22 (HI)
AC Mili-Volts PIN - 23 (LOW)
Ref. Tolerance DC Volts Tolerance
-6 427 ±40 9.2 ±0.75
0 279 ±20 6.0 ±0.50
12 0 ±20 0 ±0.50
24 279 ±20 -6.0 ±0.75
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3F21 27-30-00 PAGE 17

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 27-30-00 3F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAPS
1. Flap Drive System (Refer to Figure 1)

The flaps are driven by an electric motor-actuator unit. The motor-actuator is mounted below the floor at
fuselage station 167.97. Remove the seat, cabinet (if necessary), and floor boards to gain access to the
motor.
The drive system contains two movable micro-switches on a cam mechanism (one each for up and down
flap movement), warning horn micro-switch on cam bracket, current sensor, relay, and mechanical
linkages. A removable cover on the right forward floor gives access to the switches. The sensor and relay
are located on a plate assembly aft of motor. The cover is secured with velcro tabs for easy removal.
Pushrods are connected to the actuator at both ends. These pushrods extend out through the fuselage
and connect to bellcranks in the wings at station 29.00. Additional pushrods extend out along the wing
rear spar to an idler arm at station 64.00 and on to another bellcrank at station 93.00. Pushrods
connected to the bellcranks at station 64.00 and 93.00 connect the flaps to complete the drive system.
To ensure a good pressure seal at the fuselage exit points of the flap drive pushrods, a bellows is
connected to the pushrods and tube assemblies which are part of the fuselage structure, thus sealing
the opening and preventing any air loss from the pressurized cabin.
The flap selector provides four positions: full up (0°), 10°, 20°, and full down (36°). All positions are
preselected by the flap control lever on the instrument panel. A flap position warning system is provided
to warn when the flaps are extended to or beyond the approach position without the landing gear fully
extended and locked.
2. Troubleshooting Flap Control System
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM

Flaps fail to extend or Motor-Actuator inoperative. No electrical power to
retract. motor. Check circuit
breaker.
Flaps not synchronized Incorrect rigging of Adjust flaps.
or fail to move evenly system.
when retracted.
3F23 27-50-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
82913-2
Pushrod Interconnect
Pushrod
Switch Support
Cam Assyembly
Position
Selector
Cable Actuator Switch
Flap Switch
0
S33
Outboard
Bellcrank Assembly
85087-2 Activator Cam

Pushrod 102219 K
85068 AM
Flap Motor-Actuator and Drive System

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Flap Controls
A. Removal
(1) To remove link “E”: (Refer to Figure 2)
(a) Disconnect the linear potentiometer from link “E” by removing the AN3-10A bolt, 3
NAS1149F0332P washers (one under the head and one on either side of the clevis) and,
two NAS1149F0363P washers under the NAS679A3W nut.
(b) Remove the MS21042-4 nut, AN4-13A bolt, and NAS1149F0463P washer that secures
link “E” to the connecting arm assembly clevis and push rod link clevis.
(c) Remove the AN4-16A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, NAS1149F0432P washer (under head),
NAS1149F0463P washer(under nut), and two 82695-96 bushings that secures link “E” to
the pushrod and the motor-actuator unit.
(d) Remove safety wire from AN4H30 bolt that secures link “E” to its support bracket. Remove
the bolt, AN310-4 nut, NAS1149F0463P and NAS1149F0432P washers (under nut), and
MS24665-134 pin.
(e) Remove link “E”.
(2) To remove the aft link assembly: (Refer to Figure 2)
(a) Remove the AN24-34A bolt, MS20365-42 8C nut, two 82695-97 bushings, and
NAS1149F0432P, washer two NAS1149F0632P, and two NAS1149F0663P washers that
secure the aft link assembly to the tube assembly and arm assembly.
(b) Remove safety wire from AN4H34 bolt that secures the aft link to its support bracket.
Remove the bolt, AN310-4 nut, two NAS1149FO463P washers (under nut), and
MS24665-134 pin.
(c) Remove link.
(3) To remove the flap drive pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figures 2 and 3)
(a) Loosen appropriate hose clamp on small end of bellows.
(b) For left flap drive pushrod:
1 Remove the MS21042-4 nut, AN4-16A bolt, two each 82695-96 bushings and
NAS1149F0432P washer (under head), NAS1149F0463P washer(under nut)
securing pushrod clevis to link “E” and the actuator- motor assembly.
2 Remove NAS464-P5A9 bolt, and MS21042-5 nut that secures the pushrod clevis to
the left inboard bellcrank assembly.
(c) For right flap drive pushrod
1 Remove the AN24-34A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-97 bushings, and
NAS1149F0432P, two NAS1149F0632P, and two NAS1149F0663P washers that
secure the clevis to the tube assembly, the aft link assembly, and the arm assembly.
2 Remove NAS464-P5A9 bolt, and MS21042-5 nut that secures the pushrod clevis to
the right inboard bellcrank assembly.
(d) Slide pushrod from flap drive housing and remove.
(4) To remove the 85097-2 pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 2)
(a) Remove AN4-13A bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS21042-4 nut connecting the
pushrod assembly to link “E.”
(b) Remove AN24-14A bolt, one NAS1149F0463P washer, one NAS1149F0432P washer,
and MS21042-4 nut connecting the pushrod assembly to the cam assembly.
(c) Remove the 85097-2 pushrod assembly.
3G1 27-50-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) To remove arm assembly: (Refer to Figure 2)

(a) Remove AN4-13A bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, MS21042-4 nut connecting the arm
assembly to link “E”.
(b) Remove the AN 24-34A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-97 bushings, and
NAS1149F0432P, two NAS1149F0632P, and two NAS1149F0663P washers that secure
the arm assembly to the tube assembly and aft link assembly.
(c) Remove arm assembly.
(6) To remove the inboard bellcrank: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Remove the NAS464-P549 bolt and MS21042-5 nut that secures the bellcrank to the flap
drive pushrod.
(b) Remove the AN4-11 bolt, the AN310-4 nut, the NAS1149F0463P washer, and the
MA24665-134 pin that secures the bellcrank to the interconnect pushrod assembly.
(c) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, the MS21042-4, and the NAS1149F0463P washer that
secures the bellcrank to the 82913-2 pushrod.
(d) Remove the AN4-45 bolt, AN310-4 nut, 82695-38 bushing, and MS 24665-134 pin that
secures the bellcrank to its support bracket.
(e) Remove bellcrank.
(7) To remove the 82913-2 inboard flap actuator pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0463P washer, that
secures the pushrod to the bellcrank.
(b) Remove the AN4-12A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and two NAS1149F0463P washers (under
nut), that secures the pushrod to the support bracket on the flap.
(c) Remove the pushrod.
(8) To remove the flap interconnect pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-11 bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS 24665-134 pin
that secures the pushrod to the inboard bellcrank assembly.
(b) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-13 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and two 82695-39 bushings that secures the pushrod to the 82977-2 pushrod assembly.
(9) To remove the idler: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-13 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and two 82695-39 bushings that secures idler arm assembly to the interconnect pushrod
assembly and the 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis.
(b) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-16 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS 24665-134
pin and 82695-40 bushing that secures the pushrod to its support bracket.
(c) Remove the idler arm assembly.
(10) To remove the 82977-2 pushrod assembly (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Remove the AN310-4 nut, AN4-13 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P washers, MS24665-134 pin
and two 82695-39 bushings that secures 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis to the idler
arm assembly.
(b) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer, that
secures the pushrod to the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(c) Remove the 82977-2 pushrod assembly.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Switch Support
Cam Assyembly
Position
Selector
Cable Actuator Switch
102219 K
85068 AM
Flap Switch
0
S33
85087-2 Activator Cam

Pushrod
Flap Motor-Actuator and Drive System - Fuselage Components

Figure 2
3G3 27-50-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Motor-Actuator and Drive System - Wing Components

Figure 3
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) To remove outboard bellcrank assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)

secures the 82977-2 pushrod to the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(b) Remove the NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer, that
secures the 82913-3 pushrod assembly actuator to the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(c) Remove the AN4-20 bolt, AN310-4 nut, two NAS1149F0463P washers, 82695-37
bushing, and MS24665-134 pin that secures the outboard bellcrank assembly to the
support bracket on the flap.
(d) Remove the outboard bellcrank assembly.
(12) To remove outboard actuator pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
secures the pushrod to the bellcrank.
(b) Remove the AN4-12A bolt, MS21042-4 nut, two 82695-42 bushings, and two
NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut), that secures the pushrod to the support bracket
on the flap.
B. Installation
(1) To install outboard actuator pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Ensure that the pushrod assembly measures 4.53 inches between the centers of the rod
end holes. (Rod ends should be evenly spaced and locknuts loose)
(b) Attach rod end of pushrod assembly to outboard bellcrank arm with NAS464-P4A8 bolt,
MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(c) Position pushrod’s aft rod end bearing on flap support. Install two 82695-42 bushings,
AN4-12A bolt (with head pointing outboard), two NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut),
and MS21042-4 nut.
(2) To install the outboard bellcrank: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Position bellcrank in support.
(b) Install AN4-20 bolt (head pointing down), 82695-37 bushing, two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until support arms seat on bushing,
then tighten one to two more castellations. Ensure that bellcrank operates freely and
install cotter pin.
(c) Check for a maximum of 0.035 inch vertical end play of bellcrank. NAS1149F0532P
washers may be added as required between the bearing surfaces of the bellcrank and the
bellcrank lower supporting bracket, maintaining bellcrank freedom of rotation after
pushrod installation.
(d) Attach the 82913-3 pushrod assembly actuator to the outboard bellcrank assembly Install
NAS464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(e) Attach the 82977-2 pushrod to the outboard bellcrank assembly by installing a NAS464-
P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(3) To install the 82977-2 pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Ensure that the pushrod assembly measures 24.70 inches between the centers of the rod
end holes.
(b) Attach outboard end of the pushrod to the outboard bellcrank assembly by installing NAS
464-P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0432P washer.
(c) Attach the inboard end of the 82977-2 pushrod assembly clevis to the idler arm assembly
with two 82695-39 bushings,AN4-13 bolt (head pointing down), two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), AN310-4 nut, and MS24665-134 pin
3G5 27-50-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) To install the idler: (Refer to Figure 3)

(a) Place idler in position.
(b) Install AN4-16 bolt (head pointing down), 82695-40 bushing, two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until support arms seat on bushing,
then tighten one to two more castellations. Ensure that idler operates freely and install
cotter pin.
(c) Check for a minimum of 0.035 inch vertical end play of idler. NAS1149F0532P washers
may be added as required between the bearing surfaces of the idler and the idler lower
supporting bracket. Install MS 24665-134 cotter pin.
(d) Connect flap drive interconnect pushrod and flap interconnect pushrod to idler arm
assembly by installing AN4-13 bolt (head pointing down), two 82695-39 bushings, two
NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until idler arms seat
on bushing, then tighten one to two more castellations. Ensure that idler operates freely,
then install MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(5) To install flap interconnect pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Ensure that the pushrod measures 32.12 inches between the centers of the rod end hole
and clevis hole.
(b) Position the flap drive interconnect pushrod rod end into the flap 82977-2 pushrod
assembly clevis. Install the two 82695-39 bushings. Position this assembly into the idler
arms and secure with AN4-13 bolt (head pointing down), two NAS1149F0463P washers
(under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut until the idler arms seat on the bushing and
then tighten one to two more castellations. Check that the idler operates freely and install
MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(c) Place remaining rod end of pushrod between arms on inboard bellcrank. Place two
NAS1149F0463P washers under bolt and one NAS1149F0463P washer under nut. Install
AN4-11 bolt (head pointing down), AN310-4 nut, and MS 24665-134 cotter pin.
(6) To install the inboard flap 82913-2 actuator pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Ensure that pushrod measures 4.86 inches between the centers of the rod end bearings.
(Rod ends should be evenly spaced and locknuts loose).
(b) Attach rod end of the pushrod assembly to the outboard bellcrank arm with the NAS 464-
P4A8 bolt, NAS1149F0463P washer, and MS 21042-4 nut.
(c) Position the pushrod aft rod end bearing on the flap supports. Place one 82695-42
bushing on each side of the bearing. Install the AN4-12A bolt (head pointing outboard),
two NAS1149F0463P washers (under nut), and MS21042-4 nut.
(7) To install the inboard bellcrank: (See Figure 3.) (PIR-85068 AJ.)
(a) Position bellcrank on support bracket.

(b) Install AN4-45 bolt (head pointing down), 82695-38 bushing and AN310-4 nut. Tighten the
nut until the bracket arms seat on the bushing, then tighten one to two more castellations.
(c) Check for a maximum of 0.035 inch ver tical end play of the bellcrank. Use
NAS1149F0432P washers to reduce end play to a minimum and allow free rotation
without any binding on top as required. Use NAS1149F0632P washers to reduce end play
to a minimum and allow free rotation without any binding on bottom as required. Install
MS24665-134 cotter pin.
(d) Attach flap interconnect pushrod to upper arms on bellcrank. Use NAS1149F0432P
washers as required (Max 4 top, 4 bottom permitted), maintaining neutral alignment of
bearing within the bellcrank. Secure pushrod with AN4-11 bolt (head pointing down), one
NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Install MS24665-134 cotter pin.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Attach inboard flap actuator 82913-2 pushrod to long arms on bellcrank with NAS464-
P4A8 bolt, MS21042-4 nut, and NAS1149F0463P washer.
(f) Attach flap drive pushrod to lower arms on bellcrank with the NAS464-P549 bolt and MS
21042-5 nut
(8) To install the flap drive pushrod assembly: (Refer to Figures 2 and 3)
(a) Ensure that the pushrod being installed measures 18.58 inches (left), or 27.34 inches
(right), between the centers of the rod end holes.
(b) Slide the pushrod through appropriate flap drive housing.
(c) For left flap drive pushrod:
1 Position flap drive pushrod clevis in center of U bracket on actuator-motor assembly.
Insert the two 82695-96 bushings. Place U shaped clevis on link “E” over actuator-
motor bracket. Secure with AN4-16A bolt, NAS1149F0432P washer (under head),
NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), and MS21042-4 nut.
2 Secure other end of pushrod to the left inboard bellcrank assembly with a NAS464-
P5A9 bolt, and MS 21042-5 nut.
(d) Attach right flap drive pushrod:
Position flap drive pushrod in U shaped bracket on end of tube assembly. Insert the two
82695-97 bushings. Position the U shaped bracket on end of arm assembly over bushings
with one each NAS1149F0663P and NAS1149F0632P washers between bushings and
arm assembly bracket. Secure with the AN24-34A bolt, placing NAS1149F0432P washer
under bolt head. Install MS21042-4 nut.
(e) Tighten the hose clamp on the small end of the bellows.
(9) To install the aft link assembly: (Refer to Figure 3)
(a) Position aft link on mounting brackets. Secure with AN4H34 bolt, two NAS1149F0463P
washers (under nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut finger tight plus one or two
castellations. Insure that the aft link operates freely. Install MS 24665-134 cotter pin and
safety with MS 20995C32 wire.
(b) Install two 82695-97 bushings in hole in tube assembly. Move aft link arms over hole in
tube assembly. Move arm assembly yoke over hole, placing one each NAS1149F0663P
and NAS1149F0632P washers between yoke and aft link arms. Insert AN24-34A bolt
through yoke, arms, and actuator. Secure bolt with NAS1149F0432P washer and
MS21042-4 nut.
(10) To install “E” link: (Refer to Figure 2)
(a) Position link “E” between support brackets.
(b) Install AN4H30 bolt, one each NAS1149F0463P and NAS1149F0432P washers (under
nut), and AN310-4 nut. Tighten nut finger tight plus one to two castellations. Ensure that
the link is free to pivot, then install MS24665-134 cotter pin. Safety with MS20995C32
wire.
(c) Secure link “E” to the pushrod and the motor-actuator unit with two 82695-96 bushings,
NAS1149F0432P washer (under head), NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), AN4-16A
bolt, and MS21042-4 nut.
(d) Secure link “E” to connecting arm assembly clevis.and push rod link clevis with
NAS1149F0463P, AN4-13A bolt, and MS21042-4 nut.
(e) Attach the flap linear potentiometer to link “E” with AN3-10A bolt, one NAS1149F0332P
washer (under head), two NAS1149F0363P (under nut), two NAS1149F0332P (one on
each side of the bearing), and a NAS679A3W nut.
3G7 27-50-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Flap Motor-Actuator
(1) Removal: (Refer to Figure 2)
(a) Lower flaps to the full down position
WARNING: PULL ELECTRIC FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER, DISCONNECT BATTERY,
AND CHECK THAT NO EXTERNAL POWER IS CONNECTED TO
AIRPLANE IN ORDER TO INSURE THAT NO ELECTRICAL POWER IS
BEING APPLIED TO FLAP SYSTEM.
(b) Disconnect flap actuator motor wiring.
(c) Remove MS21042-4 nut, NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut), NAS1149F0432P washer
(under head), AN4-16A bolt, and two 82695-96 bushings connecting left end of actuator
left flap drive pushrod and “E” link.
(d) Remove AN24-34A bolt, two 82695-97 bushings, one NAS1149F0432P washer two each
NAS1149F0663P and NAS1149F0632P washers, and MS21042-4 nut securing right
pushrod clevis to the tube assembly, the aft link assembly, and the arm assembly.
(d) Remove motor-actuator and attached tube from aircraft.
(e) Remove the two MS51966-112 set screws from actuator jackscrew coupling.
(f) Unscrew tube from actuator.
NOTE: Motor and actuator remain together as one unit.
(2) Installation: (Refer to Figure 2)
WARNING: PULL ELECTRIC FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER, DISCONNECT BATTERY, AND
CHECK THAT NO EXTERNAL POWER IS CONNECTED TO AIRPLANE IN
ORDER TO INSURE THAT NO ELECTRICAL POWER IS BEING APPLIED TO
FLAP SYSTEM.
NOTE: It may be necessary to rotate the flap motor-actuator coupling by hand to extend
actuator jackscrew to full down position.
(a) Insert actuator into push tube and secure with the two MS 51966-112 set screws.
(b) Install actuator-push tube assembly to right pushrod clevis to the tube assembly, the aft
link assembly, and the arm assembly. Secure with AN24-34A bolt, two 82695-97
bushings, one NAS1149F0432P washer one each NAS1149F0663P and
NAS1149F0632P washer between bushings and arm assembly bracket, and MS21042-4
nut.
(c) Connect the left flap drive pushrod clevis in center of U bracket on actuator-motor
assembly. Insert the two 82695-96 bushings. Place U shaped clevis on link “E” over
actuator-motor bracket. Secure with AN4-16A bolt, NAS1149F0432P washer (under
head), NAS1149F0463P washer (under nut) and MS21042-4 nut.
(d) Connect flap motor-actuator wiring.
(e) Connect battery terminals.
(f) Check flap rigging and operation (refer to Rigging Flaps).
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Flap System Rigging

WARNING: PULL ELECTRIC FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER.
A. Before rigging flaps.
(1) Disconnect flap pushrods from wing bellcranks
(2) Rig flaps before lubricating flap tracks.
(3) Check that the length of the arm assembly (Figure 1) is 14.92 inches. If necessary to reset,
adjust the rod end on arm assembly.
B. Rigging flaps.
(1) Check that jack screw set dimension 0.20 ± 0.06 If adjustments is necessary, hand turn jack
screw by grasping rubber universal on motor shaft
(2) Check that selector lever is in up (0° ) position on instrument panel. Position limit switches at
null point by adjusting clevis end of selector cable.
(3) Set circuit breaker. Motor should not run. Move selector lever to 10° position. Motor should run
and extend jack screw. Return to up position. Jack screw should return to 0.20 ± 0.06
dimension.
(4) Hold flap trailing edge at approximately W.S. 93.00. Cycle flaps by hand through full travel
several times. Flap rollers should operate smoothly in the track without a tendency to grab or
bind.
(5) Keep flap rollers firmly bottomed out in forward end of center and inboard flap track slots.
Attach flap rods to wing bellcranks. Outboard flap rod is to be snug, allowing no flap end play.
Inboard rod is to be snugged and then tightened one half turn.
NOTE: Hold up on flap trailing edge when checking the 36° and 0° positions, as required in
steps (6) and (7).
(6) Move selector lever to Full flaps down position. Verify flap position of 36° +0, -1. Right and left
flap shall be within 1° of each other.
(7) Move selector lever to the Full up position. Verify flap position of 0° ± 1.
CAUTION: VERIFY FREE AND CORRECT MOVEMENT OF FLAPS. WHILE IT WOULD

ACCORDINGLY, UPON COMPLETION OF FLAP RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT,
VERIFY THAT THE FLAPS MOVE UP WHEN THE SELECTOR LEVER IS UP;
AND, THAT THE FLAPS MOVE DOWN WHEN THE SELECTOR LEVER IS
DOWN.
3G9 27-50-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Flap System Adjustment

Use the following procedure to adjust flap system:
A. To bring flaps to within a 1° position of each other, adjust the rod end on either the left or right
inboard push rod assembly (Figure 1) in the fuselage.
NOTE: Maintain a slight up pressure on the underside of the flaps when checking flap travel.
B. To increase flap travel, move rod end on 85097-2 push rod assembly (See Figure 1) further out in
the slot toward forward end of the aircraft. To decrease flap travel, move rod end in the slot toward
the aft end of the aircraft.
NOTE: It is acceptable to have up to 3/16th inch vertical end play at flap trailing edge in the 0° flap
position, measured at center of flap track.
C. After any adjustment to the flap system, check for proper operation. See Caution under Rigging.
6. Flap Bellcrank Distortion Inspection
If flaps have been extended at or above VFE, inspect the flap bellcranks for evidence of distortion.
A. If the paint is cracked or peeling anywhere along the bellcrank, torsional movement has occurred.
B. Remove the paint and inspect for cracks at either arm on the bellcrank shaft near the welds. Use a
dye penetrant method of inspection.
(1) If cracks are not found, repaint the bellcrank(s) and reinstall.
(2) If cracked, replace the bellcrank and inspect the flap system for distortion or damage to the
extension rods and rod ends.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3G11 27-50-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 27-50-00 3G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
28
FUEL
3G13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28
CHAPTER CHAPTER
28-List of 1 Apr 15/07 28-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
28-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
28-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 18 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 28-40-00 1 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 28-00-00 1 3G19

Fuel System 1 3G19
Description 1 3G19
Troubleshooting 2 3G20
Fuel System Functional Test 4 3G22
STORAGE 28-10-00 1 3H5

Access Covers 1 3H5
Leak Evaluation 2 3H6
Fuel System Leakage Inspection 5 3H9
DISTRIBUTION 28-20-00 1 3H15

Header Tanks 1 3H15
Description 1 3H15
Float Switch 1 3H15
Removal 1 3H15
Installation 2 3H16
Float Valve 3 3H17
Removal 3 3H17
Installation 3 3H17
Fuel Boost Pumps 4 3H18
Removal 4 3H18
Installation 6 3H20
Trim Fittings 6 3H20
3/8 Inch Suction Line 9 3H23
Manual Fuel Shut-off Valve 9 3H23
Fuel Filter 10 3H24
Removal 10 3H24
Installation 11 3I1
Engine Driven Pump (EDP) Low Pressure 11 3I1
Removal 11 3I1
Replacement 11 3I1
Installation 11 3I1
Fuel Return System 13 3I3
3G17 28 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
INDICATING 28-40-00 1 3I9

Fuel Quantity Indicator 1 3I9
Meggitt EFIS 1 3I9
Avidyne Entegra EFIS 2 3I10
Fuel Quantity Probes 4 3I12
Removal 4 3I12
Testing 5 3I13
Installation 6 3I14
Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration - Meggitt EFIS 6 3I14
Requirements 6 3I14
Procedure 6 3I14
Full Range Check 12 3I20
Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration - Avidyne EFIS 13 3I21
Requirements 13 3I21
Procedure 13 3I21
Full Range Check 17 3J1
Fuel Temperature Indicator 19 3J3
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Fuel System
WARNING: DURING ANY FUEL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE, USE A GROUND WIRE ATTACHED
FROM EACH MAIN GEAR GROUNDING PIN TO SEPARATE APPROVED GROUNDING
STAKES TO PREVENT THE ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION OF AIRPLANE
GROUNDING.
PUBLICATIONS.)
A. Description
(1) Serial numbers 4697001 thru 4697173 only:
The fuel system is designed to minimize complexities inherent to most aircraft fuel systems.
The fuel system consists of two sets of main, inboard, and header wing tanks, boost pumps,
supply and vent fuel lines, and three sump drains and lines. In addition, a fuel return line runs
from the engine high pressure fuel pump to the left header tank. Fuel is pumped from both
wings simultaneously, with float valves and switches employed to prevent air ingestion. The two
header tank sump drains are located on the left and right sides of the lower fwd fuselage. The
fuel filter sump drain is located adjacent to the left header tank sump drain. The EPA collector
tank drain is located on the right side of the lower fwd fuselage. The fuel shut-off valve is
located on the center pedestal and is 'PULL TO SHUT-OFF”.
A small airframe mounted inline electric boost pump is located in each wing root just forward of
the header tanks. Control of these pumps is through a three-position switch located on the left
overhead panel with selections: MAN, OFF, and AUTO. The pumps operate in unison to
provide emergency back up for the engine driven pump, boost pressure for starting, and vapor
suppression at high altitudes. In the AUTO position, a pressure switch activates both pumps
automatically when the fuel pressure from the engine driven pump drops below 9 psig, and
remains activated until the pressure increases to 12 psig. During this period, the FUEL
PRESSURE, L FUEL PUMP, and R FUEL PUMP annunciators will illuminate. As pressure
increases to 12 psig the pumps are turned off and all three annunciators extinguish. Frequent
boost pump cycling should prompt the pilot to select the MAN mode to provide continuous fuel
pressure. In the AUTO mode the pumps are also controlled automatically, but separately, by
the Meggitt Engine Display Unit (EDU) to correct fuel imbalance. A discrete signal from the
EDU activates the boost pump on the "heavy" side if a 25-pound imbalance is reached, and
stays on until fuel is in balance. If the imbalance worsens (to 40 pounds), a second discrete
output from the EDU causes the FUEL IMBALANCE light to blink.
If the pilot finds it necessary to control either pump separately, he or she can do so by pulling
the circuit breaker of the unwanted pump and selecting MAN operation.
During engine start, the fuel return solenoid valve opens and unused fuel is returned to the left
header tank. At engine shutdown, residual fuel drains into the EPA collector tank.
See 28-40-00 and 77-40-00 for more complete descriptions of the fuel indication system.
3G19 28-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Serial numbers 4697174 and up:

The fuel system is designed to minimize complexities inherent to most aircraft fuel systems.
The fuel system consists of two sets of main, inboard, and header wing tanks, boost pumps,
supply, return, and vent fuel lines, and five sump drains and lines. In addition, fuel return lines
run from the engine high pressure fuel pump to both main fuel tanks. Fuel is pumped from both
wings simultaneously, with float valves and switches employed to prevent air ingestion. The two
header tank sump drains are located on the left and right sides of the lower fwd fuselage along
with the fuel return line sump drains. The fuel filter sump drain is located adjacent to the left
header tank sump drain. The fuel shut-off valve is located on the center pedestal and is 'PULL
TO SHUT-OFF”.
A small airframe mounted inline electric boost pump is located in each wing root just forward of
the header tanks. Control of these pumps is through a three-position switch located on the left
overhead panel with selections: MAN, OFF, and AUTO. The pumps operate in unison to
provide emergency back up for the engine driven pump, boost pressure for starting, and vapor
suppression at high altitudes. In the AUTO position, a pressure switch activates both pumps
automatically when the fuel pressure from the engine driven pump drops below 9 psig, and
remains activated until the pressure increases to 12 psig. During this period, the FUEL
PRESSURE, L FUEL PUMP, and R FUEL PUMP annunciators will illuminate. As pressure
increases to 12 psig the pumps are turned off and all three annunciators extinguish. Frequent
boost pump cycling should prompt the pilot to select the MAN mode to provide continuous fuel
pressure. In the AUTO mode the pumps are also controlled automatically, but separately, by
the Meggitt Engine Display Unit (EDU) [or Avidyne Primary Flight Display (PFD)* ] to correct
fuel imbalance. A discrete signal from the EDU (or PFD* ) activates the boost pump on the
"heavy" side if a 25-pound imbalance is reached, and stays on until fuel is in balance. If the
imbalance worsens (to 40 pounds), a second discrete output from the EDU (or PFD* ) causes
the FUEL IMBALANCE light to blink.
* - in S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS
installation.
If the pilot finds it necessary to control either pump separately, he or she can do so by pulling
the circuit breaker of the unwanted pump and selecting MAN operation.
During engine start, the fuel return solenoid valve opens and unused fuel is returned to both
main fuel tanks. At engine shutdown, the fuel purge system (See 71-70-00) blows residual fuel
into the combustion chamber where it is consumed.
During operations in cold weather (i.e. - fuel temperature less than -10 °F) the fuel return
solenoid valve opens and, heated, excess fuel is returned to both main fuel tanks to slow the
cooling of the fuel supply. This permits increased operational time before the minimum fuel
temperature limits are met. See 28-40-00 for details of this system.
See 28-40-00 and 77-40-00 for more complete descriptions of the fuel indication system.
B. Troubleshooting
Chart 1 lists troubles which may occur in the mechanical or electrical portions of the fuel system,
the probable cause and suggested remedy. When troubleshooting, first check from the fuel supply
or power source to the item effected.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 28-00-00 3G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING FUEL SYSTEM

Failure of fuel to flow. Fuel line blocked. Flush fuel system.
Fuel vent blocked. Check and clean vent.
Fuel tanks empty. Check fuel tanks and fill.
Mechanical or electrical Check and replace if
fuel pump failure. necessary.
Manual fuel shut-off valve Push handle in.
pulled.
Manual fuel shut-off valve Check for obstructions,
obstructed or failed. replace as required.
Fuel quantity display Circuit breaker open. Check and reset.
fails to operate.
Faulty DAU or EDU* harness. Check and repair.
Faulty DAU or EDU*. Check, test, replace
as required.
Faulty fuel probe(s). Replace probe(s).
Low fuel pressure No fuel. See failure of fuel to flow,
indication or pressure above.
surges.
Faulty fuel pressure switch. Replace switch.
Obstructed or faulty Check, clean, replace
pump. as required.
DAU = Meggitt Data Acquisition Unit, see 28-40-00 and 77-40-00.
EDU* = Meggitt Engine DIsplay Unit, see 28-40-00 and 77-40-00.
* PFD and/or MFD in S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS.
3G21 28-00-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Fuel System Functional Test (PIR-PPS60188, Rev. I.)
Perform the following test whenever the engine low fuel pressure switch, the fuel shutoff valve, a
fuel boost pump, a fuel boost pump trim fitting, a fuel boost pump pressure switch, a header tank
float switch, the Meggitt Data Acquisition Unit (DAU), and the Meggitt Engine Display Unit (EDU)
[or the Avidyne Primary Flight Display (PFD)*] are replaced.
* - if installed, in S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up.
(1) Pull tee handle of fuel shutoff valve aft to the "CLOSED" position (See Figure 1).
(2) Ensure aircraft is leveled (See 8-20-00).
(3) Remove the fuel filter access plate (lower left side of forward fuselage). Remove fuel system
drain cap (See Figure 7, 28-20-00) and connect a hose to the fuel system drain port (1/2 inch).
Route hose to a fuel container (50 USG) and cap.
(4) Drain (or refuel) left and right wing tanks to approximately 150 lbs (68 kg) in each side (i.e. -
approximately 300 lbs (136 kg) total).
(5) Verify fuel tank vents (underneath left and right outboard wing) are clear and unobstructed.
(6) Push in the left and right header tank sump drains (underneath forward fuselage; see Figure 5,
28-20-00) momentarily and confirm fuel is draining.
NOTE: If fuel system has previously been completely drained, repriming the header tank
sump drains can take 10 to 15 seconds before fuel starts to drain.
(7) Ensure “FUEL PUMPS” switch is in the "OFF" position.
(8) Ensure engine condition lever is in the "CUT-OFF" position.
(9) Apply power to the aircraft.
(10) Verify "FUEL PRESSURE" light is illuminated on the ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(11) Select the “FUEL PUMPS” switch to "AUTO" position.
(12) Verify both pumps are operating and "L FUEL PUMP" and "R FUEL PUMP" lights are
illuminated on the ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(13) Push tee handle of fuel shutoff valve forward to the "OPEN" position (Refer to Figure 1).
(14) Verify "L FUEL PUMP", "R FUEL PUMP" and "FUEL PRESSURE" annunciator lights on the
ANNUNCIATOR panel are cycling.
(15) Select the “FUEL PUMPS” switch to "MAN" position.
(16) Verify "L FUEL PUMP" and "R FUEL PUMP" annunciator lights are illuminated and the "FUEL
PRESSURE" light extinguishes.
(17) Pull circuit breaker of right fuel pump. Verify right fuel pump stops operating and the "R FUEL
PUMP" light on the ANNUNCIATOR panel extinguishes.
(18) Push in circuit breaker of the right fuel pump.
(19) Pull circuit breaker of left fuel pump. Verify left fuel pump stops operating and the "L FUEL
PUMP" light on the ANNUNCIATOR panel extinguishes.
(20) Push circuit breaker of the left fuel pump.
(21) Select “FUEL PUMPS” switch to the "OFF" position.
(22) Pull tee handle of fuel shutoff valve aft to the "CLOSED" position (Refer to Figure 1).
(23) Uncap hose connected to the fuel system drain port and push the tee handle of the fuel shutoff
valve forward to the "OPEN" position (Refer to Figure 1).
(24) Test the right side per “Single side test,” below.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 28-00-00 3G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(25) Single side test.

(a) Pull circuit breaker of the fuel pump on the side to be tested and select “FUEL PUMPS”
switch to the "AUTO" position.
(b) Verify “FUEL PRESSURE” light is illuminated on the ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(c) Verify "FUEL IMBALANCE" light illuminates when the difference in fuel quantity, between
right and left wing, reaches 25 lbs (12 kg) for a minimum of 5 seconds.
(d) Verify “FUEL IMBALANCE” light starts blinking when the difference in fuel quantity,
between right and left wing, reaches 40 lbs (18 kg) for a minimum of 60 seconds.
(e) Select “FUEL PUMPS” switch to "OFF" after imbalance reaches 50 lbs (22 kg).
(f) Remove connector P421 at the engine low fuel pressure switch (located on the Tee-fitting
at the inlet to the engine oil-to-fuel heater).
(g) Verify "FUEL PRESSURE" light extinguishes on the ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(h) Push in circuit breaker of the fuel pump on the side being tested.
(i) Select “FUEL PUMPS” switch to "AUTO".
(j) Verify pump is operating and the "x FUEL PUMP" light is illuminated on the
ANNUNCIATOR panel for the side being tested.
(k) Verify “FUEL IMBALANCE” light stops blinking when imbalance reaches 30 lbs (14 kg).
(l) Verify "FUEL IMBALANCE" light extinguishes and the boost pump on the side being
tested turns off when fuel quantity balance is reached between the left and right wing.
Select the “FUEL PUMPS” switch to the "OFF" position.
(m) Re-install connector P421 on the engine low fuel pressure switch.
(n) Verify "FUEL PRESSURE" light is illuminated on the ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(26) Test the left side per “Single side test,” above.
(27) Select “FUEL PUMPS” switch to the "MAN" position.
(28) When total fuel quantity drops below 100 lbs (46 kg), verify “LOW FUEL” warning light is
illuminated on the ANNUNCIATOR panel and “TOTAL” fuel quantity on the EDU page [or the
Avidyne Primary Flight Display (PFD)*] turns red.
* - if installed, in S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up.
(29) Record fuel quantity in the left and right wing tanks when header tank fuel float switch
automatically turns off left and right boost pumps (fuel quantity remaining should be 0 to 10 lbs
(0 to 6 kg) per side).
(30) Select the “FUEL PUMPS” switch to the “OFF” position.
(31) If required, rebalance fuel flow with Piper Kit No. 766-683.
NOTE: Whenever a fuel boost pump or fuel boost pump trim fitting is replaced, the fuel flow
must be rebalanced by adjusting the trim fittings. Equipment and instructions to
balance the fuel flow are provided in Piper Kit No. 766-683.
(32) When fuel flow rebalance is complete or, if not required, remove drain hose, reinstall fuel
system drain cap and access plate; and otherwise return aircraft to flight configuration.
(33) Fuel system functional test is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
3G23 28-00-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS
51.5 40 29 29 40 51.5 82.5 107.5 116
HEADER TANKS
8.8 US GAL EACH
1 3 4 5
1 2
S S
T
PS TF
SHUT-OFF MAIN TANK
VALVE TF PS INBOARD TANK 64.2 US GAL
HANDLE 12 US GAL
IN COCKPIT
RIGHT WING ONLY
FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD
3/8 INCH SUCTION LINE
LP
PS
HEAT FILTER
EXCHANGER
HP FIREWALL
RESTRICTOR
SV
SYSTEM DRAIN CAP
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT
FLOW
XTDUCER NOTE: OUTBOARD OF W.S. 51.5, LEFT AND RIGHT SYSTEMS ARE THE SAME,
EXCEPT AS NOTED.
FLOW
DIVIDER
FUEL
102430 2 AM
NOZZLES
Effectivity
4697031 thru 4697173; and
4697001 thru 4697030 Fuel System
with Kit# 766-682 installed Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 28-00-00 3G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEGEND
FLOW DIRECTION 3 WAY FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE

(MANUALLY CONTROLLED
GRAVITY / SUCTION FEED LINE BY CABLE)
VENT LINE
FUEL FILTER
DRAIN LINE (WITH BYPASS INDICATOR)
FUEL RETURN LINE
VENT ASSY, MAIN FUEL TANK FUEL PRESSURE SWITCH

(WS 224.5)
FUEL FILLER (WS 201) DRAIN (SUMP AND FILTER)
1 FUEL PROBE #1 (WS 42.00)

2 DRAIN CAP (SYSTEM)
FUEL PROBE #2 (WS 94.08)
4 TRIM FITTING
FUEL PROBE #4 (WS 169.60)
T FUEL TEMP SENSOR
NIPPLE ASSY (S/N'S 4697159 AND UP;
AND 4697001 THRU 4697158
NIPPLE ASSY WITH SCREEN
WITH KIT# 767-380 INSTALLED.)
(.01 MESH)
NIPPLE / SWING CHECK VALVE ASSY
SOLENOID VALVE:
FUEL FLOAT VALVE
- S/N'S 4691001 THRU 4697173,
S FUEL FLOAT SWITCH OPEN DURING START ONLY.
- S/N'S 4607174 AND UP,
CHECK VALVE WITH THERMAL RELIEF OPEN DURING START AND
OPEN WHEN FUEL TEMP
FUEL BOOST PUMP (LEFT AND RIGHT) LESS THAN -10 ˚F AND
FUEL QUANTITY
LP ENGINE LOW PRESSURE FUEL PUMP GREATER THAN 100 LBS.
(24 ± 1 PSIG)
HP ENGINE HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP

(1000 PSIG MAX.)
Effectivity
4697031 & up; and
Fuel System 4697001 thru 4697030
Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 2) with Kit# 766-682 installed
3H1 28-00-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS WS
51.5 40 29 29 40 51.5 82.5 107.5 116
HEADER TANKS
8.8 US GAL EACH
1 3 4 5
1 2
S S
T
PS TF
SHUT-OFF MAIN TANK
VALVE TF PS INBOARD TANK 64.2 US GAL
HANDLE 12 US GAL
IN COCKPIT
RIGHT WING ONLY
FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD
3/8 INCH SUCTION LINE
LP CHECK VALVES / TEE ASSY

PS
HEAT FILTER
EXCHANGER
HP FIREWALL
SV
SYSTEM DRAIN CAP
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT
FLOW
XTDUCER NOTE: OUTBOARD OF W.S. 51.5, LEFT AND RIGHT SYSTEMS ARE THE SAME,
EXCEPT AS NOTED.
FLOW
DIVIDER
FUEL
102430 2 AM+
NOZZLES
Effectivity Fuel System

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 28-00-00 3H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: Fuel
"FUEL PUMPS" SWITCH Pressure Enable
1. Individual pump operation can only be attained by pulling Switch "YES" Discretes
appropriate circuit breaker. ( >12 psig )
2. NFA = No Further Action.
MAN OFF AUTO
?
3. "FUEL PRESSURE" annunciator independent of "FUEL PUMPS"
switch position. from
FUEL PRESSURE
4. "FUEL IMBALANCE" annunciator has independent discrete. battery 2nd
5. If imbalance increases to 40 pounds, annunciator blinks. "NO"
pole
( annunciator - red )
(see Note 3)
LEFT RIGHT "NO"

"NO" (NFA)
(NFA)
Left Right
"YES" "YES" Heavy
Heavy
( 25# or > ) ( 25# or > )
? "OR" GATE
?
"OR" GATE
( Left ) ( Right )
SWITCHES AND ANNUNCIATORS
PRESTART
Master Switch ............................. "ON"
"FUEL PUMPS" Switch .............. "AUTO"
Left Fuel Pressure (annunciator) ....... "ON" (Then "cycling") Right

"NO" Float Switch "YES" Fuel Pump (annunciator) L&R .... "ON" (Then "cycling") Float Switch "NO"
(NFA) FUEL HIGH "FUEL PUMPS" Switch .............. "OFF" FUEL HIGH (NFA)
? ?
START / POST START
"FUEL PUMPS" Switch .............. "MAN" ("OFF" after start)
Fuel Pressure (annunciator) ....... "OFF" "YES"
Fuel Pump (annunciator) L&R .... "ON" ("OFF" after start)
TAKEOFF / POST TAKEOFF

Left "FUEL PUMPS" Switch .............. "MAN" (Then "AUTO") Right
Pressure Pressure
Fuel Pump (annunciator) L&R .... "ON" (Then "OFF") Switch
Switch
PRESSURE Fuel Pressure (annunciator) ....... "OFF" PRESSURE
? ?
LEFT RIGHT
"YES" discrete outputs "YES"
Energize Energize
L FUEL R FUEL
"ON" L FUEL R FUEL "ON"
PUMP PUMP
PUMP PUMP
( annunciator - amber ) ( annunciator - amber )

Heavy FUEL Heavy
IMBALANCE
Left Right
FUEL
IMBALANCE Heavy left or right discrete to
from battery "FUEL IMBALANCE" annunciator PPS 60188 G
( see Notes 4 & 5 )
( annunciator - amber )
Fuel System Operational Logic

Figure 2
3H3 28-00-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 28-00-00 3H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORAGE
The wing tanks are an integral part of the outboard wing sections. The liquid tight wing tanks are formed
by bonding the wing skins with the ribs and stringers (i.e. - wet-wings). Holes in the ribs and spar permit
movement of the fuel within the wings. There are ten access covers on the underside of each wing for
access to the sealed portion of the tank.
1. Access Covers
In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697238, wet-wing access covers are sealed with sealant and secured with screws.
In S/N’s 4697239 and up, the wet-wing access covers use Mold-in-Place seals and are secured with
screws.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4697239 and up, the early plain access covers can be used if the newer Mold-in-Place
seal access covers are not available, but they then must be installed using sealant as described
for S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697238 under Installation, below.
NOTE: In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697238, if any press fit / clinch nut in an access cover retainer becomes
loose and spins, it may be replaced with a riveted nutplate as follows:
Press Fit / Clinch Nut replaced with Nutplate and Rivets
PS10062-10-2 MS21059L08 MS20426AD3
(467-511) (477-809)
PS10062-10-3 NAS1474A08 MS20426AD3
(603-312) (477-899)
A. Removal
(1) Drain all fuel from the wing tank being serviced.
(2) Ensure electrical power is “OFF”.
(3) Remove the access cover as follows:
(a) In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697238, remove the screws securing the access cover. With a
suitable tool, pry the access cover away from the wing, taking care not to damage the
mating surfaces - especially on the wing. When the access cover becomes free, carefully
lower the cover and sender out of the wing until the electrical connection can be reached
and disconnected.
(b) In S/N’s 4697239 and up, remove the screws securing the access cover and carefully
lower the cover and sender out of the wing until the electrical connection can be reached
and disconnected.
B. Installation (PIR-PPS50076, Rev. New.)
(1) Ensure electrical power is “OFF”.

(2) In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697238, apply Products Research Co. (PRC) PR1428-B-2 (or
PR1403G-B-2) sealant and install the access cover on the wing with screws. Allow sealant to
cure 72 hours before refilling tanks.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACETONE TO CLEAN COVER AND MATING SURFACE, AS IT IS
NOT COMPATIBLE WITH MOLD-IN-PLACE SEAL MATERIAL.
(3) In S/N’s 4697239 and up, clean access cover and mating surface using isopropyl alcohol. Allow
to air dry for 15 minutes minimum. Loosely install all screws. Using the sequence in Figure 1,
lightly snug all screws. Following the same pattern torque all screws to 25-30 inch.-lbs.
3H5 28-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Final torque all screws to 25 to 30 inch pounds
8 4 1 6 10
12 14
16 18
20 19
15
17
11
13 9 5 3
2 7
PPS 50076 New
Effectivity Fuel Access Cover Torque Pattern

4697239 and up Figure 1
2. Leak Evaluation
Routine monitoring of the fuel storage system and prompt attention to any anomalies discovered will
ensure trouble-free operation. Most fuel leaks will be identified by the pilot during pre-flight inspection
and will generally consist of a stain or leak around the vent scoop, filler, drain valves, and wing surface in
the wet-wing or along the plumbing lines in the wing or engine compartment. The following provides
criteria for evaluating various categories of leaks and the maintenance action required.
A. Wing tanks.
WARNING: CAREFULLY EXAMINE ANY LEAKAGE TO ENSURE THAT IT IS NOT
PROGRESSING TO A CRITICAL AREA OF THE AIRPLANE AND THAT THERE IS
NO POSSIBILITY OF FUEL BEING BLOWN INTO THE FUSELAGE AREAS.
(1) Upper wing surface.
The airplane may be released for flight with a fuel leak in the upper wing surface provided the
required fuel load will allow the fuel level to remain below the leak area.
(2) Lower wing surface.
Aircraft may be released for flight with fuel leaks in the lower wing skin as follows: (See Figure 2)
Stain (Detail A), Seep (Detail B), and Heavy Seep (Detail C).
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 28-10-00 3H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
FUEL LEAK EVALUATION
FUEL TANK HEAVY RUNNING AND

LEAKAGE LOCATION STAIN SEEP SEEP RUN DRIPPING
Upper Wing Surface 1 1 2 3 4
Rear of Fwd. Spar 1 2 3 3 4
Behind Leading Edge 2 2 3 4 4
Lower Wing Surface 1 2 3 4 4
1. No repair action required, frequent inspections must be made to assure that leak does not
progress.
2. No immediate repair required. Frequent inspection must be made to assure that leak does
not progress. Repair must be made within the next 100 hours.
3. Flight may be continued to base or to repair facility for repair at pilot’s discretion.
4. Immediate repair is required.
(3) Fuel leakage from the integral fuel tanks (i.e. - wet-wing) can be divided into the five categories
shown in Figure 2. Each category is identified by a visual examination of the wetted area
around the source of leakage over time.
To evaluate a leak, clean all wetted area in the vicinity of a leak. Wait two (2) hours and
reexamine the leak area and apply the following criteria to identify the leak category and
required maintenance action. (See Figure 2 and Chart 1.)
(a) A stain (Detail A) is evaluated as a leak where fuel wets an area around the apparent leak
source such that the wetted area width is not over two (2) inches.
(b) A seep (Detail B) is defined as a leak where the fuel wets an area around the apparent
leak source such that the wetted area width is not over six (6) inches. The fuel must not
run, flow, drip, or have any resemblance to any one of these conditions.
(c) A heavy seep (Detail C) is a leak where fuel appears to spread very slowly and covers an
area larger than the six (6) inches specified under seep, but does not flow, run or drip.
(d) A run (Detail D) is defined as a leak where the fuel is dripping at a rate of less than ten
(10) drops per minute or flowing slowly. A leak of this type is readily identifiable as fuel will
appear immediately after wiping the area clean.
(e) A running or dripping leak (Detail E) is any leak in excess of the run leak (Detail D). This
type requires immediate repair of the leak.
NOTE: These five (5) categories are based on reexamination of the leak two (2) hours after
the wetted area has been thoroughly cleaned.
B. Fuel plumbing.
WARNING: EVIDENCE OF FUEL LEAKAGE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT MUST BE
REPAIRED AND THE AREA CLEANED PRIOR TO STARTING ENGINE.
(1) All such leaks must be repaired before further flight.
(2) Leaks in the power plant plumbing can be seen with the engine cowling removed.
3H7 28-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Leak Size Pattern

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 28-10-00 3H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Fuel System Leakage Inspection (PIR, PPS60049-5 Rev. C.)
The integrity of the fuel system can be verified by constructing a test fixture as shown in Figure 3 and
conducting the following tests, as required.
A. Requirements
(1) Test fixture as shown in Figure 3.
The test fixture will be used to conduct the low-pressure portion of this test and will contain:
(a) A quick-disconnect fitting (to provide a means of quickly removing the air source).
(b) A needle valve (to control and close off trapped air).
(c) A water manometer (to measure air pressure in inches of water). The height of the
manometer hose on the test fixture shall be maintained at 43 inches and open to ambient.
(d) A special fuel cap with two fittings: one for air (painted red) and a second for the
manometer. The air hose shall be attached to the fitting containing a small orifice (painted
red) and the manometer shall be attached to the 2nd fitting. To avoid the possibility of
crossing the connections, both hoses shall be attached to their correct fitting in a semi-
permanent fashion. The shop air connection shall be restricted with a small orifice
(~.025 in.) to minimize chance of over-pressurizing the fuel tanks in event operator fails to
close needle valve once system reaches test pressure 42 in. H2O (~1.52 psid).
NOTE: If over-pressurization occurs, water in the manometer will be expelled when it
reaches 43 inches, allowing incoming shop air to exhaust to ambient. However,
operator will not depend on this fail-safe feature and will close needle valve
immediately upon reaching test pressure.
(e) Appropriate hoses to connect shop air and manometer to the aircraft.
(2) Appropriate caps shall be available for closing open lines and vents.
(3) A mild solution of soap and water shall be available for leak detection. Only Colgate-Palmolive
Co. Liquid M Mild 1 Hand Soap shall be used in this solution.
B. Tests
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE ACCESS PLATES IN THE MAIN, INBOARD, OR HEADER TANKS.
Remove access plates and panels as required to access the various fuel system components.
(1) Fuel Supply Line Tests - High Pressure (10 psig):
(a) Preparations
Defuel aircraft. (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(b) Engine to Check Valves Test
1 Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
2 Disconnect fuel supply hose at engine driven pump (EDP) inlet (See 28-20-00, Figure 5).
NOTE: Leak test downstream of EDP shall be by visual inspection only. After
refueling aircraft activate electric fuel pump(s) and inspect for leaks.
Allowable leakage through shaft seal of EDP shall not exceed two (2) drops
per minute.
3 Connect shop air to hose via needle valve and suitable pressure gage.
4 Slowly open needle valve to 10 psig, close valve and disconnect shop air.
5 Check for leaks in fuel supply line up to manual fuel shut-off valve.
3H9 28-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEAK TEST SETUP PPS 60049-3 G
(Fuel System – Meridian )
NOZZLES
Clear plastic tubing
Scale: Each minor tick = 0.2” H 2 O

FLOW
DIVIDER [Note: 42” H 2 O = ~1.52 psid]
FLOW
TRAN SDUCER
open to ambient
FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
Fuel Return Line Max height ~ 43” H 2 O
SOL
(left Side Only)
High Pressure
HEAT Pump
EXCHANGER Zero mark
Low Pressure 1. Fill to ~22” with "Gatorade"
Pump Low Pressure or other suitable non-toxic
~22 ” coloring.
Switch
2. Adjust scale to zero mark.
Disconnect @
this point for
FIREWALL supply line TEST FIXTURE CKJ622581
Fuel Fil t er leak-test
Manometer Hose
Fuel Shut off Valv e [Connect to open fitting]
(SOV )
Check Valve Vent (on bottom of wing)
(2 Plcs)
Special filler cap
PRESSURE BULKHEAD Tr im Fitting &
Pressure Switch
P P TF (2 Plcs)
TF
S S
Boost Pump WING STATIONS 116 134 156 182 209 240
(Typ 2 Plcs)
INBOARD
HEADER TANK
Return Line [Perform leaktest
during low pressure
test of LH side] RIGHT MAIN TANK
29 51.5 82.5 107.5

Disc
Needle Valve
Header Sump Drains Connect shop air to
& Fuel Filter Drains Shop Air restricted fitting (red)
Quick
(Ensure valves are Supply
closed) 3 Plcs Disconnect
Effectivity Fuel System Leak Test Set-up

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 28-10-00 3H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEAK TEST SETUP PPS 60049-5 Rev. C.
(Fuel System – Meridian )
NOZZLES
Clear pl astic tubing
Fuel Return Scale: Each minor tick = 0.2” H 2 O

FLOW
Pressure DIVIDER [Note: 42” H 2 O = ~1.52 psid]
Switch
FLOW
TRAN SDUCER
open to ambient
PS FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
Max height ~ 43” H 2 O
SO
Fuel Return
Line
High Pressure
Pump
HEAT
EXCHANGER Zero mark
Low Pressure 1. Fill to ~22” with "Gatorade"
Pump Low Pressure or other suitable non-toxic
~22 ” coloring.
Switch
2. Adjust scale to zero mark.
Disconnect @
inlet of LP Pump
FIREWALL for supply line TEST FIXTURE CKJ622581
Fuel Fil ter leak-tes t
Manomet er Hose
Fuel Shut off Valv e [Connect to open fitting]
(SOV )
Check Valve Vent (on bottom of wing)
(2 Plcs)
Special filler cap
PRESSURE BULKHEAD Tr im Fitting &
Pressure Switch
(2 Plcs)
T T
Boost Pump WING STATIONS 116 134 156 182 209 240
(Typ 2 Plcs)
INBOARD
HEADER TANK
Fuel Return
Check Valves 2 Plcs
RIGHT MAIN TANK
Fil ter & Sump Drains 29 51.5 82.5 107.5

(Assure Valves are Disc
closed) 5 Plcs
Needle Valve
Disconnect @ LH & RH Connect shop air to
outboard tank fuel return Shop Air
Quick restricted fitting (red)
Supply
nipple for return line leak-test Disconnect
Fuel System Leak Test Set-up Effectivity

Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 2) 4697174 and up
3H11 28-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6 Push in manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit), and repeat steps (3) and (4).
7 Check for leaks in supply line(s) up to check valve(s) in each wing.
8 Reconnect fuel supply hose and tighten connection.
(c) Between Check Valve and Header Tank Test
NOTE: Remove fuel cap(s) for this test.
1 Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
2 Remove pressure switch at trim fitting for side being tested. (See 28-20-00,
Figures 3 and 4.)
3 Connect shop air to trim fitting via needle valve and suitable pressure gage.
4 Slowly open needle valve to 10 psig, close valve and disconnect shop air.
5 Check for leaks in fuel supply line between check valve and header tank.
6 Reconnect pressure switch and torque as specified in 28-20-00, Fuel Boost
Pump - Installation.
7 Repeat for opposite wing, as required.
(2) Fuel Return Lines Leak Test (S/N’s 4697174 and up only.)
NOTE: Perform this test before performing step (3), below.
In serial numbers 4697174 and up only, the fuel return lines can be leak tested as follows:
(a) Remove fuel caps on both wings.
(b) Disconnect the fuel return lines at the left and right outboard fuel tank nipples (W.S. 116)
and cap both lines.
(c) Disconnect fuel return hose at fuel return solenoid valve.
(d) Connect shop air to fuel return hose via needle valve and suitable pressure gauge.
(e) Slowly open needle valve to 10 psig. Close valve and disconnect shop air.
(f) If system will not hold 10 psig:
1 Check for leaks in both fuel return lines.
2 Repair leaks by tightening or replacing components.
3 Retest as above to confirm repair.
(g) Remove test equipment, reconnect the fuel return hose to fuel return solenoid valve and
tighten.
(h) Reconnect both the left and right fuel return lines to the outboard fuel tank nipples.
(i) Reinstall fuel caps on both wings.
(3) Wing Tanks and Fuel Return Line Test - Low Pressure (42 in. H2O).
NOTE: In serial numbers 4697001 thru 4697173 only, the fuel return line will only be
pressurized during testing of left wing.
(a) Defuel aircraft or, if only testing one side, defuel that wing only. (See 12-10-00, Draining
Fuel System.)
(b) Install special filler cap from check fixture on test wing.
(c) Verify shop air hose from stand is attached to red fitting on test filler cap, and manometer
attached to other fitting.
(d) Verify needle valve is fully closed, and connect shop air to quick-disconnect fitting.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 28-10-00 3H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Verify sump valve is in closed position.

(f) Install plug in vent outlet.
(g) Slowly open needle valve and watch for a rise in pressure in the manometer.
NOTE: If manometer fails to rise, close needle valve immediately and determine cause.
(h) Allow manometer to rise to test pressure (42 in. H2O) and close needle valve.
(i) Disconnect shop air and monitor leakage rate.
(j) Leak-rate tolerance: one-half (1/2) inch H2O in five (5) minutes.
NOTE: This test checks the wing being tested up to the fuel float valve in the header
tank.
(k) Remove plug from fuel vent and allow pressurized air to exhaust through the vent.
(l) Vent relief valve shall close between 2.8 & 11.1 in. H2O (0.1 & 0.4 psid).
(m) Repeat for opposite wing, if required.
PAGE 9
3H13 28-10-00 Apr 15/07

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 28-10-00 3H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
Fuel distribution consists of two sets of header tanks, electric boost pumps, trim-fittings, pressure
switches, float switches, check valves, and fuel supply lines; as well as a manual fuel shut-off valve, an
in-line filter, an engine driven fuel pump; and fuel return system.
1. Header Tanks
A. Description
Each header tank is accessible through the two access plates in the bottom of the wing. Each
header tank contains a boost pump float switch, an engine supply line float valve, and the number
one fuel probe. Flapper-type check valves prevent reverse flow to the main and inboard wing tanks.
A vent line connects each header tank to its inboard wing tank.
NOTE: The left and right header tank installations are mirror images of each other, except for the fuel
return line connection in the left header tank in S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697173 only.
B. Float Switch
A float switch is located in each header tank mounted on the aft side of the intercostal that forms
the forward wall of the header tank. Access is through the inboard header tank access plate.
(1) Removal
(a) Defuel appropriate wing. (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(b) Remove access plates fore and aft of the float switch.
(c) Turn master switch OFF. Disconnect electrical leads at the connector. De-pin the
connector, as required.
(d) Remove nut and washer from the forward side of the intercostal.
(e) Remove float switch, bulkhead fitting, and gasket from the aft side of the intercostal.
(f) If replacing float switch, disassemble bulkhead fitting from float switch.
Float Switch
Figure 1
3H15 28-20-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) Prior to installation, verify float switch for continuity. Circuit shall be open when float is up
and closed when float is down.
(b) If installing new float switch, assemble bulkhead fitting to float switch as follows:
1 Run wire leads through bulkhead fitting.
2 Carefully torque the bulkhead fitting on the float switch’s adapter nipple (AN 816). Do
not allow rotation between the float switch adapter nipple and the float switch elbow.
Any rotation of the adapter nipple on the elbow can shear the float switch wires.
(c) Position gasket, bulkhead fitting, and float switch on aft side of the intercostal. Feed float
switch electrical leads through the intercostal.
CAUTION: WHEN TORQUING NUT, BELOW, TAKE CARE TO HOLD THE BULKHEAD
FITTING FROM INSIDE THE HEADER TANK. DO NOT HOLD THE FLOAT
SWITCH WHILE TORQUING NUT AS THIS MAY CAUSE THE ADAPTER
NIPPLE TO ROTATE ON THE ELBOW AND SHEAR THE WIRES.
(d) Secure bulkhead fitting, float switch, and gasket to intercostal using nut and washer from
the forward side.
(e) Verify float switch for continuity. Circuit shall be open when float is up and closed when
float is down.
(f) Brush seal float switch from inside the header tank with MIL-S-8802 or MIL-S-81733
sealant (i.e. - PRC PR-1422-A1, A2, A4, B1, B2, or B4).
(g) Connect electrical leads at the connector.
(h) Replace access plates fore and aft of the float switch. Seal header tank access plate with
PRC PR-1428-B-2 or PR-1403G-B-2 sealant. Allow to cure 72 hours.
Float Valve
Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit). Add 15 gallons fuel to the affected side. Check for leaks.
(j) Open fuel system drain cap as described in 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System. Push in
manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit) and run boost pump on affected side. Verify that float
switch shuts down boost pump with approximately 2.5 gals fuel remaining in header tank.
(k) Perform Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00, whenever a float switch is replaced.
C. Float Valve
A float valve is located in each header tank mounted on the forward side of the main spar, which
forms the aft wall of the header tank. Access is through the inboard header tank access plate.
(1) Removal
(a) Defuel appropriate wing. (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(b) Remove inboard header tank access plate.
CAUTION: DUST CAPS USED TO PROTECT OPEN LINES SHOULD ALWAYS BE
INSTALLED OVER THE TUBE ENDS AND NOT IN THE TUBE ENDS.
FLOW THROUGH THE LINES MAY BE BLOCKED OFF IF LINES ARE
INADVERTENTLY INSTALLED WITH THE DUST CAPS IN THE TUBE
ENDS.
(c) Loosen hose clamps and slide flexible hose off of float valve tube assembly and bulkhead
tube. Cap bulkhead tube.
(d) Remove safety wire, nuts and washers (2 ea.) from the aft side of the main spar. (Access
through the wheel well.)
(e) Remove tube assembly, float valve, gasket, and spacer from the forward side of the main
spar.
(f) Remove tube assembly from float valve.
(2) Installation
(a) Install tube assembly on to float valve.
(b) Position spacer, gasket, float valve and tube assembly on forward side of the main spar.
(c) Secure float switch,spacer, and gasket to main spar using nuts and washers from the
wheel well. Torque bolts 30 to 40 in. lbs and safety.
(d) Remove protective cap and slide flexible hose onto bulkhead tube and float valve tube
assembly and secure with hose clamps.
(e) Ensure float has free and clear movement around float valve tube assembly and sump
drain pickup tube.
(f) Replace access plate. Seal access plate with PRC PR-1428-B-2 or PR-1403G-B-2
sealant. Allow to cure 72 hours.
(g) Check for leaks.
3H17 28-20-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Fuel Boost Pumps (See Chart 1 and Figures 3 & 4.)

A small inline electric boost pump is located in each wing root just forward of the header tanks. These
boost pumps are removed and installed as an assembly consisting of the boost pump, a Tee-connector,
an adjustable trim fitting, a fuel pressure switch, associated unions; and in the right wing only, the pump
mounting bracket.
NOTE: Perform Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00, whenever a boost pump, trim fitting, or
pressure switch is replaced.
A. Removal
(1) Defuel appropriate wing. (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(2) Remove the large access plate on the bottom of the wing root glove and, if removing the right
boost pump, the outboard access plate just forward of the header tank.
(3) Turn master switch OFF. Disconnect electrical leads from boost pump and pressure switch.
INSTALLED OVER THE TUBE ENDS AND NOT IN THE TUBE ENDS. FLOW
THROUGH THE LINES MAY BE BLOCKED OFF IF LINES ARE
INADVERTENTLY INSTALLED WITH THE DUST CAPS IN THE TUBE ENDS.
(4) Disconnect and cap aft fuel line from the boost pump and forward fuel line from the Tee-
connector.
Effectivity
4697031 & up
and
4697001 thru 4697030 Left Fuel Boost Pump
with Kit# 766-682 installed Figure 3
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION AIRBORNE 1B300-4

Voltage (Vdc) 18 - 30
Current (Amps) 4.0 (Max.)
2.5 (Nominal at 27 Vdc)
Fuel Flow / 0 PPH at 30 PSIG

Fuel Pressure 260 PPH at 5 PSIG
Proof press. zero ext. leakage 60 PSI

Weight 1.8 LBS
DO NOT RUN DRY
Effectivity
4697031 & up and
Right Fuel Boost Pump 4697001 thru 4697030
Figure 4 with Kit# 766-682 installed
3H19 28-20-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Unscrew retaining nut and washer from bulkhead fitting on the inlet side of the pump.
(6) In the left wing only, remove safety wire, bolts, and washers (4 ea.) and clip assemblies (2 ea.)
that hold pump to mounting bracket and remove pump/Tee/switch assembly from aircraft.
(7) In the right wing only, remove bolts and washers (4 ea.) that hold pump mounting bracket to
the forward spar and remove bracket/pump/Tee/switch assembly from aircraft.
B. Installation
CAUTION: WHENEVER ONE OR BOTH OF THE FUEL BOOST PUMPS IS/ARE REPLACED,
THE FUEL FLOW MUST BE BALANCED BY ADJUSTING THE TRIM FITTINGS.
EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUCTIONS TO ACCOMPLISH THIS ARE PROVIDED IN
PIPER KIT NO. 766-683.
NOTE: The boost pumps are removed and installed as an assembly. Accordingly, ensure the
pump, Tee-connector, trim fitting, fuel pressure switch, and bulkhead union are built-up as
shown in Figure 4 prior to installation. Screw trim fitting into Tee fitting to the minimum
engagement (i.e. - until o-ring land reaches the o-ring groove on the Tee fitting). Secure
trim fitting in position with nut (torque nut to Tee fitting 150 to 200 in. lbs.). Torque pressure
switch to trim fitting 40-65 in. lbs. With the exception of the pump mounting bracket for the
right-hand installation, the build-ups are the same. For the right boost pump only, bolt the
pump mounting bracket to the pump before installation. Safety wire nut and trim fitting after
balancing fuel flow with Piper Kit No. 766-683.
(1) In the right wing only, place bracket/pump/Tee/switch assembly into position and secure the
mounting bracket to the forward spar with bolts and washers (4 ea.).
(2) In the left wing only, place pump/Tee/switch assembly into position and secure to mounting
bracket with bolts and washers (4 ea.) and clip assemblies (2 ea.) and safety.
(3) Secure bulkhead fitting with nut and washer.
(4) By turning Tee fitting, adjust pressure switch position to ensure the pressure switch clears all
de-ice lines.
(5) Remove protective caps and connect aft fuel line to the boost pump and forward fuel line to the
Tee-connector.
(6) Turn master switch OFF. Connect electrical leads to boost pump and pressure switch.
Safetywire electrical connector to pressure switch.
(7) If required, balance fuel flow with Piper Kit No. 766-683.
(8) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit). Add 10 gallons fuel to the affected side. Check for leaks.
(9) Replace the large access plate on the bottom of the wing root glove and, if installing the right
boost pump, the outboard access plate just forward of the header tank.
(10) Perform Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00, if required.
3. Trim Fittings
An adjustable trim fitting is provided in each fuel boost pump assembly (see above). These trim fittings
permit the fuel flow from both wings to be statically balanced, which is required to minimize the
occurrence of inflight fuel imbalance situations. Whenever one or both of the fuel boost pumps or trim
fittings is/are replaced, the fuel flow must be re-balanced by adjusting the trim fittings. Equipment and
instructions to accomplish this are provided in Piper Kit No. 766-683.
Additionally, perform Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00, whenever a trim fitting is replaced.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: (1) TORQUE NUT TO 80 - 100 IN. LBS. SEE FIGURE 6. 102430 6 AN
(2) FROM ENGINE HIGH PRESSURE (HP) PUMP.
(3) TO FUEL HEAT EXCHANGER.
(4) TORQUE SOLENOID VALVE TO RESTRICTOR (ON ENGINE HP PUMP) AND UNION TO SOLENOID VALVE 135 - 150 IN. LBS.
(5) TORQUE HOSE FITTINGS 300 - 400 IN. LBS.
10
(2) (5)
2
(5)
(5)
(3)
4
(5)
8 3
AN924-10 NUT
---------- FIREWALL -----------
AN4C5A BOLT 5 7
MS35338-44 WASHER 9
(2 PLACES)
6
1. FUEL RETURN SOLENOID VALVE (4) 6. FUEL SYSTEM DRAIN CAP
2. ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP (EDP) - LOW PRESSURE 7. SUMP DRAIN, LEFT (1)
3. MANUAL FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE 8. SUMP DRAIN, RIGHT (1)
4. SHUT-OFF VALVE CABLE ADJUSTMENT 9. FUEL FILTER DRAIN (1) Effectivity
5. FUEL FILTER 10. FUEL RETURN HOSE
4697031 thru 4697173 and
Forward Fuel Installation 4697001 thru 4697030
Figure 5 (Sheet 1 of 2) with Kit# 766-682 installed
3H21 28-20-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: (1) TORQUE NUT TO 80 - 100 IN. LBS. SEE FIGURE 6. 102430 6 AN
(2) FROM ENGINE HIGH PRESSURE (HP) PUMP.
(3) TO FUEL HEAT EXCHANGER.
(4) TORQUE SOLENOID VALVE TO RESTRICTOR (ON ENGINE HP PUMP) AND UNION TO SOLENOID VALVE 135 - 150 IN. LBS.
(5) TORQUE HOSE FITTINGS 300 - 400 IN. LBS.
(5)
2
(2)
(5)
(5)
(3)
(5)
8 3
11
AN924-10 NUT
---------- FIREWALL -----------
AN4C5A BOLT 5 7
MS35338-44 WASHER 9
(2 PLACES)
10
6
1. FUEL RETURN SOLENOID VALVE (4) 6. FUEL SYSTEM DRAIN CAP
2. ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP (EDP) - LOW PRESSURE 7. SUMP DRAIN, LEFT (1)
3. MANUAL FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE 8. SUMP DRAIN, RIGHT (1)
4. SHUT-OFF VALVE CABLE ADJUSTMENT 9. FUEL FILTER DRAIN (1)
5. FUEL FILTER 10. FUEL RETURN LINE DRAIN, LEFT (1)
11. FUEL RETURN LINE DRAIN, RIGHT (1)
Effectivity Forward Fuel Installation

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Quick Drain Valves

Figure 6
4. 3/8 Inch Suction Line (See 28-00-00, Figure 1.)

A section of 3/8 inch fuel line is installed in the left wing suction line to help balance the fuel flow from the
left and right wings. The fittings on each end of this line require special torques as follows:
A. Outboard end.
(1) Expander to check valve - 150-250 in. lbs.
(2) 3/8 inch line to expander - 110-130 in. lbs.
B. Inboard end.
(1) 3/8 inch line to reducer 110-130 in. lbs.
(2) 1/2 inch line to reducer 230-260 in. lbs.
5. Manual Fuel Shut-off Valve
The manual fuel shut-off valve is beneath the left rear engine compartment floor/firewall and is accessed
through a panel secured by screws.
A. Perform Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00, whenever the manual fuel shut-off valve is replaced.
B. Cable Adjustment
The control cable runs from the valve towards the aircraft center and then back and up to the
handle in the cockpit pedestal. Adjustment of the shut-off valve cable is at the cable mount on the
longeron inboard of the valve (see Figure 5). Adjust the cable such that the valve is fully open when
the handle is pushed all the way in and fully closed when the handle is pulled all the way out.
3H23 28-20-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Filter Assembly

Figure 7
6. Fuel Filter (See Figures 5 & 7.)

NOTE: For routine filter servicing (i.e. - filter element replacement), refer to 12-10-00, Fuel Filter Servicing.
NOTE: The fuel filter is removed and installed as an assembly (see Figure 7) consisting of the fuel filter
and its associated fittings and the fuel system drain tube and cap.
A. Removal
Access to the fuel filter is through the fuel filter access plate in the lower left forward fuselage.
(See 6-00-00, Figure 5.)
(1) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(2) Remove fuel filter access plate.
(3) Disconnect electrical lead from fuel filter bypass switch.
(4) Drain residual fuel from the filter bowl using the fuel filter quick drain.
(5) Disconnect and cap the fuel filter quick drain hose from the bottom of the filter.
(6) Disconnect and cap the fuel inlet hose from the union in the 3-way elbow fitting.
(7) Disconnect and cap the fuel outlet hose from the union above the firewall.
(8) From above the firewall, remove nut and washer from the bulkhead fitting.
(9) Support the fuel filter assembly; then, from above the firewall, remove nuts and washers
(2 ea.) holding fuel filter assembly to aircraft.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Remove fuel filter assembly through access hole. Take care to capture the washer on the
bulkhead fitting and the four washers (2 each bolt) which were below the mounting bolts.
B. Installation
(1) Place fuel filter assembly into position with the inlet port outboard. Ensure a washer is placed
on the bulkhead fitting so it will be below the firewall when the filter is bolted in place.
(2) Secure the fuel filter assembly to the aircraft with bolts (2 ea.) and washers (6 ea.). On each bolt,
two washers go below the firewall and one above.
(3) From above the firewall, secure the bulkhead fitting to the firewall with nut and washer.
(4) Remove protective caps from fuel hoses and connect hoses to filter assembly.
(5) Connect electrical lead to fuel filter bypass switch.
(7) Push in manual fuel shut-off (from cockpit). Check for leaks.
(8) Replace fuel filter access plate.
7. Engine Driven Pump (EDP) (Low Pressure)
The engine driven pump (EDP) functions as a continuously ON fuel boost pump to provide a constant
flow of pressurized fuel to the engine.
CAUTION: IF THE ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP (EDP) FAILS AND THE TWO BOOST PUMPS ARE
SWITCHED OFF OR CYCLE OFF FOR AN ACCUMULATED TIME IN EXCESS OF 10
HOURS OF ENGINE OPERATION, THEN THE PRATT & WHITNEY ENGINE DRIVEN
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP MUST BE REPLACED. SEE PRATT & WHITNEY
CANADA MAINTENANCE MANUAL P/N 3021442, 72-00-00, TABLE 601, FUEL SYSTEM.
A. Removal
(1) Pull manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(2) Drain residual fuel using the fuel filter quick drain.
(3) Disconnect and cap the fuel inlet and outlet hoses from the elbow fittings on the EDP.
(4) Remove bolts and washers (4 ea.) holding EDP to engine and remove EDP.
B. Replacement
If replacing the EDP, remove the two elbow fittings and locknuts from the old pump and install them
on the new pump. Use new O-rings.
C. Installation
(1) Place EDP in position at rear of engine, taking care to ensure drive spline meshes correctly.
(2) Secure EDP to engine with bolts and washers (4 ea.)
(3) Remove caps from hoses
(4) Connect fuel inlet and outlet hoses to the elbow fittings on the EDP and tighten connections.
(5) Push in manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(6) Turn the “Fuel Pumps” switch to “Manual.”
(7) Hold open the fuel filter quick drain until fuel runs continuously, then release.
(8) Check for leaks.
NOTE: Leak test downstream of EDP shall be by visual inspection only. Allowable leakage
through shaft seal of EDP shall not exceed two (2) drops per minute.
3I1 28-20-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL RETURN SOLENOID LOGIC
FUEL TEMP
GAUGE
START “NO” FUEL TEMP “NO”

CYCLE LESS THAN
-10˚ F
“YES” “YES”
ENERGIZE DE-ENERGIZE
FUEL RETURN FUEL RETURN
SOLENOID SOLENOID
TOTAL
“OR” “NO” FUEL QTY “OR”
GATE LESS THAN GATE
100 LBS “YES”
LEFT RIGHT
FUEL
QUANTITY
Effectivity Fuel Return System Logic

4697174 & up Figure 8
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Fuel Return System

A. S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697173
The fuel return system in these airplanes consists of a solenoid valve (normally closed), a check
valve, and associated line.
These airplanes are equipped with a fuel return system which functions only during engine start.
Fuel not used by the fuel control unit (FCU) is diverted from the engine high pressure pump outlet
though the fuel return solenoid valve (open only when the starting circuit is energized) through a
singe return line to the left header tank.
B. S/N’s 4697174 and up
These airplanes are equipped with a fuel return system which enhances cold weather operations. It
consists of a solenoid valve (normally closed), two relays (located under the cockpit floor at the feet
of the pilot), two (2) check valves, and associated lines and drains.
In these airplanes, the fuel feed system has not been changed, but return lines run to both main
fuel tanks.
This system functions at engine start similarly to the earlier system (described above), with the
exception that the unused fuel returns to both main fuel tanks.
During cold weather operations, when certain conditions are met (see Figure 8), fuel is pumped
through the engine driven pump (EDP) (low pressure) to the fuel-oil heat exchanger where the fuel
is warmed. Fuel not used by the fuel control unit (FCU) is diverted from the engine high pressure
pump outlet though the fuel return solenoid valve (when open) and to both main fuel tanks. The
heat energy accumulated by the fuel when passing through the fuel-oil heat exchanger warms the
fuel in the main fuel tanks.
The warming effect of the returned fuel is not sufficient to actually increase the temperature of the
entire fuel supply, but it is sufficient to slow the cooling of the fuel in the main tanks. This extends
the operating time available before the fuel temperature reaches established low temperature limits
(see Chart 2).
(1) Operational Logic (See also Figure 8.)
The logic to open and close the solenoid valve is as follows:
(a) The solenoid will be energized open when the following conditions are met:
1 The valve will always be open during an engine start, regardless of the other
conditions.
2 When the fuel temperature is below -23 °C (-10 °F) AND the total fuel quantity is
more than 100 lbs.
(b) The solenoid valve will be de-energized (closed) when the following conditions are met:
1 Fuel temperature is above -23 °C (-10 °F) and the engine is not in a start cycle.
2 Total fuel quantity is less than 100 lbs. and the engine is not in a start cycle.
3I3 28-20-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
MINIMUM FUEL TEMPERATURE OPERATING LIMITATIONS
( S/N’s 4697174 & up; and 4697001 thru 4697158 with Kit # 767-380 installed; and
4697159 thru 4697173 with Kit # 767-381 installed. )
Starting (Jet A/A-1) -34ºC (-30ºF)
In-Flight -34ºC (-30ºF) Jet A as displayed by fuel temperature indicator
-41ºC (-42ºF) Jet A-1 as displayed by fuel temperature indicator
-54ºC (-65ºF) Outside air temperature as displayed by OAT indicator
(with fuel temperature not to be less than noted above)
NOTE: This chart is provided as a general reference only. Verify actual temperature operating
limitations in a current copy of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook for each individual airplane.
(2) System Operation (See 91-28-40, Figure 4.)

To operate the logic, the fuel temperature indicator located in the instrument panel will provide
a discrete signal when the fuel temperature reaches -23 °C (-10 °F) and the Meggitt system
will provide a discrete signal when the fuel quantity drops below 100 lbs. These signals (or their
absence) activate or deactivate the two relays in the system as follows:
(a) Low Temperature Operation
1 When fuel temperature decreases to less than -10 °F, a logic low (GND) is created at
pin 3 of the fuel temperature indicator. The logic low (GND) is interlocked through the
low fuel relay:
a When total fuel quantity is greater than 100 lbs, the logic low (GND) from the
fuel temperature indicator is applied through the low fuel relay to the fuel return
relay. This activates the fuel return relay by applying power from the fuel
temperature circuit breaker through contacts B1-B2 and A1-A2 in parallel. This
activates the fuel return valve solenoid, and warm fuel is returned to both main
fuel tanks.
b When total fuel quantity is less than 100 lbs, the appropriate Meggitt EDU
activates the low fuel relay and inhibits the fuel return system by keeping the
fuel return solenoid valve closed.
2 When fuel temperature rises above -10 °F the logic low (GND) from the fuel
temperature indicator is removed and the fuel return system is deactivated.
(b) Temperature Sensing
The fuel temperature indicator provides +8 VDC to a two terminal integrated circuit
temperature transducer (fuel temperature sensor) located in the right wing inboard fuel
tank. The transducer produces an output current equal to one microamp per degree of
temperature Kelvin (1 mA/K). The transducer output signal is applied to the fuel
temperature indicator where it is processed by an A/D converter for display. The
transducer and indicator cannot be tested without the use of specialized test equipment.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Functional Test

The following functional tests are used to verify correct system operation and aid in identifying
component failures. Perform annually or each 200 hours, whichever comes first.
NOTE: The following tests assume fuel has been in the tanks long enough to adjust to
ambient air temperature, preferably overnight. Significant differences may be observed
when the aircraft has been refueled within several hours of the tests.
(a) Fuel Return Solenoid Valve Test
This test verifies that the fuel return solenoid valve is working properly.
NOTE: Conduct this test with more than 100 pounds total fuel on board.
1 Apply power to the aircraft.
2 Ensure the FUEL TEMP circuit breaker is engaged and the LOW FUEL annunciator
is not illuminated.
3 Observe the fuel temperature indication to verify the temperature indication is
approximately equal to ambient air temperature.
4 Disconnect electrical connector P398 from the Fuel Temperature Indicator and
jumper pin 3 to pin 1 (i.e. - ground pin 3).
5 Observe that the fuel return solenoid valve activates (i.e. - opens).
NOTE: Check fuel return valve operation by opening the right gull-wing door on the
engine compartment and have an assistant check for an audible or tactile
indication of valve activation.
6 Remove the jumper from P398 pins 1 and 3. When the ground is removed from pin 3,
the fuel return solenoid valve returns to its normally closed position.
7 Observe that the fuel return solenoid valve closes (see Note, above).
8 Secure the engine compartment access door.
9 Reconnect Fuel Temperature Indicator electrical connector P398.
(b) Low Fuel Relay Test
This test verifies that the low fuel relay is functioning correctly.
NOTE: Conduct this test prior to initial fueling of the aircraft or defuel (see Draining Fuel
System,12-10-00) the aircraft to achieve a LOW FUEL annunciation (i.e. - less
than 100 lbs total fuel onboard).
1 Apply power to the aircraft.
2 Ensure the FUEL TEMP circuit breaker is engaged and the LOW FUEL annunciator
is illuminated.
3 Observe the fuel temperature indication to verify the temperature indication is
approximately equal to ambient air temperature.
4 Disconnect electrical connector P398 from the Fuel Temperature Indicator and
jumper pin 3 to pin 1 (i.e. - ground pin 3).
5 Observe that the fuel return solenoid valve does not activate (i.e. - remains closed).
NOTE: Check for fuel return valve operation by opening the right gull-wing door on
the engine compartment and have an assistant verify that no indication of
valve operation (i.e. - an audible click or tactile vibration) occurs.
6 Reconnect Fuel Temperature Indicator electrical connector P398.
3I5 28-20-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Failure to successfully complete either of the above tests is immediately indicative of
failure of the tested components. If replacement of the subject components does not solve
the problem, refer to the operational logic and system operation paragraphs, above, and
the electrical schematic in 91-28-40, Figure 4, to determine a logical testing sequence for
checking essential supply voltages and signal paths in order to isolate defective
components. Specific tests and the sequence in which they are performed should be
based upon observation of the failure modes observed.
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3I7 28-20-00 PAGE 17

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 28-20-00 3I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING
1. Fuel Quantity Indicator

A. Meggitt EFIS
NOTE: The fuel quantity indication system is part of the engine instrument display system. Refer to
77-40-00 for more information.
The fuel quantity indicator is incorporated into the Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System
(EIDS). The EIDS consists of two main components, the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and the
Engine Display Unit (EDU). The DAU collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a
refined data stream to the EDU which actually displays the data. (See Figure 1.)
The fuel quantity indication system is capacitance based. Each of the ten fuel probes (i.e. - sensors)
produces a precise capacitance value based on how much of the probe is immersed in fuel. The
linear response of the probes combined with the data processing capability of the DAU allows very
accurate fuel quantity display.
VAC FF O AT 15 ˚ C G
FTF 1:00 H:M P
S
2
FAD 0 LB
5.0 150 TO TAL
I N HG PPH FUE L 1 0 1 0 LB
OIL
L R
505 505
10 ˚ C 100 PSI TE S TMO DE

EDU Fuel Quantity Display (i.e. - Secondary Display (Co-Pilot’s))
Figure 1
3I9 28-40-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Avidyne EFIS (in S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up)

NOTE: See 28-00-00 and Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - 34-20-00 for more
information.
When the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS is installed, fuel quantity information is displayed on
both the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD). The Data Acquisition Unit
(DAU) collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a refined data stream to the PFD
and MFD which actually display the data. (See Figure 2.)
Effectivity Fuel Quantity Indication

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Quantity Indication Effectivity

Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 2) with Avidyne Entegra
3I11 28-40-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Fuel Quantity Probes

Fuel probes are installed in each wing in the header tank (1 - W.S. 42.00), the inboard tank
(1 - W.S. 94.08), and the main tank (3 - W.S. 127.00, 169.60, & 206.90) (See 28-00-00, Figure 1). In each
case, the fuel probe clips into a bracket mounted on a rib or the forward side of the main spar.
CAUTION: WHILE THE WIRING, INSTALLATION, AND REMOVAL OF THE PROBES IS THE SAME,
EACH PROBE IS A DIFFERENT LENGTH UNIQUE TO ITS PARTICULAR WING STATION.
CAUTION: RECALIBRATE THE FUEL QUANTITY INDICATION SYSTEM WHENEVER A FUEL
PROBE IS REPLACED.
A. Removal
(1) Defuel appropriate wing. (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(3) Remove the appropriate access plate(s) on the bottom of the wing for the fuel probe(s) to be
removed.
(4) Reaching inside the wing, locate the fuel probe and pull it from the spring clip(s).
(5) Pull the fuel probe to the access hole and disconnect the electrical leads with a hex driver.
(6) Loosen the harness retainer and remove the probe from the aircraft.
UPPER SPRING CLIP ANTI-ROTATION TAB
R S
ELECTRICAL
TERMINALS
LOWER SPRING CLIP

WIRING HARNESS (NOT AT W.S. 169.60 OR 206.90)
Fuel Probe Installation

Figure 3
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Testing
Individual probes may be bench tested as follows:
(1) Required equipment:
(a) DC Fuel Probe Test Box - MAv No. 89-188-2 or equivalent
(b) 150 pF Capacitor Transfer Standard (DC Type)
(2) Capacitance Test
(a) Using the 150 pF capacitor transfer standard, calibrate the DC Fuel Probe Test Box to 150 pF.
(b) Connect the test box as shown in Figure 4.
(c) Read the probe’s dry capacitance. This reading must fall within the limits shown in Chart 1
for the specific probe.
CHART 1
FUEL PROBE CAPACITANCE
CAPACITANCE CAPACITANCE
PROBE DRY (pF) WET(pF)
W.S. 42.00 (P/N 481-395) 14.67 24.42
W.S. 94.08 (P/N 481-396) 8.99 17.98
W.S. 127.00 (P/N 481-397) 29.99 54.94
W.S. 169.60 (P/N 481-398) 25.83 46.10
W.S. 206.90 (P/N 481-399) 15.82 32.49
Fuel Probe Test Set-up

Figure 4
3I13 28-40-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
(1) Connect the electrical leads to the fuel probe as follows: white wire to “L” terminal, white/blue
wire to “S” terminal, and white/orange wire to “R” terminal.
(2) Route the electrical leads under the harness retainer and tighten retainer screw.
(3) Reaching inside the wing, push the probe into its spring clip(s). Take care to ensure the
anti-rotation tab on the upper spring clip engages the slot in the collar on the probe. (See Figure 3.)
NOTE: Ensure the bottom of each installed probe clears the aircraft structure and/or fuel tank
sealant by a minimum of 0.125 inch.
(4) Replace access plate(s), sealing with PRC PR-1428-B-2 or PR-1403G-B-2 sealant. Allow to
cure for 72 hours.
3. Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration - Meggitt EFIS (PIR-PPS60185, Rev. E.)
The fuel quantity indicator is incorporated into the Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS).
The EIDS consists of two main components, the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and the Engine Display
Unit (EDU). The DAU collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a refined data stream to
the EDU which actually displays the data. (See Figure 1.)
During calibration, switches on the bottom of the DAU are manipulated to select which wing is being
calibrated and which phase of the calibration process is being performed. All data relating to calibration
is displayed on the EDU.
NOTE: Fuel quantity is displayed only in pounds or kilograms, depending on which EDU (i.e. - standard
“English” or optional “Metric”) is installed. To convert pounds/kilograms to US gallons/liters, see Chart 2.
A. Requirements
(1) Calibrate both wings whenever a DAU is replaced.
NOTE: Whenever a DAU is replaced, perform Engine Torque Indication Calibration, 77-10-00; Fuel
Quantity Indication Calibration, 28-40-00; and, Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00.
(2) Calibrate the affected wing whenever fuel probe(s) are replaced.
B. Procedure
Fuel quantity calibration can only be performed on one wing at a time. If fuel quantity calibration is
performed due to a fuel quantity probe replacement, just recalibrate the side where the probe was
replaced. If fuel quantity calibration is performed due to DAU replacement, recalibrate both sides.
(1) Right Wing Fuel Tank Calibration
(a) Level the aircraft (See 8-20-00).
(b) Ensure that the fuel has been completely drained from the right wing (including the fuel
sump). (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(c) Prior to applying power to the Engine Display Unit (EDU), depress the "PAGE" switch on
the bezel of the primary EDU. While continuing to hold the "PAGE" switch depressed,
apply power to the EDU. Continue to hold the "PAGE" switch depressed until the EDU
displays the "Exceedance Data Page" in Test Mode. Release the "PAGE" switch.
(d) Depress and release the EDU "PAGE" switch until the "DAU/FQP DATA" page is displayed
(See Figure 5).
(e) Pull the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker.
(f) Reach under the instrument panel on the right side and hold the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle
switches on the DAU in the "R-CAL" position (i.e. - aft, see Figure 6). Push in the "FUEL
QTY" circuit breaker and keep holding the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle switches for a minimum
of 5 seconds.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL WEIGHT CONVERSION (LBS PER U.S. GAL)
3I15 28-40-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL WEIGHT CONVERSION (KGS PER LITER)
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DAU - FQP DATA

DAU
S OF T WA R E K E Y /R E V: 1 A 1 A
MOD E : TE S T TE S T
E QU IP ID : C 10 C 10
Initial Display,
Calibration Mode C H A N N E L ID : CH 1 CH 2
Not Yet Initiated FA IL FLAGS : PA S S PA S S
F QP LE FT R IGH T
SOF T WA R E K E Y /R E V: 1 A 1 A
MOD E : OP E R OP E R
TE S TMOD E
DAU - FQP DATA DAU - FQP DATA

DAU DAU
S O F T WA R E K EY /R E V: 1 A 1 A S OFTWA R E K E Y /R E V: 1 A 1 A
MOD E: T E ST TE S T MOD E : TE S T TEST
EQU IP ID : C10 C 10 E QU IP ID : C 10 C10
C H A N N EL ID : CH 1 CH 2 C H A N N E L ID : CH 1 CH 2
FA IL F L AGS: PA SS PA S S FA IL FLAGS : PA S S PASS
FQP LEFT R IGH T FQP LE FT RI G HT

S O F T WA R E K E Y/R EV: 1 A 1 A S OFTWA R E K E Y /R E V: 1 A 1 A
M OD E : CAL OP E R MOD E : OP E R CAL
T ES T M O D E TE S TMODE
Left Side Calibration Initiated Right Side Calibration Initiated
EDU Test Mode DAU - Fuel Quantity Processor (FQP) Data Page
Figure 5
DAU Calibration Switches

Figure 6
3I17 28-40-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) On the "DAU/FQP DATA" page, verify that the "MODE" is set to "CAL" in the right column
(See Figure 5 - Right Side Calibration Initiated).
(h) Depress and release the EDU "PAGE" switch until the "CALIBRATION" page is displayed
(see Figure 7).
(i) Observe and verify that the calibration display on the EDU shows "READY", "UNCAL HI"
and "UNCAL LO" for "FUEL", "RIGHT".
NOTE: "UNCAL HI" and "UNCAL LO" will only be displayed if the DAU has never been
calibrated. If the DAU was already calibrated at least once, "HI CAL VALID" and
LO CAL VALID" will be displayed.
(j) Put 1.5 US gallons of Jet fuel in the Right wing (unusable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(k) Hold the SW-1 toggle switch on the DAU in the "R-CAL" position (i.e. - aft) for a minimum
of 3 seconds. Verify that the EDU display shows "LO CAL VALID" for "FUEL", "RIGHT".
(l) Verify that the rectangle below “RIGHT” contains the value “0.000”.
(m) Add 85 US gallons of Jet fuel in the Right wing (usable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(n) Hold the SW-2 toggle switch on the DAU in the "R-CAL" position for a minimum of 3
seconds. Verify that the EDU display shows "HI CAL VALID" for "FUEL", "RIGHT".
(o) Verify that the rectangle below “RIGHT” contains the value “100.000”.
(p) Calibration of the Right wing fuel quantity is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
NOTE: Power to the DAU must be removed for a minimum of 20 seconds prior to being
reapplied for normal operation of the Fuel Quantity Processor.
(q) If calibration of the Left wing is required, go to “Left Wing Fuel Tank Calibration”, below.
(2) Left Wing Fuel Tank Calibration
(a) Level the aircraft (see 8-20-00).
(b) Ensure that the fuel has been completely drained from the left wing (including the fuel
sump). (See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(c) Prior to applying power to the Engine Display Unit (EDU), depress the "PAGE" switch on
(d) Depress and release the EDU "PAGE" switch until the "DAU/FQP DATA" page is displayed
(See Figure 5).
(f) Reach under the instrument panel on the right side and hold the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle
switches on the DAU in the "L-CAL" position (i.e. - fwd, see Figure 6). Push in the "FUEL
QTY" circuit breaker and keep holding the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle switches for a minimum
of 5 seconds.
(g) On the "DAU/FQP DATA" page, verify that the "MODE" is set to "CAL" in the left column
(see Figure 5 - Left Side Calibration Initiated).
(h) Depress and release the EDU "PAGE" switch until the "CALIBRATION" page is displayed
(See Figure 7).
(i) Observe and verify that the calibration display on the EDU shows "READY", "UNCAL HI"
and "UNCAL LO" for "FUEL", "LEFT".
NOTE: "UNCAL HI" and "UNCAL LO" will only be displayed if the DAU has never been
calibrated. If the DAU was already calibrated at least once, "HI CAL VALID" and
LO CAL VALID" will be displayed.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CA LIB R A TIO N
TORQUE
CH A CH B
68 % 68 %
NO T RE ADY READY
UNCAL HI CAL HI VALID
CAL L O V AL ID UNCAL LO
FUEL
LE FT RIGHT
6 3 .0 1 5 0 % 100. 000 %
NO T RE ADY READY
CAL HI V AL I D UNCAL HI
UNCAL L O UNCAL LO
TESTMODE
EDU Test Mode Calibration Page
Figure 7
(j) Put 1.5 US gallons of Jet fuel in the Left wing (unusable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(k) Hold the SW-1 toggle switch on the DAU in the "L-CAL" position (i.e. - fwd) for a minimum
of 3 seconds. Verify that the EDU display shows "LO CAL VALID" for "FUEL", "LEFT".
(l) Verify that the rectangle below “LEFT” contains the value “0.000”.
(m) Add 85 US gallons of Jet fuel in the Left wing (usable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(n) Hold the SW-2 toggle switch on the DAU in the "L-CAL" position (i.e. - fwd) for a minimum
of 3 seconds. Verify that the EDU display shows "HI CAL VALID" for "FUEL", "LEFT".
(o) Verify that the rectangle below “LEFT” contains the value “100.000”.
(p) Calibration of the Left wing fuel quantity is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
3I19 28-40-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Full Range Check

A full range check provides a detailed test of the fuel quantity indication system performance.
Perform as desired. This check is recommended as part of the refueling process whenever fuel
system has been completely drained.
(1) Level the aircraft (see 8-20-00).
(2) Ensure that the fuel has been completely drained from both wings (including the fuel sumps).
(See 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System.)
(3) Pull the manual fuel shut-off (In Cockpit).
(4) Ensure that the “FUEL PUMPS” switch is in the "OFF" position.
(6) Put 1.5 US gallons of Jet fuel in each wing (unusable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(7) Verify that the "TOTAL" fuel quantity on the secondary EDU page (See Figure 1) is red and
reads zero (0). Verify that the "R" and "L" fuel quantity reads zero (0).
(8) Verify that the "LOW FUEL" and the “FUEL PRESSURE” warning lights are illuminated on the
ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(9) Add 100 Lbs of Jet fuel in each wing and wait 5 minutes.
NOTE: To convert fuel weight (lbs/kgs) into volume (US GAL/liters), determine Jet fuel density
(refer to Chart 2) and divide weight by Jet fuel density).
(10) Verify that the "R", "L" fuel quantity on the secondary EDU page read 100 ± 15 lbs (46 ± 7 kgs)
and the "TOTAL" reads 200 ± 30 lbs (92 ± 14 kgs). Verify that the "LOW FUEL" warning light
extinguishes and all fuel quantity indication on the secondary EDU page turns green when the
"TOTAL" fuel quantity exceeds 100 lbs (46 kgs).
(12) Verify that the "R", "L" fuel quantity on the secondary EDU page read 200 ± 15 lbs (92 ± 8 kgs)
and the "TOTAL" reads 400 ± 30 lbs (184 ± 16 kgs).
(14) Verify that the "R", "L" fuel quantity on the secondary EDU page read 300 ± 15 lbs (136 ± 8
kgs) and the "TOTAL" reads 600 ± 30 lbs (272 ± 16 kgs).
(21) Full range check of the fuel quantity indication system is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration - Avidyne Entegra EFIS (PIR-PPS60185, Rev. E.)
The fuel quantity indicator is incorporated into the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra Multi-Function Display
(MFD) as well as the Primary Flight Display (PFD). Both display units are fed data by the Data
Acquisition Unit (DAU). The DAU collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a refined
data stream to the MFD and PFD. (See Figure 2.)
During calibration, switches on the bottom of the DAU are manipulated to select which wing is being
calibrated and which phase of the calibration process is being performed. All data relating to calibration
is displayed on the MFD.
NOTE: Fuel quantity is displayed only in pounds or kilograms, depending on how the MFD and PFD have been
configured (i.e. - standard “English” or optional “Metric”). To convert pounds/kilograms to US
gallons/liters, see Chart 2.
A. Requirements
(1) Calibrate both wings whenever a DAU is replaced.
(2) Calibrate the affected wing whenever fuel probe(s) are replaced.
B. Procedure
Fuel quantity calibration can only be performed on one wing at a time. If fuel quantity calibration is
performed due to a fuel quantity probe replacement, just recalibrate the side where the probe was
replaced. If fuel quantity calibration is performed due to DAU replacement, recalibrate both sides.
NOTE: The DAU is located on the right aft side of the forward pressurization bulkhead and is
accessed by reaching under the instrument panel on the right side.
(1) Right Wing Fuel Tank Calibration
(b) Ensure that the fuel has been completely drained from the Right wing (including the fuel
sump).
(c) Power up the Multi-Function Display (MFD). Select "AUX" page using the right knob outer
ring. Enter Maintenance Mode by pressing buttons "L1" and "L3" simultaneously. When in
the maintenance mode, depress and release the "Engine Setup" button. Verify the Engine
Instruments Setup Page appears on the MFD and the top left bezel button is labeled "Fuel
Cal" (See Figure 8).
(d) Depress and release the "Fuel Cal" button. Verify the "DAU Fuel Calibration" page
appears on the MFD (See Figure 9).
(f) Hold the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle switches on the DAU in the "R-CAL" position (see Figure 6).
Push in the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker and keep holding the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle
switches for a minimum of 5 seconds.
(g) On the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page, for the Right Tank, verify that:
1 The "Mode" is "Calibrating"
2 The "Low" Calibration Status is "Uncalibrated"
3 The "High" Calibration Status is "Uncalibrated"
NOTE: The "Low" and "High" Calibration Status will be "Uncalibrated" only if the
DAU has never been calibrated. If the DAU was already calibrated at least
once, "Calibrated" will be displayed for "Low" and "High" Calibration Status.
3I21 28-40-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Put 1.5 USG of Jet fuel in the Right wing (unusable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(i) Verify that the Right Tank status display is "Ready" (See Figure 9).
(j) Hold the SW-1 toggle switch on the DAU in the "R-CAL" position for a minimum of 3
seconds. Verify on the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page that the Right Tank's "Low"
Calibration Status shows "Calibrated".
(k) Verify that the Right Tank's "Quantity" rectangle shows "0%".
(l) Add 85 USG of Jet fuel in the Right wing (usable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(m) Verify that the Right Tank status display is "Ready" (See Figure 9).
(n) Hold the SW-2 toggle switch on the DAU in the "R-CAL" position for a minimum of 3
seconds. Verify on the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page that the Right Tank's "High"
(o) Verify that the Right Tank's "Quantity" rectangle shows "100%".
(p) Pull the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker.
Effectivity MFD - Engine Setup Page

with Avidyne Entegra Figure 8
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(q) Push in the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker.

(r) On the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page, for the Right Tank, verify that the "Mode" is
"Operating".
(s) Calibration of the Right wing fuel quantity is completed. If calibration of the Left wing is
required, go to Left Wing Fuel Tank Calibration, below, otherwise, turn aircraft power OFF.
MFD - DAU Fuel Calibration Page Effectivity

Figure 9 with Avidyne Entegra
3I23 28-40-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Left Wing Fuel Tank Calibration

(b) Ensure that the fuel has been completely drained from the Left wing (including the fuel
sump).
(c) Power up the Multi-Function Display (MFD). Select "AUX" page using the right knob outer
ring. Enter Maintenance Mode by pressing buttons "L1" and "L3" simultaneously. When in
Instruments Setup Page appears on the MFD and the top left bezel button is labeled "Fuel
Cal" (See Figure 8).
(d) Depress and release the "Fuel Cal" button. Verify the "DAU Fuel Calibration" page
(f) Hold the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle switches on the DAU in the "L-CAL" position (See Figure
6). Push in the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker and keep holding the SW-1 and SW-2 toggle
switches for a minimum of 5 seconds.
(g) On the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page, for the Left Tank, verify that:
1 The "Mode" is "Calibrating"
2 The "Low" Calibration Status is "Uncalibrated"
3 The "High" Calibration Status is "Uncalibrated"
(h) Put 1.5 USG of Jet fuel in the Left wing (unusable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(i) Verify that the Left Tank status display is "Ready" (See Figure 9).
(j) Hold the SW-1 toggle switch on the DAU in the "L-CAL" position for a minimum of 3
seconds. Verify on the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page that the Left Tank's "Low"
(k) Verify that the Left Tank's "Quantity" rectangle shows "0%".
(l) Add 85 USG of Jet fuel in the Left wing (usable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(m) Verify that the Left Tank status display is "Ready" (see Figure 9).
(n) Hold the SW-2 toggle switch on the DAU in the "L-CAL" position for a minimum of 3
seconds. Verify on the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page that the Left Tank's "High"
(o) Verify that the Left Tank's "Quantity" rectangle shows "100%".
(p) Pull the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker.
(q) Push in the "FUEL QTY" circuit breaker.
(r) On the MFD's "DAU Fuel Calibration" page, for the Left Tank, verify that the "Mode" is
"Operating".
(s) Calibration of the Left wing fuel quantity is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Full Range Check

A full range check provides a detailed test of the fuel quantity indication system performance.
Perform as desired. This check is recommended as part of the refueling process whenever fuel
system has been completely drained.
(1) Level the aircraft (See 8-20-00).
(2) Ensure that the fuel has been completely drained from the Right and Left wings (including the
fuel sump).
(3) Pull the manual fuel shut-off (in cockpit).
(4) Ensure that the “FUEL PUMPS” switch is in the "OFF" position.
(6) Verify the MFD is operating in normal operational mode (not Maintenance Mode). Restart the
MFD, if necessary. Turn the right knob outer ring to bring up the "Engine” page, if not already
displayed. (See Figure 2, Sheet 2.)
(7) Put 1.5 USG of Jet fuel in the Right and Left wings (unusable fuel) and wait 5 minutes.
(8) Verify that the "TOTAL" value below the fuel tapes is red and reads zero (0). Verify that the
individual tank quantities are red and read zero (0). Verify there are no "tapes" beside the fuel
quantity scales.
(9) Verify that the "LOW FUEL" warning light and the "FUEL PRESSURE" light are illuminated on
the ANNUNCIATOR panel.
(10) Verify that the "Low Fuel Quantity" message, in yellow, appears in the message bar within 5
seconds, and in the message center on the MFD's "Aux" page.
(11) Add 100 Lbs of Jet fuel in the Right and Left wings and wait 5 minutes.
NOTE: To convert fuel weight (lbs/kgs) into volume (US GAL/liters), determine Jet fuel density
(refer to Chart 2) and divide weight by Jet fuel density).
(12) Verify that the "R" and "L" quantities on the MFD engine page read 100 ± 15 lbs (46 ± 6 kg)
and the "TOTAL" reads 200 ± 30 lbs (92 ± 14 kg). Verify that the "TOTAL" fuel quantity of the
PFD reads the same value as the "TOTAL" fuel quantity of the MFD. Verify that no "Low Fuel
Quantity" message is present in the message bar or in the message center on the MFD's
"Aux" page. Verify that the "LOW FUEL" warning light on the ANNUNCIATOR panel
extinguishes. Verify that the "R" and "L" tank quantities turn green when the fuel quantity
exceeds 50 lbs (22 kg), and the "TOTAL" fuel quantity indication turns green when the "TOTAL"
fuel quantity exceeds 100 lbs (46 kg).
PFD reads the same value as the "TOTAL" fuel quantity of the MFD. (See Figure 2.)
PFD reads the same value as the "TOTAL" fuel quantity of the MFD.
3J1 28-40-00 PAGE 17

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(23) Full range check of the fuel quantity indication is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Fuel Temperature Indicator

A fuel temperature indicator is installed in airplanes S/N’s 4697159 and up; and in S/N’s 4697001 thru
4697158 with Kit No. 767-380 installed.
It consists of a fuel temperature sensor mounted in the right wing inboard fuel tank (See Figure 10, and
also 28-00-00, Figure 1) and an indicator mounted in the instrument panel to the left of the pilot’s control
yoke.
A. Indicator
The indicator is a standard face-mounted instrument and is removed and installed per the
B. Sensor
The fuel temperature sensor screws into a threaded fitting permanently bonded to the rib at W. S. 82.10.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the sensor from the wiring harness at the connectors.
(b) Unscrew and remove the sensor.
(2) Installation
(a) Screw the sensor into the threaded fitting bonded to the wing rib. Torque as specified in
Figure 10.
(b) Connect the sensor wires to the wiring harness.
Effectivity
4697159 & up;
Fuel Temperature Sensor Installation and 4697001 thru 4697158
Figure 10 with Kit # 767-380 installed
3J3 28-40-00 PAGE 19

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3J5 28-40-00 PAGE 21

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 28-40-00 3J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
29
HYDRAULIC POWER
3J7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 29
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
29-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
29-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 29 - HYDRAULIC POWER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 29-00-00 1 3J13

Description and Operation 1 3J13
Troubleshooting Hydraulic System 1 3J13
Hydraulic System Leading Particulars 2 3J14
MAIN 29-10-00 1 3J17

Hydraulic Pump 3 3J19
Removal 3 3J19
Installation 3 3J19
Normal Operation Test 5 3J21
Thermal Relief Valve Operation Test 5 3J21
Bleeding Hydraulic System 5 3J21
Hydraulic Lines, Removal and Installation 6 3J22
Hydraulic System Testing 9 3K1
Hydraulic Pump / Reservoir Servicing 9 3K1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL

The hydraulic system components covered in this chapter consist of the combination hydraulic pump/
reservoir and hydraulic lines associated with the landing gear extension and retraction system. The brake
system, although hydraulically operated, is not included in this chapter as its hydraulic system is
independent of the landing gear extension and retraction system. The brake system and additional
details of the landing gear extension and retraction system are covered in Chapter 32. The flap system in
this aircraft is electric and is covered in Chapter 27.
WARNING: PRIOR TO CHECKING OUT THE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, PLACE THE AIRPLANE ON
JACKS. (REFER TO JACKING, 7-10-00.)
The hydraulic system provides the power to operate the landing gear using an electrically driven
hydraulic pump operating at 1350 to 1400 maximum psi. The hydraulic pump is located behind the
baggage compartment with access through a removable panel. The pump has a see-thru reservoir for
ease of checking fluid level. Two relief valves in the pump prevent system pressure from exceeding 1600
psi during pump operation. Two thermal relief valves prevent hydraulic pressure from exceeding 2600 psi
when the landing gear is down and locked and airplane is on the ground.
The landing gear selector is an electrical switch that commands the pump to operate in either the up or
down direction, as appropriate. In normal operation, the pump starts when the selector switch is moved
up or down and the appropriate pressure switch senses a pressure at or below 1170 psi. As the gear
reaches full extension or retraction, hydraulic pressure builds and the appropriate pressure switch will
open at 1350 to 1400 psi to stop pump operation. The gear is held in the up position by hydraulic
pressure. An electrical by-pass is provided for gear extension. If the down pressure switch fails (i.e. -
sticks open), the hydraulic pump will operate when the selector is set to gear down and will continue to
operate until the nose gear downlimit switch is engaged. Emergency gear extension is accomplished by
a free fall (i.e. - emergency gear release) valve which releases gear up hydraulic pressure, allowing the
gear to extend and lock.
2. Troubleshooting Hydraulic System
If trouble develops in the landing gear, place the airplane on jacks (refer to Jacking, 7-10-00), and
proceed to find the cause of the trouble. A hydraulic system operational check may be conducted using
Figures 1 or 2 and the Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test, 32-30-00. When the trouble has
been recognized, the first step is to isolate the cause. After isolation of a particular cause or problem,
refer to the individual Chapter pertaining to that subject matter, i.e. Landing Gear: Chapter 32.
Hydraulic system troubles are not always traceable to one cause. A malfunction may be the result of
more than one trouble in the system. Start with the most obvious and most probable reasons for the
trouble, check each possibility and, by process of elimination, isolate the fault.
3J13 29-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Hydraulic System Leading Particulars
CHART 1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LEADING PARTICULARS
Hydraulic Pump, Electrically Driven, Reversible

Flow Rate @ 1350 psi 1 gpm
Hydraulic Fluid MIL-H-5606
Reservoir Capacity 30 cu. in. ( .49 liters)
Normal Operating Pressure 1350 psi
Relief Valve (Thermal) Opens at 2525 ± 75 psig
Relief Valve (Pressure) Opens at 1600 +0 /- 50 psig
Pressure Switch
Open 1450 ± 40 psig max.
Close 1170 psig min.
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage 24 - 28 Vdc
Operating Current @ 1350 psig 60 Amps Max. @ 27 Vdc
Operating Time Gear Up 7 - 8 sec
Gear Down 7 - 8 sec
Overload Protection 25 Amp Circuit Breaker
PS 50043-6 D
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 29-00-00 3J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3J15 29-00-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 29-00-00 3J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN
The PA-46-500TP is equipped with a Frisby Aerospace electrically driven, reversible hydraulic pump. The
pump is mounted on a floor bracket just forward of the aft pressure bulkhead.
Fluid Diagram of Hydraulic System Effectivity

Figure 1 4697001 & up
3J17 29-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Hydraulic System Installation

4697001 & up Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 29-10-00 3J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. Hydraulic Pump
CAUTION: THE HYDRAULIC PUMP IS NOT SERVICEABLE IN THE FIELD. REPLACE WITH NEW
OR FACTORY REBUILT UNIT. RETURN DEFECTIVE AND OVERLIMIT UNITS TO THE
FACTORY FOR REBUILD.
A. Removal (Refer to Figure 3)
WARNING: PLACE AIRPLANE ON JACKS PRIOR TO WORKING ON THE HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM. (REFER TO 7-10-00)
The hydraulic pump is located on a floor bracket just forward of the aft pressure bulkhead assembly.
(1) Place airplane on jacks (Refer to 7-10-00, Jacking).
(2) Reduce hydraulic pressure as follows:
(a) Place gear switch in up position.
(b) Allow gear to retract until pressure drops.
(c) Pull hydraulic pump circuit breaker.
(3) Set BATT MASTER switch to OFF position.
(4) Disconnect aft baggage net assembly.
(5) Remove access panel aft of baggage compartment.
(6) Disconnect electrical wires and tie to pump.
(7) Disconnect and rapidly cap hydraulic lines and hoses.
(8) Install vent screw, washer, and warning tag.
(9) Remove four sets of mounting bolts, washers, rubber washers, and nuts.
(10) Remove pump from airplane to a clean bench.
(11) Drain reservoir into a suitable container.
B. Installation (Refer to Figure 3)
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE BLEEDING AND TESTING
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
(1) Place pump assembly in aircraft.
NOTE: Align pump assembly so that fill plug is to the front.
(2) Install four sets of mounting bolts, washers, and rubber washers.
(3) Uncap and reconnect hydraulic lines.
(4) Fill reservoir with hydraulic fluid.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling, allow
fluid level to stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling will result in
excess fluid being expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
(5) Remove vent screw, washer, and warning tag.
(6) Set BATT MASTER switch on.
(7) Reset hydraulic pump circuit breaker.
(8) Bleed hydraulic system per paragraph 2, below.
(9) Conduct “Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test” (32-30-00). Verify that the gear
operates smoothly and there are no leaks.
3J19 29-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102559 C
PUMP MOTOR
VENT SCREW
- REMOVE BEFORE FLIGHT
- REPLACE BEFORE
REMOVING PUMP
FROM AIRCRAFT
FILL VENT
- REMOVE SCREW
WHILE FILLING
RESERVOIR
LIN W
FIL RE
G
NG E SC
DU MOV
RI
RE
FILL PLUG
DOWN
PRESSURE
SWITCH
D
O
W
N SEE-THRU
FLUID RESERVOIR
U
P
UP PRESSURE SWITCH
Effectivity Hydraulic Pump

4697001 & up Figure 3
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 29-10-00 3J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Normal Operation Test (Refer to Figure 4) (PIR-PS50043-6,Rev. D.)
Connect the hydraulic pump into a system as shown in Figure 4 to check normal pump operation.
Maintain 27-28 VDC during all testing.
(1) Fill pump reservoir to full line (“F” mark on the reservoir) with clean filtered MIL-H-5606
hydraulic fluid. Ensure that pump vent is open (remove screw, washer and warning tag, if
installed). With the shut-off valve open, run the pump in the gear “UP” position for
approximately 10 seconds. Slowly close the valve to build up 50-100 psig, and bleed air from
the “UP” side of the system. Refill reservoir as required to keep fluid level between “F” and “L”
marks during all testing.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling, allow
fluid level to stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling will result in
excess fluid being expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
(2) With the shut-off valve in the open position, apply power to the pump with the gear switch in
the gear “UP” position. Allow the pump to operate approximately 15 seconds. Slowly close the
shut-off valve. The pressure switch shall turn the pump off at 1400 psig maximum. Continue to
supply electrical power to the pump and observe for pressure drop and no pump operation for
5 minutes. Except, if the pump operates once momentarily during this five minute period there
shall be no repeated pump operation during the subsequent fifteen minutes.
(3) Repeat (2), above, with the gear switch in the gear “DOWN” position.
(4) With the shut-off valve open, the gear selector switch in the gear “DOWN” position and the
pressure switch disconnect switch in the “DOWN” position, allow the pump to operate
approximately 10 seconds. Slowly close the shut-off valve. Observe the maximum pressure
indicated and immediately shut pump off. The maximum pressure shall be at least 1550 psig
but not more than 1800 psig. With the pump off observe that the pressure does not fall below
1350 psig in 5 minutes.
(5) Repeat (4), above, with the gear switch and pressure switch disconnect switch in the gear “UP”
position. The maximum pressure shall be at least 1550 psig but not more than 2000 psig.
NOTE: If pump is not installed in an aircraft, reinstall vent screw, washer, and warning tag upon
completion of test.
D. Thermal Relief Valve Operation Test
(1) Fill pump reservoir to full line (“F” mark on the reservoir) with clean filtered MIL-H-5606
hydraulic fluid. Ensure that pump vent is open (remove screw, washer and warning tag, if
installed).
(2) With a suitable pump and calibrated gauge, slowly apply hydraulic pressure individually to the
pump “UP” and “DOWN” outlet ports. The first indication of pressure relief shall occur at 2450
to 2600 psig for both “UP” and “DOWN” sides of the pump assembly.
NOTE: If pump is not installed in an aircraft, reinstall vent screw, washer, and warning tag upon
completion of test.
2. Bleeding Hydraulic System (PIR-PPS-60033-9, Rev. I.)
NOTE: Follow this sequence to reduce foaming.

A. Place airplane on jacks. (refer to 7-10-00)
B. Disconnect the rod assemblies between nose gear doors and door actuating torque tube assembly.
The sequence valve plunger adjustment screw should be all the way "IN".
3J21 29-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB WHILE THE HYDRAULIC
PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL THE HYDRAULIC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE TESTING THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE SYSTEM. FAILURE TO
COMPLY WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE.
C. Operate the gear through at least five complete cycles.
NOTE: Add fluid to reservoir as needed.
D. With gear down, pull the hydraulic pump circuit breaker and move the gear selector switch to "UP"
position. Using the circuit breaker as a switch, cycle the gear until the nose gear is about half up
and pull the circuit breaker. Crack the "B" nut on the hose assembly at the nose gear door actuating
cylinder and depress the plunger on the sequence valve to purge air from this line.
NOTE: Move nose gear downward if necessary to create pressure and flow to completely bleed air
from the line.
Repeat as necessary until all air is removed and retighten "B" nut.
E. Crack the "B" nuts at the main gear "UP" fittings and moving the gears downward, bleed the air
from the actuators. Tighten the "B" nuts.
F. Push in the circuit breaker and complete the retraction cycle. Return the gear to the "DOWN"
position and crack the "B" nuts on the "DOWN" side fittings on all three gear actuators to bleed out
any trapped air. Retighten the "B" nuts.
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE KNOB WHILE THE HYDRAULIC
PUMP IS OPERATING. ALWAYS PULL THE HYDRAULIC PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE TESTING THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE SYSTEM. FAILURE TO
COMPLY WILL DAMAGE THE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE.
G. Operate the gear through at least three complete cycles.
H. Reconnect and adjust nose gear door actuating rods and sequence valve plunger per
32-30-00, Sequence Valve - Adjustment.
3. Hydraulic Lines - Removal and Installation
A. Remove damaged hydraulic lines by disconnecting the fittings at each end and where it is secured
by brackets. Refer to Figure 2 as an aid in locating the attaching brackets and bends in the lines.
B. Provide a small container for draining the line.
C. Install new or repaired line in the reverse order of removal.
D. Bleed system and lines.
E. Check fluid level in reservoir.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 29-10-00 3J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3J23 29-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 VDC
25A
RED WHT
UP
DN UP
3A
DN GEAR SELECT
SWITCH
PUMP-DN PUMP-UP
PRESS SW PRESS SW
P P
PRESSURE SWITCH
DISCONNECT
OFF
HYDR DN UP
BLK
PUMP
DN UP
GAUGE SHUT-OFF VALVE GAUGE
PS50043-6 D / 102220 13.0 NEW
Effectivity Hydraulic Pump Test Set-up

4697001 & up Figure 4
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 29-10-00 3J24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Hydraulic System Testing (see also Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test, 32-30-00)
The hydraulic system should be tested to check that it functions properly after performing any service or
repairs. It is suggested that the airplane be connected to an outside power source in order to conserve
the battery.
WARNING: SET BATT MASTER SWITCH TO THE OFF POSITION BEFORE INSERTING OR
REMOVING EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY PLUG.
A. Place airplane on jacks. (refer to 7-10-00)
B. With the gear down, place the BATT MASTER switch to the on position, and circuit breaker closed.
Place the landing gear selector in the UP position. Pump should immediately operate and gear
retract. The red gear unsafe light on the instrument panel should illuminate, until the gear is fully
retracted. The hydraulic pump should stop after full gear retraction.
C. Place the gear selector in the DOWN position. The gear should extend and lock. The gear down
lights on the instrument panel will illuminate when all three gears are locked in the down position.
Inspect hydraulic system for leakage.
D. Recycle landing gear to check that it functions properly.
WARNING: PRIOR TO REMOVING THE AIRPLANE FROM THE JACKS, TURN MASTER
SWITCH ON AND VERIFY THAT ALL THREE GREEN LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED.
THIS WILL INDICATE THE LANDING GEAR IS DOWN AND LOCKED.
E. Remove airplane from jacks.
5. Hydraulic Pump / Reservoir Servicing
Check fluid level in reservoir every 50 hours by viewing fluid level directly. If fluid is below the
fill-line (i.e. - the “L” mark), remove fill plug and fill vent screw and add MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid. Ensure
that the landing gear is down when filling the reservoir. Re-install fill plug and fill vent screw and tighten.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Add fluid only when level falls below the “L” mark. When filling, allow fluid level to
stabilize before comparing fluid level to fill marks. Overfilling will result in excess fluid being
expelled from reservoir vent pipe.
3K1 29-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 3K2 THRU 3L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 29-10-00 3K2
CARD 4 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

4A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
4A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 4A9
Effectivity 2 4A10
Pagination 2 4A10
Indexing 3 4A11
INDEX
Index 1 4B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
4B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 4B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
4B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 4B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
4B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 4B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
4B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 4B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
4B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
30
ICE AND RAIN
PROTECTION
4C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30
CHAPTER CHAPTER
30-List of 1 Apr 15/07 30-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
30-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
30-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 16 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 17 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 18 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 19 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 20 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 21 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 22 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 23 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07 24 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
30-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
30-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 30-00-00 1 4C7

Description and Operation 1 4C7
AIRFOIL 30-10-00 1 4C9
Pneumatic Deice System Troubleshooting 1 4C9
Pneumatic Boots 6 4C14
Removal 6 4C14
Installation 7 4C15
Repair Procedures 12 4C20
Repair Limits 15 4C23
Maintenance 15 4C23
Vacuum Manifold / Deice Flow Valve Assembly 17 4D1
Removal 17 4D1
Installation 18 4D2
Pressure Switch Assemblies 18 4D2
Removal 18 4D2
Installation 19 4D3
Pneumatic Deice System Adjustments and Test 19 4D3
Timer 19 4D3
Removal 19 4D3
Installation 19 4D3
PITOT AND STATIC 30-30-00 1 4D5
Pitot Deice Description 1 4D5
Pitot Removal, Installation, and Testing 1 4D5
WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS 30-40-00 1 4D7
Windshield Heat Troubleshooting 1 4D7
Heated Windshield Testing 1 4D7
PROPELLERS 30-60-00 1 4D9
Propeller Heat System 1 4D9
Brush Block Assemblies 10 4D18
Brush Wear 10 4D18
Module Replacement 10 4D18
Alignment 10 4D18
Slip Ring Assembly 11 4D19
Replacement 11 4D19
Alignment 11 4D19
Heater Boots 12 4D20
Electrical Check 12 4D20
Removal 12 4D20
Installation 13 4D21
Wrinkled Heater 17 4E1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
PROPELLERS (continued) 30-60-00 (cont.)

Heater Wiring Harness Installation 18 4E2
Propeller Heater Final Electrical Check 19 4E3
Propeller Heater Functional Check 19 4E3
Using the Ammeter 19 4E3
Propeller Heater Inspections 20 4E4
50 Hour 20 4E4
100 Hour 20 4E4
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Description and Operation
The ice protection system is made up of six separate systems: a pneumatic wing deice system, an
electrical propeller heat system, an electrically heated windshield, heated stall warning, heated pitot, and
a wing inspection light installation. The systems are controlled from the right overhead switch panel.
The pneumatic system utilizes boots to displace ice from the leading edges of the flight surfaces. When
SURFACE DEICE switch is selected ON, the boots are inflated on a 60 second cycle by pressure from
the bleed air system and deflated by suction from the vacuum ejector. (See 37-10-00, Figure 1.) Along
with the boots and related plumbing, the system also uses a 3-line vacuum manifold/flow valve assembly
and three pressure switches.
Boots are attached to the leading edge of the wings, vertical stabilizer, and elevator. The boots are made
up of a fabric-reinforced rubber containing built-in span-wise inflation tubes. The boots are secured to the
leading edges with cement and are connected to the plumbing through the skin by flexible air
connections.
The propeller heat system consists of an electrically heated boot bonded to each blade, a slip ring
assembly connected to the hub of the propeller, an electronic control module, a circuit breaker, a control
switch located on the overhead switch panel.
The B. F. Goodrich propeller heat system installed on this airplane uses a dual element type heater boot.
In this system each heater has two electrothermal heating elements, inboard and outboard. When the
PROP HEAT switch on the instrument panel is turned ON, the electronic control module directs power
through the modular brush assembly and slip ring to the outboard heating elements for approximately 90
seconds. The timer then switches power to the inboard heating elements for approximately 90 seconds.
This cycle will continue as long as the PROP HEAT switch is in the ON position. There is a ground test
mode which uses a squat switch relay to turn the propeller heat off if the airplane remains on the ground
more than 60 seconds after PROP HEAT is switched ON. When the airplane becomes airborne, PROP
HEAT exits the test mode and enters inflight mode.
The heated windshield consists of an electrically heated left windshield. Circuit protection is provided by
the windshield heat CONTROL and POWER breakers in the ICE PROTECTION section of the pilot’s
circuit breaker panel.
Heated pitot and stall warning systems are standard on the airplane. These systems are operated by
switches on the overhead switch panel. Other components of the systems include heated pitot heads
with 10-amp circuit breakers and a heated lift detector with a 25 amp circuit breaker.
To aid the pilot in inspecting the leading edge of the left wing for any ice formation, a wing inspection
light is installed in the left hand side of the fuselage. Information on the wing inspection light may be
found in Chapter 33 (Lights).
NOTE: For wiring schematics not found in this chapter, refer to Chapter 91.
4C7 30-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 30-00-00 4C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRFOIL
1. Pneumatic Deice System Troubleshooting

See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING PNEUMATIC DEICE SYSTEM

Deicers do not inflate. Open circuit breaker. Push circuit breaker
Engine operating at to reset.
minimum cruise power.
(“SURFACE DEICE FAIL” System connection loose Tighten or repair as
annunciator should also or wire broken. required.
illuminate.)
Timer not functioning. Test or replace as
required.
Pressure regulator valves not Make electrical test.
functioning. Check for sticking
poppet. Clean. Ensure
that both vent ports on
solenoid valves are open.
Lines blocked or not Blow out lines and
connected. inspect connections.
Make air leakage test.
Deicers do not inflate Pressure regulator valves Remove and clean.
or inflate slowly. clogged.
Deicers inflate slowly Lines partially blocked Blow out lines and
(normal time - 6 seconds). or not connected securely. inspect connections.
Make air leakage test.
Deflate solenoid valves not Ensure that both vent
functioning properly. ports on solenoid are open.
System pressure not Check performance to
being reached. manufacturer’s
specifications.
Deicer puncture. Repair per specification
or replace.
Deicers deflate slowly. Lines partially blocked. Inspect and blow out lines.
Deflate solenoid valve not Ensure that both vent
functioning properly. ports on solenoid are open.
4C9 30-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PNEUMATIC DEICE SYSTEM
Deicers inflate, indicator Indicator lamp burned out. Replace lamp.

light does not function.
(Check that deicer boot
switch is ON.)
System pressure not Check “Deicers Inflate
being reached. Slowly” above.
Pressure regulator valve Make electrical test
switch not functioning. and replace if required.
Wires loose or broken. Make electrical test.
Repair or replace
broken wires.
Poor grounding of Check for
pressure regulator valve proper ground.
switch.
Deicer boots do not Deflate valve not Remove and trouble-
hold their form in functioning properly shoot valve. Replace
flight or vacuum to if necessary.
the system is inadequate.
Vacuum line restricted. Disconnect line from
instruments, deflate
valve, and blow out line.
Broken line. Inspect system and repair.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VERTICAL FIN DEICE BOOT
PRESSURE SWITCH
PNEUMATIC LINE TO EMPENAGE
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
DEICE BOOT
A
INBOARD
DEICE BOOT
OU
DE TBO
ICE AR
BO D
OT
STALL STRIP
Pneumatic Deice System - Post-FIKI

4C11 30-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
4697100 & up and
4697001 thru 4697099 Pneumatic Deice System - Post-FIKI
(after FIKI retrofit) Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
4697100 & up and
Pneumatic Deice System - Post-FIKI 4697001 thru 4697099
Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 3) (after FIKI retrofit)
4C13 30-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pneumatic Deicer Boot Operation

Figure 2
2. Deicers (Boots) (Pneumatic Deice System)

Boots are attached to the leading edge of the wings, vertical stabilizer, and elevator. The boots are made
up of a fabric-reinforced rubber containing built-in span-wise inflation tubes. The boots are secured to the
leading edges with cement and are connected to the plumbing through the skin by flexible or aluminum
air connections.
WARNING: CEMENTS AND SOLVENTS USED TO REMOVE AND INSTALL DEICERS ARE
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE AND TOXIC. EXTINGUISH OPEN FLAMES. AVOID SPARKS.
USE IN WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID SKIN CONTACT AND/OR PROLONGED
BREATHING OF VAPORS. CONSULT MSDS FOR ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFO.
CAUTION: DISPOSE OF UNUSED MEK AND OTHER CHEMICALS AND SOLVENTS IN A MANNER
CONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAWS AND/OR ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
REGULATIONS.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK ON SMARTBOOTTM INSTALLATIONS (VERTICAL FIN AND RIGHT
STABILIZER) AS MEK WILL ATTACK ESTANE® MATERIAL. USE TOLUENE INSTEAD.
NOTE: Goodrich Black Standard Pneumatic De-Icer Installation, Maintenance & Repair Manual, ATA
Report No. 30-10-31, provides approved, alternate procedures for removing and installing deice
boots. Reference to it is highly recommended. It can be obtained online at
http://www.goodrich.com/TechPubs.
A. Removal
See Chart 2, below, for required materials.
NOTE: Disconnect line fittings from boot fittings.
(1) Starting at one corner of the upper trailing edge of the deicer, apply a minimum amount of
solvent to the seam line while tension is applied to peel back the corner of the deicer.
(2) Using a pressure handle squirt can filled with solvent, separate the deicer boot from the
surface for a distance of four (4) inches all the way along the upper trailing edge.
(3) The area between the deicer and the wing which has now been separated will act as a
reservoir for the solvent, therefore, the deicer can be pulled down towards the leading edge
with a uniform tension.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) From the centerline of the leading edge to the lower trailing edge of the deicer, use the
pressure handle squirt can to soften the bond between the deicer and the wing skin.
(5) Use Toluene or Peerco #321 to clean the dry cement off the exposed wing area, and clean the
area thoroughly with MEK (methylethylketone).
B. Installation.
See Chart 2, below, for required materials.
(1) Leading Edge Preparation.
(a) Dry fit deicer on leading edge. Make sure deicer air connection fits in air connection hole
in leading edge and cut-outs are properly aligned. Use deicer as template to mask
installation area with one (1) inch masking tape. For non-recessed deicers, add at least
one-half (1/2) inch extra around perimeter of deicer. Mark deicer centerline on masking
tape at each end.
NOTE: Masking accurately will eliminate the need for cleaning off excess cement later.
(b) Remove paint and primer in masked area with stripper or sand painted/primed area to
roughen. Use clean pressurized air or dry cloth to remove sanding particles before
proceeding with deicer installation.
NOTE: Deicers can be installed on alodined or anodized surfaces, and over primer that
cannot be removed by scrubbing with solvent.
(c) Clean the metal surfaces thoroughly, at least twice, with MEK or Toluene. For final
cleaning, wipe the solvent film off quickly with a clean dry cloth before it has time to dry.
(d) Fill gaps of skin splices that lead under deicers with any epoxy compound meeting PMS-
C1004.
(e) On wings only, apply fuel barrier cement over fuel tank rivets and edges of fuel tanks
which will lie under the installed deicer. Proceed as follows:
1 Stir cement thoroughly to blend solids.
2 Apply one even brush coat and let dry one (1) hour.
3 Apply a second coat and let dry two (2) hours.
(f) Remove the sump plugs from the air connection grommets. In some cases, it will be
necessary to remove sections of doped fabric used to cover the air connection holes.
Draw out the ends of the non-kink hose section so that they protrude through the
connection holes in the leading edge. If hose is cracked or deteriorated, replace with new
hose.
(2) Deicer Preparation
CAUTION: DO NOT SATURATE THE BACK SURFACE TOO HEAVILY WITH SOLVENT OR
SCRUB IT REPEATEDLY. ALLOW THE DEICER TO DRY THOROUGHLY
BEFORE CEMENTING.
(a) Moisten a clean cloth with MEK or acetone and carefully clean the rough, back surface of
the boot at least twice.
(b) Change cloths frequently to avoid recontamination of the cleaned areas.
4C15 30-10-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REQUIRED MATERIALS - PNEUMATIC DEICER - INSTALLATION / REMOVAL / REPAIR
Adhesive * - Choose One System (Goodrich Part Number)
3M 1300L System (preferred adhesive) and, A-851-B Fuel Barrier Adhesive
1300L Cement [Piper P/N 179-929 = 1 qt.] (74-451-99) = 1 qt.
or
Bostik 1096M System or, British Bostick 2402 System
1007 or 1007M Bostik Primer 9252 British Bostick Primer
1096M Bostik Cement 2402 British Bostick Cement
Boscodur 9R Accelerator Bostikure D Accelerator
* use Boar's Bristle brush
Filler - Choose One Product (If Required)
Lord, 305-1 (Piper P/N. 279-162) or Henkel Corp. EA 960F (Piper P/N 279-135)
305-2 (Piper P/N. 279-163) EA 9309NA (Piper P/N.279-035)
Sealer * - Choose One Product (Goodrich Part Number)
A-56-B*** (74-451-11) = 1/2 pt **; or, Edge Sealer Kit (74-451-P)
(74-451-11-1) = 1 qt. (Black Estane® or Neoprene Deicers)
Edge Sealer Kit (74-451-K)
(Black Estane® Deicers only)
* use Pure Bristle brush ** Piper P/N 912-018 *** Neoprene deicers only
Solvents
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK ON ESTANE® (I.E. - SMARTBOOTSTM ) DEICERS INTENDED FOR
REUSE OR CONTINUED USE.
Item Where Used
Toluene Leading edge and deicer cleaning solvent
Toluene, or Leading edge stripping solvent
Peerco #321 stripper, or
Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK)
MEK or Toluene or Acetone Prop deicer removal and tackifying solvent *
* Toluene is the preferred tackifying solvent. Methylethylketone (MEK) can be used, but causes very
rapid drying and provides only 10 seconds working time compared with 40 seconds for Toluene.
Tools and Miscellaneous (Goodrich Part Number)
2 x 2 1/2 in. Rubber roller (74-451-74) 1/4 in. Steel stitcher roller (74-451-89)
1 in. Paint brush Lint-free cloths
Scissors 1 in. masking tape
Emery Buffing Stick (74-451-75) 6 ea. Sharp knife
Steel measuring tape (6 ft.) Fine sharpening stone
Steel wool pads Hypodermic needles (22 gauge or smaller)
Straight edge Carpenter's chalk line
Hook knife (74-451-45) 3M EC 801 filler
FASTpatchTM Primer - 1/2 oz. crush tube (74-451-190)
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REQUIRED MATERIALS - PNEUMATIC DEICER - INSTALLATION / REMOVAL / REPAIR
Goodrich Kits
Goodrich Part No. Quantity Description
74-451-AA 1 Universal FASTpatchTM Repair Kit
74-451-206 1 Primer Pen (2 oz.)
74-451-187 30 Small Oval Patch
(1-1/4 x 2-1/2 in.)
74-451-188 30 Medium Oval Patch
(2-1/2 x 5 in.)
74-451-189 10 Large Oval Patch
(5 x 10 in.)
74-451-75 3 Emery Cloth
(9 x 11 in.)
74-451-87 1 Buffing Shield
74-451-AE 1 Pinhole Repair Kit
74-451-201 8.5 grams Accelerator
74-451-202 1 Buffing Shield
74-451-205 1 Application Tool
74-451-209 24 Cement
74-451-210 24 Mixing Cup
74-451-211 24 Mixing Tool
74-451-212 50 Application Template
74-451-K 1 Edge Sealer Kit
(Black Estane® Deicers only)
74-451-117-1 1 qt. Sealer/Cement
74-451-120 4 oz. Accelerator
74-451-L 1 Resurfacing Kit *
74-451-122 1 qt. Primer
74-451-123 1 qt. Resurfacing Coat
* after P/N 74-451-L is applied to a neoprene deicer, the deicer should be treated as an Estane® deicer for
maintenance purposes.
74-451-P 1 Edge Sealer Kit
(Black Estane® or Neoprene Deicers)
74-451-20 1 pt. Cement
74-451-148 50 ft. Edge sealer strip
74-451-185 1 pt. Primer
74-451-Z 1 Maintenance Kit
74-451-127 1 qt. AgeMaster® No. 1
74-451-178 1 pt. ShineMaster®
74-451-179 1 qt. ShineMaster® Prep Cleaner
ICEX® II 16 oz. Ice Adhesion Inhibitor
4C17 30-10-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Mounting Deicer on Leading Edge

WARNING: THE CEMENTS AND SOLVENTS USED FOR INSTALLATION ARE
FLAMMABLE AND THEIR FUMES SLIGHTLY TOXIC. THEREFORE, ALL WORK
SHOULD BE DONE IN A WELL VENTILATED AREA AWAY FROM ANY SPARKS
OR FLAMES. (THE USE OF SOLVENT RESISTANT TYPE GLOVES IS
RECOMMENDED.)
CAUTION: DISPOSE OF UNUSED MEK AND OTHER CHEMICALS AND SOLVENTS IN A
MANNER CONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAWS AND/OR ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION AGENCY REGULATIONS.
(a) Thoroughly mix the EC-1300L cement before using.
(b) Apply one even brush coat to the cleaned back surface of the boot and to the cleaned
metal surface.
(c) Allow the cement to air dry for a minimum of one hour.
(d) Apply a second coat to both surfaces and allow to air dry a minimum of one hour.
NOTE: Ambient temperature for installation should be held between 40° F and 110° F.
However, longer drying time of the cement coats may be required as the humidity
approaches 99%.
NOTE: The deicer and leading edge may be cemented for a maximum of 48 hours
before actual installation, if the cemented parts are covered and kept clean.
(e) Snap a chalk line along the leading edge of the airfoil section.
(f) Intensify the chalk line on the leading edge and the white reference line on the boot with a
ball point pen.
NOTE: Most boots are made with an excess of material at the inboard and outboard
ends for final trimming after installation.
CAUTION: TIGHTEN EACH CLAMP CAREFULLY WITH A PAIR OF SLIP JOINT PLIERS.
DO NOT SQUEEZE THE CLAMP SO TIGHT THAT THE HOSE IS DAMAGED.
(7) Hold the backside of the boot close to the leading edge and fasten the end of each non-kink
hose to its corresponding air connection stem. Tinnerman or other suitable non-kink hose
clamps should be used for this purpose.
(8) Obtain sufficient personnel to hold the boot steady during installation. (Limit handling the
cemented side of the boot with fingers.)
(9) Position the deicer centerline to coincide with the centerline of the leading edge. Hold the boot
in this position while reactivating about three inches of cement around the connections and
around the corresponding holes in the leading edge, using a clean lint-free cloth moistened
with toluol.
NOTE: When positioning the wing boots, locate the outboard deicer boot so that the manifold
tube is towards the inboard edge of the hole in the wing. The inboard deicer boot
manifold tube should be located towards the outboard edge of the hole in the wing.
In either case, the manifold tube must be clear of the edge of the hole to prevent
chafing or cutting of the tube during operation.
(10) Insert the connections in the leading edge holes when the cement dries to a tacky state and
rubber roll the boot to the leading edge in the tacky area.
(11) Continue installation by reactivating the cement along the centerline leading edge surface and
boot in spanwise strips approximately six inches wide.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: AVOID EXCESS SOAKING OR RUBBING OF THE CEMENT WHICH COULD

REMOVE THE CEMENT FROM THE SURFACE.
NOTE: When installing a longer boot (approximately 6 ft. or longer) the cement may not
remain tacky to roll down the entire length of a six inch width. Therefore, roll the boot
down part way, leaving an open angle to permit easy access for reactivating the
cement.
(12) Rubber roll the deicer firmly against the wing leading edge, being careful not to trap any air
under the deicer. Always roll parallel to the inflatable tubes.
CAUTION: AVOID TWISTING OR SHARP BENDING OF THE DEICER.
(13) If the deicer should attach incorrectly, use MEK to remove and reposition properly.
(14) Rubber roll the deicer, applying pressure over the entire surface of the deicer.
NOTE: All rolling should be done parallel to the inflatable tubes. Roll the trailing edges with a
narrow stitcher roller.
(15) Remove all masking tape. Clean the surfaces carefully with MEK, so that no solvent will run
under the deicer edges. Leave a minimum of .25 inch of bare metal between edge of adhesive
and edge of paint.
CAUTION: DO NOT TRIM DEICER EDGE CLOSER THAN ONE (1) INCH FROM TUBES
OR CUT-OUT AREAS, AS THIS COULD RESULT IN LEAKS OR SEAM FAILURE.
NOTE: Trim boots .25 inch around all access plates, panels, or covers.Trim ends of boots as required.
(16) Apply edge filler AC665B-1/2 (P/N 279-065) to fair full thickness deicer edges to adjacent
aircraft structure along upper deicer, around cut-outs, recessed edges, and/or between two
deicers installed close together.
(17) Apply two lines of masking tape bordering edges of area to be filled. Apply one line to deicer
surface .0625 to .125 inch from edge. Apply second line of masking tape on wing .25 to .5 inch
from deicer edge.
NOTE: Apply tape to form a neat straight line.
NOTE: Width between tape lines will vary depending on area to be filled, use narrowest width
possible.
(18) Mix and apply conductive cement (B.F. Goodrich A-56-B) P/N 912-018 in the area between the
tapes. Apply a smooth even coating with a minimum of .004 inch final thickness. Allow 10-15
minutes drying time between coats. Remove masking tape before final coat dries.
(19) If it becomes necessary to remove or loosen installed boots, use toluol to soften the adhesion
line by applying a minimum of this solvent to the seam line while applying tension to peel back
the boot. This removal should be slow enough to allow the solvent to undercut the cement, thus
preventing injury to the part.
(20) Cure Time.
Normal cure time is 48 hours before operating boot system. A system ground check and flight
check only may be conducted after 24 hours, however, the system may not be operated in
icing conditions prior to the full 48 hours having elapsed.
4C19 30-10-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Repair Procedures.
CAUTION: REVIEW REPAIR LIMITS, BELOW, TO DETERMINE IF REPAIR IS PERMITTED.
See Chart 2 for materials and supplies. Kits and part numbers referenced below are Goodrich
Corporation, unless otherwise noted.
NOTE: Repair of damage that does not leak air is not mandatory.
(1) Scuff (Surface) Damage: This type of damage will be most commonly encountered and,
fortunately, it is not necessary in most cases to make a repair. Surface damage that leaks air,
but does not cut inflatable tube fabric, and does not exceed 4" X 9" should be repaired with
P/N 74-451-AA patch kit as follows:
CAUTION: PATCH ADHESION IS TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE. IF TEMPERATURE IS
UNDER 50°F (10°C), WARM DEICER SURFACE PRIOR TO APPLYING
PRIMER, AND WARM INSTALLED PATCH WHILE DRYING. TO WARM, HOLD
PLASTIC BAG FILLED WITH HOT WATER ON DEICER SURFACE, AND ON
INSTALLED PATCH. IF SURFACE AND INSTALLED PATCH ARE NOT WARMED,
PATCH MAY NOT ADHERE.
CAUTION: PATCHES HAVE A ONE-WAY STRETCH ACROSS WIDTH OF PATCH SO

PATCH CAN STRETCH WHEN DEICER INFLATES. PATCH MUST BE
INSTALLED WITH LENGTH PARALLEL TO DEICER TUBES. FAILURE TO DO
SO MAY RESULT IN PATCH LIFTING WHEN DEICER INFLATES.
CAUTION: PREPARATION OF DEICER SURFACE TO BE PATCHED IS CRUCIAL FOR

GOOD PATCH ADHESION. FAILURE TO REMOVE, SHINEMASTER®
COSMETIC TREATMENT, WAX, GREASE, OIL, ICEX ® II, AND OTHER
CONTAMINANTS COMPLETELY, CAN RESULT IN POOR PATCH ADHESION.
(a) Trim standard patch sizes to accommodate small areas of damage, leaving at least 1/2
inch beyond damaged area. Mark stretch direction on patch before trimming, so trimmed
patch is installed with stretch in same direction as tube inflation.
(b) Clean deicer surface to be patched with detergent and hot water, using lint free cloths to
remove dirt, grease and cosmetic coatings. Repeat until oil and silicone contamination is
removed.
(c) Use buffing shield or patch as template to outline damaged area. Buff deicer surface with
medium grit emery cloth or equivalent.
(d) Wipe deicer surface with cloth dampened with Toluene or alcohol and let dry.
(e) Apply one coat of primer to deicer surface. Let dry to touch (5-10 min.).
(f) Remove paper backing from patch and press patch on primed deicer surface. Roll with
rubber roller.
(g) Let dry 30 minutes before inflating deicer.
(h) Patch refurbishment:
1 To replace loose or damaged patch, remove old patch by peeling off deicer.
2 Remove adhesive remaining on deicer with Scotch BriteTM soaked in alcohol.
3 Install new patch.
(2) Tube Area Damage: Use Kit No. 74-451-AA (see application instructions, under Scuff Damage,
above) to repair cuts,tears or ruptures that leak air but do not cut inflatable tube fabric, and do
not exceed 4" X 9". Use Kit No. 74-451-AE to repair pinholes that leak air, but do not exceed
1/16 inch in diameter, as follows:
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: CUTS, TEARS, OR RUPTURES THAT CUT THE INFLATABLE TUBE FABRIC
REQUIRE DEICER REPLACEMENT.
CAUTION: PATCHES HAVE A ONE-WAY STRETCH ACROSS WIDTH OF PATCH SO
PATCH CAN STRETCH WHEN DEICER INFLATES. PATCH MUST BE
INSTALLED WITH LENGTH PARALLEL TO DEICER TUBES. FAILURE TO DO
SO MAY RESULT IN PATCH LIFTING WHEN DEICER INFLATES.
CAUTION: MIXED REPAIR MATERIAL MUST BE USED WITHIN TWO (2) HOURS.
CAUTION: APPLICATION OF 74-451-AE KIT IS NOT RECOMMENDED BELOW 50°F
(10°C), AS REPAIR MATERIAL MAY NOT DRY.
(a) Clean deicer surface to be repaired with detergent and hot water using lint-free cloth, to
remove dirt, grease and cosmetic coatings. Repeat until oil and silicone contamination is
removed.
(b) Isolate repair area with buffing template. Buff isolated area with Scotch Brite TM or
equivalent.
(c) Wipe isolated area with lint-free cloth dampened with alcohol or equivalent cleaning
solvent and allow to dry.
(d) Secure application template with hole centered over pinhole.
(e) Open foil overpack of 74-451-209 cement. Clip corner of Appli-pak pouch and squeeze
cement into mixing cup. Make sure that all material from pouch is squeezed into mixing
cup to assure proper mix ratio with accelerator.
CAUTION: RECAP ACCELERATOR TIGHTLY AFTER USE AS ACCELERATOR WILL
HARDEN IF NOT SEALED COMPLETELY.
(f) Add seven (7) drops of P/N 74-451-201 accelerator. Mix thoroughly with wooden stir stick
for one minute, making sure material on sides of cup is thoroughly mixed.
CAUTION: REMOVE APPLICATION TEMPLATE AS SOON AS REPAIR MATERIAL IS
APPLIED AND LEVELED TO ASSURE SMOOTH APPEARANCE.
(g) Apply repair material into hole in application template with wooden stir stick. Push repair
material firmly into pinhole. Level repair material with application tool.
NOTE: If repair material is spilled on undamaged deicer surface, remove immediately
with Toluene.
(h) Allow two (2) hours dry time prior to flying the aircraft or inflating deicer.
(3) Loose Surface Ply in Dead Area (i.e. - non-inflatable area): Use P/N 74-451-AA patch kit to
repair cuts, tears or ruptures that do not exceed 4" X 9" per Scuff (Surface) Damage, above.
Surface ply peeling less than 4" X 9" can be repaired by trimming away loose surface material,
and applying the 74-451-AA patch repair as follows:
(a) Peel and trim the loose surface ply to the point where the adhesion of surface ply to the
deicer is good.
(b) Proceed with patch application per 74-451-AA patch kit application instructions, under
Scuff Damage, above.
4C21 30-10-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Loose Surface Ply in Dead Area (non-inflatable area)

Peel and trim the loose surface ply to the point where the adhesion of surface ply to the
deicer is good.
1 Scrub (roughen) area in which surface ply is removed with steel wool. Scrubbing
motion must be parallel to cut edge of surface ply to prevent loosening it. Scrub with
steel wool and toluol directly over all edges, but parallel to edges or surface ply to
taper them down to the tan rubber ply.
2 Cut a piece of surface ply material, Part No. 74-451-23, to cover the damaged area
and extend at least one inch beyond in all directions.
3 Mask off the damaged boot area 1/2 inch larger in length and width than the size of
surface ply patch. Apply one coat of cement, Part No. 74-451 - 11, to damaged area
and one coat to patch. Allow cement to set until tacky. Roll the surface ply to the
deicer with 2 inch rubber roller, Part No. 74-451-74. Roll edges with stitcher-roller.
Part No. 74-451-73. Apply just enough tension on the surface ply when rolling to
prevent wrinkling and be careful to prevent trapping air. If air blisters appear after
surface ply is applied, remove them with a hypodermic needle.
4 Clean excess cement from deicer with solvent.
(d) Loose Surface Ply in Tube Area
Loose surface ply in tube area is usually an indication of the deicer starting to flex fail.
This type of failure is more easily detected in the form of a blister under the surface ply
when deicer is pressurized. If this type of damage (or void) is detected while still a small
blister (about 1/4 or 3/8 inch diameter) and patched immediately, the service life of the
deicer will be appreciably extended. Apply repair patch as outlined in paragraph (a),
above.
(e) Damage to Fabric Back Ply of Deicer during Removal
If cement has pulled loose from the wing skin and adhered to the back surface of the
deicer, remove it with steel wool and MEK. In those spots where the coating has pulled off
the fabric, leaving bare fabric exposed, apply at least two additional coats of cement, Part
No. 74-451-24. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly.
(4) Vulcanized Repair
Due to the variety of boot damage possible, it is recommended that the B.F. Goodrich
Company be contacted so they can determine the extent of damage and whether it is
repairable by the vulcanized method or not. The overall condition of the deicer boot must be
given careful consideration before deciding on any repairs. Damages can vary from minor
punctures which may be easily repaired, to extensive ribbing of the tube or stretch areas which
may make repairs difficult or impossible. The determination of whether repairable damage
exists will depend upon careful inspection. For this reason, we recommend contacting the B.F.
Goodrich Company.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Repair Limits.
CAUTION: PNEUMATIC DEICERS MUST BE REPLACED IF: (1) CUTS, TEARS OR RUPTURES
CUT THE INFLATABLE TUBE FABRIC AND/OR EXCEED 4 X 9 INCHES; OR, (2)
BROKEN STITCHES OR THREADS ARE APPARENT; OR, (3) DAMAGE LEAKS AIR
AND EXCEEDS THE PATCH AND PINHOLE REPAIR LIMITS SPECIFIED BELOW.
NOTE: In addition to meeting these repair limits, the deicer must also pass the Inspection
(Pneumatic Deicers (Boots)), Procedure, below.
NOTE: If patches and pinhole repairs are mixed within any 12 inch square, a ratio equivalent to the
repair limits should be followed. For example, in a 12 inch square it would be permissible to
have one (1) small patch (33% of repair limit) and 13 pinhole repairs (67% of repair limit).
The net effect is equivalent to 100% of the repair limits.
To maintain optimal functional efficiency of the deicers:
(1) The following patch limits are established:
(a) Three (3) small patches per 12 inch square (Small patch is 2-1/2" X 1-1/4"); or,
(b) Two (2) medium patches per 12 inch square (Medium patch is 5" X 2-1/2"); or,
(c) One (1) large patch per 12 inch square (Large patch is 5" X 10"); or,
(d) Two (2) small patches and one (1) medium patch per 12 inch square.
(2) No more than 20 pinhole repairs are allowed per 12 inch square.
E. Maintenance
(1) Visually inspect deicers frequently for abrasion, erosion, cracking, tears, pinholes, foreign
object damage (FOD), debonding and other damage. Repair damage immediately, see
Repairs, below.
(2) Clean deicers when the airplane is washed with a mild soap and water solution. In cold
weather, wash the boots with the airplane inside a warm hangar if possible. If the cleaning is to
be done outdoors, heat the soap and water solution before taking it out to the airplane. If
difficulty is encountered with the water freezing on the boots, direct a blast of warm air along
the region being cleaned, using a portable type ground heater.
(3) Goodrich Corp. offers a family of deicer treatment products which reduce weathering effects,
enhance appearance, and enhance performance. Their use is recommended, see below.
(a) AGEMASTER® NO. 1 Application.
AgeMaster® No. 1 is a rubber preservative for neoprene deicers only that protects against
weathering, ozone and ultraviolet rays. Apply AgeMaster® No. 1 initially 6 months after a
new deicer is installed. Reapply every 6 months.
WARNING: AGEMASTER® NO. 1 CONTAINS PETROLEUM DISTILLATES. HARMFUL

OR FATAL IF SWALLOWED. IF SWALLOWED, DO NOT INDUCE
VOMITING; SEE PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP AWAY FROM OPEN
FLAME. VAPORS MAY IGNITE CAUSING FLASH FIRE OR EXPLOSION.
DO NOT APPLY BY SPRAYING. USE WITH ADEQUATE VENTILATION.
AVOID PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPOR. IF DIZZINESS OR NAUSEA
OCCURS, OBTAIN FRESH AIR. AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN AND EYES.
IF EYE CONTACT OCCURS, FLUSH EYES WITH WATER FOR 15
MINUTES, THEN SEE PHYSICIAN. IF SKIN CONTACT OCCURS, WASH
THOROUGHLY WITH SOAP AND WATER. EMPTY CONTAINERS MAY
CONTAIN FLAMMABLE OR EXPLOSIVE RESIDUAL VAPORS. SEE MSDS
FOR ADDITIONAL SAFETY INFORMATION.
4C23 30-10-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: AGEMASTER® NO. 1 STAINS SKIN, CLOTHING AND OTHER SURFACES.

WEAR PLASTIC OR RUBBER GLOVES WHEN USING. PROTECT
SURROUNDING AREAS. USE WATERLESS HAND CLEANER TO
REMOVE STAINING.
CAUTION: NOT SUITABLE FOR USE ON ESTANE ® DEICERS. IT WILL NOT BE
ABSORBED BY DEICER, CAUSING RUN BACK AND STAINING ON
AIRCRAFT SURFACE.
NOTE: AgeMaster® No. 1 can be applied to neoprene deicers that have been repaired
with Goodrich P/N 74-451-AA patch kit and/or Goodrich P/N 74-451-AE pinhole
repair kit; however, excess AgeMaster® No. 1 should be wiped off the surfaces of
the repair material, as it will not be absorbed.
NOTE: Store in cool, well-ventilated place. Keep container closed tightly when not in use.
1 One quart covers 90 square feet of deicer, following these directions.
Thoroughly clean deicer surface with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water
and let dry.
2 Use isopropyl alcohol to remove substances that cannot be removed with soap and
water. Repeat Step 1, above.
3 Wipe one even coat of AgeMaster® No. 1 on deicer surface with lint free cloth. Coat
deicer surface completely and evenly for best results and appearance. Let dry 5-10
minutes. Dry time may vary due to temperature and humidity conditions.
4 Repeat Step 3, above, so that three even coats have been applied with 5-10 minutes
dry time between each coat.
5 Let dry 24 hours before flying aircraft or applying Icex® II or ShineMaster® products.
(b) ShineMaster® Application.
ShineMaster ® treatment is a cosmetic coating that provides high luster shine.
ShineMaster® Prep cleaner is used to clean deicer for ShineMaster® application, and
remove residual ShineMaster® before reapplication. Application interval for ShineMaster®
depends on operating environment (2 or 3 times per year is typical).
NOTE: ShineMaster® products can be applied to deicers that have been repaired with
Goodrich P/N 74-451-AA patch kit and/or Goodrich P/N 74-451-AE pinhole repair
kit.
NOTE: ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment should not be heavily applied or allowed to
build-up on deicer edges, as it may appear cracked and is very difficult to remove
when reapplication is desired.
1 Clean deicer surface with ShineMaster® Prep cleaner to remove dirt, grease, oil,
silicone products and other contamination. Previous applications of ShineMaster®
treatment must be removed before reapplication to avoid dulling or product build-up.
2 Apply light, even coat of ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment to deicer with clean lint-
free cloth wiping in one direction. Let dry to touch - about 5-15 minutes.
3 Repeat Step 2, above, once or twice to obtain desired shine.
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Icex® II Application.

Icex® II is an ice adhesion inhibitor that enhances deicer performance by lowering
adhesion strength between ice and deicer surface. During icing season, apply Icex® II
every 50 flight hours.
NOTE: Icex® II is not a cure-all for icing problems. Icex® will not prevent or remove ice
formations. Its only function is to keep ice from initially getting a strong foothold,
thus making removal easier.
NOTE: Icex® II can be applied to deicers that have been repaired with Goodrich P/N 74-
451-AA patch kit and/or Goodrich P/N 74-451-AE pinhole repair kit.
NOTE: If Icex® II is applied too heavily, result can be sticky surface that collects dust and
dirt, reducing efficiency of Icex® II. Residue should be completely removed
before reapplication.
1 Clean deicer surface using mild soap and water.
2 Rinse with clean water and let dry.
3 Clean with isopropyl alcohol to remove substances not removed with soap and
water.
4 Repeat Steps 1 and 2, above.
5 Apply Icex® II with clean cloth or pad. Apply lightly and wipe in single continuous
back and forth motion spanwise on deicer.
(d) Application in Combination.
AgeMaster® No. 1, ShineMaster® and Icex® II are specifically designed to use together
to provide maximum deicer care, appearance and performance.
1 Clean deicer surface to remove previous coatings, dirt, grease, oil and other
contamination. ShineMaster® Prep cleaner should be used to remove ShineMaster®
treatment.
2 Apply AgeMaster® No. 1, see above, and let dry at least 24 hours.
3 Apply ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment, see above, and let dry to touch.
4 Apply Icex® II, see above.
5 Icex® II may be removed with alcohol or warm, soapy water, then reapplied without
affecting ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment.
6 Icex® II and/or ShineMaster® cosmetic treatment can be removed without affecting
AgeMaster® No. 1.
7 Icex ® II and/or ShineMaster ® cosmetic treatment must be removed before
reapplying AgeMaster® No. 1.
3. Vacuum Manifold / Deice Flow Valve Assembly
The vacuum manifold / deice flow valve assembly is located in the right wing root glove and is accessed
through the large wing root glove access plate.(Ref to Figure 3.)
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the electrical leads to the individual deice valves at the (three) connectors.
(2) Disconnect the five hoses from the assembly.
(3) Remove the bolts and washers (5 ea.) which secure the assembly to the rib at W.S. 29.00.
Remove the assembly.
4D1 30-10-00 PAGE 17

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Position the vacuum manifold / deice flow valve assembly outboard of the rib at W.S. 29.00
and secure it there with bolts and washers (5 ea.).
(2) Reconnect the five hoses to the assembly.
(3) Reconnect the electrical leads to the (three) deice valves.
4. Pressure Switch Assemblies
The two pressure switch assemblies are located in the right wing root glove and are accessed through
the large wing root glove access plate.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the electrical leads from the pressure switches at the electrical connector.
(2) Loosen clamps and disconnect the three hoses from the pressure switch assembly.
(3) Remove pressure switch assembly.
F.S.
127.30 102213 R
DE-ICE VALVE
UPPER WING
DE-ICE VALVE
LOWER WING
DE-ICE VALVE
TAIL
W.S.
W.S. 29.00
40.00
Vacuum Manifold/Deice Flow Valve Assembly

Figure 3
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
NOTE: When installing pressure switch(es), take care to orient each pressure switch so that it is
inclined upwards.
(1) Position the pressure switch assembly slide hoses over the three ends of the Tee connector.
(2) Tighten hose clamps.
(3) Reconnect electrical leads to the pressure switches.
5. Pneumatic Deice System Adjustments and Test
WARNING: DURING AN ENGINE OPERATION SPECIFIED HEREIN, EXERCISE CAUTION TO
AVOID HARM OR DAMAGE TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT BY THE PROPELLER
AND PROPELLER BLAST.
A. Start the engine and operate at 2,000 rpm.
B. Adjust the vacuum regulator to obtain a vacuum gauge indication of 4.80 inches of Hg. Verify that
the vacuum gauge indicates from 4.80 to 5.20 inches Hg. with engine operating at idle and at 2,000
rpm.
C. Check all surface boots and ensure they are down tight against the wing and tail surfaces.
D. Using a vacuum (or combination pressure/vacuum) gauge connected to a hypodermic needle,
measure the vacuum in the pneumatic system by inserting the needle in either right or left wing
hose connections located on cabin side of the forward pressure bulkhead.
E. Remove the vacuum gauge and install a pressure gauge at the same point. (This is not required if
pressure/vacuum gauge is used.)
F. Cycle the SURFACE DEICE switch ON to activate the system and check for air indication of 14 - 0,
+ 2 pounds per square inch on the pressure gauge.
G. Visually check all boots for proper operation. All cells shall inflate fully. Each segment cycle time
shall be 6 + 2 seconds. Cycle sequence is tail, lower wing, upper wing. The SURFACE DEICE
annunciator light shall illuminate during each sequence, but not necessarily for the cycling of each
boot.
H. Remove the pressure or pressure/vacuum gauge connected in step (D) or (E) above, respectively.
6. Timer
A. Removal
The pneumatic system timer is mounted to the upper right hand corner of the forward side of the
F.S. 108.00 frame.
(1) Disconnect the electrical leads from the timer at the connector.
(2) Remove the screws, nuts and washers that secure the timer to the frame. Remove the timer.
B. Installation
(1) Position the timer on the F.S. 108.00 frame. Secure it in place with the screws, nuts and
washers.
(2) Reconnect the electrical leads at the connector.
4D3 30-10-00 PAGE 19

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 30-10-00 4D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT AND STATIC
1. Pitot Deice Description
The standard pitot ice protection consists of a heated pitot head located on the lower side of the each
wing, a switch on the overhead switch panel, two 10-amp circuit breakers, two electronic control modules,
and the circuit wiring.
2. Pitot Removal, Installation, and Testing
For information on removal and installation of the pitot head and for a test of the pitot head heaters refer
to 34-10-00.
4D5 30-30-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 30-30-00 4D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS
1. Windshield Heat Troubleshooting

See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING HEATED WINDSHIELD SYSTEM
Windshield fails to heat or Circuit breaker tripped Reset circuit breaker.
no change between DEFOG
and ANTI ICE position Relay failure Replace relay.
Controller failure Replace controller.
Panel failure Replace panel.
Anti-ice panel over 120° F while Normal condition - no
sitting in sun. repair necessary.
Broken wire in harness. Repair broken wire.
Cannon plug loose or dirty. Clean and re-engage
cannon plug.
Switch defective. Replace switch.
Poor connection on terminal Tighten screws on terminal
strip. strip in console.
Windshield overheats Timer shorted. Replace timer-temperature
control.
Anti-ice panel or windshield Manually turn windshield
heat left on too long. heat off.
CAUTION: SEVERE OVERHEATING OF PANEL OR WINDSHIELD COULD RESULT IN WARPING

AND DISTORTION.
2. Heated Windshield Testing

CAUTION: AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF WINDSHIELD MUST BE BELOW 115° F.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW HEATED WINDSHIELD TO BE ON HIGH POSITION FOR MORE THAN
20 SECONDS FOR TESTING OR GROUND OPERATION. HEAT DISTORTION OF THE
WINDSHIELD COULD RESULT.
A. With engine running at 1,500 rpm, battery master ON, and the generator ON: position windshield
heat switch to LOW. The ammeter should indicate an increase.
B. Position windshield heat switch to HIGH. The ammeter should indicate an additional increase.
C. If heated windshield does not perform as indicated, consult Troubleshooting Chart.
4D7 30-40-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 30-40-00 4D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLERS
1. Propeller Heat System

The B.F. Goodrich propeller heat system installed on this airplane uses dual element heater boots.
In this system each heater has two electrothermal heating elements. When the PROP HEAT switch
is turned ON, the electronic control module directs power through the modular brush assembly(s)
and slip ring to the outboard heating elements on the propeller for approximately 90 seconds. The
electronic control module then switches power to the inboard heating elements for approximately 90
seconds. This cycle will continue as long as the PROP HEAT switch is in the ON position and the
airplane is airborne. On the ground, the PROP HEAT system has a ground test feature which turns
OFF the system after approximately 60 seconds.
When the PROP HEAT switch is turned ON, on the ground, power is sent to the outboard heating
elements for 30 seconds and the “PROP HEAT ON” annunciator is illuminated (steady). During the
next 30 seconds, power is directed to the inboard heating elements and the “PROP HEAT ON”
annunciator will flash. After one minute, the electronic control module turns OFF power to the boots
and the annunciator will also go out. As long as the airplane remains on the ground, the system will
remain OFF unless the operator manually selects the “PROP HEAT” switch ON, again, or until the
airplane leaves the ground.
The propeller heat system consists of the following:
(1) electrically heated boots bonded to the propeller blades;
(2) slip ring assemblies connected to the propeller hub to distribute power to the propeller heaters;
(3) two modular brush assemblies (post FIKI) which transfer electrical power to the rotating slip
rings;
(4) an electronic control module to cycle power to the heaters;
(5) a manual ON-OFF switch;
(6) a circuit breaker; and
(7) a squat switch relay.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
4D9 30-60-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PROPELLER HEAT SYSTEM

Ammeter shows zero current Tripped circuit breaker Locate and correct
both phases of the switch. short before setting
timing cycle. circuit breaker.
No power from airplane. If no voltage into switch,
locate and correct open.
Circuit breaker or switch If no voltage at C/ B output
faulty. with voltage at input and
C/B does not reset, replace
C/B. If voltage is OK at
output, check switch in
same manner. If voltage is
OK at switch output, go to
next step.
Ammeter faulty. (If either Test for voltage up to and
or both deicers heat with out of ammeter. If low
ammeter at zero, replace output and input satis-
the ammeter.) factory, replace ammeter.
If no voltage to ammeter,
locate and fix open
between switch and
ammeter.
Open ammeter to Disconnect harness at
electronic control module. module and check voltage
at Pin B (of harness) to
ground. If none, locate
and correct open.
Ammeter shows normal Open in wiring between Use heat test to find
current part of cycle, electronic control module deicers not heating and
zero current rest of and brush block assembly. test for voltage on that
cycle. contact of wire harness
plug. (At brush block
assembly.) If zero after
one minute, locate and
fix open in wiring from
module to wire harness
plug.
Open between brush If there is voltage to brush
block assembly and block wire harness plug,
heater lead straps. try voltage at junction to
heater lead and slip ring
lead. If no voltage, find and
correct open in wiring
within brush block or in
contact of brush to slip
ring.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ammeter shows normal Open or high resistance in Disconnect heater leads

current part of cycle, heater or slip ring leads. to check resistance. If not
low current rest of OK, replace faulty heater.
cycle. If satisfactory, locate and
fix open in slip ring leads.
Check heater wire harness
leads for continuity. Ohm-
meter needle must not
flicker when leads are
stretched or flexed.
High resistance in circuit Check for contact of brush
with low current. to slip ring. Check wiring
from electronic control
module to heaters for
loose or corroded
connections and partially
broken wiring. Correct as
required.
Ammeter shows low current Aircraft voltage low. Check voltage into switch.
over entire cycle.
Ammeter faulty. Test for voltage up to and
out of ammeter. If low
output and input satisfactory
factory, replace ammeter.
locate and fix open
between switch and
ammeter.
High resistance up to Check for partially broken
electronic control module. wire, loose or corroded
connection in wiring from
aircraft supply to module
input.
4D11 30-60-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ammeter shows excess Ammeter faulty. Test for voltage up to

current over entire cycle. and out of ammeter. If
low output and input satis-
factory, replace ammeter.
locate and fix open
between switch and
ammeter.
Ground between ammeter Disconnect harness at
and electronic control module. module and with ohmmeter
check from Pin B (of har-
ness) to ground. If ground
is indicated, locate and
correct.
Ammeter shows normal Ground between electronic Disconnect leads at
current part of cycle, control module and brush block. brush block and with
excess current rest ohmmeter check from
of cycle. power leads to ground.
If ground is indicated,
locate and correct.
Ground between brush If no short exists at brush -
block and heaters. slip ring contact, check for
ground from slip ring lead
to propeller assembly while
flexing slip ring and heater
leads. If a ground is
indicated, locate and
correct.
Short between two adjacent Check for cuts or low
circuits. resistance between circuits.
If any, locate and correct.
Electronic control module faulty. Test module.
Ammeter does not “flick” Electronic control module Disconnect harness at
approximately every 90 ground open, electronic module and check with
seconds. control module not cycling. ohmmeter from Pin G
(of harness) to ground.
If no circuit, fix open
per schematic diagram.
Electronic control module Test module. If module
contacts are welded does not cycle with voltage
(caused by short circuit at Pin B, replace module
in system). but be sure short causing
original failure has been
located and corrected.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ammeter flicks between Loose connection between Trace wiring from power
90 second phase periods. aircraft power supply and source to module input to
electronic control module input. ensure that the electrical
contacts at each connec-
tion in the circuit are good.
Loose or poor connection If trouble occurs in part of
electronic control module cycle, find which heater
to heaters. is affected and check for
rough or dirty slip rings
causing brush to “skip.”
Also, check for loose or
poor connection. (If both
heaters are affected,
check ground circuit.)
Electronic control module Test module.
cycles erratically.
Radio noise or interference Brushes “arcing.” Check brush alignment
with heaters on. as shown in Figures 6
and 7. Look for rough
or dirty slip rings. If either
condition exists, clean,
machine or replace slip
ring assembly, as required.
Check slip ring alignment.
Loose connection. Refer to “Ammeter flicks
between 90 second phase
period.”
Switch or circuit breaker Place jumper wire across
faulty. switch or circuit breaker.
If radio noise disappears,
replace the switch or circuit
breaker.
Wiring located too close to Relocate heater wiring at
radio equipment or associated least 8 inches away from
wiring. radio equipment and
wiring.
Rapid brush wear or Brush block out of Check brush alignment.
frequent breakage. alignment. Correct as required.
Slip ring wobbles. Check slip ring alignment
with dial indicator as shown
in Figure 7.
4D13 30-60-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102606 D
PROP DEICER BOOT
(SPINNER ASSY)
(ENGINE P&W PT6A-42A)
(HARTZELL PROPELLER ASSY)
AFT
MOUNTING BRACKET
SHIM (SEE NOTES)
BRUSH BLOCK ASSY (SEE NOTES)

SLIP RING ASSY
A
NOTES: THE SHIM IS A SERIES OF LAMINATES AND MAY BE
PEELED FOR PROPER ALIGNMENT OF BRUSHES
TO SLIP RINGS.
BRUSH ASSEMBLY TO BE ALIGNED AS SHOWN AND
THE BRUSHES ARE TO BE CENTERED ON SLIP RINGS
THROUGH 360˚ OF SLIP RING ROTATION.
(PROP DE-ICER BOOT)
(BLADE CENTERLINE)
(BRUSH BLOCK ASSY NOT SHOWN IN TRUE ROTATIONAL POSITION FOR CLARITY)
Effectivity Propeller Heat Installation

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: A DIAL INDICATOR CHECK SHOULD BE TAKEN OF THE SLIP RING

SURFACES TO ENSURE THEY DEVIATE FROM A TRUE PLANE
NO MORE THAN 0.008 INCH TIR AND 0.002 INCH IN ANY 4.00 INCH
INTERVAL OF SLIP RING TRAVEL.
N
IO
T
TA
G
RO SEE NOTE
IN
R
IP
SL
(BRUSH BLOCK ASSY)
#2 #1
.03 TO .09
ABC
(PROP DEICER)
(SLIP RING ASSY)

VIEW B-B
(DEICER WIRE HARNESS)
BRUSHES PARALLEL TO
SLIP RING SURFACE
ABC
#3 #4
(BRUSH BLOCK ASSY)
(ENGINE WIRE HARNESS)
BASIC ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC

Effectivity
4697100 & up and
Propeller Heat Installation 4697001 thru 4697099
Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 2) (after FIKI retrofit)
4D15 30-60-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4D17 30-60-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Brush Block Assemblies

The two (2) brush block assemblies installed in the post-FIKI Meridian each consist of three (3) constant
force brush modules.
NOTE: Brushes are not offered individually as replacements. When a brush wears out, the module
containing it should be replaced.
A. Brush Wear (See Figure 2.)
Each constant force brush has a white painted area at the lead wire end of the brush.
(1) When the white painted area on the brush first becomes visible, remove the brush block
assembly and measure brush wear as shown.
(2) .25 inch of usable brush remains when the white painted area first becomes visible.
(3) Brush replacement is mandatory when free length equals .125 inch.
B. Brush Module Replacement
(1) Remove the modular brush assembly from the aircraft, by removing the attachment hardware,
and disconnecting the engine wire harness.
(2) Remove assembly screws and separate modules and spacers.
NOTE: The part number of each module is etched into the surface of the plastic housing;
replace with the same part number module.
(3) Using the new modules, restack modules and spacer as shown in Figure 1.
NOTE: Ascertain flat washer is positioned between star washer and housing.
(4) Reconnect aircraft wire harness and ensure adjacent ring terminals are not touching.
(5) Install assembly on aircraft and check adjustment.
C. Alignment
Any time a brush block assembly is removed, alignment at reinstallation must be checked as
described in step (6) of Propeller Heater Inspections, 100 Hour, below.
CONSTANT FORCE BRUSH MODULE ASSY

(THREE (3) PER BRUSH BLOCK ASSY)
FREE LENGTH
WHITE PAINT (MEASURED WITH BRUSH BLOCK ASSY
REMOVED FROM AIRPLANE)
BRUSH
(Shown with new brush, constant force springs not shown.)
Measuring Brush Wear

Figure 2
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Suggested Use of Dial Indicator (Typical)

Figure 3
3. Slip Ring Assembly

A. Replacement
Slip ring assemblies that are open or shorted electrically, cracked or damaged structurally, or which
have damaged surfaces beyond the scope of minor repair or clean up, should be replaced.
B. Alignment
Excessive slip ring run-out will result in severe arcing between the slip ring and brushes and will
cause rapid brush wear. If the run-out is not corrected, rapid deterioration of the slip ring and brush
contact surfaces will result and lead to eventual failure of the heating system. Check the slip ring
run-out with a dial indicator securely attached to the engine with the pointer resting on the slip ring.
(Refer to Figure 3.) Rotate the propeller slowly noting the run-out indicated on the gauge. The total
run-out must not exceed 0.008 inch and 0.002 inch in any 4 inch interval of slip ring travel.
NOTE: Some error may be induced in the readings by pushing in or pulling out on the propeller.
Care must be taken to exert a uniform push or pull.
Small amounts of run-out may be corrected by varying the torque on the slip ring mounting
bolts between 40 to 100 inch-pounds to obtain the required flatness.
4D19 30-60-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Heater Boots
A. Electrical Check (Refer to Chart 2)
(1) Check the electrical resistance of element within each heater. Disconnect the heater lead wires
to isolate the individual unit.
(2) Check for intermittent open circuits by tensioning the heater wire harness slightly while
measuring the resistance. Also, press lightly on the heater surface in the area adjacent to the
harness. Resistance must not vary.
(3) Identification of the circuits within the element may be confirmed by referring to the resistance
values and schematic diagram in 91-30-60. Proper identification is necessary in order to make
the system cycle properly and to obtain the correct amperage values during system operation.
(4) If tests show the blade heater to have an open circuit, to be the wrong resistance or to be
visibly damaged beyond repair as outlined in this section, replace the heater as directed in the
following paragraphs.
CHART 2
ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
Resistance Check Max. Min.
4-Blade Prop
Single Blade 5.26 4.58
All Blades in Parallel 1.315 1.145
NOTE: These resistances apply only to heaters that are not connected to terminal studs.
B. Removal
NOTE: Goodrich Removal and Installation Manual, Standard and FASTpropTM Electrothermal
Propeller De-Icers, ATA Report No. 30-60-07; and, Hartzell Aluminum Blade Overhaul
Manual No. 133C, ATA Report No. 61-13-33; both provide approved, alternate procedures
for removing and installing propeller deicer boots. Reference to either or both of these
documents is highly recommended. The Goodrich report may be obtained online at
(1) Disconnect terminals of propeller heater from studs on the spinner bulkhead.
(2) Use MEK or Toluol to soften the adhesion line between the heater and the propeller blade.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW SOLVENTS TO LEAK INTO PROPELLER HUBS AND CAUSE
DAMAGE TO SEALS.
(3) Starting at one corner of the heater, loosen enough of the heater to grasp in the jaws of vise
grip pliers or similar tool.
(4) Apply a steady pull on the heater to pull it off the propeller surface. Continue using MEK or
Toluol to soften the adhesion lines. Unless the heater being removed is damaged and is to be
scrapped, cushion the jaws of any pulling tool used to prevent damage to the heater surface.
Remove very slowly and carefully. If heater has failed and is to be returned under request for
warranty, extreme care should be exercised so that no additional damage is incurred to the
heater during and after removal.
(5) Remove residual cement from blade. Use Turco No. 3 or equivalent to help with dried cements.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
NOTE: Goodrich Removal and Installation Manual, Standard and FASTpropTM Electrothermal
Propeller De-Icers, ATA Report No. 30-60-07; and, Hartzell Aluminum Blade Overhaul
Manual No. 133C, ATA Report No. 61-13-33; both provide approved, alternate procedures
for removing and installing propeller deicer boots. Reference to either or both of these
documents is highly recommended. The Goodrich report may be obtained online at
NOTE: Whenever heater boots are installed or recemented, perform electrical check per Heater
Boots - Electrical Check, above.
(1) Blade Preparation
NOTE: Hartzell propeller blades have a special protective coating not easily removed by
solvent. De-icers should be bonded directly over this protective coating, unless
otherwise specified in the Propeller Manufacturer’s Manual. If bare metal is exposed
on Hartzell blades, refer to Hartzell Manual No. 133C (see above) prior to deicer
installation.
(a) Visually inspect blade for damage or deterioration prior to de-icer installation, in
accordance with the propeller manufacturer's recommendations and applicable FAA
regulations. Repair, prime and/or paint blades as required per applicable Propeller
Manufacturer's Manual before proceeding to next step.
(b) Mark and cut from masking tape a pattern the size of the propeller heater. (Refer to Figure 4.)
(c) Place a mark at the hub end of the blade in line with the blade leading edge. The location
for this mark can be determined by sighting along the leading edge. Starting at the hub
(see Note below), center the pattern on this mark and stick the pattern to the leading
edge. Mark the position of the heater harness.
NOTE: All heaters on a single propeller must be located at same distance from the hub
for rotational balance.
(d) Remove the pattern and clean the masked off area thoroughly with cleaning solvent (i.e. -
MEK or acetone). For final cleaning, wipe the solvent off quickly with a clean, dry lint-free
cloth to avoid leaving a film.
CAUTION: CLEANNESS OF METAL AND RUBBER PARTS CANNOT BE TOO HIGHLY
STRESSED - ONLY PERFECTLY CLEAN SURFACES WILL ASSURE
MAXIMUM ADHESION.
(e) Using a pencil or pen, mark a centerline at the hub of the propeller blade and on the tape
at the outboard edge of the masked area.
(2) Cement Application
(a) Using a silver pencil, mark a centerline on the glossy side of the heater.
CAUTION: DISPOSE OF UNUSED MEK AND OTHER CHEMICALS AND SOLVENTS
IN A MANNER CONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAWS AND/OR
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY REGULATIONS.
(b) Moisten a clean cloth with MEK or acetone and clean the unglazed surface of the heater,
changing cloth frequently to avoid contamination of the clean area.
4D21 30-60-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Installation of Heater Boots (Typical)

Figure 4
CHART 3
REQUIRED MATERIALS FOR REPAIR OF PROPELLER HEATER
The materials and tools listed below are commercially available and are not supplied by B.F.
Goodrich in kit form:
Cement 1300L (Piper P/N 179-929) or EC 1403 (Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Co.)
Sealer 82-076-1 and -2 (B.F. Goodrich, Akron, Ohio, or
Sealer C-19861, C-21871 and C-16176 Lowe Bros., Dayton, Ohio)
Cleaning Solvent - MEK (MethylEthylKetone) or Acetone
Tackifying Solvent - Toluol or MEK (See Note)
Cleaning Cloth - any clean, lint-free cloth
1 inch paint brushes
2 inch rubber hand roller
1/4 inch hand stitcher
Masking tape
NOTE: MEK may be used instead of Toluol to tackify cement, but it provides approximately 10 seconds
working time for deicer applications, whereas Toluol provides approximately 40 seconds
working time.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Thoroughly mix the 1300L cement. Apply one even brush coat of cement to the unglazed
back surface of the heater. Cement one inch of the heater lead strap. Allow to air dry for a
minimum of one hour at 40° F or above, when the relative humidity is less than 75 %. If
the humidity is 75 % to 90 %, allow two hours drying time. Do not apply cement if the
relative humidity is higher than 90 %. After allowing the proper amount of drying time,
apply a second even brush coat of 1300L cement.
NOTE: If curling of the heater edges is a problem, apply masking tape to the edges of
the glazed side before applying cement to the unglazed side. Remove the tape
before starting to install the heater.
(d) Apply an even brush coat of #1300L cement on the cleaned surface of the propeller blade,
immediately after the second coat of cement has been applied to the heater. This timing is
important for the cement on both surfaces to reach the tack stage at the same time.
(3) Heater and Required Materials Installation
NOTE: Whenever heater boots are installed or recemented, perform electrical check per
Heater Boots - Electrical Check, above.
It is imperative that the following instructions be followed exactly to ensure maximum adhesion
to the propeller blades:
(a) When the cement coats are tacky (slightly sticky to the touch-like masking tape), dry on
both the propeller surface and heater surface, position heater on blade leading edge. Start
at hub end, using centerlines as a guide. (See Figure 4.)
(b) Make sure that the harness will fall in the previously marked position.
(c) Working outward toward the tip, tack the heater centerline to the leading edge of the
propeller blade.
(d) Use the tackifying solvent as necessary. If heater is allowed to get off course, pull up with
a quick motion and re-apply heater.
(e) If cement is removed from either surface, completely remove the heater and re-apply
cement as explained in the previous paragraph.
(f) When the heater is correctly positioned, roll firmly along the centerline with a rubber roller.
(See Figure 4.)
(g) Gradually tilt the rubber roller and carefully work the heater over either side of the blade
contour to avoid trapping air. Roll outwardly from centerline to edges. Be especially careful
to work out excess material at outboard edge of heater before other edges are completely
rolled down. If excess material at edges tends to pucker, work out puckers smoothly and
carefully with fingers.
CAUTION: TO AVOID DAMAGE TO HEATER RESISTANCE WIRES, DO NOT USE

METAL STITCHER ON BODY OF HEATER. AREA WHERE METAL
STITCHER IS PERMITTED NOT TO EXCEED 3/16" ALONG HEATER EDGE.
(h) Roll the tapered edges, especially inboard edge of the heater with the metal stitcher.
(4) Sealer Preparation and Application (See Figure 5.)
Heaters loosened due to destruction of adhesive bond by lubricants do not respond well to
recementing. Therefore, removal, cleaning, and reinstallation of the heaters are recommended.
(a) Clean an area 0.500 of an inch wide around the circumference of the heater down to the
bare metal. Use MEK or Acetone and clean thoroughly.
4D23 30-60-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Clean outer 0.500 of an inch of all heater edges and back under heater about 0.250 of an
inch on all sides past loosened areas with MEK or Acetone. For final cleaning, quickly
wipe off solvent with a clean, dry lint free cloth to avoid leaving a film.
(c) Recement loosened areas of heaters in accordance with the paragraph on cement
application.
(d) Mix the filler, sealer, or paint thoroughly and in the proper proportions by weight, as given
in Chart 4.
(e) Locate masking tape approximately 0.125 of an inch beyond the cemented area around
the heater to permit filler material to contact the propeller’s special protective coating.
Typical Heater Boot Sealer Application

Figure 5
CHART 4
MIXING OF MATERIALS
Material Manufacturing & No. Mixing Proportions

Filler 3M EC1031 and EC801 Twelve parts EC1031 with one hundred
parts EC801
Sealer BFG 82-076-1 &-2 Twelve parts-l with one part -2

or
Lowe Brothers V66V27, F63B8, One part V66V27 with seven parts
& R7K69 F63B8 (and up to two and two-thirds
parts R7K69 thinner as needed)
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Wrinkled Heater
Figure 6
(f) Apply one even coat of filler to area around the inboard end and sides of the heater. (See
Figure 5.) Immediately remove the masking tape and allow the filler to dry for six hours.
(g) Apply masking tape about 0.125 of an inch beyond filler or 0.250 of an inch beyond
cemented area when no filler is used, to permit sealer to contact the propeller’s special
protective coating. Apply one even brush coat of sealer to the area around the heater.
(See Figure 5.) Remove masking tape immediately and allow sealer to dry. Allow 12 hours
cement curing time before starting engine, allow 24 hours cement curing time before
operating the heaters.
D. Wrinkled Heater (See Figure 6.)
NOTE: Whenever heater boots are installed or recemented, perform electrical check per Heater
Boots - Electrical Check, above.
If edge of heater is found wrinkled or loose, try recementing. Use MEK or Toluol to loosen the bond
for an additional 1/4 inch beyond the loose or wrinkled area. Apply one coat of 1300L cement to the
heater and propeller bonding surfaces and allow to air dry for one hour. Then apply a second coat
of 1300L cement to both the heater and bonding surface. Allow to dry. Retackify with MEK or
Acetone and press with fingers to work out wrinkles or to secure loose edges. If material has
stretched and will not cement flat, replace the heater.
4E1 30-60-00 PAGE 17

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Heater Wiring Harness

Figure 7
5. Heater Wiring Harness Installation

The propeller heater wiring harness is secured to the propeller counterweight as follows:
A. Insert the heater wire harness thru the 9/32 diameter hole in the prop counterweight.
B. Connect the plugs of the prop heaters and the heater wire harness as shown in Figures 1 and 7.
C. Install tie strap (P/N MS3367-1-9) between the leads along the length of the plugs. Do not tighten at
this time.
D. Install both tie straps (P/N MS3367-2-9) under the tie strap installed in the previous step and around
the counterweight. Do not tighten at this time.
E. Install transflex tubing over heater wire harness.
F. Route transflex tubing under both tie straps (P/N MS3367-2-9) and tighten tie straps.
G. Tighten the tie strap around the plugs.
H. Install the terminals on the heater wire harness.
I. Install the terminals of the harness to the terminal block on the spinner bulkhead and tighten the
P- clamp over the harness.
J. To assure balance of the propeller assembly, the original balancing weights or their equivalents
must be reinstalled. The weights must be left in the original position on the propeller hub. The
restrainer and weights should not interfere with any part of the propeller assembly under any
condition. If for any reason balance weights were removed, reinstall safety wire on screws. The
heater wire harness must be installed on the propeller as just described.
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Propeller Heater Final Electrical Check

A. Make certain that all terminals are tight. Do not over torque.
B. Check the electrical resistance between the heater terminals or between the slip rings. The reading
should be per Chart 2.
7. Propeller Heater Functional Check
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE PROPELLER HEAT UNLESS ENGINE IS RUNNING AND BLADES
ARE TURNING.
A. Lock brakes, with engine operating at 2,000 rpm Np and the generator ON, turn PROP HEAT switch
ON.
B. Verify that the amber PROP HEAT ON annunciator illuminates (steady) for 30 seconds, indicating
the heater is in the 1st cycle. After approximately 30 seconds, the PROP HEAT ON annunciator
should flash 30 seconds, indicating the heater is in the 2nd cycle. At the end of one minute, the
electronic control module will switch PROP HEAT and the annunciator OFF. PROP HEAT will
remain off until the airplane leaves the ground or the pilot cycles the PROP HEAT switch on the
overhead switch panel.
C. Verify that the ship’s total amperage (LH and RH combined) shows an increase of approximately 25
amps when the PROP HEAT is cycled ON.
D. Turn PROP HEAT switch OFF. Turn engine OFF.
E. Test PROP HEAT FAIL annunciator per criteria given in 31-50-00.
NOTE: Do not attempt internal repairs of the electronic control module, ammeter or switch. If
inoperative, these components must be replaced. For any other repair or maintenance
problems not covered in this manual, inquire at Transportation Product Division of the B.F.
Goodrich Company.
8. Using the Ammeter
Whether in flight or during ground testing, the ammeter can be used to indicate the general nature of
most electrical problems. The troubleshooting chart is primarily based on the use of the ammeter and
assumes that the user does understand all normal operating modes of the system.
NOTE: When troubleshooting, determine which circuits are involved. Use circuit diagram for assistance
to check voltages or continuity.
A. Excess current reading on the ammeter always indicates a power lead is shorted to ground. Thus,
when trouble of this nature is found, it is vital that the grounded power lead be located and
corrected.
B. A considerable number of timers that have been returned for repair proved to be fully workable
when tested. Exhaust all other possibilities before turning to the timer.
C. Defective wiring in propeller mounted components may be indicated by normal current readings in
ground checkouts (propeller not rotating) but low current with propeller rotating at cruise RPM.
4E3 30-60-00 PAGE 19

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Propeller Heater Inspections

CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE PROPELLER HEAT UNLESS ENGINE IS RUNNING AND BLADES
ARE TURNING.
A. 50 Hour
Conduct Propeller Heater Functional Check, above.
B. 100 Hour
(1) Remove cowling. Conduct 50 Hour Inspection.
(2) Check for radio noise or radio compass interference by operating the engine at near takeoff
power with radio gear ON while turning PROP HEAT switch ON and OFF. If noise or
interference occurs with PROP HEAT switch ON and disappears when switch is OFF, refer to
troubleshooting chart.
(3) Ascertain that all clamps, clips, mountings and electrical connections are tight. Check for loose,
broken or missing safety wire.
(4) Heaters: Closely check heaters for wrinkled, loose or torn areas, particularly around the
outboard end. Check that terminals and terminal studs are not shorting out to each other or the
propeller hub. Inspect wire harness for evidence of chafing or shorting. Ensure that all clamps
and tie straps are properly installed. Look for abrasion or cuts, especially along the leading
edge and the flat or thrust face. If heater wires are exposed in damaged areas or if rubber is
found to be tacky, swollen or deteriorated (as from oil or solvent contact), replace the damaged
heater in accordance with the appropriate information in this chapter.
NOTE: Operate propeller from full low pitch (high RPM) to feathering and check that heater
lead wires do not come under tension or are pinched by propeller blade. (Refer to
Figures 1 and 7.)
(5) Slip Rings: Check slip rings for gouges, roughened surface, cracks, burned or discolored
areas, and for deposits of oil, grease or dirt.

(a) Clean greasy or contaminated slip rings with CRC 2-26 solvent or with Stoddard solvent.
If Stoddard solvent is used, wipe off with a clean cloth dampened with MEK to avoid
leaving a film.
(b) If uneven wear is found or if wobble is noticed, set up a dial indicator as shown in Figure 2
and check alignment of the slip rings to the propeller shaft as explained in this section.
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Centering Brushes on Slip Rings

Figure 8
(6) Modular Brush Assemblies - Brushes: Examine mounting brackets and housing for cracks,
deformation or other physical damage.
(a) Test that each brush rides fully on its slip ring over 360°. Figure 8 shows the wear pattern
if this condition is not corrected. If alignment is off, shim where brush block is mounted to
bracket or adjust mounting bracket support arm.
NOTE: The shim is a series of laminates and may be peeled for proper alignment of
brushes to slip ring
(b) Check for brush wear indicators (i.e. - white paint, see Figure 2). If present, see Brush
Wear under Brush Block Assemblies, above.
(c) Check for proper clearance of brush block to slip rings (Figure 1). Loosen mounting
screws and move in elongated holes to correct block position and tighten securely.
(d) Visually check brushes parallel to slip rings (Figure 1). If not, loosen mounting screws and
realign brush block, but be sure to hold clearance limits shown when tightening.
(7) System Wiring
Visually inspect wiring from brush blocks through firewall, to timer, to ammeter, to switch and to
aircraft power supply for breaks or damage. In such case, check continuity through affected
harness. Use the wiring diagram to trace circuitry.
4E5 30-60-00 PAGE 21

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4E7 30-60-00 PAGE 23

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 30-60-00 4E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
31
INDICATING /
RECORDING
SYSTEMS
4E9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
31-50-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
4E11 31 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 31 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 4E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEMS 31-50-00 1 4E15

Annunciator - Meggitt EFIS 1 4E15
Annunciator - Avidyne Entegra EFIS 4 4E18
Aural Warnings 7 4E21
Annunciator Removal and Installation 7 4E21
Lamp Replacement 7 4E21
Wiring 7 4E21
Beta/Reverse annunciator 7 4E21
4E13 31 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 31 - CONTENTS 4E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEMS
1. Annunciator - Meggitt EFIS (See Figure 1.)

The annunciator panel is oriented horizontally in the upper center section of the instrument panel and
consists of two groups of warning lights which function as follows:
A. Left Display
START ENGAGE Indicates the starter contactor is closed and power is being applied to the
starter/generator.
IGNITION Illuminates when power is applied to the engine ignition unit. In Auto
mode it normally illuminates when engine torque is less than 275 ft.-lbs.
OIL PRESSURE Indicates engine oil pressure is below 60 psig.
FUEL FILTER Indicates the fuel filter is operating in the bypass mode and requires
maintenance.
L FUEL PUMP Indicates the left fuel pump is operating and delivering 4.5 psig minimum.
R FUEL PUMP Indicates the right fuel pump is operating and delivering 4.5 psig minimum.
FUEL PRESSURE Indicates fuel pressure is below 10 psig.
LOW FUEL Indicates the total remaining fuel quantity is below 100 pounds.
ENGINE FIRE Indicates an overtemperature condition in the engine compartment,
possibly due to fire.
FIRE DETECT FAIL Indicates failure of the engine fire detection system.
FUEL IMBALANCE Steady illumination indicates a fuel quantity imbalance greater than 25
pounds. A flashing illumination indicates an imbalance greater than 40
pounds.
CHIP DETECTOR Indicates the existence of ferrous metal particles in the engine oil system.
GENERATOR INOP Illuminates when the generator fails or is selected OFF.
PITOT HEAT OFF Indicates the pitot heat has not been selected ON.
L PITOT HEAT Indicates the left pitot heat has failed.
R PITOT HEAT Indicates the right pitot heat has failed.
ALTERNATOR INOP Illuminates when the alternator fails or is selected OFF.
LOW BUS VOLTS Indicates the main bus voltage is less than 25 Vdc.
CABIN ALT 10K Indicates the cabin altitude is 10,000 ± 500 feet or above.
CABIN ALTITUDE Indicates the cabin altitude is 12,000 ± 500 feet or above.
4E15 31-50-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
START L FUEL ENGINE GENERATOR ALTERNATOR

ENGAGE PUMP FIRE INOP INOP
R FUEL FIRE DETECT PITOT LOW BUS
IGNITION
PUMP FAIL HEAT OFF VOLTS
OIL FUEL FUEL L PITOT CABIN
PRESSURE PRESSURE IMBALANCE HEAT ALT 10K
FUEL LOW CHIP R PITOT CABIN
FILTER FUEL DETECTOR HEAT ALTITUDE
LEFT ANNUNCIATOR DISPLAY
SURFACE SURFACE GEAR

BETA FEATHER
DE-ICE DE-ICE FAIL WARN
PROP HEAT EMERGENCY VACUUM HYDRAULIC STBY ATT IND
ON BLEED LOW PUMP TEST
PROP HEAT BLEED STALL ANNUNC STBY ATT IND
FAIL OVER TEMP WARN FAIL INOP BAT HTR FAIL
WINDSHIELD OXYGEN FLAP DOOR
OVER TEMP FAIL AJAR
RIGHT ANNUNCIATOR DISPLAY
Annunciator Panel Displays - Meggitt EFIS

Figure 1
B. Right Display
SURFACE DEICE Illuminates when the deice boots inflate. (When the SURF DEICE
switch is selected ON, the pneumatic deice system cycles boots in
sequence: tail, lower wing, upper wing. The light may not illuminate
as each individual boot cycles, but will illuminate for each sequence.)
PROP HEAT ON Cycling illumination indicates normal operation of the propeller
deice system.
PROP HEAT FAIL Illuminates if a fault develops in the prop heat system. Current is
over 30 amps or under 18 amps.
- In an over current condition, prop heat will turn off, PROP HEAT
FAIL will continue to be illuminated and PROP HEAT ON will not be
illuminated.
- In an under current condition, prop heat will remain on, and both
PROP HEAT FAIL and PROP HEAT ON will continue to be
illuminated.
- In either case, the prop heat and annunciators will remain as
described above until the over/under current condition is corrected
and the PROP HEAT switch cycled.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 31-50-00 4E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINDSHIELD OVER TEMP Illuminates when the windshield temperature exceeds 170 °F or
the windshield temperature sensor has failed.
SURFACE DEICE FAIL Illuminates when the surface deice system has failed.
EMERGENCY BLEED Illuminates when the emergency bleed system is activated either
automatically at a cabin altitude in excess of 12,000 ± 500 feet, or
by pilot activation.
BLEED OVER TEMP Indicates temperature in the bleed air ducts is 350 °F or above.
OXYGEN Illuminates if one or more of the passenger oxygen generators are
activated.
BETA Illuminates when the power lever is selected below flight idle
position and the prop blade angle is below the low pitch stop.
VACUUM LOW Illuminates if vacuum is below approximately 2 in.Hg.
STALL WARN FAIL Illuminates if the lift computer fails and/or the STALL WARN circuit
breaker trips.
FLAP FAIL Indicates a wing flap system failure due to an overcurrent condition
in the flap motor/actuator circuit.
GEAR WARN Illuminates when the gear is in transit; when all three gear are not
fully down and locked, when the gear is not fully up with the gear
doors closed, in flight when the power lever is retarded to idle and
the landing gear are not down and locked, in flight when the flaps
are extended to 10° and the landing gear are not down and locked.
HYDRAULIC PUMP Illuminates when the landing gear hydraulic pump is operating.
ANNUN INOP Indicates failure of the annunciator system or the annunciator
circuit breaker is open.
DOOR AJAR Indicates the cabin door is not properly closed and latched.
FEATHER With engine operating, light illumination indicates a failure in the
propeller feathering electrical system. An uncommanded propeller
feathering could occur if additional electrical failures occur in the
system. Illumination of the feather light is normal when the engine
is not operating, the condition lever is in cutoff, and the propeller is
feathered.
STBY ATT IND TEST Illuminates if the standby attitude indicator system test mode is
successfully completed.
STBY ATT IND BAT HTR FAIL Indicates failure of the standby attitude battery heater.
4E17 31-50-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Annunciator - Avidyne Entegra EFIS (See Figure 2.)

In S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up, when the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS is installed, the
annunciator panel is oriented vertically in the instrument panel between the pilot’s PFD and the MFD and
consists of two columns of warning lights which function as follows:
A. Left Column
ENGINE FIRE Indicates an overtemperature condition in the engine compartment,
possibly due to fire.
FUEL PRESS Indicates fuel pressure is below 10 psig.
GEAR WARN Illuminates when the gear is in transit; when all three gear are not fully
down and locked, when the gear is not fully up with the gear doors
closed, in flight when the power lever is retarded to idle and the landing
gear are not down and locked, in flight when the flaps are extended to 10°
and the landing gear are not down and locked.
EMER BLEED Illuminates when the emergency bleed system is activated either
automatically at a cabin altitude in excess of 12,000 ± 500 feet, or by pilot
activation.
GEN INOP Illuminates when the generator fails or is selected OFF.
CABIN ALT Indicates the cabin altitude is 12,000 ± 500 feet or above.
L PITOT HEAT Indicates the left pitot heat has failed.
DE-ICE FAIL Illuminates when the surface deice system has failed.
DOOR AJAR Indicates the cabin door is not properly closed and latched.
FIRE DET FAIL Indicates failure of the engine fire detection system.
CHIP DETECT Indicates the existence of ferrous metal particles in the engine oil system.
FUEL IMBALANCE Steady illumination indicates a fuel quantity imbalance greater than 25
pounds. A flashing illumination indicates an imbalance greater than 40
pounds.
BETA Illuminates when the power lever is selected below flight idle position and
the prop blade angle is below the low pitch stop.
HYD PUMP Illuminates when the landing gear hydraulic pump is operating.
START ENGAGE Indicates the starter contactor is closed and power is being applied to the
starter/generator.
VACUUM LOW Illuminates if vacuum is below approximately 2 in.Hg.
STALL WRN FAIL Illuminates if the lift computer fails and/or the STALL WARN circuit
breaker trips.
L FUEL PUMP Indicates the left fuel pump is operating and delivering 4.5 psig minimum.
PRP HTR ON Cycling illumination indicates normal operation of the propeller deice
system.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 31-50-00 4E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Right Column
OIL PRESS Indicates engine oil pressure is below 60 psig.
LOW BUS VOLTS Indicates the main bus voltage is less than 25 Vdc.
FLAP FAIL Indicates a wing flap system failure due to an overcurrent condition in the
flap motor/actuator circuit.
BLEED OVR TMP Indicates temperature in the bleed air ducts is 350 °F or above.
ALT INOP Illuminates when the alternator fails or is selected OFF.
PRP HTR FAIL Illuminates if a fault develops in the prop heat system. Current is over 30
amps or under 18 amps.
- In an over current condition, prop heat will turn off, PROP HEAT FAIL
will continue to be illuminated and PROP HEAT ON will not be
illuminated.
- In an under current condition, prop heat will remain on, and both PROP
HEAT FAIL and PROP HEAT ON will continue to be illuminated.
- In either case, the prop heat and annunciators will remain as described
above until the over/under current condition is corrected and the PROP
HEAT switch cycled.
R PITOT HEAT Indicates the right pitot heat has failed.
WNDSHLD OVR TMP Illuminates when the windshield temperature exceeds 170 °F or the
windshield temperature sensor has failed.
LOW FUEL Indicates the total remaining fuel quantity is below 100 pounds.
FUEL FILTER Indicates the fuel filter is operating in the bypass mode and requires
maintenance.
CABIN ALT 10K Indicates the cabin altitude is 10,000 ± 500 feet or above.
ANNUN INOP Indicates failure of the annunciator system or the annunciator circuit
breaker is open.
IGNITION Illuminates when power is applied to the engine ignition unit. In Auto
mode it normally illuminates when engine torque is less than 275 ft.-lbs.
OXYGEN Illuminates if one or more of the passenger oxygen generators are
activated.
FEATHER With engine operating, light illumination indicates a failure in the propeller
feathering electrical system. An uncommanded propeller feathering could
occur if additional electrical failures occur in the system. Illumination of
the feather light is normal when the engine is not operating, the condition
lever is in cutoff, and the propeller is feathered.
PITOT HTR OFF Indicates the pitot heat has not been selected ON.
R FUEL PUMP Indicates the right fuel pump is operating and delivering 4.5 psig minimum.
SURFACE DE-ICE Illuminates when the deice boots inflate. (When the SURF DEICE switch
is selected ON, the pneumatic deice system cycles boots in sequence:
tail, lower wing, upper wing. The light may not illuminate as each
individual boot cycles, but will illuminate for each sequence.)
4E19 31-50-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEST
ENGINE OIL
FIRE PRESS
FUEL LOW BUS

PRESS VOLTS
GEAR FLAP
WARN FAIL
EMER BLEED
BLEED OVR TMP
GEN ALT
INOP INOP RED
CABIN PRP HTR

ALT FAIL
L PITOT R PITOT
HEAT HEAT
DE-ICE WNDSHLD
FAIL OVR TMP
DOOR LOW
AJAR FUEL
FIRE DET FUEL

FAIL FILTER
CHIP CABIN
DETECT ALT 10K
FUEL ANNUN
IMBALANCE INOP
BETA IGNITION
AMBER
HYD OXYGEN
PUMP
START FEATHER
ENGAGE
VACUUM PITOT
LOW HTR OFF
STALL
WRN FAIL
L FUEL R FUEL
PUMP PUMP
GREEN
PRP SURF
HTR ON DE-ICE
Effectivity
4697198; 4697216 and up Annunciator Panel Display - Avidyne Entegra EFIS
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 31-50-00 4E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Aural Warnings
Aural warnings are provided to warn:
- When an engine limitation is exceeded.
- When in a Vmo/Mmo overspeed condition.
- When approaching a stall.
- When the landing gear is not extended during an approach to landing.
- When cabin altitude Caution/Warning is exceeded.
4. Annunciator Removal and Installation
See Chapter 39.
5. Lamp Replacement
See Chapter 33.
6. Wiring
See Chapter 33 and the schematics presented in 91-31-50.
7. Beta/Reverse Annunciator
A. Test
(1) Ensure the Beta Annunciator microswitch is functioning properly. Press and hold the reverse
lockout switch located on the overhead switch panel (see 11-30-00 Figure 2) this will engage
the reverse lockout. Pull up on the power lever until the movement of the lockout lever is fully
restricted. There should be no activation of the microswitch and the beta annunciator should
not light. Release the reverse lockout test switch.
(2) Pull up on the power lever until the reverse lockout lever is engaged and move aft to the full
reverse position. The lever should stay in contact with the switch for the full range of motion
and the Beta annunciator should remain lit.
B. Adjust
If either test fails the annunciator microswitch may need to be adjusted. Access the 2 screws that
attach the microswitch (see Figure 3). Loosen both screws and adjust the switch to get the correct
position. Tighten the screws and perform the test to ensure the correct adjustment was made.
4E21 31-50-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
101603 J
POWER LEVER ASSY.
BETA ANNUNCIATOR
MICROSWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
MICROSWITCH ROLLER
BETA/REVERSE
LOCKOUT LEVER
Beta Annunciator Microswitch Adjustment

Figure 3
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 31-50-00 4E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4E23 31-50-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 31-50-00 4E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
32
LANDING GEAR
4F1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32
CHAPTER CHAPTER
32-List of 1 Apr 15/07 32-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
32-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
32-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 16 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 17 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 18 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 32-40-00 1 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
32-20-00 1 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 16 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 32-50-00 1 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES (continued)
CHAPTER CHAPTER
32-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32 - LANDING GEAR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 32-00-00 1 4F9

Description and Operation 1 4F9
Special Tools 2 4F10
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS 32-10-00 1 4F11

Troubleshooting 1 4F11
Main Gear Oleo 2 4F12
Disassembly 3 4F13
Assembly 3 4F13
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 4 4F14
Main Gear Assembly 4 4F14
Removal 4 4F14
Installation 6 4F16
Adjustment 7 4F17
Alignment 9 4F19
Main Gear Tolerances 9 4F19
Main Gear Door Assembly 12 4F22
Removal 12 4F22
Adjustment 12 4F22
NOSE GEAR AND DOORS 32-20-00 1 4G1

Nose Gear Oleo 2 4G2
Disassembly 2 4G2
Assembly 4 4G4
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 5 4G5
Nose Gear Assembly 6 4G6
Removal 6 4G6
Installation 6 4G6
Adjustment 9 4G9
Alignment 9 4G9
Nose Gear Tolerances 12 4G12
Nose Gear Door Assembly 14 4G14
Removal 14 4G14
Installation 14 4G14
Nose Gear Door Adjustments 15 4G15

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTENSION AND RETRACTION 32-30-00 1 4G19

Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test 4 4G22
Nose Gear Actuator Assembly 9 4H3
Removal 9 4H3
Installation 10 4H4
Main Gear Actuator Assembly 11 4H5
Removal 11 4H5
Installation 11 4H5
Nose Gear Door Actuator Assembly 12 4H6
Removal 12 4H6
Installation 12 4H6
Sequence Valve 13 4H7
Removal 13 4H7
Installation 14 4H8
Adjustment 14 4H8
Emergency Gear Release Valve 15 4H9
Removal 15 4H9
Installation 15 4H9
WHEELS AND BRAKES 32-40-00 1 4H13

Nose Wheel Assembly 1 4H13
Removal and Disassembly 1 4H13
Assembly and Installation 1 4H13
Inspection 2 4H14
Main Wheel Assembly 2 4H14
Inspection 3 4H15
Nose and Main Wheel Assembly Repairs 4 4H16
Bearing Cup 4 4H16
Removal 4 4H16
Installation 4 4H16
Wheel Brake Assembly 4 4H16
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 5 4H17
Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly 7 4H19
Removal 7 4H19
Disassembly, Repair, and Installation 8 4H20
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES 32-40-00 (continued)

Brake Bleeding Procedure 9 4H21
(Gravity) 9 4H21
(Pressure) 9 4H21
Brake Bleeding After a Unit Has Been Changed 11 4H23
Brake System Leak Check 11 4H23
Parking Brake Valve 12 4H24
Removal 12 4H24
Disassembly 12 4H24
Assembly 12 4H24
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 12 4H24
STEERING 32-50-00 1 4I5

Steering Pushrod 1 4I5
Removal 1 4I5
Installation 1 4I5
Steering Bellcrank 1 4I5
Removal 1 4I5
Installation 1 4I5
Bungee Assembly 2 4I6
Removal 2 4I6
Installation 2 4I6
Steering Pushrod Bellows 2 4I6
Removal 2 4I6
Installation 2 4I6
Steering Arm 2 4I6
Removal 2 4I6
Installation 2 4I6
POSITION AND WARNING 32-60-00 1 4I9

Landing Gear Warning Systems Troubleshooting 1 4I9
Nose Gear 4 4I12
Up Limit Switch 4 4I12
Down Limit Switch 4 4I12
Main Gear 4 4I12
Up Limit Switch 4 4I12
Down Limit Switch 4 4I12
Landing Gear Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment 6 4I14
Landing Gear Up / Power Reduced Warning Switch 8 4I16

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
In this section are instructions for the overhaul, inspection and adjustment of the various components of
the landing gear and brake systems. Also included are adjustments for the electrical limit, safety and
warning switches.
This airplane is equipped with a retractable tricycle air-oil strut type landing gear which is hydraulically
operated by an electric hydraulic pump. A selector handle or switch on the instrument panel to the left of
the control quadrant is used to select gear UP or DOWN positions.
Gear positions are indicated by a display of three green lights (for gear down and locked) located above
the gear selector and a red warning light (for gear-in-transit or gear-unsafe conditions) in annunciator
panel. There is no separate light to indicate that all gear are fully retracted other than all gear lights being
out.
The landing gear swings to the down position and each actuator extends to its locked position, a switch
located on each actuator activates to indicate by a green light that the individual gear is safely down and
locked. When the gear begins to retract and the hydraulic actuators unlock, the down limit switch
actuates to the NC circuit and, in series with the NC circuit of the up limit switch, allows the gear unsafe
light to come on. The gear unsafe light will remain on until the gear is up and all up limit switches are
actuated to their normally open (NO) circuit.
A gear warning horn will sound when the power lever is retarded to idle unless all three gear are down.
This horn will also sound if the flaps are extended beyond approach position if the gear are not down
and locked.
The red gear unsafe light also operates simultaneously with the warning horn. Their primary purpose is
to give warning when power is reduced and the landing gear has not reached the down and locked
position. This circuit is controlled by the three paralleling down limit switches connected in series with a
power lever switch located in the control quadrant. (refer to Chapter 91 for electrical schematics.)
Each landing gear is retracted and extended by a single hydraulic locking cylinder attached to the oleo
strut housing. As the gear retract, doors enclose each gear through mechanical linkage. The gear are
held in their up position by hydraulic pressure on the cylinder.
Gear extension and retraction is normally terminated by hydraulic pressure building (as the gear reaches
its travel limits) and opening pressure switches in the hydraulic system. To ensure gear extension in case
the down pressure switch sticks open, or otherwise fails, an electrical bypass is provided. In this event,
the nose gear down limit switch stops hydraulic pump operation when the gear reaches full down and
locked.
The gear system has a free fall secondary extension system which consists of a valve that is controlled
from the panel. A down spring is incorporated in the nose gear to overcome air loads resisting gear
extension.
The nose gear is steerable through a 60 degree arc by use of the rudder pedals. As the gear retracts,
the steering linkage becomes separated from the gear so that rudder pedal action with the gear
retracted is not impeded by the nose gear operation. The nose gear rotates 90° to stow in the horizontal
position. A steering bungee is also incorporated in the nose wheel steering mechanism.
The main wheels are equipped with dual piston, single-slotted disc hydraulic brakes.
The parking brake is set by depressing both toe brakes and setting a push-pull valve lock on the
instrument panel.
4F9 32-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Special Tools
These tools are used at the factory and are recommended where rigging, alignment, or installation
procedures specify “use a suitable tool.” Order them through any Piper Dealer.
Tool (Piper Tool Number) Piper P/N
Rudder Pedal Neutral Alignment Tool (TL 623161) 762-152
Nose Wheel Centering (i.e. - Neutral) Tool (HF 622722) 762-147
Nose Gear Steering Bellcrank Centering (i.e. - Neutral) Tool (TL 622723) 762-148
Nose Gear Steering Horn / Arm Gap Tool (TL 690672) N/A
Nose Gear Actuator Alignment Tool (TL 690672) 762-137
Nose Gear Downspring Disassembly/Reassembly Tool (SK VB1152) 762-155
Nose Gear Downspring Remove/Install Tool (SK VB1153) 762-157
Control Wheel Neutral Tool (HF 622725) N/A
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-00-00 4F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING MAIN LANDING GEAR
Main landing gear shimmies Tire out of balance. Check balance and replace
during fast taxi, tire if necessary.
takeoff, or landing.
Worn or loose wheel Replace and/or adjust
bearings. wheel bearings.
Worn torque link bolts Replace bolts and!or
and / or bushings. bushings.
Excessive or uneven Incorrect operating pressure. Inflate tire to correct
wear on main tires. pressure.
Wheel out of alignment. Check wheel alignment.
(toe in or out).
Hydraulic actuator out of Check gear adjustment.
adjustment, allowing gear to
slant in or out. (There is no
adjustment on the extended
length - adjust for retracted
position only).
Strut bottoms on normal Insufficient air and/or Service strut with air
landing or taxiing on rough fluid in strut. and/or fluid.
ground.
Defective internal parts Replace defective parts.
in strut.
Landing gear doors fail Landing gear not retracting Check adjustment of
to completely close. completely. gear.
Door retraction mechanism Check adjustment.
out of adjustment.
4F11 32-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Main Gear Oleo

A. Disassembly
The main gear oleo assembly may be removed from the gear oleo housing and disassembled with
the gear removed from or installed in the airplane.
(1) Place airplane on jacks. (refer to 7-10-00)
(2) Place a drip pan under the main gear to catch spillage.
(3) Remove air and fluid from the oleo. Depress the air valve core pin to reduce strut pressure.
Remove the filler plug. With a thin hose, siphon as much hydraulic fluid from the strut as
possible.
(4) Disconnect brake line at the joint located in the wheel well. Disconnect brake line retaining
clamp that attaches the brake line to the upper part of the strut housing.
(5) To remove the piston tube assembly from the oleo housing, remove the bolt that connects the
upper and lower torque link. Note the number and thickness of spacer washer(s) between the
two links.
(6) Compress the piston tube. Reach up into the lower end of the oleo housing and release the
snap ring from the annular slot at the bottom of the oleo housing.
(7) Pull the piston tube with its component parts from the cylinder housing.
(8) The piston tube components may be removed by removing the retainer ring from the top of the
piston tube. Slide the bearing assembly (with its inner seal and back-up rings), wiper strip and
washer over the top of the piston tube.
(9) To remove the piston tube plug, located at the bottom of the piston tube assembly, remove the
bolt and insert a rod into the hole in the bottom of the fork and push the plug out of the top of
the piston tube.
(10) To remove the orifice tube, remove the orifice tube locknut, washer, lock washer and roll pin
from the top of the orifice tube (at the top of the trunnion). Slide the orifice tube from the
trunnion.
(11) The orifice tube plug may be removed by removing the snap ring from the slot at the bottom of
the orifice tube.
B. Assembly
(1) Determine that all parts are cleaned and inspected.
(2) To install the piston tube plug, first lubricate the plug O-ring with hydraulic fluid and install it on
the plug. Lubricate the inside wall of the piston tube. Insert the plug into the top of the piston
tube and push it down the tube. Align the bolt holes of the fork, tube and plug. Then install the
bolt assembly.
(3) If desired, cement a cork in the hole in the bottom of the fork body to prevent dirt from entering
between the fork and tube.
(4) To assemble components of orifice tube, insert the orifice plate into the bottom of the tube and
secure it with the snap ring. Install piston tube ring in slot on outer diameter of lower section of
orifice tube.
(5) To install the orifice tube in the oleo housing, install upper O-ring on orifice tube and insert the
tube up through the housing. With the end of the tube exposed through the top of the housing,
install the washer, lock washer, roll pin and locknut. Tighten the locknut only finger tight at this
time.
(6) Assemble components of piston tube on the tube by installing in order, snap ring, washer,
wiper ring, bearing assembly (with outer O-ring and inner seal and back-up rings) and retainer
ring.
4F13 32-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Lubricate the wall of the cylinder oleo housing and piston tube. Carefully insert the piston tube
assembly into the housing, guiding the orifice tube into the piston tube. Slide the washer and
wiper strip into position and secure the assembly with the snap ring in the lower part of the
trunnion.
(8) Torque the locknut at the top of the orifice tube from 530 to 550 inch-pounds.
(9) Ensure that the bushings are installed in the torque links. Bolt the links together making sure
that there is the same thickness of spacer washers between the links as previously removed
(to maintain wheel alignment). Tighten the bolt tight enough to allow no side play in the links
but still be free enough to rotate.
(10) Connect brake line and bleed brakes.
(11) Lubricate gear assembly. (Refer to Lubrication Chart 3, 12-20-00.)
(12) Compress and extend the strut several times to ascertain the strut will operate freely. The
weight of the gear wheel and fork should allow the strut to extend.
(13) Service the oleo strut with fluid and air. (Refer to Oleo Struts, 12-10-00.)
(14) Check main gear alignment (Refer to Alignment of Main Landing Gear) and gear operation.
(15) Ascertain that gear is down and locked.
(16) Remove the airplane from the jacks.
C. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair
(1) Clean all parts with a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect landing gear oleo assembly components for the following:
(a) Bearings and bushings for excessive wear. (Refer to Chart 3, Main Gear Tolerances for
specifications), corrosion and overall damage.
(b) Snap rings for cracks, burrs, etc.
(c) Cylinder and orifice tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks and excessive wear.
(d) Orifice plate for hole restriction.
(e) Fork tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks, dents and misalignment.
(f) Air valve for general condition.
(3) Repair of the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches, nicks or dents and replacement
of parts.
3. Main Gear Assembly
A. Removal
(1) Place the airplane on jacks.
(2) Disconnect locking actuator from strut housing.
(3) Disconnect brake line at its upper end in the wheel well.
(4) Disconnect gear door actuating rod at the gear housing.
(5) Remove bolt which retains forward strut housing support to the forward trunnion pin.
(6) Remove the forward trunnion pin by inserting a hook through the pin and drawing it towards
the center of the gear assembly.
NOTE: When withdrawing the pin do not lose the teflon washer and note the amount of shims
(if any) between the mating surfaces of the strut housing support and the support
fitting.
(7) Remove the bolt which retains the aft strut housing support to the aft trunnion pin.
(8) Remove the aft trunnion pin by inserting a hook through the pin and drawing it towards the
center of the gear assembly. Do not lose the teflon washer that was installed between the
mating surfaces of the strut housing support and the support fitting.
(9) Allow the gear to slowly drop from the wing.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main Gear Installation

Figure 2
4F15 32-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
NOTE: When assembling components of the landing gear, lubricate bearings, bushings and
friction surfaces with proper lubricant as described in 12-10-00.
(1) Install gear housing in the wheel well of the wing as follows:
(a) Place the gear up into the wheel well and align the holes in the strut support with the
holes in the support fittings.
NOTE: Ensure that one teflon washer is installed between each mating surface of the
strut support and the support fittings. The teflon surface of the washer should
face away from the centerline of the gear assembly.
NOTE: Install shims (P/N 83698-002) as required, between the mating surfaces of the
forward strut support and the support fittings, to provide 0.002 - 0.004 inches of
trunnion end play.
(b) Rotate the forward trunnion pin until the hole in the pin aligns with the hole in the strut
support.
(c) Insert bolt (bolt head should be inboard) through strut support and trunnion pin. Secure
bolt with nut and washers.
(d) Rotate the aft trunnion pin until the hole in the pin aligns with the hole in the strut support.
(e) Insert bolt (bolt head should be outboard) through strut support and trunnion pin. Secure
bolt with nut and washers.
(2) Attach the gear door actuating rod to the gear housing.
(3) Connect brake line at its upper end in the wheel well.
(4) Bolt locking actuator to gear housing. Torque to 260 - 320 in. lbs. Safety the bolt.
(5) Ensure that the landing gear is lubricated per the Lubrication Chart 3 in 12-10-00.
(6) Check the alignment of the wheel per instructions in paragraph E, below.
(7) Remove the airplane from the jacks.
(1) General (S/N’s 4697001 & up):
(a) Clean all parts in a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
(b) Inspect the gear components for the following unfavorable conditions:
1 Bolts, bearings and bushings for excessive wear, corrosion and damage.
2 Gear housing, torque links and attachment plates for cracks, bends or misalignment.
(c) Check the general condition of each limit switch and its actuator. Check the electrical
wiring for fraying, poor connections or conditions that may lead to failures.
(d) Repair of the landing gear is limited to reconditioning of parts such as replacing
components, bearings and bushings, smoothing out minor nicks and scratches and
repainting areas where paint has chipped or peeled.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) 500 Hour Main Landing Gear Actuator Upper Attach Bolt Special Inspection
(S/N’s 4697157 & up and Meridian aircraft with Kit No. 767-360 installed):
(a) Each 500 flight hours, remove the main landing gear actuator upper attach bolt
(P/N 693-216, see Figure 5), and with a 10X magnifier visually inspect for straightness,
cracking or thread wear.
(b) If any of the above conditions exist, replace bolt. Additionally, if replacing bolt, inspect
82695-059 bushings for deformation, cracking or wear and inspect attach fitting (561-083
(left) or 561-084 (right) for deformation, cracking or thread wear - replace bushings or
attach fitting as required.
(c) After completion of inspection install bolt and torque to 210-240 inch pounds.
D. Adjustment
(1) Place the airplane on jacks.
(2) Level the airplane laterally and longitudinally. (refer to Leveling, 8-20-00.)
(3) Disconnect gear door actuating rod from the strut housing by removing the rod attachment
bolt. Secure the door out of the way.
(4) Disconnect the locking actuator from the strut housing.
(5) Adjust the locking actuator to a nominal length of 24.08 inches with no load on the wheel.
Attach locking actuator to strut housing. Torque and secure bolt per paragraph B, above.
(6) Using the hydraulic pump, retract landing gear into wing well.
NOTE: This will require approximately 60 psi of pressure on the rod end part of the actuator
to unlock the cylinder and allow the cylinder to retract.
(7) Adjust the locking cylinder rod end so that the lower edge of the main wheel tire is .00 to .38
inch above a straightedge laid fore and aft across the wheel well fairing when the actuator is
fully retracted. (See Figure 3.)
(8) Inspect for adequate thread engagement of the rod end into the locking cylinder and tighten
the check nut.
(9) If the down lock limit switch is properly adjusted (see 32-60-00, Main Gear Downlimit Switch
Adjustment), retract and extend the gear hydro-electrically to ascertain that the gear operates
properly.
MAIN WHEEL TIRE
FWD
.00 TO .38 INCH
Main Gear Fully Retracted Position Adjustment

Figure 3
4F17 32-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
TOE-IN / TOE-OUT CORRECTION CHART
TOE-IN
TOE-OUT SHIM WASHERS WASHERS AN174
ANGLE WASHERS UNDER HEAD UNDER NUT BOLT
0° -- NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P (3) -14

0 ° 15 ' NAS1149F0432 NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P (2) -14
0 ° 33 ' NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P (2) -14
0 ° 48 ' NAS1149F0432 NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P -14
NAS1149F0463P
1 ° 04 ' NAS1149F0463P (2) NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P -14
1 ° 19 ' NAS1149F0432 NAS1149F0432 NAS1149F0463P -14
NAS1149F0463P (2)
1 ° 35 ' NAS1149F0463P (3) NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P (2) -15
2 ° 05 ' NAS1149F0463P (4) NAS1149F0463P NAS1149F0463P -15
Aligning Main Gear

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Alignment
(1) Place a straightedge no less than twelve feet long across the front of both main landing gear
wheels. Butt the straightedge against the tire at the hub level of the landing gear wheels. Jack
the airplane up just high enough to obtain a six and one-half inch dimension between the
centerline of the strut piston and the centerline of the center pivot bolt of the gear torque links.
Devise a support to hold the straightedge in this position.
(2) Set a square against the straightedge and check to see if its outstanding leg bears on the front
and rear side of the brake disc. (It may be necessary to remove the brake assembly to have
clear access to the disc.) If it touches both forward and rear flanges, the landing gear is
correctly aligned. The alignment for the main landing gear wheels is 0° 15' ± 5'.
NOTE: A carpenter’s square, because of its especially long legs, is recommended for
checking main landing gear wheel alignment.
(3) If the square contacts the rear side of the disc, leaving a gap between it and the front flange,
the wheel is toed-out. If a gap appears at the rear flange, the wheel is toed-in.
(4) To rectify the toe-in and toe-out condition, remove the bolt connecting the upper and lower
torque links and remove or add spacer washers to move the wheel in the desired direction.
(refer to the Toe-in, Toe-out Correction Chart Chart 2).
(5) Should a condition exist that all spacer washers have been removed and it is still necessary to
move the wheel further in or out, then it will be necessary to turn the torque link assembly over.
This will put the link connecting point on the opposite side allowing the use of spacers to go in
the same direction.
(6) Recheck wheel alignment. If the alignment is correct, safety the castellated nut with cotter pin.
(7) If a new link on the top left main gear had to be installed or it had to be reversed during the
alignment check, it will be necessary to check the gear safety switch (squat switch) bracket for
engagement and locking in place.
(8) Check adjustment of landing gear safety switch (squat switch). (See 32-60-00, Landing Gear
Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment.)
4. Main Gear Tolerances
See Chart 3 and Figure 5.
4F19 32-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
MAIN GEAR TOLERANCES
Item Part No. Manufacturer’s Service Service Remarks
Dimension Dimension Tolerance
Lower Trunnion Bushing FF411-4 .313 / .314 See Notes 1 & 3

Strut Bearing 67026-7 .313 / .314 See Notes 1 & 3
Torque Link Bushing 31796 .3760 / .3745 See Note 1
Actuator Upper
Attachment Bushing(s) 82695-59 .501 / .499
Trunnion Pin Bushing 16DU24 -- See Note 4
NOTE: 1. Line ream to this dimension after installation of new part.

2. Install bearing with wet zinc chromate on adjacent surfaces of bearing and casting.
3. Press fit.
4. Bond in place with Locktite 290.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Main Gear Tolerances

Figure 5
4F21 32-10-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Main Gear Door Assembly

A. Removal
(1) With the landing gear down, disconnect the door retraction rods from the door by removing:
(a) the nut, washers and bolt securing the forward rod to the landing gear; and,
(b) the nut, washers, bolt, and cotter pin securing the aft rod to the landing gear.
(2) Remove the door from the wing panel by cutting the safety wire on the two hinge pins and
driving the pins from the hinges.
B. Installation
(1) Position the door so that the hinges line up and insert the hinge pins. The pins should be
installed with the safety wire holes towards the center line of the door.
(2) Ensure that the ends of the pins which have the safety wire holes protrude approximately 1/4"
from the hinges. Safety the pins to the wing with MS20995-C41 safety wire.
(3) Attach the forward door retraction rod to the door with the previously removed bolt, washers
and nut.
(4) Attach the aft door retraction rod to the door with the previously removed bolt, washers, nut,
and cotter pin. Do not torque. Allow bolt .020 to .030 inch axial free play after installation.
(1) Clean the door and retraction rods with a suitable cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect the door for cracks or damage, loose or damaged hinges and brackets.
(3) Inspect the door retraction rods and end bearings for damage and corrosion.
D. Adjustment
(1) Set the forward door retraction rod to a length between 5.0 to 5.1 inches center to center of the
rod ends.
(2) Start with the aft door retraction rod set to a length of 5.08 inches center to center of the rod
ends. Adjust length so that bolt in slotted hole in bracket on landing gear contacts outboard
end of slot when main gear is fully extended.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4F23 32-10-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 32-10-00 4F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING NOSE GEAR

Nose landing gear Internal wear in bungee. Replace bungee.
shimmies during fast taxi,
takeoff or landing. Bungee loose at mounting. Replace necessary parts
and bolts.
Tire out of balance. Check balance and replace
tire if necessary.
Worn or loose wheel Replace and/or adjust
bearings. wheel bearings.
Worn torque link bolts Replace bolts and/or
and/or bushings. bushings.
Excessive or uneven Incorrect operating pressure. Inflate tire to correct
wear on nose tire. pressure.
Wear resulting from shimmy. Refer to preceding “trouble”
for correction.
Nose gear fails to Oleo cylinder binding Lubricate strut housing
steer properly. in strut housing. (refer to 12-10-00).
Cylinder and/or strut housing Determine cause and
bushings damaged. correct.
One brake dragging. Determine cause and
correct.
Rollers not engaged. (Metal Determine cause and
to metal in Gear Down correct.
Position.)
Steering bellcrank loose on Readjust and tighten.
attachment plate.
Steering bellcrank bearing Replace bearing and/or
and/or bolt worn. bolt.
Bungee galling or binding. Replace.
Nose gear fails to Steering arm roller Replace defective
straighten when sheared at top of roller.
Ianding gear extends. strut.
Incorrect rigging of Check nose gear steering
nose gear steering. adjustment.
4G1 32-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING NOSE GEAR
Nose gear fails to Centering guide roller Replace roller.
straighten when sheared.
Ianding gear retracts.
Damaged guide. Replace guide.
Strut bottoms on normal Insufficient air and/or Service strut with air
landing or taxiing on rough fluid in strut. and/or fluid.
ground.
Defective internal parts Replace defective parts.
in strut.
Landing gear doors fail Landing gear not retracting Check adjustment of
to completely close. completely. gear.
Door retraction mechanism Check adjustment.
out of adjustment.
2. Nose Gear Oleo

A. Disassembly
The nose gear oleo assembly may be removed and disassembled from the gear oleo housing with
the gear removed from or installed on the airplane.
(1) Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, 7-10-00).
(2) Place a drip pan under the nose gear to catch spillage.
(3) Remove air and oil from the oleo strut. Depress the air valve core pin until the strut chamber
pressure has diminished, remove the filler plug and, with a small hose, siphon as much
hydraulic fluid from the strut as possible.
(4) To remove the complete strut and fork assembly from the oleo housing:
(a) Cut the safety wire on the three cap bolts that retain the steering arm to the strut. Remove
the bolts.
(b) Remove the snap ring, thrust washer, and washers (if any) at the top of the strut housing.
(c) Pull the complete strut and fork assembly from the bottom of the housing.
(5) To remove the piston tube and fork from the strut:
(a) Separate the upper and lower torque links by removing the link connecting bolt assembly.
Separate the two links. noting the amount of spacer washers between the two links.
(b) Compress the piston tube. Reach up along the tube and release the snap ring from the
annular slot at the bottom of the strut.
(c) Pull the piston tube with its component parts from the strut.
(d) The piston tube components may be removed from the piston tube by removing the
retainer from the annular slot at the top of the piston tube.
(e) Slide the bearing assembly (with inner O-ring and teflon retainer), wiper ring, washer and
snap ring off of the piston tube.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly

Figure 1
4G3 32-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) To remove the orifice tube:

(a) Remove the orifice tube retaining nut from the top of the strut assembly.
(b) Pull the orifice tube down and out of the strut.
(c) The orifice plate is removed from the bottom of the orifice tube by releasing the snap ring
that holds the plate in position.
(7) To remove the piston tube plug with O-ring:
(a) Remove the bolt assembly.
(b) Insert a rod up through the hole in the body of the fork.
(c) Push the plug out through the top of the tube.
B. Assembly
(1) Ascertain that parts are cleaned and inspected.
(2) To install the piston tube plug, first lubricate the tube plug and O-ring with hydraulic fluid (MIL-
H-5606) and install the O-ring on the plug. Lubricate the inside wall of the tube, insert the plug
into the top of the tube and push it to the fork end. Align the bolt holes of the fork, tube and
plug and install the bolt assembly.
(3) If desired, cement a cork in the hole in the bottom of the fork body to prevent dirt from entering
between the fork and tube.
(4) To assemble the components of the orifice tube:
(a) Insert the orifice plate into the bottom of the tube, with the countersunk side of the hole in
the orifice plate exposed.
(b) Secure the plate with the snap ring, lubricate and install the two O-rings on the tube (one
at each end).
(5) Insert the orifice tube up through the bottom of the strut. With the threaded portion of the
orifice tube exposed through the top of the strut, install the washer and insert a roll pin through
the washer into the strut. Install the orifice tube nut finger tight at this time.
(6) The fork and piston tube assembly may be assembled by installing the tube components on
the tube. In order, slide onto the tube the snap ring, washer, wiper ring, bearing assembly (with
inner O-ring and teflon retainer). Reinstall the retainer in the annular slot in the top of the piston
tube.
(7) Lubricate the inner wall of the strut with hydraulic fluid. Insert O-ring into bottom of strut.
Carefully insert the piston tube assembly into the bottom of the strut, allowing the orifice tube
to guide itself into the piston tube. Push the tube all the way up in the cylinder. Position wiper
ring and install wiper ring, slide washer up into the strut and secure the assembly by placing
the snap ring into the annular slot in the bottom of the strut.
(8) At the top of the strut, torque the orifice tube retaining nut from 500 to 600 inch-pounds.
(9) Ascertain that bushings are installed in the upper and lower torque links and then install both
links. Lubricate the torque link bolts and tighten them only tight enough to allow no side play in
the links, yet still be free enough to rotate.
(10) Ensure that the two thrust washers (with their coated surfaces together) are installed in place
on the lower portion of the strut immediately above the boss where the upper torque link
attaches to the strut.
(11) Slide the strut assembly up into the trunnion. Ensure that a thrust washer (with its coated side
down) is placed on top of the trunnion. Place the snap ring in its annular slot in the top of the
strut.
(12) At the top of the oleo strut assembly install the steering arm to the top of the strut with the
three cap bolts. Torque the bolts and safety them with 0.032 safety wire.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) Lubricate the gear assembly (refer to 12-20-00, Chart 4).

(14) Compress and extend the strut several times to ascertain that the strut will operate freely.
Weight of the gear wheel and fork should allow the strut to extend.
(15) Service the oleo strut with fluid and air (Refer to 12-10-00, Filling Oleo Struts).
(16) Check nose gear for alignment (refer to 32-20-00, Nose Gear Assembly - Alignment) and gear
operation.
(2) Inspect the landing gear oleo assembly components for the following:
(a) Bearings and bushings for excess wear, corrosion, scratches and overall damage.
(b) Lock rings for cracks, burrs, etc.
(c) Cylinder and orifice tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks and excess wear.
(d) Bushing assembly for looseness or turning in cylinder.
(e) Orifice plate for hole restriction.
(f) Fork tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks, dents and misalignment.
(g) Air valve for general condition.
(3) Repair of the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches, nicks and dents and
replacement of parts.
4G5 32-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Nose Gear Assembly

A. Removal
(1) Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to 71-10-00.)
(2) Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00.)
(3) Retract the nose gear slightly to remove it from the down locked position.
WARNING: USE HOSE CLAMPS TO HOLD DOWN SPRING WITHIN THE CONFINES OF
SPECIAL TOOL. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RELEASE DOWN SPRING WITHOUT
THE USE OF THE SPECIAL TOOL. THE DOWN SPRING ASSEMBLY IS
SPRING LOADED AND WILL FLY APART.
(4) Use the special tool Piper P/N 762-157 (see Figure 2) to hold the down spring at proper length
for installation. Disconnect the actuator and emergency down spring mechanism from the right-
hand side of the trunnion by removing the bolt, spacers and washers.
(5) The landing gear may then be removed by removing the nuts, washers and bolts that attach
the gear trunnion to the attachment points on each side of the engine mount.
B. Installation
NOTE: When assembling any units of the landing gear, lubricate bearings, bushings, and friction
surfaces with the proper lubricant as described in 12-20-00.
(1) To install the landing gear assembly, position the gear so that the bolt attachment points on the
housing align with the attachment points on the engine mount. Install pivot bolts, washers and
nuts. Tighten the nuts to a snug fit, still allowing the gear to swing free.
(2) Connect the actuator and emergency down mechanism to the right-hand side of the trunnion
with the previously removed bolt, spacers and washers. Safety the bolt to the trunnion with
MS20995-C41 safety wire. Remove the down spring retaining tool.
(3) Cycle the gear a minimum of three times to ensure proper operation.
(4) Ascertain that gear is lubricated per 12-20-00, Chart 4.
(5) Check the adjustment of the gear per Nose Gear Assembly - Adjustment, below.
(6) Install engine cowling. (Refer to 71-10-00)
(7) Retract landing gear and check door operation per Nose Gear Door Adjustments, below.
(8) Check the alignment of the nose gear per Nose Gear Assembly - Alignment, below.
(9) Remove the airplane from the jacks. (refer to 7-10-00.)
Nose Gear Down Spring Tool

Figure 2
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOWN SPRING
ACTUATOR STEERING
BELLCRANK
BUNGEE
ENGINE
MOUNT
STEERING ARM
ST
RU
T AN
D TIRE
S
IN ERVICE
ST
IN RUCTIONS
FL
A
TO TE STRUT
110
PSI
GEAR ASSEMBLY
Nose Gear Installation

Figure 3
4G7 32-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STA
60.50 102590 W
(REF)
STA
100.00
(REF)
ENGINE MOUNT
STA
78.00
(REF)
BUNGEE (SEE NOTE)
A A
ACTUATOR BELLCRANK
(SEE VIEW C)
STEERING ARM
MOUNT PLATE MOUNT PLATE

DOWN SPRING
LOCKING
VlEW B-B ASSY
STEERING
HORN NOTE: INSTALL BUNGEE BETWEEN STEERING
PADS
B B ARM AND BELLCRANK, WITH BELLCRANK IN
NEUTRAL POSITION (I.E. - NO LOAD ON SPRINGS).
ADJUST LENGTH AS REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT
AHEAD NOSE WHEEL ALIGNMENT.
TIGHTEN JAM NUTS.
STEERING ARM
VlEW A-A
WASHERS
(NAS1149F0863P AND
NAS1149F0832P,
0.0˚ TO 0.5˚ THREE REQUIRED.)
VIEW C
TORQUE TO THE LOWER END OF THE
RANGE LISTED IN 91-10-00, CHART 2.
THE BELLCRANK VERTICAL PLAY IS NOT
TO EXCEED 0.007 INCH, MEASURED AT BOLT.
Nose Gear Adjustment

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(2) Inspect the gear components for the following unfavorable conditions:
(a) Bolts, bearings and bushings for excessive wear, corrosion and damage.
(b) Gear housing, torque links and down spring for cracks, bends or misalignment.
(3) Check the general condition of each limit switch and its actuator. Check wiring for fraying, poor
connections or conditions that may lead to failures.
(4) The bungee requires no service other than routine inspection. In case of damage or
malfunction, the bungee should be replaced rather than repaired.
(5) Repair to the landing gear is limited to reconditioning of parts such as replacing bearings and
bushings, smoothing out minor nicks and scratches, repainting of areas where paint has
chipped or peeled and replacement of parts.
D. Adjustment
(1) Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking 7-10-00.)
(2) Place gear in UP position. Gear should retract until it touches gear up stop, located on right
hand side of nose gear wheel well opening.
(3) Adjust gear for retracted position only, as follows:
(a) Loosen locknut where actuator rod-end bearing attaches to trunnion.
(b) Adjust actuator for full retraction.
(c) Tighten locknut.
NOTE: If unable to rig nose wheel assembly to proper retracted location with two jam nuts
installed, remove one jam nut. Maximum thread exposure with single nut is 0.28 inch.
(4) Repeat step (3) as needed.
(5) Place gear in DN position. Extended position is determined by the cylinder locking. (refer to
32-30-00, Nose Gear Actuator Assembly)
(6) Remove airplane from jacks.
E. Alignment
(1) Place the airplane on a smooth level floor that will accommodate the striking of a chalk line.
(2) Ascertain that the nose gear is properly adjusted as given in Nose Gear Assembly -
Adjustment, above.
(3) With the landing gear in the down locked position, weight proportionally on the nose gear and
the nose wheel facing forward, adjust the steering arm by loosening the pivot bolt and moving
the adjuster on the bottom of the mount plate until the steering arm clears the rollers by
0.010 - 0.030 in. Make this measurement with the nose wheel locked in alignment with the
longitudinal axis and the steering arm parallel to the steering horn pads. Torque the pivot bolt.
(4) Place the airplane on jacks. (refer to 7-10-00.)
(5) Level the airplane laterally and longitudinally. (Refer to 8-20-00.)
(6) From the center point of the tail skid, extend a plumb bob and mark the contact point on the
floor.
(7) Extend a chalk line from the mark on the floor below the tail skid to a point approximately three
feet forward of the nose wheel. Allow the line to pass under the wheel at the centerline of the
tire. Snap the chalk line.
4G9 32-20-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Clamping Rudder Pedals in Neutral Position Rudder Pedals at Neutral Position

Figure 5 Figure 6
(8) Clamp the rudder pedals to align them in a lateral position. Ascertain that the rudder pedals
are in their neutral position. (refer to Figures 5 and 6.)
(9) Check to ensure that the steel bellcrank mounted in the nose gear tunnel is perpendicular
(crosswise ) to the sides of the tunnel (steering pushrods from the bellcrank to the pedals must
be equal length).
(10) Disconnect steering bungee at the forward end.
(11) To align the nose wheel straight forward, stand in front of the nose gear and align the center rib
of the tire with the chalk line, or lay a straightedge along the side of the tire and parallel the
straightedge with the chalk line.
(12) Adjust the steering bungee length and install with nose wheel straight forward. Check that the
rod ends have sufficient thread engagement by ascertaining that a wire will not go through the
check hole in the rod. Tighten the jam nuts.
(13) To check the nose gear steering for its 30° right and left maximum travel, mark the 30° angles
on each side of the nose wheel from the centerline and wheel pivot point. Turn the wheel to its
maximum travel in both directions to check for allowable travel. Should travel be too much in
one direction but not enough in the other direction, check for possible damage to the gear fork
or torque links.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4G11 32-20-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Nose Gear Tolerances

See Chart 2 and Figure 7.
CHART 2
NOSE GEAR TOLERANCES
Item Part No. Manufacturer’s Service Service Remarks

Dimension Dimension Tolerance
Upper Strut Bearing FF411-2 .313 / .314 See Note 1

Lower Strut Bearing 67026-007 .312 / .313 See Note 1
Torque Link Bushing FF310-5 .2495 / .2505 See Notes 1 & 2
Trunnion Support Bushing 83630-012 .753 / .752 See Note 3
L/H Roller Bushing 86700-47 .312 O.D.
R/H Roller Bushing 82695-18 .660 O.D.
Trunnion Spacer 82695-3 .501 / .500
Steering Arm Bearing 83630-4 .501 / .502 See Note 1
Emergency Down Mechanism
Spacer Bushing 82695-108 .377 / .375
Steering Bellcrank Pivot Bearing 83630-2 .6245 / .6255 See Note 1
NOTE: All dimensions unless otherwise noted are I.D.(inside Diameter)

NOTE: 1. Line ream to this dimension after installation.
2. Install bearing with wet zinc chromate.
3. Shrink fit.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Tolerances

Figure 7
4G13 32-20-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Nose Gear Door Assembly (See Figure 8.)

A. Removal
(1) With nose gear extended, disconnect door link rods by removing nuts, bolts and washers.
(2) To remove either left or right nose gear door:
(a) In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697173, for airplanes which have not complied with Piper Service
Bulletin No. 1144, procure the following parts: two (2) each, Hinge Pin, P/N102156-012;
four (4) each, Washer (NAS1149FN616P), P/N 690-639; four (4) each, Cotter Pin
(MS24665-132), P/N 424-051.
1 Using a number 30 drill bit (.1285 inch diameter), carefully drill out the existing
crimped material from each end of the forward door hinge (both left and right hand
assemblies, by drilling along hinge pin axis until drill point makes contact with the
end face of the existing (currently installed) hinge pin, which should be a depth of
approximately .12 inch at each end.
2 Replace the existing forward hinge pin with the new hinge pin procured above (P/N
102156-012) as follows: Insert new pin into hinge pin hole until it makes contact with
existing pin. Using a light tapping action, install new pin while driving out old pin.
Discard old pin. When properly positioned, the new pin will protrude from each end of
the hinge by .22 inches. Place a washer onto hinge pin shaft (one end only), and
secure with a cotter pin, using cotter pin holes in new hinge pin.
3 Bend one end of the aft hinge pin straight. Pull out both the forward and aft hinge
pins and remove the door.
(b) In S/N’s 4697174 and up, and earlier airplanes post-SB 1144, bend one end of the aft
hinge pin straight. Remove the cotter pin and washer from one end of the forward hinge
pin. Pull out both hinge pins and remove the door.
B. Installation
(1) Install each nose gear door by aligning the forward and aft hinge halves of the door with the
corresponding hinge halves on the wheel well and then inserting the two hinge pins (ensure
the forward hinge pin has a cotter pin and washer on one end). New pins are recommended.
(2) Bend the ends of the aft hinge pin to secure it in place. Rotate the aft hinge pin ends so that
they point into the wheel well when the doors are closed.
(3) Place the washer over the end of the forward hinge pin and insert and secure the cotter pin.
(4) Attach the door link rods to the doors with the previously removed bolts, nuts and washers.
(1) Clean all parts with a suitable cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect doors for damage, loose or damaged hinges and brackets.
(3) Inspect door retraction link assemblies and arms for damage or wear.
(4) Check the tension spring (right door) for wear and tension. Reject the spring if the tension does
not maintain the doors in the full open position.
(5) Repairs to the door are limited to replacement of hinges and painting.
(6) Repairs to the retraction mechanism are limited to replacement of parts, removal of light
corrosion and painting.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Doors

Figure 8
6. Nose Gear Door Adjustments

A. Place the airplane on jacks per 7-10-00.
B. Disconnect both gear door actuating rods.
C. Retract gear into wheel well.
D. Adjust rod assemblies so that the door assemblies form a straight line at B.L. 0.000. Adjust the right
hand door first by itself, the adjust the left hand door.
4G15 32-20-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4G17 32-20-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 32-20-00 4G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
1. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING LANDING GEAR EXTENSION AND RETRACTION
Landing gear system fails Hydraulic pump circuit breaker Reset circuit breaker and
to operate. open. determine cause.
Hydraulic pump circuit wires Check wiring.
broken.
Safety (squat) switch out of Adjust switch.
adjustment.
Squat switch inoperative. Replace switch.
Pressure switch inoperative. Check bypass circuitry.
Replace switch.
Hydraulic pump inoperative. Check ground wire.
Replace pump.
Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic
below operating level. fluid to full level and
investigate cause.
Battery low or dead. Check condition of battery.
Recharge or replace.
Hydraulic fluid leak in system. Isolate leak and repair.
Hydraulic pump electric motor Replace pump.
inoperative.
Hydraulic lines obstructed or Check lines.
Ieaking.
Landing gear retraction Hydraulic pump motor. Check pump motor.
extremely slow.
below operating level. fluid. Check for leaks.
Internal / external leak in system. Isolate and repair / replace.
Restriction in hydraulic lines. Isolate and check hydraulic
lines.
4G19 32-30-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pump stops during gear Hydraulic pump circuit breaker Reset circuit breaker and
retraction / extension. opens. determine cause for
overload.
Pressure switch out of Check bypass circuitry.
adjustment.
Remove and readjust or
replace switch.
Bypass circuitry malfunction Check per Landing Gear
or nose gear extension prior Retraction System
to main gear extension. Functional Test, below.
Pressure relief valve out Adjust / replace pressure
of adjustment. relief valve.
Mechanical restriction or Place airplane on jacks and
obstruction in hydraulic run extension check.
system to allow pressure Isolate and determine
to build up and shut off cause.
pump before gear has
extended / retracted.
Pump fails to shut off Pressure switch inoperative. Repair / replace switch.
though gear has fully
retracted / extended. Pressure switch out of Check bypass circuitry.
adjustment.
Adjust switch.
Pump relay sticking. Replace relay.
below operating level. fluid. Check for leaks.
Pressure relief valve out of Adjust / replace pressure
adjustment. relief valve.
Internal / external leakage Check gear actuating
of system. cylinders for
internal / external leakage.
Check for internal damage
to hydraulic pump.
Check for damaged
hydraulic lines.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Pump running intermittently Pump leaking. Replace.
after gear has retracted/
extended. Internal leakage of system. Check free fall valve for
internal leakage.
Check pressure relief valve.
Check gear actuating
cylinders for internal
Ieakage.
External leakage of system. Check for leak between
reservoir and pump.
Check gear actuating
cylinders for external
leakage.
Check for broken or
damaged hydraulic lines.
Pump running intermittently Hydraulic fluid low in Fill reservoir and check
after gear has retracted. reservoir. for leaks.
Gear stops part way up, but Hydraulic fluid in reservoir Fill reservoir with hydraulic
pump continues to run. below operating level. fluid.
Internal leakage of system. Check gear actuating
cylinders for internal
leakage.
Check free fall valve for
internal leakage
Check for broken or
damaged hydraulic lines.
Emergency extender pulled. Reset emergency extender.
All gear fail to free fall. Free fall function of selector Check mechanical
fails to operate. connections.
Inspect valve for damage.
Gear pivot points dry. Lube pivot points.
4G21 32-30-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Landing Gear Retraction System Functional Test (PIR-PPS-60033-9, Rev. J.)
WARNING: BE SURE AIRPLANE IS ON JACKS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE FOLLOWING

TEST.
The following test verifies that the landing gear retraction system is functioning properly.
A. Set up
(1) Verify that main and nose gear are properly adjusted (See 32-10-00 & 32-20-00, respectively)
and ensure tires and struts are properly inflated.(See 12-10-00).
(2) Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00)
(3) Connect a 28 Vdc regulated power source capable of supplying a minimum of 50 amperes to
the aircraft electrical system.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE WITH HYDRAULIC
PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER “IN”.
CAUTION: BEFORE STARTING TEST, CHECK ADEQUATE CLEARANCE EXISTS FOR

NOSE GEAR LIGHT ,SEQUENCE VALVE, ACTUATORS, HOSES, ETC.
NOTE: With power supplied through the auxiliary power plug the batt-master switch should
remain in the "OFF" position. The APU circuit bypasses the batt-master switch to
energize the ship power circuits.
NOTE: During this test, add hydraulic fluid, MIL-H-5606, to the reservoir as required to keep
the fluid level between the “F” (full) and “L” (low) marks. The yellow hydraulic pump
annunciator light will illuminate whenever the pump is operating.
(4) Remove vent screw, washer, and warning tag, if installed.
(5) Bleed the hydraulic system. (See Bleeding Hydraulic System, 29-10-00.)
(6) Set the Sequence Valve.
Adjust the plunger screw outward until the sequence lever depresses the plunger
approximately .125 inch when the nose gear is fully retracted, and the nose gear door
actuating torque tube rotates. Lock the plunger and screw in place and connect the nose gear
door actuation rods. These rods shall be long initially and shortened progressively until the
nose gear doors seat firmly, but are not distorted when closed. Cycle the gear as required to
ensure proper operation.
(7) Check/adjust switches.
(a) Check/adjust squat switch per Landing Gear Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment,
32-60-00.
(b) Check to ensure that the gear door closed (gear "UP") switches are wired to the proper
panel indicator light (gear warning annunciator).
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Procedure
(1) Place the power lever in the idle stop position. (See paragraph (7), below.)
NOTE: The following tests and checks must be performed in the sequence shown. Any failure
of the system to perform as specified indicates a malfunction, which must be
corrected before proceeding.
(2) Place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position.
(3) Verify that:
(a) Three green safe lights are illuminated.
(b) Red gear warning light is off.
(c) Gear warning horn does not sound.
(d) Hydraulic pump does not operate.
(4) Leave the gear up for at least five (5) minutes. Check that the hydraulic pump motor does not
operate. If the pump operates at any time during the five (5) minute period, check for leaks or
malfunctioning components in the system.
NOTE: One momentary pump operation is allowable during this five (5) minute period,
provided that the gear warning light is out and no repeated pump operations for a
subsequent fifteen (15) minute period occur.
(5) Place the gear selector switch in the UP position.
(6) Verify that:
(a) Three green safe lights are out.
(b) Red gear warning light illuminates.
(c) Gear warning horn sounds.
(d) All gear retract fully and the gear doors close.
(e) Hydraulic pump motor shuts off.
(7) Warning Horn and Annunciator Light
(a) In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 as originally delivered:
Advance the power lever to a position midway between max power and idle. The warning
horn should stop sounding and the gear warning light should go out.
(b) In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 with Piper Kit No. 766-
697 installed and in S/N’s 4697115, 4697117, 4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 & up:
Power lever position will not affect the warning horn or annunciator light when on the
ground. Press the “GEAR WARN MUTE” switch (on the instrument panel) to stop the
warning horn from sounding. The “GEAR WARN” annunciator light automatically turns off
when the gear are in the full up and locked position.
(8) With the gear fully retracted extend the flaps to the 10° position. The red “GEAR WARN”
annunciator and gear warning horn should not operate. At flap extensions beyond 10° and to
the full down position, the red “GEAR WARN” annunciator and the gear warning horn should
operate simultaneously and continuously. Operate the flap extension back to the 10° position -
prior to reaching the 10° position, press the “GEAR WARN MUTE” switch (on the instrument
panel) to stop the warning horn from sounding and to turn OFF the red “GEAR WARN”
annunciator.
4G23 32-30-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Leave the gear up for at least five (5) minutes. Check that the hydraulic pump motor does not
operate. If the pump operates at any time during the five (5) minute period, check for leaks or
malfunctioning components in the system.
NOTE: One momentary pump operation is allowable during this five (5) minute period,
provided that the gear warning light is out and no repeated pump operations for a
subsequent fifteen (15) minute period occur.
(10) Pull the hydraulic pump circuit breaker out.
(11) Release the guard and pull the emergency gear release (free fall) knob out.
(12) Verify that:
(a) The landing gear falls to the down and locked position.
(b) Red gear warning light goes out when the gear locks.
(c) Three green safe lights are illuminated when the gear locks.
NOTE: The main gear may not fall completely into the locked position during ground free
fall test. If not, after waiting two (2) minutes for pressure to bleed off, extend the
gear manually using a side force at the center line of axle that does not exceed
nine (9) pounds. The gear should then lock.
(13) Push in the free fall knob. Position the guard.
(14) Push the hydraulic pump circuit breaker in.
(15) Check that three green lights stay on.
NOTE: Pump may run momentarily.
(16) Cycle gear up and down, one time to verify normal operations.
(17) Place the landing light switch ON.
(18) Place the gear selector switch in the UP position.
(19) Verify that:
(a) Hydraulic pump motor operates and the gear retracts.
(b) Three green safe lights are out.
(c) Red gear warning light illuminates, until all the gear are up, and then goes out.
(d) The gear retracts fully in nine (9) seconds or less.
(e) Hydraulic pump motor stops operating when the gear is up.
(f) Gear warning horn does not sound.
(g) The landing light shuts off as the nose gear doors close.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(20) Test the Gear Down Pressure Switch Bypass Relay Circuit as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE EMERGENCY GEAR RELEASE VALVE WITH HYDRAULIC
PUMP CIRCUIT BREAKER “IN”.
See Figure 3, 29-10-00, and Figure 1, 91-29-10.
(a) Disconnect the gear down pressure switch circuit (red wire) and conduct the following
sequence:
1 Place the gear selector switch in the “UP” position. The gear should function
normally.
2 Place the gear selector switch in the “DOWN” position. The pump will shut “OFF”
before the gear reach the full down position. It is acceptable if the nose gear fully
extends down and locks. The main gear may only extend partially.
3 Complete gear extension by activating the emergency release valve and moving the
main gear to the down and locked position.
4 Reconnect the gear down pressure switch circuit (red wire).
5 Reset the emergency release valve.
(b) Disconnect the gear down pressure switch by-pass relay circuit (wire G13B22) and
conduct the following sequence:
1 Place the gear selector switch in the “UP” position. The gear should function
normally.
2 Place the gear selector switch in the “DOWN” position. The gear should function
normally.
3 Reconnect the gear down pressure switch by-pass relay circuit (wire G13B22).
(21) With the gear fully retracted, place the gear selector switch in the DOWN position. Verify that:
(a) Hydraulic pump motor operates and the gear extends.
(b) All gear return to the down and locked position (extending fully in nine (9) seconds or
less).
(c Hydraulic pump motor stops operating after the gear is in down and locked position.
(d) Red gear warning light is illuminated while gear is in transit.
(e) Three green safe lights are illuminated as the gear locks.
(f) Gear warning horn does not sound.
(g) Landing light illuminates as the gear door opens.
CAUTION: A MOMENTARY BLINKING OF THE RED OR GREEN GEAR LIGHTS

AFTER THE ACTUATOR IS DOWN AND LOCKED MAY INDICATE AN
IMPROPERLY ADJUSTED SWITCH IN A LOCKING CYLINDER.
(22) Turn the landing light switch to the OFF position.
(23) Disconnect the ground power unit.
WARNING: VERIFY GEAR ARE DOWN AND LOCKED BEFORE REMOVING AIRPLANE
FROM JACKS.
(24) Remove airplane from the jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00.)
4H1 32-30-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Actuator Installation

Figure 1
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Nose Gear Actuator Assembly

NOTE: No field repair of Frisby Aerospace actuators installed in PA-46-500TP airplanes is authorized.
Actuator overhaul service is available through Piper distributors.
(1) Place airplane on jacks. (refer to 7-10-00)
(a) Place the gear control in the UP position.
(b) Allow the gear to retract half way only.
(d) Set the BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE OR DISCONNECT EITHER END OF THE
NOSE GEAR DOWNSPRING ASSEMBLY WITHOUT THE USE OF THE
SPECIAL TOOL (P/N 762-157) SHOWN IN FIGURE 2. THE DOWNSPRING
ASSEMBLY IS HEAVILY LOADED.
CAUTION: ONCE THE REMOVE/INSTALL TOOL (P/N 762-157) IS IN PLACE, USE HOSE
CLAMPS TO SECURE IT TO THE DOWNSPRING ASSEMBLY.
(3) Position the special remove/install tool (P/N 762-157) (see Figure 2) so that the nose gear
downspring is within the two end plates. Secure the special tool to the downspring assembly
with hose clamps. Remove bolt holding rod end bearing and spring to trunnion. Remove
washers, spacers, and bushing.
CAUTION: IF COMPLETE DISASSEMBLY OF THE DOWNSPRING MECHANISM IS
DESIRED, USE OF THE SPECIAL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY TOOL (P/N
762-155) IS REQUIRED. THE EMERGENCY DOWNSPRING MECHANISM IS
SPRING LOADED AND COULD CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DAMAGE IF THE
SPECIAL DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY TOOL (P/N 762-155) IS NOT USED.
(4) Disconnect electrical leads from downlimit micro-switch.
(5) Disconnect and quickly cap two hydraulic lines at nose gear actuator.
NOTE: If the hydraulic line elbow on the lower end of the nose gear Actuator is to be removed
(i.e. - if replacing actuator), it may be necessary to first remove the downlimit
micro-switch. If so, remove only the four screws holding the switch plate to the
actuator. DO NOT move or adjust the jam nuts and lockwire attaching the micro-switch
to the switch plate as that would affect lock engagement verification.
Downspring Remove/Install Tool (P/N 762-157)

Figure 2
4H3 32-30-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Move landing gear selector to the DOWN position.

(7) Manually extend rod so that actuator assembly locks in down, or fully extended, position.
(8) Measure and record distance from end fitting to center of rod end bearing. This measurement
is important for proper installation.
WARNING: IF EITHER THE NOSE GEAR OR ACTUATOR IS DAMAGED OR MISALIGNED,
THIS MEASUREMENT MAY NOT BE VALID. IN EITHER CASE, REPLACE
DAMAGED COMPONENTS, AS REQUIRED, AND USE MALIBU NOSE GEAR
ACTUATOR ALIGNMENT TOOL (P/N 762-137) DURING INSTALLATION.
(9) Remove rod end bearing from actuator rod. Check that rod end bearing locknut is free of
scoring and nicks. Smooth out if necessary.
(10) Remove actuator from engine mount.
NOTE: If the downlimit micro-switch was previously removed from the actuator, install it and tighten
the four screws in a criss-cross pattern, torquing each 13 to 17 in. lbs. Verify lock indication
in the extended position and unlock indication in the retracted position with a multi-meter or
continuity tester.
(1) Manually extend rod so that actuator assembly locks in down, or fully extended, position.
(2) Install rod end bearing in actuator rod. Adjust to same length as recorded during Removal,
above. (See WARNING above.)
(3) Install actuator to engine mount.
NOTE: Pay close attention to the nose gear actuator / engine mount connecting hardware to
ensure the correct locknut is used (i. e. - P/N 404-891, MS 20365-720C). Additionally,
check for proper thread engagement between the bolt and nut by ensuring at least
one thread of the bolt protrudes through the nut per AC 43.13-1, latest revision. In
early airplains which have not complied with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1158 A, ensure
the original AN7-14A bolt has been replaced with a longer bolt, P/N 401-509 (AN7-
15A). Torque to the standard torque value (91-10-00, Chart 6) for a 7/16-20 AN7
bolt/MS 20365 nut.
(4) Install actuator and nose gear downspring rod end bearings in trunnion. Torque per Figure 1.
(5) Check adjustment and alignment of nose gear.
(6) Tighten rod end bearing locknut.
NOTE: If unable to rig nose wheel assembly to proper retracted location with two jam nuts
installed, remove one jam nut. Maximum thread exposure with single nut is 0.28 inch.
(7) Uncap and connect hydraulic line to actuator.
(8) Connect electrical leads to downlimit micro-switch.
(9) Purge air from system. (See 29-10-00, Bleeding Hydraulic System.)
(10) Check that hydraulic pump circuit breaker is on (pressed in), gear control lever is in the DOWN
position, and BATT MASTER switch is in the OFF position.
(11) Set BATT MASTER switch to the ON position. Cycle landing gear up and down at least three
(3) times. Watch that the gear operates smoothly and check that there are no hydraulic leaks.
(12) Service reservoir as required.
(13) Remove airplane from jacks (See 7-10-00).
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Main Gear Actuator Assembly

A. Removal
(1) Place airplane on jacks per 7-10-00.
(a) Place gear control in the UP position.
(b) Allow gear to retract approximately halfway and pull Hydraulic Pump circuit breaker.
NOTE: Have assistants standing by each main gear to catch the gear and prevent them
from falling back to a down and locked position. Block each main gear to hold that
position.
(c) Set BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap hydraulic lines at main gear actuator.
(4) Disconnect actuator from landing gear trunnion by removing washer, bushing, and bolt.
(5) Disconnect upper end of actuator from its mounting bracket by removing bolt and washer.
(6) Remove actuator from airplane.
(7) Remove rod end bearing from actuator rod. Check that rod end bearing lock nut is free of
scoring and nicks. Smooth out if necessary.
(8) Measure and record distance from end fitting to center of rod end bearing. This measurement
is important for proper installation.
(9) Move landing gear selector to the DOWN position.
(10) Manually extend rod so that actuator assembly locks in down, or fully extended position.
B. Installation.
(1) Install rod end bearing on actuator rod.
(2) Bolt upper end of actuator to its support. Torque to 210 -270 in.-lbs. Safety the bolt.
(3) Position gear in order to bolt rod end bearing to main gear trunnion. Torque to 260 -320 in.-lbs.
Safety the bolt.
(4) Check adjustment of rod end bearing. (refer to Main Landing Gear Assembly Adjustment)
(5) Tighten rod end bearing locknut.
(6) Uncap and connect hydraulic lines.
(7) Connect electrical leads to downlimit micro-switch.
(8) Purge system of air. (See 29-10-00, Bleeding Hydraulic System.)
(9) Check that hydraulic pump circuit breaker is set (pressed in), gear control switch is in the
DOWN position and BATT MASTER switch is OFF.
(10) Remove airplane from jacks (See 7-10-00).
4H5 32-30-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Door Actuator Tube Assembly

Figure 3
5. Nose Gear Door Actuator Assembly

(1) Place airplane on jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00)
(d) Set BATT MASTER switch to the OFF position.
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap hydraulic line to nose gear door actuator. Tie capped line to
airframe.
(4) Remove bolt, nut, and two washers holding rod end to nose gear/tube assembly .
(5) Remove clevis bolt, four washers, nut, and bushing from the aft end of actuator.
(6) Remove actuator from airplane.
B. Installation (Refer to Figure 3)
(1) Position actuator in airplane and secure aft end of Actuator with clevis bolt, four washers, nut,
and bushing.
(2) Bolt rod end to nose gear door tube assembly.
(3) Uncap and connect hydraulic line to nose gear door actuator. Purge system of air. (Refer to
29-10-00, Bleeding Hydraulic System)
(5) Remove airplane from jacks. (refer to 7-10-00).
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Sequence Valve (Refer to Figure 4)

The sequence valve is bolted to a bracket on the left lower engine mount tube and is accessed through
the nose gear doors.
NOTE: No field repair of Frisby Aerospace sequence valves installed in PA-46-500TP airplanes is
authorized. Sequence valve overhaul service is available through Piper distributors.
A. Removal
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap hydraulic lines.
(4) Remove two bolts and remove sequence valve from mounting bracket.
Sequence Valve
Figure 4
4H7 32-30-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
CAUTION: WITH SEQUENCE VALVE INSTALLED AND HYDRAULIC LINES CONNECTED,
VERIFY THAT BOTH VALVE AND LINES CLEAR THE NOSE GEAR DOOR SPRING
BY NO LESS THAN 0.25 INCH THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE EXTENSION AND
RETRACTION SEQUENCE. IF NOT, ADJUST SEQUENCE VALVE MOUNTING TO
ITS BRACKET AS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE CLEARANCE.
(1) Position sequence valve at its mounting bracket. Install and tighten two bolts.
(2) Uncap and connect hydraulic lines to sequence valve. Purge system of air. (Refer to 29-10-00,
Bleeding Hydraulic System)
(4) Remove airplane from jacks. (Refer to 7-10-00).
C. Adjustment (PIR-PPS-60033-9, Rev. H.)

(2) Disconnect the nose gear door actuating rods between the nose gear doors and the actuator
torque tube.
(3) Place gear control in the UP position. Allow gear to fully retract.
(4) Adjust the plunger screw outward until the sequence lever depresses the plunger
approximately .125 inch when the nose gear is fully retracted and the nose gear door actuating
torque tube rotates.
(5) Lock the plunger and screw in place and reconnect the nose gear door actuating rods. These
rods shall be long initially and shortened progressively until the nose gear doors seat firmly, but
not distorted when closed.
(6) Cycle the gear as required to ensure proper operation.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Emergency Gear Release Valve (Refer to Figure 5)

The emergency gear release valve is located beneath floor boards under copilot’s seat. For access,
remove seat, carpet, access panel, and center floorboard.
NOTE: No field repair of Frisby Aerospace emergency gear release valves installed in PA-46-500TP
airplanes is authorized. Emergency gear release valve overhaul service is available through
Piper distributors.
A. Removal
(3) Remove and quickly cap hydraulic lines.
(4) Loosen and remove bulkhead fitting nuts from the aft side of the bulkhead.
(5) Disconnect yoke from actuating rod.
(6) Remove valve from aircraft.
B. Installation
(1) Attach actuating rod to yoke.
(2) Position valve at bulkhead and install and tighten bulkhead fitting nuts from aft side of
bulkhead.
(3) Uncap and connect hydraulic lines. Purge system of air. (Refer to 29-10-00, Bleeding Hydraulic
System.)
(4) Pull the hydraulic pump circuit breaker out.
(5) Release the guard and pull gear free fall knob out.
(6) Verify that the landing gear falls to the down and locked position.
NOTE: The main gear may not fall completely into the locked position during ground free fall
test. Extend the gear using a side force at the center line of axle that does not exceed
nine (9) pounds. The gear should then lock.
(8) Push in the free fall knob. Position the guard.
(9) Push the hydraulic pump circuit breaker in.
(10) Cycle gear up and down, one time to verify normal operations.
(13) Install access panel and floorboard. Secure with screws. Replace carpet and seat.
4H9 32-30-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F.S. 102550 S
132.00
BULKHEAD
FITTINGS
YOKE
DN
UP
ACTUATING ROD
EMERGENCY
GEAR RELEASE
VALVE
F.S.
124.125
Effectivity
4697159 & up, and
Emergency Gear Release Valve 4697001 thru 4697158 with
Figure 5 Kit No. 767-364 installed
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4H11 32-30-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 32-30-00 4H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES
1. Nose Wheel Assembly

A. Removal and Disassembly (Refer to Figure 1)
(1) Jack the airplane enough to raise the nose wheel clear of the ground. (Refer to Jacking, 7-10-
00)
(2) To remove the nose wheel, first remove the cotter pin and washer that secures the safety clevis
pin of the wheel nut. Next remove the clevis pin and wheel nut. Then slide the wheel from the
axle.
(3) The wheel halves may be separated by first deflating the tire. With the tire sufficiently deflated,
remove the wheel through bolts. Pull the wheel halves from the tire by removing the wheel half
opposite the valve stem first and then removing the other half.
(4) The wheel bearing assemblies may be removed from each wheel half by first removing the
snap rings that secure the grease seal retainers, and then the retainers, grease seals and
bearing cones. The bearing cups should be removed by tapping out evenly from the inside.
B. Assembly and Installation (Refer to Figure 1)
CAUTION: DO NOT USE POWER TOOLS TO INSTALL NUTS AND BOLTS
(1) Ascertain that the bearing cup for each wheel is properly installed. Install the tire with tube on
the wheel half with the valve stem hole, install a rubber grommet on the stem at the wheel half
joint.
(2) Then join the two wheel halves and install the through bolts with the washers and nuts to the
valve stem side. On the 40-77G wheel apply anti seize compound AMS-2518 (Piper Part
Number 279-237) on bearing surfaces of bolts, washers, nuts and threads.
Nose Wheel Assembly

Figure 1
4H13 32-40-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Restrain the bolt head and tighten (draw up) the nut in a criss-cross pattern to about 20 inch-
pounds.
(4) The tie bolts should be set evenly to about half the final torque value (45 - 50 inch-pounds) on
each nut prior to setting the final torque.
(5) Final torque to value on the placard (90 inch pounds).
(6) Lubricate the bearing cones and install the cones, grease seals, felt rings and seal retainer
rings. Secure with snap rings.
(7) Slide the wheel on the axle. While rotating the wheel, tighten the axle nut to allow no side play,
yet to allow wheel to rotate freely. Rotate the axle nut to align the nearest slot with the cotter
pin hole. Install the cotter pin.
C. Inspection
(1) General
(a) Visually check all parts for cracks, distortion, defects, and excess wear.
(b) Check tie bolts for looseness or failure.
(c) Verify torque on tie bolts as required by the placard on the wheel.
(d) Check internal diameter of felt grease seals. Replace the felt grease seal if surface is hard
or gritty.
(e) Check tire for cuts, internal bruises, and deterioration.
(f) Check bearing cones and cups for wear and pitting, then lubricate.
(g) Replace any wheel casting having visible cracks.
(2) 100 hour
Check nose wheel bolts and nuts for looseness and proper torque. Retorque bolts to value
indicated by placard on wheel.
2. Main Wheel Assembly
A. Removal and Disassembly (Refer to Figure 2)
(1) Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, 7-10-00)
(2) To remove the main wheel, remove the cap bolts that join the brake cylinder housing and the
lining back plate assemblies. Remove the back plate from between brake disc and wheel.
(3) Remove the dust cover, the cotter pin and flat head pin that safeties the wheel nut, and the
wheel nut. Slide the wheel from the axle.
(4) The wheel halves may be separated by first deflating the tire. With the tire sufficiently deflated,
remove the wheel through bolts. Pull the wheel halves from the tire by removing the inner half
from the tire first, and then the outer half.
(5) The wheel bearing assemblies may be removed from each wheel half by first removing the
retainer snap rings that secure the grease seal retainers, and then the retainers, grease seals
and bearing cone. The bearing cups should not be removed except for replacement. Refer to
Repair of Nose and Main Wheel Assemblies for bearing cup replacement instructions.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Assembly and Installation (Refer to Figure 2)

(1) Ascertain that the bearing cup for each wheel is properly installed. Install the tire with tube and
wheel half with the valve stem hole. Ascertain that the index mark is aligned with the index
mark on the tire to ensure proper tire, tube and wheel balance. Join the two wheel halves and
position the brake disc in the inner wheel half. Install the through bolts with nuts on the valve
stem side. Torque the wheel nuts to 150 inch-pounds and inflate the tire.
(2) Lubricate the bearing cones and install the cones, grease seals and seal retainer rings. Secure
retainer with snap ring.
(3) Slide the wheel on the axle. While rotating the wheel, tighten the axle nut to allow no side play,
yet to allow wheel to rotate freely. Rotate the axle nut to align the nearest slot with the cotter
pin hole. Install the cotter pin.
(4) Position the brake lining back plates between the wheel and brake disc and the brake cylinder
on the torque plate. Insert the spacer blocks between the back plates and cylinder, and install
the four bolts to secure the assembly. If the brake was disconnected, reconnect the line and
bleed the brakes.
Main Wheel Assembly

Figure 2
4H15 32-40-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Inspection
(1) Visually check all parts for cracks, distortion. defects, and excess wear.
(2) Check tie bolts for looseness or failure.
(3) Check internal diameter of felt grease seals. Replace the felt grease seal if surface is hard or
gritty.
(4) Check tire for cuts, internal bruises, and deterioration.
(5) Check bearing cones and cups for wear and pitting, then lubricate.
(6) Replace any wheel casting having visible cracks.
(7) Inspect brake disc for cracks. excessive wear or scoring, rust, corrosion, and warpage.
(8) Remove rust and blend out nicks, using fine 400 grit sandpaper.
(9) Replace disc if cracked or when disc is worn below .450 in. (Refer to Wheel Brake Assembly -
Cleaning, Inspection and Repair, below)
3. Nose and Main Wheel Assembly Repairs
Repairs are limited to blending out small nicks, scratches, gouges and areas of slight corrosion, plus the
replacement of parts which are cracked or badly corroded.
NOTE: Remove corrosion and blend out small nicks, using fine 400 grit sandpaper.
Wheels may also be repainted if the parts have been repaired and thoroughly cleaned. Paint exposed
areas with one coat zinc chromate primer and one coat of aluminum lacquer.
NOTE: Never paint working surfaces of the bearing cups.
4. Bearing Cup
A. Removal
(1) Insert wheel half into boiling water for 15 minutes or place in an oven not exceeding 250° F
(121° C) for 15 minutes.
(2) Remove from source of heat and invert wheel half. If the cup does not drop out, tap the cup
evenly from the axle bore with a fiber drift pin or suitable arbor press.
B. Installation
(1) To replace a new cup, apply one coat of zinc chromate primer to wheel half bearing bore.
(2) Insert wheel half into boiling water for 15 minutes or place in an oven not exceeding 250° F
(121° C) for 15 minutes. Chill new bearing cup in dry ice for a minimum of 15 minutes.
(3) Remove wheel half from source of heat and bearing cup from dry ice. Install the chilled bearing
cup into the bearing bore of the heated wheel half. Tap gently to seat evenly in place, using a
fiber drift pin or suitable arbor press.
5. Wheel Brake Assembly
A. Removal and Disassembly (Refer to Figures 3 and 4)
To remove the brake assembly:
(1) Disconnect the brake line from the brake cylinder at the tube fitting.
(2) Remove the cap bolts that join the brake cylinder housing and the lining back plate assembly.
Remove the back plate from between the brake disc and wheel.
(3) Slide the brake cylinder housing from the torque plate.
(4) Remove the pressure plate by sliding it off the anchor bolts of the housing.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove piston(s) by injecting low air pressure in the cylinder fluid inlet and forcing the piston
from the housing.
(6) Check anchor bolt for wear.
(a) To remove anchor bolt:
1 Position cylinder assembly on a holding fixture. (Refer to Figure 4, Step A).
2 Use a suitable arbor press to remove the anchor bolt from the cylinder body.
(b) To install anchor bolt:
1 Support anchor bolt in a holding fixture. (Refer to Figure 4, Step B)
2 Align cylinder body over anchor bolt. (Refer to Figure 4, Step C)
3 Use a suitable arbor press and apply pressure on the spot face directly over the
anchor bolt hole. (Refer to Figure 4, Step D)
B. Assembly and Installation (Refer to Figure 3.)
(1) Lubricate the piston O-ring(s) with fluid MIL-H-5606 and install on piston(s). Slide the piston(s)
in cylinder housing until flush with surface of housing.
(2) Slide the lining pressure plate onto the anchor bolts of the housing.
(3) Slide the cylinder housing assembly on the torque plate of the gear.
(4) Position the lining back plate between the wheel and brake disc. Install the bolts and torque to
80 - 90 inch-pounds to secure the assembly.
(5) Connect the brake line to the brake cylinder housing.
(6) Bleed the brake system as described in Brake Bleeding Procedure, later in this section.
Wheel Brake Assembly

Figure 3
4H17 32-40-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Anchor Bolt, Removal and Installation

Figure 4
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair (Refer to

Figure 3):
(1) Clean the assembly with a suitable
solvent and dry thoroughly.
(2) Check the wall of the cylinder housing
and piston for scratches, burrs,
corrosion, etc, that may damage O-
rings. These may be hand polished out
with 600 grit emory paper.
(3) Check the general condition of the brake
bleeder screw and lines.
(4) Check the brake disc for wear, grooves,
scratches, or pits. The minimum disc
thickness of Disc 164-07800 used on
Wheel Assembly 40-142 is .450. A
single groove or isolated grooves up to
.030 of an inch deep would not
necessitate replacement, but a grooving Brake Lining Wear Limits
of the entire surface would reduce lining Figure 5
life and would necessitate replacement of the disc. Should it be necessary to remove the wheel
disc, refer to Main Wheel Assy., Removal and Disassembly, above.
(5) To remove the snap-on type lining used on the brake assemblies may be by prying loose with a
screwdriver or a thin flat wedge. Install the snap-on type lining by positioning onto the pins and
applying pressure to snap into position.
(6) If a powdery rust appears on the brake disc, one or two taxi braking applications should wipe
the disc clear. Rust allowed to progress beyond this point may require removal of the disc from
the wheel assembly to properly clean both faces. Wire brushing followed by sanding with 220
grit sandpaper can restore the braking surfaces for continued use.
(7) Replace linings when worn below 0.100 inch or worn unevenly. (See Figure 5.)
NOTE: No adjustment of brake lining clearance is necessary as they are self-adjusting.

Inspection of the lining is necessary, and it may be inspected visually while installed
on the airplane. The linings are metallic and attached with torque pins. The holes for
the pins are only visible if the linings are worn beyond limits.
NOTE: Condition replacement brake linings by performing two consecutive full stops from 30
to 35 mph. Do not allow the brake discs to cool substantially between stops. Allow
brakes to cool 10 to 15 minutes. Apply brakes and check holding at high power. If
brakes hold, conditioning is complete. If not, allow to cool completely and repeat
conditioning procedure. Conditioning will wear off any high spots and at the same time
generate sufficient heat to glaze the surface of the metallic linings. Once the linings
are glazed, they will provide many hours of maintenance free service.
4H19 32-40-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly

Figure 6
6. Toe Brake Cylinder Assembly

A. Removal (Figure 6)
WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN AIRPLANE IS PARKED ON LEVEL GROUND WITH WHEELS
CHOCKED.
(1) Place chocks under main and nose wheels.
(2) Release parking brake.
(3) Disconnect and quickly cap upper and lower hydraulic lines from cylinder assembly being
removed.
(4) Disconnect clevis from rudder pedal by removing cotter pin and pin.
NOTE: The rod and ring subassembly may be removed at this time without fur ther
disassembly of the toe brake assembly. Refer to Steps B (1) and (2) for rod and ring
removal instructions and steps B (9) and (10) for installation. (See also the CAUTION
in paragraph B.)
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) (Inboard toe brake assemblies only.) Remove nut, bolt, and washer holding nose wheel
steering rod assembly to pedal.
(6) Remove the two nuts, bolts, and washers holding cylinder assembly to rudder bar.
(7) Remove toe brake and cylinder assembly from airplane.
B. Disassembly, Repair, and Installation
(1) Remove end fitting from cylinder housing.
(2) Slide entire rod and ring assembly with attached piston out of cylinder housing.
NOTE: Repairs to the rod and ring assembly and piston are limited to polishing small
scratches and burrs, and replacement of parts.
(3) Clean cylinder bore, rod and ring assembly, and piston with dry-type solvent.
(4) To replace any of the component parts shown in the parts catalog, remove retaining ring. All
parts will slide off rod and ring assembly.
(5) Soak end fitting O-rings (one internal, one external) and piston O-ring in hydraulic fluid. Coat
with fluid compatible gel.
(6) Install power spring on rod and ring assembly.
(7) Insert rod and ring sub-assembly with spring through end fitting.
(8) Insert, in order: washer seal, piston, piston spring, and bushing. Snap retaining ring into
groove.
CAUTION: PISTON MUST BE INSERTED INTO CYLINDER HOUSING IN SUCH A WAY

THAT ONLY PISTON O-RING CONTACTS THE CYLINDER INNER SURFACE.
OTHERWISE, THE INNER SURFACE MAY BECOME SCRATCHED.
(9) Carefully insert piston and rod and ring assembly into cylinder housing.
(10) Tighten end fitting to a torque of 13-17 inch-lbs.
(11) Connect cylinder assembly to rudder bar with two nuts, bolts, and washers.
(12) (Inboard toe brake assemblies only.) Connect pedal to nose wheel steering rod assembly.
(13) Connect clevis to rudder pedal by inserting pin, washer, and cotter pin.
(14) Uncap and connect upper and lower hydraulic lines to cylinder assembly.
(15) Bleed brakes. (See Brake Bleeding Procedure, later in this section.)
(16) Set parking brakes.
(17) Remove chocks from wheels before moving airplane.
7. Brake Bleeding Procedure (Refer to Figure 7) (PIR-PPS50037-1, Rev A)
A. (Gravity)
(1) Depress the Co-pilot left toe brake to a firm pedal and hold.
(2) Open the left bleed port to bleed out air and fluid until brake pedal almost bottoms out.
Immediately close bleed port. Release brake pedal to neutral
(3) Repeat the process until all air bubbles have escaped from both left brake bleed ports.
NOTE: Fluid level in the reservoir must be maintained to prevent air from entering the line.
(4) Follow the procedure with the pilot’s left toe brake.
(5) Follow the procedure with the co-pilot’s right toe brake.
(6) Follow the procedure with the pilot’s right toe brake.
(7) Check per Brake System Leak Check
4H21 32-40-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Brake System Installation

Figure 7
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. (Pressure)
(1) Place a small clear plastic hose on the vent tube of the brake reservoir and place a second
small clear plastic hose on the bleeder fitting on one main landing gear. Place the open ends of
these hoses in a suitable container to collect the fluid overflow. Open the bleeder fitting one or
two turns.
(2) On the other main gear, slide the hose of the pressure unit over the bleeder fitting, then open
the fitting one or two turns and pressure fill the brake system with MIL-H-5606 fluid.
(3) With fluid continually flowing through the brake system, SLOWLY and together actuate the
pedals several times.
NOTE: By watching the fluid pass through the plastic hose at the fluid reservoir and the
bleeder fitting on the gear being bled, it can be determined whether any air is left in
the system. If air bubbles are evident, filling of the system shall be continued until all
the air is out of the system and a steady flow of fluid is obtained. Should the toe
brakes remain spongy, it may be necessary to repeat the brake bleeding procedure.
(4) Close the open bleeder fitting on the gear being bled. Close the open bleeder fitting to which
the pressure hose is attached; then close the pressure unit and remove the hoses from the
bleeder fittings and from the reservoir vent. Check the brakes for proper pedal pressure.
Replace the caps over the bleeder fittings.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove any trapped air in the top of the wheel brake unit by
applying pressure to the system with the toe brakes and slowly opening the bleeder
and releasing the hand lever.
(5) Repeat this procedure, if necessary, on the other gear.
(6) Drain excess fluid from the reservoir to fluid level line with a syringe.
C. Brake Bleeding After a Unit Has Been Changed
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW PRESSURE TO BLEED OFF BEFORE CLOSING BLEEDERS, FOR
THIS WILL ALLOW AIR TO ENTER THE SYSTEM. REPEAT THE PUMPING AND
BLEEDING APPROXIMATELY 10 OR MORE TIMES OR UNTIL ALL THE AIR IS
RELEASED FROM THE SYSTEM. DURING ALL BLEEDING, FLUID LEVEL OF THE
RESERVOIR MUST BE MAINTAINED.
(1) Actuate the toe brakes until some pressure builds up in the system. At this time crack the
attaching B nuts at any of the hose connections of the replaced unit. Most of the brake pedals’
spongy feeling should be displaced by this action. Tighten B nut.
(2) Actuate the toe brake/ master cylinder on the side on which the unit has been replaced. Bleed
fluid through the wheel brake assembly by pumping pressure and cracking bleeder until the
pressure drops.
8. Brake System Leak Check
A. Push on the toe brakes for a good firm pressure and lock the parking brake mechanism.
B. Allow the system to stand for approximately 10 minutes, then, by pushing the toe brakes, they
should not be able to be pushed forward further then the original set.
C. If the toe brakes can be pushed forward and feel spongy, a leak is present at some point in the
system.
D. This leak may appear at any one of the connections throughout the system or internally in the toe
brake master cylinder or wheel brake assemblies.
4H23 32-40-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Parking Brake Valve (Refer to Figure 8)

A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the parking brake cable from the valve actuating arm.
(2) Disconnect the fluid lines from the valve.
(3) Remove the screws that attach the valve to its mounting bracket.
(4) Place a protective material over the line openings to prevent contamination of the system.
B. Installation
(1) Attach the valve to the bulkhead mounting bracket with screws.
(2) Connect the fluid lines to the valve.
(3) Connect the control cable to the valve lever.
C. Disassembly
(1) Remove the two fittings from the outside of the valve body. A valve spring is held in place by
the fittings. Use caution not to loosen these when removing the fittings.
(2) From the valve body, remove the valve spring and valve.
(3) To remove the valve cam, remove the nut, washer, bushing and spring. Pull the cam from the
valve body.
D. Assembly
(1) Install O-rings on valve cam.
(2) Lubricate O-rings with fluid (MIL-H-5606), insert cam into valve body and secure with spring,
bushings, washer and self-locking nut.
(3) Install O-ring on the valve, insert valve in hole of out port, install valve spring and secure with
outlet fitting.
E. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair
(1) Clean the valve parts with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly.
(2) Inspect valve and seat surfaces of valve body for excessive wear and corrosion.
(3) Inspect the cam assembly for burrs, scratches, excess wear, loose operating lever, etc.
(4) Check general condition of valves and springs.
(5) Repair to the valve is largely limited to smoothing burred or scratched surfaces and replacing
O-rings.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Parking Brake Valve Assembly

Figure 8
4I1 32-40-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4I3 32-40-00 PAGE 15

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 32-40-00 4I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STEERING
The nose gear is steered by means of the rudder pedals. Movement of the pedals is transmitted to the
steering arm by two steering pushrods, a steering bellcrank and a steering bungee. Bellows are installed
on the forward portion of the steering pushrods where they pass through the forward pressure bulkhead.
NOTE: After removal and installation of any of the following components, see 32-20-00, Nose Gear
Assembly - Adjustment and 32-20-00, Nose Gear Assembly - Alignment.
1. Steering Pushrod
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the aft end of the pushrod from the arm on the rudder bar.
(2) Disconnect the forward end of the pushrod from the steering bellcrank.
(3) Loosen the forward end of the bellows and slip the pushrod through the bellows. The rod end
on the forward end of the bellows will have to be removed to allow the rod to pass through the
opening in the bellows.
B. Installation
(1) Set the length of the steering pushrods to an initial length of 11.90 inches between the centers
of the bolt holes in the rod end bearings. Ensure that the rod ends are positioned 90° to each
other. Loosen the forward jam nut 1/2 turn. Remove the rod end/jam nut without turning the jam
nut on the rod end shaft any more.
(2) Insert the steering rod assembly into the aft end of the bellows. Push the rod through the
sleeve in the forward end of the bellows.
(3) Reinstall the rod end on the end of the pushrod. Then tighten the rod end 1/2 turn.
(4) Attach the forward end of the steering rod to the steering bellcrank.
(5) Attach the aft end of the steering rod to the arm on the rudder bar.
(6) Locate the forward end of the bellows immediately aft of the jam nut on the forward rod end
and tighten the hose clamp on the forward end of the bellows.
2. Steering Bellcrank
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the forward ends of both steering pushrods from the bellcrank.
(2) Disconnect the aft end of the bungee from the left side of the bellcrank.
(3) Cut the safety wire and remove the bolt that secures the steering bellcrank to the outer support
plate.
(4) Remove the bellcrank.
B. Installation (See Figure 1, View C)
(1) Ensure that two bushings and spacer are in place in the steering bellcrank.
(2) Place washer over bolt and slide bolt into steering bellcrank.
(3) Place washers over bolt. Insert bolt in support plates, insuring that spacer is in place between
inner and outer support plate. Torque bolt and safety bolt to clip with MS20995-C41 safety wire.
(4) Connect the aft end of the steering bungee to the left side of the steering bellcrank.
(5) Connect the forward ends of both steering pushrods to the bellcrank.
4I5 32-50-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Bungee Assembly
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect forward end of bungee from left-hand side of steering arm.
(2) Disconnect aft end of bungee from left-hand side of steering bellcrank.
(3) Remove bungee.
B. Installation
(1) Place bungee in position.
(2) Connect aft end of bungee to left-hand side of steering bellcrank.
(3) Connect forward end of bungee to steering arm. The thinner washer goes under the bolt head,
the thicker washer under the nut.
4. Steering Pushrod Bellows
A. Removal
(1) Loosen hose clamps on forward end of bellows.
(2) Disconnect steering pushrod from steering bellcrank. Remove rod end bearing and jamnut
from forward end of steering pushrod. Slide pushrod aft.
(3) Remove screws from fire shield. (The fire shield is the plate on the aft side of the pressure
bulkhead which helps to secure the large end of the bellows to the pressure bulkhead.)
(4) Slide fire shield, packing ring/housing/spacer assembly and plate aft on steering rod tube.
(5) Push bellows forward out of cutout in pressure bulkhead.
(6) Remove bellows from steering rod.
B. Installation
(1) Place bellows over forward end of steering pushrod.
(2) Push large end of bellows through cutout in pressure bulkhead.
(3) Slide plate, packing ring/housing/spacer assembly and fire shield forward on steering rod tube.
(4) Line up holes in pressure bulkhead, plate and fire shield; install screws, washers and nuts.
NOTE: Install all screws, except the uppermost one, with their shanks pointing aft. The
uppermost screw’s shank should point forward.
(5) Install steering pushrod per instructions in this chapter.
(6) Reconnect steering rod to steering bellcrank.
(7) Tighten hose clamp on forward end of bellows.
NOTE: With nose landing gear pointing straight ahead, the forward end of the bellows should
be approximately even with the forward end of the steering rod tube.
5. Steering Arm
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the forward end of the bungee from the left-hand side of the steering arm.
(2) Remove the nut and washer that secures the steering arm to the mount plate.
(3) Lift the steering arm off of the bolt.
B. Installation
(1) Position the steering arm on the bolt, ensuring that a washer is installed above and below the
spacer which goes through the bushing in the steering arm. Install and torque nut.
(2) Attach forward end of bungee to left side of steering arm.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-50-00 4I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STA
60.50 102590 W
(REF)
STA
100.00
(REF)
ENGINE MOUNT
STA
78.00
(REF)
BUNGEE (SEE NOTE)
A A
ACTUATOR BELLCRANK
(SEE VIEW C)
STEERING ARM
MOUNT PLATE MOUNT PLATE

DOWN SPRING
LOCKING
VlEW B-B ASSY
STEERING
HORN NOTE: INSTALL BUNGEE BETWEEN STEERING
PADS
B B ARM AND BELLCRANK, WITH BELLCRANK IN
NEUTRAL POSITION (I.E. - NO LOAD ON SPRINGS).
ADJUST LENGTH AS REQUIRED FOR STRAIGHT
AHEAD NOSE WHEEL ALIGNMENT.
TIGHTEN JAM NUTS.
STEERING ARM
VlEW A-A
WASHERS
(NAS1149F0863P AND
NAS1149F0832P,
0.0˚ TO 0.5˚ THREE REQUIRED.)
VIEW C
TORQUE TO THE LOWER END OF THE
RANGE LISTED IN 91-10-00, CHART 2.
THE BELLCRANK VERTICAL PLAY IS NOT
TO EXCEED 0.007 INCH, MEASURED AT BOLT.
Steering
Figure 1
4I7 32-50-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 32-50-00 4I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POSITION AND WARNING
1. Landing Gear Warning Systems Troubleshooting

WARNING: ALWAYS PLACE THE AIRPLANE ON JACKS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
TROUBLESHOOTING OF THE GEAR. (SEE 7-10-00.)
See Chart 1.
TROUBLESHOOTING LANDING GEAR WARNING SYSTEMS
Red gear unsafe light out Indicator lamp burned Replace lamp.
while gear is in transit. out.
Indicator light ground Check ground circuit.
incomplete.
Indicator light circuit Check wiring.
wire broken.
Indicator light circuit Reset circuit breaker
breaker open. and determine cause for
open circuit breaker.
Red gear unsafe light on One or more up limit Isolate and replace
though gear has retracted. switches failed. switch.
Nose gear up limit Check gear up adjustment
switch out of adjustment. and readjust up limit
switch.
Main gear not retracting Check gear up adjustment.
far enough to actuate
switch.
Red gear unsafe light on One or more down limit Isolate and replace switch.
though gear is down switches failed.
and locked.
Nose gear down limit Readjust down limit switch.
switch out of adjustment.
Main gear down limit switch Readjust down limit switch.
out of adjustment.
NOTE: The out of adjustment or failed switch may be determined by noting which down light is not lit.
Red gear unsafe light Light circuit wire loose. Check wiring.
operates on and off
after gear has retracted. Hydraulic system Refer to Chapter 29 and
losing pressure. Section 32-30-00, Landing
Gear Extension and
Retraction Functional Test.
Gear up switch out of Check gear up adjustment
adjustment. and then
switch adjustment.
4I9 32-60-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING MAIN LANDING GEAR WARNING SYSTEMS
Red gear unsafe light out Lamp burned out. Replace lamp.
and one green gear
down light out though Gear down limit switch Replace switch.
gear is down and locked. failed.
NOTE: Ascertain navigation lights are off (daytime).
Light circuit wire Check wiring.
broken.
Red gear unsafe light and Indicator lights circuit Reset circuit breaker
all green lights out. breaker open. and determine cause for
open circuit breaker.
NOTE: Ascertain navigation lights are off (daytime).
Light circuit wire Check wiring.
broken.
Red gear unsafe light and Landing gear selector Reset circuit breaker
horn fail to operate circuit breaker open. and determine cause
when power is decreased for open circuit breaker.
and landing gear is retracted.
* Micro switch at power lever Adjust micro switch.
out of adjustment.
* Micro switch at power lever Replace switch.
failed.
Warning horn and light Check wiring.
circuit wire broken.
Red gear unsafe light and horn Gear selector handle in up Place handle in down
fail to stop when power lever is position. position.
closed and gear has extended.
(Gear extended through the use
of the emergency gear release.)
Red gear unsafe light and horn Warning light and horn circuit Check wiring.
fail to operate when selector wire broken.
switch is moved to up position
with gear extended and power
lever not full forward. *
* Instructions linking position of the power lever (and resulting power lever micro switch state) to the
gear warning light and horn only apply to aircraft S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118,
and 4697125 as originally delivered.
In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 with Piper Kit No. 766-697 installed
and in S/N’s 4697115, 4697117, 4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 & up, the gear up / power
reduced warning system has been modified. The micro switch in the power lever quadrant has been
removed and an oil pressure switch has been added to the engine. In these aircraft, if the red gear
unsafe light and horn fail to operate when the landing gear is up and engine power is decreased below
275 ft-lbs.± 75, then the oil pressure switch may have failed.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 32-60-00 4I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING MAIN LANDING GEAR WARNING SYSTEMS
Above condition on ground. Defective safety (squat) switch. Replace switch.
Hydraulic pump shuts off, but Gear not fully retracted. Check gear retraction
red gear unsafe light remains on. adjustments.
Gear not contacting up Check gear up switches.
micro switches.
Green gear down lights Failed instrument panel Replace switch.
dim though position light control switch.
Iight switch is off. (Lights grounding
and gear is down and through dimming
locked. resistor instead of instrument
panel light control.)
Green gear down light Gear down limit switch Replace switch.
fails to go out with failed.
gear in transit or retracted.
Green gear down lights Green light ground Replace resistor.
will go out and not dimming resistor
dim when position light open.
switch is turned on though gear
is down and locked.
Green gear down lights Micro switch out of Adjust micro switch.
blink momentarily before adjustment.
the down lock is engaged
on roller.
4I11 32-60-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Nose Gear
WARNING: ALL ADJUSTMENTS OF LIMIT SWITCHES SHOULD BE MADE WITH THE AIRPLANE
ON JACKS.
A. Up Limit Switch (Refer to Figure 1)
CAUTION: BEFORE ADJUSTING ANY UP LIMIT SWITCH, VERIFY LANDING GEAR AND
DOORS ARE INSTALLED AND ADJUSTED CORRECTLY AND THAT LANDING
GEAR AND DOORS ARE RETRACTING COMPLETELY.
The nose gear up limit switch is located on the right-hand side of the wheel well opening. The right-
hand nose wheel door actuates this switch.
This switch is adjusted as required by backing off the two nuts on the switch plunger bushing.
B. Down Limit Switch
The nose gear down limit switch is mounted on the nose gear locking actuator. The switch is
activated when the cylinder is extended and locked.
No adjustment of this switch is required.
3. Main Gear
WARNING: ALL ADJUSTMENTS OF LIMIT SWITCHES SHOULD BE MADE WITH THE AIRPLANE
ON JACKS.
A. Up Limit Switch (Refer to Figure 2)
CAUTION: BEFORE ADJUSTING ANY UP LIMIT SWITCH, VERIFY LANDING GEAR AND
DOORS ARE INSTALLED AND ADJUSTED CORRECTLY, AND RETRACTING
COMPLETELY.
A main gear up limit switch is located in each wing wheel well, beneath the locking actuator. These
switches are adjusted as required by backing off the two nuts on the switch plunger bushing. An
initial setting of 0.20 to 0.22 inches above the flush line of the lower wing skin is recommended.
B. Down Limit Switch
The main gear down limit switches are mounted in each main gear locking actuator. The switch is
activated when the cylinder is extended and locked.
No adjustment of these switches is required.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 32-60-00 4I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Nose Gear Up Switch

Figure 1
Main Gear Up Switch

Figure 2
4I13 32-60-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Adjustment of Main Gear Squat Switch

Figure 3
4. Landing Gear Safety Switch (Squat Switch) Adjustment

The Malibu Meridian employs two squat switches: one on the left main gear and one on the nose gear.
A. The main landing gear safety switch is located on the left main gear housing (Refer to Figure 3). It is
adjusted to actuate when the main gear is extended 7.70 to 8.00 inches - i.e. - switch will be open at
7.70 inches and closed at 8.00 inches.
(1) Jack the airplane. (refer to 7-10-00)
(2) Compress the strut until 7.75 inches is obtained between the top of the gear fork and the
bottom of the gear housing. Hold the gear at this measurement.
(3) Adjust the switch so that it actuates at this point. Secure the switch with lockwire.
(4) Extend and then compress the strut to ascertain that the switch will actuate within the last
quarter of an inch of oleo extension.
B. The nose landing gear safety switch is located on the right side of the nose gear strut (See Figure 4).
It is adjusted to de-actuate (plunger out) when the nose gear is compressed .06 to .12 inch from the
fully extended position. i.e. - with the strut fully extended, switch is actuated (plunger in).
(1) Jack the airplane. (refer to 7-10-00)
(2) Compress the strut .06 inches (measure between the top of the gear fork and the bottom of the
gear housing). Hold the gear at this measurement.
(3) Adjust the switch so that it de-actuates at this point. Secure the switch jamnuts with lockwire.
(4) Extend and then compress the strut to ascertain that the switch will de-actuate within the first
eighth of an inch of oleo compression.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 32-60-00 4I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DE-ACTUATE
BETWEEN
.06 TO .12 INCH A
INITIAL
COMPRESSION
SWITCH
ASSY.
STRIKER
A
VIEW A-A
102605 A
Adjustment of Nose Gear Squat Switch

Figure 4
4I15 32-60-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Landing Gear Up / Power Reduced Warning Switch

In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118, and 4697125 after FIKI retrofit (i.e. - with Piper Kit
No. 766-697 installed) and in S/N’s 4697115, 4697117, 4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 & up:
The gear up / power reduced warning system has been modified. The micro switch in the power lever
quadrant has been removed and an oil pressure switch added to the engine torque transducer manifold
on the propeller reduction gearbox. No adjustment is necessary.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 32-60-00 4I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4I17 32-60-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 32-60-00 4I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
33
LIGHTS
4J1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
33-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
33-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
33-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33 - LIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 33-10-00 1 4J7

Dimmer Control Modules 1 4J7
Removal 1 4J7
Installation 1 4J7
Instrument Panel Post Lights 1 4J7
Lamp Replacement 1 4J7
Removal 2 4J8
Installation 2 4J8
Annunciator Panel 2 4J8
Meggitt EFIS 2 4J8
Avidyne EFIS 2 4J8
Standby-Map Light Lamp Replacement 2 4J8
Dimming Rheostats 2 4J8
Removal 2 4J8
Installation 2 4J8
Rocker Switch Lamp Replacement 3 4J9
Overhead Switch Panel 3 4J9
Electroluminescent Lighting 3 4J9
Fixed Oxygen Cylinder Cabinet Lighting 3 4J9
Post-Installation Set-up 4 4J10
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 33-20-00 1 4J13

Courtesy Lighting 1 4J13
Description 1 4J13
Courtesy Light Lamp Replacement 1 4J13
Courtesy Lighting Timer 1 4J13
Removal 1 4J13
Installation 1 4J13
Eyeball Spotlights (Reading Lamps) 1 4J13
Removal 1 4J13
Installation 1 4J13
Side Light Strips 1 4J13
EXTERIOR 33-40-00 1 4J15

Strobe Lights 1 4J15
Description 1 4J15
Strobe Xenon Tubes and Power Supply - General Service Information 1 4J15
Strobe / Position Lamp Replacement 2 4J16
Strobe Power Supply Replacement 3 4J17
Taxi / Pulse (Recognition) Lights 4 4J18
Landing Light Replacement 5 4J19
Wing Inspection (Ice) Light 5 4J19

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
All interior lighting is 24 Vdc, except for the electroluminescent lighting. The circuit breaker panels and
some placards are electroluminescent, using an inverter to convert 24 Vdc input to 115 Vac 400 Hz.
Cockpit lighting consists of instrument panel post lights which are controlled by a solid state dimmer
control unit. Radio lighting is controlled separately and in any case consists of integral lighting normally
provided in radio equipment. Switches are back lighted for positive identification and visibility. An
overhead light is located in the cockpit ceiling above each of the two front seats providing map lights and
standby panel lighting for each crew member. These standby/ map lights are controlled by individual
dimmer rheostats, located in the center of the overhead switch panel. The electroluminescent lighting
receives its power from the PANEL LIGHTS circuit breaker via the panel lights dimmer switch, taper
block TB1 and the electroluminescent panel inverter.
There are four dimmer control modules. Each is solid state and powered through its respective circuit
breaker. The panel and switch lights dimmer modules are mounted in the pilot’s fwd circuit breaker panel
below the 3 amp INSTR PANEL LIGHTS circuit breaker which feeds them. The avionics dimmer is
mounted in the co-pilot’s fwd circuit breaker panel below the 5 amp AVIONICS DIMMING circuit breaker
which feeds it. The EFIS displays and the Garmin GNS-430/-530 displays are dimmed by the panel
LCD’s dimmer mounted just aft of the co-pilot’s circuit breaker panels and also fed by the 5 amp
AVIONICS DIMMING circuit breaker. Dimmer control switches in the overheard switch panel control
these functions.
The annunciator and avionics day/night relays are mounted under cover plates in the cabin floor
between FS 108.00 and 117.00. The annunciator relay is at the pilot’s feet and the avionics relay is at the
co-pilot’s feet. Both are fed by the 5 amp TIE BUS circuit breaker and controlled by the day/night switch
in the overhead switch panel.
Employ conventional troubleshooting methods: panel lights full bright, first replacing offending individual
lamps. If not successful measure socket voltage and repair as required. If all lamps are “OUT” check
power from bus, through circuit breaker, harness, dimmer control, and dimmer output. Replace or repair
as required.
NOTE: Refer to 91-33-10, 91-33-20, and 91-33-40 for schematics on the Lighting systems.
1. Dimmer Control Modules
A. Removal
(1) Remove respective interior side panel based on location described above.
(2) Disconnect the electrical harness connectors (top and bottom).
(3) Remove mounting screws and the dimmer control module.
B. Installation
(1) Position the dimmer control module in place and secure with the mounting screws.
(2) Connect the electrical harness connectors to dimmer, top and bottom.
(3) Cycle lighting to verify function.
(4) Replace the interior side panel.
2. Instrument Panel Post Lights
A. Lamp Replacement
(1) Pull firmly on the post light hood and remove.
(2) The lamp will be pulled from socket and remain inside hood. Gently pry the lamp base flange
from the hood to remove the lamp.
(3) Push the new lamp into the hood and push the hood back into the socket.
4J7 33-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Removal
(1) Disconnect wire from rear of socket behind panel.
(2) Unscrew rear contact collar from rear of socket.
(3) Remove mounting washer and nut from light assembly.
(4) Pull assembly from panel mounting hole.
C. Installation
(1) Insert assembly into panel mounting hole.
(2) Install mounting washer and nut onto light assembly.
(3) Screw rear contact collar from rear of socket.
(4) Connect wire to rear of socket behind panel.
3. Annunciator Panel (See 91-31-50 for wiring.)
A complete functional description is provided in 31-50-00.
A. Meggitt EFIS
The annunciator panel is oriented horizontally at the top center of the instrument panel.
Lamp Replacement
Pull evenly on the annunciator panel bezel to access its lamp bulbs. An extraction tool and four
spare bulbs are located behind the bezel. Use the extraction tool to replace defective bulb and
reverse removal procedure. Depress “Test” function to verify lamp function.
NOTE: Test function only tests the bulbs, not the annunciator circuit.
B. Avidyne EFIS
In S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up, when the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS is installed, the
annunciator panel is an LED unit. In the unlikely event of LED failure, the entire unit must be
replaced.
4. Standby-Map Light Lamp Replacement
A. Remove the four lens retainer screws and remove the lens.
B. Remove and replace the bayonet type lamp.
C. Replace the lens and four mounting screws.
5. Dimming Rheostats
A. Removal
(1) Remove the overhead switch panel.
(2) Remove rheostat mounting screws.
(3) Disconnect and label wiring.
(4) Remove rheostat.
B. Installation
(1) Connect wiring to rheostat.
(2) Position rheostat in proper location and install mounting screws.
(3) Install the overhead switch panel.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 33-10-00 4J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Rocker Switch Lamp Replacement

A. On the exposed arc of the rocker switch find an indentation and pry the rocker portion of switch from
the switch assembly, using the indentation for leverage note rocker position.
B. Locate and pull the metal tab. Remove lamp from its socket and replace. It is not necessary to
rotate lamp when removing or installing it.
C. After replacing the lamp, place the rocker portion of the switch in the same position as when
removed, and press it firmly into place noting an audible “snap” as the plastic locks mate into place.
Cycle the switch to confirm rocker is seated.
7. Overhead Switch Panel
The overhead switch panel is lighted with electroluminescent placards (see below). The left and right
sections are retained by the panel mounting screws. The center section is glued on.
8. Electroluminescent Lighting
Illumination by electroluminescence is accomplished by discharging an alternating current through
phosphor treated material, such as the circuit breaker decal strips. Should any one decal strip fail to
illuminate, the complete strip must be replaced
Should all decal strips fail to illuminate, the probable fault is with the inverter used to convert 24 Vdc to
115 Vac. The inverter is located on the bottom of the cover plate in the floor at the pilot’s feet (see
6-00-00, Figure 5). Replace the inverter.
The 24 Vdc power to the inverter comes through the INSTR PANEL 5 amp circuit breaker. If the
electroluminescence placards and post lights fail to illuminate, check that the INSTR PANEL circuit
breaker has not tripped; reset, if necessary. If the INSTR PANEL circuit breaker has not tripped, check
the PANEL dimmer control unit.
If the PANEL dimmer control unit is good, check that neither MAIN 80 amp Tie Bus circuit breaker has
tripped; reset as necessary.
If none of the above correct the problem, check all related wiring. Refer to Chapter 91 for appropriate
electrical schematics.
9. Fixed Oxygen Cylinder Cabinet Lighting
The fixed oxygen cylinder cabinet has two lights which are controlled by a switch mounted on the front
right of the cabinet.
A. A standard post light is mounted in the top to illuminate the pressure gauge. See Instrument Panel
Post Lights, above, for lamp replacement, removal, and installation.
B. An LED light is mounted in the front left of the cabinet to illuminate the pilot’s oxygen mask stowage
box. Should the light fail, replacement of the entire light assembly is required.
(1) Removal
(a) At the front of the cabinet, remove the two screws holding the light assembly to the
cabinet.
(b) At the rear of the cabinet, cut the two wires leading from the light assembly to the
harness.
NOTE: Leave sufficient length of wire to accommodate splicing in the new light
assembly.
(c) Remove light assembly.
4J9 33-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) At the front of the cabinet, insert the wires from the new light assembly and route them to
the rear. Secure the light assembly to the cabinet with two screws.
(b) At the rear of the cabinet, splice the two wires from the new light assembly to the stubs of
the wires from the old light assembly (i.e. - white to white and black to black).
10. Post-Installation Set-up (PIR-PPS-60199-2, Rev.D / PPS-60206, Rev. E.)
The GNS-430/-530 NAV/COM/GPS, the GTX-327/-330 Transponder and the ADF-650D Radio Direction
Finder each have lighting configuration settings which must be adjusted after installation. Whenever a
unit is replaced, use the following procedures to configure the lighting in the new unit.
A. GNS-430/-530
With power applied to the avionics rack and the GNS-430/-530 turned off, press and hold the ENT
key and turn the unit ON. Release the ENT key when the display activates. After the data base
pages, press the ENT key twice (to step through the Data Base Information and Indicator Self Test
Pages). The next page displayed is the MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG page.
While in Configuration Mode, pages can be selected by ensuring the cursor is off and rotating the
small (inner) right knob. Do this now and select the MAIN LIGHTING PAGE.
To change data on the displayed Main Lighting Page, press the small (inner) right knob (CRSR) to
turn on the cursor. Turn the large (outside) right knob to step through the data fields. Turn the small
(inner) right knob to change the data in the field that the cursor is on. Press the ENT key to accept
the data that is displayed in the selected field.
Configure a newly installed unit as shown in Chart 1.
NOTE: Initial configuration may be done using aircraft battery or external power. Final performance
should be checked with the airplane configured as follows:
Engine - Running Alternator – ON Avionics – ON
Instrument Panel Lights – Full Bright Day/Night Switch – Day
Navigation Lights – ON Strobe Lights – ON Pitot Heat – OFF
Air Conditioning – OFF Cabin Blower Fan – Low Vent Blower – OFF
CHART 1
GNS-430/-530 MAIN LIGHTING CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY KEY
LIGHTING NO SETTING NO SETTING
SOURCE 28 VDC PHOTO
RESP TIME / MIN 4 / 80 4 / 99
SLOPE / OFFSET 50 / 50 50 / 90
PHOTO TRANS % 25
PHOTO SLP / OFST 35 * / 35 *
NOTE: Due to tolerances of electrical components, these settings may vary slightly from unit to
unit. Adjust (±/-10%) if needed, to obtain optimum lighting balance between panel units.
Settings marked * may be adjusted as required.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 33-10-00 4J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. GTX-327/-330
With power applied to the avionics rack and the GTX-327/-330 turned off, press and hold the FUNC
key and turn the unit ON. This provides access to the configuration pages. The FUNC key
sequences forward through the configuration pages. The START/STOP key sequences the
configuration pages backward. The CRSR key will highlight selectable fields on each page. When a
field is highlighted, the numeric data entry will be performed with the 0-9 keys, and list selections
will be performed with the 8 or 9 keys. Press the CRSR key to accept changes. Pressing the FUNC
key moves on to the next configuration page without saving the changes. To exit the configuration
pages, turn the power off and then on again (without holding the FUNC key).
Configure a newly installed unit as shown in Chart 2.
NOTE: For the GTX-330 only: when the unit is turned on for the first time, or an invalid aircraft
address is recognized, the unit will prompt the user to enter a valid aircraft address. See
latest revision of Garmin GTX-330 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00207-02.
CHART 2
GTX-327/-330 LIGHTING CONFIGURATION
Data Element Selection

DISPLAY MODE PAGE
DISPLAY MODE AUTO
LEVEL 75
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT PAGE
BKLT AUTO
LVL Not Selectable
RSP TIME 4
MIN 8
BKLT SRCE PHOTO
SLOPE 50
OFFSET 50
KEY LIGHTING PAGE
KEY AUTO
LVL Not Selectable
RSP TIME 4
MIN 5
KEY SRCE 28V
SLOPE 20
OFFSET 30
CONTRAST MODE AUTO
4J11 33-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. ADF-650D
Using the instructions provided in the Pilots Operating Handbook for the ADF-650D
(i.e. - P/N 87111), pages 2-11, 2-12 & 2-13, adjust the lighting characteristics to match the
GTX-327 as closely as possible. When selecting the models for the display, OPTO mode should be
selected for the display as shown in fig. 2-15, and AUTO mode should be selected for the
background as shown in fig. 2-16.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 33-10-00 4J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Cabin lighting is provided by eight overhead eyeball spot lights and two lighting strips running down the
left and right sides of the cabin. A courtesy light illuminates the cabin entrance door.
1. Courtesy Lighting
A. Description
The cabin door courtesy light, the two eyeball spots over the baggage area and one each of the fwd
and mid-cabin spots are all wired to the courtesy lighting circuit and illuminate when the cabin door
is opened. The courtesy lighting circuit is powered through an in-line 5 amp fuse from the battery
bus. Two switches, an upper and lower, are actuated by the cabin door. One half of the lower switch
controls the cabin courtesy lighting, while the other half and the upper portion of the switch provides
door ajar warning power to the annunciator panel. The courtesy lighting circuit is controlled by a
twelve minute “one-shot” timer to prevent unnecessary battery discharge if the door is left open
unattended.
B. Courtesy Light Lamp Replacement
(1) Remove lens mounting screws.
(2) Pull out bayonet base lamp.
(3) Install replacement, check, and reinstall lens.
C. Courtesy Lighting Timer
(1) Removal
(a) The courtesy lights timer is located on a frame assembly aft of the lower cabin door.
(b) Disconnect electrical wires.
(c) Remove mounting screws and timer assembly.
(2) Installation
(a) Position timer assembly in place and secure with mounting screws.
(b) Connect electrical wires.
(c) Test for proper operation of timer.
2. Eyeball Spotlights (Reading Lamps)
A. Lamp Replacement
Pull the lens cover off and twist out the bayonet mount bulb.
B. Removal
The eyeball spotlights are mounted in pairs to the central headliner assembly.
(1) Remove four bezel mounting screws and remove bezel.
(2) Remove screws holding light assembly to headliner and remove spotlight.
C. Installation
(1) Position spotlight at headliner and secure with screws.
(2) Position bezel around the spotlight pair and secure with screws.
3. Side Light Strips
The side light strips are illuminated by hundreds of miniature light bulbs within each strip. Bulbs cannot
be replaced individually. The side light strips are controlled by a switch adjacent to the cabin door.
4J13 33-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 33-20-00 4J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR
External lighting consists of anti-collision strobes, landing, taxi-pulse, position, and wing inspection
lights. Refer to 91-33-00 for electrical schematic details of these lighting systems.
1. Strobe Lights
A. Description (Refer to Figure 1 and Section 91-33-40.)
Each wing tip strobe tube is powered by its individual power supply. Both power supplies receive
power from the main bus through the 5 amp STROBE LIGHTS circuit breaker, and are controlled by
the strobe light switch. If both strobe lights exhibit a fault, first verify that the STROBE LIGHTS
circuit breaker has not opened (reset, if necessary), and then integrity of the strobe light switch
(replace, if required). If either strobe is operating correctly, the strobe switch considered good.
Check wiring from the strobe light switch to each strobe power supply to verify system wiring
integrity.
The strobe light assembly functions as a capacitor high voltage discharge system. An audible tone
of 1 to 1.5 K Hertz is emitted during the charge cycle of the strobe power supply in a normally
functioning unit. However, the audible tone does not necessarily mean the power supply firing circuit
is good. A voltage of approximately 450 volts is developed on the capacitor, after which the audible
tone ceases. The capacitor is paralleled across the Xenon flash tube which holds off the voltage
until the tube is triggered by a separate pulse generated by a solid state timing circuit.
After the trigger pulse causes ionization of the Xenon gas in the envelope, an intense light is given
off for a brief moment as the capacitor discharges. Following discharge across the tube, the
oscillator again chops up the dc aircraft current into alternating current, and again develops a higher
voltage through transformer action. After full voltage is again impressed on the capacitor the cycle
repeats itself occurring at about 50 flashes per minute.
Since each wing tip strobe is powered by its own power supply, and if both power supplies are
emitting audible tones, simply switch power supplies from each wing tip. If the trouble is one of the
power supplies, replace it. If the faulty strobe still malfunctions replace that strobe tube. Refer to
Replacement of Position / Strobe Lamps and to Replacement of Strobe Power Supplies.
B. Strobe Xenon Tubes and Power Supply - General Service Information
(1) Never reverse power supply input connections for even an instant. Reverse polarity will
permanently damage the circuitry. Even though damage may not be immediately apparent, the
power supply will fail in use.
(2) Wait five minutes for high voltage bleed down to occur, before handling a strobe power supply
to avoid electrical shock.
(3) Never allow connection between pins 1 and 2 of the flash tube connector, since this will
discharge the capacitor and destroy the trigger circuit in the power supply.
NOTE: All of the following conditions, except item (6), are considered to require replacement.
(4) A Xenon flash tube can be photo-sensitive. Some may flash normally when exposed to light,
but may become difficult to fire in darkness.
(5) Xenon flash tubes become more difficult to fire with age, or when exposed to very high
temperatures.
(6) A tube with most of the service life left in it, should fire on a reduced voltage of 22 volts.
(7) A tube with little service life left in it, will fire with an engine running, but refuse to fire on battery
voltage.
4J15 33-40-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Under hot and cold cycling during normal operation, “egg-shelling” of the glass envelope can
occur, or leaks may develop in the glass seal.
(9) Xenon strobe tubes can sometimes go into “self-ionization” continuously glowing a light blue,
thus rendering the system inoperative.
C. Position / Strobe Lamp Replacement
(1) Remove the screws securing the plexiglass cover to the wing tip structure, and separate the
cover from the wing tip.
(2) Remove lens retainer screws, retainer, and lens, exposing the light bracket assembly. (Refer to
Figure 1)
(3) The position lamps can now be replaced.
NOTE: If strobe (Xenon) lamp is to be replaced, proceed to step (5). If not complete step (4).
(4) Install lens, retainer, and cover in reverse of the preceding steps.
(5) Each strobe lamp is powered by its own power supply which is attached to a wing access
panel located on the lower wing surface just inboard of each wing tip.
CAUTION: WHEN DISCONNECTING STROBE POWER SUPPLY, ALLOW FIVE MINUTES
OF BLEED DOWN TIME BEFORE HANDLING A CHARGED UNIT.
(6) Remove the 12 screws securing wing access panel to the underside of the wing. Drop access
panel from the wing exposing the attached strobe power supply.
(7) Remove four attachment screws and eight AN960-10 washers; separate power supply from
access panel. Set wing access panel aside to protect paint etc.
(8) Unplug both power supply connectors, (P110 and P111 left wing / P210 and P211 right wing)
and remove power supply from wing.
(9) Reach into wing and unscrew (P109 left wing / P209 right wing) releasing this connector.
(Refer to Figure 1.)
(10) Remove light bracket assembly mounting screws from wing tip and gently pull entire light
assembly free of wing tip, feeding wiring through wing tip opening until plug (P101/P2111)
three wire connector is pulled outside of wing.
NOTE: If sufficient wire length is not available to continue with the following steps, the
remaining ground wire will have to be disconnected at the plug bracket assembly
ground lug (Figure 1).
(11) Cut the disconnected three wire connector, P111 or P211, at the base of the strobe light
bracket assembly and discard cut wires and connector end.
(12) Remove and destroy Xenon strobe lamp.
(13) Route new wires attached to replacement strobe lamp through hole in bracket assembly and
install new Xenon tube in bracket assembly.
(14) Referring to 91-33-40 schematic of anti-collision strobe lighting insert new wiring terminals into
the replacement connector plug supplied with the new strobe lamp. Wire according to
schematic.
(15) Gently feed cable assembly back into wing and align light bracket assembly in place. Do not
mount assembly.
(16) If ground wire was disconnected from plug bracket ground lug, connect this wire.
(17) Reconnect (P109 or P209) to plug bracket mate.
(18) Connect new three wire connector P-111 or P-211 and the original P-110 or P-210 connectors
to power supply.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 33-40-00 4J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(19) Install power supply to access panel with the eight AN960-10 washers and four attachment
screws.
(20) Install wing access panel with power supply attached and wires facing outboard, to the wing
surface with appropriate mounting screws previously removed.
(21) Install the light bracket assembly, lens, lens retainer and plexiglass cover.
D. Strobe Power Supply Replacement
(1) Each wing tip strobe light is powered by its individual power supply which is attached to a wing
access panel located on the lower wing surface just inboard of the wing tip. Refer to Figure 2.
(2) Remove wing access panel.
(3) Unplug power supply connectors P-111 and P-110 on left wing and P-211 and P-210 on right
wing.
(4) Remove four screws and eight AN960-10 washers attaching power supply to wing access
panel and separate from power supply.
(5) Reverse procedures for installation of strobe power supply.
Position, Strobe, and Taxi / Pulse Light Installation

Figure 1
4J17 33-40-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Taxi / Pulse (Recognition) Lights

The “Taxi-Pulse” switch is located in the overhead switch panel. When switched to “Taxi”, the lights are
illuminated continuously. When “Pulse” is selected, a flasher unit (mounted below the fwd pilot’s circuit
breaker panel) is engaged and the lights illuminate alternately (left & right) at about 55 pulses per minute
to increase aircraft visibility.
A. A 50 watt taxi / pulse light is located within the leading edge of each wing inboard of the tip.
B. If the strobes have just been in operation, wait five minutes for high voltage bleed down to occur
before removing wing access panel located on the lower surface of the wing just inboard of the wing
tip by removing the 12 screw securing to the wing. The strobe power supply is attached to this wing
access panel with 4 screws an eight AN960-10 washers.
C. Remove access panel and unplug strobe power supply connectors, so access panel with power
supply still attached can be set aside. This will prevent weight of power supply from pulling on
electrical harness. (refer to Figure 1)
D. Disconnect electrical connectors from rear of light.
E. Remove four bracket retaining screws from the assembly. These screws are removed from the
external surface of the wing; two on the bottom and two on top.
F. Slide the light bracket assembly aft and down and out through access opening.
Taxi / Pulse Light Installation (Side View)

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 33-40-00 4J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. To remove lens, squeeze lens gently and slide forward, out of edge of wing structure, ensuring the
gasket does not slide off and into the wing.
H. To remove lamp from light assembly, snap lens cover off of the reflector and replace the lamp.
I. Installation is reverse of preceding steps.
3. Landing Light Replacement
A 250 watt landing light is attached to the nose gear strut by a support bracket and brace. It functions
independently of the taxi / pulse lights.
A. Remove the four lens attachment screws and pull the bezel from the fixture being careful not to
damage the seal. Remove bezel, seal, and glareshield.
B. The lamp will be free to separate from the support bracket. Pull the lamp forward and unscrew the
electrical connections from the lamp.
C. Replace the lamp making sure the electrical connections are secured with the electrical connection
screws previously removed, and push the lamp into the lamp support bracket.
D. Reinstall the glareshield, seal, and bezel with the four attachment screws.
4. Wing Inspection (Ice) Light
The wing inspection (ice) light is riveted into the left side of the fuselage assembly at F.S. 104.73 (i.e. -
above the left wing root glove).
Lamp Replacement
(1) Remove screws (4) from lens cover and remove lens cover.
(2) Twist bulb out of bayonet socket.
(3) Insert new bulb (MS25338-7079).
(4) Replace lens cover and secure with screws (4).
4J19 33-40-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 4J20 THRU 4L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 33-40-00 4J20
CARD 5 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

5A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
5A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 5A9
Effectivity 2 5A10
Pagination 2 5A10
Indexing 3 5A11
INDEX
Index 1 5B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
5B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 5B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
5B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 5B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
5B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 5B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
5B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 5B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
5B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
34
NAVIGATION
5C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34
CHAPTER CHAPTER
34-List of 1 Apr 15/07 34-20-00 (cont.) 26 Apr 15/07

28 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 30 Apr 15/07
31 Apr 15/07
34-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 32 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 33 Apr 15/07
34 Apr 15/07
34-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 35 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 36 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 34-40-00 1 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 34-50-00 1 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
34-20-00 1 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 34-00-00 1 5C7
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENT DATA 34-10-00 1 5C7

Pitot and Static Systems 1 5C9
Description and Operation 1 5C9
Troubleshooting 1 5C9
Test 1 5C9
Pitot Head 5 5C13
Removal 5 5C13
Installation 5 5C13
Heaters Test 5 5C13
Standby Altimeter 7 5C15
Standby Airspeed Indicator 9 5C17
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 9 5C17
ATTITUDE & DIRECTION 34-20-00 1 5C19

Standby Attitude Indicator 1 5C19
Removal and Installation 1 5C19
Emergency Power Supply 1 5C19
Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Meggitt Magic 3 5C21
Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) (i.e. - PFD) 3 5C21
Basic Functional Test 3 5C21
Removal and Installation 4 5C22
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) (i.e. - ND) 9 5D3
Basic Functional Test 9 5D3
Removal and Installation 15 5D9
Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) (i.e. - AHRS) 16 5D10
Magnetic Heading Compensation/Calibration 16 5D10
Ground Test Procedure 16 5D10
Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Avidyne Entegra 16 5D10
Description 16 5D10
Maintenance 16 5D10
Primary Flight Display (PFD) 19 5D13
Multifunction Display (MFD) 19 5D13
Component Locator 24 5D18

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont.)
ATTITUDE & DIRECTION (cont.) 34-20-00

Magnetic Heading Systems 24 5D18
Meggitt EFIS Installation 24 5D18
Flux Detectors 24 5D18
Magnetic Heading Compensation / Calibration 26 5D20
Avidyne EFIS Installation 29 5D23
Magnetometers 29 5D23
PFD - Magnetometer Calibration Procedure 30 5D24
PFD - Magnetometer Calibration Alternate Procedure 30 5D24
Magnetic Compass 31 5E1
Adjustment 31 5E1
Turn Coordinator 34 5E4
Removal and Installation 34 5E4
INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING 34-40-00 1 5E7

Color Weather Radar 1 5E7
Removal 2 5E8
Installation 2 5E8
Self-test 2 5E8
DEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING 34-50-00 1 5E11

COM/NAV/GPS 1 5E11
S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697215, less 4697198 1 5E11
Post-Installation Lighting Set-up 1 5E11
S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up 1 5E11
Transponder 4 5E14
S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697173 4 5E14
S/N’s 4697174 and up 5 5E15
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Meggitt Magic
The Meggitt Avionics next Generation Integrated Cockpit (MAGIC) Electronic Flight Instrument System
(EFIS) is installed as the primary flight and navigation instrumentation. The MAGIC EFIS consists of
three primary components: (See 34-20-00, Figure 1.)
A. Primary Flight Display (PFD) [i.e. - Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI)],
B. Navigation Display (NAV) [i.e. - Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)], and
C. Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) [i.e. - Attitude Heading Reference
System (AHRS)].
PUBLICATIONS.)
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting and that is addressed in 34-20-00.
In addition, the Meridian employs Meggitt’s MAGIC Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS) as the
primary engine instrumentation. The MAGIC EIDS consists of two primary components: the Engine
Display Unit (EDU) and the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU). Germane to this chapter is the fact that Outside
Air Temperature data is collected by the DAU and displayed by the EDU. See 77-40-00 for additional info.
2. Avidyne FlightMax Entegra
The Avidyne FlightMax Entegra Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) is available in S/N’s 4697198;
4697216 and up
This system uses three large 10.4-inch diagonal, high-resolution, sunlight-readable full color displays
(PFD and MFD), to provide standard flight instrumentation including attitude direction indicator (EADI),
horizontal situation indicator (EHSI), altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, moving map, weather, terrain and
traffic data, as well as all engine instrumentation. Standard primary flight instruments (i.e. - airspeed,
electric attitude indicator, and altimeter) provide redundancy. (See 34-20-00, Figure 2.)
The EFIS installation consists of the following components: pilot and co-pilot Primary Flight Display s
(PFDs); a single Multifunction Display (MFD); Data Acquisition Unit (DAU), mini-DAU, and associated
sensors; and two Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assemblies.
PUBLICATIONS.)
See 77-40-00 for additional info on the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and mini-DAU.
5C7 34-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 34-00-00 5C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT ENVIRONMENT DATA
The instrument air system consists of pitot air and static air sources. The system supplies both pitot and
static air pressure for the EFIS Air Data and Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) and standby
airspeed indicator, and static pressure for the standby altimeter and the cabin pressure differential,
vertical speed, and altitude (triple) indicator. Instruments addressed in this section are face mounted. (See
39-10-00, Face Mounted Instruments - Removal and Installation.)
1. Pitot and Static System
Impact air pressure entering the heated pitot heads installed on the bottom of the left and right
wings is carried through hose and tubing within the wing and fuselage to the ADAHRS unit(s) (two
on the aft equipment shelf in the Meggitt EFIS installation or one integrated into each PFD in the
Avidyne EFIS installation) and to the standby airspeed gauge on the instrument panel. Static
pressure for the ADAHRS unit(s), standby altimeter and airspeed indicators and the differential,
vertical speed, and altitude (triple) indicator, is sensed by static source pads on the underside of the
fuselage at F.S. 243.38. Static pressure for the pressurization system outflow valve is sensed by
another static pad at F.S. 243.38 and between the instrument static pads.
An alternate static source control valve is located below the instrument panel to the left of the pilot.
For normal operation, the lever remains down. To select alternate static source, place the lever in
the up position. When the alternate static source is selected the airspeed and altimeter and vertical
speed indicator are vented to the alternate static pad on the aft sides of the fuselage. During
alternate static source operation, these instruments may give slightly different readings. The pilot
can determine the effects of the alternate static source on instrument readings by switching from
standard to alternate sources at different airspeeds.
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRAIN STATIC SYSTEM DURING PRESSURIZED FLIGHT.
If one or more of the pitot static instruments malfunction, the system should be checked for dirt,
leaks or moisture. A partially or completely blocked pitot head will give erratic, erroneous, or zero
reading on the instruments. The pitot and static lines may be drained by drains located next to the
pilot and copilot seats.
The holes in the sensors for pitot and static pressure must be fully open and free from blockage.
Blocked sensor holes will give erratic or zero readings on the instruments.
The heated pitot heads are standard equipment. The pitot heat switch is located on the right
overhead switch panel. Static source pads have been demonstrated to be non-icing; however, in the
event that icing does occur, selecting the alternate static source will alleviate the problem.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1. In the Meggitt EFIS installation, see also Appendix 1 (grid 5K1).
C. Test (PIR-PPS 60035, Rev. M)
This test requires a pitot/static test fixture (i.e. - Aerosonic Air Data Test Set - Model 90000-0168 or
Barfield Part No. 101-00164 or equivalent) and calibrated air source (i.e. - airspeed simulator) and
should be performed at any time an instrument, fitting, line, pitot head, or static button is
disconnected. The test should be performed prior to the next flight.
NOTE: Ensure the lines and fittings are free of any entrapped moisture or restrictions.
(1) Attach the test fixture to the pitot head. Align the holes in the fixture with the holes in the head.
(2) Attach the airspeed simulator hose to the pitot (pressure) port of the fixture.
(3) Turn ON both PFDs (i.e. - EADI’s in the Meggitt EFIS installation).
5C9 34-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING PITOT AND STATIC SYSTEMS
Heating element inoperative. Defective switch. Replace the switch.
Grounded or open circuit. Check for continuity
and repair.
Defective heating element Replace the
in pitot head. pitot-static mast.
Circuit breaker keeps tripping. Grounded wire. Check for continuity
and repair.
Instruments inoperative or Lines clogged. Disconnect lines at
erratic in operation. instruments and blow out
with low pressure air.
Line leaks. Check lines for loose
connections at all
connection points.
NOTE: If any connections in static system are opened for maintenance, the complete
system must be rechecked per FAR 23.1325. With Meggitt EFIS installation, see
Appendix 1 (grid 5K1).
(4) Operate the simulator to obtain a reading of 75 knots on the airplane airspeed indicator(s).
(5) Check that the standby airspeed indicator needle follows in the same direction as the simulator
airspeed indicator needle.
(6) Raise airspeed to 188 knots and wait 15 seconds to allow the airplane airspeed indicators to
stabilize.
(7) Observe the simulator and airplane airspeed indicators for 15 seconds. If a leak is present, the
indicator needles will move toward zero.
(8) If a leak is present, check the fixture installation, hose connections, and pitot system lines and
fittings. Repair the leak when found, then repeat steps (1) - (7).
(9) Turn OFF the copilot’s PFD.
(10) Operate the simulator to indicate 140 knots on the pilot’s PFD. Verify that the pilot’s PFD
indicates within three (3) knots of the simulator indication.
(11) Turn OFF the pilot’s PFD and turn ON the copilot’s PFD.
(12) Repeat step (10) for the copilot’s PFD and for the standby airspeed indicator.
(13) Turn ON the pilot’s PFD and turn OFF the copilot’s PFD.
(14) Operate the simulator until the overspeed aural alarm first sounds. Verify that the simulator
indicates an airspeed of 188 to 194 knots.
(15) Increase the simulator airspeed indication to 200 knots.
(16) Decrease the simulator airspeed indication until the overspeed aural alarm first stops. Verify
that the simulator indicates an airspeed of less than 188 knots.
(18) Repeat steps (14) - (16).
(19) Remove the test fixture from the pitot head.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 34-10-00 5C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S TAT IC / A LT STAT I C
PI TOT A LTE RNAT E
STAT IC
PR E SSURE
BO U N DA RY
CPI ASI A LT
FWD
DRA IN #1
ALT STATIC
DRA IN #2
SELECTOR
D R AIN #5 VALVE
DRAIN # 3 DRA IN #4
LEFT DRAI N #6 RIGHT

P I TOT P ITOT
P ROBE P ROB E
PI LOT CO-P ILOT
S TATI C STATIC
STATI C BUTTON BUTTON P ITOT
MEGGITT EFIS
AU TO PIL OT 102575 P
TR AN SD U CER ADAHR S1 A DA HRS2
NOT INSTALLED IN
S/N'S 4697144, AND
4697149 & UP. ALTERNATE STATI C BUTTONS
Pitot-Static System
5C11 34-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PFD #2
PFD #1
STANDBY
PITOT LINE AIRSPEED
INDICATOR
(REF.)
STANDBY
ALTITUDE
INDICATOR
(REF.)
STATIC LINE
CABIN
PRESSURIZATION
INDICATOR
STATIC LINE (REF.)
VIEW
LOOKING AFT
PITOT LINE
STATIC / ALT STATIC PITOT
AS
ALT PFD #1 PFD #2 PRESSURE

BOUNDARY FWD
CRI
STATIC SOURCE
SELECTOR VALVE
AVIDYNE EFIS
(S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up)
DRAIN
DRAIN DRAIN
DRAIN DRAIN
LEFT RIGHT
PITOT PITOT 105135 D
PROBE PROBE
PRI STATIC STATIC

PFD #1 PFD #2
ALT STATIC ALT STATIC

PFD #1 PFD #1
Pitot-Static System
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 34-10-00 5C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(20) Attach static test fixture to the static port and pitot test port of the aircraft. Tape over the other
static button.
(21) Turn ON the pilot’s PFD.
(22) Set the aircraft altimeter needles to read zero altitude. Operate the static simulator to cause the
aircraft altimeter needles to read 1,000 feet altitude. Momentarily open the alternate static port.
There should be a decrease in altimeter indication. If no change occurs the system is blocked
and must be repaired prior to further testing.
(23) Increase altitude to 1,050 feet.
(24) Check that the aircraft altimeter shows an increase.
(25) Observe the aircraft altimeter. Loss of indicated altitude shall not exceed 100 feet in one
minute.
(26) Increase altitude to 12,700 feet.
(27) Check that the aircraft altimeter shows an increase.
(28) Observe the aircraft altimeter. Loss of indicated altitude shall not exceed 254 feet in one
minute.
(29) If a leak exceeds the tolerances in step (25) or (28), check the fixture installation, plumbing and
fittings. Repair the leak when found and repeat the static system checks above.
(31) Repeat test steps (22) thru (29) for copilot’s PFD.
(32) Remove the test fixture and tape from the static button.
2. Pitot Head
A. Removal (refer to Figure 2)
The pitot heads are located on the bottom of each wing.
(1) Remove the four screws which secure the pitot tube to the mast assembly.
(2) Carefully pull the pitot tube from the mast assembly.
(3) Remove the hose from the elbow on top of the pitot tube.
(4) Disconnect the electrical leads at the connector.
B. Installation
(1) Reconnect the electrical leads to the heating elements.
(2) Install the pitot tube into the mast assembly.
(3) Secure the pitot tube to the mast assembly with the four screws
(4) Reconnect the electrical leads to the gauge.
C. Heaters Test
(1) Remove the pitot head from mast assembly and the wing.
(2) With one of the test leads connected to one of the terminals of the head, ground the other lead
to the metal body of the head assembly. There should be no continuity.
(3) Reinstall the pitot head into the mast assembly and the wing.
5C13 34-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B B
VIEW B - B
MAST
ASSEMBLY
A A
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR PINS
DRAIN
HOLE
PART
NUMBER
MARKED "TOP"
VIEW A - A
“L” Shaped Pitot Tube Installation

Figure 2
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 34-10-00 5C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Standby Altimeter
The altimeter uses pressure differential to indicate altitude in feet. When the barometric pressure scale
on the instrument is set to the current altimeter setting, the altimeter will indicate altitude, in feet, above
sea level. The indicator has one pointer, a dial scale, and a drum indicator; the pointer is read in feet, the
right digit on the drum reads in hundreds of feet and the left digits on the drum read in thousands of feet.
The barometric pressure window, located on the lower right side of the indicator dial, is set by the knob
located on the lower left corner of the instrument. The altimeter consists of a sealed aneroid (diaphragm)
that is connected to the pointer and drum through a mechanical linkage. The instrument case is vented
to the static air system and as static air pressure decreases, the aneroid expands, causing the pointer
and drum to move through the mechanical linkage. The altimeter incorporates an electrically driven
vibrator to prevent meter sticking.
Troubleshooting - see Chart 3.
NOTE: If any connections in static system are opened for maintenance, the complete system must be
rechecked per FAR 23.1325. With Meggitt EFIS installation, see Appendix 1 (grid 5K1).
CHART 3
TROUBLESHOOTING ALTIMETER (Sheet 1 of 2)

Excessive scale error. Improper calibration adjustment. Replace instrument.
Excessive pointer oscillation. Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
High or low reading. Improper venting. Eliminate leak in static
pressure system and check
alignment of airspeed tube.
Setting knob is hard to turn. Wrong lubrication or lack of Replace instrument.
Iubrication.
Pointer or drum fails to Out of engagement. Replace instrument.
move when setting knob is
rotated.
Setting knob set screw loose or Not tight when altimeter was Tighten instrument screw, if
missing. reset. Ioose. Replace instrument,
if screw is missing.
Cracked or loose cover glass. Case gasket hardened. Replace instrument.
Dull or discolored markings. Age.
Barometric scale and reference Slippage of mating parts. Replace instrument.
markers out of synchronism.
Barometric scale and reference Drift in mechanism. Refer to the latest revision
markers out of synchronism of AC 43. 13-1.
with pointer or drum.
Altimeter sticks at altitude or Water or restriction in static Remove static lines from all
does not change with change of line. instruments, blow line clear
altitude. from cockpit to static ports.
Loss of power to instrument. Check wiring and electrical
connections.
5C15 34-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
TROUBLESHOOTING ALTIMETER (Sheet 2 of 2)
Altimeter changes reading Water in static line. Remove static lines from all
as aircraft is banked. instruments, and blow line
clear from cockpit to static
ports.
Altimeter requires resetting Temperature compensator Change instrument.
frequently. inoperative.
Outside Air Temperature Probe

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 34-10-00 5C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Standby Airspeed Indicator

The airspeed indicator provides a means of indicating the speed of the airplane passing through the air.
The airspeed indication is the differential pressure reading between pitot air to pressure and static air
pressure. This instrument has the diaphragm vented to the pitot air source, and the case is vented to the
static air system. As the airplane increases speed, the pitot air pressure increases, causing the
diaphragm to expand. A mechanical linkage picks up this motion and moves the instrument pointer to the
indicated speed. The instrument dial is calibrated in knots, and also has the necessary operating range
markings for safe operation of the airplane.
Troubleshooting - see Chart 4.
NOTE: If any connections in static system are opened for maintenance, the complete system must be
rechecked per FAR 23.1325. With Meggitt EFIS installation, see Appendix 1 (grid 5K1).
CHART 4
TROUBLESHOOTING AIRSPEED TUBES AND INDICATOR
Pointers on instruments stick Leak in instrument case or Check for leak and seal.
or do not indicate properly. in pitot lines.
Pointer of instrument Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
oscillates.
Instrument reads high. Pointer not on zero. Replace instrument.
Leaking static system. Find leak and correct.
Instrument reads low. Pointer not on zero. Replace instrument.
Leaking static system. Find leak and correct.
Pitot head not aligned Realign pitot head.
correctly.
Airspeed changes as aircraft Water in pitot line. Remove lines from static
is banked. instruments and blow out
lines from cockpit to pitot
head.
5. Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

The OAT sensor is located at Sta 244.3 on the bottom of the right wing.(See Figure 4)
A. Meggitt EFIS Installation
The Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) collects and transmits OAT sensor data for display on the co-pilot’s
Engine Display Unit (EDU). See 77-40-00 for more information on Meggitt MAGIC EDU.
B. Avidyne EFIS Installation
In S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up, with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS installed; the Data
Acquisition Unit (DAU) collects the OAT sensor data and sends it to the Primary Flight Displays
(PFDs) and the Multifunction Display (MFD).
5C17 34-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 34-10-00 5C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTITUDE & DIRECTION
1. Standby Attitude Indicator

The standby Attitude Indicator is essentially an electrically driven gyroscope rotating in a horizontal
plane and is operated on the principal of rigidity in space. Due to the gyroscopic inertia, the spin axis
continues to point in the near vertical direction, providing a constant visual reference to the attitude of
the airplane relative to pitch and roll axis. A bar across the face of the indicator represents the horizon,
and aligning the miniature airplane to the horizon bar simulates the alignment of the airplane to the
actual horizon. Any deviation simulates the deviation of the airplane from the true horizon. The Attitude
Indicator is marked for different degrees of bank.
A. Troubleshooting - see Chart 1.
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Bar fails to respond. No power. Check power.
Faulty instrument. Check/replace instrument.

Bar does not settle. Incorrect instrument. Check part number.
Defective instrument. Replace.
Bar oscillates or shimmies Instrument loose in panel. Tighten mounting screws.
continuously.
Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
Instrument does not indicate Instrument not level in Loosen screws and level
level flight. panel. instrument.
Aircraft out of trim. Trim aircraft.
Bar high after 180° Normal, if it does not Self correcting.
turn. exceed 1/16th inch.
B. Removal and Installation

See 39-10-00, Face Mounted Instruments - Removal and Installation.
C. Emergency Power Supply
A 24Vdc battery operated power supply (i.e. - B.F. Goodrich PS-834A) is installed in the aft radar
pod compartment to provide emergency power for the standby attitude indicator. The unit is
connected to the main electrical bus and its sealed lead-acid cells are automatically charged and
recharged by its built-in charging system.
(1) System Test.
The power supply may be tested locally using its integral test switch and light, or, remotely,
using the annunciator (i.e. - STBY ATT IND TEST) and instrument panel mounted remote
switch (i.e. - Standby Gyro Test Switch).
In either case, place the switch in TEST position for a minimum of five (5) seconds. The test
light must remain illuminated the entire time.
5C19 34-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The built-in-test function checks for operation of the up-converter with an internal load applied.
During the built-in-test, the input power is automatically switched off and then the voltage of the
battery pack is compared to a temperature compensated reference. If the battery capacity is
greater than 50% and the built-in-test monitors are valid, a green “TEST” LED on the connector
end of the unit and the remote test lamp will remain on as long as the unit is in test mode.
While in the remote activated built-in-test mode, the 28 Vdc output will maintain 0.24 ± 0.1
Amp at 24 ± 0.2 Vdc for 4.0 ± 1.0 seconds. Six seconds after remote activation, the 28 Vdc
output will time-out and drop to 24 - 0.1, + 0.5 Vdc and less than 0.1 Amp.
If the test light fails to illuminate as required during the test, one or more of the following
conditions may exist:
1 the power supply batteries are less than 50% charged;
2 the test lamp is burned out; or,
3 the power supply unit is defective.
To determine which condition(s) exist(s), first check the test lamp and then proceed to the
Capacity Test, below.
(2) Capacity Test.
Each twelve months, verify the B.F. Goodrich PS-834A Emergency Power Supply battery
capacity as follows:
(a) Required Equipment
Power Supply - variable, 0-32 Vdc @ 6.0 amps continuous output.
Voltmeter - Fluke 8050A or equivalent
Load Resistors - 100.0 ohm ± 2%, 10.0 W (28.0 V load)
- 13.0 ohm (or equivalent) ± 2%, 5.0 W (5.0 V load)
(b) Procedure
1 Disconnect and remove power supply from radar pod.
2 Ground J1 pin E or F.
NOTE: Connect directly to the pin(s) or via a test harness equipped with a
MS3106F20-27S (or equivalent) connector.
3 Apply 28.0 ± 0.5 Vdc to J1 pin A for two (2) hours.
4 After two (2) hours, remove 28 Vdc input.
5 Apply 100.0 ohm ± 2%, 10.0 W, load resistor to J1 pin C.
6 Apply 13.0 ohm ± 2%, 5.0 W, load resistor to J1 pin H.
NOTE: The 13 ohm resistor can consist of two five (5) watt resistors whose series
ohm value is equal to 13 ohms.
7 Ground J1 pin I to turn unit ON.
8 Using the voltmeter:
a Monitor the output voltage from J1 pin C for a minimum of 45 minutes. Voltage
must be 24.0 ± 1.0 Vdc for at least 45 minutes after the load is applied.
b Check the output voltage from J1 pin H. Verify 5.0 ± 0.3 Vdc.
9 If the unit meets the standards in step 8, proceed to step 10. If the unit fails the
standards in step 8, replace it.
10 Disconnect all loads (i.e. - J1 pin C and J1 pin H) and the ground from J1 pin I.
11 Repeat step 3. When the unit is fully charged, disconnect it from the test set-up and
reinstall it.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Meggitt

A. Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) [i.e. - Meggitt MAGIC EFIS Primary Flight Display
(PFD)]
The Primary Flight Display (PFD) is a microprocessor-based color, liquid crystal (LCD) display
system. Information displayed includes Airspeed, Altitude, Attitude, Vertical Speed, Heading and
Instrument Landing System data. The information is conveyed via predefined display formats. In
addition, the PFD includes built-in test, performance and health monitoring functions and display
brightness control. The PFD provides Gillam Code Altitude Output for the transponder (Mode C
altitude).
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION
- SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
Descriptions of the operator controls and basic operating modes and screens are in the appropriate
Pilot’s Operating Handbook.
(1) Troubleshooting
See Chart 2. See also Appendix 1 (grid 5K1).
(2) Basic Functional Test
CAUTION: IF, DURING THE FOLLOWING TEST, ANY COMPONENT DOES NOT
PRODUCE THE EXPECTED RESULTS, THAT COMPONENT MUST NOT BE
USED IN FLIGHT UNTIL THE PROBLEM IS CORRECTED.
(a) Before applying power, verify proper voltage inputs and ground connections as well as all
system interfaces.
(b) Start the PFD in Test Mode by pressing and holding the Baro Pushbutton while applying
power until the Initialization page is shown. Verify that the Initialization page displays
'MERIDIAN PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY' at the top of the screen and is replaced by the
Configuration Data page after approximately 5 seconds.
(c) Verify that the Configuration Data page Configuration Discrete Parity Status and Power
On Self Test results both show results of Pass. If the result is FAIL, further diagnostic
effort is required to determine if the failed indication is the result of improper installation, a
faulty PFD, or both.
(d) Verify that the Configuration Data page displays the correct installation location (primary
or secondary).
(e) Remove power from the PFD to terminate Test Mode. Re-apply power to the PFD and
start the display in Mission Operational Mode.
(f) Verify that the PFD displays the Initialization page for approximately 5 seconds prior to
displaying the PFD Screen Format. If power has not been applied to the ADAHRS then
the PFD screen format will be replaced by failure indications.
(g) Apply power to the Air Data Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) (i.e. - AHRS)
providing serial data to the PFD.
(h) Verify that the PFD Screen Format is displayed (if the ADAHRS is performing initialization
then the ADAHRS Initialization screen will replace the attitude sphere). If any of the failure
indications are displayed refer to Chart 2.
(i) Verify that the ADAHRS has completed initialization by observing that the attitude sphere
replaces the ADAHRS Initialization screen. If the ADAHRS has not completed initialization
within 180 seconds after application of power to the ADAHRS refer to Chart 2.
5C21 34-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(j) Apply power to the Navigation Display (ND) (i.e. - EHSI) providing serial data to/from the
PFD.
(k) Apply power to the Radar Altimeter. Perform a functional test on the Radar Altimeter
system and verify that the PFD Rad Alt Indication and Decision Height Annunciation are
displayed correctly.
(l) Apply power to the VOR radio. Perform a functional test on the VOR Radio system and
verify that the PFD Localizer/Glideslope and Backcourse/Localizer Sensing Indications
are displayed correctly.
(m) Apply power to the Marker Beacon system. Perform a functional test on the Marker
Beacon system and verify that the PFD Marker Beacon indications are displayed
correctly.
(n) Apply power to the Autopilot system. Place the Autopilot Master Switch in the Flight
Director position and verify that the flight director bars are displayed correctly.
(o) Press the Baro pushbutton and verify that the barometric correction displays 'STD'. Rotate
the Baro Rotary Control clockwise and verify that the barometric correction increases.
Rotate the Baro Rotary Control counter-clockwise and verify that the barometric
correction decreases.
(p) On the pilot’s side unit only:
1 Press the ADAHRS 2 Select switch to change the data source to ADAHRS No. 2.
Verify that the PFD screen format and the ADAHRS Source warning are displayed
correctly.
2 Press the ADAHRS 2 Select switch again to change the data source back to
ADAHRS No. 1. Verify that the PFD screen format is displayed correctly and the
ADAHRS Source warning has been removed.
(q) On the overhead switch panel, decrease the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify that
the PFD brightness decreases.
(r) On the overhead switch panel, increase the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify that the
PFD brightness increases.
(s) Press the EADI Display Down switch. Verify that the PFD screen blanks and that the PFD
screen format is displayed on the Navigation Display (ND) (i.e. - EHSI) .
(t) Press the EADI Display Down switch again. Verify that the PFD screen format is displayed
on the PFD and that the PFD screen format is removed from the ND.
(3) Removal and Installation
See 39-10-00.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PILOT CO-PILOT
Air Data Air Data
Attitude - Heading Attitude - Heading
Reference Reference
System System
ADAHRS 2
Sel Sw
Primary Altitude Alerter Primary
Flight Display ATC Transponder Flight Display
GPS1 and GPS2
Overspeed Aural Warning Device
Navigation Navigation
Display Display
EADI VOR1 GPS1 GPS2 VOR2 EADI

Display Display
Down Down
Sw Sw
Key
Arinc 429
Analogue/Discrete
Marker Rad Alt DME ADF1 ADF2
Auto Pilot
System (Optional) (Optional) (Optional) (Optional) RS422
Gillam Code
Meggitt EFIS Functional Schematic

Figure 1
5C23 34-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING EADI (i.e. - PFD)
No display visible at power up. +28 VDC power missing. Check wiring & bus voltage.
+28 VDC Return missing. Check wiring.
Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
EADI Display Down mode Check EADI Display Down
selected. switch.
Test mode visible at power up. Stuck Baro pushbutton. Check Baro pushbutton.
PFD failed self test. Replace PFD.
Display brightness does not 28 VDC lighting bus not Check wiring and 28 VDC
change when PFD brightness connected or not functional. lighting bus.
control operated.
Brightness control not functional. Check Brightness control.
Barometric correction does not PFD in test mode. Ensure PFD in mission
change when BARO Rotary operational mode.
control is rotated.
Barometric correction does not PFD in test mode. Ensure PFD in mission
change to standard setting when operational mode.
Baro pushbutton is pressed.
Unable to enter test mode when Airspeed equal to or greater Ensure airspeed is less
Baro pushbutton is pressed. than 40 knots detected. than 40 knots.
Unit not powered off before Ensure unit is powered off
Baro Pushbutton is pressed. before Baro Pushbutton is
pressed.
Baro Pushbutton pressed and Ensure Baro Pushbutton is
held for insufficient time. pressed and held until
initialization page displays.
Test page does not change when PFD in mission operational mode. Ensure PFD in test mode.
Baro Rotary Control is rotated.
Power on self test status on Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Configuration Data page is
indicated as FAIL.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Configuration discrete parity Parity input (Configuration Check configuration
status on Configuration Data Discrete 7) not wired correctly. discrete setting.
page is indicated as FAIL.
Check wiring.
Installation location on Configuration discretes 0 and 1 Check configuration
Configuration Data page incorrect. not wired correctly. discrete setting.
Check wiring.
ADAHRS initialization screen is ADAHRS not completing Perform ADAHRS test.
not removed from the display initialization.
after 3 minutes have elapsed
since ADAHRS power on.
Rad Alt indication and/or Failed Radar Altimeter. Perform Rad Alt test.
decision height annunciation
are not displayed correctly. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Localizer/Glideslope and/or Failed VOR radio. Perform VOR radio test.
Backcourse/Localizer sensing
indications not displayed correctly. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Marker beacon indications Failed marker beacon system. Perform marker beacon
not displayed correctly. system test.
Flight director bars not Failed Autopilot system. Perform Autopilot system
displayed correctly. test.
FD/AP switch Check FD/AP switch and
not functional/wired correctly. wiring.
Full Field Red, Green, Blue, Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
Black, and White pages are
not displayed correctly.
ND Interface Data page shows Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
valid data is not being transmitted.
ND Interface Data page shows RS422 Receive A and B lines Check wiring.
valid data is not being received. are not connected or are wired
incorrectly.
Failed ND. Replace ND.
5D1 34-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ADAHRS Interface Data pages ARINC IN A and B lines are not Check wiring.
show valid data is not being connected or are wired incorrectly.
received.
Failed ADAHRS. Replace ADAHRS.
ADAHRS select switch has no ADAHRS select switch not Check ADAHRS select
effect on the PFD. functional/wired correctly. switch and wiring.
Selecting the EADI Display EADI Display Down switch not Check EADI Display Down
Down switch to EADI Display functional/wired correctly. switch and wiring.
Down does not remove
the PFD display. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
PFD screen format not displayed EADI Display Down switch not Check EADI Display Down
on the PFD when the EADI functional/wired correctly. switch and wiring.
Display Down switch selected
to normal. Failed PFD. Replace PFD.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) [i.e. - Meggitt MAGIC EFIS Navigation Display (ND)]
The Navigation Display (ND) is, like the Meggitt Primary Flight Display (PFD), a microprocessor-
based color, liquid crystal (LCD) display system. Information displayed includes Navigation Data,
Autopilot Data, Radio Tuning, Airspeed, Altitude, Attitude, Vertical Speed, Heading and Instrument
Landing System data. The information is displayed via a series of predefined display formats (HSI,
ARC, MAP). In addition, the ND includes built-in test, performance and health monitoring functions
and display brightness control.
AIRCRAFT, MAY RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. (SEE INTRODUCTION
- SUPPLEMENTARY PUBLICATIONS.)
Descriptions of the operator controls and basic operating modes and screens are in the appropriate
Pilot’s Operating Handbook.
(1) Troubleshooting
See Chart 3. See also Appendix 1 (grid 5K1).
(2) Basic Functional Test
The following test procedure should be performed with the aircraft in a suitable position to
receive valid VOR/ILS/GPS/DME signals. If this is not possible, then use the appropriate test
sets to simulate the signals as required.
CAUTION: IF, DURING THE FOLLOWING TEST, ANY COMPONENT DOES NOT
PRODUCE THE EXPECTED RESULTS, THAT COMPONENT MUST NOT BE
USED IN FLIGHT UNTIL THE PROBLEM IS CORRECTED.
(a) Before applying power, verify proper voltage inputs and ground connections as well as all
system interfaces.
(b) Start the ND in Test Mode by pressing and holding the MNU Pushbutton while applying
power until the Initialization page is shown. Verify that the Initialization page displays
'MERIDIAN NAVIGATION DISPLAY' at the top of the screen and is replaced by the
Configuration Data page after approximately 5 seconds.
(c) Verify that the Configuration Data page Configuration Discrete Parity Status and Power
On Self Test results both show results of Pass. If the result is FAIL, further diagnostic
effort is required to determine if the failed indication is the result of a fault in the wiring, a
faulty ND, or both.
(d) Verify that the Configuration Data page displays the correct installation location (primary
or secondary).
(e) Remove power from the ND to terminate Test Mode. Re-apply power to the ND and start
the display in Mission Operational Mode.
(f) Verify that the ND displays the Initialization page for approximately 5 seconds prior to
displaying the HSI Screen Format. If power has not been applied to the ADAHRS then the
HSI screen format will display the heading failure indication.
(g) Apply power to the Air Data Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) (i.e. - AHRS)
providing serial data to the ND.
(h) Apply power to the Primary Flight Display (PFD) (i.e. - EADI) providing serial data to/from
the ND.
(i) Verify that the HSI Screen Format is displayed and the installation specific defaults as
shown in Chart 4 apply. If any of the failure flags are displayed refer to Chart 3.
(j) Enable the Mission Operational Mode/Rev Mode menu by pressing the bezel mounted
'MNU' button. Verify that the menu is displayed correctly.
5D3 34-20-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING EHSI (i.e. - ND)
No display visible at power up. +28 VDC power missing. Check wiring & bus voltage.
Display powers-up in EADI EADI Display Down mode Check EADI Display Down
Display Down mode. selected. switch.
Test mode visible at power up Stuck MNU button Check MNU button
ND failed self test Replace ND
Display brightness does not 28 VDC lighting bus not Check wiring and 28 VDC
change when Panel LCD’s connected or not functional lighting bus
dimmer switch operated
Panel LCD’s dimmer module Check/replace module
not functional
Panel LCD’s dimmer switch Check/replace switch.
not functional
Failed ND Replace ND
Menu does not appear when Stuck MNU button Check MNU button
MNU button is pressed
Menu cursor does not change Stuck and/or buttons Check and buttons
when and/or buttons
are pressed Failed ND Replace ND
Unable to select menu options Stuck SEL button Check SEL button
when SEL button is pressed
Unable to enter Test mode Airspeed equal to or Ensure airspeed is less
when MNU button is pressed greater than 40 knots than 40 knots
detected
Unit not powered off before Ensure unit is powered off
MNU button is pressed before MNU button is
pressed
MNU button pressed and held Ensure MNU button is
for insufficient time pressed and held until
initialization page displays
Test menu does not change ND in mission operational mode Ensure ND in test mode
when the and/or buttons
are pressed Stuck and/or buttons Check and/or buttons
Unable to select Test pages Stuck SEL button Check SEL button
when the SEL button is pressed
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Barometric setting does not Stuck and/or buttons Check and buttons
change in EADI Display Down
mode when the and/or Failed ND Replace ND
buttons are pressed
Selected CRS does not change Stuck CRS knob Check CRS knob
when CSR knob rotated
Selected HDG does not change Stuck HDG knob Check HDG knob
when HDG knob rotated
Selected CRS does not align Stuck CRS knob Check CRS knob
with present heading when
CSR knob pushed Failed ND Replace ND
Selected HDG does not align Stuck HDG knob Check HDG knob
with present heading when
HDG knob pushed Failed ND Replace ND
Failure flags present on display Equipment supplying relevant Check status of equipment
data to ND failed supplying data to ND
Failed ND Check data on relevant
ND test page
Power on self test status on Failed ND Replace ND
Configuration Data page is
indicated as FAIL
Configuration discrete parity Parity input (Configuration Check configuration
status on Configuration Data Discrete 7) not wired correctly discrete setting
page is indicated as FAIL
Check wiring
Installation location on Configuration discretes 0 and 1 Check configuration
Configuration Data page incorrect not wired correctly discrete setting
Check wiring
PFD Interface Data Page shows RS422 Receive and/or Check wiring
valid data is not being Transmit lines are not connected
received/transmitted or wired correctly
Failed PFD Replace PFD
ADAHRS Interface Data pages ARINC IN A and B Bus 1 lines Check wiring
show valid data is not being are not connected or are wired
received incorrectly
Failed ADAHRS Replace ADAHRS
5D5 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NAV Interface Data Page shows ARINC In A and B Bus 2 lines Check wiring
valid data is not being Received are not connected or are wired
incorrectly
Failed Nav radio Replace Nav radio
GPS Interface Data Pages show ARINC In A and B Bus 4A and/or Check wiring
valid data is not being Received 4B lines are not connected or are
wired incorrectly
Failed GPS Receiver Replace GPS Receiver
Cross Side Input Interface Data ARINC In A and B Bus 3 lines Check wiring
Page shows valid data is not are not connected or are wired
being Received incorrectly
Failed cross-side ND Test cross-side ND
Cross Side Output Interface ARINC Out A and B Bus 2 lines Check wiring
Data Page shows valid data is are not connected or are
not being Transmitted wired incorrectly
NAV/GPS Output Interface ARINC Out A and B Bus 1 lines Check wiring
Data Page shows valid data is are not connected or are
not being transmitted wired incorrectly
Analog Interface Data Page Failed ND Replace ND
shows valid data is not being
Received or Transmitted Failed Autopilot Input Perform Autopilot Test
Failed DME Input Perform DME Test
Failed Audio Panel Input Perform Audio Panel Test
Failed Rad Alt Input Perform Rad Alt Test
Failed ADF Input Perform ADF Test
Failed Autopilot outputs Check ND inputs
Discrete Interface Data Page Failed ND Replace ND
shows valid data is not being
Received or Transmitted Failed Autopilot Input Perform Autopilot Test
Failed DME Input Perform DME Test
Failed Rad Alt Input Perform Rad Alt Test
Failed DAU output Check GPS inputs
Failed Autopilot output Check Nav inputs
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
NAVIGATION DISPLAY (ND) DEFAULT SETTINGS
Pilot Co-Pilot
Screen Format HSI HSI
Element Setting
CDI VOR1 VOR2
RMI1 OFF OFF
RMI2 OFF OFF
RANGE 2.5NM 2.5NM
GPS SEL GPS1 GPS2
APORTS Disabled Disabled
NAVAIDS Disabled Disabled
WPTS Disabled Disabled
NDB Disabled Disabled
Selected Heading Last Known Setting Last Known Setting
Selected Course /
Desired Track Last Known Setting Last Known Setting
Barometric Setting Last Known Setting Last Known Setting
CHART 5
NAVIGATION DISPLAY (ND) COLOR CODING
Display Parameter
Color Mission Operational Mode EADI Display Down Mode
White A/C Symbol, Scales, Range
Rings, Digital Readouts, Scales, Digital Readouts
RMI1 Pointer and Annunciation
Grey N/A Scale Tapes
A/C Symbol N/A Aircraft Symbol, Lubber Line
Amber Failures and Annunciation's Stall Warning,
Failures and Annunciation's
Red N/A Airframe Limits
Sky N/A Sky
Ground N/A Ground and Radar Altimeter
ground reference
Green N/A Baro Correction
Magenta Deviation Bar, Sel HDG/CRS Flight Director Command
Bugs, CDI Pointer and Annunciation Bars and Deviation Pointers
Cyan RMI2 Pointer and Annunciation N/A
5D7 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(k) Ensure that the Nav Radios are selected off. Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL”
buttons to navigate through the menu, selecting RMI1 to display VOR1 and RMI2 to
display VOR2. Verify that the RMI1 and RMI2 second level menus are displayed correctly
and the RMI1 and RMI2 source annunciations match the selections.
(l) Verify that the RMI1, RMI2 and CDI source annunciations are amber in color. Verify that
the associated frequency annunciations are replaced with amber dashes. Verify that both
RMI pointers and the CDI pointer are removed from the display.
(m) Apply power to the Nav radios. Select valid VOR frequencies on the Nav Radios and verify
that the RMI1, RMI2 and CDI source and frequency annunciations are displayed in the
correct colors (see Chart 5). Verify that the ND displayed frequencies match the Nav radio
frequencies (i.e. RMI1 frequency matches Nav Radio 1 and RMI2 frequency matches Nav
Radio 2. The CDI frequency should match the currently selected CDI source frequency).
Verify that both RMI pointers and the CDI pointer are displayed correctly.
(n) Select valid ILS frequencies on the Nav Radios and verify that the RMI1, RMI2 and CDI
source annunciations display VOR1, VOR2 and ILS1/ILS2 (dependent on current selected
CDI source) respectively in the correct colors (see Chart 5). Verify that the ND displayed
frequencies match the Nav radio frequencies (i.e. RMI1 frequency matches Nav Radio 1
and RMI2 frequency matches Nav Radio 2. The CDI frequency should match the currently
selected CDI source frequency). Verify that both RMI pointers are removed and the CDI
pointer is displayed correctly.
(o) Apply power to the GPS Receivers. Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to
navigate through the menu, selecting RMI1 and RMI2 to display GPS and CDI (verify that
the CDI second level menu is displayed correctly) to display GPS (GPS1 or GPS2 will be
available dependent on GPS source selection). Verify that the RMI1, RMI2 and CDI
source annunciations reflect the selections.
(p) Refer to the GPS Installation Manual and display the self test page on the on-side GPS.
Verify that the applicable ND parameters display the correct self test values as listed in
the GPS Installation Manual during the display of the self test page.
(q) Verify that the GPS source annunciation displays the currently selected GPS source in
white. Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to navigate through the menu,
selecting the GPS source to the off-side GPS. Verify that the GPS second level menu is
displayed correctly. Verify that the GPS source annunciation displays the currently
selected GPS source in white.
(r) Refer to the GPS Installation Manual and display the self test page on the off-side GPS.
Verify that the applicable ND parameters display the correct self test values as listed in
the GPS Installation Manual during the display of the self test page.
(s) Press the EADI Display Down switch to select EADI Display Down mode and verify that
the ND displays the PFD (i.e. - EADI) screen format. Verify that the PFD screen blanks.
(t) Apply power to the Radar Altimeter. Perform a functional test on the Rad Alt system and
verify that the ND Rad Alt Indication and Decision Height Annunciation are displayed
correctly.
(u) Perform a functional test on the VOR Radio system and verify that the ND Localizer /
Glideslope and Backcourse / Localizer Sensing indications are displayed correctly.
(v) Apply power to the Marker Beacon system. Perform a functional test on the Marker
Beacon system and verify that the ND Marker Beacon indications are displayed correctly.
(w) Apply power to the Autopilot system. Place the Autopilot Master Switch in the Flight
Director position and verify that the flight director bars are displayed correctly.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(x) Press the bezel mounted “” button once and verify that the barometric correction
increases by 0.01inHg/1hPa. Press and hold the bezel mounted “” button and verify that
the barometric correction continuously increases in increments of 0.01inHg/1hPa until the
button is released or the maximum barometric correction is reached.
(y) Press the bezel mounted “” button once and verify that the barometric correction
decreases by 0.01inHg/1hPa. Press and hold the bezel mounted “” button and verify
that the barometric correction continuously decreases in increments of 0.01inHg/1hPa
until the button is released or the minimum barometric correction is reached.
(z) Press the ADAHRS 2 Select switch to select ADAHRS 2 and verify that the PFD screen
format and the ADAHRS Source warning are displayed correctly.
(aa) Press the ADAHRS 2 Select switch again to select ADAHRS 1 and verify that the PFD
screen format is displayed correctly and the ADAHRS Source warning has been removed.
(bb) Press the EADI Display Down switch to shift back to normal mode and verify that the HSI
screen format is displayed on the ND. Verify that the PFD screen format displays on the
PFD.
(cc) Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to navigate through the menu,
selecting the Arc screen format. Verify that the Arc screen format is displayed correctly.
(dd) Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to navigate through the menu,
selecting the Map screen format. Verify that the Map screen format is displayed correctly.
(ee) Use the bezel mounted “”, “” and “SEL” buttons to navigate through the menu,
selecting the HSI screen format. Rotate the CRS Rotary Control clockwise and verify that
the selected CRS pointer rotates clockwise around the compass card and the selected
course digital readout increases and mirrors the pointer heading. Rotate the CRS Rotary
Control anti-clockwise and verify that the selected CRS pointer rotates anti-clockwise
around the compass card and the selected course digital readout decreases and mirrors
the pointer heading. Push the CRS Pushbutton and verify that the selected course pointer
and digital readout align to the current aircraft heading.
(ff) Rotate the HDG Rotary Control clockwise and verify that the selected HDG bug rotates
clockwise around the compass card and the selected heading digital readout increases
and mirrors the bug heading. Rotate the HDG Rotary Control anti-clockwise and verify
that the selected HDG bug rotates anti-clockwise around the compass card and the
selected heading digital readout decreases and mirrors the bug heading. Push the HDG
Pushbutton and verify that the selected heading bug and digital readout align to the
current aircraft heading.
(gg) On the overhead switch panel, decrease the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify that
the ND brightness decreases.
(hh) On the overhead switch panel, increase the Panel LCD’s dimmer switch and verify that the
ND brightness increases.
See 39-10-00.
5D9 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) [i.e. - Attitude Heading Reference
System (AHRS)].
The two (2) ADAHRS units are located on the aft equipment shelf behind the cabin rear closeout
panel.
NOTE: When installing an ADAHRS unit; first, level the airplane per 8-20-00; and then, use
NAS 1149FN816P washers as required to level the ADAHRS unit.
(1) Magnetic Heading Compensation / Calibration
Perform the Magnetic Heading Compensation/Calibration Procedure in Magnetic Heading
Systems, Meggitt EFIS Installation, below, whenever an ADAHRS unit is installed or replaced.
NOTE: Re-calibrate both Pilot and Copilot systems at the same time, even if only one unit
was installed or replaced.
(2) Ground Test Procedure
This test procedure (included as Appendix 1 - grid 7K1) verifies the integrity and accuracy of
the air data and pitot-static systems and shows that these systems comply with the applicable
airworthiness regulations. Perform this procedure:
(a) each 24-months,
(b) to proof test the static system in accordance with FAR 23.1325 each time any connections
in static system are opened for maintenance, or
(c) following installation or maintenance on either ADAHRS unit, the primary flight display
(PFD), or the transponder Mode C interface.
3. Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Avidyne Entegra
RENDER THE AIRCRAFT UNAIRWORTHY. SEE INTRODUCTION - SUPPLEMENTARY
PUBLICATIONS.
The Avidyne FlightMax Entegra Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) is installed in S/N’s 4697198,
and 4697216 and up. See 28-40-00, 34-10-00, and 77-10-00 for more info.
A. Description (See Figures 2 and 5.)
This system uses three large 10.4-inch diagonal, high-resolution, sunlight-readable full color
displays (PFD and MFD), to provide primary flight and engine information as well as a wide variety
of other data. Standard primary flight instruments (i.e. - airspeed, electric attitude indicator, and
altimeter) provide redundancy.
The EFIS installation consists of the following components: Primary Flight Display (PFD),
Multifunction Display (MFD), Data Acquisition Unit (DAU), mini-DAU, and associated sensors, and
Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assembly.
B. Maintenance
The Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) published by Avidyne provide the necessary
information for maintaining this system as installed in Piper airplanes, except as noted below.
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDBY
INSTRUMENTS
DC-50
PFD
MFD
PFD
INSTALL MFD WITH 4 CAPTIVE DZUS FASTENERS
105121 L
INSTALL PFD(S) WITH 4 CAPTIVE SCREWS (TORQUE - 31 TO 32 IN. LBS.)
BLACK WIRES BLACK WIRES

MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY TO EXISTING
TO EXISTING
GROUND BLOCK GROUND
CONNECTORS BLOCK
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY P551 CONNECTORS
P7322
J7322
P530
J7321
P7321
J7312
J530
P7312 P7311
J7332
J7311
J7331
J730
P730
XMJ1 P730
P7332 P7331
P551
P552
INDUSTRIES
POSITRONICS
INDUSTRIES
POSITRONICS
P3401
R
P3402
COM
P43022 COM
P43021
P43012
GPS
P43011
P1061
GPS P6502
GS NAV GS
P43062 NAV
P43061 P6501
P4502
P3302 P3301
POSITRONICS
INDUSTRIES
-37
MA
DCM
DC
A-37
P501 VIEW LOOKING AFT
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
TO TOP COMM ANT.

DC COUPLER HARNESS
FWD
TO MFD
DC-50 ANTENNA COUPLER TO GNS-430 #2
Avidyne EFIS Component Locator Effectivity

Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 2) with Avidyne Entegra
5D11 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL (REF)
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT (DAU)
STALL AND GEAR WARN

HORN ASSY (REF)
DE-ICE TIMER
(REF)
DEICE LIGHT
(REF)
F.S.
MINI
100.00
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
(DAU)
ADF
VOLTAGE
CONVERTER DME TRANSCEIVER (REF)
(REF)
WX-500 STORMSCOPE PROCESSOR (REF)
KMH-820 PROCESSOR (REF)
F.S.
265.80 105123 A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
(ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHELF)
Effectivity Avidyne EFIS Component Locator

PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Primary Flight Display (PFD) (PIR-PPS60217, Rev. C)
Use 700-00006-0XX PFD & 700-00011-000 Mag/OAT ICA, Avidyne Document No. AVPFD-
174, latest revision, with the following exceptions:
(a) In para 6, Troubleshooting Information, in the chart where it says “OAT (Optional),” cross
out “optional.” The OAT is standard in the Piper installation.
(b) In para 7.2 and Figure 7, where the standard Avidyne installation describes alignment
pins and retaining clips on the sides of the PFD, the Piper installation uses a single
alignment pin on the top of the PFD engaging a slot in the upper rear cross bracket.
(c) In para 7.5.2.2, in the “Main RS232 Configuration Page” table, for CHNL 3 under GNS-430
No 2, both Input and Output should read “Crossfill” instead of “Off.”
(d) In para 7.5.4.3, below the heading “Autopilot Unit - STEC Autopilots,” insert the following:
“If the PFD is replaced, the IRU calibration and Magnetometer calibration must be
completed before continuing with the following steps.”
(2) Multifunction Display (MFD) (PIR-PPS60216, Rev. C)
Use 700-00004-0XX-() Multifunction Display ICA, Avidyne Document No. AVMFD-167, with the
following exceptions:
In para 2, items 7 and 8 are standard in the Piper installation.
(a) Replace 7.3.4, Lightning Sensor Interface and Setup, with the following:
1 From the maintenance page, depress LSK (L3) to access the Lightning Set-up page.
2 Using the right outer concentric knob to select the configuration field and the right
inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration. Configure the Lightning
Setup page for the following conditions:
Sensor: WX-500
Operating Mode: Weather
Port: RS232 3 – (Lightning Default)
Stabilization type: Use Map Heading / Track
Enable lightning ahead: box CHECKED
Antenna on top: box NOT CHECKED
3 Press SAVE button.
(b) Replace 7.3.10, Engine Sensor, with the following:
1 From the maintenance page, depress LSK (L4) to access the Engine Set-up page.
inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration. Configure the Engine Setup
page for the following conditions:
Aircraft Model: PA-46-500P (Meridian)
DAU ARINC Port: ARINC 429 RX 4
Electrical Rudder Trim Port: RS232 2
Fuel Quantity Port: RS232 4
Fuel Units: “Pounds”
3 When setting up a MFD for the first time only the following set up box appears.
"Select ACFT Model and Port (s)" Press "Resync".
5D13 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Replace 7.6.3.1, TAWS Setup, with the following:

1 From the maintenance page, depress LSK (L5) to access the TAWS Set-up page.
inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration. Configure the TAWS Setup
Sensor: Honeywell EGPWS
ARINC 429 Port: ARINC 429 TX 2
ARINC 453 Port: ARINC 453 2 – (TAWS Default)
Altitude Annunciation on: box CHECKED
(d) Replace 7.3.8, Map Heading, with the following:
1 From the maintenance page, depress LSK (R1) to access the MAP Heading page.
inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration; configure the Map Heading
Map Heading: FMS/GPS
(e) Replace 7.3.7, Radar Sensor; and 7.3.12.7, Radar Setup, with the following:
Setup
If configuring a replacement MFD, start with step (a). In all other cases start with step (f).
1 From the maintenance page, depress LSK (R3) to access the RADAR Set-up page.
inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration.
3 From the RADAR Set-up Page select the following:
Sensor: AlliedSignal ART-2000
ARINC 429 Port: ARINC 429 Tx 1
ARINC 453 Port: ARINC 453 1
4 Press SAVE. (After pressing SAVE, MFD goes to maintenance Setup Page)
5 From the Maintenance Setup Page, press Restart System.
6 Re-enter Maintenance Setup Page, depress LSK R3 to access the RADAR Setup
Page.
inner concentric knob to select the desired configuration. Configure the Radar Setup
Radar Sensor: AlliedSignal ART-2000
Park Position: Centered
Beam Width: 7.0 °
Beam Height: 7.0 °
All boxes CHECKED, except “Disable Stabilization” is NOT CHECKED.
Press SAVE. (After pressing save, MFD goes to Maintenance Setup Page)
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Calibration
The R/T Configuration Module must be configured using the Allied Signal KPA 900
Configuration ModuleProgrammer Kit (Part Number 050-03311-0002) in conjunction with
a personal computer. See the configuration module user data for detailed setup
instructions. Follow the instructions for the programmer.
Perform radar R/T calibration as follows: Reference AlliedSignal (Bendix/King) 2000
Radar Sensor installation manual.
Antenna Clearance Check
1 From the Maintenance Set Up Page Select RADAR.
2 Set the radar park position to Full Up. Enter SAVE.
3 Restart the MFD. (SYSTEM) (R5)
4 From the Radar Page, set the Radar Function to SBY. (L3)
5 Set the Radar Mode to GND. (R1) Set KNOB to gain (L5)
6 Reduce the gain until the gain indicator shows the minimum setting.
7 Set the Antenna Tilt to full Up (U 15.0)
8 Set Range to 240 NM.
9 From the Aux Page, enter Maintenance Mode, as described in Section 6.3, "Using
the Maintenance Mode Page" on page 25.
10 Press "Radar Setup".
11 Press "Calibration" to display the RT CALIBRATION DATA page. Upon display of the
RT CALIBRATION DATA page with the system in calibration mode, all fault fields will
flash briefly. This verifies that the system is in calibration mode.
12 Starting at -30 , slowly adjust the gain control downward until the antenna clearance
scan begins. This should take place at a gain value no lower that -26. The antenna
will move to each of the extreme positions to determine that there is no interference
with antenna movement and all scan motors are working properly.
Calibrate Radar Pitch and Roll.
1 Use the right outer knob to set ROLL TRIM to 0 degrees.
2 Calibrate AHRS ARINC 429 Pitch Offset.
Level aircraft.
Adjust the GAIN buttons for a GAIN POT /2 setting to 11- or 12-.
Set the PITCH ANGLE field to 0.0 +/- 1.0 degrees.
To increment the value of the PITCH ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change the
TILT SETTING to between 5 and UP. When the TILT SETTING is set to between 5
and 10 UP, the value of the PITCH ANGLE field will slowly increase.
To decrement the value of the PITCH ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change the
TILT SETTING to between 5 and 10 DOWN. When the TILT SETTING is set to
between 5 and 10 DOWN, the value of the PITCH ANGLE field will slowly decrease.
When the desired setting is reached, quickly adjust the TILT SETTING to above 10
UP to lock in the setting.
5D15 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 21
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Calibrate AHRS ARINC 429 Roll Offset.

Verify that the aircraft is level.
Adjust the GAIN buttons for a GAIN POT setting to 7- or 9-.
Set the ROLL ANGLE field to 0.0 +/- 1.0 degrees.
To increment the value of the ROLL ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change the
TILT SETTING to between 5 and 10 UP. When the TILT SETTING is set to between 5
and 10 UP, the value of the PITCH ANGLE field will slowly increase.
To decrement the value of the ROLL ANGLE, use the left inner knob to change the
TILT SETTING to between 5 and 10 DOWN. When the TILT SETTING is set to
between 5 and 10 DOWN, the value of the ROLL ANGLE field will slowly decrease.
When the desired setting is reached, quickly adjust the TILT SETTING to above 10
UP to lock in the setting.
4 Save Configuration:
Adjust the GAIN controls for a GAIN POT /2 setting to 4- or 5-.
The FAULTS field will display GYRO.
Set the TILT SETTING to 15.0 DOWN. The fault fields will flash indicating that your
settings are being saved. If the save procedure is successful the GYRO fault will
disappear and the azimuth count will cycle through its entire number range.
NOTE: Transmitter FAULTS with the Radar OFF.
If the GYRO fault remains, set the TILT to 0 and repeat the previous step.
Enter EXIT.
After the Calibration is completed then enter SAVE.
Return to the RADAR Setup Page and change Park Position to Centered and SAVE.
(f) See Chart 6 for Port Information.
Chart 6
PORT INFORMATION PAGE
Port Used By Port Used By

RS232 1 Broadcast ARINC 429 TX1 Radar
RS232 2 Engine ARINC 429 TX2 TAWS
RS232 3 Lightening ARINC 429 TX3
RS232 4 Engine ARINC 429 TX4
RS232 5 Datalink ARINC 453-1 Radar
RS232 6 Datalink ARINC 453-2 TAWS
ARINC 429 RX1 GPS A
ARINC 429 RX2 GPS B
ARINC 429 RX3 Traffic
ARINC 429 RX4 PFD Link
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE VIEW A
BRASS SCREW (MS 35214-27)

BRASS WASHER (AN960-B6)
(3 EACH)
FAIRING - DORSAL
FLUX DETECTOR
LH #1
UP
FLUX DETECTOR
RH #2
FORWARD
F.S.
282.372
W.L.
91.446
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD (LEFT HAND SIDE)
Flux Detector Installation

Figure 3
5D17 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 23
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)

(a) The DAU installed with the Avidyne Entegra EFIS is the same unit used in the Meggitt
EFIS installation. Maintenance is on condition. Configuration/calibration procedures are in
28-40-00 and 77-10-00.
(b) Removal and Installation
The DAU is mounted underneath the instrument panel on the right aft side of the forward
pressure bulkhead (F.S. 100.00) (see Figure 2).
(4) Mini-Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)
(a) The mini-DAU provides the MFD with the data required to populate the Electrical and
Rudder Trim sections of the MFD Engine Page display. Maintenance is on condition only.
(b) Removal and Installation
The mini-DAU is mounted on the right side of the upper aft equipment shelf at F.S. 265.80
(see Figure 2). Remove the rear seats (if desired) and aft cabin closeout panel for access.
(5) Magnetometer/OAT Sensor Assembly
See information under Primary Flight Display, above. Removal and installation instructions are
provided under “Magnetic Heading Systems, Avidyne Entegra EFIS Installation,” below.
C. Component Locator
See Figures 2 and 5.
4. Magnetic Heading Systems
A. Meggitt EFIS Installation
(1) Flux Detectors (See Figure 3.)
Two flux detectors are used to provide heading data to the ADAHRS. They are installed in the
leading edge of the vertical fin.
CAUTION: PERFORM MAGNETIC HEADING COMPENSATION / CALIBRATION, BELOW,
WHENEVER A FLUX DETECTOR IS CHANGED.
(a) Removal
1 Remove the dorsal fairing to expose the flux detectors.
2 Disconnect the wiring harness(es) from the top of the flux detector(s) to be removed.
3 Unscrew and remove the three brass screws and washers and remove the flux
detector.
(b) Installation
CAUTION:THE FLUX DETECTORS ARE SECURED TO THE MOUNTING BRACKET
WITH BRASS SCREWS. ENSURE ONLY BRASS SCREWS ARE USED
WHEN REINSTALLING.
1 Place the flux detector into position on its mounting bracket and secure with brass
screws and washers (3 ea.)
2 Connect wiring harness to the connector on top of the flux detector.
3 Seal the connector backshell and base (see Figure 3, view A) with DOW Corning 4
Electrical Insulating Compound.
4 Reinstall the dorsal fairing.
NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used when reinstalling vertical fin dorsal fairing
over flux detector.
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 7
ADAHRS MAGNETIC HEADING COMPENSATION / CALIBRATION INDEXING DATA
Aircraft Serial No.: Aircraft Registration No.:

Pilot’s Side EFIS Co-Pilot’s Side EFIS
Error (+/-) Heading Compass Rose Heading Error (+/-)
N
E
S
W
= Total Error Total Error =
(N+E+S+W) (N+E+S+W)
= Index Error Index Error =
(Total Error ÷ 4) (Total Error ÷ 4)
CHART 8
ADAHRS MAGNETIC HEADING COMPENSATION / CALIBRATION VERIFICATION
Pilot-Side Heading Compass Rose Co-Pilot-Side Heading

N
30
60
E
120
150
S
210
240
W
300
330
5D19 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 25
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Magnetic Heading Compensation / Calibration (PIR-PPS 60189, Rev. D.)
The two (2) Air Data & Attitude Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) units mounted on the
aft equipment shelf provide the other components of the Meggitt Magic EFIS system with
magnetic heading data derived from two flux detectors installed in the leading edge of the
vertical fin. The ADAHRS units should be swung (checked for changes in deviation) whenever
any ADAHRS unit, flux detector, or cabin recirculation blower is changed, and at least once a
year.
Use the following procedure to compensate and calibrate the magnetic heading indication
portion of the Meggitt Magic EFIS installation:
NOTE: Always re-calibrate both the Pilot and Copilot EFIS Systems whenever this procedure
is performed.
(a) Flux Detector Indexing
1 The aircraft should be configured in the following manner:
Generator/Alternator - ON Avionics - ON
Day/Night Switch - DAY Navigation Lights - ON
Strobe Lights - ON Pitot Heat - OFF
Windshield Heat - OFF Air conditioning - ON
Cabin Blower Fan - LOW Vent Blower - OFF
CAUTION: THE TEST CABLE P/N 101453-002 IS REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. NO
OTHER TEST CABLE IS AUTHORIZED. SEE FIGURE 6.
2 Install the ADAHRS interface test cable (Piper P/N 101453-002) between the
ADAHRS and the existing production harness assembly. Verify that the ADAHRS test
cable calibration switch is in the open (off) position.
3 Initialize the Navigation Display (ND) in the "TEST MODE" by applying power with
the "MNU" button held in the depressed position until the initialization page is
displayed.
4 Select the ADAHRS interface test page 2 from the Navigation Display (ND) menu
selection. The ADAHRS must be in the "INITIALIZATION" mode for the indexing
procedure.
5 Place the ADAHRS interface test cable calibration switch in the closed (calibration)
position. Ensure that the heading system flag comes into view on the PFD replacing
the heading scale.
6 Position the aircraft on the NORTH heading of the compass rose and record the
indicated “MAGHDG” as displayed on the ND. Record both pilot and copilot side
heading indications in Chart 7. (This is the raw data output from the flux values.)
Repeat this step for EAST, SOUTH and WEST headings.
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7 After recording the above heading information, calculate the index heading errors in
Chart 7. Refer to Figure 4 to calculate errors. The following logic applies to
calculating heading errors:
For N, if indication is +, then error is +.
For N, if indication is -, then error is -.
For E, if indication is less than 90 then error is -.
For E, if indication is greater then 90, then error is +.
For S, if indication is less than 180, then error is -.
For S, if indication is greater than 180, then error is +.
For W, if indication is less then -90, then error is -.
For W, if indication is greater then -90, then error is +.
Add up the errors for both pilot and copilot (Total Error) side and enter the sum in
Chart 7. Divide the Total Error by 4 and enter in Chart 7. The result is the “Index
Error” of the flux valve.
N
8 If the index error is greater than 1 degree,
loosen the flux detector and adjust out the index - +
error by rotating the flux valve.
9 Repeat steps (6) through (8), above, until the + -
index error is less than 1 degree.
W E
10 Upon achieving an index error of less than one
degree, ensure that the differences in raw data
- +
errors for the flux detectors at each respective + -
cardinal heading are less than three degrees
between the two EFIS Systems, Pilot and
Copilot. Additionally, the raw data errors
S
between reciprocal cardinal headings, N to S Index Heading Error Logic
and E to W, should also be less than or equal to Figure 4
three degrees. Repeating the indexing process
in a different direction, ex. +1 direction to -1 direction, may decrease the reciprocal
heading errors. If not, the flux detector must be replaced. It is highly desirable that
the index errors on pilot and copilot side be in the same direction. (Both positive or
both negative.)
NOTE: Upon completion of flux detector indexing procedure, apply torque stripe to
each of the flux detector mounting screws.
11 This completes indexing of the flux values.
(b) Heading System Calibration / Compensation
The heading system calibration / compensation should be performed upon completion of
the flux detector indexing, above, and using the same aircraft configuration specified in
the flux detector indexing procedure, above.
1 Place the Navigation Display (ND) in the normal or mission operational mode (normal
power-up).
2 With the ADAHRS test cable calibration switch in the closed (calibration) position,
slowly taxi the aircraft in two complete 360-degree turns. The direction of the turn
does not matter; however, a minimum time of 1 minute for 360 degree turn (two
minutes for the full 720 degrees) is required for the calibration process. The slow turn
rate permits the ADAHRS to generate more data point samples for constructing the
compensation curve. Make sure the turns are continued until the heading flag is
replaced by normal heading indication.
5D21 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 27
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Magnetometer / OAT Sensor Assemblies

PAGE 28
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Upon completing the two turns, the ADAHRS will automatically disengage from the
calibration mode, and enter the normal / operational mode.
4 Place the ADAHRS test cable calibration switch in the open (off) position and
perform a complete heading system swing. A settling time of 2 minutes must be used
at each heading to ensure heading stabilization. After 2 minutes of settling, record
the indicated heading against the known compass rose heading for all twelve
compass rose points in Chart 8. The heading system error should not exceed 3
degrees on any compass point.
5 Upon completion, remove test cable.
B. Avidyne Entegra EFIS Installation
(1) Magnetometers
In S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up, when equipped with the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS,
two Magnetometer / OAT Sensor Assemblies (Mag/OAT) feed magnetic heading information to
the Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) and the Multifunction Display (MFD). The Mag/OAT’s are
mounted under the dorsal fairing atop the aft fuselage at F.S. 282.372. See Figure 5.
NOTE: The OAT sensors in the Mag/OAT assemblies are not used. See Outside Air
Temperature in 34-10-00.
(a) Removal
1 Remove the dorsal fairing to expose the magnetometers.
2 Disconnect the wiring harness(es) from the aft fuselage harness.
3 Unscrew the three screws securing the OAT probe mounting plate to the mounting
bracket.
4 Remove the OAT probe mounting plate and unscrew and remove the OAT probe
nut(s) from the bottom of the mounting plate and remove the OAT probe(s).
5 Unscrew and remove the three brass screws and washers securing the
magnetometer to its mounting bracket and remove the magnetometer(s).
(b) Installation
CAUTION: THE MAGNETOMETERS ARE SECURED TO THE MOUNTING BRACKET
WITH BRASS SCREWS. ENSURE ONLY BRASS SCREWS ARE USED
WHEN REINSTALLING.
1 Place the magnetometer(s) into position on its mounting bracket, with the arrow on
the magnetometer pointing forward, and secure with brass screws and washers (3
ea).
2 Place the OAT probe(s) into position on its mounting plate and secure with nut(s)
from bottom.
3 Place OAT probe mounting plate into position on mounting bracket and secure with
brass screws and washers (3 ea.)
4 Connect wiring harness(es) to the aft fuselage harness.
5 Reinstall the dorsal fairing.
NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used when reinstalling vertical fin dorsal fairing
over flux detector.
5D23 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 29
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) PFD - Magnetometer Calibration Procedure: (PIR-PPS60217-1, Rev. A.)
This procedure is done using a bore sight reference compass and 2 technicians. With the
"Calibration" Tab selected perform the Magnetometer (MAG) Calibration by pressing LSK L2,
labeled "Perform Mag Cal" and continue as follows:
NOTE: A hand-held bore sight reference compass is required for this procedure.
NOTE: LSK L1 "Perform IRU Mx" and LSK L3 "Perform ADU Cal" are to be performed by
Avidyne Service Technicians only. These functions are for bench test only.
(a) Apply external power to the aircraft. This allows the PFDs to align while conserving the
battery for the remaining calibration procedure.
(b) Allow the pilot and copilot PFDs to align (approximately 3 minutes) until the ADAHRS
countdown timer expires and the Gyro Warm-up box is removed from view Aircraft in
“level flight attitude”
NOTE: The PFD countdown timer might automatically restart its count before the
countdown expires. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with the PFD.
(c) Allow an additional 10 minutes in the aligned state to ensure complete stability.
(d) Place Battery Master Switch “ON”.
(e) Remove external power from the aircraft.
(f) Position the aircraft in an area located away from metal structures and magnetic
interference such as that caused by underground power lines, etc.
(g) Using the bore sight compass, align the aircraft to a heading of 360° +/- 1°.
(h) Enter the System Setup mode on the pilot and copilot PFDs as follows:
1 Apply power to all the sensors that interface with the PFD, including the Garmin
GNS-430 radios and S-TEC 1500 Autopilot. (Battery Master Switch “On” or External
Power applied and Radio Master Switch “On”.)
2 The system will begin its normal start-up sequence. Simultaneously press and hold
the top left (L1) and third down from top left (L3) Line Select Keys (LSK) until the
countdown timer in the lower left corner of the display (adjacent to the (LSK) L4 Line
Select Key) indicates zero (0).
3 At the end of the displayed countdown clock, the System Set-up Page will appear.
(i) Press the “Perform Mag Cal” LSK (L2).
(j) Follow the directions on the “Magnetometer Calibration page” (press the “Calibrate
Heading” button and wait until “Done” is displayed).
(k) Align the aircraft to each of the remaining 11 consecutive 30° headings using the same
steps used to align the aircraft to the 360° heading and press the “Calibrate Heading” LSK
(R4) at each of these alignment points after satisfactory alignment is achieved.
(l) At the final alignment point (330°), remain stationary until “Done” is displayed. This could
take up to one minute as data from the 12 calibration points is loaded into the PFDs.
(m) When completed, this message appears:
“MAG CAL COMPLETE – YOU MUST CYCLE POWER ON THE PFD IN ORDER FOR
THE MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION TO TAKE EFFECT”
CYCLE POWER BY PULLING THE FOLLOWING CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
MAIN BUS-“PILOT PFD” & “CO-PILOT PFD”
NON ESSENTIAL BUS-“PFD/MFD POWER CONVERTER”
AVIONICS 1 BUS - “PILOT PFD”
AVIONICS 2 BUS – “CO-PILOT PFD”
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before applying power.
PAGE 30
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(n) Verify the calibration by aligning the aircraft with consecutive 90° headings, starting with
360°. Use the same alignment procedure as before and view the digital heading display
on the pilot and copilot PFDs at each of these headings (360°, 90°, 180°, and 270°).
(o) The magnetometer calibration is now complete.
(3) PFD - Magnetometer Calibration Alternate Procedure: (PIR-PPS60217-1, Rev. A.)
This procedure is done using the Compass Rose and Engine Run. With the "Calibration" Tab
selected perform the Magnetometer (MAG) Calibration by pressing LSK L2, labeled "Perform
Mag Cal" and continue as follows:
(a) Perfor m nor mal engine star t and tur n on Avionics Master if needed for taxi
communications.
(b) Remain stationary and allow the pilot and copilot PFDs to align (approximately 3 minutes)
until the ADAHRS countdown timer expires and the Gyro Warm-up box is removed from
the PFD screen.
NOTE: The PFD countdown timer might automatically restart its count before the
countdown expires. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with the PFD.
(c) Allow the system 10 additional minutes in the aligned state to ensure complete stability.
(d) Taxi to the compass rose with a technician to act as a spotter to aid in the alignment.
(e) Enter the System Setup mode on the PFDs as follows:
1 Apply power to all the sensors that interface with the PFD, including the Garmin
GNS-430 radios and S-TEC 1500 Autopilot. (Battery Master Switch “On” or External
Power applied and Radio Master Switch “On”.)
2 The system will begin its normal start-up sequence. Simultaneously press and hold
the top left (L1) and third down from top left (L3) Line Select Keys (LSK) until the
countdown timer in the lower left corner of the display (adjacent to the (LSK) L4 Line
Select Key) indicates zero (0).
3 At the end of the displayed countdown clock, the System Set-up Page will appear.
(f) Press the “Perform Mag Cal” LSK (L1).
(g) Align the aircraft with magnetic north on the compass rose with the assistant to achieve
+/- 1° accuracy.
(h) Follow the directions on the magnetometer calibration page and press “Calibrate Heading”
LSK (R4) and wait until “Done” is displayed.
(i) Align the aircraft to each of the remaining 11 consecutive 30° headings using the same
steps to achieve the 360° heading alignment and press “Calibrate Heading” LSK (R4) at
each of these points when satisfactory alignment is achieved.
(j) At the final alignment point (330°), remain stationary until “Done” is displayed. This could
take up to one minute as data from the 12 calibration points is loaded into the PFDs.
(k) When completed, this message appears:
“MAG CAL COMPLETE – YOU MUST CYCLE POWER ON THE PFD IN ORDER FOR
THE MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION TO TAKE EFFECT”
CYCLE POWER BY PULLING THE FOLLOWING CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
MAIN BUS-“PILOT PFD” & “CO-PILOT PFD”
NON ESSENTIAL BUS-“PFD/MFD POWER CONVERTER”
AVIONICS 1 BUS - “PILOT PFD”
AVIONICS 2 BUS – “CO-PILOT PFD”
NOTE: Wait 20 seconds before applying power.
5E1 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 31
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(l) Verify the calibration by aligning the aircraft with consecutive 90° headings, starting with
360°. Use the same alignment procedure as before and view the digital heading display
on the pilot and copilot PFDs at each of these headings (360°, 90°, 180°, and 270°).
(m) The magnetometer calibration is now complete.
C. Magnetic Compass
The magnetic compass is a self-contained instrument. This instrument has an individual light which
is connected to the instrument lighting circuit. The compass correction card is located in the card
holder mounted on the instrument. The compass should be swung (checked for changes in
deviation) whenever instruments or radios are changed, and at least once a year.
(1) Troubleshooting
See Chart 9.
(2) Adjustment
Before attempting to compensate compass, every effort should be made to place the aircraft in
simulated flight conditions; check to see that the doors are closed, flaps in retracted position,
engine running, throttle set at cruise position and aircraft in level flight attitude. Aircraft master
switch, alternator switch, and all radio switches should be in the ON position. All other cockpit
controlled electrical switches should be in the OFF position.
(a) Set adjustment screws of compensator on zero. Zero position of adjusting screws is when
the dot of the screw is lined up with the dot of the frame.
(b) Head aircraft on a magnetic North heading. Adjust N-S adjustment screw until compass
reads exactly North.
(c) Head aircraft on a magnetic East heading and do the same as (b), above, adjusting E-W
adjusting screw.
(d) Head aircraft on a magnetic South heading and note resulting South error. Adjust N-S
adjusting screw until one-half of this error has been removed.
(e) Head aircraft on magnetic West and do same as (d), above, adjusting E-W adjustment
screw.
(f) Head aircraft in successive magnetic 30° degree headings and record compass readings
on appropriate deviation card. Deviations must not exceed +10° on any heading.
PAGE 32
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 9
TROUBLESHOOTING MAGNETIC COMPASS
Excessive card error. Compass not properly Compensate instrument.
compensated.
External magnetic Locate magnetic
interference. interference and eliminate
if possible.
Excessive card oscillation. Insufficient liquid. Replace instrument.
Card sluggish. Weak card magnet. Replace instrument.
Excessive pivot friction or Replace instrument.
broken jewel.
Liquid leakage. Loose bezel screws. Replace instrument.
Broken cover glass. Replace instrument.
Defective sealing gaskets. Replace instrument.
Discolored markings. Age. Replace instrument.
Defective light. Burned out lamp or broken Check and replace lamp.
circuit. Check continuity of wiring.
Card sticks. Altitude compensating Replace instrument.
diaphragm collapsed.
Card does not move when The gears that turn Replace instrument.
compensating screws are compensating magnets are
turned. stripped.
Compass swings erratically. Normal.
when radio transmitter is
keyed.
5E3 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 33
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Turn Coordinator (Not installed with Avidyne Entegra EFIS.)

Unlike the conventional turn and slip indicator, the electrically operated gyroscope in the turn
coordinator is canted. However, like conventional turn and slip indicator, it works on the principal of
precession. By canting the gyro, the instrument not only measures rate of turn, but also measures rate
of roll. With this indicator, if the aircraft is rolled right and left rapidly, the indicator will move, measuring
the rate at which the airplane is rolled by indicating a turn in the direction of the roll. If the aircraft is held
in a bank, and rudder is applied (such as when slipping), the needle indicator will come back to neutral,
indicating no turn.The slip/skid portion of the indicator is a ball sealed in a curved glass tube filled with
damping fluid. In the previous example, It would indicate the airplane is slipping. By utilizing rudder and
aileron to establish the airplane in a desired rate of turn will eventually establish the airplane in a
coordinated turn at the desired rate.
A. Troubleshooting - see Chart 10.
B. Removal and Installation
See 39-10-00, Face Mounted Instruments - Removal and Installation.
Chart 10
TROUBLESHOOTING TURN COORDINATOR
Instrument fails to respond Foreign matter lodged in Replace instrument.
when power is being applied instrument.
to instrument.
Incorrect sensitivity. Out of calibration. Replace instrument.
Incorrect turn rate. Out of calibration. Replace instrument.
Ball sticky. Flat spot on ball. Replace instrument.
Ball not in center when aircraft Instrument not level in panel. Level instrument.
is correctly trimmed in wings
level flight.
Instrument will not run No power to instrument. Check appropriate circuit
breaker on pilot's circuit
breaker panel.
Check circuit and repair.
Instrument malfunction. Replace instrument.
PAGE 34
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTES: 1. COVER 153-633 WIRE WITH WHITE SHRINK SLEEVE 189-601.

2. USE RAYCHEM SPLICES, 588-731 TO CONNECT TO SWITCH TO WIRES SHOWN IN WIRING DIAGRAM.
3. LABEL SWITCH CALIBRATION POSITION WITH "CAL".
4. LABEL ASSEMBLY AS FOLLOWS "FOR CALIBRATION PURPOSE ONLY,"NOT APPROVED FOR PERMANENT INSTALLATION.
P2 P1
28 VDC POWER
13 13
28 VDC POWER
14 14
POWER GROUND
15 15
POWER GROUND
16 16 WIRING DIAGRAM
CHASSIS GROUND
12 12
FLUX GATE EXC HI
4 4
FLUX GATE EXC LO
3 3
FLUX GATE X
31 31
FLUX GATE Y CALIBRATE
20 20
FLUX GATE Z 1
19 19
23
ARINC BUS 1A
23 2
ARINC BUS 1B
7 7
ARINC BUS 2A NORMAL
33 33
ARINC BUS 2B
32 32
PARITY SELECT
8 8
COPILOT LOCATION
24 24
CALIBRATE ENABLE
10 10
CONFIGURATION COMMON
9 9
2X
(588-731)
REF
SEE NOTE 2
12.0 IN. ± 1.0
588-731, SPLICES
P1 P2
TO
AIRCRAFT TO
ADAHRS 153-601, WIRE
WIRING
SEE NOTE 3
S1
153-633, WIRE
189-601, SLEEVE SEE NOTE 4
168.0 IN. ± 1.0
1 602-513 SWITCH, SPDT MTL-106D 9

1 599-698 CONNECTOR, RECEPTACLE MS27473T14B-35S 8
1 599-697 CONNECTOR, STRAIGHT PLUG MS27508E14B35P 7
2 588-731 SPLICES PS10025-16-2 6
A/R 189-601 SLEEVE, PTFE SHRINK, WHT M23053/12-203-3 5
A/R 153-633 WIRE, PTFE, 22AWG WHT M22759/11-22-9 4
A/R 153-601 WIRE, CABLE-EL PMS-E0017-22-24 3
2
-002 HARNESS ASSEMBLY-ADAHRS CALIBRATION 3400 M 1530 1
CODE NO. MATERIAL HEAT E-ITEM ITEM ITEM POS.
ITEM NO. ITEM NAME MATERIAL STOCK SIZE FINISH SPECIFICATION NOTE ZONE
SPEC CONTROL DWG SPECIFICATION TREAT GROUP TYPE GROUP NO.
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF THE NEW PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. AND ITS
INSTL, ASSY, SUB ASSY, OR KIT
REVISION DRAFTSMAN T TAYLOR 5/28/02 POSSESSION BY UNAUTHORIZED PERSONS SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS
PERMISSION TO REPRODUCE FOR SALE IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY DEVICES
A REV DESIGN ENGR SHOWN THEREON.
ADAHRS CALIBRATION
DC BY
6/16/03 DATE
CHECKER
THE NEW PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC. HARNESS ASSEMBLY
PROGRAM MGR
APPD VERO BEACH, FLORIDA
SCALE LAST SECTION OR VIEW REF. LAYOUT NO. (S)
REV
MANUFACTURING PRACTICES - SEE PIPER REPORT VB-9 SH

BY WT. DRAWING SIZE
D 1
DATE
APPD
TOL.
.XXX = +/- .010 .XX = +/- .030 .X = +/- .10
MANUFACTURING
MATERIALS
OF
1 101453 A
ADAHARS Test Cable Fabrication
Figure 6
5E5 34-20-00 Apr

PAGE 35
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 36
Apr 15/07 34-20-00 5E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING
Color Weather Radar

Maintenance instructions included in the manual are limited to description, removal, replacement, and
self-test. Work exceeding this scope should be conducted by a qualified avionics repair facility in
accordance with the component manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
PUBLICATIONS.)
AlliedSignal’s Bendix/King RDR 2000 Vertical Profile Radar system is installed as standard equipment.
It consists of the IN-182A radar display indicator in the center of the instrument panel and the ART 2000
antenna transceiver, AA2010H antenna array, and CM 2000 configuration module mounted in a teardrop
shaped pod hung from the right wing at the joint between the outboard and center wing sections.
(See Figure 1.)
NOTE: With the Avidyne Entegra EFIS, installed the IN-182A display is replaced by the Avidyne
Entegra MFD. See 34-20-00, Avidyne Entegra EFIS, Maintenance, Multifunction Display (MFD),
for setup and calibration.
The antenna transceiver and antenna array are assembled as a single unit and are mounted to the
forward side of the bulkhead inside the radar pod. The configuration module is separately mounted to the
pod bulkhead.
The antenna transceiver and array assembly are covered by a removable radome secured to the
circumference of the pod bulkhead with screws.
A door in the right rear of the pod provides access to the void aft of the bulkhead, which can be used for
miscellaneous lightweight storage, such as the ground protection equipment.
Color Weather Radar Pod

Figure 1
5E7 34-40-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR SHOULD BE OPERATED ON THE GROUND ONLY BY

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING: THIS INSTRUMENT GENERATES MICROWAVE RADIATION.
-- DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL TO STAND NEAR OR CROSS IN FRONT OF A
TRANSMITTING RADAR ANTENNA.
-- DO NOT ALLOW PERSONNEL TO LOOK INTO A WAVEGUIDE, OR INTO THE OPEN
END OF A COAXIAL CONNECTOR OR LINE CONNECTOR TO A RADAR
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT.
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE RADAR WHILE AIRCRAFT IS IN A HANGAR OR OTHER
ENCLOSURE UNLESS THE RADAR TRANSMITTER IS NOT OPERATING OR THE
ENERGY IS DIRECTED TOWARD AN ABSORPTION SHIELD WHICH DISSIPATES THE
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) ENERGY.
A. Removal
(1) Remove screws (13) and remove the radome.
(2) Disconnect ground wires, antenna transceiver connector, and configuration module connector.
(3) Remove screws (4) and remove the antenna transceiver / array assembly.
(4) Remove screws (2) and remove the configuration module.
B. Installation
(1) Position the configuration module and secure with screws (2).
(2) Position the antenna transceiver / array assembly and secure with screws (4).Torque to the
low side of 60-70 in.-lbs.
(3) Connect ground wires, antenna transceiver connector, and configuration module connector.
(4) Position the radome and secure with screws (13).
C. Self-test
NOTE: This procedure does not apply when the Avidyne Entegra EFIS is installed.
The following displays basic system fault information and tests antenna clearance. Use the GAIN,
TILT, and function knobs and the RNG and mode buttons on the IN-182A indicator.
(1) Set the radar function knob to TST.
(2) Turn GAIN knob to minimum.
(3) Set antenna TILT to full up and select a range (RNG) of 240 NM.
(4) At the same time, depress the Wx/WxA and VP mode buttons to display the maintenance
menu. (See Figure 2.)
(5) Press the range up (RNG ^ ) to display the RT CALIBRATION DATA page. (See Figure 3.)
(6) As the RT CALIBRATION DATA page comes up, all fault fields will flash briefly. When the
display stabilizes, the only fault field displayed should be XMITTER. If any other fault fields are
displayed, further investigation is required.
(7) To initiate the antenna clearance test, rotate the GAIN knob to obtain a GAIN POT %2 value of
-26.5 to -28. The antenna will then move to each of its extreme positions to verify that there is
no physical interference and to ensure that all scan motors are working properly.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 34-40-00 5E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BENDIX/KING LOG
BRT
ON
TST
SELECT TEST SBY
OFF
Wx R/T CALIB RNG

WxA RETURN
GATE ARRAY TEST RNG

VP
MAP SWITCHES TRK
CROSS HATCH TRK

NAV NAV DATA
UP
TILT
GAIN DN
PULL STAB OFF
IN-182A Maintenance Menu

Figure 2
BENDIX/KING LOG
BRT
ON
RT CALIBRATION DATA TST
SBY
(PRESS Wx TO RETURN) OFF
Wx GAIN POT %2: 31.0- FAULTS: RNG

WxA
PITCH ANGLE: 0.0U 400 REF
TILT SETTING: 0.0U GYRO RNG
VP ROLL ANGLE: 0.0R H.V.
ROLL TRIM: 0.0R AFC
MAP 400 HZ REF: 0.0+ AGC TRK
AZIMUTH COUNT: +45 XMITTER
ANTENNA ELEVATION: ELV TRK
NAV
L = 0.0U C = 0.0U R = 0.0U
UP
TILT
GAIN DN
PULL STAB OFF
IN-182A RT Calibration Data Display

Figure 3
5E9 34-40-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 34-40-00 5E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DEPENDENT POSITION DETERMINING
1. COM/NAV/GPS
PUBLICATIONS.)
A. S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697215, less 4697198
Dual Garmin GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS systems are installed with the Meggitt EFIS. Each
installation consists of the GNS-530 transceiver/display unit, associated wiring, and antennas.
Maintenance of the GNS-530 is “on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete
units, should be performed only by a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN GNS-
530 Maintenance Manual (Garmin P/N - 190-00181-05).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the
GNS-530 transceiver/display units, their associated wiring and antennas. In addition, a detailed
electrical schematic for each unit is provided in 91-34-50.
See Figures 1 & 2 and 39-10-00 - Avionics, Removal and Installation.
(2) Post-Installation Lighting Set-up
See 33-10-00, Post-Installation Lighting Set-up.
B. S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up
Dual Garmin GNS-430 COM/NAV/GPS systems are installed as standard equipment. Each
installation consists of the GNS-430 transceiver/display unit, associated wiring, and antennas.
Maintenance of the GNS-430 is “on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete
units, should be performed only by a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN Series
400 Maintenance Manual (Garmin P/N - 190-00140-05).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the
GNS-430 transceiver/display units, their associated wiring and antennas.
See 39-10-00.
5E11 34-50-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102301 D GNS-530 NO.2 HARNESS ASSY GPS2/DAU TO EFIS HARNESS

(SEE 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
GPS2/DAU TO DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
GPS2 FROM GPS 2 ANT GPS1 FROM GPS 1 ANT
GPS/ENC 2 TO TRANSPONDER HARNESS J601 TO DME HARN.(P601)
J602 TO DME HARN. (P602) GNS-530 NO.1 HARNESS ASSY

(SEE 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)
AUDIO HARNESS (REF)
NAV1-EFIS TO EFIS HARNESS
SEE 91-34-50, FIGURES 1& 2
FOR P1 PIN CONNECTIONS GPS1/DAU TO DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
GPS/ENC 2 TO TRANSPONDER HARNESS
J1 J2 NAV INDICATOR
P1
J1
P1002 P1002
COM
COM
P1001 P1001
GPS
GPS
P1006 P1006
GS NAV
GS NAV
GI 106
COOLING
COOLING HOSES (REF) HOSES (REF)
S342
14 R N L
I O E
2 5 G S F
H E T
36 T
COM1 FROM COM 1 ANT
COM2 FROM COM2 ANT

COM-1 TO P387 PIN 20 NAV2 FROM NAV/GS COUPLER NAV1 FROM NAV/GS COUPLER
GS2 FROM NAV/GS COUPLER
GPS/N-1 TO P317 PIN 11 GS1 FROM NAV/GS COUPLER
TO DIM BUS (BLU)
COM-2 TO P6-A1 & P6-A2 TO GND (BLK) TO DIM BUS (BLU)
GPS/N-2 TO P6-B1 & P6-B2
VIEW LOOKING AFT TO GND (BLK)
Effectivity
4697001 thru 4697215, Dual GNS-530 Installation
less 4697198 Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 34-50-00 5E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102329 M
GPS 1 & 2
FS 150.25 COMM 1
RBL 2.56 (GPS 2) FS 200.86 NAV
LBL 2.56 (GPS 1) RBL 2.62 FS 324.288
WL 135.135
NAV ANTENNA COUPLER

FS 108.00
WL 79.950
VOR 2 G/S 2
VOR 1 G/S 1
ANT
VIEW
LOOKING
FWD
MARKER BEACON
FS 236.500
RBL 1.750
COMM 2
FS 141.81
RBL 3.00
TRANSPONDER
FS 103.76
LBL 5.86
Antenna Installations
Figure 2
5E13 34-50-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Transponder
PUBLICATIONS.)
A. S/N’s 4697001 Thru 4697173
Garmin GTX-327 Transponder is installed as standard equipment.Maintenance of the GTX-327 is
“on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete units, should be performed only by
a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN GTX-327 Maintenance Manual (Garmin
P/N - 190-00187-05).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the GTX-
327 transceiver/display unit, its associated wiring and antenna. In addition, a detailed electrical
schematic is provided in 91-34-50.
See Figures 2 & 3 and 39-10-00 - Avionics, Removal and Installation.
SUPP. TO DME HARN.

IDENT WIRES TO CONTROL WHEEL CONN. GTX-327 TRANSPONDER HARNESS
CW7H22 TO PIN 13, CW8H22 TO PIN 14 (SEE 91-34-50, FIGURE 3)
102304 C
GPS-ENC2 TO GPS2 HARNESS
XPNDR-EFIS TO EFIS HARNESS
GPS-ENC1 TO GPS1 HARNESS
ALT/ENC TO A/P HARNESS
TRANSPONDER
J1 J2
#1
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
EADI EADI ALT PRE
ELECT ALTITUDE IND P372 J1 ELECT ALTITUDE IND
J1 J1 9V
P373 J2
ANNUN CLOCK
J2 J2
EHSI
ELECT HEADING SIT IND NAV/COM/GPS NAV/COM/GPS EHSI
TURN & BANK (STORMSCOPE)
ELECT HEADING SIT IND
J1
J2
RADAR
(NAV 2) CABIN PRESS

CONTROL CONTROL
WHEEL P385 WHEEL
DME450 CABIN
(OPTION) PRESS
FLAP CONTROL
INDICATOR S342
HOUR 14 R
I
N
O
L
METER 25 G
H
S
E
E
F
T
M310 ELT 36 T
REF CO-PILOT REF PILOT

TO DIM BUS (BLU) ANT. COAX (REF)
WIRE "XPNDR" TO CKT BKR CONN P4C-6 ORANGE TY-RAP (REF)
WIRE "J317-33" TO CONN J317-33 UNDER
GB3-K (BLK) TO GND BUS CO-PILOTS FLOOR ACCESS PANEL TO TRANSPONDER ANTENNA
VIEW LOOKING AFT
Effectivity GTX-327 Transponder Installation

4697001 thru 4697173 Figure 3 (Typical)
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 34-50-00 5E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. S/N’s 4697174 and up

A Garmin GTX-330 Transponder is installed as standard equipment. Maintenance of the GTX-330 is
“on condition” only and, with the exception of swapping complete units, should be performed only by
a qualified avionics shop in accordance with the GARMIN GTX-330 Maintenance Manual (Garmin
P/N - 190-00207-02).
Information provided in this manual is intended solely to aid the removal and installation of the GTX-
330 transceiver/display unit, its associated wiring and antenna.
See 39-10-00.
5E15 34-50-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 5E16 THRU 5J24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 34-50-00 5E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPENDIX
1
GROUND TEST
PROCEDURE
MEGGITT MAGIC
AIR DATA & HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM
(ADAHRS)
AND
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
5K1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPENDIX 1
CHAPTER CHAPTER
APP1 - List of 1 Apr 15/07

APP1 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07
26 Apr 15/07
5K3 APPENDIX 1 - LOE PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 APPENDIX 1 - LOE 5K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(PIR-Meggitt/S-TEC Doc. No. 97-9001-001, Rev. 3.)

Ground Test Procedure - Meggitt MAGIC ADAHRS and Pitot-Static System
Ground Test Procedure (Sheet 1 of 24)

Meggitt MAGIC Air Data and Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) and Pitot-Static System
5K5 APPENDIX 1 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 APPENDIX 1 5K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5L1 APPENDIX 1 PAGE 21

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 APPENDIX 1 5L2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 5L6 THRU 5L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 26
CARD 6 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

6A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
6A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 6A9
Effectivity 2 6A10
Pagination 2 6A10
Indexing 3 6A11
INDEX
Index 1 6B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
6B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 6B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
6B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 6B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
6B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 6B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
6B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 6B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
6B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
35
OXYGEN
6C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
35-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
35-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35 - OXYGEN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CREW 35-10-00 1 6C7

Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System 1 6C7
Safety Precautions 1 6C7
300 Hour Inspection 4 6C10
Removal 4 6C10
Installation 5 6C11
Disassembly 5 6C11
Pressure Gauge 5 6C11
Cylinder Assembly 6 6C12
Servicing 7 6C13
Refilling Oxygen System 7 6C13
Cleaning and Purging Oxygen System Components 8 6C14
Application of Teflon Tape Thread Sealant 9 6C15
Leak Tests 9 6C15
Mask 10 6C16
Fixed Oxygen Generator System 11 6C17
PASSENGER 35-20-00 1 6C19

Description 1 6C19
Fixed Oxygen Generator System 1 6C19
100 Hour Inspection 1 6C19
Removal 3 6C21
Installation 3 6C21

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CREW
The crew compartment is equipped with two independent oxygen systems. A quick-donning mask
hooked to a fixed oxygen cylinder is provided for the pilot. A solid-state oxygen generator system is
provided for the copilot / front seat passenger.
PUBLICATIONS.)
1. Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System
The pilot’s oxygen system is in the pyramid cabinet behind the copilot’s seat. The oxygen cylinder,
regulator, and gauge are mounted in a drawer at the top of the cabinet. The quick-donning mask is in a
stowage box just below the oxygen cylinder drawer.
NOTE: Remove the cylinder drawer assembly from the aircraft as a unit for routine servicing (including
filling), as well as for inspection or replacement of the cylinder, regulator or gauge.
A. Safety Precautions
WARNING: DO NOT USE GREASE OR ANY TYPE OF GREASE FITTING ON ANY OXYGEN
SYSTEM. WHEN WORKING WITH AN OXYGEN SYSTEM MAKE SURE HANDS,
CLOTHING, TOOLS, AND IMMEDIATE AREA ARE FREE OF GREASE.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TIGHTEN ANY CONNECTIONS WHILE THE SYSTEM IS
CHARGED.
CAUTION: CYLINDERS WHICH HAVE BEEN EVACUATED TO FIFTY (50) PSI FOR A
SIGNIFICANT LENGTH OF TIME, OR THOSE THAT DO NOT PRODUCE AN
AUDIBLE HISSING SOUND WHEN THE VALVE IS CRACKED, SHOULD BE
REMOVED AND HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED. IF EITHER OF THESE CONDITIONS
HAS EXISTED FOR A SIGNIFICANT LENGTH OF TIME, PURGE THE SYSTEM.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THERE IS NO OIL, GREASE, HYDRAULIC FLUID, OR FUEL IN THE
VICINITY OF ANY FITTINGS BEING SERVICED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THREAD LUBRICANTS OF ANY KIND. USE TEFLON TAPE (3M NO. 48)
ON TAPERED PIPE THREADS, WITHOUT TAPE EXTENDING BEYOND THE FIRST
THREAD. SEE “APPLICATION OF TEFLON TAPE THREAD SEALANT” LATER IN
THIS SECTION.
CAUTION: BEFORE WORKING WITH THE SYSTEM, MAKE SURE AIRCRAFT IS
ELECTRICALLY GROUNDED AND YOUR HANDS TOOLS, AND CLOTHES ARE
FREE OF OIL, GREASE AND DIRT.
CAUTION: KEEP FIRE AND HEAT AWAY FROM OXYGEN EQUIPMENT. DO NOT SMOKE
WHEN WORKING WITH OR NEAR OXYGEN EQUIPMENT. DO NOT GENERATE
SPARKS WHEN USING TOOLS.
CAUTION: NEVER ALLOW ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO CONTACT OXYGEN CYLINDER.
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR OR REPAINT OXYGEN EQUIPMENT.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
6C7 35-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System Installation

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 35-10-00 6C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System Installation

6C9 35-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING OXYGEN CYLINDER SYSTEM

No indication of pressure Cylinder empty or leak in Purge, charge, and check
on pressure gauge. system has exhausted pressure. system for leaks.
Pressure gauge or regulator Replace gauge.
defective.
Pressure indication normal Oxygen cylinder regulator Remove tank and have
but no oxygen flowing. assembly defective. check/replace regulator.
Offensive odors in oxygen. Cylinder pressure below 50 psi. Purge the oxygen system.
Foreign matter has entered the
system during previous servicing.
C. 300 Hour Inspection (See chart 2)

NOTE: Oxygen cylinders are identified by the ICC or DOT identification stamped on the cylinder.
The standard weight cylinder (ICC or DOT 3AA1800) used in this airplane must be
hydrostatically tested every 5 years. The month and year of the last test is stamped
beneath the ICC/DOT identification.
(1) Check the high pressure gauge for accuracy by comparing its indicated pressure with that of a
gauge of known accuracy connected to the fill port.
(2) Inspect tank for dents, bulges, corrosion, and major strap chaffing marks. Should any of these
problems exist, the tank should be removed and hydrostatically tested by a DOT or
manufacturer approved facility.
(3) Test the oxygen for odor. Pure oxygen is odorless and tasteless. Any system having a
significant odor present in the gas should be purged and the bottle replaced or removed and
purged.
(4) Any fittings, connectors, lines and hoses which have imperfect threads, pitted or disfigured
cones, or other damage should be replaced.
(5) Check lines and hoses for kinking, cracks, gouges, dents, deep scratches, or other damage.
Replace as necessary.
(6) Clean components as necessary per Servicing - Cleaning and Purging Oxygen System
Components, below.
D. Removal
CAUTION: OPENING CONTROL VALVE DURING REMOVAL OF OXYGEN LOW PRESSURE
LINE FROM CYLINDER WILL RESULT IN AN UNCHECKED FLOW OF OXYGEN
INTO CABIN UNTIL VALVE CAN BE CLOSED.
(1) Reaching under drawer, to the right of the quick-donning mask stowage box, pull down the
drawer locking pin and slide the drawer out to the limit of the low pressure line/post light
electrical lead.
(2) Safety the ON / OFF valve at the regulator in the OFF position.
(3) Disconnect low pressure line from cylinder. Cap line and port immediately after removal.
(4) Disconnect post light electrical lead.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 35-10-00 6C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 2
FIXED OXYGEN CYLINDER SYSTEM COMPONENT LIMITS
Part Inspection Overhaul

Regulator 300 Flight Hours 5 Years
Pressure Gauge 300 Flight Hours Replace on Condition
High Pressure Line 300 Flight Hours Replace on Condition
Low Pressure Line 300 Flight Hours Replace on Condition
Fill Valve Each Use Every 5 Years 1
Mask At least once per year Every 6 Years
1. If the screen in front of valve is dirty, replace valve. Valve replacement is recommended every 5 years.
(5) Release catches on drawer slides and remove the drawer, oxygen cylinder, regulator, and
pressure gauge from the aircraft as an assembly.
(6) If further disassembly is required, it can be accomplished at the bench.
E. Installation
(1) Check pressure and refill cylinder as necessary, at the bench, before installing cylinder drawer
assembly in airplane.
(2) Inspect for leaks.
(3) Slide cylinder drawer assembly into drawer slides in the pyramid cabinet and ensure that
drawer slide catches have engaged.
(4) Connect low pressure line to cylinder. Tighten the nut by hand and then one quarter turn with a
wrench. If fitting is relatively new the nut might be turned 3/4 of a turn. Follow up by snugging
the nut slightly with a wrench.
(5) Connect post light electrical lead.
(6) Unsafety valve on cylinder. Check that valve remains in OFF position.
(7) Inspect for leaks, especially at fittings that have been separated.
F. Disassembly
(1) Pressure Gauge
The oxygen cylinder pressure gauge is installed in the top of the cylinder drawer assembly. (See
Figure 1.) The pressure gauge is fed by a high pressure capillary line from the regulator. Prior
to any work on the pressure gauge, remove cylinder assembly drawer per Fixed Oxygen
Cylinder System, Removal, above.
(a) Removal
At the bench:
1 Disconnect high pressure capillary line from the port on the regulator. Cap line and
port immediately after removal.
NOTE: Continuous pressure is applied to high pressure line until it is disconnected
from regulator. A check valve will close when high pressure line is
disconnected. The closing of this valve is frequently accompanied by a loud
popping sound.
6C11 35-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 Disconnect high pressure capillary line from gauge and cap line and gauge
immediately.
3 Remove nuts (2) securing gauge to bracket and remove gauge from the top.
(b) Installation
At the bench:
1 Place gauge in position on the drawer assembly and secure with nuts (2). Ensure gauge
is positioned so that it can be read by the pilot.
2 Connect high pressure capillary line to gauge.
3 Connect high pressure capillary line to the port on the regulator.
4 Install cylinder assembly drawer per Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System, Installation,
(2) Cylinder Assembly
The oxygen cylinder assembly (i.e. - regulator and cylinder) is installed in the top of the cylinder
drawer assembly. (See Figure 1.) and is retained by a quick release cam clamp. The pressure
gauge HP line is attached to the regulator. Prior to any work on the cylinder assembly, remove
cylinder assembly drawer per Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System, Removal, above.
(a) Removal
At the bench:
1 Disconnect high pressure capillary line from the port on the regulator. Cap line and
port immediately after removal.
NOTE: Continuous pressure is applied to high pressure line until it is disconnected
from regulator. A check valve will close when high pressure line is
disconnected. The closing of this valve is frequently accompanied by a loud
popping sound.
2 Remove lock wire and release cam clamp around cylinder neck.
3 Remove cylinder and regulator from drawer assembly.
(b) Installation
At the bench:
1 Place cylinder assembly into the mounting brackets in the cylinder assembly drawer.
2 Engage cam clamp around cylinder neck and close lever. Lock wire lever.
3 Connect high pressure capillary line to the port on the regulator.
4 Install cylinder assembly drawer per Fixed Oxygen Cylinder System, Installation.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 35-10-00 6C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Servicing
CHART 3
NOTE: Oxygen cylinders are identified by the ICC or DOT
FILLING PRESSURE VS.
identification stamped on the cylinder. The standard weight
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
cylinder (ICC or DOT 3AA1800) used in this airplane must
be hydrostatically tested every 5 years. The month and year Ambient Filling
of the last test is stamped beneath the ICC/DOT Temperature Pressure
identification. °F / °C (PSI)
(1) Refilling Oxygen System 0 / -17.78 1650
CAUTION: BEFORE SERVICING THE OXYGEN SYSTEM, 10 / -12.22 1700
MAKE SURE THE AIRCRAFT IS SECURELY
20 / -6.67 1725
GROUNDED ELECTRICALLY.
30 / -1.11 1775
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
WHILE SERVICING OXYGEN SYSTEM. 40 / 4.44 1825
50 / 10 1875
CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TIGHTEN ANY
CONNECTIONS WHILE THE SYSTEM IS 60 / 15.56 1925
CHARGED.
70 / 21 1975
Refilling of oxygen systems should be done only by qualified
80 / 27 2000
personnel. For comparison of filling pressures to ambient
temperatures refer to Chart 3. Proceed as follows: 90 / 32 2050
(a) Only aviators breathing oxygen (MIL-0-27210) and 100 / 38 2100
appropriate filling equipment should be used to fill the
system. 110 / 43 2150
(b) If a cylinder has less than fifty (50) psi pressure or has 120 / 49 2200
insufficient pressure to produce an audible hissing sound
130 / 54 2250
when the valve is cracked, it should be removed and/or
purged, and if the condition has existed for a significant NOTE
length of time, hydrostatically test cylinder. Filling pressures are for
(c) Make sure both the charge valve and recharge cart fittings 1850 PSI at 70°F
are clean and free of contamination. (21.11°C). Chart assumes
25°F (11.8°C) rise due to
WARNING: BE CERTAIN NO OIL OR OTHER heat of compressor with
PETROLEUM BASED MATERIAL IS ON THE max. fill rate.
FITTINGS OR IN THE IMMEDIATE VICINITY.
(d) Attach service cart hose to recharge port. Fill the system at a rate not exceeding 200 psig
per minute proceeding as follows:
1 To obtain the correct filling pressure for the oxygen system at various ambient
temperatures, a table is included for your convenience. The pressures given are not
exact, but sufficiently accurate for practical purposes of working pressures between
1800 and 2400 psig cylinders. The cylinder should be allowed to cool to a stabilized
temperature after filling before checking against the values in Chart 2.
2 When using a recharge unit consisting of one supply cylinder, slowly open the valve
of the supply unit and allow the oxygen to transfer.
6C13 35-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 When using a recharge unit consisting of two or more supply cylinders (cascade
storage system), it is recommended that the following procedure be used:
a Before opening any valves, check the pressure remaining in the airplane's
oxygen cylinder. If it is still partly charged, note the pressure indicated on the
cylinder gauge. Then open and close each valve on the cascade storage system
and determine which cylinder has the lowest pressure. When found, if this
cylinder has a pressure lower than the oxygen cylinder in the aircraft, do not
attempt using it for filling; use the storage cylinder that has a pressure higher
than the aircraft's cylinder but lower than the others.
b Open the valve on only the one storage cylinder with the lowest pressure. When
the pressures indicated on the aircraft's oxygen gauge and on the charging
stand gauge have equalized, close the valve of the storage cylinder, then go to
the storage cylinder with the next higher pressure and repeat the procedure.
c If after using the last storage cylinder the aircraft's oxygen system is still not fully
charged, a full storage cylinder should be put in place of a cylinder with the
lowest pressure and used in the same manner.
d A good amount of oxygen will remain in the large cylinders used in the cascade
system after filling only one of the cylinders. This remaining oxygen will be at a
pressure something less than the 1850 psi. This is not sufficient pressure to
completely refill another aircraft cylinder, although it will refill several small
cylinders.
e It is not economical, even on a three or four cylinder cascade system, to begin
recharging with oxygen at less than 300 psi pressure in the 300 cubic foot bank
of cylinders. So use 300 cubic foot cylinders down to approximately 300 psi;
then return for refilling. In two cylinder systems use to approximately 100 psi;
then return for filling.
(e) When the pressure gauge on the recharge unit or in the aircraft reaches 1800 to 1850 psi,
close the pressure regulator valve on the recharge unit. Disconnect the filler hose from the
filler valve and replace the protective cap on the filler valve. Check the cylinder pressure
according to Chart 3 after the cylinder temperature stabilizes.
(f) After detaching the service cart, cap hose and fittings to prevent contamination.
(g) Perform a leak check of the high pressure lines and clean off solution afterwards. If
solution is not properly cleaned off, corrosion may result.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 35-10-00 6C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Cleaning and Purging Oxygen System Components
CAUTION: CARE MUST BE EXERCISED TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OF

COMPONENTS BY OIL, GREASE, WATER, OR FOREIGN MATTER.
COMPRESSED AIR USED IN CLEANING AND FLUSHING TUBES AND
HOSES MUST BE CLEAN, DRY, FILTERED (OIL FREE) AIR ONLY.
Three methods are recommended for cleaning oxygen system components:
(a) Method I.
1 Vapor degrease part(s) with trichlorethylene.
2 Blow part(s) dry with a stream of compressed air or dry nitrogen.
(b) Method II.
1 For tubing, flush with naptha per specification TT-N-95.
2 Blow clean and dry off all solvent with clean, dry, filtered air.
3 Flush with isopropyl alcohol.
4 Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
5 Dry with air as described in previous caution or by heating at a temperature of 250°
to 300°F for one-half hour.
NOTE: Solvents can be reused provided they do not become badly contaminated
with oil. This condition can be determined by thoroughly evaporating 100
millimeters of the liquid in a glass dish of a determined weight. Evaporation
may be accomplished by heating the dish at 200°F (93°C) for one-half hour.
If after evaporation and cool down, the residue exceeds 100 milligrams in
weight, the solvent cannot be reused for this purpose.
(c) Method III.
1 Flush with hot inhibited alkaline cleaner until free from oil and grease.
2 Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
3 Dry thoroughly with a stream of clean air as described in the previous caution or by
heating 250°F to 300°F (121°C to 149°C) for one-half hour minimum.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ADHESIVE TAPE FOR ATTACHING OR SECURING
PROTECTIVE COVERINGS ON OXYGEN COMPONENTS. USE WAXED
LACING TWINE OR TIE RAPS.
(d) After cleaning, all tubing must be protected by caps, plugs and/or plastic bags.
(e) Before installation, make sure fitting, tube, and fixture threads are in good condition and
that the cones do not exhibit pitting or disfigurement.
(3) Application of Teflon Tape Thread Sealant
All male pipe (tapered) threads of the oxygen system should be sealed with 3M No. 48 teflon
tape. Teflon tape should not be used on straight threads. Do not use any other lubricants in
place of the teflon or on any other threads.
(a) Wrap tape on the threads, starting with those farthest from the opening, in the direction of
the thread spiral. Circle the threads, making sure that each side of the tape has a slight
overlap.
(b) Wrap the tape such that it does not extend beyond the last thread on the fitting at the
opening. The tape should then be pulled till it separates. Do not cut tape, it will not stick
properly.
6C15 35-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Leak Tests

Leak-Tec Formula #16-OX is the solution recommended for leak testing and is available from
Scott Aviation.
NOTE: Whenever a leak check is performed, all fitting connections as well as other
questionable areas, should be inspected.
(a) The following can be tested with the cylinder drawer assembly removed from the aircraft
and the cylinder fully charged: (all are high pressure)
1 cylinder to regulator connection
2 capillary line to regulator connection
3 capillary line to pressure gauge
(b) The low pressure hose and its connection to the mask / stowage box assembly can be
checked in two ways:
1 by pressurizing the hose to 100 PSI with dry nitrogen from a gauged regulated
source, or
2 by setting the pilot’s oxygen valve to ON when the cylinder is fully charged and the
cylinder drawer assembly is installed in the airplane.
(c) Procedure:
1 As described in (a) or (b), above, ensure the component/connection to be tested is
pressurized.
2 Apply the leak detector solution to the test surface and watch for indication of
leakage.
3 Large leaks will produce bubbles immediately, but small leaks will form a white foam
in 5 to 60 seconds.
4 If leaks are evident, remove pressure, correct any leaks and retest.
5 When no leaks are evident, wipe off excess leak detector solution.
6 If a low pressure hose test, close the valve on the nitrogen gas tank or the pilot’s
oxygen valve and use the mask “Press to Test and Reset” and mask regulator “Press
to Test” control knob to vent line to ambient. Disconnect the gauged regulated
nitrogen source, if used.
7 If the oxygen cylinder is not to be hooked up or installed immediately, cap and cover
the exposed fittings with new clean plastic bags. Make sure caps and coverings are
as clean as possible.
(5) Mask
(a) Complete System Test
At least once a year perform the following test.
1 Remove the mask from the stowage box by firmly grasping the red tabs and pulling.
2 Depress the inflation control valve (red tab) with thumb and forefinger and hold to
inflate the harness.
NOTE: Make sure the blinker on the stowage box turns yellow and then black, within
a few seconds. This indicates harness is leak-tight when inflated.
3 Position the mask onto the head and release the inflation control valve to deflate the
harness.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 35-10-00 6C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 While breathing with the mask set in the “N” (normal) position and also in the “100%”
position, check the blinker to see that it turns first yellow and then black within a few
seconds of operation. This indicates the regulator demand mechanism is operating
properly and that there are no leaks in the regulator. If the yellow light remains on,
the system needs to be checked by a Scott Aviation approved repair facility.
5 On the mask, rotate the “Press to Test” control knob counter-clockwise (i.e. - in the
direction of the arrow). Take a few breaths. Breathing should be unrestricted. Rotate
the “Press to Test” control knob clockwise back to its original position.
6 Test the microphone.
a Set the Mic Select switch to Mask.
b Energize a radio.
c Conduct a radio check with a cooperating station.
7 Stow the mask per the instructions below.
(b) Cleaning
CAUTION: DO NOT CLEAN THE MASK FACE PIECE WITH SOLVENT.
1 Disinfect the mask face piece by wiping quickly and lightly with the cleaner
disinfectant swab “EROS SAN 50”, available from Scott Aviation.
2 Air dry completely before restowing in stowage box.
(c) Restowing Mask
1 Open the stowage box doors.
2 Ensure pneumatic lines and electrical connectors from the mask are properly
connected to receptacles in the stowage box.
3 Make sure the harness is relaxed and positioned behind the face piece.
4 Holding the mask by the red tabs, coil the hose and position it at the back of the
stowage box.
5 Gather the harness and push it into the stowage box, back of the harness first.
6 Center the remainder of the hose and feed it into the stowage box underneath the
face piece.
7 Place the mask-regulator into the stowage box, ensuring it is fully seated against the
stop in the top of the stowage box.
8 Shut the left stowage box door. Note that the “OXY ON” flag is extended.
9 Press the “Press to Test and Reset” control lever and release. Check that the “OXY
ON” flag retracts.
10 Insert the door pin into the mating hole in the left red tab on the mask.
11 Close the right stowage box door.
2. Fixed Oxygen Generator System
The oxygen generator system will deliver constant flow upon demand for approximately 15 minutes, or
long enough for the airplane to be flown to an altitude of 10,000 feet or less.
The copilot’s oxygen generator is located in a tray under the seat. A drawer containing two masks opens
inboard. The basic system is the same as that installed for the passengers. See 35-20-00 for detailed
information on removal, installation, and inspection.
6C17 35-10-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 35-10-00 6C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER
1. Description
The chemical oxygen generator system used in this airplane is a single-use system, which will deliver
constant flow upon demand for approximately 15 minutes (i.e. - long enough for the airplane to be flown
to an altitude of 10,000 feet or less) after ignition.
Passenger oxygen is installed in the cabin under the passenger seat directly behind the copilot’s seat,
and contains four masks and two oxygen generators.
The generators are activated individually by removing a mask from the storage drawer and pulling the
lanyard attached to the mask. This action pulls the firing pin allowing the hammer to strike the percussion
cap and ignites the generator. Once activated, the oxygen will continue to flow until the particular
generator is expended. An indicator light is located in the annunciator panel and illuminates whenever
any one of the generators has been activated.
2. Fixed Oxygen Generator System (See Figures 1 and 2.)
PUBLICATIONS.)
Take care when handling the oxygen generators. Even though they are not under high pressure, they do
generate very high tempertures. Inadvertant ignition due to careless handling is to be avoided. The
generators have a percussion cap igniter on one end which must be protected with a plastic cover when
the generator(s) are removed from the mounting tray/drawer. Do not remove this plastic protective cover
until the generator is installed/reinstalled in the mounting tray/drawer and the system is rearmed.
NOTE: Installed generators are normally removed only when expended, damaged, or at the end of their
twelve (12) year service life (as indicated by the date of manufacture on the individual unit
dataplate).
A. 100 Hour Inspection
(1) Turn master switch ON. Inspect the annunciator panel display to ensure “Oxygen” warning light
remains OFF. If warning light is ON, check first for an expended generator. If no generator is
expended, check that the hammer has properly captured the microswitch at each generator
location.
(2) Inspect each firing pin and hammer. If firing pin has been pulled and hammer is in contact with
percussion cap, consider the generator to be expended and replace.
(3) Inspect each percussion cap:
(a) Verify that the plastic protective cover has been removed from each percussion cap. If not,
remove plastic protective cover.
(b) If the normally smooth surface of the percussion cap exhibits any evidence of indentation,
replace the generator.
(4) Check each generator for security within its mounting points.
(5) Check each generator for any obvious physical damage (i.e. - punctures, dents, deep
scratches, etc.). If damage present, replace generator.
CAUTION: DO NOT PULL ON THE LANYARD. THE GENERATOR MAY IGNITE IF THE
LANYARD IS PULLED.
(6) Check lanyard cords for fraying and security at both ends.
6C19 35-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fixed Oxygen Generator System Installation

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 35-20-00 6C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Check oxygen lines for security of connections to mask and generator outlet fitting. Verify that
each mask lanyard and oxygen line are connected to the same generator.
(8) Check the manufacturer’s data plate on each oxygen generator for date of manufacture. If date
is twelve (12) years or older, replace generator.
B. Removal
WARNING: WHEN ACTIVATED, THE EXTERIOR SURFACE OF THE GENERATOR WILL REACH
VERY HIGH TEMPERATURES (UP TO 500° F) UNTIL DEPLETION. IF REMOVING
AN UNEXPENDED GENERATOR, TAKE CARE TO AVOID INADVERTANT
ACTIVATION.
(1) Disconnect the wiring harness and remove the mounting tray/drawer from the aircraft.
(2) Remove the screws (3) securing the heat shield over the generator.
(3) Disconnect the oxygen lines from the generator outlet fitting.
(4) Untie the lanyards from the masks. Retain the sleeves installed over the knots for reuse.
(5) If generator has not been expended, place a plastic protective cover over the percussion cap
and coil and secure the lanyard to ensure the firing pin is not pulled during removal and
handling.
(6) Remove generator from mounting tray/drawer.
C. Installation
NOTE: New generators are delivered from the factory with the lanyards and firing pin installed and
the hammer armed. A plastic protective cover protects the percussion cap from being
ignited if the firing pin is inadvertantly pulled during handling.
If the firing pin has been pulled during handling, verfify that the generator has not been
expended and then rearm the generator by pulling the hammer back and inserting the
firing pin attached to the end of the lanyard in front of the hammer. Ensure the firing pin
covers at least 2/3 of the hammer.
(1) Place a new generator into position in
the mounting tray/drawer, ensuring
proper indexing of locator pins to the
mounting brackets - i. e. - two down, one
up.
(2) Ensure that the hammer is in contact
with the micro switch.
(3) Connect the oxygen lines to the
generator outlet fitting.
(4) Place the heat shield over the generator.
Verify insertion of the indexing pin in the
heat shield and secure with screws (3).
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT THE
LANYARD AND TUBE
FROM EACH MASK ARE
CONNECTED TO THE
SAME GENERATOR.
(5) Trim lanyard lengths to 30 inches ± 1.
Using a square knot, tie lanyards to the
appropriate masks and cover knots with
sleeves. New Generator Fresh from the Box
Figure 2
6C21 35-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Coil up each mask and related oxygen line and lanyard and install in the storage compartment
of the mounting tray/drawer.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO REMOVE THE PLASTIC PROTECTIVE COVER FROM THE
PERCUSSION CAP WILL PREVENT THE GENERATOR FROM IGNITING
WHEN THE LANYARD IS PULLED.
(7) Remove the plastic protective cover (see Figure 2) from the percussion cap on the newly
installed generator.
(8) Install mounting tray/drawer in aircraft.
(9) Connect the wiring harness, turn ON the master switch, and verify the annunciator panel
warning light remains out. If not recheck that the hammer has properly captured the
microswitch.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 35-20-00 6C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6C23 35-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 35-20-00 6C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
37
VACUUM
6D1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 37
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
37-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 37 - VACUUM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DISTRIBUTION 37-10-00 1 6D7

Vacuum System 1 6D7
Description 1 6D7
Service Tips 8 6D14
Vacuum Regulator Valve 8 6D14
Removal 8 6D14
Installation 8 6D14
Adjustment 9 6D15
INDICATING See 77-40-00

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
1. Vacuum System (See Figure 1.)

A. Description
The vacuum system functions by bleed air being forced through a venturi device called an ejector.
As the primary bleed air flow is forced through the ejector, a decrease in pressure develops
providing the secondary flow. The secondary flow acts as the source of air to the system.
An ambient pressure reference is located between the firewall and the forward pressure bulkhead.
The vacuum is controlled on the vacuum side of the system by a vacuum regulator and check valve.
The regulator maintains vacuum at a nominal 5.0 inches mercury, relative to ambient pressure. On
the vacuum side of the regulator, a check valve is built into the line, preventing reverse flow.
The vacuum system operates the cabin pressurization controller, safety outflow valve, and
pneumatic deice system.
The vacuum gauge has been incorporated into the Meggit Engine Instrument Display System
(EIDS) (see 77-40-00). A transducer mounted on the aft side of the forward pressure bulkhead
provides input to the EIDS Data Acquisition Unit which then transmits the data to the EIDS Engine
Display Unit. Nominal pressure is 5.0 in. hg.
See also 21-30-00 and 30-10-00.
B. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
6D7 37-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VACUUM SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

(POST FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING)
10. EMERGENCY BLEED AIR

SOLENOID VALVE
(I.E. - EMERG. PRESSURE VALVE)
BLEED AIR SYSTEM

(TO CABIN) (REF)
1. PRESSURE
REGULATOR
12. TO DE-ICE (PRESSURE)

P3 AIR FROM (TORQUE AN818 NUT TO 350-375 FT-LBS TAKING
2. PRECOOLER CARE TO HOLD ELBOW BULKHEAD FITTING TO
PREVENT DAMAGE TO DEICE TUBE AFT OF
FIREWALL.)
3. EJECTOR 11. WATER SEPARATOR
4. LOW VACUUM SWITCH VACUUM LOW
ANNUNCIATOR
5. CHECK VALVE
FLOW
6. VACUUM REGULATOR
7. AMBIENT RESTRICTORS
PRESSURE
REFERENCE
8. PRESSURE
BULKHEAD (REF) 13. TO CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROL SYSTEM
14. TO DE-ICE (VACUUM)
9. VACUUM TRANSDUCER
S/N'S 4797100 & UP

AND
S/N'S 4797001 THRU 4797099
WITH KIT# 767-313 INSTALLED
Vacuum System Installation

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 37-10-00 6D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UP
B 102581 S
SEE SHEET 3
8
B FIGURE 1 (SEE SHEET 1 FOR LEGEND)
AFT LEFT
14
S/N’S 4697100 & UP AND

S/N’S 4697015 THRU 4697099
WITH KIT# 767-313 INSTALLED
AND
S/N’S 4697001 THRU 4697014
WITH KIT#’S 767-313 & 766-680 INSTALLED
10
11
VIEW A
12
2
4
1 5

6D9 37-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13 102581 S
13
14 7
VIEW B-B
9
S/N’S 4697211 AND UP
14
VIEW B-B
S/N’S 4697001 THRU 4697210

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 37-10-00 6D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6D11 37-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING VACUUM SYSTEM
(see also Chart 1 in 77-40-00)

No vacuum indication and Faulty transducer. Replace transducer.
cabin dump works,
deice boots hold down, and
“Vacuum Low” annunciator
is not illuminated.
Low vacuum system Vacuum regulator valve Adjust regulator valve in
pressure indicated by low incorrectly adjusted. accordance with
reading on vacuum display. “Adjustments” in this
section.
Line from transducer to ejector Check lines, fittings and
restricted or leaking. check valve.
Repair or replace, as
required.
Blocked bleed air nozzle Remove ejector and
in ejector. blow out nozzle.
Line between ejector Check lines and fittings.
and precooler restricted Repair or replace, as
or Ieaking. required.
Low vacuum system Vacuum regulator valve Adjust regulator valve in
pressure indicated by incorrectly adjusted. accordance with
“Vacuum Low” annunciator. “Adjustments” in this
section.
Line from low vacuum switch Check lines and fittings.

to ejector restricted or leaking. Repair or replace, as
required.
Low vacuum switch faulty. Replace switch.
Line between ejector Check lines and fittings.
and precooler restricted Repair or replace, as
or Ieaking. required.
High system pressure. Vacuum regulator Adjust regulator.
Vacuum regulator sticking Clean and check operation
or dirty screen. of regulator.
Check ambient reference

line and transducer for
contamination by cabin air.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 37-10-00 6D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING VACUUM SYSTEM
(see also Chart 1 in 77-40-00)

Regulator cannot be adjusted Lines leaking or blocked. Check lines and fittings.
to produce correct pressure. Repair or replace, as
required.
Check valve faulty (i.e. - closed). Replace check valve.
Vacuum correct on ground, Regulator sticky. Clean regulator.
but will not maintain pressure
at altitude. Check ambient reference
line and transducer for
contamination by
cabin air.
Vacuum correct, but pilot Regulator sticky. Clean regulator.
reports pressure erratic or
shows complete loss in flight.
Pressure can only be maintained Leak in system. Check lines and fittings.
at full throttle on ground. Repair or replace, as
required.
Stuck regulator. Clean or replace regulator.
Vacuum display indication Foreign matter on Raise regulator diaphragm
follows engine rpm. regulator seat. with thin, blunt tool
(tongue depresser).
Remove the contaminant.
Reset regulator. If no
foreign matter is present
on the regulator seat, test
regulator function.
Vacuum display shows Blocked bleed air nozzle Remove ejector and
pressure drop. in ejector. blow out nozzle.
(Cabin pressure gauge may
show increase.) Check valve faulty (i.e. - closed). Replace check valve.
Vacuum regulator faulty Replace regulator and/or
or secondary flow inlet clear inlet.
is blocked.
Lines from ejector to Check lines and fittings.
vacuum regulator blocked Repair or replace, as
or leaking. required.
6D13 37-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Service Tips
(1) Hoses and Clamps:
(a) These items should be examined periodically, and inspected carefully whenever engine
maintenance activities cause a hose disconnection to be made at the ejector, regulating
valve, or other system component.
(b) The ends of the hoses should be examined for rubber separation and slivers of rubber on
the inside diameter of the hoses. These slivers can and do become detached.
CAUTION: PIPE DOPE OR ANY OTHER ANTI-SEIZE TAPE OR COMPOUND CAN

CLOG VACUUM SYSTEM COMPONENTS. IF REQUIRED, WHEN
REPLACING ANY OF THE THREADED FITTINGS, SPRAY THE MALE
THREADS WITH SILICONE LUBRICANT ONLY.
(c) Hose clamps and fittings should be replaced when broken, damaged or corroded.
(2) Vacuum Regulator:
(a) The vacuum regulating valve seldom needs replacement. Symptoms that suggest
replacement are:
1 Chatter as indicated by rapid fluctuation of the EIDS vacuum reading or an audible
sound.
2 Non-repeatability of the EIDS vacuum reading when the EIDS is not suspect or has
been checked (cruise rpm only).
(b) All modes of regulator malfunction tend to increase the vacuum power. Thus, although
excess vacuum is applied, a loss of vacuum does not occur.
NOTE: If the EIDS has been checked and found “OK” and the vacuum reading does not
repeat within the normal operating range, then the regulating valve should be
changed. Observe the usual precautions for maintaining system cleanliness to
avoid premature component service.
2. Vacuum Regulator Valve
A. Removal
(1) Remove inlet hose from top side of valve.
(2) Remove outlet hose from bottom side of valve.
(3) Remove nut that secures valve to bracket.
(4) Pull valve up out of bracket.
B. Installation
(1) Insert valve into hole in bracket from top.
(2) Secure valve to bracket with nut.
(3) Attach outlet hose to bottom fitting of valve.
(4) Attach inlet hose to top fitting of valve.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 37-10-00 6D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Adjustment
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE WITHOUT A QUALIFIED PILOT OR OTHER
RESPONSIBLE PERSON AT THE CONTROLS OF THE AIRPLANE.
NOTE: Do not reset the regulator until the lines have been checked.
(1) Start engine and turn ON bleed air switch.
(2) Set engine at 75% Ng. Check vacuum reading. If reading is less than 4.5 in. Hg., shut down the
engine and adjust the valve. (Turn the valve adjustment screw clockwise to increase pressure
and counterclockwise to decrease pressure.)
(3) Start the engine and repeat the check until not less than 4.5 in. Hg. is obtained at 75% Ng.
(4) Advance power on engine to a minimum 90% and ensure vacuum gauge reads 5.4 in. Hg
minimum. If not, shut down the engine and adjust the valve. (Turn the valve adjustment screw
clockwise to increase pressure and counterclockwise to decrease pressure.)
(5) Start the engine and repeat the check until not less than 5.4 in. Hg. is obtained at 90% Ng.
(6) After establishing above parameters, apply sufficient power to obtain a pressure gauge reading
of 16-20 psig. Cycle deicer boots and ensure vacuum indicates a steady 4.5 in. Hg, after deicer
boot cycle is turned OFF.
(7) After the system has been properly adjusted, bend the locking tabs on the valve down over the
adjustment screw.
6D15 37-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 37-10-00 6D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6D17 37-10-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 37-10-00 6D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
39
ELECTRICAL /
ELECTRONIC PANELS
6D19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 39
CHAPTER CHAPTER
39 - List of 1 Apr 15/07

39 - Table of Contents 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
39-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
39-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 39 - ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC PANELS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS 39-10-00 1 6E1

General 1 6E1
Face-Mounted Instruments 1 6E1
Removal 1 6E1
Installation 1 6E1
Rack-Mounted Avionics 1 6E1
Removal 1 6E1
Installation 1 6E1
Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator 2 6E2
Post-Installation Set-Up 2 6E2
Circuit Breaker Panels 2 6E2
Switches 2 6E2
Overhead Switch Panel 2 6E2
Rocker-type Switches 4 6E4
Push ON - Push OFF Switches 4 6E4
ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 39-20-00 1 6E13
6D23 39 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS
1. General
A. Face-Mounted Instruments
Most instruments are face-mounted and secured to the instrument panel by screws from the front of
the panel. Most instruments are removed out the back of the panel, but a few are removed through
the front of the panel. Take special care when any operation pertaining to the instruments is
performed.
(1) Removal
(a) Disconnect the plumbing and / or electrical connectors from the back of the instrument.
Where two or more lines connect to an instrument, identify and tag each line to facilitate
installation. Attach a dust cap to each fitting.
NOTE: For those instruments which remove through the front of the panel, disconnecting
and tagging plumbing and / or electrical connectors can be done after the
instrument retaining screws are removed and the instrument is slid gently forward
to expose the connections at the rear.
(b) Remove the screws that secure the instrument in the panel cutout.
(c) Remove the instrument from the panel.
(2) Installation
(a) Place the instrument in its proper panel cutout and secure with screws.
NOTE: For those instruments which install through the front of the panel, connecting
plumbing and / or electrical connectors can be done from the front of the panel
before the instrument retaining screws are installed. After the connections are
secure, slide the instrument into place and install the retaining screws.
(b) Connect the plumbing and/or electrical connectors to back of instrument.
(c) Check instrument operation.
B. Rack-Mounted Avionics
Most avionics are rack-mounted front-removable units generally secured to the instrument panel
tray/rack by a single jackscrew located in the center of their faceplate.
(1) Removal
(a) Insert an appropriate size (generally 3/32 inch) allen wrench into the jackscrew access
hole in the faceplate.
(b) Unscrew the jackscrew in a counterclockwise direction.
(c) Slide the avionics unit aft and out of the instrument panel tray/rack.
(2) Installation
NOTE: Inspect the front of the panel-mounted avionics tray/rack to verify it is not significantly
inset from the panel. If so, correct the tray/rack installation before proceeding.
NOTE: The high insertion forces required to seat a unit with “high density” connectors tend to
limit the effectiveness of the first seating attempt. Accordingly, the following procedure
requires sequential applications of force, and subsequent tightening of the jackscrew,
to ensure all connectors seat properly.
(a) Slide the avionics unit into the instrument panel rack and forward applying a moderate
insertion force.
6E1 39-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Insert an appropriate size (generally 3/32 inch) allen wrench into the jackscrew access
hole in the faceplate and tighten to remove any slack, but do not try to “pull” unit into place
with the jackscrew.
(c) Apply additional insertion force to front of unit.
(d) Tighten jackscrew again.
(e) Apply additional insertion force to front of unit.
(f) Finish tightening jackscrew.
(g) Ensure that unit bezel is “tight” against panel.
2. Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator - Meggitt EFIS Only (See Figure 1.)
NOTE: In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697155, when replacing the original factory installed Volt-Amp/Rudder
Trim Indicator (P/N 602-264), you must also replace the original factory installed rudder trim
actuator assembly (P/N 102345-004). Order Kit No. 767-342.
The Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator is located in the center of the instrument panel just above the
engine control pedestal. When installing a new unit, the following post-installation set-up procedure must
be performed.
Post-Installation Set-Up
(1) Verify rudder and rudder trim tab are rigged as specified in 27-20-00.
(2) Cycle rudder trim tab to full left and full right travel and note the reading on the
Volt-Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator. If both read 13 degrees, no adjustment is required. If not,
proceed with steps (3) and (4).
(3) Set rudder trim tab to full left travel: adjust “ZERO” pot for 13 degree indication.
(4) Set rudder trim tab to full right travel: adjust “GAIN” pot for 13 degree indication.
3. Circuit Breaker Panels (See Figures 1 and 2.)
Circuit breakers are installed on both the pilot’s and copilot’s side. Should a circuit breaker be replaced or
added, exercise extreme caution ensuring the breakers are in proper mechanical alignment, any
insulators that are called out are installed correctly, and all electrical wiring and connections meet
aviation standards. Do not deviate from the parts manual requirements when replacing circuit breakers.
4. Switches
A. Overhead Switch Panel
Most switches are located in the overhead switch panel. When working on the overhead switch
panel, remove it from the aircraft first.
(1) Removal
(a) Remove panel retaining screws (8).
(b) Slide the switch panel down to gain access to the electrical connectors at the back of the
panel.
(c) Disconnect the electrical connectors and remove panel from aircraft.
(2) Switch Replacement
Switches in the overhead switch panel are not replaceable. If one switch fails, the entire switch
panel must be replaced.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 39-10-00 6E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. PILOT’S AFT CB PANEL 11. EADI

2. PILOT’S FWD CB PANEL (I.E. - MEGGITT PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY)*
3. ECS (BLEED AIR) CONTROL PANEL 12. ENGINE DISPLAY UNIT*
4. COLOR WEATHER RADAR 13. ANNUNCIATOR
5. VOLT/AMP/RUDDER TRIM METER 14. STANDBY INSTRUMENTS
6. ENVIRONMENTAL (A/C) CONTROL PANEL 15. GARMIN GMA-340 AUDIO PANEL
7. COPILOT’S AFT CB PANEL 16. GARMIN GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS*
8. COPILOT’S FWD CB PANEL 17. OVERHEAD SWITCH PANEL
9. BUS TIE CB PANEL
10. EHSI (I.E. - MEGGITT NAV DISPLAY)* * = Installed on both sides.
Flight Deck View (Meggitt EFIS Shown)

Figure 1
6E3 39-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Installation
NOTE: The overhead switch panel is lighted with electroluminescent placards. The left and
right placards bear part of the load exerted by the panel retaining screws. A maximum
of 20 inch lbs of torque should be applied to the retaining screws when installing the
switch panel or you may damage the placards.
(a) Holding the switch panel below the opening in the headliner, connect the electrical
connectors to the rear of the panel.
(b) Slide the panel into position and secure with screws (8). Torque the screws to 20 Inch lbs.
B. Rocker-type Switches
A few rocker-type switches are used in the instrument panel.
CAUTION: ALTHOUGH SMALL SWITCH ASSEMBLIES ARE EASIER TO REMOVE IF WIRING
IS FIRST DISCONNECTED, THE LIMITED WORK SPACE BEHIND THE PANEL CAN
RESULT IN BURNED WIRE INSULATION. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO UNSOLDER
THESE SMALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDER ANY CONDITIONS. IF NECESSARY, CUT WIRES AT POINT OF
CONNECTION. IN ANY CASE, IT’S BETTER TO DAMAGE THE SWITCH AND
REPLACE IT, RATHER THAN DAMAGE THE WIRING HARNESS LEADS.
(1) Removal
(a) Gain access to the switch from behind the instrument panel.
(b) Squeeze retainer blades on top and bottom of the switch together and push switch from
the panel.
(c) Make note of the placement of, and / or tag, wires on the switch to facilitate installation.
(d) Disconnect wires from the switch. Remove switch.
(2) Installation
(a) Connect wires to the switch.
(b) Squeeze retainer blades on top and bottom of the switch together and push switch into
panel until retainer blades engage the panel.
C. Push ON - Push OFF Switches
A few Push ON - Push OFF switches are used in the instrument panel.
(1) Removal
(a) Gently pry off the switch cap.
(b) With a small screwdriver, rotate the two retaining tabs until they disengage.
(c) Slide the switch out.
(2) Installation
(a) Slide the switch into place.
(b) With a small screwdriver, rotate the two retaining tabs until they engage.
(c) Press on the switch cap.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 39-10-00 6E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6E5 39-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Circuit Breaker Panels (Typical)

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 39-10-00 6E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Circuit Breaker Panels (Typical)

6E7 39-10-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Electronic Control Module and Terminal Junction Module Identification

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 39-10-00 6E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102228 AA
105125 D
VENT DEFOG
AIR 2001 2002 2003 2004

HI BLOWER
CONDITIONING
PITOT HEAT
ANNUNCIATOR LO BLOWER
RELAY *
PITOT HEAT
ANNUNCIATOR
RELAY *
AVIONICS
DIMMING
LEFT 2005 2006 2008 2009

TJ BLOCK 6
PITOT HEAT
RIGHT TJ BLOCK 5
PITOT HEAT
TJ BLOCK 4
TJ BLOCK 3
TJ BLOCK 2
TJ BLOCK 1
* SEE DETAIL A, 39-20-00 FIGURE 2, SHEET 3, FOR RELAY PIN IDENTIFICATION. TJ RAIL
COPILOT'S
Electronic Control Module and Terminal Junction Module Identification

6E9 39-10-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 39-10-00 6E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102221 AD
P17B6R P6A4
P17B6L P5A4
P4B4
P1D2
LINE RP1A8R
CONTACTOR
RP1A8L
(K405)
P55ZZ20 TO
TERMINAL 87y
FROM
TERMINAL 87b
TO
MOUNTING SCREW
(GND)
#1 AVIONICS BUS
CB304 (35 A)
BATTERY
CB301 (150 A) #2 AVIONICS BUS
CB305 (35 A)
ALTERNATOR
NON-ESSENTIAL BUS
CB302 (150 A)
CB308 (100 A)
#2 MAIN BUS #1 MAIN BUS
P5B2 CB306 (80 A) CB307 (80 A)
TO
GENERATOR
SHUNT
LOOKING AFT AT RIGHT SIDE INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tie Bus Panel Connections

Figure 4
6E11 39-10-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 39-10-00 6E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
102223 AK
GEAR
COMM INDICATION
BATTERY VIEW A-A

BUS EMER. AUDIO
LIGHTS MKR
COURTESY
STEREO CLOCK LIGHTS

(RP10A18) (G5E20)
(RP7A20)
(EL1A20)
(CL1A20)
(ST1A20) (L60A20)
AUXILIARY
POWER
CONTACTOR
(K403) A A
BATTERY
CONTACTOR
(K401)
- + + -
START
CONTACTOR
(K402)
- +
102221 AJ
Master Electrical Panel

Figure 1
6E13 39-20-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 2
Kit# 766-697 installed

4697125 with
4697116, 4697118, and
4697001 thru 4696114,
4697126 & up; and
4697119 thru 4697124,
4697115, 4697117,
Effectivity
1N4719 DIODE
TO K2-2 291 TERMINAL BOARD
5
39-20-00
3.3K RESISTOR 1 TO J317-10

RC07GF332J 2 6
3 7
TO J317-11
4 8
TO GND
TB1
TERMINAL BOARD ASSY
GEAR WARN MUTE
DIMMING
(SEE DETAIL A ON SHEET 3)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GEAR WARN MUTE

DEACTIVATE
Relay Installation
K1A K20
K3 K9 K1
1 5 K2
J317
K4 ANNUN. SQUAT ANNUN.
2 6
ANNUN.
INOP. SW NO. 2 TEST DAY/NIGHT
STALL 3 7
COMPUTER 4
FAIL LOGIC 8
TB1
THIS AREA MUST REMAIN FREE

OF COMPONENTS & WIRING TO
PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR THE
EMERGENCY GEAR CABLE. ONLY WITH
AVIDYNE
102252 AD
6E14
6E15
102252 V
S/N'S 4697120, 4697122, 4697124,

AND 4697126 & UP ONLY TO TB1 PIN 1 RESISTOR
RC07GF682J 6.8 OHM
J317 25 27 29 31 3 4 5 33 34 1 28 23 22 2 8 32 13 6 14 7 10 11 12 24 26 15 16 17

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5 8
Relay Installation
2 TO TB1
6 (SEE SHEET 1)
N.C.
N.O. 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 3 4
COM. 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 7 8 B2 A2 K10 B2 K10
5 6 5 6 9 10 11 12 5 6
A2
COIL 9 10 11 12
B3 B1 A3 A1 X1
A B A A B
A B B A B X2 B3 B1 A3 A1 X1 X2
K4 K3 K9 K1 K2 K1A K20
RESISTOR 1K OHM,
1/4 WATT
1N2071A DIODE 1N4002
(7 PLACES) RESISTOR 560 OHM,
39-20-00
1/2 WATT, 10%

4697116, 4697118, and
4697001 thru 4696114,
4697119 thru 4697124,

Kit# 766-697 installed
4697115, 4697117,
4697126 & up; and
4697125 with
Apr 15/07
Effectivity
PAGE 3
Apr 15/07
PAGE 4
with Avidyne Entegra

Effectivity
39-20-00
102252 AD
1N4002 DIODE
TO TB1 PIN 1 RESISTOR RC07GF682J 6.8K OHM

J317 25 27 29 31 32 3 4 5 33 34 1 28 23 22 2 8 30 13 18 9 6 14 7 10 11 12 24 26 15 16 17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Relay Installation
5 8
TO TB1
(SEE SHEET 1)
N.C 1 1 4 1 2
2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
N.O.
COM.
3
5
4 3
5
4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 B2 A2
K10 B2 A2 K10
6 6 9 10 11 12 5 6 9 10 11 12
COIL B3 B3 A1
A A B1 B1 A3 X1
A B A B B B A B A3 A1 X1 X2 X2
K4 K3 K9 K1 K2 K1A K20
1K OHM 1/4 WATT
RESISTOR
1N2071A DIODE 1N4002 1.21K 1/10 WATT RESISTOR

7 REQ
6E16
6E17
102252 V
K
6
GNS 530
A K8 K6 K7
NAV/COM/GPS 1
DIMMING
EMER / GND GROUND SQUAT
(SEE DETAIL A) CLEARANCE CLEARANCE SW NO. 1
FEATHER
ANNUNCIATOR
K
10

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

J387
Relay Installation
A3 A1
X2 B2 BLUE BEAD
A2 X1 102252 AD
1N2071A DIODE
B1 B3
(5 PLACES)
K
6
DETAIL A A K8 K6
(RELAY PIN IDENT) EMER/GND
CLEARANCE
GROUND
CLEARANCE
39-20-00
with Kit# 766-696 installed
4697001 thru 4696054
4697055 & up; and
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA INSTALLED

Apr 15/07
Effectivity
PAGE 5
Apr 15/07
PAGE 6
with Kit# 766-696 installed

4697001 thru 4696054
4697055 & up; and
Effectivity
16 31 32 21 34 6 37 29 J387
39-20-00
B2 A2 K6A B2 A2 K10
B3 B1 A3 A1 B3 B1 A3 A1 X1 X2
X1 X2
EXISTING WIRE TO K6 PIN B
TO K6 PIN A

TO K6 PIN 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Relay Installation
23 22 24 26 25 27 16 15 17 19 18 14 20 21 1 13 12 10 9 8 7 5 3 4 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4
102252 V
3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 6 5 6 9 10 11 12
A B A B A B
1N4719 1N4002
DIODE DIODE
K8 K6 K7
6E18
6E19
16 31 32 21 34 6 37 29
B2 A2 K6A B2 A2 K10
B3
B1 A3 A1 B3 B1 A3 A1 X1 X2
X1 X2
EXISTING WIRE TO K6 PIN B

TO K6 PIN 3 TO K6 PIN A

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Relay Installation
J387 23 22 24 25 26 27 28 30 16 15 17 19 18 14 20 21 1 13 12 10 9 8 7 5 3 4 2
39-20-00
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 3 4 1N4719 DIODE 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 5 6 9 10 11 12
A A B
with Avidyne Entegra
B A B
K8 K6
K7 1N4002 DIODE
Apr 15/07
Effectivity
PAGE 7
102252 AD
Apr 15/07
PAGE 8
4697174 and up
Effectivity
39-20-00
INVERTER ASSY ANNUN. DIMMING PANEL (-002)

ANNUN. DIMMING PANEL (-004)
ACCESS PANEL ASSY
STRAP ASSY
F. S.
108.00
REF

Annun Dimming and Relay Assy.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FUSELAGE ASSY
P363 J363
IGNITION
P366 J366 RELAY
P394 P394
F. S.
117.00
REF
IGNITION ASSY
B. L.
PILOT SIDE 0.00
REF
102231 G
6E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6E21 39-20-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 6E22 THRU 6E24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 39-20-00 6E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
51
STRUCTURES
6F1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
51-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
51-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
51-70-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
51-80-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 51 - STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 51-00-00 1 6F7
INVESTIGATION, CLEANUP
AND AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHNESS 51-10-00 1 6F11
Corrosion Control 1 6F11
Forms of Corrosion 1 6F11
Conditions Affecting Corrosion 1 6F11
Corrosion Inspections 2 6F12
Corrosion Removal and Control 3 6F13
Corrosion Prone Areas 4 6F14
REPAIRS 51-70-00 1 6F17

Fiberglass Repairs 1 6F17
Touch-up and Surface Repairs 1 6F17
Fracture and Patch Repairs 2 6F18
Thermoplastic Repairs 3 6F19
Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk Installation 11 6G3
Metal Wire Stitch Repair 12 6G4
ELECTRICAL BONDING 51-80-00 1 6G7

General 1 6G7
100 Hour Inspection 1 6G7
On Condition Inspection 1 6G7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
13
7
1 9
7 7 9 3 10
7
5 4 (OIL DOOR)
12
9 9 10 3
2 3 3
10 4
9
3
9 8 3
13
9 7
1
3 7 9
10 7
7
10
12
3 10 9
3 9
4 9 2
4 9
3
3 9
8
NUMBER MATERIAL THICKNESS
1 2024-0* .020
2 2024-0* .025
3 2024-0* .032
4 2024-0* .040
5 2024-0* .063
6 2024-T3 .016
7 2024-T3 .020
8 2024-T3 .025
9 2024-T3 .032
10 2024-T3 .040
11 2024-T3* .040
12 5052-H34 .025
13 6061-0 .025
14 6061-0* .032
15 FIBERGLASS
* HEAT TREAT TO T42
Skin Material Specifications

6F7 51-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 9 9
4 9
3 10 4 9 9
10
3
4 3 3
3 9 9
8 8
11 11
10 10
TOP
8 8 8 8
2 2
6 6
8 8
11 11
10 10
BOTTOM
8 8 8 8
2 2
6 6

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 51-00-00 6F8
6F9
8
7
9
9
10
10 9
10 11
WS WS
WS WS WS WS 240.00
WS 182.00 209.00
107.50 134.00 156.00
82.50
WS WS WS
61.80 93.00 116.00
WS
51.542
WS 4
40.00
WS
29.00 10
8 11
9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7
9
10 9
10 9
10
4
10
51-00-00 AprPAGE
CENTER WING SECTION OUTBOARD WING SECTION
15/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 51-00-00 6F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INVESTIGATION, CLEANUP AND AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHNESS
Corrosion Control
Corrosion is the deterioration of metal by chemical or electrochemical attack. Water which is allowed to
remain on the aircraft and industrial pollution are the major causes of corrosion in aircraft. The two
general types of corrosion are:
-- Direct chemical attack. (i.e. spilled battery acid)
-- Electrochemical attack which requires a medium. (usually water)
The latter is the most common and is responsible for most forms of aircraft corrosion.
Since corrosion is a constant threat, the only effective method to control it is a routine of regular
inspection, cleaning, and surface refinishing.
A. Forms of Corrosion
The following are the most common forms of corrosion:
(1) Surface corrosion appears as a general roughening or pitting on the surface usually
accompanied by a powdery deposit of corrosion products. It may spread under the surface and
not be recognized until the paint or plating is lifted off the surface in small blisters.
(2) Dissimilar metal corrosion may occur when two dissimilar metals are contacting each other.
This type may be serious because it usually takes place out of sight. The only way to find it
before structural failure is by disassembly and inspection. Insulating is necessary between two
contacting dissimilar surfaces (2-3 coats of waterborne, chromated, fluid resistant, epoxy
primer (i.e. - PRC Desoto) or a coat of epoxy polyamide on each surface; plus a .003 thick
piece of vinyl tape if one of the surfaces is magnesium).
(3) Intergranular corrosion is difficult to detect in its early stages. When severe, it causes the
surface of the metal to exfoliate (flake or lift).
(4) Stress Corrosion is the result of sustained tensile stresses and corrosive environment. It
usually occurs in assemblies such as aluminum alloy bellcranks with pressed in bushings;
landing gear shock struts with pipe thread grease fittings, clevis pin joints and shrink fit parts.
(5) Fretting Corrosion takes place when two parts rub together, constantly exposing fresh active
metal to the corrosive effects of the atmosphere
(6) Filiform Corrosion is the appearance of numerous meandering thread-like filaments of
corrosion on the surface of various types of metal.
B. Conditions Affecting Corrosion
Some conditions which affect the occurrence of corrosion are:
(1) Heat and humidity increase corrosion.
(2) Different metal and their relative sizes affect resistance or susceptibility to corrosion.
(3) Frequent contributing factors to corrosion are:
(a) Soil and atmosphere dust.
(b) Oil, grease and exhaust residues.
(c) Salt water and salt moisture condensation.
(d) Spilled battery acids and caustic cleaning solutions.
(e) Welding, brazing and soldering flux residue
A clean aircraft will resist corrosion better than a dirty one. Cleaning frequency depends on several
factors (such as geographical location, type of operation, etc). Soil should be removed as soon as
possible, especially when it is on a high temperature area.
6F11 51-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TYPES OF METAL CORROSION
Type of Material Type of Corrosion Remedy**
Steel Rust* Complete removal of
corrosion by mechanical
means.
Aluminum White to grey powdery material. Mechanical polishing or
brushing with material
softer than aluminum.
Magnesium (highly susceptible White powdery snow-like
to corrosion) mounds and white spots.
Cadmium (plating) White to brown to black Mechanical removal of
mottling of surface (plating corrosion should be limited
is still protecting until iron to metal surfaces from
appears). which the cadmium has
been depleted.
Chromium (plating) May pit in chloride Promotes rusting of steel
environment. where pits occur in the
coating.
* Red rust generally shows on bolt heads, hold-down nuts and other aircraft hardware. Its presence in
these areas is generally not dangerous. However, it is indicative of a need for maintenance and also of
the possibility of corrosive attack in more critical areas. Any corrosion on the surface of a highly
stressed steel part is potentially dangerous. A careful removal of corrosion products using mild
abrasives (rough or fine grit aluminum oxide paper) is necessary, using care not to overheat the metal
when removing the corrosion.
** For abrasion, do not use dissimilar material (i.e. steel wool on aluminum). Remove only the material
required to clean up the affected area.
After cleaning, ensure that no cleaning solution remains in any holes, crevices or joints, as it may
lead to increased corrosion. Also, all exposed areas (landing gear, flap tracks, control surface, hinge
parts, etc) should be lubricated after cleaning.
C. Corrosion Inspections
NOTE: Some areas of the airplane have been treated with a corrosion inhibiting compound which
requires re-treatment at 5 year intervals. See 5-30-00.
Corrosion should be inspected for at every inspection. In trouble areas, the inspection frequency
should be increased.
In addition to routine inspections:
(1) Aircraft operating around a marine environment should be given special checks on a weekly
basis.
(2) Aircraft operating in a semi-acid condition should be inspected monthly. A semi-acid condition
is likely to occur in industrialized areas where sulfur bearing particles in dust, smoke and smog
attack painted surfaces.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 51-10-00 6F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Inspections for corrosion should be performed by personnel familiar with corrosive problems
and their remedies.
(a) Daily and preflight inspections should include the engine frontal areas, all intake vents,
engine compartments, gaps, seams, and faying surfaces in the exterior skins, wheel and
wheel well areas, battery compartment, fuel cell and all other drains, and any bilge areas
not requiring extensive removal of inspection access covers.
(b) Detailed inspection should include the above referenced areas along with areas requiring
removal of screw attached inspection plates and panels to thoroughly inspect the internal
cavities of the aircraft.
(4) During inspection remember that paint tends to hide corrosion in its initial stages. However, the
results of corrosion can sometimes be seen as blisters, flakes, chips and other irregularities in
the paint.
D. Corrosion Removal and Control
CAUTION: REMOVAL OF “SEVERE CORROSION” MAY BE CONSIDERED A MAJOR REPAIR.
ANY REPAIR OF THIS TYPE MUST BE APPROVED BY THE FAA BEFORE
RETURNING THE AIRPLANE TO SERVICE.
Corrosion cannot be prevented or eliminated on aircraft; it can only be reduced to an acceptable
level by proper control methods.
All corrosion products must be removed prior to refinishing. If they are not removed, corrosion will
begin again, even though the affected area is refinished.
(1) Before beginning any rework:
(a) Position the airplane in a wash rack or provide some type of washing apparatus for rapid
rinsing of all surfaces.
(b) Connect a static ground line to the airplane.
(c) Remove the airplane battery if required.
(d) Protect the pitot-static ports, engine openings, airscoops, louvers, wheels, tires and other
portions of the airplane from moisture and chemical brightening agents.
(e) Protect the surfaces next to the rework areas from chemical paint strippers, corrosion
removal agents and surface treatment materials.
(2) An evaluation of the corrosion damage is necessary to determine the type and extent of
repairs required.
The following are general guidelines:
(a) Light Corrosion: Discoloration or pitting; normally removed by light hand sanding or a
small amount of chemical treatment.
(b) Moderate Corrosion: Similar to light corrosion except there could be some blistering or
evidence of scaling and flaking. Removed by extensive hand sanding or mechanical
sanding.
(c) Severe Corrosion: Similar to moderate corrosion with severe blistering, exfoliation,
scaling and / or flaking, normally removed by extensive mechanical sanding or grinding.
NOTE: The depth of material removed should not exceed safe limits.
6F13 51-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Corrosion Prone Areas

Certain areas are more prone to corrosion than others. The following list is intended to be a general
guide to areas where corrosion is frequently found.
(1) Areas around steel fasteners are susceptible to corrosion. The paint on these areas cracks
which allows moisture to seep in and corrode the underlying metal. Each time the fastener is
removed, it should be coated with zinc chromate before reinstallation. The paint should be wet
when the fastener is installed.
(2) Fluids tend to seep into faying surfaces, seams and joints due to capillary action. The effect of
this type of intrusion is usually detectable by irregularities in the skin’s surface.
(3) Spot welded assemblies are particularly prone to corrosion. The only means to prevent this
type of corrosion is by keeping potential moisture entry points in the spot weld filled with a
sealant or preservative compound. On an aluminum spot welded assembly, a chromate
conversion coating before paint is applied will help prevent corrosion.
(4) Areas which are exposed to exhaust gases may have their finish damaged by deposits. These
deposits may result in an aggressive attack on the metal by corrosion. Heat from the exhaust
may also blister or otherwise damage the paint. Gaps, seams, hinges and fairings are some
places where exhaust gas deposits may be trapped and not reached by normal cleaning
methods.
(5) The wheel well and landing gear are the most exposed parts of the aircraft. Due to the
complexity of its shape, assemblies and fittings, maintaining a protective coverage is difficult.
The especially troublesome areas are:
(a) Magnesium wheels: around bolt heads, lugs and wheel well areas:
(b) Exposed rigid tubing, B-nuts, ferrules, under clamps and tubing identification tape:
(c) Exposed position indicator switches and other electrical equipment:
(d) Crevices between stiffeners, ribs and lower skin surfaces.
(6) Flaps, flight control slots and equipment installed in these areas may corrode unnoticed unless
a careful surveillance is maintained.
(7) Engine frontal areas, air inlet ducts and the leading edge of wings, because they are constantly
exposed to abrasion by dirt, dust, gravel and rain, should be checked frequently for the
beginning of corrosion.
(8) Hinges (piano hinges especially) are extremely vulnerable to corrosion due to the wearing
away of their protective coating and their being a natural trap for dirt, salt and moisture.
(9) Control cables may have bare spots in their preservative coating which could lead to corrosion.
Cables having external corrosion should be checked for internal corrosion. If internal corrosion
is present, replace the cable. If only external corrosion is present, remove corrosion with a wire
brush and recoat cable with preservative.
(10) Any area where water may be trapped is a trouble spot for corrosion. Drain holes should be
checked and cleaned regularly.
(11) Battery compartment and vent openings are particularly prone to corrosion due to spilled
electrolyte. Fumes from overheated battery electrolyte will spread to adjacent areas and cause
rapid corrosion of unprotected surfaces. Frequent cleaning and neutralization of deposits will
minimize corrosion from this cause.
(12) Due to magnesium parts being prone to corrosion, special attention should be given to their
surface treatment, proper insulation (due to dissimilar metal corrosion) and paint coatings.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 51-10-00 6F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) Electrical components and connectors should be checked. Their inspection frequency should
be based on their operational environment and past trouble with them.
(14) Skin joints and lap-overs are two areas which may contain moisture. Corrosion in these areas
may go unnoticed unless particular attention is paid to them during inspection.
(15) Hoses having an internal wire braid which are located in a position where they are frequently
water soaked need a protective treatment.
(16) Drilled holes and the trimmed end of sandwich panels should be protected. An inhibitor
solution and/ or sealant application is recommended. Any gaps or cavities which allow dirt or
moisture to enter should be filled with a sealant.
6F15 51-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 51-10-00 6F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
REPAIRS
Structural repair methods used must be in accordance with regulations set forth in FAA Advisory Circular
43.13-1, latest revision. To assist in making repairs and/or replacements, Figure 1, 51-00-00, identifies
type and thickness of various skin material used.
WARNING: NO ACCESS HOLES ARE PERMITTED IN ANY CONTROL SURFACE. USE OF PATCH
PLATES FOR REPAIRS OF ALL MOVABLE TAIL SURFACES IS PROHIBITED. USE OF
ANY FILLER MATERIAL NORMALLY USED FOR REPAIR OF MINOR DENTS AND/OR
MATERIALS USED FOR FILLING INSIDE OF SURFACES IS ALSO PROHIBITED ON ALL
MOVABLE TAIL SURFACES.
Never make a skin replacement or patch plate from material other than type of original skin, or of a
different thickness than original skin. Repair must be as strong as original skin. However, flexibility must
be retained so surrounding areas will not receive extra stress.
1. Fiberglass Repairs
The repair procedure in this section will describe the methods for the repair of fiberglass reinforced
structures. This section describes Touch-up and Surface Repairs such as blisters, open seams,
delaminations, cavities, small holes and minor damages that have not harmed the fiberglass cloth
material. Also covered are Fracture and Patch Repairs such as puncture, breaks and holes that have
penetrated through the structure and damaged the fiberglass cloth. A repair kit, Piper P/N 766-222, that
will furnish the necessary material for such repairs, is available through Piper Distributors.
NOTE: Very carefully follow resin and catalyst mixing instructions furnished with repair kit.
A. Touch-up and Surface Repairs
(1) Remove wax, oil and dirt from around the damaged area with acetone. Methylethylketone or
equivalent and remove paint to gel coat.
(2) The damaged area may be scraped with a fine blade knife or a power drill with a burr
attachment to roughen the bottom and sides of the damaged area. Feather the edge
surrounding the scratch or cavity. Do not undercut the edge. (If the scratch or cavity is shallow
and penetrates only the surface coat, continue to step (8).
(3) Pour a small amount of resin into a jar lid or on a piece of cardboard, just enough to fill the
area being worked on. Mix an equal amount of milled fiberglass with the resin, using a putty
knife or stick. Add catalyst, according to kit instruction, to the resin and mix thoroughly. A
hypodermic needle may be used to inject gel into small cavities not requiring fiberglass millings
mixed with the gel.
(4) Work the mixture of resin, fibers and catalyst into the damaged area, using the sharp point of a
putty knife or stick to press it into the bottom of the hole and to puncture any air bubbles which
may be present. Fill the scratch or hole above the surrounding undamaged area about .062 of
an inch.
(5) Lay a piece of cellophane or waxed paper over the repair to cut off air and start the cure of gel
mixture.
(6) Allow the gel to cure 10 to 15 minutes until it feels rubbery to the touch. Remove the
cellophane and trim flush with the surface, using a sharp razor blade or knife. Replace the
cellophane and allow to cure completely for 30 minutes to an hour. The patch will shrink slightly
below the structure surface as it cures. (If wax paper is used, make sure the wax is removed
from surface)
(7) Rough up the bottom and edges of the hole with the electric burr attachment or rough
sandpaper. Feather hole into surrounding gel coat, do not undercut.
6F17 51-70-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Pour out a small amount of resin, add catalyst and mix thoroughly, using a cutting motion
rather than stirring. Use no fibers.
(9) Using the tip of a putty knife or fingertips, fill the hole to about .062 of an inch above the
surrounding surface with the gel coat mixture.
(10) Lay a piece of cellophane over the patch to start the curing process. Repeat step (6), trimming
patch when partially cured.
(11) After trimming the patch, immediately place another small amount of gel coat on one edge of
the patch and cover with cellophane. Then, using a squeegee or the back of a razor blade,
level with area surrounding the patch; leave the cellophane on patch for one to two hours or
overnight, for complete cure.
(12) After repair has cured for 24 hours, sand patched area, using a sanding block with fine wet
sandpaper. Finish by priming, again sanding and applying color coat.
B. Fracture and Patch Repairs
(1) Remove wax, oil and dirt from around the damaged area with acetone, methylethylketone or
equivalent.
(2) Using a key hole saw, electric saber saw, or sharp knife cut away ragged edges. Cut back to
sound material.
(3) Remove paint three inches back from around damaged area.
(4) Working inside the structure, bevel the edges to approximately a 30 degree angle and rough-
sand the hole and the area around it, using 80 grit dry paper. Feather back for about two
inches all around the hole. This roughens the surface for strong bond with patch.
(5) Cover a piece of cardboard or metal with cellophane. Tape it to the outside of the structure,
covering the hole completely. The cellophane should face toward the inside of the structure. If
the repair is on a sharp contour or shaped area, a sheet of aluminum formed to a similar
contour may be placed over the area. The aluminum should also be covered with cellophane.
(6) Prepare a patch of fiberglass mat and cloth to cover an area two inches larger than the hole.
(7) Mix a small amount of resin and catalyst; enough to be used for one step at a time, according
to kit instructions.
(8) Thoroughly wet mat and cloth with catalyzed resin. Daub resin on mat first, and then on cloth.
Mat should be applied against structures surface with cloth on top. Both pieces may be wet out
on cellophane and applied as a sandwich. Enough fiberglass cloth and mat reinforcements
should be used to at least replace the amount of reinforcements removed in order to maintain
the original strength. If damage occurred as a stress crack, an extra layer or two of cloth may
be used to strengthen area.
(9) Lay patch over hole on inside of structure, cover with cellophane, and squeegee from center to
edges to remove all air bubbles and assure adhesion around edge of hole. Air bubbles will
show white in the patch and they should all be worked out to the edge. Remove excess resin
before it gels on the part. Allow patch to cure completely.
(10) Remove cardboard or aluminum sheet from outside of hole and rough-sand the patch and
edge of hole. Feather edge of hole about two inches into undamaged area.
(11) Mask area around hole with tape and paper to protect surface. Cut a piece of fiberglass mat
about one inch larger than the hole and one or more pieces of fiberglass cloth two inches
larger than the hole. Brush catalyzed resin over hole, lay mat over hole and wet out with
catalyzed resin. Use a daubing action with brush. Then apply additional layer or layers of
fiberglass cloth to build up patch to the surface of structure. Wet out each layer thoroughly with resin.
(12) With a squeegee or broad knife, work out all air bubbles in the patch. Work from center to edge
pressing patch firmly against the structure. Allow patch to cure for 15 to 20 minutes.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) As soon as the patch begins to set up, but while still rubbery, take a sharp knife and cut away
extra cloth and mat. Cut on outside edge of feathering. Strip cut edges of structure. Do this
before cure is complete, to save extra sanding. Allow patch to cure overnight.
(14) Using dry 80 grit sandpaper on a power sander or sanding block, smooth patch and blend with
surrounding surface. Should air pockets appear while sanding, puncture and fill with catalyzed
resin. A hypodermic needle may be used to fill cavities. Let cure and resand.
(15) Mix catalyzed resin and work into patch with fingers. Smooth carefully and work into any crevices.
(16) Cover with cellophane and squeegee smooth. Allow to cure completely before removing
cellophane. Let cure and resand.
(17) Brush or spray a coat of catalyzed resin to seal patch. Sand patch, finish by priming, again
sanding and applying color coat.
NOTE: Brush and hands may be cleaned in solvents such as acetone or methylethylketone. If
solvents are not available, a strong solution of detergent and water may be used.
2. Thermoplastic Repairs
The following procedure will assist in making field repairs to items made of thermoplastic which are used
throughout the airplane. Chart 1 lists materials needed to perform these repairs along with suggested
suppliers of the material. Common safety precautions should be observed when handling some of the
materials and tools used while making these repairs. Refer to Vendor Information, Chapter 91, for
supplier addresses.
A. Surface Preparation:
(1) Surface dirt and paint if applied must be removed from the item being repaired. Household
cleaners have proven most effective in removing surface dirt.
(2) Preliminary cleaning of the damaged area with perchlorethylene or V M & P Naphtha will
generally ensure a good bond between epoxy compounds and thermoplastic.
B. Surface Scratches, Abrasion or Ground-in-Dirt: (See Figure 1.)
(1) Shallow scratches and abraded surfaces are usually repaired by following directions on
containers of conventional automotive buffing and rubbing compounds.
(2) If large dirt particles are embedded in thermoplastic parts they can be removed with a hot air
gun capable of supplying heat in the temperature range of 300° to 400° F. Use care not to
overheat the material. Hold the nozzle of the gun about 1/4 of an inch away from the surface
and apply heat with a circular motion until the area is sufficiently soft to remove the dirt
particles.
(3) The thermoplastic will return to its original shape upon cooling.
C. Deep Scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes - Less than 1 inch in diameter: (See Figure 2.)
(1) Solvent cements will fit virtually any of these applications. If the area to be repaired is very
small, it may be quicker to make a satisfactory cement by dissolving thermoplastic material of
the same type being repaired in solvent until the desired paste like consistency is achieved.
(2) This mixture is then applied to the damaged area. Upon solvent evaporation, the hard durable
solids remaining can easily be shaped to the desired contour by filing or sanding.
(3) Solvent adhesives are not recommended for highly stressed areas, or thin walled parts or for
patching holes greater than 1/4 inch in diameter.
(4) For larger damages, an epoxy patching compound is recommended. This type material is a
two part, fast curing, easy sanding commercially available compound.
(5) Adhesion can be increased by roughing the bonding surface with sandpaper and by utilizing as
much surface area for the bond as possible.
6F19 51-70-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Surface Scratches - Abrasions or Ground in Dirt

Figure 1
Deep Scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Mixing of Epoxy Patching Compound

Figure 3
Welding Repair Method

Figure 4
6F21 51-70-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) The patching compound is mixed in equal portions on a hard flat surface using a figure eight
motion. The damaged area is cleaned with perchlorethylene or V M & P Naphtha prior to
applying the compound. (See Figure 3.)
(7) A mechanical sander can be used after the compound is cured, providing the sander is kept in
constant motion to prevent heat buildup.
(8) For repairs in areas involving little or no shear stress, the hot melt adhesives, polyamids which
are supplied in stick form, may be used. This type of repair has a low cohesive strength factor.
(9) For repairs in areas involving small holes, indentations or cracks in the material where high
stress is apparent or where thin walled sections are used, the welding method is suggested.
(10) This welding method requires a hot air gun and ABS rods. To weld, the gun should be held to
direct the flow of hot air into the fusion (repair) zone, heating the damaged area and rod
simultaneously. The gun should be moved continuously in a fanning motion to prevent
discoloration of the material. Pressure must be maintained on the rod to ensure good
adhesion. (See Figure 4.)
(11) After the repair is completed, sanding is allowed to obtain a surface finish of acceptable
appearance.
D. Cracks: (See Figure 5.)
(1) Before repairing a crack in the thermoplastic part, first determine what caused the crack and
alleviate that condition to prevent it from recurring after the repair is made.
(2) Drill small stop holes at each end of the crack.
(3) If possible, a double plate should be bonded to the reverse side of the crack to provide extra
strength to the part.
(4) The crack should be “V” grooved and filled with repair material, such as solvent cement, hot
melt adhesive, epoxy patching compound or it should be hot air welded, whichever is
preferred.
(5) After the repair has cured, it may be sanded to match the surrounding finish.
Repairing of Cracks
Figure 5
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Repairing Major Damage: - Larger than 1 inch in diameter (See Figure 6.)
(1) If possible, a patch should be made of the same material, and cut slightly larger than the
section being repaired.
(2) When appearances are important, large holes, cracks, tears, etc, should be repaired by cutting
out the damaged area and replacing it with a piece of similar material.
(3) When cutting away the damaged area, under cut the perimeter and maintain a smooth edge.
The patch and/or plug should also have a smooth edge to ensure a good fit.
(4) Coat the patch with solvent adhesive and firmly attach it over the damaged area.
(5) Let the patch dry for approximately one hour before any additional work is performed.
(6) The hole, etc, is then filled with the repair material. A slight overfill of the repair material is
suggested to allow for sanding and finishing after the repair has cured. If patching compound is
used, the repair should be made in layers, not exceeding a 1/2 inch thickness at a time. This
will allow the compound to cure and ensure a good solid buildup of successive layers as
required.
6F23 51-70-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Various Repairs
Figure 6
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Repair of Stress Lines

Figure 7
Repair of Impact Damage

Figure 8
6G1 51-70-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
LIST OF MATERIALS (THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS)
Items Descriptions Suppliers
Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type - DuPont #7 DuPont Company
Compounds
Ram Chemical #69 x 1 Ram Chemicals
Mirror Glaze #1 Mirror Bright Polish Co., Inc.
Cleaners Fantastic Spray Obtain From Local Suppliers
Perchlorethylene
V M & P Naphtha (Lighter Fluid )
ABS-Solvent Cements Solarite #11 Series Solar Compounds Corp.
Solvents Methylethylketone Obtain From Local Suppliers
Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Epoxy Patching Solarite #400 Solar Compounds Corp.
Compound
Hot Melt Adhesives Stick Form 1/2 in. dia. Sears Roebuck & Co. or
Polyamids and Hot 3 in. long Most Hardware Stores
Melt Gun
Hot Air Gun Temp. Range 300° to 400° F Local Suppliers
F. Stress Lines: (See Figure 7.)

(1) Stress lines produce a whitened appearance in a localized area and generally emanate from
the severe bending or impacting of the material. (See Figure 8.)
(2) To restore the material to its original condition and color, use a hot air gun or similar heating
device and carefully apply heat to the affected area. Do not overheat the material.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Painting the Repair:

(1) An important factor in obtaining a quality paint finish is the proper preparation of the repair and
surrounding area before applying any paint.
(2) It is recommended that parts be cleaned prior to painting with a commercial cleaner or a
solution made from one-fourth cup of detergent mixed with one gallon of water.
(3) The paint used for coating thermoplastic can be either lacquers or enamels, depending on
which is preferred by the repair facility or customer.
NOTE: It is extremely important that solvent formulations be considered when selecting a

paint, because not an lacquers or enamels can be used satisfactorily on
thermoplastic. Some solvents used in the paints can significantly affect and degrade
the plastic properties
(4) Another important matter to consider is that hard, brittle coatings that are usually best for
abrasion resistance should not be used in areas which incur high stress, flexing or impact.
Such coating may crack, thus creating a weak area.
3. Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk Installation
Each of the steps on the lower cabin door have an 11.75 in. x 7.50 in. piece of pressure sensitive safety
walk installed on them.
A. Surface Preparation:
(1) Allow newly painted surfaces to dry a minimum of 2 hours prior to applying the safety walk.
(2) If the paint becomes contaminated, remove the contamination with clean dry rags or paper
wipers moistened with MIL-S-18718 Safety Solvent.
(3) Prior to applying the safety walk, wipe the applicable surface with a clean dry cloth, ensuring
that no moisture remains on the surface.
B. Application Procedure:
(1) Do not apply when surface temperature is below 50°.
(2) Peel back the full width of the protective liner leading edge approximately two inches.
(3) Adhere this edge of the safety walk to the inboard edge of the step.
(4) Remove the remaining protective lines as the safety walk is being adhered to the step.
(5) Roll firmly with a long handled cylindrical brush in both lengthwise directions.
6G3 51-70-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Metal / Wire Stitching Repair (See Figure 9.) (PIR-PPS20024, Rev. A.)
CAUTION: METAL/WIRE STITCHING (AND THE ALTERNATE METHOD OF JOINING DESCRIBED

BELOW) SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR NON-STRUCTURAL, NON-LOAD CARRYING
APPLICATIONS.
A metal/wire stitching process is used to staple fabric and rubber seal materials to engine baffles and
some composite materials. The following alternate method of joining is approved for field use when
replacing these fabric and rubber seal materials.
Alternate (Rivet) Method of Joining.
(1) Substitute two rivets in lieu of each staple where stitching was previoiusly used or is specified.
Maintain a minimum of .75 inch spacing between rivets.
(2) When materials being joined include Stainless Steel, Galvanized Steel or Steel, use:
(a) MS20615M4 Rivet (Monel) and NAS1149CN432R Washer (See Figure 9.)
(b) Install with manufactured (factory) head against hardest material. Install washer against
opposite side of joint and upset rivet (bucktail) against washer.
(3) When materials being joined include only aluminum and nonmetallic materials use:
(a) MS20470A4 Rivet and NAS1149DN432H Washer (See Figure 9.)
(b) Install with manufactured (factory) head against hardest material. Install washer against
opposite side of joint and upset rivet (bucktail) against washer.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Metal / Wire Stitching Repair

Figure 9
6G5 51-70-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 51-70-00 6G6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL BONDING
1. General (See also 23-60-00.) (PIR-PPS55006, Rev. T.)
All electrical and electronic equipment and specified components shall be installed in such a manner as
to provide a continuous low resistance path (bonds) from the equipment enclosure/component to the
airplane structure. Bonds must be installed to ensure that the structure and equipment are electrically
stable and free from the hazards of lightning, static discharge, electrical shock, etc.
A. All parts shall be bonded with as short a lead as possible.
B. All bonding surfaces shall be cleaned prior to the installation of the bonded joint.
C. All nuts used in bonding shall be of the self-locking type. (Do Not use fiber-locking type).
D. All electrical bonding shall be accomplished without affecting the structural integrity of the airframe.
2. 100 Hour Inspection (PIR-AC 43.13-1, Rev. B.)
Each 100 hours, visually inspect shield and shield terminations of each electrical harness for integrity,
condition, and security. If electrical arcing is evident, check for intermittant contact between conducting
surfaces. Arcing can be prevented by bonding or insulation, as appropriate.
Inspect the components listed in Chart 1 as follows:
A. Bond connections shall be secure and free from corrosion.
B. Bonding jumpers installed so as not to interfere in any way with the operation of moveable
components of the aircraft.
C. No self-tapping screws used for bonding purposes.
D. Exposed conducting frames or parts of electrical or electronic equipment should have a low
resistance bond of less than 2.5 millohms to structure. If the equipment design includes a ground
terminal or pin, which is internally connected to such exposed parts, a ground wire connection to
such terminal will satisfy this requirement.
E. Parts shall be bonded directly to the primary structure rather than to other bonded parts.
F. Where aluminum or copper is bonded to dissimilar metallic structures, ensure installed hardware
(typically washers) is as called out in the parts catalog to minimize electrolytic corrosion and ensure
the hardware should corrode first.
3. On Condition Inspection
Whenever any electrically bonded component (see Chart 1) is removed and reinstalled, or visual
inspection reveals the electrical bonding to be suspect, measure resistance between component and
aircraft structure.
To ensure proper operation and suppression of radio interference from hazards, electrical bonding of
equipment must not exceed the maximum allowable resistance values specified in Chart 1.
A. Measurements should be performed after the grounding and bonding mechanical connections are
complete to determine if the measured resistance values meet the basic requirements.
B. A high quality test instrument (AN AN/USM-21A or equivalent) will accurately measure the very low
resistance values specified.
C. Another method of measurement is the millivolt drop test as shown in Figure 1.
6G7 51-80-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
ELECTRICAL BONDING RESISTANCE INDEX
Maximum Allowable
Component Resistance Value in Ohms
Engine Mount(s) .003
Generator(s) .010
Ailerons .003
Elevator / Stabliator .003
Rudder .003
Alternator(s) .010
Trim Tab(s)
Conventional Hinge .003
Piano Hinge .010
Instrument Panel Inserts .010
Exterior Lights Mounted on Non-Conductive Material .003
Avionics ‘Black Boxes’ .003
NOTE: Harnesses should be installed and connected for this check, internal chassis
wiring through the connector to ground is permissible for this grounding.
Battery Ground Point .010
Static wick mounting plates (TCO Model B-4) P/N 452-094 1.00
NOTE: Where jumper wires or cables are used to accomplish a proper bond, resistance between
the jumper terminal and the component or structure shall not exceed .001 ohms. The
controlling points for measuring resistance will be within the limits of the cleaned area to be
bonded and within 1/4 inch of the exterior limits of the bonding jumper terminal or material
called for in the bill of materials of the drawing.
Resistance to ground will be measured from wire terminal to structure for electrical /
electronic equipment not internally grounded and from mounting flange to structure for
equipment that is internally grounded.
COMPONENT SURFACE VOLT METER AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE SURFACE
MV
BONDING STRAP
Adjust rheostat (R1) so that ammeter (A)

reads 10 Amps.
28 VDC SOURCE
- Resistance in milliohms is then the reading
on the volt meter (i.e. - millivolts (MV))
divided by the amps (10) set on the
+ ammeter. For example, where MV equals
30:
A
R1 30 MV
= .003 OHMS RESISTANCE
AMMETER 10 AMPS
Millivolt Drop Test
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 51-80-00 6G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6G9 51-80-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 51-80-00 6G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
52
DOORS
6G11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
52-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
52-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
52-70-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PASSENGER / CREW 52-10-00 1 6G17

Description 1 6G17
Cabin Door 1 6G17
Upper Half 1 6G17
Removal 1 6G17
Installation 1 6G17
Lower Half 1 6G17
Removal 1 6G17
Installation 1 6G17
Door Support 1 6G17
Removal 1 6G17
Installation 2 6G18
Door Cable Assembly 2 6G18
Removal 2 6G18
Installation 2 6G18
Door Latching Mechanism 2 6G18
Description 2 6G18
Upper Door 2 6G18
Removal 2 6G18
Installation 3 6G19
Lower Door 3 6G19
Removal 3 6G19
Installation 6 6G22
Door Seal 6 6G22
Removal 6 6G22
Installation 6 6G22
EMERGENCY EXIT 52-20-00 1 6H1

Door 1 6H1
Removal 1 6H1
Installation 1 6H1
Seal 1 6H1
Removal 1 6H1
Installation 1 6H1
DOOR WARNING 52-70-00 1 6H3

Cabin Door Ajar Warning System 1 6H3
Troubleshooting 1 6H3
Cabin Door Ajar Switches 1 6H3
Removal 1 6H3
Installation 1 6H3
Adjustment 1 6H3
Periodic Checks 2 6H4

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER / CREW
1. Description
This airplane is provided with a cabin door on the left side of the fuselage between the passenger seats.
The cabin door is in two sections, the upper door having a window and the lower door having two
boarding steps that assume their proper position when the door is lowered. Signal flags are incorporated
in each of the cabin door’s locking pins to show the pin’s position.
The emergency exit door is located on the right-hand side of the fuselage at the center seat.
NOTE: Refer to 51-70-00, Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk Installation, for instructions on installing the
pressure sensitive safety walk strips on the lower cabin door steps.
2. Cabin Door
A. Upper Half
(1) Removal
(a) Rotate the handle to the unlocked position and open the door.
(b) Open the lower door.
(c) Disengage the door holder assembly from the door.
(d) Hold the door partly open and relieve the weight of the door from the hinge pin to facilitate
hinge pin removal.
(e) Remove the hinge pin and lift off the door.
(2) Installation
(a) Align the door hinge with the fuselage hinge and insert the hinge pin.
(b) Attach the door holder assembly to the door.
B. Lower Half
(1) Removal
(a) Open both upper and lower doors to full open position.
(b) Remove the screw, washers and nut which secures the cable assembly to the lower door.
(c) Relieve the weight of the door from the hinge and remove the hinge pin.
(d) Lift the door off of the lower hinge.
(2) Installation
(a) Align the door hinge with the fuselage hinge and insert the hinge pin.
(b) Attach the cable assembly to the door with the previously removed screw, washers and
nut.
3. Door Support
A. Removal
The hydraulic door support is located at the upper left-hand corner of the upper half of the cabin
door. The unit is designed to provide 65 to 80 pounds of pressure when fully extended.
(1) Open the upper door. Relieve door weight on the door support.
(2) Support the door and remove the retaining nuts and washers from both ends of the door
support.
(3) Remove the door support.
6G17 52-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Position the door support on the door and fuselage.
(2) Secure the door support to the door and to the door frame with the previously removed nuts
and washers.
4. Door Cable Assembly
A. Removal
The door cable assemblies are attached to lugs on the door’s frame.
(1) Open the lower door.
(2) Support the lower door and remove the cable retaining screws, washers, and nuts from the
door lug and door frame lug.
(3) Remove the cable assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Attach the eye end of the cable to the door frame lug.
(2) Attach the yoke end of the cable to the door lug.
5. Door Latching Mechanism
A. Description
The upper door locking mechanism consists of an external and internal handle which actuate two
locking pins in the lower corners of the door and two locking hooks which protrude out of the lower
edge of the door. When the handle is rotated to the open position, the guide pins and latch hooks
are disengaged and withdrawn into the door.
An auxiliary lock is installed in the upper door under the interior handle to prevent inadvertent
opening of the door. When opening the door from inside the airplane, the auxiliary lock handle must
be pulled inboard to allow the door handle to rotate.
The lower door locking mechanism is similar to the upper mechanism except that it has no latch
hooks and only one handle. Lifting the latch handle up withdraws the two pins into the door.
B. Upper Door
(1) Removal
(a) To remove the door handle bellcrank: (refer to Figure 1)
1 Remove the pin which retains the interior door handle to the bellcrank assembly.
Remove the handle.
2 Remove the bellcrank support from the interior of the door by removing the rivets
from the bellcrank support.
3 Remove the pins which attach the bellcrank to the pushrods.
4 Remove the bellcrank retaining screw from the bellcrank.
5 Pull the bellcrank assembly from the door.
(b) To remove the pushrod assemblies and the door retaining pins:
1 Remove the pin which connects the pushrod assembly to the bellcrank assembly.
2 Disconnect the pins and washer which secures the pushrod assembly to the door
retaining pins.
3 Slide the pushrod and door retaining pin out of the door.
4 Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3 for the remaining side.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 52-10-00 6G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) To install the door handle bellcrank:
1 Position the bellcrank assembly in the door. Ensure that a washer is at each end of
the bellcrank.
2 Secure the bellcrank assembly with the screw, nut and washer.
3 Attach the pushrod clevises to the bellcrank with the pins and washer.
4 Rivet the interior bellcrank support to the door.
5 Attach the door handle to the bellcrank assembly with the pin.
(b) To install the door retaining pins and pushrod assemblies:
1 Slide the door retaining pin into position.
2 Place the pushrod assembly into position (the threaded section should point towards
the door handle).
3 Align the holes in the pushrod clevis, door retaining pin and latch hook. Secure with
the pins and washer.
4 Attach the remaining pushrod clevis end to the door handle bellcrank with the pins
and washers.
NOTE: The door retaining pins should protrude out of the door 1.00 inch with the
door handle in the closed position. Make adjustments at the pushrod
assembly as required.
(3) To check adjustment of door latch hook:
(a) Shut and latch both doors.
(b) Check gap of hook and latch plate.
(c) Hook may be filed .053" max. (maintaining the same ramp contour) to provide
engagement with plate on lower door assembly. A gap of up to 0.030" maximum between
hook and latch plate (with hook fully engaged and without cabin pressure) is acceptable.
C. Lower Door
(1) Removal
(a) To remove the door handle bellcrank: (refer to Figure 1)
1 Disconnect the pushrod clevises from the bellcrank by removing the pins and
washer.
2 Remove the bellcrank retaining bolt.
3 Remove the rivets which retain the interior bellcrank support to the door channel.
4 Remove the screws and nuts which retain the handle to the bellcrank.
5 Remove the bellcrank.
(b) To remove the pushrod assemblies and the door retaining pins:
1 Disconnect the pushrod clevis from the handle bellcrank by removing the pins and
washer.
2 Disconnect the pushrod clevis from the door retaining pin by removing the pins and
washer.
3 Slide the retaining pin out of the door and remove the pushrod assembly.
6G19 52-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Door Locking Mechanism

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 52-10-00 6G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Door Locking Mechanism

6G21 52-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Installation
(a) To install the door handle bellcrank:
1 Position the bellcrank in door.
2 Attach the lever to the bellcrank with the screws, washers and nuts.
3 Ensure that washers are positioned at each end of the bellcrank. Insert the bolt
through the interior bellcrank support.
4 Rivet the support in place and tighten the bolt.
(b) To install the pushrod assemblies and the door retaining pins:
1 Position the pushrod assembly in the door. The threaded portion of the pushrod
should point towards the bellcrank assembly.
2 Secure the pushrod with the pins and washer.
3 Slide the door retaining pin into the door.
4 Attach the door retaining pin to the pushrod with the pins and washer.
NOTE: The door retaining pins should protrude from the edge of the door
approximately 1.00 inch. Make adjustments to the pushrod assembly as
required. After installation mechanism must rotate and operate easily
through full cycle without friction and binding.
6. Door Seal
A. Removal
To remove the door seal, pull the cemented surfaces free of the retainer and / or door edge,
applying MEK as needed to help loosen the bond.
B. Installation (refer to Figure 2)
(1) Remove any traces of the previous seal and cement.
(2) Thoroughly clean the areas to be cemented with MEK.
(3) Bond the seal to the door and/or angle per Figure 2.
C. Bonding (PIR PPS45009, Rev. C.)
(1) Use Adhesive Silicone RTV 157 (Piper Code 279-021).

(2) Clean surfaces to be bonded or sealed with a clean, lint-free cloth or wiper dampened with
isopropyl alcohol. Wipe dry using a dry wiper before the alcohol evaporates.
(3) Apply adhesive to only one of the surfaces to be joined. Thickness of the adhesive shall be
0.015 inch minimum and 1/8 inch maximum. Press surfaces to be joined together firmly. No
“squeeze out” of adhesive should be left around the edges of the joint.
(4). Apply sealant as required to specified areas, however the maximum section of the sealant
shall be 1/8 inch.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 52-10-00 6G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Door Seal Installation

Figure 2
6G23 52-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 52-10-00 6G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY EXIT
1. Door
The airplane’s emergency exit door is located on the right-hand side of the airplane at the center seat.
A. Removal
To remove the emergency exit door, pull down on the release at the top of the door, bring the top of
the door slightly down and lift the entire door towards the center of the aircraft.
B. Installation
To install the door, insert the lower lip of the door on the outboard side of the two stops and push
the door outwards until the handle snaps into place on the catch assembly.
2. Seal
A. Removal
Remove the seal by pulling it away from the skin.
B. Installation
(1) Remove any remaining traces of the seal or cement with a clean rag moistened with MEK.
(2) Apply a small bead of FAS BOND 10 adhesive or equivalent on the outside radius of the door
seal flange and cement the seal in place.
6H1 52-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 52-20-00 6H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOOR WARNING
1. Cabin Door Ajar Warning System

The cabin door ajar warning system consists of two switches mounted in the W.L. 76.15 and W.L. 71.47
longerons. These switches are activated by the two forward door locking pins pushing on two switch
actuating pins.
A door ajar light is located on the annunciator panel.
2. Troubleshooting
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING CABIN DOOR AJAR WARNING SYSTEM

Cabin door unsafe light will Latching relay sticking in the Lubricate the mechanical
not go out. open position. parts (sparingly).
Switch or switches in door Adjust.
frame out of adjustment.
Short to ground. Check wiring and repair.
Cabin door unsafe light will Circuit breaker open. Reset circuit breaker.
not come on.
Broken wire or loose Check wiring and repair.
connection.
3. Cabin Door Ajar Switches

A. Removal
(1) Gain access to the switches. They are located approximately 4 inches in front of each of the
forward door locking pins.
(2) Disconnect the two electrical leads (per switch).
(3) Loosen the jam nut on the switch and turn the switch body out of the pin support tube
assembly.
B. Installation
(1) Turn the switch body into the pin support tube assembly. Do not tighten the jam nut at this time.
(2) Adjust the switches per the following paragraph.
(3) Reconnect the two electrical leads (per switch).
C. Adjustment
(1) Ensure that the door retaining pins protrude out the side of the door 1.00 inch when the latch
mechanism is in the closed position. (refer to View A of Figure 1, Door Locking Mechanism.)
(2) Close the door and turn the latch mechanism to its locked position.
(3) Turn the switch body into the pin support tube assembly until the switch activates.
(4) Tighten the switch jam nut.
(5) Connect the two leads to the switch.
(6) Repeat Steps (1) thru (5) for the other switch.
6H3 52-70-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Periodic Checks
Periodically check the action of the cabin door switches as follows:
(1) Insert a small blunt object into the pin support tube receptacle.
(2) Push on the switch actuating pin until an audible click is heard. Release the pin, noting another
audible click.
(3) Replace any switch in which the click action and mechanical function is doubtful.
(4) Ensure that the door ajar light on the instrument panel comes on when the switch is activated.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 52-70-00 6H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6H5 52-70-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 52-70-00 6H6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
55
STABILIZERS
6H7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6H8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
55-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
55-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
55-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
55-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
55-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55 - STABILIZERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 55-00-00 1 6H13

100 Hour Tailcone Inspection 1 6H13
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 55-10-00 1 6H17

Horizontal Stabilizer 1 6H17
Removal 1 6H17
Installation 1 6H17
Attach Fittings Corrosion Control Inspection 1 6H17
Vortex Generators 3 6H19
ELEVATOR 55-20-00 1 6H21

Elevator 1 6H21
Removal 1 6H21
Installation 1 6H21
Balancing 1 6H21
Balancing Equipment 2 6H22
Elevator Trim Tab 4 6H24
Elevator Trim Tab Push Rods Attach Brackets 4 6H24
Elevator Trim Tab Push Rods Corrosion Control Inspection 4 6H24
VERTICAL STABILIZER 55-30-00 1 6I3

Vertical Fin 1 6I3
Removal 1 6I3
Installation 1 6I3
Attach Fitting Corrosion Control Inspection 1 6I3
RUDDER 55-40-00 1 6I5

Rudder 1 6I5
Removal 1 6I5
Installation 1 6I5
Balancing 1 6I5
Rudder Trim Tab 4 6I8
Removal 4 6I8
Installation 4 6I8

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
100 Hour Tailcone Inspection

In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697170, for airplanes which have not installed Kit No. 767-356, each 100 hours
inspect the tailcone in the immediate area of the horizontal stabilizer (see Figure 1). Look for rivets with
cracked paint around the rivet heads and/or trailing dark smear markings.
A. If no “working” rivets are found, make a logbook entry indicating accomplishment of this inspection.
B. If “working” rivets are found, install Kit No. 767-356 and make an appropriate logbook entry.
C. Installation of Kit No. 767-356 relieves this repetitive inspection requirement.
Effectivity
100 Hour Tailcone Inspection 4697001 thru 4697170
Figure 1 without Kit No. 767-356 installed
6H13 55-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Empennage Installation
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 55-00-00 6H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TORQUE TUBE
VERTICAL FIN
AN4-23A
AN6-7A NAS1149F0432P (UNDER HEAD)
NAS1149F0663P (2 REQ.) NAS1149F0463P (UNDER NUT)
MS21042-6 MS21042-4
TORQUE 240-270 IN.-LBS. TORQUE 80-100 IN.-LBS.
(2 PLACES)
AN3-11A
NAS1149F0363P (2 REQ.)
RUDDER SECTOR MS21042-3
TORQUE 38-43 IN.-LBS.
(3 PLACES)
A
AN6-10A
NAS1149F0663P (2 REQ.)
MS21042-6
TORQUE 160-200 IN.-LBS. NAS1149F0463P AND/OR
(2 PLACES) NAS1149F0432
USE ANY COMBINATION OF
THICK AND THIN WASHERS
TO ELIMINATE GAP BETWEEN
BOTTOM OF RUDDER TORQUE
TUBE AND TOP OF QUADRANT.
MS21250-06008
MS21299-C6 (UNDER HEAD)
NAS1149F0663P (2 REQ.)
(UNDER NUT)
NAS 1804-6
TORQUE 300-320 IN.-LBS.
B (4 PLACES)
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER SPAR

O
82218 AW
Empennage Installation
6H15 55-00-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 55-00-00 6H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
1. Horizontal Stabilizer (See Figure 2, 55-00-00.)

A. Removal
NOTE: At each removal of the horizontal stabilzer, conduct Attach Fittings Corrosion Control
Inspection, below.
(1) Remove the elevator.
(2) Remove the nut, bolt and washer that attaches the stabilizer forward support to the bulkhead
(each side).
(3) Support the stabilizer and remove the nuts, bolts and washers that attach the stabilizer spar to
the bulkhead. Remove the stabilizer.
B. Installation
(1) Position the horizontal stabilizer on the tail section.
(2) Attach the horizontal stabilizer spar to the bulkhead. See 55-00-00, Figure 2, Sheet 2, “B”.
Torque as specified.
(3) Attach the two horizontal stabilizer forward supports to the bulkhead. The bolts should be
installed with their heads pointing aft. Torque as specified in 55-00-00, Figure 2, Sheet 1.
(4) Install the elevator. (See 55-20-00.)
(5) Check elevator trim and elevator operation and rigging. (See Elevator Controls Rigging and
Elevator Trim Controls Rigging, both in 27-30-00.)
2. Attach Fittings Corrosion Control Inspection
Each five years, inspect the attach fittings shown in Figures 1 and 2 for corrosion and condition.
Repair/replace as required. When inspection and repair/replacement are completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8
(P/N 89500-800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
NOTE: For all fittings, inspection of the exposed portion is sufficient unless obvious or extensive
corrosion is apparent.
NOTE: Any part exhibiting flaking of the metal due to rust must be replaced.
NOTE: If aluminum skin or structure is corroded (beyond a light surface oxidation), the area must be
repaired or replaced.
NOTE: On any part being replaced, dip rivets in waterborne, chromated, fluid resistant, epoxy primer
(i.e. - PRC Desoto) or equivilent primer and install wet.
A. When inspection and repair or replacement are completed, allow sufficient time for primer to dry,
and apply Dinitrol AV 8 to:
(1) Forward horizontal stabilizer attach points. Inside and outside fuselage. See Figure 2 to add an
access hole.
(2) Aft horizontal stabilizer attach points.
(3) Entire surface of tail cone interior.
CAUTION: READ PRECAUTIONS ON CONTAINER LABEL AND WEAR A CHARCOAL FILTER
MASK WHEN APPLYING DINITROL AV 8.
B. Apply Dinitrol by spraying or brush. Use an air or airless spray gun if available. A hand aspirator
bottle may be used if a sufficient fan spray pattern can be developed. Product should not be
thinned.
6H17 55-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cover safety and outflow valves, air conditioning condenser, and other components on the pressure
bulkhead. Cover autopilot servos, electrical connectors, and cable pulleys.
WARNING: DO NOT GET DINITROL INTO AUTOPILOT SERVOS OR CLUTCHES.
D. Spray directly into faying surfaces and mating points.
E. Ensure entire attach fitting is treated. Spray inside where the fitting is attached to the structure.
F. Apply to approximately .8 mils in thickness. Avoid puddling and running. Allow to dry 1 to 1 1/2
hours before airplane use. Full drying takes 6 to 8 hours.
Horizontal Stabilizer Attach Fittings

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 55-10-00 6H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Vortex Generators
S/N’s 4697157 & up and Meridian aircraft with Kit No. 767-360 installed have vortex generators (VG)
installed on the upper leading edge of the wing (see 57-50-00) and the lower trailing edge of the
horizontal stabilizer.
WARNING: A TOTAL OF MORE THAN FIVE (5) VORTEX GENERATORS MISSING FROM THE WING
AND/OR THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER RENDERS THE AIRPLANE UNAIRWORTHY.
A spares kit is provided with each aircraft. Replace VG’s as required. Use the existing glue footprint from
the missing VG and the information in Figure 3 to properly locate the replacement VG. See application
NOTE: If the aircraft is repainted, the vortex generators must be replaced. Repaint kits are available.
Horizontal Stabilizer Forward Attach Fitting Access

Figure 2
6H19 55-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Vortex Generators - Horizontal Stabilizer
Figure 3
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 55-10-00 6H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR
1. Elevator
CAUTION: CONTROL SURFACE SKINS MUST BE REPLACED IF THEY SUSTAIN DAMAGE OR
EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the elevator trim actuating rods at the clevis on the actuator.
(2) Disconnect the elevator actuating arm at the elevator actuating plate.
(3) Support the elevator and remove the attaching bolts.
(4) Remove the elevator from the airplane.
B. Installation
WARNING: IF THE ELEVATOR HAS BEEN REPLACED OR REPAINTED OR THE TRIM TAB
REPLACED OR REPAINTED, THE ELEVATOR MUST BE BALANCED BEFORE
INSTALLATION PER INSTRUCTIONS IN BALANCING, BELOW.
(1) Position the elevator in place on the horizontal stabilizer.
(2) Attach the elevator to the horizontal stabilizer. See 55-00-00, Figure 2, Sheet 1. Torque as
specified.
(3) Connect the elevator actuating arm to the elevator actuating plate.
(4) Connect the elevator trim actuating rods to the actuator clevis.
(5) Check elevator trim and elevator operation and rigging. (See Elevator Controls Rigging and
Elevator Trim Controls Rigging, both in 27-30-00.)
C. Balancing (Refer to Chart 1 and Figures 1 and 2)
To balance the elevator, the assembly must be complete including the trim tab (without the tab
pushrods), elevator tips and all attaching screws. Before balancing, tape the trim tab in its neutral
position with a small piece of tape. Ensure that there are no drafts in the balancing room. Place the
complete assembly on the knife edge supports of a balancer with the beam perpendicular to the
hinge centerline. Do not place the tool on the trim tab. Calibrate the tool. Read the scale when the
bubble level has been centered by adjustment of the movable weight and determine the static
balance limit. There are no adjustment provisions on the elevator.
See Balancing Equipment, below.
CHART 1
ELEVATOR STATIC BALANCE LIMITS
Leading Edge Heavy Trailing Edge Heavy

(Inch-Pounds) (Inch-Pounds)
— -47.0 to -65.0
NOTE: Elevator is balanced with tab installed but without the tab pushrods.
6H21 55-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Balancing Equipment
Balancing must be done using a suitable tool capable of measuring unbalance in inch-pounds from the
centerline of the control surface hinge pin. See the tool configuration in Figure 2. Other tool
configurations may be used if accuracy is maintained and recalibration capability is provided.
To use this tool:
(1) Ensure that the control surface is in its final Flight configuration, static wicks, trim tabs, trim tab
push pull rod (unless specifically exempted) and control surface tip (as applicable) should be
installed. The surface should be painted and trim/servo tabs should be in the neutral position.
NOTE: Because paint is a considerable balance factor, it is recommended that existing paint
be removed prior to repainting a control surface.
(2) Place hinge bolts through control surfaces and place control surface on a holding fixture.
(3) Calibrate the tool.
(a) Avoiding rivets, place the balancing tool on the control surface with the tool’s hinge
centerline directly over the hinge line of the control surface.
(b) Adjust the movable trailing edge support to fit the width of the control surface. Tighten the
set screw on the trailing edge support.
(c) Adjust the trailing edge support vertically until the beam is parallel with the control surface
chord line.
(d) Remove the tool from the control surface and balance the tool itself by adding or removing
nuts or washers from the beam balancing bolt. When balancing the tool, the movable
weight must be at the bar’s hinge centerline.
Balancing Elevator
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 55-20-00 6H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Surfaces Balancing Tool

Figure 2
6H23 55-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) After balancing the tool, reattach it to the control surface per Figures 1 and 2. Keep the beam
positioned 90° from the control surface hinge line.
(5) Determine balance of control surface by sliding movable weight along the balance beam.
(6) Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered. Multiply by three to determine inch-
lbs. (I.E. - Since the movable weight weighs three pounds, every inch it is moved from the
center of the beam equals three inch-lbs of force.)
3. Elevator Trim Tab
The elevator trim tab is attached to the elevator by three piano hinges along the top forward edge of the
trim tab.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the trim tab push rods.
(2) Remove the three piano hinge pins.
B. Installation
(1) Align the two halves of the three piano hinges and secure with pins.
(2) Connect the trim tab push rods.
4. Elevator Trim Tab Push Rods Attach Brackets
If the elevator trim tab push rods attach brackets are removed and replaced or reinstalled, ensure that a
coat of waterborne, chromated, fluid resistant, epoxy primer (i.e. - PRC Desoto) is applied between the
tab skin and the brackets to eliminate surface corrosion.
5. Elevator Trim Tab Rods Corrosion Control Inspection
Each five years, remove the elevator trim tab rods from the airplane and inspect as shown in Figure 3
for corrosion and condition. Repair/replace as required. When inspection and repair/replacement are
completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8 (P/N 89500-800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
NOTE: Any part exhibiting flaking of the metal due to rust must be replaced. The elevator trim tab
actuator push rods must be replaced if rust is evident extending from inside the tubes.
A. When inspection and repair or replacement are completed, apply Dinitrol AV 8 to elevator trim tab
actuator push rod tubes.
thinned.
C. Spray directly into mating points. Pour inside the lower (curved) elevator trim tab actuator push rod
tubes until full and drain.
D. Apply to approximately .8 mils in thickness. Avoid puddling and running. Allow to dry (6 to 8 hours)
before reinstalling elevator trim tab rods.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 55-20-00 6H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Elevator Trim Tab Rods

Figure 3
6I1 55-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 55-20-00 6I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VERTICAL STABILIZER
1. Vertical Fin (See Figure 2, 55-00-00.)

A. Removal
NOTE: At each removal of the vertical fin, conduct Attach Fittings Corrosion Control Inspection,
below.
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(2) Remove the dorsal fairing.
(3) Remove the rudder and rudder tab per 55-40-00.
(4) Remove the forward vertical fin attaching bolt.
(5) Support the fin and remove the aft vertical fin attaching nuts, bolts and washers. Remove the
fin from the airplane.
B. Installation
(1) Position the vertical fin on the airplane.
(2) Attach the aft vertical fin spar to the fuselage spar with bolts, nuts and washers. See 55-00-00,
Figure 2, Sheet 2, View A. Torque as specified.
(3) Attach the forward vertical fin spar to the fuselage spar. See 55-00-00, Figure 2, Sheet 1.
Torque as specified.
(4) Attach the rudder and rudder tab to the vertical fin per 55-40-00.
(5) Check the rigging of the rudder and rudder trim tab control system. (See 27-20-00, Rudder
Controls Rigging and Rudder Trim Control Rigging.)
(6) Install the dorsal fairing. Seal fairing to skin and fairing recess angle using Bostik Chem-Calk
Urethane No. 915 - remove excess sealant.
NOTE: Ensure correct hardware is used to install dorsal fairing.
(7) Install the aft fuselage access panel.
2. Attach Fitting Corrosion Control Inspection
Each five years, inspect the attach fittings shown in Figure 1 for corrosion and condition. Repair/replace
as required. When inspection and repair/replacement is completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8 (P/N 89500-
800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
NOTE: On any part being replaced, dip rivets in zinc chromate or equivilnt primer and install wet.
and apply Dinitrol AV 8 to forward vertical fin attach point.
thinned.
6I3 55-30-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cover safety and outflow valves, air conditioning condenser, and other components on the pressure
bulkhead. Cover autopilot servos, electrical connectors, and cable pulleys.
Vertical Stabilizer Attach Fittings

Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 55-30-00 6I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER
1. Rudder (See Figure 2, 55-00-00.)

EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the aft fuselage access panel.
(2) Remove the rudder cables from the rudder sector or loosen them if the rudder sector is not to
be removed.
(3) Disconnect the sector from the rudder torque tube by removing three (3) bolts, nuts and
washers.
(4) If rudder sector is to be removed, remove the retaining nut, bolt and washers and remove
rudder sector.
(5) Support the rudder and remove the two sets of rudder hinge bolts, nuts and washers. Remove
the rudder from the airplane.
B. Installation
WARNING: IF THE RUDDER OR THE TRIM TAB HAS BEEN REPLACED OR REPAINTED, THEN
THE RUDDER MUST BE BALANCED BEFORE INSTALLATION PER BALANCING,
BELOW.
(1) Position the rudder on the airplane.
(2) Install the two sets of rudder hinge bolts. See 55-00-00, Figure 2, Sheet 1. Torque as specified.
(3) If previously removed, install the rudder sector, securing it with bolt, nut and washers. See 55-00-00,
Figure 2, Sheet 2, View A. Torque as specified.
(4) Attach the rudder sector to the rudder torque tube with three (3) bolts, nuts and washers. See
55-00-00, Figure 2, Sheet 2, View A. Torque as specified.
(5) If the rudder cabes were previously removed, attach rudder cables to the rudder sector.
(6) Check rigging and operation of rudder and rudder trim tab control system per 27-20-00,
Rudder Controls Rigging and Rudder Trim Control Rigging.
(7) Install the aft fuselage access panel.
C. Balancing (See Chart 1 and Figure 1.)
To balance the rudder, the assembly must be complete - including the trim tab, but without the trim
tab rods attached. Place the complete assembly horizontally on the knife edge support of a
balancer. Ensure that there are no drafts in the balancing room. Place the tool on the rudder with
the beam perpendicular to the hinge centerline. Calibrate the tool (see Balancing Equipment,
55-20-00). Read the scale when the bubble level has been centered by adjustment of the movable
weight and determine the static balance limit. If the static balance is not within the limits given,
proceed as follows:
(1) Nose Heavy: This condition is highly improbable: recheck calculations and measurements.
(2) Nose Light: In this case, the rudder is too heavy because of painting or repairs; it will be
necessary to strip the paint and repaint the rudder. If the rudder is too heavy as a result of
repairs, the repair must be removed and the damaged parts replaced.
6I5 55-40-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
RUDDER STATIC BALANCE LIMITS

-- -17.0 to -50.0
NOTE: Rudder is balanced with tab installed but without the tab pushrods.
Balancing Rudder
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 55-40-00 6I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rudder Trim Tab Installation

Figure 2
6I7 55-40-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Rudder Trim Tab

EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Remove cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt in two places and disconnect the rudder trim tab
push rods from the tab.
(2) Swing the tab to one side (to gain access to mounting bolts) and support the bottom.
(3) In S/N’s 4697100 and up only, remove screw and washer and disconnect grounding strap from
the tab.
(4) Remove cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt in three places and remove rudder trim tab.
B. Installation
WARNING: IF THE TRIM TAB BEING INSTALLED HAS BEEN REPAINTED OR IS NEW, THEN
THE ELEVATOR MUST BE REBALANCED BEFORE IT IS INSTALLED ON THE
AIRPLANE.
(1) Place the tab in position and secure with bolt, washers, nut, and cotter pin in three places.
(2) Connect the rudder trim tab push rods to the tab in two places with bolt, washers, nut, and
cotter pin in three places.
(3) In S/N’s 4697100 and up only, swing the tab to one side and reconnect the grounding strap to
the tab with screw and washer.
(4) If rudder is installed on the airplane, verify rudder trim tab rigging per 27-20-00, Rudder Trim
Control Rigging.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 55-40-00 6I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6I9 55-40-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 55-40-00 6I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
56
WINDOWS
6I11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
56-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
56-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
56-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
56-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56 - WINDOWS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 56-00-00 1 6I17

Limitations 1 6I17
Definitions 1 6I17
Inspection and Repair 2 6I18
Heated Glass Windshield 2 6I18
Acrylic Windshield 4 6I20
Acrylic Window (Cockpit) 6 6I22
Acrylic Window (Cabin) 8 6I24
Crack Inspection 8 6I24
Window / Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure 12 6J4
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT 56-10-00 1 6J7

Windshield 1 6J7
Removal 1 6J7
Installation 1 6J7
Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window 4 6J10
Removal 4 6J10
Installation 4 6J10
Storm Window 6 6J12
CABIN 56-20-00 1 6J15

Passenger Windows 1 6J15
Removal 1 6J15
Installation 1 6J15
DOOR 56-30-00 1 6J17

Door Window 1 6J17
Removal 1 6J17
Installation 1 6J17
6I15 56 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The airplane is equipped with a two piece windshield and eight cabin windows (one is in the door and
one is the emergency exit window).
The pilot’s windshield is made of two-ply laminated glass and is heated. The co-pilot’s windshield and
windows are made of two-ply laminated clear stretched acrylic. They are installed with sealant and
fasteners as necessary to retain them and prevent water or air leaks.
1. Limitations
A. If this airplane must be flown with a cracked or crazed window or windshield it must not be flown in
a pressurized condition.
B. Pressurized flights with discoloration or haze should be avoided but, if absolutely necessary while
awaiting replacement, flights may be made if careful inspection for crazing is implemented before
each flight.
2. Definitions.
The following apply to all cockpit and cabin windows and windshields.
Critical The viewing area of the windshields used for taxiing, takeoff, climb, cruise, and
landing.
Semi-Critical The viewing area used for general flight vision.
Non-Critical Viewing areas not normally used for flight operations.
Distortion Lines in windows or windshields that cause waviness in objects when looking
through the window or windshield.
Crack Critical narrow break, fissure, or separation extending through the entire
thickness of the transparent material.
Craze Fissure on the surface of the transparent material that does not penetrate the
full thickness of the material.
Crazing Mesh of fine hairline cracks that do not penetrate the full thickness of the
material, located on the surface or within the structure of the transparent
material.
Star Craze A condition where several fissures radiate from a central point.
Wedge A condition in a piece of optical glass having a progressive variation in
thickness or absorption from one side to the other.
Scratch An abrasion on the surface of the material caused by contact with rough
abrasives or sharp objects.
Hairline Scratch Visible scratch undetectable when passing a fingernail over the scratch.
Considered non-critical other than being an appearance defect.
Light Scratch A scratch measuring less than 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) deep. Can be detected
when passing a fingernail over the scratch. Considered non-critical except for
appearance.
Heavy Scratch A scratch measuring more than 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) deep. Can be detected
when passing a fingernail over the scratch. This type of scratch may be
accompanied by chipping along the edge. Considered critical when occurring to
inner glass ply. Considered semi-critical when occurring to outer glass ply
within certain limitations. Considered non-critical within certain limitations when
occurring to acrylic surfaces.
Chip A chip is considered a small scratch.
6I17 56-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Peel Chip Peel chips, also known as adhesion chips or cold chips, occur on the laminated
surface of a glass ply when the vinyl interlayer pulls a chip of glass out of the
glass ply.
Haze A foggy appearance located on the surface of the transparent material.
Blemish Speck, air bubble, or other minor imperfection imbedded in the transparent
material.
Mark-Off An almost nonexistent shallow depression on the surface possessing
practically no depth. Discernible only due to a noticeable rim or roughened
surface caused by mold surface defects transferred to the surface during the
forming operation.
Delamination Visible evidence of a physical break of the bond between the plastic interlayer
and either glass ply. Delamination may be caused by laminating stresses,
preload on installation, or excessive heat. Cloudy or milky appearance in the
delamination indicates moisture or solvent penetration.
3. Inspection and Repair
CAUTION: DAMAGE LIMITS AND REPAIRS STATED HEREIN MUST BE APPLIED
CONSERVATIVELY. REWORK OF MULTIPLE CHIPS OR SCRATCHES SHOULD NOT BE
ATTEMPTED IN ANY CASE WHERE, WHEN FINISHED, A LINEAR PATTERN WILL HAVE
BEEN CREATED.
A. Heated Glass Windshield (Pilot’s Side) Inspection
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDSHIELD.
The pilot’s windshield is a two-ply laminated glass containing a heating element.
(1) Critical Area Inspection. The area of the laminated glass windshield used for taxiing, takeoff,
climb, cruise, and landing.
(a) Cracks can occur in either the inner, outer, or both glass plies. Cracking in either ply is
critical and cause for immediate replacement.
(b) Blemishes.
1 Blemishes in windshields form in the vinyl plastic interlayer bonding the two glass
plies together.
2 Blemishes in the critical or semi-critical portion of the windshield are not acceptable
unless 0.062 inch (1.575 mm) or smaller in circumference, including distorted area.
3 No more than two blemishes, at least 12 inches (30.48 cm) apart are acceptable in
the windshield.
4 No more than two blemishes within a two inch (5.08 cm) area along the upper
portion of the windshield are acceptable.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance on the glass is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog
causes an obstruction of vision in the area used for operation of the aircraft.
(d) Scratches.
1 Scratches in the outboard surface of the outer glass ply no longer than 0.062 inch
(1.575 mm) and no deeper than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm) are allowable.
2 Scratches in the inboard surface of the inner glass ply with a depth less than or
equal to 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) are allowable.
3 Scratches which obstruct vision required for safe operation of the aircraft or exceed
the above limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Delamination.
Delamination is primarily a vision issue. Cloudy or milky appearance in the critical area
(i.e. - obstructing vision required for safe operation of the aircraft) is cause for immediate
replacement.
(f) Peel Chips
1 Delaminated areas characterized by irregular or jagged boundaries indicate uneven
separation of the vinyl and glass. This condition may cause the vinyl to pull chips
from the inner glass ply, resulting in failure of the glass ply. Conduct periodic
inspections to determine if the damage is progressive or if chipping of the inner glass
ply is present.
2 Replace windshield if any of the following conditions are noted:
a Evidence of chipping of inner glass ply.
b Area of vision required for safe operation is affected.
c Windshield heat system inoperative.
(g) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
when looking through the windshield is acceptable.
(h) Distortion. Slight horizontal distortion is acceptable, if: there are no more than two lines;
they do not occupy more than 25 percent of the windshield area, and; they are separated
by a minimum of six inches (15.24 cm).
(2) Semi-Critical Area Inspection. The perimeter area of the heated glass windshield used for
general flight vision.
(a) Blemishes.
1 Blemishes in windshields form in the vinyl plastic interlayer bonding the two glass
plies together.
2 Blemishes in the critical or semi-critical portion of the windshield are not acceptable
unless 0.062 inch (1.575 mm) or smaller in circumference, including distorted area.
3 No more than two blemishes, at least 12 inches (30.48 cm) apart are acceptable in
the windshield.
4 No more than two blemishes within a two inch (5.08 cm) area along the upper
portion of the windshield are acceptable.
(b) Haze or foggy appearance on the glass is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog
(c) Scratches.
1 Scratches in the outboard surface of the outer glass ply no longer than 0.062 inch
(1.575 mm) and no deeper than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm) are allowable.
2 Scratches in the inboard surface of the inner glass ply with a depth less than or equal
to 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) are allowable.
3 Scratches which obstruct vision required for safe operation of the aircraft or exceed
the above limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement.
(d) Delamination.
Delamination is primarily a vision issue.
1 Delamination is allowable up to two inches along the perimeter of the daylight
opening of the windshield. In the corners, up to four inches is allowable.
2 Windshields exhibiting delamination must be monitored as the condition is usually
progressive.
6I19 56-00-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Replace windshield if any of the following condition are noted:

a Delamination exceeds allowable limts.
(e) Peel Chips
1 Delaminated areas characterized by irregular or jagged boundaries indicate uneven
separation of the vinyl and glass. This condition may cause the vinyl to pull chips
from the inner glass ply, resulting in failure of the glass ply. Conduct periodic
inspections to determine if the damage is progressive or if chipping of the inner glass
ply is present.
a Evidence of chipping of inner glass ply.
(f) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
(g) Distortion.
1 A moderate amount of distortion is acceptable along the lower portion of the
windshield if no more than 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) above the windshield retrainer strip.
2 Distortion may not be so severe that it restricts vision or diverts runway lines or
section lines more than 45°.
3 Slight horizontal distortion is acceptable, if: there are no more than two lines; they do
not occupy more than 25 percent of the windshield area, and; they are separated by
a minimum of six inches (15.24 cm).
B. Acrylic Windshield (Co-Pilot’s Side) Inspection
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDSHIELD.
The co-pilot’s windshield is two-ply laminated stretched acrylic 0.325 inch thick.
(1) Critical Area Inspection. The area of the acrylic windshield used for taxiing, takeoff, climb,
cruise, and landing.
(a) Cracking in the windshield is critical and cause for immediate replacement.
(b) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windshield is critical.
2 Determine depth of craze using a calibrated depth gauge or scale (see Figure 1).
3 A craze of 0.065 inch (1.651 mm) depth is cause for immediate replacement. A craze
of 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) depth is cause for replacement at the earliest opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of the windshield requires replacement.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog causes an
obstruction of vision in the area used for operation of the aircraft.
(d) Scratches.
1 Limits:
1.5 inch (38.1 mm) long
0.032 inch (0.813 mm) deep
0.2 inch (5.080 mm) wide
0.25 in2 (1.613 cm2) total area
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Determining Depth of Craze

Figure 1
2 No more than two allowed per 10 in 2 (64.516 cm 2 ) of area (i.e. - an area

approximately 3.16 inch by 3.16 inch).
3 Scratches exceeding these limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement /
rework (see Window / Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure, below).
(e) Delamination.
Delamination is primarily a vision issue. Cloudy or milky appearance in the critical area
(i.e. - obstructing vision required for safe operation of the aircraft) is cause for immediate
replacement.
(g) Distortion. Slight horizontal distortion is acceptable, if: there are no more than two lines;
they do not occupy more than 25 percent of the windshield area, and; they are separated
by a minimum of six inches (15.24 cm).
(2) Semi-Critical Area Inspection. The perimeter area of the acrylic windshield used for general
flight vision.
(a) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windshield is critical.
6I21 56-00-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 A craze 0.032 inch (0.813 mm) deep is cause for replacement at the earliest
opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of the windshield requires replacement.
(b) Haze or foggy appearance is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog causes an
(c) Scratches.
1 Scratches in acrylic windshields may be reworked per Window / Windshield Repair /
Rework Procedure, below, if:
a They are less than 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) deep.
b Windshield is a minimum of 0.279 inch (7.087 mm) thick after rework.
c No vision distortions in critical and semi-critical areas as a result of rework.
2 Replace acrylic windshields with scratches that cannot be reworked in accordance
with these standards.
(d) Delamination.
opening of the windshield. In the corners, up to four inches is allowable.
2 Windshields exhibiting delamination must be monitored as the condition is usually
progressive.
(e) Mark-Off of such low intensity that vision quality is not impaired and that is not visible
(f) Distortion.
C. Acrylic Window (Cockpit) Inspection
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDOW.
(1) The cockpit windows are two-ply laminated stretched acrylic 0.275 inch thick.
(2) Semi-Critical Area Inspection. The areas of cockpit acrylic windows used for general flight
vision.
(a) Cracks.
Inspect for cracks as directed in paragraph 6, below: Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows.
(b) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windows is critical.
3 A craze 0.055 inch (1.397 mm) deep is cause for immediate replacement. A craze
0.027 inch (0.686 mm) deep is cause for replacement at the earliest opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of a window requires replacement.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Haze or foggy appearance is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog causes an
(d) Scratches.
1 Limits:
1.5 inch (38.1 mm) long
0.027 inch (0.686 mm) deep
0.2 inch (5.080 mm) wide
0.25 in2 (1.613 cm2) total area
2 No more than two allowed per 10 in 2 (64.516 cm 2 ) of area (i.e. - an area
approximately 3.16 inch by 3.16 inch).
3 Scratches exceeding these limits are cause for immediate windshield replacement /
rework (see Window / Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure, below).
4 Scratches in acrylic cockpit windows may be reworked per Window / Windshield
Repair / Rework Procedure, below, if:
a They are less than 0.027 inch (0.686 mm) deep.
b Window is a minimum of 0.248 inch (6.3 mm) thick after rework.
c No vision distortions in critical and semi-critical areas as a result of rework.
5 Replace acrylic windows with scratches that cannot be reworked in accordance with
these standards.
(e) Delamination.
opening of the window. In the corners, up to four inches is allowable.
2 Windows exhibiting delamination must be monitored as the condition is usually
progressive.
3 Replace window if any of the following condition are noted:
(g) Distortion.
6I23 56-00-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Acrylic Window (Cabin) Inspection

CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED WINDOW.
(1) The cabin windows are two-ply laminated stretched acrylic 0.225 inch thick.
(2) Non-Critical Area Inspection. Any portion of a window not used for flight vision.
(a) Cracks.
Inspect for cracks as directed below: Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows.
(b) Crazing.
1 Crazing in the windows is critical.
3 A craze of 0.045 inch (1.143 mm) depth is cause for immediate replacement. A craze
0.022 inch (0.559 mm) deep is cause for replacement at the earliest opportunity.
4 Crazing in any portion of a window requires replacement.
(c) Haze or foggy appearance on the glass is not acceptable if the amount of haze/fog
(d) Mark-Off in moderate amounts is acceptable provided that visibility is not impaired.
(e) Distortion.
1 Distortion along the sides of the window within 0.5 inches (12.70 mm) or less of the
retainer is acceptable.
2 Distortion along the upper portion of the window is acceptable if distortion does not
extend downward more than 2.00 inches (50.8 mm) from the top and does not impair
vision.
3 Distortion of the main body of the side window is acceptable providing the distorted
area does not exceed 25 percent of the winddow area.
E. Crack Inspection - Acrylic Windows and Windshields.
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED OR CRAZED
WINDOW/WINDSHIELD.
(1) Perform this inspection annually or each 1,000 hours, whichever occurs first.
NOTE: This inspection should also be performed after repainting when any chemical stripping
agent was used. Use the prism method described in step (3) to inspect the entire
circumference of the window for stripper damage/etching; especially in areas
concealed by window frames, retainers, plates, or collars.
(2) Inspect window panes as follows:
(a) Inspect sealant for signs of wear, deterioration, and positive contact with mounting
surfaces.
(b) Inspect window frames, retainers, plates, and collars for cracks, loose rivets or screws,
corrosion, and structural defects.
(3) Inspect bolt holes in windows and co-pilot’s windshield as follows, using Window Inspection Kit
- P/N 766-294. (A 45° acrylic prism and glycerin may be used if kit not available.)
(a) Clean area to be inspected with soap and water to ensure surface is free of oil, dirt, and
wax.
(b) Determine which immersion oil to use: Type A in cold weather; Type B in hot weather.
(c) Apply a small amount of oil to the surface of window adjacent to bolt hole. On initial
application, use a small amount of oil applied directly to one 90° face of inspection prism
in contact with glass or acrylic (see Figure 2).
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Visual Inspection
Figure 2
6J1 56-00-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A B B
OUT OF HOLE HOLE TO HOLE
CRACK
0.150 INCH 0.150 INCH

(3.81 MM) (3.81 MM) 0.300 INCH
(7.62 MM)
0.300 INCH (7.62 MM) MAX
COMBINED LENGTH OF CRACKS
DETAIL C DETAIL D
Crack Limitations
Figure 3
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Press oiled face of prism to glass or acrylic. Slide prism around until a constant film of oil
extends across prism face and window surface.
(e) Look into 90° face of prism (see Figure 2). The image of an unfractured fastener hole will
appear as a frosty cylinder.
(f) If hole is countersunk, cylinder will appear to have a cone setting on one end as seen in
Figure 2.
(g) The image of a cracked hole will appear as a frosty or reflective projection extending from
the hole (see detail A-A, Figure 3).
(h) The image of a crack from one hole to another will appear as a frosty or reflective
irregular surface (see detail B-B, Figure 3).
(4) Crack Limitation.
(a) The maximum acceptable length of a crack from any single screw hole is 0.300 inch
(7.62mm).
(b) The maximum combined length of multiple cracks into the space between two adjacent
bolt holes is 0.300 inch (7.62mm) (see Figure 3).
(c) If a crack less than 0.300 inch (7.62mm) is left unrepaired, reinspect the window each
additional 25 hours of aircraft operation.
(d) A maximum of three bolt holes with cracks less that 0.299 inch (7.59mm) long are
acceptable in any one window pane before that window pane must be replaced.
(e) Replace window pane if a single crack or combination of adjacent facing cracks exceed
0.300 inch (7.62mm) in length.
(5) Chips, Scratches, and Crazing Limitations.
CONSERVATIVELY. REWORK OF MULTIPLE CHIPS OR SCRATCHES SHOULD
NOT BE ATTEMPTED IN ANY CASE WHERE, WHEN FINISHED, A LINEAR
PATTERN WILL HAVE BEEN CREATED.
(a) Scratches in acrylic windows and the co-pilot’s windshield may be reworked (see Window
/ Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure, below) as follows:
1 Co-pilot’s windshield - scratch is less than 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) deep and
windshield is a minimum of 0.279 inch (7.087 mm) thick after rework.
2 Cockpit side windows - scratch is less than 0.027 inch (0.686 mm) deep and window
is a minimum of 0.248 inch (6.3 mm) thick after rework.
3 Cabin side windows - scratch is less than 0.022 inch (0.589 mm) deep and window is
a minimum of 0.203 inch (5.156 mm) thick after rework.
4 No vision distortions in critical and semi-critical areas as a result of rework.
(b) Replace acrylic windows with scratches that cannot be reworked in accordance with these
standards.
6J3 56-00-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Window / Windshield Repair / Rework Procedure (Acrylic Windows / Co-Pilot’s Windshield Only).
The following methods should be used for repairs:
CAUTION: ANY ACRYLIC WINDOW WHICH MAY HAVE BEEN DAMAGED BY PAINT THINNER,
PAINT REMOVER OR OTHER SOFTENING AGENT MUST BE REPLACED. NO
REPAIR IS PERMITTED FOR THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE.
CONSERVATIVELY. REWORK OF MULTIPLE CHIPS OR SCRATCHES SHOULD
NOT BE ATTEMPTED IN ANY CASE WHERE, WHEN FINISHED, A LINEAR
PATTERN WILL HAVE BEEN CREATED.
Rework the damaged area to the depth of the damage, approximately twice the length and three
times the width, removing all sharp edges.
(1) Areas with small scratches:
(a) Clean the window, using generous amounts of water and a mild detergent.
(b) Polish the window with an approved compound and soft cloth.
(c) Clean and wax the polished area.
(2) Areas with large scratches, gouges, and nicks: Areas with damages exceeding .003 of an inch
depth or those with less than .003 of an inch in depth, having sharp edges which cause
hanging of fingernail should be locally rounded out or buffed.
(a) Clean the window using generous amounts of water and a mild detergent.
(b) Use a scratch removal kit, such as the type supplied by Micro-Surface Finishing Products
Inc., P.O. Box 456, Wilton, Iowa, to remove the defective area, blend and buff.
(c) Using 400A wet or dry abrasive paper wrapped around a smooth rubber block and
generous amounts of water, lightly sand over and around the defected area in a circular
motion, extending in a diameter equal to two or three times the defected area.
(d) Continue sanding until the initial defect is no longer apparent. Thoroughly flush the area
with water.
(e) Using 600A wet or dry abrasive paper, repeat step (c). Continue sanding only until the
hairline scratches caused by the coarse sanding are no longer apparent. Sand a larger
area than that covered by the original sanding operation. Thoroughly wash the area.
(f) Finish the repair using instructions given in paragraph (1), above.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6J5 56-00-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 56-00-00 6J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
1. Windshield
A. Removal
(1) If removing the pilot’s windshield (i.e. - heated), disconnect the battery and remove external
power connections, if any.
(2) Remove all screws which attach the windshield to the retainer and the retainer to the fuselage.
(3) If removing heated windshield, disconnect black ground wire from tooling hole near instrument
panel support clip.
(4) Remove the retainer.
(5) Remove the windshield.
B. Installation
(1) If the old retainer is being reused, remove all traces of the old sealant from its inside surface.
(2) Remove all traces of the old sealant from the shims, windshield mounting angles and retainer
mating surfaces.
(3) All corners must be broken and all edges smooth and free of tool marks.
(4) Check fit the windshield to the fuselage to ensure that it will fit the contour of the fuselage. If
replacing the co-pilot’s windshield (i.e. - acrylic), trim excess material as required.
(5) If using a new retainer:
(a) Check fit and trim to fit as required. The areas most likely to require trimming are the lower
left outboard side and along the bottom edge near the center post.
(b) Using the old retainer as a template, drill .191 inch screw holes. Countersink the screw
holes .380 in. dia. x 100 degrees.
NOTE: For the pilot’s heated glass windshield, apply a parting agent (Polyvinyl Alcohol, P/N
915-936, or equivilent) to the faying surface of the retainer and do not install silicone
rubber tubes in the screw holes as described in step (6), below.
(6) Apply sealant per Figure 1 and install windshield insuring that a silicone rubber tube is installed
in each tooling hole in the windshield. Torque any fasteners which penetrate the windshield
from 19 to 22 in. - lbs.
(7) If installing glass heated windshield, connect black ground wire to tooling hole near instrument
panel support clip with a MS35206-215 screw, AN960-4 washer, MS35338-41 lock washer,
and a MS21044N04 nut.
(8) Install the retainer.
(9) Conduct the Pressurization System Test, 21-30-00.
(10) Reconnect the battery and, if desired, external power.
(11) Conduct the Heated Windshield Test, 30-40-00.
(12) Prime and paint as desired.
(13) Make a proper logbook entry documenting this installation.
6J7 56-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
82288 AP
D NOTES:
A D
1. APPLY SEALANT HERE.
2. TORQUE ALL FASTENERS WHICH
PENETRATE THE WINDSHIELD
A FROM 19 TO 22 INCH POUNDS.
3. TUBING NOT REQUIRED
WHEN GLASS HEATED
WINDSHIELD IS INSTALLED.
4. FOR PILOT'S HEATED GLASS
WINDSHIELD ONLY, IT IS
B PERMISSABLE TO REMOVE
UP TO .10 INCH OF FIBERGLASS
FRAME EDGE TO ACHIEVE
SEE NOTE 4 .03/.06 INCH EDGE CLEARANCE
B BY SANDING PERPENDICULAR
TO EDGE WITH (MAX) 220 GRIT,
IN AREA SHOWN ONLY. REFINISH
SANDED EDGE WITH FLAT BLACK
ENAMEL PAINT.
WINDSHIELD
SILICONE SEE
RUBBER NOTE 1
TUBES
SHIM SHIM SEE
(RIGHT AND NOTE 1
LEFT SIDE)
SEE
SHIM NOTE 1
SILICONE (RIGHT
SEE RUBBER AND LEFT
NOTE 1 TUBE SIDE)
SECTION A - A
SECTION B - B
SECTION C - C
SILCONE
RUBBER SEE
TUBE NOTE 1
PILOTS TYPICAL VIEW OF
WINDOW SILCONE RUBBER TUBE
WINDSHIELD IN WINDSHIELD
(REF)
(SEE NOTE 3)
LENGTH OF TUBING TUBE

SHIM (RIGHT TO EQUAL THICKNESS
AND LEFT SIDE) OF WINDSHIELD
SECTION D - D
FASTENER
HOLE
Windshield Installation
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 56-10-00 6J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100877 J
100879 H
A B
A
C C
REFER TO FIGURE 4
STORM WINDOW E
STRAP
WINDSHIELD SEE NOTE 1
(REF) SEE NOTE 1
SHIM
(RIGHT AND STRAP
LEFT SIDE)
SILICONE RUBBER TUBE SILICONE
RUBBER TUBE
SECTION A - A SECTION C - C
SILICONE
SEE RUBBER
NOTE 1 TUBE
TYPICAL VIEW OF
SEE NOTE 1 TUBE IN WINDSHIELD
(REFER TO FIGURE 1
FOR DETAILS)
SILICONE
RUBBER TUBE
SECTION B - B
SECTION D - D SILICONE RUBBER
TUBE
NOTES: 1. APPLY SEALANT HERE. SEE 91-10-00, CHART 10, SEALANT, WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELDS.
2. ALL FASTENERS WHICH PENETRATE THE WINDOW SHALL BE TORQUED TO 19 - 22 INCH POUNDS.
Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window Installation

Figure 2
6J9 56-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Pilot’s / Copilot’s Window

A. Removal
(1) Remove the screws, nuts, washers and strap that retain the window to the fuselage.
(2) Remove the window.
B. Installation
(1) Remove all traces of old sealant from the outboard side of the strap and the inboard side of the
fuselage window frame.
(3) Check fit the window to the fuselage window frame to ensure that it will fit. Trim excess material
as required.
(4) Apply sealant to the inboard side of the fuselage window frame.
(5) Position the window in its frame, apply sealant to the outboard side of the strap. Secure the
window to the frame and strap with the previously removed nuts, bolts and washers. Torque
any fasteners which penetrate the window from 19 to 22 inch - pounds.
C. 50 Hour Pilot’s Side Cockpit Window Inspection
For airplanes with pilot’s side cockpit windows which have accumulated 350 hours time-in-service,
upon reaching 350 hours and each 50 hours time-in-service thereafter, inspect as follows:
(1) Examine the exterior of the pilot’s side cockpit window in the area between the storm window
hinge and the fuselage skin.
(2) If sealant exists between the storm window hinge and the airframe skin, remove the sealant in
that area only, very carefully with a plastic scraper, ensuring that the window is not scratched.
NOTE: Replacing sealant after inspection is not required.
(3) Inspect the pilot’s side cockpit window in the area between the storm window hinge and the
fuselage skin for cracks. Especially examine the area highlighted in Figure 3.
(a) If no cracks are found, make an appropriate logbook entry documenting completion of this
inspection and return airplane to service.
CAUTION: PRESSURIZED FLIGHT PROHIBITED WITH CRACKED WINDOW.
(b) If any crack is found, pressurized flight is prohibited until window is replaced as described
above.
NOTE: Unpressurized flight operations are authorized pending replacement of a cracked
window.
(4) In either case, for airplanes with pilot’s side cockpit windows which have accumulated 350
hours time-in-service, continue repetitive 50 hour inspections until such time as a permanent
solution is released (see future revisions of Piper Service Bulletin No. 1175).
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 56-10-00 6J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HINGE FUSELAGE SKIN
LOOKING INBOARD FROM LEFT
50 Hour Pilot’s Side Cockpit Window Inspection

Figure 3
6J11 56-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Storm Window (see Figure 4)

A. Replacing the storm window in an existing pilot’s side window.
(1) Removal
(a) Push button on latch and pull latch to open the storm window.
(b) Remove hinge pin.
(c) Remove storm window.
(2) Installation
(a) Align storm window hinge half with hinge half on the pilot’s window.
(b) Install hinge pin.
(c) Push latch onto latch pin to close the storm window.
B. Installing a storm window in a new pilot’s side window.
(1) Position the hinge in the notch at the base of the storm window cut-out. With the storm window
in a closed position, center the storm window in the cut-out and mark the pilot’s window to
indicate the outer edges of the hinge.
(2) Bond the hinge half to the pilot’s side window with Dexter Hysol 9446 (see A-A, Figure 4). Take
care to ensure the inside edge of the hinge half is bonded flush to the pilot’s window. Also,
ensure that a .030 inch gap is left between the bottom edge of the cut-out and the inside of
the hinge half and that the gap is filled with adhesive.
(3) When the hinge to window bond is cured, slide the latch pin assembly over the rear upper
edge of the storm window cut-out and push the storm window to a closed and latched position.
Mark the position of the latch pin assembly on the pilot’s side window.
(4) Bond the latch pin assembly to the pilot’s side window with Dexter Hysol 9446 (see B-B, Figure
4). Ensure that the latch pin assembly is aligned to the markings previously made on the pilot’s
side window.
NOTE: The storm window retainer is bonded to the storm window with PRC PR-1422
Sealant. The latch pin assembly and hinge are bonded to the pilot’s window with
Dexter Hysol 9446.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 56-10-00 6J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100876 F STORM WINDOW ASSY.

100877 J - BOND HINGE TO WINDOW PRIOR
100879 H TO BONDING LATCH PIN ASSY.
- MAINTAIN .030 INCH MINIMUM GAP
BETWEEN STORM WINDOW RETAINER
AND PILOT'S SIDE WINDOW.
- CENTER HINGE HALF IN CUTOUT AREA
AND ENSURE IT DOES NOT RIDE INTO
THE CORNER RADII.
FWD
NOTE 3
A
NOTE 4
B NOTE 2
B FILL GAP BETWEEN WINDOW

AND HINGE HALF WITH
DEXTER HYSOL 9446 ADHESIVE
NOTE 2
NOTE 4
THIS SURFACE OF
HINGE HALF MUST
BE BONDED FLUSH
AGAINST WINDOW
INSTALL MS 20470AD3-3 RIVET NOTE 1
IN EACH END OF HINGE WITH
A LOCTITE 420 TO RETAIN HINGE PIN SILICONE
RUBBER
VIEW OUT APPLY PR1422-B4
TUBE
SEALANT HERE
WASHER(S)
(TWO MAX.) NOTE 1
(BEFORE BONDING, REMOVE KNOB FROM STORM WINDOW
ASSY. AND CENTER LATCH PIN TO THE .5 IN. DIAMETER HOLE
IN THE STEEL RETAINER. PIN MUST BE CENTERED WITHIN
.015 INCH. AFTER BONDING, WINDOW MUST OPERATE
SMOOTHLY WITHOUT DRAG OR BINDING.)
LATCH PIN
ASSY.
NOTE 2
.06/.12 INCH FILLET SEAL WITH PR-1422

SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
NOTES: 1. BOND WITH DEXTER HYSOL 9446.
2. BOND WITH PR-1422.
3. BOND SEAL TO RETAINER WITH RTV 157
4. EARLY SEALS AS SHOWN, LATER SEALS
AND SERVICE REPLACEMENT SEALS ARE
ARE RECTANGULAR CROSS-SECTION.
Storm Window
Figure 4
PAGE 7
6J13 56-10-00 Apr 15/07

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 56-10-00 6J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CABIN
Passenger Windows
A. Removal
(1) Drill out the rivets which fasten the window retainer to the fuselage skin.
(2) Push the window and retainer inward until it is free of the fuselage skin.
(3) Remove the retainer from the window.
(4) Save the old window for a template if a new window is to be installed.
B. Installation
(1) Remove all traces of old sealant from the retainer, inboard edge of the window opening, and
old window.
(3) If a new window is being installed, ensure that it is the same dimensions as the old window.
(4) Apply PRC 1422-B4 sealant to the outboard surface of the window where it mates with the
inboard edge of the window opening. Also apply sealant to the outboard surface of the retainer
where it mates with the inboard edge of the window opening and where it mates with the
inboard edge of the window.
(5) Line up the rivet holes and rivet the retainer to the skin and to the window.
6J15 56-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 56-20-00 6J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOOR
Door Window
A. Removal
(1) Drill out the rivets which fasten the window retainer to the inner frame of the door.
(2) Remove the retainer.
(3) Remove the door window.
B. Installation
(1) Remove all remaining traces of a sealant from the inner surface of the door window frame and
outboard-facing side of the retainer.
(2) Fit-check the new window before applying sealant.
(3) Apply PRC1422-B4 sealant to the inner surface of the frame and outboard-facing side of the
retainer. Rivet the retainer to the frame.
RETAINER
CABIN DOOR
WINDOW
SEALANT
(PR1422-B4)
Section View of Cabin Door Window

Figure 1
6J17 56-30-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 56-30-00 6J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
57
WINGS
6J19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
57-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07
57-50-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57 - WINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ATTACH FITTINGS 57-40-00 1 6K1

General 1 6K1
Outboard Wing 1 6K1
Removal 1 6K1
Installation 2 6K2
HI-LOK Removal and Installation 6 6K6
Inboard Wing 8 6K8
General 8 6K8
Removal 8 6K8
Installation 13 6K13
Attach Fitting Corrosion Control Inspection 17 6K17
FLIGHT SURFACES 57-50-00 1 6K21

Aileron 1 6K21
Removal 1 6K21
Installation 1 6K21
Balancing 2 6K22
Wing Flaps 4 6K24
Removal 4 6K24
Installation 4 6K24
Vortex Generators 5 6L1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTACH FITTINGS
1. General
This chapter contains removal and installation procedures for the wing and related components.
The wing is comprised of three separate sections. The center section is comprised of the inboard portion
of each wing joined by a continuous main spar. The outboard edges of the inboard wing assembly are
fitted with an outer panel splice. The outboard wing assemblies have mating splice plates and splice
angles.
2. Outboard Wing
NOTE: Order Piper Kit No. 767-344 (Right Outboard Wing Replacement) or 767-345 (Left Outboard
Wing Replacement), as appropriate, when replacing an outboard wing section.
A. Removal (refer to Figure 1)
(1) Drain the fuel from both wings. (refer to 12-10-00, Draining Fuel System)
(2) Remove the flap per Wing Flaps - Removal, 57-50-00.
(3) Remove the aileron per Aileron - Removal, 57-50-00.
(4) Remove aileron cable, sector assembly, and pulley assemblies from the outboard and inboard
wing sections stopping at the pulley assembly nearest the wing root. Gather the cable and
secure it out of the way.
(5) Carefully remove the wing splice skin (W.S. 107.50 - W.S. 116.00) that covers the inboard /
outboard wing splice. This old skin may be used as a template for the new skin.
(6) Remove the screws from the fuel tank access panels in the outboard and inboard fuel tanks.
Carefully remove the fuel tank access panels and set them aside for reuse.
NOTE: The fuel access panels may be installed with low adhesive sealant and, if so, will not
come off without some method of separating them from the wing. Use of a fabricated
laminated fiberglass wedge is recommended.
Wing Installation
Figure 1
6K1 57-40-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Disconnect the fuel lines by removing clamps and cutting the flexible connections.
(8) Disconnect the fuel quantity probe lead.
(9) Disconnect the taxi/recognition and navigation/strobe light leads.
(10) Support the outboard wing.
(11) Free the main spar splice plate and angles by drilling out the rivets and removing the Hi-Lok
pins and collars from the inboard ends of the splice plate and angles (i.e. - inboard of W.S.
107.50). (See Figure 2.)
NOTE: The 22 Hi-Loks securing the inboard section of the main spar splice plate penetrate
the aft wall of the inboard fuel tank and their collars must be accessed through that
fuel tank’s outboard access panel.
(12) Free the aft spar splice plate and angles by drilling out the rivets securing their inboard ends
(i.e. - inboard of W.S. 107.50). (See Figure 1.)
NOTE: The rivets securing the inboard section of the aft spar splice angles also retain
nutplates for an aileron cable pulley bracket. As these rivets are drilled out, reach
inside the wing access which doubles as the pitot head mount and capture and
remove the three nutplates. Set them aside for reuse.
(13) Carefully remove the outboard wing, being certain that all electrical leads, fuel and vent lines,
and control cables are disconnected.
B. Installation
NOTE: When installing a “replacement” wing or wing section, perform Stall Warning Flight Test
Procedure, 27-30-00, upon completion of wing installation.
(1) Carefully position the outboard wing, aligning its splice plates and angles with the holes in the
inboard wing main and rear spars.
(2) Use a string of suitable length extended from the inboard wing leading edge next to the
fuselage out to the outboard wing tip to help maintain true alignment of the wing sections. Also,
extend a string from the wing tip to the stabilizer, marking its length and checking this with the
opposite wing and stabilizer, using the same reference points on both wings and stabilizers.
(3) While maintaining proper alignment of the wing, install the Hi-Lok pins and rivets into the spars
and splice plates per Figure 2. Refer to the PA-46-500TP Illustrated Parts Catalog for correct
rivet part numbers and locations.
NOTE: When riveting the the aft spar splice angles, be sure to reinstall the three aileron cable
bracket nutplates drilled out during Removal, above.
(4) Seal the inboard fuel tank.
(5) Connect the leads from the taxi/recognition and navigation/strobe lights.
(6) Connect the fuel and vent lines, using new flexible connections.
(7) Connect the fuel quantity probe lead.
(8) Install the wing splice skin at W.S. 107.50 - 116.00.
(9) Install the aileron cable pulley assemblies, sector assembly, and aileron cable.
(10) Install the flap per Wing Flaps - Installation, 57-50-00.
(11) Install the aileron per Aileron - Installation, 57-50-00.
(12) Check operation of the taxi/recognition lights and navigation/strobe lights.
(13) Check fuel system for leaks and flow. (refer to 28-10-00, Fuel System Leakage Inspection.)
(14) Calibrate fuel quantity indicator per Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration, 28-40-00.
(15) Fill the fuel system per 12-10-00.
(16) Make appropriate logbook entry.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
83000 AF W.S. W.S.

107.50 116.00
SPLICE SKIN AREA (REF)
HL18-6-7 (10 PLACES) A HL18-8-8 (2 PLACES)
SPLICE PLATE
IS PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
SPLICE ANGLE
IS PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
HL18-6-6 (10 PLACES)

A OUTBOARD
B B
STRAP
FWD SPLICE ANGLES

ARE PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
STRAP
HL18-6-4 (22 PLACES)
VIEW A-A
(LOOKING INBOARD)
Outboard Wing Installation

6K3 57-40-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89640 BX
W.S.
107.50
SKIN
HL19-6-10
HL19-6-9
HL19-6-8
FWD
SPLICE ANGLE
IS PART OF
OUTBOARD
WING ASSY.
SKIN
OUTBOARD
VIEW B-B
(ROTATED 90°)
Outboard Wing Installation
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6K5 57-40-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. HI-LOK Removal and Installation

NOTE: Refer to Hi Shear Catalogs for further information and a complete list of power and hand tools to
aid in removal and installation of the Hi-Lok fasteners.
A. Hi-Lok pins and collars are used at various points in the wing installation. Refer to the Parts Catalog
for locations and proper pin and collar part numbers.
B. To remove the Hi-Lok pin and collar:
(1) Grasp the collar with pliers.
(2) Insert an Allen hex wrench in the hex in the end of the pin.
(3) Turn the collar with pliers.
(4) Remove the collar and pin.
(5) If not damaged during removal, the Hi-Lok pin can be reused.
C. To install the Hi-Lok pin and collar:
(1) Insert the Hi-Lok pin in the hole (after hole has been deburred if new).
(2) Manually turn the Hi-Lok collar onto the pin.
(3) If using Hi-Lok power tools, insert the hex wrench tip of the power driver into the pin’s hex
recess, and the socket over the collar hex. Press the power driver against the collar and
operate the power driver until the collar’s wrenching device has been torque off.
(4) If using shop tools, insert an Allen wrench into the pin’s hex recess and turn the collar hex with
an open end wrench until the collar’s wrenching device has been turned off.
(5) Check the protrusion of the threaded end for the limits given in Figure 3. Hi-Lok Protrusion
Gauges (P/N 2-1522) offer a convenient method to check the pin protrusion limits.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DEBURR IF COUNTERSINK
DEBURR HERE TOOL DOES NOT HAVE
(SEE NOTE) THIS FEATURE (SEE NOTE)
(R) HEAD RADIUS (R) HEAD RADIUS
NOTE: The HI-LOK pin has a slight radius under its head.
After drilling, deburr the edge of the hole. This
permits the head to fully seat in the hole. See the
list in this figure for head radius dimensions. For
example, the 3/16 protruding head (HL 18-6 series)
TYPE OF HI-LOK PIN (R)
has a .015/.025 radius while the 3/16 flush head
HL18-5 SERIES .025 (HL 19-6 series) has a .025/.030 radius.
HL18-6 SERIES .015
HL18-8 SERIES
HL18-10 SERIES .030

HI-LOK PROTRUSION
HL19-6 SERIES .020 GAUGE (HI-SHEAR
P/N 2-1522) MAY BE
USED WITH OR WITHOUT
COLLAR INSTALLED
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE MAX
MIN
P (.490)
P1 (.572) 1/16 i.e. 5/16
i.e. 5/16
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM THICKNESS
THICKNESS
MINIMUM GRIP MAXIMUM GRIP

(MAXIMUM PROTRUSION) (MINIMUM PROTRUSION)
EXAMPLE
HL18-10-10
MAXIMUM GRIP LENGTH OF PIN IN 1/16ths
(10/16" OR 5/8" GRIP LENGTH FOR THIS EXAMPLE)
STANDARD HI-LOK PIN MINIMUM MAXIMUM

FIRST DASH NOMINAL PROTRUSION PROTRUSION
NUMBER DIAMETER P P
1
-5 5/32 .302 .384
-6 3/16 .315 .397

-8 1/4 .385 .467
-10 5/16 .490 .572
HI-LOK Fasteners Installation

Figure 3
6K7 57-40-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Inboard Wing
NOTE: When replacing the inboard wing section or the entire wing, order the appropriate Piper Service
Kit containing the required parts and instructions as follows:
Effectivity P/N
4697001 thru 4697156 767-373
4697157 and up, 767-374
and airplanes which have installed
Piper Kits No. 767-360 and 767-361.
A. General
If it is necessary to replace the entire wing structure, you will need special equipment. Allow time for
setting up as follows:
(1) Determine whether wing will be lowered or fuselage raised to remove wing. Equipment will
vary accordingly.
(2) Fabricate the following special equipment prior to starting the procedure. (See Figure 4.)
(a) Cradle to support fuselage: Create slings from industrial nylon lifting strap, six (6) inches
wide. Lifting capability needed only if raising fuselage away from wing.
(b) Dolly to cradle wing: A single jack may be specially adapted for this procedure in order to
lower wing away from fuselage.
(c) Hoist assembly: To be attached to ceiling, with sufficient weight-bearing capacity. Position
clamps so that straps will cradle fuselage at bulkheads (see Figure 4) for best support.
(d) Lifting pins (left and right) and cable: Suitable to attach to engine mount for additional
steadying.
(e) Tools for removing rivets and cutting sealant: May be standard or fabricated.
B. Removal
NOTE: Whenever the inboard wing section is removed, conduct Attach Fittings Corrosion Control
Inspection, below.
(1) Remove all fuel from the airplane.
(2) Prepare hoist and fuselage supports.
(3) Set up dolly under wing.
(4) Remove interior furnishings as follows:
NOTE: Perform steps (4) thru (6) inside airplane.
(a) Forward and center seats, left and right.
(b) Cabinets, left and right.
(c) Floor carpet.
(d) Forward side panels below window line, left and right.
(5) Remove floor panels from forward cockpit area to entrance door (F.S. 117.00 to F.S. 89.60).
(6) Remove lines and cables as follows:
(a) Remove relief tube, located under center left floorboard.
(b) Derig aileron, rudder, and stabilator cables. Remove from below spar.
NOTE: Do not disconnect hydraulic lines at this time.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Special Equipment for Wing Removal and Installation

Figure 4
6K9 57-40-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Removal and Installation of Inboard Wing

(7) Remove wing to fuselage fairings, left and right wing roots. Remove bottom fuselage skin
panels at wing spar, left, center, and right. Remove tee channels and angles below spar.
NOTE: Perform steps (7) and (8) outside airplane.
(8) Disconnect/remove lines as follows (Figure 5, Detail A):
(a) Disconnect flap drive. Remove rods, left and right.
(b) Pull aileron cables through wing root and secure cables (refer to 27-00-00).
(c) Disconnect and clear fuel lines from wing root area.
(d) Disconnect electrical cannon plugs, left and right.
(9) Remove rivets and hardware (see Figure 5, Detail B).
NOTE: Perform step (9) with one man inside airplane at wing spar and one outside assisting.
Use special tools to remove rivets and Hi-Loks.
(a) Remove pilot seat belt supports, each side of forward spar
(b) Remove six forward and six aft Hi-Loks, each side above spar.
(c) Remove five rivets thru fuselage skin and angle each side above spar.
(d) Remove sealant between fuselage, frame, and angle each side above spar.
(e) Remove floor board clips attached to aft spar.
NOTE: It may be necessary to cut sealant several times to get complete separation. Sealant
after 28 days has 260 psi adhesion.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INBOARD WING ATTACH FITTINGS
DETAIL A
FS
100.00 MAIN
SPAR
FS
95.00
FWD PRESSURE BULKHEAD

FIREWALL
FUEL
ELECTRICAL FS
PNEUMATIC 150.58
AILERON CABLES
ELECTRICAL (RIGHT SIDE
(RIGHT SIDE ONLY) ONLY)
FLAP PUSHRODS
BRAKES PNEUMATIC
FS FS FS
132.00 146.47 171.43
HYDRAULIC
Removal and Installation of Inboard Wing

6K11 57-40-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Break sealant loose forward and aft of spar each side.
(a) Use a sharp putty knife and cut away excess sealant top and bottom of spar.
(b) Use piano wire between spar and frame pulling from inside and outside thru seals like a
saw. The wire will cut the sealant but not the aluminum. Drip PSS solvent on piano wire as
you cut and this will help separation.
CAUTION: PROTECT AIRPLANE FINISH BY PLACING CLOTH OR PADDING UNDER
STRAPS.
(11) Attach straps, as shown in Figure 4, at indicated fuselage stations.
NOTE: This and the following steps support the fuselage for wing removal. Use fabricated
hoist, cradle, and lifting pin.
WARNING: DO NOT ENTER AIRPLANE BEFORE ATTACHING LIFTING PINS TO KEEP

FUSELAGE FROM ROTATING IN SLINGS.
(12) Anchor fabricated lifting pins to engine mount tubes to secure nose and prevent fuselage from
rotating. (See Figure 5.)
(13) Suspend fuselage with hoist. Attach cable to lifting pins.
(14) Retract landing gear and disconnect/remove hydraulic lines as follows:
NOTE: Dolly should already be in place under wing.
NOTE: Perform step (14) both inside and outside airplane.
(a) Using hydraulic pressure, release gear down locks.
(b) Retract and tie back main landing gear.
(c) Drain off hydraulic pressure.
(d) Disconnect/remove hydraulic lines (Figure 5).
(15) Remove forward and aft wing attach bolt or Hi-Lok at glove spar, forward spar, and aft spar, on
each side. If sealant is completely free, wing will be ready to remove.
WARNING: MAKE CERTAIN THAT FUSELAGE LIFTING DEVICE AND LIFTING STRAPS
ARE STRONG AND POSITIONED PROPERLY. SPAR FITS TIGHTLY IN
CANTED SPAR BOX IN FUSELAGE. EVEN AFTER SEALANT HAS BEEN CUT,
A HEAVY AMOUNT OF LIFTING PRESSURE (TO BREAK SEALANT GRIP)
MAY BE REQUIRED. TAKE EXTREME CARE NOT TO DAMAGE FUSELAGE
AND WING.
NOTE: These final steps may require additional manpower.
(16) Additional pressure will be necessary to separate wing from fuselage. Proceed as follows:
(a) Have one man on each wing tip to steady the airplane and apply downward pressure.
(b) Observe spar area inside airplane.
(c) Strike spar with dead blow mallet until wing is completely released.
(17) With wing resting on dolly, lift fuselage to clear spar or lower wing.
(18) Remove wing.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
WARNING: FUSELAGE MUST BE CRADLED.
NOTE: When installing a “replacement” wing or wing section, perform Stall Warning Flight Test
Procedure, 27-30-00, upon completion of wing installation.
(1) Clean surfaces and all parts to be installed using PSS or other suitable solvent. Pay special
attention to frame area inside airplane where sealant was broken or rivets removed. Remove
all old sealant residue. Remove all corrosion inhibiting surface paint. This will ensure good
sealant grip.
(2) Place new wing on dolly and position under fuselage.
(3) Raise wing or lower fuselage over wing.
(4) Secure wing attach fittings with bolt (forward spar) or Hi-Lok (glove spar and aft spar), as
required, on both sides.
(5) Align spar with frames. Drill holes. Align angles with top of spar and with frames each side.
Mark holes thru angles in top of spar each side.
CAUTION: KEEP SURFACES FREE OF METAL SPLINTERS.
(6) Remove wing attach bolts and separate fuselage from wing. Move wing away from fuselage to
work on each independently.
(7) Drill wing spar top each side for angles that attach to fuselage and frame.
(8) Use a vacuum or air hose to clean away all metal splinters in both wing spar and fuselage.
(9) Apply sealant to top spar and angles each side. Use R4 sealant.
(10) Attach angles to top spar each side with cherry rivets.
CAUTION: PROPER SEALING IS CRITICAL TO MAINTAIN PRESSURIZATION OF
COCKPIT. BE GENEROUS WITH SEALANT PARTICULARLY IN CORNERS
WITH WIDE GAPS. USE B4 SEALANT.
(11) Apply sealant to wing spar aft, forward, left and right plates and angles as shown in Figures 7 and
8.
(12) Apply sealant to canted frames as shown in Figure 8.
(13) Position wing under fuselage for installation.
(14) Lower fuselage onto wing spar. Some sealant will squeeze out.
(15) Secure wing with wing attach bolts. Install forward spar bolts, then aft spar Hi-Loks with nuts
forward, and finally the glove spar Hi-Loks with nuts forward.(See Figure 6 )
(16) Tighten forward spar nuts to a torque of 550 inch - pounds. Tighten glove spar and aft spar
nuts (Hi-Loks) till they shear off.
(17) Clean off excess sealant with PSS solvent.
(18) Rivet canted frames to left and right aft spar.
NOTE: Two people are needed to buck and shoot rivets.
(19) Rivet floorboard clips to aft spar.
(20) Rivet canted frame at left forward spar.
(21) Rivet canted frame to spar at right forward spar.
(22) Install five (5) rivets in angle on top of spar each side thru fuselage skin from outside fuselage.
6K13 57-40-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(23) Install four (4) Hi-Lok bolts thru each intercostal, frame, angle and two (2) thru frame and wing
spar, just under intercostal. All four locations are left, right, fwd and aft of top wing spar. See
Figures 5 and 8.
(24) Install four (4) angles that form two (2) tee’s in bottom of fuselage. Tap with a plastic mallet thru
aft channels in the frame under wing spar until they clear the fwd frame under spar. Then using
small vise grips attach to angles and tap thru fwd frame channels an equal amount.
(25) Inside fuselage align angles evenly with Kleco fasteners to existing holes one on each side of
stringer.
(26) Below fuselage place short tee angles between floor angles and rivet together with four (4)
rivets on top. Then go inside and rivet both ends to bottom stringer.
(27) Ensure there are no metal splinters on chips between skins prior to installing close outs.
(28) Apply sealant to all skins and close out skins on bottom of aircraft. See Figure 7. Apply sealant
1/4" each side of rivets.
(29) Install close outs in place with Kleco fasteners and insert rivets from bottom.
(30) Inspect rivets.
(31) Install fwd pilot’s seat belt brackets with bolts.
(32) Install cat grommets on all passage holes in bottom spar.
NAS6607-9, BOLT 89635 V

NAS1149F0763P, WASHERS
(FIVE REQ., ONE UNDER HEAD,
ONE TO THREE BETWEEN FITTINGS,
REMAINING UNDER NUT.
TWO NAS1149F0732P WASHERS,
ONE BETWEEN FITTINGS,
ONE UNDER NUT,
MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR
ONE NAS1149F0763P WASHER.)
MS21044-N7, NUT
(TORQUE TO 550 IN.-LBS.)
LOOKING AFT AT FWD SPAR

(TYPICAL, LEFT AND RIGHT)
Installation of Inboard Wing

Figure 6
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(33) Inside fuselage at spar all newly installed rivets and Hi-Loks must be brush sealed with A-4
sealant.
(34) Reinstall all lines and cables removed in steps B.(6), B.(8), and B(14). First, reinstall electrical,
fuel, and hydraulic lines -- then, reinstall control cables.
(35) Reinstall flap drive control rods left and right.
(36) Make adjustments as follows:
(a) Control cables (refer to 27-10-00, Aileron Control Rigging and Adjustment).
(b) Hydraulic lines (refer to 29-10-00, Hydraulic System Testing and Bleeding Hydraulic
System).
1 Put pressure on system.
2 Allow gear to extend.
3 Test and bleed system.
4 Perform gear cycle test (refer to 32-30-00, Landing Gear Retraction System
Functional Test).
5 Be sure that all three landing gear are down and locked.
(c) Fuel System.
1 Perform Fuel System Leakage Inspection, 28-10-00.
2 Calibrate fuel quantity indicator per Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration, 28-40-00.
(d) Flap drive control rods ( refer to 27-50-00, Flap Drive System.)
(37) Remove support straps.
(38) Remove dolly.
(39) Install wing to fuselage fairings and bottom skin panels.
(40) Install interior furnishings. (Refer to Removal, above.)
6K15 57-40-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hole and Slot Fillets

Figure 7
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Application of Sealant
Figure 8
5. Attach Fittings Corrosion Control Inspection

Each five years, inspect the attach fittings shown in Figure 9 for corrosion and condition. Repair/replace
as required. When inspection and repair/replacement is completed, reapply Dinitrol AV 8 (P/N 89500-
800) Corrosion Inhibiting Compound.
NOTE: On any part being replaced, dip rivets in zinc chromate or equivilnt primer and install wet.
and apply Dinitrol AV 8 to:
(1) Forward wing spar attach fittings.
(2) Aft wing spar attach fittings.
NOTE: Includes wing and fuselage fittings.
CAUTION: READ PRECAUTIONS ON CONTAINER LABEL AND WEAR A CHARCOAL

FILTER MASK WHEN APPLYING DINITROL AV 8.
thinned.
6K17 57-40-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cover autopilot servos, electrical connectors, and cable pulleys.

Attach Fittings Corrosion Control

Figure 9
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6K19 57-40-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 57-40-00 6K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT SURFACES
1. Aileron (refer to Figure 1)

EXHIBIT CRACKS.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the nut and bolt which secures the aileron drive sector to the yoke in the aileron.
(2) Support the aileron and remove the three aileron hinge bolts.
(3) Remove the aileron.
B. Installation
WARNING: ALL CONTROL SURFACES THAT HAVE BEEN REPLACED OR REPAINTED MUST
BE BALANCED PER BALANCING, BELOW, BEFORE INSTALLATION.
(1) Position the aileron on the trailing edge of the wing.
(2) Install the attaching nuts, bolts and washers.
(3) Attach the aileron drive sector to the yoke in the aileron with the previously removed nut, bolt
and washers.
(4) Actuate the aileron controls to ensure freedom of movement.
Aileron Installation
Figure 1
6K21 57-50-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Balancing (See Figures 2 and 3.)

To balance the aileron, the assembly must be complete, including the trim tab and all attaching
screws. Before balancing, bend the trim tab into its neutral position. Place the aileron assembly on
the knife edge supports in a draft free room with the beam perpendicular to the hinge centerline. Do
not place the tool on the trim tab. Calibrate the tool (see Balancing Equipment, 55-20-00). Read the
scale when the bubble level has been centered by adjustment of the movable weight and determine
the static balance limit.
There is no adjustment provision for the ailerons.
CHART 1
AILERON BALANCE LIMITS

0 -4.8
Balancing Aileron
Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 57-50-00 6K22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Control Surfaces Balancing Tool

Figure 3
6K23 57-50-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Wing Flaps (refer to Figure 4)

A. Removal
(1) Extend the flap and disconnect the flap drive push rods (2 places each flap).
(2) Support the flap and remove the flap hinge bolts, nuts and washers.
(3) Pull the flap straight back off the wing.
B. Installation
(1) Position the flap on the trailing edge of the wing.
(2) Ensure that spacers are in place in the flap tracks.
(3) Insert bolts, washers and nuts. Torque the nuts from 38 - 43 inch pounds and safety with cotter
pins. Install the teflon faced washers on the center tracks so that the teflon side faces the flap
track.
(4) Connect the two flap drive push rods to the aileron.
(5) Cycle the flaps several times to make sure that they are operating freely. (refer to 27-50-00 for
Flap Rigging and Adjustment)
Wing Flap Installation

Figure 4
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 57-50-00 6K24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Vortex Generators
S/N’s 4697157 & up and Meridian aircraft with Kit No. 767-360 installed have vortex generators installed
on the upper leading edge of the wing and the lower trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer
(see 55-10-00.)
WARNING: A TOTAL OF MORE THAN FIVE (5) VORTEX GENERATORS MISSING FROM THE WING
AND/OR THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER RENDERS THE AIRPLANE UNAIRWORTHY.
NOTE: If the aircraft is repainted, the vortex generators must be replaced. Repaint kits are available.
A spares kit (containing extra VG’s and Loctite 330 adhesive) is provided with each aircraft. Replace
VG’s as required.
A. Use the existing glue footprint from the missing VG(s) and the information in Figure 5 to properly
locate the replacement VG(s).
(1) All measurements are in inches.
(2) Chordwise meassurements are made at a 90 degree angle to the trailing edge of the wing
forward of the aileron and flap.
(3) 62 inches is measured from the skin located at the trailing edge of the wing nearest the
outboard edge of the flap.
(4) If a vortex generator location falls on a skin seam, rivet line, or other obstacle, move the VG
spanwise the shortest distance possible to clear the obstacle.
B. Application Instructions.
(1) Lightly sand the glue footprint to scuff the surface. Remove sanding dust/residue by wiping
with a clean lint-free cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
(2) Apply activator to the glue footprint.
(3) Spread one (1) drop of adhesive evenly over the base of the VG.
CAUTION: THE ADHESIVE SETS UP VERY QUICKLY. ENSURE PROPER ALIGNMENT OF
EACH VG BEFORE MOVING TO THE NEXT, IF ANY.
(4) Install the VG in place.
(5) Clean up excess adhesive with cotton swabs.
6L1 57-50-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Vortex Generator Installation - Wing
Figure 5
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 57-50-00 6L2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6L3 57-50-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 6L2 THRU 6L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 57-50-00 6L4
CARD 7 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

7A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
7A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 7A9
Effectivity 2 7A10
Pagination 2 7A10
Indexing 3 7A11
INDEX
Index 1 7B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
7B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 7B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
7B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 7B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
7B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 7B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
7B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 7B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
7B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
61
PROPELLER
7C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
61-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
61-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
61-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61 - PROPELLER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 61-00-00 1 7C7

Description 1 7C7
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY 61-10-00 1 7C9

Spinner 1 7C9
Removal 1 7C9
Installation 1 7C9
Propeller 3 7C11
Removal 3 7C11
Installation 3 7C11
Blade Track 4 7C12
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 4 7C12
Propeller Blade Inspection and Repair 5 7C13
All-Metal Blades 5 7C13
CONTROLLING 61-20-00 1 7C15

Propeller Governor 1 7C15
Removal 1 7C15
Installation 1 7C15
Rigging and Adjustment 3 7C17
Overspeed Governor 5 7C19
Removal 5 7C19
Installation 5 7C19
Operational Check 5 7C19

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Description
The propeller is a Hartzell model number HC-E4N-3Q/E8501K-3.5, 82.5 inch diameter, four blade, metal,
constant speed unit with reversing and full feathering capabilities. The propeller is deiced with electrically
heated boots (See 30-60-00).
The propeller governor pressurizes and regulates the flow of the propeller gearbox oil to a piston in the
propeller dome. The piston is linked by a sliding rod and fork arrangement to the propeller blades.
Governor oil pressure against the piston works to decrease propeller blade pitch. Centrifugal twisting
moments on the propeller blades work to decrease propeller blade pitch and increase rpm. Governing of
the interaction of these and other forces to maintain constant rpm is provided by the propeller governor.
The propeller governor maintains a constant propeller speed and is not pilot controlled, but rather fixed
at a maximum propeller speed of 2000 RPM. Propeller feather is selected by moving the condition lever
to the cutoff position. Beta and reverse blade angles are controlled by power lever movement. Movement
of the power lever into the beta and reverse range of operation is only possible on the ground via a squat
switch controlled solenoid. An additional overspeed governor is also provided to protect against propeller
and power turbine overspeed.
Propeller Installation
Figure 1
7C7 61-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 61-00-00 7C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY
1. Spinner
NOTE: Hartzell introduced an improved manufacturing process in late 2003. All spinner domes (P/N
595-009) and bulkheads (P/N 595-008) subsequently manufactured are marked with a “C” suffix
in the serial number - i.e. “AZ-1234 C”. These improved improved spinner domes and bulkheads
(i.e. - with “C” suffix serial number) are not interchangeable with earlier spinner domes and
bulkheads (i.e. - with no suffix serial number) even though the Piper and Hartzell part numbers
are the same.
Accordingly, if replacing either a spinner dome or spinner bulkhead which has a no suffix serial
number, you will need to order both par ts or the entire spinner assembly to ensure
compatability. Hartzell Service Letter HC-SL-61-225 applies.
Spinner Installation
Figure 1
7C9 61-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Propeller Assembly
Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 61-10-00 7C10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Removal
(1) Mark spinner dome and spinner bulkhead to enable reassembly in the same orientation.
(2) Remove screws (20) around the circumference of the spinner / spinner bulkhead and remove
the spinner dome, cylinder bulkhead unit and spinner mounting spacers from the propeller.
B. Installation
(1) Assemble spinner dome, cylinder bulkhead unit and spinner mounting spacers as shown in
Figure 1.
(2) Use a sufficient number of spinner mounting spacers to obtain 25% preload as defined in
Figure 1.
(3) Align index marks on spinner dome and spinner bulkhead. Press spinner dome into place and
secure with screws (20).
2. Propeller
A. Removal.
(1) Ensure master switch is OFF.
(2) Remove spinner assembly per Spinner - Removal, above.
(3) Remove upper forward and lower cowlings. (See 71-10-00.)
(4) Place a drip pan under the propeller to catch oil spillage.
(5) Remove propeller heat brush block assembly. (See Figure 1 and Brush Module Replacement,
both in 30-60-00.)
(6) Disconnect and remove beta linkage (i.e. - reversing lever) and carbon block from propeller
governor and beta control unit (i.e. - beta ring).
(7) Using Hartzell Special Tool No. CST-2987 (or CST-2834 with mod kit CST-2834-1), compress
the beta system and pull the beta control unit forward to permit access to the propeller
mounting bolts.
(8) Support propeller with a hoist. Remove safetywire and eight propeller mounting bolts and washers.
(9) Carefully remove propeller from the aircraft.
Torquing Propeller Mounting Bolts

Figure 3
7C11 61-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Decompress the beta system and

remove the special tool.
(11) Remove and discard the propeller
mounting O-ring.
B. Installation.
(1) Ensure master switch is OFF.
(2) Clean propeller and engine flanges.
(3) Lubricate and install a new propeller
mounting O-ring.
(4) Using Hartzell Special Tool No. CST-2987
(or CST-2834 with mod kit CST-2834-1),
compress the beta system and pull the
beta control unit forward to permit access
to the propeller mounting bolts. Carbon Block Clearance
Figure 4
(5) Carefully place propeller into position on
engine flange and secure with bolts and
washers (8 ea.).
(6) Torque propeller mounting bolts as shown in Figure 3. Remove hoist and safetywire bolts.
(7) Decompress the beta system and remove the special tool.
(8) Install and connect beta linkage (i.e. - reversing lever) and carbon block on propeller governor
and into beta control unit (i.e. - beta ring). Safety beta linkage.
(9) Check carbon block clearance per Figure 4. On a new installation it may be necessary to dress the
sides of the block to obtain minimum clearance required.
(10) Install propeller heat brush block assembly. (See Figure 1 and Brush Module Replacement,
both in 30-60-00.)
(11) Check slip ring run out with dial indicator per Slip Ring Assembly - Alignment, 30-60-00.
(12) Check propeller blade track per Blade Track, below.
(13) Grease propeller hub.
(14) Install spinner per Spinner - Installation, above.
(15) Install cowlings. (See 71-10-00.)
C. Blade Track
Blade track is the ability of one blade tip to follow the other, while rotating, in almost the same plane.
Excessive difference in blade track - more than 0.0625 inch - may be an indication of bent blades or
improper propeller installation. Check the blade track as follows:
(1) With the engine shut down and blades vertical, secure a smooth board to the airplane just
under the tip of the lower blade. Move the tip fore and aft through its full blade-shake travel,
making small marks with a pencil at each position. Then center the tip between these marks
and scribe a line on the board for the full width of the tip.
(2) Carefully rotate the propeller by hand to bring the opposite blade down. Center the tip and
scribe a pencil line as before and check that the lines are not separated more than 0.0625
inch.
(3) Propellers having excess blade track should be removed and inspected for bent blades, or for
parts of sheared O-rings, or foreign particles, which have lodged between the hub and
crankshaft mounting faces. Bent blades will require repair and overhaul of assembly.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 61-10-00 7C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Typical Nicks and Removal Method for All-Metal Blades

Figure 5
D. Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair

(1) Check for oil and grease leaks.
(2) Clean the spinner, propeller hub interior, exterior, and blades with a non-corrosive solvent.
(3) Inspect the hub parts for cracks.
(4) Steel hub parts should not be permitted to rust. Use aluminum paint to touch up if necessary,
or replate during overhaul.
(5) Check all visible parts for wear and safety.
(6) Check the blades to determine whether they turn freely on the hub pivot tube. This can be
done by rocking the blades back and forth through the slight freedom allowed by the pitch
change mechanism. If they appear tight and are properly lubricated, remove the pitch change
mechanism so that each blade can be checked individually. If the blades are tight, the propeller
should be disassembled.
3. Propeller Blade Inspection and Repair
All-Metal Blades
(1) Inspect the blades for damage or cracks. Nicks in the leading edges of the blades should be
filed out and all edges rounded, to prevent formation of cracks. Use fine emery cloth for
finishing.
(2) Refer to Figure 2 for all-metal propeller blade care.
7C13 61-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 61-10-00 7C14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROLLING
1. Propeller Governor
A. Removal
The propeller governor is mounted on the upper portion of the propeller gearbox. Remove the
governor as follows:
(1) Remove the upper forward cowling to gain access to the governor.
(3) Disconnect propeller speed control rod at the governor control lever.
(4) Disconnect topping governor (Nf) link from governor reset arm.
(5) Disconnect propeller beta linkage (i.e. - reversing lever) from beta control valve clevis and pull
forward to clear clevis.
(6) Disconnect pneumatic (Py) line from left rear of governor.
(7) Remove the governor mounting nuts and washers and withdraw the governor from the
mounting pad. Cover the mounting pad to prevent foreign material from entering the engine.
B. Installation
(1) Clean the mounting pad and the governor drive shaft thoroughly.
(2) Install the mounting pad gasket with raised side up.
(3) Install governor over mounting studs. Rotate propeller shaft slightly to engage governor drive
splines.
(4) Making sure governor and gasket are mounted flush, secure with nuts and washers. Torque as
shown in Figure 1.
(5) Connect beta control valve clevis to propeller beta linkage (i.e. - reversing lever).
(6) Connect topping governor (Nf) link to governor reset arm.
(7) Connect propeller speed control rod to the governor control lever.
(8) Connect pneumatic (Py) line to left rear of governor. Torque coupling nut 90 to 100 in. lbs. and
safety.
(10) Check system rigging per Rigging and Adjustment, below.
(11) Install cowling and check engine operation.
7C15 61-20-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VIEW A
Propeller Governor
Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 61-20-00 7C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Rigging and Adjustment

WARNING: STABILIZED GROUND OPERATION BELOW 1200 RPM (NP) CAN GENERATE HIGH
PROPELLER STRESSES AND RESULT IN FATIGUE DAMAGE TO THE
PROPELLER. THIS DAMAGE CAN LEAD TO A REDUCED PROPELLER FATIGUE
LIFE, PROPELLER FAILURE, AND LOSS OF CONTROL OF THE AIRCRAFT.
CONTACT THE PROPELLER MANUFACTURER FOR CORRECTIVE ACTIONS IF A
PROPELLER RESTRICTION OR LIMITATION IS VIOLATED.
The propeller speed control rod is designed to act as a propeller control lever set at full fine pitch
(i.e. - maximum). Accordingly, adjust it to hold the governor propeller speed control arm full against
its stop.
(1) With engine static, disconnect pneumatic (Py) line from left rear of governor. Blank off nipple
with suitable cap.
(2) Perform pre-start check.
(3) Start engine and allow it to warm up in idle setting until normal operating oil temperature is
reached. (60°C (140°F) minimum.)
(4) Advance power control lever to obtain 80% Ng. Perform two feathering cycles to purge air from
system. To reduce feathering time, turn feathering adjuster (Figure 2) counterclockwise.
NOTE: Two complete turns (counterclockwise from the nominal setting) is the maximum
permitted adjuster range.
(5) Advance power control lever to allow constant propeller speed. Temporarily mark position of
lever on quadrant and record Ng.
(6) Adjust governor maximum speed adjuster (Figure 2) as necessary to obtain 2000 RPM
propellor speed. Turn screw counterclockwise to increase speed and clockwise to decrease
speed.
(7) Record Ng, torque, and fuel flow.
(8) Shutdown engine and reconnect pneumatic (Py) line to left rear of governor. Torque coupling
nut 90 to 100 in. lbs and safety. Restart engine.
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST PNEUMATIC MAXIMUM ADJUSTMENT (FIGURE 2).
(9) Advance power lever to position previously marked. Compare Ng with previously recorded
figure. Maximum permissible Ng drop is 100 RPM. If previous Ng is exceeded, check topping
governor (i.e. - air bleed) linkage is contacting the maximum stop, adjust link rod as necessary.
(10) Repeat step (9).
(11) Shutdown engine, disconnect topping governor link rod (Figure 2) at air bleed link. Secure link
to minimum stop.
(12) Restart engine. Advance power control lever to maximum stop and record Np. Check that Np is
86% ± 1% of maximum speed set in step (6). Adjust pneumatic minimum eccentric adjuster
(Figure 2), in increments, to meet this requirement.
(13) Shutdown engine and reconnect air bleed link to topping governor link rod.
(14) Restart engine and check reverse power setting. Reverse propeller Np should not exceed
1900 ± 10 RPM.
7C17 61-20-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Propeller Governor Adjustment

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 61-20-00 7C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Overspeed Governor
A. Removal
(1) Remove upper forward and lower cowlings.
(2) Disconnect electrical leads from overspeed governor.
(3) Remove nuts and washers securing overspeed governor to propeller gearbox. Withdraw
assembly from mounting studs and discard mounting gasket.
B. Installation
(1) Install new mounting gasket over studs.
(2) Install overspeed governor on mounting pad. Ensure drive shaft is properly engaged, secure
with washers and self-locking nuts.
(3) Connect electrical leads to overspeed governor.
(4) Check overspeed governor operation per Operational Check, below.
(5) Reinstall cowlings.
C. Operational Check (PIR-PPS60187, Rev. C.)
(1) Start engine and allow engine instruments to stabilize.

(2) Set power levers for 1900 rpm propeller speed.
(3) Push Overspeed Governor Test switch (in overhead switch panel) and observe drop in
propeller rpm. The drop must be approximately 20 to 50 rpm.
(4) Release switch and prop rpm must increase to original rpm.
7C19 61-20-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 61-20-00 7C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
70
STANDARD
PRACTICES - ENGINE
7D1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 70
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
70-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 70 - STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 70-00-00 1 7D7

Basic Procedures 1 7D7
Additional Information 2 7D8

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Basic Procedures
Use the following procedures whenever applicable:
A. To facilitate and ensure proper installation, tag and/or mark all parts and hardware as to their
location before they are removed or disassembled.
B. When removing any tubes or engine parts, look for indications of scoring, burning or other
undesirable conditions. Tag any unserviceable parts or units for investigation and possible repair.
CAUTION: DUST CAPS USED TO PROTECT OPEN LINES SHOULD ALWAYS BE INSTALLED
OVER THE TUBE ENDS AND NOT IN THE TUBE ENDS. FLOW THROUGH THE
LINES MAY BE BLOCKED OFF IF LINES ARE INADVERTENTLY INSTALLED WITH
THE DUST CAPS IN THE TUBE ENDS.
C. Take extreme care to prevent foreign matter (lockwire, nuts, washers, dirt, etc.) from entering the
engine whether it is on or off the aircraft. Make use of protective caps, plugs, and covers to ensure
openings are not exposed.
D. If anything is dropped into the engine, work should be stopped immediately and the item removed
even if considerable time and labor is required.
E. Ensure all parts are thoroughly clean before assembling, especially during engine build-up.
F. Never reuse any lockwire, lock washers, tablocks, tab washers, or cotter pins.
G. All lockwire and cotter pins must fit snugly in holes drilled in specific hardware. On castellated nuts,
the cotter pin head must fit into a recess of the nut with the other end bent such that one leg is back
over the stud and the other is down flat against the nut. Use only corrosion resistant steel for cotter
pins or lockwire. Safety wire bushing plugs to the assembly boss or case - do not safety wire
bushing plugs to the bushing.
H. Replace gaskets, packings, or rubber parts with parts at reassembly. Use the same type or
composition as that of the part that was removed.
I. Make sure replacement nonmetallic parts show no sign of storage deterioration.
J. Protect critical areas of engine parts (such as compressor and turbine disks) from scratches and
nicks by tools. Tool surfaces contacting these areas must be covered with a protective material.
CAUTION: BEFORE USING TOOLS ON THE ENGINE, ENSURE THAT SUFFICIENT
PROTECTIVE MATERIAL IS PRESENT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO ENGINE PARTS.
K. Use only a mallet of plastic or rawhide when installation of a part requires such force.
CAUTION: ENSURE THAT ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUNDS ARE APPLIED IN THIN EVEN COATS
AND THAT EXCESS COMPOUND IS COMPLETELY REMOVED TO AVOID
CONTAMINATION OF ADJACENT PARTS.
L. Loose fitting spline drives external to the engine which have no means of lubrication should be
lubricated with an anti-seize lubricant such as molybdenum disulfide.
M. Do not leave adhesive tape or tape residue on engine parts. If adhesive tape has been applied to
any part, the tape must be removed and any adhesive residue completely removed with petroleum
solvent before being subjected to high temperature during engine run. Tape/adhesive residue can
cause surface attack and/or reduction in tensile ductility as temperature increases.
N. Remove any corrosion-inhibiting compounds from all parts before reassembly. Ensure all traces of
such compounds and any accumulated foreign material have been thoroughly removed.
7D7 70-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Additional Information
Engine standard practices presented herein are general in nature. Additional, more detailed, information
should be reviewed in Chapter 70 of Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas
Turbine Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A - Part No. 3021442.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 70-00-00 7D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
71
POWER PLANT
7D9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71
CHAPTER CHAPTER
71-List of 1 Apr 15/07 71-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
71-70-00 1 Apr 15/07
71-00-00 1 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
71-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
71-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
71-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71 - POWER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 71-00-00 1 7D15

Engine 8 7D22
Removal 8 7D22
Buildup 9 7D23
Installation 9 7D23
Depreservation 10 7D24
Engine Wet Motoring Run 10 7D24
Engine Ground Test and Safety Precautions 11 7E1
COWLING 71-10-00 1 7E5

Engine Cowling 1 7E5
Removal 1 7E5
Forward Upper 1 7E5
Lower 1 7E5
Rear Upper 1 7E5
Installation 4 7E8
Rear Upper 4 7E8
Lower 4 7E8
Forward Upper 4 7E8
Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair 4 7E8
MOUNTS 71-20-00 1 7E9

100 Hour Engine Mount Special Inspection 1 7E9
Engine Shock Mount Replacement 5 7E13
Engine Mount - Installation 7 7E15
Engine Mount Corrosion Inspection, Immersion in Water 7 7E15
FIRE SEALS 71-30-00 1 7E19

Fire Seals 1 7E19
100 Hour Firewall Inspection 2 7E20
1000 Hour Firewall Special Inspection 4 7E22
AIR INTAKES 71-60-00 1 7E23

Mass Flow Control and Accessory Cooling Intake 1 7E23
Drain Hose Routing Inspection 1 7E23
DRAINS 71-70-00 1 7F3

EPA Drain Tank 2 7F4
Fuel Purge System 3 7F5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL

PUBLICATIONS.)
This chapter supplements Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas Turbine
Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A - Part No. (P/N) 3021442 and consists of removal and
installation of external components and engine accessories. Repairs beyond this level should be
accomplished by an approved Pratt & Whitney Canada overhaul facility.
In the interest of maintaining efficient engine performance, an Engine Condition Trend Monitoring
System has been established by Pratt & Whitney Canada. This is not a mandatory procedure, but is
highly recommended by Pratt & Whitney Canada and Piper. Introduction of the monitoring system when
engines are new or newly overhauled enables the establishment of a performance baseline before any
deterioration of components takes place within the engine. Engine condition can then be observed
without actual teardown of components. The complete procedure can be found in the Engine Condition
Trend Monitoring Analytical Guide (EAG) Manual P/N 3043607, latest revision, available from Pratt &
Whitney Canada.
The PA-46-500TP is powered by a lightweight, reverse-flow free turbine, Pratt & Whitney Canada PT6A-42A
gas turbine engine rated at 500 shaft horsepower at 2000 propeller RPM for takeoff and flat-rated at 400
SHP at 2000 propeller RPM for maximum continous power. The PT6A-42A uses two independent
turbine sections: one drives the compressor in the gas generator section and the second drives the
propeller shaft through a reduction gearbox. Accessories include a starter/generator and a belt driven
alternator and air conditioning compressor.
Engine intake air is provided through dual, symmetric air inlets located on the forward portion of the
cowling at the four and eight o'clock positions. The inlets are of fixed geometry such that no moving ice
vanes or doors are utilized. The inlets are designed such that the dynamics of icing conditions do not
allow the inlet to ice closed. Both inlets supply air to an inertial separator, which in turn supplies a
common engine inlet plenum and intake screen.
The inertial separator functions by preventing foreign objects from making an abrupt turn into the plenum
and instead exit through the bypass outlet. As air enters through the intake screen, it is ducted into a
three-stage axial and single-stage centrifugal compressor driven by a single-stage reaction turbine. A
dual turbine, counter-rotating with the first, drives the propeller through a two-stage reduction gear box.
Exhaust is provided through dual exhaust ports located on either side of the engine just behind the
propeller.
A single annular combustion chamber, containing 14 removable fuel nozzles and two igniter plugs,
comprises the combustion system. Only seven of the fuel nozzles are used for starting; the remaining
nozzles activate as the engine accelerates. A hydropneumatic fuel control unit schedules fuel flow to
maintain the power set by the gas generator power lever.
The ignition system consists of one exciter box, two ignition leads and two spark igniters. Both igniters
are engaged simultaneously. DC power is delivered to the exciter box from the essential bus through an
ignition mode selector switch in the engine control switch panel and a torque pressure switch. While in
the Automatic ignition mode, the ignition system will activate when the torque is less than or equal to
approximately 275 ft. lbs., and deactivate when the torque is greater than or equal to approximately 375
ft. lbs. Continuous ignition, at any torque setting, is provided in the Manual ignition mode.
7D15 71-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
In serial numbers 4697001 thru 4697173, residual fuel remaining in the lines at shutdown drains into an
EPA-compliant collection tank. The EPA tank in turn is drained through an external quick-drain under the
engine compartment. See 71-70-00, Figure 2.
In serial numbers 4697174 and up, residual fuel remaining in the lines at shutdown is blown into the
combustion chamber and consumed. See Fuel Purge System, 71-70-00.
The engine incorporates an oil lubrication system with a 12 quart total capacity including propeller,
integral engine oil system, and oil cooler. The oil tank is an integral part of the compressor inlet case in
front of the accessory gearbox and contains a filler neck with calibrated dipstick. The filler neck
incorporates a ball check valve to ensure oil does not migrate out of the filler neck in the event the
dipstick is not properly secured. In addition, an oil level sight glass is provided to indicate the oil level in
the gearbox without having to remove the dipstick. Adequate oil level for engine operation is indicated by
an oil level within the green area of the sight glass.
Engine instruments, located on the center panel, are displayed on the two EDU's (engine display unit).
The standard display on the primary, pilot side, EDU displays torque, ITT (interstage turbine
temperature), propeller (Np) RPM, gas generator (Ng) RPM, and fuel flow (during engine start). The
standard display on the secondary, copilot side EDU displays vacuum level, fuel flow, oil temperature, oil
pressure, outside air temperature, estimated time enroute, fuel at destination, and fuel quantity.
Fire detection is provided by a heat sensitive fire cable, which passes a current at approximately 540° F.
This current alerts the fire detection computer, which then actuates the ENGINE FIRE warning light on
the annunciator display system. When switched to test mode, an electrical current is passed to the fire
detection computer, which should sense the current and illuminate the ENGINE FIRE warning light in the
annunciator panel.
The engine is completely enclosed by cowlings consisting of two upper and one lower section. The rear
upper cowling contains an oil filler door, a cooling inlet for the starter generator and alternator, and left
and right gull-wing access doors. The lower cowling incorporates the engine air inlets, the oil cooler air
inlet, and the forward portion of the inertial separators.
2. Troubleshooting
Troubles concerning the power plant are listed in Chart 1 along with their probable causes and
suggested remedies. Before attempting to locate the difficulty, consult all available sources for any
pertinent information which might assist in diagnosing the trouble. Perform the Minimum Checks
Required Before Troubleshooting as listed in the Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual No. P/N
3021442, Chapter 71.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING ENGINE

Engine fails to start. No fuel supply to engine. Check for clean fuel supply
at firewall shutoff valve.
Air in fuel system. Perform motoring run.
Open ignition circuit. Check wiring and
connections.
Defective engine driven Check for flow from pump
fuel pump. while motoring engine.
If no flow, replace pump.
Defective fuel control Check for flow from FCU
unit. outlet tube to starting
flow control while
motoring engine. If no
flow, remove FCU, check
bypass valve by applying
5 psi max. to bypass
return port and check for
air leakage from FCU inlet.
If leakage is evidenced,
replace fuel control unit
and fuel pump. If no
leakage, replace only
FCU.
Restricted fuel Clean and check nozzles.
nozzles. (Refer to P&WC Engine
Maintenance Manual.)
Engine does not idle Idle speed setting incorrect. Adjust idle speed and
properly. minimum flow as required.
Leak or restriction in Check all pneumatic tubes
FCU pneumatic system. and connections for
leakage.
Engine does not Leak or restriction in Check all connections for
accelerate properly. fuel control pneumatic leakage. Check for dirt in
system. P3 metering orifice.
(Refer to P&WC Engine
P3 filter plugged. Maintenance Manual
for cleaning instructions.)
Defective fuel control unit. Replace fuel control unit.
Engine does not Power control linkage Adjust linkage.
decelerate. adjusted incorrectly.
Defective fuel control Replace fuel control unit.
unit.
7D17 71-00-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine does not Faulty engine instrumenation. Check instrument system.

develop full power. Replace or recalibrate
as necessary.
If torquemeter system
defect is established,
return power section to
overhaul facility for repair.
Control linkage adjusted Check adjustment.
incorrectly.
Propeller governor pneumatic Adjust.
section adjusted incorrectly.
Leak or restriction in fuel Check all tubes for
control pneumatic system. restrictions and
connections for leakage.
Engine power settings not Check adjustment settings.
adjusted correctly.
Defective fuel control unit. Replace fuel control unit.
Restricted fuel nozzles. Clean and check nozzles.
(Refer to P&WC Engine
Excessive vibration. Propeller out of balance. Replace propeller.
Compressor or compressor Return disc to an overhaul
turbine disc out of balance. facility. (Refer to P&WC
Engine Maint. Manual.)
Low oil pressure. Oil pressure indicating Check system and repair
system defective. as necessary.
Insufficient oil. Fill oil tank as required.
Excessive hot air leakage Replace engine.
through faulty heat shielding.
High oil temperatures. Check cooling system.
High oil temperature. Insufficient oil supply. Refill oil tank as required.
Faulty instrumentation. Check instrumentation,
repair or replace as
required.
Cooling system defective. Check system and clean
cooler if required.
Excessive hot air leakage Replace engine.
through faulty heat shielding.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Excessive oil consumption. Leakage or restriction in Visually inspect all tubes

pressure or scavenge and connections.
oil tubes. Repair as required.
Oil level too high. Maintain correct oil level.
Defective Labyrinth seals. Check inlet and exhaust
areas for collections of oil.
If evident, replace engine.
Defective oil to fuel heater Pressure check heater.
(internal leakage). (Refer to P&WC Engine
Engine drops below idle P-Y line leaking. Check P-Y line connections
(min. flow) in flight. for leakage.
Leak or restriction in P-3 line. Check P-3 line for
restriction. Replace if
required.
Ice accumulation in P-3 line. Check wiring and
connections of electrically
heated P-3 line. Repair or
replace as required.
7D19 71-00-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALTERNATOR
IGN UNIT
EMERGENCY PRESSURE VALVE
ENGINE HARNESS
MASS FLOW PROBE

FIRE DETECT
OVERSPEED
GOVERNOR CHIP DETECTOR
DUCT TEMP SENSOR

FEATHER CHIP DETECTOR
SOLENOID A/C COMPRESSOR
LOCAL GND
VACUUM SWITCH
FUEL
FILTER
LEFT HAND SIDE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LOCATOR
Engine Installation
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102223 AJ
PY HEATER
FLOW SENSOR
OIL PRESS SW OIL PRESS XDCR
FEATHER TORQUE SW
DUCT TEMP SENSOR PLENUM
STARTER GENERATOR BLEED AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE GEAR WARNING SW
IGN TORQUE SWITCH
PROP TACH GEN

TORQUE XDCR
CHIP DETECTOR
ENGINE HARN
ENGINE HARN BLEED AIR TEMP CONTROL VALVE
FUEL PRESS SW NOSE GEAR UP SWITCH
TURBINE % RPM CHIP DETECTOR
OIL TEMP SENSOR
FUEL FLOW XDCR
PROP HEAT RELAY (REF)
RIGHT HAND SIDE ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LOCATOR
Engine Installation
7D21 71-00-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Engine
A. Removal
WARNING: PLACE A TAIL STAND UNDER THE TAIL OF THE AIRPLANE BEFORE REMOVING
THE ENGINE.
NOTE: All hoses, lines, and wires should be tagged (identified) to facilitate installation. Open fuel,
oil, and vacuum lines and fittings should be covered to prevent contamination.
(1) Place a tail stand under the aircraft.
(2) Turn off all cockpit switches and disconnect battery.
(3) Pull the fuel shutoff (i.e. - valve closed).
(4) Remove the engine cowling per 71-10-00.
(5) Drain the engine oil. (Refer to P&WC Maintenance Manual, P/N 3021442, 72-00-00, Engine,
Turboprop - Servicing.)
(6) Remove the propeller. (Refer to 61-10-00.)
(7) Disconnect all fluid hoses, bleed air lines, A/C lines, clamps, and electrical leads attached to
the engine, engine-mounted accessories, and/or engine mount from the firewall (cap all fluid
lines).
(8) Disconnect the electrical leads from the rear engine lifting bracket.
(9) Disconnect and cap oil cooler lines at the oil cooler.
NOTE: The oil cooler system remains attached to the bulkhead.
(10) Disconnect all drain lines attached to the engine and engine-mounted accessories.
CAUTION: DO NOT BEND THE POWER CONTROL CABLE IN THE DIRECTION
OFFERING THE GREATEST RESISTANCE, AS DAMAGE WILL BE DONE TO
THE CABLE.
(11) Disconnect the power control cable from the fuel control unit actuating lever and remove the
cable from the support bracket. Disconnect and remove the support bracket.
(12) Disconnect the condition cable from the condition lever arm and remove the cable clamp from
the cable support bracket. Disconnect and remove the support bracket.
(13) Disconnect the manual override cable from the manual metering actuating lever arm and
remove the cable clamp from the cable support bracket. Disconnect and remove the support
bracket.
(14) Attach lifting sling to the engine suspension points and using a one-half ton hoist, support the
engine to allow the engine mount bolts to be removed at the firewall.
(15) Swing the engine and mount free from the firewall; check to be certain no attachments remain
to obstruct its removal.
(16) Move the engine away from the aircraft and place on a suitable stand.
(17) Remove the accessories and equipment to be installed on the new engine (or this one when
overhaul is complete) and tag or identify all items removed to facilitate installation.
NOTE: If the engine removed is expected to be inactive for a period of time, refer to the Pratt
& Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual, P/N 3021442 for the necessary preservation
schedule.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Buildup
CAUTION: REFER TO PRATT & WHITNEY CANADA MAINTENANCE MANUAL, P/N 3021442
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE A NEW ENGINE FROM THE SHIPPING
CONTAINER.
Reinstall (or transfer) the necessary accessories and equipment when the engine overhaul is
complete (or from the engine removed for overhaul to a new engine). Replace safety wire,
lockwashers, gaskets, and rubber hoses when needed to complete the engine assembly ready for
installation in the aircraft.
C. Installation
Before installing the engine, be certain all engine-mounted accessories are properly installed,
torqued and safetied. This includes the engine mount and plenum.
NOTE: Prior to installing the engine, install all items that were removed from the engine after the
engine was removed from the aircraft. Remove any protective caps and identification tags
as each item is installed.
NOTE: All engine nuts, bolts, and screw torque
settings will be obtained using a thread CHART 2
lubricant (i.e. - engine oil or equivilent). ENGINE TORQUE LIMITS
Torque limits are defined in Chart 2.
Thread Torque Limits (IN. LBS.)
(1) Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the Size Min. Max.
engine and swing the engine into alignment
with its attaching points. .190-32 20 30
(2) With the engine suspended from a one-half .250-28 65 85

ton hoist, carefully swing the engine .3125-24 125 170
assembly into position. Use caution not to
damage any engine components, plumbing .375-24 225 300
or wiring. .437-20 450 500
(3) Install the engine mount to the attachment
points at the firewall and torque the mounting bolts to the specifications shown in Chart 2.
NOTE: Apply an anti-seize compound to all male tubing threads; be certain the compound
does not enter the system. Prior to installing compressor bleed air line fitting to
engine, make sure the correct length bolts are used, and coat the bolt threads which
secure the fitting to the compressor case with Fel-Pro C5-a Hi-Temp. thread
compound. Torque the bolts 65 to 85 inch-pounds and safety with MS20995-C41
safety wire.
(4) Route and reconnect all previously disconnected fluid hoses, bleed air lines, A/C lines, and
electrical leads from the firewall to the respective connections on the engine, engine-mounted
accessories, and/or engine mount and secure with the appropriate clamps.
(5) Install the manual overide cable support bracket. Connect the manual override cable to the
manual metering actuating lever arm and attach the cable clamp to the cable support bracket.
(6) Install the condition cable support bracket. Connect the condition cable to the condition lever
arm and attach the cable clamp to the cable support bracket.
(7) Install the power control cable support bracket and connect the power control cable to the fuel
control unit power lever.
(8) Install the propeller per 61-10-00.
(9) Adjust the engine and propeller controls. (See 76-10-00 and 61-20-00.)
(10) Refill the oil tank with the specified type and amount of oil. (See Filling Oil Sump, 12-10-00.)
7D23 71-00-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Connect the battery.

(12) Reinstall the cowling per 71-10-00.
(13) Perform the post installation procedures described in Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance
Manual, P/N 3021442, 71-00-00, Table 501.
(14) Check for fuel and oil leaks and security of the engine components.
D. Depreservation (See also Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual, P/N 3021442, 72-00-00,
Engine, Turboprop - Servicing - Depreservation.)
After completion of a new engine installation and before the first engine start, the following
procedure should be followed to clear the engine:
(1) Fill the engine oil tank with the recommended oil. (See Filling Oil Sump, 12-10-00.)
NOTE: When filling the oil tank, it is recommended that the oil be strained before entering the
engine to eliminate the possibility of foreign material in the engine.
(2) Motor the engine to circulate the oil.
(3) Recheck the oil level and refill as necessary. Normal oil level is one U.S. quart below the
maximum level mark.
(4) Disconnect fuel line at flow divider inlet to permit drainage into a suitable container.
(5) With ignition switch OFF, set power control to MAX and condition lever to RUN.
(6) Select MANUAL on the start mode switch.
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED STARTER TIME LIMITS (30 SECONDS ON, 1 MINUTE OFF,
30 SECONDS ON, 1 MINUTE OFF, 30 SECONDS ON, 30 MINUTES OFF).
(7) With the starter switch, motor engine until clean fuel flows from line. Move power control lever
to IDLE and back to MAX and condition lever to CUT-OFF and back to RUN during the
motoring run.
NOTE: Check for proper operation of oil pressure, fuel flow, fuel pressure, and check that the
Ng percent indicator moves in the proper direction during initial motoring run.
(8) Reconnect fuel inlet line to flow divider.
(9) Return power control lever to IDLE and condition lever to CUT-OFF.
4. Engine Wet Motoring Run
A wet motoring run is used to check for fuel system leaks after component replacement.
CAUTION: AFTER A WET MOTORING RUN, A DRY MOTORING RUN (SEE PILOT’S OPERATING
HANDBOOK, PARA. 4.15) MUST BE PERFORMED BEFORE STARTING ENGINE.
(1) Set the condition lever at CUT-OFF.
(2) Set the power control lever at IDLE.
(3) Set ignition switch OFF.
(4) Master switch ON (to supply electrical power to starter).
(5) Fuel shutoff pushed in (i.e. - valve open).
(6) Fuel pump switch ON (to provide lubrication for engine driven fuel pumping elements).
(7) Select MANUAL on the start mode switch.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED STARTER TIME LIMITS (30 SECONDS ON, 1 MINUTE OFF,
30 SECONDS ON, 1 MINUTE OFF, 30 SECONDS ON, 30 MINUTES OFF).
(8) Operate starter. Observe stabilized Ng and positive oil pressure and then set condition lever to
RUN for 10 seconds.
(9) Set condition lever back to CUT-OFF. Release engine starter switch.
(10) During rundown, check that flow divider, dump valve, and gas generator case drain valves are
functioning.
(11) Fuel pump switch OFF, after Ng has stopped.
(12) Master switch OFF.
(13) Check oil lines, fuel lines, and connections for leaks. No leaks allowed, except at normal
seepage drains.
5. Engine Ground Test and Safety Precautions
A. Prior to ground testing the engine, the following safety precautions should be adhered to:
(1) Position the airplane into the wind.
(2) Set the parking brake and chock the wheels.
NOTE: The importance of placing chocks in front of the wheels cannot be overstressed. It is
possible for the airplane to move with just the brakes applied when the power being applied
exceeds 600 foot-pounds of torque.
(3) Be certain a fire extinguisher is readily available.
(4) Be certain the area around the airplane is free of loose objects.
(5) Check that the engine intakes and exhausts are free from foreign objects.
(6) Ascertain that the danger areas around the airplane are clear of personnel.
B. Ascertain the engine indicating systems are properly calibrated.
C. Install and secure the cowling, if not already installed.
CAUTION: BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO START THE ENGINE, PERSONNEL SHOULD BE
CHECKED OUT BY A QUALIFIED PILOT OR OTHER RESPONSIBLE PERSON ON
THE ENGINE STARTING AND SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES, AND ANY OTHER
SYSTEM FUNCTIONS WHICH MAY BE REQUIRED TO PROPERLY AND SAFELY
OPERATE THE POWER PLANT. THE USE OF THE PILOT’S OPERATING
HANDBOOK FOR THIS INFORMATION IS MANDATORY.
WARNING: STABILIZED GROUND OPERATION BELOW 1200 RPM (NP) CAN GENERATE HIGH
PROPELLER STRESSES AND RESULT IN FATIGUE DAMAGE TO THE
PROPELLER. THIS DAMAGE CAN LEAD TO A REDUCED PROOELLER FATIGUE
LIFE, PROPELLER FAILURE, AND LOSS OF CONTROL OF THE AIRCRAFT.
CONTACT THE PROPELLER MANUFACTURER FOR CORRECTIVE ACTIONS IF A
PROPELLER RESTRICTION OR LIMITATION IS VIOLATED.
D. Start the engine and idle three to five minutes. Cycle the propeller while running. Check the inter-
turbine temperature and torque indicators for proper operation.
7E1 71-00-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Shutdown the engine and check the oil level. Refill if necessary to proper level (one (1) quart below
the full mark).
F. Restart the engine.
G. Check the overspeed governor operation as follows:
(2) Set power levers for 1900 rpm propeller speed.
propeller rpm. The drop must be approximately 30 to 40 rpm.
(4) Release switch and prop rpm must increase to original rpm.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7E3 71-00-00 PAGE 13

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 71-00-00 7E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COWLING
Engine Cowling (Refer to Figure 1)

The engine cowling consists of two upper and one lower sections. The one-piece forward upper cowling
extends from FS 73.00 to FS 24.63 The rear upper cowling consists of a hatchback containing an oil filler
door and the left and right gull-wing access doors. The rear upper cowling extends from the firewall (FS
94.25) to FS 73.00. The lower cowling incorporates the engine air inlets, the oil cooler air inlet, and the
forward portion of the inertial separators, and extends from FS 55.00 to FS 24.63.
A. Removal
(1) Forward Upper
(a) Remove the screws (5) that attach the forward upper cowling to the rear upper cowling
hatchback.
(b) Release the rotary latches (three (3) each side) that attach the forward upper cowling to
the fuselage and the lower cowling.
(c) Remove the upper cowling.
(2) Lower
NOTE: Support lower cowling before removing any attaching hardware.
(a) Remove the forward upper cowling, if not done already.
(b) Remove the camloc fasteners (seven (7) each side) that attach the lower cowling to the
fuselage
(c) Disconnect the bleed air precooler intake hose.
(d) Remove the lower cowling.
(3) Rear Upper (i.e. - hatchback)
(a) Remove the forward upper cowling, if not done already.
(b) Remove the camloc fasteners (5) that attach the hatchback to the brackets on the firewall.
(c) Open the gull-wing access doors.
(d) Disconnect the following hoses from the hatchback air inlet: alternator cooling,
starter-generator cooling, mass flow control valve ambient air, and drain.
(e) Remove the bolts, nuts, and washers (two (2) sets each side) that attach the hatchback
frame to the flanges on the motor mount.
(f) Remove the rear upper cowling.
7E5 71-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102410
Engine Cowling
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 71-10-00 7E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RIGHT GULL-WING
ACCESS DOOR OIL FILLER DOOR
LEFT GULL-WING
ACCESS DOOR
UPPER COWLING
LOWER COWLING
UPPER COWLING
ENGINE CENTERLINE
LOWER COWLING
Engine Cowling
7E7 71-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Rear Upper (i.e. - hatchback)
(a) Set the rear upper cowling in place (with the gull-wing access doors open) and secure the
hatchback frame to the flanges on the motor mount with two (2) bolts, nuts and washers
on each side.
(b) Secure the hatchback to the brackets on the firewall with camloc fasteners (5).
CAUTION: ENSURE AIR INLET DRAIN HOSE IS ROUTED AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1,
71-60-00.
(c) Connect the following hoses to the hatchback air inlet: alter nator cooling,
starter-generator cooling, mass flow control valve ambient air, and drain.
(2) Lower
(a) Place the lower cowling in position and connect the bleed air precooler intake hose.
(b) Secure the lower cowling to the fuselage with camloc fasteners (seven (7) each side).
(3) Forward Upper
(a) Set the forward upper cowling in place and secure it to the rear upper cowling hatchback
with camloc fasteners (5).
(b) Secure the forward upper cowling to the fuselage and lower cowling with rotary latches
(three (3) each side).
(1) Clean the cowling with a suitable solvent and then wipe dry with a clean cloth.
(2) Inspect the cowling for dents, cracks, loose rivets, damaged or missing fasteners, and
damaged areas.
(3) Repair all defects to prevent further damage.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 71-10-00 7E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOUNTS
1. 100 Hour Engine Mount Special Inspection

NOTE: Installation of a current production engine mount, P/N 102460-036, will relieve this repetitive
inspection requirement.
In S/N’s 4697001 through 4697240 and 4697242 through 4697244 with engine mount P/N 102460-002
installed, each 100 hours time-in-service:
A. Remove the nose gear hydraulic actuator and the nose gear assembly from the engine mount per
32-20-00. Clean the engine mount actuator attach feet area including tube welds as shown in
Figure 1, Sheet 1. Clean the inboard sides of the mount within two (2) inches of the nose gear
attach points as shown in Figure 1, Sheet 2.
B. Remove protective coating (paint or Dinitrol AV8) from the inspection areas.
C. Inspect the welded areas of the nose gear actuator attach feet (see Figure 1, Sheet 1) for cracks:
(1) First visually inspect the engine mount welds and the tubes as shown in Figure 1 then;
(2) Perform a 'liquid penetrant inspection' of the entire length of each weld on the attach feet. A
mirror will be required to inspect the upper surface of the attach feet and associated tubes for
cracks per the latest revision of AC 43.13-1.
D. If no cracks are found:
(1) The engine mount can continue in service until the next 100 hour inspection.
(2) Clean the inspection areas and apply Dinitrol AV8 (P/N 89500-800) to the areas where the
protective coating was previously removed.
(3) Reinstall the nose gear assembly and nose gear actuator per Nose Gear Assembly -
Installation, 32-20-00 and Nose Gear Actuator Assembly - Installation, 32-30-00.
(4) Make an appropriate logbook entry documenting this inspection.
E. If cracks are found on the engine mount:
(1) The entire engine mount assembly must be replaced with a current production engine mount,
P/N 102460-036, per Piper Kit No. 767-515 before further flight.
(2) See Engine - Installation, 71-00-00, and Engine Mount - Installation, below.
(3) Reinstall the nose gear assembly and nose gear actuator per Nose Gear Assembly -
Installation, 32-20-00 and Nose Gear Actuator Assembly - Installation, 32-30-00.
(4) Make an appropriate logbook entry documenting the new engine mount installation.
7E9 71-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACTUATOR
ATTACH FEET
TUBE “D”
TUBE “A”
TUBE “C”
TUBE “B”
100 Hour Engine Mount Special Inspection

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 71-20-00 7E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEFT SIDE LOOKING OUTBOARD

REMOVE PAINT FROM
THESE AREAS AND INSPECT
FOR CRACKS.
RIGHT SIDE LOOKING OUTBOARD
NOSE GEAR PIVOT POINTS
100 Hour Engine Mount Special Inspection

7E11 71-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 71-20-00 7E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Engine Shock Mount Replacement

The engine vibration isolators may be replaced with the engine installed as well as removed from the
airplane. Refer to Figure 2 for the arrangement of the vibration isolator assemblies. The procedure
described in this paragraph is with the engine installed.
A. Remove the engine cowling: forward upper, rear upper, and lower sections (see 71-10-00).
CAUTION: CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN NOT TO INTRODUCE ADVERSE STRESSES ON THE
CONTROL CABLES, ELECTRICAL CABLES, HOSES AND OTHER ITEMS
ATTACHED TO THE ENGINE, WHILE HOISTING THE ENGINE.
B. Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the engine lift points and relieve tension on the shock
mounts.
C. Remove all four (4) nuts, washers, and bolts that attach the shock mounts to the tubular engine
mount. (see A, Figure 1)
D. Remove the safety wire from the mounting pad bolts; remove the bolts (four (4) each pad) and
remove the vibration isolator assemblies from the engine. (see Figure 2)
E. Install the mount assembly in reverse order of removal. Torque the pad mounting special bolts to
225 inch-pounds and safety with MS20995-C41 safety wire.
F. Torque the tubular engine mount bolt to 450 inch-pounds.
WL
78.522
A
(C/L ENGINE)
B
B-B
WL 49.500
WL 47.240
BL
0.000
Engine Shock Mount Attach Points (View Aft)

Figure 2
7E13 71-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102400
AN7-27A BOLT
GASKET
32FE-720 NUT
VIEW C-C
NAS6206-3H BOLT
(4 PLCS)
WASHER
MS20995-C41
SAFETY WIRE
C C
ENGINE VIBRATION ISOLATION INSTL

(4 PLCS)
Engine Shock Mounts

Figure 3
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 71-20-00 7E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Engine Mount - Installation

Pay close attention to the nose gear actuator / engine mount connecting hardware to ensure the correct
locknut is used (i. e. - P/N 404-891, MS 20365-720C). Additionally, check for proper thread engagement
between the bolt and nut by ensuring at least one thread of the bolt protrudes through the nut per
AC 43.13-1, latest revision. If there are not sufficient threads exposed after the lock nut, replace the bolt
with a longer bolt, P/N 401-509 (AN7-15A). Torque to the standard torque value (91-10-00, Chart 6) for a
7/16-20 AN7 bolt/MS 20365 nut.
4. Engine Mount Corrosion Inspection, Immersion in Water
The following guidance is general in nature and should be applied or varied to fit the individual situation
based on water level during immersion, length of time immersed, length of time since exposure, etc.
Proceed as follows:
A. Inspection
(1) Level the aircraft in accordance with 8-20-00 in the maintenance manual.
(2) In the two lower tubes as indicated in Figure 3; drill a 3/16 inch hole in each tube, at the
approximate mid-point.
(3) Visually inspect the interior surface of each tube through the 3/16 inch hole for evidence of
internal corrosion.
(5) Should evidence of corrosion be detected in step (3), above, replace the engine mount. If no
corrosion is detected, proceed with corrosion prevention, paragraph B, below.
B. Corrosion Prevention
If no evidence of corrosion is detected in step (3), above, proceed as follows:
(1) Place a drip pan below the inspection holes in each engine mount tube.
(2) Insert a plastic tube thru each inspection hole and feed it up to the high point of the engine
mount tube.
(3) Using a syringe inserted into the end of the plastic tube, pump linseed oil into the upper end of
the engine mount tube while rotating the syringe / plastic tube assembly to assure maximum
coverage. Continue pumping until the lower end of the engine mount tube is filled with linseed
oil to the level of the inspection hole.
(4) Now, draw the plastic tube out of the upper end of the engine mount tube and reinsert it in the
opposite direction, feeding it to the lower end of the engine mount tube.
(5) Suck excess linseed oil out of the engine mount tube with the syringe / plastic tube assembly.
(6) When linseed oil can no longer be picked up by the syringe / plastic tube assembly, remove it
and allow the engine mount tube to drain into drip pans for approximately two hours.
(7) Purge excess oil from tubes by applying air pressure to each 3/16 inch inspection hole, one at
a time.
(8) Ensure that roughly the same amount of linseed oil that was pumped in is retrieved in the drip
pans.
(9) Apply a liberal coating of an approved fuel tank sealant (see Chart 3, 91-10-00) to each
inspection hole and seal the hole with an appropriate blind rivet. After installing the rivet, apply
a liberal coating of the approved fuel tank sealant over the head of the rivet.
7E15 71-20-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102460
FW
D
D
FW
DRILL HERE
Engine Mount Corrosion Inspection Points

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 71-20-00 7E16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 9
7E17 71-20-00 Apr 15/07

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 71-20-00 7E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIRE SEALS
1. Fire Seals (See Figure 1.)

The engine fire seals are bolted to the engine fire seal flanges forward and aft of the gas generator case
and engine compressor air intake. The fire seals are constructed in semi-circular sections and are
designed to form a fire seal between the engine and air intake plenum assembly.
Engine Fire Seal Installation

Figure 1
7E19 71-30-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. 100 Hour Firewall Inspection (See Figure 2.)

The 100 Hour Firewall Inspection is a general visual inspection for cracks, stress, and condition. This
inspection is accomplished from the rear and underside of the firewall through the use of inspection
mirrors and a borescope inserted via access plates. Access points are shown in Figure 2.
A. Through the right and left gull-wing engine access doors: Remove the ECS crossover tube, the
circular fire blanket insert and the access plate behind it (Figure 2, Sheet 2). Inspect the rear of the
firewall.
B. Remove the fuel filter access plate (see 12-10-00, Figure 2) and inspect the underside of the
firewall.
C. Remove the battery access panel and interior access plate (shown in Figure 2, Sheet 2) and
inspect the underside and rear of the firewall.
D. Aircraft with Piper Kit No. 767-326 installed can also remove the wing root covers and insert a
borescope to inspect the rear of the firewall (Figure 2, Sheet 1).
100 Hour Firewall Inspection - Access Points

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 71-30-00 7E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 Hour Firewall Inspection - Access Points

7E21 71-30-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. 1000 Hour Firewall Special Inspection

Each 1000 hours time-in-service:
A. Remove heat blankets and inspect forward and upper sides of firewall for cracks, stress, and
condition.
B. Repair or replace, as required.
C. Reinstall heat blankets
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 71-30-00 7E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR INTAKES
Mass Flow Control and Accessory Cooling Intake

Ambient air for the mass flow control valve is provided by an air inlet in the rear upper cowling
hatchback. In addition, this air inlet provides engine accessory cooling for the starter-generator and
alternator.
The open-top design of the air inlet demands proper drainage for correct operation. Accordingly, a drain
hose is attached on the right side.
CAUTION: THE AIR INLET DRAIN HOSE (A) MUST BE ROUTED AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1.
On several occasions, after the removal and reinstallation of the rear upper cowling hatchback and/or the
air inlet duct assembly itself, the drain hose (A) has been inadvertently re-routed as shown in Figure 2.
Additionally, the electrical connector (B), can also be reinstalled in the wrong location. The configuration
of the hose and the connector shown in Figure 2 could interfere with the fuel control arm (C) on the fuel
control unit, which could result in an inability to reduce engine power.
NOTE: Item callouts (i.e. - (A), (B), (C), etc.) are keyed to Figures 1 and 2.
Drain Hose Routing Inspection.
Each 100 hours and whenever the rear upper cowling hatchback, the air inlet duct assembly or
drain hose, or the engine overboard breather drain tube are removed, replaced, or reinstalled:
(1) Open Gull Wing door on right side on the engine compartment.
(2) Inspect air inlet drain hose routing. If the air inlet drain hose (A) is routed as shown in Figure 1,
the electrical connector (B) is installed as shown in Figure 1, and the area around the fuel
control arm (C) is clear, no further action is required - proceed to step (4).
(3) If air inlet drain hose (A) is improperly routed and/or the electrical connector (B) is improperly
installed (see Figure 2 for examples), re-route and resecure the air inlet drain hose (A) and/or
reinstall the electrical connector (B) in the configuration shown in Figure 1. Install new clamps
and hardware as required: (see Figure 1)
(a) For the drain hose add (D) two (2) clamps (one (1) P/N 554-906 and one (1) P/N 454-977)
with one (1) each screw MS35207-263, washer NAS1149F0332P and nut MS21042-3.
(b) For the electrical connector add (E) two (2) clamps (one (1) MS21919-WH8 and one (1)
MS21919-WH16) with one (1) each screw MS35206-245, washer NAS1149GFN816P
and nut MS21045-08.
(4) Close Gull Wing door on right side on the engine compartment.
7E23 71-60-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Air Inlet Drain Hose - Correct Routing

Figure 1
Air Inlet Drain Hose - Incorrect Routing

Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 71-60-00 7E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7F1 71-60-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 71-60-00 7F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DRAINS
Engine Drains Installation

Figure 1
7F3 71-70-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. EPA Drain Tank

In serial numbers 4697001 thru 4697173, residual fuel remaining in the lines at shutdown drains into an
EPA-compliant collection tank. The EPA tank in turn is drained through an external quick-drain under the
engine compartment. See 71-70-00, Figure 2.
CAUTION: EXCESS FUEL DRAINING FROM DRAIN MAST AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN IS
INDICATIVE OF EPA DRAIN VALVE STOPAGE OR TANK OVERFLOW.
Effectivity EPA Drain Installation

4697001 thru 4697173 Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 71-70-00 7F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Fuel Purge System

In serial numbers 4697174 and up, residual fuel remaining in the lines at shutdown is blown into the
combustion chamber and consumed.
The system consists of a bleed air purge tank, lines, filter and check valves. Engine pressure bleed air
accumulates in the purge tank and is released during shutdown, as the fuel pressure drops, forcing
residual fuel back into the burner. The fuel is then completely consumed. The upper check valve allows
bleed air into the purge tank until pressure in the tank reaches equilibrium with the bleed air system. The
lower check valve keeps fuel out of the purge tank when the fuel system is pressurized and as fuel
pressure drops during shutdown allows the air in the purge tank to force the residual fuel into the
combustion chamber. The air filter ensures that any particles found in the bleed air system cannot
contaminate the fuel system.
A. Removal. (See Figure 4.)
The purge tank, clamp, air filter, upper check valve, and inlet tube are removed together and
disassembled on the bench. The outlet hose and lower check valve/union assembly are removed
individually.
(1) Remove upper forward and lower cowlings as described in 71-10-00.
(2) Purge tank, clamp, upper check valve, air filter, and inlet tube:
(a) Disconnect the inlet tube from the bleed air tube.
(b) Disconnect the outlet hose from the purge tank.
(c) Remove clamp retaining screw and remove components.
(d) See Bench Disassembly, below.
P3 AIR
(SEE 21-20-00, FIGURE 1)
AIR FILTER
UPPER CHECK VALVE
FUEL PURGE TANK
LOWER CHECK VALVE
FLOW DIVIDER
Fuel Purge System Functional Schematic Effectivity

Figure 3 4697174 & up
7F5 71-70-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INLET TUBE
MS9387-04 O-RING
AIR FILTER
MS9387-04 O-RING
CHECK VALVE
CLIP
MS21919DG64 CLAMP
MS35207-264 SCREW
NAS 679A3W NUT
PURGE TANK
BLEED AIR TUBE
FWD
OUTLET HOSE
MS9387-04 O-RING
CHECK VALVE
MS9387-04 O-RING
LEFT AN815-4 UNION 102400 7.1 W+
Effectivity Fuel Purge System Installation

4697174 & up Figure 4
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 71-70-00 7F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Outlet hose - disconnect the fittings at each end and remove outlet hose and O-ring.
(4) Lower check valve/union assembly:
(a) Disconnect the fitting at the upper end, if not already disconnected, and unscrew and
remove the check valve/union assembly from the flow divider.
(b) Remove remaining O-ring(s).
B. Installation. (See Figure 4.)
The purge tank, clamp, upper check valve, air filter, and inlet tube are pre-assembled on the bench
and installed as a unit. The outlet hose and lower check valve/union assembly are installed
individually.
(1) Lower check valve/union assembly:
(a) Check arrow on check valve for proper flow direction.
NOTE: If union was disassembled from check valve, ensure it is (was) reassembled on
outlet side.
(b) Ensure O-rings (2) are positioned as shown in Figure 4.
(c) Screw union end of check valve/union assembly into flow divider and tighten.
(d) If outlet hose is already installed, connect lower outlet hose fitting to check valve and
tighten.
(2) Outlet hose:
(a) If purge tank is already installed, connect upper outlet hose fitting to outlet port of purge
tank and tighten.
(b) Ensure O-ring is positioned on the check valve as shown in Figure 4.
(c) Connect lower outlet hose fitting to check valve and tighten.
(3) Purge tank, clamp, upper check valve, air filter, and inlet tube:
(a) See Bench Assembly, below.
(b) Place components in position, with inlet tube aft, and secure clamp to clip with screw and
tighten.
(b) Connect the inlet tube to the bleed air tube and tighten.
(c) Connect the outlet hose to the outlet port of the purge tank and tighten.
(4) Install lower and upper forward cowlings as described in 71-10-00.
C. Bench Disassembly.
The purge tank, clamp, upper check valve, air filter, and inlet tube are removed together and
disassembled on the bench.
(1) Inlet tube - disconnect the tube from the air filter and remove.
NOTE: Mark the tube end that connects to the air filter to ensure proper reassembly.
(2) Air filter:
(a) Remove the inlet tube, see above.
(b) Unscrew the air filter from the check valve and remove air filter and O-rings.
(3) Upper check valve:
(a) Remove the inlet tube, see above.
(b) Remove the air filter, see above.
(c) Unscrew the check valve from the purge tank and remove.
7F7 71-70-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Bench Assembly.
The purge tank, clamp, upper check valve, air filter, and inlet tube are pre-assembled on the bench
and installed as a unit.
(1) Upper check valve:
(a) Check arrow on check valve for proper flow direction.
(b) Screw outlet end of check valve into inlet port on purge tank and tighten. See Figure 4.
(2) Air filter:
(a) Assemble the check valve to the purge tank, see above.
(b) Ensure O-rings (2) are positioned as shown in Figure 4.
(c) Check arrow on air filter for proper flow direction.
(d) Screw outlet end of air filter into inlet port of check valve and tighten.
(3) Inlet tube:
(a) Assemble the check valve to the purge tank, see above.
(b) Assemble the air filter to the check valve, see above.
(c) Connect the marked tube end to the air filter and tighten.
E. Inspection and Cleaning.
Each 400 hours or two (2) years, whichever comes first, clean and inspect the purge tank, check
valves, air filter, and flow divider/purge valve as described below. Replace O-rings.
(1) Remove components per Removal, above.
(2) Purge tank:
(a) Flush tank with Stoddard solvent and blow dry with shop air.
(b) Visually inspect for condition, damage, and evidence of leaks. Replace as required.
(3) Air filter:
(a) Visually inspect for rust and corrosion. Evidence of either is cause for replacement.
(b) Check arrow on air filter for flow direction.
(c) Backflush with Stoddard solvent and shop air. Blow dry with shop air.
(4) Check valves:
(a) Visually inspect for foreign material and corrosion. Evidence of corrosion is cause for
replacement.
(b) Check arrow on check valve for flow direction.
(c) Pressure flush check valve with methyl eythel ketone (MEK) solvent to remove carbon
particles or other residue.
(d) Allow solvent to drain and then blow dry with shop air.
(e) Leak test as follows:
1 Connect a filtered, regulated (40-100 psi), air source to the outlet end of the check
valve.
2 Hold check valve with inlet end up and fill with water.
3 Apply regulated air to outlet end of check valve and observe water in inlet end for
evidence of leakage (i.e. - bubbles). If leakage detected, repeat steps (a) thru (d),
above and then repeat leak test. If leak still detected, replace check valve.
(f) Disconnect, drain water, and blow dry with shop air.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 71-70-00 7F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Reinstall components per Installation, above, but do not install the engine cowlings.
(6) Flow divider/purge valve leak test:
(a) Disconnect lower check valve/union assembly from flow divider/purge valve.
(b) Connect a length of clear fuel resistant hose to the flow divider/purge valve and route it
down to an empty collection bottle/jar on the ground behind the nose wheel.
(c) Start engine and allow engine temperature to stabilize.
(d) Observe clear hose and collection bottle/jar for fuel leakage. Any evidence of fuel leakage
from flow divider/purge valve while engine is running is cause for flow divider/purge valve
replacement.
(e) Shutdown engine.
NOTE: Some fuel may exit the flow divider/purge valve during or after engine shutdown.
This is normal.
(f) Disconnect the clear hose and collection bottle and remove.
(g) Connect lower check valve/union assembly to flow divider/purge valve and tighten.
(h) Perform a dry motoring run (see Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH), paragraph 4.15) prior
to next engine start.
(7) Install lower and upper forward cowlings as described in 71-10-00.
7F9 71-70-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 71-70-00 7F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
72
ENGINE
7F11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
72-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
72-60-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
7F13 72 - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 72 - ENGINE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 72-00-00 1 7F17

Preservation 1 7F17
ACCESSORY DIRVES 72-60-00 1 7F19

Accessory Drive 1 7F19
Removal 1 7F19
Installation 1 7F19

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Preservation
If airplane has been, or is to be, inactive for more than seven (7) days, see Pratt & Whitney Canada
Maintenance Manual No. 3021442, 72-00-00, Engine, Turboprop - Servicing, paragraph 6 - Preservation
and Depreservation.
7F17 72-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 72-00-00 7F18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY DRIVES
Accessory Drive (See Figure 1.)

The airplane is provided with an accessory drive assembly mounted on the engine dual drive pads. The
accessory drive powers the alternator and the air conditioning compressor.
A. Removal
(1) Remove alternator and belt per 24-30-00, Alternator - Removal.
(2) Remove air conditioning compressor and belt per 21-50-00, Compressor - Removal.
(3) Disconnect drain line from bottom of accessory drive housing.
(4) Remove cotter pin, nut, and washer, and remove pulley and key from aft end of accessory
drive shaft.
(5) Remove seven bolts and washers securing housing assembly to engine dual drive pads.
(6) Remove housing assembly and gasket from engine dual drive pads.
(7) Remove cap (and in S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697221, for those airplanes which have not complied
with Piper Service Bulletin No. 1158A, also remove bushing) from aft end of housing.
(8) Remove spacer from forward end of accessory drive housing.
B. Installation
(1) Insert spacer into forward end of accessory drive housing.
(2) In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697221, for those airplanes which have not complied with Piper
Service Bulletin No. 1158A, insert bushing into aft end of housing.
(3) Lubricate accessory drive shaft (quill shaft) spline with a thin even coat of Molykote “G”.
Remove excess.
(4) Place cap onto aft end of housing, aligning holes in cap with holes in housing.
CAUTION: TAKE CARE TO ENSURE ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFT (QUILL SHAFT) SPLINE
MESHES WITH ENGINE DRIVE SPLINE, WHEN INSTALLING HOUSING
ASSEMBLY.
(5) Install gasket and housing assembly onto engine dual drive pads.
(6) Secure housing assembly to engine dual drive pads with bolts and washers (7 ea. - four long
and three short). Torque bolts (oiled) to 65 - 85 in. lbs and safety.
(7) Connect drain line to bottom of accessory drive housing.
(8) Install pulley onto aft end of accessory drive shaft (quill shaft) and secure with key, washer, nut,
and cotter pin. Install nut as follows:
(a) Initially torque nut to 200 in./lbs., and then inspect alignment of nut castellation relative to
cotter pin hole in bolt. If necessary, increase torque as required to rotate nut castellation
into alignment for cotter pin installation.
(b) Do not exceed 350 in./lbs. of torque.
(9) Install air conditioning compressor and belt per 21-50-00, Compressor - Installation.
(10) Install alternator and belt per 24-30-00, Alternator - Installation.
7F19 72-60-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102431 K
ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT
TENSION ADJUSTMENT TURNBUCKLE
STARTER / GENERATOR
(REF)
FWD
ALTERNATOR
WITH
COOLING SHROUD
ACCESSORY
DRIVE
ASSEMBLY
ACCESSORY DRIVE PULLEY
A/C COMPRESSOR
A/C COMPRESSOR BELT

TENSION ADJUSTMENT TURNBUCKLE
Accessory Drive Installation

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 72-60-00 7F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GASKET
FWD
ACCESSORY DRIVE
ACCESSORY DRIVE SHAFT SPLINE
HOUSING
SPACER
BUSHING
(S/N’S 4697001 THRU 4697221,
PRE-SB 1158A, ONLY.)
CAP
KEY
PULLEY ENGINE DUAL DRIVE

MOUNTING PAD
AN310-8 NUT
MS24665-285 COTTER PIN
DRIVE BELTS P/N 50169-005 BOLT

(3 PLACES, NOT SHOWN)
P/N 50169-004 BOLT
(4 PLACES)
VIEW A - A
Accessory Drive Installation

7F21 72-60-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 7F22 THRU 7F24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 72-60-00 7F22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
74
IGNITION
7G1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
74-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
74-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
74-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74 - IGNITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 74-00-00 1 7G7

Description and Operation 1 7G7
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY 74-10-00 1 7G9

Checking Ignition System 1 7G9
Ignition Exciter 2 7G10
Removal 2 7G10
Installation 2 7G10
DISTRIBUTION 74-20-00 1 7G13

Igniter Plugs 1 7G13
Removal 1 7G13
Installation 1 7G13
Cleaning and Inspection 1 7G13
Ignition Cables 3 7G15
Removal 3 7G15
Installation 3 7G15
Cleaning 5 7G17
Inspection 5 7G17

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
Description and Operation

The ignition system consists of one exciter box, two ignition leads and two spark igniters. Both igniters
are engaged simultaneously. DC power is delivered to the exciter box from the essential bus through an
ignition mode selector switch in the engine control switch panel and a torque pressure switch. While in
the Automatic ignition mode, the ignition system will activate when the torque is less than or equal to
approximately 275 ft. lbs., and deactivate when the torque is greater than or equal to approximately 375
ft. lbs. Continuous ignition, at any torque setting, is provided in the Manual ignition mode.
The exciter is a sealed unit consisting of electronic components encased by an epoxy resin. When
energized, a capacitor in the unit is progressively charged until it reaches a predetermined value, when
the energy stored is sufficient to ionize a spark gap in the unit and discharge the capacitor across two
spark igniters. The design of the system permits continued operation of one spark igniter if the other
stops functioning.
The high tension cable assemblies carry an electrical charge from ignition exciter to spark igniters. The
cable consist of an electrical lead contained in a flexible metal braiding, with coupling nuts on each end
and mounting flanges for attachment to engine fire seals.
The spark igniters are located at the 4 and 9 o’clock positions on the gas generator case adjacent to fuel
manifold.
7G7 74-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 74-00-00 7G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
WARNING: VOLTAGE IN IGNITION EXCITER CAN BE DANGEROUSLY HIGH. USE EXTREME

CAUTION WHEN WORKING AROUND THIS SYSTEM. ENSURE IGNITION IS
SWITCHED OFF AND SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE FOR AT LEAST SIX (6) MINUTES,
BEFORE REMOVING IGNITION COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS TO
REMOVE CABLE COUPLING NUTS. DO NOT TOUCH OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR
COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE HANDS. ALWAYS DISCONNECT COUPLING NUTS AT
IGNITION EXCITER END FIRST.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW LUBRICANT TO CONTACT CONDUCTOR OF CONNECTORS WHICH
COULD RESULT IN HIGH RESISTANCE PATH, GENERATING HEAT AND OXIDATION.
For additional information regarding items installed on engines and functional check of system, refer to
Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-
41/-42/-42A - Part No. (P/N) 3021442, 74-10-00.
1. Checking Ignition System
A common ignition problem is a low battery. Before inspecting ignition system, start engine with an
auxiliary power unit. If engine does not start, proceed with ignition system check.
During following procedure, an auxiliary power unit for dry motoring runs can eliminate possibility of low
voltage at exciter box and excessive battery drain.
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN THE EXCITER CAN BE VERY HIGH. ENSURE IGNITION IS OFF
AND SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE FOR AT LEAST SIX (6) MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING
COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS AND REMOVE COUPLING NUTS AT
EXCITER END FIRST. DO NOT TOUCH OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS
WITH BARE HANDS.
CAUTION: PERFORM DRY MOTORING RUN PRIOR TO SWITCHING IGNITION ON TO ENSURE
NO FUEL REMAINS IN GAS GENERATOR CASE. (REFER TO PILOT’S OPERATING
HANDBOOK, PARAGRAPH 4.15.)
A. Switch ignition system OFF.
B. Disconnect coupling nut of one ignition cable from output connector on exciter box.
C. Switch battery master and ignition switches ON.
D. At gas generator case, listen for snapping sound with frequency of approximately one snap per
second. If snapping is audible, ignition is satisfactory.
E. Secure engine by switching ignition and battery master switches OFF.
F. Reconnect coupling nut of ignition cable to exciter box. Remove other cable coupling nut and repeat
steps C thru E.
G. If snapping sound is not heard after one check, replace proper spark igniter or ignition cable.
Repeat steps C thru E.
H. If no snapping sound is heard on either check, replace ignition exciter box and repeat steps C thru
E.
7G9 74-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Ignition Exciter
The ignition exciter is located on a bracket mounted to the left upper engine mount tube at FS 73.00. The
unit is non-serviceable other than cleaning, and must be replaced if defective. Observe all safety
precautions when handling this unit.
AND SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE FOR AT LEAST SIX MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING
COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS AND REMOVE COUPLING NUTS AT
WITH BARE HANDS.
A. Removal
(1) Remove forward upper cowling and open left engine access gull-wing door.
(2) Remove power from ignition system.
(3) Disconnect power supply cable from exciter box input connector.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING OR FERRULES TO ROTATE
WHEN REMOVING COUPLING NUTS.
(4) Disconnect two ignition cable couplings from output connectors on exciter.
(5) Remove four bolts, washers, and self-locking nuts securing unit to bracket.
(6) Remove ignition exciter unit.
B. Installation
(1) Install ignition exciter unit to bracket with four bolts, washers, and nuts.
(2) Connect coupling nuts of supply cable and two ignition cables to proper connectors on exciter.
WHEN SCREWING ON COUPLING NUTS.
(3) Tighten coupling nuts finger tight, plus 45 degrees; safety with lockwire.
(4) Replace forward upper cowling and close left engine access gull-wing door.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 74-10-00 7G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7G11 74-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 74-10-00 7G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
1. Igniter Plugs
The spark igniters are located at 4 and 9 o’clock positions on gas generator case, adjacent to fuel
manifold. Observe all safety precautions when working on ignition system. See also Pratt & Whitney
Canada’s Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A -
Part No. (P/N) 3021442, 74-20-00.
AND SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE FOR AT LEAST SIX (6) MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING
COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS. REMOVE COUPLING NUTS AT
WITH BARE HANDS.
A. Removal
(2) Disconnect coupling nut from igniter.
CAUTION: WHEN UNSCREWING COUPLING NUTS, DO NOT ALLOW BRAIDING,
FERRULES, OR IGNITER PLUG TO TURN AT SAME TIME.
(3) Remove igniter plug and copper gasket from gas generator case.
B. Installation
CAUTION: USE ONLY P&WC-APPROVED ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND (I.E. - NEVER-SEEZ OR
SILVER GOOP) DURING REINSTALLATION. TAKE CARE TO APPLY COMPOUND
ONLY TO IGNITER THREADS OR BOSS THREADS.
(1) Install new copper gasket and igniter into gas generator case. Tighten igniter and torque to 300
inch-pounds. Loosen to 0 inch-pounds and retorque to 300-360 inch-pounds.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING, FERRULE OR IGNITER PLUG
TO TURN WHEN SCREWING ON COUPLING NUT.
(2) Reconnect ignition cable to igniter plug. Tighten coupling nuts fingertight plus 45 degrees.
C. Cleaning and Inspection
(1) Cap cable end of igniter plug to prevent foreign material from entering during cleaning.
NOTE: Never clean electrode end (firing) of igniter. Do not remove carbon from electrode or
annular gap area as carbon deposits in gap area aid igniter operation.
(2) Using felt swab soaked in solvent (i.e. - Varsol or isopropyl alcohol); clean inside surface of
terminal well.
(3) Dry igniter with dry, compressed air.
CAUTION: IF IGNITER PLUG IS DROPPED, INTERNAL DAMAGE, NOT DETECTABLE BY
TEST, CAN OCCUR AND IGNITER PLUG MUST BE REPLACED.
(4) After cleaning igniter, inspect electrode end for erosion limits. (Refer to Chart 1.)
CAUTION: SHOULD AN IGNITER PLUG BE DROPPED, INTERNAL DAMAGE, POSSIBLE
NOT DETECTABLE BY TEST, CAN OCCUR. RECOMMENDATION IS TO
REPLACE THE IGNITER PLUG.
CAUTION: IF IGNITER PLUG IS DROPPED, INTERNAL DAMAGE, NOT DETECTABLE BY

TEST, CAN OCCUR, AND IGNITER PLUG MUST BE REPLACED.
7G13 74-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Spark Igniter Plug Wear

Figure 1
CHART 1
SPARK IGNITER Erosion Limits
P&WC Vendor Dimension in Inches *

Part No. Name and Part No. 'A' 'B'
3014986 ** Champion: FHE-182 0.3437 0.0312
3014985 ** Bendix: 10-380700-1 0.2500 0.0310
3024706 ** A.C.:5611760 0.2750 0.1000
3027280*** Champion: CH34055 0.3000 N/A ****
3032213 *** Bendix: 10-390667-1 0.3000 N/A ****
* = See Figure 1.
** = Ordered under P&WC P/N 3014981.
*** = Ordered under P&WC P/N 3032096.
**** = Not applicable to air-cooled igniters.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 74-20-00 7G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Inspect exterior cylindrical area of igniter shell electrode end for chaffing wear. (Wear is
acceptable to a depth of 0.015 inch.)
(6) If erosion equals or exceeds amounts shown in Chart 1 for igniter; replace igniter.
(7) Check air cooling holes are clear and unobstructed.
2. Ignition Cables (See Figure 2.)
The two ignition cable assemblies consist of electrical leads contained in flexible metal braiding with
coupling nuts at each end. Observe all safety precautions when working on ignition system. See also
Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-
41/-42/-42A - Part No. (P/N) 3021442, 74-20-00.
NOTE: Ignition cable routing on the Meridian does not penetrate the fireseals or plenum. The cables run
outside the plenum, along its left side, and then down or across the forward side of the plenum
to their respective igniters.
A. Removal
(1) Remove forward upper cowling.
WARNING: RESIDUAL VOLTAGE IN THE EXCITER CAN BE VERY HIGH. ENSURE
IGNITION IS OFF AND SYSTEM IS INOPERATIVE FOR AT LEAST SIX (6)
MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING COMPONENTS. ALWAYS USE INSULATED
TOOLS AND REMOVE COUPLING NUTS AT EXCITER END FIRST. DO NOT
TOUCH OUTPUT CONNECTORS OR COUPLING NUTS WITH BARE HANDS.
(3) Disconnect ignition cable coupling nuts from ignition exciter and spark igniters.
CAUTION: WHEN UNSCREWING COUPLING NUTS, DO NOT ALLOW BRAIDING,
FERRULES OR IGNITER TO TURN AT THE SAME TIME.
(4) Remove the retaining screws, nuts and washers on the P-clamps supporting the ignition
cables.
(5) Remove ignition cables.
B. Installation
CAUTION: NEVER USE LUBRICANT CONTAINING GREASE OR SILICONE, OR
LUBRICANTS SUCH AS PETROLATUM ON ANY IGNITION COMPONENT.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY LUBRICATION TO ANY CABLES WITH TEFLON INSULATED
SLEEVES.
(1) Install the ignition cables in their respective P-clamps, working from their igniters to the exciter
box. Loosely install the retaining screws, washers and nuts.
(2) Connect coupling nuts of ignition cables to proper connectors on exciter and to their respective
igniters.
WHEN SCREWING ON COUPLING NUTS.
(3) Tighten coupling nuts fingertight, plus 45 degrees. On the exciter box only, safety with lockwire.
(4) Secure cables in P-clamps with retaining screws, washers and nuts.
(5) Gather any excess cable and and neatly secure it to itself with cable ties at the forward left
corner of the plenum.
(6) Reinstall forward upper cowling.
7G15 74-20-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ignition Cable Installation

Figure 2
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 74-20-00 7G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Cleaning
(1) Remove all corrosion residue with a stainless steel wire brush.
(2) Clean affected areas with an isopropyl alcohol or acetone dampened cloth.
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW LUBRICANT TO CONTACT CONDUCTOR OF CONNECTORS
WHICH COULD RESULT IN HIGH RESISTANCE PATH, GENERATING HEAT
AND OXIDATION.
(3) After cleaning, apply light film of fluorocarbon spray lubricant to cleaned area.
D. Inspection
(1) Inspect cables for signs of damage to braiding and for general condition.
(2) Inspect cable coupling nuts for signs of corrosion.
(3) Inspect central conductor and insulation for damage.
7G17 74-20-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 74-20-00 7G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
75
AIR
7G19
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 75
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
75-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 75 - AIR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 75-00-00 1 7H1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The PT6A-42A engine contains three separate air systems. One provides air for bearing compartment
sealing, one provides cooling air, and the last provides air for the compressor bleed valves and airframe
environmental control.
Refer to Chapter 75 of Pratt & Whitney Canada Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine
Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A - Part No. 3021442 for information on servicing these systems.
See also Chapter 21, in this manual, for information on airframe environmental control.
7H1 75-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 75-00-00 7H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
76
ENGINE CONTROLS
7H3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 76
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
76-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
76-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 76 - ENGINE CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBJECT CHAPTER PAGE GRID NO.
GENERAL 76-00-00 1 7H9

POWER CONTROL 76-10-00 1 7H11
Engine Performance Check 1 7H11
Power Lever Cable 5 7H15
Removal 5 7H15
Installation 8 7H18
Adjustment 8 7H18
Condition Lever Cable 12 7H22
Removal 12 7H22
Adjustment 13 7H23
Manual Override Lever Cable 13 7H23
Removal 13 7H23
Adjustment 14 7H24

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
The engine is controlled by power, condition, and manual override levers, located on the control
quadrant of the lower central instrument panel. The controls utilize Teflon-lined control cables to reduce
friction and binding. The power lever is used to actuate the engine fuel control unit as well as propeller
beta and reverse settings. The gear-up warning horn is activated by an idle power setting or flap
extension beyond 10 degrees combined with the landing gear not in a down and locked position. The
horn will continue to sound until the gear is down and locked, the power setting is increased, or the flaps
are retracted to less than 10 degrees. This is a safety feature to warn the pilot of an inadvertent gear-up
landing.
The condition lever controls the run and cut-off function of the fuel control unit as well as propeller
feather. The full forward position sets the run fuel flow and full aft position cuts off fuel flow while
feathering the prop.
The manual override lever is used to directly control fuel flow to the engine in the event of a fuel control
unit failure.
The friction adjustment lever, located in the middle of the control quadrant, may be adjusted to increase
or decrease the friction holding the power lever.
7H9 76-00-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 76-00-00 7H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER CONTROL
1. Engine Performance Check (PIR-PPS60187, Rev. D.)
WARNING: BEWARE PROPELLER BLAST AND ROTATING PROPELLER BLADES DURING ENGINE
OPERATION. EXERCISE CAUTION TO AVOID DAMAGE TO PERSONNEL AND
EQUIPMENT.
PUBLICATIONS.)
CAUTION: BEFORE ATTEMPTING FULL POWER CHECKS, BE SURE THAT THE BRAKES ARE
PROPERLY MAINTAINED AND SET, AND THAT THE GROUND CONDITIONS WILL NOT
PERMIT THE WHEELS TO SLIP DURING FULL POWER CHECK.
See also Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Maintenance Manual - Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Model(s)
PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A - Part No. (P/N) 3021442, 71-00-00.
A. Remove cowlings, including the rear upper cowling (i.e. - hatchback) (See 71-10-00).
B. Start engine
(1) Manual override lever - OFF (i.e. - full aft and locked.)
(2) Power lever - IDLE.
(3) Condition control - CUTOFF/FEATHER.
(4) Electrical master switch - ON.
(5) Verify proper operation of engine gauges.
(6) Bleed air - OFF.
(7) Firewall fuel shutoff valve - OPEN (i.e. - handle pushed in and cover closed.)
(8) Fuel Pumps switch - ON.
(9) Verify that the low fuel pressure annunciator extinguishes.
(10) Engine ignition switch - AUTO.
(11) Engine start mode switch - AUTO (i.e. - light extinguished.)
(12) Check prop area clear, lift cover on engine start switch and push.
CAUTION: WHENEVER THE GAS GENERATOR FAILS TO LIGHT UP WITHIN 10
SECONDS AFTER MOVING THE CONDITION LEVER TO THE RUN
POSITION, SHUT OFF FUEL, STARTER AND IGNITION. ALLOW A 30-
SECOND FUEL DRAINING PERIOD FOLLOWED BY A 15-SECOND DRY
MOTORING RUN (SEE PILOT’S OPERATING HANDBOOK, PARA. 4.15)
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANOTHER START. ALLOWING A RUNDOWN AFTER
THE 15-SECOND DRY RUN IS NOT NECESSARY IF STARTER LIMITS
PERMIT. IF, FOR ANY REASON, A STARTING ATTEMPT IS DISCONTINUED,
ALLOW THE ENGINE TO COME TO A COMPLETE STOP AND THEN
ACCOMPLISH A DRY MOTORING RUN. REPEAT THE COMPLETE STARTING
SEQUENCE, OBSERVING THE STARTER LIMITS.
(13) Condition lever - RUN -- WHEN Ng REACHES 12% - 18%.
(14) Verify that starter disengages at 56% Ng.
(15) Engine ignition switch - AUTO.
(16) Verify that ignition annunciator extinguishes.
7H11 76-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(17) Ensure that the engine accelerates normally to idle speed and the maximum I.T.T. starting limit
is not exceeded (i.e. - 800 to 1000 °C for no more than five seconds).
WARNING: STABILIZED GROUND OPERATION BELOW 1200 RPM (NP) CAN GENERATE
HIGH PROPELLER STRESSES AND RESULT IN FATIGUE DAMAGE TO THE
PROPELLER. THIS DAMAGE CAN LEAD TO A REDUCED PROPELLER
FATIGUE LIFE, PROPELLER FAILURE, AND LOSS OF CONTROL OF THE
AIRCRAFT. CONTACT THE PROPELLER MANUFACTURER FOR
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS IF A PROPELLER RESTRICTION OR LIMITATION IS
VIOLATED.
C. Idle engine for 5 minutes. Observe all engine gauges for proper operation.
D. Shut down engine
(1) Power lever - IDLE.
(2) Condition lever - CUTOFF/FEATHER.
(3) Fuel Pumps - OFF.
(4) Electrical master - OFF
E. Check for fuel and oil leaks. Check oil level. Refill if necessary to proper level. (Oil level should be
centered in sight glass.)
F. Install cowlings (see 71-10-00).
G. Repeat step B (i.e. - start engine), above.
H. Overspeed governor test - (HTG test)
(2) Set power levers for 1900 rpm propeller speed (Np).
propeller rpm. The drop should be approximately 20 to 50 rpm.
(4) Release switch and prop rpm (Np) must increase to original rpm (i.e. - 1900).
I. Auto Ignition
(1) Set ignition switch to AUTO.
(2) Check ignition off with increasing torque at 450 ft-lbs or greater.
(3) Check ignition on with decreasing torque at 240 ft-lbs minimum.
J. Manual Override Check (PIR-PPS60187, Rev. D.)
(1) Disconnect fuel supply line at F.C.U. to engine flow divider. Attach a short piece of hose to
permit fuel to drain into a container.
(2) Disconnect control cable at the F.C.U. MOR lever.
(3) Condition lever to RUN, F.C.U. MOR lever is positively held against the shutoff stop and Fuel
boost pumps ON.
(4) Conduct a wet motoring run for 30 seconds and record amount of fuel in the container.
(5) Reconnect control cable at the F.C.U. MOR lever.
(6) Rig MOR lever by putting both the MOR quadrant lever and the F.C.U. MOR lever in the
maximum position.
(7) Return the MOR quadrant lever to the off and stowed position.
(8) Condition lever to RUN, fuel boost pumps ON.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Control Unit Adjustments

Figure 1
7H13 76-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Conduct a wet motoring run for 30 seconds and record the amount of fuel in the container. If
the amount of fuel is the same (± 10cc) the engine may be started.
(10) Reconnect the fuel supply line at the the F.C.U. to engine flow divider.
(11) Start engine.
(12) Place power lever in idle. Advance quadrant MOR lever slowly. Verify that full power can be
achieved (1310 ft-lb minimum @ 2000 RPM).
(13) Verify the MOR deadband is a minimum of 25 degrees at the F.C.U. MOR before MOR fuel
flow starts increasing.
K. Torque Limiter Check
NOTE: Perform the torque limiter check only after hot section inspection or engine change.
The torque limiter is set at 565 shp (1484 ft. lbs.).
(1) Advance power lever to its full max travel (i.e. - beyond the normal full power range).
(2) Verify that the engine torque is limited to 1480 to 1500 ft. lbs.
(3) Placing the power lever at full max travel, above, will cause an exceedance. Make an engine
logbook entry to document the “Exceedance caused by torque limiter check.”
L. Adjustments Required (See Figures 1, 2, & 3.)
(1) Idle Adjustment
WARNING: STABILIZED GROUND OPERATION BELOW 1200 RPM (NP) CAN GENERATE
HIGH PROPELLER STRESSES AND RESULT IN FATIGUE DAMAGE TO THE
PROPELLER. THIS DAMAGE CAN LEAD TO A REDUCED PROPELLER
FATIGUE LIFE, PROPELLER FAILURE, AND LOSS OF CONTROL OF THE
AIRCRAFT. CONTACT THE PROPELLER MANUFACTURER FOR
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS IF A PROPELLER RESTRICTION OR LIMITATION IS
VIOLATED.
(a) Adjust F.C.U. idle (i.e. - Minimum Governing Adjustment, Figure 1) to give 63 to 64 % Ng
(1 flat = 2%).
NOTE: If the minimum governing adjustment range is insufficient to achieve specified
Ng, then reset the FCU control arm one (1) serration and try again. See also
Power Lever Cable, Adjustment, and Detail C, Figure 3.
(b) Bleed Air, Generator, and Air Conditioning should be ON.
(2) Maximum Power
Verify torque of 1310 to 1330 ft.-lbs. at Np of 2000 RPM. Use view-thru Tach to verify.
(3) Forward Ng Pickup Dead Band
Adjust F.C.U. Control Rod (attached to FCU control arm, Figure 1) to obtain .25 in. to .312 in.
deadband from power lever idle stop in pedestal. See also Power Lever Cable, Adjustment,
and Detail C, Figure 3.
NOTE: Shortening rod will decrease Ng pickup dead band.
(4) Reverse Ng Pickup Dead Band
Adjust deadband adjustment screw on beta cam box. Delay Ng pickup in reverse until prop
RPM drops slightly. The gap should be approximately 0.312 in.
NOTE: Place power lever in IDLE. When you pull power lever up to go into BETA, no
decrease in Ng should be noted.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Maximum Reverse Power

Verify torque of 310 to 360 ft-lbs. at 1810 to 1890 RPM. Use view-thru Tach to verify. If not as
specified, repeat step (4), above.
NOTE: Reverse propeller Np should be 1900 ± 10 RPM.
(6) Np Maximum Propeller Speed (See 61-20-00, Figure 2.)
Adjust max. speed screw to achieve 2000 RPM max. governing speed.
2. Power Lever Cable
A. Removal
(1) Remove pedestal cover (i.e. - in cockpit) and open right engine access gull-wing door.
(2) At each end of cable, measure distance from center of clevis or rod end, respectively, to cable
mounting clip. These measurements are critical to reinstallation. Additionally, take note of which
hole the cable assembly is connected to, if the actuating lever provides more than one option.
(3) In the engine compartment:
(a) Remove cotter pin, nut and bolt and disconnect cable assembly rod end from cam
assembly lever.
(b) Slide cable assembly from cable assembly end retaining clip and, working towards the
pressure bulkhead, free the cable from all additional mounting clamps, clips or brackets.
(4) In the cockpit:
(a) Remove cotter pin, washer and clevis pin and disconnect cable assembly clevis from
power lever assembly.
pressure bulkhead, disconnect the cable from all additional mounting clamps, clips or
brackets.
(c) At the pressure bulkhead, open the pressure bulkhead feed-thru by removing eight nuts
and washers and three screws and six washers.
(d) Pull the cable through the pressure bulkhead and remove it from the airplane.
7H15 76-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Engine Controls Installation

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
101602 M
AN3-6 BOLT
PS10020-2-5RX BEARING BOLT, AN3-7
MS35338-43 WASHER WASHER, NAS1149F0332
ACTUATING LEVER / LINKAGE BRACKET, 50239-000
NAS1149F0332P WASHER WASHER, MS35338-4
MS24665-134 COTTER PIN BEARING, PS10020-2-5RX
AN315-3R NUT WASHER, MS35338-43
WASHER, 62833-101
NUT, AN310-3
COTTER PIN,MS24665-134
NUT,AN315-3R
EDP
FUEL
PUMP
CABLE ASSY.
RETAINING
CLIP
MANUAL OVERRIDE
CABLE
POWER LEVER CABLE

CONDITION CABLE
WHEELWELL
PRESSURE BULKHEAD
Engine Controls Installation

7H17 76-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Set the cable end lengths to the dimensions measured in Removal, above.
(2) In the cockpit:
(a) Slide the rod end of the cable assembly through the pressure bulkhead feed-thru into the
engine compartment.
(b) Take the clevis end of the cable assembly and route it up through the pedestal to the
power lever assembly. Fit the cable loosely into its mounting clamps, clips or brackets
along the way.
(c) Slide the cable assembly into the cable assembly end retaining clip and secure the clevis
to the power lever assembly with pin, washer and cotter pin.
(a) Take the rod end of the cable assembly and route it up through the engine compartment
to the cam assembly. Fit the cable loosely into its mounting clamps, clips or brackets
along the way.
(b) Slide the cable assembly into the cable assembly end retaining clip and secure the rod
end to the cam assembly lever with bolt, nut and cotter pin. Refer to removal notes and be
sure to connect the rod end to the same hole in the actuating lever previously used.
(4) With both cable ends secured, secure all mounting clamps, clips or brackets along the
remainder of the cable length.
(5) From the cockpit side of the pressure bulkhead, secure the pressure bulkhead feed-thru with
three screws, six washers and eight nuts and washers. Take care to ensure that the feed-thru
seal is in good condition and properly installed.
(6) Replace pedestal cover (i.e. - in cockpit) and close right engine access gull-wing door.
(7) Adjust power lever control per Adjustment, below.
(8) Verify engine performance per Engine Performance Check, above.
(9) Before pressurized flight, perform a Pressurization System Test per 21-30-00.
C. Adjustment (PIR-PPS60186, Rev. New.)
(1) If a new or used cable has been installed with the cable ends adjusted to pre-removal
measurements (see Removal, above) and no other adjustments were made to the fuel control
unit, cam assembly or propeller beta control, no further adjustment is required.
(2) If a new or used cable has been installed without cable ends adjusted to pre-removal
measurements, and/or additional adjustments or replacements were made to either the fuel
control unit, cam assembly or propeller beta control, proceed as follows:
(a) At the forward end of the engine: (See Figure 3, Detail A.)
1 The beta collar must be flush with the beta valve.
2 The terminal block must be parallel to the ground.
3 The Nf lever must rest against the Nf stop.
4 Verify that the witness hole in the terminal block is covered by the wire rope.
(b) At the aft end of the engine: (See Figure 3, Detail B.)
1 Verify that there is a gap between the cable sleeve and the housing.
2 Verify that the witness hole in the push-pull terminal is covered by the wire rope.
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) At the cam assembly:

1 In the cockpit, set the power lever at IDLE.
a Adjust cam assembly as shown in Figure 3, Detail C.
b Adjust the FCU control rod to obtain .25 to .3125 inch Forward Ng Pickup Dead
Band from the power lever idle stop in the cockpit pedestal.
NOTE: Shortening rod decreases Ng pickup dead band.
2 In the cockpit, set the power lever at FULL POWER.
Adjust cam assembly as shown in Figure 3, Detail D.
3 In the cockpit, set the power lever at BETA.
Adjust cam assembly as shown in Figure 3, Detail E.
4 In the cockpit, set the power lever at REVERSE.
a Adjust cam assembly as shown in Figure 3, Detail F.
b Adjust dead band adjustment screw on beta cam box to set Reverse Ng Pickup
Dead Band so that Ng pickup in reverse is delayed until RPM drops slightly. The
gap should be approximately .312 inch.
Power Lever Cable Adjustment

7H19 76-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7H21 76-10-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Condition Lever Cable

A. Removal
mounting clip. These measurements will simplify reinstallation. Additionally, take note of which
(a) Remove cotter pin, nut and bolt and disconnect cable assembly rod end from fuel control
unit (FCU) cut-off and idle reset linkage.
(4) In the cockpit:
condition lever assembly.
pressure bulkhead, disconnect the cable from all additional mounting clamps, clips or brackets.
B. Installation
(2) In the cockpit:
engine compartment.
condition lever assembly. Fit the cable loosely into its mounting clamps, clips or brackets
along the way.
to the condition lever assembly with pin, washer and cotter pin.
to the FCU cut-off and idle reset linkage. Fit the cable loosely into its mounting clamps,
clips or brackets along the way.
end to the FCU cut-off and idle reset linkage with bolt, nut and cotter pin. Refer to removal
notes and be sure to connect the rod end to the same hole in the actuating lever
previously used.
(7) Adjust condition lever control per Adjustment, below.
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
unit no further adjustment is required.
measurements, and/or additional adjustments or replacements were made to the fuel control
unit, proceed as follows:
(a) Working at either or both cable ends, as required, adjust cable length so that the FCU cut-
off and idle reset linkage moves stop to stop when the condition lever is moved stop to
stop in the pedestal.
(b) In the cockpit, place the condition lever in the CUTOFF position.
Verify that the engine condition input lever (Figure 1) is against the cutoff stop. If the lever
is not on the stop, adjust control cable clevis rod end to achieve contact with the stop.
(c) In the cockpit, place the condition lever in the RUN position.
Adjust the run stop (Figure 1) at the engine condition input lever so that the lever contacts
the run stop.
(d) In the cockpit, return the condition lever in the CUTOFF position.
4. Manual Override Lever Cable
A. Removal
mounting clip. These measurements will simplify reinstallation. Additionally, take note of which
(a) Remove cotter pin, nut and bolt and disconnect cable assembly rod end from fuel control
unit (FCU) manual metering actuating lever.
(4) In the cockpit:
manual override lever assembly.
pressure bulkhead, disconnect the cable from all additional mounting clamps, clips or
brackets.
7H23 76-10-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(2) In the cockpit:
engine compartment.
manual override lever assembly. Fit the cable loosely into its mounting clamps, clips or
brackets along the way.
to the manual override lever assembly with pin, washer and cotter pin.
to the FCU manual metering actuating lever. Fit the cable loosely into its mounting
clamps, clips or brackets along the way.
end to the FCU manual metering actuating lever with bolt, nut and cotter pin. Refer to
removal notes and be sure to connect the rod end to the same hole in the actuating lever
previously used.
(7) Adjust manual override lever control per Adjustment, below.
unit no further adjustment is required.
measurements, and/or additional adjustments or replacements were made to the fuel control
unit, proceed as follows:
(a) Working at either or both cable ends, as required, adjust cable length so that the FCU
manual metering actuating lever moves stop to stop when the manual override lever is
moved stop to stop in the pedestal.
(b) In the cockpit, place the manual override lever in the OFF position. The knob should be
down and locked behind the detente.
(c) Verify that the engine manual override input lever is against the shutoff stop (i.e. - in the
OFF position - see Figure 1). If not, adjust the control cable clevis rod end to achieve
contact with the stop.
(d) In the cockpit, place the manual override lever in the FULL POWER position. Set the
engine manual override input lever to have a .125 inch gap between the lever and the
maximum speed stop (Figure 1).
NOTE: Final adjustment of the manual override maximum speed stop must be checked
with the engine running. See Engine Performance Check - Manual Override
Check, above.
(e) In the cockpit, return the manual override lever to the OFF position.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7I1 76-10-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 76-10-00 7I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
77
ENGINE INDICATING
7I3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
77-00-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
77-10-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
77-40-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77 - ENGINE INDICATING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL 77-00-00 1 7I9

Meggitt EFIS 1 7I9
Avidyne EFIS 1 7I9
POWER 77-10-00 1 7I13

Engine Torque - Meggitt EFIS 1 7I13
Description 1 7I13
Engine Torque Indication Calibration 1 7I13
Engine Torque - Avidyne EFIS 6 7I18
Description 6 7I18
Engine Torque Indication Calibration 6 7I18
Tachometer Generators 10 7I22
Removal 10 7I22
Installation 10 7I22
TEMPERATURE 77-20-00
See Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Maintenance Manual
- Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A - Part No. (P/N) 3021442, 77-20-00.
INTEGRATED ENGINE
INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS 77-40-00 1 7J1
Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS) - 1 7J1
Modes of Operation 3 7J3
Mission Operational Mode 3 7J3
Test Mode 4 7J4
EIDS Flags 9 7J9
EIDS Colors 9 7J9
Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS 10 7J10
Engine Condition Trend Monitoring (ECTM) 10 7J10
7I7 77 - CONTENTS PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL
1. Meggitt EFIS (See 77-10-00, Figure 1.)

The PA-46-500TP Malibu Meridian employs the Meggitt Avionics next Generation Integrated Cockpit
(MAGIC) Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS) as the primary engine instrumentation. The MAGIC
EIDS consists of two primary components:
A. Engine Display Unit (EDU) and
B. Data Acquisition Unit (DAU).
PUBLICATIONS.)
2. Avidyne EFIS (See Figure 1.)
In S/N’s 4697198, 4697216 and up, when the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS is installed, primary
engine instrumentation is provided in the Primary Flight Display (PFD). Detailed engine information is
provided on the engine page of the Multi-Function Display (MFD). The Data Acquisition Unit (DAU)
collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a refined data stream to the PFD and MFD
which actually display the data.
PUBLICATIONS.)
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting and that is addressed in vendor
publications referenced in 34-20-00.
7I9 77-00-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Engine Instrument Displays
4697198; 4697216 and up Figure 1
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 77-00-00 7I10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7I11 77-00-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 77-00-00 7I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER
1. Engine Torque - Meggitt EFIS

NOTE: When Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS) is installed, Refer to 77-40-00 for more
information.
A. Description
The engine torque indicating system consists of a torque pressure transducer at the propeller
reduction gearbox and the Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS).
The engine torque indicator is incorporated into the Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System
(EIDS). The EIDS consists of two main components, the Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and the
Engine Display Unit (EDU). The DAU collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a
refined data stream to the EDU which actually displays the data. (See Figure 1.)
B. Engine Torque Indication Calibration (PIR-PPS60185, Rev. E.)
During calibration, switches on the bottom of the DAU are manipulated to select which phase of the
calibration process is being performed. All data relating to calibration is displayed on the EDU.
(1) Requirements
(a) Calibrate whenever a DAU is replaced.
(b) Calibrate whenever a torque pressure transducer is replaced.
TQ LB - FT I TT °C
1 100 155
NP RPM NG %
57 0 3 7 .3
ECTM: C R U IS E 1 MAINT
EDU Pilot’s Engine Instrument Display
Figure 1
7I13 77-10-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT PERFORM TORQUE CALIBRATION WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT. LET
THE ENGINE COOL DOWN FOR A MINIMUM OF ONE (1) HOUR PRIOR TO
PERFORMING TORQUE CALIBRATION.
(a) Prior to applying power to the Engine Display Unit (EDU), depress the "PAGE" switch on
(b) Depress and release the EDU "PAGE" switch until the "DAU/FQP DATA" page is displayed
(Refer to Figure 2).
(c) Pull both "DATA ACQUISITION" circuit breakers.
(d) Hold the SW-3 and SW-4 toggle switches on the DAU to either the "MIN MAX" or the
"CAL" position (Refer to Figure 3). Push in both "DATA ACQUISITION" circuit breakers
and keep holding the SW-3 and SW-4 toggle switches for a minimum of 5 seconds.
(e) On the "DAU/FQP DATA" page, verify that the mode is set to "CAL" (Refer to Figure 2).
DAU - FQP DATA

DAU
SOFTWARE KE Y / RE V: 1 A 1 A
M O D E: T ES T T ES T
E QUI P ID : C10 C10
CHANNE L ID : CH 1 CH 2
FAI L F L AGS : PA S S PA SS
FQP LEFT R IGH T

SOFTWARE KE Y / REV: 1 A 1 A
M O D E: CAL CAL
T ES T M OD E
EDU DAU-FQP DATA Page
Figure 2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 77-10-00 7I14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DAU Switches
Figure 3
CA L IB R A T IO N
TORQUE
CH A CH B
68 % 68 %
NOT READY READY
CAL LO VALID UNCAL LO
FUEL
LEFT RIGHT
63.0150 % 100.000 %
N OT READY READY
CAL HI VALI D UNCAL HI
UNCAL LO UNCAL LO
TESTMODE
EDU Calibration Page
Figure 4
7I15 77-10-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Calibrated Pressure Source Test Set-up

Figure 5
(f) Depress and release the EDU "PAGE" switch until the "CALIBRATION" page is displayed
(Refer to Figure 4).
(g) Observe and verify that the calibration display on the EDU shows "READY", "UNCAL HI"
and "UNCAL LO" for "TORQUE", "CH A" and "CH B".
(h) Connect the Torque Transducer to a calibrated pressure source (Refer to Figure 5).
(i) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
corresponding to zero (0) LBS-FT of torque to the torque transducer.
(j) Hold the SW-3 toggle switch on the DAU in either the "CAL" or "MIN" position for a
minimum of 3 seconds. Verify that the EDU display shows "CAL LO VALID" for "CH A",
"CH B" for "TORQUE".
(k) Verify that the rectangles below "CH A" and "CH B" contain the value "0".
(l) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
corresponding to 1313 LBS-FT of torque to the torque transducer.
(m) Hold the SW-4 toggle switch on the DAU in either the "CAL" or "MAX" position for a
minimum of 3 seconds. Verify that the EDU display shows "CAL HI VALID" for "CH A",
"CH B" for "TORQUE".
(n) Verify that the rectangles below "CH A" and "CH B" contain the value "100".
(o) Calibration of the Engine Torque is completed, turn aircraft main power off and disconnect
the calibrated pressure source.
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 77-10-00 7I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TORQUE CALIBRATION
Torque Transducer Pressure EDU Torque Indication Transducer Output

(PSID) (LB-FT) (Vdc)
0 0 0.25
6.5 200.0
10.0 305.7 1.20
13.1 400.0
19.6 600.0
26.2 800.0
32.7 1000.0
35.0 1070.0 3.58
39.3 1200.0
42.9 1313.0
43.2 1320.0
(3) Full Range Check

A full range check provides a more detailed test of the engine torque indicating system
calibration.
(a) Apply power to the aircraft.
(b) Connect the Torque Transducer to a calibrated pressure source. (See Figure 5.)
(c) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(d) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads zero (0).
(e) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(f) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 200 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(g) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(h) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 400 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(i) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(j) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 600 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(k) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(l) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 800 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(m) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(n) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 1000 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(o) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
7I17 77-10-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(p) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 1200 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(q) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(r) Verify that the Torque reading on the EDU reads 1320 ± 10 LBS-FT.
(s) Full range check of the engine torque indication is completed, turn aircraft power off.
2. Engine Torque - Avidyne EFIS -
In S/N’s 4697198, 4697216 and up, when the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS is installed, primary
engine instrumentation is provided in the Primary Flight Display (PFD). Detailed engine information is
provided on the engine page of the Multi-Function Display (MFD).
A. Description
The engine torque indicating system consists of a torque pressure transducer at the propeller
reduction gearbox, the Primary Flight Display (PFD), the Multi-Function Display (MFD), and the
Data Acquisition Unit (DAU).
Torque and ITT data are provided in the Primary Flight Display (PFD). Torque, ITT, Np, Ng, Oil
Temperature, and Oil pressure data are provided on the engine page of the Multi-Function Display
(MFD). The Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a
refined data stream to the PFD and MFD which actually display the data.
B. Engine Torque Indication Calibration (PIR-PPS60185, Rev. E.)
During calibration, switches on the bottom of the DAU are manipulated to select which phase of the
calibration process is being performed. All data relating to calibration is displayed on the MFD.
(1) Requirements
(a) Calibrate whenever a DAU is replaced.
(b) Calibrate whenever a torque pressure transducer is replaced.
(2) Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT PERFORM TORQUE CALIBRATION WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT. LET
THE ENGINE COOL DOWN FOR A MINIMUM OF ONE (1) HOUR PRIOR TO
PERFORMING TORQUE CALIBRATION.
(a) Turn ON the Multi-Function Display (MFD). Select the "AUX" page using the outer right
knob. Enter Maintenance Mode by pressing buttons "L1" and "L3" simultaneously. When in
Instruments Setup Page appears on the MFD and the 2nd bezel button from the top on
the left side is labeled "Torque Cal" (See Figure 6).
(b) Depress and release the "Torque Cal" button. Verify the "DAU Torque Calibration" page
(c) Pull both "DATA ACQUISITION" circuit breakers.
(d) Hold the SW-3 and SW-4 toggle switches on the DAU to either the "MIN MAX" or the
"CAL" position (See Figure 3). Push in both "DATA ACQUISITION" circuit breakers and
keep holding the SW-3 and SW-4 toggle switches for a minimum of 5 seconds.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 77-10-00 7I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity
Engine Instruments Setup Page - (MFD) with Avidyne Entegra in
Figure 6 4697198; 4697216 and up
(e) On the MFD "DAU Torque Calibration" page (See Figure 7), observe and verify:
1 "Mode" is "Calibrating"
2 "Low" Calibration Status is "Uncalibrated" for both "Channel 1 (PFD)" and "Channel 2
(MFD)"
3 "High" Calibration Status is "Uncalibrated" for both "Channel 1 (PFD)" and "Channel 2
(MFD)"
(f) Connect the Torque Transducer to a calibrated pressure source (See Figure 5).
(g) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
7I19 77-10-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Verify that torque calibration status displays show "Ready" (See Figure 7).
(i) Hold the SW-3 toggle switch on the DAU in either the "CAL" or "MIN" position for a
minimum of 3 seconds. Verify the MFD shows "Calibrated" for "Low" Calibration Status for
both Channel 1 and Channel 2.
(j) Verify that the Channel 2 rectangle on the MFD shows the value "0".
(k) Verify that the Pilot's PFD shows the Torque value "0".
(l) Use a calibrated pressure source and apply the pressure corresponding to 1313 LBS-FT
of torque (See Chart 1) to the torque transducer.
(m) Hold the SW-4 toggle switch on the DAU in either the "CAL" or "MAX" position for a
minimum of 3 seconds. Verify the MFD shows "Calibrated" for "Low" Calibration Status for
both Channel 1 and Channel 2.
(n) Verify that the Channel 2 rectangle on the MFD shows the value "1313" (or, rarely, “1312”
or “1314” - see Note, below).
(o) Verify that the Pilot's PFD shows the Torque value "1313" (or, rarely, “1312” or “1314” - see
Note, below).
NOTE: In rare instances, the DAU will display the value 1312 or 1314 on the MFD when
the calibrated pressure corresponding to 1313 LBS-FT of torque is first applied to
the torque transducer (i.e. - before the DAU is calibrated in step M, above). In
those cases, the displayed value 1312 or 1314 will remain after calibration is
complete. In any other case, the value initially displayed will change to 1313 after
calibration is complete.
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in DAU Torque Calibration Page - (MFD)
4697198; 4697216 and up Figure 7
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 77-10-00 7I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(p) Calibration of Engine Torque is complete. Turn aircraft main power OFF.
(q) Disconnect the calibrated pressure source and reconnect the torque transducer lines.
(3) Full Range Check of the Engine Torque Indication
(a) Apply power to the aircraft.
(b) Verify the MFD is operating in normal operational mode, not Maintenance Mode (See
77-00-00, Figure 1). Restart it if necessary. Turn the right outer knob to bring up the
Engine Page, if necessary.
(c) Connect the Torque Transducer to a calibrated pressure source as shown in Figure 5.
(d) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(e) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 0. Verify that the Torque value of the PFD
reads the same value as the torque value of the MFD. (See 77-00-00, Figure 1.)
(f) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(g) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 200 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque value
of the PFD reads the same value as the torque value of the MFD.
(h) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(i) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 400 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque value
(j) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(k) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 600 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque value
(l) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(m) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 800 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque value
(n) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(o) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 1000 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque
value of the PFD reads the same value as the torque value of the MFD.
(p) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(q) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 1200 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque
(r) Referring to Chart 1 and using the calibrated pressure source, apply the pressure
(s) Verify the Torque display on the MFD reads 1320 ± 10 LBS-FT. Verify that the Torque
(t) Full range check of the engine torque indication is completed, turn aircraft power OFF.
(u) Disconnect the calibrated pressure source and reconnect the torque transducer lines.
7I21 77-10-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Tachometer Generators
The propeller (Np) and gas generator (Ng) tachometer-generators produce an electric current which is
proportional to gas generator and propeller speed. The electric current is monitored and the tach speeds
are displayed by the Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS); or the Avidyne MFD when
installed in S/N’s 4697198, 4697216 and up. The gas generator tachometer generator is mounted on the
backside of the accessory gearbox and rotates counterclockwise. The propeller tachometer generator is
mounted on the right side of the reduction gearbox case and rotates clockwise.
A. Removal
(1) Disconnect the electrical connector from the tachometer generator unit.
(2) Remove the four mounting nuts at the base of the tachometer generator.
CAUTION: IMMEDIATELY AFTER REMOVING EACH TACHOMETER GENERATOR UNIT,
COVER THE TACH GENERATOR MOUNTING PAD TO PREVENT FOREIGN
MATERIAL FROM ENTERING THE ENGINE.
(3) Pull the unit straight out and away from the mounting lugs.
B. Installation
(1) To install the tachometer generator unit, place a new gasket on the mounting pad.
(2) Lubricate the tachometer generator unit shaft splines with Molybdenum Disulfide, Type G,
paste form lubricant (MIL-G-21164).
(3) With the electrical socket pointing down, slide the tachometer generator into place over the
mounting studs.
(4) Secure the unit in place with the four mounting nuts and torque to 65 to 85 inch-pounds.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 77-10-00 7I22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7I23 77-10-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 77-10-00 7I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTEGRATED ENGINE INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS
1. Meggitt Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS) -

Meggitt Avionics’ next Generation Integrated Cockpit (MAGIC) Engine Instrument Display System (EIDS)
is the primary engine instrumentation. The MAGIC EIDS consists of two primary components:
Engine Display Unit (EDU) and
Data Acquisition Unit (DAU).
PUBLICATIONS.)
As installed in the Meridian, a single Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) and its associated sensors feed two
Engine Display Units (EDU) (a primary and a secondary). Torque (TQ), fuel flow (FF), inter-turbine
temperature (ITT), propeller speed (Np), and gas generator speed (Ng) are acquired by the DAU through
dual redundant channels. In addition, vacuum pressure (VAC), oil temperature (OT), outside air
temperature (OAT), and oil pressure (OP) are acquired by the DAU on a single channel and then cross-
fed to dual redundant channels. The left, right, and total fuel level is also determined by the DAU.
Engine instrumentation display is provided by the primary and secondary EDU. The primary EDU is
located on the pilot’s side to the left of the standby airspeed indicator and the secondary EDU is located
on the co-pilot’s side to the right of the standby altimeter. The information displayed is primarily derived
from signal conditioned, digital data provided by the DAU, which is located behind the instrument panel,
mounted to a bracket on the right side of the forward pressure bulkhead. The only data not provided by
the DAU is the estimated time enroute (ETE) and fuel at destination (FAD) displays which both require
Garmin GPS data and an active flight plan.
The primary EDU indicates torque, ITT, Np, and Ng in both analog and digital format. During engine
start, fuel flow is also digitally indicated on the primary EDU. The secondary EDU indicates vacuum
pressure, fuel flow, remaining useable fuel, oil temperature, and oil pressure in both analog and digital
format. Additional secondary EDU digital indications are OAT, ETE, and FAD, accompanied by the
appropriate GPS 1 or 2 data source label.
The system also includes exceedance, engine condition trend monitoring (ECTM), and instrumentation
fault detection features. Parameter exceedance data is recorded by the DAU for display on the EDU and
subsequent download to a laptop. A parameter exceedance is alerted by an aural alarm and visual
warning consisting of digital indications highlighted with a red background and analog indications with a
red pointer. The aural alarm is cancelable by pressing the mute switch, located below the glare shield on
the pilot side. Engine condition trend monitoring data is automatically recorded by the DAU for
subsequent download to a laptop. Recording of ECTM data is signified by a CRUISE1 or CRUISE2
indication on the primary EDU. In addition, the EDU is constantly searching for instrumentation faults
caused by a failure in the EDU, DAU, or its associated sensors. Should a system fault occur, a MAINT
indication is displayed on the primary and secondary EDU. Upon completion of the flight, all MAINT
indications should be investigated by a qualified technician and the necessary repairs made prior to
further flight.
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting.
A. Troubleshooting
See Chart 1.
7J1 77-40-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 1
TROUBLESHOOTING EIDS (i.e. - EDU / DAU)

No display visible at power up +28 VDC power missing. Check wiring and bus.
voltage.
Failed EDU. Replace EDU.
Display does not dim 28 VDC lighting bus not Check wiring and 28 VDC.
lighting bus. connected or not functional.
Display page does not change Failed EDU. Replace EDU.
when PAGE button is pressed.
SYSTEM STATUS on Failed EDU or DAU. Check EDU and
Exceedance page is DAU DATA Pages.
indicated as FAIL.
FAIL FLAG on EDU DATA Failed EDU. Replace EDU.
page is indicated as FAIL.
Installation Location not Configuration Discrete 0-7 Check wiring.
correctly indicated. not wired properly.
Switch inputs not functional. Switch inputs (Configuration Check wiring.
Discrete 8 and 9) not
wired properly.
Output advisories not functional. Output Discrete 0 - 5 Check wiring.
not wired properly.
DAU on DAU/FQP DATA page ARINC IN A and B lines Check wiring.
indicated as "----". This indicates are backwards.
that invalid data is being received.
Failed DAU. Replace DAU. (See Note.)
DAU data on DAU/FQP DATA ARINC inputs not connected. Check wiring.
page indicated as "ND". This
indicates that no data is being Failed DAU. Replace DAU. (See Note.)
received.
DAU FAIL FLAG shows “FAIL”. Failed DAU. Replace DAU. (See Note.)
Faulty Engine Sensor or Wiring. Check sensors and wiring.
FQP data on DAU/FQP DATA RS422 RECEIVE A and B lines Check wiring.
page indicated as "----". This are backwards.
indicates that invalid data is
being received. Failed DAU. Replace DAU. (See Note.)
FQP data on DAU/FQP DATA RS422 inputs not connected. Check wiring.
page indicated as "ND". This
indicates that invalid data is Failed DAU. Replace DAU. (See Note.)
being received
NOTE: Whenever a DAU is replaced, perform Engine Torque Indication Calibration, 77-10-00;
Fuel Quantity Indication Calibration, 28-40-00; and, Fuel System Functional Test, 28-00-00.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 77-40-00 7J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. EIDS Modes of Operation

The EDU is the operator interface to the EIDS. It has two modes of operation: Mission Operational
Mode and Test Mode.
(1) Mission Operational Mode is the default mode and provides the following displays in sequence:
Pilot’s EDU Copilot’s EDU
Initialization Page Initialization Page
Primary Display Exceedance Display
Reversionary Display Secondary Display
Exceedance Display Reversionary Display
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook, paragraph 7.8a for graphic examples of these
displays.
(a) These displays are accessed by repeatedly pressing the EDU “Page” button on the
bottom center of the EDU bezel until the desired page appears.
(b) The following parameters are included in each display:
1 Exceedance Data Display
- DATE - The date of the exceedance event1.
- TIME - The GMT time of the exceedance event2.
- PARAM - Identifies the physical measurement which caused the exceedance
event.
- PEAK - The maximum value attained by the parameter during the
exceedance event.
- DUR - The duration (DUR) is the elapsed time of the exceedance event.
NOTES: 1. If there is no GPS input available at the time of the exceedance event,
then the DATE field will display the default value of "----".
2. The time display is based upon a 24 hour clock; i.e. 1 PM is displayed as
13:00. If a GPS input is not available, the TIME field will be blank.
2 Primary Display
- TQ - Engine Torque in LB-FT.
- ITT - Inter Turbine Temperature in degrees Celsius
- NP - The propeller rotational rate in RPM
- NG% - The turbine rotational rate as compared with the maximum turbine
rotational rate, expressed as a percentage.
- FF - The Fuel Flow in Pounds Per Hour (PPH) (shown only during
engine start)
- ECTM - The ECTM cruise mode flag is illuminated when one of the ECTM
cruise modes is achieved.
- MAINT - The MAINT indicator is illuminated when a maintenance action is
required.
7J3 77-40-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 Secondary Display
- VAC - Vacuum Pump pressure in inches of mercury
- FF - Fuel Flow in PPH
- OIL °C - Oil Temperature in degrees Celsius.
- OIL PSI - Oil Pressure in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI)
- TOTAL FUEL - The sum of the fuel remaining in the left and right fuel tank groups
in pounds.
-L - The fuel remaining in the left tank group of the aircraft in pounds.
-R - The fuel remaining in the right tank group of the aircraft in pounds.
- OAT - The Outside Air Temperature in degrees Celsius.
- ETE - Estimated Time En Route is the GPS calculated value.3
- FAD - Fuel At Destination is the calculated fuel at destination value, in
pounds. 4
required.
- GPS - The GPS flag identifies the GPS unit which is on-line5
NOTES: 3. If a GPS is not available this display will show "ND".
4. If a GPS is not available this display will show "---".
5. If no GPS unit is on-line, this flag will not be displayed.
4 Reversionary Display
- TQ - Engine Torque in LB-FT.
- ITT - Inter Turbine Temperature in degrees Celsius
- NP - The propeller rotational rate in RPM
- NG% - The turbine rotational rate as compared with the maximum turbine
rotational rate, expressed as a percentage.
- OIL °C - Oil Temperature in degrees Celsius.
- OIL PSI - Oil Pressure in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI)
- OAT - The Outside Air Temperature in degrees Celsius.
- FF - The Fuel Flow in Pounds Per Hour (PPH)
- LT - The fuel remaining in the left tank group of the aircraft in pounds.
- RT - The fuel remaining in the right tank group of the aircraft in pounds.
required.
(2) Test Mode is the maintenance mode and is entered only if the “Page” button is held during
power-up until the initialization page is displayed. It provides the following displays in
sequence:
Initialization Page
Exceedance Display -- Test Mode
Primary Display -- Test Mode
Secondary Display -- Test Mode
Reversionary Display -- Test Mode
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 77-40-00 7J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EDU Data Page

Calibration Page
DAU / FQP Test Data Page
(a) These displays are accessed by repeatedly pressing the EDU “Page” button on the
bottom center of the EDU bezel until the desired page appears.
(b) The following displays are the same as in mission operation mode, except for the addition
of a “TESTMODE” flag:
Exceedance Display -- Test Mode (See Figure 1.)
Primary Display -- Test Mode
Secondary Display -- Test Mode
Reversionary Display -- Test Mode
EXCEEDANCE DATA
DATE TIME PARAM PEAK DUR
SYSTEM STATUS: PASS

PRESS PAGE TO RESUME MAINT
Exceedance Data Page

Figure 1
7J5 77-40-00 PAGE 5

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) The following parameters are included in each the other test mode displays:
1 EDU Data Page (See Figure 2.)
- SOFTWARE P/N - Identity of the EDU computer program which is being
executed.
- SOFTWARE REV - The revision level of the EDU computer program.
- INSTALL LOC - The position of this EDU in the aircraft, i.e., PRIMARY
position (pilot location) or SECONDARY position (co-pilot
location)
- FAIL FLAG - The result of the EDU built in test.
- CONFIG DISCRETES - The binary values assigned to the configuration discrete
inputs6.
NOTES: 6. The value of configuration discrete 15 is the first character on the left of
the display; the value of configuration discrete 0 is the right most
character.
EDU Data Page

Figure 2
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 77-40-00 7J6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 Calibration Page (See Figure 3.)
CA LIB R A TIO N
TORQUE
CH A CH B
68 % 68 %
NO T RE ADY READY
CAL L O V AL ID UNCAL LO
FUEL
L E FT R IG H T
6 3 .0 1 5 0 % 100. 000 %
NO T RE ADY READY
CAL HI V AL I D UNCAL HI
UNCAL L O UNCAL LO
TESTMODE
EDU Calibration Page

Figure 3
7J7 77-40-00 PAGE 7

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 DAU-FQP Data Page (See Figure 4.)

- DAU SOFTWARE KEY - Identifies the DAU computer program being executed.
- DAU SOFTWARE REV - Identity of the revision level of the DAU computer
program.
- DAU EQUIP ID - Identity of the version of the DAU to which the EDU is
connected.
- DAU CHANNEL ID - Identity of the DAU Channel to EDU ARINC Port
connectivity.7
- DAU FAIL FLAGS - The result of the DAU built in Test.
- DAU SOFTWARE KEY - Identifies the FQP computer program being executed.
- DAU SOFTWARE REV - Identity of the revision level of the FQP computer
program.
A display of "ND" for any por tion of the display indicates that there is a
communications problem between the EDU and the DAU. This can be the result of a
faulty EDU, faulty DAU, or faulty aircraft wiring.
NOTES: 7. Identifies which DAU channel is connected to ARINC Port A (CH A) of
the EDU and which DAU is connected to ARINC port B of the EDU.
EDU DAU - FQP Data Page

Figure 4
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 77-40-00 7J8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. EIDS Flags
The following flags are included in the above displays as indicated:
Flag Indication
MAINT A fault has been uncovered by either the DAU or EDU built in test
which requires a maintenance action.
FAIL FLAG
(EDU Data Page) Indicates if the MAINT flag illumination was the result of the EDU
being observed. A "FAIL" indicates that this unit is faulty.
FAIL FLAG
(DAU/FQP Data Page) Indicates if the MAINT flag illumination was the result of either
channel 1 or channel 2 of the DAU. A "FAIL" indicates that the
channel is faulty.
ECTM: CRUISE Mode Flag The display of this flag occurs when the aircraft achieves cruise
mode. Displays the present ECTM Cruise Mode, either Cruise Mode 1
or Cruise Mode 2.
GPS 1 Indicates that the EDU is displaying GPS information from GPS 1.
GPS 2 Indicates that the EDU is displaying GPS information from GPS 2.
D. EIDS Colors
The display will change colors to indicate the parameter being reported has entered a new range of
values, as an example, as the value for ITT leaves the normal range of values and enters the
cautionary range of values the graphical display for ITT will change from white to yellow and the
digital display for ITT will change from white on a black background to black on a yellow
background.
(1) Graphical Displays
White = Normal
Yellow = Caution
Red = Warning
Cyan = Flag
(2) Digital Displays
White on a Black Background = Normal
Black on Yellow Background = Caution
Black on Red Background = Warning
7J9 77-40-00 PAGE 9

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS -

In S/N’s 4697198, 4697216 and up, when the Avidyne FlightMax Entegra EFIS is installed, engine
instrumentation is integrated into the Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and Multi-Function Display (MFD).
The Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) collects and processes the raw sensor input and provides a refined
data stream to the PFDs and MFD which actually display the data.
See 28-40-00 and 77-10-00 for more information.
PUBLICATIONS.)
Line maintenance of this system is limited to basic troubleshooting and that is addressed in vendor
publications referenced in 34-20-00.
3. Engine Condition Trend Monitoring (ECTM)
In the interest of maintaining efficient engine performance, an Engine Condition Trend Monitoring
System has been established by Pratt & Whitney Canada. This is not a mandatory procedure, but is
highly recommended by Pratt & Whitney Canada and Piper. Introduction of the monitoring system when
engines are new or newly overhauled enables the establishment of a performance baseline before any
deterioration of components takes place within the engine. Engine condition can then be observed
without actual teardown of components. The complete procedure can be found in the Engine Condition
Trend Monitoring Analytical Guide (EAG) Manual P/N 3043607, latest revision, available from Pratt &
Whitney Canada.
Engine condition trend monitoring data is automatically recorded by the DAU for subsequent download
to a laptop. Meggitt “Test Mode Terminal” software is required to download this data and transfer (i.e. -
upload) it to the Pratt & Whitney Canada ECTM software.
The DAU ECTM Maintenance Port is located under the instrument panel near the co-pilot’s control
wheel. See also 91-95-00, Figure 1.
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 77-40-00 7J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7J11 77-40-00 PAGE 11

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 77-40-00 7J12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
79
OIL
7J13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07
79-20-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
79-30-00 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79 - OIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DISTRIBUTION 79-20-00 1 7J19

Oil Cooler Installation 1 7J19
INDICATING 79-30-00 1 7J21

Engine Oil Pressure 1 7J21
Engine Oil Temperature 1 7J21

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DISTRIBUTION
With the exception of the oil cooler and associated hoses (see Figure 1), the engine oil distribution
system is the standard Pratt & Whitney Canada installation described in P&WC Maintenance Manual -
Turboprop Gas Turbine Engine Model(s) PT6A-38/-40/-41/-42/-42A - Part No. (P/N) 3021442.
Engine Oil Cooler Installation

Figure 1
7J19 79-20-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 79-20-00 7J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING
NOTE: These airplanes are equipped with one of two Integrated Engine Instrument Systems, see
77-40-00 for more information.
1. Engine Oil Pressure (See Figure 1.)
The oil pressure transducer is mounted on an engine mount tube on the right side of the engine
compartment and can be accessed through the right engine access gull-wing door.
2. Engine Oil Temperature (See Figure 1.)
The oil temperature probe is mounted on the lower right side of the engine accessory case.
Engine Oil Pressure Transducer and Oil Temperature Probe Installation

Figure 1
7J21 79-30-00 PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 79-30-00 7J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7J23 79-30-00 PAGE 3

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 7J24 THRU 7L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 79-30-00 7J24
CARD 8 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

8A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
8A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 8A9
Effectivity 2 8A10
Pagination 2 8A10
Indexing 3 8A11
INDEX
Index 1 8B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
8B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 8B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
8B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 8B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
8B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 8B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
8B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 8B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
8B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
91
CHARTS & WIRING
DIAGRAMS
8C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-List of 1 Apr 15/07 91-21-20 1 Apr 15/07

3 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 91-21-30 1 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
91-10-00 1 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 91-21-50 1 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 91-22-10 1 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
26 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
27 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
28 Apr 15/07
29 Apr 15/07
30 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-22-10 (cont.) 15 Apr 15/07 17 Apr 15/07

16 Apr 15/07 18 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07 19 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07 20 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07 21 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07 22 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07 91-25-10 1 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
26 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
27 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
28 Apr 15/07
91-26-10 1 Apr 15/07
91-23-00 1 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
91-27-20 1 Apr 15/07
91-23-50 1 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 91-27-30 1 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
91-24-30 1 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 91-27-50 1 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91-28-20 (cont.) 1 Apr 15/07 91-30-60 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 91-31-30 1 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
91-28-40 1 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 91-31-50 1 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
91-29-10 1 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
91-30-10 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
91-30-30 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
91-30-40 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 - CHARTS & WIRING DIAGRAMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHARTS 91-10-00 1 8C15

Torque Requirements 1 8C15
Conversion Tables 2 8C20
Hose Specifications 2 8C20
Consumable Materials 2 8C20
Vendor Contact Information 2 8C20
Electrical Wire Coding 2 8C20
Electrical Symbols 2 8C20
WIRING DIAGRAMS (SCHEMATICS) 91-21-20 & up (See Note Below) 8E2
ATA Code Grid No. ATA Code Grid No.

2120 8E2 3440 9G4
2130 8E9 3450 9G12
2150 8E20 3510 9I2
2210 8F2 3720 9I4
2300 8G6 5270 9I6
2350 8G9 6120 9I8
2430 8G18 7210 9I16
2510 8H16 7420 9I18
2610 8H22 7740 9J1
2720 8I2 8010 9J12
2730 8I8 9500 9J15
2750 8I14
Subject Grid No.
2820 8I22
2840 8J6 ADF
2910 8J18 Dual (KR-87) 9H9
3010 8J24 Single 9H10
3030 8K4 Air Conditioning and Vent Blowers 8E20
3040 8K10 Airspeed Warning 9E22
3060 8K12 Alert Horn - Vmo 9F19
3130 8K18 Alternator System and Control 8H2
3150 8K21 Altimeter, Standby 9E24
3260 9C10 Annunciator 9G9
3310 9D2 Annunciator Dimming 8J13
3320 9E2 Annunciator Panel 8K21
3340 9E8 Attitude Indicator, Standby 9F4
3410 9E22 Audio 8G9
3420 9F6

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 - CHARTS &WIRING DIAGRAMS
WIRING DIAGRAMS (SCHEMATICS) (continued)
Subject Grid No. Subject Grid No.

Autopilot Entertainment Console 8H18
Meggitt/S-TEC 1500 Control 8G2 Fire Detection System 8H22
S-TEC MAGIC 1500 8F13 Flap Indicator 8I18
S-TEC System 550 8F3 Flaps 8I14
Avionics Cooling 8E4 Flight Hour Meter 8K18
Avionics Lighting 9D16 Fuel Filter 8J2
Blower, Vent Fuel Pressure 8I22
Cabin Recirculation 8E20 Fuel Pumps 8I22
Ground 8E2 Fuel Quantity
Cabin Lights 9E2 Left 8J6
Cabin Pressurization 8E12 Right 8J8
Cabin Pressurization Dump 8E16 Fuel Return Valve 8J13
Cabin Side Panel Lights 9E4 Fuel Temp. Indicator 8J10
Chip Detector 9I16 Sensor - Right 8J11
Circuit Breaker Panel Lighting 9D4 Generator System and Control 8H4
Clock 8H16 GI-106 9G22
Collins DME 9H7 GMA-340 9F22, 9G20, 9H6, 9H7, 9H9, 9H10
COM/NAV #2 9G16 GMA-340 Audio/Mkr/Intercom 8G9
Console, Entertainment 8H18 GNS 430 9G20
Cooling, Avionics 8E4 Dual (#1 and #2) 9H6, 9H8
Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) 8J7, 8J9, 9J1 GNS-530 #1 9G12
DC 50 Antenna Coupler 9G1 GNS-530 #2 9G16
Deice GPS# 2 9G16
Propeller 8K12 Ground Clearance 8G6
Surface 8J24 GTX 327 9G24
Wing 8J24 GTX 330 9H2
Digital Voice Recorder Clock 8H16 Dual 9H4
Display, Engine Data 9J7 Heated Windshield 8K10
Door Ajar Warning 9I6 Hour Meter 8K18
Electric Flaps 8I14 Hydraulic Pump 8J18
Electroluminescent Panel Lighting 9D4 Ignition 9I18
ELT Power: 8H17 IHAS 9G8
Emergency Pressurization Valve 8E10, 8E12 IND-450 9H7
Engine 9J1 IND-650A 9H10
Chip Detector 9I16 Instrument Panel
Data Acquisition 9J1 Post Lights 9D8
Data Display 9J7 Switch Lights 9D12
Data Monitoring 9J1 Intercom 8G9
Ignition 9I18 J Block Diagrams 8H9
PY Line Heaters 9I18 KA-44B Antenna 9H9
KDI 572 9H6
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

KI-227-00 Indicator 9H9 Panel (Post) Lights 9D8
KMH 820 9F24, 9G8 Panel LCD Lighting 9D20
KN-63 DME 9H6 Panel Switch Lights 9D12
KR-87 ADF 9H9 Pitot Heat 8K4
KRA 10A Radar Altimeter 9G1 Position Lights 9E8
Landing Gear Position Indicators 9C10 Power Distribution 8G18
Landing Gear Warning 9C12 Pressurization 8E10, 8E12, 8E16
Landing Lights 9E16 Primary Flight Display
Lift Detector Heat 8K6 Dual PFD 9F22
Lights 9D2 PFD #1 9F20
Avionics 9D16, 9D20 PFD #2 9F21
Cabin 9E2 Propeller 9I8
Cabin Side Panel 9E4 Deice 8K12
Circuit Breaker Panel 9D4 Feather 9I10
Courtesy 9E2 Heat 8K12
Ice 9E14 Overspeed Governor 9I14
Instrument Panel Posts 9D8 Reverse Lockout 9I8
Instrument Panel Switches 9D12 Radar, Weather 9G4
Landing 9E16 RCR-650D ADF 9H10
LCD Panel 9D20 Recorder, Digital Voice 8H16
Map 9D2 Relay, Computer Fail Logic 8I9
Navigation 9E8 Rudder Meter 8G22
Oxygen Cabinet 9D12 Rudder Trim 8I2
Position 9E8 Stall Detection and Warning 8I8
Recognition 9E16 Standby Altimeter 9E24
Strobe 9E8 Standby Attitude Indicator 9F4
Tail 9E12 Stormscope 9G7
Taxi 9E16 Strobe Lights 9E8
Wing Inspection 9E14 Summing Amp 8G14, 9G1
Map Lights 9D2 Surface Deice 8J24
Marker Beacon 8G9 Switch Lights, Panel 9D12
Meters 8G22 Tail Light: 9E12
MFD 9F24 Taxi/Recognition Lights 9E16
Monitoring Engine Data 9J1 TCR-451 9H7
NAV/COM #2 9G16 Transponder 9G24
Navigation Lights 9E8 Dual GTX 330 9H4
Oil Pressure Switch 8K18 GTX 327 9G24
Overhead Switch Panel 9I9, 9I15, 9I19 GTX 330 9H2
Overspeed Horn 9E22 Vacuum System 9I4
Oxygen Generator System 9I2 Volt/Amp Meters 8G22
Weather Radar 9G4

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Subject Grid No.

Windshield, Heated 8K10
Wing Deice 8J24
Wing Inspection (Ice) Light 9E14
XM Satellite Receiver 9G1
Wire Coding 8D17
NOTE: Card 9 grid numbers, above, may be erroneous if Card 9 has been updated subsequent to this
revision of Card 8. See Chapter 91 (Continued) Table of Contents on Card 9.
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHARTS
1. Torque Requirements (PIR-PPS20015-1, Rev. S.)
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTORQUE FITTINGS.

Chart 1 lists the torque values for flared fittings of various sizes and material.
NOTE: When installing flared fittings, verify that male threads are properly lubricated.
The torque values given in Chart 2 are derived from oil-free cadmium-plated threads and are
recommended for all airframe installation procedures where torquing is required, unless other values are
specified in subject chapter/section. Engine torque values are found in the latest revision of Pratt &
Whitney Canada PT6A-38-41-42-42A Overhaul Manual No. 3021443: and propeller torque values are
found in 61-10-00.
NOTE: If normal operation requires movement between any of the components being clamped
together, tighten the nut (or bolt) enough to insure intended operation of the assembly.
A. Calibrate the torque wrench periodically to assure accuracy, and recheck frequently.
B. If the fastener, screw, or nut is listed in Chart 2, but the mating fastener is not listed, tighten only to
the low end of the torque range specified for the listed fastener. In addition, the following limitations
shall apply:
(1) Fastener and nut threads shall be clean and dry (free of lubricants). If the subject
chapter/section requires the fastener and/or nut to be lubricated prior to tightening and does
not specify a torque requirement, use the Chart 2 torque range reduced 50 percent.
(2) Chart 2, Sheet 1, shall be used for free running nuts, provided minimal friction drag is
determined as specified below.
CHART 1
FLARE FITTING TORQUE VALUES
Torque — Inch-Pounds
Tubing Aluminum - Alloy Steel Tubing Hose End Fitting
OD Tubing Flare - and Flare and
Inches 10061 or 10078 and 10061 Hose Assemblies
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
1/8 ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ———
3/16 ——— ——— 90 100 70 100
1/4 40 65 135 150 70 120
5/16 60 80 180 200 85 180
3/8 75 125 270 300 100 250
1/2 150 250 450 500 210 420
5/8 200 350 650 700 300 480
3/4 300 500 900 1000 500 850
1 500 700 1200 1400 500 1150
1-1/4 600 900 ——— ——— ——— ———
1-1/2 600 900 ——— ——— ——— ———
1-3/4 ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ———
2 ——— ——— ——— ——— ——— ———
8C15 91-10-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) The friction drag torque can be determined as follows: Run the nut down to near contact (but
not in contact) with the bearing surface and check the "friction drag torque" required to turn the
nut.
NOTE: Check the friction drag torque by attaching a scale type torque wrench to the nut and
determining the torque required to turn the nut on the bolt. (Before the nut makes
contact with the bearing surface.)
(4) The friction drag torque (if any) shall be added to the desired torque specified in Chart 2,
Sheet 1. This final torque should register on the indicator or be the setting for a snap-over
torque limiting device.
(5) Torque requirements do not apply to cross recessed or slotted screws or to fasteners installed
into rivnuts, pressnuts or other nuts not designed to rotate for wrenching at the fastener unless
otherwise specified in the subject chapter/section.
(6) Fasteners listed in Chart 2 installed into nutplates, and which are accessible to be torqued at
the fastener, must be tightened to the low end of the torque range specified in the appropriate
“shear” column. Torque requirements do not apply if the fastener can not be torqued due to
torque device accessibility.
NOTE: When the fastener is stationary and the nut is torqued, use the lower side of the torque
range.
When the nut is stationary and the fastener is torqued, use the higher side of the torque
range. In this case, ensure one (1) washer is installed under the head as follows:
(a) If the subject chapter/section does not specify the use of a washer under the head,
install one (1) NAS1149 .032 thick washer under the head. If additional washers are
required under nut to adjust for grip length variation as described under Threaded
Fastener Installation in 20-00-00: reduce them .032 to allow for the additional .032
washer now installed under head. Check to ensure threads are not bearing loads, due
to the added .032 washer thickness.
(b) All added washers are to be of the correct diameter, material and finish that matches
the fastener being installed.
(7) Apply a smooth even pull when applying torque pressure. If chattering or a jerking motion
occurs during final torque, back off and re-torque.
(8) When installing a castellated nut, start alignment with the cotter pin hole at minimum
recommended torque, and do not exceed maximum recommended torque. If the hole in the
fastener shank and the nut castellation do not align within this range, change washers and try
again. Do not exceed the maximum recommended torque. If self-locking castellated nuts are
used, include friction drag torque.
(9) Unless otherwise specified in the subject chapter/section, when castellated nuts are used with
a cotter pin on moving joints, the nut shall not be torqued to Chart 2 values. Nuts shall be
tightened to remove looseness in the joint and then the cotter pin installed.
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8C16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Gap Conditions Between Parts Attached with Threaded Fasteners

If a gap condition exists between mating parts where a threaded fastener is to be installed, install
fasteners and associated hardware per subject chapter/section or to buildup noted during removal.
Then, torque to a value 10% of the final torque required plus the friction drag torque.
For example, if Chart 2, Sheet 2, torque is 190 in.-lbs. and the friction drag torque of the nut is 80
in.-lbs. (i.e. - Chart 2, Sheet 2, torque minus Chart 2, Sheet 1, torque), torque to a value of:
Maximum Permissible
Gap Closing Torque = (Chart 2, Sheet 1, torque x .10) + (Sheet 2 - Sheet 1) torque
Example: 3/8-24 (190 x .10) + (270-190) = 19 + 80 = 99 in.-lbs.
Accomplish this for all fasteners common to the gapped interface. If no gap exists after
accomplishing the above, finish torquing to final torque. If a gap remains consult your Piper Dealer’s
Service Advisor (DSA) for further assistance.
D. After the final torque, apply a slippage mark to the nut or bolt or screw head as applicable.
NOTE: For more details on torquing, refer to FAA AC 43.13-1, latest revision.
8C17 91-10-00 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECOMMENDED NUT TORQUES
Bolts - Steel Bolts - Aluminum
AN 3 thru AN 20 MS 20004 AN 3DD Series
AN 42 thru AN 49 NAS 333 thru NAS 340
AN 525 NAS 464
MS 20033 thru MS 20046 NAS 624 thru NAS 644
MS 20073 NAS 1580
MS 20074 NAS 6203 thru NAS 6220
MS 24694 NAS 6603 thru NAS 6620
MS 27039 NAS 6703 thru NAS 6720
Nuts - Steel Nuts - Aluminum
Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
AN 310 AN 320 AN 310 AN 320 AN 310D AN 320D
AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315D
MS 20365 MS 21083 MS 20365 MS 21083
MS 21042 MS 21245 MS 21042 MS 21245
MS 21044 MS 21044
MS 21045 MS 21045
NAS 679 NAS 679
FINE THREAD SERIES - ADD FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
8-36 12 15 7 9 5 10 3 6
10-32 20 25 12 15 25 30 15 20 10 15 5 10
1/4-28 50 70 30 40 80 100 50 60 30 45 15 30
5/16-24 100 140 60 85 120 145 70 90 40 65 25 40
3/8-24 160 190 95 110 200 250 120 150 75 110 45 70
7/16-20 450 500 270 300 520 630 300 400 180 280 110 170
1/2-20 480 690 290 410 770 950 450 550 280 410 160 260
9/16-18 800 1,000 480 600 1,100 1,300 650 800 380 580 230 360
5/8-18 1,100 1,300 660 780 1,250 1,550 750 950 550 670 270 420
3/4-16 2,300 2,500 1,300 1,500 2,650 3,200 1,600 1,900 950 1,250 560 880
7/8-14 2,500 3,000 1,500 1,800 3,550 4,350 2,100 2,690 1,250 1,900 750 1,200
1-14 3,700 4,500 2,200 3,300 4,500 5,500 2,700 3,300 1,600 2,400 950 1,500
1-1/8-12 5,000 7,000 3,000 4,200 6,000 7,300 3,600 4,400 2,100 3,200 1,250 2,000
1-1/4-12 9,000 11,000 5,400 6,600 11,000 13,400 6,600 8,000 3,900 5,600 2,300 3,650
COARSE THREAD SERIES - ADD FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max.
8-32 12 15 7 9
10-24 20 25 12 15
1/4-20 40 50 25 30 NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, torque size No. 6
5/16-18 80 90 48 55 screws used with self-locking nutplates to no greater
3/8-16 160 185 95 110 than 4 to 5 in.-lbs.
7/16-14 235 255 140 155 Use an appropriately calibrated driver.
1/2-13 400 480 240 290
9/16-12 500 700 300 420
5/8-11 700 900 420 540
3/4-10 1,150 1,600 700 950
7/8-9 2,200 3,000 1,300 1,800
1-8 3,700 5,000 2,200 3,000
1-1/8-8 5,500 6,500 3,300 4,000
1-1/4-8 6,500 8,000 4,000 5,000
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECOMMENDED NUT TORQUES
Bolts - Steel Bolts - Aluminum
AN 3 thru AN 20 MS 20004 AN 3DD Series
AN 42 thru AN 49 NAS 333 thru NAS 340
AN 525 NAS 464
MS 20033 thru MS 20046 NAS 624 thru NAS 644
MS 20073 NAS 1580
MS 20074 NAS 6203 thru NAS 6220
MS 24694 NAS 6603 thru NAS 6620
MS 27039 NAS 6703 thru NAS 6720
Nuts - Steel Nuts - Aluminum
Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear
AN 310 AN 320 AN 310 AN 320 AN 310D AN 320D
AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315 MS 20364 AN 315D
MS 20365 MS 21083 MS 20365 MS 21083
MS 21042 MS 21245 MS 21042 MS 21245
MS 21044 MS 21044
MS 21045 MS 21045
NAS 679 NAS 679
FINE THREAD SERIES - INCLUDES FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
10-32 38 43 30 33 43 48 33 38 28 33 23 28
1/4-28 65 100 60 70 110 130 80 90 60 75 45 60
5/16-24 160 200 120 145 180 205 130 150 100 125 85 100
3/8-24 240 270 175 190 280 330 200 230 155 190 125 150
7/16-20 550 600 370 400 620 730 400 500 280 380 210 270
COARSE THREAD SERIES - INCLUDES FRICTION DRAG
Nut-Bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits
Size In.-Lbs. In.-Lbs.
Min. Max. Min. Max. NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, torque size No. 6
8-32 27 30 22 24 screws used with self-locking nutplates to no greater
10-24 38 43 30 33 than 4 to 5 in.-lbs.
1/4-20 70 80 55 60 Use an appropriately calibrated driver.
5/16-18 140 150 108 115
3/8-16 240 265 175 190
7/16-14 335 355 240 255
8C19 91-10-00 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Conversion Tables
The following charts contain various conversion data that may be useful when figuring capacities,
lengths, temperatures, and various weights and measures from the English system to the metric system
or back again:
Chart 3, Torque Conversion
Chart 4, Decimal Conversions
Chart 5, Temperature Conversion
Chart 6, Weights and Measures Conversion
Chart 7, Metric Conversion
Chart 8, Drill Sizes
3. Hose Specifications
See Chart 9.
4. Consumable Materials
See Chart 10.
5. Vendor Contact Information
See Chart 11.
6. Electrical Wire Coding
See Chart 12.
7. Electrical Symbols
See Chart 13.
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 3
TORQUE CONVERSION
INCH POUNDS (IN.-LBS.) TO CENTIMETER KILOGRAMS (CMKG.)

CENTIMETER KILOGRAMS (CMKG.) TO INCH POUNDS (IN.-LBS.)
FOOT POUNDS (FT.-LBS.) TO METER KILOGRAMS (MKG.)
METER KILOGRAMS (MKG.) TO FOOT-POUNDS (FT.-LBS.)
IN.-LBS. CMKG. FT.-LBS. MKG. FT.-LBS. MKG. MKG. FT.-LBS.

5 5.76 2.5 .346 115 15.900 1 7.23
10 11.52 5 .691 120 16.591 2 14.46
15 17.28 7.5 1.037 125 17.282 3 21.69
20 23.04 10 1.383 130 17.974 4 28.98
25 28.80 12.5 1.728 135 18.665 5 36.16
30 34.56 15 2.074 140 19.356 6 43.39
35 40.32 17.5 2.419 145 10.047 7 50.63
40 46.08 20 2.765 150 20.739 8 57.86
45 51.84 22.5 3.111 155 21.430 9 65.09
50 57.60 25 3.456 160 22.121 10 72.32
55 63.36 27.5 3.802 165 22.813 11 79.56
60 69.12 30 4.148 170 23.504 12 86.79
65 74.88 32.5 4.493 175 24.195 13 94.02
70 80.64 35 4.839 180 24.887 14 101.26
75 86.40 37.5 5.185 185 25.578 15 108.49
80 92.16 40 5.530 190 26.269 16 115.72
85 97.92 42.5 5.876 195 26.960 17 122.95
90 103.68 45 6.222 200 27.652 18 130.19
95 109.44 47.5 6.567 105 28.343 19 137.42
100 115.20 50 6.913 210 29.034 20 144.65
105 120.96 52.5 7.258 215 29.726 21 151.89
110 126.72 55 7.604 220 30.417 22 159.12
115 132.48 57.5 7.950 225 31.108
120 138.24 60 8.295 230 31.800
62.5 8.641 235 32.491
CMKG. IN.-LBS. 65 8.987 240 33.182
67.5 9.332 245 33.873
50 43.4
70 9.678 250 34.565
100 86.8
72.5 10.024 255 35.256
150 130.2
75 10.369 260 35.947
200 173.6
77.5 10.715 265 36.639
250 217.0
80 11.060 270 37.330
300 260.4
82.5 11.406 275 38.021
350 303.8
85 11.752 280 38.713
400 347.2
87.5 12.097 285 39.404
450 390.6
90 12.443 290 40.095
500 434.0
92.5 12.789 295 40.786
550 477.4
95 13.134 300 41.478
600 520.8
97.5 13.480
650 564.2
100 13.826
700 607.6
105 14.517
110 15.208
8C21 91-10-00 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 4
DECIMAL CONVERSIONS
8C23 91-10-00 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 5
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
CENTIGRADE - FAHRENHEIT
Example: To convert 20°C, to Fahrenheit, find 20 in the center column headed (°F - °C);
then read 68.0°F, in the column (°F) to the right. To conver t 20°F, to
Centigrade; find 20 in the center column and read -6.67°C, in the (°C) column
to the left.
°C °F - °C °F °C °F - °C °F
-56.7 -70 -94.0 104.44 220 428.0
-51.1 -60 -76.0 110.00 230 446.0
- 45.6 -50 -58.0 115.56 240 464.0
- 40.0 -40 -40.0 121.11 250 482.0
- 34.0 -30 -22.0 126.67 260 500.0
- 38.9 -20 -4.0 132.22 270 518.0
- 23.3 -10 14.0 137.78 280 536.0
- 17.8 0 32.0 143.33 290 554.0
-12.22 10 50.0 148.89 300 572.0
-6.67 20 68.0 154.44 310 590.0
-1.11 30 86.0 160.00 320 608.0
4.44 40 104.0 165.56 330 626.0
10.00 50 122.0 171.11 340 644.0
15.56 60 140.0 176.67 350 662.0
21.11 70 158.0 182.22 360 680.0
26.67 80 176.0 187.78 370 698.0
32.22 90 194.0 193.33 380 716.0
27.78 100 212.0 198.89 390 734.0
43.33 110 230.0 204.44 400 752.0
38.89 120 248.0 210.00 410 770.0
54.44 130 266.0 215.56 420 788.0
60.00 140 284.0 221.11 430 806.0
65.56 150 302.0 226.67 440 824.0
71.00 160 320.0 232.22 450 842.0
76.67 170 338.0 257.78 460 860.0
82.22 180 356.0 243.33 470 878.0
87.78 190 374.0 248.89 480 896.0
93.33 200 392.0 254.44 490 914.0
98.89 210 410.0 260.00 500 932.0
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8C24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 6
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES CONVERSION
MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN

CENTIMETERS 0.3937 IN. KILOGRAMS 2.205 LB.
0.03281 FT. 35.27 OZ.
1000 GRAMS
CU. CENTIMETERS 0.001 LITERS
0.06102 CU. IN. LITERS 1000 CU. CM.
0.0002642 U.S. GAL. 61.03 CU. IN.
0.03532 CU. FT.
CU. FT. 28.320 CU. CM.
0.2642 U.S. GAL.
1.728 CU. IN.
0.22 IMPERIAL GAL.
7.481 U.S. GAL.
1.057 QUARTS
28.32 LITERS
METERS 39.37 IN.
CU. IN. 16.39 CU. CM.
3.281 FT.
0.01639 LITERS
1000 MM.
0.004329 U.S. GAL.
0.01732 QUARTS METER-KILOGRAM 7.233 FT.-LB.
9.807 JOULES
CU. METERS 1000000 CU. CM.
35.314 CU. FT. OUNCES, AVDP 0.0625 LB., AVDP
61.023 CU. IN. 28.35 GRAMS
264.17 GAL. 437.5 GRAINS
999.97 LITERS
OUNCES, FLUID 29.57 CU. CM.
FEET 0.3048 METERS 1.805 CU. IN.
12.000 MILS
LB., AVDP 453.6 GRAMS
304.8 MM.
7000 GRAINS
0.3333 YARDS
16.0 OUNCES
FT.-LB. 0.1383 M-KG
SQUARE INCH 6.4516 SQ. CM.
0.001285 BTU
0.000000376 KW-HR POUND PER 0.0703 KG.-CM
SQUARE INCH SQUARED
FLUID OZ. 8 DRAM
(PSI)
29.6 CU. CM.
STATUTE MILE 1.609 KILOMETER
GAL., IMPERIAL 277.4 CU. IN.
0.8684 NAUTICAL MILE
1.201 U.S. GAL.
4.546 LITERS NAUTICAL MILE 1.151 STATUTE
MILE
GAL., U.S. DRY 268.8 CU. IN.
0.1556 CU. FT. QUART .9463 LITER
1.164 U.S. GAL., LIQ.
4.405 LITERS MILLIMETER 1000 MICRON
GAL., U.S. LIQ. 231.0 CU. IN. MICRON 0.001 MILLIMETER

0.1337 CU. FT. 0.000039 INCH
3.785 LITERS INCH 11.521 METER
0.8327 IMPERIAL GAL. POUNDS GRAMS
128 FLUID OZ.
INCH 0.72 METER
IN. 2.540 CM. OUNCES GRAMS
.08333 FT.
POUNDS 0.453 KILOGRAMS
JOULES 0.000948 BTU
0.7376 FT.-LB.
8D1 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 7
METRIC CONVERSION
Example: Convert 1.5 inches to millimeters.
(1) Read down inches column to 1. inches.
(2) Read across top inch column to 0.5.
(3) Read down and across to find millimeters (1.5 inches is 38.10 millimeters).
INCHES TO MILLIMETER
INCHES 0.0000 0.0001 0.0002 0.0003 0.0004 0.0005 0.0006 0.0007 0.0008 0.0009
MILLIMETER
0.000 0.0025 0.0050 0.0076 0.0101 0.0127 0.0152 0.0177 0.0203 0.0228
0.001 0.0254 0.0279 0.0304 0.0330 0.0355 0.0381 0.0406 0.0431 0.0457 0.0482
0.002 0.0508 0.0533 0.0558 0.0584 0.0609 0.0635 0.0660 0.0685 0.0711 0.0736
0.003 0.0762 0.0812 0.0838 0.0863 0.0889 0.0914 0.0939 0.0965 0.0965 0.0990
0.004 0.1016 0.1041 0.1066 0.1092 0.1117 0.1143 0.1168 0.1193 0.1219 0.1244
0.005 0.1270 0.1295 0.1320 0.1346 0.1371 0.1397 0.1422 0.1447 0.1447 0.1498
0.006 0.1524 0.1549 0.1574 0.1600 0.1625 0.1651 0.1676 0.1701 0.1727 0.1752
0.007 0.1778 0.1803 0.1828 0.1854 0.1879 0.1905 0.1930 0.1955 0.1981 0.2006
0.008 0.2032 0.2057 0.2082 0.2108 0.2133 0.2159 0.2184 0.2209 0.2235 0.2260
0.009 0.2286 0.2311 0.2336 0.2362 0.2387 0.2413 0.2438 0.2463 0.2489 0.2514
INCHES 0.000 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009
MILLIMETER
0.00 0.025 0.050 0.076 0.101 0.127 0.152 0.177 0.203 0.228
0.01 0.254 0.279 0.304 0.330 0.355 0.381 0.406 0.431 0.457 0.482
0.02 0.508 0.533 0.558 0.584 0.609 0.635 0.660 0.685 0.711 0.736
0.03 0.762 0.787 0.812 0.838 0.863 0.889 0.914 0.939 0.965 0.990
0.04 1.016 1.041 1.066 1.092 1.117 1.143 1.168 1.193 1.219 1.244
0.05 1.270 1.295 1.320 1.346 1.371 1.397 1.422 1.447 1.473 1.498
0.06 1.524 1.549 1.574 1.600 1.625 1.651 1.676 1.701 1.727 1.752
0.07 1.778 1.803 1.828 1.854 1.879 1.905 1.930 1.955 1.981 2.006
0.08 2.032 2.057 2.082 2.108 2.133 2.159 2.184 2.209 2.235 2.260
0.09 2.286 2.311 2.336 2.362 2.387 2.413 2.438 2.463 2.489 2.514
INCHES 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
MILLIMETER
0.0 0.254 0.508 0.762 0.016 1.270 1.524 1.778 2.032 2.286
0.1 2.540 2.794 3.048 3.302 3.556 3.810 4.064 4.318 4.572 4.826
0.2 5.080 5.334 5.558 5.842 6.096 6.350 6.604 6.858 7.112 7.366
0.3 7.620 7.874 8.128 8.382 8.636 8.890 9.144 9.398 9.652 9.906
0.4 10.160 10.414 10.668 10.922 11.176 11.430 11.684 11.938 12.192 12.446
0.5 12.700 12.954 13.208 13.462 13.716 13.970 14.224 14.478 14.732 14.986
0.6 15.240 15.494 15.748 16.002 16.256 16.510 16.764 17.018 17.272 17.526
0.7 17.780 18.034 18.288 18.542 18.796 19.050 19.304 19.558 19.812 20.066
0.8 20.320 20.574 20.828 21.082 21.336 21.590 21.844 22.098 22.352 22.606
0.9 22.860 23.114 23.368 23.622 23.876 24.130 24.384 24.638 24.892 25.146
INCHES 0.00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
MILLIMETER
0.0 2.54 5.08 7.62 10.16 12.70 15.24 17.78 20.32 22.86
1.0 25.40 27.94 30.48 33.02 35.56 38.10 40.64 43.18 45.72 48.26
2.0 50.80 53.34 55.88 58.42 60.96 63.50 66.04 68.58 71.12 73.66
3.0 76.20 78.74 81.28 83.82 86.36 88.90 91.44 93.98 96.52 99.06
4.0 101.60 104.14 106.68 109.22 111.76 114.30 116.84 119.38 121.92 124.46
5.0 127.00 129.54 132.08 134.62 137.16 139.70 142.24 144.78 147.32 149.86
6.0 152.40 154.94 157.48 160.02 162.56 165.10 167.64 170.18 172.72 175.26
7.0 177.80 180.34 182.88 185.42 187.96 190.50 193.04 195.58 198.12 200.66
8.0 203.20 205.74 208.28 210.82 213.36 215.90 218.44 220.98 223.52 226.06
9.0 228.60 231.14 233.68 236.22 238.76 241.30 243.84 246.38 248.92 251.46
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 8
DRILL SIZES
Decimal/Millimeter Equivalents of Drill Sizes From 1/2" to No. 80
Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter
Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv.
1/2 0.500 12.7000 G 0.261 6.6294 5/32 0.1562 3.9687 51 0.067 1.7018
31/64 0.4843 12.3031 F 0.257 6.5278 23 0.154 3.9116 52 0.0635 1.6129
15/32 0.4687 11.9062 E-1/4 0.250 6.3500 24 0.152 3.8608 1/16 0.0625 1.5875
29/64 0.4531 11.5094 D 0.246 6.2484 25 0.1495 3.7973 53 0.0595 1.5113
7/16 0.4375 11.1125 C 0.242 6.1468 26 0.147 3.7338 54 0.055 1.397
27/64 0.4218 10.7156 B 0.238 6.0452 27 0.144 3.6576 55 0.052 1.3208

Z 0.413 10.4902 15/64 0.2343 5.9531 9/64 0.1406 3.5719 3/64 0.0468 1.1906
13/32 0.4062 10.3187 A 0.234 5.9436 28 0.1405 3.5687 56 0.0465 1.1811
Y 0.404 10.2616 1 0.228 5.7912 29 0.136 3.4544 57 0.043 1.0922
X 0.397 10.0838 2 0.221 5.6134 30 0.01285 3.2639 58 0.042 1.0668
25/64 0.3906 9.9212 7/32 0.2187 5.5562 1/8 0.125 3.1750 59 0.041 1.0414
W 0.386 9.8044 3 0.213 5.4102 31 0.120 3.048 60 0.040 1.016
V 0.377 9.5758 4 0.209 5.3086 32 0.116 2.9464 61 0.039 0.9906
3/8 0.375 9.5250 5 0.2055 5.2197 33 0.113 2.8702 62 0.038 0.9652
U 0.368 9.3472 6 0.204 5.1816 34 0.111 2.8194 63 0.037 0.9398
23/64 0.3593 9.1262 13/64 0.2031 5.1594 35 0.110 2.794 64 0.036 0.9144
T 0.358 9.1281 7 0.201 5.1054 7/64 0.1093 2.7781 65 0.035 0.899
S 0.346 8.7884 8 0.199 5.0546 36 0.1065 2.7051 66 0.033 0.8382
11/32 0.3437 8.7300 9 0.196 4.9784 37 0.104 2.6416 1/32 0.0312 0.7937
R 0.339 8.6106 10 0.1935 4.9149 38 0.1015 2.5781 67 0.032 0.8128
Q 0.332 8.4328 11 0.191 4.8514 39 0.0995 2.5273 68 0.031 0.7874

21/64 0.3281 8.3337 12 0.189 4.8006 40 0.098 2.4892 69 0.029 0.7366
P 0.323 8.2042 3/16 0.1875 4.7625 41 0.096 2.4384 70 0.028 0.7112
O 0.316 8.0264 13 0.185 4.699 3/32 0.0937 2.3812 71 0.026 0.6604
5/16 0.3125 7.9375 14 0.182 4.6228 42 0.0935 2.3749 72 0.025 0.635
N 0.302 7.6708 15 0.180 4.572 43 0.089 2.2606 73 0.024 0.0696

19/64 0.2968 7.5387 16 0.177 4.4958 44 0.086 2.1844 74 0.0229 0.58166
M 0.295 7.4930 17 0.173 4.3942 45 0.082 2.0828 75 0.021 0.5334
L 0.290 7.3660 11/64 0.1718 4.3656 46 0.081 2.0574 76 0.020 0.508
9/32 0.2812 7.1425 18 0.1695 4.3053 47 0.0785 1.9939 77 0.018 0.4572
K 0.281 7.1374 19 0.166 4.2164 5/64 0.0781 1.9844 1/64 0.0156 0.3969
J 0.277 7.0358 20 0.161 4.0894 48 0.076 1.9304 78 0.016 0.4064
I 0.272 6.9088 21 0.159 4.0386 49 0.073 1.8542 79 0.0145 0.3683
H 0.266 6.7564 22 0.157 3.9878 50 0.070 1.778 80 0.0135 0.3429
17/64 0.2656 6.7462
DRILL SIZES AVAILABLE

Drill may be obtained in regular sizes to a 4 inch diameter, and increase in 64ths of an inch. The regular metric drills vary
from 2 to 76mm and increase in 0.5mm variations.
8D3 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 9
HOSE SPECIFICATIONS
SINGLE WIRE BRAID FABRIC COVERED
TUBE HOSE HOSE RECOMMENDED MIN MAX MIN

MIL SIZE SIZE SIZE OPER. BURST PROOF BEND
PART NO. O.D. I.D. O.D. PRESS PRESS PRESS RADIUS
MIL-H-8794- 3-L 3/16 1/8 .45 3,000 12,000 6,000 3.00

MIL-H-8794- 4-L 1/16 3/16 .52 3,000 12,000 6,000 3.00
MIL-H-8794- 5-L 5/16 1/4 .58 3,000 10,000 5,000 3.38
MIL-H-8794- 6-L 3/8 5/16 .67 2,000 9,000 4,500 4.00
MIL-H-8794- 8-L 1/2 13/32 .77 2,000 8,000 4,000 4.63
MIL-H-8794-10-L 5/8 1/2 .92 1,750 7,000 3,500 5.50
MIL-H-8794-12-L 3/4 5/8 1.08 1,500 6,000 3,000 6.50
MIL-H-8794-16-L 1 7/8 1.23 800 3,200 1,600 7.38
MIL-H-8794-20-L 1 1/4 1 1/8 1.50 600 2,500 1,250 9.00
MIL-H-8794-24-L 1 1/2 1 3/8 1.75 500 2,000 1,000 11.00
MIL-H-8794-32-L 2 1 13/16 2.22 300 1,400 700 13.25
MIL-H-8794-40-L 2 1/2 2 3/8 2.88 200 1,000 300 24.00
MIL-H-8794-48-L 3 3 3.56 200 800 300 33.00
Construction: Seamless synthetic Uses: Hose is approved for use in

rubber inner tube reinforced with aircraft hydraulic, pneumatic, coolant,
one fiber braid, one braid of high fuel and oil systems.
tensile steel wire and covered with
an oil resistant rubber impregnated Operating Temperatures:
fiber braid. Sizes -3 thru -12: Minus 65°F. to plus
Identification: Hose is identified by 250°F.
specification number, size number, Sizes -16 thru -48: Minus 40°F to
quar ter year and year, hose plus 275°F.
manufacturer's identification.
NOTE: Maximum temperatures and
pressures should not be used
simultaneously.
MULTIPLE WIRE BRAID RUBBER COVERED
TUBE HOSE HOSE RECOMMENDED MIN MAX MIN

MIL SIZE SIZE SIZE OPER. BURST PROOF BEND
PART NO. O.D. I.D. O.D. PRESS PRESS PRESS RADIUS
MIL-H-8788- 4-L 1/4 7/32 .63 3,000 16,000 8,000 3.00

MIL-H-8788- 5-L 5/16 9/32 .70 3,000 14,000 7,000 3.38
MIL-H-8788- 6-L 3/8 11/32 .77 3,000 14,000 7,000 5.00
MIL-H-8788- 8-L 1/2 7/16 .86 3,000 14,000 7,000 5.75
MIL-H-8788-10-L 5/8 9/16 1.03 3,000 12,000 6,000 6.50
MIL-H-8788-12-L 3/4 11/16 1.22 3,000 12,000 6,000 7.75
MIL-H-8788-16-L 1.00 7/8 1.50 3,000 10,000 5,000 9.63
Hose Construction: Seamless synthetic rubber inner tube reinforced with Uses: High pressure hydraulic,
one fabric braid, two or more steel wire braids, and covered with a pneumatic, coolant, fuel and oil.
synthetic rubber cover (for gas applications, request perforated cover).
Operating Temperature:
Identification: Hose is identified by specification number, size number,
quarter year and year, hose manufacturer's identification. Minus 65°F to plus 200°F.
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
MATERIAL SPECIFICATION PRODUCT VENDOR

ABS-Solvent/ Solarite, #11 Series Solar Compounds Corp.
Cements
Adhesive EC 801 Minnesota Mining and
EC 807 Manufacturing
EC 1357 Adhesive Coating and
Scotch Grip 210 Sealers Division
(Rubber Adhesive)
Anti-Galling MIL-A-907 Ease-Off Taxacone Company
Solution
Anti-Seize Compound MIL-T-5544 Armite Product Armite Laboratories
(Graphite Petrolatum)
Anti-Seize Compound Exxon Oil Company
Royco 44 Royal Lubricants Co.
Anti-Seize Compound TT-A-580 Armite Product Armite Laboratories
(White Lead Base) (JAN-A-669)
Anti-Seize Thread Fel-Pro C5-A Fel-Pro Incorporated
Compound “HIGH
TEMPERATURE”
Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type DuPont Company
Compounds DuPont #7
Ram Chemical #69 Ram Chemicals

Compound for Mirror Glaze Mirror Bright Polish
Polishing Co., Incorporated
Plexiglas Polish P-P-560 Part Number 403D Permatex Co., Inc.
and Cleaner Kansas City, Kansas
66115
Cleaners Fantastic Spray Local Supplier
Perchlorethylene
VM&P Naphtha
(Lighter Fluid)
Deicer Boot Surface Agemaster B.F. Goodrich
Coatings
Dry Lubricant MIL-L-60326 MS-122-6075 Local Supplier
Epoxy Patching Solarite #400 Solar Compounds Corp.
Compound
Gasket Cement Permatex No. 2 Permatex Company, Inc.
Grease, Actuator 2196-74-1 Dukes Astronautics Co.
8D5 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-23827A Supermil Grease Amoco

Instrumentation, (See Note at end.) No. A72832
Gear and Actuator
Screw (Temp. Range - Royco 27A Royal Lubricants Co.
(100°F to +250°F)
Shell 6249 Grease Shell Oil Company
RR-28 Socony Mobil Oil Co.
Castrolease A1 Burmah-Castrol LTD.
Low-Temp. Grease E.P. Texaco Incorp.
5114 E.P. Grease Standard Oil of Calif.
AV55
Aeroshell Grease 7 Shell Oil Company
Braycote 627S
Mobil Grease 27 Mobil Oil Corporation
B.P. Aero Grease 31B B.P. Trading Limited
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-3278 Unitemp E.P. Texaco Incorporated
Instrumentation,
Gear and Actuator RPM Aviation Grease Standard Oil of Calif.
Screw (Temp. Range - 5, Supermil Grease
65°F to +250°F) No. 8723
Aeroshell Grease 7A Shell Oil Corporation
Royco 78 Royal Lubricants
Company
L-1212 Sinclair Refining Co.
1916 Uni-Temp California Texas Oil
Grease Corporation
Grease Ball and MIL-G-18709 Regal ASB-2 Formula Texaco Incorporated
Roller Bearing TG-10293
Andok B Exxon Company, U.S.A.
Code 1-20481, Darina Shell Oil Company
Grease 1 XSG-6213
Code 71-501, Darina
Grease 2 XSG-6152
Code 71-502, Alvania
Grease 2 XSG-6151
Code 71-012, Cyprina
Grease 3 XSG-6280
Code 71-003
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Grease, General MIL-G-81322 Marfax All Purpose Texaco Incorporated

Purpose Wide
Temperature Aeroshell No. 6 Shell Oil Company
or Mobilux EP2
Shell Alvania EP2 Shell Oil Company
Royco 22 Royal Lubricants
Company
Aeroshell No. 22 Shell Oil Company
Grease, High MIL-G-3545 High Temp. Grease, Texaco Incorporated
Temperature Marfak All Purpose
Shellaire Grease HT Shell Oil Company
Alvania E.P. Grease 2
Aeroshell Grease 5
Grease 77, Mobilux Mobil Oil Corporation
E.P. 2
Royco 45A Royal Lubricants Co.
L-1231 Sinclair Refining
Company
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-7711 Regal AFB2 Regal Texaco Incorporated
General Purpose Starfak Premium
PED 3040 Standard Oil of Calif.
Aeroshell Grease 6 Shell Oil Company
Royco II Royal Lubricants Co.
Grease, Lubricating, MIL-G-21164 Aeroshell Grease Shell Oil Company
Molybdenum No. 17
Disulfide, Low and
High Temperature Royco 64C Royal Lubricants Co.
Castrolease MSA (c) Burmah Castrol LTD.
Grease, Lubricating, MIL-G-6032 Royco 32 Royal Lubricant Co.
Plug Valve, Gasoline
and Oil Resistant Castrolease PV Burmah Castrol LTD.
Parker Fuel Lube 44 Parker Seal Company
B.P. Aero Grease 32 B.P. Trading Limited
L-237 Lehigh Tenneco
Chemicals Co., Inc.
Rockwell 950 Rockwell International
8D7 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Grease, Waterproof, Aero Lubriplate Fiske Brothers

High and Low Refining Company
Temperature
“Hot Melt” Adhesive Stick Form 1/2 in. Sears, Roebuck and
Polyamids and “Hot diameter, 3 in. Company or most
Melt” Gun. long hardware stores.
Hydraulic Fluid MIL-H-5606 Brayco 756D Bray Oil Company
TL-5874 Texaco Incorporated
PED 3565 Standard Oil Company
of California
Aircraft Hydraulic Texaco Incorporated
Oil AA
RPM Aviation Oil Standard Oil Company
No. 2 Code of California
PED 2585
PED 3337
3126 Hydraulic Oil Exxon Company U.S.A.
(Univis 40)
Aeroshell Fluid 4, Shell Oil Company
SL-7694
Aero HF Mobil Oil Corporation
Royco 756, 756A Royal Lubricants Co.
and 756B
Isopropyl Alcohol Fed. Spec. TT-I-735 Local Supplier
Isocryl Tape (PMS-C1012-2) Schnee Moorehead
Chemicals, Incorporated
Kevlar Kevlar Kevlar Special Products
Leak Detector MIL-L-25567 ALPHA 73 U.S. Gulf Corporation
Solution for Oxygen Leak Detector
Oxygen Systems Type 1
Leak Tec #16-OX American Gas and
Chemical Co. LTD.
Loctite MIL-S-22473 Loctite 290 Loctite Corporation
Grade AA
MIL-S-22473 Loctite 222
Grade H and HV
Lubricant, O-Ring Piper P/N 197-507 Parker Super-O- Lube Local Supplier
Methylethylketone Fed. Spec. TT-M-261 Local Supplier
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Molybdenum MIL-M-7866 Molykote-Type G Dow Corning Corp.

Disulfide (Paste)
Molykote - Type 2
(Powder)
Oil, Air Conditioner, R12 Frigidaire #525 Virginia Chemical
Suniso #5 Sun Oil Company of
Pennsylvania
Texaco Capilla "E" Texaco Incorporated
Oil, Air Conditioner, Piper P/N 923-384 PAG-21941
HFC-134a
Oil Lubricating, MIL-L-7870 Caltex Low Temp. Caltex Oil Products
General Purpose, Oil Company
Low Temperature
Sinclair Aircraft Sinclair Refining
Orbit Lube Company
1692 Low Temp Oil Texaco Incorporated
Aviation Instrument Standard Oil Company
Oil of California
Royco 363 Royal Lubricants Co.
Rain Repellent FSCM 50150 Repcon Unelco Corporation
Safety Walk Flextred 300 Wooster Products,
Pressure Sensitive Incorporated
Sealant MIL-S-11031B PRC 5000 Products Research
PRC 383 Company
Sealant, Fuel *RS-36b, Stripper CEE BEE Chemical Co.
Tank Sealing (thin)
*RS-24b, Stripper
(thick)
*PR 1422 A-2 Sealant Products Research
(Brushing Consistency) Company
*PR 1422 B-2 Sealant
(Trowling Consistency)
*PR 1431G, Faying
Surface Seal, Type 1
* PR 1321-B 1/2,
Access Panel Sealant
* PR 1560 MK, Primer Products Research
(Anti-Bacteriological Company
Coating)
8D9 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Sealant, Fuel * BJO-0930, Phenolic Union Carbide Plastics

Tank Sealing(continued) Balloons Division
* ERL-2795, Epoxy
Resin
* 22LA-0340
Polyamid Hardener
Class A-2 * Thiokol MC-236
* NOTE: Use of Equivalent Sealant Approved.
Sealant, Fuselage Class A-1/2, A-2, B-2 H.S. Bancroft Corp.
Structure B-4, B-6, B-8
EC 1239 Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing
Industrial Specialties
Division
EC 612 (Leak Marker or
Weather Stripping, etc)
RTV-157 General Electric
(Piper P/N 279-021) Silicone Products
Department
G.E.-SS-4004 (Primer) General Electric
RTV-88 with Silicone Products
RTV-9811 Department
Sealant, AMS 3333 Type II, EC-801/1063 3M Company
Windshield & Windows Class B-2 (Piper P/N 279-047)
PR 1425 Products Research
(Piper P/N 279-019) Company
CS3247 Chem Seal
(Piper P/N 279-227)
Sealing Compound, Tite-Seal Radiator Specialty Co.
Gasket and Joint
Sealer PR 1321 B-1/2 Products Research
Company
Silicone Compound MIL-S-8660 DC-4, DC-6 Dow Corning
(MIL-C-21567) Compound
G-624 General Electric Co.
Silicone Products
Department
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Solvents Methylethyl Ketone Local Suppliers

Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Y2900 Union Carbide; Plastic
Division
Fed. Spec. PD 680 Local Supplier
Type I - Stoddard
Solvent
Type II - High Local Supplier
Temperature
Propeller Slip Ring CRC-2-26 Corrosion Reaction
Cleaning Solvent Consultants, Inc.
Toluol TT-M-261 Local Supplier
Trichlorethylene MIL-T-7003 Perm-A-Clor Dextrex Chemical
Industries, Inc.
Turco 4217 Turco Products, Inc.
Teflon Tape .003" x .5" wide/-1 Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company
Shamban W.S. and Co.
.003" x .25" wide/-2 Johnson & Johnson, Inc.
Permacel Division
Thread Sealant MIL-T-27730 Permacel 412 Johnson & Johnson, Inc.
for High Pressure Permacel Division
Oxygen System
Vinyl Foam 1 in. x 1/8 in. 530 Series, Type I Norton Tape Division
Vinyl, Foam Tape 1/8 in. x 1 in. 501 Series, Type II Norton Tape Division
Vinyl, Black Plastic 2 in. x 9 mil. and/or
1 1/2 in. x 9 mil.
Corrosion Retardant MIL-C-16173 D LPS-3 Heavy Duty Holt Lloyd Corp.
Compounds Rust Inhibitor
(Piper P/N 197-508)
Metal Parts Protector Chemi-Cap. Chemical
Protector Flex Packaging Corp.
(Piper P/N 197-509)
NOTE: Take precautions when using MIL-G-23827 and engine oil. These lubricants contain chemicals
harmful to painted surfaces.
8D11 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 21
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
A Chemi-cap G
Chemical Packaging Corp.
American Gas and General Electric Co.
1100 N.W. 70th Street
Chemical Co. LTD Silicone Products Dept.
Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33309
220 Pegasus Avenue Waterford, NY 12188
305-665-9059
Northvale, NJ 07647 518-237-3330
201-767-7300 Corrosion Reaction
H
Consultants, Inc.
Amoco Oil Co.
Limekin Pike H. S. Bancroft Corp.
200 E. Randolph Drive
Dresher, PA 19025 One Rockhill
Chicago, IL 60601
Industrial Park
312-856-5111 D
Cherry Hill, NJ 08003
Armite Laboratories Dextrex Chemical 609-854-8000
1845-49 Randolph Street P. O. Box 501
Holt Lloyd Corp.
Los Angeles, CA 90001 Detroit, MI 48232
4647 Hugh Howell Rd.
213-587-7744
Dow Corning Corporation Tucker, GA 30084
B Alpha Molykote Plant 404-934-7800
64 Harvard Avenue
BP Trading Limited J
Stanford, CT 06902
Moore Lane
Johnson & Johnson, Inc.
Brittanic House Dukes Astronautics Co.
Permacel Division
London E.C. 2 7866 Deering Avenue
501 George Street
England Canoga Park, CA 91304
New Brunswick, NJ 08901
Bray Oil Company 201-524-0400
DuPont Company
1925 N. Marianna Avenue
Finishes Div. K
Los Angeles, CA 98103
DuPont Building
213-268-6171 Kevlar Special Products
Wilmington, DE 19898
E.I. DuPont de
Burmah - Castrol Inc. 302-774-1000
Nemours & Co., (Inc.)
30 Executive Avenue
E Textile Fibers
Edison, NJ 08817
Department
201-287-3140 Exxon Oil Company
Centre Road Building
1251 Avenue of the Americas
C Wilmington, DE 19898
New York, NY 10020
302-999-3156
California Texas Oil Corp., 212-398-3093
380 Madison Avenue L
F
New York, NY 10017
Lehigh - Tenneco Chemicals
Fel-Pro Incorporated
Caltex Oil Products Co. Co., Inc.
7450 N. McCormick Blvd.
New York, NY 10020 Chestertown, MD 21620
Box C1103
301-778-1991
CEE BEE Chamical Co. Skokie, IL 60076
9520 E. CEE BEE Drive 312-761-4500 Loctite Corporation
Box 400 777 N. Mountain Road
Fiske Brothers
Downey, CA 92041 Newington, CT 06111
Refining Company
800-243-8160
120 Lockwood Street
In CT 800-842-0225
Newark, NJ 07105
201-589-9510
8D13 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 23
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION
M R Sun Oil Company of Penna

5 Penn Center Plaza
Miller-Stephenson Radiator Specialty Co.
Philadelphia, PA 19103
George Washington Hwy P.O. Box 34689
215-972-2000
Danbury, CT 06810 Charlotte, NC 28234
203-743-4447 704-377-6555 T
Minnesota Mining and MFG Ram Chemicals Taxacone Company
3M Center 201 E. Alondra Blvd. P.O. Box 10823 TR
St. Paul, MN 55144 Gardena, CA 90248 Dallas, TX 75208
612-733-1110 213-321-0710
Texaco, Inc.
Mirror Bright Polish Co., Inc. Rockwell International 2000 Westchester Avenue
Irvine Industrial Complex 600 Grant Street White Plains, NY 10650
P.O. Box 17177 Irvin, CA 92713 Pittsburgh, PA 15219 914-253-4000
714-557-9200 412-565-2000
Turco Products Inc.
Mobil Oil Corporation Royal Lubricants Company 24600 S. Main Street
150 E. 42nd Street River Road Box 6200
New York, NY 10017 E. Hanover, NJ 07936 Carson, CA 90749
212-883-4242 201-887-3100 213-835-8211
Morton Inc. S U
7341 Anacona Ave
Schnee Moorhead Chemicals, Inc. U.S. Gulf Corp.
Garden Grove, CA 92641
P.O. Box 233
724-373-2837 Shamban W.S. and Co.
Stoney Brook, NY 11790
Fax 724-373-1913 1857 Centinela Avenue
212-683-9221
Santa Monica, CA 90404
N
213-397-2195 Unelko Corporation
Norton Tape Division 727 E. 110th Street
Shell Oil Company
Department 6610Troy, NY 12181 Chicago, IL 60628
909 Fannin St STE 700
518-273-0100
Houston TX 77010-1016 Union Carbide; Plastic Div.
P 713-220-6697 270 Park Avenue
New York, NY 10017
Parker Seal Company Sinclair Refining Co.
212-551-3763
17325 Euclid Avenue 600 Fifth Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44112 New York, NY 10020 V
216-531-3000
Socony Mobil Oil Co. Virginia Chemical
Permatex Co., Inc. Washington 5, DC 20005 3340 W. Norfolk Rd.
P.O. Box 11915 Solar Compounds Corp. Portsmouth, VA 23703
Newington, CT 06111 1201 W. Blancke Street 703-484-5000
203-527-5211 Linden, NJ 07036
W
201-862-2813
Products Research Co.
Wooster Products, Inc.
2919 Empire Avenue Standard Oil of California
1000 Spruce Street
Burbank, CA 91504 225 Bush Street
Wooster, OH 44691
213-849-3992 San Francisco, CA 94104
800-321-4936
415-894-7700
In OH 216-264-2844
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8D15 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 25
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 12
ELECTRICAL WIRE CODING
CIRCUIT FUNCTION CIRCUITS

LETTER
A AUTOPILOT
C CONTROL SURFACE
E ENGINE INSTRUMENT
F FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
G LANDING GEAR
H HEATER - VENTILATING & DEICING
L LIGHTING
P POWER
Q FUEL & OIL
RP RADIO POWER
RZ RADIO AUDIO
J IGNITION
W WARNING
K STARTER
8D17 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 27
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 13
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS (Sheet 1 of 2)
AIRCRAFT LOCATION SYMBOLS ADJUSTABILITY BATTERIES BUS
FS WL BL
+ -
GENERAL GENERAL MULTICELL
FUSELAGE STATION WATER LINE BUTT LINE
CABLES AND CONDUCTORS

P T
OR
SHIELDED
COAXIAL SHIELDED TWO SHIELDED
TWISTED TWISTED SINGLE
GROUPING OF LEADS CABLE CONDUCTOR TWISTED
PAIR TRIPLE CONDUCTOR
W / GROUND PAIR
CAPACITOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

CONNECTORS
CURRENT LIMITER
A
CB PUSH PUSH-PULL SWITCH B
GENERAL BASIC BREAKER BREAKER BREAKER
RECEPTACLE PLUG MATED PLUG
& RECEPTACLE
DIODES FUSE GROUNDS
-A
GENERAL ZENER, ZENER,

GROUND OR GROUND TO
UNIDIRECTIONAL BIDIRECTIONAL OR
CIRCUIT CHASSIS
RETURN (WITH TERMINAL)
HORN HEATED ELEMENT SQUIB ELECTRIC LAMPS

A*
IGNITER
INDICATOR LIGHT
(* LETTER DENOTES INCANDESCENT FLUORESCENT
COLOR - ASTERISK LAMP LAMP
IS NOT PART OF SYMBOL)
METER POLARITY POTENTIOMETER

MOTOR
A
M + -
* LETTER DENOTES THE
TYPE OF METER POSITIVE NEGATIVE
i.e. A = AMMETER
RESISTOR
SPLICE
TERMINAL BOARD
RELAY COIL RHEOSTAT
1
PERMANENT 2
3
4
DISCONNECT
TRANSISTORS
TRANSDUCER TRANSFORMERS
GENERAL PNP TYPE NPN TYPE
THERMAL ELEMENT COILS

(TRANSDUCER)
SINGLE PHASE
(3) WINDING NON SATURATING
GENERAL GENERAL ADJUSTABLE
W/CORE
PAGE 28
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHART 13
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS (Sheet 2 of 2)
PUSH BUTTON MOMENTARY OR

CONTACT SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
SPRING RETURN
BASIC
(MAKE) (BREAK)
CLOSED OPEN TRANSFER CIRCUIT TWO
CIRCUIT
CONTACT CONTACT CLOSING CIRCUIT
OPENING
MOMENTARY OR LOCKING AND NON-LOCKING

NON-LOCKING
SPRING RETURN
OFF
OFF
(MAKE) (MAKE OR BREAK) (BREAK)
CIRCUIT TWO TRANSFER THREE POSITION THREE POSITION
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
CLOSING CLOSING OR OPENING OPENING CIRCUIT ONE POLE TWO POLE
TEMPERATURE ACTUATED
PRESSURE OR VACUUM ACTUATED SWITCH
NOTE: t* SYMBOL
SHALL BE REPLACED
BY DATA GIVING THE
V P OPERATING
OR OR
t t t t TEMPERATURE
CLOSES ON OPENS ON OF THE DEVICE
CLOSES ON OPENS ON
RISING PRESSURE RISING PRESSURE
RISING TEMPERATURE RISING TEMPERATURE
t THERMAL SWITCHES
LIMIT SWITCH, DIRECTLY ACTUATED - SPRING RETURN
NORMALLY OPEN t
CLOSES ON
RISING TEMPERATURE
NORMALLY NORMALLY OPEN NORMALLY NORMALLY CLOSED t

OPEN HELD CLOSED CLOSED HELD OPEN
NORMALLY OPEN
NORMALLY CLOSED INTERNAL HEATER
OPENS ON SHOWN
RISING TEMPERATURE
SELECTOR OR MULTI - POSITION SWITCH EXAMPLE

ON-ON-ON SWITCH ACUTATION
TOGGLE IN THE TOGGLE IN THE

DOWN POSITION UP POSITION
ANY NUMBER OF TRANSMISSION PATHS MAY BE SHOWN
SWITCHES WITH TIME/DELAY FEATURE
ROTARY
SWITCH NOTE: Viewed from end
OPEN CLOSED
opposite control knob.
TIME-DELAY TIME-DELAY
CLOSING OPENING
OPEN CLOSED
TIME-DELAY TIME-DELAY
EXAMPLE OF OPENING CLOSING
RELAY ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION

OF SWITCH OPERATION
IN WHICH CONTACT
ACTION IS DELAYED
8D19 91-10-00 Apr

PAGE 29
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 8D20 THRU 8D24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 30
Apr 15/07 91-10-00 8D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8E1 91-21-20 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item# Designation Description
1 CB385 Circuit Breaker (10 Amp)

2 2002 Control Module
3 S333 Vent/Defog Switch
4 B402 Vent/Defog Blower
1-2
Effectivity Vent Blower

4697001 and up Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-21-20 8E2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/O FWD R/H C/B PANEL 20 GA. JUMPER
VENT BLOWER J5
P305/P405 R437 P422
ELECT B J4F/P4F
A
CB385A18 MODULE CB385B18 1 GB1A18 K GB1B18 K GB1C18 1 RED
10A
VENT
CB385 2002
BLOWER
BLK
CONTROL B402
BROWN
TJ BLOCK 1 J4A/P4A
ON
E F G H CB385C22 2 GB1D22 21
P385 P385
OFF
10
VENT BLOWER
SWITCH 22
} TO GND (SEE 91-21-50)
GRAY
P/O ENVIR. SW PANEL
TJ BLOCK 5 J4B/P4B
C G L R Y CB385D22 9
TJ BLOCK 4
GB1E22 TO P348-1 (SEE 91-21-30, FIGURE 1)
A B C
D E F J4B/P4B
G H J BLACK-22 6 BLACK-22
BLACK GB1-N
K L M
102220 30.0 NEW/Y

NOTE: 1. GND ON BROWN TO TURN BLOWER ON. 104635 NEW/AB
2. GND ON GRAY WILL TURN BLOWER OFF EVEN WITH GND ON BROWN. 105122 NEW
Vent Blower Effectivity

8E3 91-21-20 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 B303 Blower
Effectivity Avionics Cooling

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-21-20 8E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102220 37.0 L/V

AFT L/H C/B PNL 104635 NEW/AB
AVIONICS COOLING
J3-C/P3-C 308
J P AV4
2A CB349-22 6 RC1A22 1 RED BLOWER
CB349
RC2A22N 2 BLK B303
GB2-A
AV5
1 RED MUFFIN
FAN
2 BLK
WITH MEGGITT EFIS

IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP
105122 37.0 NEW

AFT L/H C/B PNL
AVIONICS COOLING
J3-C/P3-C AV5
2A CB349-22 6 RC1A22 RED 1 RED

MUFFIN
CB349 BLK FAN
RC2A22N BLK 2
GB2-A
AV4
RED 1 AVIONICS
COOLING
BLK 2 BLOWER
Avionics Cooling Effectivity

8E5 91-21-20 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-21-20 8E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8E7 91-21-20 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-21-20 8E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Relay, Squat Switch No. 2
4 Cabin Temperature Sensor
5 Duct Temperature Sensor
6 Temperature Modulating Valve
7 ECS Cabin Comfort Switch
8 Flow Control Valve
9 Mass Flow Sensor
10 Mass Flow Probe
11 Cabin Temperature Controller
12 Mass Flow Controller
9, 11 12
1 2
6 5, 10
6 5, 9 11 (Right), 12 (Left)
Environmental and Bleed Air Control Effectivity

8E9 91-21-30 AprPAGE 1

15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 2
4697001 and up
Effectivity
J4D/P4D
P/O FWD R/H C/B PNL
5A
CABIN
TEMP.
CB384-20 H2A20
9
CB383
GB1-B
P344
H2D20N
MODULATING
91-21-30
P312
VALVE (TEMP)
28VDC, IN
9
CABIN TEMP
BLEED OPEN
BLEED OPEN
FAN GND D
COOL OPEN
COOL OPEN
SENSOR
28VDC, IN
27 34 14 36 8
CABIN TEMP. CONTROLLER

+28VDC FAN C H2B20
SENSOR GND B WHT CABIN SENSOR -
H2C20 CABIN SENSOR +
SENSOR POS A WH/BLU
GB1-A
H2P20N POWER GND
P412
D
B
C
A
J3 POWER GND
P435/J435 P403/P303
Environmental and Bleed Air Control
m
H2G20 H2F20 H2E20

23 22 2
WHT WHT WHT OPEN +28VDC
e
d
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WH/BLU WH/BLU WH/BLU CLOSE +28VDC
g
e

WH/ORN WH/ORN WH/ORN OPEN GND
i
WH/GRN WH/GRN WH/GRN CLOSE GND
1
k
g
DUCT TEMP
P408 H2K20 H2J20 H2H20

SENSOR
10 32
WHT WHT WHT DUCT SENSOR +
n
BLEED OPEN A
i
WH/BLU WH/BLU WH/BLU SENSOR GND
p
COOL OPEN B
q
k
BLEED OVER
TEMP ANNUN
(91-31-50)
P329-22
GB7-M
20
H2R22 DUCT OVERTEMP
P385 8 13 19 18
MANUAL
LIGHTS
-
L23L20N
ENVIRONMENTAL SWITCH PANEL
L23P20 (91-33-10 FIGURE 5)
+
AUTO WARM
CONTROLLER
H2S20 INCREASE
3
BLEED AIR
H2T20 DECREASE
6
COOL
P/O AFT L/H C/B PNL
3A
37
5 H2Z20 AUTO/MAN
CB344
17 4 16
35 25 13
H2Y20 SWITCH GND
CB344-20
CLIMATE CONTROL
H2M20 SWITCH PWR +15VDC

FOR AUTO
H2L20 STANDBY
29 5 31
COMPUTER PILOT CONT +5VDC(WARM)
3 15 2
H2U20
ON/OFF
J3B/P3B
H2V20 PILOT CONTROL(ADJ)

PILOT CONT GND(COOL)
1
H2W20
8E10
A
C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
POWER +15VDC
SIGNAL 0-5VDC
CLOSE +28VDC
OPEN +28VDC
CHASSIS GND
POWER GND
POWER GND
POWER GND
SIGNAL GND
CLOSE GND
OPEN GND
28VDC, IN
28VDC, IN
STANDBY
GROUND
NORM
HIGH
13 18 30 26 9 27 8 36 1 2 22 23 7 5 31 24 P345
A
H3S20
H2X20
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
WH/GRN
H3D20
WHT
P387
5
H3G20N
H3H20N
SQT SW. RELAY

TO FIGURE 2
(SHOWN ON GND)
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
P309
D
WH/BLU
B
H3A20
WHT
3
H PROBE SHIELD
F PROBE BLACK
G PROBE WHITE
11
E PROBE RED
7 7 MASS
GB5-D FLOW
H3N20
H3P20
H3R20
SENSOR
K7
H3M20
GB5-E
SEE P309
FIGURE 3
H3G20
9 6 8 7
P348
H3RR20
H3PP20
H3NN20
H3MM20
P404/P304
m k j i h s r q p n
J4
EMER
NORM
HIG
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
WH/BLU
H3B20
H3E20
H
WHT
WHT
OFF
ECS CABIN
COMFORT SW.
P436/J436
k h g f e r q p n m
P348 1 H3TT20
H3K20
GB1EE22
H3J20
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
WH/BLU
H3F20
H3C20
WHT
WHT
B
JB13
H3T20
C
A
A
P406 P407
D
B
B
GB1E22
CLOSE GND
CLOSE +28V
OPEN GND
OPEN +28V
SHIELD
WHT
RED
BLK
TO P4B-9
91-21-20
1
B 14
FIGURE 1
P385 MASS
FLOW CONTROL FLOW
VALVE PROBE 102220 6.0 J/V
104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW/A
C WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 & UP
Environmental and Bleed Air Control Effectivity
8E11 91-21-30 AprPAGE 3
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A314 Cabin Altitude Sensor
3 Emergency Pressure Valve
4 Cabin Altitude Switch
Effectivity Cabin Pressurization

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-21-30 8E12
8E13
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
EMERGENCY
PRESSURE P305 J5 P405 R437 P437 P432
J3C/P3C
CB341-22 1 CP18A22 E E CP18B20 E E CP18C20 A EMERGENCY
5A
CABIN ALTITUDE PRESSURE
CB341 F F CP18E20 F F CP18D20 B VALVE
WARNING SONALERT
NORMALLY CLOSED/
ENERGIZE TO OPEN
+ -
CP19A22 CP19B22
CP19C22
CP18H20
P/O ANNUNC. CONTROL

RELAY ASSEMBLY
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 9

P394/
Cabin Pressurization
2 10 J394
H3M20 EMER. POSITION ON
4 11 BLEED AIR CONTROL SW.
5 12 CP19G22 (SEE P348-7, FIGURE 1)
6 13
CP19D22
7 14
K304 K305 CP18G22 TO "EMERGENCY BLEED"
ANNUN. P329-24
(91-31-50)
CP19H22
CP19K22 TO CABIN ALTITUDE
CP18J20 ANNUN. P328-15
CP19E22 NO (91-31-50)
C
CP19J22 CABIN ALT.
91-21-30 AprPAGE
CP19F22 NC SENSOR
P395/ A315
1 2 3 4
CP18F20N
TO ''CABIN ALT 10K'' J395 (OPENS AT 10.75K ± 750FT)
NO
ANNUN. P328-1 W6A22 (CLOSES AT 12K ± 500FT)
C NC
(91-31-50)
W6B22N
A314
CABIN ALTITUDE SENSOR
4697001 and up
(CLOSES AT 10K ± 500FT)

GB1-R
(OPENS AT 9K ± 500FT) 102220 29.1 P/V
104635 A/AB
Effectivity
GB1-L MUTE SWITCH

(MOMENTARY)
15/07
5
Apr 15/07
PAGE 6
4697198; 4697216 and up

with Avidyne Entegra in
Effectivity
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
EMERGENCY
91-21-30
J5 P432
PRESSURE J3C/P3C P305 P405 J437 P437
5A CB341-22 1 CP18A22 E E CP18B20 E E CP18C20 A EMERGENCY

CABIN ALTITUDE PRESSURE
CB341 F F CP18E20 F F CP18D20 B VALVE
WARNING SONALERT
NORMALLY CLOSED/
ENERGIZE TO OPEN
CP18H20
+ -
CP19A22 CP19B22
H3M20 EMER. POSITION ON
BLEED AIR CONTROL SW.
CP19C22
(SEE P348-7 FIGURE 1)

ANNUNCIATOR CONTROL
CP18G22 TO "EMERGENCY BLEED"
RELAY ASSEMBLY
ANNUN. P329-24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(91-31-50)

1 9
Cabin Pressurization
P394/
CP19K22 TO CABIN ALTITUDE
2 10 J394
ANNUN. P328-15
(91-31-50)
4 11
CP19D22 5 12 CP19G22
6 13
7 14
K304 K305
JB13
JB14 A
H CP19H22 F
C CP19DD22
CP18J20
CP19E22 NO
C CABIN ALT.
CP19J22
CP19F22 SENSOR
NC
A315 (CLOSES AT 12K ± 500FT)
TO "CABIN ALT 10K" NO (OPENS AT 10.75K ± 750FT)
CP18F20N
ANNUN. P328-1 W6A22
(SEE 91-31-50) C NC
A314
W6B22N
CABIN ALTITUDE SENSOR

(CLOSES AT 10K ± 500FT)
(OPENS AT 9K ± 500FT)
GB1-R
8E14
MUTE SWITCH 105122 29.1 NEW

GB1-L
(MOMENTARY)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8E15 91-21-30 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A312 Cabin Pressurization Dump Solenoid
3 S310 Cabin Pressurization Dump Switch
4 K7 Squat Switch Relay No. 1
5 S103 Squat Switch Assembly
6 CR7 Diode
7 Emergency Pressure Valve
8 Cabin Altitude Switch
2 5
Effectivity Cabin Pressurization Dump

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-21-30 8E16
8E17
P/O AFT L/H C/B PANEL P330

CABIN J3C/P3C A312
PRESSURE CB342A-22 2 CP14A22 A
3A DUMP
DUMP CB342B-22 3
CB342 SOLENOID
CP14B22 B (GND TO DUMP)
S310 8 DUMP P318
P318 3 E17L20 TO 91-61-20
6 CP17B22
GB6-E CP15B22N 1

7 NORM
2 N P301
Cabin Pressurization Dump
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO TB3*, 91-33-10 L33H22
CP17A22

J1
CP15D22
CP16C22
N P101
GB1-M BLACK-22
CP17C20
TO 91-30-30 D4E22 CP17D20N
H3R20
TO FIGURE 1 { H3S20
M5B20 P104
TO 91-31-30 { M5A22 7 9
J104
9
7
S103
* LB3 WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA 8
IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP P387
12 13 5 7 3 4 8 9 1 2 10 L MAIN
(SHN ON GND)
91-21-30 AprPAGE
J387 SQ SW
CR7 SQUAT SW
RELAY 1
5 7 8 6
1 3 4 2 A B (SHN ON GND)
102220 29.0 H/V
104635 NEW/AB
105122 A/B 9 11 12 10 K7
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
9
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-21-30 8E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8E19 91-21-50 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4 2003, 2004 Control Module
6 S321 Recirculation Blower Switch
7 B301 Left Blower Fan Motor
8 Air Conditioner Switch
9 B302 Right Blower Fan Motor
10 High Pressure Switch
11 K501 Condenser Blower Relay
12 K405 Compressor Clutch Assembly
13 688-368 Low Pressure Switch
14 B501 Condenser Blower Motor Assy.
15 CR402 Diode
16 CR501 Diode
17 Blower HI / LO Switch
1-5
1-3
4-5 7, 9
Effectivity Air Conditioning and Vent Blowers

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-21-50 8E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102220 28.0 C/V
20 GAUGE
JUMPER
P/O FWD R/H C/B PANEL
a
CB388F18
2004
2001
2003
P/O FWD R/H C/B PANEL

Air Conditioning and Vent Blowers Effectivity
Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 4) 4697001 thru 4697125 only
8E21 91-21-50 AprPAGE 3
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 4
4697126 and up
Effectivity
FWD R/H C/B PANEL
CABIN FANS LEFT
HI BLOWERS BLOWER
TB303
ELECT J4F/P4F (HI)
A MODULE B
CB388C18 1
CB388A18 2 AC1A16 ORG
15A B301 BLK
91-21-50
CONTROL 2
CB388 TJ BLOCK 1 J4A/P4A AC1B16 RED
CB388B18
GRAY
BLACK BROWN J K L M CB388D18 3 (LOW)
{
AC1C16
AC1D16
TO TJ BLK 4(GND) BLACK BROWN N P R S CB388E18 4
GRAY
(HI)
CONTROL J4F/P4F 1
A B
CB388F18 3 ORG
ELECT B302 BLK
MODULE
2
RED
LO BLOWERS (LOW)
AIR CONDITIONER TB304 RIGHT
CONTROL BLOWER
ELECT J4D/P4D
A MODULE B
CB387A20 CB387B20 8 AC4A20

Air Conditioning and Vent Blowers
5A
CB387 CONTROL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TJ BLOCK 1 J4A/P4A

GRAY
TO TJ BLK 4(GND) BLACK BROWN A B C D CB387C22 1

HI
AC1E22 24 BLOWER
J 333 P OFF HI/LO SW
AC1F22 11
1 AC6A18
P385 LO
P
P305 P405 TB303 3
HI
2 J5
3 AC6C18 m m AC6D18
P385
ON
J419/P419 P437/R437 AIR
P AC4B22 25
LO a
CR COND
1 AC6F18 AC6E18 405
SWITCH
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH K405 OFF
AC5A16
20 GA. JUMPER X1
K501
COND CR ENVIR. SW. PANEL
BLWR 501 10 22
RELAY P385
AIR CONDITIONER AC5B16N
POWER X2
AC1H20N
AC1G20N
J5D/P5D
A1 A2
WHT
CB386-12 1 WHT B501
25A AC7A12
WHT/BL BLK
CB386 AFT PRESS
BKHD FEEDTHRU CONDENSOR
BLOWER
GB3-F GB3-H
FWD R/H C/B PANEL
8E22
104635 28.0 N/AB

8E23
FWD R/H C/B PANEL LEFT

CABIN FANS
HI BLOWERS BLOWER
J349/P349 (HI)
ELECT J4F/P4F
A MODULE B
CB388A18 CB388C18 2 AC1A16 AC1C16 1 ORG
15A B301 BLK
CB388 CONTROL TJ BLOCK 1 RED
J4A/P4A AC1D16 2
CB388B18
GRAY
BLACK BROWN J K L M CB388D18 3 (LOW)
TO TJ BLK 4(GND) { BLACK BROWN N P R S CB388E18 4
GRAY
J350/P350
J4F/P4F (HI)
CONTROL
A B
CB388F18 3 AC1B16 AC1E16 1 ORG
ELECT B302 BLK
MODULE AC1F16 2 RED
LO BLOWERS (LOW)
AIR CONDITIONER RIGHT

Air Conditioning and Vent Blowers
CONTROL BLOWER
ELECT J4D/P4D
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A MODULE B

CB387A20 CB387B20 8 AC4A20
5A
CB387 CONTROL TJ BLOCK 1
J4A/P4A
GRAY
TO TJ BLK 4(GND) BLACK BROWN A B C D CB387C22 1
HI
AC1E22 24 BLOWER
OFF
J 333 P HI/LO SW
AC1F22 11
1 AC6A18 LO
P305 P405 P385
P 2 J5
HI
3 AC6C18 m m AC6D18
P385
ON
J419/P419 P437/J437 AC4B22 AIR
P 25
LO CR COND
1 AC6F18 a AC6E18 405 SWITCH
COMPRESSOR
91-21-50 AprPAGE
CLUTCH K405 OFF

20 GA. JUMPER
K501
4697198; 4697216 and up
COND
X1 CR P/O ENVIR. SW. PANEL
BLWR 501 10 22
RELAY P385
AIR CONDITIONER AC5B16N
POWER X2
AC1G20N
AC1H20N
J5D/P5D
A1 A2
WHT
CB386-12 1 WHT B501
25A AC7A12
WHT/BL BLK
AFT PRESS
CB386 BKHD FEEDTHRU CONDENSOR
Effectivity
BLOWER GB3-F GB3-H

FWD R/H C/B PANEL
15/07
105122 28.0 NEW/B

5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-21-50 8E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8F1 91-22-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4 Trim Relay
5 S-TEC 01240 Trim Monitor
6 S-TEC 01192-27-49TPM Programmer / Computer
7 S-TEC 01279-PM Altitude Selector
8 S-TEC 01188-PM Autopilot Annunciator
9 Trim Master / Annunciator Switch
10 MEGGITT 84-134-1 (both sides) EFIS NAV Display (i.e. - EHSI)
11 S-TEC 6405-28L Turn Coordinator (Pilot’s)
12 S-TEC 6542 Horn
13 S-TEC 0106-6-R2 Roll Servo
14 S-TEC 0106-T8 Trim Servo
15 S-TEC 0111 Transducer
16 S-TEC 0106-Y10 Yaw Servo
17 S-TEC 0108-P4 Pitch Servo
18 S-TEC 0121-5 Yaw Amplifier
19 S-TEC 90408-8 (both sides) Control Wheel Switch Installation
20 Flap Compensator Potentiometer
4 2 1 5 20 14 15a 17
6
7
8
19
9
10
11
3 13 15b 16 18
7-8 9 15a
10
11
12
4 5 13 14 15b 16 17 18
Effectivity
Autopilot (S-TEC System 550) 4697001 thru 4697143; and,
Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 9) 4697145 thru 4697148
8F3 91-22-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A/P-F/D MASTER SW
WIRING SCHEMATIC WITH EFIS DISPLAY

ANNUNCIATOR A/P CB
SYSTEM 550 COMPUTER 3 4 5 2 22
CONNECTOR P2 A/C BUSS
INTERNAL (5A)
CABLE ASSEMBLY 39237-5 (REF)
24 ANNUNCIATOR LOAD
25 GRN
ANNUNCIATOR CLOCK BLK
26 ANNUNCIATOR DATA WHT TRIM CB
A/C BUSS
41 SHIELD GROUND
REFER TO THE APPLICABLE TRIM
MASTER SWITCH SCHEMATIC FOR (2A)
WIRING INFORMATION TRIM MONITOR
SEE DETAIL F
38 GPSS ENABLE T2 CABLE ASSEMBLY
39 AP REF GND 3 BLK (REF)
2 RED
1 WHT FAIL LAMP 7
T1
3 BLK TRIM PWR IN 2
1 2 GRN TRIM LAMP 4
28 PITCH FLAP POT WHT 1 RED LAMP PWR 9
30 SIG REF WHT/BLU 2 FLAP POT 12
31 PITCH TRIM FLAP POT WHT/ORN 3 4 4 BLK TRIM PWR OUT 8
45 SHIELD GROUND 4 1 1 RED TRIM SOL 6
2 2 WHT TRIM SERVO +DN 5
3 3 GRN TRIM SERVO +UP 3
5 5 14
WHT AUDIO 11
T3 BLK AUTOTRIM GND 10
8 FD ENABLE RED
A/C GND 13
WHT +HORN 15
WHT 1
TO A/C PANEL LIGHT BUSS
+
A/S 1
20 ALT. ENGAGE SIG. WHT 1 1 WHT
21 ALT. SEL. CONTROL BLU 2 2 RED
22 VS SIGNAL RED 3 3 GRN HORN S-TEC
23 ALT. SEL. JUMPER ORN 4 4 P/N 6542
42 JUMPER GND GRN 5 5
3 ROLL SOL. LOGIC (YD) YEL 6 6 (REF)
49 SHIELD GROUND
14 TRIM INTERRUPT BLK

15 MANUAL TRIM +DN WHT
16 MANUAL TRIM +UP GRN
6 CWS GND YEL
5 CWS ORN
46 SHIELD GROUND
P1-36
P1-37
P1-32 P1-34
27 AUDIO OUTPUT WHT
28VDC TRIM BLK
P1-33
50 300
P1-35
33 SOL + RED 1 1/4W

48 SOL GND BLK 2 3 PLCS
32 MTR +UP GRN 4 TRIM SERVO
17 MTR +DN WHT
IN
3
47 SHIELD GROUND 9
AUDIO
AMP
43 SHIELD GROUND
36 ROLL STR 429A WHT
37 ROLL STR 429B WHT/BLU
12 ROLL STR SIG WHT

13 PITCH STR SIG BLU/WHT
7 SIG REF ORN/WHT
41 SHIELD GROUND
4
1
2
18
19
FD LOGIC
G\S FLAG +
G\S FLAG -
G\S + UP
G\S + DOWN
ORN/WHT
WHT
BLU/WHT
WHT
BLU/WHT
B
SYSTEM 550 COMPUTER
CONNECTOR P1
34 A/P A+ RED
17 A/P DISCONNECT WHT
16 TRANSDUCER GROUND BLK 2
33 10 VDC RED 3
50 TRANSDUCER SIGNAL GRN 1
46 SHIELD GROUND TRANSDUCER
2 PITCH SOL. GND BLK
21 PITCH MOTOR YEL
4 TRIM SWITCH DN ORN
20 PITCH SOLENOID RED
3 PITCH MOTOR GRN
22 TRIM SWITCH UP BLU
23 TRIM SWITCH COM WHT 28
40 SHIELD GROUND
1 ROLL MOTOR WHT 4
26 CABLE ASSEMBLY, JUMPER
27
18 ROLL SOLENOID RED 1 9
19 ROLL MOTOR GRN 3 5
36 ROLL SOL GND BLK 2 6
39 SHIELD GROUND 9 8
ROLL SERVO 25
GRN "Y1"
20
21 8 8
17 AUTO WHT 6 6 WHT
18 OFF RED 1 1 RED
19 ON BLK 4 4 BLK
13 NAV FLAG + WHT 22 WHT 3 3 GRN
14 NAV FLAG - WHT/BLU 23 YAW DAMPER WHT/ORN 5 5 YEL
32 LOC. SWITCH WHT/ORN 24 WHT/BLU 2 2 BLU
31 L-R +LT BLU/WHT 15 MASTER SWITCH 7 7
30 L-R +RT WHT 14
45 SHIELD GROUND 16
25 EXCITATION WHT 1
26 EXC REF WHT/BLU 2
27 SIG REF WHT/ORN 4 YAW TRIM
42 SHIELD GROUND 3
7 AC HEADING WHT 10 POTENTIOMETER
8 AC CRS
RATE GYRO TACH
BLU/WHT 11 102310 10.0 F
5 GRN E 13
6 RATE GYRO REF WHT D
24 RATE GYRO SIG BLK C TURN COORDINATOR EFIS/AP1
41 SHIELD GROUND BLK-AIRFRAME GND B
15
35
BATTERY BUSS
LIGHTS
AIRFRAME GROUND
T&B
RED-T&B A+
WHT
BLK
A
TO A/C AVIONICS LIGHT BUSS
CABLE ASSEMBLY 39256-1 (REF) C
Effectivity
4697001 thru 4697143; and, Autopilot (S-TEC System 550)
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8F4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STALL WARNING &

J1-1 REVERSIONARY MODE
D J1-2
J1-3
TRIGGER
NO
NC
J1-4
J1-5
C
J1-6
P/N 73D03-1 J1
332K W 1M w
P/N 73U18 P/N
w + AP DISC TRIM INTRPT SW
200K -
73Q02-60
10K 4 3 2 1 (S-TEC P/N 3519) (REF)
332K w 1K w 4 3 2 1 C NC
10m F
CO-PILOT TRIM CMD SW
P/N 39326-4 (REF) (S-TEC P/N 03112) (REF)
DN
3 3
4 4
7 7 CONTROL WHEEL
8 8 STEERING SWITCH
9 9
(REF) (REF) 5 5 NO C UP
CABLE ASSEMBLY CABLE ASSEMBLY 11 11

6 6
P/N 39271-2 P/N 39247-12 2 2
GND 3 3 1
TRIM C/B 4 4 5 3 3
AP A+ 7 7 3
4 4
TRIM INT 8 8 5 5
MOTOR DN 9 9 2
6
1
6
1
MOTOR UP 5 5 6
4 2 2
A/P DISC 11 11
7 7
CWS GND 6 6
PILOT TRIM CMD SW
CWS 2 2 7 8
(S-TEC P/N 03112) (REF)

DN
3 3
4 4
7 7
8 8
9 9 UP
5 5 AP DISC TRIM INTRPT SW
11 11
6 6 (S-TEC P/N 3519) (REF)
2 2
C NC
C NC
E ALT SEL A+ RED 18

CONTROL WHEEL
STEERING SWITCH
NO C
VOLTAGE SELECT JUMPER 7
28 VDC 14
ALT ENGAGE WHT 10
MANUAL/VS SELECT RED 9
VS COMMAND GRN 17
MASTER DISC. SWITCH WHT 16
AUDIO OUTPUT WHT 8
1 A1 WHT/ORN 5
2 A2 WHT 4
3 A4 WHT/BLU 12
4 T2
F
5 B1 WHT/ORN 13 BLK 3
6 B2 WHT 3 RED 2
7 B4 WHT/BLU 24
2 6
ORN 1
8 5 7
9 C1 WHT/ORN 19 3
10 C2 WHT 22
11 C4 WHT/BLU 23 T1
12 1 4
WHT 11 YEL 3
13 D4 25
BLK GRN 2
AIRFRAME GROUND 11 8 10
BLU
9 12 1
ALTITUDE SELECTOR/ALERTER
PB1
Y Y BLK 2
TRIM MASTER SWITCH (STACO)
X X YEL 4
W W ORN 8 CABLE ASSEMBLY 39229-2-14 (REF)
V V RED 1 PITCH SERVO
U U GRN 3
T T BLU 6
S S WHT 7 YAW AMPLIFIER
k k 9 T2
P P RED 13
YEL 3
N N BLK 4
M M GRN 7 GRN 2
L L YEL 10 BLU 1
BLU 8 1 2 3 4
K K
6
i i
3 GRN 1
4 WHT 2
YAW 1 RED 3 5 7
SERVO 2 BLK 6
9 9
19 8 11 12 10 T1
BLK 3
RED 2
ORN 1
TRIM MASTER SWITCH (EATON)

CABLE ASSEMBLY 39229-4-14 (REF)
Effectivity
8F5 91-22-10 AprPAGE 5

15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 6
4697145 thru 4697148

4697001 thru 4697143; and,
Effectivity
DETAIL
A/P-F/D MASTER SW
WIRING SCHEMATIC WITH EFIS DISPLAY
A
91-22-10
ANNUNCIATOR A/P CB
SYSTEM 550 COMPUTER 3 4 5 2 22
CONNECTOR P2 A/C BUSS
INTERNAL (5A)
24 ANNUNCIATOR LOAD GRN
25 ANNUNCIATOR CLOCK BLK
26
TRIM CB

ANNUNCIATOR DATA WHT
A/C BUSS
41 SHIELD GROUND
Autopilot (S-TEC System 550)
TO DETAIL D
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

REFER TO THE APPLICABLE TRIM (2A) TRIM MONITOR

MASTER SWITCH SCHEMATIC FOR
38 GPSS ENABLE WIRING INFORMATION CABLE ASSEMBLY
T2 (REF)
39 AP REF GND SEE DETAIL F
3 BLK
2 RED
1 WHT FAIL LAMP 7
T1
3 BLK TRIM PWR IN 2
2 GRN TRIM LAMP 4
28 PITCH FLAP POT WHT 1 1 9
RED LAMP PWR
30 SIG REF WHT/BLU 2 FLAP POT 12
31 PITCH TRIM FLAP POT WHT/ORN 3 4 4 BLK TRIM PWR OUT 8
45 SHIELD GROUND 4 1 1 RED TRIM SOL 6
5 5 14
WHT AUDIO 11
T3 10
8 FD ENABLE RED BLK AUTOTRIM GND
A/C GND 13
TO DETAIL B & C
WHT 15
+HORN
WHT 1
TO A/C PANEL LIGHT BUSS
TO DETAIL B
+
TO DETAIL B
TO DETAIL B
HORN S-TEC
P/N 6542
8F6
8F7
TO DETAIL A
TO DETAIL A
TO DETAIL A
A/S 1
20 ALT. ENGAGE SIG. WHT 1 1 WHT
21 ALT. SEL. CONTROL BLU 2 2 RED
22 VS SIGNAL RED 3 3 GRN
23 ALT. SEL. JUMPER ORN 4 4
42 JUMPER GND GRN 5 5
3 ROLL SOL. LOGIC (YD) YEL 6 6
49 SHIELD GROUND TO DETAIL D
TO DETAIL E
14 TRIM INTERRUPT BLK

15 MANUAL TRIM +DN WHT
16 MANUAL TRIM +UP GRN TO DETAIL D

6 CWS GND YEL
5 CWS
ORN
46 SHIELD GROUND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P1-36
P1-37
P1-32 P1-34 TO DETAIL E
27 AUDIO OUTPUT WHT
50 28VDC TRIM BLK 300
P1-33
P1-35
33 SOL + RED 1 1/4W
SOL GND BLK 2 3 PLCS
48
32 MTR +UP GRN 4 TRIM SERVO
17 MTR +DN WHT 3
IN
47 SHIELD GROUND 9
AUDIO
AMP
43 SHIELD GROUND
36 ROLL STR 429A WHT
37 ROLL STR 429B WHT/BLU
91-22-10 AprPAGE
12 ROLL STR SIG WHT

4697001 thru 4697143; and,
DETAIL
7 SIG REF ORN/WHT
41 SHIELD GROUND
4697145 thru 4697148
B
4 FD LOGIC ORN/WHT
1 G\S FLAG + WHT
2 G\S FLAG - BLU/WHT
18 G\S + UP WHT
BLU/WHT
Effectivity
19 G\S + DOWN
15/07
TO DETAIL C TO DETAIL C
7
Apr 15/07
PAGE 8
4697145 thru 4697148

4697001 thru 4697143; and,
Effectivity
DETAIL
TO DETAIL B
91-22-10
C
TO DETAIL A
TO DETAIL A
TO DETAIL B
SYSTEM 550 COMPUTER
CONNECTOR P1
34 A/P A+ RED
17 WHT
TO DETAIL E
A/P DISCONNECT
16 TRANSDUCER GND BLK 2

33 10 VDC RED 3
50 TRANSDUCER SIGNAL GRN 1
46 SHIELD GROUND
TRANSDUCER
2 PITCH SOL. GND BLK
TO DETAIL E
21 PITCH MOTOR YEL

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 PITCH MOTOR GRN


23 TRIM SWITCH COM WHT
SHIELD GROUND 28
40 26 CABLE ASSEMBLY, JUMPER
1 ROLL MOTOR WHT 4 27
18 ROLL SOLENOID RED 1 9
19 ROLL MOTOR GRN 3 5
36 ROLL SOL GND BLK 2 6
39 SHIELD GROUND 9 8
ROLL SERVO 25 "Y1"
20 GRN
21 8 8
TO DETAIL E
17 AUTO WHT 6 6 WHT
18 OFF RED 1 1 RED
19 ON BLK 4 4 BLK
13 NAV FLAG + WHT 22 WHT 3 3 GRN
14 NAV FLAG - WHT/BLU 23 YAW DAMPER WHT/ORN 5 5 YEL
32 LOC. SWITCH WHT/ORN 24 WHT/BLU 2 2 BLU
31 L-R +LT BLU/WHT 15 MASTER SWITCH 7 7
30 L-R +RT WHT 14
45 SHIELD GROUND 16
25 EXCITATION WHT 1
26 EXC REF WHT/BLU 2
27 SIG REF WHT/ORN 4 YAW TRIM
42 SHIELD GROUND 3
7 AC HEADING WHT 10 POTENTIOMETER
8 AC CRS BLU/WHT 11
5 RATE GYRO TACH GRN E 13
6 RATE GYRO REF WHT D
24 RATE GYRO SIG BLK C
EFIS/AP1
41 SHIELD GROUND BLK-AIRFRAME GND B TURN COORDINATOR
BATTERY BUSS RED-T&B A+ A
T&B
15 LIGHTS WHT TO A/C AVIONICS LIGHT BUSS
35 AIRFRAME GROUND BLK
CABLE ASSEMBLY
8F8
8F9
STALL WARNING &

J1-1 REVERSIONARY MODE
DETAIL
TRIGGER
J1-2
J1-3
J1-4
NC
NO
D
J1-5
TO DETAIL A
C
J1-6
P/N 73D03-1 J1
332K 1M w
P/N 73U18 P/N
+ AP DISC TRIM INTRPT SW
200K w 73Q02-60
- (S-TEC P/N 3519) (REF)
10K 4 3 2 1
332K w 1K w 4 3 21 C NC
10m F

(S-TEC P/N 03112) (REF)

DN
3 3
4 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7 7 CONTROL WHEEL

8 8 STEERING SWITCH
9 9
(REF) (REF) 5 5 NO C UP
CABLE ASSEMBLY 11 11
CABLE ASSEMBLY P/N 39247-12
6 6
2 2
P/N 39271-2
GND 3 3 1
TRIM C/B 4 4 5 3 3
AP A+ 7 7 3 4 4
TRIM INT 8 8 5 5
MOTOR DN 9 9 2 6 6
MOTOR UP 5 5 6 1 1
4 2 2
A/P DISC 11 11 7 7
CWS GND 6 6 PILOT TRIM CMD SW
8
TO DETAIL B & A CWS 2 2 7
(S-TEC P/N 03112) (REF)
DN
3 3
4 4
TO DETAIL B
7 7
8 8
9 9 UP
11 11
91-22-10 AprPAGE
6 6 (S-TEC P/N 3519) (REF)

2 2
C NC
4697001 thru 4697143; and,
C NC
4697145 thru 4697148
CONTROL WHEEL
Effectivity
STEERING SWITCH
NO C
15/07
TO DETAIL E
9
Apr 15/07
PAGE 10
4697145 thru 4697148

4697001 thru 4697143; and,
Effectivity
TO DETAIL D & B
DETAIL
91-22-10
E
ALT SEL A+ RED 18
VOLTAGE SELECT JUMPER 7
28 VDC 14
ALT ENGAGE WHT 10
MANUAL/VS SELECT RED 9
VS COMMAND GRN 17
MASTER DISC. SWITCH WHT 16
AUDIO OUTPUT WHT 8
1 A1 WHT/ORN 5

2 A2 WHT 4
3 A4 WHT/BLU 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B1

5 WHT/ORN 13
6 B2 WHT 3
7 B4 WHT/BLU 24
8
9 C1 WHT/ORN 19
10 C2 WHT 22
11 C4 WHT/BLU 23
12
13 D4 WHT 25
AIRFRAME GROUND BLK 11
TO DETAIL C ALTITUDE SELECTOR/ALERTER
CABLE ASSEMBLY 39241-2
PB1
CABLE ASSEMBLY 39253-1
BLK
TO DETAIL C
Y Y 2
X X YEL 4
W W ORN 8
U U GRN 3
T T BLU 6
k k 9
P P RED 13
N N BLK 4
M M GRN 7
L L YEL 10
K K BLU 8
i i
3 GRN 1
4 WHT
TO DETAIL C
2
YAW 1 RED 3
SERVO 2 BLK 6
9
19
8F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DETAIL F
T2
BLK 3
RED 2
6
ORN 1
2
5 7
3
1 4
T1
11 YEL 3
GRN 2
8 10
9 12 BLU 1

CABLE ASSEMBLY
T2
YEL 3
GRN 2
BLU 1
1 2 3 4
6
5 7
9
8 11 12 10 T1
BLK 3
RED 2
ORN 1
TRIM MASTER SWITCH (EATON)

CABLE ASSEMBLY
Effectivity
8F11 91-22-10 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4 Trim Relay
5 S-TEC 01240 Trim Monitor
6 S-TEC 01192-27-49TPM Programmer / Computer
7 S-TEC 01279-PM Altitude Selector
8 S-TEC 01188-PM Autopilot Annunciator
9 Trim Master / Annunciator Switch
10 MEGGITT 84-134-1 (both sides) EFIS NAV Display (i.e. - EHSI)
11 S-TEC 6405-28L Turn Coordinator (Pilot’s)
12 S-TEC 6542 Horn
13 S-TEC 0106-6-R2 Roll Servo
14 S-TEC 0106-T8 Trim Servo
15 S-TEC 0111 Transducer
16 S-TEC 0106-Y10 Yaw Servo
17 S-TEC 0108-P4 Pitch Servo
18 S-TEC 0121-5 Yaw Amplifier
19 S-TEC 90408-8 (both sides) Control Wheel Switch Installation
20 Flap Compensator Potentiometer
4 2 1 5 20 14 15a 17
6
7
8
19
9
10
11
3 13 15b 16 18
7-8 9 15a
10
11
12
4 5 13 14 15b 16 17 18
Effectivity
Autopilot (S-TEC MAGIC 1500) 4697144 and
8F13 91-22-10 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A/P MASTER SW
MAGIC 1500 COMPUTER
CONNECTOR P2 A/P CB
CABLE ASSEMBLY (REF) AVIONICS BUSS
(5A)
EADI DOWN
SW-1 PIN 7 TRIM CB
4 PITCH FLAP POT WHT 1
6 SIG REF BLU/WHT 2 FLAP POT
5 PITCH TRIM FLAP POT ORN/WHT 3 AVIONCS BUSS
SHIELD GROUND 4 (2A)
AV2
25 STALL WARN TRIGGER WHT 1
SEE DETAIL D, E, & F TO DAY/NIGHT REAY

30 ARINC-TX1A BLU/WHT
31 ARINC-TX1B WHT
SHIELD GROUND
SEE DETAIL A
24 FD ENABLE WHT SEE DETAIL D, E, B, & C 4
1
4
1
2 2
3 3
8 CWS 5 5
55 CWS/GA GND T3
12 DISC SW
SHIELD GROUND
SEE DETAIL D, E, & G
SEE DETAIL E, B, & F

TO DAY/NIGHT
14 GO AROUND BLK RELAY
D
A1
SEE DETAIL E
13 ADAHRS SEL WHT 3
SEE ADAHRS SEL
44 YAW LOGIC WHT
45 MODE SW BLU/WHT
SHIELD GROUND
RAD
ALT
20 RAD ALT FLG WHT 3
15 MIDDLE MARKER BLU/ WHT 4
16 RAD ALT SIG WHT 1
56 RAD ALT GND BLU/WHT 2
SHIELD GROUND 5
Y2
SEE DETAIL D & A
SEE DETAIL A
11 YAW DAMPER ENABLE WHT 1 1
28 ARINC-RX2A BLU/WHT
29 ARINC-RX2B WHT
SHIELD GROUND
SEE DETAIL D
SEE DETAIL D & A
26 ARNIC-RX1A BLU/WHT
27 ARINC-RX1B WHT
SHIELD GROUND SEE DETAIL A & B
E
32 GPSS ARINC-RX3A WHT
33 GPSS ARINC-RX3B BLU/WHT
B
SHIELD GROUND
MAGIC 1500 COMPUTER

CONNECTOR P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY (REF)
14 TRIM INTERRUPT BLU/WHT

35 MANUAL TRIM +DN ORN/WHT
34 MANUAL TRIM +UP WHT
SHIELD GROUND SEE DETAIL E, D, & G SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL F & I

17 AUDIO OUTPUT WHT P1-32 P1-34
T5
P1-35
P1-33 300
1/4W
1 1 1 2 PLCS
48 TRIM SOLENOID RED 3 3 3
TRIM
46 MTR +UP GRN 4 4 4
IN
8 MTR +DN WHT 2 2 2 SERVO
58 SOL GND BLK 9 9 9
SHIELD GROUND 12 12 AUDIO
6 6 AMP
10 10
SEE DETAIL F
7 7
2 28VDC TRIM BLK 11 11 SEE DETAIL B
SEE DETAIL C
44 ROLL MOTOR 1 WHT 4

49 ROLL SOLENOID RED 1 SEE DETAIL E & D
4 ROLL MOTOR 2 GRN 3 ROLL SERVO
54 ROLL SOL GND BLK 2
SHIELD GROUND 9
SEE DETAIL F & I
43 A/P A+ RED
62 AIR FRAME GROUND
9 PITCH SOL GND BLK

45 PITCH MOTOR YEL
6 PITCH MOTOR GRN
C
SEE DETAIL E, D, B, & A
SHIELD GROUND
SEE DETAIL F & I
SEE DETAIL E, B, & A
SEE DETAIL E, D, & A
SEE DETAIL C
50 ROLL STR SIG WHT

19 SIG REF ORN/WHT
SHIELD GROUND
25
34
33
41 G/S FLAG + GRN 32
40 G/S FLAG - WHT 31
42 G/S + UP RED 30
1 G/S + DOWN BLK 29
SHIELD GROUND 28
26
27
9
37 NAV FLAG + GRN 5
36 NAV FLAG - YEL 6
23 LOC. SWITCH BLU 8 429 INTERFACE
39 L-R +LT BLK 20
38 L-R +RT RED 21
SHIELD GROUND 17 P3 P1
18
F
19
22
EXCITATION 23
21 WHT 24
22 EXC REF BLU/WHT
18 SIG REF 15
SHIELD GROUND ORN/WHT 14 1 PWR A+
16 9
1 8
2 10 SIGNAL
4 24
3 25 PWR GROUND
3 AC HEADING WHT 10
47 AC CRS 11 JUMPER
BLU/WHT 11 16
SHIELD GROUND 13 8
2
Effectivity
4697144 and Autopilot (S-TEC MAGIC 1500)
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8F14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D TRIM MONITOR
T2 CABLE ASSEMBLY
3 BLK
2 RED
1 WHT FAIL LAMP 7
WHT
T1
3 BLK TRIM PWR IN 2
2 GRN TRIM LAMP 4
1 RED LAMP PWR 9
AP DISC TRIM INTRPT SW
G
12
BLK TRIM PWR OUT 8
RED TRIM SOL 6 C NC
WHT TRIM SERVO +DN 5
GRN TRIM SERVO +UP 3
14 CO-PILOT TRIM CMD SW
WHT AUDIO 11
BLK AUTOTRIM GND 10
A/C GND 13 DN
WHT 1 3 3
WHT +HORN 15 4 4
7 7 CONTROL WHEEL
CABLE ASSEMBLY 8 8
STEERING SWITCH
9 9
+ P/N 39271-1 5 5 NO C UP
HORN S-TEC (REF) (REF) 11 11
6 6
P/N 6542 CABLE ASSEMBLY 2 2
(REF) T4
SEE DETAIL D GND 3 3 1
TRIM C/B 4 4 5 3 3
AP A+ 7 7 3 4 4
SEE DETAIL G TRIM INT 8 8 5 5
MOTOR DN 9 9 2 6 6
MOTOR UP 5 5 6 1 1
4 2 2
A/P DISC 11 11 7 7
CWS GND 6 6
2 2 7 8
CWS PILOT TRIM CMD SW
SEE DETAIL E, D, & B 3 3
DN
SEE DETAIL E & B SEE DETAIL G 4 4
7 7
8 8
9 9 UP
SEE DETAIL G 5 5
6 6
2 2
C NO
SEE DETAIL G SEE DETAIL E, D, & A

C NO
CONTROL WHEEL
STEERING SWITCH
NO C
E THROTTLE MOUNTED
GO AROUND SWITCH
NO C
H YEL
GRN
BLU
T2
3
2
1
BLK
RED
T2
3
2
ORN 1
1 2 6 3 4 2 5 7 6 EFIS
3 ADAHRS
7 SEL SW
5 P1
1 4 T1 1
9 T1 11 YEL
8 11 12 10 3 A1
BLK 3 12 GRN 2 1 1
RED 2 9 8 10 BLU 2 2
1
F
ORN 1 3 3
TRIM MASTER SWITCH (EATON) TRIM MASTER SWITCH (STACO) AUTOPILOT ADHARS SEL RELAY
PB1
SEE DETAIL F & C CABLE ASSEMBLY
SEE DETAIL I
Y Y BLK 2
X X YEL 4
W W ORN 8
U U GRN 3
T T BLU 6
K K 9
P P RED 13
N N BLK 4
WHT WHT s s WHT 9
SEE DETAIL F, E, D, B, & A M M GRN 7
L L YEL 10
Y3 K K BLU 8
I I
3 GRN 1
YAW TRIM WHT 1 1 WHT YAW 4 WHT 2
POTENTIOMETER ORN/WHT 2 2 ORN/WHT 1 RED 3
BLU/WHT 3 3 BLU/WHT SERVO 2 BLK 6
4 4 9
19
SEE DETAIL I
Y1
I
SEE DETAIL F
Effectivity
8F15 91-22-10 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 16
4697149 thru 4697197

4697144 and
Effectivity
DETAIL
MAGIC 1500 COMPUTER
CONNECTOR P2
A
91-22-10
4 PITCH FLAP POT WHT 1

6 SIG REF BLU/WHT 2 FLAP POT
5 PITCH TRIM FLAP POT ORN/WHT 3
SHIELD GROUND 4
AV2
25 STALL WARN TRIGGER 1

WHT
Autopilot (S-TEC MAGIC 1500)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

30 SEE DETAIL D, E & F

ARINC-TX1A BLU/WHT
31 ARINC-TX1B WHT
SHIELD GROUND
SEE DETAIL D, B, C, &E

24 FD ENABLE WHT
8 CWS
55 CWS/GA GND
12 DISC SW SEE DETAIL D, E, & G
SHIELD GROUND
14 GO AROUND BLK SEE DETAIL D, E, & G
A1
13 ADAHRS SEL WHT 3 SEE ADAHRS SEL
SEE DETAIL B, E, & F

44 YAW LOGIC WHT
45 MODE SW BLU/ WHT
SHIELD GROUND
RAD
ALT
20 RAD ALT FLG WHT 3
15 MIDDLE MARKER BLU/ WHT 4
16 RAD ALT SIG WHT 1
56 RAD ALT GND BLU/ WHT 2
8F16
SHIELD GROUND 5
8F17
SEE DETAIL A
Y2
11 YAW DAMPER ENABLE WHT 1 1
28 ARINC-RX2A BLU/WHT
29 ARINC-RX2B WHT
SEE DETAIL E, F, & I

SHIELD GROUND
26 ARNIC-RX1A BLU/WHT
27 ARINC-RX1B WHT
SHIELD GROUND
32 GPSS ARINC-RX3A WHT
33 GPSS ARINC-RX3B BLU/WHT
SHIELD GROUND
MAGIC 1500 COMPUTER

CONNECTOR P1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL E, D, & G

14 TRIM INTERRUPT BLU/WHT
35 MANUAL TRIM +DN ORN/WHT
34 MANUAL TRIM +UP WHT
SHIELD GROUND
17 AUDIO OUTPUT WHT
T5
1 1 1
48 TRIM SOLENOID RED 3 3 3
TRIM
46 MTR +UP GRN 4 4 4
8 MTR +DN WHT 2 2 2 SERVO
58 SOL GND BLK 9 9 9
SHIELD GROUND 12 12
6 6
10 10
91-22-10 Apr
SEE DETAIL E & D

7 7
2 28VDC TRIM BLK 11 11
4697149 thru 4697197
44 ROLL MOTOR 1 WHT 4

49 ROLL SOLENOID RED 1
4 ROLL MOTOR 2 GRN 3 ROLL SERVO
DETAIL
54 ROLL SOL GND BLK 2
4697144 and
SHIELD GROUND 9
Effectivity
PAGE 17
15/07
B
SEE DETAIL C
Apr 15/07
PAGE 18
4697149 thru 4697197

4697144 and
Effectivity
SEE DETAIL B & A
43 A/P A+ RED
SEE DETAIL F, E, & D
91-22-10
62 AIR FRAME GROUND
PITCH SOL GND
SEE DETAIL F & I

9 BLK
45 PITCH MOTOR YEL
DETAIL

6 PITCH MOTOR GRN
C

SHIELD GROUND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

50 ROLL STR SIG WHT

19 SIG REF ORN/WHT
SHIELD GROUND 25
34
33
41 G/S FLAG + GRN 32
40 G/S FLAG - WHT 31
42 G/S + UP RED 30
1 G/S + DOWN BLK 29
SHIELD GROUND 28
26
27
9
37 NAV FLAG + GRN 5
36 NAV FLAG - YEL 6
23 LOC. SWITCH BLU 8
39 L-R +LT BLK 20
38 L-R +RT RED 21
SHIELD GROUND 17
18
19
22
21 EXCITATION WHT 23
22 EXC REF 24
BLU/WHT 15
18 SIG REF ORN/WHT 14
SHIELD GROUND 16
1
2
4
AC HEADING 3
3 WHT 10
47 AC CRS
8F18
BLU/WHT 11
SHIELD GROUND 13
8F19
A/P MASTER SW
DETAIL
A/P CB
D AVIONICS BUSS
(5A)
EADI DOWN
SW-1 PIN 7 TRIM CB
AVIONCS BUSS
(2A)
TRIM MONITOR
T2 CABLE ASSEMBLY
3 BLK
2

RED
1 WHT FAIL LAMP 7
WHT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

T1
TO DAY/NIGHT REAY
3 BLK TRIM PWR IN 2
2 GRN TRIM LAMP 4
1 RED LAMP PWR 9
12
SEE DETAIL A
4 4 BLK TRIM PWR OUT 8

1 1 RED TRIM SOL 6
5 5 14
T3 WHT AUDIO 11
BLK AUTOTRIM GND 10
A/C GND 13
WHT 1
TO DAY/NIGHT WHT +HORN 15
SEE DETAIL G
RELAY
+ HORN S-TEC
P/N 6542
91-22-10 Apr
(REF)
4697149 thru 4697197
SEE DETAIL G
SEE DETAIL E
4697144 and
Effectivity
PAGE 19
SEE DETAIL E, F, C, G, & I SEE DETAIL E, B, & F SEE DETAIL E & B

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE DETAIL G
DETAIL E
SEE DETAIL D & G
SEE DETAIL F
SEE DETAIL D
SEE DETAIL D & A
SEE DETAIL F & I

P1-35
P1-34
AUDIO
AMP
IN
2 PLCS
P1-32
1/4W
300
P1-33
SEE DETAIL F & I

SEE DETAIL B & A
SEE DETAIL B & A SEE DETAIL B SEE DETAIL B & C

Effectivity SEE DETAIL B
4697144 and Autopilot (S-TEC MAGIC 1500)
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8F20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE DETAIL I
ORN/WHT
BLU/WHT
WHT
WHT
Y3
POTENTIOMETER
YAW TRIM
WHT
SEE DETAIL E, B, & A
PWR GROUND
SIGNAL
PWR A+
429 INTERFACE
2
8
P1
11 JUMPER
25
16
24
10
1
8
9
P3
SEE DETAIL B, E, & D
DETAIL F
SEE DETAIL C Effectivity
8F21 91-22-10 Apr
PAGE 21
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 22
4697149 thru 4697197

4697144 and
Effectivity
DETAIL
AP DISC TRIM INTRPT SW
C NC
G
91-22-10
DN
3 3
4 4
7 7 CONTROL WHEEL
CABLE ASSEMBLY 8 8 STEERING SWITCH
9 9
P/N 39271-1 5 5 NO C UP
(REF) (REF) 11 11
CABLE ASSEMBLY 6 6
2 2
GND 3 3 T4
SEE DETAIL D 1
TRIM C/B 4 4 5 3 3
AP A+ 7 7 3 4 4
TRIM INT 8 8 5 5

MOTOR DN 9 9 2 6 6
1 1
MOTOR UP 5 5 6
4 2 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A/P DISC 11 11 7 7

CWS GND 6 6 8
CWS 2 2 7
PILOT TRIM CMD SW
DN
3 3
4 4
7 7
SEE DETAIL E, D, & B 8 8
9 9 UP
5 5
11 11
2 2
C NO

C NO
CONTROL WHEEL
STEERING SWITCH
NO C
THROTTLE MOUNTED
GO AROUND SWITCH
NO C
8F22
8F23
HDETAIL

T2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T2

YEL 3
GRN 2 BLK 3
BLU 1 RED 2
ORN 1
1 2 6 3 4 2 5 7 6 EFIS
3 ADAHRS
7
SEL SW
5 P1
1 4 T1 1
9
8 11 12 10 T1 11 YEL 3 A1
BLK 3 12 GRN 2 1 1
RED 2 9 8 10 BLU 2 2
1 3 3
ORN 1
91-22-10 Apr
TRIM MASTER SWITCH (EATON) TRIM MASTER SWITCH (STACO) AUTOPILOT ADHARS SEL RELAY
4697149 thru 4697197
4697144 and
Effectivity
PAGE 23
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 24
4697149 thru 4697197

4697144 and
Effectivity PB1
91-22-10
CABLE ASSEMBLY
SEE DETAIL F & C
Y Y BLK 2
X X YEL 4
W W ORN 8
U U GRN 3
T T BLU 6

K K 9
P P RED 13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

N N BLK 4
s s WHT 9
SEE DETAIL F, E, D, B, & A M M GRN 7
L L YEL 10
K K BLU 8
I I
3 GRN 1
4 WHT 2
1 1 WHT
1 RED 3
2 2 ORN/WHT YAW
SERVO 2 BLK 6
3 3 BLU/WHT
4 4 9
19
SEE DETAIL F
Y1
DETAIL
I
8F24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8G1 91-22-10 Apr

PAGE 25
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
T2 T2 T2
YEL 3
3 BLK 3 GRN 2
2 RED 2 BLU 1
1 2 3 4
2 1 6
ORN 1 6
7
5
P551 3
MEGGITT / S-TEC 5 7
MAGIC 1500
BOOM MIKE
1 10
T1 T1 9
4 8 11 12 T1
ADA
11 3 YEL 3 BLK 3
8
2 12 GRN 2 RED 2
RA
HRS
9 1 10 BLU 1 ORN 1
D
XP
AL
ND TRIM MASTER SWITCH (EATON)
T
R
CABLE ASSY. 39229-4-14 CABLE ASSY. 39229-2-14
LB3-E L23W20 L23WW20 WHT

(SEE 91-34-20 FIGURE 6) A
BLK BLK BLK
KE
GB3A-R MI TRIM
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5) OM R
BO ND RED
P3E-2
LT
XP
RS
RED
DA
AH
RA
AD
A ON B
3
(SEE 91-34-20 FIGURE 6) 2
A/P+ 43 22 RED RED P3E-1
A/P
1 MASTER SWITCH AUTOPILOT
S551
6
5 1 A 4
4
OFF
A/P 2 5
BLK MASTER SWITCH
AIRFRAME GND 62 GB3A-E
AUDIO OUTPUT 17 JB1-N

} (SEE 91-24-30 FIGURE 5) INSTRUMENT PNL
3 B 6 B
22 RED
28VDC TRIM 2 GRE
SOL+ 48 WHT
MTR +DN 8 BLU
MTR +UP 46 ORG
C
SOL GND 58
PITCH SOLENOID 53 WHT

PITCH SOL. GND 9 BLU
PITCH MOTOR 1 45 ORG
PITCH MOTOR 2 6 GRN
TRIM SWITCH DN 33 WHT
TRIM SWITCH UP 32 BLU
TRIM SWITCH COM. 56 ORG
P562
R0LL MOTOR 1 44 WHT 4
D
ROLL SOLENOID 49 BLU 22 RED
1
ROLL MOTOR 2 4 ORG 3
ROLL SOL. GND 54 GRN WHT
2
SHIELD GND 9
ROLL SERVO BLU
P552
P557 9
8
FLAP POT SIGNAL 4 WHT 1 1 22 RED
FLAP POT REFERENCE 6 BLU 2 FLAP POT 10
PITCH TRIM FLAP POT 5 ORG 3 24
SHIELD GND 4 25 GB5A-N
11 (SEE 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
YAW DAMPER ENABLE 11 16
ARINC TX1 A 30 WHT 22BLK
P3
ARINC TX1 B 31 BLU
P1
429 INTERFACE
YAW LOGIC 44 WHT 2 429 INTERFACE GO AROUND HARNESS ASSY
MODE SW 45 BLU 8
SHEILD GND GO AROUND SWITCH
GA1 C
GO AROUND 14 WHT 11 RED
GROUND 59 BLU 22 BLK
NO
LIGHTS 9 22 BLU LB5-B
LB2-M 22 BLU LB5-A
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Meggitt / S-TEC 1500 Autopilot Control
4697198, 4697216 and up Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 2)
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105120 F
L FUSELAGE
TRIM MASTER SW
J564 (DIMMING) P555 TRIM MONITOR
TO P317-14
3 WHT 2 TRIM PWR IN
M/W T1 2 BLU 4 TRIM LAMP
1 ORG 9 LAMP PWR
CABLE ASSY. 39229-2-14 (REF)
OR
CABLE ASSY. 39229-4-14 (REF) 1 GRN 7 FAIL LAMP
2 RED 12 SHIELD GROUND
M/W T2 3 BLK GB3A-D
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
P565
A
AP1A22
JB1-J (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 11 AUDIO
GB3A-A BLK 10 AUTOTRIM GND
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 13 A/C GND
CENTER PEDESTAL BLU 1 PANEL LIGHTS
P317-13 (DIMMING)
WHT 15 +HORN
BLK
REF
TRIM SONALERT GB3A-B
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GRE 8 TRIM PWR OUT
WHT 6 TRIM SOL
BLU 5 TRIM SERVO +DN
ORG 3 TRIM SERVO +UP
P559 14 SHIELD GROUND
1 WHT
3 BLU
B TRIM SERVO 4 ORG
9
2
C
P359
V
W
X
Y
k* J359
j* 105120 F / 105124-008
i* V WHT 1
W BLU 2
D e*
X ORG 4
m* Y GRN 3
22 RED n* k* WHT 8
p* j* BLU 6
q* i* ORG 7 PITCH SERVO
r* e* 9 YAW AMPLIFIER
s*
t* m* WHT 13
n* BLU 4
p* ORG 9
WHT
BLU
ORG
q* WHT 7
r* BLU 10
P553 s* 8
ORG
3 t*
2 3 WHT 1
1 YAW POT YAW SERVO 4 BLU 2
1 ORG 3
4
2 GRN 6
9 19
Effectivity
Meggitt / S-TEC 1500 Autopilot Control with Avidyne Entegra in
Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 2) 4697198, 4697216 and up
8G3 91-22-10 Apr

PAGE 27
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 28
Apr 15/07 91-22-10 8G4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8G5 91-23-00 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB362, CB363 Circuit Breaker (5 Amp)

3 F401, F403 Fuse (3 Amp)
F402, F404, F405 Fuse (5 Amp)
4 K6 Ground Clearance Relay
5 Ground Clearance Switch
6 CR6 Diode
7 Battery Master Switch
5, 7
1-2
4
3
5, 7
Ground Clearance
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-23-00 8G6
FWD R/H C/B PANEL FOR COM/NAV/
8G7
J4E/P4E GPS 1 DISPLAY
CB364A18 3 RP1A18 IN GND CLR
CB364B18 4 RP1B18 P387/J387
10A
A
V CB364 COMM1 J4A/P4A
I 18 18
CB362A22 15 RP2A22
B 5A CB362B22 RP2B22
U 16
S CB362 AUDIO/MKR
J4A/P4A P J 317
1 J P RP2E20 15
CB363A22 13 RP2C22 317 12 20
5A CB363B22 14 RP2D22 10 11 NAV/
GPS/N-1
CB363 NAV/GPS1 GPS1 14 20
2
P404 P304
5A 6
F405 * P436 R436 J4 4
F404 5A RP10A18 CCCC RP10B18 g g RP10C18 18

19
1 5
F402 5A RP7A20 R R RP7B20 G G RP7C20 16 20
3
**F403 3A EL1A20 E E RP12C20 d d
F401 3A G5E20
P380 31
14 RP12B22
ON
32
P380
RP12D20
K6
15
RP12G16
Ground Clearance
P450 OFF
TO 91-33-10
GND CLEAR SW. K6A
TO 91-32-60
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CR6
J450
SEE SEE RP12A22 21

91-24-30 91-24-30
RP12E20 BATTERY
MASTER SW. 17 20
(SHOWN OFF)
OVHD SW. PANEL
20 18
TO K8 RELAY
RP12F16 TO DISPLAY
(91-32-60)
COM#1
DIM MODULE
BATT
MASTER SPKR/AUDIO AMP (SEE 91-23-50, FIGURE 1)
TO BATT BUS TO BATT CONTACTOR P5001 PIN 39 COM/NAV #1 DIM IN
(91-24-30) (91-24-30)
102220 35.0 N/V
* NOT INSTALLED WITH AVIDYNE ENTGRA IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 AND UP. 104635 NEW/AB
** F406 WITH AVIDYNE ENTGRA IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 AND UP. 105122 NEW/A
91-23-00 AprPAGE 3
15/07
with Kit No. 766-696 installed
Effectivity
and 4697001 thru 4697054

4697055 & up,
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-23-00 8G8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 GMA-340 Audio/Mkr/Intercom Panel

2 Mic Select Switch
3 Mic/Phone Jacks (Co-Pilot)
4 Mic/Phone Jacks (Pilot)
5 J13 Connector (to Stereo)
6 Mic/Phone Jacks (Passenger No. 1)
10 Mkr/Beacon Antenna
1 3 7 8
CO-
PILOT 2 3
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
1 4
PILOT
2 4 5 6 9
10
GMA-340 Audio/Mkr/Intercom
8G9 91-23-50 AprPAGE 1

15/07
1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH
GMA 340 CONTROL WHEEL CO-PILOT PASSENGER PASSENGER PASSENGER PASSENGER
EFIS PILOT MUSIC
CLOCK
AUDIO M/B PILOT CO-PILOT HARNESS MIC PHONE AUDIO MIC MIC PHONE INPUT MIC PHONE MIC PHONE MIC PHONE
340P2 340P1 FUNCTION J1/P1 SPKR (REF) (REF) J16 J20 J19 J17 J18 J3 J4 J13 J7 J9 J6 J5 J11 J10
PAGE 2
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
8 AUDIO AMP/MKR A+ 22 RED RP7
TO P387-17 (SEE 91-23-00, FIGURE 1)
less 4697198
9 AUDIO AMP/MKR A+ 22 RED RP7
10 AIRFRAME GND 22 BLACK
11 AIRFRAME GND 22 BLACK
5 DIM GROUND 22 BLACK
6
4697001 thru 4697215,

7 DIM 22 BLUE
32 CO-PILOT MIC AUDIO 3

33 CO-PILOT MIC KEY 2
91-23-50
34 CO-PILOT MIC RETURN 1
4
CO-PILOT PTT SW CW15J
CW16J
4 CO-PILOT PHONES AUDIO 2
2 PHONES AUDIO RETURN 1
3
35 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO 2
36 MIC AUDIO RETURN 3
1
1
1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
41 PASSENGER PHONE AUDIO RT 1
40 PASSENGER PHONE AUDIO LT 2

42 PHONE AUDIO RETURN 3
4
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
26 MUSIC #2 INPUT L 3
27 MUSIC #2 INPUT R 2
28 MUSIC #2 INPUT GND 1
9 COMM 1 AUDIO HI 5
10 COMM 1 AUDIO LO 6
ALL WIRING IS 22 AWG. (SHIELDED AS SHOWN) UNLESS
7
OTHERWISE DESIGNATED.
11 COMM 1 MIC AUDIO 8
12 COMM 1 MIC KEY 9
10
A B C D E F G H I
8G10
A B C D E F G H I
13 COMM 2 AUDIO HI 11
8G11
MONO PHONE\PJACK MIC OR STEREO\PPHONE JACK
14 COMM 2 AUDIO LO 12
13
15 COMM 2 MIC AUDIO 14
30 COMM 2 MIC KEY 15 R T
T S
16 S
17 NAV 1 AUDIO HI 17
VIEW A
18 NAV 1 AUDIO LO 18
19
1 2 3
19 NAV 2 AUDIO HI 20
20 NAV 2 AUDIO LO 21
K'WAY
22
21 DME AUDIO HI 23
22 DME AUDIO LO 24 4 5 6
25
7 ADF 1 AUDIO HI 26 SWITCH DETAIL
8 ADF 1 AUDIO LO 27
28
RADAR ALT DH AUD 30
15 1 15 1
31
30 16 30 16
31 A/P ALERT 32 44 31 44 31
33
34 340P1 340P2
ALT PRESELECT AUDIO
35
TRIM MONITOR AUDIO 36 REAR CONNECTOR VIEW
37
330 OHM 1/4 WATT

RESISTOR (4 REQ)
36 MARKER I SIG(WHT) 1
37 MARKER O SIG(BLUE) 3
38 MARKER M SIG (AMBER) 2

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
33 PILOT MIC AUDIO 3

34 PILOT MIC KEY 2
35 PILOT MIC RETURN 1
4
3
2
PILOT PTT SW CW15
CW16 1
6
5
16 PILOT PHONES AUDIO 2 4

3 3
1 PHONES AUDIO RETURN 1 R
1 1
3 T SEE VIEW A
44 SPEAKER 1
S
43 SPKR GND 2 2 2 #S12B OXYGEN
MASK
GROUND 22B
MIC JACK
SEE SWITCH DETAIL
91-23-50 AprPAGE
102313 T/U
1 MKR RCVR ANTENNA RG188A/U
15/07
3
less 4697198
4697001 thru 4697215,
Effectivity
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PASSENGER AUDIO
P340P2
GMA-340
PAGE 4
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PASSENGER #1
J3403
PAX-1 MIC IN 35 WHT 2
PAX-1 MIC GND 36 BLU 3
1
J3404
1
2
3

4
4697198, 4697216 and up

PASSENGER #2
PAX-2 MIC IN 37 WHT 2 J3407
91-23-50
1
J3409
1
2
3
4
PASSENGER #3
J3406
1
J3405
1
2
3
4
PASSENGER #4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J34011
J34010
1
2
3
J34013 4
MUSIC #2 INPUT L 26 3
MUSIC #2 INPUT R 27 2
MUSIC #2 INPUT GND 28 1
P340P1
PAX HDST RT 41
STEREO PAX HDST LT 40
PAX HDST GND 42
105120 SHT 13 D/M
8G12
105120 SHT12 M
INSTRUMENT PANEL
8G13
GMA-340
P340P2
11-33 VDC POWER INPUT 8 22 RED AUDIO
11-33 VDC POWER INPUT 9 22 RED AUDIO P387-17
POWER GROUND 10 22 BLK GB1A-C (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
POWER GROUND 11 22 BLK GB1A-D (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
14V LGT LO / 28V LGT LO 5 22 BLK GB1A-E (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
14V LGT / 28V LGT LO 6
14V LGT / 28V LGT 7 22BLU LB2-J (TO 91-33-10 FIGURE 5)
SPEAKER OUT 44 1 P34012

SPEAKER GND 43 2 ("SPKR")
J34019
3
CO-PILOT PHONE AUDIO 4 WHT 2 J34020
PHONE AUDIO RETURN 2 BLU 1 4
CO-PILOT MIC AUDIO 32 WHT 3
CO-PILOT MIC KEY 33 BLU 2
CO-PILOT MIC RETURN 34 ORG 1
P566 J34016
CW15J 10 P/O COPILOT CONTROL WHEEL
CW16J 12 3
PILOT PHONE AUDIO 16 WHT 2
J34018
PILOT AUDIO RETURN 1 BLU 1
P340P1 4
PILOT MIC AUDIO 33 WHT 3
PILOT MIC KEY 34 BLU 2
PILOT MIC RETURN 35 ORG 1
WHT
P554 BLK SEE 91-22-10 FIGURE 3
CW15 10 P/O PILOT CONTROL WHEEL A B BOOM SWITCH

CW16 12
3
2 1
6
P34017
5 4 J34017
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 3
R
1 1
T OXYGEN MASK
2 2 S MIC
JB CENTER RACK
COMM 1 MIC KEY 12 JB5-Y (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
COMM 2 MIC KEY 30 JB7-W (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
AUDIO PANEL
UNMUTED AUDIO IN 31 JB2-T (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
MKR BCN ANT 1

2-330062-1
CONNECTOR
91-23-50 AprPAGE
15/07
5
4697198, 4697216 and up
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105120 30.0 F
SUMMING AMP
M1019 AUD1
+28 VDC POWER 13 22RED AMP

P4A-12
POWER GROUND 12 22BLK GB4A-A (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
CHASSIS GROUND 25 22BLK GB4A-B (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
XPNDR #1 AUDIO IN 1 XPNDR #1 (JB1-D, 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

SHIELD 2
XPNDR #2 AUDIO IN 4 XPNDR #2 AUDIO HI (P3302-15, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
SHIELD 5 XPNDR #2 AUDIO LO (P3302-16, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
RAD ALT AUDIO IN 7 RAD ALT AUDIO HI (KI250-7, 91-34-20 FIGURE 8)

SHIELD 8
IHAS AUDIO IN 15 IHAS 500 OHM AUDIO HI (P10-20, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)

IHAS 500 OHM AUDIO LO (P10-21, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
SHIELD 16 (REF) GB5A-H
SUMMED AUDIO OUT 23 JB1-Y (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

SHIELD 24 JB2-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Summing Amp
4697198, 4697216 and up Figure 2
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-23-50 8G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8G15 91-23-50 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-23-50 8G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8G17 91-24-30 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item # Designation Description
1 CB301 CB302 Circuit Breaker (150 Amp)

3 CB306, CB307, CB308 Circuit Breaker (80 Amp)
7 F402, F404, F407 Fuse (5 Amp)
8 F401, F403, F406, F408 Fuse (3 Amp)
9 F307 Fuse (2 Amp)
10 Radio Master Switch
11 K310, K315 Radio Master Contactor
12 External Power Receptacle
13 Alternator (130 Amp)
14 K403 External Power Contactor
15 Battery
16 K401 Battery Contactor
17 Battery Master Switch
18 R304 Shunt
19 R305 Shunt
20 K405 Line Contactor
102228B, 102285 A
10, 17
5, 11
18
6
1-4, 20
7, 8, 14-16 19
10, 17
13 18
12
19
Effectivity Power Distribution
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8G18
LIGHTNING
8G19
SUPPRESSOR FWD MAIN BUS
CB346-16N CB346-16
V308 LIGHTNING P/O C/B PNL'S
SUPPRESSOR
CB366-16N
P9A6
CB346
V309 CR331L 15A CR331R
AFT MAIN BUS
CB366-16 CB366
15A 25A CB368 CR331M
RP1B8L AV #1 AV #2 RP1B8R
K310 (SHOWN OFF) AVIONICS (SHOWN OFF) K315

NC NO NC NO
ON
P6A4
1A X2 P380 OFF P380
X1 X1 1A X2
P17B6R
RP3A22L 21 20 RP3A22R
CR310 C C CR315
P/O OVHD SW PNL
NON-ESS P5A4
P17B6L
RP1A8L RP1A8R
50mv=200A
LINE CB CB CB CB CB 50mv=150A
FIREWALL PRESS BLKHD 307
CONTACTOR 306 304 305 308
FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU SHUNT 80A PRESS BLKHD
R304 80A 35A 35A 100A FIREWALL
SHUNT FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU
P5A2 P5B2 5A CB302
BUSS TIE R305
B P4B4 P4A4
C 20 150A
P P4D4
P5P 5A 5A 2A 5A
SEE FIGURE 4 FOR
COIL WIRING CB301
P5HH20
91-23-00
SEE START 150A SEE FIGURE 4 +

SEE FIGURE 4 E3N20 SEE 91-77-40, FIG 2, SHT 3
GEN SYSTEM ALT
P7AA20 SEE FIGURE 2
(91-80-10)
F401 91-32-60
DN1AA22 TO 91-31-50
F402 91-23-00
F403 91-33-10
F405
F404
P1D2
A GND
Power Distribution
TO START 3A 5A 3A 5A 5A
B PRESS. BLKHD FEEDTHRU CONTACTOR
EMER/GND CLR BUS
C (91-80-10)
RP12G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FIREWALL FEEDTHRU X2
P4C4N
E
P5A2N
BU
S
EXT PWR BATTERY RP12E20 } TO EMER./GND CLEARANCE

FIREWALL PRESS BLKHD
RP12F16
AFT X1
BA
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR P436-E (91-23-00)

R
FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU

A2 A1 K420
BUS BAR P1A2
CR402
AFT BLHK P22D20 F F +
J420 A/P CONN. P305/P405 + INTERNAL
91-25-10
91-33-20
91-25-10
P22A18 Z Z P22B18 b b P22C20 b b P430/J430 K403 SUPPRESSION K401 *

P20A2 R437/P437 - -
P22A20N P430/J430
F406
F407
F408
P21A2N 38A
20 GA. JUMPER GG 3A 5A 3A SINGLE
EXTERNAL P1C16
BATT BUS 17A * 12A OR BATTERY
POWER P435 R435 P403J3 P303
P2A20 c c P2B20 _c _ c P2C20 DUAL
RECEPTACLE
P1B2N
P1B2N
BATTERY
P380 16
BATTERY * 2 GAUGE
MASTER JUMPER
P380 ON
P2D20N 17 TO S/N'S 4697170 & UP
GND CLEAR AND
OFF (91-23-00) 4697001 THRU 4697169
GB5-B WITH KIT # 767-375
102220 2.0 V/V P/O OVHD SW. PANEL
INSTALLED.
91-24-30 AprPAGE
104635 2.0 W/AB
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
3
FWD MAIN BUS
PAGE 4
P/O C/B PNL'S
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
P9A6
CR331L CR331R
AFT MAIN BUS
25A CB365 CR331M
RP1B8L AV #1 AV #2 RP1B8R

(NO POWER APPLIED)
K310(SHN. IN OFF) ( SHN. IN OFF)K315
4697198; 4697216 and up

NC NO NC NO
OFF ON
P6A4
X1 1A X2
P380 P380 X1 X2
P17B6R
RP3A22L 21 20 RP3A22R
C C 1A
CR310 CR315
91-24-30
AVIONICS
NON-ESS P5A4
P17B6L
RP1A8L RP1A8R
50mv=200A
LINE CB CB CB CB CB 50mv=150A
FIREWALL PRESS BLKHD 307
SHUNT CONTACTOR 306 304 305 308
FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU 80A
80A 35A 35A 100A PRESS BLKHD FIREWALL
R304 SHUNT FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU
P5A2 P5B2 CB302
R305
B BUSS TIE P4B4 P4A4
C 0 5A 150A
PP2
P5 5A 5A 5A
SEE FIGURE 4
CB301 P4D4
P5HH20 SEE FIGURE 4
91-23-00
91-23-00
91-23-00
91-23-00
FOR COIL WIRING SEE FIGURE 4 150A +

SEE START
GEN SYSTEM P7AA20 SEE FIGURE 2 ALT
(91-80-10)
F401
DN1AA22 TO 91-31-50
F406
F405
F403
F402
F404
P1D2
A GND
Power Distribution
TO START 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 5A
B PRESS. BLKHD FEEDTHRU CONTACTOR
EMER/GND CLR BUS
C (91-80-10)
RP12G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E FIREWALL FEEDTHRU X2
P4C4N
P5A2N
BU X1 }
S
RP12E20 TO EMER./GND
EXT PWR BATTERY CLEARANCE P436-E
PRESS BLKHD FIREWALL
RP12F16
AFT
BA
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR K420

R
FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU FEEDTHRU (91-23-00)

A2 A1
BUS BAR P1A2
CR402
P22D20 F F
J420 P359/J359 P305/P405 + INTERNAL + 38A
91-25-10
91-33-20
91-25-10
P22A18 Z Z b b b b P430/J430 SUPPRESSION BATTERY

P22B18 P22C20
P20A2 J437/P437 - - K401
P22A20N P430/J430
F409
F408
F407
P21A2N K403
20 GA. JUMPER G G 5A 5A 5A
EXTERNAL P1C16
P1B2N
P435 J435 P403 J3 P303 BATT BUS

POWER
P2A20 c c P2B20 _c _c P2C20
RECEPTACLE
P380 16
BATTERY
MASTER
P380 ON
P2D20N 17
105122 2.0 NEW/A TO GND CLEAR
(91-23-00)
OFF
GB5-B
OVHD SW. PANEL
8G20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8G21 91-24-30 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 F305 Fuse (5 Amp)
4 F408 Fuse (3 Amp)
5 F301 - F304 Fuse (5 Amp)
6 R304 Shunt
7 R305 Shunt
8 A0780 Volt-Amp / Rudder Trim Indicator
(S/N’s 4697156 & up; and, 4697001 thru 4697155 with Kit No. 767-342 installed. See Notes.)
9 KGAM Relay, Generator - Ammeter
NOTE: In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697155, when replacing the original factory installed Volt-Amp/Rudder
Trim Indicator (P/N 602-264), you must also replace the original factory installed rudder trim
actuator assembly (P/N 102345-004). Order Kit No. 767-342.
NOTE: When the Avidyne Entegra is installed in S/N’s 4697198: 4697216 and up, the Volt-Amp/Rudder
Trim Indicator is not installed. See Sheet 3.
1-2
Effectivity Volt/Amp and Rudder Meters

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO
P56A20 P56B20
FIGURE 4
C C C C
KGAM NO NO KGAM NO NO
SHOWN WITH SHOWN WITH

GENERATOR OFF GENERATOR OFF
S/N'S 4697070 THRU 4697072, 4697074, S/N'S 4697165 & UP.

4697076, AND 4697078 & UP;
AND 4697001 THRU 4697069,
4697073, 4697075 AND 4697077
WITH KIT # 767-308 INSTALLED.
TO GEN 50mv 50mv TO ALTNR

(SEE FIGURE 4) SHUNT CB302 SHUNT (SEE FIGURE 3)
R304 R305
P5A2 P5B2 P4B4 P4A4
F301 150A
5A
BUS TIE F303 F304
F302 LINE
5A 5A
5A CONTACTOR
F305
5A J315/P315
1 P6C18
P7AA20
2 P6B18
P314/J314 GB3-D
TO 91-33-10, FIGURE 5
P8A18 1 J313 P7F20N
4
P6K20
P8B18 2
P313 P7E20N
P7B20N P6J20
P7H20
GB3-C
GB3-B
P7G20
P7A20
T1H20 TO AFT BLKHD

A/P CONN. f (91-27-20)
T1L20N GB7-D
GB3-A
L25F20
T1N20 TO AFT BLKHD

P7C20N A/P CONN. c (91-27-20)
TO LOW BUS P7D22 TO AFT BLKHD

T1J20
ANNUNCIATOR
P328-3 A/P CONN. h (91-27-20)
P327 9 20 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 23 24 1 25 12 22 21 13 11 18 19 17
(91-31-50)
LOW VOLTAGE ALARM
CASE GROUND
GEN. REG. ADJUST (CW)
GEN. REG. ADJUST (SLIDER)
GEN. REG. ADJUST (CCW)
ALT. REG. ADJUST (CW)
ALT. REG. ADJUST (SLIDER)
ALT. REG. ADJUST (CCW)
POWER INPUT RTN
AMP SIGNAL HI (GEN)
AMP SIGNAL LO (GEN)
+28VDC POWER HI
SIGNAL INPUT (VDC)
+28VDC LIGHTING HI
AMP SIGNAL LO (ALT)
AMP SIGNAL HI (ALT)
LIGHTING RTN (DAY)
LIGHTING RTN (NIGHT)
RUDDER SIG. INPUT HI
RUDDER SIG. INPUT LOW
RUDDER EXC. (+28 VDC)
VOLT/AMP METERS
102220 2.1 U/V

104635 2.1 AB
Volt/Amp and Rudder Meters Effectivity

8G23 91-24-30 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO GEN TO ALTNR
50mv CB302 50mv
(SEE FIGURE 4) (SEE FIGURE 3)
SHUNT SHUNT
R304 R305
P5A2 P5B2 P4B4 P4A4
F301 150A
5A BUS TIE
F302 LINE
5A
CONTACTOR
F303
5A
K300 WHT
P314/J314
A3 BLU
1 P7GG20 A2
A1 5A
F304
2 P7RR20 B3
B2
B1
3
X2 X1
TO GEN CONTACT (+) P56B20
NOTE: SHN WITH

P7G22
P7R22
GENERATOR OFF
P6J22
P327
MFD INTERFACE
15
BLU 6 AMP SIGNAL HI (ALT)
WHT 13 AMP SIGNAL LO (ALT)
BLU 12 AMP SIGNAL LO (GEN)

WHT 5 AMP SIGNAL HI (GEN)
TO LOW BUS ANNUN P7D22 7 LOW VOLTAGE ALARM
P328-3
(91-31-50)
105122 2.1 NEW/A
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Volt/Amp and Rudder Meters
4697198; 4697216 and up Figure 2 (Sheet 3 of 3)
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8H1 91-24-30 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A335 Voltage Regulator
3 Alternator (130 Amp)
4 Alternator Switch
5 R305 Shunt
6 F421 Fuse (1 Amp)
7 F409 Fuse (5 Amp)
2, 5
4
3
2, 5
Effectivity Alternator System and Control

PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8H2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
102220 4.0 V/V

P/O OVHD SW. PANEL
104635 L/AB
ALTERNATOR 105122 NEW
FIELD ALTERNATOR
SWITCH
J2A/P2A P380 P380
MAIN BUS
ON
CB326-20 9 P4N20 13 12
5A
CB326 OFF
P/O FWD L/H C/B PANEL
P360/J360
P4P20 1 RED
TO P384-3 P4M20 4 GRY A

ANNUN-RELAY 9 LAV VOLT 3
(91-31-50)
6 YEL REG 3
7 ORN 5
2 BLU
3 BRN
8 BLK
P4G20
P4S20N
P4K20
P4L20
GB5-C
V P4J20 V P4H20
W P4F20 W P4E20
F321
P305 P405 P437
F409
J5
1A
5A
50mv
SHUNT
R305 FD STA
TO TIE BUS P4B4 P4A4 BAT
50mv = 150A
(91-24-30, FIGURE 1) ALT
GND
PRESS. BLKHD. FEEDTHRU
P4C4N
FIREWALL FEEDTHRU
V P4J20 V P4H20
W P4F20 W P4E20
S P4T20 S P4U20
P305 P405 P437
J5 F421 F409
1A 5A
50mv
SHUNT
R305 FD STA
TO TIE BUS P4B4 P4A4 BAT
50mv = 150A
(91-24-30, FIGURE 1) ALT
GND
PRESS. BLKHD. FEEDTHRU
P4C4N
FIREWALL FEEDTHRU
S/N'S 4697123 & UP; AND 4697001 THRU 4697122 WITH KIT # 767-307 INSTALLED.
Alternator System and Control Effectivity

8H3 91-24-30 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB Circuit Breaker (10 Amp)

3 A443 Starter/Generator (200 Amp)
4 Generator Control Unit (GCU)
5 Generator Control Switch
6 R304 Shunt
7 F324, F325 Fuse (5 Amp)
8 CB 315 Circuit Breaker (5 Amp)
6
1-2
4
3
Effectivity Generator System and Control

PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8H4
8H5
GEN CONTROL UNIT
TO P437-N (91-80-10, FIGURE 1) K1C20 P GEN DISABLE
J4
P304/P404 R436/P436
TO P384-4
ANNUN-RELAY P5AA20 S P5Z20 BB P5Y20 S GEN OFF ANNUN
(91-31-50)
V P5J20 u P5K20 A BUS SENSE

W P5M20 v P5N20 H LINE CONT COIL
X P5R20 w P5S20 B GEN SENSE
P/O OVHD SW. PNL c P5V16 P5W16
AA J POWER IN
P5H20
ON 8 P5U16
M FIELD
P5L20
10 9
D CURRENT SENSE
P5LL20N P380 20 GA JUMPERS
P5P20
11
G SIG GND
P380 OFF
P5T16
GB3-E
P313 GENERATOR L GROUND
2 7 6 5 CONTROL SW.
J313
P424
ON INSTR PANEL P5G16N
GB9-B
P5PP20
GENERATOR
P55L20
P5HH20
P5LN20N
F325
- CONTROL
10A P5F20
X1
5A P5E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
16
F324 X2 50mv P5D16
TT
Generator System and Control

5A SHUNT
+
P5
A2 A1 R304
P5B2 P5A2
BUSS TIE 50mv = 200A B A443
SEE 91-24-30, FIGURE 1 LINE
CONTACTOR BEHIND INSTR. PANEL C A
K405 }
D
SEE START
PRESSURE BULKHEAD FEEDTHRU CONTROL GEN
(91-80-10)
FIREWALL FEEDTHRU
P5A2N A
E
B
C
102220 5.0 N/V

104635 5.0 H
91-24-30 Apr
4697001 thru 4697131
Effectivity
15/07
PAGE 13
GEN CONTROL UNIT
PAGE 14
Effectivity
TO P437-N (91-80-10, FIGURE 1) K1C20 P GEN DISABLE
Apr 15/07
P5AA20
J4
TO P384-4 P304/P404 R436/P436
ANNUN-RELAY
ENGINE
(91-31-50) P55AA20 S P5Z20 BB P5Y20 S GEN OFF ANNUN
START
4697001 thru 4697131

5A K2A20
CB315 V P5J20 u P5K20 A BUS SENSE
S/N'S 4697132 & UP; and

P5U20 W P5M20 v P5N20 H LINE CONT COIL
with Kit # 767-329 installed.

OVHD SW. PNL
91-24-30
3 ON 8 c P5V16 AA P5W16 J POWER IN
P5H20
10 9 M FIELD
P380 20 GA JUMPERS
11 D CURRENT SENSE
P5LL20N
P5T20
P5P20
P380 OFF SIG GND
G
GB3-E GENERATOR
CONTROL SW.
P313 L GROUND
2 7 6 5
TO P56B20
J313
FIGURE 2 INSTR PANEL P424
P55Z20
* P5G16N
GENERATOR GB9-B
CONTROL
P5PP20
P55L20
P5HH20
P5LN20N
P55T16
F325
P56A20
- a P5F20
10 P313
5A 9 P5E20
J313
6
F324
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P5D16
T T1
5A SHUNT
+
P5

A2 A1 R304
P5B2 P5A2
BUSS TIE 50mv=200A B A443
K405 - LINE CONTACTER
SEE FIGURE 1 } (BEHIND INSTR. PANEL)
C A
87a 87z P55ZZ20
SEE START
D
P55Z20N (91-80-10)
FIREWALL FEEDTHRU
S/N'S 4697165 & UP. P5A2N

* A
E
B
C
104635 5.0 U/AB
8H6
8H7
GEN CONTROL UNIT
TO P394-18
ANNUN RELAY TO P437-N (91-80-10) K1C20 P GEN DISABLE
(91-31-50) P5AA20 J4
ENGINE
START P304/P404 J436/P436
J2A P2A
CB315-20 2 K2A20 P55AA20 S P5Z20 BB P5Y20 S GEN OFF ANNUN
5A
CB315
V P5J20 u P5K20 A BUS SENSE

P5U20 W P5M20 v P5N20 H LINE CONT COIL
OVHD SW. PNL
3 ON 8 c P5V16 AA P5W16 J POWER IN
P5H20
10 9 M FIELD
P380 20 GA JUMPERS
11 D CURRENT SENSE
P5LL20N
P5T20
P5P20
P380 OFF G SIG GND
GENERATOR
GB3-E CONTROL SW.
L GROUND
INSTR PANEL P424
TO FIG. 2
P55Z20
GENERATOR P5G16N
CONTROL
GB9-B
P55T16
F325
- a P5F20
10
5A
P5E20
P56B20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
F324 P5D16
T1

T
5A SHUNT
+
P5
A2 A1 R304
P5B2 P5A2
BUSS TIE 50mv=200A B A443
K460 LINE CONTACTER
SEE FIGURE 1 } (BEHIND INSTR. PANEL) C A
87a 87z
SEE START D
P55Z20N
(91-80-10)
FIREWALL FEEDTHRU
P5A2N A
E
B
105122 5.0 A
C
91-24-30 Apr
PAGE 15
15/07
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item # Designation Part Number Description
PENDING
(See Parts Catalog)
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in J Block Diagrams
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8H8
8H9
GB1A GB4A
A GI-106 (P-21, 91-34-50 FIGURE 4) A SUMMING AMP (AUD1-12, 91-23-50 FIGURE 2)
B GI-106 (P-18, 91-34-50 FIGURE 4) B SUMMING AMP (AUD1-25, 91-23-50 FIGURE 2)
C GMA-340 (P2-10, 91-23-50 FIGURE 1) C GNS430 #2 (P43022-21, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
D GMA-340 (P2-11, 91-23-50 FIGURE 1) D GNS430 #2 (P43022-22, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
E GMA-340 (P2-5 & 6, 91-23-50 FIGURE 1) E (JB10-Z, 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
F ADF (P1-11 OR P871-S, 91-34-50 FIGURE 10) F TAS SW (91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
H ADF (P1-19 OR P871-E, 91-34-50 FIGURE 10) H CONTROL INHIBIT SW (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
J ADF-IND (P6502-8, 91-34-50 FIGURE 10) J
K DME-IND (P4501-25, 91-34-50 FIGURE 9) K K17 SHIELD (91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
L DME-SWITCH (1C-C, 91-34-50 FIGURE 9) L
M IHAS ANNUN (P411-9, 21, & 22, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3) M
N XM RECEIVER (XMP1-37, 91-34-20 FIGURE 8) N
P DC COUPLER (P501-8, 91-34-20 FIGURE 8) P
R R
LH/FWD RH/FWD
GB2A GB5A
Ground and Junction Block Diagrams

A ADAHRS SW (P-3, 91-34-20 FIGURE 4) A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B PFD #1 (A2, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) B DME (P4511-25, SH 19 OR P631-1,A 91-34-50 FIGURE 8)

C C KMH-820 (P10-1, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
PFD #1 (A2, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)

D PFD #1 (D1, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) D KMH-820 (P10-127 & 128, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
E PFD #1 (A4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) E IHAS (TDIAG-5, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
F PFD #1 (A4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) F IHAS (GPDIAG-5, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
H PFD #1 (D2, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) H KMH-820 (P10-SHEILD, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
J #1 GNS430 (P43021-21, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3) J KMH-820 (P10-SHEILD, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
K #1 GNS430 (P43021-22, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3) K KMH-820 (P10-84, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
L RELAY PANEL (J567-B, 91-34-20 FIGURE 6) L KMH-820 (P10-83, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
M M KRA10A (P1001-11, 91-34-50 FIGURE 8)
N N KRA10A (SHIELD, 91-34-50 FIGURE 8)
P P
R R
LH/FWD AFT
GB3A GB6A
91-24-30 Apr
A TRIM MONITOR (P555-10 & 13, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3) A ADF CONVERTER (91-34-50 FIGURE 10)
B TRIM HORN (GND, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3) B
C CONTROL WHEEL (P554-3, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3) C
D TRIM MASTER SW (P565-3, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3) D
4697198; 4697216 and up
E AUTOPILOT (P1-62, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3) E

F PFD #2 (A2, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) F
H PFD #2 (A2, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) H

J PFD #2 (D3, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) J
K PFD #2 (A4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) K
L PFD #2 (A4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) L
M PFD #2 (D4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5) M
N MFD (P530-60, 61, & 62, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7) N
P TRIM RELAY GND (J567-B, 91-34-20 FIGURE 6) P
R SWITCH LIGHT GND (A/P MAS SW-A, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3) R
Effectivity
PAGE 17
105120 27 K
15/07
RH/FWD AFT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JB1
A TIS AUDIO (#1 XPDR)(P3301-15, 91-34-50 FIGURE 6)

B
C
D SUMMING AMP (AUD1-1, 91-23-50 FIGURE 2)
E
F
G
H
J TRIM MONITOR AUDIO (P555-11, 91-23-50 FIGURE 2)
K
L
M
N A/P ALERT AUDIO (P1-17, 91-22-10 FIGURE 3)
P
R
S
T
W
Y SUMMING AMP (AUD1-23, 91-23-50 FIGURE 2)
Z
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF) 330 OHM 1/4 WATT
RESISTOR (3 REQ)
JB2
N
J AUDIO ALERTS
E
A
T ALERT AUDIO HI
B (P3401-31, 91-23-50 FIGURE 1)
F
K
P
W
CTJ1-22E-04F (REF)
JB3
TO JB6
A JUMPER TO JB6-D
B GTX330 #1 (P3301-32, 91-34-50 FIGURES 6 & 7)
C
D MFD 429 CH 1 RX A (P530-5, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
E JUMPER TO JB6-H
F
G GTX330 #1 (P3301-35, 91-34-50 FIGURES 6 & 7)
H MFD 429 CH 1 RX B (P530-23, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB4
A #1 PFD (P732-68, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
B #1 GTX-330 (P3301-33, 91-34-50 FIGURE 6)
C DAU 429 PORT C AIR DATA (J2-4)
D DAU GPS 1 RX PORT A (J2-3)
E
F RDR-2000 (P5001-8, 91-34-40 FIGURE 1)
G KMH-820 (P10-62, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
H 1500 A/P (P2-26, 91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
CTJ1-22E-01C (REF)
JB12
A #1 PFD (P732-67, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
B #1 GTX-330 (P3301-36, 91-34-50 FIGURE 6)
C DAU 429 PORT C AIR DATA(J2-17)
D DAU GPS 1 RX PORT A (J2-16)
E
F RDR-2000 (P5001-9, 91-34-40 FIGURE 1)
G KMH-820 (P10-63, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
H 1500 A/P (P2-27, 91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
CTJ1-22E-01C (REF)
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Ground and Junction Block Diagrams
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JB5 105120 28.0 G
A #2 PFD CH 7, TX A (P732-68, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)

B DAU GPS 2 RX PORT B (J3-3)
C
D
E #2 PFD CH 7, TX B (P732-67, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
F DAU GPS 2 RX PORT B (J3-16)
G
H
J
K #2 GTX-330 (P3301-33, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
L DAU 429 PORT D IN A (J3-4)
M 1500 A/P (P2-28, 91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
N
P #2 GTX-330 (P3301-36, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
R DAU 429 PORT D IN B (J3-17)
S 1500 A/P (P2-29, 91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
T #2 GPS TX LOCK (P43022-14, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
W #1 GPS MIC (P43021-4, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
Y #1 GMA MIC KEY #1 (P3401-12, 91-23-50 FIGURE 1)
Z
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB6
TO JB3
A #1 GPS CH1 TX A (P43011-46, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
B #1 PFD CH 1, RX A (P732-41, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
C #2 PFD CH 1, RX A (P732-41, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
D JUMPER TO JB3-A
E #1 GPS CH1 TXB (P43011-47, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
F #1 PFD CH 1, RX B (P732-40, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
G #2 PFD CH 1, RX B (P732-40, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
H JUMPER TO JB3-E
J #1 GPS VOR/ILS TX A(P43061-24, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
K #1 PFD CH 2, RX A (P732-4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
L #2 PFD CH 2, RX A (P732-4, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
M
N #1 GPS VOR/ILS TX B (P43061-23, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
P #1 PFD CH 2, RX B (P732-3, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
R #2 PFD CH 2, RX B (P732-3, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
S
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB7
TO JB11
A JUMPER JB11-J
B #1 PFD CH 3, RX A (P732-43, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
C #2 PFD CH 3, RX A (P732-43, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
D MFD CH2 RX (P530-45, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
E JUMPER JB11-N
F #1 PFD CH 3, RX B (P732-42, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
G #2 PFD CH 3, RX B (P732-42, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
H MFD CH2 RX (P530-65, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
J #2 GPS VOR/ILS TX A(P43062-24, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
K #1 PFD CH 4, RX A (P732-7, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
L #2 PFD CH 4, RX A (P732-7, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
M
N #2 GPS VOR/ILS TX B (P43062-23, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
P #1 PFD CH 4, RX B (P732-6, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
R #2 PFD CH 4, RX B (P732-6, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
S
T #2 GPS MIC (P43022-4, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
W #1 GMA MIC KEY #2 (P3401-30 91-23-50 FIGURE 1)
Y #1 GPS TX LOCK (P43021-14, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
Z DC-50 TX PTT (P501-5, 91-34-20 FIGURE 8)
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
Effectivity
Ground and Junction Block Diagrams with Avidyne Entegra in
Figure 5 (Sheet 4 of 6) 4697198; 4697216 and up
8H11 91-24-30 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO JB10
JB8 A #1 GTX330 (P3301-30, 91-34-50 FIGURES 6 & 7)
B #2 GTX330 (P3301-30, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7) 105120 29 G
C JUMPER JB10-J
D
E #1 GTX330 (P3301-28, 91-34-50 FIGURES 6 & 7)
F #2 GTX330 (P3301-28, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
G JUMPER JB10-N
H
J KMH-820 (P10-60)(-100 ONLY)
K #1 GPS CH 1 RX A (P43011-48, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
L #2 GPS CH 1 RX A (P43012-48, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
M K17-9
N KMH-820 (P10-61)(-100 ONLY)
P #1 GPS CH 1 RX B (P43011-49, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
R #2 GPS CH 1 RX B (P43012-49, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
S K17-10
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB9 E PFD #1 ANALOG IN #0 P733-15 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)

F PFD #2 ANALOG IN #0 P733-15 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
G MAGIC 1500 P1-51 (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
H
J PFD #1 ANALOG IN #1 P733-30 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
K PFD #2 ANALOG IN #1 P733-30 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
L MAGIC 1500 P1-50 (91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
M
N PFD #1 ANALOG GND P733-29 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
P PFD #2 ANALOG GND P733-29 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
R MAGIC 1500 P1-55 (91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
S
T PFD #1 ANALOG REF P733-28 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
W PFD #2 ANALOG REF P733-28 (91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
Y MAGIC 1500 P1-18 (91-34-20 FIGURE 6)
Z
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB10 DME SUPPRESSION (P4511-10, 91-34-50 FIGURE 9)

A
OR (P631-K, 91-34-50 FIGURE 8)
B KMH-820 SUPPRESION (P10-68, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
C #1 & 2 GTX-330 SUPPRESSION (P3301-31, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
D
E DME SUPPRESSION SHIELD (P4511-9, 91-34-50 FIGURE 9)
OR (P631, 91-34-50 FIGURE 8)
F KMH-820 SUPPRESION SHIELD (91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
G #1 GTX-330 SUPPRESSION SHIELD (91-34-50 FIGURE 6) OR
DUAL GTX-330 SUPPRESSION SHIELD (91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
H TO JB8
J JUMPER JB8-C
K MFD (P530-8, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
L KMH-820 (P10-54, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
M
N JUMPER JB8-G
P MFD (P530-28, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
R KMH-820 (P10-55, 91-34-40 FIGURE 3)
S
T #1 GTX-330 TIS SELECT (P3301-46, 91-34-50 FIGURE 6)
W #2 GTX-330 TIS SELECT (P3302-46, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
Y
Z GB4A-E (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB11
A DAU 429 PORT B TX A (J3-18)
B
C MFD CH 4 RX A (P530-48, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
D #2 PFD CH 6, RX A (P732-9, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
E DAU 429 PORT B TX B (J3-6)
F
G MFD CH 4 RX B (P530-68, 91-34-20 FIGURE 7)
H #2 PFD CH 6, RX B (P732-8, 91-34-20 FIGURE 5)
J JUMPER JB7-A
K #2 GPS CH1 TX A (P43012-46, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
L #2 XPNDR (P3302-32, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
M
N JUMPER JB7-E
P #2 GPS CH1 TXB (P43012-47, 91-34-50 FIGURE 3)
R #2 XPNDR (P3302-35, 91-34-50 FIGURE 7)
S
TO JB7
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Ground and Junction Block Diagrams
PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIODE BLOCK
A SPLICE P328-15, JB13-A, A315-NO
F CP19G22 (P394-10 & 12)
JB13
B GB1EE22 (P348-1 & P385-1)
G GB1E22 (PP4B-9)
C CP19DD22 (A314-C) CABIN ALT SENSOR 10K
H CP19D22 (P394-5 & 2)
D SPLICE P396-2, P397-3, JB13-K
J SPLICE J347-1 AND P317-17
E SPLICE P302-W, P329-2, P301-E, AND P304-K
K SPLICE P396-2, P397-3, JB13-D
CTJ4-20E-005
DIODE BLOCK
A JUMPER (SPLICE W/ JB15-A) LEFT GEAR ANNUN
F G2H20 (P301-C) L MAIN GEAR DOWN LOCKED
JB14
B JUMPER (SPLICE W/ JB15-B) RIGHT GEAR ANNUN
G G2D22 (P302-U) R MAIN GEAR DOWN LOCKED
C JUMPER (SPLICE W/ JB15-C) NOSE GEAR ANNUN

H G2E22 (P304-M AND K313-A) NOSE GEAR DOWN LOCKED
D AV2AA22 (A/P P2-25) STALL WARN

J AV2A22 (P397-1 & P376-12) STALL WARN
CTJ4-20E-005
DIODE BLOCK
A JUMPER (SPLICE W/ JB14-A) LEFT GEAR ANNUN
F
JB15
B JUMPER (SPLICE W/ JB14-B) RIGHT GEAR ANNUN
G
C JUMPER (SPLICE W/ JB14-C) NOSE GEAR ANUUN

H
D W3AA22 (W1AA22)
J W3A22 (J2B-3) DN1J22
(P317-22)
E W1AA22 (W3AA22)
K W1A22 (J4B-10)
CTJ4-20E-005
DIODE BLOCK
A (P359-a & J311-F) TAIL PRESS SW
F
JB16
B (P306-C & J311-H) UPPER WING PRESS SW
G DN29H20
(P329-9)
C (P306-A & J311-K) LOWER WING PRESS SW
H
CTJ4-20E-005
JB17
A NOSE GEAR SQUAT SW (P304-t*)
B
C
D
N CONF DISC 6 (P340-20)
P
R
S
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
JB18
A SQUAT SW GND DATA (P317-34)
B AIR/GND (P10-4)
C
D
E SQUAT SW GND AVIONICS (P317-33)
F XPNDR #1 & #2 (P3301,P3302-17)
G
H
CTJ1-22E-05E (REF)
Effectivity
Ground and Junction Block Diagrams with Avidyne Entegra in
8H13 91-24-30 Apr

PAGE 21
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 22
Apr 15/07 91-24-30 8H14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 1
8H15 91-25-10 Apr 15/07

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB394 Circuit Breaker (1.5 Amp)

2 F406 Fuse (5 Amp)
3 Digital Quartz Clock
1 3
Effectivity Digital Voice Recorder Clock

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-25-10 8H16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATT 105122 33.0 NEW/A

BUS
J4
F406 P436 R436 P404 P304
CL1A20 M M CL1B20 A A CL1C20 PWR TO ELT-110-4
5A
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP

(I.E. - THE DVR CLOCK IS NOT INSTALLED)
MEGGITT EFIS
CLOCK
DVR-300i-XT
P323
J4 GB6-F
BATT F406 P436 R436 P404 P304 CL2A20 1 GROUND
BUS CL1A20 M M CL1B20 A A CL1C20 2 BATT BUS PWR
5A PWR TO ELT-110-4
1A
PILOT AUDIO LO
CL3A22S
PHONE JACK 7 AUDIO OUT
P/O FWD R/H C/B PANEL CL5A20 9 AVI BUS PWR

J4C/P4C AUDIO LO
CLOCK CL4A22S
AVIONICS CB365-20 4 4 14 AUDIO IN
BUS 1.5A
CB394
CL-P1
3 1 2
3 1 2
CL-J1
AUDIO/INTERCOM
3 AUDIO OUT
22 AUDIO LO
102220 33.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
(REF. AUDIO/INTERCOM HARNESS)
(SEE 91-23-50, FIGURE 1)
Digital Voice Recorder Clock Effectivity

8H17 91-25-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 F408 Fuse (3 Amp)
3 Fuse (1 Amp)
4 Entertainment Switch
5 Entertainment Console Relay
4 3, 5
3, 5
Effectivity Entertainment Console (Optional)

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-25-10 8H18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AFT R/H C/B PANEL

ENTERTAINMENT CONSOLE OR STEREO UNIT
ENTERTAINMENT
J6A/P6A P371 1
5
CB399-18 3 3 ST1D18 2 5
10A 3
2
CB400 4 6
CONSOLE
ST1E18 BUS
1A 4
ST1F20
B
OVHD SW PNL
ENT. CONSOLE
SWITCH
105122 41.0 NEW/ A P381
ON P381
4
5 BLACK-20
OFF
GND BUS
GB2-R
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP
MEGGITT EFIS
AFT R/H C/B PANEL
ENTERTAINMENT CONSOLE
OR STEREO UNIT
102220 41.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
Entertainment Console (Optional) Effectivity

8H19 91-25-10 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-25-10 8H20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8H21 91-26-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Fire Det. Test Switch
3 Fire Detection Computer
4 Engine Fire Cable
1
3
2
4
Effectivity Fire Detection System

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-26-10 8H22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(OPTIONAL)
FIRE DETECTION COMPUTER
ANNUN OUT (FAULT)
ANNUN OUT (FIRE)
}
28VDC PWR.
ALARM ADJ.
ALARM ADJ.
OPERATE
CABLE
TEST
GND
P310 5 4 7 9 3 8 2 1 6
FD1L20N
FD1C22
FD1D20
FD1B22
FD1E20
FD1F20
FD1J20
GB2-C
19 P328 8
SEE ANNUNCIATOR
(91-31-50) J5
P305/P405 R439
C C FD1K20
P379
28 29
J379 OPERATE J5
P305/P405 R440
30 FD1G20 D D FD1H20
J379/P379
FIRE TEST
DETECTION
SWITCH (MOM SW.)
P/O OVHD SW PANEL ENGINE FIRE

LOOP
P/O FWD L/H C/B PANEL 102220 44.0 D/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
FIRE
DETECTION
J2A/P2A
CB325-20 7 FD1A20
3A
CB325
Fire Detection System Effectivity

8H23 91-26-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-26-10 8H24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8I1 91-27-20 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Rudder Trim Switch
3 Volt-Amp / Rudder Trim Indicator
4 Rudder Trim Acuator Assy
(S/N’s 4697156 & up; and, 4697001 thru 4697155 with Kit No. 767-342 installed. See Notes.)
NOTE: In S/N’s 4697001 thru 4697155, when replacing the original factory installed rudder trim
actuator assembly (P/N 102345-004), you must also replace the original factory installed Volt-
Amp/Rudder Trim Indicator (P/N 602-264). Order Kit No. 767-342.
NOTE: When the Avidyne Entegra is installed in S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 and up, the Volt-Amp/Rudder
Trim Indicator is not installed. See Sheet 4.
Effectivity Rudder Trim

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-27-20 8I2
8I3
GND TO J320
FUEL SHUT-OFF HANDLE LIGHT
(91-33-10, FIGURE 3)
P364 / J364
RUDDER TRIM SW. A/P AFT BLKHD
P365
(MOM. SW.)
1 T1B20 b T1C20 1 RED
RETRACT
L23U22N L/S
M
2 GB2-N T1D20 2 WHT
- + -
3 L23T22 TAPER BLOCK 1 (91-33-10)
3 BLK
4 T1E20 d T1F20
EXTEND
L/S
5
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
RUDDER h T1K20 4 YEL

TRIM
J2A/P2A
C1
CB327-20 8 T1A20
5A f T1G20 5 ORN
Rudder Trim
CB327
POSITION POT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VOLT-AMP/RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR

(91-24-30)
A1
P327
+ 5VDC EXC 17 T1J20
+ SIG. IN 18 T1H20 T1M20 6 GRN
- SIG. IN 19 T1N20 c
RUDDER TRIM TAB RUDDER TRIM TAB ACTUATOR

POSITION IND.
T1L20N
102220 49.0 J/V

GB7-D
91-27-20 AprPAGE 3
15/07
4697001 thru 4697155
Effectivity
GND TO J320
(91-33-10, FIGURE 3)
PAGE 4
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
P364/J364
RUDDER TRIM SW. A/P AFT BLKHD
J365/P365
4697156 & up; and,

(MOM. SW.)
1 T1B20 b T1C20 1 RED
RETRACT
Kit No. 767-342 installed

L23U22N L/S
M
4697001 thru 4697155 with

2 GB2-N T1D20 2 WHT
- + -
3 L23T22 TAPER BLOCK 1 (91-33-10)
3 BLK
91-27-20
4 T1E20 d T1F20
EXTEND
L/S
5
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
RUDDER h T1K20 4 YEL 28 VDC INPUT

TRIM
J2A/P2A
CB327-20 8 T1A20
5A f T1G20 5 ORN
Rudder Trim
CB327
POSITION POT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VOLT-AMP/RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR

(91-24-30)
P327
+ 28 VDC 17 T1J20
+ SIG. IN 18 T1H20 T1M20 6 GRN
- SIG. IN 19 T1N20 c
RUDDER TRIM TAB RUDDER TRIM TAB ACTUATOR

POSITION IND. T1L20N
GB7-D 104635 49.0 AB
8I4
8I5
GND TO J320
(91-33-10, FIGURE 3)
P364/J364
RUDDER TRIM SW.
J365/P365 P359/J359
(MOM. SW.)
1 T1B20 b T1C20 1 RED
RETRACT
L23U22N L/S
M
2 GB2-N T1D20 2 WHT
- + -
3 L23T22 LB3-F (91-33-10)
3 BLK
4 T1E20 d T1F20
EXTEND
L/S
5
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
RUDDER YEL
TRIM
J2A/P2A
CB327-20 8 T1A20 C1
5A ORN
Rudder Trim
CB327
MFD POSITION
P327 P530
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B1 POT
MINI-DAU SHIELD 15
32
30
RS-232 TX OUT 8 h T1K20 4 A1
31
28VDC R/T5 ACTUATOR 2 f T1G20 5

P7H22
RUDDER SIG. INPUT HI 4 T1M20 6 GRN
RUDDER SIG. INPUT LOW 11 c
RUDDER TRIM TAB ACTUATOR
105122 49.0 NEW/A
91-27-20 AprPAGE
15/07
5
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-27-20 8I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8I7 91-27-30 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 S347 Stall Test Switch
4 S349, S350 Flap Micro-Switch (2 each)
5 S348 Power Lever Switch Assembly
6 A305 Horn - Dual Warn Unit
7 K4 Comp. Fail Logic Relay Assembly
8 Lift Computer
9 Lift Transducer
7
1 9
6
8
3
Effectivity Stall Detection and Warning
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-27-30 8I8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO AUTOPILOT
(SEE 91-34-20)
(SEE 91-22-10)
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
TO EFIS
A101
CR399 AV3
AV2
CR398
AV2A22
LEVER SW
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
POWER
TO
(91-31-50)
P382/J382
102220 25.0 H/V

Stall Detection and Warning Effectivity
8I9 91-27-30 AprPAGE 3
15/07
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
P376 P2C/J2C STALL DETECT
PAGE 4
Effectivity
1 CB328-22
Apr 15/07
10 S1A22 3A CB328
28VDC PWR
1
P301 P101 AIR L
4697123 and up
PWR. GND. 2 J1 J 105 P FLOW I
24 WHT Y Y WHT B F
L
PRIMARY S2B22 S3B20 T
I
25 WH/BL b b WH/BL E
F
T
T 26 WHT d d WHT A R
A
C SECONDARY 27 S2E22 WH/BL f f WH/BL S3E20 D A101
N
91-27-30
O
S
M 28 WH/ORG h h WH/ORG C
D
P
SELF TEST 16 S2G22 j j S3G20 F U
U
C
T
11 E
E
10 R
R ENABLE 7 S2H20 K K S3H20 10 S103
1 2 12 (CLOSED
TEST SW 8 S2M22 S2M22N S3H20N 12 IN AIR)
S347 L. MAIN
STALL TEST P 104 J SQUAT SW
J348
GB6-B
THROTTLE POS 3 S2N22 6 THROTTLE
LEVER SW G4H22N
EXECUTE 4 S2T22 S2L22 4 NOT REQUIRED
GB5-H
P382/J382 5
FLAPS C S350
S2S22 3 (8˚)
STALL GEAR HORN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Stall Detection and Warning

P397/J397
FULL 6 S2R22 2 C S349 A305
(25˚) GEAR
10˚/20˚ 5 S2P22 1 4 HORN

FLAP SW.'S
3
STALL
WARN DEVICE 12 S2J22 1 HORN
FAIL 9 S2Z22 S2A22 CR398
AV2A22 TO AUTOPILOT SYSTEM

P317
25 27 AV2 (SEE 91-22-10)
J317
TO TO EFIS SYSTEM
B A 4 "STALL WARN FAIL" CR399
COMPUTER 2 AV3 (SEE 91-34-20)
ANNUN. P329-7
FAIL LOGIC (91-31-50)
104635 25.0 H/AB RELAY
K4 6
(SHN IN FAIL)
8I10
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
8I11
P376 P2C/J2C STALL DETECT
10 S1A22 1 CB328-22 3A CB328
28VDC PWR
1
P301 P101 AIR L
PWR. GND. 2 BLK20 J1 J 105 P FLOW I
24 WHT Y Y WHT B F
L
PRIMARY S2B22 S3B20 T
I
25 WH/BL b b WH/BL E
F
T
T 26 WHT d d WHT A R
A
C SECONDARY 27 S2E22 WH/BL f f WH/BL S3E20 D A101
N
O
S
M 28 WH/ORG h h WH/ORG C
D
P
SELF TEST 16 S2G22 j j S3G20 F U
U
C
T
11 E
E
10 R
R ENABLE 7 S2H20 K K S3H20 10 S103
12 (CLOSED
TEST SW 8 S2M22 S2M22N S3H20N 12 IN AIR)
STALL TEST L. MAIN
J348
P 104 J SQUAT SW
GB6-C
THROTTLE POS 3 S2N22 6 G4H22N GB5-H
THROTTLE
LEVER SW
EXECUTE 4 S2T22 S2L22 4 NOT REQUIRED
P382/J382 5 P397/J397
(SEE 91-32-60,
FLAPS C S350
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S2S22 3 FIGURE 2)
Stall Detection and Warning

(8°)
4 STALL GEAR HORN
FULL 2 JB15 A305
6 S2R22 C S349
(25°) E K G8C22 3 GEAR
10°/20° 1 GND HORN
5 S2P22
FLAP SW.'S
(SEE 91-32-60, FIGURE 2) 2
STALL
WARN DEVICE 12 S2J22 1 HORN
FAIL 9 S2Z22 S2A22 JB14

AV2A22 J D AV2AA22 25
P317
J317
25 27 A/P
P-2
TO
B A 4
COMPUTER 2 "STALL WARN FAIL"
105122 25.0 NEW/A ANNUN. P329-7
FAIL LOGIC
(91-31-50)
RELAY K4 6
91-27-30 AprPAGE
(SHN IN FAIL)
15/07
5
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-27-30 8I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8I13 91-27-50 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 K321 Current Sensor
4 MT302 Flap Actuator Motor Assembly
5 K320 Relay
6 A337 Time Delay Module
7 S340, S341 Flap Control Switch
CR330 Diode Assembly
R310 Resistor Assembly
Capacitor Assembly
3 5
6
4
1-2
Effectivity Electric Flaps

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-27-50 8I14
8I15
CW1F18 X BLK
FLAP CONTROL ASSY.

MT FLAP
MOTOR
P/O FWD L/H C/B PANEL 302
FLAP MOTOR
CURRENT CW1G18 X YEL
CB336 1
SENSOR
J1D/P1D CW1C18
5
CB336-18 2 CW1A18 CW1B18
10A
3
K321
J2C/P2C WC5A22 2
6
3A CB335-22 3 WC1A22 WC1B22
CB335 4
FLAP WARN WC3A22
CR330
SEE 91-32-60, FIGURE 2
A
WC4A22
CW1K18N
CR P346
329 2 1 5 6 7 8
J346
B
Electric Flaps
4.7uf K320
50wv
WC5B22
SEE S330, 91-32-60, FIGURE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WC3B22
A337
TIME DELAY R310

TO
CW1J18
CW1D18
CW1E18
CW1H18
(2.3 SEC) 470K

"FLAP FAIL"
ANNUNCIATOR
P329-17
(91-31-50)
S340 UP
WC3B22N
102220 11.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW FLAP
CONTROL
S341
DOWN
91-27-50 AprPAGE 3
15/07
4697001 and up
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-27-50 8I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8I17 91-27-50 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Flap Indicator
3 Flap Potentiometer
Effectivity Flap Indicator

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-27-50 8I18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAP IND
P370 J3C/P3C
1 CW2A22 4
2A
L27B22
CB348
5 TO LB1-D (91-33-10, FIGURE 3)
4
6 CW2E22N
GB1-F
3
2 CW2EE22 CW2E22
CW2F22N
P377
A CW2D22
GB1-E
B
P377
105122 11.1 NEW/A
FLAP POT.
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198 AND UP
STANDARD
AFT L/H C/B PANEL FLAP

INDICATOR
FLAP 1 2 3 4 6 5 P370
INDICATOR L27B22 TO TB 1
J3C/P3C (91-33-10)
CW2E22N
CB348-22 4 CW2A22
2A
CW2B22N
CB348
CW2D22
CW2C22N GB1-E
GB1-F
A
P377
B
102220 11.1 NEW/V P377
104635 NEW/AB
FLAP POT.
Flap Indicator Effectivity

8I19 91-27-50 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-27-50 8I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8I21 91-28-20 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Fuel Pump (2 ea.)
3 Fuel Pressure Switch (2 ea.)
4 Fuel Pump Auto Enable Switch
5 Low Fuel Switch (2 ea.)
6 Engine Display No. 1
7 Engine Display No. 2
5 5
2 2
3
1, 8
6-7
4
1
8
Effectivity Fuel Pumps/Fuel Pressure

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-28-20 8I22
FWD L/H C/B PANEL A
8I23
L. FUEL PUMP B INC.
ELECT. J2A/P2A FUEL
A MODULE B TO ANNUN. Q10N22 S Q11Y20 C PRESS.
CB339A20 CB339B20 3 P328-24
5A 1010 (91-31-50) P110
CB339 J1
CONTROL P301 P101
P118 L. FUEL PUMP
(GND ON GRAY Q11A20 J Q11B20 Q11X20 A + INPUT
DISABLES MODULE)
GRAY
TO GND BLOCK BLACK
BROWN
Q11U20N B GND
TJ 3 TJ BLOCK 6 J1E/P1E
E F G H CB339C20 3 Q11C20N L Q11D20 C CASE GND
J K L M CB339D20 4 GB7-F
N R S CB338C20 5
T W Z CB338D20 6 A
INC.
TO GND BLOCK BLACK B FUEL
7
TJ 3 PRESS.
8 TO ANNUN. Q10P22 S Q11Z20 C
GRAY
P328-12
BROWN
TIE JUNCT. P210
(GND ON GRAY (91-31-50)
J6
Q10U22
Q10X22
DISABLES MODULE) P306 P206
R. FUEL PUMP CONTROL J2A/P2A R. FUEL PUMP
Q11W20
A 1011 B
CB338A20 CB338B20 4 Q11E20 X Q11F20 A + INPUT
5A ELECT.
CB338 MODULE Q11V20N B GND
GB2-F
Q10F22 Q11G20N Y Q11H20 C CASE GND
OVHD SW. PANEL
P380
MAN Q10D22 P218
23
OFF 24 P117 LEFT P117
Q10E22N g Q10S22 1 2 Q10T22 R GND LFT WING HEAVY AUTO ENABLE
AUTO
P301 P101 P301 P101 P372
J1 LOW FUEL SWITCHES J1
GB7-E Q11J22 Q11K22 32 P373
25 (SHN. NORMAL FUEL) ENGINE
Q11M22
Fuel Pumps/Fuel Pressure

14 J1 DISPLAY J2 27
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P380
Q10R22N W Q10V22 1 2 Q10W22 b Q11R22 13 NO.1
GB1-H P217 RIGHT P217
P306 P206 P306 P206

J6 J6 P375
Q10C22
(IN WINGS) FUEL IMB.

ANNUN. Q11L22 32 P374
Q10M20N
ENGINE
J5 P328-20 Q11T22 14
(91-31-50) J1 DISPLAY J2 27
P437 R437 P405 P305 Q11S22 NO.2
Q11P22 13
GB5-F L L Q10J22 L L Q10G22 GND RIGHT WING HEAVY
Q10L22 M M Q10A22 M M Q10B22
Q10Y22 X X Q10Q22 X X Q10H22 TO "FUEL PRESS" ANNUN.

P328-23
(91-31-50)
Q10K22
Q10Z22N
P421 GB9-L
C B F E
ENGINE PRESSURE SWITCH

DRIVEN (CLOSES LOW PRESS.) 102220 10.0 H/V
104635 NEW/AB
PUMP
91-28-20 AprPAGE
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
3
FWD L/H C/B PANEL P328
A
B INC.
L. FUEL PUMP ELECT. L. FUEL PUMP FUEL
Q10N22 Q11Y20
PAGE 4
A MODULE B ANNUN. 9 S C PRESS.
CB339A20 CB339B20
Effectivity
(91-31-50)
Apr 15/07
5A P110
CONTROL
J1
CB339 P301 P101
J2A/P2A P118 L. FUEL PUMP
Q11X20
(GND ON GRAY Q11A20 J Q11B20 A + INPUT
3
DISABLES MODULE)
GRAY
TO GND BLOCK BLACK
BROWN
TJ 3 Q11U20N B GND
TJ BLOCK 6 J1E/P1E

E F G H CB339C20 3 Q11C20N L Q11D20 C CASE GND
J K L M CB339D20 4
4697198; 4697216 and up

GB7-F
N R S CB338C20 5
T W Z CB338D20 6 A
INC.
TO GND BLOCK BLACK B FUEL
TJ 3
7
91-28-20
Q10P22 Q11Z20 PRESS.
8 S C
GRAY
BROWN
TIE JUNCT. P210
(GND ON GRAY
J6
Q10U22
Q10X22
DISABLES MODULE)
CONTROL P306 P206
R. FUEL PUMP J2A/P2A P218 R. FUEL PUMP
Q11W20
A B
CB338A20 CB338B20 4 Q11E20 X Q11F20 A + INPUT
5A ELECT.
CB338 MODULE Q11V20N B GND
GB2-F
Q10F22 Q11G20N Y Q11H20 C CASE GND
OVHD SW. PANEL
P380 P328
MAN Q10D22
23
20 R. FUEL PUMP ANNUN, 91-31-50
OFF 24 P117 LEFT P117
Q10E22N g Q10S22 1 2 Q10T22 R
Q11K22 Q11S22 P328-21, 91-31-50
Q10C22
AUTO Q11P22
P301 P101 P101 P301
J1 LOW FUEL SWITCHES J1 PFD #1
GB7-E
(SHN. NORMAL FUEL) P7321
25
Q11M22 FUEL IMBALANCE
Fuel Pumps/Fuel Pressure

39
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P380
Q10R22N W Q10V22 1 2 Q10W22 b Q12D22 FUEL PUMP AUTO ENABLE
P217 RIGHT P217
73
GB1-H
P306 P206 P206 P306 P7331

J6 J6
IN WINGS Q11J22 4 GND LEFT WING HEAVY
Q10M20N
Q11Q22 19 GND RIGHT WING HEAVY
J5
P437 J437 P405 P305
GB5-F L L Q10J22 L L Q10G22

PFD #2
P7322
Q10L22 M M Q10A22 M M Q10B22
TO Q11N22 39 FUEL IMBALANCE
Q10Y22 Q10Q22 Q10H22 "FUEL PRESSURE" FUEL PUMP AUTO ENABLE
X X X X Q12E22 73
ANNUN. P328-23
(91-31-50)
P7332
Q10K22
Q10Z22N
Q11L22 4 GND LEFT WING HEAVY
P421 GB9-L
C B F E Q11R22 19 GND RIGHT WING HEAVY
ENGINE PRESSURE SWITCH

DRIVEN (CLOSES LOW PRESS.)
105122 10.0 NEW/A
PUMP
8I24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J1 91-28-20 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Fuel Filter
Effectivity Fuel Filter

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-28-20 8J2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL
FILTER
(91-31-50)
GROUND TO
TOOLING HOLE
102220 47.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Fuel Filter Effectivity

8J3 91-28-20 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-28-20 8J4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J5 91-28-40 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Data Acquisition Unit
3 Fuel Probes (5)
Fuel Probe, WS 42.00
Effectivity Fuel Quantity - Left

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-28-40 8J6
8J7
DATA
28VDC, R/FUEL
28VDC, L/FUEL
ACQUISITION
SHLD RTN
SIG IN A N
SIG IN A P
UNIT
LO Z A
FWD L/H C/B PANEL J1
6 12 4 5 17 18
P336
FUEL
QTY SEE
J2C/P2C RIGHT
FUEL
CB337-22 2 Q1E22
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
QUANTITY
Q1A20
5A
WHT
CB337

P301
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J1 T U V W X

P101
Fuel Quantity - Left
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
Q1B20
WHT
Q1D20 Q1C20
WH/GRN WH/GRN
WH/ORN WH/ORN
WH/BLU WH/BLU
WHT WHT
P P P
115 E A B C D 114 E A B C D 113 E A B C D
J J J
91-28-40 AprPAGE
L WHT L WHT L L WHT L WHT

S WH/BLU S WH/BLU S S WH/BLU S WH/BLU
R WH/ORN R WH/ORN R R WH/ORN R WH/ORN
WH/GRN WH/GRN WH/GRN WH/GRN
4697001 and up
Effectivity
OUTBOARD TANK OUTBOARD TANK OUTBOARD TANK INBOARD TANK HEADER TANK 102220 9.0 NEW/V
PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE 104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
15/07
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Fuel Probes (5)
Effectivity Fuel Quantity - Right

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-28-40 8J8
8J9
SIG IN B N
SIG IN B P
LO Z B
PWR RETURN (A)
PWR RETURN (B)
J1
23 11 24 19 25
P336
SEE
LEFT
FUEL
QUANTITY
WHT
Q2A20
WH/BLU
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
Q2E20N
P306 GB1-D
J2 M L K J N
P206
Q2C20 Q2D20
WHT
Q2B20
WH/BLU
WHT WHT
WH/ORN
WH/GRN
WH/BLU WH/BLU
WH/ORN WH/ORN
WH/GRN WH/GRN
P
Fuel Quantity - Right

P
P 215 D C B A E
213 D C B A E 214 E A B C D
J
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J J
WHT L WHT L WHT L

L L WH/BLU S WH/BLU S WH/BLU S
S S WH/ORN R WH/ORN R WH/ORN R
R R WH/GRN WH/GRN WH/GRN
OUTBD TANK OUTBD TANK OUTBD TANK

102220 9.1 NEW/V HEADER TANK INBD TANK PROBE PROBE PROBE
104635 NEW/AB PROBE PROBE
105122 NEW
91-28-40 AprPAGE
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Fuel Temp Indicator
3 Fuel Temp Sensor
3
1 2
Effectivity
4697159 thru 4697173; and
4697001 thru 4697158 Fuel Temperature Indicator
with Kit # 767-380 installed. Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 2)
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-28-40 8J10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AFT R/H C/B PANEL 104635 58.0 V/AB
FUEL
TEMP
J6B/P6B
CB401A22 8
2A
CB401
Q3A22
P398
FUEL TEMP
P306 P206 PL5 SENSOR
P398 J2
4 +28VDC(IN) SIGNAL PROBE 6 Q3D-BLU h* Q3E-BLU 1 1 WHT/BLU
+8 VDC PROBE 5 Q3D-WHT j* Q3E-WHT 2 2 WHT

1 GND
NOT INSTALLED IN
S/N'S 4697159 AND 4697160.
RIGHT WING
FUEL TEMP INDICATOR
Q3B22N
GB6-F
Effectivity
4697159 thru 4697173; and
Fuel Temperature Indicator 4697001 thru 4697158
Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 2) with Kit # 767-380 installed.
8J11 91-28-40 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Fuel Temp Indicator
3 Fuel Temp Sensor
5
6 Fuel Return Solenoid Valve
7 K306 Relay, Low Fuel
8 K307 Relay, Fuel Return
7-8
3 4
1 2
7-8
Effectivity Fuel Temperature Indicator and Control

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-28-40 8J12
8J13
AFT R CKT BKR PANEL

P6B
FUEL
TEMP CB401B22 9 Q1A22
P398
FUEL TEMP INDICATOR
CB401A22 8 Q3A22 4 +28 VDC ACFT PWR
2A
FUEL TEMP
CB401 CB401C22 10 Q2A22 SENSOR J2
P206 P306
BLU 1 Q3E22BLU h* Q3D22BLU 6 SIGNAL PROBE

WHT 2 Q3E22WHT j* Q3D22WHT 5 +8 VDC PROBE
P2B INBOARD FUEL TANK

PL5 Q3B22N 1 GND
FWD L CKT BKR PANEL RIGHT WING
Q20A22 3 GND= FUEL <-10 F
ANNUNCIATOR CB320B22 11 GB6-F
CB320C22 12
Fuel Temperature Indicator and Control
5A

CB320 P394 P394 ENGINE DISPLAY 1
P373
CB320A18
B3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B2
29

B1
E4K22
32 LOW FUEL
GB6-G A3
CB320D22 9 A2
Q19A22N 30 A1
X1
CB320E22 10 28 ENGINE DISPLAY 2
K306
X2 P374
CB320F20 16 Q18A22
31 Q21A22 E4L22 32 LOW FUEL
L PRESSURE
LOW FUEL RLY
CAP & BULKHEAD
ENGINE COMPARTMENT Q17C22 P328 ANNUNCIATOR PNL
L ENGINE STOW
FIREWALL
32 Q22A22 22 LOW FUEL
P437 R437 J5
P461 P405 P305 P329
D3 D2
36 Q23A22 6
2 Q17A22 d* Q17B22 d* D1
Q16B22 j* C3
1 Q16A22 e* Q16C22 38 C2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
91-28-40 AprPAGE
Q15A22 f* Q15B22 Q15C22 35 C1

3 f*
B3
B2
B1 37 Q1A22
5 A3
A2
4 Q14A22N A1
39 X1
GB10-A K307
X2
Y-J2N-300M
+ 28 VDC START CR340
4697174 & up
(SEE 91-80-10) Q12A20 g* Q12B20 e* Q12C20 33 FUEL RETURN RLY

CR339
FUEL RETURN
Effectivity
VALVE
1 1 Q13A20 h* Q13B20 h* Q13C20 34 104635 58.1 AA/AB
2 2
15/07
Q12B20N
P459/J459 GB10-K ANNUNCIATOR DIMMING PANEL
9
P6B
FUEL
TEMP
P398
PAGE 10
Effectivity
CB314A22 9 Q3A22 4 +28 VDC ACFT PWR
Apr 15/07
2A
FUEL TEMP
CB314 CB314B22 10 Q1A22 SENSOR P206 J2 P306
BLU 1 Q3E22BLU h* Q3D22BLU 6 SIGNAL PROBE
FWD L CKT BKR PANEL
WHT 2 Q3E22WHT j* Q3D22WHT 5 +8 VDC PROBE

INBOARD FUEL TANK PL5 Q3B22N 1 GND
RIGHT WING Q20A22 3
4697198; 4697216 and up

GND = FUEL < -10 ° F
GB6-F
FUEL TEMP INDICATOR
91-28-40
PFD #1
P394 P394 P7321
B3
B2 LOW FUEL
B1 29 Q21C22 19
GB6-G A3
A2
Q19A22N 30 A1
X1
28
P2B PFD #2
K306
X2 P7322
SEE ANNUNCIATOR 16 Q18A22
91-31-50 31 Q21A22 Q21B22 LOW FUEL
19
L PRESSURE
CAP & LOW FUEL RLY
BULKHEAD Q17C22
ENGINE COMPARTMENT P329
L ENGINE STOW
FIREWALL
32 Q22A22 21 LOW FUEL
P437 R437 J5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P461 P405 P305

2 Q17A22 d* Q17B22 d*
Fuel Temperature Indicator and Control

ANNUNCIATOR PNL
B3
B2
B1
5 A3
A2
4 Q14A22N 37 A1
39 X1
GB10-A K307
X2
Y-J2N-300M
CR340
SEE 91-80-10 Q12A20 g* Q12B20 e* Q12C20 33 FUEL RETURN RLY
CR339
FUEL RETURN
VALVE
1 1 Q13A20 h* Q13B20 h* Q13C20 34
2 2 Q12B20N 105122 58.0 NEW/A
P459/J459 ANNUNCIATOR DIMMING PANEL

GB10-K
8J14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J15 91-28-40 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-28-40 8J16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J17 91-29-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 S342 Gear Selector Switch
4 A332, A331 Pressure Switch Assembly
5 MT301 Hydraulic Pump
7 K313 Gear Position Indicator Relay
8 K312A, K312B Gear Select Relays
1-2
Effectivity Hydraulic Pump

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-29-10 8J18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F326
TO "HYDRAULIC PUMP" ANNUN
W4A22
P329-14
(91-31-50)
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
22
B2 B1
PUMP POWER
J1A/P1A 22
25A CB329-10 1 G10A10
CB329
G10
GEAR SELECT A2 A1
PUMP CONTROL G12A20
SWITCH X1
DN
J1E/P1E
G9A22
2 1 DN
3A CB330-22 1
CB330 3 G11A20 X2
S342 UP K312B
6
5
4
} SEE
(91-32-60)
G11D20
G13A22 RED
2
6 PUMP-DN PUMP
G13B22 PRESS SW PRESS
P301 F M C
4 J101
P101 F M
NC NO
G13C20
P A332 P
G11C20
K313 G11B20
CR313 BLK
RELAY SHOWN GEAR

G13D20
DOWN AND LOCKED

5 4 6 P104
* RELAYS ARE INTERL
SIMULTANEOUS OPE
4
SEE 91-32-60 LEFT MAIN
SQUAT SW NOTE: SQ SW SHOWN WEIGHT ON WHEEL
LANDING GEAR 5 6
POSITION INDICATOR S103
Hydraulic Pump Effectivity

8J19 91-29-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-29-10 8J20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J21 91-29-10 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-29-10 8J22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8J23 91-30-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A318 Timer Assembly
3 A222, A223, A224 De-Ice Valve
4 A430, A431, A432 Pressure Switches (3)
5 Surface De-Ice Switch
3-4
1
2
Effectivity Surface Deice

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-30-10 8J24
8K1
(PRESSURE SWITCHES SHOWN WITHOUT PRESSURE APPLIED)
102220 34.0 P/V
104635 A/AB A230
LOWER D29D20
WING
D29D20N
P222 INSTALLED IN
LOWER 1 D23A20 D D RT. WING
WING A222 E E A231
2 D23A20N
F F UPPER D29C20
WING
D29C20N
P223 P206 P306
J6
UPPER 1 D24A20
WING A223 A232
2 D24A20N
DE-ICE VALVES
TAIL D29B20
(INSTALLED IN RT. WING)

INSTALLED D29B20N
P224
IN TAIL
1 D25A20
TAIL A224
2 D25A20N
AFT A/P CONN.
D29A20N
J311 a a
G D25B20
Surface Deice
L D24B20
D23B20 J6
J
P306 P206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F D29E20
K D29F20 A A
H D29G20 C C
TIMER
A318 AFT L/H C/B PANEL

D29H20 TO "SURFACE DE-ICE" OVERHD SW. PANEL
ANNUN. P329-9 SURFACE SURFACE
(91-31-50) DE-ICE DE-ICE
P381 ON SWITCH
C D20B20 2 P3E/J3E
4 CB375-20
B D21A20 6 5A
OFF
A D20B20N 3 CB375
D D29A20
TO "SURFACE DE-ICE FAIL"
ANNUN. P329-11 D20A20
(91-31-50)
91-30-10 AprPAGE
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
3
(PRESSURE SWITCHES SHOWN WITHOUT PRESSURE APPLIED)
A230
PAGE 4
105122 34.0 NEW/A
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
LOWER D29D20
WING
D29D20N
P222 INSTALLED IN
LOWER 1 D23A20 D D RT. WING
WING A222
2 D23A20N E E A231

F F UPPER D29C20
4697198; 4697216 and up

WING
D29C20N
P223 P206 P306
J6
UPPER 1 D24A20
91-30-10
WING A223
2 D24A20N A232
TAIL D29B20
DE-ICE VALVES
INSTALLED D29B20N
(INSTALLED IN RT. WING)

P224
IN TAIL
1 D25A20
TAIL A224
2 D25A20N
P359/J359
D29A20N
J311
a a
G D25B20
Surface Deice
L D24B20
D23B20 J6
J
P306 P206
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F D29E20
K D29F20 A A
H D29G20 C C
TIMER JB16
A318 A F AFT L/H C/B PANEL
OVERHD SW. PANEL
C H D29H20 SURF DE-ICE ANNUN
SURFACE SURFACE
P329-9 (91-31-50) DE-ICE
B G DE-ICE
P381
ON SWITCH
C D20B20 2 P3E/J3E
4 CB375-20
B D21A20 6 5A
OFF
A D20B20N 3 CB375
GB7-A
D D29A20
SURFACE DE-ICE FAIL ANNUN
P329-11 (91-31-50) D20A20
8K2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8K3 91-30-10 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB379, CB378 Circuit Breaker (7.5 Amp)

3 Pitot Heat Switch
Switch Cap - Pitot Heat
4 AN5812 Pitot Head Assembly - Heated (2)
5 Squat Switch Assembly
4 4
1-2
Effectivity Pitot Heat

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-30-30 8K4
8K5
NOTE: PITOT HEAT WILL CYCLE AT A 30 SECOND RATE WHEN
AIRCRAFT IS ON THE GROUND WITH SWITCH ON.
PITOT HEAT WILL BE ON CONSTANTLY IN THE AIR WHEN SWITCH IS ON.
CB378F16
1 J5F AN5812
1 P5F FWD R/H C/B PANEL IF POWER INPUT IS LOST, RIGHT WING
RELAY WILL TURN ON RIGHT PITOT MAST
CB378G18
PITOT HEAT ANNUNCIATOR.
BLACK
P207
RED 18 1 2
J207
J3A 1
18
WHITE
P3A 1 BLACK
RIGHT
D4F18N
PITOT HEAT
J4E/P4E P302 P201
BUS ELECT. LOAD
CB378A18 CB378B18 1 1 D4C18 e e D4D18
MODULE
10A
CONTROL J2
TJ BLOCK 2
CB378 J4A/P4A D6V22 TO P11-1, 91-30-60
2006
ORANGE A B C D CB378C22 5 5 D4B22 TO "R. PITOT HEAT" ANNUN. P328-17 (91-31-50)
BLACK
GRAY E F G H CB378D22 6 6 D4E22 TO SQUAT SW. RELAY P387-3 (91-21-30) (GND ON GND)
GRAY CB378E22 8 8 OVHD SW PNL

PITOT HEAT SWITCH P379
AFT L/H C/B PANEL BROWN P381 15 BLACK
ON
Pitot Heat
BROWN J K L M CB379C22 7 7 D4A22 10 19 BLACK GB5-J
N P R S 9 OFF GND BUS GB7-P
D5A22 TO "PITOT HEAT OFF" ANNUN. AN5812
P328-14 (91-31-50) LEFT WING

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT MAST
ORANGE T W Y Z CB379E22 9 9 D5B22 TO "L. PITOT HEAT"ANNUN.
P328-16 (91-31-50) P107

1 2
BLACK-22 10 10 BLACK-22 TO GB1-J J107
BLACK
BLACK-22 11 11 BLACK-22 TO GB1-K
18
LEFT A B C D
TJ 4
D5F18N
PITOT HEAT E F G H NOT INSTALLED WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA OPTION

CONTROL GROUND IN S/N'S 4697198 AND UP.
T W Y Z BLOCK
CB379A18 ELECT. J4E/P4E
WHITE
LOAD P301 P101

10A BUS MODULE
CB379B18 2 2 D5C18 e e D5D18
CB379 2005
J3A 2 J1
P3A 2
RED 18
BLACK
IF POWER INPUT IS LOST,

RELAY WILL TURN ON LEFT 102220 26.0 G/V
104635 NEW /AB
CB379G18 PITOT HEAT ANNUNCIATOR.
2 J5F 105122 NEW
2 P5F
BLACK
91-30-30 AprPAGE
CB379F16
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Control Module
3 Stall Heat Switch
Switch Cap - Stall Heat
4 R103 Resistor - Heated Stall Warn (RH100)
5 A101 Lift Transducer
6 S101 Switch Assembly - Main Gear Uplock - Left
7 K101 Heat Control Relay Assembly
1-2
Effectivity Lift Detector Heat

PAGE 3
Apr 15/07 91-30-30 8K6
8K7
STALL HEAT
MODULE ASSEMBLY
J10/P10
BLACK 1 1 BLACK-22
OVHD SW PNL
GB1-K P379
P381 GND BUS
ON 15 BLACK
BROWN 2 2 D1A22 7
19 BLACK
OFF
STALL WARN GB5-J
HEAT SWITCH
AFT L/H C/B PANEL GB7-P
9 ohms 160 watts 3%
GRAY
LEFT WING
PRESS. BLKHD. LIFT
STALL TRANSDUCER
HEAT
{
106
J381 R103 J P
BUS CONTROL LOAD
CB376A14 D2A14 D2B14 D2E16 A
25A ELECT. P181 VANE
MODULE
Lift Detector Heat

CB376
D2D16
D2C14
FLT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CASE
PLATE
16
D2F16 C
5 D3A20 GND
5 110
J P
S101 4 D3B20
J P HEAT
6 CR
103 309 CONTROL A101
LEFT RELAY
102220 27.0 C/V D3C20N
D2G14N
104635 NEW/AB UP LOCK

K101
105122 NEW/A SWITCH
(SHN GEAR DOWN)
91-30-30 AprPAGE
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 5
Apr 15/07 91-30-30 8K8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8K9 91-30-30 AprPAGE 6

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 A310 Controller
4 A427 Heated Windshield
5 K314 Controller Relay
6 K322 Heat Relay
7 Windshld Heat Switch
1-2
3, 5 & 6
3, 5 & 6
Effectivity Heated Windshield

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-30-40 8K10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
104635 NEW/AB
102220 31.0 H/V
105122 NEW
(91-31-50)
DE-FOG
ANTI-ICE
J3D / P3D
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
J3E / P3E
3
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
3A
Heated Windshield Effectivity

8K11 91-30-40 AprPAGE 2

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Control Module
3 A411, A412 Brush Blocks
4 Prop Heat Switch
5 Prop Heater (Boot)
6 Slip Ring
7 K421 Relay
1-2
3&6 4
Effectivity Propeller Heat

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-30-60 8K12
GB8-P
BLACK 7 D6U22
8K13
GRAY 1 D6V22 TO P4A-8 (91-30-30) ( GND ON GND)
PILOTS AFT C/B PANEL
ORANGE 2 D6H22 TO P329-25 (91-31-50) PROP HEAT FAIL ANNUNCIATOR
BROWN 3
VIOLET 4 D6J22 TO P329-10 (91-31-50) PROP HEAT ON ANNUNCIATOR
PROP HEAT J11/P11 P305/J5/P405
CONTROL
BUS LOAD (16) a (16)
25A CB377A12 ELECT
D6A12
(16) Z (16)
MODULE
CB377 RED 5
D6P22 T
YELL 6
D6B12
J11/P11 D6T22 U
PROP HEAT ASSY.
OVHD SW. PANEL
P381
D6N22
PROP HEAT ON
D6S22
SWITCH D6F22 8 D6G22

(16) (16)
OFF P379
15 BLACK GB5-J U T m r
P437/R437
GND BUS 19 BLACK GB7-P

(16) (16)
D7C12
D7B12
D7A12
D6R22
Propeller Heat
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D6C12
D6M22
A412 A411 5A
A A A4 A3
D6K12
B SLIP B
RINGS
12 GA.
D6L12
A2 A1
5A
C C
L.H. X1
R.H.
BRUSH K421
BLOCK BRUSH
(4 BLADE) BLOCK X2
D6E12N
ELEMENT RESISTANCE (EACH)

4.58 OHMS MIN.
5.26 OHMS MAX.
91-30-60 AprPAGE
102220 32.0 S
NOTE: VOLTAGE TO OUTBOARD AND INBOARD ELEMENTS ALTERNATES AT 90 SECOND INTERVALS.
15/07
2
(after FIKI refit)
Effectivity
and, 4697001 thru 4697099

4697100 thru 4697134;
BLACK 7 D6U22 GB8-P
GRAY 1 D6V22 TO P4A-8 PG. 26.0 ( GND ON GND)
PILOTS AFT C/B PANEL
PAGE 3
ORANGE 2 D6H22 TO P329-25 (91-31-50) PROP HEAT FAIL ANNUNCIATOR
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
BROWN 3 D6J22 TO P329-10 (91-31-50) PROP HEAT ON ANNUNCIATOR
VIOLET 4 P305/J5/P405
PROP HEAT J11/P11 c
CONTROL
BUS LOAD (16) a (16)
4697135 & up; and,

25A CB377A12 ELECT
D6A12
(16) Z (16)
CB377 MODULE
Kit No. 767-354 installed

RED 5 D6P22 T
4697001 thru 4697134 with

D6B12
YEL 6 D6T22 U
91-30-60
J11/P11
OVHD SW. PANEL PROP HEAT ASSY.
D6N22
P381
D6S22
PROP HEAT ON
SWITCH D6F22 8 D6G22 (16) (16)
OFF P379 r
U T m Z
15 BLACK GB5-J
P437/R437
GND BUS 19 BLACK GB7-P (16) (16)
D7C12
D7B12
D7A12
D6R22
Propeller Heat
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D6C12
D6M22
5A
A412 A411
A A A4 A3
D6K12
B SLIP B
RINGS
12 GA.
D6L12
A2 A1
5A
C C
L.H. GB10B X1
R.H.
BRUSH
BLOCK BRUSH
(4 BLADE) BLOCK X2
D6E12N
ELEMENT RESISTANCE (EACH)

K421
4.58 OHMS MIN.
5.26 OHMS MAX.
104635 32.0 P/AB
NOTE: VOLTAGE TO OUTBOARD AND INBOARD ELEMENTS ALTERNATES AT 90 SECOND INTERVALS.
8K14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8K15 91-30-60 AprPAGE 4

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 5
Apr 15/07 91-30-60 8K16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8K17 91-31-30 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 A430 Oil Pressure Switch
3 K7 Squat Switch Relay No. 1
4 M310 Flight Hour Meter
4 1
Effectivity Flight Hour Meter / Oil Pressure Switch

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-31-30 8K18
PA-46-500TP,
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J3
OIL PRESS. SW. P435 R435 P403 P303
M6C20 m m M6B20 d d M6A20

E6C20N
P
GB9-J
E5N20 p p E5P20 r r
A430
TO "OIL PRESS" ANNUN M HOUR

E5R22
P328-13 310 METER
(91-31-50) 2
M5B20
FOR RELAY
COIL WIRING
SEE 91-21-30
AFT L/H C/B PNL
1
HOUR METER
9
K7 13
5 12 M5A22 5 5 CB347-22
3A
SQUAT SW J P
387 P3C/J3C CB347
RELAY
(SHN ON GND)
102220 8.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Flight Hour Meter / Oil Pressure Switch Effectivity

8K19 91-31-30 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-31-30 8K20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 F307 Fuse (2 Amp)
3 K2 Relay
4 K1, K3 Relay (2)
5 K300 Relay
6 K302, K303 Relay (2)
7 R323, R324, R325 Resistor (3)
8 Day / Night Switch
9 Annunciator Panel
1
3-4
8
9
Annunciator Panel Effectivity

8K21 91-31-50 AprPAGE 1

15/07
PAGE 2
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
BETA
IGNITION
FEATHER
FLAP FAIL
HYD PUMP
GEAR WARN
ANNUN INOP
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
START ENGAGE
WSHLD OV TEMP
STBY ATT IND TEST
STBY ATT BAT HTR FAIL

LEFT
NOSE
RIGHT
4697001 thru 4697173
91-31-50
F6N20
F6L20
PP1J20
91-61-20
91-28-20 91-28-20
91-29-10 91-27-50 91-30-40 91-32-60 91-80-10 91-74-20
91-34-20 91-61-20
91-32-60 91-32-60 91-32-60
DN5E22
(91-24-30)
Annunciator Panel
DN1B22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CR TIE
21 BUS
F306
5A
8 8 DN1BB22
P313 J313
LEGEND: APPLY POWER TO TURN ON ANNUNCIATOR
APPLY GROUND TO TURN ON ANNUNCIATOR
SEE SHEET 3
102220 14.0 J/V
104635 14.0 A/Y SEE 91-32-60
(S/N'S 4697115, 4697117, 4697119 THRU 4697124, AND 4697126 & UP;
AND OTHER AIRPLANES WITH KIT # 766-697 INSTALLED.)
8K22
8K23
OXYGEN
LOW FUEL
DOOR AJAR
OIL PRESS
FUEL FILTER
L PITOT HEAT
R PITOT HEAT
SURF DE-ICE
VACUUM LOW
ENGINE FIRE
CABIN ALT 10K
PROP HEAT ON
PITOT HEAT OFF
PROP HEAT FAIL

LOW BUS VOLTS
CABIN ALTITUDE
FUEL PRESSURE
CHIP DETECTOR
STALL WARN FAIL

GENERATOR INOP
ALTERNATOR INOP
FUEL IMBALANCE
FIRE DETECT FAIL
BLEED OVER TEMP

EMERGENCY BLEED
SURFACE DE-ICE FAIL
D29H20
D29A20
CP19K22
91-21-30 91-30-60 91-37-20 91-21-30 91-27-30 91-30-10 91-24-30 91-77-40 91-30-30 91-21-30 91-28-20 91-30-30 91-26-10
91-30-10 91-52-70 91-35-10 91-28-20 91-31-30 91-72-10
91-28-20
5A
5a TO AUTOPILOT INSTL
DN1AA22 3 DN1A22 AV4 AV5
J313 / P313
Annunciator Panel
DN1G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DN6A22
DN6B22
32 13 14
2
10
6
6.8K OHMS
1/4 WATT
3.3K OHMS
1 1K OHMS 1/4 WATT
9 1/4 WATT
5
NOTE: APPLY GROUND TO TURN ON ANNUNCIATORS
560 OHMS
1/2 WATT LEGEND: SEE SHEET 2
102220 14.1 P/V
91-31-50 AprPAGE 3
15/07
4697125 as originally delivered
4697116, 4697118, and
4697001 thru 4697114,
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-31-50 8K24
8L1
OXYGEN
LOW FUEL
DOOR AJAR
OIL PRESS
FUEL FILTER
L PITOT HEAT
R PITOT HEAT
SURF DE-ICE
VACUUM LOW
ENGINE FIRE
CABIN ALT 10K
PROP HEAT ON
PITOT HEAT OFF
PROP HEAT FAIL

LOW BUS VOLTS
CABIN ALTITUDE
FUEL PRESSURE
CHIP DETECTOR
STALL WARN FAIL

GENERATOR INOP
ALTERNATOR INOP
FUEL IMBALANCE
FIRE DETECT FAIL
BLEED OVER TEMP

EMERGENCY BLEED
SURFACE DE-ICE FAIL
D29H20
D29A20
CP19K22
Annunciator Panel
91-21-30 91-30-60 91-37-20 91-21-30 91-27-30 91-30-10 91-24-30 91-77-40 91-30-30 91-21-30 91-28-20 91-30-30 91-26-10
91-30-10 91-52-70 91-35-10 91-28-20 91-31-30 91-72-10
91-28-20
G8L22
SEE 91-32-60
G8K22 P/O FWD L/H C/B PANEL
AVIONICS OPTION (IHAS) (S/N'S 4697126 & UP ONLY)

DN1T22
5A
5A F307 TO AUTOPILOT INSTL
J313 / P313
TO TIE BUS
RP15A22N
DN1S22
DN1G22
DN6A22
DN6B22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 31 26 29 24 28 32 13 14
GB1-P
2
10
6
6.8K OHMS
A3 2 1/4 WATT
A2
3.3K OHMS
6 4
1 1 1K OHMS 1/4 WATT
A1 9 1/4 WATT
X1 A
5
K3 5
K1A
CR3 NOTE: APPLY GROUND TO TURN ON ANNUNCIATORS
X2 B
560 OHMS
(ANNUN
INOP) 104635 14.1 J/Y
91-31-50 AprPAGE 5
15/07
and other airplanes with Kit # 766-697 installed
4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 thru 4697173;
4697115, 4697117,
Effectivity
PAGE 6
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
BETA
IGNITION
FEATHER
FLAP FAIL
4697174 & up
HYD PUMP
GEAR WARN
ANNUN INOP
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
START ENGAGE
WSHLD OV TEMP
STBY ATT IND TEST
STBY ATT BAT HTR FAIL

LEFT
NOSE
RIGHT
91-31-50
F6N20
F6L20
PP1J20
91-61-20
91-28-20 91-28-20
91-29-10 91-27-50 91-30-40 91-32-60 91-80-10 91-74-20
91-34-20 91-61-20
91-32-60 91-32-60 91-32-60
DN5E22
(91-24-30)
Annunciator Panel
DN1B22
P394
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
19 18 15 16 20 26 23 25 22 21 24 17
J394
CR TIE
21 BUS
F306
5A
8 8 DN1BB22
P313 J313
SEE SHEET 6
104635 14.0.1 Y+
SEE 91-32-60
8L2
8L3
OXYGEN
LOW FUEL
DOOR AJAR
OIL PRESS
FUEL FILTER
L PITOT HEAT
R PITOT HEAT
SURF DE-ICE
VACUUM LOW
ENGINE FIRE
CABIN ALT 10K
PROP HEAT ON
PITOT HEAT OFF
PROP HEAT FAIL

LOW BUS VOLTS
CABIN ALTITUDE
FUEL PRESSURE
CHIP DETECTOR
STALL WARN FAIL

GENERATOR INOP
ALTERNATOR INOP
FUEL IMBALANCE
FIRE DETECT FAIL
BLEED OVER TEMP

EMERGENCY BLEED
SURFACE DE-ICE FAIL
Q22A22
D29H20
D29A20
CP19K22
91-21-30 91-30-60 91-37-20 91-21-30 91-27-30 91-30-10 91-24-30 91-28-40, 91-30-30 91-21-30 91-28-20 91-30-30 91-26-10
91-30-10 91-52-70 91-35-10 FIGURE 4 91-31-30 91-72-10
91-28-20
91-28-20
G8L22
SEE 91-32-60
G8K22 P/O FWD L/H C/B PANEL

DN1T22
5A
5A F307 TO AUTOPILOT INSTL
J313 / P313
Annunciator Panel
TO TIE BUS
RP15A22N
DN1S22
DN1G22
DN6A22
DN6B22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 31 26 29 24 28 32 13 14
GB1-P
2
10
6
6.8K OHMS
A3 2 1/4 WATT
A2
3.3K OHMS
6 4
1 1 1K OHMS 1/4 WATT
A1 9 1/4 WATT
X1 A
5
K3 5
K1A
CR3 NOTE: APPLY GROUND TO TURN ON ANNUNCIATORS
X2 B
560 OHMS
(ANNUN
INOP) 104635 14.1.1 Y
91-31-50 AprPAGE 7
15/07
4697174 & up
Effectivity
PAGE 8
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
BETA
IGNITION
FEATHER
FLAP FAIL
HYD PUMP
GEAR WARN
ANNUN INOP
L FUEL PUMP
R FUEL PUMP
START ENGAGE
WSHLD OV TEMP
LEFT
NOSE
RIGHT

4697198; 4697216 and up
15 12 10 11 9 20 7
JB15
JB14
JB15
JB14
JB15
JB14
A A C C B B
15 12 10 9 20
91-31-50
11 7
F F H H G G
JB15
JB14
JB15
JB14
JB15
JB14
DN1Y22
PP1J20
91-61-20 91-28-20 91-28-20
91-29-10 91-27-50 91-30-40 TO 91-32-60 91-80-10 91-74-20
P317-30 91-61-20
91-32-60 91-32-60 91-32-60
TO P317-22
DN5E22
TO
GEAR MUTE
(91-24-30)
OVHD SW PANEL
Annunciator Panel
(DAY)
DN1B22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P394
19 18 3 16 20 26 23 25 22 21 24 17
(NIGHT)
J394
CR TIE
21 BUS
F306
5A
DN1BB22
SEE SHEET 8
105122 14.0 NEW/A
SEE 91-32-60
8L4
8L5
OXYGEN
LOW FUEL
DOOR AJAR
OIL PRESS
FUEL FILTER
L PITOT HEAT
R PITOT HEAT
SURF DE-ICE
VACUUM LOW
ENGINE FIRE
CABIN ALT 10K
PROP HEAT ON
PITOT HEAT OFF
PROP HEAT FAIL

LOW BUS VOLTS
CABIN ALTITUDE
FUEL PRESSURE
CHIP DETECTOR
STALL WARN FAIL

GENERATOR INOP
ALTERNATOR INOP
FUEL IMBALANCE
FIRE DETECT FAIL
BLEED OVER TEMP

EMERGENCY BLEED
SURFACE DE-ICE FAIL
21 21
21 21
Q22A22
D29H20
D29A20
CP19K22
91-24-30
91-28-40, 91-21-30 91-30-60 91-37-20 91-21-30 91-27-30 91-30-10 (P327-11) 91-30-30 91-21-30 91-28-20 91-28-20 91-30-30 91-26-10
FIGURE 4 91-30-10 91-52-70 91-35-10 91-31-30 91-72-10
91-28-20
G8L22
SEE 91-32-60
G8K22 FWD L/H C/B PANEL
P2B/J2B
11 CB320B-22 ANNUNCIATOR
TO 91-33-10, FIGURE 6
DN1T22 12 CB320C-22
5A F307 * 5A
TO TRIM MONITOR TO 91-33-10,
DN1A22 * * ** * P555-1 P555-2 FIGURE 6 CB320
TO TIE BUS
SEE
9 CB320D-22
DME DWG.
Annunciator Panel
RP15A22N
DN1S22
DN1G22
DN1N22
DN1J22
DN5A22
DN3A22
DN1Y22
DN6A22
DN6B22
DN3B22
10 CB320E-22
}
P317 P2B/J2B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 31 26 32 29 24 28 23 22 8 18 30 6 7 13 14 9
16
GB1-P J317
2
3.3K 91-28-40 Q18A22

10
2 6 1/4 WATT
4
6.8K
6 1/4 WATT
4 12
A3 2 8
1
A2 1 1K OHMS
9
6 4 5 1/4 WATT
A1 3
X1 A A 5
3
K3 11
K1A CR3 K1
7
X2 B B A 1.21 K OHMS
NOTE: APPLY GROUND TO TURN ON ANNUNCIATORS
K2 1/10 WATT
B LEGEND: SEE SHEET 7

(ANNUN INOP) (PTT) DAY/NIGHT
(SHN IN DAY)
105122 14.1 NEW/A
91-31-50 AprPAGE 9
15/07
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-31-50 8L6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8L7 91-31-50 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 8L8 THRU 8L24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-31-50 8L8
CARD 9 OF 9
PA-46-500TP
(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

9A1
Published by

2926 Piper Drive
U.S.A.
Member
General Aviation
9A2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

PR010219 February 19, 2001 1
PR010515 May 15, 2001 1
PR011201 December 1, 2001 1, 3, & 4
PR030306 March 6, 2003 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
PR040109 January 9, 2004 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, & 7
PR041231 December 31, 2004 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, & 7
CR061130 November 30, 2006 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9
CR070415* April 15, 2007 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, & 9

04/15/07.
manual.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER CHAPTER


2 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07
Index 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
General 1 9A9
Effectivity 2 9A10
Pagination 2 9A10
Indexing 3 9A11
INDEX
Index 1 9B1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

Chapter 5 (5-20-00).
2. General
airplane.
correspondence.

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Effectivity
2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4697148 thru 4697173
2001 4697038 thru 4697119, and
4697121, 4697123, & 4697125 2004 4697174 thru 4697197
2002 4697120, 4697122, 4697124, 2005 4697198 thru 4697215
and 4697126 thru 4697141,
2006 4697216 thru 4697282
and 4697143, and
4697145 thru 4697147 2007 4697283 and up

Example: 46 97 001

MODEL CODE

fuel system.
PIPER.
6. Pagination
PAGE 2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
different page.
Example.
9. Indexing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Wylie, Texas 75098
P.O. Box 1404
(3) ALTERNATOR:
Airport Complex
P. O. Box 273
Vendor: Lamar
(5) AUTOPILOT:
One S-TEC Way
Instructions for
Instructions for
- Part No. 81640P
PAGE 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) BATTERIES:
(a) AIRCRAFT MAIN:
Maintenance Manual
P.O. Box 873
1160 Center Road
Avon, Ohio 44011
(8) DEICER SYSTEM:
10 Ammon Drive FAX: - (603) 669-0931
55 Old Bedford Road
Lincoln, MA 01773

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14405 Keil Road NE
(11) ENGINE:
Longueuil, Quebec
Canada J4G 1A1
P/N 3021442
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: Meggitt
Vendor: H3R Inc. PH: - (800) 249-4289
43 Magnolia Ave # 4
20 New King Street
Airborne Division
711 Taylor Street
Elyria, Ohio 44035
PAGE 6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

14900 - 40th Ave. N.E.
(20) GROUND BLOWER:
2600 S. Custer
Wichita, Kansas
4520 Hampton Rd. FAX: - (336) 766-9040
Clemmons, NC 27012
2600 Skypark Drive
Olathe, KS 66062
(25) OXYGEN SYSTEM:
2225 Erie Street
P/N 4NUT0045A
Torrance, CA 90504

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(27) PROPELLER:
Piqua, OH 45356-2634
Aluminum Blade
Inspection, Repair,
Propeller Owner’s
One Woodward Way
P.O. Box 405
Vendor: Honeywell
23500 W. 105th Street, M/D #45
Olathe, KS 66061-1950
P/N 006-05332-0001
Installation and
Maintenance Manual
4200 Encino Lane
Ventura, CA 93001
100 Corporate Drive
PAGE 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
10 Time Limits
00 General
10 Jacking
10 Weighing
20 Leveling
00 General
10 Towing
20 Taxiing
10 Parking
20 Mooring

12 SERVICING 1K1
00 General
10 Replenishing

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
00 General
20 Distribution
40 Heating
50 Cooling
22 AUTOFLIGHT 2G15
10 Autopilot
00 General
00 General
30 DC Generation
40 External Power
60 Emergency
10 Detecting
20 Extinguishing
00 General
10 Aileron and Tab
20 Rudder and Tab
30 Elevator and Tab
50 Flaps
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
28 FUEL 3G13
00 General
10 Storage
20 Distribution
40 Indicating
00 General
10 Main
00 General
10 Airfoil
30 Pitot and Static
60 Propellers
32 LANDING GEAR 4F1
00 General
50 Steering
33 LIGHTS 4I21
40 Exterior
34 NAVIGATION 5C1
00 General
35 OXYGEN 6C1
10 Crew
20 Passenger

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37 VACUUM 6D1
10 Distribution
20 Indicating
38 WATER/WASTE
(See 12-00-00.)

51 STRUCTURES 6F1
00 General
70 Repairs
52 DOORS 6G11
10 Passenger/Crew
20 Emergency Exit
70 Door Warning
55 STABILIZERS 6H7
20 Elevator
40 Rudder
56 WINDOWS 6I11
00 General
20 Cabin
30 Door
57 WINGS 6J17
40 Attach Fittings
50 Flight Surfaces
61 PROPELLERS 7C1
00 General
20 Controlling
PAGE 14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
00 General
71 POWER PLANT 7D9
00 General
10 Cowling
20 Mounts
30 Fire Seals
70 Drains
72 ENGINE 7F9
60 Accessory Drives

P/N 3021442.)
74 IGNITION 7G1

20 Distribution
75 AIR 7G19
00 General
00 General
10 Power Control
00 General
10 Power
20 Temperature
78 EXHAUST
(See 71-00-00.)
79 OIL 7J13
20 Distribution
30 Indicating

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
80 STARTING
(See 24-30-00.)
10 Charts
APPENDIXES
PAGE 16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7F20 5C17 B
2E24
2F15
9B1 INDEX AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Meggitt/S-TEC 1500
Control: 8G2
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 INDEX 9B2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9E4 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Landing: 9E16
8H18 GNS-530 #2: 9G16 Tail: 9E12
9B3 INDEX AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

8E16 System See ELT
6H24
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 INDEX 9B4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Temperature: 3J3
I
Drive System: 3F24
9B5 INDEX AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Hour: 7E23 1C21
Engine Mount 1C21
3G10 Form: 1E7 4G19
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 INDEX 9B6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4J7
9B7 INDEX AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Exterior: 1I11
N Interior: 1I19 R
4D18 Rigging: 3F3
Carpets: 3C10
Table: 3C16
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 INDEX 9B8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4H20
Checks: 1C13
9B9 INDEX AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Yaw Servo: 2H10
V
Vacuum System
Description: 6D7
Installation: 6D8
Regulator: 6D14
Vendor
Publications: A12
Vertical Fin: 6I3
6I3
6E2
W
Waterlines: 1G3
Weighing: 1G23
Wheels
Bearing Cup: 4H16
Main
Assembly: 4H14
Nose
Assembly: 4H13
Nose and Main Wheel
Definitions: 6I17
Limitations: 6I17
Window
Cabin: 6J15
Door: 6J17
Storm: 6J12
Windshield: 6J7
PAGE 10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9B11 INDEX Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER
91
CHARTS & WIRING
DIAGRAMS
(CONT.)
9C1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9C2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 (CONT.)
CHAPTER CHAPTER
91 (Cont.) -List of 1 Apr 15/07 23 Apr 15/07

91 (Cont.) - 1 Apr 15/07 91-33-20 1 Apr 15/07

Table of Contents 2 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07
91-32-60 1 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 91-33-40 1 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07
91-33-10 1 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 91-34-10 1 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 91-34-20 1 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07 12 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07 13 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07 14 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07 15 Apr 15/07
9C3 91 (CONT.) - LOE PAGE 1

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 (CONT.)
CHAPTER CHAPTER
16 Apr 15/07 91-37-20 1 Apr 15/07

17 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07 91-52-70 1 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07 91-61-20 1 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07
91-34-40 1 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
2 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
91-34-50 1 Apr 15/07 91-72-10 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
4 Apr 15/07 91-74-20 1 Apr 15/07
5 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
6 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
7 Apr 15/07
8 Apr 15/07 91-77-40 1 Apr 15/07
9 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
10 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
11 Apr 15/07 4 Apr 15/07
12 Apr 15/07 5 Apr 15/07
13 Apr 15/07 6 Apr 15/07
14 Apr 15/07 7 Apr 15/07
15 Apr 15/07 8 Apr 15/07
16 Apr 15/07 9 Apr 15/07
17 Apr 15/07 10 Apr 15/07
18 Apr 15/07 11 Apr 15/07
19 Apr 15/07
20 Apr 15/07 91-80-10 1 Apr 15/07
21 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
22 Apr 15/07 3 Apr 15/07
23 Apr 15/07
24 Apr 15/07 91-95-00 1 Apr 15/07
25 Apr 15/07 2 Apr 15/07
91-35-10 1 Apr 15/07

2 Apr 15/07
3 Apr 15/07
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91 (CONT.) - LOE 9C4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 91 (CONTINUED) - CHARTS &WIRING DIAGRAMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WIRING DIAGRAMS (SCHEMATICS) (continued) (See Note at end.)
ATA Code Grid No. Subject Grid No.

2120 8E2 ADF
2130 8E9 Dual (KR-87 9H9
2150 8E20 Single 9H10
2210 8F2 Air Conditioning and Vent Blowers 8E20
2300 8G6 Airspeed Warning 9E22
2350 8G9 Alert Horn - Vmo 9F19
2430 8G18 Alternator System and Control 8H2
2510 8H16 Altimeter, Standby 9E24
2610 8H22 Annunciator 9G9
2720 8I2 Annunciator Dimming 8J13
2730 8I8 Annunciator Panel K21
2750 8I14 Attitude Indicator, Standby 9F4
2820 8I22 Audio 8G9
2840 8J6 Autopilot
2910 8J18 Meggitt/S-TEC 1500 Control 8G2
3010 8J24 S-TEC MAGIC 1500 8F13
3030 8K4 S-TEC System 550 8F2
3040 8K10 Avidyne EFIS
3060 8K12 DC 50 Antenna Coupler 9G1
3130 8K18 Dual PFD 9F22
3150 8K21 MFD 9F24
3260 9C10 PFD #1 9F20
3310 9D2 PFD #2 9F21
3320 9E2 Avionics Cooling 8E4
3340 9E8 Avionics Lighting 9D16
3410 9E22 Blower, Vent
3420 9F6 Cabin Recirculation 8E20
3440 9G4 Ground 8E2
3450 9G12 Cabin Lights 9E2
3510 9I2 Cabin Pressurization 8E12
3720 9I4 Cabin Pressurization Dump 8E16
5270 9I6 Cabin Side Panel Lights 9E4
6120 9I8 Chip Detector 9I16
7210 9I16 Circuit Breaker Panel Lighting 9D4
7420 9I18 Clock 8H16
7740 9J1 Collins DME 9H7
8010 9J12 COM/NAV #2 9G16
9500 9J15 Console, Entertainment 8H18
Cooling, Avionics: 8E4
Data Acquisition Unit (DAU) 8J7, 8J9, 9J1
9C5 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Deice GTX 327 9G24
Propeller 8K12 GTX 330 9H2
Surface 8J24 Dual 9H4
Wing 8J24 Heated Windshield 8K10
Digital Voice Recorder Clock 8H16 Hour Meter 8K18
Display, Engine Data 9J7 Hydraulic Pump 8J18
Door Ajar Warning 9I6 Ice Light 9E14
Electric Flaps 8I14 Ignition 9I18
Electroluminescent Panel Lighting 9D4 IHAS 9G8
ELT Power 8H17 IND-450 9H7
Emergency Pressurization Valve 8E10, 8E12 IND-650A 9H10
Engine 9J1 Instrument Panel
Chip Detector 9I16 Post Lights 9D8
Data Acquisition 9J1 Switch Lights 9D12
Data Display 9J7 Intercom: 8G9
Data Monitoring 9J1 J Block Diagrams 8H9
Ignition 9I18 KA-44B Antenna 9H9
PY Line Heaters 9I18 KDI 572 9H6
Entertainment Console 8H18 KI-227-00 Indicator 9H9
Fire Detection System 8H22 KMH 820 9F24, 9G8
Flap Indicator 8I18 KN-63 DME 9H6
Flaps 8I14 KR-87 ADF 9H9
Flight Hour Meter 8K18 KRA 10A Radar Altimeter 9G1
Fuel Filter 8J2 Landing Gear Position Indicators 9C10
Fuel Pressure 8I22 Landing Gear Warning 9C12
Fuel Pumps 8I22 Landing Lights 9E16
Fuel Quantity Lift Detector Heat 8K6
Left 8J6 Lights 9D2
Right 8J8 Avionics 9D16, 9D20
Fuel Return Valve 8J13 Cabin 9E2
Fuel Temp. Indicator 8J10 Cabin Side Panel 9E4
Sensor - Right 8J11 Circuit Breaker Panel 9D4
Generator System and Control 8H4 Courtesy 9E2
GI-106 9G22 Ice 9E14
GMA-340 9F22, 9G20, 9H6, 9H7, 9H9, 9H10 Instrument Panel Posts 9D8
GMA-340 Audio/Mkr/Intercom 8G9 Instrument Panel Switches 9D12
GNS 430 9G20 Landing 9E16
Dual (#1 and #2) 9H6, 9H8 LCD Panel 9D20
GNS-530 #1 9G12 Map 9D2
GNS-530 #2 9G16 Navigation 9E8
GPS# 2 9G16 Oxygen Cabinet 9D12
Ground Clearance 8G6 Position 9E8
PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS 9C6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Lights (cont.) Recorder, Digital Voice 8H16
Recognition 9E16 Relay, Computer Fail Logic 8I9
Strobe 9E8 Rudder Meter 8G22
Tail 9E12 Rudder Trim 8I2
Taxi 9E16 Stall Detection and Warning 8I8
Wing Inspection 9E14 Standby Altimeter 9E24
Map Lights 9D2 Standby Attitude Indicator 9F4
Marker Beacon 8G9 Stormscope 9G7
Meggitt EFIS 9F8 Strobe Lights 9E8
ADAHRS 9F12 Summing Amp 8G14, 9G1
DAU 9F13 Surface Deice 8J24
PFD 1 / ND 1 / ND 2 9F10 Switch Lights, Panel 9D12
PFD 2 9F14 Tail Light 9E12
Meters 8G22 Taxi/Recognition Lights 9E16
Monitoring, Engine Data 9J1 TCR-451 9H7
NAV/COM #2 9G16 Transponder 9G24
Navigation Lights 9E8 Dual GTX 330 9H4
Oil Pressure Switch 8K18 GTX 327 9G24
Overhead Switch Panel 9I9, 9I15, 9I19 GTX 330 9H2
Overspeed Horn 9E22 Vacuum System 9I4
Oxygen Generator System 9I2 Vent Blower
Panel (Post) Lights 9D8 Cabin Recirculation 8E20
Panel LCD Lighting 9D20 Ground 8E2
Panel Switch Lights 9D12 Volt/Amp Meters 8G22
Pitot Heat 8K4 Weather Radar 9G4
Position Lights 9E8 Windshield, Heated 8K10
Power Distribution 8G18 Wing Deice 8J24
Pressurization 8E10, 8E12, 8E16 Wing Inspection (Ice) Light 9E14
Propeller 9I8 XM Satellite Receiver 9G1
Deice 8K12
Feather 9I10
Heat 8K12
Overspeed Governor 9I14
Reverse Lockout 9I8
Radar, Weather 9G4
RCR-650D ADF 9H10
NOTE: Card 9 grid numbers, above, may be erroneous if Card 8 has been updated subsequent to this
revision of Card 9. See Chapter 91 Table of Contents on Card 8.
9C7 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91 (CONT.) - CONTENTS 9C8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9C9 91-32-60 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 F401 Fuse (3 Amp)
3 S102, S202, S402 Left, Right Main and Nose Gear
Down Lock Switch Assembly
4 K8 Relay
4 1
Effectivity Landing Gear Position Indicators

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-32-60 9C10
9C11
FWD L/H C/B PANEL

Landing Gear Position Indicators
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(91-23-00)
IF AVIDYNE ENTEGRA OPTION IS INSTALLED,

91-32-60 AprPAGE
IN S/N'S 4697198 AND UP,

SEE 91-31-50 FOR CONNECTOR DETAIL.
(91-29-10)
L R
N
O
4697001 and up
M M
A S A
I E I
N N SEE 91-31-50
Effectivity
15/07
102220 12.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 S102, S202, S402 Left, Right Main and Nose Gear
Down Lock Switch Assembly
3 S101, S201 Left, Right Main Up Lock
Switch Assembly
4 S401 Nose Gear Up Lock
Switch Assembly
5 S342 Gear Selector Switch
6 A305 Dual Warning Horn
8 S325 Warning Horn Micro Switch Assy,
Power Lever
9 S330 Warning Horn Micro Switch, Flaps
3 3 9
7 1
2 6
5
8
2
4
Effectivity Landing Gear Warning

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-32-60 9C12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
W
QW
W
O
O
D
C
H
AC
TH
C
H
K
S
E
S
SS
K
S
E
S
T
T
L
L
I
U TI
102220 15.0 A/V

G4D22
G3F22
G3D22
G4F22
G3G22
G7C22
G7D22
G3J22
G3E22
G3H22
G4E22
G7B22
G7A22
(91-31-50)
POWER
LEVER
FWD
AFT
Effectivity
Landing Gear Warning 4697001 thru 4697114, 4697116, 4697118,
Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 5) and 4697125 as originally delivered
9C13 91-32-60 AprPAGE 5
15/07
and other airplanes with Kit # 766-697 installed
4697119 thru 4697124, and 4697126 & up;
4697115, 4697117,
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 6
FWD L/H C/B PANEL

GEAR WARN P301 P101
J1 102 5
J2C / P2C P J D
CB331-22 11 G7A22 G7C22 A A G7E20 4 4 L.MAIN O
91-32-60
6
3A W
G3F22 P P G3C20 5 N
CB331 2 S102
"GEAR WARN" 5 P304 P404 J410 L
ANNUN. P329-2 W22A22 J4 R436 P410 O
P436 5
(SEE 91-31-50) C
G7B22 P P G7K20 b b G7F20 4 4 NOSE K
S342 3 6
GEAR MUTE G3E22 N N G3Y20 a a G3B20 5
GEAR S402 S
TORQUE SWITCH 6 UP
SELECT 5 W
P302 P201
UPPER
LOWER SWITCH 4 DN I
G8F22 J2 202 T
5
CR P J C
n n R.MAIN
G8K22
320 2 G7D22 G7G20 4 4 H

6 E
AB P460
3 G3D22 S S G3A20 5
S202 S
6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
G8C22

G8H20
G4S20
GND
J397/P397 P301 P101 J104
STALL GEAR G4H22N J1 P104 S S
HORN A305 CR AIR 3
LEFT QW
GB5-H 314 G1F22 G G G1K20 1 1 MAIN U TI
GND 2 A C
J H P436 / R436 J317 / P317 G6E22 H H G5A20 2 T H
S103
24
SEE 91-31-50 P301
26 P101
P404 / P304 J1 103 3
P J
G4R20 T G3R22 G3J22 D D G3M20 1 1 L.MAIN U
8 2 P
G8G20 Y G8J22
7 G4F22 E E G4C20 2
S101
Landing Gear Warning
P396 CR L
GEAR WARN MUTE O
4 399 P304 P404 J401
G8R22 2 G8A22
J4 P401 C
R436 P436 3 K
G8S22 4 G8L22 WW
9 G3H22 J J G3Z20 G3L20 1 1 NOSE
1
G8U2
G8N22 2 S
G4E22 K K G4N20 X X G4B20 2 W
3 G8M22 P317/J317 S401 I
2
15 T
G8P22 G8T22N 16
K20 C
GB4-P 17 P302 P201 J203 H
DN5E22 J2 P203 3 E
UP TO 91-31-50 10 S
G3G22 V V G3K20 1 1 R.MAIN
FLAPS 2
G4D22 W W G4A20 2
G8E22 8 G8D22 1 G8B22 S201
G3U22 7 G3T22 3 G3S22
S330 J346 / P346 P347 / J347

DOWN 104635 15.0 F/AB
NOTE: INDICATES TERMINAL BOARD 301#'S
9C14
9C15
L.MAIN
J301/ P101 DN LOCK
TO P329-2, 91-31-50 W22A22 P 102 J 5
G7C22 A A G7E20 4 S102
4 6
G3F22 P P G3C20 5
JB13
P 103 J AIR
G3FF22 D D 1 3
J (SEE SHEET 5) G3J22 G3M20
1 UP LOCK
E G4DD22 G4F22 E E G4C20 2 2 S101
K G8C22 TO P396-2, SHEET 5 GND
D G8A22
TO P397-3, SHEET 5
P 104 J 3
G1FF22 G1F22 G G G1K20 1
1 2
TO GEAR SEL SW-6 (SHEET 5 ) G6E22 H H G5A20 2
TO K312A-Y1 G11D20 M M G11C20 6
(91-29-10) 6
TO GEAR SEL SW-3 G11A20 F F G11B20 4
4

(91-29-10) 5 5 SQUAT
TO P387-2 CP17B22 N N CP17C20 7 9 S103
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(91-21-30) 7 8

CP17D20N 9
TO P379-17, (91-33-40)
12
TO P2B-1, (91-33-40)
TO P376-7 S2H20 K K S3H20 10
(91-30-30) 10 11
S3H20N 12
FWD L/H C/B PANEL

J304/ P404 J436/ P436 NOSE
GEAR WARN P 403 J 3
G3H22 J J G3Z20 W W G3L20 1
1 2 UP LOCK
J2C/P2C G4E22 K K G4N20 X X G4B20 2
CB331-22 6 S401
11 G7A22 G2G22 L L G2M20 Y Y G2J20 4
3A 4 5
G2F20 R R G2P20 c c G2K20 5
CB331
TO P304-T, SHEET 5 G3R22 G3RR22 P 410 J DN LOCK
P P b b 4 5
TO J347-3, SHEET 5 G3S22
G7B22 G7K20 G7F20
4 S402
G3E22 N N G3Y20 a a G3B20 5 6
91-32-60 AprPAGE
R.MAIN
J302/ P201
P 202 J
4697198; 4697216 and up
n n 4 5 DN LOCK
G7D22 G7G20
4 6 S202
G3DD22 G3D22 S S G3A20 5
P 203 J 3
G3G22 V V G3K20 1
1 2 UP LOCK
G4D22 W W G4A20 2
6 S201
SEE ENTEGRA AVIONICS DWG AV10A22 X X AV1C22 4
AND FIGURE 3. 4 5
AV1A22N Y Y AV1B22 5
Effectivity
GB4-L
15/07
105122 15.0 NEW/A

7
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 8
GEAR
G6E22 TO P301-H, SHEET 4
SELECT S342 6
SWITCH
UP
5
DN
91-32-60
G8F22 4
P397
JB13
2
(SEE 91-27-30 FOR J397, 3 G8C22 K E (SHEET 4)
STALL GEAR HORN)
4
G4H22N
GB5-H
G8K22

GEAR MUTE J317/P317
TORQUE
24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SWITCH

SEE 91-31-50
26
LOWER P460 P436/R436 P404/P304
B G4S20 H G4R20 T G3R22 TO SHEET 4
A G8H20 J G8G20 Y G8J22
UPPER
GEAR WARN
MUTE
P396
SWITCH
G8R22 2 G8AA22 TO SHEET 4
G8S22 4 G8L22
G8N22 1
P317/J317
K20
3 G8M22 15
G8T22N 16
G8P22 G8U22 17
GB4-P
SEE 91-31-50 DN5E22

JB13
UP
G8E22 8 G8D22 1 G8B22 G8BB22 J D (SHEET 4)
FLAPS
G3U22 7 G3T22 3 G3S22 TO SHEET 4
105122 15.1 NEW
S330
9C16
DOWN J346/P346 P347/J347

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9C17 91-32-60 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S201 Left, Right Main Up Lock

Switch Assembly
Effectivity Landing Gear / Avionics Interfaces

PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-32-60 9C18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
104635 56.0 J/AB
R.MAIN UPLOCK SWITCH

S201
203
P J
3
3
NOTE: "IHAS" OPTION AVAILABLE

SEE SHEET 3 { 1
2
1
2
IN S/N'S 4697126 & UP ONLY.

6
SEE SKYWATCH 6
OR "IHAS" INSTL X AV1C22 4 4
5
AV1A22N Y AV1B22 5
P302 P201
J2
GB4-L
(
( GEARSWITCH SHOWN
DOWN AND LOCKED
317
J P
22 TO LANDING GEAR LIGHTS, 91-31-50

2
6 4
23 PRESS TO TEST FROM ANNUN PANEL, 91-31-50
1
3
5 28 SEE "IHAS" AVIONICS OPTION
TO
K1A-X2
(91-31-50) A
K9
1
B
PTT RELAY K1
3
34 SEE SKYWATCH OR "IHAS" INSTALLATION AND 91-61-20
11 7
2
33 SEE TRANSPONDER INSTALLATION AND 91-61-20
10 6
4
1
5
} REVERSE LOCKOUT,
9 5
A
K9 3 TO REVERSE LOCKOUT C/B, 91-61-20, FIGURE 1

1 E17L20 TO P387-2, 91-21-30, FIGURE 3
B
GND IN FLT
SQUAT RELAY 2
(SHN ON GND)
Landing Gear / Avionics Interfaces Effectivity

9C19 91-32-60 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
203
P J
3 R.MAIN
3
1
KMH820 SEE FIGURE 2 { 2
1
2
UPLOCK
SWITCH
P10
6 6 S201
3 AV10A22 X AV1C22 4 4
5
AV1A22N Y AV1B22 5
GB4-L P302 P201

J2
( SWITCH SHOWN GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED )
P317 JB18
3
34 AV20A22 A SQUAT SW GND DATA CONCENTRATOR
11 7
2
33 AV21A22 E SQUAT SW GND AVIONICS
10 6
4
1
5
} REVERSE
91-61-20
LOCKOUT,
9 5
A
K9 3 TO REVERSE LOCKOUT C/B, 91-61-20

1 E17L20 TO P387-2, 91-21-30
B
GND IN FLT
SQUAT RELAY 2
(SHN ON GND)
105122 56.0 NEW
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Landing Gear / Avionics Interfaces
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-32-60 9C20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9C21 91-32-60 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 91-32-60 9C22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9D1 91-33-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 XDS308, XDS309 Map Light
Effectivity Map Lights

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
102220 23.0 NEW/AB

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Map Lights Effectivity

9D3 91-33-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 A338 Inverter
Effectivity Electroluminescent Panel Lighting (C/B Panels)

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D4
9D5
C/B PANELS
L/AFT C/B PANELS L/FWD C/B PANELS R/FWD C/B PANELS R/AFT C/B PANELS
PL1 PL3
WHT 1 1 1 1
N J E A
WHT
N J E A
WHT WHT
WHT 2 2 WHT 2 2
TJ BLOCK 2
TJ BLOCK 5
WHT WHT
WHT WHT
WHT
T
T
Electroluminescent Panel Lighting (C/B Panels)
TJ BLOCK 5
TJ BLOCK 2
P K F B
P K F B
BLK

BLK BLK
PL2 BLK BLK PL4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BLK 1 1 BLK BLK BLK 1 1
W
BLK 2 2 BLK 2 2
L41D22
L40G22
L40E22
L41E22
L41H22
L41B22
L40C22
L40J22
J3C J2C J4B J6B
P3C 8 7 P2C 9 8 P4B 8 7 P6B 5 4
P389
TO L40H22
1 L40L22 L40D22
ECS
2 L41P22N L40F22
PLACARD P358
L40K22 1 TO POWER LEVER
P320 L41M22 1 TO BUS POWER
2 PLACARD
L41N22N 2 PLACARD
L41L22N
91-33-10 AprPAGE
L41A22N L41C22N L41G22

P363/J363 GB8-B
L41F22N
GB6-N L40B22 2 BLK GB2-H
TO TB1 * L40A22 1 BLK E L PANELS
(POST LIGHTS, INVERTER P381
SEE FIGURE 3)
4697001 and up
TO OVHD 18 L41K22
A338 SW. PANELS 19 L41J22
Effectivity
102220 43.0 N/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW/A * TO LB1-B WHEN AVIDYNE ENTEGRA INSTALLED
15/07
IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP.

5
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9D7 91-33-10 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 F403 Fuse (3 Amp)

2 K8 Relay
Effectivity Instrument Panel (Post) Lights

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D8
9D9
AIRSPEED ADI OPTIONAL LIGHTING

AIRSPEED
102220 20.0 J/V L311
104635 NEW/AB
A B
ALTIMETER ALTIMETER
VIB.
L312
VSI E DCB A
1 1
P334
2 2 (91-34-10)
TO TB2, FIGURE 5 L23G20
J334
ADI
INV.
L313
PILOT INSTR. PNL. CE BA
R.H. SIDE P387
2 P387
25 20 6 1 1
20 27 EL1D20 1 1 1 2 2 (91-34-20)
26 20 4 2 2 2 J355

FOR RELAY COIL WIRING L23B22 3 3 3
Instrument Panel (Post) Lights
4 4 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEE K8, 91-32-60 L319 PEDESTAL

PILOT INSTR. PNL. P362/J362 J362
L27C22N
L.H. SIDE FUEL SHUT-OFF HANDLE
K8 RELAY
LIGHT
COMPASS
LIGHT
GB8-C L320
L23M22
L23M22N J320
GB2-PEMER/GND SEE 91-27-20
OPTIONAL CO-PILOT
CLR INSTR. PNL. J310
P304 P404 BUS
J4 R436 P436
F403
EL1C20 B B EL1B20 N N EL1A20 L310
3A
EMER.
LIGHTS L23F20 L26C22
TO RUDDER TRIM SWITCH (SEE 91-27-20) L23T22

91-33-10 AprPAGE
L23C20
TB1
L23D20
TO EL PANELS (FIGURE 2) L40A22
L23E20
TOP CENTER PANEL L23H20
FROM C/B PANEL P2D-2 (FIGURE 4) L23A20
4697001 and up
FLAP IND. LIGHT (SEE 91-27-50, FIGURE 2) L27B22

TO OXYGEN CABINET PLACARD LIGHT { 1 1 L27D22
2 2
Effectivity
L27E22N
J321/L321
GB4-N
15/07
CO-PILOT PANEL
9
Apr 15/07
PAGE 10
4697198; 4697216 and up

Effectivity
C
E
ADI
TO P395 (91-34-20) F6R20 A INV.
B
L313
L27CC22N
L23BB22
91-33-10
F6S20N
P387 FWD L/H C/B PANEL L312
2 P387
25 20 6
20 27 EL1D20 GB4-F E
26 20 4
ALTIMETER VIB
D
J2C/P2C C ALTIMETER
FOR RELAY COIL WIRING L23B22
SEE K8 PG. 12.0
CB334-22 5 F5A22 A VIB.
3A F5B22N B
L319
CB334 L311
K8 RELAY GB8-L
A
AIRSPEED
COMPASS B

LIGHT
Instrument Panel (Post) Lights
L27C22N
L23M22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L23M22N

GB2-P EMER/GND
CLR
BUS GB8-C
P304 P404
J4 J436 P436
F406
EL1C20 B B EL1B20 N N EL1A20
3A
LIGHTS
EMER.
GND FROM 91-27-20 LB1

L320/J320
PEDESTAL FUEL SHUT-OFF INSTRUMENT LIGHTS
HANDLE LIGHT J310
L310
L26C22 H
TO OXYGEN CABINET PLACARD LIGHT { 1 1 L27D22 G

2 2 L27E22N
J321/L321
GB4-N
ENVIRONMENTAL SW PNL L23P22 J

BOTTOM CENTER PANEL LIGHTS L23E20 F
PILOT PANEL L23D20 E
FLAP INDICATOR (91-27-50, FIGURE 2) L27B20 D
L23G22 C
TO EL PANELS (FIGURE 2) L40A22 B
TO P2D-2 (FIGURE 4) L23A20 A
9D10
105122 20.0 NEW/A

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9D11 91-33-10 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4 Switch, Switch Lights
5 Switch, Panel Lights
4-5
1-3
4-5
2-3
Effectivity Instrument Panel Switch Lights

PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D12
9D13
TAPER
BLOCK
TB3 P381
L23S20 12 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS +
L23J20N 11 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS -
GB7-K
P380
L23R20 6 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS +
L23K20N 22 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS -
FWD L/H C/B PANEL GB7-L
L26B20N 19 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS -
INSTR. GB7-R
L33H22 TO P318-4 (91-21-30) CABIN DUMP SWITCH
PANEL
LIGHTS 1005

Instrument Panel Switch Lights
EL J2D/P2D
A MODULE B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB317A20 CB317C20 1 L33A20
3A 5VDC
CB317 CONTROL OVHD SW PANEL
TJ BLOCK 5 J2C/P2C
BLACK
P379 SWITCH
INC
GRAY A B C D CB317E22 13 L33B22 1 LIGHTS P379
3 BLACK
TJ BLOCK 3 VIOLET E F G H CB317F22 14 L33C22 2
VIOLET J K L M CB317G22 15 DEC
GB5-N
J K L M N P R S CB317H22 16
GRAY
P379 INC PANEL
(GND) LIGHTS P379
BLACK
L33D22 4
6 BLACK
L33E22 5
DEC
GB5-P
CONTROL
EL
J2D/P2D
91-33-10 Apr
MODULE
A B
CB317B20 1006 CB317D20 2 L23A20 TO POST LIGHT TAPER BLOCK TB1 (FIGURE 3)
P316 1 3
CB317J20 3 L24A22 1 2 OXYGEN
CABINET
4 6
5 LIGHTS
4697001 and up
L24B22N 2
LT LT+
Effectivity
GB3-K OXYGEN CABINET

PAGE 13
102220 19.0 J/V

104635 NEW/AB
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 14
4697198; 4697216 and up

Effectivity
SWITCH LIGHTS
LB3
F L23T20 TO P365-3 RUDDER TRIM SW.
E L23W20 TO PNL SW'S
P381
91-33-10
D L23S20 12 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS +

L23J20N 11 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS -
GB7-K
P380
C L23R20 6 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS +
L23K20N 22 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS -
GB7-L
FWD L/H C/B PANEL 19 TO OVHD SW. PANEL LIGHTS -
L26B20N
GB7-R
INSTR. B L33H22 TO P318-4 (91-21-30)
A
PANEL
LIGHTS 1005 CTJ1-20E-01B

EL
Instrument Panel Switch Lights
J2D/P2D
A MODULE B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 L33A20

CB317A20 CB317C20
5VDC
3A
CB317 OVHD SW PANEL
CONTROL
TJ BLOCK 5 J2C/P2C SWITCH

BLACK
P379 INC
GRAY A B C D CB317E22 13 L33B22 1 LIGHTS P379
3 BLK20
TJ BLOCK 3 VIOLET E F G H CB317F22 14 L33C22 2
VIOLET J K L M CB317G22 15 DEC
J K L M GB5-N
GRAY N P R S CB317H22 16
P379 INC PANEL
(GND) LIGHTS P379
L33D22 4
BLACK
6 BLK20
L33E22 5
DEC
CONTROL GB5-P
EL
MODULE J2D/P2D
A B
CB317B20 1006 CB317D20 2 L23A20 TO POST LIGHT BLOCK LB1-A (FIGURE 3)
P316 1 3
CB317J20 3 L24A22 1 2 OXYGEN
CABINET
4 6
5 LIGHTS
L24B22N 2 LT LT+
105122 19.0 NEW/A

9D14
GB3-K OXYGEN CABINET

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9D15 91-33-10 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Switch, Avionics Dimming
1-2
3
1
Effectivity Avionics Lighting

PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
39 OHM
FIGURE 6
L23G20
TO
BLUE
L19A20
TO FIGURE 3
2
1
(91-21-30)
TO PILOT'S T&B (91-34-20, FIGURE 3)
CB382E20
(91-24-30)
FWD R/H C/B PANEL
2008
104635 NEW/AB
102220 36.0 H/V
Avionics Lighting Effectivity
9D17 91-33-10 Apr
PAGE 17
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 18
4697198; 4697216 and up

Effectivity
91-33-10
FWD R/H C/B PANEL OVHD SW PNL
AVIONICS
DIMMER
SWITCH
BLACK

TO TJ BLOCK 4(GND) J4B/P4B
TJ BLOCK 3 P379 INC
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRAY N P R S CB383C20 L26A22

1 7
VIOLET T W Y Z CB383D20 5 L27A22 8

Avionics Lighting
BLK22 9 DEC
AVIONICS
DIMMING GB6-C
CONTROL
J4D/P4D
A B
5A ELECT
CB383A20 CB383B20 6 L25A20
CB383 MODULE
CB383E20 7 L19A20 TO FIGURE 6
TO SHEET 4
105122 36.0 NEW
9D18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105120 29 F
105122 36.1 A
LB2
AVIONICS LIGHTS
A L25A20 TO P4D-6
B DN3A22 TO P317-18
C XPNDR #1
D XPNDR #2
E ADF
F DME
G
H
J AUDIO PANEL
K ADF IND
L P387-28
M
CTJ1-20E-01B (REF)
LB5
AVIONICS LIGHTS
A
B AUTOPILOT
C IHAS ANNUN
CTJ1-20E-01B (REF)
Effectivity
Avionics Lighting with Avidyne Entegra in
9D19 91-33-10 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Control Module
2 Switch, Display Dimmer
1-2
3
1
Effectivity Panel LCD Lighting

PAGE 20
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D20
9D21
OVHD SW PNL
DISPLAY DIMMER
J392/P392 GB4-K SWITCH
BLACK 2 L19E20N P379
INC
GRAY 3 L19D20 34
VIOLET 4 L19C20 35
BLACK 33 DEC

GB8-N
CONTROL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Panel LCD Lighting
TO FIGURE 5 J392/P392
A B TAPER
P5E-2 L19A20 ELECT
1 RED WHT 5 BLOCK
MODULE
TB4
P392/J392
L19B20
TO EDU P372-35 (91-77-40, FIGURE 2, SHEET 2) L25B20
TO EDU P375-35 (91-77-40, FIGURE 2, SHEET 3) L25C20
TO EADI NO. 1 (SEE 91-34-20, FIGURE 2)
TO EADI NO. 2 (SEE 91-34-20, FIGURE 2)

91-33-10 Apr
TO EHSI NO. 1 (SEE 91-34-20, FIGURE 2)
TO EHSI NO. 2 (SEE 91-34-20, FIGURE 2)
TO GNS NO. 1 (SEE 91-34-50, FIGURE 1)

4697001 and up
102220 39.0 F/V

104635 NEW/AB
TO GNS NO. 2 (SEE 91-34-50, FIGURE 2)
Effectivity
PAGE 21
15/07
Apr 15/07
PAGE 22
4697198; 4697216 and up

Effectivity
91-33-10
OVHD SW PNL
105122 39.0 A
J392/P392 GB4-K DISPLAY DIMMER

SWITCH
BLACK 2 L19E20N P379
INC
GRAY 3 L19D20 34
VIOLET 4 L19C20 35
BLK20 33 DEC

GB8-N
TO AVIONICS CONTROL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DIMMING CB
P392/J392 J392/P392
Panel LCD Lighting
(FIGURE 5) A B
ELECT
P4D-7 L19A20 1 RED WHT 5
MODULE
L19B20
LB4
PANEL LIGHTS
A
B TO P387-31(SEE 91-23-00 FIGURE 1 (2))
C DN3A22 TO P317-18
G DN3B22 TO P317-9
H TO PFD #1 DIMMING
J TO MFD DIMMING
K TO PFD #2 DIMMING
CTJ1-20E-02C
9D22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9D23 91-33-10 Apr

PAGE 23
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 91-33-10 9D24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9E1 91-33-20 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 F407 Fuse (5A)
3 Lights, Baggage Area
4 A323 Timer
5 S352 Timer Reset Switch
6 Cabin Door Lock Switch
7 Courtesy Light Assembly (Door)
8 Lights, Aft Cabin
9 Lights, Mid Cabin
10 Lights, Fwd Cabin
Effectivity Cabin and Courtesy Lights

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-33-20 9E2
9E3
SWITCHES SHOWN WITH DOORS OPEN.

BATT BUS
P436 R436
P404 P304
J4
* S352
J342 P342 J332 P332 J343 P343
L60A20 L L L60B20 b b L60C20 22 22 22 22
5A
F407
CABIN TIMER
FWD L/H C/B PANEL DOOR LOCK RESET
SWITCH SWITCH
CABIN LIGHTS (SHOWN DOOR OPEN)
J2B/P2B P351/J351
CB318-22 14 L15A22 TIMER
5A A323
CB318
L15B22
L15C22
WHT
RED
BLK
R.H.
R.H. L15E22 4 4

2 1 L308 3 3
2 1 L306
Cabin and Courtesy Lights
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 2

L15F22 1 1
L15G22
L16F22
L16G22
J341 P341
L15D22
L16A22
L305
2 1 L301 2 1 L302 2 1 L303 2 1

COURTESY LIGHTS
MID AFT
CABIN CABIN AFT
FWD BAGG
CABIN ENTRANCE
L16H22
L16J22
COMP
DOOR
AFT AFT
FWD MID
CABIN BAGG
CABIN CABIN
COMP
91-33-20 AprPAGE
2 1 L314 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
L316
L16C22
L16E22
L315 L304 L317

L16D22
4697001 and up
2 1 L307 SIDE PANEL LIGHTS

2 1 L309 102220 21.0 D/V
L318 SWITCH 104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Effectivity
L24F22 1
L.H.
L16B22 L.H. 2
15/07
L24C22 TO P354, FIGURE 2

3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Light Strip, Right Side

2 Light Strip, Left Side - Fwd
3 Light Strip, Left Side - Aft
Effectivity Cabin Side Panel Lights

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-33-20 9E4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIGHT STRIP R.H. SIDE
P352
1 1
TYPICAL LIGHTS
2 2
BLACK
GB3-L
TO L318-2,
L24C22
FIGURE 1
L24E22
P353 P354
L24D22 1 1 1 1
TYPICAL LIGHTS
2 2 2 2
BLACK
BLACK
GB8-A
LIGHT STRIPS L.H. SIDE
102220 22.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Cabin Side Panel Lights Effectivity

9E5 91-33-20 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-33-20 9E6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9E7 91-33-40 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 XDS 202, XDS 203 Nav & Strobe Light, Right
4 XDS 102, XDS 103 Nav & Strobe Light, Left
5 A103, A201 Strobe Light Power Supply
6 Switch, Nav Lights
7 Switch, Strobe Lights
6-7
3 5 5 4
1-2
1 6-7
Effectivity Position (Navigation) and Strobe Lights

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVHD SW PNL
TO TAIL LIGHT
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
1004
1002
102220 17.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Position (Navigation) and Strobe Lights Effectivity
9E9 91-33-40 AprPAGE 3
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9E11 91-33-40 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Tail Light
Effectivity Tail Light (Optional)

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUTOPILOT CONNECTOR * IN AFT

PRESSURE BULKHEAD
TAIL
LIGHT
TO L2B18 L2F18 9 9 L2G18

(FIGURE 1)
* P359/J359 WHEN AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IS INSTALLED

IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 AND UP.
102220 17.1 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Tail Light (Optional) Effectivity

9E13 91-33-40 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 XDS307 Ice Light
4 Ice Light Switch
1-2
4
3 1
Effectivity Wing Inspection (Ice) Light

PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P357 J357
GB8-M
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
BLACK 22*
* CB309D22 WHEN AVIDYNE ENTEGRA INSTALLED

IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP.
BLACK 22
OVHD SW PANEL
102220 24.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Wing Inspection (Ice) Light Effectivity

9E15 91-33-40 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 CB313 Circuit Breaker (10 Amp.)

3 XDS401 Light, Landing
4 S401 Switch, Nose Gear Up Lock
5 Switch, Landing Light
6 CB310 Circuit Breaker (7.5 Amp.)
1006 Control Module
8 1007 Pulse Timer Control
9 XDS101, XDS201 Lights, Taxi/Pulse
10 Switch, Taxi/Pulse Lights
1&6 5 & 10
2, 7 & 8
4
3
5 & 10
9 9
Effectivity Landing and Taxi/Recognition Lights

PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E16
9E17
TAXI FWD L/H C/B PANEL

LIGHT LEFT P301 P101 P109
1001 P1B J1 J109 J112
J1B XDS101
P112
A EL B
CB310A18 CB310D18 2 2 L9A18 Z Z WH/ORG 3 1
7.5A MODULE TJ BLOCK 1
BROWN a a WH/BLU 2 2
CB310 E F G H
CONTROL GRAY P2B c c
J2B WHITE 1 LEFT
J K L M
RIGHT
CB310L22 4 4
A B
CB310B18 1008* CB310E18
EL P1B P302 P201 P209
J1B J2 J209 P212
MODULE
BROWN J212 XDS201
GRAY 3 3
CONTROL
CB310C20
BLACK L9B18 c c WH/ORG 3 1

BLACK TJ BLOCK 3 Z Z WH/BLU 2 2
L8B22
A B C D BLACK-22 a a WHITE 1 RIGHT
E F G H BLACK-22
Landing and Taxi/Recognition Lights
1007 P2B

TJ BLOCK 6 J2B
A B C D GB5-L (TAXI)
TIMER
23 23
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 2 L9D22 J379 P379
VIOLET

CONTROL ORANGE 5 5 L9C22 21 BLACK

BLACK GB5-M
T W Y Z CB310R22 6 6 L8C22 22 22
BROWN (PULSE)
TJ BLOCK 1 GB5-K
P379 J379
* 1006 IN S/N'S 4697001 THRU 4697124 ONLY.
OVHD SW. PANEL
LANDING
LIGHT 1003 P305 P405
P1B J5 P437
EL J1B R437 XDS201
A MODULE B
CB313A18 CB313B18 1 1 L10A18 B B L10B18 B B L10C18 LANDING
10A
CONTROL LIGHT
CB313
TJ BLOCK 1
L12A18N ON NOSE
BROWN A B C D CB313D22 1 1
TO TJ BLOCK 3(B) GND 20 GA. JUMPER GEAR ASSY
GRAY
J2B P2B
91-33-40 Apr
LANDING ON
LIGHT SWITCH 17 G2F20 NOSE UP LOCK
P379 P304 P404 SWITCH
P436 J401
OFF J4 R436 P401
6
15 BLACK 4
G2G22 L L G2M20 Y Y G2J20 4 4 S401
4697001 and up
c c 5
GND BUS P379 GB5-J R R G2P20 G2K20 5 5
19 BLACK
OVHD SW. PANEL (SHOWN GEAR DOWN)
Effectivity
PAGE 11
GB7-P
15/07
102220 18.0 E/V

104635 NEW/AB
NOTE: FOR LANDING LIGHT TO OPERATE, NOSE GEAR HAS TO BE DOWN. 105122 NEW
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 12
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9E19 91-33-40 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 91-33-40 9E20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9E21 91-34-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Overspeed Horn
2 1
Effectivity Airspeed Warning

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-34-10 9E22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FWD L/H C/B PANEL PFD1-P1
13 PFD #1
PILOT AIRSPEED
WARN
J2B/P2B
CB321-22 3 W1A22 W1A22
1A W1E22
CB321
OVERSPEED
W3A22 HORN
FWD R/H C/B PANEL
CO-PILOT AIRSPEED
WARN
J4B/P4B PFD2-P1
CB381-22 10 W3A22
1A PFD #2
W3E22 13
CB381
102220 50.0 K/V

104635 NEW/AB
WITH MEGGITT EFIS
WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 AND UP
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
PILOT AIRSPEED JB15

WARN
J2B/P2B
CB321-22 3 W1A22 K E W1AA22
1A
CB321 OVERSPEED
HORN
J D W3AA22
FWD R/H C/B PANEL
CO-PILOT AIRSPEED PFD #1

W1E22 78
WARN P7321
J4B/P4B
CB381-22 10 W3A22 PFD #2
1A W1F22 78
CB381 P7322
105122 50.0 NEW
Airspeed Warning Effectivity

9E23 91-34-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Effectivity Standby Altimeter

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-34-10 9E24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
ALTIMETER
J2C/P2C P334
3A CB333-22 5 F5A22 1
TO J334,
CB333 F5B22N 2 91-33-10,
FIGURE 3
GB8-L
NOT INSTALLED WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 AND UP.
102220 51.0 C/V

104635 NEW/AB
Standby Altimeter Effectivity

9F1 91-34-10 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-34-10 9F2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9F3 91-34-20 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Battery
3 Standby Gyro Switch
Effectivity Standby Attitude Indicator

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9F4
9F5
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
STBY ATT. IND. 102220 52.0 E/V

104635 NEW/AB
J2D/P2D
CB322-20 7 F6A20
7.5A
CB322
GB8-R

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Standby Attitude Indicator

P208
BATTERY
(IN RADAR POD)
J6 STANDBY GYRO
P206 P306 SWITCH
P356
28VDC INPUT A F6B20 G P356
4 F6P20N GB4-E
ON/OFF CONTROL I F6C20 H F6C20 1
GB-4M ON
5 F6R20 1 TO STANDBY
Z F6E20 2 OFF ATTITUDE
F6S20N 2
+24/28 VDC OUTPUT C F6D20 P TEST (MOM) INDICATOR
P355 (SEE 91-33-10,
REMOTE TEST INPUT K F6F20 R F6G20 3 FIGURE 3)
GB4-F
DC RETURN (GND) E F6H20 T F6J20N
91-34-20 AprPAGE
GB4-D
REMOTE TEST LAMP J F6K20 U F6L20 TO ANNUN. P329-3 (91-31-50)

REMOTE WARNING LAMP L F6M20 V F6N20 TO ANNUN. P329-5 (91-31-50)
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
3
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 4
FWD L/H C/B PANEL

91-34-20
STBY
ATT. IND. 105122 52.0 A
J2D/P2D
CB321-20 7 F6A20
7.5A
CB321
BLK22
GB8-R
P208

BATTERY
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Standby Attitude Indicator

(IN RADAR POD)
J6 STANDBY GYRO
P206 P306 SWITCH
28VDC INPUT A F6B20 G
F6P20N GB4-E
ON/OFF CONTROL I F6C20 H F6C20
ON
F6R20 A
Z F6E20 OFF
F6S20N B
+24/28 VDC OUTPUT C F6D20 P GB4-M BLK22 TEST (MOM)
L313
REMOTE TEST INPUT K F6F20 R F6G20 GB4-F
STANDBY ATTITUDE
DC RETURN (GND) E F6H20 T F6J20N INDICATOR
(91-33-10, FIGURE 3)
GB4-D
P329 P329
J6 P334/J334
P206 P306 13 F6T20 1 (RED)
TO STAND ALONE
REMOTE TEST LAMP J F6K20 U F6L20 6 5 F6U20 2 (ORANGE) ANNUNCIATOR
(BLUE) (NOT SHOWN)
REMOTE WARNING LAMP L F6M20 V F6N20 18 4 F6V20 3
9F6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9F7 91-34-20 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S-TEC 6446 Flux Sensor (2)

2 ADAHRS 2 Select Relay
3 Meggitt 37002-01-01 ADAHRS Unit (2)
4 ADAHRS 2 Select Switch
5 Meggitt 84-133-1 PFD Unit (2)
6 Meggitt 84-134-1 ND Unit (2)
5 3
2
1
4 2
102325 AB
6
Effectivity
4697001 thru 4697215, Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Meggitt
less 4697198 Figure 2 (Sheet 1 of 7)
PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9F8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTR PANEL
FS: 108.00 SW-1, SW-2
EADI DISPLAY DOWN SWITCH
7
3
1 8
6
102324 AC 10
6
4
9
16
7
15
8
17
13
5
12
14
1 2 3
2
2 6 7 8 3 22 WH (TYP)
9 10 11 4
12 13 14
1 15 16 17 5
PRESSURE BULKHEAD DISC SWITCH DETAIL
AUTOPILOT
HARNESS FLUX VALVE 1 AFT EQUIPMENT SHELF
UPPER FS:263.00
A A
B B BUS A
C D BUS B
n
D E BUS A
E H
BUS B
F A
K10 A2
G B
H D BUS A
p A1 A3
R E
j H BUS B B2
B1
LOWER B3
FLUX VALVE 2
1 22 WHT
2 22 BLU
3 X1
CR100
IN4005 X2
INSTR PANEL 22 BLK
FS:108.00
ADAHRS 2
SELECT 7
SWITCH
6 8 P1 J1
1 22 RED
10
9
11
BLUE BEAD
2 22 BLK
A3 B1 X1 B2
1 2 3
5V-LT
2 22 BLU A2 X2 A1 B3
1
}
J2 P2
22 RED ADAHRS 2 PWR. RELAY DETAIL
SEE SHEET 5
22 RED ADAHRS 1 PWR.
Effectivity
Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Meggitt 4697001 thru 4697215,
Figure 2 (Sheet 2 of 7) less 4697198
9F9 91-34-20 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRIMARY FLIGHT NAVIGATION NAVIGATION

DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2
PFD1-P1 ND1-P1 ND1-P2 ND1-P3 ND2-P1 ND2-P2 FUNCTION
3 28VDC POWER A
22 28VDC POWER
4 28VDC RETURN
23 28VDC RETURN
3 28VDC POWER
22 28VDC POWER
4 28VDC RETURN
35
23
35
28VDC RETURN
28VDC LIGHTS+ B
17 17 LIGHTS GROUND
5 CHASSSIS GND
5 CHASSSIS GND
1 2 422 BUS A
20 21 422 BUS B
CONN GND C
2 1 422 BUS A
21 20 422 BUS B
6 24
422 BUS SHIELD
429 IN 1A BUS A D
25 6 429 IN 1A BUS B
429 BUS SHIELD
CONN GND
27 CONFIGURE 0
9 CONFIGURE 1
28 CONFIGURE 2
10 CONFIGURE 3
29 CONFIGURE 4
11 CONFIGURE 5
30 CONFIGURE 6
12 CONFIGURE 7
31 CONFIGURE RETURN
27 CONFIGURE 0
9 CONFIGURE 1
28 CONFIGURE 2
10 CONFIGURE 3
29 CONFIGURE 4
11 CONFIGURE 5
30 CONFIGURE 6
12 CONFIGURE 7
31 CONFIGURE RETURN
25 429 IN2 BUS A
E
7 429 IN2 BUS B
429 IN2 SHIELD GROUND
26 37 429 IN3 BUS A
8 19 429 IN3 BUS B
CONN GND
37 26 429 OUT2 BUS A
19 8
25
429 OUT2 B BUS
429 OUT2 BUS A F
7 429 OUT2 B BUS
429 IN3 SHIELD GROUND
14 14 429 IN4B BUS A
33 33 429 IN4B BUS B
429 IN4A SHIELD GROUND
13 13 429 IN4A A BUS
32 32 429 IN4A B BUS
429 IN4B SHIELD GROUND
36 429 OUT1 BUS A
18 429 OUT1 B BUS
429 OUT1 SHIELD GROUND
36 429 OUT2 BUS A
18 429 OUT2 B BUS
429 OUT2 SHIELD GROUND
27 CONFIGURE 0
9 CONFIGURE 1
28 CONFIGURE 2
10 CONFIGURE 3
29 CONFIGURE 4
11 CONFIGURE 5
30 CONFIGURE 6
12 CONFIGURE 7
13
31 CONFIGURE RETURN
REVERSIONARY MODE
G
1 1 AC EXC HI
14 14 AC EXC REF
AC REF SHIELD
15 15 CRS HDG REF
3 3 FD ROLL SIG
16 16 FD PITCH SIG
4 PITCH STR SIG
17 17 FD REF
SHIELD
6 HDG ERROR SIG
19 CRS ERROR SIG
SHIELD
CONN GND
8 DEV CT RT
21 DEV CT LT
SHIELD
10 DEV GS UP
23 DEV GS DN
SHIELD
11 GS FLG P
24 GS FLG N
12 NAV FLG P
25 NAV FLG N
13 LOC SW
Effectivity
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9F10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERCONNECTS REV RADAR EFIS SW.

AUTOPILOT NAV 1/GPS NAV 2/GPS SW-1 INTERCONNECT STORMSCOPE RELAY
EFIS-AP1 EFIS-NAV 1 EFIS-NAV 2 SW-1 EFIS-RADAR EFIS-STORMSCOPE EFIS-RELAY
1
A 3 20 RED P4D-4
20 BLK
20 RED P4D-5
20 RED P6C-3
20 BLK
B 20 RED/WHITE
20 BLK
22 BLK
22 BLK
C 22 BLK
D 2 1 A1
3 2 B1
4 3
22 BLK
E 1 102324 3 AD
2
3
F 1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
26 7
27 8
28 9
7
8
9
4
7 SEE SHEET 7
5 20 RED/WHITE 5V DC SW LIGHT BUS
G 6
1
2 2 22 BLU
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
22 BLK
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Effectivity
9F11 91-34-20 AprPAGE 9

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H
PRIMARY NAVIGATION PRIMARY NAVIGATION ADAHRS 1 ADAHRS 2 AUTOPILOT PRESSURE
FLIGHT DISPLAY 1 FLIGHT DISPLAY 2 BULKHEAD CONNECTOR AUDIO
DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2
FUNCTION
PFD1-P1 ND1-P3 PFD2-P1 ND2-P1 ND2-P3 AD1-P1 AD2-P1 EFIS-PB1 EFIS-AUDIO
1 1 ADF1 SIN A
20 20 ADF1 SIN B
2 2 ADF1 COS A
21 21 ADF1 COS B
SHIELD
4 4 ADF2 SIN A
23 23 ADF2 SIN B
5 5 ADF2 COS A
24 24 ADF2 COS B
SHIELD
6 6 DME1 OUT SIG
25 25 DME1 OUT RTN
SHIELD
9 9 RAD ALT SIG
28 28 RAD ALT RTN
31 31 RAD ALT VALID
SHIELD
36 36 DH FLAG
17 17 DH FLAG RTN
29 29 MKR I SIG 1
11 11 MKR M SIG 2
30
12
30
12
MKR O SIG
MKR RTN
3 I
32 32 DME1 FLG
14 14 DME SEL SW2
33 33 DME SEL SW1
35 HOLD ANNUN
15 15 FD SEL SW
13 REVERSIONARY DESCRETE
18 GPS SRC IN/OUT
8
9
PARITY
CONFIG RETURN J
NOTE: STEP DOWN 20 AWG
WIRES TO 22 AWG 13 28VDC POWER
WIRES, NO MORE 14 28VDC POWER 20 RED
THAN 6 INCHES 15 28VDC RETURN
FROM CONNECTOR. 16 28VDC RETURN 20 BLK
31 SIG X A
20 SIG Y B
19 SIG Z C
4 EXC HI D
E
3
23
EXD LO
429 OUTA BUS A K
7 429 OUTA BUS B
SHIELD n
CONN GND 22 BLK
12 CHASSIS GND 22 BLK
3 28VDC POWER 20 BLK
22 28VDC POWER
4
23
28VDC RETURN
28VDC RETURN 20 BLK L
3 28VDC POWER
22 28VDC POWER
4
23
28VDC RETURN
28VDC RETURN M
35 35 28VDC LIGHTS
17 17 LIGHTS GROUND
5 CHASSIS GND
CONN SHELL
1 2 422 BUS A
20 21 422 BUS B
2 1 422 BUS A
21 20 422 BUS B
5 CHASSIS GND
CONN GND
6 24 23 429 BUS A
25 6 7 429 BUS B
SHIELD p
31 SIG X F N
20 SIG Y G
19 SIG Z H
4 EXC HI R
3 EXC LO j
CONN GND
12 CHASSIS GND
33 429 OUTB A
32 429 OUTB B
SEE NOTE
O
13 28VDC POWER
14 28VDC POWER
15 28VDC RETURN
16 28VDC RETURN
24 CONFIGURE 1
9 CONFIG RETURN
13 W1E22 AIRSPEED WARN

P
13 W3E22 AIRSPEED WARN
Effectivity
PAGE 10
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9F12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H INTERCONNECTS INTERCONNECTS
REV AUTO ADAHRS2
RAD ALT DME 1 ADF 1 ADF 2 SELECT ENGINE INSTRUMENT
SW 2 PILOT RELAY DATA ACQ. UNIT
EFIS-RA EFIS-DME EFIS-ADF1 EFIS-ADF2 SW-2 EFIS-AP1 EFIS-RELAY ADAHRS1-DAU ADAHRS2-DAU A/P RAD ALT
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
2 1
3 2
4 3
1 5
5
6
4
I 22 BLU
4
5
6
7
25
6
4
J 22 RED ADAHRS 1 PWR TO SHEET 2
P4D-7
5 20 RED/WHITE 5V DC SW LIGHT BUS
K 30 A2 1
29 B2 2
31 3
22 BLK
22 BLK
1 20 RED P6C-5
3
L
4 20 RED P6C-6
M 20 BLK
20 RED/WHITE 2 22 BLU
20 BLK
22 BLK
22 BLK
22 BLK
22 BLK
33 1
32 2
N 34 3
22 BLK
22 BLK
A3
B3
O 22 RED ADAHRS 2 PWR P2-1
TO SHEET 2
20 RED P6C-7
20 BLK
W1A22 P2B-3
W3A22 P4B-10
1N4005 1N4005
W3A22
SONALERT POS
W1A22
P W1E22 102324 4 K/AD
SONALERT GND
W3E22
Effectivity
9F13 91-34-20 Apr

PAGE 11
15/07
less 4697198
4697001 thru 4697215,
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 12
A/P
PRIMARY FLIGHT PRIMARY FLIGHT PRIMARY FLIGHT XPNDR REV REV F/D XPNDR
DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2 DISPLAY 2 INTERCONNECT SW-1 DISC SWITCH INTERCONNECT
PFD1-P2 PFD2-P2 PFD2-P1 FUNCTION EFIS-XPNDR 1 SW-1 AV3 AP/SW EFIS-XPNDR 2

91-34-20
REF SHT.3
27 CONFIGURE 0 3
9 CONFIGURE 1
28 CONFIGURE 2
10 CONFIGURE 3
29 CONFIGURE 4
11 CONFIGURE 5
30 CONFIGURE 6
12 CONFIGURE 7
31 CONFIGURE RETURN
Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) - Meggitt
CONN GND 22BLK

1 ALT A1 1
9 ALT A2 2

2 ALT A4 3
SHIELD GROUND 4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 ALT B1 5

11 ALT B2 6
4 ALT B4 7
SHIELD GROUND 8
5 ALT C1 9
13 ALT C2 10
6 ALT C4 11
SHIELD GROUND 12
7 ALT D4 13
15 ALT RETURN 14
SHIELD GROUND 15
CONN GND 22BLK

1 ALT A1 1
9 ALT A2 2
2 ALT A4 3
SHIELD GROUND 4
3 ALT B1 5
11 ALT B2 6
4 ALT B4 7
SHIELD GROUND 8
5 ALT C1 9
13 ALT C2 10
6 ALT C4 11
SHIELD GROUND 12
7 ALT D4 13
15 ALT RETURN 14
SHIELD GROUND 15
REVERSION A/P DISC PWR 7 A+
A/P 28V PWR 8 1

4
SEE FIGURES 3 & 4 5
9F14
6 SEE FIGURES 3 & 4
2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9F15 91-34-20 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Pilot's Turn Coordinator
3 Copilot's Turn Coordinator
2
3
Effectivity Turn Coordinator(s)

PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9F16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
9 SEE AUTOPILOT C.I.P. DRAWING

AND 91-22-10
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
102220 38.0 NEW/V

104635 P
Effectivity
Turn Coordinator(s) 4697001 thru 4697143,
Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 3) and 4697145 thru 4697148 only
9F17 91-34-20 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PILOT
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
PILOT
TURN
COORD
J2D/P2D J12
5A CB334-20 9 F3A20 A
PILOT
CB334 B TURN
F4A20N
COORD
GB5-A C
CO-PILOT (OPTIONAL)
FWD L/H C/B PANEL
CO-PILOT
TURN
COORD
J2C/P2C P307
3A CB333-22 5 F7A22 A
CB333 CO-PILOT
F7A22N B TURN
COORD
GB2-B C
NOT INSTALLED WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IN S/N'S 4697198, 4697216 AND UP.
104635 38.0 R/AB
Effectivity
4697144; and, Turn Coordinator(s)
PAGE 16
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9F18
9F19
105120 5.0 F
PFD #1 (PILOT) P7321
DISC OUT 11 78
(Vmo ALERT)
W1AA22
ADAHRS 1 SELECT W3AA22
DISCRETE INPUT 13 34
DISCRETE INPUT 14 53 ADAHRS 2 SELECT
(SEE AUTO PILOT MASTER SWITCH 91-22-10 FIG 3) Vmo ALERT HORN
(REF)
JB15
P7301 WHT
BLK D
W E
BYTEFLIGHT + 1 B
BYTEFLIGHT - 9
GND 8
PFD #2 (CO-PILOT)
Avionics Harness Assembly / Power Converter
BRACKET
P7302 A B
1
BYTEFLIGHT - 9 B

BYTEFLIGHT + 1 W N/C
2
22 BLK
GND 8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GB2A-A

P7322 3 (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
F308 F309
DISCRETE INPUT 13 34 ADAHRS 1 SELECT ADAHRS 1 / 2 SELECT SWITCH F310 D
DISCRETE INPUT 14 53 ADAHRS 2 SELECT D15 D17 D19
INSTRUMENT PANEL
D
Figure 4
D18 D20
D16
DISC OUT 11 78
(Vmo ALERT)
DETAIL C
AVIONICS HARNESS
P28 ASSEMBLY
DCP3 DCJ3
TO P5A-1 DC1M12 1 1 DC1G12 B CATHODE (-) ANODE (+)
CATHODE (-) ANODE (+)

16 GA JUMPER
16 GA JUMPER
DCJ1
D15 F308 D16 SEE DETAIL C P28 DC-DC POWER
91-34-20 Apr
1 DC1A16 DC1H16 DC1L12 C CONVERTER WASHER (CLEAR) NUT

BRACKET WASHER (STAR)
DC1B16 WASHER (MICCA) WASHER (FLAT)
2
D17 F309 D18 DC1M12N A
4697198; 4697216 and up
3 DC1C16 DC1J16 TERMINAL

VIEW D
4 DC1D16 (6 PLCS)
DCJ2 D19 F310 D20

1 DC1E20 DC1K16
2 DC1F20
DCJ3
1 DC1G12 B
Effectivity
PAGE 17
5871 DIODE
PFD/MFD
TERMINAL POWER CONVERTER
15/07
20 GA JUMPER ASSEMBLY
7 1/2 250V FUSE 5871 DIODE
10 FUSE 5 PLCS
HKP-CC HOLDER HKP-CC HOLDER
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 18
P7301 INSTRUMENT PANEL P359

PFD #1 (PILOT)
MAG/OAT 24VDC OUT 31 W WHITE
B
A
MAG/OAT PWR GND 32 BLUE B
C
MAG/OAT 422 TX + 6 W WHITE D
MAG/OAT 422 TX - 14 B BLUE E
F
MAG/OAT 422 RX + 5 W WHITE G
91-34-20
MAG/OAT 422 RX - 13 B BLUE H

J
CH_ID0 16
CH_ID1 17
TAIL DISCONNECT
CH_ID2 18
GND 25 AWG-20
28VDC INPUT A1 16 AWG RED 16 AWG RED P4F-4
GND A2 16 AWG BLACK 1
D1
2 DOT DENOTES PIN 1
20BLK
GB2A-B GB2A-C R/H INST PNL
(91-24-30 (91-24-30
GB2A-D FIGURE 5) FIGURE 5)
BEZEL DIMMING 15 BLUE LB4-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5) DCP1
AWG-20
D1 DETAIL

28VDC INPUT A3 16 AWG RED DC1N16 2
EFIS - Avidyne Entegra, #1 PFD

DOT DENOTES PIN 1 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P1D-1 DC1P16
D2

20BLK
GB2A-E GB2A-F
GB2A-H
(91-24-30 (91-24-30 L/H INST PNL D2 DETAIL TO K17-13
D5 FIGURE 5) FIGURE 5) (FIGURE 8)
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5) P336
P7311 TO P7312-8 (SHEET 2) J1
D6 TO P7312-9 (SHEET 2) DAU
RS 422 RX+ 9 21 422 BUS B TX+
RS 422 RX- 8 9 422 BUS B TX-
FQ RS232 RX (DAU) 25 15 422 BUS A TX-

D7
FQ RS232 GND (DAU) 18 7 CHASSIS GND
D8 13 SHIELD
TO P7312-25 (SHEET 2)
P7331 T0 P7312-18 & P530-71 (SHEET 2 & FIGURE 7)
ANALOG INPUT 0 15 W W JB9-E (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

ANALOG INPUT 1 30 B B JB9-J (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ANALOG GROUND 29 W W JB9-N (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

ANALOG REF 28 B B JB9-T (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
P7321
ARINC 429 CH 7 TX A 68 W JB4-A (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

ARINC 429 CH 7 TX B 67 B
JB12-A (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 69
ARINC 429 CH 1 RX A 41 W W JB6-B (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
B B
ARINC 429 CH 1 RX B 40 JB6-F (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 44 #1 PFD
ARINC 429 CH 2 RX A 4 W W JB6-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) (PILOT SIDE PFD)
ARINC 429 CH 2 RX B 3 B B JB6-P (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 5
ARINC 429 CH 3 RX A 43 W W JB7-B (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ARINC 429 CH 3 RX B 42 B B JB7-F (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 64
ARINC 429 CH 4 RX A 7 W W JB7-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ARINC 429 CH 4 RX B 6 B B JB7-P (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
9F20
SHIELD GND 10 105120 06 F

9F21
INSTRUMENT PANEL P359

PFD #2 (CO-PILOT) P7302
MAG/OAT 24VDC OUT 31 W WHITE K
B BLUE L
MAG/OAT PWR GND 32
M
MAG/OAT 422 TX + 6 W WHITE N
B BLUE P
MAG/OAT 422 TX - 14
R
MAG/OAT 422 RX + 5 W WHITE S
MAG/OAT 422 RX - 13 B BLUE T
U
CH_ID1 17 TAIL DISCONNECT
CH_ID2 18
GND 25
BEZEL DIMMING 15 BLUE LB4-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) DCP1
AWG-20
28VDC INPUT A1 16 AWG RED DC1Q16 4
P1D-4 DC1R16 3
D3
2 DOT DENOTES PIN 1
20BLK
GB3A-F GB3A-H L/H INST PNL
28VDC INPUT A3 16 AWG RED
(91-24-30 (91-24-30
GND A4 16 AWG BLACK FIGURE 5) FIGURE 5)
GB3A-J
(91-24-30

D3 DETAIL
FIGURE 5)
EFIS - Avidyne Entegra, #2 PFD
AWG-20
TO P7311-8 (FIGURE 5 SHEET 1) P336 16 AWG RED
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P7312 D9 J1 DAU P6A-3

TO P7311-9 (FIGURE 5 SHEET1) 1
D10
RS 422 RX+ 9 21 422 BUS B TX+
2 D4
RS 422 RX- 8 9 RS 422 BUS B TX-
20BLK
GB3A-K GB3A-L R/H INST PNL
(91-24-30 (91-24-30
RS232 RX (DAU) 25 15 422 BUS A TX- FIGURE 5) FIGURE 5)
D11 GB3A-M
RS232 GND (DAU) 18 7 CHASSIS GND (91-24-30
13 GND FIGURE 5)
DOT DENOTES PIN 1
D12
T0 P7311-18 & P530-71
(SHEET 1 & FIGURE 7)
TO P7311-25
P7332 (FIGURE 5 SHEET1)
ANALOG INPUT 0 15 W W
D4 DETAIL
B B
JB9-F (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ANALOG INPUT 1 30 JB9-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ANALOG GROUND 29 W W JB9-P (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
CONTROL INHIBIT SW
ANALOG REF 28 B B
JB9-W (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) SEE DETAIL B
MTA106D SWITCH
P7322
1
91-34-20 Apr
DISCRETE INPUT 8 13 COPILOT PFD CONTROL INHIBIT 2

ARINC 429 CH 7 TX A 68 W W JB5-A (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 3 GB4A-H
ARINC 429 CH 7 TX B 67 B B (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
JB5-E (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 69
4697198; 4697216 and up
ARINC 429 CH 1 RX A 41 W W JB6-C (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

40 B B (CONTROL INHIBIT SW)
ARINC 429 CH 1 RX B JB6-G (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 44
ARINC 429 CH 2 RX A 4 W W JB6-L (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
O O O
N F N
ARINC 429 CH 2 RX B 3 B B 1
JB6-R (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 5
F
2
ARINC 429 CH 3 RX A 43 W W JB7-C (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ARINC 429 CH 3 RX B 42 B B
JB7-G (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 3
SHIELD GND 64
ARINC 429 CH 4 RX A 7 W W JB7-L (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ARINC 429 CH 4 RX B 6 B B
JB7-R (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) (KEYWAY) (KEYWAY)
SHIELD GND 10
Effectivity
PAGE 19
ARINC 429 CH 6 RX A 9 W W JB11-D (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

8 B B (BACKVIEW)
ARINC 429 CH 6 RX B JB11-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 20
B
15/07
DETAIL
JB RACK CENTER 105120 07 G
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 20
105120 25 F
INSTRUMENT PANEL L INSTRUMENT PANEL

1500 CONN
91-34-20
P7322 PFD #2 COPILOT

P552
72 DISCRETE INPUT 11
ARINC RX1 A 26 JB4-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ADHRS DATA FROM PFD #1 ARINC CH #7 WHT
ARINC RX1 B 27 BLU JB12-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHLD GND
ARINC RX2 A 28 WHT JB5-M (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ARINC RX2 B 29 ADHRS DATA FROM PFD #2 ARINC CH #7
BLU JB5-S (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHLD GND 58
GPSS ARINC RX #3 A 32
GPSS ARINC RX #3 B 33
P7321 PFD #1 PILOT
FD ENABLE 24 72 DISCRETE INPUT 11
STALL WARN 25

JB14-D (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
EFIS - Avidyne Entegra, Dual PFD
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P/O GMA-340

P3401
MIDDLE MARKER 15 39 MIDDLE MARKER
P551
G/S FLAG + 41 WHT 37 DISCRETE OUTPUT 1
G/S FLAG - 40 BLU 36 GROUND
30 SHIELD GND
LOC SWITCH 23 56 DISCRETE OUTPUT 2
NAV FLAG + 37 WHT 17 DISCRETE OUTPUT 0
NAV FLAG - 36 BLU 16 GROUND
P7331
G/S +UP 42 WHT 9 ANALOG OUTPUT 4

G/S +DN 1 BLU 37 ANALOG GROUND
SHLD GND 60
35 SHIELD GND
PITCH STR OUT 51 JB9-G (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
ROLL STR OUT 50 JB9-L (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GND 55 JB9-R (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SIG REF 18 JB9-Y (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHLD GND 61
21 SHIELD GND
L-R + RT 38 WHT 24 ANALOG OUTPUT 5
L-R + LT 39 BLU 23 ANALOG GROUND
SHLD GND 57
DC HDG HI 5 WHT 26 ANALOG OUTPUT 2
HDG RETURN 7 BLU 27 ANALOG GROUND
DC CRS HI 11 WHT 40 ANALOG OUTPUT 3
CRS RETURN 12 BLU 41 ANALOG GROUND
SHLD GND
9F22
9F23
105120 26 J
CO-PILOT CW
P566 RELAY PANEL (REF)
GND 3
9
4 J567
TRIM INT 5 2 2
8 6 6
7 4
A/P DISC 11 4
CWS GND 6 1
1
CWS 2 5 5
3
A 3
A
PILOT CW
B

P554
EFIS - Avidyne Entegra, Dual PFD
B
BLK
GND 3 GB3A-C (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9

TRIM C/B 4 P3E-2 K10P-11D15-24 RELAY (REF)
8 SEE (91-22-10
FIGURE 3)
5 R FUSELAGE FWD OF FS 67.880
A/P A+ 7 22RED
11
CWS GND 6 GB2A-L
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
CWS 2
1 2
3 4
5 6
1500 CONN
P551 A B
TRIM INT 14
91-34-20 Apr
TRIM DN 35 27E488 RELAY SOCKET DETAIL

TRIM UP 34 BOTTOM VIEW
4697198; 4697216 and up
A/P MASTER
1500 CONN ON
P552 AUTOPILOT
3
SEE (91-22-10 FIGURE 3) 2
CWS/GA GND 55 22RED P3E-1
CWS 8 1
DISC SW 12
OFF
Effectivity
PAGE 21
15/07
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 22
105120 08 F
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MFD JUMPER RC 1/2G302JT DCP2
P530 20 GA (3K 1/2 WATT)
EXCEEDANCE
91-34-20
DC1S20 1
ALERT HORN P2D-6
(REF)
(2 REQ'D)
DISC OUT 1 14 E3L22 - + E3M20
+28 VDC 40 22RED 20 AWG RED DC1T20 2

+28 VDC 41 22RED
+28 VDC 42 22RED
GND 60 22BLK 20 AWG BLK GB3A-N (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GND 61 22BLK
GND 62 22BLK
LIGHTING 18 22BLU LB4-J (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

LS ARINC 429 CH 1 RX A 5 W GNS-430 #1, GPS OUT W JB3-D (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
B B
EFIS - Avidyne Entegra, MFD
LS ARINC 429 CH 1 RX B 25 JB3-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SHIELD GND 3

LS ARINC 429 CH 2 RX A 45 W GNS-430 #2, GPS OUT W JB7-D (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
B B
LS ARINC 429 CH 2 RX B 65 JB7-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 23
HS ARINC 429 CH 4 RX A 48 W W JB11-C (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
HS ARINC 429 CH 4 RX B 68 B B
JB11-G (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
Figure 7
SHIELD GND 22
W TRAFFIC W JB10-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

HS ARINC 429 CH 3 RX A 8
B B
HS ARINC 429 CH 3 RX B 28 JB10-P (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
SHIELD GND 21
KMH 820
24 P10
LO CH2 TX 6 W W 95 GPWS CTL RX
B B
96 GPWS CTL RX
LO CH2 TX 26
453 CH1 RX 56 W W 103
GPWS CTL 453 TX
453 CH1 RX 59 B B
104 GPWS CTL 453 TX
SHIELD GND 27
TO P7311-18 & P336-7 P7312 PFD #2

(91-34-20 FIGURE 5 & FIGURE 7)
W FUEL QTY
RS 232 RX 70 26 SERIAL TX
B D13
RS 232 GND 71 18 GND
D14
9F24
9G1
105120 23 F
INSTRUMENT PANEL 105121 M
(91-22-10 FIGURE 3) WHT

KRA 10A BLK RAD ALT SW
RADAR ALTIMETER
A B
P1001
3 20 RED
27.5VDC P6C-5
5 20 RED
2 1
KI 250
GROUND 11 22 BLK GB5A-M RADAR ALT INDICATOR
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5) P2501 AUD1 SUMMING AMP
7 7 RAD ALT AUDIO IN
LB5-E 22 BLU 4 8 SHIELD
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
(TO 91-23-50 FIGURE 2)

20VDC 9 20VDC 2 A/P
SELF TEST 7 SELF TEST 9 P552
KRA 10A/XM Receiver/DC 50 - Optional
28VDC FILTERED 6 28VDC FILTERED 6 20

ANALOG ALTITUDE 2 ANALOG ALTITUDE 10
RAD ALT LO 12 RAD ALT LO 1 56
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
22 BLK

GB5A-N LIGHT COMMEN 5
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
RAD ALT HI 8 16
Figure 8
XMDR
XM SATELLITE RECEIVER XMP1
+28 VDC ACFT PWR 19 20 AWG RED P4D-4
P530
SWITCHED 28V DC ENABLED 18
MFD XMP1 ACFT GND 37 20BLK
RS232 1A TX 10 4 RS232 RX
11 22 RS232 TX GB1A-N
RS232 1A RX (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
RS232 1A GND 12 23 RS232 GND
CABLE REF
XMRANT-01
91-34-20 Apr
RX ANTENNA
XMP4
4697198; 4697216 and up
DC 50 ANT COUPLER P501

XMTR PTT 5 JB7-Z (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
+28 VDC ACFT PWR 1 20RED 20RED P6A-4

Effectivity
PAGE 23
ACFT GND 8 20BLK

15/07
GB1A-P
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 24
Apr 15/07 91-34-20 9G2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9G3 91-34-40 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 IN-182A Radar Indicator

2 ART 2000 Radar Antenna Transceiver
Radar Antenna Array
Configuration Module
Effectivity Weather Radar

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-34-40 9G4
9G5
RIGHT WING TO CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL DISCONNECTOR

ART 2000 IN-182A
ANTENNA MAIN HARNESS P6C RADAR
RECEIVER CONNECTOR
INDICATOR
TRANSMITTER 2 RADAR 20 RED IN182A
P201 P302
34 20 RED A A 20 RED 19
28VDC 35 28 VDC PWR
37
36 20 BLK
GND TO GND
37
RT ON/OFF 31 B B 31 RT ON/OFF
TO GND 20 BLK 8
16 GROUND
17
29 LIGHTS GND
TO GND 22 BLK
C C

# 1 429 A IN 2 J J 27 # 1 429 A OUT
# 1 429 B IN 3 K K 2 # 1 429 B OUT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L L

M M
453 DATA OUT A 42 N N 1 453 DATA A IN
Weather Radar
453 DATA OUT B 43 P P 20 453 DATA B IN

R R
TO GND 22 BLK
TO DIMMER BUS DIM 22 BLU 30 LIGHTS A+
D D 1
PITCH/ROLL 429 A 8 F F 2
PITCH/ROLL 429 B 9 G G 3
H H 4
RADAR / EFIS
91-34-40 AprPAGE
P1
CONFIGURATION
DATA IN 49 4
MODULE
4697001 thru 4697125
CHIP SELECT 1 46 2
CHIP SELECT 2 47 9
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS 22 GAUGE,
UNLESS OTHERWISE
INDICATED.
CLOCK 45 6
DATA OUT 48 8
Effectivity
+5 VDC PWR 44 5
POWER GND 50 1
15/07
102342 E
3
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 4
105120 17 F
RDR 2000
WEATHER RADAR
91-34-40
P2001
P201/P302
AIRCRAFT POWER
+28V DC 34 20RED A A 20RED P6C-3
+28V DC 35 20RED
DC AIRCRAFT PWR
CHAS GND 36 20BLK KPA 900
CHAS GND 37 20BLK CONFIGURATION MODULE

MODULE GND 50 1 POWER GROND
CONFIG DATA RX 49 4 CONFIG DATA TX
46 2 CHIP SELECT 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHIP SELECT 1

CHIP SELECT 2 47 9 CHIP SELECT 2
CONFIG CLOCK 45 6 CONFIG CLOCK

CONFIG DATA TX 48 8 CONFIG DATA RX
Weather Radar
5V DC PWR 44 5 5V DC PWR
P201/P302
429 PITCH/ROLL RX A 8 C C JB4-F (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

429 PITCH/ROLL RX B 9 D D JB12-F (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
E E P530
MFD
429 CNTRL RX A 2 J J 43 LS ARINC 429 TX1 A

429 CNTRL RX B 3 K K 63 LS ARINC 429 TX1 B
L L 64 429 GND
REF. 44152-0002 CABLE
M M
453 CNTRL TX A 42 N N 75 453 CH 0 RX A
453 CNTRL TX B 43 P P 78 453 CH 0 RX B
R R 67 453 GND
ON/OFF 31 B B 1 R/T ON/OFF
RADAR POB
9G6
9G7
WX-500 AFT EQUIPMENT SHELF 105120 20 K
STORMSCOPE
P5001
14/28 VDC 1 20RED P6C-1

6 20RED P6C-2
GND 5 20 BLK GB5A-B
9 (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

P5003
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P530
MFD
Stormscope
Figure 2
RS 232 TX 20 50 RS232 C RX
RS 232 RX 8 49 RS232 C TX
51 RS232 C GND
1
HEADING CONFIG 2
HDG FLAG SENSE 4
CONFIG
P5002
REF. 803-10950-005 CABLE

CONFIG GND 6 STORMSCOPE ANTENNA
RS 232 GND 5
P5004
91-34-40 AprPAGE
X LOOP 3 ORANGE C X LOOP

+12 V 16 RED D +12 V
SENSE 17
4697198; 4697216 and up
BROWN B SENSE
ANT_REF 2 BLACK J ANT_REF
-12 V 15 YELLOW F -12 V

Y LOOP 4 GREEN G Y LOOP
ANT TEST 14 BLUE H ANT TEST
ANT COM 1 DRAIN A ANT COM
WIRE BRAID FROM ANTENNA CONNECTOR
20BLK
Effectivity
LOWER FUSELAGE FS 206.00

15/07
5
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 6
105120 21 F
KMH-820
TRAFFIC/TERRAIN P10
* THESE CONNECTORS ARE TO BE LOCATED FOR
EASY ACCESS. CONNECTORS ARE TO BE BAGGED
+28V DC AIRCRAFT PWR 59 22RED 20RED
P6C-4 AND STOWED WHEN NOT IN USE, OR THEY MAY
+28V DC AIRCRAFT PWR 82 22RED BE MOUNTED.
91-34-40
ON 1 22BLK GB5A-C (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
DC AIRCRAFT 127 22BLK 20BLK GB5A-D (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

128 22BLK
PWR/CHAS GND TDIAG * IHAS DIAG PORT
DIAG RS232 TX 38 2 RD
DIAG RS232 RX 39 3 TD
DIAG RS232 TERM RDY 41 4 DTR

DIAG RS232 READY 40 8 CTS
5 SG
CFG MODL VCC (+5VDC) 76 1 VCC (+5VDC) GB5A-E
CFG MODL GND 77 3 GND (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

CFG MODL CHIP SELECT 74 5 CHIP SELECT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CFG MODL CLOCK 75

4 CLOCK
SERIAL DATA IN 72 2 SERIAL DATA OUT

Optional IHAS
SERIAL DATA OUT 73 6 SERIAL DATA IN

CFG MODL SERIAL DATA OUT
CFG MODL CS 108 9 CS
CFG MODL CLK 107 8 CLK
105 10 SERIAL DATA IN

CFG MODL SERIAL DATA IN 106 7 SERIAL DATA OUT
GPDIAG * EGPWS DIAG PORT

RS232 TX MON 99 2 RD KCM 850
RS232 RX MON 100 3 TD CONFIGURATION MODULE
5 SG
GB5A-F AFT EQUIPMENT RACK

(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
500 OHM AUDIO HI OUT 20 AUD1-15 (91-23-50 FIGURE 2)

500 OHM AUDIO LO OUT 21 AUDIO SHLD AUD1-16
GB5A-H (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) (91-23-50 FIGURE 2)
(REF) 101437-003 ASSY
TOP DIR ANT (YELLOW) J1 (REF) 101437-004 ASSY
SUM KA-815 (TOP)
TOP DIR ANT (BLACK) J2 DELTA-1 DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA
(REF) 101437-005 ASSY
TOP DIR ANT (BLUE) J3 (REF) 101437-006 ASSY
DELTA-2
TOP DIR ANT (RED) J4 TEST
(REF) 101437-007 ASSY
BOTTOM DIR ANT (YELLOW) J5 SUM
(REF) 101437-008 ASSY KA-815 (BOT)
BOTTOM DIR ANT (BLACK) J6 DELTA-1
BOTTOM DIR ANT (BLUE) J7 (REF) 101437-009 ASSY
DELTA-2 DIRECTIONAL ANTENNA
(REF) 101437-010 ASSY
BOTTOM DIR ANT (RED) J8 TEST
9G8
9G9
105120 22 G
KMH-820 P10 TAS SW SEE 1 1 1
TRAFFIC/TERRAIN DETAIL A 2 2 2 SWITCH
3 3 3
TAS STANDBY 1 4
23 5 4 4 4
2 2 5 5 5
FUNCTIONAL TEST 2 5
M OO
O NN
6 6 6
M
4 3 6
GB4A-F 22BLK DOWN POS CENTER POS UP POS
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 1
(TEST) (STDBY) (ON)
MOMENTARY ON ON (BACKVIEW)
(KEYWAY)
TRFC CDU 429 TX A 54 W JB10-L (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
B JB10-R (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
TRFC CDU 429 TX B 55 DETAIL A
CHASSIS GND 84 22BLK GB5A-K (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
EGPWS PWR GND 83 22BLK GB5A-L (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) P530

MFD
GPWS CTL 429 RX A 95 6 LS ARINC 429 CH 2 TX A

96 26 LS ARINC 429 CH 2 TX B
GPWS CTL 429 RX B

24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GPWS DATA 453 TX A 103 56 ARINC 453 CH 1 RX A

GPWS DATA 453 TX B 104 59 ARINC 453 CH 1 RX B
27
Optional IHAS
INSTR PNL
RS232 GPS IN 88
P43011-58
SUPPRESSION 68 JB10-B (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
P411
ANNUN CTL UNIT
JB10-F (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
120 10 TERR N/A ANNUN
TERR N/A ANNUN
TERR AWRN ANNUN 116 11 TERR AWRN ANNUN
TERR CAUTION ANNUN 117 5 TERR CAUTION ANNUN
SELF TEST INPUT 121 19 TERR PTT
TERR INHIBIT INPUT 126 20 TERR INHIBIT OUTPUT
22BLK
91-34-40 AprPAGE
LANDING GEAR RETRACT 3 9 LIGHTING LO

(GND = EXTENDED) P302-X GB1A-M
22BLK 21 AIRCRAFT GROUND
(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
22 AIRCRAFT GROUND
AIR/GND 4 JB18-B
4697198; 4697216 and up
(GND = ON GROUND) LB5-C 22BLU 8 PANEL LIGHTING HI

(91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
6 ANNUN PTT (GND = TEST)

P317-28
HDG 429 RX A 22RED 13 ANNUN PWR
62 JB4-G (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) P2B-10
HDG 429 RX B 63 JB12-G (91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 12 PHOTOCELL DIM OUT
7 BRT/DIM PWR IN
GB5A-J (91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
Effectivity
INST PANEL
15/07
AFT EQUIPMENT RACK

7
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-34-40 9G10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9G11 91-34-50 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Garmin GNS-530 Global Navigation System

2 NAV Antenna Coupler
3 GPS#1 Antenna (i.e. - left side)
4 COM#1 Antenna
5 NAV Antenna
3 4
5
Effectivity GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS #1

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9G12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GNS 530 ENGINE
TRANSPONDER NAV/COMM/GPS NAV EFIS DME COMM/NAV 2 INSTRUMENTS AUDIO
HARNESS TRANSCEIVER INDICATOR HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS DAU HARNESS
GPS/ENC 1 FUNCTION P4001 P4002 P4006 GI 106-2 NAV1-EFIS J601 C/N 2 GPS1/DAU P1
DME COMMON 22 10
2 X 5 MHZ A 14 1
2 X 5 MHZ C 21 2
2 X 5 MHZ D 33 3
2 X 5 MHZ E 20 4
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ A 37 5
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ C 40 6
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ D 42 7
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ E 39 8
2 X 5 50 KHZ 43 9
1 ALTITUDE A1 69
2 ALTITUDE A2 68
3 ALTITUDE A4 67
4
5 ALTITUDE B1 66
6 ALTITUDE B2 65
7 ALTITUDE B4 64
8
9 ALTITUDE C1 63
10 ALTITUDE C2 62
11 ALTITUDE C4 61
12
13 ALTITUDE D4 70
14 ALT COMMON 60
15 COMM AUDIO HI 7 5
COMM AUDIO LO 19 6
7
NAV AUDIO HI 16 17
NAV AUDIO LO 17 18
19
MIC AUDIO 6 8
MIC KEY 4 1 9
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK 14 2 10
DATA CROSSFILL TRANSMIT 41 3
4
DATA CROSSFILL RECEIVE 42 5
6
22 BLK
GROUND 40 22B
28V DIM 39 22 BLU
22 BLK
429 OUT A 24 1
429 OUT B 23 2
3
429 IN A 48 7
429 IN B 49 8
9
429 OUT A 46 4 1
429 OUT B 47 5 2
6 3
429 IN A 36
429 IN B 35
GROUND 22 22 BLK
28V DIM 21 22 BLU
+ TO 1 9
+ FROM 2 10
22 BLK
G/S + UP 32 13
G/S +DOWN/- FLAG 31 14
VERTICAL FLAG + 30 15
16
+ LEFT 5 11
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS 22 GAUGE,
+ RIGHT 6 12
UNLESS OTHERWISE
INDICATED.
LATERAL FLAG + 3 7
LATERAL FLAG - 4 8
* SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 1.
OBS RES H 10 1
OBS RES C 9 2
102302 P
OBS RES D 13 3
OBS RES E/G 11 5
OBS RES F 12 4
6
22 BLK
GROUND 21 18 BLK
GROUND 22 18 BLK
+28 VDC POWER 11 18 RED COM-1
+28 VDC POWER
GROUND 77
12 18 RED
22 BLK
COM-1 *
GROUND 78 22 BLK
+28 VDC GPS POWER 19 22 RED GPS/N-1
+28 VDC GPS POWER 20 22 RED GPS/N-1 *
GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS #1 Effectivity
9G13 91-34-50 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GNS 530
NAV/COMM/GPS RADAR/ ENGINE
TRANSPONDER
TRANSCEIVER NAV EFIS COMM/NAV 2 FLTMAX AUDIO INSTRUMENTS DME SKYWATCH STORMSCOPE IHAS
HARNESS INDICATOR HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS DAU HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS
GPS/ENC 1 FUNCTION P5001 P5002 P5006 GI 106-2 NAV1-EFIS C/N 2 GNS1/FSD P1 GPS1/DAU J601 GNS1/SKY GNS1/WX GPS/HAZ
DME COMMON 22 10
2 X 5 MHZ A 14 1
2 X 5 MHZ C 21 2
2 X 5 MHZ D 33 3
2 X 5 MHZ E 20 4
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ A 37 5
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ C 40 6
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ D 42 7
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ E 39 8
2 X 5 50 KHZ 43 9
RS232 OUT 58 1
COMM AUDIO HI 7 5 2
COMM AUDIO LO 19 6
7
NAV AUDIO HI 16 17
NAV AUDIO LO 17 18
19
MIC AUDIO 6 8
MIC KEY 4 1 9
DATA CROSSFILL 41 3
TRANSMIT 4
DATA CROSSFILL 42 5
RECEIVE 6
22B
GROUND 40 22B
DISPLAY DIMMER P387-31
VOLTAGE 22BLU P387-31
28V DIM 39 22BLU P387-32
RS232 IN 55 7 9 1
8 10 2
RS232 OUT 56 7
8
DISP GROUND 78 4
22B
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2A 50 9 1 1
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2B 51 10 2 2
11 3 3
22B
429 OUT A 24 1
429 OUT B 23 2
3
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 7
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 49 8
9
ARINC GPS 429 OUT A 46 4 4 1
ARINC GPS 429 OUT B 47 5 5 2
6 6 3
429 IN A 36
429 IN B 35
GROUND 21 22B
28V DIM 22 22BLU
1 ALTITUDE A1 69
2 ALTITUDE A2 68
3 ALTITUDE A4 67
4
5 ALTITUDE B1 66
6 ALTITUDE B2 65
7 ALTITUDE B4 64
8
9 ALTITUDE C1 63
10 ALTITUDE C2 62
11 ALTITUDE C4 61
12
13 ALTITUDE D4 70
14 ALT COMMON 60
15
+ TO 1 9
+ FROM 2 10
22B
G/S + UP 32 13
G/S +DOWN/- FLAG 31 14
VERTICAL FLAG + 30 15
16
+ LEFT 5 11
+ RIGHT 6 12
LATERAL FLAG + 3 7
LATERAL FLAG - 4 8
OBS RES H 10 1
OBS RES C 9 2
OBS RES D 13 3
OBS RES E/G 11 5
OBS RES F 12 4
6
22B
GROUND 21 18B
GROUND 22 18B
+28 VDC POWER 11 18R COM-1 18R P387-20
+28 VDC POWER 12 18R COM-1
GROUND 77 22B 104545 F
+28 VDC GPS POWER 19 22R GPS/N-1
+28 VDC GPS POWER 20 22R GPS/N-1 P317-11

PAGE 4
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9G14
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9G15 91-34-50 AprPAGE 5

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Garmin GNS-530 Global Navigation System

2 Garmin GI-106 Course Deviation (NAV) Indicator
3 NAV Antenna Coupler
4 GPS#2 Antenna (i.e. -right side)
5 COM#2 Antenna
6 NAV Antenna
2
3
4
6

PAGE 6
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9G16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GNS 530 ENGINE
TRANSPONDER NAV/COMM/GPS DME COMM/NAV 1 AUDIO EFIS INSTRUMENTS
HARNESS TRANSCEIVER HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS DAU
GPS/ENC 2 FUNCTION P1001-2 P1002-2 P1006-2 J602 C/N 2 P1 NAV2-EFIS GPS2/DAU
DME COMMON 22 10
2 X 5 MHZ A 14 1
2 X 5 MHZ C 21 2
2 X 5 MHZ D 33 3
2 X 5 MHZ E 20 4
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ A 37 5
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ C 40 6
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ D 42 7
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ E 39 8
2 X 5 50 KHZ 43 9
1 ALTITUDE A1 69
2 ALTITUDE A2 68
3 ALTITUDE A4 67
4
5 ALTITUDE B1 66
6 ALTITUDE B2 65 NOTE: ALL WIRING IS
7 ALTITUDE B4 64 22 GAUGE,
UNLESS
8
OTHERWISE
9 ALTITUDE C1 63 INDICATED.
10 ALTITUDE C2 62
11 ALTITUDE C4 61 102302 N
12
13 ALTITUDE D4 70
14 ALTITUDE COMMON 60
15
COMM AUDIO HI 7 11
COMM AUDIO LO 19 12
13
NAV AUDIO HI 16 20
NAV AUDIO LO 17 21
22
MIC AUDIO 6 14
MIC KEY 4 2 15

6
4
22 BLK
GROUND 40 22 BLK
28V DIM 39 22 BLU
22 BLK
429 OUT A 24 1
429 OUT B 23 2
3
429 IN A 48 7
429 IN B 49 8
9
429 OUT A 46 4 1
429 OUT B 47 5 2
6 3
429 IN A 36
429 IN B 35
GROUND 21 18 BLK
* SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 1.
GROUND 22 18 BLK
+28 VDC POWER 11 18 RED COM-2 P6-A1
+28 VDC POWER
GROUND 77
12 18 RED
22 BLK
COM-2 P6-A2 *
GROUND 78 22 BLK
+28 VDC GPS POWER 19 22 RED GPS/N-2 P6-B1
+28 VDC GPS POWER 20 22 RED GPS/N-2 P6-B2 *
GNS-530 COM/NAV/GPS #2 Effectivity
9G17 91-34-50 AprPAGE 7

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GNS 530 RADAR/ ENGINE
TRANSPONDER NAV/COMM/GPS EFIS FLTMAX INSTRUMENTS
COMM/NAV 1 AUDIO DME
HARNESS TRANSCEIVER HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS DAU HARNESS
GPS/ENC 2 FUNCTION P5001-2 P5002-2 P5006-2 C/N 2 NAV2/EFIS P1 GPS2/FSD GPS2/DAU J602
DME COMMON 22 10
2 X 5 MHZ A 14 1
2 X 5 MHZ C 21 2
2 X 5 MHZ D 33 3
2 X 5 MHZ E 20 4
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ A 37 5
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ C 40 6
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ D 42 7
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ E 39 8
2 X 5 50 KHZ 43 9
1 ALTITUDE A1 69
2 ALTITUDE A2 68
3 ALTITUDE A4 67
4
5 ALTITUDE B1 66
6 ALTITUDE B2 65
7 ALTITUDE B4 64
8
9 ALTITUDE C1 63
10 ALTITUDE C2 62
11 ALTITUDE C4 61
12
13 ALTITUDE D4 70
14 ALTITUDE 60
COMMON
15
COMM AUDIO HI 7 11
COMM AUDIO LO 19 12
13
NAV AUDIO HI 16 20
NAV AUDIO LO 17 21 104546 A
22
MIC AUDIO 6 14
MIC KEY 4 2 15

6
4
22B
GROUND 40 22B
28V DIM 39 22BLU
22B
8
RS 232 IN 4 55 7
429 IN 2A 50 9
429 IN 2B 51 10
11 5
GPS RS 232 OUT 1 56 4
22B
429 OUT A 24 1
429 OUT B 23 2
3
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 7
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 49 8
9
ARINC GPS 429 OUT A 46 4 1 1
ARINC GPS 429 OUT B 47 5 2 2
6 3 3
429 IN A 36
429 IN B 35
GROUND 21 18B
* SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 1.
GROUND 22 18B
+28 VDC POWER 11 18R COM-2 P6A-1
+28 VDC POWER
GROUND 77
12 18R
22B
COM-2 P6A-2 *
GROUND 78 22B
+28 VDC GPS POWER 19 22R GPS/N-2 P6B-1
+28 VDC GPS POWER 20 22R GPS/N-2 P6B-2 *
PAGE 8
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9G18
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9G19 91-34-50 AprPAGE 9

15/07
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 10
105120 9 D
#1 GNS 430 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

NAV/COMM/GPS P43011
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 19 22RED GPS/N-1
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 20 22RED GPS/N-1 P317-11
91-34-50
GROUND 77 22BLK TERMINATE TO (TO 91-34-50 FIGURE 4) P1061-20 22RED GPS/N-1

GROUND 78 22BLK 20BLK GROUND BUS
GROUND 40 22BLK LB4-B (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5) P387-31
LIGHTING BUSS HI 39 22BLU P387-32
P43021
GROUND 21 18BLK GB2A-J (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GROUND 22 18BLK GB2A-K (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
JB RACK CENTER
MIC KEY 4 JB5-W (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK 14 JB7-Y (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
+ 28VDC POWER 11 18RED COM-1

+ 28VDC POWER 12 18RED COM-1 P387-20
GNS 430 NAV/COM/GPS #2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P43061
JB CENTER RACK
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 W W JB6-J (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 B B JB6-N (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
P3401 GMA 340 (STD)
NAV AUDIO HIGH 16 17 NAV 1 AUDIO HIGH
NAV AUDIO LOW 17 18 NAV 1 AUDIO LOW
P43021
COMM AUDIO HI 7 9 COMM 1 AUDIO HIGH
COMM AUDIO LO 19 10 COMM 1 AUDIO LOW
MIC AUDIO 6 11 COMM 1 MIC AUDIO
P43011 P43012 GNS430 #2

CROSSFILL 41 42 CROSSFILL
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1A 46 W W

JB6-A (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
B B
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1B 47 JB6-E (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GPS ARINC 429 IN 2A 50

GPS ARINC 429 IN 2B 51
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 W W JB8-K (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 49 B B
JB8-P (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
9G20
INSTRUMENT PANEL
9G21
105120 10 D
#2 GNS 430 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

NAV/COMM/GPS P43012
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 19 22 RED GPS/NAV-2
+ 28VDC GPS POWER 20 22 RED GPS/NAV-2 P6B-1
GROUND 77 22BLK P6B-2
GROUND 78 22BLK 20BLK
GROUND 40 22BLK
28V DIM 39 22BLU LB4-C (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
P43022
GROUND 21 18BLK GB4A-C (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GROUND 22 18BLK GB4A-D (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
JB RACK CENTER
MIC KEY 4 JB7-T (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
TRANSMIT INTERLOCK 14 JB5-T (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

+ 28VDC POWER 11 18RED COM-2
+ 28VDC POWER 12 18RED COM-2 P6A-1
GNS 430 NAV/COM/GPS #2
P6A-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P43062
JB RACK CENTER
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 W W JB7-J (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 B B JB7-N (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
P3401 GMA 340 (STD)
NAV AUDIO HIGH 16 WHT 19 NAV 2 AUDIO HIGH
NAV AUDIO LOW 17 BLU 20 NAV 2 AUDIO LOW
P43022
COMM AUDIO HI 7 WHT 13 COMM 2 AUDIO HIGH
COMM AUDIO LO 19 BLU 14 COMM 2 AUDIO LOW
MIC AUDIO 6 15 COMM 2 MIC AUDIO
P43012 P43011
GNS430 #1
91-34-50 Apr
4697198; 4697216 and up
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 50

GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 51
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 JB8-L (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GPS ARINC 429 IN 1B 49 JB8-R (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1A 46 JB11-K (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

Effectivity
PAGE 11
GPS ARINC 429 OUT 1B 47 JB11-P (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

15/07
INSTRUMENT PANEL
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 12
105120 11 E
INSTRUMENT PANEL
GNS 430 #1
NAV/COMM/GPS GI-106A
91-34-50
P1061
NAV INDICATOR
GPS/N-1 20RED 20 28 VDC ANNUN POWER

P317-11
GB1A-A (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 22BLK 21 PANEL LAMPS GROUND

P43061
(TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5)

LB2-L
GNS 430 NAV/COM/GPS with GI-106 - Optional
P387-28
P387-30 22BLU 22 28 VDC PANEL LAMPS

GB1A-B (TO 91-24-30 FIGURE 5) 22BLK 18 VLOC ANNUNCIATOR
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
+ TO 1 WHT 9 + TO

+ FROM 2 BLU 10 + FROM
OBS RES H 10 WHT 1 OBS RES H

OBS RES C 9 BLU 2 OBS RES C
Figure 4
OBS RES D 13 WHT 3 OBS RES D

OBS RES E 11 BLU 5 OBS RES E
OBS RES F 12 WHT 4 OBS RES F
OBS RES G BLU 6 OBS RES G
+ UP 32 WHT 13 + UP
+ DOWN 31 BLU 14 + DOWN
VERTICAL FLAG + 30 ORG 15 VERTICAL FLAG +
VERTICAL FLAG - GRN 16 VERTICAL FLAG -
+ LEFT 5 WHT 11 + LEFT

+ RIGHT 6 BLU 12 + RIGHT
LATERAL FLAG + 3 ORG 7 LATERAL FLAG +
4 GRN 8 LATERAL FLAG -
LATERAL FLAG -
INSTRUMENT PANEL
9G22
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9G23 91-34-50 Apr

PAGE 13
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Garmin GTX-327 Transponder

2 Encoding Altimeter
3 Transponder Antenna
Effectivity GTX-327 Transponder

PAGE 14
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9G24
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALTITUDE
GTX-327 EFIS GPS GPS PRESELECT RELAY
TRANSPONDER HARNESS SUPPRESSION HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS ASSY
J102 FUNCTION XPNDR-EFIS SUPP. GPS/ENC1 GPS/ENC2 ALT/ENC P317(REF)
22 SQUAT SW P317-33 33
1
15 28VDC PWR 20 RED XPNDR P4C-6
13 PWR GROUND 20 BLK
*
* SEE 34-50-00, FIGURE 3.
P4D-1
23 DIM 22 BLU
*
3 A1 1 1 1 1
5 A2 2 2 2 2
6 A4 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
9 B1 5 5 5 5
11 B2 6 6 6 6
12 B4 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
10 C1 9 9 9 9
4 C2 10 10 10 10
7 C4 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12
18 D4 13 13 13 13
ALT RTN 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15
25 GROUND CW8H22
TO CONTROL WHEEL CONN.
8 EXT. IDENT. CW7H22
17 SUPPRESSION 1
2 NOTE: ALL WIRING IS 22 GAUGE,
UNLESS OTHERWISE
INDICATED.
22 BLK
102305 L
ANTENNA RG58C/U
ORANGE TY-RAP
GTX-327 Transponder Effectivity

9H1 91-34-50 Apr

PAGE 15
15/07
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 16
105120 14 F
GTX-330 P3301
TRANSPONDER
#1
AVIONICS MASTER ON 1 22RED
91-34-50
28VDC PWR 21 22RED 20RED P4C-6

28VDC PWR 42 22RED
P/O P554 KMH-820
EXT. IDENT. 12 CW7H22 13 PILOT CONTROL P10
PWR GROUND 43 22BLK CW8H22 14 WHEEL

60 JB8-J (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
PWR GROUND 27 22BLK 20BLK
61 JB8-N (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
KHS-17D31-24 RELAY
27E006 RELAY SOCKET
1N4005 DIODE
PFD #2
DIM 14 22BLU LB2-C (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) P7322 GB4A-D 22 BLK

DISCRETE IN 12 14 K17
25
429 CH 0 22 1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

429 CH 0 21 2
GTX-330 Transponder
PFD #1 P7321
429 CH 0 22 5
Figure 6
JB CENTER RACK 429 CH 0 21 6

25
JB8-M
(TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 9
SQUAT SWITCH 17 JB18-F JB8-S 10
(TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
DISCRETE IN 12 14 7
JB10-C (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) GND 55 11
SUPPRESSION 31
JB10-G (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) DISCRETE OUT 5 38 14
SHIELD GND 59
18RED 13
ARINC 429 CH1 RX 32 JB3-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH1 RX 35 JB3-F (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) P1D-1
TO P7301-A3
(TO 91-34-20 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH7 RX 33 JB4-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH7 RX 36 JB12-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) K17 OR XP 1/2
1
9
ARINC 429 TX 30 JB8-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 5
ARINC 429 TX 28 JB8-E (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
2
10
6
TIS SELECT 46 JB10-T (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
3
AUDIO OUT HI 15 JB1-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 11
16 7
4
12
8
ANTENNA 13
14
9H2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
LOWER FUSELAGE STA 56.11
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9H3 91-34-50 Apr

PAGE 17
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105120 15 J
GTX-330 GTX-330
TRANSPONDER #1 TRANSPONDER #2
P3301 P3302
AVIONICS MASTER ON 1 22RED
28VDC PWR 21 22RED 20RED P4C-6
28VDC PWR 42 22RED
AVIONICS MASTER ON 1 22RED A
28VDC PWR 21 22RED 20RED
28VDC PWR 42 22RED
EXT. IDENT. 12 12 CW7H22

PWR GROUND 43 43 22BLK CW8H22
PWR GROUND 27 27 22BLK 20BLK B
DIM 14 22BLU LB2-C (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
DIM 14 22BLU LB2-D (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
JB CENTER RACK
SQUAT SWITCH 17 17 JB18-F
SUPPRESSION 31 31 JB10-C (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

JB10-G (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH7 RX A 33 JB5-K (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

ARINC 429 CH7 RX B 36 JB5-P (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH7 RX A 33 JB4-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

ARINC 429 CH7 RX B 36 JB12-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
AUDIO OUT HI 15 JB1-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

16
AUDIO OUT HI 15 AUD1-4 (TO 91-23-50 FIG 2)
16
TIS SELECT 46 JB10-T (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
TIS SELECT 46 JB10-W (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 TX 30 JB8-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 TX 28 JB8-E (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 TX 30 JB8-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

ARINC 429 TX 28 JB8-F (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH1 RX A 32 JB3-B (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

ARINC 429 CH1 RX B 35 JB3-F (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
ARINC 429 CH3 RX A 32 JB11-L (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

ARINC 429 CH3 RX B 35 JB11-R (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
C
STANDBY ALERT 13
STANDBY ALERT 13
ANTENNA #1
D
ANTENNA #2
Effectivity
with Avidyne Entegra in Dual GTX 330 Transponders
PAGE 18
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9H4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
105120 15 J
A
P6B-3
P/O P554 PILOT CONTROL

13 WHEEL
14
B
PFD #2
P7322 GB4A-K (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 22BLK
DISCREET IN 12 14 K17 XP 1/2
CHASSIS GND 25
429 CH 0 22 1 1
429 CH 0 21 2 2
PFD #1 P7321
429 CH 0 22 5 5
429 CH 0 21 6 6
CHASSIS GND 25 KMH-820
P10
JB8-M (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 9 429 ALTITUDE 10
JB8-S (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
61
10 429 ALTITUDE
DISCREET IN 12 14 7 60 9
GND 55 11
DISCREET OUT 5 38 14
SHIELD GND 59
18RED 13 20RED 13
1N4005 DIODE 14
1N4005 DIODE
P1D-1
TO P7301-A3
(TO 91-34-20 FIG 5) INSTRUMENT PANEL
(TO 91-22-10 FIG 3)
WHT XPDR #1/#2 SELECT
BLK SWITCH
A B
C #1 XPDR 22BLK
3 2
GB2A-R
1 (TO 91-34-20 FIG 6)
#2 XPDR
Effectivity
Dual GTX 330 Transponders with Avidyne Entegra in
9H5 91-34-50 Apr

PAGE 19
15/07
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 20
P631 P5721
KN-63 KDI 572
GROUND 1 22BLK (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) LB2-F 22BLU 9 28V LIGHTING
GB5A-B
GROUND A 22BLK 20BLK (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
A+ IN DME
91-34-50
2 22RED 20RED P4C-7

A+ IN 3 22RED
DME REQUEST D 15 DME REQUEST
CLOCK BUS F 12 CLOCK BUS
DATA BUS 6 11 DATA BUS
GROUND 12 40 GROUND
HOLD E 2 HOLD
ON 11 19 ON
+9.25 V 9 3 +9.25 V
+192 V 10 1 +192 V
P3401 GMA-340
AUDIO HI C WHT 21 DME AUDIO HI

AUDIO LO N BLU 22 DME AUDIO LO
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUPPRESSION K JB10-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
JB10-E (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
KN-63 DME
31 M20
Figure 8
32 NAV 2 COMMON
P632 30 M20
47 NAV 1 COMMON
50 NAV 1 CODE SELECT
7 2 x 5 CODE PROGRAM
P43062 16 NAV 2 CODE SELECT
22 WHT 49 NAV 2 COMMON
43 GRY 27 2 x 5 0.01 MHZ
(KA60 ANTENNA)
39 YEL 24 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ E
42 GRE 26 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ D
#2 GNS-430 40 BLU 25 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ C
37 VIO 36 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ A
20 BLK 22 2 x 5 1 MHZ E
33 BRO 4 2 x 5 1 MHZ D
(COAX ASSY) 21 RED 21 2 x 5 1 MHZ C
14 ORG 34 2 x 5 1 MHZ A
P43061
22 WHT 48 NAV 1 COMMON
43 GRY 44 2 x 5 0.01 MHZ
39 YEL 41 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ E
42 GRE 43 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ D
#1 GNS-430 40 BLU 42 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ C
37 VIO 37 2 x 5 0.1 MHZ A
20 BLK 39 2 x 5 1 MHZ E
33 BRO 20 2 x 5 1 MHZ D
105120 32 D
21 RED 38 2 x 5 1 MHZ C
14 ORG 35 2 x 5 1 MHZ A
9H6
9H7
INSTRUMENT PANEL
AFT EQUIPMENT SHELF
P4501 IND-450
TCR-451 LB2-F (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 22BLU 11 PANEL LTS
P4511
GB1A-K (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 22BLK 25 POWER GROUND

+15 V DC 21 21 +15 V DC
-15 V DC 22 22 -15 V DC
+6 V DC 23 AWG20 AWG20 23 +6 V DC
SWITCHED DME POWER 2 2 SWITCHED 28 VDC
14 SHIELD GROUND
DME DISTANCE 15 15 DME DISTANCE
DME SIGNAL COMMON 16 16 DME SIGNAL COMMON
DME GROUNDSPEED 17 17 DME GROUNDSPEED
DME FLAG 20 20 DME FLAG
P317
REF: ANNUNCIATOR 7 22RED

HARNESS 6 3 28 VDC ACFT PWR
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DME HOLD

Collins DME (Optional)
20RED P4C-7
FREQUENCY HOLD 7
D13 D14
NAV-1 HOLD NAV-2

(1C-1) (1C-2) (1C-3)
(1C-C)
22 BLK
DME SELECT
GB1A-L
9
JB10-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
SUPPRESSION 10
91-34-50 Apr
JB10-E (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

P3401
GMA-340
DME AUDIO HI
4697198; 4697216 and up
DME AUDIO HI 3 21
DME AUDIO LO 4 22 DME AUDIO LO
Effectivity
PAGE 21
REF: FIG 9 SHEET 2

15/07
105120 18 D
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 22
REF: TO FIG 9 SHEET 1

105120 19 D
91-34-50
AFT EQUIPMENT SHELF
P4511
P43061 #1 GNS-430
2 X 5 MHZ. A 28 BLK BLK 14 2 X 5 MHZ. A
2 X 5 MHZ. C 29 BRO BRO 21 2 X 5 MHZ. C
2 X 5 MHZ. D 30 RED RED 33 2 X 5 MHZ. D
2 X 5 MHZ. E 31 ORA ORA 20 2 X 5 MHZ. E
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. A 32 YEL YEL 37 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. A
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. C 33 GRE GRE 40 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. C

2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. D 34 BLU BLU 42 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. D
2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. E 35 VIO VIO 39 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 X 5 KHZ. 36 GRY GRY 43 2 X 5 KHZ.

Collins DME (Optional)
22 FREQ. COMMON 1
P43062 #2 GNS-430
BLK 14 2 X 5 MHZ. A
BRO 21 2 X 5 MHZ. C
RED 33 2 X 5 MHZ. D
POWER GROUND 25 20BLK ORA 20 2 X 5 MHZ. E
GB5A-B YEL 37 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. A
GRE 40 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. C
(TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) BLU 42 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. D
VIO 39 2 X 5 0.1 MHZ. E
GRY 43 2 X 5 KHZ.
22 FREQ. COMMON 2
TCR-451
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(REF) 102307-004
P/N 357-0038-010
9H8
9H9
KR-87 ADF
RECEIVER P871
28VDC PWR. 13 20RED ADF

P4C-8
PWR. GND. S 20BLK GB1A-F (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
KI-227-00
ADF INDICATOR
22BLU LB2-E (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
P2271
28V DIMMER 9 A +28V LIGHTING

A C DC SIN OUT
DC SIN OUT

DC COS OUT B E DC COS OUT
4.5V COMMON D B +4.5V COMMON
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BOT. MOUNT ANT. E H A/C GND.

KR-87 ADF (Standard)
H
M 20BLK GB1A-H (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
GROUND
P
R
P3401
P/O GMA-340
AUDIO OUT 10 7 ADF AUDIO HI

8 ADF AUDIO LO KA-44B
ADF ANTENNA
P441
ANT. PWR. 12 WHITE/RED WHITE/RED 1 ANT. PWR.

LOOP ENABLE 8 WHITE/GREEN WHITE/GREEN 2 LOOP ENABLE
WHITE WHITE
91-34-50 Apr
32HZ < + 90 6 4 32HZ < + 90

32HZ < 0 F WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/ORANGE 5 32HZ < 0
GROUND 15 WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLUE 7 GROUND
4697198; 4697216 and up
9 OUTER SHIELD
RF INPUT 3 RF OUTPUT
8 INNER SHIELD
Effectivity
PAGE 23
(TRIAXAL CABLE)
15/07
105120 31 D
4697198; 4697216 and up
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 24
105120 16 D
RCR-650D
ADF RECEIVER P6501
+ 28VDC ACFT POWER 12 20 RED P4C-8

ACFT GND 11 20 BLK GB1A-F (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
91-34-50
POWER CONVERTER
+28 VDC SWITCHED 13 28VDC 20RED +28
+14 VDC 25 14VDC 20RED +14
20BLK GND
GB6A-A (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Single ADF - Optional
P6503
SENSE ANTENNA S TRF-58 S
P6504
Y LOOP Y TRF-58 Y
P6505
X TRF-58 X
X LOOP
P6502
IND-650A
+SIN BEARING 16 5 +SIN BEARING
-SIN BEARING 14 2 -SIN BEARING
+COS BEARING 3 1 +COS BEARING
-COS BEARING 15 4 -COS BEARING
LB2-K (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 22 BLU 6 PANEL LTS
+14 VDC LIGHTING 20 22 BLU LB2-E (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
GB1A-J (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5) 22 BLK 8 ACFT GND
ACFT GND 19 22 BLK GB1A-H (TO 91-24-30 FIG 5)
P3401 P/O GMA-340

ADF AUDIO HI 23 7 ADF AUDIO HI
ADF AUDIO LO 24 8 ADF AUDIO LO
P/O P6501
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
9H10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9H11 91-34-50 Apr

PAGE 25
15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GRIDS 9H12 THRU 9H24

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 26
Apr 15/07 91-34-50 9H12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9I1 91-35-10 AprPAGE 1

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S335, S336, S337 Switch (3 each)
Effectivity Fixed Oxygen Generator System

PAGE 2
Apr 15/07 91-35-10 9I2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OX3D22N
GB3-A

OX2D22N IN S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 AND UP
GB3-B
OX1F22N
GB3-C OX1A22 OXYGEN ANNUN

P329-20
(91-31-50)
P321
J321
OX3D22N 1 OX3C22
S337 NC
OXYGEN
OX3A22 2 OX3B22 BOTTLE #3
GB6-K C
NO
OX1B22
P322
J322
OX2D22N 1 OX2B22
S336 NC
OXYGEN
OX2A22 2 OX2C22 BOTTLE #2
GB6-J C
NO
OX1F22N 3 OX1E22
S335 NC
OXYGEN
OX1C22 4 OX1D22 BOTTLE #1
GB6-H C
NO
NOTE: SWITCHES SHOWN IN ARMED POSITION.

SWITCHES CLOSE WHEN CANISTERS ARE ACTIVATED.
SEE ALSO 91-33-10, FIGURE 4.
102220 40.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 A/B
Fixed Oxygen Generator System Effectivity

9I3 91-35-10 AprPAGE 3

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Vacuum Ejector
2 Vacuum Transducer
1 2
Effectivity Vacuum System

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-37-20 9I4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P319
VACUUM
XDUCER
VACUUM
EJECTOR
REG J5
P437/R437 P405/P305
NO C SEE ANNUN.
D30C20 P P D30B20 P P D30A20 P329-19
NC D30F20 R R D30E20 R R D30D20N (91-31-50)
VACUUM SW.
(SHOWN NORMAL VACUUM)
GB6-P
102220 45.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Vacuum System Effectivity

9I5 91-37-20 AprPAGE 2

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 S326, S327 Door Ajar Switch (Lower & Upper)
Effectivity Door Ajar Warning

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-52-70 9I6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO "DOOR AJAR" ANNUN. W17A22

P329-16
(91-31-50)
W17B22 W17C22
J316
P316 1 2
*
LOWER
*
UPPER
S326 DOOR DOOR S327
AJAR AJAR
SWITCH SWITCH
* (SWITCHES SHOWN NORMALLY CLOSED, WITH DOORS OPEN)
102220 16.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Door Ajar Warning Effectivity

9I7 91-52-70 PAGE 2

Apr 15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 K9 Relay, Squat Switch
3 Switch, Reverse Lockout Test
4 Switch, Reverse Lockout
5 Solenoid, Reverse Lockout
4-5 3
2 1
4-5 3
Effectivity Propeller Reverse Lockout

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-61-20 9I8
9I9
102220 7.0 K/V J451/P451 P436/J436 P404/P304

104635 NEW/AB E17U20 E17T20
105122 NEW/B 1 2 2 U U
3 1 GB9-M
E17V20N
4 5 5 JB17
6 4 E17W20 t E17X20 t E17Y22 A
NOSE SQUAT SW.
(SHN. ON GND) WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA, IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP
P436/R436 P404/P304
J451/P451
2 E17U20 U U E17T20 U U
1 E17V20N

NOSE SQUAT SW. P317/J317
E17S20
(SHN. ON GND)
GB9-M
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Propeller Reverse Lockout

34
11 3
SEE
TO "BETA" ANNUN. TRANSPONDER INSTALLATION
P329-4* E17J22 AND 7
(91-31-50) 91-32-60 33
10 2
* P328-12 WITH AVIDYNE ENTEGRA,
IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP.
6
OVHD SW PNL J317/P317
AFT L/H C/B PANEL P379/J379 J379/P379 1
5
REVERSE E17B20 32 31 E17C20 4
LOCKOUT 9
5
E17D20N
J3B/P3B REVERSE LOCKOUT A
TEST SWITCH 3
CB352-20 7 E17A20 20 (NORMALY CLOSED)
5A K9
91-61-20 AprPAGE
CB352 1
P335 1 2 POWER 5 6 P335 E17K20 B
LEVER P386/J386
SQUAT SW. RELAY NO. 2
POWER LEVER E17M22 2 2 E17N22 - (SHOWN ON GND)
BETA POSITION E17P22 1 1 E17R22 + GB1-C
SWITCH
4697001 and up
(SWITCH CLOSES IN BETA POSITION) 10,000 MF

* REVERSE 50 VDC E17L20 TO 91-21-30
LOCKOUT (GND IN FLT.)
Effectivity
SOLENOID
15/07
* LOCK RETRACTED WITH

WEIGHT ON WHEELS
2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Switch, Feather (2)
3 Solenoid, Feather
2
3
Effectivity Propeller Feather

PAGE 3
Apr 15/07 91-61-20 9I10
9I11
J387/P387
P387/J387
34 PP1J20 TO "FEATHER" ANNUN.
PP1H20 6 P329-1 (91-31-50)
AFT L/H C/B PANEL

PP1L20 37
PROP
FEATHER PP1K20 29
J3B/P3B
CB354-20 2 PP1A20 DE-ENERGIZED IN FEATHER
5A ENERGIZED WHEN NOT IN FEATHER
CB354

PP1C20N
P335
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 8 10 11 9 7 FEATHER

TORQUE
SWITCH
Propeller Feather
NO NO
FEATHER C C C
GB2-L SWITCHES (SW'S SHOWN IN FEATHER POS.) B P
NC NC A
SW.'S CLOSE IN FUEL CUTOFF POSITION
P433
ON POWER LEVER
PP1E20
PP1F20
J4
P304 P404 P426
91-61-20 AprPAGE
Q9B20 R436 P436 Q9A20
PP1B20 C C WHT F F WHT A FEATHER

SOLENOID
D D WHT/BLU G G WHT/BLU B
ENERGIZE TO
4697001 and up
PP1D22N E E C FEATHER
GB10-J GND TO
GB2-M
Effectivity
ENGINE
S/N'S 4697115, 4697120 THRU 4697124; AND 4697126 & UP. 102220 48.0 D/V
15/07
104635 K/AB
AND ALSO, 4697001 THRU 4697114, 4697116 THRU 4697119; AND 4697125 WITH KIT NO. 767-328 INSTALLED. 105122 NEW
4
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PAGE 5
Apr 15/07 91-61-20 9I12
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9I13 91-61-20 AprPAGE 6

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 Switch, Overspeed Governor Test
3 Overspeed Governor
Effectivity Propeller Overspeed Governor

PAGE 7
Apr 15/07 91-61-20 9I14
9I15

AFT L/H C/B PANEL
OVHD SW PNL
Propeller Overspeed Governor
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVERSPEED TEST J3

O
P303 P403 R435 P435 P417

CB380 J3B/P3B P379/J379 J379/P379 V
t t r r E
CB380-20 6 E17D20 27 25 E17E20 E17F20 E17G20
5A A R G
S O
OVERSPEED GOV.
E17H20N B P V
TEST SWITCH E
(NORMALY OPEN) E
GB9-E D
91-61-20 AprPAGE
102220 54.0 E/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
4697001 and up
Effectivity
15/07
8
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 *Chip Detector (2)
* - See Pratt & Whitney Canada’s Parts Catalog for Engine Model PT6A-42A
Effectivity Chip Detector

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-72-10 9I16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
J3 CHIP
P303 P403 R435 P435 DETECTOR
TO "CHIP DETECTOR" ANNUN.
P328-6 E18A22 s s E18B20 q q E18C20 A
(91-31-50)
E18D20N B
P418
E18E20
GB9-C
CHIP
DETECTOR
A
E18F20N B
P425
GB9-D PROPELLER
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
102220 16.0 NEW/V

104635 NEW/AB
105122 NEW
Chip Detector Effectivity

9I17 91-72-10 AprPAGE 2

15/07
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 PY Heaters (2)
4 K404 Relay Assy.
5 Ignition Unit
6 Switch, Ignition
7 Switch, Torque
8 Switch, Condition
8 6
1&3
2
5
8 6
Engine Ignition and PY Line Heaters

PAGE 1
Apr 15/07 91-74-20 9I18
9I19
FWD L/H C/B PANEL 20 GA. JUMPER

PY HEATERS S/N’S 4697001 THRU 4697271
J5
J1D/P1D P305/P405 R437/P437 P429
3 Y Y A PY 100 WATTS
CB340-18 H4A18 H4B18 H4C18
7.5A 8 OHMS
CB340 C
18GA
S/N’S 4697272 AND UP B PX 40 WATTS
P429 H4D18N D 20 OHMS
A PY 100 WATTS
H4C18
8 OHMS
H4D18N C
Engine Ignition and PY Line Heaters

TORQUE
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OVHD SW PNL J3 SWITCH
IGNITION P303/P403 R435/P435

P380
A B C
SWITCH P
28 K3B20 h K3C20 N K3D20
AUTO j
P380 K3G20 K3F20 T K3E20
K3J20N 29 OFF P427
(1)
MAN. WHEN AVIDYNE ENTEGRA IS INSTALLED IN S/N'S 4697198; 4697216 AND UP,
27 THE FOLLOWING NOTES APPLY: (1) WIRE CODE IS K3HH20.
GB6-M
(2) RELAY IS K404A.
P380
(3) CONNECTOR IS P328-18.
K3H20
2
(4)
1
P366
91-74-20 AprPAGE
FWD L/H C/B PANEL RELAY ASSY

1 J5
IGNITION 5 P305/P405 R437/P437
1 P366 P420
K3A20
J2A/P2A 3 K3R20 J K3L20 J K3M20 A
2 3 IGNITION
1 P366 A 4 B
5A CB316-20 UNIT
K3P22
C
K3N20N
K404(2)
CR
404
CB316 (4)
B
102220 42.0 E/V GB9-F
104635 NEW/AB TO "IGNITION" ANNUN.
15/07
105122 B
P328-11(3)
(91-31-50)
2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PAGE 3
Apr 15/07 91-74-20 9I20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 CB343, CB345, CB356 Circuit Breaker (3 Amp)
3 Sensor, OAT
4 Transducer, Vacuum
5 Tachometer Generator, (NG) Turbine
6 Tachometer Generator, (NP) Propeller
7 Transducer, Torque
8 Transducer, Oil Pressure
9 Transmitter, Fuel Flow
10 Sensor, Oil Temperature
1-2
11
8-10
5
102222 A 6-7
102223 C
11
Engine Data Acquisition and Monitoring Effectivity

9J1 91-77-40 AprPAGE 1

15/07
as delivered
4697001 thru 4697134
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 2

91-77-40
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
PWR. RETURN (A)

PWR. RETURN (B)
DATA
28VDC PWR. (A)

28VDC PWR. (B)
CASE GROUND
ACQ.
UNIT
J3B/P3B
ITT IN CR
ITT IN AL
VAC IN N
OAT IN C
OAT IN D
VAC IN P
OAT IN A
OAT IN B
NG IN A
NG IN B
NP IN A
NP IN B
CB350-20 4 E3D20
5A
CB350
J4
1 20 3 2 21 4 23 5 24 31 13 6 25 9 28 26 8
P339
YEL RED
Engine Data Acquisition and Monitoring

VACUUM
J3B/P3B
E3P20N
E3G20N
WH/BLU
E4C20
E2C20
WH/BLU
WHT
WHT
CB343-20 3 E4D20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3A

WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
QT1B20
WH/BLU
WHT
CB343
WHT
GB2-D
P303 P303
GB2-E J3 R S T F G H J3
P403 P403
P302 t q s r
WH/BLU
WH/BLU
J2
E4B20
E2B20
WHT
WHT
t q s r
P201
OAT SENSOR
BLACK
(RT WING) QT1A20
FEED THRU R435 R435
EXC. HI A WHT R S F G
FIREWALL
SIG HI B WH/BLU P435 P435 (NP) PROP
SIG. LO C WH/ORN TACH GEN
BLACK
BLACK
E2A20
EXC LO D WH/GRN WH/BLU B SIG. (-)
WHT A SIG. (+)
P216
P413
GB10-H
VACUUM
XDUCER V1B20 GB10-F
(NG) TURBINE
CROMEL
28 + A WHT TACH GEN
ALUMEL
28 - D WH/BLU E4A20
102220 46.0 N/V WH/BLU B SIG. (-)
SIG. HI B WH/ORN
WHT A SIG. (+)
SIG LO C WH/GRN
TO ITT P416
P319 STUDS ON ENGINE
9J2
15/07 9J3
3
91-77-40 AprPAGE
as delivered Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 5)
4697001 thru 4697134 Engine Data Acquisition and Monitoring
Effectivity
3A
3A
5A
CB345
CB351
CB353
TORQUE
OIL PRESS.
DATA ACQ. UNIT
102220 46.1 C/V

CB345-20
CB353-20
CB351-20
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
9
8
5
SIG LO
SIG. HI
28 -
28 +
XDCR
J3B/P3B
J3B/P3B
J3B/P3B
TORQUE
B
A
C
D
P415
E4F20
E4E20
E4G20
WHT
E3A20
WH/BLU
28VDC PWR. (B)
WH/ORN
WH/GRN
28VDC PWR. (A)
GB2-J
E4H20N CASE GROUND
E4J20N PWR. RETURN (B)
J3
PWR. RETURN (A)
18 36 17 19 37
P403
P303
GB2-K
P435
R435
E3B20 E3C20
J
J
WHT WHT
K
K
WH/BLU WH/BLU
L
L
WH/ORN WH/ORN TQ IN P
M
M
WH/GRN WH/GRN TQ IN N
10 29
BLACK-22
GB10-B
J3
P403
BLACK-22
P303
GB10-C
Y
P435
R435
E5A20 E5B20 E5C20

U
U
28 + C WHT WHT WHT

D
V
V
28 - WH/BLU WH/BLU WH/BLU
XDCR
SIG HI A WH/ORN WH/ORN WH/ORN OP IN P
W
W
OIL PRESS
X
X
SIG LO B WH/GRN WH/GRN WH/GRN OP IN N

14 33
P409
J3
BLACK-22
P403
P303
P435
R435
GB10-D
A
E1A20 E1B20 E1C20

B
B
F.F. IN + A WHT WHT WHT FF IN P

B
C
C
F.F. IN - FF IN N
15 34
WH/BLU WH/BLU WH/BLU

F.F. COMP COM D
XMITTER
D
D
F.F. COMP IN E WH/ORN WH/ORN WH/ORN FF COMP IN

FUEL FLOW
E
F.F. TEMP IN C WH/GRN WH/GRN WH/GRN

16 35
FF TEMP IN
P414
J3
P403
P303
P435
R435
E6A20 E6B20 E6C20

Z
Z
P411 A
WHT WHT WHT OT IN P

B
a
a
WH/BLU WH/BLU WH/BLU OT IN N

SENSOR
OIL TEMP
b
WH/ORN WH/ORN OT IN C
30 12 11
WH/ORN
f
BLACK-22
J4
P339
GB10-E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4697001 thru 4697134 with Kit No. 767-354 installed
4697135 and up; and,
Effectivity
Apr 15/07
PAGE 4
AFT L/H C/B PANEL

PWR. RETURN (A)

PWR. RETURN (B)
DATA
28VDC PWR. (A)

28VDC PWR. (B)
CASE GROUND
91-77-40
ACQ.
UNIT
J3B/P3B
ITT IN CR
ITT IN AL
VAC IN N
OAT IN C
OAT IN D
VAC IN P
OAT IN A
OAT IN B
NG IN A
NG IN B
NP IN A
NP IN B
CB350-20 4 E3D20
5A
CB350
J4
1 20 3 2 21 4 23 5 24 31 13 6 25 9 28 26 8
P339
YEL RED
VACUUM
J3B/P3B
WH/BLU
WH/BLU
E2C20
E3G20N
E4C20
WHT
E3P20N

CB343-20 3 E4D20
WHT
3A
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
WH/BLU
WH/GRN
WH/ORN
QT1B20
WH/BLU
WHT
WHT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CB343

GB2-D
GB2-E P303 P303
J3 R S T F G H J3
P403 P403
P302 t q s r p
WH/BLU
WH/BLU
J2
E4B20
E2B20
WHT
WHT
t q s r p
P201
OAT SENSOR
(RT WING)
QT1A22
Engine Data Acquisition and Monitoring
FEED THRU
EXC. HI A WHT FIREWALL * R435 R S F G n * R435
SIG HI B WH/BLU P435 P435
(NP) PROP
SIG. LO C WH/ORN TACH GEN
EXC LO D WH/GRN E2A20

WH/BLU B SIG. (-)
P216 WHT A SIG. (+)
VACUUM P413
XDUCER V1B20
(NG) TURBINE
CROMEL
ALUMEL
28 + A WHT TACH GEN
28 - D WH/BLU E4A20
WH/BLU B SIG. (-)
SIG. HI B WH/ORN
104635 46.0 P/AB WHT A SIG. (+)
105122 NEW/B SIG LO C WH/GRN
TO ITT
P416
P319 STUDS ON ENGINE
* J435 IN S/N’s 4697198; 4697216 AND UP.

9J4
15/07 9J5
5
91-77-40 AprPAGE
4697001 thru 4697134 with Kit No. 767-354 installed Figure 1 (Sheet 5 of 5)
4697135 and up; and, Engine Data Acquisition and Monitoring
Effectivity
3A
5A
3A
UNIT
DATA
ACQ.
CB345
CB353
CB351
TORQUE
OIL PRESS.
CB351-20
CB345-20
CB353-20
AFT L/H C/B PANEL
9
8
28 -
SIG. HI
28 +
XDCR
J3B/P3B
J3B/P3B
J3B/P3B
TORQUE
B
A
SIG LO C
D
P415
104635 46.1 P/AB

105122 46.1 NEW/B
E4F20
E4E20
E4G20
WHT
E3A20
WH/BLU
WH/ORN
WH/GRN
18
28VDC PWR. (B)

28VDC PWR. (A)
GB2-J
E4H20N CASE GROUND
E4J20N PWR. RETURN (B)
36 17 19 37

Amm Pa-46-500tp

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amm Pa-46-500tp

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Amm Pa-46-500tp

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AIRPLANE MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(S/N’s 4697001 and UP)

PIPER AIRCRAFT, INC.

PART NUMBER 767-005 April 15, 2007

© Piper Aircraft, Inc.

AEROFICHE REVISION STATUS

Revision Publication Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity

ORG000701 July 1, 2000 All

* COMPLETE REVISION OF MAINTENANCE MANUAL 767-005

1A3 AEROFICHE EFFECTIVITY PAGE 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Intro-List of 1 Apr 15/07

Intro-Table of Contents 1 Apr 15/07

Introduction 1 Apr 15/07

Index 1 Apr 15/07

1A5 INTRO - LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES AprPAGE 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

SUBJECT SECTION PAGE GRID NO.

1A7 INTRO - CONTENTS AprPAGE 1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

1A9 INTRODUCTION PAGE 1

2000 4697001 thru 4697037 2003 4697142, 4697144, and

4. Serial Number Explanation

TYPE CERTIFICATE DESIGNATION SEQUENCE NUMBER

5. Assignment of Subject Material

1A11 INTRODUCTION PAGE 3

13. Supplementary Publications

1A13 INTRODUCTION PAGE 5

(10) EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER:

(19) GENERATOR CONTROL UNIT:

1A15 INTRODUCTION PAGE 7

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

1A17 INTRODUCTION PAGE 9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

14. Chapter/Section Index Guide

4 AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 1C1

5 TIME LIMITS/MAINTENANCE CHECKS 1C9

6 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 1F15

7 LIFTING AND SHORING 1G9

8 LEVELING AND WEIGHING 1G17

9 TOWING AND TAXIING 1H5

10 PARKING AND MOORING 1H17

11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 1I5

20 Exterior Placards and Markings

1A19 INTRODUCTION PAGE 11

CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.

20 STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME 2C1

21 ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS 2D1

24 ELECTRICAL POWER 2IJ1

26 FIRE PROTECTION 3D1

27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 3D15

CHAPTER SECTION TITLE GRID NO.

29 HYDRAULIC POWER 3J7

30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 4C1

31 INDICATING/RECORDING SYSTEMS 4E9

50 Central Warning Systems

32 LANDING GEAR 4F1